Professional Documents
Culture Documents
K Park Park S Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine Banarsidas Bhanot 2015 1
K Park Park S Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine Banarsidas Bhanot 2015 1
It is indeed gratifying that this book has seen twenty two successful editions
and is now entering the twenty-third edition with a brand new look. This new
edition is in keeping with the tradition of release of new editions at regular
intervals, with the objective to match the pace of everchanging subject matter.
The book has been thoroughly updated and revised.
The other topics of interest are Global Hunger Index, the current situation
about Millennium Development Goals, revised classification of adverse events
following immunization, the new and updated matter about child and maternal
mortality, Mission Indradhanush (launched on 25th December 2014), and many
more. 121h Five Year Plan replaces the l l 1h Plan.
Lastly, I extend my appreciation to Mr. Brij Mohan Bhanot for the care
bestowed in publication of this book.
Jabalpur K.PARK
January 2015
------- - - -------- ------ ------------------- - - ------- ----- --------------------- ----- "------ --------------------"--------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
CONTENTS
Chapter Page
ABBREVIATIONS 926
INDEX 928
Man and Medicine :
•
Towards Health for All
- - • • • ' ' ' ' ' I ' '
"Those who fail to read history are destined to suffer the repetition of its mistakes"
From time immemorial man has been interested in trying integral part of ancient cultures and civilizations. Henry
to control disease. The medicine man, the priest, the Siegerist, the medical historian has stated that every culture
herbalist and the magician, all undertook in various ways to had developed a system of medicine, and medical history is
cure man's disease and/or to bring relief to the sick. In an but one aspect of the history of culture (1). Dubos goes one
almost complete absence of scientific medical knowledge, it step further and says that ancient medicine was the mother
would not be fair to say that the early practitioners of of sciences and played a large role in the integration of early
medicine contributed nothing to the alleviation of man's cultures (2). Since there is an organic relationship between
suffering from disease. Medical knowledge in fact has been medicine and human advancement, any account of
derived, to a very great degree, from the intuitive and medicine at a given period should be viewed against the
observational propositions and cumulative experiences civilization and human advancement at that time, i.e.
gleaned from others. A history of medicine thus contributes philosophy, religion, economic conditions, form of
a review of accomplishments and errors, false theories and government, education, science and aspirations of the
misinformation and mistaken interpretations. It is also a people.
study of the evolution of man and of human knowledge
down the ages; of the biographies of eminent individuals Primitive medicine
who developed medicine; of the discoveries and inventions It has been truly said that medicine was conceived in
in different historical periods; and of the ever-changing sympathy and born out of necessity; and that the first doctor
concepts, goals and objectives of medicine. In the course of was the first man, and the first woman, the first nurse. The
its evolution, which proceeded by stages, with advances and prehistoric man, motivated by feelings of sympathy and
halts, medicine has drawn richly from the traditional cultures kindness, was always at the behest of his kindred, trying to
of which it is a part, and later from biological and natural provide relief, in times of sickness and suffering.
sciences and more recently from social and behavioural
sciences. Medicine is thus built on the best of the past. In the Since his knowledge was limited, the primitive man
crucible of time, medicine has evolved itself into a social attributed disease, and in fact all human suffering and other
system heavily bureaucratized and politicized. The calamities, to the wrath of gods, the invasion of body by
"explosion" of knowledge during the 20th century has made "evil spirits" and the malevolent influence of stars and
medicine more complex, and treatment more costly, but the planets. The concept of disease in which the ancient man
benefits of modern medicine have not yet penetrated the believed is known as the "supernatural theory of disease".
social periphery in many countries. The glaring contrasts in As a logical sequence, the medicine he practised consisted in
the state of health between the developed and developing appeasing gods by prayers, rituals and sacrifices, driving out
countries, between the rural and urban areas, and between "evil spirits" from the human body by witchcraft and other
the rich and poor have attracted worldwide criticism as crude means and using charms and amulets to protect
"social injustice". The commitment of all countries, under himself against the influence of evil spirits. The
the banner of the World Health Organization, is to wipe out administration of certain herbs or drugs whose effect is
the inequalities in the distribution of health resources and doubtful or nil, but hopefully harmless, may also be likened
services, and attain the Millenium Development Goals. The to a kind of magic ritual associated with the need to "do
goal of modern medicine is no longer merely treatment of something". There is also evidence that prehistoric man
sickness. The other and more important goals which have improvised stone and flint instruments with which he
emerged are prevention of disease, promotion of health and performed circumcisions, amputations and trephining of
improvement of the quality of life of individuals and groups skulls. It is thus obvious that medicine in the prehistoric
or communities. In other words, the scope of medicine has times (about 5000 B.C.) was intermingled with superstition,
considerably broadened during recent years. It is also religion, magic and witchcraft.
regarded as an essential component of socio-economic Primitive medicine is timeless. If we look around the
development. world, we find that the rudiments of primitive medicine still
persist in many parts of the world in Asia, Africa, South
I. MEDICINE IN ANTIQUITY America, Australia and the Pacific islands. The supernatural
theory of disease in which the primitive man believed is as
In ancient times, health and illness were interpreted in a new as today. For example, in India, one may still hear the
cosmological and anthropological perspective. Medicine was talk of curing snake bites by "mantras". Diseases such as
dominated by magical and religious beliefs which were an leprosy are interpreted as being punishment for one's past
2 MAN AND MEDICINE : TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
sins in some cultures. Although primitive man may be Hygiene was given an important place in ancient Indian
extinct, his progeny the so-called "traditional healers" are medicine. The laws of Manu were a code of personal
found everywhere. They live close to the people and their hygiene. Archaeological excavations at Mohenjo-daro and
treatments are based on various combinations of religion, Harappa in the Indus valley uncovered cities of over two
magic and empiricism. thousand years old which revealed rather advanced
knowledge of sanitation, water supply and engineering. The
Indian medicine (3) golden age of Indian medicine was between 800 B.C. and
The medical systems that are truly Indian in origin and 600 A.D. During the Moghul period and subsequent years,
development are the Ayurveda and the Siddha systems. Ayurveda declined due to lack of State support.
Ayurveda is practised throughout India, but the Siddha Medical historians admit that Indian medicine has played
system is practised in the Tamil-speaking areas of South in Asia the same role as the Greek medicine in the west, for
India. These systems differ very little both in theory and it has spread in Indochina, Indonesia, Tibet, Central Asia,
practice (4). Ayurveda by definition implies the "knowledge and as far as Japan, exactly as the Greek medicine has done
of life" or the knowledge by which life may be prolonged. Its in Europe and Arab countries (7).
origin is traced far back to the Vedic times, about 5000 B.C.
During this period, medical history was associated with Mention must be made of the other indigenous systems of
mythological figures, sages and seers. Dhanvantari, the medicine namely Unani-Tibb and Homoeopathy, which are
Hindu god of medicine is said to have been born as a result not of Indian origin. The Unani-Tibb system of medicine,
of the churning of the oceans during a 'tug of war' between whose origin is traced to the ancient Greek medicine, was
gods and demons. According to some authorities, the introduced into India by the Muslim rulers about the 10th
medical knowledge in the Atharvaveda (one of the four century A.D. By the 13th century, the Unani system of
Vedas) gradually develop~d into the science of Ayurveda. medicine was firmly entrenched in certain towns and cities
notably Delhi, Aligarh, Lucknow and Hyderabad (5). It
In ancient India, the celebrated authorities in Ayurvedic
medicine were Atreya, Charaka, Susruta and Vaghbhatt. enjoyed State support under successive Muslim rulers in
Atreya (about 800 B.C.} is acknowledged as the first great India, till the advent of the British in the 18th century.
Indian physician and teacher. He lived in the ancient Homoeopathy, which was propounded by Samuel
university of Takshashila, about 20 miles west of modern Hahnemann (1755-1843) of Germany gained foothold in
Rawalpindi (5). Ayurveda witnessed tremendous growth and India during 1810 and 1839 (9). It is a system of pharmaco-
development during the Buddhist times. King Ashoka dynamics based on "treatment of disease by the use of small
(226 B.C.} and the other Buddhist kings patronized amounts of a drug that, in healthy persons, produces
Ayurveda as State medicine and established schools of symptoms similar to those of the disease being treated" (10).
medicine and public hospitals. Charaka (200 A.D.), the most Homoeopathy is practised in several countries, but India
popular name in Ayurvedic medicine, was a court physician claims to have the largest number of practitioners of this
to the Buddhist king Kanishka. Based on the teachings of system in the world (9).
Atreya, Charaka compiled his famous treatise on medicine, The Indian systems of medicine including Unani-Tibb and
the "Charaka Samhita". Charaka mentions some 500 drugs. Homoeopathy are very much alive in India even today. In
The Indian snakeroot (rauwolfia} was employed for fact, they have become part of Indian culture, and they
centuries by the Indian physicians, before reserpine was continue to be an important source of medical relief to the
extracted from the root and found spectacularly effective in rural population.
the treatment of hypertension.
Among the many distinguished names in Hindu Chinese medicine
medicine, that of Susruta, the "father of Indian surgery" Chinese medicine claims to be the world's first organized
stands out in prominence. He compiled the surgical body of medical knowledge dating back to 2700 B.C. (11). It
knowledge of his time in his classic "Susruta Samhita". It is is based on two principles the yang and the yin. The yang
believed that this classic was compiled between 800 B.C. is believed to be an active masculine principle and the yin a
and 400 A.D. Though this work is mainly devoted to negative feminine principle. The balance of these two
surgery, it also includes medicine, pathology, anatomy, opposing forces meant good health. Hygiene, dietetics,
midwifery, ophthalmology, hygiene and bedside manners. hydrotherapy, massage, drugs were all used by the Chinese
The early Indians set fractures, performed amputations,
physicians.
excised tumours, repaired hernias and excelled in cataract
operations and plastic surgery (6). It is stated that the British The Chinese were early pioneers of immunization. They
physicians learned the art of rhinoplasty from Indian practised variolation to prevent smallpox. To a Chinese, "the
surgeons in the days of East India Company (7). However, great doctor is one who treats not someone who is already ill
during Buddhist times, Indian surgery suffered a setback but someone not yet ill". The Chinese have great faith in
because of the doctrine of ahimsa (non-violence}. their traditional medicine, which is fully integrated with
Of significance in Ayurveda is the "tridosha theory of modern medicine. The Chinese system of "barefoot doctors"
disease". The doshas or humors are: uata (wind}, pitta (gall} and accupuncture have attracted worldwide attention in
and kapha (mucus). Disease was explained as a disturbance recent years (12).
in the equilibrium of the three humors; when these were in
perfect balance and harmony, a person is said to be healthy Egyptian medicine
(8). This theory of disease is strikingly similar to the "theory Egypt had one of the oldest civilizations in about
of four humors" in Greek medicine. Medical historians admit 2000 B.C. A lot is known about ancient Egypt because they
that there was free exchange of thought and experience invented picture writing and recorded their doings on
between the Hindu, Arab, Persian, Greek and Jewish papyrus. In Egyptian times, the art of medicine was mingled
scholars. The Samhitas of Charaka and Susruta were with religion. Egyptian physicians were co-equals of priests,
translated into Persian and Arabic in about 800 A.D. trained in schools within the temples. They often helped
MEDICINE IN ANCIENT TIMES
priests care for the sick who were brought to the temples for proposed therapy proved wrong, ran the risk of being killed.
treatment. There were no practical demonstrations in Laws relating to medical practice, including fees payable to
anatomy, for Egyptian religion enjoined strict preservation physicians for satisfactory services and penalties for harmful
of the human body. Egyptian medicine reached its peak in therapy are contained in the Babylonian Code of
the days of Imhotep (2800 B.C.) who was famous as a Hammurabi, the very first codification of medical practice.
statesman, architect, builder of the step pyramid at While the code of Hammurabi reflected a high degree of
Saqqarah and physician. The Egyptians worshipped many social organization, the medicine of his time was devoid of
gods. Imhotep was considered both a doctor and divinity. any scientific foundation.
Specialization prevailed in Egyptian times. There were eye
doctors, head doctors and tooth doctors. All these doctors Greek medicine
were officials paid by the State. Homer speaking of the The classic period of Greek medicine was the year 460-
doctors of the ancient world considered the Egyptians to be 136 B.C. The Greeks enjoyed the reputation - the civilizers
the "the best of all" (13). of the ancient world. They taught men to think in terms of
Egyptian medicine was far from primitive. They believed 'why' and 'how'. An early leader in Greek medicine was
that disease was due to absorption from the intestine of Aesculapius (1200 B.C.). Aesculapius bore two daughters -
harmful substances which gave rise to putrefaction of blood Hygiea and Panacea. The medical historian, Douglas
and formation of pus. They believed that the pulse was "the Guthrie (17) has reminded us of the legend that Hygiea was
speech of the heart". Diseases were treated with cathartics, worshipped as the goddess of health, and Panacea as the
enema, blood-letting and a wide range of drugs. The best goddess of medicine. Panacea and Hygiea gave rise to
known medical manuscripts belonging to the Egyptian times dynasties of healers (curative medicine) and hygienists
are the Edwin Smith papyrus (3000-2500 B.C.), and the (preventive medicine) with different philosophies. Thus the
Ebers papyrus (1150 B.C.). The Edwin Smith papyrus, the dichotomy between curative medicine and preventive
oldest treatise on surgery, accurately describes partial medicine began early and we know it remains true today.
paralysis following cerebral lesions in skull fractures. The Hygiea (prevention) is at present fashionable among the
Ebers papyrus which was found with a mummy on the banks intellectuals; but Panacea (cure) gets the cash. Aesculapius is
of the Nile, is a unique record of some 800 prescriptions based still cherished in medical circles - his staff, entwined by a
on some 700 drugs. Castor oil, tannic acid, opium, turpentine, serpent, continues to be the symbol of medicine.
gentian, senna, minerals and root drugs were all used by the By far the greatest physician in Greek medicine was
Egyptian physicians. A great number of diseases are reported Hippocrates (460-370 B.C.) who is often called the "Father
in the papyri such as worms, eye diseases, diabetes, of Medicine". He was born on the little island of Cos, in the
rheumatism, polio and schistosomiasis. Unfortunately, these Aegean sea, about 460 B.C. He studied and classified
ailments are still present in modern Egypt (7). diseases based on observation and reasoning. He challenged
In the realm of public health also, the Egyptians excelled. the tradition of magic in medicine, and initiated a radically
They built planned cities, public baths and underground new approach to medicine i.e., application of clinical
drains which even the modern might envy. They had also methods in medicine. Hippocrate's lectures and writings, as
some knowledge of inoculation against smallpox, the value compiled later by Alexandrian scholars into the "Corpus
of mosquito nets and the association of plague with rats. Hippocraticum", encompassed all branches of medicine. This
Their god of health was Horus. Egyptian medicine occupied 72 volume work contains the first scientific clinical case
a dominant place in the ancient world for about 2,500 years histories. Some of the sayings of Hippocrates later became
when it was replaced by Greek medicine. favourites with physicians, such as "Life is short, the art (of
medicine) long, opportunity fleeting, experience treacherous
Mesopotamian medicine and judgement difficult", and "where there is love for
mankind, there is love for the art of healing". His famous
Contemporary with ancient Egyptian civilization, there oath, the "Hippocratic oath" has become the keystone of
existed another civilization in the land which lies between the medical ethics. It sets a high moral standard for the medical
Euphrates and Tigris rivers, Mesopotamia (now part of Iraq), profession and demands absolute integrity of doctors.
often called the "Cradle of Civilization", as long as 6,000 years Hippocrates will always be regarded as one of the masters oi
ago. the medical art.
In ancient Mesopotamia, the basic concepts of medicine Hippocrates was also an epidemiologist. Since hE
were religious, and taught and practised by herb doctors, distinguished between diseases which were epidemic anc
knife doctors and spell doctors - a classification that roughly those which were endemic, he was, in fact, the first truE
parallels our own internists, surgeons and psychiatrists. epidemiologist. He was constantly seeking the causes o
Mesopotamia was the cradle of magic and necromancy. disease. He studied such things as climate, water, clothing
Medical students were busy in classifying "demons", the diet, habits of eating and drinking and the effect they had ir
causes of diseases. Geomancy, the interpretation of dreams, producing disease. His book "Airs, Water and Places" i:
and hepatoscopic divination (the liver was considered the considered a treatise on social medicine and hygiene. Thi
seat of life) are characteristic of their medical lore. Hippocratic concept of health and disease stressed th1
Sumerians, Babylonians and Assyrians were the authors of a relation between man and his environment.
medical astrology which flourished in the whole of Eurasia. In short, the Greeks gave a new direction to medica
Prescriptions were written on tablets, in cuneiform writing. thought. They rejected the supernatural theory of diseas•
The oldest medical prescription comes to us from and looked upon disease as a natural process, not
Mesopotamia, dating back to 2100 B.C. visitation from· a god of immolation. The Greeks believe•
Hammurabi, a great king of Babylon who lived around that matter was made up of four elements - earth, air, fir
2000 B.C. formulated a set of drastic laws known as the and water. These elements had the corresponding qualitie
Code of Hammurabi that governed the conduct of physicians of being cold, dry, hot and moist and were represented i
and provided for health practices (14). Doctors whose the body by the four humors - phlegm, yellow bile, bloo
MAN AND MEDICINE : TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
and black bile similar to the "tridosha theory" in known as "Middle Ages". With the fall of the Roman empire,
Ayurveda. The Greeks postulated that health prevailed the medical schools established in Roman times also
when the four humors were in equilibrium and when the disappeared. Europe was ravaged by disease and pestilence:
balance was disturbed, disease was the result. The human plague, smallpox, leprosy and tuberculosis. The practice of
body was assumed to have powers of restoration of humoral medicine reverted back to primitive medicine dominated by
equilibrium, and it was the physician's primary role to assist superstition and dogma. Rejection of the body and
in this healing process. While the humoral theory of glorification of the spirit became the accepted pattern of
Hippocrates was based on incorrect foundations, the behaviour. It was regarded as immoral to see one's body;
concept of the innate capacity of the body of responding to consequently, people seldom bathed. Dissection of the
disturbances in the equilibrium that constitutes health is human body was prohibited. Consequently there was no
highly relevant to modern medicine (15). progress of medicine. The medieval period is therefore called
Outstanding amongst post-Hippocratic medical centres the "Dark Ages of Medicine" - a time of great strife, of socio-
was Alexandria's huge museum, the first University in the political change, of regression and progression (7).
world which sheltered a library containing over 70,000 When Europe was passing through the Dark Ages, the
books. To this house of learning came eminent men. Arabs stole a march over the rest of the civilization. They
Between 300 B.C. and 30 B.C., thousands of pupils translated the Graeco-Roman medical literature into Arabic
matriculated in the school of Alexandria, which replaced and helped preserve the ancient knowledge. Borrowing
Athens as the world's centre of learning. In short, the largely from the Greeks and Romans, they developed their
Hippocratic school inspired in turn the Alexandria school, own system of medicine known as the Unani system of
and the Arabo-Persian medicine. The Hippocratic school medicine. They founded schools of medicine and hospitals
changed the destiny of medicine by separating it from magic in Baghdad, Damascus, Cairo and other Muslim capitals.
and raising it to the status of a science. They had scientific The Arabs lit a brilliant torch from Greecian lamps, said
method, although not scientific knowledge. The glorious Osler. Leaders in Arabic medicine were the Persians, Abu
Greek civilization fell into decay and was succeeded by the Beer (865-925) also known as Rhazes; and lbn Sina (980-
Roman civilization. 1037) known as Avicenna to the western world. Rhazes was
a director of a large hospital in Baghdad and a court
Roman medicine physician as well. Noted for keen observation and
By the first Century B.C., the centre of civilization shifted inventiveness, he was the first to observe pupillary reaction
to Rome. The Romans borrowed their medicine largely from to light; to use mercurial purgatives; and to publish the first
the Greeks whom they had conquered. While the politics of known book on Children's diseases (7). However, the work
the world became Roman, medicine remained Greek. In the most highly regarded today is his book on smallpox and
political philosophy of the Romans, the State and not the measles which he distinguished clinically. Avicenna was an
individual was supreme. intellectual prodigy. He compiled a 21 volume
The Romans were a more practical-minded people than encyclopaedia, the "Canon of Medicine", which was to
the Greeks. They had a keen sense of sanitation. Public leave its mark on medical theory and practice. He was
health was born in Rome with the development of baths, responsible for elevating Islamic medicine to its zenith in the
sewers and aqueducts. The Romans made fine roads middle ages. The greatest contribution of Arabs, in general,
throughout their empire, brought pure water to all their cities was in the field of pharmacology. Seeking the "elixir of life",
through aqueducts, drained marshes to combat malaria, they developed pharmaceutical chemistry, introducing a
built sewerage systems and established hospitals for the sick. large number of drugs, herbal and chemical. Pioneers in
An outstanding figure among Roman medical teachers pharmacology, they invented the art of writing prescriptions,
was Galen (130-205 A.O.) who was born in the Greek city of an art inherited by our modern pharmacists. They
Pergamon in Asia Minor (now Turkey). He was physician to introduced a wide range of syrups, oils, poultices, plasters,
the Roman emperor, Marcus Aurelius. His important pills, powders, alcoholates and aromatic waters. The words
contributions were in the field of comparative anatomy and drug, alcohol, syrup and sugar are all Arabian (17). The
experimental physiology. Galen was far ahead of his time in golden age of Arabic medicine was between 800-1300 A.D.
his views about health and disease. About health he stated: During the turbulent middle ages, Christianity exerted a
"Since both in importance and in time, health precedes wholesome influence. The spread of Christianity led to the
disease, so we ought to consider first how health may be establishment of hospitals. Early medieval hospitals rarely
preserved, and then how one may best cure disease" (16). specialized in treatment of the sick. Usually the sick were
About disease, Galen observed that disease is due to three received for the purpose of supplying their bodily wants and
factors - predisposing, exciting and environmental factors, a catering to their spiritual needs. The first hospital on record
truly modern idea. The doctrines of Hippocrates and Galen in England was built in York in 937 A.O. With the growth of
were often in conflict since their approaches were so.different medicine, a chain of hospitals sprang up from Persia to
one is synthetic, the other analytic. The author of some 500 Spain- there were more than 60 in Baghdad· and 33 in
treatises on medical subjects, Galen was literally a "medical Cairo. Some hospitals, like Cairo's Al Mansur had separate
dictator" in his time, and also for a long time thereafter. His departments for various diseases, wards for both sexes,
writings influenced European medicine. They were accepted fountains to cool fever patients, libraries, musicians and
as standard textbooks in medicine for 14 centuries, till his story tellers for the sleepless.
teachings and views were challenged by the anatomist, During the middle ages, religious institutions known as
Vesalius in 1543, and the physiologist, William Harvey in "monasteries" headed by monks, saints and abbotts also
1628, almost 1500 years after his death. came up. These monasteries admitted men and women from
all ranks including kings and queens. They not only helped
Middle ages preserve the ancient knowledge but also rendered active
The period between 500 and 1500 A.O. is generally medical and nursing care to the sick.
II. DAWN OF SCIENTIFIC MEDICINE 22 years for the working class, in 1842 (14). Add to this, the
frequent visitations of cholera compounded the misery of the
The period following 1500 A.D. was marked by people. The great cholera epidemic of 1832 led Edwin
revolutions - political, industrial, religious and medical. Chadwick (1800-1890), a lawyer in England to investigate
Political revolutions took place in France and America, the health of the inhabitants of the large towns with a view to
people claiming their just rights. The industrial revolution in improve the conditions under which they lived (18).
the West brought great benefits leading to an improvement Chadwick's report on "The Sanitary Conditions of the
in the standard of living among people. With advancing Labouring Population in Great Britain", a landmark in the
degrees of civilization, medicine also evolved. history of public health, set London and other cities slowly
on the way to improve housing and working conditions.
Revival of medicine
Chadwick's report focussed the attention of the people and
For many historians, the revival of medicine encompasses government on the urgent need to improve public health.
the period from 1453-1600 A.D. It was an age of individual Filth was recognized as man's greatest enemy and with this
scientific endeavour. The distinguished personalities during began an anti-filth crusade, the "great sanitary awakening"
this period were: Paracelsus (1493-1541) who revived which led to the enactment of the Public Health Act of 1848
medicine. He was born at a time "when Europe stretched in England. A new thinking began to take shape i.e., the
her limbs after a sleep of a thousand years in a bed of State has a direct responsibility for the health of the people.
darkness". Labelled genius by some and quack by others,
Swiss-born Paracelsus publicly burnt the works of Galen and Rise of public health
Avicenna and attacked superstition and dogma and helped The above events led to the birth of public health concept
turn medicine towards rational research. Fracastorius in England around 1840. Earlier, Johanna· Peter Frank
(1483-1553), an Italian physician enunciated the "theory of (1745-1821) a health philosopher of his time, conceived
contagion". He envisaged the transfer of infection via public health as good health laws enforced by the police and
minute invisible particles and explained the cause of enunciated the principle that the State is responsible for the
epidemics. Fracastorius recognized that syphilis was health of its people. The Public Health Act of 1848 was a
transmitted from person to person during sexual relations. fulfilment of his dream about the State's responsibility for the
He became the founder of epidemiology. Andreas Vasalius health of its people.
(1514-1564) of Brussels did lot of dissections on the human Cholera which is often called the "father of public health"
body and demonstrated some of Galen's errors. He raised appeared time and again in the western world during the
the study of anatomy to a science, and has been called "the 19th century. An English epidemiologist, John Snow,
first man of modern science". Vesalius' great work Fabrica studied the epidemiology of cholera in London from 1848 to
became a classic text in medical education. What Vesalius 1854 and established the role of polluted drinking water in
did for anatomy, Ambroise Pare (1510-1590). a French the spread of cholera. In 1856, William Budd, another
Army surgeon did for surgery and earned the title, "father of pioneer, by careful observations of an outbreak of typhoid
surgery". Pare advanced the art of surgery, but John Hunter fever in the rural north of England concluded that the spread
(1728-1793) taught the science of it. In 1540, the United was by drinking water, not by miasma and sewer gas. These
Company of Barber Surgeons was established in England, two discoveries were all the more remarkable when one
which later became the Royal College of Surgeons. Another considers that the causative agents of cholera and typhoid
great name in clinical medicine is that of Thomas Sydenham fever were not identified. Then came the demand from
(1624-1689), the English Hippocrates who set the example people for clean water. At that time the Thames was both a
of the true clinical method. He made a differential diagnosis source of drinking water and the depository for sewage. A
of scarlet fever, malaria, dysentery and cholera. Sydenham comprehensive piece of legislation was brought into force in
is also regarded as the first distinguished epidemiologist. England, the Public Health Act of 1875 for the control of
The 17th and 18th centuries were full of even more man's physical environment. The torch was already lit by
exciting discoveries, e.g., Harvey's discovery of the Chadwick, but the man who was actually responsible more
circulation of blood (1628), Leeuwenhoek's microscope than any other for sanitary reforms was
(1670) and Jen~er's vaccination against smallpox (1796). Sir John Simon (1816-1904), the first medical officer of
However, the progress in medicine as well as surgery, during health of London. He built up a system of public health in
the 19th century would not have been possible but for England which became the admiration of the rest of the
Morgagni (1682-1771) who founded a new branch of world (18). This early phase of public health (1880-1920) is
medical science, pathologic anatomy. often called the "disease control phase". Efforts were
directed entirely towards general cleanliness, garbage and
Sanitary awakening refuse disposal. Quarantine conventions were held to
Another historic milestone in the evolution of medicine is contain disease.
the "great sanitary awakening" which took place in England The development of the public health movement in
in the mid-nineteenth century and gradually spread to other Amercia follows closely the English pattern. In 1850, Lemuel
countries. It had a tremendous impact in modifying the Shattuck (1793-1859), a bookseller and publisher,
behaviour of people and ushering an era of public health. published his report on the health conditions in
The industrial revolution of the 18th century sparked off Massachusetts. Like Chadwick's report it stirred the
numerous problems - creation of slums, overcrowding with conscience of the American people to the improvement of
all its ill-effects, accumulation of filth in cities and towns, high public health. France, Spain, Australia, Germany, Italy,
sickness and death rates especially among women and Belgium and the Scandinavian countries all developed their
children, infectious diseases like tuberculosis, industrial and public health. By the beginning of the 20th century, the
social problems - which deteriorated the health of the people broad foundations of public health - clean water, clean
to the lowest ebb. The mean age at death in London was surroundings, wholesome condition of houses, control of
reported to be 44 years for the gentry and professionals, and offensive trades, etc were laid in all the countries of the
MAN AND MEDICINE · TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
western world. After the First World War, there were three Aedes mosquito. With the knowledge derived from
particular newcomers to the public health scene - bacteriology, it became possible to control disease by
Yugoslavia, Turkey and Russia (19). These three countries in specific measures such as blocking the channels of
1920 presented the typical picture of the underdeveloped transmission, e.g., quarantine, water purification,
world. Today they are quite advanced in public health. pasteurization of milk, protection of foods, proper disposal
While public health made rapid strides in the western of sewage, destruction of insects and disinfection. The
world, its progress has been slow in the developing countries development of laboratory methods for the early detection
such as India where the main health problems continue to of disease was a further advance. In its early years,
be those faced by the western world 100 years ago. The preventive medicine was equated with the control of
establishment of the WHO providing a Health Charter for all infectious diseases. The modern concepts of primary,
people provided a great fillip to the public health movement secondary and tertiary prevention were not known.
in these countries.
III. MODERN MEDICINE
Germ theory of disease
The dichotomy of medicine into two major branches
For long, man was groping in darkness about the namely curative medicine, and public health/preventive
causation of disease. Several theories we.re advanced from medicine was evident at the close of the 19th century. After
time to time to explain disease causation such as the 1900, medicine moved faster towards specialization, and a
supernatural theory of disease, the theory of humors by rational, scientific approach to disease. The pattern of
Greeks and Indians, the theory of contagion, the miasmatic disease began to change. With the control of acute infectious
theory which attributed disease to noxious air and vapours, diseases, the so-called modern diseases such as cancer,
the theory of spontaneous generation, etc. The diabetes, cardiovascular disease, mental illness and
breakthrough came in 1860, when the French bacteriologist accidents came into prominence and have become the
Louis Pasteur (1822-1895) demonstrated the presence of leading causes of death in industrialized countries. These
bacteria in air. He disproved the theory of "spontaneous diseases could not be explained on the basis of the germ
generation''. In 1873, Pasteur advanced the "germ theory of theory of disease, nor treated with "magic bullets". The
disease". In 1877, Robert Koch (1843-1910) showed that realization began to dawn that there are other factors or
anthrax was caused by a bacteria. The discoveries of Pasteur causes in the aetiology of diseases, namely social, economic,
and Koch confirmed the germ theory of disease. It was the genetic, environmental and psychological factors which are
golden age of bacteriology. Microbe after microbe was equally important. Most of these factors are linked to man's
discovered in quick succession gonococcus in 1847; lifestyle and behaviour. The germ theory of disease gave
typhoid bacillus, pneumococcus in 1880; tubercle bacillus in place to a newer concept of disease - "multifactorial
1882; cholera vibrio in 1883; diphtheria bacillus in 1884, causation". In fact, it was Pettenkofer of Munich (1819-
and so on. These discoveries and a host of others at the turn 1901) who first mooted the concept of multifactorial
of the century marked a turning point in our aetiological causation of disease but his ideas were lost in the
concepts. All attention was focussed on microbes and their bacteriological era. The concept of multifactorial causation
role in disease causation. The germ theory of disease came was revived by epidemiologists who have contributed
to the forefront, supplanting the earlier theories of disease significantly to our present-day understanding of
causation. Medicine finally shed the rags of dogma and multifactorial causation of disease and "risk-factors" in the
superstition and put on the robes of scientific knowledge. aetiology of disease. The developments in modern medicine
may be reviewed broadly under the following heads:
Birth of preventive medicine
Preventive medicine really dates back to the 18th 1. Curative medicine
century. It developed as a branch of medicine distinct from Although curative medicine is thousands of years old,
public health. Curiously, it came into existence even before modern medicine, as we know today, is hardly 100 years
the causative agents of disease were known. James Lind old. Its primary objective is the removal of disease from the
(1716-1794), a naval surgeon advocated the intake of fresh patient (rather than from the mass). It -employs various
fruit and vegetables for the prevention of scurvy in 1753. modalities to accomplish this objective, e.g., diagnostic
Edward Jenner (1749-1823) of Great Britain, a pupil of techniques, treatment. Over the years, the tools of diagnosis
John Hunter, discovered vaccination against smallpox in have become refined, sophisticated and numerous; the
1 796. These two discoveries marked the beginning of a new armamentarium for treatment more specific and potent. In
era, the era of disease prevention by specific measures. the middle of the 20th century a profound revolution was
Preventive medicine got a firm foundation only after the brought in "allopathic medicine" which has been defined as
discovery of causative agents of disease and the "treatment of disease by the use of a drug which produces a
establishment of the germ theory of disease. The latter part reaction that itself neutralizes the disease" (10), by the
of the 19th century was marked by such discoveries in introduction of antibacterial and antibiotic agents. These
preventive medicine as Pasteur's anti-rabies treatment discoveries, if they were to be recorded, would fill volumes.
(1883), cholera vaccine (1892), diphtheria antitoxin (1894), Suffice it to say that curative medicine, over the years, has
anti-typhoid vaccine (1898), antiseptics and disinfectants accumulated a vast body of scientific knowledge, technical
(1827-1912), etc. A further advance was the elucidation of skills, medicaments and machinery - highly organized not
the modes of disease transmission. For example, in 1896, merely to treat dis(:lase but to preserve life itself as far as it
Bruce, a British Army surgeon, demonstrated that the could be possible.
African sleeping sickness was transmitted by tsetse fly. In In reviewing the history of medicine during the past 100
1898, Ross demonstrated that malaria was transmitted by years, one cannot fail to note the tremendous growth of
the Anopheles. In 1900, Walter Reed and his colleagues specialization that has taken place in response to advances
demonstrated that yellow fever was transmitted by the in medical technology due to changes in the nature and
MODERN MEDICINE
distribution of health and disease pattern in the community, treatment have become important tools of preventive
and to the changing emphasis placed by society upon age medicine. The pattern of disease in the community began to
and sex groups. Some specialities have emerged, based on change with improved control of infectious diseases through
clearly defined skills such as surgery, radiology, and both prevention and treatment, and people are now living
anaesthesia; some based on parts of the body such as ENT, for longer years, especially those in developing countries.
ophthalmology, cardiology, gynaecology; and, some based A new concept - concept of disease eradication - began
on particular age or sex groups such as paediatrics, geriatrics to take shape. This concept found ready application in the
and obstetrics. Again, within each speciality, there has been eradication of smallpox. Eradication of certain other
a growth of sub-specialities, as for example, neonatology, diseases (e.g., measles, tetanus, guineaworm and endemic
perinatology, paediatric cardiology, paediatric neurology goitre} are on the anvil.
and paediatric surgery - all in paediatrics. One wonders
Another notable development in the 20th century is the
whether such microspecialization is needed.
development of "screening" for the diagnosis of disease in
Specialization has no doubt raised the standards of its presymptomatic stage (21). In the 1930s, the two most
medical care, but it has escalated the cost of medical care commonly used tests were the serologic blood test for
and placed specialist medical care beyond the means of an syphilis, and the chest X-ray for tuberculosis. As the number
average citizen, without outside aid or charity. It has of screening tests increased, the concept of screening for
infringed upon the basic tenets of socialism (i.e., the greatest individual diseases entered the multiphasic epoch in early
good of the greatest number) and paved the way to varying 1950s. In spite of the fact that the utility of screening has
degrees of social control over medicine. Specialization has been increasingly debated in recent years, screening for
also contributed to the decline of general practice and the disease among apparently healthy people has remained an
isolation of medical practitioners at the periphery of the important part of preventive medicine. An offshoot of the
medical care system (20). screening is screening for "risk-factors" of disease and
identification of "high-risk groups". Since we do not have
2. Preventive medicine specific weapons against chronic diseases, screening and
Preventive medicine developed as a branch of medicine regular health-checkups have acquired an important place
distinct from public health. By definition, preventive in the early detection of cancer, diabetes, rheumatism and
medicine is applied to "healthy" people, customarily by cardiovascular disease, the so-called "diseases of
actions affecting large numbers or populations. Its primary civilization".
objective is prevention of disease and promotion of health. Preventive medicine is currently faced with the problem of
The early triumphs of preventive medicine were in the "population explosion" in developing countries where
field of bacterial vaccines and antisera at the turn of the population overgrowth is causing social, economic, political
century which led to the conquest of a wide spectrum of and environmental problems. This is another kind of
specific diseases. Declines took place in the morbidity and prevention - prevention of a problem that demands a mass
mortality from diphtheria, tetanus, typhoid fever and others. attack, if its benefits are to accrue in the present and
Later, the introduction of tissue culture of viruses led to the succeeding generations. Consequently, research in human
development of anti-viral vaccines, e.g., polio vaccines fertility and contraceptive technology has gained momentum.
( 1955, 1960). The eradication of smallpox (the last case of Genetic counselling is another aspect of the population
smallpox occurred in Somalia in 1977) is one of the greatest problem that is receiving attention.
triumphs of preventive medicine in recent times. The search Preventive medicine has become a growing point in
for better and newer vaccines (e.g., against malaria, leprosy, medicine (21). Advances in the field of treatment in no way
syphilis and other parasitic diseases and even cancer} has diminished the need for preventive care nor its
continues. usefulness. Preventive measures are already being applied
Preventive medicine did not confine itself to vaccination not only to the chronic, degenerative and hereditary
and quarantine. Discoveries in the field of nutrition have diseases but also to the special problems of old age. In fact,
added a new dimension to preventive medicine. New as medical science advances, it will become more and more
strategies have been developed for combating specific preventive medical practice in nature. The emergence of
deficiencies as for example, nutritional blindness and iodine ·preventive paediatrics, geriatrics and preventive cardiology
deficiency disorders. The recognition of the role of vitamins, reflect newer trends in the scope of preventive medicine.
minerals, proteins and other nutrients, and more recently Scientific advances, improved living standards and fuller
dietary fibre emphasize the nutrition component of education of the public have opened up a number of new
preventive medicine. avenues to prevention. Three levels of prevention are now
Another glorious chapter in the history of preventive recognized: primary, intended to prevent disease among
medicine is the discovery of synthetic insecticides such as healthy people; secondary, directed towards those in whom
DDT, HCH, malathion and others. They have brought about the disease has already developed; and tertiary, to reduce
fundamental changes in the strategy in the control of vector- the prevalence of chronic disability consequent to disease.
borne diseases (e.g., malaria, leishmaniasis, plague, Preventive medicine ranges far beyond the medical field in
rickettsial diseases) which have been among the most the narrow sense of the word. Besides communicable
important world-wide health problems for many years. diseases, it is concerned with the environmental, social,
Despite insecticide resistance and environmental pollution economic and more general aspects of prevention. Modern
mishaps (e.g., Bhopal tragedy in India in 1984), some of the preventive medicine has been defined as "the art and
chemical insecticides such as DDT still remain unchallenged science of health promotion, disease prevention, disability
in the control of disease. limitatibn and rehabilitation". It implies a more personal
The discovery of sulpha drugs, anti-malarials, antibiotics, encounter between the individual and health professional
anti-tubercular and anti-leprosy drugs have all enriched than public health. In sum, preventive medicine is a kind of
preventive medicine. Chemoprophylaxis and mass drug anticipatory medicine (22).
MAN AND MEDICINE : TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
2
MAN AND MEDICINE : TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
charitable and voluntary agencies providing free medical and community. Family and community medicine overlap
care to the poor. An attitude developed that charity was and strengthen each other.
worthy of man and that the benefits of modern medicine
should be available to all people. A solution was to be found Family medicine
- it was "socialization of medicine". The emergence of family medicine has been hailed as a
Social medicine should not be confused with state rediscovery of the human, social and cultural aspects of
medicine or socialized medicine. State medicine implies health and disease, and of the recognition of family as a
provision of free medical service to the people at focal point of health care and the right place for integrating
government expense. Socialized medicine envisages preventive, promotive and curative services. Family
provision of medical service and professional education by medicine has been defined as "a field of specialization in
the State as in state medicine, but the programme is medicine which is neither disease nor organ oriented. It is
operated and regulated by professional groups rather than family oriented medicine or health care centred on the
by the government. family as the unit from first contact to the ongoing care of
chronic problems (from prevention to rehabilitation). When
Germany led the way by instituting compulsory sickness
insurance in 1883. Other countries followed suit England family medicine is applied to the care of patients and their
in 1911, France in 1928 and so on. Great· Britain families, it becomes the speciality of family practice. Family
nationalized its health services in 1946. A few other practice is a horizontal speciality, which, like paediatrics and
countries notably the socialist nations in Europe, New internal medicine, shares large areas of content with other
Zealand and Cuba took steps to socialize their health clinical disciplines. The speciality of family practice is
services. However, Russia was the first country to socialize specially designed to deliver "primary care" (41).
medicine completely and to give its citizens a constitutional Community medicine
right to all health services. From a private ownership,
medicine became a social institution, one more link in the Like family medicine, community medicine is a
chain of welfare institutions (39). newcomer. It is the successor of what was previously known
as public health, community health, preventive and social
Socialization is a noble idea. It eliminates the competition medicine. All these share common ground, i.e., prevention
among physicians in search of clients. It ensures social of disease and promotion of health. The appearance of
equity, that is universal coverage by health services. Medical community medicine has caused confusion. The Faculty of
care becomes free for the patient, which is supported by the Community Medicine of the Royal College of Physicians has
State. However, the varying degrees of social control over defined community medicine as "that speciality which deals
medicine, has resulted in a variety of health systems, each with populations ...... and comprises those doctors who try to
system having its own merits and demerits. It is now measure the needs of the population, both sick and well,
recognized that mere socialization was not sufficient to
who plan and administer services to meet those needs, and
ensure utilization of health services. What is required is
those who are engaged in research and teaching in the field"
"community participation", which, as envisaged by WHO
(27). Besides this, there are at least four other definitions of
and UNICEF is "the process by which individuals and
families assume responsibility for their own health and community medicine (42). To make matters worse, a WHO
welfare and for those of the community, and develop the study group (43) stated that since health problems vary from
capacity to contribute to their and the community's country to country, each country should formulate its own
development (32). It also implies community participation in definition of community medicine in the light of its
the planning, organization and management of their own traditions, geography and resources. There is still confusion
health services. This is called simply "Health by the People" and conflict about roles, tasks and professional identities in
(40). This is what Virchow had prophesied that medicine is the service as well as the academic worlds of community
nothing but politics on a large scale. medicine (27).
2
MAN AND MEDICINE : TOWARDS HEALTH FOR ALL
"Health is NOT mainly an issue of doctors, social services and hospitals. It is an issue of social justice. 11
CONCEPT Of HEALTH
Health is a common theme in most cultures. In fact, all was considered healthy. This concept, known as the
communities have their concepts of health, as part of their "biomedical concept" has the basis in the "germ theory of
culture. Among definitions still used, probably the oldest is disease" which dominated medical thought at the turn of the
that health is the "absence of disease". In some cultures, 20th century. The medical profession viewed the human
health and harmony are considered equivalent, harmony body as a machine, disease as a consequence of the
being defined as "being at peace with the self, the community, breakdown of the machine and one of the doctor's task as
god and cosmos". The ancient Indians and Greeks shared this repair of the machine (3). Thus health, in this narrow view,
concept and attributed disease to disturbances in bodily became the ultimate goal of medicine.
equilibrium of what they called "humors".
The criticism that is levelled against the biomedical
Modern medicine is often accused for its preoccupation concept is that it has minimized the role of the
with the study of disease, and neglect of the study of health. environmental, social, psychological and cultural
Consequently, our ignorance about health continues to be determinants of health. The biomedical model, for all its
profound, as for example, the determinants of health are not spectacular success in treating disease, was found
yet clear; the current definitions of health are elusive; and inadequate to solve some of the major health problems of
there is no single yardstick for measuring health. There is thus mankind (e.g., malnutrition, chronic diseases, accidents,
a great scope for the study of the "epidemiology" of health. drug abuse, mental illness, environmental pollution,
However, during the past few decades, there has been a population explosion) by elaborating the medical
reawakening that health is a fundamental human right and a technologies. Developments in medical and social sciences
worldwide social goal; that it is essential to the satisfaction of led to the conclusion that the biomedical concept of health
basic human needs and to an improved quality of life; and, was inadequate.
that it is to be attained by all people. In 1977, the 30th
World Health Assembly decided that the main social target 2. Ecological concept
of governments and WHO in the coming decades should be Deficiencies in the biomedical concept gave rise to other
"the attainment by all citizens of the world by the year 2000 concepts. The ecologists put forward an attractive
of a level of health that will permit them to lead a socially hypothesis which viewed health as a dynamic equilibrium
and economically productive life", for brevity, called "Health between man and his environment, and disease a
for All" (1). With the adoption of health as an integral part of maladjustment of the human organism to environment.
socio-economic development by the United Nations in 1979 Dubas (4) defined health saying : "Health implies the
(2), health, while being an end in itself, has also become a relative absence of pain and discomfort and a continuous
major instrument of overall socio-economic development adaptation and adjustment to the environment to ensure
and the creation of a new social order. optimal function". Hu man, ecological and cultural
adaptations do determine not only the occurrence of disease
CHANGING CONCEPTS but also the availability of food and the population
An understanding of health is the basis of all health care. explosion. The ecological concept raises two issues, viz.
Health is not perceived the same way by all members of a imperfect man and imperfect environment. History argues
community including various professional groups (e.g., strongly that improvement in human adaptation to natural
biomedical scientists, social science specialists, health environments can lead to longer life expectancies and a
administrators, ecologists, etc) giving rise to confusion about better quality of life even in the absence of modern health
the concept of health. In a world of continuous change, new delivery services (5).
concepts are bound to emerge based on new patterns of
thought. Health has evolved over the centuries as a concept 3. Psychosocial concept
from an individual concern to a worldwide social goal and Contemporary developments in social sciences revealed
encompasses the whole quality of life. A brief account of the that health is not only a biomedical phenomenon, but one
changing concepts of health is given below: which is influenced by social, psychological, cultural,
economic and political factors of the people concerned (5).
1. Biomedical concept These factors must be taken into consideration in defining
Traditionally, health has been viewed as an "absence of and measuring health. Thus health is both a biological and
disease", and if one was free from disease, then the person social phenomenon.
14 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
4. Holistic concept but which may vary as human beings adapt to internal and
The holistic model is a synthesis of all the above external stimuli.
concepts. It recognizes the strength of social, economic,
political and environmental influences on health. It has been
New philosophy of health
variously described as a unified or multidimensional process In recent years, we have acquired a new philosophy of
involving the well-being of the whole person in the context health, which may be stated as below :
of his environment. This view corresponds to the view held health is a fundamental human right
by the ancients that health implies a sound mind, in a sound health is the essence of productive life, and not the
body, in a sound family, in a sound environment. The result of ever increasing expenditure on medical care
holistic approach implies that all sectors of society have an - health is intersectoral
effect on health, in particular, agriculture, animal husbandry,
health is an integral part of development
food, industry, education, housing, public works,
communications and other sectors (6). The emphasis is on health is central to the concept of quality of life
the promotion and protection of health. health involves individuals, state and international
res po nsib ility
DEFINITION OF HEALTH health and its maintenance is a major social
investment
"Health" is one of those terms which most people find it health is a worldwide social goal.
difficult to define, although they are confident of its
meaning. Therefore, many definitions of health have been DIMENSIONS OF HEALTH
offered from time to time.
Health is multidimensional. The WHO definition
WHO definition envisages three specific dimensions - the physical, the
The widely accepted definition of health is that given by mental and the social. Many more may be cited, viz.
the World Health Organization (1948) in the preamble to its spiritual, emotional, vocational and political dimensions. As
constitution, which is as follows : the knowledge base grows, the list may be expanding.
Although these dimensions function and interact with one
"Health is a state of complete physical, mental and another, each has its own nature, and for descriptive
social well-being and not merely an absence of disease purposes will be treated separately.
or infirmity"
1. Physical dimension
In recent years, this statement has been amplified to
include the ability to lead a "socially and economically The physical dimension of health is probably the easiest
productive life" (6). to understand. The state of physical health implies the
notion of "perfect functioning" of the body. It conceptualizes
The WHO definition of health has been criticized as being
health biologically as a state in which every cell and every
too broad. Some argue that health cannot be defined as a
organ is functioning at optimum capacity and in perfect
"state" at all, but must be seen as a process of continuous
harmony with the rest of the body. However, the term
adjustment to the changing demands of living and of the
"optimum" is not definable.
changing meanings we give to life. It is a dynamic concept. It
helps people live well, work well and enjoy themselves. The signs of physical health in an individual are: "a good
Inspite of the above limitations, the concept of health as complexion, a clean skin, bright eyes, lustrous hair with a
defined by WHO is broad and positive in its implications; it body well clothed with firm flesh, not too fat, a sweet breath,
sets out the standard, the standard of "positive" health. It a good appetite, sound sleep, regular activity of bowels and
symbolizes the aspirations of people and represents an bladder and smooth, easy, coordinated bodily movements.
overall objective or goal towards which nations should strive. All the organs of the body are of unexceptional size and
function normally; all the special senses are intact; the
Operational definition of health resting pulse rate, blood pressure and exercise tolerance are
all within the range of "normality" for the individual's age
The WHO definition of health is not an "operational" and sex. In the young and growing individual there is a
definition, i.e., it does not lend itself to direct measurement. steady gain in weight and in the future this weight remains
Studies of epidemiology of health have been hampered more or less constant at a point about 5 lbs (2.3 kg) more or
because of our inability to measure health and well-being less than the individual's weight at the age of 25 years (8).
directly. In this connection an "operational definition" has
This state of normality has fairly wide limits. These limits are
been devised by a WHO study group (7). In this definition,
set by observation of a large number of "normal" people,
the concept of health is viewed as being of two orders. In a
who are free from evident disease.
broad sense, health can be seen as "a condition or quality of
the human organism expressing the adequate functioning of Evaluation of physical health
the organism in given conditions, genetic or environmental".
Modern medicine has evolved tools and techniques
In a narrow sense - one more useful for measuring which may be used in various combinations for the
purposes - health means: (a) there is no obvious evidence of assessment of physical health. They include :
disease, and that a person is functioning normally, i.e.,
conforming within normal limits of variation to the - self assessment of overall health
standards of health criteria generally accepted for one's age, - inquiry into symptoms of ill-health and risk factors
sex, community, and geographic region; and (b) the several - inquiry into medications
organs of the body are functioning adequately in themselves inquiry into levels of activity (e.g., number of days of
and in relation to one another, which implies a kind of restricted activity within a specified time, degree of
equilibrium or homeostasis a condition relatively stable fitness)
DIMENSIONS OF HEALTH 15
inquiry into use of medical services (e.g., the number impairments impede role performance and subjective life
of visits to a physician, number of hospitalizations) in quality, or psychiatric diagnosis (10).
the recent past One of the keys to good health is a positive mental
standardized questionnaires for cardiovascular health. Unfortunately, our knowledge about mental health is
diseases far from complete.
- standardized questionnaires for respiratory diseases
- clinical examination 3. Social dimension
nutrition and dietary assessment, and Social well-being implies harmony and integration within
biochemical and laboratory investigations. the individual, between each individual and other members
of society and between individuals and the world in which
At the community level, the state of health may be they live (11). It has been defined as the "quantity and
assessed by such indicators as death rate, infant mortality quality of an individual's interpersonal ties and the extent of
rate and expectation of life. Ideally, each piece of involvement with the community" (12).
information should be individually useful and when
combined should permit a more complete health profile of The social dimension of health includes the levels of
individuals and communities. social skills one possesses, social functioning and the ability
to see oneself as a member of a larger society. In general,
2. Mental dimension social health takes into account that every individual is part
Mental health is not mere absence of mental illness. Good of a family and of wider community and focuses on social
mental health is the ability to respond to the many varied and economic conditions and well-being of the "whole
experiences of life with flexibility and a sense of purpose. person" in the context of his social network. Social health is
More recently, mental health has been defined as "a state of rooted in "positive material environment" (focussing on
balance between the individual and the surrounding world, financial and residential matters), and "positive human
a state of harmony between oneself and others, a environment" which is concerned with the social network of
coexistence between the realities of the self and that of other the individual (10).
people and that of the environment" (9). 4. Spiritual dimension
Some decades ago, the mind and body were considered Proponents of holistic health believe that the time has
independent entities. However, researchers have discovered come to give serious consideration to the spiritual dimension
that psychological factors can induce all kinds of illness, not and to the role this plays in health and disease. Spiritual
simply mental ones. They include conditions such as health in this context, refers to that part of the individual
essential hypertension, peptic ulcer and bronchial asthma.
which reaches out and strives for meaning and purpose in
Some major mental illnesses such as depression and
life. It is the intangible "something" that transcends
schizophrenia have a biological component. The underlying
physiology and psychology. As a relatively new concept, it
inference is that there is a behavioural, psychological or
seems to defy concrete definition. It includes integrity,
biological dysfunction and that the disturbance in the mental
principles and ethics, the purpose in life, commitment to
equilibrium is not merely in the relationship between the
some higher being and belief in concepts that are not subject
individual and the society (10).
to "state of the art" explanation (13).
Although mental health is an essential component of
health, the scientific foundations of mental health are not yet 5. Emotional dimension
clear. Therefore, we do not have precise tools to assess the Historically the mental and emotional dimensions have
state of mental health unlike physical health. Psychologists been seen as one element or as two closely related elements.
have mentioned the following characteristics as attributes of However, as more research becomes available a definite
a mentally healthy person: difference is emerging. Mental health can be seen as
a. a mentally healthy person is free from internal "knowing" or "cognition" while emotional health relates to
conflicts; he is not at "war" with himself. "feeling". Experts in psychobiology have been relatively
b. he is well-adjusted, i.e., he is able to get along well successful in isolating these two separate dimensions. With
with others. He accepts criticism and is not easily this new data, the mental and emotional aspects of
upset. humanness may have to be viewed as two separate
c. he searches for identity. dimensions of human health (13).
d. he has a strong sense of self-esteem.
e. he knows himself: his needs, problems and goals (this 6. Vocational dimension
is known as self-actualization). The vocational aspect of life is a new dimension. It is part
f. he has good self-control-balances rationality and of human existence. When work is fully adapted to human
emotionality. goals, capacities and limitations, work often plays a role in
g. he faces problems and tries to solve them intelligently, promoting both physical and mental health. Physical work is
i.e., coping with stress and anxiety. usually associated with an improvement in physical capacity,
Assessment of mental health at the population level may while goal achievement and self-realization in work are a
be made by administering mental status questionnaires by source of satisfaction and enhanced self-esteem (14).
trained interviewers. The most commonly used The importance of this dimension is exposed when
questionnaires seek to determine the presence and extent of individuals suddenly lose their jobs or are faced with
"organic disease" and of symptoms that could indicate mandatory retirement. For many individuals, the vocational
psychiatric disorder; some personal assessment of mental dimension may be merely a source of income. To others, this
well-being is also made. The most basic decision to be made dimension represents the culmination of the efforts of other
in assessing mental health is whether to assess mental dimensions as they function together to produce what the
functioning, i.e., the extent to which cognitive or affective individual considers life "success" (13).
16 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
DIMENSION
INDEX
1
Life expectancy index
\ Education index
l
I 1
GNI index
FIG.1
Calculating the Human Development Index
Source : (26)
18 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
Goalposts for the Human Development Index Norway, Australia and USA are at the top of HDI ranking
and D.R. of Congo, Niger are at the bottom. India comes in
DIMENSION OBSERVED MAXIMUM MINIMUM
the medium human development category, ranking at
Life expectancy 83.4 20.0 number 136 (27).
(Japan, 2011)
Mean years of schooling 13.1 0
Disparities between regions can be significant with some
(Czech Republic, 2005) regions having more ground to cover in making the shortfall
Expected years of schooling 18.0 0
than others. The link between the economic prosperity and
(capped at) human development is neither automatic nor obvious. Two
countries with similar income per capita can have very
Combined education index 0.978 0
(New Zealand, 2010) different HDI values, and countries having similar HDI can
have very different income levels.
Per capita income (PPP$) 107,721 100
(Qatar, 2011)
SPECTRUM OF HEALTH
Having defined the minimum and maximum values, the
subindices are calculated as follows: Health and disease lie along a continuum, and there is no
Actual value Minimum value single cut-off point. The lowest point on the health-disease
Dimension index (1) spectrum is death and the highest point corresponds to the
Maximum value Minimum value WHO definition of positive health (Fig. 2). It is thus obvious
For education, equation 1 is applied to each of the two that health fluctuates within a range of optimum well-being
subcomponents, then a geometric mean of the resulting to various levels of dysfunction, including the state of total
indices is created and finally, equation 1 is reapplied to the dysfunction, namely the death. The transition from optimum
geometric mean of the indices using 0 as the minimum and health to ill-health is often gradual, and where one state
the highest geometric mean of the resulting indices for the ends and the other begins is a matter of judgment.
time period under consideration, as the maximum. This is
The spectral concept of health emphasizes that the health
equivalent to applying equation 1 directly to the geometric
of an individual is not static; it is a dynamic phenomenon
mean of the two subcomponents.
and a process of continuous change, subject to frequent
Step 2. Aggregating the subindices to produce the Human subtle variations. What is considered maximum health today
Development Index may be minimum tomorrow. That is, a person may function
The HDI is the geometric mean of the three dimension at maximum levels of health today, and diminished levels of
indices: health tomorrow. It implies that health is a state not to be
attained once and for all, but ever to be renewed. There are
( I Life 113 X I Education l/3 XI /ncom/13 ) (2) degrees or "levels of health" as there are degrees or severity
The construction of HDI methodology can be illustrated of illness. As long as we are alive there is some degree of
with the example of India for the year 2010. health in us.
Indicator Value
Life expectancy at birth (years) 65.4
Positive health
Mean years of schooling (years) 4.4 Better health
Expected years of schooling (years) 10.3 Freedom from sickness
GNI per capita (PPP$) 3,468
Unrecognized sickness
65.4 - 20 45.4 Mild sickness
Life expectancy index = . _ 0.716 Severe sickness
83 4 20 63.4
Death
4.4 0
Mean years of schooling index = ''o.335
13.1-0
10.3- 0 FIG.2
Expected years of schooling index =--- 0.572 The health sickness spectrum
. '10.335 x 0.572 - 0
Education index = ----0-.~9 7-8-_-0---- 0.447 DETERMINANTS OF HEALTH
Ecology is a key word in present-day health philosophy. Historically, the right to health was one of the last to be
It comes from the Greek "Oikos" meaning a house. Ecology proclaimed in the Constitutions of most countries of the world
is defined as the science of mutual relationship between (42). At the international level, the Universal Declaration of
living organisms and their environments. Human ecology is Human Rights established a breakthrough in 1948, by stating
a subset of more general science of ecology. in Article 25: "Everyone has the right to a standard of living
adequate for the health and well-being of himself and his
A full understanding of health requires that humanity be family ..... ". The Preamble to the WHO Constitution also
seen as part of an ecosystem. The human ecosystem affirms that it is one of the fundamental rights of every human
includes in addition to the natural environment, all the being to enjoy "the highest attainable standard of health".
dimensions of the man-made environment physical, Inherent in the right to health is the right to health or medical
chemical, biological, psychological: in short, our culture and care. Some countries have used the term "right to health
all its products (40). Disease is embedded in the ecosystem protection" which is assured by a comprehensive system of
of man. Health, according to ecological concepts, is social insurance that provides material security in cases of
visualized as a state of dynamic equilibrium between man illness or accident, and free medical education, medicaments
and his environment. and other necessary materials and the right to be cared for by
By constantly altering his environment or ecosystem by society in old age and invalidity (42).
such activities as urbanization, industrialization, In an increasing number of societies, health is no longer
deforestation, land reclamation, construction of irrigation accepted as a charity or the privilege of the few, but demanded
canals and dams, man has created for himself new health as a right for all. However, when resources are limited (as in
problems. For example, the greatest threat to human health in most developing countries), the governments cannot provide
India today is the ever-increasing, unplanned urbanization, all the needed health services. Under these circumstances the
growth of slums and deterioration of environment. As a result, aspirations of the people should be satisfied by giving them
diseases at one time thought to be primarily "rural" (e.g., equal right to available health care services (43).
filariasis) have acquired serious urban dimensions. The agents
of a number of diseases, for example, malaria and The concept of "right to health" has generated so many
chikungunya fever, which were effectively controlled have questions, viz. right to medical care, right to responsibility
shown a recrudescence. The reasons for this must be sought in for health, right to a healthy environment, right to food, right
changes in the human ecology. Man's intrusion into ecological to procreate (artificial insemination included), the right not
cycles of disease has resulted in zoonotic diseases such as to procreate (family planning, sterilization, legal abortion),
kyasanur forest disease, rabies, yellow fever, monkeypox, rights of the deceased persons (determination of death,
lassa fever, etc. The Bhopal gas tragedy in 1984 highlights the autopsies, organ removal) and the right to die (suicide,
danger of locating industries in urban areas. The nuclear hunger strike, discontinuation of life support measures), etc.
disaster in Soviet Russia in April 1986 is another grim Many of these issues have been the subject of debate. It is
reminder of environmental pollution. Construction of left to the lawyers, ethicists and physicians to formulate a
irrigation systems and artificial lakes has created ecological general outline of what is acceptable and what is
niches favouring the breeding of mosquitoes and snails. In unacceptable in human society.
fact, ecological factors are at the root of the geographic
distribution of disease. Therefore it has been said that good RESPONSIBILITY FOR HEALTH
public health is basically good ecology. Health is on one hand a highly personal responsibility
Some have equated ecology with epidemiology. The and on the other hand a major public concern. It thus
main distinction between epidemiology and ecology is that involves the joint efforts of the whole social fabric, viz. the
while epidemiology is the study of the relationship between individual, the community and the state to protect and
variations in man's environment and his state of health (or promote health.
disease), ecology embraces the interrelationship of all living
things. In this regard, epidemiology constitutes a special 1. Individual responsibility
application of human ecology or that part of ecology relating Although health is now recognized a fundamental human
to the state of human health (41). right, it is essentially an individual responsibility. It is not a
It is now being increasingly recognized that environmental commodity that one individual can bestow on another. No
factors and ecological considerations must be built into the community or state programme of health services can give
total planning process to prevent degradation of ecosystems. health. In large measure, it has to be earned and maintained
Prevention of disease through ecological or environmental by the individual himself, who must accept a broad spectrum
manipulations or interventions is much safer, cheaper and a of responsibilities, now known as "self care".
more effective rational approach than all the other means of
control. It is through environmental manipulations that Self care in health
diseases such as cholera and other diarrhoeal diseases, A recent trend in health care is self care (44). It is defined as
typhoid, malaria and other vector borne diseases, and "those health-generating activities that are undertaken by the
hookworm disease could be brought under control or persons themselves" (45). It refers to those activities
eliminated. The greatest improvement in human health thus individuals undertake in promoting their own health,
may be expected from an understanding and modification of preventing their own disease, limiting their own illness, and
the factors that favour disease occurrence in the human restoring their own health. These activities are undertaken
ecosystem. Professor Rene Dubos believes that man's capacity without professional assistance, although individuals are
to adapt himself to ecological changes is not unlimited. Man informed by technical knowledge and skills. The generic
can adapt himself only in so far as the mechanisms of attribute of self care is its non-professional, non-bureaucratic,
adaptations are potentially present in his genetic code (18). non-industrial character; its natural place in social life (46).
22 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
Self care activities comprise observance of simple rules of Long ago, Henry Sigerist, the medical historian stated
behaviour relating to diet, sleep, exercise, weight, alcohol, that "The people's health ought to be the concern of the
smoking and drugs. Others include attention to personal people themselves. They must struggle for it and plan for it.
hygiene, cultivation of healthful habits and lifestyle, The war against disease and for health cannot be fought by
submitting oneself to selective medical examinations and physicians alone. It is a people's war in which the entire
screening; accepting immunization and carrying out other population must be mobilized permanently" (51).
specific disease-prevention measures, reporting early when
sick and accepting treatment, undertaking measures for the 3. State responsibility
prevention of a relapse or of the spread of the disease to The responsibility for health does not end with the
others. To these must be added family planning which is individual and community effort. In all civilized societies, the
essentially an individual responsibility. State assumes responsibility for the health and welfare of its
The shift in disease patterns from acute to chronic disease citizens. The Constitution of India provides that health is a
makes self care both a logical necessity and an appropriate State responsibility. The relevant portions are to be found in
strategy. For example, by teaching patients self care (e.g., the Directive Principles of State Policy, which are as below :
recording one's own blood pressure, examination of urine The State shall, in particular, direct the policy towards
for sugar), the burden on the official health services would securing-
be considerably reduced. In other words, health must begin .. .. that the health and strength of workers, men and women
with the individual. and the tender age of children are not abused and that
citizens are not forced by economic necessity to enter
2. Community responsibility avocations unsuited to their age or strength.
Health can never be adequately protected by health .... that childhood and youth are protected against
services without the active understanding and involvement exploitation and against moral and material abandonment.
of communities whose health is at stake. Until quite recently, The State shall, within the limits of its economic capacity and
throughout the world, people were neglected as a health development, make effective provision for securing the right
resource; they were merely looked upon as sources of to work, to education and to public assistance in cases of
pathology or victims of pathology and consequently as a unemployment, old age, sickness and disablement, and in
"target" for preventive and therapeutic services. This other cases of undeserved want.
negative view of people's role in health has changed The State shall make provision for securing just and humane
because of the realization that there are many things which conditions of work and maternity relief.
the individual cannot do for himself except through united The State shall regard the raising of the level of nutrition and
community effort. The individual and community standard of living of its people and the improvement of public
responsibility are complementary, not antithetical. The health as among its primary duties.
current trend is to "demedicalize" health and involve the - The Constitution of India; Part IV
communities in a meaningful way. This implies a more active India is a signatory to the Alma-Ata Declaration of 1978
involvement of families and communities in health matters, and the Millennium Development Goals of 2000. The
viz. planning, implementation, utilization, operation and National Health Policy, approved by Parliament in 1983 and
evaluation of health services. In other words, the emphasis later on in 2002 have resulted in a greater degree of state
has shifted from health care for the people to health involvement in the management of health services, and the
care by the people. The concept of primary health care establishment of nation-wide systems of health services with
centres round people's participation in their own activities. emphasis on primary health care approach.
The Village Health Guides' scheme in India, launched in
1977, is an example of community participation. 4. International responsibility
There are three ways in which a community can The health of mankind requires the cooperation of
participate (47): (i) the community can provide in the shape governments, the people, national and international
of facilities, manpower, logistic support, and possibly funds organizations both within and outside the United Nations
(ii) it also means the community can be actively involved in system in achieving our health goals. This cooperation
planning, management, and evaluation, and (iii) an equally covers such subjects as exchange of experts, provision of
important contribution that people can make is by joining in drugs and supplies, border meetings with regard to control
and using the health services. This is particularly true of of communicable diseases. The TCDC (Technical
preventive and protective measures. Further, no standard Cooperation in Developing Countries), ASEAN (Association
pattern of community participation can be recommended of South-East Asian Nations) and SMRC (South Asia
since there is a wide range of economic and social problems, Association for Regional Cooperation) are important
as well as political and cultural traits among and within the regional mechanisms for such cooperation (49).
communities. What is essential is flexibility of approach.
The eradication of smallpox, the pursuit of "Health for
However, community involvement is not easy to obtain All" and the campaign against smoking and AIDS are a few
as extensive experience has indicated (48). The traditional recent examples of international responsibility for the
Indian society is cut across on rigid religion and caste lines, control of disease and promotion of health. Today, more
and appropriate role for each caste group has been a serious than ever before, there is a wider international
obstacle in securing complete community participation (49). understanding on matters relating to health and "social
And in the health sector, the greatest resistance to health injustices" in the distribution of health services. The WHO is
guide's involvement in primary health care came from the a major factor in fostering international cooperation in
medical profession than the lay public (50). Community health. In keeping with its constitutional mandate, WHO acts
participation has become an aphorism that is still awaiting as a directing and coordinating authority on international
genuine realization in many countries of the world. health work.
HEALTH AND DEVELOPMENT 23
HEALTH AND DEVELOPMENT Kerala has demonstrated that, in a democratic system
with a strong political commitment to equitable socio-
"Health is essential to socio-economic development" has economic development, high levels of health can be
gained increasing recognition. It was commonly thought in achieved even on modest levels of income. Kerala can
the 1960s that socio-economic progress was not essential for therefore be considered a yardstick for judging health
improving the health status of people in developing status in the country.
countries, and that substantial and rapid progress could be Studies have shown that the efforts in the health field
made through introduction of modern public health were simultaneously reinforced by developments in other
measures alone. According to this way of thinking, the role sectors. Literacy (especially female literacy) has played a key
of human beings in the developing process was grossly role in improving the health situation. This was probably
underestimated. responsible for the high rate of utilization of health facilities.
The period 1973-1977 witnessed considerable rethinking Long-standing programmes directed at social welfare raised
on this subject (49). There was profound modification of the not only educational levels of the population but also
economic theory. It became increasingly clear that economic developed a social infrastructure, including a transport
development alone cannot solve the major problems of network which provided easy access to services. An effective
poverty, hunger, malnutrition and disease. In its place, programme of land reform had given poor people access to
"non-economic" issues (e.g., education, productive land resources for food production at the household level.
employment, housing, equity, freedom and dignity, human Kerala has demonstrated that good health at low cost is
welfare) have emerged as major objectives in development attainable by poor countries, but requires major political and
strategies. social commitment.
The experiences of a few developing countries (e.g., Sri HEALTH DEVELOPMENT
Lanka, Costa Rica, and the state of Kerala in India) illustrate
dramatically the way in which health forms part of Health development is defined as "the process of
development. This was because the efforts in the health field continuous progressive improvement of the health status of
were simultaneously reinforced by developments in other a population" (53). Its product is rising level of human well-
sectors such as education, social welfare and land reforms being, marked not only by reduction in the burden of
(52). The link between health and development has been disease, but also by the attainment of positive physical and
clearly established, the one being the starting point for the mental health related to satisfactory economic functioning
other and vice versa. and social integration (54).
Since health is an integral part of development, all sectors The concept of health development as distinct from the
of society have an effect on health. In other words, health provision of medical care is a product of recent policy
services are no longer considered merely as a complex of thinking. It is based on the fundamental principle that
solely medical measures but a "subsystem" of an overall governments have a responsibility for the health of their
socio-economic system. In the final analysis, human health people and at the same time people should have the right as
and well-being are the ultimate goal of development. well as the duty, individually and collectively to participate
in the development of their own health.
Lessons from Kerala State Health development contributes to and results from social
Kerala is the southern-most state of India. With a and economic development. Therefore, health development
population of 33.36 million, and a population density of 858 has been given increasing emphasis in the policies and
per sq.km, the state of Kerala is extremely crowded, perhaps programmes of the United Nations system. One example is
more than Bangladesh. Its annual per capita income of that of World Bank which is providing funds for the health
component of economic development programmes. The
Rs. 83,725 (2011-12) is more than the national average of
UNDP has also shown a growing interest in health
Rs. 60,603. Kerala has surpassed all the Indian states in development, as has the World Bank.
certain important measures of health and social
development, as shown in Table 1. INDICATORS OF HEALTH
TABLE 1 A question that is often raised is: How healthy is a given
Comparison of Kerala and all-India Health Statistics community ? Indicators are required not only to measure the
health status of a community, but also to compare the health
Kerala All India status of one country with that of another; for assessment of
health care needs; for allocation of scarce resources; and for
Death rate/1000 (2012) 6.9 7.0 monitoring and evaluation of health services, activities, and
Rural birth rate (2012) 15.1 23.1 programmes. Indicators help to measure the extent to which
Infant mortality rate (2012) 12.0 42 the objectives and targets of a programme are being
Annual growth rate, per cent (2012) 0.8 1.45 attained.
Life expectancy at birth As the name suggests, indicators are only an indication of a
2011...;..2015 (Projection) given situation or a reflection of that situation. In WHO's
Male 73.2 67.3 guidelines for health programme evaluation (55) they are
Female 77.6 69.1 defined as variables which help to measure changes. Often
Literacy rate, per cent (2011) 90.92 74.04 they are used particularly when these changes cannot be
Female literacy rate (2011) 91.98 65.46
measured directly, as for example health or nutritional status
(54). If measured sequentially over time, they can indicate
Mean age at marriage, females (2012) 22.9 21.2 direction and speed of change and serve to compare different
Per capita income (2011-12) Rs. 83,725 Rs. 60,603 areas or groups of people at the same moment in time (55).
24 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
There has been some confusion over terminology: community. It indicates the rate at which people are dying.
health indicator as compared to health index (plural: Strictly speaking, health should not be measured by the
indices or indexes). It has been suggested that in relation to number of deaths that occur in a community. But in many
health trends, the term indicator is to be preferred to countries, the crude death rate is the only available indicator
index, whereas health index is generally considered to be of health. When used for international comparison, the
an amalgamation of health indicators (_56). usefulness of the crude death rate is restricted because it is
influenced by the age-sex composition of the population.
Characteristics of indicators Although not a perfect measure of health status, a decrease
Indicators have been given scientific respectability; for in death rate provides a good tool for assessing the overall
example ideal indicators health improvement in a population. Reducing the number
of deaths in the population is an obvious goal of medicine
a. should be valid, i.e., they should actually measure and health care, and success or failure to do so is a measure
what they are supposed to measure; of a nation's commitment to better health.
b. should be reliable and objective, i.e., the answers
should be the same if measured by different people in (b) Expectation of life : Life expectancy at birth is "the
similar circumstances; average number of years that will be lived by those born
alive into a population if the current age-specific mortality
c. should be sensitive, i.e., they should be sensitive to rates persist". Life expectancy at birth is highly influenced by
changes in the situation concerned, the infant mortality rate where that is high. Life expectancy
d. should be specific, i.e., they should reflect changes at the age of 1 excludes the influence of infant mortality, and
only in the situation concerned, life expectancy at the age of 5 excludes the influence of child
e. should be feasible, i.e., they should have the ability mortality. Life expectancy at birth is used most frequently
to obtain data needed, and; (57). It is estimated for both sexes separately. An increase in
f. should be relevant, i.e., they should contribute to the the expectation of life is regarded, inferentially, as an
understanding of the phenomenon of interest. improvement in health status.
But in real life there are few indicators that comply with Life expectancy is a good indicator of socio-economic
all these criteria. Measurement of health is far from simple. development in general. As an indicator of long-term
No existing definition (including the WHO definition) survival, it can be considered as a positive health indicator.
contains criteria for measuring health. This is because It has been adopted as a global health indicator.
health, like happiness, cannot be defined in exact (c) Age-specific death rates : Death rates can be
measurable terms. Its presence or absence is so largely a expressed for specific age groups in a population which are
matter of subjective judgement. Since we have problems in defined by age. An age-specific death rate is defined as total
defining health, we also have problems in measuring health number of deaths occurring in a specific age group of the
and the question is largely unresolved. Therefore, population (e.g. 20-24 years} in a defined area during a
measurements of health have been framed in terms of illness specific period per 1000 estimated total population of the
(or lack of health), the consequences of ill-health (e.g., same age group of the population in the same area during
morbidity, disability) and economic, occupational and the same period.
domestic factors that promote ill-health - all the antitheses (d} Infant mortality rate : Infant mortality rate is the ratio
of health. of deaths under 1 year of age in a given year to the total
Further, health is multidimensional, and each dimension number of live births in the same year; usually expressed as
is influenced by numerous factors, some known and many a rate per 1000 live births (56). It is one of the most
unknown. This means we must measure health universally accepted indicators of health status not only of
multidimensionally. Thus the subject of health measurement infants, but also of whole population and of the socio-
is a complicated one even for professionals. Our economic conditions under which they live. In addition, the
understanding of health, therefore, cannot be in terms of a infant mortality rate is a sensitive indicator of the
single indicator; it must be conceived in terms of a profile, availability, utilization and effectiveness of health care,
employing many indicators, which may be classified as: particularly perinatal care.
1. Mortality indicators (e) Child mortality rate : Another indicator related to the
2. Morbidity indicators overall health status is the early childhood (1-4 years)
3. Disability rates mortality rate. It is defined as the number of deaths at ages
4. Nutritional status indicators 1-4 years in a given year, per 1000 children in that age
group at the mid-point of the year concerned. It thus
5. Health care delivery indicators excludes infant mortality.
6. Utilization rates
Apart from its correlation with inadequate MCH services,
7. Indicators of social and mental health
it is also related to insufficient nutrition, low coverage by
8. Environmental indicators immunization and adverse environmental exposure and
9. Socio-economic indicators other exogenous agents. Whereas the IMR may be more
10. Health policy indicators than 10 times higher in the least developed countries than in
· 11. Indicators of quality of life, and the developed countries, the child mortality rate may be as
12. Other indicators. much as 25 times higher. This indicates the magnitude of the.
gap and the room for improvement.
1. Mortality indicators (f) Under-5 proportionate mortality rate : It is the
(a) Crude death rate: This is considered a fair indicator of proportion of total deaths occurring in the under-5 age group.
the comparative health of the people. It is defined as the This rate can be used to reflect both infant and child mortality
number of deaths per 1000 population per year in a given rates. In communities with poor hygiene, the proportion may
INDICATORS OF HEALTH 25
exceed 60 per 1000 live births. In some European countries, 2. Morbidity indicators
the proportion is less than 2 per 1000 live births. High rate
reflects high birth rates, high child mortality rates and shorter To describe health in terms of mortality rates only is
life expectancy (26). misleading. This is because, mortality indicators do not
reveal the burden of ill-health in a community, as for
(g) Adult mortality rate : The adult mortality rate is example mental illness and rheumatoid arthritis. Therefore,
defined as the probability of dying between the age of 15 morbidity indicators are used to supplement mortality data
and 60 years per 1000 population. The adult mortality rate to describe the health status of a population. Morbidity
offers a way to analyze health gaps between countries in the statistics have also their own drawback; they tend to
main working groups. The probability of dying in adulthood overlook a large number of conditions which are subclinical
is greater for men than for women in almost all countries, or inapparent, that is, the hidden part of the iceberg of
but the variations between countries is very large. In Japan, disease.
less than 1 in 10 men (and 1 in 20 women) die in these The following morbidity rates are used for assessing
productive age group, compared to almost 2-3 in 10 men ill-health in the community (60).
(and 1-2 women) in Angola (58).
a. incidence and prevalence
(h) Maternal {puerperal) mortality rate : Maternal
(puerperal} mortality accounts for the greatest proportion of b. notification rates
deaths among women of reproductive age in most of the c. attendance rates at out-patient departments,
developing world. There are enormous variations in health centres, etc.
maternal mortality rate according to country's level of socio- d. admission, readmission and discharge rates
economic status. e. duration of stay in hospital, and
(i) Disease-specific mortality rate : Mortality rates can be f. spells of sickness or absence from work or school.
computed for specific diseases. As countries begin to 3. Disability rates
extricate themselves from the burden of communicable
diseases, a number of other indicators such as deaths from Since death rates have not changed markedly in recent
cancer, cardiovascular diseases, accidents, diabetes, etc years, despite massive health expenditures, disability rates
have emerged as measures of specific disease problems. related to illness and injury have come into use to
supplement mortality and morbidity indicators. The
(j) Proportional mortality rate : The simplest measure of disability rates are based on the premise or notion that
estimating the burden of a disease in the community is health implies a full range of daily activities. The commonly
proportional mortality rate, i.e., the proportion of all deaths used disability rates fall into two groups: (a) Event-type
currently attributed to it. For example, coronary heart indicators and (b) person-type indicators (10, 61).
disease is the cause of 25 to 30 per cent of all deaths in most
(a) Event-type indicators
western countries. The proportional mortality rate from
communicable diseases has been suggested as a useful i) Number of days of restricted activity
health status indicator; it indicates the magnitude of ii) Bed disability days
preventable mortality. iii) Work-loss days (or school-loss days) within a
specified period
(k) Case fatality rate : Case fatality rate measures the risk
of persons dying from a certain disease within a given time (b) Person-type indicators
period. Case fatality rate is calculated as number of deaths i) Limitation of mobility: For example, confined to
from a specific disease during a specific time period divided bed, confined to the house, special aid in getting
by number of cases of the disease during the same time around either inside or outside the house.
period, usually expressed as per 100. The case fatality rate is ii) Limitation of activity: For example, limitation to
used to link mortality to morbidity. One function of the case perform the basic activities of daily living (ADL)-
fatality rate is to measure various aspects or properties of a e.g., eating, washing, dressing, going to toilet,
disease such as its pathogenicity, severity or virulence (59). moving about, etc; limitation in major activity, e.g.,
It can also be used in poisonings, chemical exposures or ability to work at a job, ability to housework, etc.
other short-term non-disease cause of death. HALE (Health-Adjusted Life Expectancy) : The name
(1) Years of potential life lost (YPLL) : Years of potential of the indicator used to measure healthy life expectancy has
life lost is based on the years of life lost through premature been changed from disability-adjusted life expectancy (DALE)
death. It is defined as one that occurs before the age to to health-adjusted life expectancy (HALE). HALE is based on
which a dying person could have expected to survive (before life expectancy at birth but includes an adjustment for time
an arbitrary determined age, usually taken age 75 years). A spent in poor health. It is most easily understood as the
30 year old who dies in a road accident could theoretically equivalent number of years in full health that a newborn can
have lived to an average life expectancy of 75 years of age; expect to live based on current rates of ill-health and mortality.
thus 45 years of life are lost. Quality-adjusted life years (QALY) : QALY is a
Mortality indicators represent the traditional measures of measure of disease burden including both the quality and
health status. Even today they are probably the most often quantity of life lived. It is used in assessing the value for
used indirect indicators of health. As infectious diseases money of a medical intervention. The QALY is based on the
have been brought under control, mortality rates have number of years of life that would be added by intervention.
declined to very low levels in many countries. Consequently Each year in perfect health is assigned a value of 1.0 down
mortality indicators are losing their sensitivity as health to a value of 0.0 for death, i.e. 1 QALY (1 year of life x 1
indicators in developed countries. However, mortality utility value = 1 QALY) is a year of life lived in perfect
indicators continue to be used as the starting point in health health. Half a year lived in perfect health is equivalent to 0.5
status evaluation. QALY (1 year x 0.5 utility value).
3
CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
Disability-free life expectancy (Syn : active life 5. Health care delivery indicators
expectancy) : Disability-free life expectancy {DFLE) is the
The frequently used indicators of health care delivery are:
average number of years an individual is expected to live
free of disability if current pattern of mortality and disability a. Doctor-population ratio
continue to apply (62). b. Doctor-nurse ratio
Disability-adjusted life years (DALY) : DALY is a c. Population-bed ratio
measure of overall disease burden, expressed as a number of d. Population per health/subcentre, and
years lost due to ill-health, disability or early death. e. Population per traditional birth attendant.
Originally developed by Harvard University for the World These indicators reflect the equity of distribution of health
Bank in 1990, the WHO subsequently adopted the method resources in different parts of the country, and of the
in the year 2000. The DALY is becoming increasingly provision of health care.
common in the field of public health and health impact
assessment. The Global Burden of Disease project combines 6. Utilization rates
the impact of premature mortality with that of disability. It In order to obtain additional information on health
captures the population impact of important fatal and non- status, the extent of use of health services is often
fatal disabling conditions through a single measure. The investigated. Utilization of services - or actual coverage - is
major measure used is disability-adjusted life years {DALYs) expressed as the proportion of people in need of a service
which combines (58) : who actually receive it in a given period, usually a year (57).
- years of lost life {YLL) - calculated from the number It is argued that utilization rates give some indication of the
of deaths at each age multiplied by the expected care needed by a population, and therefore, the health
remaining years of life according to a global status of the population. In other words, a relationship exists
standard life expectancy between utilization of health care services and health needs
years lost to disability {YLD) where the number of and status. Health care utilization is also affected by factors
incident cases due to injury and illness is multiplied such as availability and accessibility of health services and
by the average duration of the disease and a the attitude of an individual towards his health and the
weighting factor reflecting the severity of the health care system. A few examples of utilization rates are
disease on a scale from 0 {perfect health) to 1 cited below:
(dead). a. proportion of infants who are "fully immunized"
It is calculated by formula : DALY = YLL + YLD against the 6 EPI diseases.
The DALY relies on an acceptance that the most b. proportion of pregnant women who receive antenatal
appropriate measure of the effects of the chronic illness is care, or have their deliveries supervised by a trained
time. One DALY, therefore, is equal to one year of healthy birth attendant.
life lost. Japanese life expectancy statistics are used as a c. percentage of the population using the various
standard for measuring premature death, as Japanese have methods of family planning.
the longest life expectancy. d. bed-occupancy rate {i.e., average daily in-patient
DALY can reveal surprising things about a population's census/average number of beds).
health. For example, the 1990 WHO report indicated that e. average length of stay (i.e., days of care rendered/
5 out of 10 leading causes of disability were psychiatric discharges), and
conditions. Psychiatric and neurological conditions account f. bed turnover ratio (i.e., discharges/average beds).
for about 28 per cent of years lived with disability, but The above list is neither exhaustive nor all-inclusive. The
accounts for only 1.4 per cent of all deaths and 1.1 per cent list can be expanded depending upon the services provided.
of years of life lost. Thus they have a huge impact on These indicators direct attention away from the biological
population. A crucial distinction among DALY studies is the aspects of disease in a population towards the discharge of
use of "social weighting", in which the value of each year of social responsibility for the organization in delivery of health
life depends on age. Commonly, years lived as a young care services.
adult are valued more highly than years spent as a young
child or older adults. This weighting system reflects societie's 7. Indicators of social and mental health
interest in productivity and receiving a return on its As long as valid positive indicators of social and mental
investment in upbringing of the children. The effects of the health are scarce, it is necessary to use indirect measures,
interplay between life expettancy and years lost, viz. indicators of social and mental pathology. These include
discounting, and social weighting are complex, depending suicide, homicide, other acts of violence and other crime;
on the severity and duration of illness. road traffic accidents, juvenile delinquency; alcohol and
4. Nutritional status indicators drug abuse; smoking; consumption of tranquillizers; obesity,
etc (57). To these may be added family violence, battered-
Nutritional status is a positive health indicator. Three baby and battered-wife syndromes and neglected and
nutritional status indicators are considered important as abandoned youth in the neighbourhood. These social
indicators of health status. They are (57) : indicators provide a guide to social action for improving the
a. anthropometric measurements of preschool health of the people.
children, e.g., weight and height, mid-arm
circumference; 8. Environmental indicators
b. heights (and sometimes weights) of children at Environmental indicators reflect the quality of physical
school entry; and and biological environment in which diseases occur and in
c. prevalence of low birth weight {less than 2.5 kg). which the people live. They include indicators relating to
INDICATORS OF HEALTH 27
pollution of air and water, radiation, solid wastes, noise, performance" (64) include calorie consumption; access to
exposure to toxic substances in food or drink. Among these, water; life expectancy; deaths due to disease; illiteracy,
the most useful indicators are those measuring the doctors and nurses per population; rooms per person;
proportion of population having access to safe water and GNP per capita.
sanitation facilities, as for example, percentage of (c) "Health for All" indicators : For monitoring progress
households with safe water in the home or within 15 towards the goal of Health for All by 2000 AD, the WHO has
minutes' walking distance from a water standpoint or listed the following four categories of indicators (Table 2).
protected well; adequate sanitary facilities in the home or
immediate vicinity (57). TABLE 2
Indicators selected for monitoring progress
9. Socio-economic indicators towards "Health for All"
These indicators do not directly measure health.
Nevertheless, they are of great importance in the (l)Health policy indicators:
interpretation of the indicators of health care. These - political commitment to "Health for All"
include: - resource allocation
a. rate of population increase - the degree of equity of distribution of health services
- community involvement
b. per capita GNP - organizational framework and managerial process
c. level of unemployment
d. dependency ratio (2) Social and economic indicators related to health:
e. literacy rates, especially female literacy rates - rate of population increase
- GNPorGDP
f. family size - income distribution
g. housing: the number of persons per room, and work conditions
h. per capita "calorie" availability. - adult literacy rate
- housing
10. Health policy indicators - food availability
The single most important indicator of political (3) Indicators for the provision of health care:
commitment is "allocation of adequate resources". The availability
relevant indicators are: (i) proportion of GNP spent on - accessibility
health services (ii) proportion of GNP spent on health- - utilization
related activities (including water supply and sanitation, quality of care
housing and nutrition, community development), and (4) Health status indicators:
(iii) proportion of total health resources devoted to primary low birth weight (percentage)
health care. - nutritional status and psychosocial development of
children
11. Indicators of quality of life infant mortality rate
Increasingly, mortality and morbidity data have been child mortality rate (1-4 years)
life expectancy at birth
questioned as to whether they fully reflect the health status
maternal mortality rate
of a population. The previous emphasis on using increased disease specific mortality
life expectancy as an indicator of health is no longer morbidity - incidence and prevalence
considered adequate, especially in developed countries, and disability prevalence
attention has shifted more towards concern about the
quality of life enjoyed by individuals and communities. Source : (57)
Quality of life is difficult to define and even more difficult to
measure (see page 16). Various attempts have been made to (d) Millennium Development Goal Indicators : The
reach one composite index from a number of health Millennium Development Goals adopted by the United
indicators. The physical quality of life index is one such Nations in the year 2000 provide an opportunity for
index (see page 17). It consolidates three indicators, viz. concerted action to improve global health. The health
infant mortality, life expectancy at age one, and literacy. related goals and their indicators of progress are listed in
Obviously more work is needed to develop indicators of Table 3.
quality of life.
The search for indicators associated with or casually
12. Other indicators series related to health continues. It will be seen from the above
that there is no single comprehensive indicator of a nation's
(a) Social indicators : Social indicators, as defined by the health. Each available indicator reflects an aspect of health.
United Nations Statistical Office, have been divided into The ideal index which combines the effect of a number of
12 categories:- population; family formation, families and components measured independently is yet to be
households; learning and educational services; earning developed. While the search for a single global index of
activities; distribution of income, consumption, and health status continues, the use of multiple indicators
accumulation; social security and welfare services; health arranged in profiles or patterns should make comparisons
services and nutrition; housing and its environment; public between areas, regions and nations possible (66). In the last
order and safety; time use; leisure and culture; social few decades, attention has shifted from reliance on
stratification and mobility (63). economic performance (e.g., GNP or GDP) towards other
(b) Basic needs indicators : Basic needs indicators are ways of measuring a society's performance arid quality of
used by ILO. Those mentioned in "Basic needs life.
28 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
(b) Secondary health care : At this level, more between the rich and poor, urban and rural population, both
complex problems are dealt with. This care comprises between and within countries. The essential principle of
essentially curative services and is provided by the district "HFA" is the concept of "equity in health", that is, all people
hospitals and community health centres. This level serves as should have an opportunity to enjoy good health.
the first referral level in the health system.
Primary health care
(c) Tertiary health care : This level offers super-
specialist care. This care is provided by the regional/central The concept of primary health care came into lime-light
level institutions. These institutions provide not only highly in 1978 following an international conference in Alma-Ata,
specialized care, but also planning and managerial skills and USSR. It has been defined as:
teaching for specialized staff. In addition, the tertiary level "Essential health care based on practical, scientifically sound
supports and complements the actions carried out at the and socially acceptable methods and technology made
primary level. universally accessible to individuals and families in the
community through their full participation and at a cost that
Health team concept the community and the country can afford to maintain at
every stage of their development fn the spirit of se/f-
It is recognized that the physician of today is overworked determination"
professionally. It is also recognized that many of the
functions of the physician can be performed by auxiliaries, The primary health care approach is based on principles
given suitable training. An auxiliary worker has been of social equity, nation-wide coverage, self-reliance,
defined as one "who has less than full professional intersectoral coordination, and people's involvement in the
qualifications in a particular field and is supervised by a planning and implementation of health programmes in
professional worker". The WHO no longer uses the term pursuit of common health goals. This approach has been
"paramedical" for the various health professions allied with described as "Health by the people" and "placing people's
medicine (53). health in people's hands". Primary health care was accepted
by the member countries of WHO as the key to achieving
The practice of modern medicine has become a joint the goal of HFA by the year 2000 AD.
effort of many groups of workers, both medical and non-
medical, viz. physicians, nurses, social workers, health The Declaration of Alma~Ata (6) stated that primary
assistants, trained dais, village health guides and a host of health care includes at least:
others. The composition of the team varies. The hospital education about prevailing health problems and
team is different from the team that works in the community. methods of preventing and controlling them;
Whether it is a hospital team or community health work promotion of food supply and proper nutrition;
team, it is important for each team member to have a
- an adequate supply of safe water and basic sanitation;
specific and recognized function in the team and to have
freedom to exercise his or her particular skills. In this - maternal and child health care, including family
context, a health team has been defined as "a group of planning;
persons who share a common health goal and common immunization against infectious diseases;
objectives, determined by community needs and towards prevention and control of endemic diseases;
the achievement of which each member of the team appropriate treatment of common diseases and
contributes in accordance with her/his competence and injuries; and
skills, and respecting the functions of the other" (71). The
auxiliary is an essential member of the team. The team must - provision of essential drugs.
have a leader. The leader should be able to evaluate the The concept of primary health care involves a concerted
team adequately and should know the motivations of each effort to provide the rural population of developing
member in order to stimulate and enhance their countries with at least the bare minimum of health services.
potentialities. The health team concept has taken a firm root The list can be modified to fit local circumstances. For
in the delivery of health services both in the developed and example, some countries have specifically included mental
developing countries. The health team approach aims to health, physical handicaps, and the health and social care of
produce the right "mix" of health personnel for providing the elderly. The primary health care approach integrates at
full health coverage of the entire population. The mere the community level all the factors required for improving
presence of a variety of health professionals is not sufficient the health status of the population. As a signatory to the
to establish teamwork; it is the proper division and Alma-Ata Declaration, the Government of India, has
combination of their operations from which the benefits of pledged itself to provide primary health care. Obstacles to
divided labour will be derived (72). the implementation of primary health care in India include
shortage of health manpower, entrenchment of a curative
Health for All culture within the existing health system, and a high
After three decades of trial and error and dissatisfaction concentration of health services and health personnel in
in meeting people's basic health needs, the World Health urban areas (49).
Assembly, in May 1977, decided that the main social goal of
governments and WHO in the coming years should be the Health promotion (73)
"attainment by all the people of the world by the year 2000 The first international conference on health promotion
AD of a level of health that will permit them to lead a was held in Ottawa in November 1986, primarily in
socially and economically productive life". This goal has response to growing expectation for a new public health
come to be popularly known as "Health for All by the year movement around the world. It was built on progress made
2ti"{)" (HFA). The background to this "new" philosophy was through Declaration on Primary Health Care at Alma-Ata,
the growing concern about the unacceptably low levels of and the debate at the World Health Assembly on
heaith status of the majority of the world's population intersectoral action for health. The conference resulted in
especially the rural poor and the gross disparities in health proclamation of the Ottawa Charter for Health
~-------····------- ----------------------~··--.-·----··---···---···-------·-·····.
HEALTH SERVICE PHILOSOPHIES
Millennium Development Goals The concept of HSR is holistic and multidisciplinary. The
In the Millennium Declaration of September 2000, prime purpose of HSR is to improve the health of the people
Member States of the United Nations made a most through improvement not only of conventional health
passionate committment to address the crippling poverty services but also of other services that have a bearing on
and multiplying misery that grip many areas of the world. health. HSR is essential for the continuous evolution and
Governments had set a date of 2015 by which they would refinement of health services (76).
meet the Millennium Development Goals: eradicate extreme
poverty and hunger, achieve universal primary education, CONCEPT OF DISEASE
promote gender equality and empower women, reduce child
mortality, improve maternal health, combat HIV/AIDS, There have been many attempts to define disease.
malaria and other diseases, ensure environmental Webster defines disease as "a condition in which body
sustainability and develop a global partnership for health is impaired, a departure from a state of health, an
alteration of the human body interrupting the performance
development.
of vital functions". The Oxford English Dictionary defines
Health policy disease as "a condition of the body or some part or organ of
the body in which its functions are disrupted or deranged".
Policies are general statements based on human From an ecological point of view, disease is defined as "a
aspirations, set of values, commitments, assessment of maladjustment of the human organism to the environment"
current situation and an image of a desired future situation (79). From a sociological point of view, disease is
(53). A national health policy is an expression of goals for considered a social phenomenon; occurring in all societies
improving the health situation, the priorities among these (80) and defined and fought in terms of the particular
goals, and the main directions for attaining them (74). cultural forces prevalent in the society. The simplest
Health policy is often defined at the national level. definition is, of course, that disease is just the opposite of
Each country will have to develop a health policy of its health - i.e., any deviation from normal functioning or state
own aimed at defined goals, for improving the people's of complete physical or mental well-being - since health and
health, in the light of its own problems, particular disease are mutually exclusive. These definitions are
circumstances, social and economic structures, and political considered inadequate because they do not give a criterion
and administrative mechanisms. Among the crucial factors by which to decide when a disease state begins, nor do they
affecting realization of these goals are: a political lend themselves to measurement of disease.
commitment; financial implications; administrative reforms; The WHO has defined health but not disease. This is
community participation and basic legislation (75). because disease has many shades ("spectrum of disease")
A landmark in the development of health policy was the ranging from inapparent (subclinical) cases to severe
worldwide adoption of the goal of HFA by 2000 A.O. A manifest illness. Some diseases commence acutely (e.g.,
further landmark was the Alma-Ata Declaration (1978) food poisoning), and some insidiously (e.g., mental illness,
calling on all governments to develop and implement rheumatoid arthritis). In some diseases, a "carrier" state
primary health care strategies to attain the target of "HFA'.' occurs in which the individual remains outwardly healthy,
by 2000 A.O. and more recently, Millennium Development and is able to infect others (e.g., typhoid fever). In some
Goals. instances, the same organism may cause more than one
clinical manifestation (e.g., streptococcus). In some cases,
Health services research the same disease may be caused by more than one organism
(e.g., diarrhoea). Some diseases have a short course, and
Health research has several ramifications. It may include some a prolonged course. It is easy to determine illness
(a) Biomedical research, to elucidate outstanding health when the signs and symptoms are manifest, but in many
problems and develop new or better ways of dealing with diseases the border line between normal and abnormal is
them; (b) Intersectoral research, for which relationships indistinct as in the case of diabetes, hypertension and
would have to be established with the institutions concerned mental illness. The end-point or final outcome of disease is
with the other sectors, and (c) Health services research variable - recovery, disability or death of the host.
or health practice research (now called "health systems
research"). Distinction is also made between the words disease,
illness and sickness which are not wholly synonymous. The
The concept of health services research (HSR) was term "disease" literally means "without ease" (uneasiness) -
developed during 1981-1982. It has been defined as "the disease, the opposite of ease - when something is wrong
systematic study of the means by which biomedical and other with bodily function. "Illness" refers not only to the presence
relevant knowledge is brought to bear on the health of a specific disease, but also to the individual's perceptions
of individuals and communities under a given set of and behaviour in response to the disease, as well as the
conditions" (76). HSR is wide in scope. It deals with all aspects impact of that disease on the psychosocial environment
of management of health services, viz. prioritization of health (81). "Sickness" refers to a state of social dysfunction.
problems, planning, management, logistics and delivery of Susser (82) has suggested the following usage:
health care services. It deals with such topics as manpower, Disease is a physiological/psychological dysfunction;
organization, the utilization of facilities, the quality of health
care, cost-benefit and cost-effectiveness (77). Illness is a subjective state of the person who feels
aware of not being well;
Thousands of people suffer morbidity, mortality and
disability not because of deficiencies in biomedical Sickness is a state of social dysfunction, i.e., a role
knowledge but as a result of the failure to apply this that the individual assumes when ill ("sickness role").
knowledge effectively. Health services research aims to The clinician sees people who are ill rather than the
correct this failure (78). diseases which he must diagnose and treat (83). However, it
-------------------·-~-·----------
33
is possible to be victim of disease without feeling ill, and to focus on different classes of factors, especially with regard to
be ill without signs of physical impairment. In short, an infectious diseases (84).
adequate definition of disease is yet to be found a
definition that is satisfactory or acceptable to the (59)
epidemiologist, clinician, sociologist and the statistician. The traditional triangle of epidemiology is shown in
Figure 5. This triangle is based on the communicable disease
CONCEPT Of CAUSATION model and is useful in showing the interaction and
interdependence of agent, host, environment, and time as
Upto the time of Louis Pasteur (1922-1895), various used in the investigation of diseases and epidemics. The
concepts of disease causation were in vogue, e.g., the agent is the cause of disease; the host is an organism,
supernatural theory of disease, the theory of humors, the usually a human or an animal, that harbours the disease, the
concept of contagion, miasmatic theory of disease, the environment is those surroundings and conditions external
theory of spontaneous generation, etc. Discoveries in to the human or animal that cause or allow disease
microbiology marked a turning point in our aetiological transmission; and time accounts for incubation periods, life
concepts. expectancy of the host or the pathogen, and duration of the
course of illness or condition.
Germ theory of disease Agents of infectious diseases include bacteria, viruses,
Mention has already been made about the germ theory of parasites, fungi, and molds. With regard to non-infectious
disease in chapter 1. This concept gained momentum during disease, disability, injury, or death, agents can include
the 19th and the early part of 20th century. The emphasis chemicals from dietary foods, tobacco smoke, solvents,
had shifted from empirical causes (e.g., bad air) to microbes radiation or heat, nutritional deficiencies, or other
as the sole cause of disease. The concept of cause embodied substances, such as poison. One or several agents may
in the germ theory of disease is generally referred to as a contribute to an illness.
one-to-one relationship between causal agent and disease. A host offers subsistence and lodging for a pathogen and
The disease model accordingly is : may or may not develop the disease. The level of immunity,
Disease agent -7 Man -7 Disease genetic makeup, level of exposure, state of health, and
The germ theory of disease, though it was a revolutionary overall fitness of the host can determine the effect a disease
concept, led many epidemiologists to take one-sided view organism will have on it. The makeup of the host and the
of disease causation. That is, they could not think beyond ability of the pathogen to accept the new environment can
the germ theory of disease. It is now recognized that a also be a determining factor because some pathogens thrive
disease is rarely caused by a single agent alone, but rather only under limited ideal conditions. For example, many
depends upon a number of factors which contribute to its infectious disease agents can exist only in a limited
occurrence. Therefore, modern medicine has moved away temperature range.
from the strict adherence to the germ theory of disease. Environmental factors can include the biological aspects
as well as social, cultural, and physical aspects of the
Epidemiological triad environment. The surroundings in which a pathogen lives
The germ theory of disease has many limitations. For and the effect the surroundings have on it are a part of the
example, it is well-known, that not everyone exposed to environment. Environment can be within a host or external
tuberculosis develops tuberculosis. The same exposure, to it in the community. Finally, time includes severity of
however, in an undernourished or otherwise susceptible illness in relation to how long a person is infected or until the
person may result in clinical disease. Similarly, not everyone condition causes death or passes the threshold of danger
exposed to beta-haemolytic streptococci develops acute towards recovery. Delays in time from infection to when
rheumatic fever. There are other factors relating to the host symptoms develop, duration of illness, and threshold of an
and environment which are equally important to determine epidemic in a population are time elements with which the
whether or not disease will occur in the exposed host. This epidemiologist is concerned.
demanded a broader concept of disease causation that (Environment)
synthesized the basic factors of agent, host and environment
(Fig. 4).
Environment
FIG.5
The Triangle of Epidemiology
Agent Host Source : (59)
FIG. 4
Epidemiological triad
The primary mission of epidemiology is to provide
information that results in breaking one of the legs of the
The above model - agent, host and environment - has triangle, thereby disrupting the connection among
been in use for many years. It helped epidemiologists to environment, host, and agent, and stopping the outbreak.
34 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
?"t'~
Abundance Lack of Smoking
·------r"" Emotional
1
of food physical
~"''" 1 ;:~nf~~:,
disturbances .
Obesity Hypertension
1
Hyperlipidaemia
Increased catacholamines
thrombotic tendency
j
Changes in wa!ls of arteries
1---------+
Coronary atherosclerosis
Coronary occlusion
J.
Myocardial ischaemia
J.
Myocardial infarction
FIG. 7
Web of casuation for myocardial infarction
' ' .
PERIOD OF PRE-PATHOGENESIS
DISEASE PROCESS -t Before man is involved -t
.
PERIOD OF PATHOGENESIS
-t The course of the disease in man -t
.
Agent Host I DEATH
Chronic state
v And
Environmental Factors
Clinical horizon
Defect
Disability
Illness
Signs & symptoms
MODES OF
INTERVENTION
HEALTH
PROMOTION
SPECIFIC EARLY DIAGNOSIS
PROTECTION AND TREATMENT
DISABILITY
LIMITATION
IREHABILITATION
FIG. 8
Natural history of disease
(From Preventive Medicine for the Doctor in His Community, by Leavell & Clark with permission of McGraw-Hill Book Co.)
CONCEP-;' HEALTH P1ND DISEt~SE
36
there is no manifest disease. The pathological changes are
essentially below the level of the "clinical horizon". The
This refers to the period preliminary to the onset of
clinical stage begins when recognizable signs or symptoms
disease in man. The disease agent has not yet entered man,
appear. By the time signs and symptoms appear, the disease
but the factors which favour its interaction with the human
phase is already well advanced into the late pathogenesis
host are already existing in the environment. This situation is phase. In many chronic diseases, the agent-host-
frequently referred to as "man in the midst of disease" or environmental interactions are not yet well understood.
"man exposed to the risk of disease". Potentially we are all
in the prepathogenesis phase of many diseases, both
communicable and non-communicable.
The first link in the chain of disease transmission is a
The causative factors of disease may be classified as disease agent. The disease "agent" is defined as a
AGENT, HOST and ENVIRONMENT. These three factors are substance, living or non-living, or a force, tangible or
referred to as epidemiological triad. The mere presence intangible, the excessive presence or relative lack of which
of agent, host and favourable environmental factors in the may initiate or perpetuate a disease process. A disease may
prepathogenesis period is not sufficient to start the disease have a single agent, a number of independent alternative
in man. What is required is an interaction of these three agents or a complex of two or more factors whose combined
factors to initiate the disease process in man. The agent, presence is essential for the development of the disease (31).
host and environment operating in combination determine
not only the onset of disease which may range from a single Disease agents may be classified broadly into the
case to epidemics (as depicted in Fig. 9's black area) but following groups :
also the distribution of disease in the community. 1. Biological agents
These are living agents of disease, viz, viruses, rickettsiae,
fungi, bacteria, protozoa and metazoa. These agents exhibit
certain "host-related" biological properties such as:
(i) infectivity: this is the ability of an infectious agent to
invade and multiply (produce infection) in a host;
(ii) pathogenicity: this is the ability to induce clinically
apparent illness, and (iii) virulence: this is defined as the
proportion of clinical cases resulting in severe clinical
manifestations (including sequelae). The case fatality rate is
one way of measuring virulence (84).
2. Nutrient agents
These are proteins, fats, carbohydrates, vitamins,
minerals and water. Any excess or deficiency of the intake of
nutritive elements may result in nutritional disorders. Protein
energy malnutrition (PEM), anaemia, goitre, obesity and
vitamin deficiencies are some of the current nutritional
problems in many countries.
FIG. 9
Epidemiologic concept of interactions of 3. Physical agents
Agent, Host and Environment Exposure to excessive heat, cold, humidity, pressure,
(Adapted from Health Services Reports, Vol. 87, page 672) radiation, electricity, sound, etc may result in illness.
2. l)J'h<'l.§£ 4. Chemical agents
The pathogenesis phase begins with the entry of the (i) Endogenous: Some of the chemicals may be produced
disease "agent" in the susceptible human host. The further in the body as a result of derangement of function, e.g., urea
events in the pathogenesis phase are clear-cut in infectious (ureamia), serum bilirubin (jaundice), ketones (ketosis), uric
diseases, i.e., the disease agent multiplies and induces tissue acid (gout), calcium carbonate (kidney stones), etc.
and physiological changes, the disease progresses through a (ii) Exogenous: Agents arising outside of human host,
period of incubation and later through early and late e.g., allergens, metals, fumes, dust, gases, insecticides, etc.
pathogenesis. The final outcome of the disease may be These may be acquired by inhalation, ingestion or
recovery, disability or death. The pathogenesis phase may inoculation.
be modified by intervention measures such as immunization
and chemotherapy. 5. Mechanical agents
It is useful to remember at this stage that the host's Exposure to chronic friction and other mechanical forces
reaction to infection with a disease agent is not predictable. may result in crushing, tearing, sprains, dislocations and
That is, the infection may be clinical or subclinical; typical or even death.
atypical or the host may become a carrier with or without
having developed clinical disease as in the case of 6. Absence or insufficiency or excess of a factor
diphtheria and hepatitis B. necessary to health
In chronic diseases (e.g., coronary heart disease, These may be (i) Chemical factors: e.g., hormones (insulin,
hypertension, cancer), the early pathogenesis phase is less oestrogens, enzymes) (ii) Nutrient factors: given under no. (2)
dramatic. This phase in chronic diseases is referred to as above (iii) Lack of structure: e.g., thymus (iv) Lack of part of
presymptomatic phase. During the presymptomatic stage, structure, e.g., cardiac defects (v) Chromosomal factors, e.g.,
Psychosocial factors can also affeet negatively man's they are observable or identifiable prior to the event they
health and well-being. For example, poverty, urbanization, predict. It is also recognized that combination of risk factors
migration and exposure to stressful situations such as in the same individual may be purely additive or synergistic
bereavement, desertion, loss of employment, birth of a (multiplicative). For example, smoking and occupational
handicapped child may produce feelings of anxiety, exposure (shoe, leather, rubber, dye and chemical
depression, anger, frustration, and so forth; and these industries) were found to have an additive effect as risk
feelings may be accompanied by physical symptoms such as factors for bladder cancer (85). On the other hand, smoking
headache, palpitation and sweating. But these emotional was found to be synergistic with other risk factors such as
states also produce changes in the endocrine, autonomic hypertension and high blood cholesterol (90). That is, the
and motor systems, which, if prolonged and in interaction effects are more than additive.
with genetic and personality factors, may lead to structural Risk factors may be truly causative (e.g., smoking for lung
changes in various bodily organs. The resulting cancer); they may be merely contributory to the undesired
psychosomatic disorders include conditions such as outcome (e.g., lack of physical exercise is a risk factor for
duodenal ulcer, bronchial asthma, hypertension, coronary coronary heart disease), or they may be predictive only in a
heart disease, mental disorders and socially deviant statistical sense (e.g., illiteracy for perinatal mortality).
behaviour (e.g., suicide, crime, violence, drug abuse). Of
Some risk factors can be modified; others cannot be
primary concern is coronary heart disease which may be
modified. The modifiable factors include smoking,
related to lifestyle and psychosocial stress. In many
hypertension, elevated serum cholesterol, physical activity,
countries, road accidents are now the principal cause of
obesity, etc. They are amenable to intervention and are
death in young people. rt is related to psychosocial states
useful in the care of the individual. The unmodifiable or
such as boredom, anxiety, frustration and other pre-
immutable risk factors such as age, sex, race, family history
occupations that can impair attention. and genetic factors are not subject to change. They act more
Man today is viewed as an "agent" of his own diseases; as signals in alerting health professionals and other
his state of health is determined more by what he does to personnel to the possible outcome (91).
himself than what some outside germ or infectious agent Risk factors may characterize the individual, the family,
does to him. For example, the medical cause of lung cancer the group, the community or the environment. For example,
may be a chemical substance in cigarettes, but the some of the individual risk factors include age, sex, smoking,
psychosocial cause is behaviour - smoking. From a hypertension, etc. But there are also collective community
psychosocial point of view, disease may be viewed as a risks for example, from the presence of malaria, from air
maladjustment of the human organism to his psychosocial pollution, from substandard housing, or a poor water supply
environment resulting from misperception, misinterpretation or poor health care services. The degree of risk in these
and misbehaviour (88). The epidemiologists today are as cases is indirectly an expression of need. Therefore it is
much concerned with psychosocial environment, as with stated that a risk factor is a proxy for need - indicating the
physical or biological environment, in search for aetiological need for promotive and preventive health services.
causes of disease.
Epidemiological methods (e.g., case control and cohort
Because of the fact that man exists concurrently in so studies) are needed to identify risk factors and estimate the
many environmental contexts, it has become customary to degree of risk. These studies are carried out in population
speak of man in his "total environment". The social groups among whom certain diseases occur much more
environment is so inextricably linked with the physical and frequently than other groups. By such comparative studies,
biological environments that it is realistic and necessary to epidemiologists have been able to identify smoking as a risk
view the human environment in toto to promote health. A for lung cancer; high serum cholesterol and high blood
stable and harmonious equilibrium between man and his pressure as risk factors for coronary heart disease. The
environment is needed to reduce man's vulnerability to contribution of epidemiology in the identification of risk
disease and to permit him to lead a more productive and factors has been highly significant. Risk factors associated
satisfying life. with some major disease groups are as shown in Table 5.
Risk factors TABLE 5
For many diseases, the disease "agent" is still Prominent risk factors
unidentified, e.g. coronary heart disease, cancer, peptic
ulcer, mental illness, etc. Where the disease agent is not Disease Risk factors
firmly established, the aetiology is generally discussed in
terms of "risk factors". Heart disease Smoking, high blood pressure, elevated
serum cholesterol, diabetes, obesity,
The term "risk factor" is used by different authors with at lack of exercise, type A personality
least two meanings (31): Cancer Smoking, alcohol, solar radiation,
a. an attribute or exposure that is significantly associated ionizing radiation, work-site hazards,
with the development of a disease (89); environmental pollution, medications,
infectious agents, dietary factors
b. a determinant that can be modified by intervention,
thereby reducing the possibility of occurrence of Stroke High blood pressure, elevated
cholesterol, smoking
disease or other specified outcomes (31);
Motor vehicle accidents Alcohol, non-use of seat belts, speed,
Risk factors are often suggestive, but absolute proof of automobile design, roadway design
cause and effect between a risk factor and disease is usually Diabetes Obesity, diet
lacking. That is, the presence of a risk factor does not imply
Cirrhosis of liver Alcohol
that the disease will occur, and in its absence, the disease
will not occur. The important thing about risk factors is that Source : (92)
Control activities may focus on primary prevention or or of the extent to which patients comply with or adhere to
secondary prevention, most control programmes combine advice from health professionals.
the two. The concept of tertiary prevention is comparatively In management, monitoring refers to "the continuous
less relevant to control efforts. oversight of activities to ensure that they are proceeding
In disease control, the disease "agent" is permitted to according to plan. It keeps track of achievements, staff
persist in the community at a level where it ceases to be a movements and utilization, supplies and equipment, and the
public health problem according to the tolerance of the local money spent in relation to the resources available so that if
population. A state of equilibrium becomes established anything goes wrong, immediate corrective measures can be
between the disease agent, host and environment taken" (53).
components of the disease process. An excellent
embodiment of this concept is malaria control, which is ii) Surveillance
distinct from malaria eradication. Surveillance is defined in many ways. According to one
interpretation, surveillance means to watch over with great
attention, authority and often with suspicion (95). According
Between control and eradication, an intermediate goal to another, surveillance is defined as "the continuous scrutiny
has been described, called "regional elimination" (97). The of the factors that determine the occurrence and distribution
term "elimination" is used to describe interruption of of disease and other conditions of ill-health" (100).
transmission of disease, as for example, elimination of Surveillance programmes can assume any character and
measles, polio and diphtheria from large geographic regions dimension th us we have epidemiological surveillance (101),
or areas (31). Regional elimination is now seen as an demographic surveillance, nutritional surveillance (102), etc.
important precursor of eradication (97). The main objectives of surveillance are: (a) to provide
information about new and changing trends in the health
status of a population, e.g., morbidity, mortality, nutritional
Eradication literally means to "tear out by roots". status or other indicators and environmental hazards, health
Eradication of disease implies termination of all transmission practices and other factors that may affect health (103);
of infection by extermination of the infectious agent (31). As (b) to provide feed-back which may be expected to modify
the name implies, eradication is an absolute process, and the policy and the system itself and lead to redefinition of
not a relative goal. It is "all or none phenomenon". The objectives, and (c) provide timely warning of public health
word eradication is reserved to cessation of infection and disasters so that interventions can be mobilized.
disease from the whole world (97).
According to the above definitions, monitoring becomes
Today, smallpox is the only disease that has been one specific and essential part of the broader concept
eradicated globally. Every disease like every human being is embraced by surveillance. Monitoring requires careful
unique with its own epidemiological characteristics and planning and the use of standardized procedures and
specific strategies for control. methods of data collection, and can then be carried out over
During recent years, three diseases have been seriously extended periods of time by technicians and automated
advanced as candidates for global eradication within the instrumentation. Surveillance, in contrast, requires
foreseeable future: polio, measles and dracunculiasis. The professional analysis and sophisticated judgement of data
feasibility of eradicating polio appears to be greater than leading to recommendations for control activities.
that of others and the goal is in sight.
Sentinel suJrveillance
Experience gained from eradication programmes (e.g.,
malaria, yaws) has shown that once the morbidity of a No routine notification system can identify all cases of
disease reaches a very low level, a "residual" infection infection or disease. A method for identifying the missing
usually persists in the population leading to a state of cases and thereby supplementing the notified cases is
equilibrium between the agent, host and environmental required. This is known as "sentinel surveillance." The
components of the disease process. In this situation, there sentinel data is extrapolated to the entire population to
are always hidden foci of infection, unrecognized methods estimate the disease prevalence in the total population. The
of transmission, resistance of the vector or organism, all of advantages of such a system are that the reporting biases are
which may again flare up when the agent-host-environment minimized, and feed-back of information to the providers is
equilibrium is disturbed (98). Failure to understand this led simplified.
to disappointment in the eradication programmes mounted Sentinel surveillance agencies could be interested and
against malaria, yaws, plague, kala-azar and yellow fever. competent physicians (or institutions) in selected areas to
report the cases of disease in their areas. This system would
provide more valuable and detailed information than could
According to standard dictionaries, the words monitoring be obtained from the traditional notification system (104).
and surveillance are almost synonymous. But in public Finally, these sentinel sites could be developed into a
health practice they have taken on rather specific and notification system for providing more detailed information,
somewhat different meanings (99): which, in some settings, may be less costly than developing
and maintaining an ongoing notification system.
i) Monitoring
Monitoring is "the performance and analysis of routine Evah.rntion of control
measurements aimed at detecting changes in the Evaluation is the process by which results are compared
environment or health status of population" (31). Thus we with the intended objectives, or more simply the assessment
have monitoring of air pollution, water quality, growth and of how well a programme is performing. Evaluation should
nutritional status, etc. It also refers to on-going measurement always be considered during the planning and
of performance of a health service or a health professional, implementation stages of a programme or activity.
CONCEPTS OF PREVENTION 41
Evaluation may be crucial in identifying the health benefits to the onset of disease, which removes the possibility that a
derived (impact on morbidity, mortality, sequelae, patient disease will ever occur". It signifies intervention in the
satisfaction). Evaluation can be useful in identifying pre-pathogenesis phase of a disease or health problem (e.g.,
performance difficulties. Evaluation studies may also be low birth weight) or other departure from health. Primary
carried out to generate information for other purposes, e.g., prevention may be accomplished by measures designed to
to attract attention to a problem, extension of control promote general health and well-being, and quality of life of
activities, training and patient management, etc. The people or by specific protective measures. These are
principles of evaluation are discussed in chapter 20. discussed in detail elsewhere under "Mode of Intervention".
Primary prevention is far more than averting the
CONCEPTS OF PREVENTION occurrence of a disease and prolonging life. It includes the
The goals of medicine are to promote health, to preserve concept of "positive health", a concept that encourages
health, to restore health when it is impaired, and to minimize achievement and maintenance of "an acceptable level of
suffering and distress. These goals are embodied in the word health that will enable every individual to lead a socially and
"prevention" (31). Successful prevention depends upon a economically productive life". It concerns an individual's
knowledge of causation, dynamics of transmission, attitude towards life and health and the initiative he takes
identification of risk factors and risk groups, availability of about positive and responsible measures for himself, his
prophylactic or early detection and treatment measures, an family and his community.
organization for applying these measures to appropriate The concept of primary prevention is now being applied
persons or groups, and continuous evaluation of and to the prevention of chronic diseases such as coronary heart
development of procedures applied (105). disease, hypertension and cancer based on elimination or
It is not necessary (although desirable) to know modification of "risk-factors" of disease. The WHO has
everything about the natural history of a disease to initiate recommended the following approaches for the primary
preventive measures. Often times, removal or elimination of prevention of chronic diseases where the risk factors are
a single known essential cause may be sufficient to prevent a established (106) :
disease. The objective of preventive medicine is to intercept a. population (mass) strategy
or oppose the "cause" and thereby the disease process. This b. high-risk strategy
epidemiological concept permits the inclusion of treatment
as one of the modes of intervention (87). a. Population (mass) strategy
Levels of prevention Another preventive approach is "population strategy"
which is directed at the whole population irrespective of
In modern day, the concept of prevention has become
individual risk levels. For example, studies have shown that
broad-based. It has become customary to define prevention even a small reduction in the average blood pressure or
in terms of four level: serum cholesterol of a population would produce a large
1. primordial prevention reduction in the incidence of cardiovascular disease (107).
2. primary prevention The population approach is directed towards socio-
3. secondary prevention economic, behavioural and lifestyle changes (107).
4. tertiary prevention b. High-risk strategy
These levels of prevention are shown in Fig.10 in relation
The high-risk strategy aims to bring preventive care to
to the natural history of disease. Authorities on preventive
individuals at special risk. This requires detection of
medicine do not agree on the precise boundaries between
these levels, but that does not minimize their importance. For individuals at high risk by the optimum use of clinical
example, the supply of food supplements to a family could be methods.
primary prevention for some members, and secondary Primary prevention is a desirable goal. It is worthwhile to
prevention (curative) for others. These differences of opinion recall the fact that the industrialized countries succeeded in
are more semantic than substantive (31). A general discussion eliminating a number of communicable diseases like
of these concepts is given below: cholera, typhoid and dysentery and controlling several
others like plague, leprosy and tuberculosis, not by medical
1. Primordial prevention interventions but mainly by raising the standard of living
Primordial prevention, a new concept, is receiving special (primary prevention). And much of this success came even
attention in the prevention of chronic diseases. This is before immunization became universal routine. The
primary prevention in its purest sense, that is, prevention of application of primary prevention to the prevention of
the emergence or development of risk factors in countries or chronic disease is a recent development. To have an impact
population groups in which they have not yet appeared. For on the population, all the above three approaches
example, many adult health problems (e.g., obesity, (primordial prevention, population strategy and high-risk
hypertension) have their early origins in childhood, because strategy) should be implemented as they are usually
this is the time when lifestyles are formed (for example, complementary.
smoking, eating patterns, physical exercise). In primordial In summary, primary prevention is a "holistic" approach.
prevention, efforts are directed towards discouraging It relies on measures designed to promote health or to
children from adopting harmful lifestyles. The main protect against specific disease "agents" and hazards in the
intervention in primordial prevention is through individual environment. It utilizes knowledge of the prepathogenesis
and mass education. phase of disease, embracing the agent, host and
environment. Fundamental public health measures and
2. Primary prevention activities such as sanitation; infection control; immunization;
Primary prevention can be defined as "action taken prior protection of food, milk, and water supplies; environmental
42 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
protection; and protection against occupational hazards and health, happiness and useful longevity will be achieved at far
accidents are all basic to primary prevention. Basic personal less expense with less suffering through primary prevention
hygiene and public health measures have had a major than through secondary prevention (109).
impact on halting communicable disease epidemics.
Immunization, infection control (eg, hand washing), 4. Tertiary prevention
refrigeration of foods, garbage collection, solid and liquid When the disease process has advanced beyond its early
waste management, water supply protection and treatment, stages, it is still possible to accomplish prevention by what
and general sanitation have reduced infectious disease might be called "tertiary prevention" (87). It signifies
threats to populations. The safety and low cost of primary intervention in the late pathogenesis phase. Tertiary
prevention justifies its wider application. Primary prevention prevention can be defined as "all measures available to
has become increasingly identified with "health education" reduce or limit impairments and disabilities, minimize
and the concept of individual and community responsibility suffering caused by existing departures from good health
for health (108). and to promote the patient's adjustment to irremediable
conditions" (31). For example, treatment, even if
3. Secondary prevention undertaken late in the natural history of disease may prevent
Secondary prevention can be defined as "action which sequelae and limit disability. When defect and disability are
halts the progress of a disease at its incipient stage and more or less stabilized, rehabilitation may play a preventable
prevents complications". The specific interventions are early role. Modern rehabilitation includes psychosocial,
diagnosis {e.g., screening tests, case finding programmes) vocational, and medical components based on team work
and adequate treatment. By early diagnosis and adequate from a variety of professions. Tertiary prevention extends
treatment, secondary prevention attempts to arrest the the concept of prevention into fields of rehabilitation.
disease process; restore health by seeking out unrecognized Table 7 summarizes the levels of prevention.
disease and treating it before irreversible pathological
changes have taken place; and reverse communicability of MODES OF INTERVENTION
infectious diseases. It may also protect others in the
community from acquiring the infection and thus provide, at "Intervention" can be defined as any attempt to intervene
once, secondary prevention for the infected individuals and or interrupt the usual sequence in the development of
primary prevention for their potential contacts (84). disease in man. This may be by the provision of treatment,
education, help or social support. Five modes of
Secondary prevention is largely the domain of clinical
intervention have been described which form a continuum
medicine. The health programmes initiated by governments corresponding to the natural history of any disease. These
are usually at the level of secondary prevention. The levels are related to agent, host and environment and are
drawback of secondary prevention is that the patient has shown in Fig. 9. They are:
already been subject to mental anguish, physical pain; and
the community to loss of productivity. These situations are 1. Health promotion
not encountered in primary prevention. 2. Specific protection
Secondary prevention is an imperfect tool in the control 3. Early diagnosis and treatment
of transmission of disease. It is often more expensive and less 4. Disability limitation
effective than primary prevention. In the long run, human 5. Rehabilitation
TABLE 7
Levels of prevention
Phase of disease Aim Actions Target
Underlying economic, social, Establish and maintain Measures that inhibit the Total population or
and environmental conditions conditions that minimize emergence of environmental, selected groups; achieved
leading to causation hazards to health economic, social and through public health policy
behavioural conditions. and health promotion.
Primary Specific causal factors Reduce the incidence Protection of health by Total population, selected
of disease personal and community groups and individuals at
efforts, such as enhancing high-risk; achieved through
nutritional status, providing public health programmes
immunizations, and eliminating
environmental risks.
Secondary Early stage of disease Reduce the prevalence Measures available to individuals Individuals with established
of disease by shortening and communities for early disease; achieved through
its duration detection and prompt intervention early diagnosis and
to control disease and minimize treatment.
disability (e.g. through
screening programmes).
Tertiary Late stage of disease Reduce the number Measures aimed at softening the Patients; achieved through
(treatment, rehabilitation) and/or impact of impact of long-term disease and rehabilitation.
complications disability; minimizing suffering;
maximizing potential years
of useful life.
Source ; (58)
MODES OF INTERVENTION 43
1. Health promotion specific hazards in the general environment, e.g., air
Health promotion is "the process of enabling people to pollution, noise control (i) control of consumer product
increase control over, and to improve health" (110). It is not quality and safety of foods, drugs, cosmetics, etc.
directed against any particular disease, but is intended to Health protection
strengthen the host through a variety of approaches
(interventions). The well-known interventions in this area are: The term "health protection" which is quite often used, is
not synonymous with specific protection. Health protection
i. health education is defined as "The provision of conditions for normal mental
ii. environmental modifications and physical functioning of the human being individually
iii. nutritional interventions and in the group. It includes the promotion of health, the
iv. lifestyle and behavioural changes prevention of sickness and curative and restorative medicine
in all its aspects" (56). In fact, health protection is conceived
(i) Health education: This is one of the most cost- as an integral part of an overall community development
effective interventions. A large number of diseases could be programme, associated with activities such as literacy
prevented with little or no medical intervention if people campaigns, education and food production (113). Thus
were adequately informed about them and if they were health protection covers a much wider field of health
encouraged to take necessary precautions in time. activities than specific protection.
Recognizing this truth, the WHO's constitution states that
"the extension to all people of the benefits of medical, 3. Early diagnosis and treatment
psychological and related knowledge is essential to the fullest
attainment of health". The targets for educational efforts A WHO Expert Committee (114) defined early detection
may include the general public, patients, priority groups, of health impairment as "the detection of disturbances of
health providers, community leaders and decision-makers. homoeostatic and compensatory mechanism while
biochemical, morphological, and functional changes are still
(ii) Environmental modifications: A comprehensive reversible." Thus, in order to prevent overt disease or
approach to health promotion requires environmental disablement, the criteria of diagnosis should, if possible, be
modifications, such as provision of safe water; installation of based on early biochemical, morphological and functional
sanitary latrines; control of insects and rodents; improvement changes that precede the occurrence of manifest signs and
of housing, etc. The history of medicine has shown that many symptoms. This is of particular importance in chronic
infectious diseases have been successfully controlled in diseases.
western countries through environmental modifications,
even prior to the development of specific vaccines or Early detection and treatment are the main interventions
chemotherapeutic drugs. Environmental interventions are of disease control. The earlier a disease is diagnosed and
non-clinical and do not involve the physician. treated the better it is from the point of view of prognosis and
preventing the occurrence of further cases (secondary cases)
(iii) Nutritional interventions: These comprise food or any long-term disability. It is like stamping out the "spark"
distribution and nutrition improvement of vulnerable rather than calling the fire brigade to put out the fire.
groups; child feeding programmes; food fortification;
nutrition education, etc. Strictly speaking, early diagnosis and treatment cannot be
called prevention because the disease has already
(iv) Lifestyle and behavioural changes: The
commenced in the host. However, since early diagnosis and
conventional public health measures or interventions have treatment intercepts the disease process, it has been
not been successful in making inroads into lifestyle reforms. included in the schema of prevention, in as much as the goal
The action of prevention in this case, is one of individual of prevention is "to oppose or intercept a cause to prevent
and community responsibility for health (see page 19), the
or dissipate its effect." (87).
physician and in fact each health worker acting as an
educator than a therapist. Health education is a basic Early diagnosis and treatment though not as effective and
element of all health activity. It is of paramount importance economical as "primary prevention" may be critically
in changing the views, behaviour and habits of people. important in reducing the high morbidity and mortality in
certain diseases such as essential hypertension, cancer
Since health promotion comprises a broad spectrum of
cervix and breast cancer. For many others such as
activities, a well-conceived health promotion programme
tuberculosis, leprosy and STD, early diagnosis and treatment
would first attempt to identify the "target groups" or at-risk
are the only effective mode of intervention. Early effective
individuals in a population and then direct more
appropriate message to them (111). Goals must be defined. therapy has made it possible to shorten considerably the
Means and alternative means of accomplishing them must period of communicability and reduce the mortality from
be explored. It involves "organizational, political, social and acute communicable diseases.
economic interventions designed to facilitate environmental Mass treatment: A mass treatment approach is used in the
and behavioural adaptations that will improve or protect control of certain diseases, viz. yaws, pinta, bejel, trachoma
health" (112). and filaria, The rationale for a mass treatment programme is
the existence of at least 4-5 cases of latent infection for each
2. Specific protection clinical case of active disease in the community. Patients
To avoid disease altogether is the ideal but this is possible with a latent (incubating) infection may develop disease at
only in a limited number of cases. The following are some any time. In such cases, mass treatment is a critical factor in
of the currently available interventions aimed at specific the interruption of disease transmission. There are many
protection: (a) immunization (b) use of specific nutrients variants of mass treatment total mass treatment, juvenile
(c) chemoprophylaxis (d) protection against occupational mass treatment, selective mass treatment, depending
hazards (e) protection against accidents (fl protection from upon the nature and prevalence of disease in the
carcinogens (g) avoidance of allergens (h) the control of community (104).
44 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
living standards, demographic factors, urbanization and Whereas in developing countries, public health has not
industrialization, medical interventions, maintenance of made much headway in terms of sanitary reforms and
people with transmissible genetic defects, and the control of communicable diseases, it has made tremendous
widespread effects of technology on ecology. strides in the industrialized western countries resulting in
The changing pattern of disease in both developed and longer expectation of life and significant decline in death
developing countries and the emergence of new problems rates. As a result of improvements in public health during
emphasize the need for forward-looking approaches in the past 50 or 60 years, public health in the developed
health planning and management. countries has moved from sanitation and control of
communicable diseases (which have been largely controlled)
to preventive, therapeutic and rehabilitative aspects of
POPULATION MEDICINE chronic diseases and behavioural disorders.
Knowledge about human health and disease is sum of the A EURO symposium in 1966 (56) suggested that the
contributions of a large number of disciplines, classified as definition of public health should be expanded to include
(a) basic sciences (b) clinical sciences, and (c) population the organization of medical care services. This was endorsed
medicine. The basic sciences (e.g., biochemistry, physiology, by another Expert Committee of WHO in 1973 (122). Thus
microbiology) are primarily sited in laboratories; clinical modern public health also includes organization of medical
activities are carried out in hospitals, and population care, as a means of protecting and improving the health of
medicine in the community. Tuberculosis provides a good people (123). Since the organization of public health tends
illustration of the three different approaches to the same to be determined by cultural, political and administrative
disease. The basic sciences are concerned with tubercle patterns of the countries, there is a wide mosaic of
bacilli; the clinical sciences with the treatment of tuberculosis organizational arrangements.
in the individual, and population medicine with prevention Public health, in its present form, is a combination of
and control of tuberculosis in the community (84). All these scientific disciplines (e.g., epidemiology, biostatistics,
approaches are highly interrelated. laboratory sciences, social sciences, demography) and skills
In different settings, population medicine is referred to and strategies (e.g., epidemiological investigations, planning
as hygiene, public health, preventive medicine, social and management, interventions, surveillance, evaluation)
medicine or community medicine. All these share common that are directed to the maintenance and improvement of
ground in their concern for promotion of health and the health of the people (123).
prevention of disease. Each has originated at a different With the adoption of the goal of "Health for All", a new
time, and each has introduced a new direction or emphasis. public health was evident worldwide, which may be defined
So there should be little expectation that definitions can be as:
other than arbitrary and imprecise (120). It has been truly
said that every definition is dangerous. "the organized application of local, state, national and
international resources to achieve "Health for All", i.e.,
Hygiene attainment by all people of the world by the year 2000 of a
level of health that will permit them to lead a socially and
The world "hygiene" is derived from Hygeia, the economically productive life".
goddess of health in Greek mythology. She is represented as
a beautiful woman holding in her hand a bowl from which a Although the term "public health" has lost its original
serpent is drinking. In Greek mythology, the serpent testifies meaning, the term is still widely used. Terms like preventive
the art of healing which symbol is retained even today. medicine, social medicine and community medicine are
Hygiene is defined as "the science of health and embraces used as synonyms for public health. Public health is not only
all factors which contribute to healthful living". a discipline but has become a "social institution" (31)
created and maintained by society to do something about
Public health the death rate and sanitary conditions and many other
matters relating to life and death (124). In this sense public
The term "public health" came into general use around health is both a body of knowledge and also a means to
1840. It arose from the need to protect "the public" from the apply that knowledge.
spread of communicable diseases. Later, it appeared in 1848
in the name of a law, the Public Health Act in England to Preventive medicine
crystallize the efforts organized by society to protect,
promote, and restore the people's health. Preventive medicine developed as a branch of medicine
distinct from public health, based on aetiology. It is, by
In 1920, C.E.A. Winslow, a former professor of public definition, applied to "healthy" people. It scored several
health at Yale University, gave the oft-quoted definition of successes in the prevention of communicable diseases based
public health. The WHO Expert Committee on Public on immunization, so much so, in its early years, preventive
Health Administration, adapting Winslow's earlier definition, medicine was equated with the control of infectious
has defined it as (121): diseases. A brief account of the advances made in
"the science and art of preventing disease, prolonging life, preventive medicine is given in chapter 1.
and promoting health and efficiency through organized As concepts of the aetiology of disease changed through
community efforts for the sanitation of the environment, time, so too have the techniques and activities of preventive
the control of communicable infections, the education of medicine. Preventive medicine is no longer concerned, as it
the individual in personal hygiene, the organization of
medical and nursing services for early diagnosis and
used to be, with immunization, important though it may be.
preventive treatment of disease, and the development of The concept of preventive medicine has broadened to
social machinery to ensure for every individual a standard include health promotion, treatment, and prevention of
of living adequate for the maintenance of health, so disability as well as specific protection (88). Preventive
organizing these benefits as to enable every citizen to medicine has thus come to include both specific medical
realize his birthright of health and longevity". measures (e.g., immunization), as well as general health
POPULATION MEDICINE 47
promotional measures (e.g., health education). Within this medicine is not a new branch of medicine, but rather an
change in the definition and scope of preventive medicine, it extension of the public health idea reflecting the strong
has become clear that promoting health and preventing relationship between medicine and social sciences.
illness involve responsibilities and decisions at many levels - Professor Crew of Edinburgh defined social medicine as
individual, public and private; and that these efforts are follows: "Social medicine stands upon two pillars, medicine
applied to whole population or to segments. In this, and sociology. Social medicine, by derivation is concerned
preventive medicine has become akin to public health. with the health of groups of individuals and individuals
Preventive medicine has become a growing point in within these groups with a view to create, promote,
medicine (125). It has branched into newer areas such as preserve, and maintain optimum health. The laboratory to
screening for disease, population control, environmental practice social medicine is the whole community; the tools
control, genetic counselling and prevention of chronic for diagnosing community ills are epidemiology and
diseases. Community prevention and primordial prevention biostatistics; and social therapy does not consist in
(see page 41) are relatively new concepts which are being administration of drugs, but social and political action for
applied in the community control of coronary heart disease, the betterment of conditions of life of man. Social medicine
hypertension and cancer with palpable success (107). The is one more link in the chain of social organizations of a
emergence of preventive paediatrics, preventive geriatrics civilized community". Terms such as social anatomy, social
and preventive cardiology are relatively new dimensions of physiology, social pathology and social therapy came into
prevention. vogue to describe the various aspects of social medicine.
Since preventive medicine has increasingly tended to be Although the term "social medicine" was introduced
applied to the organized health activities of the community more than 150 years ago, the characteristic aspect was its
(56), the term "preventive medicine" is regarded as repeated advent and disappearance. It never came to be
synonymous with public health. Both terms often appear in generally accepted. There was no unanimity in its objectives
combination (e.g., Maxcy-Rosenau Textbook of "Public or subject matter. This is reflected in more than 50
Health and Preventive Medicine"). definitions given to social medicine.
Associated with the concept of public health, preventive Social medicine had achieved academic respectability in
medicine has been defined as meaning "not only the England when John Ryle was appointed as professor of
organized activities of the community to prevent occurrence social medicine at Oxford, and Crew at Edinburgh. The
as well as progression of disease and disability, mental and post-war period (1945-196 7) saw considerable expansion
physical, but also the timely application of all means to of social medicine as an academic discipline (126).
promote the health of individuals, and of the community as With the development of epidemiology as a new
a whole, including prophylaxis, health education and similar discipline and a practical tool in the planning, provision and
work done by a good doctor in looking after individuals and evaluation of health services, interest in social medicine
families" (56). In this the goals of preventive medicine and began to wane. In 1968, the Report of the Royal
public health have become identical, i.e., Health for All. In Commission on Medical Education {Todd Report) for the
line with this extension of the scope of preventive medicine, first time referred to "community medicine" instead of social
it is now customary to speak of primary, secondary and medicine, and defined it in terms which embraced social
tertiary levels of prevention (56). The cornerstone of medicine, but went beyond it, by giving greater emphasis to
preventive medicine is, however, "primary prevention". the organizational and administrative aspects than had
academic social medicine in the past (126). This gave a blow
Community health to the further development of social medicine which had
The term "community health" has replaced in some tended in many countries to be displaced by the newer term
countries, the terms public health, preventive medicine and "community medicine" (56).
social medicine. A EURO symposium in 1966 (56) defined
community health as including "all the personal health and Community medicine
environmental services in any human community, The term "community medicine" is a newcomer. It is the
irrespective of whether such services were public or private successor of what has been previously known as public
ones". In some instances, community health is used as a health, preventive medicine, social medicine and
synonym for "environmental health". It is also used to refer community health. Since community medicine is a recent
to "community health care". Therefore, a WHO Expert introduction, it has borrowed heavily from the concepts,
Committee in 1973 (122) observed that without further approaches and methods of public health, preventive
qualification, the term "community health" is ambiguous, medicine and social medicine.
and suggested caution in the use of the term. The history of community medicine in England is
Social medicine interesting. It was instituted by Ordinance and by Act of
Parliament (127). The Todd Commission (1968) forcibly
The term "social medicine" was first introduced by Jules recommended that every medical school in England should
Guerin, a French physician in 1848. In 1911, the concept of have a department of community medicine. The Royal
social medicine was revived by Alfred Grotjahn of Berlin College of Physicians of Edinburgh and London and the
who stressed the importance of social factors as Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons of Glasgow
determinants of health and disease. These ideas of social established the Faculty of community medicine, which came
medicine spread throughout Europe and England after the into being in March 1972 as the central body with a
First World War (see page 8). responsibility of setting standards and overseeing the quality
By derivation, social medicine is "the study of man as a of postgraduate education and training in the field (128). On
social being in his total environment". It is concerned with all the night of 31 March 1974, the traditional medical officer of
the factors affecting the distribution of health and illhealth in health passed into the pages of the history book, and was
population, including the use of health services (126). Social thereafter designated as the "community physician".
48 CONCEPT OF HEALTH AND DISEASE
The term community medicine means different things in in splendid isolation in the community, acqumng the
different countries (56). For example, in most European euphemism "an ivory tower of disease"; it absorbs vast
countries various aspects of community medicine are taught proportion (50 to 80 per cent) of health budget; it is not
at medical universities, though under different names, such people-oriented; its procedures and styles are inflexible; it
as general practice, family medicine, community medicine overlooks the cultural aspects of illness (treating the disease
or social medicine (129). Even in the same country and without treating the patient); the treatment is expensive; it is
region, the variation in the amount and range of teaching intrinsically resistant to change, and so on. The relative
remains remarkable (128). These variations are reflected in isolation of hospitals from the broader health problems of
the definitions quoted below (56). the community which has its roots in the historical
(a) The field concerned with the study of health and development of health services has contributed to the
disease in the population of a defined community or dominance of hospital model of health care.
group. Its goal is to identify the health problems and In 1957, an Expert Committee of WHO (132)
needs of defined population (community diagnosis) emphasized that the general hospital cannot work in
and to plan, implement and evaluate the extent to isolation; it must be a part of a social and medical system
which health measures effectively meet these needs. that provides complete health care for the population.
(b) The practice of medicine concerned with groups or Subsequent years witnessed the efforts of WHO, UNICEF
population rather than with individual patients. This and non-governmental agencies to involve hospitals in
includes the elements listed in definition (a), together providing basic and referral services. The establishment of
with the organization and provision of health care at a primary health centres was a step forward to integrate
community or group level. preventive and curative services.
(c) The term is also used to describe the practice of The community hospital should be a flexible institution,
medicine in the community, e.g., by a family capable of adapting its resources to the total health care
physician. Some writers equate the terms "family needs of the community. This adaptation requires hospital
medicine" and "community medicine"; others confine administration that is both a science and art. Dr. Rene Sand
its use to public health practice. has said that the right patient should receive the right care at
the right time in the right place at the right cost (133). This
(d) Community oriented primary health care is an ideal, seemingly simple, is perhaps never achieved, like all
integration of community medicine with the primary other ideals because of a complex set of interacting and
health care of individuals in the community. In this often conflicting social forces operating both within and
form of practice, the community practitioner or outside the hospital system.
community health team has responsibility for health
care at a community or at an individual level. With the acceptance of the goal of "Health for All", there
is involvement of hospitals in primary health care activities.
It will be seen that a common thread runs through all the Member countries of WHO have enunciated in their national
above definitions. Diagnosis of the state of health of a policies to reorient and restructure their health care systems
community is an important foundation of community on the basis of primary health care. Primary health care
medicine. As used in the present context, community cannot work unless there is effective hospital support to deal
medicine is a practice which focuses on the health needs of with referred patients, and to refer patients who do not
the community as a whole. The combination of community require hospital attention to one of the other primary health
medicine with "primary health care" extends the functioning care services. Without hospital support primary health care
of both elements to a health care system which aims to could not achieve its full potential. The trend is now set to
change the state of health of the community by intervention redefine the role of the hospital as a community health
both at the individual and group level. The foundations of oriented institution, which means that it is not only disease
community medicine are in no way different from those of oriented but has responsibilities in the field of preventive
modern public health and social medicine, viz. medicine and health promotion (134).
epidemiology, biostatistics, social sciences and organization
of health care which includes planning, implementation and Functions of a physician
evaluation (130). The object of medical education is to prepare a doctor
It is anomalous that in England and United States where (physician) for the tasks he is likely to be given. In view of
the term community medicine is freely used, their standard the fact that there is no internationally accepted definition of
textbooks on the subject are still titled Public Health (e.g., the word "physician", the WHO has adopted the following
Oxford "Textbook of Public Health;" Maxcy-Rosenau: definition (135).
"Public Health and Preventive Medicine"). "A physician is a person who, having been regularly
admitted to a medical school, duly recognized in the
HOSPITALS AND COMMUNITY country in which it is located, has successfully completed
the prescribed courses of studies in medicine and has
The hospital is a unique institution of man. A WHO acquired the requisite qualification to be legally licensed to
Expert Committee in 1963 (131) proposed the following practise medicine (comprising prevention, diagnosis,
working definition of a hospital: "A hospital is a residential treatment and rehabilitation) using independent
establishment which provides short-term and long-term judgement to promote community and individual health".
medical care consisting of observational, diagnostic, In India, at present, a doctor soon after graduation, has
therapeutic and rehabilitative services for persons suffering often to take charge of a health centre (population 30,000)
or suspected to be suffering from a disease or injury and for which is usually in a rural area. He is called upon to provide
parturients. It may or may not also provide services for promotive, preventive, curative, rehabilitative and emergency
ambulatory patients on an out-patient basis". care services appropriate to meet the main health problems in
The criticism levelled against the hospital is that it exists the community, with special attention to vulnerable groups.
HOSPITALS AND COMMUNITY 49
The functions of the health centre are discussed elsewhere. diagnosis. Improvement of water supplies, immunization,
The functions of a doctor (physician) may be summarized as health education, control of specific diseases, health
follows: legislation are examples of community health action or
(a) The care of the individual: A physician must be able to interventions. Action may be taken at three levels: at the
assess the state of health of the individual. This would level of the individual, at the level of the family and at the
include a clinical diagnosis, a simple laboratory diagnosis as level of the community (136). ·
well as an assessment of the individual's state of nutrition, A programme of community action must have the
level of development, social and emotional state and the following characteristics: (a) it must effectively utilize all the
health needs. He must then be able to take any further available resources, (b) it must coordinate the efforts of all
measures necessary for treatment, prevention and referral to other agencies in the community, now termed as
higher levels of health care. He must be particularly expert "intersectoral coordination", and (c) it must encourage the
in common conditions, in first-aid and in the management of full participation of the community in the programme. These
acute emergencies. Because of the large numbers involved, are the principles on which primary health care, as defined
he must know how to delegate work to his auxiliaries. in the Alma-Ata Declaration, is based. This approach is a
(b) The care of community: The care of the community significant departure from the earlier basic services
centres round the eight essential elements of primary health approach.
care as stated in the Alma-Ata Declaration (see page 30).
The physician is the leader of the "health team". He DISEASE CLASSIFICATION
provides primary health care through the health team at the There is a wide variation among countries in the criteria
grass-root level. He should be familiar with community and standards adopted for diagnosis of diseases and their
diagnosis, prioritization of health problems and community notification, making it difficult to compare national statistics.
treatment. A system of classification was needed whereby diseases
(c) The physician as a teacher: The term "doctor" by could be grouped according to certain common
derivation means to teach. Therefore the physician has a characteristics, that would facilitate the statistical study of
major responsibility as a teacher and educator. In his disease phenomena. Over the years, many approaches were
practice, in his professional associations and in his tried to classify diseases. John Graunt in the 17th century in
community activities, the physician has wide educational his study of Bills of Mortality, arranged diseases in an
opportunities. But unfortunately, the physician's role as a alphabetical order. Later, a more scientific approach was
teacher is a neglected one. Many physicians are reluctant to adopted in classifying diseases according to certain
capitalize on their role as educators. As a teacher, the characteristics of the disease or injuries such as (a) the part
physician can play an effective role in community health of the body affected (b) the aetiologic agent (c) the kind of
education so that individuals, families and communities morbid change produced by the disease, and {d) the kind of
assume greater responsibility for their own health and disturbance of function produced by the disease or injury.
welfare, including self-care. He can also generate and Thus there are many axes of classification, and the
mobilize community participation in health programmes particular axis selected will depend on the interest of the
through effective propagation of relevant information. investigator (137).
X. Diseases of the respiratory system (JOO - J99) neoplasms, special tabulation lists for mortality and
XI. Diseases of the digestive system (KOO K93) morbidity, definitions, and the nomenclature regulations.
XII. Diseases of the skin and subcutaneous tissue (LOO Volume 2 is instruction manual and volume 3 contains
-L99) alphabetical index.
XIII. Diseases of the musculosketetal system and The ultimate purpose of !CD is to contribute to a uniform
connective tissue (MOO - M99) classification that can be used throughout the world to make
XIV. Diseases of the genitourinary system (NOO - N99) accurate comparisons of morbidity and mortality data for
XV. Pregnancy, childbirth and puerperium (000- decision-making in prevention, in management of health care
099) and in facilitating research on particular health problems. The
reader is referred to the Tenth Revision of the !CD for general
XVI. Certain conditions originating in perinatal period principles and description of the !CD classification.
(POO-P96)
XVII. Congenital malformations, deformations and References
chromosomal abnormalities (QOO Q99) 1. WHO (1979). Health for All, Sr.No.2.
XVIII. Symptoms, signs and abnormal clinical and 2. WHO (1980). WHO Chr., 34 (2) 80.
laboratory findings, not elsewhere classified (ROO 3. Ahmed, and Coelho, (1979). Toward a New Definition of Health,
R99) Pleum,N. Y.
XIX. Injury, poisoning and certain other consequences 4. Dubos, R. (1965). Man Adapting, New Haven, Yale Uni.Press.
of external causes (SOO - T98) 5. WHO (1986). Concepts of Health Behaviour Research, Reg. Health
Paper No.13, SEARO, New Delhi.
XX. External causes of morbidity and mortality (VOl
6. WHO (1978).Hea/thforAll, Sr.No.I.
Y98) 7. WHO (1957). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.137.
XX!. Factors influencing health status and contact with 8. Crew, F.A.E. (1965). Health its Nature and Conservation, Pergamon
health services (ZOO 299). Press, London.
9. Sartorius, N. (1983). Bull WHO, 61(1)5.
The coding system 10. Fillenbaum, G.G. (1984) The Wellbeing of the Elderly, WHO Offset
Publ.No.84.
The first character of the ICD-10 code is a letter and each
11. Crnich, D.E. (1984) Jr.School Health, 54 (1) 30-32.
letter is associated with a particular chapter, except for the 12. Donald, C.A. et al (1978). Social Health. In: Conceptualization and
letter D, which is used in chapter II and chapter Ill, and letter measurement of health for adults in the health insurance study, Santa
H which is used in chapter VII and chapter VIII. Chapter I, II, Monica, CA, Rand Corporation, Vol 4.
XIX and XX use more than one letter in the first position of 13. Eberst, R.M. (1984).Jr.SchoolHealth, 54 (3) 99-104.
their codes. 14. WHO (1985). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.714.
Each chapter contains sufficient three-character 15. Indian Council of Social Science Research and ICMR (1981). Health
for All, an alternative strategy, Voluntary Health Asso. of India, New
categories to cover its contents. Not all the available codes Delhi.
are used, allowing space for future revision and expansion. 16. Twaddle, A.C. and Hassler, R.M. (1977). A Sociology of Health, St.
The range of categories is given in parentheses after each Louis, Mosby.
block title. 17. Charles, Sir John (1970). WHO Chr., 24 (9) 391.
Although not mandatory for reporting at the international 18. Dubos, R. (1969). WHO Chro., 23:499.
level, most of the three-character categories are subdivided 19. Carlos, M. (1978). Bull PAHO, 12:7.
by means of a fourth numeric character after a decimal 20. Nagpal, R. and Sell, H. (1985). Subjective Wellbeing, Reg. Health
Papers No. 7, SEARO, WHO New Delhi.
point, allowing upto 10 subcategories. Where a three
21. WHO (1975). Promoting Health in the Human Environment, Geneva.
character category is not subdivided, it is recommended that
22. United Nations (1961 ). International Definition and Measurement of
the letter "X" be used to fill the fourth position so that the Levels of Living-an interim guide, UN Pub!. 61, IV F.
codes are of a standard length for data-processing. 23. WHO (1976). WHO Chr, 30 (8) 312.
Examples: 24. Morris, D.M. and Michelle, B.M. (1982). Measuring the condition of
India's poor-PQLI, Promilla & Co., New Delhi-1.
Chapter XX! Factors influencing health status and 25. UNDP, Human Development Report 2007-08, Oxford University
contact with health services (Z 00 Z 99) Press.
Z 72 - Problems relating to lifestyle 26. UNDP (2011 ), Human Development Report 2011, Oxford University
Press.
Z 72.0 Tobacco use 27. UNDP (2013), Human Development Report 2013, Oxford University
Z 72 .1 Alcohol use Press. ·
Z 72.2 Drug use 28. WHO (1998), International Digest of Health Legislation, Vol. 49, No.
1, 1998.
Z 72 .3 Lack of physical exercise 29. WHO (1986). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.731.
Z 72.4 Inappropriate diet and eating habits 30. Wingard, D.L. (1982).Am.J.Epid, 116 (5) 765.
Z 72.5 High-risk sexual behaviour 31. Last, J.M. (1983). A Dictionary of Epidemiology, Oxford University
Press.
The unused "U" code : Codes U 00 - U 49 are to be used 32. Ratcliffe, John (1984). In: Practising Health for All, David Morley, et al
for provisional assignment of new diseases of uncertain (eds), Oxford University Press.
aetiology. Codes U 50-U 99 may be used in research, e.g., 33. Govt. of India (2011). SRS Bulletin, Dec. 2011, Ministry of Home
when testing an alternative sub-classification for a special Affairs, New Delhi.
project (138). 34. Govt. of India (2011). Census of India 2011, Dec. 2011, Ministry of
Home Affairs, New Delhi.
ICD-10 consists of three volumes. Volume 1 contains the 35. Banerji, (1985). Health & Family Planning Services in India, Lok
report of the International conference for the Tenth Paksh, N. D.
Revision, the classification itself at the three-and four 36. UNICEF (2012), The State of World's Children 2012.
character levels, the classification of the morphology of 37. WHO (1986). WHO Chr., 32 (7) 295.
REFERENCES 51
38. WHO (1978). WHO Chr., 32 (9) 356. Methods, Boston: Little, Brown.
39. Noble, John, (1976). Primary Care & Practice of Med., Little Brown, 86. Stallones, R.A. (1971). Environmental Ecology and Epidemiology,
Boston. PAHO Scientific Pub!. No. 231.
40. Editorial (1982). Canad. J. Pub. Hlth, 73 (3) 153. 87. Leavell, H.R. and Clark, E.G. (1965). Preventive Medicine for the
41. Susser, M.W. (1973). Causal thinking in the health sciences, Ox.U.P. Doctor in his Community, McGraw Hill, New York.
42. WHO (1976). Health Aspects of Human Rights, WHO, Geneva. 88. Suchman, E.A. (1970). Arch.Env. Health, 20:105.
43. Horwitz, A. (1983). Bull PAHO, 17 (1) 61. 89. WHO (1980). WHO Chr., 34 (5) 189.
44. Levin, LS. (1981). World Health Forum, 2 (2) 179. 90. WHO (1979). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.636.
45. WHO (1982). WHO Chr., 36 (3) 117. 91. Sackett, E.M. et al (1984). The risk approach to health care, Public
46. Levin, LS. and E.L Idler (1983). Ann.Rev.Pub.Health, 4: 181-201. health papers No. 76.
47. Djukanovic, V. and Mach, E.P. (1975). Alternative approaches to 92. Fielding, J.E. (1984). Ann.Rev.Public Health, 5:239.
meeting basic health needs in developing countries, A Joint UNICEF/ 93. WH0(1984). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.706.
WHO Study. 94. WHO (1977). WHO Chr., 31:150.
48. WHO (1987). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.744. 95. WHO (1976). Tech.Rep.Ser.No.593.
49. WHO (1986). Seventh Report World Health Situation, Vol.4 96. Lilienfeld, A.M. and Lilienfeld, D. (1979). Foundations of
Evaluation of the strategy for health for all, WHO, SEARO. Epidemiology, New York, Oxford University Press.
50. WHO (1984). Strengthening Ministries of Health for Primary Health 97. Stuart-Harris, Charles (1981). World Health Forum, 2 (2) 305.
Care, WHO Offset Publ.No.82. 98. Soper, F.L (1962).Am.J.PublicHealth, 52:724-745.
51. Sigerist, H.E. (1941). Medicine and Human Welfare, New Haven, Yale 99. WHO (1972). Health Hazards of the Human Environment, WHO
University Press. Geneva.
52. WHO (1984). Intersectoral Linkages and Health Development, WHO 100. WHO (1981). Tech.Rep.Ser.,No.666.
Offset Publ.No.83. 101. Raska, K. (1966). WHO Chr., 20, 315.
53. WHO (1984). Health for All, Ser.No.9. 102. Mason, J.B. et al (1984). Nutritional Surveillance, WHO, Geneva.
54. WHO (1984). Health Planning and Management Glossary. 103. Symposium on methods of surveillance (1976). InterJ. Epi., 5: 13-87.
Reg.Health Paper 2, SEARO, New Delhi.
104. WHO (1986). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.736.
55. WHO (1981). Health for All, Sr.No.6. 105. WHO (1979). WHO Chr.,33 (2) 50.
56. Hogarth, J. (1978). Glossary for Health Care Terminology, Public 106. WHO (1982). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.678.
Health in Europe-4.
107. WHO (1986). Techn. Rep.Ser., No.732.
57. WHO (1981). Health for Ali, Sr.No.4.
108. Dept, of Health and Social Security (1976). Prevention and Health
58. WHO (2006). Basic Epidemiology, Second Ed., R. Bonita, Everybody's Business, London, HMSO.
R. Beaglehole, T. Kjellstrom.
109. Suchman, LM. (1970). Public Health Reports, 85:1.
59. Ray M. Merrill, Thomas C. Timmreck, Introduction to Epidemiology,
4th Ed., Jones and Bartlett Publishers. 110. WHO (1987). World Health, May 1987.
60. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep.Ser., No.587. 111. Lauzon, R.R. J. (1977). Canad. J.Pub.Health, 68:311.
61. Wilson, R.W. and T.E Drury (1984). Ann Rev. Pub.Health. 5:83-106. 112. WHO (1984). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.713.
62. Last, John M., A Dictionary of Epidemiology, Fourth Ed. (2001), 113. WHO (1976). WHO Chr.,30 (1) 16.
Ox.U.P. 114. WHO (1973). Tech.Rep.Ser., No.535.
63. UN Dept. of Economic and Social Affairs (1978}. Social Indicators, 115. WHO (1980). International classification of impairments, disabilities,
Statistical Paper Series M.No.63. handicaps. WHO, Geneva.
64. Sheehan, and Hopkins, (1979). Basic needs performance, ILO, 116. WHO (1981). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.668.
Geneva. 117. WHO (1969). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.419.
65. WHO (2003), World Health Report 2003, Shaping the future. 118. WHO (1984). World Health, May 1984.
66. WHO (1971). Techn.Rep. Ser., No.472. 119. WHO (2013), WHO Fact Sheet No. 310, The top 10 causes of death,
67. WHO (2013}, World Health Statistics. July 2013.
68. Lee P.R. and P.E. Franks (1977). Preventive Medicine, 6, 209: 226. 120. Clark, Duncan and B. MacMohan (1981). Preventive and Community
69. WHO (1972). Techn.Rep.Ser.No.499. Medicine, 2nd ed., Boston: Little, Brown & Co.
70. WHO (1980). Information systems for health services, Public Health 121. WHO (1952). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.55.
in Europe-13, Regional Office for Europe. 122. WHO (1973). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.533.
71. WHO (1987). Techn.Rep.Ser.,No.746. 123. Roger Detels and Lester Breslow (1984). In: Oxford Textbook of Public
72. Kohn,R. (1983). The health centre concept in primary health care, Health. Vol 1. W.W. Holland, et al (eds) Oxford University Press.
Public health in Europe-22, Regional Office for Europe. 124. Brockington, F. (1958). World Health, A pelican book.
73. WHO (1986). Health promotion, Ottawa Charter, First International 125. Norton, Alan (1969). The New Dimensions of Medicine, 20th century
Conference, 21st Nov. 1986. studies, Hodder and Stoughton, London.
74. WHO (1981). Health for All, Sr.No.5. 126. Chave, S.P.W. (1984). In: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol 1,
75. WHO (1980). Sixth Report, World Health Situation. Oxford University Press.
76. WHO (1983). The concept of Health Services Research, SEARO 127. Stewart, G.T. (1974). Int.J.Epid, 3 (3) 275.
Techn.Publ.1, New Delhi. 128. Warren, M.D. and Roy M.Acheson (1973). Int.J.Epi., 2 (4) 371-378.
77. Grundy, Eand W.A. Reinke (1973). Health Practice Research and 129. WHO (1985). Primary prevention coronary heart disease, EURO
Formalized Management Methods, WHO, Geneva. Reports and Studies 98.
78. WHO (1979). WHO Chr., 33 (2) 49. 130. Kark, S.L. et al (1973). IntJ. Epid, 2 (4) 419.
79. Gregg Alan (1956). Amer. J. Public Health, 46: 1384. 131. WHO (1963) Techn.Rep.Ser.,No. 261.
80. Suchman, E.A. (1963). Sociology and the field of Public Health, 132. WHO (1957). Techn.Rep.Ser., No. 122.
Russel Sage Foundation, New York. 133. Rene Sand (1952). The Advance to Social Medicine, Lon. Staples
81. Ouslander, J.G. and J.C. Beck (1982). Ann.Rev.Public Health, 3:58. Press.
82. Susser, M.W. and Waston, W. (1971). Sociology in Medicine, 2nd ed. 134. WHO (1987). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.744.
London, Oxford University Press. 135. WHO (1972). WHO Chr., 26 (4) 181.
83. Le Riche, W.H. and Jean Milner (1971). Epidemiology as Medical 136. King Maurice ed (1982). Medical Care in Developing Countries,
Ecology, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. Ox.U.P.
84. Mausner, J.S. and Kramer, S. (1985). Mausner and Bahn: 137. Kupka, K. (1978). WHO Chr., 32:219-225.
Epidemiology-An Introductory Text, Saunders. 138. WHO (1993), International Statistical Classification of Diseases and
85. MacMahon, B.and Pugh, T.E (1970). Epidemiology: Principles and Related Health Problems, Tenth Revision, Vol. 2.
Principles of ·Epidemiology
and Epidemiologic Methods
"I keep six honest serving men; they taught me all I know.
Their names are what, why, when, how, where and who."
Epidemiology is the basic science of preventive and There appears to be almost as many definitions of
social medicine. Although of ancient lineage, it made only epidemiology as there are authors who have written on the
slow progress upto the start of 20th century. Epidemiology subject, ranging from Hippocrates to those of the present
has evolved rapidly during the past few decades. Its day. A short list is given below (2, 3) :
ramifications cover not only study of disease distribution 1. That branch of medical science which treats epidemics
and causation (and thereby prevention), but also health and (Parkin, 1873).
health-related events occurring · in human population. 2. The science of the mass phenomena of infectious
Modern epidemiology has entered the most exciting phase diseases (Frost, 1927).
of its evolution. By identifying risk factors of chronic disease,
evaluating treatment modalities and health services, it has 3. The study of disease, any disease, as a mass
provided new opportunities for prevention, treatment, phenomenon (Greenwood, 1934), and
planning and improving the effectiveness and efficiency of 4. The study of the distribution and determinants of
health services. The current interest of medical sciences in disease frequency in man (MacMahon, 1960).
epidemiology has given rise to newer off-shoots such as To !\n Ml&S'T
infectious disease epidemiology, chronic disease Definition
epidemiology, clinical epidemiology, serological Epidemiology has been defined by John
,...._. M. Last in 1988
epidemiology, cancer epidemiology, malaria epidemiology, as:-
neuro epidemiology, genetic epidemiology, occupational "The study of the <}istribution and determinants of
epidemiology, psychosocial epidemiology, and so on. This health-related states or evenls in specified populations,
trend is bound to increase in view of the increasing a_!!d the application of this study to the control of health
importance given to the pursuit of epidemiological studies. ~'.
That these studies have added substantially to the
advancement of medical knowledge is indisputable. This The wide variety of meanings attached to epidemiology is
Chapter studies the basic concepts and principles of the expression of the wide ranging subject-matter. The
epidemiology as an introduction to the subject. diseases included in the subject-matter have increased from
(~ o-.~i\1.1\ ...~ those which occur in epidemics to include those infectious
History €f 1~ ~ f.,,.,r diseases which are endemic in nature, and more recently
chronic diseases, accidents and mental health. Modern
Epidemiology began with Adam and Eve, both trying to
epidemiology has also taken within its scope the study of
investigate the qualities of the "fm:hi~!s!~.n.._!!,Yif'. health-related states, events and "facts of life" occurring in
Epidemiology is derived from the word epioemic
human population. This includes study of the health services
(~ ~ple;J.2gos=st1:!9y), which is a very
old word dating back to the 3rd century B.C. The used by the population, and to measure their impact.
foundation of epidemiology was laid in the 19th century, Epidemiology, like public health itself, is often more
when a few classic studies made a major contribution to the concerned with the well-being of society as a whole, than
saving of life. Mention is made of an Epidemiological with the well-being of individuals.
Society in London in 1850s under the presidency of the Earl Although there is no single definition to which all
of Shaftesbury (1). The Society's main concern was the epidemiologists subscribe, three components are common to
investigation of infectious diseases. The sudden growth of most of them. First, studies of disease frequency; second,
bacteriology had smothered the development of studies of the distribution; and third, studies of the
epidemiology in the Universities. determinants. Each of these components confers an
In the United States, Winslow and Sedgwick both lectured important message.
in epidemiology in the early 1920s, although the subject was
not given departmental status. In 1927, W.H. Frost became 1. Disease frequency
the first professor of epidemiology in US. Later Major Inherent in the definition of epidemiology is measurement
Greenwood became the first professor of epidemiology and of frequency of disease, disability or death, and summarizing
medical statistics in the University of London (1). this information in the form of rates and ratios {e.g.,
Epidemiology has grown rapidly during the past few decades. prevalence rate, incidence rate, death rate, etc). Thus the
It has now become firmly established in medical education. basic measure of disease frequency is a rate or ratio. These
DEFINITIONS
rates are essential for comparing disease frequency in different studies, analytical studies, and experimental or intervention
populations or subgroups of the same population in relation to studies (6): These studies are described in the following
suspected causal factors. Such comparisons may yield pages.
important clues to disease aetiology. This is a vital step in the The ultimate aim of epidemiology is to lead to effective
development of strategies for prevention or control of health action:
problems.
a. to eliminate or reduce the health problem or its
Equally, epidemiology is also concerned with the consequences; and
measurement of health-related events and states in the b. to promote the health and well-being of society as a
community (e.g., health needs, demands, activities, tasks, whole.
health care utilization} and variables such as blood pressure,
serum cholesterol, height, weight, etc. In this respect, Epidemiology and clinical medicine
epidemiology has the features of a quantitative science. The basic difference between epidemiology and clinical
Much of the subject matter of measurement of disease and medicine is that in epidemiology, the unit of study is a
health-related events falls in the domain of biostatistics, "defined population" or "population at-risk"; in clinical
which is a basic tool of epidemiology. medicine, the unit of study is a "case" or "cases". In clinical
medicine, the physician is concerned with disease in the
2. Distribution of disease
individual patient, whereas the epidemiologist is concerned
It is well-known that disease, or for that matter health, is not with disease patterns in the entire population. Epidemiology
uniformly distributed in human populations. The basic tenet is thus concerned with both the sick and healthy. It has been
of epidemiology is that the distribution of disease occurs in stated that clinicians are interested in cases with the disease,
patterns in a community (3) and that the patterns may lead to the statistician with the population from which the cases are
the generation of hypotheses about causative (or risk) factors. derived, and the epidemiologist is interested in the
An important function of epidemiology is to study these relationship between cases and the population in the form of
distribution patterns in the various subgroups of the arate(7).
population by time, place and person. That is, the Jn clinical medicine, the physician seeks a diagnosis from
epidemiologist examines whether there has been an increase which he derives a prognosis and prescribes specific
or decrease of disease over time span; whether there is a treatment. In epidemiology, an analogous situation exists.
higher concentration of disease in one geographic area than in The epidemiologist is confronted with relevant data derived
others; whether the disease occurs more often in men or in a from a particular epidemiological study. He seeks to identify
particular age-group, and whether most characteristics or a particular source of infection, a mode of spread or an
behaviour of those affected are different from those not aetiological factor in order to determine a future trend and
affected (4). Epidemiology addresses itself to a study of these recommend specific control measures (8). The
variations or patterns, which may suggest or lead to measures epidemiologist also evaluates the outcome of preventive and
to control or prevent the disease. An important outcome of therapeutic measures instituted which provides the necessary
this study is formulation of aetiological hypothesis. This guidance and feed-back to the health care administrator for
aspect of epidemiology is known as "descriptive effective management of public health programmes.
epidemiology".
In clinical medicine, the patient comes to the doctor; in
3. Determinants of disease epidemiology, the investigator goes out into the community
to find persons who have the disease or experience of the
A unique feature of epidemiology is to test aetiological suspected causal factor in question. Clinical medicine is
hypotheses and identify the underlying causes (or risk based on biomedical concepts with an ever-increasing
factors) of disease. This requires the use of epidemiological concern for refining the technique of diagnosis and
principles and methods. This is the real substance of treatment at the individual level. The subject matter of
epidemiology. This aspect of epidemiology is known as clinical medicine is easily "perceived" by such techniques as
"analytical epidemiology". Analytical strategies help in clinical and laboratory examinations including postmortem
developing scientifically sound health programmes, reports. In contrast, the subject matter of epidemiology is
interventions and policies. In recent years, analytical studies "conceptual" and can only be symbolized in the form of
have contributed vastly to our understanding of the tables and graphs (9).
determinants of chronic diseases, e.g., lung cancer and
cardiovascular diseases. Finally, it may be stated that clinical medicine and
epidemiology are not antagonistic. Both are closely related,
Aims of epidemiology co-existent and mutually helpful. Most epidemiological
enquiries could never be established without appropriate
According to the International Epidemiological clinical consideration as to how the disease in question can
Association (!EA}, epidemiology has three main aims (5): be identified among individuals comprising the group under
a. to describe the distribution and magnitude of health scrutiny. Likewise, a knowledge of prevalence, aetiology and
and disease problems in human populations prognosis derived from epidemiological research is
b. to identify aetiological factors (risk factors} in the important to the clinician for the diagnosis and management
pathogenesis of disease; and of individual patients and their families (9).
c. to provide the data essential to the planning, Epidemiological approach
implementation and evaluation of services for the
prevention, control and treatment of disease and to The epidemiological approach to problems of health and
the setting up of priorities among those services. disease is based on two major foundations:
Jn order to fulfil these aims, three rather different classes a. Asking questions
of epidemiological studies may be mentioned: descriptive b. Making comparisons.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
durations of observation or exposure. (iv) PERSON- operation, the patient developed bronchopneumonia as a
DISTANCE: A variant of person-time is person-distance, as complication which ended in death. The concept of
for example passenger-miles. (v) SUB-GROUPS OF THE "underlying cause" is the essence of the international death
POPULATION: The denominator may be subgroups of a certificate. It is defined as (a) the disease or injury which
population, e.g., age, sex, occupation, social class, etc. initiated the train of morbid events leading directly to death
or (b) the circumstances of the accident or violence which
b. Related to total events produced the fatal injury. In Part II is recorded any
In some instances, the denominator may be related to significant associated diseases that contributed to the death
total events instead of the total population, as in the case of but did not directly lead to it.
infant mortality rate and case fatality rate. In the case of
accidents, the number of accidents "per 1000 vehicles" or Death Certificate used in India
"per million vehicle-miles" will be a more useful In order to improve the quality of maternal mortality and
denominator than the total population, many of them may infant mortality data and to provide alternative method of
not be using vehicles. collecting data on deaths during pregnancy and infancy, a
set of questions are added to the basic structure of
MEASUREMENT OF MORTALITY international death certificate for use in India.
Traditionally and universally, most epidemiological Limitations of mortality data
studies begin with mortality data. Mortality data are Mortality data are not without limitations. Problems are
relatively easy to obtain, and, in many countries, reasonably posed by (a) Incomplete reporting of deaths. This is not a
accurate. Many countries have routine systems for collecting problem in developed countries, but in India and other
mortality data. Each year, information on deaths is analyzed developing countries, this may be considerable. (b) Lack of
and the resulting tabulations are made available by each accuracy: That is inaccuracies in the recording of age and
government. Mortality data provide the starting point for cause of death. The practice of medical certification of death
many epidemiol9gical studies. In fact, they are the major is not widespread. If it does exist, the cause of death is often
resource for the epidemiologist. inaccurate or incomplete due to such difficulties as lack of
International Death Certificate diagnostic evidence, inexperience on the part of the certifying
doctor and absence of postmortem which may be important
The basis of mortality data is the Death Certificate. So we in deciding the cause of death. (c) Lack of uniformity: There is
first look at death certification for ascertaining the frequency no uniform and standardized method of collection of data.
of disease in a population. For ensuring national and This hampers national and international comparability
international comparability, it is very necessary to have a (d) Choosing a single cause of death: Most countries tabulate
uniform and standardized system of recording and mortality data only according to the underlying cause of
classifying deaths. The death certificate recommended by death. Other diseases (or risk factors) and conditions which
WHO for international use is given in Fig. 1. contribute to the patient's death are not tabulated, and
It will be seen from Fig. 1 that the international death valuable information is thereby lost. (e) Changing: Changing
certificate is in two parts. Part I deals with the immediate coding systems and changing fashions in diagnosis may affect
cause, and the underlying cause which started the whole the validity. We also need uniform definitions and
trend of events leading to death. The underlying cause of nomenclature. (f) Diseases with low fatality: Lastly, mortality
death is recorded on line (c). In the example cited, the statistics are virtually useless, if the disease is associated with
underlying cause of death is strangulated hernia. After low fatality (e.g., mental diseases, arthiitis).
II
Other significant conditions ... ' ....;/)_(~~ .. .... ' ... ' .. ' .......... , ............ ···················
contributing to the death, but
not related to the disease or
condition causing it
FIG. 1
International form of Death Certificate
Uses of mortality data is due to its older population compared with population B
Statistics on causes of death are important and widely which has a relatively younger population. Currently, this is
used for a number of purposes. They may be employed in the prevailing situation in most developing countries with low
explaining trends and differentials in overall mortality, crude death rates, but high age-specific death rates.
indicating priorities for health action and the allocation of
resources, in designing intervention programmes, and in the
assessment and monitoring of public health problems and
programmes - moreover, they give important clues for
• Popula Crude Age-specific death rates per 1000 population
epidemiological research. -tion death
rate 0-1 1-4 5-7 8-44 45-64 65+
MORTALITY RATES AND
A 15.2 13.5 0.6 0.4 1.5 10.7 59.7.
The commonly used measures are described below : 9.9 22.6
B
L-·--··-·--- ---·-·-----
1.0 0.5 3.6 6~:1 i
1. Crude death rate
In summary, the crude death rates have a major
The simplest measure of mortality is the 'crude death rate'. disadvantage, that is, they lack comparability for
It is defined as "the number of deaths (from all causes) per communities with populations that differ by age, sex, race,
1000 estimated mid-year population in one year, in a given etc. However, they should always be examined first, and
place". It measures the rate at which deaths are occurring later the age-specific death rates which are the most useful
from various causes in a given population, during a specified single measures of mortality. By moving away from the
period. The crude death rate is calculated from the formula: crude death rate to the more detailed age-specific rates, an
Number of deaths during the year attractive feature of the crude death rate, that is, its ability to
----~~~~~~~ XlOOO portray an impression in a single figure is lost.
Mid-year population
It is important to recognize that the crude death rate
summarizes the effect of two factors:
When analysis is planned to throw light on aetiology, it is
a. population composition essential to use specific death rates. The specific death rates
b. age-specific death rates (which reflect the probability may be - (a) cause or disease specific - e.g., tuberculosis,
of dying) cancer, accident; (b) related to specific groups e.g., age-
Table 1 shows the crude death rates of two populations, A specific, sex-specific, age and sex specific, etc. Rates can
and B. The crude death rate for population A is 15.2 per also be made specific for many other variables such as
1000. The crude death rate for population Bis 9.9 per 1000. income, religion, race, housing, etc. Specific death rates can
Apparently, population B appears healthier, than population help us to identify particular groups or groups "at-risk", for
A. preventive action. They permit comparisons between
The limitation of the crude death rate is exposed, when we different causes within the same population. Specific death
compare the age-specific rates between the two populations rates are obtained mainly in countries in which a satisfactory
as shown in Table 1. It can be seen that population B has civil registration system operates and in which a high
higher age-specific rates in all age groups. This seeming proportion of deaths is certified medically.
contradiction is due to differences in the age-composition of Table 2 illustrates how some specific death rates in
the population. The higher crude death rate in population A common use are computed :
TABllE 2
death rates
Deaths in January X 12
4. Death rate for January x 1,000.
(Note: The deaths are multiplied by 12 in order Mid-year population
to make the monthly death rate comparable
with the annual death rate)
3. Case fatality rate (Ratio) particular age-sex groups for the reduction of preventable
mortality (14). Proportional mortality rate does not indicate
Total number of deaths due the risk of members of the population contracting or dying
to a particular disease from the disease.
Total number of cases due 5. Survival rate
to the same disease
It is the proportion of survivors in a group, (e.g., of
Case fatality rate represents the killing power of a disease. patients) studied and followed over a period (e.g., a 5-year
It is simply the ratio of deaths to cases. The time interval is period). It is a method of describing prognosis in certain
not specified. Case fatality rate is typically used in acute disease conditions. Survival experience can be used as a
infectious diseases (e.g., food poisoning, cholera, measles). yardstick for the assessment of standards of therapy. The
Its usefulness for chronic diseases is limited, because the survival period is usually reckoned from the date of
period from onset to death is long and variable. The case diagnosis or start of the treatment. Survival rates have
fatality rate for the same disease may vary in different received special attention in cancer studies.
epidemics because of changes in the agent, host and
environmental factors. Case fatality is closely related to Total number of patients alive
virulence. after 5 years
Survival rate = x 100
4. Proportional mortality rate (Ratio) Total number of patients diagnosed
or treated
It is sometimes useful to know what proportion of total
deaths are due to a particular cause (e.g., cancer) or what 6. Adjusted or standardized rates
proportion of deaths are occurring in a particular age group
(e.g., above the age of 50 years). Proportional mortality rate If we want to compare the death rates of two populations
expresses the "number of deaths due to a particular cause with different age-composition, the crude death rate is not
(or in a specific age group) per 100 (or 1000) total deaths". the right yardstick. This is because, rates are only
Thus we have: comparable if the populations upon which they are based
are comparable. And it is cumbersome to use a series of age
(a) Proportional mortality from a specific disease specific death rates. The answer is "age adjustment" or "age
standardization", which removes the confounding effect of
Number of deaths from the specific disease different age structures and yields a single standardized or
in a year adjusted rate, by which the mortality experience can be
x 100 compared directly. The. adjustment can be made not only for
Total deaths from all causes in that year age but also sex, race, parity, etc. Thus one can generate
age-sex, and race-adjusted rates.
(b) Under-5 proportionate mortality rate
Standardization is carried out by one of two methods -
Number of deaths under 5 years direct or indirect standardization. Both the methods begin by
of age in the given year choosing a "standard population", not the age-structures of
the populations.
Total number of deaths during the same period
applied to the smaller study group. It gives a measure of the Three aspects of morbidity are commonly measured by
likely excess risk of mortality due to the occupation. morbidity rates or morbidity ratios, namely frequency,
duration and severity. Disease frequency is measured by
*SMR Observed deaths X lOO incidence and prevalence rates. The average duration per
Expected deaths
case or the disability rate, which is the average number of
If the ratio had value greater than 100, then the days of disability per person, may serve as a measure of the
occupation would appear to carry a greater mortality risk duration of illnesses. The case fatality rate may be used as
than that of the whole population. If the ratio had value less an index of severity (19). This section focuses on incidence
than 100, then the occupation risks of mortality would seem and prevalence rates, which are widely used to describe
to be proportionately less than that for the whole population. disease occurrence in a community.
Table 7 shows that the mortality experience of coal The value of morbidity data may be summarized as
workers was 129 per cent, which meant that their mortality follows:
was 29 per cent more than that experienced by the national
population. Values over 100 per cent represent an a. they describe the extent and nature of the disease load
unfavourable mortality experience and those below 100 per in the community, and thus assist in the establishment
cent relatively favourable mortality experience. Table 7 of priorities.
displays the calculations. b. they usually provide more comprehensive and more
accurate and clinically relevant information on patient
TABLE 7 characteristics, than can be obtained from mortality
Calculation of the SMR for coal workers data, and are therefore essential for basic research.
National
c. they serve as starting point for aetiological studies,
Coal
pcipulation workers Observed .. · Expected and thus play a crucial role in disease prevention.
Age d. they are needed for monitoring and evaluation of
death rates population deaths deaths
J:>er 1000 disease control activities.
25-34 3.0 300 * 0.9
INCIDENCE
35-44 5.0 400 * 2.0
45-54 8.0 200 * 1.6 Incidence rate is defined as "the number of NEW cases
55-64 25.0 2.5 occurring in a defined population during a specified period
100 * of time". It is given by the formula :
I 1,000 9 7.0
SMR = 9/7x100=129 Number of new cases of specific
* It is not necessary to know these values; only the total for the disease during a given time period
whole age-range is required Incidence = x 1000
Population at-risk during that period
The SMR has the advantage over the direct method of
age adjustment in that it permits adjustment for age and For example, if there had been 500 new cases of an
other factors where age-specific rates are not available or illness in a population of 30,000 in a year, the incidence rate
are unstable because of small numbers. One needs to know would be:
only the number of persons in each age group in the study 500/30,000 x 1000
population and the age-specific rates of the national 16. 7 per 1000 per year
population (or other reference population). It is possible to
use SMR if the event of interest is occurrence of disease Note: Incidence rate must include the unit of time used
rather than death. in the final expression. If you write 16. 7 per 1000, this
would be inadequate. The correct expression is 16. 7 per
2. Other standardization techniques 1000 per year (20).
(a) A more complicated method of indirect adjustment It will be seen from the above definition that incidence
which yields absolute age adjusted rate, involves the rate refers
calculation of an index death rate and a standardizing factor a. only to new cases
for each population of interest. The reader is referred to AB. b. during a given period (usually one year)
Hill's "Principles of Medical Statistics". (b) Life table is an c. in a specified population or "population at risk",
age-adjusted summary of current all-causes mortality. unless other denominators are chosen.
(c) Regression techniques: These are an efficient means of d. it can also refer to new spells or episodes of disease
standardization. (d) Multivariate analysis: A computer, using arising in a given period of time, per 1000 population.
regression or similar methods, can standardize for many For example, a person may suffer from common cold
variables simultaneously (16). more than once a year. If he had suffered twice, he
would contribute 2 spells of sickness in that year. The
MEASUREMENT OF MORBIDITY formula in this case would be:
Morbidity has been defined as "any departure, subjective Number of spells of sickness
or objective, from a state of physiological well-being" starting in a defined period
(17,18). The term is used equivalent to such terms as Incidence rate x 1000
sickness, illness, disability etc. The WHO Expert Committee (spells) Mean number of persons
on Health Statistics noted in its 6th Report (17) that exposed to risk in that period
morbidity could be measured in terms of 3 units Incidence measures the rate at which new cases are
(a) persons who were ill; (b) the illnesses (periods or spells of occurring in a population. It is not influenced by the
illness) that these persons experienced; and (c) the duration duration of the disease. The use of incidence is generally
(days, weeks, etc) of these illnesses. restricted to acute conditions.
---····---··
Special incidence rates Point prevalence is given by the formula:
Examples include: Attack rate (case rate), Secondary Number of all current cases (old and new)
attack rate, Hospital admission rate, etc. of a specified disease existing at
a given point in time
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - x 100
a. Attack rate Estimated population at the
An attack rate is an incidence rate (usually expressed as a same point in time
per cent), used only when the population is exposed to risk When the term "prevalence rate" is used, without
for a limited period of time such as during an epidemic. It any further qualification, it is taken to mean "point
relates the number of cases in the population at risk and prevalence" (17).
reflects the extent of the epidemic. Attack rate is given by the
formula: Point prevalence can be made specific for age, sex and
other relevant factors or attributes.
Number of new cases of a specified (b) Period prevalence
disease during a specified time interval
Attack rate --~~----~~---~x100
A less commonly used measure of prevalence is period
Total population at risk during the prevalence. It measures the frequency of all current cases (old
same interval and new) existing during a defined period of time (e.g.,
annual prevalence) expressed in relation to a defined
population. It includes cases arising before but extending into
b. Secondary attack rate or through to the year as well as those cases arising during the
It is defined as the number of exposed persons year (Fig. 2). Period prevalence is given by the formula:
developing the disease within the range of the incubation
Number of existing cases (old and new)
period following exposure to a primary case. (see page 100). of a specified disease during a given
period of time interval
USES OF INCIDENCE RATE x 100
The incidence rate, as a health status indicator, is useful Estimated mid-interval population at-risk
for taking action (a) to control disease, and (b) for research The terms incidence and prevalence are illustrated in
into aetiology and pathogenesis, distribution of diseases, Fig. 2
and efficacy of preventive and therapeutic measures (14).
For instance, if the incidence rate is increasing, it might case 1
indicate failure or ineffectiveness of the current control
programmes. Rising incidence rates might suggest the need
case 2 case 3
for a new disease control or preventive programme, or that
reporting practices had improved. A change or fluctuation in case 4
the incidence of disease may also mean a change in the
aetiology of disease, e.g., change in the agent, host and case 5
environmental characteristics. Analysis of differences in
incidence rates reported from various socio-economic 0-- case6
groups and geographical areas may provide useful insights
into the effectiveness of the health services provided (14). 0---+-- case 7 case 8
Jan 1 Dec31
PREVALENCE 0 Start of illness
The term "disease prevalence" refers specifically to all Duration of illness
current cases (old and new) existing at a given point in time, Incidence would include cases - 3,4,5, and 8
or over a period of time in a given population. A broader Point prevalence (Jan 1) cases - 1,2, and 7
definition of prevalence is as follows: "the total number of all Point prevalence (Dec.31) cases - 1,3,5 and 8
Period prevalence (Jan-Dec) cases - 1,2,3,4,5,7, and 8
individuals who have an attribute or disease at a particular
time (or during a particular period) divided by the FIG.2
population at risk of having the attribute or disease at this Number of cases of a disease beginning, developing and ending
point in time or midway through the period (2)". Although during a period of time
referred to as a rate, prevalence rate is really a ratio.
Relationship between prevalence and incidence
Prevalence is of two types :
Prevalence depends upon 2 factors, the incidence and
(a) Point prevalence duration of illness. Given the assumption that the population
(b) Period prevalence is stable, and incidence and duration are unchanging, the
relationship between incidence and prevalence can be
(a) Point prevalence expressed as :
Point prevalence of a disease is defined as the number of P= IxD
all current cases (old and new) of a disease at one point of incidence x mean duration
time, in relation to a defined population. The "point" in Example (for a stable condition)
point prevalence, may for all practical purposes consist of a Incidence = 10 cases per 1000 population per year
day, several days, or even a few weeks, depending upon the Mean duration of disease = 5 years
time it takes to examine the population sample (20). Prevalence = 10 x 5 50 per 1000 population
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
Conversely, it is possible to derive incidence and duration which affect the course of the disease. In other words, the
as follows: element of duration reflects the prognostic factors, and
Incidence P/D incidence reflects the causal factors. Therefore, incidence
rates should be optimally used in the formulation and testing
Duration = P/I of aetiological hypotheses. When incidence rates are not
The above equation (P Ix D) shows that the longer the available, prevalence rates (which are readily obtainable)
duration of the disease, the greater its prevalence. For may have to be used, but the contribution of duration
example, tuberculosis has a high prevalence rate relative to element always has to be assessed. ·
incidence. This is because new cases of tuberculosis keep
cropping up throughout the year, while the old ones may Uses of prevalence
persist for months or years. On the other hand, if the disease (a) Prevalence helps to estimate the magnitude of health/
is acute and of short duration either because of rapid disease problems in the community, and identify potential
recovery or death, the prevalence rate will be relatively low high-risk populations (b) Prevalence rates are especially
compared with the incidence rate. In some diseases (e.g., useful for administrative and planning purposes, e.g.,
food poisoning), the disease is so short-lived, there are no hospital beds, manpower needs, rehabilitation facilities, etc.
"old" cases. The same is true of conditions which are rapidly
fatal, such as homicides. Strictly speaking, these events have EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
no prevalence. In other words, decrease in prevalence may
take place not only from a decrease in incidence, but also The primary concern of the epidemiologist is to study
from a decrease of the duration of illness through either disease occurrence in people, who during the course of their
more rapid recovery or more rapid death. lives are exposed to numerous factors and circumstances,
When we see a change in prevalence from one time some of which may have a role in disease aetiology. Unlike
period to another, this can result from changes in incidence, the clinician or the laboratory investigator, who is able to
changes in duration of disease or both. For example, study disease conditions more precisely, the epidemiologist
improvements in treatment may decrease the duration of employs carefully designed research strategies to explore
illness and thereby decrease prevalence of a disease. But if disease aetiology.
the treatment is such that by preventing death, and at the Epidemiological studies can be classified as observational
same time not producing recovery, may give rise to the studies and experimental studies with further subdivisions :
apparently paradoxical effect of an increase in prevalence.
Further, if duration is decreased sufficiently, a decrease in 1. Observational studies
prevalence could take place despite an increase in
incidence. a. Descriptive studies
b. Analytical studies
Prevalence has been compared with a photograph, an
instantaneous record; and incidence with a film, a (i) Ecological or Correlational, with populations
continuous record. Both the terms may perhaps be better as unit of study
understood by taking into consideration a coffee house. (ii) Cross-sectional or Prevalence, with individuals
After the coffee house opens in the morning, people keep as unit of study
entering and leaving, each one remaining inside the coffee (iii) Case-control or Case-reference, with individuals
house for a short while. At any point of time, say 10 AM, we as unit of study
could go into the coffee house and count people over there. (iv) Cohort or Follow-up, with individuals
This corresponds to estimating the prevalence. The rate at as unit of study
which people enter the coffee house, say 10 people per
hour, is equivalent to the incidence. The relationship 2. Experimental studies Intervention studies
between incidence and prevalence is shown in Fig. 3 (21). a. Randomized or Clinical with patients as
controlled trials trials unit of study
b. Field trials with healthy
people as
unit of study
c. Community trials or Community with
intervention communities
studies as unit of study
Prevalence
These studies or methods cannot be regarded as
watertight compartments; they complement one another.
Observational studies allow nature to take its own course;
the investigator measures but does not intervene.
Descriptive study is limited to a description of the
Recovery/Death occurrence of a disease in a population. An analytical study
goes further by analyzing relationship between health status
FIG. 3
Relationship between incidence and prevalence
and other variables. Experimental or intervention studies
involve an active attempt to change a disease determinant
It is important to note the limitations of prevalence rate. It or the progress of a disease, and are similar in design to
is not the ideal measure for studying disease aetiology or experiments in other sciences. However, they are subject to
causation. We have seen that two factors determine extra constraints, since the health of the people in the study
prevalence, namely incidence and duration. Incidence is group may be at stake. The major experimental design is the
related to the occurrence of disease and duration to factors randomized controlled trial using patients as subjects. Field
trials and community trials are other experimental studies in The defined population needs to be large enough so that
which the participants are healthy people and community age, sex and other specific rates are meaningful. The
respectively (22). community chosen should be stable, without migration into
In all epidemiological studies, it is essential to have a or out of the area. It should be clear who does and who does
clear definition of a case of the disease being investigated not belong to the population, as for example, visitors and
and of an exposed person. In absence of clear definitions of relations. Perhaps the most· essential ingredient is
disease and exposure, great difficulties are likely to be community participation, which must be forthcoming.
experienced in interpreting the data. Furthermore, the population should not be overtly different
from other communities in the region. Finally, a health
DESCRIPTIVE EPIDEMIOLOGY facility should be close enough to provide relatively easy
access for patients requiring medical services. In the famous
The best study of mankind is man. This statement Framingham Heart Study in US, all the above criteria were
emphasizes the importance of making the best use of taken into consideration in choosing the study population.
observations on individuals or populations exposed to The concept of 'defined population' (or population at
suspected factors of disease. Meticulous observations made risk) is crucial in epidemiological studies. It provides the
in Africa by Burkitt led to the eventual incrimination of denominator for calculating rates which are essential to
Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) as the aetiological factor (possibly measure the frequency of disease and study its distribution
conditioned by other factors such as malarial infection) of and determinants. Epidemiologists therefore have been
the type of cancer known as Burkitt's lymphoma. It was the labelled as men in search of a denominator (23).
epidemiological study in New Guinea of "Kuru", a
hereditary neurological disorder, that led to the discovery of 2. Defining the disease under study
slow virus infections as the cause of chronic degenerative
neurological disorders in human beings. The list is endless. Once the population to be studied is defined or specified,
one must then define the disease or condition being
Descriptive studies are usually the first phase of an investigated. Here the needs of the clinician and
epidemiological investigation. These studies are concerned epidemiologist may diverge. The clinician may not need a
with observing the distribution of disease or health-related precise definition of disease (e.g., migraine) for immediate
characteristics in human populations and identifying the patient care. If the diagnosis is wrong, he can revise it
characteristics with which the disease in question seems to subsequently. But the epidemiologist, whose main concern
be associated. Such studies basically ask the questions. is to obtain an accurate estimate of disease in a population,
a. When is the disease occurring ? needs a definition that is both precise and valid to enable
time distribution him (or observers working in field conditions) to identify
b. Where is it occurring? those who have the disease from those who do not (9). The
- place distribution diagnostic methods for use in epidemiological studies must
be acceptable to the population to be studied, and
c. Who is getting the disease?
applicable to their use in large populations.
- person distribution
In other words, the epidemiologist looks out for an
The various procedures involved in descriptive studies "operational definition", i.e., a definition by which the
may be outlined as below (Table 8). disease or condition can be identified and measured in the
TABLE 8
defined population with a degree of accuracy. For example,
tonsillitis might be defined clinically as an inflammation of
Procedures in descriptive studies the tonsils caused by infection, usually with streptococcus
pyogenes. This definition, like many other clinical definitions
1. Defining the population to be studied (and the WHO definition of 'health') serves to convey
2. Defining the disease under study particular information, but cannot be used to measure
3. Describing the disease by disease in the community. On the other hand, an
a. time "operational definition" spells out clearly the criteria by
b. place which the disease can be measured. Such criteria in the case
c. person of tonsillitis would include the presence of enlarged, red
4. Measurement of disease tonsils with white exudate, which on throat swab culture
5. Comparing with known indices grow predominantly S. pyogenes. If the definition is not
6. Formulation of an aetiological hypothesis valid, it would be a powerful source of error in the
presentation and comparability of measurements from
1. Defining the population different sources. With regard to certain diseases (e.g.,
Descriptive studies are investigations of populations, not neurological diseases) which often do not have
individuals. The first step is, therefore, to define the pathognomonic signs and symptoms, disease definition is a
"population base" not only in terms of the total number, but crucial concern for the epidemiologist. In such cases, the
also its composition in terms of age, sex, occupation, cultural epidemiologist frames his own definition keeping the
characters and similar information needed for the study. objectives of his study in view and aiming at the same time a
The "defined population" can be the whole population in degree of accuracy sufficient for his purpose. Once
a geographic area, or more often a representative sample established, the case definition must be adhered to
taken from it. The defined population can also be a specially throughout the study.
selected group such as age and sex groups, occupational
3. Describing the disease
groups, hospital patients, school children, small
communities as well as wider groupings in fact, wherever a The primary objective of descriptive epidemiology is to
group of people can be fairly accurately counted. describe the occurrence and distribution of disease (or
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
health-related events or characteristics within populations) may suggest : (1) a time relationship with exposure to a
by time, place and person, and identifying those suspected source, (2) a cyclical or seasonal pattern
characteristics associated with presence or absence of suggestive of a particular infection, and common source or
disease in individuals. This involves systematic collection propagated spread of the disease.
and analysis of data. Some of the characteristics most A. Common-source epidemics
frequently examined by · epidemiologists in descriptive
studies are given in Table 9. It is only an initial separation or (a) Common-source, single exposure epidemics
grouping of variables according to time, place and person These are also known as "point-source" epidemics. The
and NOT a classification of causal factors. exposure to the disease agent is brief and essentially
simultaneous, the resultant cases all develop within one
TABLE 9
incubation period of the disease (e.g., an epidemic of food
Cha:·acteristics frequently examined poisoning). Fig. 4 illustrates a common-source, single
in studies exposure epidemic. The curve has usually one peak. One
point of interest is the "median incubation period", it is the
Time Place Person time required for 50 per cent of the cases to occur following
Year, season Climatic zones Age Birth order exposure.
Month, week Country, region Sex Family size
Day, hour of Urban/rural Marital Height
onset,
Duration
Local community state
Towns
Weight
Blood pressure
Blood cholesterol
-
...0
())
.D
Personal habits E
;::l Exposure
z
TIME DISTRIBUTION ....___l~"-------__.,,___
The pattern of disease may be described by the time of its Time
occurrence, i.e., by week, month, year, the day of the week, FIG. 4
hour of onset, etc. It raises questions whether the disease is Source: (3) Epidemic curve
seasonal in occurrence; whether it shows periodic increase The main features of a "point-source" epidemic are :
or decrease; or whether it follows a consistent time trend. (i) the epidemic curve rises and falls rapidly, with no
Such studies may yield important clues about the source or secondary waves (ii) the epidemic tends to be explosive,
aetiology of the disease, thereby suggesting potential there is clustering of cases within a narrow interval of time,
preventive measures. Epidemiologists have identified three and (iii) more importantly, all the cases develop within one
kinds of time trends or fluctuations in disease occurrence. incubation period of disease.
I. Short-term fluctuations Common-source epidemics are frequently, but not
IL Periodic fluctuations, and always, due to exposure to an infectious agent. They can
III. Long-term or secular trends result from contamination of the environment (air, water,
food, soil) by industrial chemicals or pollutants, e.g., Bhopal
L Short-term fluctuation§ gas tragedy in India and Minamata disease in Japan
The best known short-term fluctuation in the occurrence resulting from consumption of fish containing high
of a disease is an epidemic. According to modern concepts concentration of methyl mercury.
an epidemic is defined as "the occurrence in a community or If the epidemic continues over more than one incubation
region of cases of an illness or other health-related events period, there is either a continuous or multiple exposure to a
clearly in excess of normal expectancy". The community or common source, or a propagated spread.
region, and the time period in which the cases occur, are
specified precisely. Epidemicity is thus relative to usual (b) Common-source, continuous or repeated exposure
frequency of the disease in the same area, among the Sometimes the exposure from the same source may be
specified population, at the same season of the year (2). The prolonged - continuous, repeated or intermittent - not
data in Table 10 illustrates this point. · necessarily at the same time or place. A prostitute may be a
common source in a gonorrhoea outbreak, but since she will
Types of epidemics infect her clients over a period of time there may be no
Three major types of epidemics may be distinguished. explosive rise in the number of cases. A well of
A. Common-source epidemics contaminated water, or a nationally distributed brand of
(a) Single exposure or "point-source" epidemics. vaccine (e.g. polio vaccine), or food, could result in similar
outbreaks. In these instances, the resulting epidemics tend to
(b) Continuous or multiple exposure epidemics
be more extended or irregular. The outbreak of respiratory
B. Propagated epidemics illness, the Legionnaire's disease, in the summer of 1976 in
(a) Person-to-person Philadelphia (USA) was a common-source, continuous or
(b) Arthropod vector repeated exposure outbreak. This outbreak, as in other
(c) Animal reservoir outbreaks of this type, continued beyond the range of one
C. Slow (modern) epidemics. incubation period. There was no evidence of secondary
cases among persons who had contact with ill persons (24).
A graph of the time distribution of epidemic cases is
called the "epidemic curve" (Fig. 4). The epidemic curve A variation to the above model is that an epidemic may
TIME DISTRIBUTION
be initiated from a common source and then continue as a Some epidemiologists would regard seasonal trend as a form
propagated epidemic. Water-borne cholera is a familiar of cyclic trend. Table 10 shows a typical pattern of seasonal
example, the epidemic reaches a sharp peak, but tails off trend, the outbreaks of dengue/OF starting by month of
gradually over a longer period of time. July and peaking in September, October and November,
coinciding with late summer and rain.
B. Propagated epidemics
TABLE 10
A propagated epidemic is most often of infectious origin Seasonal trend of dengue/DHF in India 2005-2007
and results from person-to-person transmission of an
infectious agent (e.g., epidemics of hepatitis A and polio). 2005 2006 2007
The epidemic usually shows a gradual rise and tails off over 151 281 83
a much longer period of time. Transmission continues until 80 193 64
the number of susceptibles is depleted or susceptible 59 178 46
individuals are no longer exposed to infected persons or 68 166 50
intermediary vectors. The speed of spread depends upon May 172 181 127
herd immunity, opportunities for contact and secondary June 130 269 175
attack rate. Propagated epidemics are more likely to occur July 742 478 487
where large number of susceptibles are aggregated, or where
August 946 577 487
there is a regular supply of new susceptible individuals {e.g.,
birth, immigrants) lowering herd immunity. Fig. 5 illustrates September 4,852 1,275 974
the course of a typical propagated epidemic in which the October 2,482 5,880 1,507
agent is transmitted by contact between individuals. November 1,507 1,934 802
December 801 905 221
II. Periodic fluctuations
{i) Seasonal trend : Seasonal variation is a well-known
characteristic of many communicable diseases, e.g., measles, Source : (25)
varicella, cerebro-spinal meningitis, upper respiratory {ii) Cyclic trend : Some diseases occur in cycles spread
infections, malaria, etc. For example, measles is usually at its over short periods of time which may be days, weeks,
height in early spring and so is varicella. Upper respiratory months or years. For example, measles in the pre-
infections frequently show a seasonal rise during winter vaccination era appeared in cycles with major peaks every
months. Bacterial gastrointestinal infections are prominent in 2-3 years and rubella every 6-9 years. This was due to
summer months because of warm weather and rapid naturally occurring variations in herd immunity. A build-up
multiplication of flies. The seasonal variations of disease of susceptibles is again required in the "herd" before there
occurrence may be related to environmental conditions (e.g., can be another attack. Influenza pandemics are known to
temperature, humidity, rainfall, overcrowding, life cycle of occur at intervals of 7-10 years, due to antigenic variations.
vectors, etc.) which directly or indirectly favour disease Non-infectious conditions may also show periodic
transmission. However, in many infectious diseases (e.g., fluctuations, e.g., automobile accidents in US are more
polio), the basis for seasonal variation is unknown. Non- frequent on week-ends, especially Saturdays. A knowledge
infectious diseases and .conditions may sometimes exhibit of cyclicity of disease is useful in that it may enable
seasonal variation, e.g., sunstroke, hay fever, snakebite. communities to defend themselves.
I Wd3J
Infected person
Susceptible population 0 who infects others
~ Immune population
FIG. 5
• Infected person who
fails to infect others
----·--------------·----- -----·---·---
DISTRIBUTION
FIG. 6
Spot map of Asiatic cholera in London
findings, Snow was able to hypothesize that cholera was a hypotheses. The clinician is also benefited from knowledge
water-borne disease, long before the birth of bacteriology. It that a patient comes to him from a certain geographic area
was by a spot map by "place of employment" Maxcy which is endemic for certain infrequent diseases such as
hypothesized a rodent reservoir for typhus fever in 1920s yaws or leishmaniasis, as it helps him to focus attention on
which led to the discovery that typhus fever was not a single these diseases to which the patient may have been exposed.
disease entity, as it was earlier thought. Also, the evidence of The geographic distribution of disease may change, if
case clustering based on sexual contact or blood product use changes occur in the agent, host and environmental factors.
provided the clue that AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency The empires of malaria, plague and many other diseases
Syndrome) was an infectious disease. have shrunk due to changes in the epidemiological triad. On
In short the geographic differences in disease occurrence the other hand, since 1961 cholera has shown an increasing
is an important dimension of a descriptive study. These geographic distribution due to changes in the disease agent.
differences are determined by the agent, host and Since the mode of living and environmental factors vary
environmental factors. The classic example of place-related from country to country, one would expect to find differences
diseases include yellow fever, schistosomiasis, sleeping in the geographic distribution and frequency of disease.
sickness and endemic goitre. There have also been studies
on asthma, cancer, cardiovascular diseases, blood groups Migration studies
and abnormal haemoglobins by geographic location. In Large scale migration of human populations from one
short, all diseases whether acute or chronic, communicable country to another provides a unique opportunity to
or non-communicable, show definite patterns of geographic evaluate the role of the possible genetic and environmental
distribution. factors in the occurrence of disease in a population.
The epidemiologist is interested in geographic variations Supposing there are marked geographic differences in the
in disease occurrence. Geographic distribution may provide occurrence of a disease in two areas, area "/\' and area "B".
evidence of the source of disease and its mode of spread. By Let us assume that the environments in these two places are
relating these variations to agent, host and environmental very different. The question arises whether the
factors, he tries to derive clues to the source of disease and environmental differences in the two areas account for the
its mode of spread to formulate and test aetiological variations in the occurrence of the disease in question.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
Ideally, samples of population in area "Pt should be sent age groups, it implies that all age groups are equally
to area "B", and vice versa to study change in incidence of susceptible, and there was no previous immunity. Many
disease. In human populations this is hardly possible, so we chronic and degenerative diseases (e.g., cancer) show a
restrict our study to observation of changes in disease progressive increase in prevalence with advancing age. This
frequency among migrants. may reflect a persistent and cumulative exposure to a causal
Migrant studies can be carried out in two ways : agent or risk factor (12).
(a) comparison of disease and death rates for migrants Bimodality : Sometimes there may be two separate peaks
with those of their kin who have stayed at home. This instead of one in the age incidence curve of a disease as in
permits study of genetically similar groups but living under the case of Hodgkin's disease, leukaemia, and female breast
different environmental conditions or exposures. If the cancer. This phenomenon is known as bimodality. Fig. 7
disease and death rates in migrants are similar to country of shows the age incidence curve for Hodgkin's disease in
adoption over a period of time, the likely explanation would USA (29). The curve is bimodal with an initial peak between
be change in the environment. A special case is the use of the ages 15 and 35 years, and a later peak starting at age
twins who have been exposed to different environments of 50. Bimodality is of special interest to epidemiologists. It
migration. indicates that the study material is not homogeneous, and
that two distinct sets of causal factors might be operative,
(b) comparison of migrants with local population of the even though the clinical and pathological manifestations of
host country provides information on genetically different the disease are the same at all ages.
groups living in a similar environment. If the migration rates
of disease and death are similar to the country of origin, the
7
likely explanation would be the genetic factors.
6
Migrant studies have shown that men of Japanese
ancestry living in USA experience a higher rate of coronary 5
heart disease than do the Japanese in Japan (27). Taking .._o
UJO
another example, Japan has a higher rate for stomach ,_ o_ 4
cancer and a lower rate for colon cancer than the United ;ii8
r-1 3
States has. However, third-generation descendants of 2
Japanese immigrants to USA have rates of stomach and
colon cancer like those of the total US population. These 1
studies suggest that as the Japanese were probably adopting 0
the American way of life, their susceptibility to coronary 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
heart disease, gastric and colonic cancer was moving in the
direction of that found in the Americans. Further, migrant AGE
studies may also indicate the duration of residence FIG. 7
necessary to acquire susceptibility to the disease in question Bimodality in Hodgkin's disease
by comparing groups that left home at different ages. However, there are two points relating to bimodality
Studies of this kind provide a basis for further studies of which make their interpretation difficult : (a) small numbers
specific environmental factors to which the migrants may of observations are a. frequent source of bimodality; (b) the
have been exposed or of changes in their habits of life that absence of bimodality does not signify that data have come
may be of aetiological importance. from a homogeneous source.
Migrant studies suffer from the usual defects of (b) Sex : Sex is another host characteristic which is often
observational studies, deriving from lack of random studied in relation to disease, using such indices as sex-ratio,
assignment to the groups under observation. Migrants may sex-specific morbidity and mortality rates. It has been found
be self-selected in that fit, vigorous and perhaps the that certain chronic diseases such as diabetes,
temperamentally unstable are more likely to migrate (28). hyperthyroidism and obesity are strikingly more common in
The environmental factors may only act at a certain critical women than in men, and diseases such as lung cancer and
point or at a certain specific age. If the incubation period of coronary heart disease are less frequent in women.
the disease is very long, migrants may not show any Variations in disease frequency between sexes have been
increased incidence or mortality from the disease for many ascribed to (a) basic biological differences between the sexes,
years. including sex-linked genetic inheritance, and (b) cultural
PERSON DISTRIBUTION and behavioural differences between the sexes (e.g.,
smoking, automobile use, alcoholism) due to different roles
In descriptive studies, the disease is further characterized in social setting. In fact, it is the 4: 1 male to fem ale ratio in
by defining the persons who develop the disease by age, lung cancer that has helped to identify cigarette smoking as a
sex, occupation, martial status, habits, social class and other causal factor. Even larger differences exist in, for example,
host factors. These factors do not necessarily represent duodenal ulcer and coronary heart disease, that are as yet
aetiological factors, but they contribute a good deal to our unexplained (30).
understanding of the natural history of disease. Some of the (c) Ethnicity: Differences in disease occurrence have been
host factors basic to epidemiological studies (Table 9) are noted between population subgroups of different racial and
discussed below. ethnic ongm. These include tuberculosis, essential
(a) Age : Age is strongly related to disease than any other hypertension, coronary heart disease, cancer, and sickle cell
single host factor. Certain diseases are more frequent in anaemia. These differences, whether they are related to
certain age groups than in others, e.g., measles in childhood, genetic or environmental factors, have been a stimulus to
cancer in middle age and atherosclerosis in old age. If the further studies.
attack rate of a communicable disease is uniform in all the (d) Marital status : In countries where studies on mortality
in relation to marital status have been conducted, it was areas these diseases have created a serious problem in
found that mortality rates were always lower for married urban areas also.
males and females than for the unmarried, of the same age Human movement may be classified (i) as short-term,
and sex. According to demographers and sociologists, the long-term, and permanent (ii) according to age, sex,
reason for this phenomenon may be found in the fact that education, occupation, (iii) internal or external (iv) urban
marriages are selective with respect to the health status of versus rural, etc. Migration has presented challenge to
persons, for those who are healthy are more likely to get control/prevention of disease.
married, with the result that the risk of dying is also less.
Besides, married persons are generally more secure and To sum up, a study of the host factors in relation to
protected and they usually lead a more sober life than those disease occurrence is an important dimension of descriptive
who are unmarried. All these factors are thought to epidemiology. Variations in the distribution of disease in
contribute to lower mortality rates among married persons. age, sex, occupation and other subgroups of the population
can be the starting point for an epidemiological enquiry
Marital status can be a risk factor for some diseases and leading to formulation of an aetiological hypothesis for
conditions. The observation that cancer cervix is rare in nuns
further study. Knowledge of the frequency of disease in
led to the hypothesis regarding marital status and cancer
subgroups of the population has also generated the concept
cervix. Further studies led to the suggestion that cancer
of "high risk groups".
cervix may be associated with multiple sexual contacts and
promiscuity. This in turn raised the possibility of a possi_ble 4. Measurement of disease
infectious agent transmitted venereally. Although the viral
aetiology of cancer cervix is not yet proved, this chain of It is mandatory to have a clear picture of the amount of
thinking serves to illustrate how an observation can be a disease ("disease load") in the population. This information
starting point of an epidemiological enquiry. should be available in terms of mortality, morbidity, disability
and so on, and should preferably be available for different
(e) Occupation : It is now well recognized that man's subgroups of the population. Measurement of mortality is
occupation from which he earns his livelihood has an straightforward. Morbidity has two aspects - incidence and
important bearing on his health status. Occupation may alter
prevalence (see page 60, 61). Incidence can be obtained from
the habit pattern of employees e.g., sleep, alcohol, smoking,
"longitudinal" studies, and prevalence from "cross-sectional"
drug addiction, night shifts etc. It is obvious that persons
studies. Descriptive epidemiology may use a cross-sectional
working in particular occupations are exposed to particular
or longitudinal design to obtain estimates of magnitude of
types of risks. For instance, while workers in coal mines are
health and disease problems in human populations.
more likely to suffer from silicosis, those in sedentary
occupations face the risk of heart disease. Cross-sectional studies
(f) Social class : Epidemiological studies have shown that Cross-sectional study is the simplest form of an
health and diseases are not equally distributed in social observational study. It is based on a single examination of a
classes. Individuals in the upper social classes have a longer cross-section of population at one point in time - the results
life expectancy and better health and nutritional status than of which can be projected on the whole population provided
those in the lower social classes. Certain diseases (e.g., the sampling has been done correctly. Cross-sectional study
coronary heart disease, hypertension, diabetes) have shown is also known as "prevalence study".
a higher prevalence in upper classes than in the lower
classes. Social class differences have also been observed in Cross-sectional studies are more useful for chronic than
mental illness and utilization of medical and health care short-lived diseases. For example, in a study of hypertension,
services. we can also collect data during the survey about age, sex,
physical exercise, body weight, salt intake and other
However, there is one snag. Social classification varies variables of interest. Then we can determine how prevention
from country to country. It has different meanings for of hypertension is related to certain variables simultaneously
different persons. Therefore associations of disease with measured. Such a study tells us about the distribution of a
social class vary according to one's concept of social class. disease in population rather than its aetiology.
Consequently, it is difficult to compare the results of studies
in which social class has been used differently by different The most common reason that epidemiologist examines
investigators (30). the inter-relationships between a disease, or one of its
precursors, and other variables is to attempt to establish a
(g) Behaviour : Human behaviour is increasingly looked causal chain and so give lead to possible ways of preventing
upon as a risk factor in modern-day diseases such as
that disease. A point which must be stressed is that the time
coronary heart disease, cancer, obesity and accidents. The
sequence which is essential to the concept of causativity
behavioural factors which have attracted the greatest
cannot be deduced from cross-sectional data. However,
attention are cigarette smoking, sedentary life, over-eating
frequently there is evidence that permits ranking of events to
and drug abuse. To this must be added the mass movement
form such a sequence. That is, the distribution patterns may
of people, such as occurs in pilgrimages, which lends
suggest causal hypothesis which can be tested by analytical
themselves to the transmission of infectious diseases such as
studies. Although a cross-sectional study provides
cholera and diarrhoeal diseases, insect-borne and sexually
information about disease prevalence, it provides very little
transmitted diseases.
information about the natural history of disease or about the
(h) Stress : Stress has been shown to affect a variety of rate of occurrence of new cases (incidence).
variables related to patients response, e.g., susceptibility to
disease, exacerbation of symptoms, compliance with Longitudinal studies
medical regimen, etc. There is an increasing emphasis on the value of
(i) Migration : In India diseases like leprosy, filaria and longitudinal studies in which observations are repeated in
malaria are considered to be rural problems. However, the same population over a prolonged period of time by
because of the movement of people from rural to urban means of follow-up examinations. Cross-sectional studies
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
have been likened to a photograph, and longitudinal studies existence of a possible causal association between a factor
to a cine film. Longitudinal studies are useful (i) to study the and a disease is usually recognized in descriptive studies.
natural history of disease and its future outcome {ii) for Thus, if the disease is observed to be more frequent in a
identifying risk factors of disease, and (iii) for finding out particular group than in others, hypotheses are formulated to
incidence rate or rate of occurrence of new cases of disease explain the increased frequency (c) provide background data
in the community. Longitudinal studies provide valuable for planning, organizing and evaluating preventive and
information which the cross-sectional studies may not curative services, and (d) they contribute to research by
provide, but longitudinal studies are difficult to organize and describing variations in disease occurrence by time, place
more time-consuming than cross-sectional studies. and person.
Measurement can also be extended to health states and
events. For example, the study of blood pressure levels in a ANALYTICAL EPIDEMIOLOGY
population will reveal the normal values, rather than
abnormal ones related to disease. Analytical studies are the second major type of
epidemiological studies. In contrast to descriptive studies
5. Comparing with known indices that look at entire populations, in analytical studies, the
subject of interest is the individual within the population.
The essence of epidemiology is to make comparisons and
The object is not to formulate, but to test hypotheses.
ask questions. By making comparisons between different
Nevertheless, although individuals are evaluated in
populations, and subgroups of the same population, it is
analytical studies, the inference is not to individuals, but to
possible to arrive at clues to disease aetiology. We can also
identify or define groups which are at increased risk for the population from which they are selected.
certain diseases. Analytical studies comprise two distinct types of
observational studies :
6. Formulation of a hypothesis
a. case control study
By studying the distribution of disease, and utilizing the
techniques of descriptive epidemiology, it is often possible to b. cohort study.
formulate hypotheses relating to disease aetiology. A From each of these study designs, one can determine :
hypothesis is a supposition, arrived at from observation or
reflection. It can be accepted or rejected, using the a. whether or not a statistical association exists
techniques of analytical epidemiology. An epidemiological between a disease and a suspected factor; and
hypothesis should specify the following (12) : b. if one exists, the strength of the Association.
a. the population the characteristics of the persons to A schematic design of case control and cohort studies is
whom the hypothesis applies shown in Fig. 8.
b. the specific cause being considered Design of a Case Control Study
c. the expected outcome - the disease
TIME
d. the dose-response relationship - the amount of the
cause needed to lead to a stated incidence of the Direction of inquiry
effect
Start with:
e. the time-response relationship the time period that
will elapse between exposure to the cause and Cases
(people with disease)
observation of the effect. I Not exposed I
In other words, a hypothesis should be formulated in a
manner that it can be tested taking into consideration the
above elements. In practice, the components of a hypothesis
Controls
are often less well-defined. (people without
For example : disease)
"Cigarette smoking causes lung cancer" - is an
incomplete hypothesis. Design of a Cohort Study
An improved formulation
"The smoking of 30-40 cigarettes per day causes lung
cancer in 10 per cent of smokers after 20 years of
exposure"
The improved formulation suggests data needed to test
the hypothesis, i.e., the number of cigarettes smoking per
day, years of exposure, and so on. The success or failure of a People
research project frequently depends upon the soundness of without
the hypothesis (12). the disease
relationship of smoking and myocardial infarction and (b) Age could be a confounding variable. Supposing, we
chooses bladder cancer cases as controls, the relationship are investigating the relationship between steroid
between smoking and myocardial infarction may not have contraceptive and breast cancer. If the women taking these
been demonstrated. Therefore, great care must be taken contraceptives were younger than those in the comparison
when using other patients as comparison subjects, for they group, they would necessarily be at lower risk of breast
differ in many ways from a normal healthy population. cancer since this disease becomes increasingly common with
Ideally the controls should have undergone the same increasing age. This "confounding" effect of age can be
diagnostic work-up as cases, but have been found to be neutralized by matching so that both the groups have an
negative. But this may not be acceptable to most controls equal proportion of each age group. In other words,
(ii) RELATIVES : The controls may also be taken up from matching protects against an unexpected strong association
relatives (spouses and siblings). Sibling controls are between the matching factor (e.g., age) and the disease
unsuitable where genetic conditions are under study. (e.g., breast cancer). In a similar fashion other confounding
(iii) NEIGHBOURHOOD CONTROLS : The controls may be variables will have to be matched.
drawn from persons living in the same locality as cases,
While matching it should be borne in mind that the
persons working in the same factory or children attending
suspected aetiological factor or the variable we wish to
the same school. (iv) GENERAL POPULATION : Population
measure should not be matched, because by matching, its
controls can be obtained from defined geographic areas, by
aetiological role is eliminated in that study. The cases and
taking a random sample of individuals free of the study
controls will then become automatically alike with respect to
disease. We must use great care in the selection of controls
to be certain that they accurately reflect the population that that factor. In the above example, it would be useless to
is free of the disease of interest. match cases and controls on steroid contraceptive use; by
doing so, the aetiological role of steroid contraceptive
How many controls are needed ? If many cases are cannot be investigated.
available, and large study is contemplated, and if the cost to
collect case and control is about equal, then one tends to There are several kinds of matching procedures. One is
use one control for each case. If the study group is small (say group matching. This may be done by assigning cases to
under 50) as many as 2,3, or even 4 controls can be selected sub-categories (strata) based on their characteristics (e.g.,
for each study subject. age, occupation, social class) and then establishing
appropriate controls. The frequency distribution of the
To sum up, selection of proper cases and controls is matched variable must be similar in study and comparison
crucial to the interpretation of the results of case control groups. Matching is also done by pairs. For example, for
studies. Some investigators select cases from one source and each case, a control is chosen which can be matched quite
controls from more than one source to avoid the influence of closely. Thus, if we have a 50 year old mason with a
"selection bias". Such studies are recommended by particular disease, we will search for 50 year old mason
epidemiologists. It is also desired to conduct more than one without the disease as a control. Thus one can obtain pairs
case control study, preferably in different geographic areas. of patients and controls of the same sex, age, duration and
If the findings are consistent, it serves to increase the validity severity of illness, etc. But there may be great difficulties in
(i.e., accuracy) of the inferences. Failure to select obtaining cases and controls matched on all characteristics,
comparable controls can introduce "bias" into results of case and it may be necessary to wait a considerable period of
control studies and decrease the confidence one can place in time before obtaining a sufficient number of matched pairs.
the findings. Therefore, some leeway is necessary in matching for
variables (32, 33). It should be noted that if matching is
2. Matching overdone, it may be difficult to find controls. Further with
The controls may differ from the cases in a number of excess zeal in matching, there may be a tendency to reduce
factors such as age, sex, occupation, social status, etc. An the odds ratio.
important consideration is to ensure comparability between
cases and controls. This involves what is known as 3. Measurement of exposure
"matching". Matching is defined as the process by which we Definitions and criteria about exposure (or variables
select controls in such a way that they are similar to cases which may be of aetiological importance) are just as
with regard to certain pertinent selected variables (e.g., age) important as those used to define cases and controls.
which are known to influence the outcome of disease and Information about exposure should be obtained in precisely
which, if not adequately matched for comparability, could the same manner both for cases and controls. This may be
distort or confound the results. A "confounding factor" is obtained by interviews, by questionnaires or by studying
defined as one which is associated both with exposure and past records of cases such as hospital records, employment
disease, and is distributed unequally in study and control records, etc. It is important to recognize that when case
groups. More specifically a "confounding factor" is one that, control studies are being used to test associations, the most
although associated with "exposure" under investigation, is important factor to be considered, even more important
itself, independently of any such association, a "risk factor" than the P. values obtained, is the question of "bias" or
for the disease. Two examples are cited to explain systematic error which must be ruled out (see page 73).
confounding.
(a) In the study of the role of alcohol in the aetiology of 4. Analysis
oesophageal cancer, smoking is a confounding factor The final step is analysis, to find out ·
because (i) it is associated with the consumption of alcohol
and (ii) it is an independent risk factor for oesophageal (a) Exposure rates among cases and controls to
cancer. In these conditions, the effects of alcohol suspected factor
consumption can be determined only if the influence of (b) Estimation of disease risk associated with exposure
smoking is neutralized by matching (31). (Odds ratio)
CASE CONTROL STUDY
after Dr. Joseph Berkeson who recognized this problem. The 7 young women ( 15 to 22 years) born in one Boston
bias arises because of the different rates of admission to hospital between 1966 and 1969. The apparent "time
hospitals for people with different diseases (i.e., hospital clustering" of cases 7 occurring within 4 years at a single
cases and controls). (e) Interviewer's bias : Bias may also hospital - led to this enquiry. An eighth case occurred in
occur when the interviewer knows the hypothesis and also 1969 in a 20 year old patient who was treated at another
knows who the cases are. This prior information may lead Boston hospital in USA.
him to question the cases more thoroughly than controls The cause of this tumor was investigated by a case control
regarding a positive history of the suspected causal factor. A study in 1971 to find out the factors that might be associated
useful check on this kind of bias can be made by noting the with this tumor. As this was a rare disease, for each case, four
length of time taken to interview the average case and the matched controls were put up. The controls were identified
average control. This type of bias can be eliminated by from the birth records of the hospital in which each case was
double-blinding (see page 83). born. Female births occurring closest in time to each patient
Advantages and disadvantages were selected as controls. Information was collected by
personal interviews regarding (a) maternal age (b) maternal
Table 13 summarizes the advantages and disadvantages smoking {c) antenatal radiology, and (d) diethyl-stilbestrol
of case control studies. {DES) exposure in foetal life. The results of the study are
TABLE 13 shown in Table 14 which shows that cases differed
· Advantages and disadvantages of case control studies significantly from the controls in their past history. Seven of
the eight cases had been exposed to DES in foetal life. This
ADVANTAGES drug had been given to their mothers during the first
1. Relatively easy to carry out. trimester of pregnancy to prevent possible miscarriage. But
2. Rapid and inexpensive (compared with cohort studies). none of the mothers in the control group had received DES.
3. Require comparatively few subjects. Since this study, more cases have been reported and the
4. Particularly suitable to investigate rare diseases or diseases association with DES has been confirmed. The case control
about which little is known. But a disease which is rare in the method played a critical role in revealing exposure to DES
general population (e.g., leukaemia in adolescents) may not
be rare in special exposure group (e.g. prenatal X-rays). in utero as the cause of vaginal adenocarcinoma in the
5. No risk to subjects. exposed child 10-20 years later.
6. Allows the study of several different aetiological factors (e.g., TABLE 14 ·
smoking, physical activity and personality characteristics in Association between maternal DES therapy and
myocardial infarction).
7. Risk factors can be identified. Rational prevention and adenocarcinoma of vagina amongst female offspring
control programmes can be established. '-'-~--•:-- Controls Significance
i1 ............... """' ......... 1;1 Cases
8. No attrition problems, because case control studies do not acquired (8) (32) level
require follow-up of individuals into the future. retrospectively
9. Ethical problems minimal.
DISADVANTAGES Maternal age 26.1 29.3 n.s.
1. Problems of bias relies on memory or past records, the Maternal smoking 7 21 n.s.
accuracy of which may be uncertain; validation of Antenatal radiology 1 4 n.s.
information obtained is difficult or sometimes impossible. Oestrogen exposure 7 P<0.00001
2. Selection of an appropriate control group may be difficult.
Source : (26)
3. We cannot measure incidence, and can only estimate the
relative risk. Example 2: Oral contraceptives and thromboembolic
4. Do not distinguish between causes and associated factors. disease (46,47).
5. Not suited to the evaluation of therapy or prophylaxis of
disease. By August 1965, the British Committee on Safety of
6. Another major concern is the representativeness of cases and Drugs had received 249 reports of adverse reactions and 16
controls. reports of death in women taking oral contraceptives. It
became apparent that epidemiological studies were needed
Source : (35,36) to determine whether women who took oral contraceptives
Examples of case control studies were at greater risk of developing thromboembolic disease.
Case control studies have provided much of the current In 1968 and 1969, Vassey and Doll reported the findings
base of knowledge in epidemiology. Some of the early case of their case control studies in which they interviewed
control studies centred round cigarette smoking and lung women who had been admitted to hospitals with venous
cancer (34,37,38). Other studies include: maternal smoking thrombosis or pulmonary embolism without medical cause
and congenital malformations (39), radiation and leukaemia and compared the history with that obtained from other
(40), oral contraceptive use and hepatocellular adenoma women who had been admitted to the same hospital with
(41), herpes simplex and Bell palsy (42), induced abortion other diseases and who were matched for age, marital status
and spontaneous abortion (43), physical activity and and parity.
coronary death (44), artificial sweeteners and bladder It was found that out of 84, 42 {50%) of those with
cancer (45), etc. venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism had been
A few studies are cited in detail : using oral contraceptives, compared with 14% of controls
{Table 15). The studies confirmed that taking the pill and
qample 1: Adenocarcinoma of vagina (26). having pulmonary embolism co-existed more frequently
An excellent example of a case control study is than would be expected by chance. The relative risk of users
adenocarcinoma of the vagina in young women. It is not to non-users was 6.3:1. That is, the investigators found that
only a rare disease, but also the usual victim is over 50 years users of oral contraceptives were about 6 times as likely as
of age. There was an unusual occurrence of this tumor in non-users to develop thromboembolic disease.
the incidence rate of the disease in both the groups is cancer in uranium miners, study of the mortality experience
determined. If it is found that the incidence of the disease in of groups of physicians in relation to their probable
the exposed group, a/(a+b) is significantly higher than in the exposure to radiation (53,54,55). More recently,
non-exposed group, c/(c+d), it would suggest that the angiosarcoma of the liver, a very rare disease, has been
disease and suspected cause are associated. Since the reported in excess frequency in relation to poly-vinyl
approach is prospective, that is, studies are planned to chloride (56). This association was picked up only because
observe events that have not yet occurred, cohort studies of the retrospective cohort design. Retrospective cohort
are frequently referred to as "prospective" studies. studies are generally more economical and produce results
A well-designed cohort study is considered the most more quickly than prospective cohort studies.
reliable means of showing an association between a suspected 3. Combination of retrospective and prospective
risk factor and subsequent disease because it eliminates many cohort studies
of the problems of the case control study and approximates
the experimental model of the physical sciences. In this type of study, both the retrospective and
prospective elements are combined. The cohort is identified
Types of cohort studies from past records, and is assessed of date for the outcome.
Three types of cohort studies have been distinguished The same cohort is followed up prospectively into future for
on the basis of the time of occurrence of disease in relation further assessment of outcome.
to the time at which the investigation is initiated and Court-Brown and Doll (1957) applied this approach to
continued: study the effects of radiation. They assembled a cohort in
1. Prospective cohort studies 1955 consisting of 13,352 patients who had received large
2. Retrospective cohort studies, and doses of radiation therapy for ankylosing spondylitis between
1934 and 1954. The outcome evaluated was death from
3. A combination of retrospective and prospective cohort leukaemia or aplastic anaemia between 1935 and 1954.
studies. They found that the death rate from leukaemia or aplastic
1. Prospective cohort studies anaemia was substantially higher in their cohort than that of
the general population. A prospective component was added
A prospective cohort study (or "current" cohort study) is to the study and the cohort was followed, as established in
one in which the outcome (e.g., disease) has not yet 1955, to identify deaths occurring in subsequent years (57).
occurred at the time the investigation begins. Most
prospective studies begin in the present and continue into ELEMENTS OF A COHORT STUDY
future. For example, the long-term effects of exposure to
uranium was evaluated by identifying a group of uranium The elements of a cohort study are :
miners and a comparison group of individuals not exposed 1. Selection of study subjects
to uranium mining and by assessing subsequent
2. Obtaining data on exposure
development of lung cancer in both the groups. The principal
finding was that the uranium miners had an excess frequency 3. Selection of comparison groups
of lung cancer compared to non-miners. Since the disease 4. Follow-up, and
had not yet occurred when the study was undertaken, this 5. Analysis.
was a prospective cohort design. The US Public Health
Service's Framingham Heart Study (49), Doll and Hills (50) 1. Selection of study subjects
prospective study on smoking and lung cancer, and study of The subjects of a cohort study are usually assembled in
oral contraceptives and health by the Royal College of one of two ways - either from general population or select
General Practitioners (51) are examples of this type of study. groups of the population that can be readily studied (e.g.,
persons with different degrees of exposure to the suspected
2. Retrospective cohort studies causal factor).
A retrospective cohort study (or "historical" cohort study) (a) General population : When the exposure or cause of
is one in which the outcomes have all occurred before the death is fairly frequent in the population, cohorts may be
start of the investigation. The investigator goes back in time, assembled from the general population, residing in well-
sometimes 10 to 30 years, to select his study groups from defined geographical, political and administrative areas
existing records of past employment, medical or other (e.g., Framingham Heart Study). If the population is very
records and traces them forward through time, from a past large, an appropriate sample is taken, so that the results can
date fixed on the records, usually up to the present. This be generalized to the population sampled. The exposed and
type of study is known by a variety of names : retrospective unexposed segments of the population to be studied should
cohort study, "historical" cohort study, prospective study in be representative of the corresponding segments of the
retrospect and non-concurrent prospective study. general population.
The successful application of this approach is illustrated (b) Special groups : These may be special groups or
in one study undertaken in 1978 a cohort of 17 ,080 exposure groups that can readily be studied : (i) Select
babies born between January 1, 1969 and December 31, groups : These may be professional groups (e.g., doctors,
1975 at a Boston hospital were investigated of the effects of nurses, lawyers, teachers, civil servants), insured persons,
electronic foetal monitoring during labour. The outcome obstetric population, college alumni, government
measured was neonatal death. The study showed that the employees, volunteers, etc. These groups are usually a
neonatal death rate was 1. 7 times higher in unmonitored homogeneous population. Doll's prospective study on
infants (52). The most notable retrospective cohort studies smoking and lung cancer was carried out on British doctors
to date are those of occupational exposures, because the listed in the Medical Register of the UK in 1951 (58) . The
recorded information is easily available, e.g., study of the study by Dorn on smoking and mortality in 293,658
role of arsenic in human carcinogenesis, study of lung veterans (i.e., former military service) in United States
having life insurance policies is another example of a study TABLE 17
based on special groups (59). These groups are not only Age standardized death rates per 100,000 men per year
homogeneous, but they also offer advantages of accessibility amount of current
and easy follow-up for a protracted period (ii) Exposure
groups : If the exposure is rare, a more economical Classification of
No. of deaths Death rate
procedure is to select a cohort of persons known to have
experienced the exposure. In other words, cohorts may be 1/2 pack 24 95.2
selected because of special exposure to physical, chemical 1/2-1 pack 84 107.8
and other disease agents. A readily accessible source of 1-2 packs 90 229.2
these groups is workers in industries and those employed in 2 packs+ 97 264.2
high-risk situations (e.g., radiologists exposed to X-rays). ---------------
Source : (5)
When cohorts have been selected because of special
exposure, it facilitates classification of cohort members (b) External comparisons
according to the degree or duration of exposure to the When information on degree of exposure is not available,
suspected factor for subsequent analytical study. it is necessary to put up an external control, to evaluate the
2. Obtaining data on exposure experience of the exposed group, e.g., smokers and non-
smokers, a cohort of radiologists compared with a cohort of
Information about exposure may be obtained directly from ophthalmologists, etc. The study and control cohorts should
the (a) Cohort members : through personal interviews or be similar in demographic and possibly important variables
mailed questionnaires. Since cohort studies involve large other than those under study.
numbers of population, mailed questionnaires offer a simple
and economic way of obtaining information. For example, (c) Comparison with general population rates
Doll and Hill (60) used mailed questionnaires to collect If none is available, the mortality experience of the exposed
smoking histories from British doctors. (b) Review of group is compared with the mortality experience of the general
records: Certain kinds of information (e.g., dose of radiation, population in the same geographic area as the exposed
kinds of surgery, or details of medical treatment) can be people, e.g., comparison of frequency of lung cancer among
obtained only from medical records. (c} Medical examination uranium mine workers with lung cancer mortality in the
or special tests : Some types of information can be obtained general population where the miners resided (54); comparison
only by medical examination or special tests, e.g., blood of frequency of cancer among asbestos workers with the rate in
pressure, serum cholesterol, ECG. (d) Environmental general population in the same geographic area (61).
surveys : This is the best source for obtaining information on Rates for disease occurrence in sub-groups of the control
exposure levels of the suspected factor in the environment cohort by age, sex, and other variables considered
where the cohort lived or worked. In fact, information may be important may be applied to the corresponding sub-groups
needed from more than one or all of the above sources. of the study cohort (exposed cohort) to determine the
Information about exposure (or any other factor related "expected" values in the absence of exposure. The ratio of
to the development of the disease being investigated) should "observed" and "expected" values provides a measure of the
be collected in a manner that will allow classification of effect of the factor under study.
cohort members : The limiting factors in using general population rates for
(a) according to whether or not they have been exposed comparison are : (i) non-availability of population rates for
to the suspected factor, and the outcome required; and (ii) the difficulties of selecting the
(b) according to the level or degree of exposure, at least in study and comparison groups which are representative of
broad classes, in the case of special exposure groups the exposed and non-exposed segments of the general
(Table 17). population.
In addition to the above, basic information about
demographic variables which might affect the frequency of 4. Follow-up
disease under investigation, should also be collected. Such One of the problems in cohort studies is the regular follow-
information will be required for subsequent analysis. up of all the participants. Therefore, at the start of the study,
methods should be devised depending upon the outcome to
3. Selection of comparison groups be determined (morbidity or death), to obtain data for
There are many ways of assembling comparison groups : assessing the outcome. The procedures required comprise :
(a) periodic medical examination of each member of the
(a) Internal comparisons cohort
In some cohort studies, no outside comparison group is (b) reviewing physician and hospital records
required. The comparison groups are in-built. That is, single (c) routine surveillance of death records, and
cohort enters the study, and its members may, on the basis (d} mailed questionnaires, telephone calls, periodic home
of information obtained, be classified into several visits - preferably all three on an annual basis.
comparison groups according to the degrees or levels of
exposure to risk (e.g., smoking, blood pressure, serum Of the above, periodic examination of each member of the
cholesterol) before the development of the disease in cohort, yields greater amount of information on the individuals
question. The groups, so defined, are compared in terms of examined, than would the use of any other procedure.
their subsequent morbidity and mortality rates. Table 17 However, inspiteof best efforts, a certain percentage of
illustrates this point. It shows that mortality from lung cancer losses to follow-up are inevitable due to death, change of
increases with increasing number of cigarettes smoked residence, migration or withdrawal of occupation. These
reinforcing the conclusion that there is valid association losses may bias the results. It is, therefore, necessary to build
between smoking and lung cancer. into the study design a system for obtaining basic
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EP!DEMIOLOGIC METHODS
information on outcome for those who cannot be followed In our hypothetical example (Table 18), the relative risk is
up in detail for the full duration of the study (13). The safest 10. It implies that smokers are 10 times at greater risk of
course recommended is to achieve as dose to a 95 per cent developing lung cancer than non-smokers. The larger the
follow-up as possible (12). RR, the greater the "strength" of the association between the
suspected factor and disease. It may be noted that risk does
5. Analysis not necessarily imply causal association.
The data are analyzed in terms of :
(a) Incidence rates of outcome among exposed and non- ATTRIBUTABLE RISK
exposed,
Attributable risk (AR) is the difference in incidence rates
(b) Estimation of risk. of disease (or death) between an exposed group and non-
(a) Incidence rates exposed group. Some authors use the term "risk difference"
to attributable risk.
In a cohort study, we can determine incidence rates
directly in those exposed and those not exposed. A Attributable risk is often expressed as a per cent. This is
hypothetical example is given in Table 18 showing how given by the formula:
incidence rates may be calculated : Incidence of disease rate among exposed
- incidence of disease rate among non-exposed
TABLE 18
Contingency table applied to hypothetical Incidence rate among exposed
cigarette smoking and lung cancer example Attributable risk in our example (Table .18) would be :
Cigarette Developed Did not develop Total
smoking lung cancer lung cancer ...1Q_J_ x 100 90 per cent
10
Yes 70 6930 7000 Attributable risk indicates to what extent the disease
(a) (b) (a + b) under study can be attributed to the exposure. The figure in
No 2997 3000
our example indicates that the association between smoking
3
(c) (d) (c + d) and lung cancer is causal, 90 per cent of the lung cancer
among smokers was due to their smoking. This suggests the
Incidence rates amount of disease that might be eliminated if the factor
(a) among smokers = 7017000 10 per 1000 under study could be controlled or eliminated.
(b) among non-smokers = 3/3000 = 1 per 1000 POPULATION-ATTRIBUTABLE RISK
Statistical significance : P < 0.001
Another concept is "population-attributable risk". It is the
(b) Estimation of risk incidence of the disease (or death) in the total population
Having calculated the incidence rates, the next step is to minus the incidence of disease (or death) among those who
estimate the risk of outcome (e.g., disease or death) in the were not exposed to the suspected causal factor (Table 19).
exposed and non-exposed cohorts. This is done in terms of
two well-known indices: (a) relative risk, (b) attributable risk. TABLE 19
Lung cancer death rates among smokers
RELATIVE RISK and non-smokers : UK physicians
Relative risk (RR) is the ratio of the incidence of the Deaths per 100,000 person-years
disease (or death) among exposed and the incidence among Heavy smokers 224 Exposed to suspected
non-exposed. Some authors use the term "risk ratio" to refer factor (a)
to relative risk. Non-smokers 10 Non-exposed to suspected
Incidence of disease (or death) among exposed causal factor (b)
RR Deaths in 74 (c)
Incidence of disease (or death) among non-exposed total population
In our hypothetical example (Table 18) 224
Individual RR alb = 22.40
10
RR of lung cancer = = 10 Population AR (c-b)/c = 86 per cent
Estimation of relative risk (RR) is important in aetiological Source : (58)
enquiries. It is a direct measure (or index) of the "strength"
of the association between suspected cause and effect. A The concept of population attributable risk is useful in
relative risk of one indicates no association; relative risk that it provides an estimate of the amount by which the
greater than one suggests "positive'.' association between disease could be reduced in that population if the suspected
exposure and the disease under study. A relative risk of 2 factor was eliminated or modified. In our example (Table 19)
indicates that the incidence rate of disease is 2 times higher one might expect that 86 per cent of deaths from lung
in the exposed group as compared with the unexposed. cancer could be avoided if the risk factor of cigarettes were
Equivalently, this represents a 100 per cent increase in risk. eliminated.
A relative risk of 0.25 indicates a 75% reduction in the
incidence rate in exposed individuals as compared with the
Relative risk versus attributable risk
unexposed (35). It is often useful to consider the 95 per cent Relative risk is important in aetiological enquiries. Its size
confidence interval of a relative risk since it provides an is a better index than is attributable risk for assessing the
indication of the likely and maximum levels of risk. aetiological role of a factor in disease. The larger the relative
PUPU! )\J,Uf'i-1\TTi'\1 l3UT!\BI .E
risk, the stronger the association between cause and effect. changed their classification. Even in very common chronic
But relative risk does not reflect the potential public health diseases like coronary heart disease, cohort studies are
importance as does the attributable risk. That is, attributable difficult to carry out. It is difficult to keep a large number of
risk gives a better idea than does relative risk of the impact individuals under medical surveillance indefinitely.
of successful preventive or public health programme might (c) Certain administrative problems such as loss of
have in reducing the problem. experienced staff, loss of funding and extensive record
Two examples are cited (Tables 20 and 21) to show the keeping are inevitable. (d) It is not unusual to lose a
practical importance of distinguishing relative and absolute substantial proportion of the original cohort they may
risk. In the first example, (Table 20) the RR of a migrate, lose interest in the study or simply refuse to provide
cardiovascular complication in users of oral contraceptives is any required information. (e) Selection of comparison
independent of age, whereas the AR is more than 5 times groups which are representative of the exposed and
higher in t_he older age groups. This epidemiological unexposed segments of the population is a limiting factor.
observation has been the basis for not recommending oral Those who volunteer for the study may not be representative
contraceptive in those aged 35 years and over. of all individuals with the characteristic of interest. (f) There
may be changes in the standard methods or diagnostic
TABLE 20 criteria of the disease over prolonged follow-up. Once we
The relative and attributabie risks of cardiovascular have established the study protocol, it is difficult to introduce
complications in women taking oral contraceptives new knowledge or new tests later. (g) Cohort studies are
expensive. (h) The study itself may alter people's behaviour.
Age
If we are examining the role of smoking in lung cancer, an
30-39 increased concern in the study cohort may be created. This
2.8 may induce the study subjects to stop or decrease smoking.
(i) With any cohort study we are faced with ethical problems
3.5
of varying importance. As evidence accumulates about the
Source: (62) implicating factor in the aetiology of disease, we are obliged
to intervene and if possible reduce or eliminate this factor,
The second example (Table 21) shows that smoking is
and (j) Finally, in a cohort study, practical considerations
attributable to 92 per cent of lung cancer, and 13.3 per cent
dictate that we must concentrate on a limited number or
of CHD. In CHD, both RR and AR are not very high
factors possibly related to disease outcome.
suggesting not much of the disease could be prevented as
compared to lung cancer. The main differences between case control and cohort
studies are summarized in Table 22.
TABLE 21
Risk assessment, smokers us non-smokers TABLE 22
Death Main differences between case control and cohort studies
RR
Smokers Non-smokers
Case control study Cohort study
0.90 0.07 12.86
4.87 4.22 1.15 1. Proceeds from "effect to Proceeds from "cause to
cause". effect".
Source: (63) 2. Starts with the disease. Starts with people exposed
risk factor or suspected
Advantages and disadvantages of cohort studies cause.
Advantages 3. Tests whether the suspected Tests whether disease .occurs
cause occurs more frequently more frequently in those
(a) Incidence can be calculated. (b) Several possible in those with the disease than exposed, than in those not
outcomes related to exposure can be studied simultaneously among those without the similarly exposed.
- that is, we can study the association of the suspected disease.
factor with many other diseases in addition to the one under 4. Usually the first approach to Reserved for testing of
study. For example, cohort studies designed to study the the testing of a hypothesis, .precisely formulated
association between smoking and lung cancer also showed but also useful for exploratory hypothesis.
association of smoking with coronary heart disease, peptic studies.
ulcer, cancer oesophagus and several others. (c) Cohort 5. Involves fewer number of Involves larger number of
studies provide a direct estimate of relative risk. (d) Dose- subjects. subjects.
response ratios can also be calculated, and (e) Since 6. Yields relatively quick results. Long follow-up period often
comparison groups are formed before disease develops, needed, involving delayed
certain forms of bias can be minimized like mis-classification results.
of individuals into exposed and unexposed groups. 7. Suitable for the study of rare Inappropriate when the
diseases. disease or exposure under
Disadvantages investigation is rare.
Cohort studies also present a number of problems : 8. Generally yields only estimate Yields incidence rates, RR as
(a) Cohort studies involve a large number of people. They of RR (odds ratio). well as AR.
are generally unsuitable for investigating uncommon
9. Cannot yield information about Can yield information about
diseases or diseases with low incidence in the population. diseases other than that more than one disease
(b) It takes a long time to complete the study and obtain selected for study. outcome.
results (20-30 years or more in cancer studies) by which time
the investigators may have died or the participants may have 10. Relatively inexpensive. Expensive.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
Examples of cohort studies contraceptives and health conducted by the Royal College
of General Practitioners in England (1974). It was initiated
Example 1 : Smoking and lung cancer. in 1968, after 2 years of planning. 23,000 users of the pill
At least eight prospective studies on the relation of aged 15-49 years together with a similar number of controls
smoking to lung cancer had been done. Doll and Hill (50, using other methods or no method of contraception were
60, 64), Hammond and Horn (65,66) and Dorn (59) were brought under observation of 1400 general practitioners.
the first to report their findings. During follow-up doctors recorded the diagnoses of episodes
of illness, and information about pregnancies and deaths.
In October 1951, Doll and Hill sent a questionnaire to
59,600 British doctors listed in the Medical Register of the The study brought out the risks and benefits of oral
UK enquiring about their smoking habits. This enabled them contraceptive use. For example, the study showed that the
to form two cohorts (smokers and non-smokers) who were risk of hypertension increases, and the risk of benign breast
disease decreases with the dose of norethisterone acetate
similar in all other respects like age, education and social
{progestogen) in the combined pill which is an important
class. They received usable replies from 40, 701 physicians -
finding. The study found an increased mortality from
34,494 men and 6,207 women. These were followed for
diseases of cardiovascular system in pill users confirming the
4 years and 5 months by obtaining notifications of
results of retrospective case control studies (67).
physicians' deaths from the Registrar General, the General
Medical Council and the British Medical Association. For
every death certified as due to lung cancer, confirmation EXPERIMENTAL EPIDEMIOLOGY
was obtained by writing to the physician certifying the death In the 1920s, "experimental epidemiology" meant the
and also, when necessary to the hospital or consultant to study of epidemics among colonies of experimental animals
whom the patient had been referred. The results of the study such as rats and mice. In modern usage, experimental
are shown in Table 19. epidemiology is often equated with RANDOMIZED
CONTROLLED TRIALS (2).
Example 2: The Framingham heart study (49).
Experimental or intervention studies are similar in
The Framingham heart study was initiated in 1948 by the approach to cohort studies excepting that the conditions in
United States Public Health Service to study the relationship which study is carried out are under the direct control of the
of a number of (risk) factors {e.g., serum cholesterol, blood investigator. Thus experimental studies involve some action,
pressure, weight, smoking) to the subsequent development intervention or manipulation such as deliberate application
of cardiovascular disease. The town of Framingham or withdrawal of the suspected cause or changing one
{Massachusetts) had a population of 28,000 in 1948. The variable in the causative chain in the experimental group
study was planned for 20 years in view of the slow while making no change in the control group, and observing
development of heart disease. and comparing the outcome of the experiment in both the
The lower and upper limits of the study population was groups. This contrasts sharply with observational studies
set at 30 and 59 years. Out of 10,000 people in this age (e.g., descriptive, case control and cohort studies), where
group a sample of 6,507 persons of both sexes were invited the epidemiologist takes no action but only observes the
to participate in the study, out of which 5,209 participated. natural course of events or outcome.
The initial examination revealed that 82 subjects had The aims of experimental studies may be stated as
clinically evident CHO. These were excluded from the follows : (a) to provide "scientific proof" of aetiological {or
sample leaving a total of 5,127. risk) factors which may permit the modification or control of
4,469 (69 per cent) of the 6,507 in the initial sample those diseases : and (b) to provide a method of measuring
actually underwent the first examination. After the first the effectiveness and efficiency of health services for the
examination, the study population was examined every 2 prevention, control and treatment of disease and improve
years for a 20 year period. Information was obtained with the health of the community.
regard to serum cholesterol, blood pressure, weight and Experimental studies have all the advantages and
cigarette smoking. Although biennial examinations were the disadvantages of the usual prospective cohort studies plus
main source of follow up information, other means were also three additional problems namely cost, ethics and feasibility.
adopted to detect CHO (e.g., Death certificate records). Experimental studies have become a major area of
Among other things, the study showed increasing risk of epidemiological studies. They may be conducted in animals
CHO with increasing serum cholesterol levels in the 45-54 or human beings.
age group. The study also showed that the association Animal studies
between smoking and CHO varied with manifestations of the
disease. Thus, smoking was more strongly associated with Throughout history animals have played an important
sudden death from CHO than with less fatal forms of the role in men's quest for knowledge about himself and his
disease. Risk factors have been found to include male sex, environment. Animal studies have contributed to our
advancing age, high serum lipid concentration, high blood knowledge of anatomy, physiology, pathology, microbiology,
pressure, cigarette smoking, diabetes mellitus, obesity, low immunology, genetics, chemotherapy and so many others.
vital capacity and certain ECG abnormalities. The predictive At the beginning of this century, Webster in United States
value of serum lipids, blood pressure and cigarette smoking and Tapley, Wilson and Greenwood in England had carried
have been repeatedly demonstrated. The Framingham heart out classical animal experiments. Their studies centred
study became a prototype of similar studies in US and other round inducing epidemics in animals and in studies of herd
countries. immunity under laboratory conditions.
More important application of animal experiments have
Example 3: Oral contraceptives and health (51). been in (a) experimental reproduction of human disease in
Another example is the cohort study of oral animals to confirm aetiological hypotheses and to study the
pathogenetic phenomena or mechanisms (b) testing the experiment. Thus when an illness is fatal (e.g., excessive
efficacy of preventive and therapeutic measures such as haemorrhage) and the benefit of treatment (e.g., blood
vaccines and drugs, and (c) completing the natural history of transfusion) is self-evident, it would be ethically unacceptable
disease. For example, naturally occurring leprosy has been to prove or disprove the therapeutic value of blood
found in armadillos. Data obtained from studying these transfusion. However, such instances represent only a small
animals indicate that lepra bacilli might exist outside of part of the total research effort. On the other hand, in the
humans. present era of scientific medicine, many unscientific or
Animal experiments have their own advantages and scientifically unsound procedures are still being carried out.
limitations. The advantages are that the experimental For instance, in the study of prescription drugs, a panel of
animals can be bred in laboratories and manipulated easily experts in USA found that only 23 per cent of some 16,000
according to the wishes of the investigator. A more drugs could be classified unequivocally as "effective" (36). It
important point is that they multiply rapidly and enable the is now conceded that it is equally unethical if a drug or
investigators to carry out certain experiments (e.g., genetic procedure is brought into general use without establishing its
experiments) which in human population would take several effectiveness by controlled trials. The thalidomide disaster and
years and involve many generations. The limitations of the occurrence of carcinoma of the vagina in the offspring of
animal experiments are that not all human diseases can be pregnant women treated with diethylstilbestrol highlight the
reproduced in animals. Secondly, all the conclusions derived unfortunate consequence of therapy on the basis of
from animal experiments may not be strictly applicable to uncontrolled observations. The WHO in 1980 has laid down a
human beings. An excellent example to illustrate this point is strict code of practice in connection with human trials (68).
the WHO trial of typhoid vaccine in Yugoslavia in the mid- Experimental studies are of two types :
1950s. Laboratory tests in animals showed the alcohol-killed a. Randomized controlled trials (i.e., those involving a
and preserved vaccine to be more effective than the process of random allocation); and
traditional heat-killed phenol-preserved vaccine. But
randomized controlled trials in human beings demonstrated b. Non-randomized or "non-experimental" trials (i.e.,
that, contrary to laboratory evidence, the alcohol-preserved those departing from strict randomization for practical
vaccine was found to be less than half as effective in purposes, but in such a manner that non-
preventing typhoid fever as the traditional phenol-preserved randomization does not seriously affect the theoretical
vaccine introduced by Almorth Wright. This highlights the basis of conclusions).
difficulties encountered in extrapolating findings from
animal experiments in man. RANDOMIZED CONTROLLED TRIALS
Human experiments Too often physicians are guided in their daily work by
clinical impressions of their own or their teachers. These
Human experiments will always be needed to investigate impressions, particularly when they are incorporated in
disease aetiology and to evaluate the preventive and textbooks and repeatedly quoted by reputed teachers and
therapeutic measures. These studies are even more essential their students acquire authority, just as if they were proved
in the investigation of diseases that cannot be reproduced in facts. Similarly many public health measures are introduced
animals. on the basis of assumed benefits without subjecting them to
Historically, in 1747, James Lind performed a human rigorous testing. The history of medicine amply illustrates
experiment (clinical trial) in which he added different this. For instance, it took centuries before therapeutic blood
substances to diet of 12 soldiers who were suffering from letting and drastic purging were abandoned by the medical
scurvy. He divided his patients into 6 pairs and profession.
supplemented the diets of each pair with cider, elixir vitriol, It is mainly in the last 35 to 40 years, determined efforts
vinegar, sea water; a mixture of nutmeg, garlic, mustard and have been made to use scientific techniques to evaluate
tamarind in barley water; and two oranges and one lemon methods of treatment and prevention. An important
daily. All the subjects were studied for 6 days. At the end of advance in this field has been the development of an
6 days the LIMEYS recovered from scurvy and were found assessment method, known as Randomized Controlled Trial
fit for duty. Then came Edward Jenner's experiment with (RCT). It is really an epidemiologic experiment. Since its
cowpox in 1796. Other classical experiments are Finlay and introduction, the RCT has questioned the validity of such
Reed's experiments (1881-1900) to elucidate the mosquito- widely used treatments as oral hypoglycaemic agents,
borne nature of yellow fever and Goldberger's classical varicose vein stripping, tonsillectomy, hospitalization of all
experiments in 1915 inducing pellagra by diets deficient in patients with myocardial infarction, multiphasic screening,
nicotinic acid, thereby proving pellagra to be a nutritional and toxicity and applicability of many preventive and
deficiency disease, not an infectious disease as was then therapeutic procedures.
supposed. Since then, human beings have participated in
studies of malaria, syphilis, hepatitis, measles, polio and The design of a randomized controlled trial is given in
others. These experiments have played decisive roles in Fig. 9. For new programmes or new therapies, the RCT is
investigating disease aetiology and in testing preventive and the No.1 method of evaluation. The basic steps in
therapeutic measures. conducting a RCT .include the following :
Although the experimental method is unquestionably the 1. Drawing up a protocol.
most incisive approach to scientific problem, ethical and 2. Selecting reference and experimental populations.
logistic considerations often prevent its application to the 3. Randomization.
study of disease in humans. Therefore, before launching
4. Manipulation or intervention.
human experiments, the benefits of the experiment have to be
weighed against risks involved. The volunteers should be 5. Follow-up.
made fully aware of all possible consequences of the 6. Assessment of outcome.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMJOLOGIC METHODS
Patients COMPARE
OUTCOME
Unxeposed to 1----------------t
Specific ~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - -- ------- ------------------ ----
--------------------------- - t
Time
b Observation
Random ~Exposed
Specific
to
~
;- COMPARE
Assignment OUTCOME
\ /
Patients x EXPOSED
AND
I \ UNEXPOSED
\__ TO~
Unxeposed to
Specific ~
Time
FIG.10
Schematic diagram of the design of concurrent parallel and cross-over controlled therapeutic trials (73).
TYPES OF RANDOMIZED CONTROLLED TRIALS children between 6-18 months who were entered into the
trial were randomly allocated in study and control groups.
1. Clinical trials The vaccine was given in three, monthly injections, and the
children were followed up at monthly intervals to detect the
For the most part, "clinical trials" have been concerned
occurrence of whooping cough. The study group comprised
with evaluating therapeutic agents, mainly drugs. The last
of 3,801 children who were vaccinated, and 149 developed
decades have seen clearly the utility of clinical trials. Some
whooping cough. The control group consisted of 3, 75 7
of the recent examples include - evaluation of beta-blockers
unvaccinated children, and 687 of them developed the
in reducing cardiovascular mortality in patient surviving the
infection. This gave an attack rate of 1.45 per 1000 child
acute phase of myocardial infarction (69); trials of folate
months in the vaccinated group and 6. 72 per 1000 child
treatment/supplementation before conception to prevent
months in the control group. The difference was significant.
recurrence of neural tube defects (70); trials of aspirin on
cardiovascular mortality and beta-carotene on cancer Analysis of a preventive trial must result in a clear
incidence; efficacy of tonsillectomy for recurrent throat statement about (a) the benefit the community will derive
infection (71); randomized controlled trial of coronary from the measure (b) the risks involved, and (c) the costs to
bypass surgery for the prevention of myocardial infarction the health service in terms of money, men and material
(72), etc. The list is endless. resources (21). Since preventive trials involve larger number
of subjects and sometimes a longer time span to obtain
Unfortunately, not all clinical trials are susceptible to being
results, there may be greater number of practical problems
blinded. For example, there is no way to perform a clinical
in their organisation and execution.
trial of tonsillectomy and adenoidectomy without its being
obvious who received surgery and who did not, a reason why 3. Risk factor trials
the value of these procedures continues to be uncertain.
Many ethical, administrative and technical problems are A type of preventive trial is the trial of risk factors in which
involved in the conduct of clinical trials. Nevertheless, they the investigator intervenes to interrupt the usual sequence in
are a powerful tool and should be carried out before any new the development of disease for those individuals who have
therapy, procedure or service is introduced. "risk factor" for developing the disease; often this involves
risk factor modification. The concept of "risk factor" gave a
2. Preventive trials new dimension to epidemiological research.
In general usage, prevention is synonymous with primary For example, the major risk factors of coronary heart
prevention, and the term "preventive trials" implies trials of disease are elevated blood cholesterol, smoking,
primary preventive measures. These trials are purported to hypertension and sedentary habits. Accordingly, the four
prevent or eliminate disease on an experimental basis. The main possibilities of intervention in coronary heart disease
most frequently occurring type of preventive trials are the are : reduction of blood cholesterol, the cessation of
trials of vaccines and chemoprophylactic drugs. The basic smoking, control of hypertension and promotion of regular
principles of experimental design are also applicable to these physical activity. Risk factor trials can be "single-factor" or
trials. It may be necessary to apply the trial to groups of "multi-factor" trials. Both the approaches are
subjects instead of to individual subjects. For example, in complementary, and both are needed.
1946, the Medical Research Council of UK conducted an The WHO (75) promoted a trial on primary prevention of
extensive trial (74) to test whooping cough vaccine from coronary heart disease using clofibrate to lower serum
three manufacturers in ten separate field trials. Those cholesterol, which was accepted as a significant risk factor
for CHO. This study is the largest preventive trial yet 200
conducted, comprising more than 15,000 men of whom 180
one-third received clofibrate and two-third received olive oil
as a control treatment. The study was conducted in 3 centres (f)
160
in Europe (Edinburgh, Prague, and Budapest). The design UJ
(f) 140
was double-blind and randomization was successfully <l:'.
u
achieved. The mean observation was 9.6 years. The trial u..
120
showed a significant reduction in non-fatal cardiac 0
100
I
0:::
infarction, but unfortunately, there were 25 per cent more UJ
deaths in the clofibrate-treated group than in the control ca 80
:::?.:
~""'
group possibly due to long-term toxic effect of the drug. The :::::>
trial illustrates the kind of contribution that an
z 60
40
epidemiological approach can make to protect the public 051
health against possible adverse effects of long-term 20
medication with potent drugs (75).
The other widely reported risk-factor intervention trials in
coronary heart disease are : (a) The Stanford Three
Community Study (b) The North Karelia Project in Finland YEAR OF BIRTH
(c) The Oslo Study, and (d) The Multiple Risk Factor
Intervention Trial (MRFIT) in USA. FIG. 11
Incidence of retrolental fibroplasia in New York, 1938-1956
4. Cessation experiments
The dramatic rise and fall in frequency of RLF can be
Another type of preventive trial is the cessation seen in Fig. 11. It will be noted that RLF reached its peak
experiment. In this type of study, an attempt is made to during the years 1952-53. The sharp drop in the graph after
evaluate the termination of a habit (or removal of suspected 1953 highlights the results of the decreased use of oxygen.
agent) which is considered to be causally related to a RLF illustrates one of the problems often introduced by
disease. If such action is followed by a significant reduction technological or scientific advances.
in the disease, the hypothesis of cause is greatly
strengthened. The familiar example is cigarette smoking and Since most diseases are fatal, disabling or unpleasant,
lung cancer. If in a randomized controlled trial, one group of human experiments to confirm an aetiological hypothesis
cigarette smokers continue to smoke and the other group are rarely possible.
has given up, the demonstration of a decrease in the 6. Evaluation of health services
incidence of lung cancer in the study group greatly
strengthens the hypothesis of a causal relationship. A large Randomized controlled trials have been extended to
randomized controlled trial has been mounted to study the assess the effectiveness and efficiency of health services.
role of smoking cessation in the primary prevention of Often, choices have to be made between alternative policies
coronary heart disease (76). of health care delivery. The necessity of choice arises from
the fact that resources are limited, and priorities must be set
5. Trial of aetiological agents for the implementation of a large number of activities which
could contribute to the welfare of the society. An excellent
One of the aims of experimental epidemiology is to example of such an evaluation is the controlled trials in the
confirm or refute an aetiological hypothesis. The best known chemotherapy of tuberculosis in India, which demonstrated
example of trial of an aetiological agent relates to retrolental that "domiciliary treatment" of pulmonary tuberculosis was
fibroplasia (RLF). Retrolental fibroplasia, as a cause of as effective as the more costlier "hospital or sanatorium"
blindness, was non-existent prior to 1938. It was originally treatment. The results of the study have gained international
observed and reported by TL.Terry, a Boston acceptance and ushered in a new era the era of
ophthalmologist in 1942 (77), and later in many other domiciliary treatment, in the treatment of tuberculosis.
countries outside the USA.
More recently, multiphasic screening which has achieved
RLF was recognized as a leading cause of blindness by great popularity in some countries, was evaluated by a
descriptive studies which showed that beginning in about randomized controlled trial in South-East London. The study
1940-1941, the incidence of the disease increased at an led to the withholding of vast outlay of resources required to
alarming rate (Fig. 11), and that this previously unknown mount a national programme of multiphasic screening in UK
disease was occurring only in premature babies. Analytical (80,81). Another example is that related to studies which
studies demonstrated its close association with have shown that many of the health care delivery tasks
administration of oxygen to premature babies. A large traditionally performed by physicians can be performed by
randomized controlled trial was mounted involving 18 nurses and other paramedical workers, thus saving physician
hospitals in United States by Kinsey and Hemphill (78, 79) time (82). These studies are also labelled as "health services
in which premature babies with birth weight of 1500 gram or research" studies.
less were allocated into experimental and control groups. In
the experimental group, all the babies received 50 per cent NON-RANDOMIZED TRIALS
oxygen therapy for 28 days, while in the control group
("curtailed oxygen group") oxygen was used only for clinical Although the experimental method is almost always to be
emergency. It was later found that all of the babies in the preferred, it is not always possible for ethical, administrative
"curtailed oxygen group" who developed RLF had received and other reasons to resort to a randomized controlled trial
some oxygen. There were no cases among those who in human beings. For example, smoking and lung cancer
received none, confirming the aetiological hypothesis. and induction of cancer by viruses have not lent themselves
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
to direct experimentation in human beings. Secondly, some source of water supply in their households. The results of the
preventive measures can be applied only to groups or on a experiment are given in Table 23.
community-wide basis (e.g., community trials of water
fluoridation). Thirdly, when disease frequency is low and the TABLE 23
natural history long (e.g., cancer cervix) randomized Deaths from cholera per 10.000 houses and sources of
controlled trials require follow-up of thousands of people for water supply of these houses. London 1853
a decade or more. The cost and logistics are often
prohibitive. These trials are rare. In such situations, we must Sources of Number of Deaths from
depend upon other study designs these are referred to as water supply houses cholera
non-randomized (or non-experimental) trials.
Southwark & 40,046 1263 315
Where the approach is sophisticated in randomized Vauxhall Co.
controlled trials, it is rather crude in non-randomized trials.
As there is no randomization in non-experimental trials, the Lambeth Co. 26,107 98 37
degree of comparability will be low and the chances of a
spurious result higher than where randomization had taken It will be seen from Table 23 that deaths were fewer in
place. In other words, the validity of causal inference houses supplied by Lambeth company compared to houses
remains largely a matter of extra-statistical judgement. supplied by Southwark and Vauxhall company. The
Nevertheless, vital decisions affecting public health and inference was obvious the Lambeth company water came
preventive medicine have been made by non-experimental from an intake on the River Thames well above London,
studies. A few examples of· non-randomized trials are whereas the Southwark and Vauxhall company water was
discussed below : derived from the sewage polluted water basin. The great
difference in the occurrence of cholera among these two
1. Uncontrolled trials populations gave clear demonstration that cholera is a
water-borne disease. This was demonstrated long before the
There is room for uncontrolled trials (i.e., trials with no advent of the bacteriological era; it also led to the institution
comparison group). For example, there were no randomized of public health measures to control cholera.
controlled studies of the benefits of the Pap test (cervical
cancer) when it was introduced in 1920s. Today, there is 3. Before and after comparison studies
indirect epidemiological evidence from well over a dozen
uncontrolled studies of cervical cancer screening that the Pap These are community trials which fall into two distinct
test is effective in reducing mortality from this disease. Initially groups:
uncontrolled trials may be useful in evaluating whether a A. Before and after comparison studi.es without control,
specific therapy appears to have any value in a particular and
disease, to determine an appropriate dose, to investigate B. Before and after comparison studies with control.
adverse reactions, etc. However, even in these uncontrolled
trials, one is using implied "historical controls", i.e., the A Before and after comparison studies without control
experience of earlier untreated patients affected by the same These studies centre round comparing the incidence of
disease. disease before and after introduction of a preventive
Since most therapeutic trials deal with drugs which do not measure. The events which took place prior to the use of the
produce such remarkably beneficial results, it is becoming new treatment or preventive procedure are used as a
increasingly commonto employ the procedures of a double- standard for comparison. In other words, the experiment
blind controlled clinical trial in which the effects of a new serves as its own control; this eliminates virtually all group
drug are compared to some concurrent experience (either differences. The classic examples of "before and after
placebo or a currently utilized therapy). comparison studies" were the prevention of scurvy among
sailors by James Lind in 1750 by providing fresh fruit;
2. Natural experiments studies on the transmission of cholera by John Snow in
Where experimental studies are not possible in human 1854; and later, prevention of polio by Salk and Sabin
populations, the epidemiologist seeks to identify "natural vaccines.
circumstances" that mimic an experiment. For example, in In order to establish evidence in before and after
respect of cigarette smoking, people have separated comparison studies, the following are needed; (a) data
themselves "naturally" into two groups, smokers and non- regarding the incidence of disease, before and after
smokers. Epidemiologists have taken advantage of this introduction of a preventive measure must be available
separation and tested hypothesis regarding lung cancer and (b) there should be introduction or manipulation of only one
cigarette smoking. Other populations involved in natural factor or change relevant to the situation, other factors
experiments comprise the following groups : (a) migrants remaining the same, as for example, addition of fluorine to
(b) religious or social groups (c) atomic bombing of Japan drinking water to prevent dental caries. (c) diagnostic criteria
(d) famines (e) earthquakes, etc. A major earthquake in of the disease should remain the same (d) adoption of
Athens in 1981 provided a "natural experiment" to preventive measures should be over a wide area
epidemiologists who studied the effects of acute stress on (e) reduction in the incidence must be large following the
cardiovascular mortality. They showed an excess of deaths introduction of the preventive measure, because there is no
from cardiac and external causes on the days after the major control, and (f) several trials may be needed before the
earthquake, but no excess deaths from other causes (83). evaluation is considered conclusive.
John Snow's discovery that cholera is a water-borne Table 24 gives an example of a "before and after
disease was the outcome of a natural experiment. Snow in comparison study" in Victoria (Australia) following
his "grand experiment" identified two randomly mixed introduction of seat-belt legislation for prevention of deaths
populations, alike in other important respects, except the and injuries caused by motor vehicle accidents.
87
TABLE 24 ASSOCIATION AND CAUSATION
Effect of of in Descriptive studies help in the identification of the
disease problem in the community; and by relating disease
1970 1971 % change to host, agent and environmental factors, it endeavours to
suggest an aetiological hypothesis. Analytical and
564 464 - 17.7 experimental studies test the hypotheses derived from
14620 12454 14.8 descriptive studies and confirm or refute the observed
association between suspected causes and disease. When
Table 24 shows a definite fall in the numbers of deaths the disease is multifactorial (e.g., coronary heart disease)
and injuries in occupants of cars, following the introduction numerous factors or variables become implicated in the web
of compulsory seat-belts in one state of Australia. of causation, and the notion of "cause" becomes confused.
The more associations, the more investigations to
B. Before and after comparison studies with control disentangle the web of causation. The epidemiologist whose
primary interest is to establish a "cause and effect"
In the absence of a control group, comparison between relationship has to sift the husk from the grain. He proceeds
observations before and after the use of a new treatment or from demonstration of statistical association to
procedure may be misleading. In such situations, the demonstration that the association is causal.
epidemiologist tries to utilize a "natural" control group i.e.,
The terms "association" and "relationship" are often used
the one provided by nature or natural circumstances. If interchangeably. Association may be defined as the
preventive programme is to be applied to an entire concurrence of two variables more often than would be
community, he would select another community as similar expected by chance. In other words, events are said to be
as possible, particularly with respect to frequency and associated when they occur more frequently together than
characteristics of the disease to be prevented. One of them one would expect by chance (2). Association does not
is arbitrarily chosen to provide the study group and the necessarily imply a causal relationship.
other a control group. In the example cited (e.g., seat-belt
legislation in Victoria, Australia), a natural "control" was It will be useful to consider here the concept of
correlation. Correlation indicates the degree of association
sought by comparing the results in Victoria with other states
between two characteristics. The correlation coefficients
in Australia where similar legislation was not introduced.
range from -LO to +LO. A correlation coefficient of 1.0
The findings are given in Table 25.
means that the two variables exhibit a perfect linear
relationship. However, correlation cannot be used to invoke
TABLE 25
causation, because the sequence of exposure preceding
Effect of adoption of compulsory seat-belt legislation in disease (temporal association) cannot be assumed to have
Victoria. 1971 compared with other states where similar occurred. Secondly, correlation does not measure risk. It
legislation was not introduced may be said that causation implies correlation, but
correlation does not imply causation.
1970 1971
Association can be broadly grouped under three headings :
Deaths a. Spurious association
Victoria 564 464 -17.7
Other states 1,426 1,429 0.2 b. Indirect association
Injuries c. Direct (causal) association
Victoria -14.8 (i) one-to-one causal association
Other states 1.0
(ii) multifactorial causation.
In the example cited above, the existence of a control a. Spurious association
with which the results in Victoria could be compared
strengthens the conclusion that there was definite fall in the Sometimes an observed association between a disease
number of deaths and injuries in occupants of cars after the and suspected factor may not be real. For example, a study
introduction of compulsory seat-belt legislation. in UK of 5174 births at home and 11,156 births in hospitals
showed perinatal mortality rates of 5.4 per 1000 in the
In the evaluation of preventive measures, three questions home births, and 27.8 per 1000 in the hospital births (84).
are generally considered : (a) How much will it benefit the Apparently, the perinatal mortality was higher in hospital
community ? This will depend upon the effectiveness of the births than in the home births. It might be concluded that
preventive measure and the acceptance of the measure by homes are a safer place for delivery of births than hospitals.
the community. The combined outcome of effectiveness and Such a conclusion. is spurious or artifactual, because in
acceptability is measured by the difference in the incidence general, hospitals attract women at high risk for delivery
rate among the experimental and control groups. (b) What because of their special equipment and expertise, whereas
are the risks to the recipients? These include the immediate this is not the case with home deliveries. The high perinatal
and long-term risks. (c) Cost in money and man power? This mortality rate in hospitals might be due to this fact alone,
is done to find out whether the preventive measure is and not because the quality of care was inferior. There might
economical and practical in terms of money spent. It is now be other factors also such as differences in age, parity,
conceded that no health measure should be introduced on a prenatal care, home circumstances, general health an.cl
large scale without proper evaluation. disease state between the study and control groups. This
Recent problems that have engaged the attention of type of bias where "like" is not compared with "like"
epidemiologists are studies of medical care and health (selection bias) is very important in epidemiological studies.
services; planning and evaluation of health measures, It may lead to a spurious association or an association when
services and research. none actually existed.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EP!DEM!OLOGIC METHODS
hypothesis. Another factor that has added to the weight of association, reflecting a definite causal association. In short,
evidence is the fact that lung cancer death rates among specificity supports causal interpretation but lack of
moderate smokers were intermediate between those among specificity does not negate it.
light smokers and heavy smokers. TABLE 28
TABLE 26 Expected and observed deaths for smokers of cigarettes
Death rate and relative risk for smokers and non-smokers compared to non-smokers: Seven prospective studies
combined. for selected causes of death
Death rate per 1000
Underlying Expected Observed Mortality
Smokers Non-smokers cause of death deaths (E) deaths (0) ratio (0/E)
frequency. We have to measure the cost of its large-scale tremendous impetus to the development of intensive
application in terms of the cost of the vaccine, trained coronary care units (97). Epidemiological investigations
personnel, storage, transport and other factors. The value of have yielded a large amount of data on risk factors in
one method in relation to others is assessed by cost- relation to chronic disease. The impact of these findings on
effectiveness studies. It is now being recognized that not only our knowledge of the natural history of chronic disease
vaccines, but in time all health services will have to submit remains to be elucidated. Since the epidemiologist is
to evaluation (93). The development of randomized concerned with all cases in the defined population,
controlled trial has made it possible to evaluate treatment regardless of severity or source of medical care, his
modalities on a firm scientific basis. Such trials have raised perspective of disease is consequently the broadest.
doubts about the utility of multiphasic screening, certain
operative procedures (e.g., tonsillectomy, varicose vein, 7. Searching for causes and risk factors
stripping), prolonged hospitalization of patients with Epidemiology, by relating disease to interpopulation
myocardial infarction, etc. Clearly it is not enough to know differences and other attributes of the population or cohorts
that a programme provides some benefit; we need to know examined, tries to identify the causes of disease. The
how much benefit and at what risk and cost (93). contributions of epidemiology have been many in this
regard. Numerous examples can be cited : epidemiological
4. Evaluation of individual's risks and chances studies have incriminated that rubella is the cause of
One of the important tasks of epidemiologists is to make congenital defects in the newborn, that thalidomide is a
a statement about the degree of risk in a population. Besides teratogenic agent, cigarette smoking is a cause of lung
the incidence rate and specific rates which are measures of cancer, exposure of premature babies to oxygen is the cause
absolute risk, the epidemiologists calculate relative risk and of retrolental fibroplasia, etc. in the case of chronic disease,
attributable risk for a factor related to or believed to be a hopes of finding a single cause remains unfulfilled, but an
cause of the disease. The risk of bearing a mongol child and important conceptual change has occurred - that is, search
of some hereditary disorders are classic examples of for risk factors. The concept of "risk factors" gave renewed
evaluating individual's risks and chances. The risk impetus to epidemiological research. The search for causes
assessment for smokers and non-smokers, for selected and risk factors will be a ceaseless effort, as our ignorance
causes of death (e.g., cancer CHD) is another well-known about disease aetiology, particularly chronic disease, is
example. profound, not to speak of the "new" diseases which are
appearing.
5. Syndrome identification
Medical syndromes are identified by observing frequently INFECTIOUS DISEASE EPIDEMIOLOGY
associated findings in individual patients. It is worth
recalling that, although approximately 3000 so-called Infectious disease epidemiology is a fundamental part of
syndromes are described in the contemporary paediatric the whole of epidemiology. In fact, the subject of
literature, a primary defect is known only in about 20 per epidemiology originally developed from the study of
cent of these (94). Epidemiological investigations can be epidemics of infectious diseases. There is a renaissance in
used to define and refine syndromes. By observation of the study of communicable diseases, stimulated by {a)
groups, such studies have been able to correct changes in the pattern of communicable diseases, (b) by the
misconceptions concerning many disease syndromes. For discovery of "new" infections, and (c) by the possibility that
example, there was less appreciation of the two main types some chronic diseases have an infective origin. The
of peptic ulcer (gastric and duodenal) till 1920. But the development of vaccines and antibiotics was not followed,
"poverty" gradient in the certification of the gastric ulcer as predicted, by the virtual disappearance of infectious
and its absence in duodenal ulcer led to differentiation of disease. Its prevention and control needs epidemiological
gastric and duodenal ulcers. Another example is that of knowledge and experience (98). This section focuses on
Patterson-Kelly syndrome of association between dysphagia infectious disease epidemiology.
and iron-deficiency anaemia, but when the association was Selected definitions
tested by epidemiological methods, it was not found (10).
Clinical studies using plasma renin levels have suggested Definitions are essential for any kind of epidemiological
that aetiologically, prognostically and therapeutically distinct activity, e.g., disease reporting, measurement of mortality
syndromes of essential hypertension may exist. It has been and morbidity, etc. Clear-cut definitions of the terms such as
the subject of hot debate (95, 96). "infection", "epidemic" and "surveillance" are needed in the
study of infectious diseases. A few selected definitions
6. Completing the natural history of disease pertaining to infectious disease epidemiology are given
Epidemiology is concerned with the entire spectrum of below:
disease in a population. The picture of disease constructed INFECTION
on the basis of hospital patients is quite different from that
found in the community. The epidemiologist by studying The entry and development or multiplication of an
disease patterns in the community in relation to agent, host infectious agent in the body of man or animals (2,99). It also
and environmental factors is in a better position to fill up the implies that the body responds in some way to defend itself
gaps in the natural history of disease than the clinician. For against the invader, either in the form of an immune
example an outstanding contribution by epidemiology to the response (evidence of this may not be readily available) or
natural history of atherosclerosis is the recognition that one- disease. An infection does not always cause illness.
third to two-thirds of all deaths due to ischaemic heart There are several levels of infection : colonization (e.g.,
disease are sudden, i.e., occur in less than one hour. S. aureus in skin and normal nasopharynx); subclinical or
Hospital studies could never have come to this conclusion, inapparent infection (e.g., polio); latent infection (e.g., virus
for most victims do not reach the hospital. This gave of herpes simplex); and manifest or clinical infection.
INFECTIOUS DISEASE EPIDEMIOLOGY
natural conditions from vertebrate animals to man. May be diagnostic procedures, e.g., reactions to penicillin and
enzootic or epizootic e.g., rabies, plague, bovine immunizing agents, aplastic anaemia following the use of
tuberculosis, anthrax, brucellosis, salmonellosis, endemic chloramphenicol, childhood leukaemia due to prenatal
typhus, hydatidosis, etc. In recent years several new X-rays, hepatitis B following blood transfusion, etc. These
zoonoses have emerged, e.g., Kyasanur forest disease, are all preventable. In short, iatrogenic disease is a hazard of
Monkeypox, Lassa fever, etc. health care.
The term zoonoses has been further amplified as follows : SURVEILLANCE
(a) anthropozoonoses : that is, infections transmitted to man
from vertebrate animals, e.g., rabies, plague, hydatid Surveillance has been defined as "the continuous
disease, anthrax and trichinosis; (b) zooanthroponoses : that scrutiny of the factors that determine the occurrence and
is, infections transmitted from man to vertebrate animals, distribution of disease and other conditions of illhealth.
e.g., human tuberculosis in cattle; and (c) amphixenoses : Surveillance is essential for effective control and prevention,
that is infections maintained in both man and lower and includes the collection, analysis, interpretation and
vertebrate animals that may be transmitted in either distribution of relevant data for action (104).
direction, e.g., T.cruzi, and S.japonicum (102). Surveillance also connotes exercise of continuous
scrutiny of health indices, nutritional status, environmental
EPIZOOTIC hazards, health practices and other factors that may affect
An outbreak (epidemic) of disease in an animal health. Thus we have epidemiological surveillance (105),
population (often with the implication that it may also affect nutritional surveillance (106), demographic surveillance
human populations) (2). Only a few zoonotic agents cause (107), serological surveillance, etc.
major epidemics. Notable among these are the agents of The main purpose of surveillance is to detect changes in
anthrax, brucellosis, rabies, influenza, Rift valley fever, Q
trend or distribution in order to initiate investigative or
fever, Japanese encephalitis and equine encephalitis. The control measures (2).
study of epizootic diseases is given the name of
epizootiology. ERADICATION
EPORNITHIC Termination of all transmission of infection by
extermination of the infectious agent through surveillance
An outbreak (epidemic) of disease in a bird population (2).
and containment (2). Eradication is an absolute process, an
ENZOOTIC "all or none" phenomenon, restricted to termination of an
infection from the whole world. It implies that disease will no
An endemic occurring in animals e.g., anthrax, rabies, longer occur in a population. To-date, only one disease has
brucellosis, bovine tuberculosis, endemic typhus and tick been eradicated, that is smallpox.
typhus.
The term elimination is sometimes used to describe
NOSOCOMIALINFECTION "eradication" of disease (e.g., measles) from a large
Nosocomial (hospital acquired) infection is an infection geographic region or political jurisdiction (2). In the state of
originating in a patient while in a hospital or other health our present knowledge, diseases which are amenable to
care facility. It denotes a new disorder (unrelated to the eradication are measles, diphtheria, polio and guinea worm.
patient's primary condition) associated with being in a
hospital (2). That is, it was not present or incubating at the DYNAMICS OF DISEASE TRANSMISSION
time of admission or the residual of an infection acquired
Communicable diseases are transmitted from the
during a previous admission. It includes infections acquired
reservoir/source of infection to susceptible host. Fig.16
in the hospital but appearing after discharge, and also such
infections among the staff of the facility (99). Examples illustrates the medical model of an infectious disease.
include infection of surgical wounds, hepatitis B and urinary Basically there are three links in the chain of transmission,
tract infections. viz, the reservoir, modes of transmission and the susceptible
host.
OPPORTUNISTIC INFECTION
Sources and reservoir
This is infection by an organism(s) that takes the
opportunity provided by a defect in host defence to infect The starting point for the occurrence of a communicable
the host and hence cause disease. The organisms include disease is the existence of a reservoir or source of infection.
Herpes simplex, Cytomega/ovirus, Toxop/asma, M. The source of infection is defined as "the person, animal,
tuberculosis, M. avium intracellulare, pneumocystis, etc.
object or substance from which an infectious agent passes or
(For example, opportunistic infections are very common in is disseminated to the host" (99). A reservoir is defined as
AIDS). Infection by an organism that is not normally "any person, animal, arthropod, plant, soil or substance {or
pathogenic, but can cause disease if resistance is lowered. combination of these) in which an infectious agent lives and
multiplies, on which it depends primarily for survival, and
IATROGENIC (PHYSICIAN-INDUCED) DISEASE where it reproduces itself in such manner that it can be
Any untoward or adverse consequence of a preventive, transmitted to a susceptible host" (99). In short, the reservoir
diagnostic or therapeutic regimen or procedure, that causes is the natural habitat in which the organism metabolizes and
impairment, handicap, disability or death (103) resulting replicates.
from a physician's professional activity or from the The terms reservoir and source are not always
professional activity of other health professionals (2). The synonymous. For example, in hookworm infection, the
disease may be serious enough to prolong the hospital stay, reservoir is man, but the source of infection is the soil
require special treatment or actually threaten life. Most of the contaminated with infective larvae. In tetanus; the reservoir
episodes are related to drug therapy, immunization or and source are the same, that is soil. In typhoid fever, the
DY'.'IAMICS OF TRANSMlSSlON
FIG. 16
Chain of Infection
reservoir of infection may be a case or carrier, but the source Barring a few (e.g., measles), subclinical infection occurs
of infection may be faeces or urine of patients or in most infectious diseases. In some diseases (e.g., rubella,
contaminated food, milk or water. Thus the term "source" mumps, polio, hepatitis A and B, Japanese encephalitis,
refers to the immediate source of infection and may or may influenza, diphtheria), a great deal of subclinical infection
not be a part of reservoir. occurs. Since subclinical infections occur frequently during a
The term homologous reservoir is applied when another person's life time, they are responsible for the immunity
member of the same species is the victim, as for example shown by adult humans to a variety of disease-producing
man is the principal reservoir for some enteric pathogens, microbes.
e.g., vibrio cholerae. The term heterologous is applied when (3) The term latent infection must be distinguished from
the infection is derived from a reservoir other than man, as subclinical infection. In latent infection, the host does not shed
for example animals and birds infected with salmonella. the infectious agent which lies dormant within the host
The reservoir may be of three types : without symptoms (and often without demonstrable presence
in blood, tissues or bodily secretions of the host). For example,
1. Human reservoir latent infection occurs in herpes simplex, Brill-Zinser disease,
2. Animal reservoir, and infections due to slow viruses, ancylostomiasis, etc. The role of
3. Reservoir in non-living things. latent infection in the perpetuation of certain infectious agents
appears to be great (108).
1. Human reservoir In epidemiological terminology, the term primary case
By far the most important source or reservoir of infection refers to the first case of a communicable disease introduced
for humans is man himself. He may be a case or carrier. Man into the population unit being studied. The term index
is often described as his own enemy because most of the case refers to the first case to come to the attention of the
communicable diseases of which man is heir to are investigator; it is not always the primary case. Secondary
contracted from human sources. cases are those developing from contact with primary case.
A suspect case is an individual (or a group of individuals)
a.CASES who has all of the signs and symptoms of a disease or
condition, yet has not been diagnosed as having the disease
A case is defined as "a person in the population or study or had the cause of the symptoms connected to the
group identified as having the particular disease, health suspected pathogen.
disorder or condition under investigation" (2). A variety of
criteria (e.g., clinical, biochemical, laboratory) may be used Whatever may be the "gradient of infection", all infected
to identify cases. Broadly, the presence of infection in a host persons, whether clinical or subclinical, are potential sources
may be clinical, subclinical or latent. These variations in the of infection, because the disease agent is leaving the body
manifestations of disease are referred to as "spectrum of through frequent stools, vomiting, coughing, sneezing or
disease" or "gradient of infection" (see page 39). other means and is potentially available for transfer to a new
host.
(1) The clinical illness may be mild or moderate, typical
or atypical, severe or fatal depending upon the gradient of b. CARRIERS
involvement. Epidemiologically, mild cases may be more
In some diseases, either due to inadequate treatment or
important sources of infection than severe cases because
immune response, the disease agent is not completely
they are ambulant and spread the infection wherever they
eliminated, leading to a carrier state. A carrier is defined as
go, whereas severe cases are usually confined to bed.
"an infected person or animal that harbours a specific
(2) The subclinica/ cases are variously referred to as infectious agent in the absence of discernible clinical disease
inapparent, covert, missed or abortive cases. They are and serves as a potential source of infection for others" (2).
equally important as sources of infection. The disease agent As a rule carriers are less infectious than cases, but
may multiply in the host but does not manifest itself by signs epidemiologically, they are more dangerous than cases
and symptoms. The disease agent is, eliminated and because they escape recognition, and continuing as they do
contaminates the environment in the same way as clinical to live a normal life among the population or community,
cases. Persons who are thus sick (unbeknown to themselves they readily infect the susceptible individuals over a wider
and others) contribute more than symptomatic patients to area and longer period of time, under favourable conditions.
the transmission of infection to others and what is more, The "Typhoid Mary" is a classic example of a carrier.
they do not appear in any of the statistics. Subclinical cases The elements in a carrier state are : (a} the presence in
play a dominant role in maintaining the chain of infection the body of the disease agent {b) the absence of
(endemicity) in the community. recognizable symptoms and signs of disease, and (c) the
Subclinical infection can be detected only by laboratory shedding of the disease agent in the discharges or
tests, e.g., recovery of the organism, antibody response, excretions, thus acting as a source of infection for other
biochemical and skin sensitivity tests. persons.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
Carriers may be classified as below : Carriers of avirulent organisms are called pseudo-carriers.
A. Type Pseudo-carriers are not important epidemiologically.
(a) lncubatory C. By portal of exit : Carriers may also be classified
(b) Convalescent according to the portal of exit of the infectious agent. Thus
(c) Healthy we have urinary carriers, intestinal carriers, respiratory
carriers, nasal carriers, etc. Skin eruptions, open wounds
B. Duration and blood are also portals of exit. In typhoid fever, the
(a) Temporary urinary carrier is more dangerous than an intestinal carrier.
(b) Chronic A typhoid carrier working in a food establishment or water
C. Portal of exit works is more dangerous than a typhoid carrier working in
(a) Urinary an office establishment. Thus the portal of exit and the
(b) Intestinal occupational status of the carrier are important
(c) Respiratory epidemiological considerations.
(d) Others
2. Animal reservoir
A. By type : (a) INCUBATORY CARRIERS : Incubatory The source of infection may sometimes be animals and
carriers are those who shed the infectious agent during the birds. These, like the human sources of infection, may be
incubation period of disease. That is, they are capable of cases or carriers. The diseases and infections which are
infecting others before the onset of illness. This usually transmissible to man from vertebrates are called zoonoses.
occurs during the last few days of the incubation period, There are over 100 zoonotic diseases which may be
e.g., measles, mumps, polio, pertussis, influenza, diphtheria conveyed to man from animals and birds. The best known
and hepatitis B. (b) CONVALESCENT CARRIERS : That is, examples are rabies, yellow fever and influenza. The role of
those who continue to shed the disease agent during the pigs and ducks in the spread of epidemic and pandemic
period of convalescence, e.g., typhoid fever, dysentery influenza both as reservoirs, carriers and "amplifying hosts"
(bacillary and amoebic), cholera, diphtheria and whooping is now well established. Pigeons in cities can lead to
cough. In these diseases, clinical recovery does not coincide infection with chlamydia; dust mites from them can cause
with bacteriological recovery. A convalescent carrier can allergy in man. Ornithosis and arboviruses can be
pose a serious threat to the unprotected household members transmitted to man from various birds. Wild birds, in
and those in the immediate environment, as in the case of a particular, are important hosts in the transmission cycles of
typhoid fever patient who may excrete the bacilli for 6-8 most of the mosquito-borne encephalitis and several
weeks. This highlights the importance of bacteriological mosquito-borne undifferentiated febrile diseases (101).
surveillance of carriers, after clinical recovery. (c) HEALTHY Histoplasmosis is carried all over the world by birds (109).
CARRIERS : Healthy carriers emerge from subclinical cases. As birds migrate from one locality to another they may carry
They are victims of subclinical infection who have ticks infected with viruses and rickettsiae that may cause
developed carrier state without suffering from overt disease, disease in humans. In short, the migrations and movements
but are nevertheless shedding the disease agent, e.g., of animals and birds may carry serious epizootiological and
poliomyelitis, cholera, meningococcal meningitis, epidemiological risks. There is evidence that genetic
salmonellosis, and diphtheria. It is well to remember that a recombination between animal and human viruses might
person whose infection remains subclinical may or may not produce "new" strains of viruses (e.g., influenza viruses).
be a carrier. For example, in polio the infection may remain
subclinical and the person may act as a temporary carrier by 3. Reservoir in non-living things
virtue of shedding the organism. On the other hand, in
tuberculosis, most persons with positive tuberculin test do Soil and inanimate matter can also act as reservoirs of
not actively disseminate tubercle bacilli and therefore are infection. For example, soil may harbour agents that cause
not labelled as carrier (36). tetanus, anthrax, coccidioidomycosis and mycetoma.
B. By duration : (a) TEMPORARY CARRIERS : MODES OF TRANSMISSION
Temporary carriers are those who shed the infectious agent
for short periods of time. In this category may be included Communicable diseases may be transmitted from the
the incubatory, convalescent and healthy carriers. reservoir or source of infection to a susceptible individual in
(b) CHRONIC CARRIERS : A chronic carrier is one who many different ways, depending upon the infectious agent,
excretes the infectious agent for indefinite periods. Chronic portal of entry and the local ecological conditions. As a rule,
carrier state occurs in a number of diseases, e.g., typhoid an infectious disease is transmitted by only one route, e.g.,
fever, hepatitis B, dysentery, cerebra-spinal meningitis, typhoid fever by vehicle transmission and common cold by
malaria, gonorrhoea, etc. Chronic carriers are far more direct contact. But there are others which may be
important sources of infection than cases. The longer the transmitted by several routes e.g., AIDS, salmonellosis,
carrier state, the greater the risk to the community. Some hepatitis B, brucellosis, Q fever, tularemia etc. The multiple
carriers excrete the infectious agent only intermittently and transmission routes enhance the survival of the infectious
some continuously. The duration of the carrier state varies agent. The mode of transmission of infectious diseases may
with the disease. In typhoid fever and hepatitis B, the be classified as below (2,99).
chronic carrier state may last for several years; in chronic
dysentery, it may last for a year or longer. In diphtheria, the A DIRECT TRANSMISSION
carrier state is associated with infected tonsils; in typhoid 1. Direct contact
fever with gall bladder disease. Chronic carriers are known 2. Droplet infection
to reintroduce disease into areas which are otherwise free of 3. Contact with soil
infection (e.g., malaria). Therefore their early detection and 4. Inoculation into skin or mucosa
treatment are essential to limit the spread of infection. 5. Transplacental (vertical)
MODES OF TRANSMISSION
B INDIRECT TRANSMISSION tetanus, mycosis etc. (4) Inoculation into skin or mucosa :
1. Vehicle-borne The disease agent may be inoculated directly into the skin or
2. Vector-borne mucosa e.g., rabies virus by dog bite, hepatitis B virus
a. Mechanical through contaminated needles and syringes etc., and
b. Biological (5) Transplacental (or vertical) transmission : Disease agents
3. Air-borne can be transmitted transplacentally (111, 112). This is
a. Droplet nuclei another form of direct transmission. Examples include the
b. Dust so-called TORCH agents (Toxoplasma gondii, rubella virus,
4. Fomite-borne cytomegalovirus and herpes virus), varicella virus, syphilis,
5. Unclean hands and fingers hepatitis B, Coxsackie B and AIDS. Some of the non-living
agents (e.g., thalidomide, diethylstilbestrol) can also be
transmitted vertically. In these cases, the disease agent
( 1) Direct contact : Infection may be transmitted by direct produces malformations of the embryo by disturbing its
contact from skin to skin, mucosa to mucosa, or mucosa to development.
skin of the same or another person. This implies direct and
essentially immediate transfer of infectious agents from the
reservoir or source to a susceptible individual, without an This embraces a variety of mechanisms including the
intermediate agency, e.g., skin-to-skin contact as by traditional 5 F's - "flies, fingers, fomites, food and fluid". An
touching, kissing or sexual intercourse or continued close essential requirement for indirect transmission is that the
contact. Direct contact not only reduces the period for which infectious agent must be capable of surviving outside the
the organism will have to survive outside the human host human host in the external environment and retain its basic
but also ensures a larger dose of infection. Diseases properties of pathogenesis and virulence till it finds a new
transmitted by direct contact include STD and AIDS, host. This depends upon the characteristics of the agent, the
leprosy, leptospirosis, skin and eye infections. (2) Droplet inanimate object and the influence of environmental factors
infection : This is direct projection of a spray of droplets of such as temperature and humidity. If the disease agent
saliva and nasopharyngeal secretions during coughing, acquires drug resistance, it will further facilitate its spread.
sneezing, (Fig.17) or speaking and spitting, talking into the Indirect transmission can occur in a variety of settings :
surrounding atmosphere. The expelled droplets may
impinge directly upon the conjunctiva, oro-respiratory
1. Vehnde-borne
mucosa or skin of a close contact. Particles of 10 mmm or Vehicle-borne transmission implies transmission of the
greater in diameter are filtered off by nose. Those 5 mmm or infectious agent through the agency of water, food (including
less can penetrate deeply and reach the alveoli. The droplet raw vegetables, fruits, milk and milk products), ice, blood,
spread is usually, limited to a distance of 30-60 cm between serum, plasma or other biological products such as tissues
source and host (110). In infectious diseases, these droplets, and organs. Of these water and food are the most frequent
which may contain millions of bacteria and viruses can be a vehicles of transmission, because they are used by everyone.
source of infection to others. When a healthy susceptible The infectious agent may have multiplied or developed in the
person comes within the range of these infected droplets he vehicle (e.g., S. aureus in food) before being transmitted; or
is likely to inhale some of them and acquire infection. only passively transmitted in the vehicle (e.g., hepatitis A
Diseases transmitted by droplet spread include many virus in water}. Diseases transmitted by water and food
respiratory infections, eruptive fevers, many infections of the include chiefly infections of the alimentary tract, e.g., acute
nervous system, common cold, diphtheria, whooping cough, diarrhoeas, typhoid fever, cholera, polio, hepatitis A, food
tuberculosis, meningococcal meningitis, etc. The potential poisoning and intestinal parasites. Those transmitted by
for droplet spread is increased in conditions of close blood include hepatitis B, malaria, syphilis, brucellosis,
proximity, overcrowding and lack of ventilation. (3) Contact trypanasomes (Chaga's disease), infectious mononucleosis
with soil : The disease agent may be acquired by direct and cytomegalovirus infection (113). Organ transplantation
exposure of susceptible tissue to the disease agent in soil, may result in the introduction of the disease agent such as
compost or decaying vegetable matter in which it normally cytomegalovirus in association with kidney transplants.
leads a saprophytic existence e.g., hookworm larvae, The epidemiological features of vehicle transmission are :
(a) if the dose of contamination is heavy, the outbreak may
be explosive as in the case of cholera and hepatitis A
epidemics (b) cases are initially confined to those who are
exposed to the contaminated vehicle, in some infections
(c) when secondary cases occur, the primary case may be
obscured (d) the distance travelled by the infectious agent
may be great, e.g., outbreaks of food poisoning (e) it is not
always possible to isolate the infectious agent in the
incriminated vehicle, e.g., typhoid bacilli in contaminated
water (f) when the vehicle is controlled or withdrawn, the
epidemic subsides, e.g., epidemics of cholera, and (g} the
common source of infection is often traceable.
2. Vector-borne
In infectious disease epidemiology, vector is defined as
FIG. 17 an arthropod or any living carrier (e.g., snail) that transports
Droplets sprayed into the air from a sneeze an infectious agent to a susceptible individual. Transmission
(From: The Medical Clinics of North America, 1944. p. 1301) by a vector may be mechanical or biological. In the latter
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
case, the disease agent passes through a developmental The factors which influence the ability of vectors to transmit
cycle or multiplication in the vector. disease are : (a) host feeding preferences (b) infectivity, that is
ability to transmit the disease agent (c) susceptibility, that is
Epidemiological classification of vector-borne diseases ability to become infected (d) survival rate of vectors in the
environment (e) domesticity, that is degree of association with
I. By vector man, and (f) suitable environmental factors. Seasonal
a) Invertebrate type : Arthropod vectors fall into seven occurrence of some diseases (e.g., malaria) may be related to
orders largely intense breeding and thereby greater density of the insect
(1) Diptera - flies and mosquitoes vector during certain periods of the year.
(2) Siphonaptera fleas 3. Airborne
(3} Orthoptera cockroaches
(1) Droplet nuclei : "Droplet nuclei" are a type of
(4) Anoplura - sucking lice
particles implicated in the spread of airborne infection. They
(5) Hemiptera - bugs, including kissing bugs are tiny particles (1-10 microns range) that represent the
(6) Acarina - ticks and mites dried residue of droplets (2). They may be formed by
(7) Copepoda - cyclops (a) evaporation of droplets coughed or sneezed into the air
b) Vertebrate type - Mice, rodents, bats. or (b) generated purposefully by a variety of atomizing
devices (aerosols). They may also be formed accidentally in
II. By transmission chain microbiological laboratories, in abattoirs, rendering plants or
autopsy rooms (99). The droplet nuclei may remain airborne
Vector-borne diseases are classified under heterogeneous for long periods of time, some retaining and others losing
infection chain and involve three principal patterns : infectivity or virulence. They not only keep floating in the air
a) Man and a non-vertebrate host but may be disseminated by air currents from the point of
1} Man-arthropod-man (malaria) their origin. Particles in the 1-5 micron range are liable to be
2} Man-snail-man (schistosomiasis). easily drawn into the alveoli of the lungs and may be
retained there. Diseases spread by droplet nuclei include
b) Man, another vertebrate host, and a non-vertebrate
tuberculosis, influenza, chickenpox, measles, Q fever and
host many respiratory infections. (Not considered airborne are
1} Mammal-arthropod-man (plague) droplets and other large particles which promptly settle out).
2} Bird-arthropod-man (encephalitis). Mention must also be made of the role of airborne spread of
c) Man and 2 intermediate hosts toxic air pollutants including "smog" resulting in air pollution
epidemics.
1) Man-cyclops-fish-man (fish tape worm)
2) Man-snail-fish-man (Clonorchis sinensis) (2) Dust : Some of the larger droplets which are expelled
3) Man-snail-crab-man (Paragonimiasis). during talking, coughing or sneezing, settle down by their
sheer weight on the floor, carpets, furniture, clothes, bedding,
III. By methods in which vectors transmit agent linen and other objects in the immediate environment and
a) Biting become part of the dust. A variety of infectious agents (e.g.,
b) Regurgitation streptococci, other pathogenic bacteria, viruses and fungal
spores) and skin squamae have been found in the dust of
c) Scratching-in of infective faeces
hospital wards and living rooms. Some of them (e.g., tubercle
d) Contamination of host with body fluids of vectors. bacilli) may survive in the dust for considerable periods under
IV. By methods in which vectors are involved in the optimum conditions of temperature and moisture. During the
transmission and propagation of parasites act of sweeping, dusting and bed-making, the dust is released
into the air and becomes once again airborne. Dust particles
(a) Mechanical transmission : The infectious agent is may also be blown from the soil by wind; this may include
mechanically transported by a crawling or flying arthropod fungal spores. Coccidioidomycosis is an example of a disease
through soiling of its feet or proboscis; or by passage of spread through airborne transmission of fungal spores (36).
organisms through its gastrointestinal tract and passively Other diseases carried by infected dust include streptococcal
excreted. There is no development or multiplication of the and staphylococcal infection, pneumonia, tuberculosis,
infectious agent on or within the vector. Q fever and psittacosis. Airborne dust is primarily inhaled,
(b) Biological transmission : The infectious agent but may settle on uncovered food and milk. This type of
undergoing replication or development or both in vector and transmission is most common in hospital-acquired
requires an incubation period before vector can transmit. (nosocomial) infection.
Biological transmission is of three types : (i) Propagative :
The agent merely multiplies in vector, but no change in 4. Fomite-borne
form, e.g., plague bacilli in rat fleas. (ii) Cyclo-propagative : Fomites (singular; fomes) are inanimate articles or
The agent changes in form and number, e.g., malaria substances other than water or food contaminated by the
parasites in mosquito. (iii) Cyclo-deve/opmental : The infectious discharges from a patient and capable of
disease agent undergoes only development but no harbouring and transferring the infectious agent to a healthy
multiplication, e.g., microfilaria in mosquito. person. Fomites include soiled clothes, towels, linen,
When the infectious agent is transmitted vertically from handkerchiefs, cups, spoons, pencils, books, toys, drinking
the infected female to her progeny in the vector, it is known glasses, door handles, taps, lavatory chains, syringes,
as transovarial transmission. Transmission of the disease instruments and surgical dressings. The fomites play an
agent from one stage of the life cycle to another as for important role in indirect infection. Diseases transmitted by
example nymph to adult is known as transstadial fomites include diphtheria, typhoid fever, bacillary
transmission. dysentery, hepatitis A, eye and skin infections.
5. Unclean hands and fingers explained in Fig.18. The factors which determine the
Hands are the most common medium by which incubation period include the generation time of the
pathogenic agents are transferred to food from the skin, nose, particular pathogen, infective dose, portal of entry and
bowel, etc as well as from other foods. The transmission takes individual susceptibility. As a rule, infectious diseases are
place both directly (hand-to-mouth) and indirectly. not communicable during the incubation period, but there
Examples include staphylococcal and streptococcal are exceptions, as for example, measles, chickenpox,
infections, typhoid fever, dysentery, hepatitis A and intestinal whooping cough and hepatitis A are communicable during
parasites. Unclean hands and fingers imply lack of personal the later part of the incubation period.
hygiene. Lack of personal hygiene coupled with poor The length of the incubation period is characteristic of
sanitation favour person-to-person transmission of infection, each disease. There is a minimum incubation period for every
an example is the 1984 dysentery epidemic in India. disease before which no illness can occur. That is, incubation
period varies for different infectious diseases, and also from
SUSCEPTIBLE HOST one person to another with the same disease. In some, the
incubation period is very short ranging from a few hours to
Successful parasitism 2-3 days, e.g., staphylococcal food poisoning, cholera,
bacillary dysentery and influenza. In some, the incubation
Four stages have been described in successful parasitism : period is of median length ranging from 10 days to 3 weeks;
(a) First, the infectious agent must find a PORTAL OF in this category, there are many examples : typhoid infections,
ENTRY by which it may enter the host. There are many virus diseases such as chickenpox, measles and mumps. Then
portals of entry, e.g., respiratory tract, alimentary tract, there are infections with longer incubation periods (ranging
genitourinary tract, skin, etc. Some organisms may have from weeks to months or years) and whose incubation time is
more than one portal of entry, e.g., hepatitis B, Q fever, difficult to measure precisely, e.g., hepatitis A and B, rabies,
brucellosis. (b) On gaining entry into the host, the organisms leprosy and slow virus diseases.
must reach the appropriate tissue or "SITE OF ELECTION"
in the body of the host where it may find optimum Non-infectious diseases such as cancer, heart disease and
conditions for its multiplication and survival. (c) Thirdly, the mental illness also have incubation periods, which may be
disease agent must find a way out of the body (PORTAL OF months or years. The term latent period is used in non-
EXIT) in order that it may reach a new host and propagate infectious diseases as the equivalent of incubation period in
its species. If there is no portal of exit, the infection becomes infectious diseases (36). Latent period has been defined as
a dead-end infection as in rabies, bubonic plague, tetanus "the period from disease initiation to disease detection" (2).
and trichinosis. (d) After leaving the human body, the In chronic disease, the agent-host interactions leading to a
organism must survive in the external environment for sequence of cellular changes are not well understood.
sufficient period till a new host is found. In addition, a Incubation period is of fundamental importance in
successful disease agent should not cause the death of the epidemiological studies : (a) Tracing the source of infection
host but produce only a low-grade immunity so that the host and contacts : In the case of a disease with a short incubation
is vulnerable again and again to the same infection. The best period ranging from a few hours to a few days, it is relatively
example is common cold virus. simple to trace the source of infection and "follow the trail"
of the spread of infection as in the case of food poisoning,
Incubation period bacillary dysentery or typhoid fever. The position is quite
An infection becomes apparent only after a certain different with diseases whose incubation period is of medium
incubation period, which is defined as "the time interval length (10 days to 3 weeks) or longer. So many things will
between invasion by an infectious agent and appearance of have happened and such varied contacts taken place that the
the first sign or symptom of the disease in question" (2). cause-effect relationship becomes "diluted". We will have a
During the incubation period, the infectious agent whole gamut of possible causes from among which we have
undergoes multiplication in the host. When a sufficient to single out the main cause. Once the source of infection is
density of the disease agent is built up in the host, the health traced, then only it will be possible to institute appropriate
equilibrium is disturbed and the dlsease becomes overt. Also control measures. (b) Period of surveillance : Incubation
of interest to the epidemiologist is the median incubation period is useful in determining the period of surveillance
period, defined as the time required for 50 per cent of the (or quarantine) which may be advised (A in Fig. 18). This
cases to occur following exposure. These concepts are period is usually equal to the maximum incubation period of
c
A Minimum incubation period
B
B Median incubation period
C Estimate of average incubation period
Primary cases
A Secondary cases
i
Time
Exposure FIG. 18
Showing incubation periods (Ref. 3)
PRfNCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
the disease. (c) Immunization : Prophylactically, a knowledge The denominator consists of all persons who are exposed
of incubation period helps us to prevent clinical illness by to the case. More specifically, the denominator may be
human immunoglobulins and antisera. (d) Identification of restricted only to "susceptible" contacts, if means are
point source or propagated epidemics : In a point source available to distinguish the susceptible persons from the
epidemic, all the cases occur within one incubation period immune (4). The primary case is excluded from both the
of the disease; in a propagated epidemic, cases occur later numerator and denominator.
than the known length of the incubation period; and Supposing there is a family of 6 consisting of 2 parents
{e) Prognosis : Incubation period can also be used in {already immune) and 4 children who are susceptible to a
estimating the prognosis of a disease. In some diseases {e.g., specific disease, say measles. There occurs a primary case
tetanus, rabies), the shorter the incubation period, the worse and within a short time 2 secondary cases among the
the prognosis of the disease. Thus 'prognosis is related to the remaining children. The secondary attack rate is 2/3 or 66.6
incubation period of the disease (13). per cent. The primary case is excluded from both numerator
Serial interval and denominator.
In actual practice we seldom know precisely the Secondary attack rate is limited in its application to
incubation period of a disease. But we know, when an infectious diseases in which the primary case is infective for
outbreak of disease occurs, say in a family which is the only a short period of time measured in days (e.g., measles
smallest group and also a closed group, there is an initial and chickenpox). When the primary case is infective over a
primary case. The primary case is followed by 2 or 3 long period of time {e.g., tuberculosis), duration of exposure
secondary cases within a short time. The gap in time is an important factor in determining the extent of spread
(13). It is indicated by the formula:
between the onset of the primary case and the secondary
case is called the "serial interval". By collecting information Number of contacts developing
about a whole series of such onsets, we get a distribution of tuberculosis
secondary cases from which we can guess the incubation SAR
period of disease. Number of person-weeks (months
or years) of exposure
Generation time
Another concept in infectious disease epidemiology is Another limitation of secondary attack rate is to identify
"generation time". It is defined as "the interval of time "susceptibles". It is feasible only in diseases such as measles
between receipt of infection by a host and maximal and chickenpox where history can be used as a basis for
infectivity of that host" (2). In general, generation time is identification; but in many others, susceptibles cannot be
roughly equal to the incubation period. However, these two readily identified {e.g., influenza). In such cases, secondary
terms are not the same. The time of maximum attack rate is based on all exposed family members and still
communicability may precede or follow the incubation remains a useful tool (13). Where there are numerous
period. For example, in mumps, communicability appears to subclinical cases, secondary attack rate has a limited
reach its height about 48 hours before the onset of swelling meaning. Further spread cannot be measured without
of the salivary glands (36). With person-to-person laboratory investigations (108).
transmission of infection, the interval between cases is An additional advantage of the secondary attack rate is
determined by the generation time (2). A further difference that vaccinees and non-vaccinees from several families can
is that the term "incubation period" can only be applied to be added to determine the overall attack rates in the
infections that result in manifest disease, whereas vaccinated and unvaccinated populations, provided the
"generation time" refers to transmissions of infection, same definitions for cases and immunization status are used.
whether clinical or subclinical (36). Secondary attack rate was initially developed to measure
Communicable period the spread of an infection within a family, household or any
closed aggregate of persons who have had contact with a
The communicable period is defined as "the time during case of disease. It is also useful to determine whether a
which an infectious agent may be transferred directly or disease of unknown aetiology (e.g., Hodgkin's disease) is
indirectly from an infected person to another person, from communicable or not; and in evaluating the effectiveness of
an infected animal to man, or from an infected person to an control measures such as isolation and immunization.
animal, including arthropods" (2). Communicability varies
in different diseases. Some diseases are more communicable HOST DEFENCES
during the incubation period than during actual illness.
Communicability of some diseases can be reduced by early Host defences against infection are at once local and
diagnosis and treatment. An important measure of systemic, non-specific and specific, and humeral and
communicability is Secondary attack rate. cellular. It is difficult to identify any infectious agent that fails
Secondary attack rate to stimulate multiple host defence mechanisms. The concept
of overlapping host defences is crucial to our understanding
Secondary attack rate (SAR) is defined as "the number of of susceptibility to infection. This overlapping underlies the
exposed persons developing the disease within the range of reasonable measure of good health in the face of an
the incubation period, following exposure to the primary apparently significant host immune defect (114).
case" (4). It is given by the formula:
There is a phase of passive immunity transmitted to the
Number of exposed persons developing baby from the mother across the placenta. Maternal
the disease within the range of the
incubation period
antibody transmitted to infant is gradually lost over a period
SAR=
of 6 months. Thus a large proportion of infants remain free
Total number of exposed/"susceptible" from potent infection up to 3 months, or even longer. There
contacts is good evidence that this protective "biological shield" is
due to the presence of high levels of immunoglobulins lgM
and especially lgG in the cord blood and plasma of infants
born of immune mothers. It has been postulated that some
other factors (breast milk, presence of fetal haemoglobulin),
are also responsible for the transient protection of infants.
SPECIFIC DEFENCES
Specific defences come into play, once microorganisms
have breached local defence mechanisms. By virtue of these FIG. 19
defences, the host is able to recognize, destroy and eliminate The primary response
antigenic material (e.g., bacteria, viruses, proteins, etc.)
foreign to his own. A person is said to be immune when he The nature and extent of primary response to an antigen
possesses "specific protective antibodies or cellular immunity is determined by a number of factors, e.g., dose of antigen,
as a result of previous infection or immunization, or is so nature of antigen, route of administration, adjuvants,
conditioned by such previous experience as to respond nutritional status of the host, etc (115). For example, with
adequately to prevent infection and/or clinical illness small doses of antigen, only lgM type of response may be
following exposure to a specific infectious agent" (99). induced, and successive small doses of antigen at suitable
intervals may also induce lgM antibody. The antigenic dose
The specific defences may be discussed for convenience required for the induction of lgG is about 50 times that
under the following heads : which is required to induce lgM antibody.
1. Active immunity An important outcome of primary antigenic challenge is
(1) Humoral immunity education of the reticuloendothelial system of the body.
(2) Cellular immunity There is production of what are known as "memory cells" or
"primed cells" by both B and T lymphocytes. These cells are
(3) Combination of the above. responsible for the "immunological memory" which
2. Passive immunity becomes established after immunization. In fact, the purpose
(1) Normal human lg of immunization is to develop immunological memory.
(2) Specific human lg (b) SECONDARY (BOOSTER) RESPONSE: The response
to a booster dose differs in a number of ways from the
(3) Animal antitoxins or antisera. primary response : (1) shorter latent period. (2) production
1. Active immunity of antibody more rapid. (3) antibody more abundant.
(4) antibody response maintained at higher levels for a
It is the immunity which an individual develops as a result longer period of time, and (5) the antibody elicited tends to
of infection or by specific immunization and is usually have a greater avidity or capacity to bind to the antigen.
associated with presence of antibodies or cells having a
specific action on the microorganism concerned with a The secondary response also involves the production of
particular infectious disease or on its toxin (99). In other lgM and IgG antibody. Collaboration between B and T cells
words, active immunity depends upon the humoral and is necessary to initiate a secondary response. There is a brief
cellular responses of the host. The immunity produced is production of IgM antibody and much larger and more
prolonged production of lgG antibody. This accelerated
specific for a particular disease, i.e., the individual in most
response is attributed to immunological memory. The
cases is immune to further infection with the same organism
immune response (primary and secondary) and
or antigenically related organism for varying periods
immunological memory are the basis of vaccination and
depending upon the particular disease.
revaccination.
Active immunity may be acquired in 3 ways :
(a) following clinical infection, e.g., chickenpox, rubella (1) Humoral immunity
and measles. Humoral immunity comes from the B-cells (bone-marrow
(b) following subclinical or inapparent infection, e.g., derived lymphocytes) which proliferate and manufacture.
polio and diphtheria. · specific antibodies after antigen presentation by
macrophages. The antibodies are localized in the
(c) following immunization with an antigen which may be immunoglobulin fraction of the serum. lmmunoglobulins are
a killed vaccine, a live attenuated vaccine or toxoid. divided into 5 main classes - lgG, lgM, lgA, lgD and lgE (and
sub-classes within them) each class representing a different
The immune response
functional group. These antibodies circulate in the body and
(a) PRIMARY RESPONSE : When an antigen is act directly by neutralizing the microbe, or its toxin or
administered for the first time to an animal or human who rendering the microbe susceptible to attack by the
has never been exposed to it, there is a latent period of polymorphonuclear leucocyte and the monocyte. The
induction of 3 to 10 days before antibodies appear in the complement system, together with antibodies is necessary for
blood (Fig. 19). The antibody that is elicited first is entirely efficient phagocytosis of bacteria (116).
of the lgM type. The lgM antibody titre rises steadily during The antibodies are specific, i.e., they react with the same
the next 2-3 days or more, reaches a peak level and then antigen which provoked their production, or a closely related
declines almost as fast as it developed. Meanwhile, if the one. As a result of this specificity, host response mediated by
antigenic stimulus was sufficient, lgG antibody appears in a antibodies is somewhat limited in that it will not provide
few days. lgG reaches a peak in 7-10 days and then protection against more than one antigen (117). This
gradually falls over a period of weeks or months (Fig. 19). specificity has been a formidable problem in the production
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPJDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
of vaccines. For example, there are numerous antigenic types individual, his physiological state and the micro-organism,
of rhinoviruses, and it is not possible to expect a single the immune systems are overwhelmed and the disease
vaccine to be effective against all these types (117). develops. Many examples of this can be seen among
individuals who, though immunized, nevertheless contact a
(2) Cellular immunity typhoid or paratyphoid infection, diphtheria, or some other
Although antibodies are quite effective in combating most disease.
infectious diseases, humoral immunity does not cover all the Moreover, many factors are involved in the maintenance
situation that one finds in infectious diseases (117). For of immunity. Fatigue, strange surroundings, change of diet,
example, some pathogens (e.g., M. leprae, M. tuberculosis, ingestion of drugs, and emotional shock are examples of
S. typhi, Candida a/bicans and many viruses) escape the these factors that can produce a fall in immunity or a
bactericidal action of leukocyte. They can even multiply in lowering of the threshold at which resistance to infection
the mononuclear leukocyte (macrophage). However, these fails (120).
macrophages can be stimulated by substances (lymphokines)
secreted by specific stimulated T-lymphocytes (thymus - 2. Passive immunity
derived lymphocytes). The activated macrophages perform a When antibodies produced in one body (human or
much more efficient phagocytic function than non-activated animal) are transferred to another to induce protection
macrophages (114). against disease, it is known as passive immunity. In other
It is now well-recognized that cellular immunity plays a words, the body does not produce its own antibodies but
fundamental role in resistance to infection. It is mediated by depends upon ready-made antibodies. Passive immunity
the T-cells which differentiate into sub-populations able to may be induced :
help B-lymphocytes. The T-cells do not secrete antibody, (a) by administration of an antibody-containing
but are responsible for recognition of antigen. On contact preparation (immune globulin or antiserum)
with antigen, the T -cells initiate a chain of responses e.g., (b) by transfer of maternal antibodies across the placenta.
activation of macrophages, release of cytotoxic factors, Human milk also contains protective antibodies, (lgA).
mononuclear inflammatory reactions, delayed (c) by transfer of lymphocytes, to induce passive cellular
hypersensitivity reactions, secretion of immunological immunity - this procedure is still experimental.
mediators (e.g., immune interferon), etc. There is growing
evidence that cellular immunity is responsible for immunity Passive immunity differs from active immunity in the
· against many diseases including tuberculosis, brucellosis and following respects : {a) immunity is rapidly established
also for the body's rejection of foreign material, such as skin (b) immunity produced is only temporary (days to months)
grafts. The importance of cell-mediated immunity can be till the antibody is eliminated from the body, and (c) there is
appreciated from the fact that a child born with a defect in no education of the reticuloendothelial system.
humoral antibody production may survive for as long as Passive immunization is useful for individual who cannot
6 years without replacement therapy, but a severe defect in form antibodies, or for the normal host who takes time to
cell-mediated immunity will result in death within the first develop antibodies following active immunization.
six months of life (118).
Herd immunity
(3) Combination of the above Herd immunity (or community immunity) describes a type
In addition to the B and T lymphoid cells which are of immunity that occurs when the vaccination of a portion of
responsible for recognizing self and non-self, very often, population (or herd) provides protection to unprotected
they cooperate with one another and with certain accessory individuals. Herd immunity theory proposes that in diseases
cells such as macrophages and human K (killer) cells, and passed from individual to individual, it is difficult to maintain
their joint functions constitute the complex events of a chain of infection when large numbers of a population are
immunity. For instance, one subset of T-cells (helper T-cells) immune. The higher the number of immune individuals, the
are required for the optimal production of antibody to most lower the likelihood that a susceptible person will come in
antigens. Another set of T-cells (suppressor T-cells) inhibit contact with an infectious agent (121).
immunoglobulin synthesis. Antibody-dependant cell- Herd immunity provides an immunological barrier to the
mediated (K) cytotoxic cells recognize membrane viral spread of disease in the human herd. For example, when an
antigens through specific antibody, whereas natural killer infectious disease is introduced into a "virgin" population,
(NK) cells destroy non-specifically virus-infected target cells. that is, population with a very low or no immunity, the
It is now increasingly recognized that vaccines to be effective attack and case fatality rates tend to be very high involving
must elicit both humoral and cell-mediated responses (119). practically all susceptibles as it had happened in the very
Active immunity takes time to develop. It is superior to severe measles epidemic in the Faroe islands, in 1854,
passive immunity because (a) the duration of protection, like where the population had no previous experience of
that of the natural infection is frequently long-lasting measles. The epidemic wave declined with a build-up of
(b) with few exceptions, severe reactions are rare (c) the herd immunity following natural infection.
protective efficacy of active immunization exceeds that of Elements which contribute to herd immunity are
passive immunization, and in some instances, approaches (a) occurrence of clinical and subclinical infection in the
100 per cent, and (d) active immunization is less expensive herd, (b) immunization of the herd, and (c) herd structure.
than passive immunization. Vaccines are cheaper to produce Herd structure is never constant. It is subject to constant
than are antisera. variation because of new births, deaths and population
It is important to realize at this stage that an individual is mobility. An on-going immunization programme will keep up
immunized only against small doses of pathogenic agents or the herd immunity at a very high level.
toxins. There exists a "threshold" at which resistance fails. The herd structure includes not only the hosts
Beyond a certain dosage, which here again varies with the (population) belonging to the herd species but also the
103
presence and distribution of alternative animal hosts and Vaccine is an immuno-biological substance designed to
possible insect vectors as well as those environmental and produce specific protection against a given disease. It
social factors that favour or inhibit the spread of infection stimulates the production of protective antibody and other
from host to host. The herd structure thus plays a decisive immune mechanisms. Vaccines may be prepared from live
role in the immunity status of the herd. modified organisms, inactivated or killed organisms,
If the herd immunity is sufficiently high, the occurrence of extracted cellular fractions, toxoids or combination of these.
an epidemic is regarded as highly unlikely. If that high level a. Live vaccines
of immunity is maintained and stepped up, by an on-going
immunization programme, to the point where the Live vaccines (e.g., BCG, measles, oral polio) are
susceptible persons are reduced to a small proportion of the prepared from live or wild (generally attenuated) organisms.
population, it may lead (but not necessarily) to elimination These organisms have been passed repeatedly in the
of the disease in due course. This has been achieved in such laboratory in tissue culture or chick embryos and have lost
diseases as diphtheria and poliomyelitis. In the case of their capacity to induce full-blown disease but retain their
smallpox, however, it may be mentioned that it was not herd immunogenicity. In general, live vaccines are more potent
immunity (although important as it was) that played a immunizing agents than killed vaccines, the reasons being :
crucial role in its eradication, but elimination of the source (i) live organisms multiply in the host and the resulting
of infection, by surveillance and containment measures. antigenic dose is larger than what is injected, (ii) live
With the abolition of vaccination against smallpox, the herd vaccines have all the major and minor antigenic
immunity in the case of smallpox will naturally tend to components, (iii) live vaccines engage certain tissues of the
decline with the passage of time. In the case of tetanus, body, as for example, intestinal mucosa by the oral polio
however, herd immunity does not protect the individual. vaccine, and (iv) there may be other mechanisms such as
the persistence of latent virus.
Studies have shown that it is neither possible nor
necessary to achieve 100 per cent herd immunity in a Live vaccines should not be administered to persons with
immune deficiency diseases or to persons whose immune
population to halt an epidemic or control disease. as for
example, eradication of smallpox. Just how much l~ss than response may be suppressed because of leukaemia,
100 per cent is required is a crucial question, for which no lymphoma or malignancy or because of therapy with
definite answer can be given. corticosteroids, alkylating agents, antimetabolic agents, or
radiation (123, 124). Pregnancy is another contraindication
Herd immunity may be determined by serological surveys unless the risk of infection exceeds the risk of harm to the
(serological epidemiology). foetus of some live vaccines.
When two live vaccines are required they should be given
IMMUNIZING AGENTS either simultaneously at different sites or with an interval of
The immunizing agents may be classified as vaccines, atleast 3 weeks. In the case of live vaccines, protection is
immunoglobulins and antisera. generally achieved with a single dose of vaccine. An
additional dose is given to ensure seroconversion, e.g., 95 to
Vaccines 98 per cent of recipient will respond to single dose of
Over the last century, vaccination has been the most measles vaccine. The second dose is given to ensure that
effective medical strategy to control infectious diseases. 100 per cent of persons are immune. The other exception is
Smallpox has been eradicated world-wide and poliomyelitis polio vaccine which needs three or more doses to be given
has been almost eradicated. Most viral and bacterial at spaced intervals to produce effective immunity. Live
diseases traditionally affecting children world-wide are now vaccines usually produce a durable immunity, but not
preventable by vaccines. Vaccination is estimated to save at always as long as that of the natural infection.
least 2-3 million lives every year. The vaccines currently Live vaccines must be properly stored to retain
used are as shown in Table 29. effectiveness. Serious failures of measles and polio
TABLE 29
Vaccines currently in use
immunization have resulted from inadequate refrigeration circulating antibody. They are often more stable than live
prior to use. attenuated vaccines.
b. Inactivated or killed vaccines Some features of attenuated vaccines versus inactivated
(killed) vaccines are listed in Table 30 and some of the very
Inactivated vaccines are produced by growing virus or important developments in the field of vaccines are listed in
bacteria in culture media and then inactivating them with Table 31.
heat or chemicals (usually formalin), when injected into the
body they stimulate active immunity. They are usually safe
v.:1ccines
but generally, less efficacious than live vaccines. For example,
cholera vaccine offers only 50 per cent protection. The Killed Live
efficacy of 3 doses of pertussis vaccine is about 80 per cent in Characteristic
vaccine
the first three years, and almost "nil" 12 years after
Number of doses Mutiple
immunization. Killed vaccines usually require a primary series
of 2 or 3 doses of vaccine to produce an adequate antibody Need for adjuvant Yes
response, and in most cases "booster" injections are required. Duration of immunity Shorter Longer
The duration of immunity following the use of inactivated Effectiveness of protection Lower Greater
vaccines varies from months to many years. Inactivated polio (more closely mimics natural infection)
vaccine has been quite an effective vaccine, the widespread Immunoglobulins produced IgG lgA and lgG
use of which in certain countries has led to the elimination of Mucosa! immunity produced Poor Yes
the disease. Killed vaccines are usually administered by Cell-mediated immunity produced Poor Yes
subcutaneous or intramuscular route. Residual virulent virus in vaccine Possible No
Because the vaccine is inactivated, the infective agent Reversion to virulence No Possible
cannot grow in the vaccinated individual and therefore, can Excretion of vaccine virus and No Possible
transmission to non-immune contacts
not cause the disease, even in an immunodeficient person.
Interference by other viruses in host No Possible
The only absolute contraindication to their administration Stability at room temperature High Low
is a severe local or general reaction to a previous dose.
Unlike live antigens, inactivited antigens are not affected by Source : (125)
TABLE 31
Milestones in vaccination
Source : (126)
105
c. Subunit vaccines (122) bacterial components from becoming a target of the host
A vaccine can be made of single or multiple antigenic immune response. Nevertheless, antibodies to bacterial
components of a microorganism that are capable of surface polysaccharides can clear the bacteria from the host
stimulating a specific immune response sufficient to protect by different mechanisms, such as complement-mediated
from the relevant pathogen infection or from the clinical killing and opsonophagocytosis. Hence, stimulation of an
manifestation of the disease. Depending on the molecular antibody response against the surface polysaccharide of
composition of the purified antigen used to prepare the pathogenic bacteria is a strategy for the development of
vaccine, and on the techniques applied to obtain the final vaccines against capsulated bacteria. The chemical structure
material used as a vaccine, different types of subunit or capsular polysaccharides varies not only between bacteria
vaccines can be defined. of different but also between different strains within
a single species, which are usually differentiated and typed
1. Toxoids based on their capsular polysaccharides. As a consequence,
a limitation of polysaccharide-based vaccine is that the
Certain organisms produce exotoxins, e.g., diphtheria immune responses they elicit are often serotype specific. In
and tetanus bacilli. The toxins produced by these organisms addition to S. pneumoniae, for which a vaccine against 23
are detoxicated and used in the preparation of vaccines. The serotypes is available, polysaccharide-based vaccines have
antibodies produced neutralize the toxic moiety produced been developed for MenACWY, Hib, and Salmonella
during infection, rather than act upon the organisms. In typhimurium (122).
general, toxoid preparations are highly efficacious and safe
immunizing agents. 5. Conjugated vaccines
2. Protein vaccines Children under two years of age do not respond well to
antigens, such as polysaccharides, which produce antibodies
In case, immunization with a single protein or a via a T-cell independent mechanism. If these polysaccharide
combination of proteins from a pathogen is sufficient to antigens are chemically linked (conjugated) to a protein that
stimulate a protective immune response against that T-cells recognize, then these conjugate vaccines can elicit
particular microorganism, the approach of a protein-based strong immune responses and immune memory in young
vaccine is appropriate. Proteins can be purified from in-vitro children. Similar to the polysaccharide-based vaccines, the
cultures of a pathogenic microorganism. The resulting conjugate vaccines are also sero-type specific, and,
vaccine preparations contain different amounts of therefore, multivalent formulations are required to achieve
contaminants depending on the efficiency of the purification protection against multiple serotypes. Examples are
process. Licensed acellular pertussis vaccines currently S. pneumococca/ and meningococca/ vaccines (121).
available contain from two to four different proteins purified
from B. pertussis and are able to confer protection against d. Combinations
whooping cough comparable to that obtained with the If more than one kind of immunizing agent is included in
whole cell vaccine. One of the most widely used subunit the vaccine it is called a mixed or combined vaccine. The
protein vaccines is the influenza vaccine composed of aim of co~bined vaccines is to simplify administration,
haemagglutinin (HA) and neuraminidase (NA) purified from reduce costs minimize the number of contacts of the patient
the inactivated influenza virus. with the health system, reducing the storage cost, improving
timelines of vaccination, and facilitating the addition of new
3. Recombinant protein vaccines
vaccine into immunization programme. No evidence exists
Development of the recombinant deoxyribonucleic acid that the administration of several antigens in combined
(DNA) technology has made possible the expression of vaccines increases the burden on the immune system which
protective protein antigens in heterologous expression is capable of responding to millions of antigens at a time.
systems such as E. coli, yeast, mammalian cells, or Combining antigens usually does not increase the risk of
baculovirus. This technology avoids the problems related to adverse reactions and can infact lead to an overall reduction
growing and manipulating large amounts of a pathogen in adverse reactions (121). The following are some of the
from which the antigen is purified. Moreover, recombinant well-known combinations :
proteins are generally better purified from cultured
microorganisms resulting in cleaner vaccine preparations DPT (Diphtheria-pertussis-tetanus)
with a better safety profile. A drawback of a clean vaccine OT (Diphtheria-tetanus)
preparation containing pure recombinant protein(s) is their DP (Diphtheria-pertussis)
reduced immunogenicity that may require the addition of an DPT and typhoid vaccine
adjuvant to achieve enhanced efficacy. For example, the
hepatitis B vaccine is made by inserting a segment of the MMR (Measles, mumps and rubella)
hepatitis B virus gene into a yeast cell. The modified yeast DPTP (DPT plus inactivated polio)
cell produces large amounts of hepatitis B surface antigen, Hepatitis A, and B
which is purified and harvested and used to produce the Hepatitis A, and typhoid.
vaccine. The recombinant hepatitis B vaccine is identical to
the natural hepatitis B surface antigen, but does not contain DTwP (Diphtheria, tetanus, whole-cell pertussis)
virus DNA and is unable to produce infection. DPT-Hep B-Hib (Diphtheria, pertussis, tetanus, hepatitis
Band haemophilus influenza type B).
4. Polysaccharide-based vaccines The term "polyvalent" is applied to vaccines (e.g., polio,
The surface of many pathogenic bacteria is covered by a influenza vaccines) which are prepared from two or more
capsular shell that is mainly assembled from polymeric strains of the same species. The term "auto" or
glycans. This extensive polysaccharide coat entirely shields "autogenous" vaccine is applied when the organism in the
the bacteria outer membrane, preventing other surface vaccine is obtained from the same patient.
PRI~ClPLES OF EPJDEMJOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGJC METHODS
Agent/
Target population Preparation°b Dosec Status
Condition
Hepatitis A Family contacts IG (0.02 ml/kg of body weight) Recommended
Institutional outbreaks (3.2mg/kg of body weight) for prevention
Travellers exposed to IG 0.02-0.05 ml/kg of body weight
unhygienic conditions in (3.2-8.0 mg/kg of body weight)
tropical or developing every 4 months
countries
Hepatitis C Percutaneous or mucosa! JG 0.05 ml/kg of body weight Optional for
exposure (8 mg/kg of body weight) prevention
Hepatitis B Percutaneous or mucosa! HBIG 0.05-0.07 ml/kg of body weight Recommended for
exposure (8-11 mg/kg of body weight) prevention
Repeat in one month
Newborns of mothers with HBIG 0.05ml (8 mg) at birth, 3, Recommended for
HBsAg and 6 months prevention
Sexual contacts of acute HBIG 0.05 ml/kg of body weight Optional for
hepatitis B patients (8 mg/kg of body weight) prevention
Repeat after one month
Rubella Women exposed during IG 20ml Optional for
early pregnancy prevention
·Varicella-zoster lmmuno-suppressed contacts VZ!Gct 15-25 units/kg body weight; Recommended for
of acute cases or minimum 125 units prevention
newborn contacts
'Measles (rubeola) Infants less than 1 year old or IG 0.25 ml/kg of body weight Recommended for
immuno-suppressed contacts or 0.5 ml/kg of body weight prevention
of acute cases exposed if immuno-suppressed
I
less than 6 days previously
,Rabies Subjects exposed to rabid RIG 20 JU/kg of body weight Recommended for
animals prevention
Tetanus Following significant TlG 250 units for prophylaxis Recommended
exposure of unimmunized 3000-6000 units for therapy for prevention
or incompletely immunized or treatment
person or immediately on
diagnosis of disease
'Rh isoimmunization Rh (DJ-negative mother on RhIG 1 vial (200-300 µg) per 15 ml Recommended for
delivery of Rh-positive infant, of Rh ( +) blood exposure prevention
or after uncompleted
pregnancy with Rh-positive
father, or after transfusion of
Rh-positive blood to
Rh-negative mother
a IG = immune globulin (human); HBIG =hepatitis B immune globulin; VZIG = varicella-zoster immune globulin;
RIG = rabies immune globulin; TIG tetanus immune globulin; RhIG = rhesus factor immune globulin.
b Hyperimmune immunoglobulins have also been used in prophylaxis of mumps and prophylaxis and treatment of pertussis and
diphtheria; there are no conclusive data available, and no recommendations can be given.
c Dose based on intramuscular administration of 16.5% solution
d Of limited availability at the present time.
manufacturer with the vaccine, since the diluent is Reading the Stages of the WM
specifically designed for the needs of that vaccine, with Stage 1. The inner square is lighter than the outer circle. If
respect to volume, pH level and chemical properties. the expiry date has not been passed .: USE the
Store the diluents, between +2° to + 8° C in the ILR. If vaccine
there are constraints of space, then store diluents outside Stage 2. The inner square is still lighter than the outer
the cold chain. However, remember to cool diluents for at circle. If the expiry date has not been passed :
least 24 hours before use to ensure that vaccines and USE the vaccine
diluents are at to +8°C when being reconstituted.
Otherwise, it can lead to thermal shock i.e. the death of Discard Point :
some or all the essential live organisms in the vaccine. Store Stage 3. The colour of the inner square matches that of the
the diluents and droppers with the vaccines in the vaccine outer circle : DO NOT use the vaccine
carrier during transportation. Diluents should not come in
direct contact with the ice pack. Beyond the Discard Point
Stage 4. The colour of the inner square is darker than the
The Vaccine Vial Monitor (VVM) (130, 131) outer circle : DO NOT use the vaccine
A VVM is a label containing a heat-sensitive material The VVM does not directly measure vaccine potency but
which is placed on a vaccine vial to register cumulative heat it gives information about the main factor that affects
exposure over time. potency i.e. heat exposure over a period of time.
The combined effects of time and temperature cause the
inner square of the VVM to darken gradually and ADVERSE EVENTS FOLLOWING
irreversibly as shown in Fig. 20. Before opening a vial, IMMUNIZATION
check the status of the VVM. Vaccines used in national immunization programmes are
extremely safe and effective. However, no immune response
is entirely free from the risk of adverse reactions or remote
sequelae.
An AEFI is any untoward medical occurrence which
follows immunization and which does not necessarily have a
causal relationship with the usage of the vaccine. The
adverse event may be any unfavourable or unintended sign,
abnormal laboratory finding, symptom or disease. Reported
adverse events can either be true adverse events, i.e. really a
result of the vaccine or immunization process, or
coincidental events that are not due to the vaccine or
immunization process but are temporally associated with
immunization.
In 2012, the Council for International Organizations of
Medical Sciences (CIOMS} and WHO revised the existing
classification relevant to cause-specific categorization
FIG. 20 of AEFis and a new categorization has been introduced
Different stages of the VVM (Table 35).
TABLE 35
Cause-specific categorization of AEFis (CIOMS/WHO 2012}
Vaccine product-related reaction An AEFI that is caused or precipitated by a vaccine due to one or more of the inherent properties
of the vaccine product.
Vaccine quality defect-related An AEFI that is caused or precipitated by a vaccine that is due to one or more quality defects of
reaction the vaccine product, including its administration device as provided by the manufacturer.
Immunization error-related reaction Immunization error-related reaction: an AEFI that is caused by inappropriate vaccine handling,
(formerly "programme error") prescribing or administration and thus by its nature is preventable.
Immunization anxiety-related An AEFI arising from anxiety about the immunization.
reaction
Coincidental event An AEFI that is caused by something other than the vaccine product, immunization error or
immunization anxiety.
Note : "Immunization" as used in these definitions means the usage of a vaccine for the purpose of immunizing individuals. "Usage" includes
all processes that occur after a vaccine product has left the manufacturing/packaging site, i.e. handling, prescribing and administration of
the vaccine.
Source : (121)
1. Vaccine reactions (121) TABlLE 36
The new cause-specific categorization is important for
decision-making on a vaccine-product, since it dearly Expected
differentiates the two types of possible vaccine reactions. frequency
The first, vaccine product-related reaction, is a reaction in Local reaction Common
an individual's response to the inherent properties of the (pain, swelling, redness)
vaccine, even when the vaccine has been prepared, Oral presentation-none
handled and administered correctly. The second, vaccine Local reaction Upto 50%
quality defect-related reaction, is the defect in a vaccine (pain, swelling, redness)
that occurred during manufacturing process. Such a defect Fever Upto 50%
may have an impact on an individual's response and thus Local reaction Upto 50%
increase the risk of adverse vaccine reactions. In early years (pain, swelling, redness)
of immunization programmes, a few major incidences of Hepatitis B Local reaction Adults up to
vaccine quality defect-related reactions were reported (e.g. (pain, swelling, redness) 30%, Children
upto 5%
Cutter case study). However, due to introduction of Fever 1-6%
improved Good Manufacturing Practices · (GMP), such
Hib Local reaction 5-15%
defects are now very rare. (pain, swelling, redness)
Fever 2-10%
Vaccine reactions may be classified into common, minor
reactions or rare, more serious reactions. Most vaccine Japanese Local reaction, Upto 20%
encephalitis low-grade fever, myalgia,
reactions are minor and settle on their own. More serious gastrointestinal upset
reactions are very rare and, in general, do not result in
Measles/ Local reaction Upto 103
long-term problems. IMMR (pain, swelling, redness)
Irritability, malaise and Upto5%
COMMON, MINOR VACCINE REACTIONS II Pneumococcal non-specific symptoms, fever
Local reaction 30-503
The purpose of a vaccine is to induce immunity by (pain, swelling, redness)
causing the recipient's immune system to react to the Poliomyelitis None
vaccine. Local reaction, fever and systemic symptoms can (OPV)
result as part of the immune response. In addition, some of I
Poliomyelitis None
the vaccine's components (e.g. aluminium adjuvant,
stabilizers or preservatives) can lead to reactions. A I (IPV)
Rabies Local and/or general reaction 15-25%
successful vaccine reduces these reactions to a minimum depending on type of vaccine
while producing the best possible immunity. (see product information)
Meningococcal Mild local reactions Upto 71%
The local reactions include pain, swelling and/or redness disease
at the injection site and can be expected in about 103 of I
vaccinees, except for those injected with DTP (whole cell), ITetanus/Td Local reaction
(pain, swelling, redness)b
Upto 10%
or tetanus boosters, where up to half can be affected. BCG Malaise and non-specific Upto253
causes a specific local reaction that starts as a papule symptoms
l
{lump) two or more weeks after immunization, that then Tick-borne Local reaction Upto 10%
becomes ulcerated and heals after several months, encephalitis (pain, swelling, redness)
leaving a scar. Keloid (thickened scar tissue) from the BCG
lesion is more common among asian and african
II Typhoid fever Depends on type of vaccine
use (see product information)
I
populations. ' Yellow fever Headache 10%
Influenza-like symptoms 22%
The systemic reactions include fever and occur in about Local reaction 53
103 or less of vaccinees, except for DTP where it is again (pain, swelling, redness)
about half. Other common systemic reactions (e.g., With whole-cell pertussis vaccine. Rates for acellular pertussis
irritability, malaise, 'off-colour', loss of appetite) can also vaccine are lower.
b
occur after DTP. For measles/MMR and OPV the sytemic Rate of local reactions likely to increase with booster doses,
up to 50-85%.
reactions arise from vaccine virus infection. Measles vaccine
causes fever, rash and/or conjunctivitis, and affects 5-153 Source : (132)
of vaccinees. It is very mild compared to 'wild' measles, but
for severely immunocompromised individuals, it can be RARE, MORE SERIOUS VACCINE REACTIONS (121)
severe, even fatal. Vaccine reactions for mumps (swollen 'Serious' and 'severe' are often used as interchangeable
parotid gland) and rubella (joint pains and swollen lymph terms but they are not. An AEFI will be considered serious, if
nodes) affect less than 1 3 of children. Rubella vaccine it results in death, is life-threatening, requires in-patient
causes symptoms more often in adults, with 15% suffering hospitalization or prolongation of existing hospitalization,
from joint pains. Systemic reactions from OPV affect less results in persistent or significant disability/incapacity, is a
than 1 % of vaccinees with diarrhoea, headache and/or congenital anomaly/birth defect, or required intervention to
muscle pain. prevent permanent impairment or damage. Severe is used to
describe the intensity of a specification event (as in mild,
The common minor vaccine reactions and their expected moderate or severe). The event itself, however, may be of
frequency are as shown in Table 36. relatively minor medical significance. (For example, fever is
I:P;DEMJDLOC,Y !-\NU CPIDEMlCi_GC1C
a common relatively minor medical event, but according to thrombocytopenia, HHEs, persistent inconsolable
its severity it can be graded as mild fever or moderate fever. screaming) do not lead to long-term problems. Anaphylaxis,
Anaphylaxis is always a serious event and life-threatening.) while potentially fatal, is treatable without leaving any long-
Table 37 details the rare vaccine reactions; the onset term effects. Although encephalopthy is included as a rare
interval, the rate per doses and the case definitions. Most of reaction to measles or DTP vaccine, it is not certain that
the rare and more serious vaccine reactions (e.g. seizures, these vaccines in fact cause encephalopathy.
Notes:
Reactions (except anaphylaxis) do not occur if already immune (-90% of those receiving a second dose are immune): children over six
years unlikely to have febrile seizures.
VAPP Risk is higher following the first dose (1 in 750,000 compared to 1 in 5.1 million for subsequent doses), and for adults and
immunocompromised.
± No proven risk of severe febrile or anaphylactic reactions or neurological disorders (e.g. Guillain-Barre syndrome)
•• Post-marketing surveillance of currently available rotavirus vaccines has detected a small increased risk of intussusception
100,000 infants vaccinated) in some settings shortly after the first dose of rotavirus vaccine.
Very rare in children
tt Seizures are mostly febrile and the risk depends on age, with much lower risk in infants under the age of four months.
Although encephalopathy is included as a rare possible reaction to measles, JE or DTP vaccines, it is not certain that these
cause encephalopathy. Hence, further scientific evaluation is necessary.
other serious events have been reported following immunization, it is likely that these events are coincidental, not true rei:tct1•ons
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _A_D_V_E_R_S_E_-_EV_EN_T_s_-_F_O_L_LO_Vl_IIN_G_l_M_M_U_N_ll_ZA_T_l_O_N_ _ .• 113 ·
The case definitions and treatments of adverse events following immunization are as follows (121) :
Acute flaccid Acute onset of flaccid paralysis within 4 to 30 days of receipt No specific treatment OPV
paralysis (vaccine of oral poliovirus (OPV), or within 4 to 75 days after contact available; supportive
associated paralytic with a vaccine recipient with isolation of vaccine virus and care.
poliomyelitis) absence of wild polio virus in the stool, and neurological
deficits remaining 60 days after onset, or death.
Anaphylactoid Exaggerated acute allergic reaction, occurring within 2 hours Self-limiting; All
reaction (acute after immunization, characterized by one or more of the anti-histamines
hypersensitivity following: may be helpful.
reaction) • wheezing and shortness of breath due to bronchospasm
• laryngospasm/laryngeal oedema
• one or more skin manifestations, e.g. hives, facial oedema,
or generalized oedema.
Less severe allergic reactions do not need to be reported.
Anaphylaxis Severe immediate (within 1 hour) allergic reaction leading to Adrenaline injection All
circulatory failure with or without bronchospasm and/or
laryngospasm/laryngeal oedema
Arthralgia Joint pain usually including the small peripheral joints. Self-limiting; Rubella,
Persistent, if lasting longer than 10 days, transient; if lasting analgesics MMR
up to 10 days.
Brachia! neuritis Dysfunction of nerves supplying the arm/shoulder without Symptomatic only; Tetanus
other involvement of nervous system. A deep steady, often analgesics.
severe aching pain in the shoulder and upper arm followed
in days or weeks by weakness and wasting in arm/shoulder
muscles. Sensory loss may be present, but is less prominent.
May present on the same or the opposite side to the injection
and sometimes affects both arms.
Disseminated BCG Widespread infection occurring within 1 to 12 months after Should be treated BCG
infections BCG vaccination and confirmed by isolation of with anti-tuberculous
Mycobacterium bovis BCG strain. Usually in regimens including
immunocompromised individuals. isoniazid and rifampicin
Encephalopathy Acute onset of major illness characterized by any two of the No specific treatment Measles,
following three conditions: available; supportive Pertussis
• seizures care.
• severe alteration in level of consciousness lasting for
one day or more
• distinct change in behaviour lasting one day or more.
Needs to occur within 48 hours of DTP vaccine or from
7 to 12 days after measles or MMR vaccine, to be related
to immunization.
Fever The fever can be classified (based on rectal temperature) Symptomatic; All
as mild (38 to 38.9°C), high (39 to 40.4°C) and paracetamol.
extreme (40.5°C or higher). Fever on its own does not
need to be reported.
Hypotonic, Event of sudden onset occurring within 48 (usually less The episode is Mainly
hyporesponsive than 12) hours of vaccination and lasting from one minute transient and DTP,
episode (HHE or to several hours, in children younger than 10 years of age. self-limiting, and does rarely
shock-collapse) All of the following must be present : not require specific others
• limpness (hypotonic) treatment. It is not
• reduced responsiveness (hyporesponsive) a contraindication to
• pallor or cyanosis - or failure to observed/recall. further doses of the
vaccine.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
Injection site Fluctuant or draining fluid-filled lesion at the site of injection. Incise and drain; All
abscess Bacterial if evidence of infection (e.g. purulent, inflammatory antibiotics if
signs, fever, culture), sterile abscess if not. bacterial.
Lymphadenitis Either at least one lymph nodes enlarged to > 1.5 cm in size Heals spontaneously BCG
(includes (one adult finger width), or a draining sinus over a lymph (over months) and
suppurative node. Almost exclusively caused by BCG and then occurring best not to treat
lymphadenitis) within 2 to 6 months after receipt of BCG vaccine, on the unless lesion is
same side as inoculation (mostly axilliary). sticking to skin. If
so,or already draining,
surgical drainage and
local instillation of
anti-tuberculous drug.
Systemic treatment
with anti-tuberculous
drugs is ineffective.
Osteitis/ Inflammation of the bone with isolation of Mycobacterium Should be treated with BCG
Osteomyelitis bovis BCG strain. anti-tuberculous
regimens including
isoniazid and rifampicin
Persistent Inconsolable continuous crying lasting 3 hours or longer Settles within a day or DTP,
inconsolable accompanied by high-pitched screaming. so; analgesics may . Pertussis
screaming help
Seizures Occurrence of generalized convulsions that are not Self-limiting supportive All,
accompanied by focal neurological signs or symptoms. care; paracetamol and especially
Febrile seizures: if temperature elevated >38°C (rectal) cooling if febrile; rarely Pertussis,
Afebrile seizures : if temperature normal. anticonvulsants. Measles
Sepsis Acute onset of severe generalized illness due to bacterial Critical to recognize All
infection and confirmed (if possible) by positive blood and treat early. Urgent
culture. Needs to be reported as possible indicator of transfer to hospital for
programme error. parenteral antibiotics
and fluids
Severe local Redness and/or swelling centred at the site of injection Settles spontaneously All
reaction and one or more of the following: within a few days to
• swelling beyond the nearest joint a week. Symptomatic
• pain, redness, and swelling of more than 3 days duration treatment with
• requires hospitalization. analgesics. Antibiotics
Local reactions of lesser intensity occur commonly and are are inappropriate.
trivial and do not need to be reported.
Thrombocytopaenia Serum platelet count of less than 50,000/ml leading to Usually mild and MMR
bruising and/or bleeding. self-limiting;
occasionally may need
steroid or platelets.
Toxic shock Abrupt onset of fever, vomiting and watery diarrhoea within a Critical to recognize All
syndrome (TSS) few hours of immunization. Often leading to death within and treat early. Urgent
24 to 48 hours. Needs to be reported as possible indicator of transfer to hospital
programme error. for parenteral
antibiotics and fluids.
il
Hoarseness, nausea, vomiting, Moderate
Cardiovascular • Hypotension
sub-sternal pressure
• Clinical diagnosis of uncompensated
shock, indicated by the combination of Laryngeal oedema, dyspnoea, Moderate
at least three of the following: abdominal pain to severe
Tachycardia Late, life-threat- Bronchospasm, stridor, collapse, Severe
Capillary refill time >3 seconds ening symptoms hypotension, dysrhythmias
Reduced central pulse volume
- Decreased level of consciousness or 2. lmmtmizi!.Hon ern3:r-reTiated rnacforH1§ (121)
loss of consciousness "Immunization" means the usage of a vaccine for the
• Cardiac arrest purpose of immunizing individuals. "Usage" includes all
• Bradycardia (a slow pulse) is usually a processes that occur after a vaccine product has left the
late feature, often preceding cardiac manufacturing/packaging site, i.e. handling, prescribing and
arrest administration of the vaccine.
CNS • Confusion/ Agitation An immunization error-related reaction may lead to a
• Headache cluster of events associated with immunization. These
• Loss of consciousness clusters are usually associated with a particular provider, or
Dermatologic or • Tingling of lips health facility, or even a single vial of vaccine that has been
mucosa/ • Generalized urticaria or generalized inappropriately prepared or contaminated. Immunization
erythema
errors-related reactions can also affect many vials. For
• Angioedema, localized or generalized example, freezing vaccine during transport may lead to an
(angioedema is similar to urticaria but
involves swelling of deeper tissues, most increase in local reactions.
commonly in the eyelids and lips, and Table 38 shows the immunization error-related reactions
sometimes in the mouth and throat) (121).
TABLE 38
Immunization error rel,11ed 1'l'i1clinn~
In the past, the most common immunization error was an 4. Coincidental event§
infection (including bloodborne virus) as a result of non- Occasionally following immunization there may occur a
sterile-injection. The infection could manifest as a local disease totally unconnected with the immunizing agent.
reaction (e.g. suppuration, abscess), systemic effect (e.g. Vaccines are normally scheduled early in life, when
sepsis or toxic shock syndrome), or blood-borne virus infections and other illnesses are common, including
infection (e.g. HIV, hepatitis B or hepatitis C). However, with manifestations of an underlying congenital or neurological
the introduction of auto disabled (AD) syringes, infection condition. The mechanism seems to be that the individual is
occurrence has reduced significantly. Still, infection can harbouring the infectious agent and the administration of
occur in cases of mass vaccination or disaster stituations, the vaccine shortens the incubation period and produces the
particularly if there is any shortage or problems with logistics disease or what may have been otherwise only a latent
and supplies. This can be avoided by proper planning and infection is converted into a clinical attack.
preparedness of programme managers.
The symptoms arising from an immunization error may PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN
help to identify the likely cause. For example, children Before administration of the antiserum or antitoxin, it is
immunized with contaminated vaccine (usually the necessary to test for sensitivity reaction. This can be done in
bacterium Staphylococcus aureus) become sick within a few 2 ways: (a) instilling a drop of the preparation into the
hours; local tenderness and tissue infiltration, vomiting, conjunctiva! sac. A sensitized person will develop pricking of
diarrhoea, cyanosis and a high temperature are the most the conjunctiva. (b) a more reliable way of testing is by
frequent symptoms. Bacteriological examination of the vial, intradermal injection of 0.2 ml of antiserum diluted 1 : 10
if still available, can confirm the source of the infection. with saline. A sensitized patient will develop a wheal and
flare within 10 minutes at the site of injection. It should be
3. Immunization anxiety-related reactions (121) borne in mind that these tests are not infallible.
Individuals and groups can react in anticipation to and as Adrenaline (1:1000 solution) should be kept ready when
a result of an injection of any kind. This reaction is unrelated giving foreign serum. In the event of anaphylaxis, for an
to content of the vaccine. Fainting is relatively common. adult, 0.5 ml of adrenaline solution should be injected
During fainting, the individual suddenly becomes pale, loses intramuscularly immediately, followed by 0.5 ml every
consciousness and collapses to the ground. Fainting is 20 minutes if the systolic blood pressure is below 100 mm of
sometimes accompanied by brief clonic seizure activity (i.e. mercury. An injection of antihistaminic drug should also be
rhythmic jerking of the limbs), but this requires no specific given, e.g., 10-20 mg of chlorpheniramine maleate by the
treatment or investigation. Fainting is relatively common intramuscular route, to minimize the after-effects such as
after immunization of adults and adolescents, but very rare urticaria or oedema. The patient should be observed for
in young children. It is managed by simply placing the 30 minutes after any serum injection.
patient in a recumbent position. Recovery of consciousness The risk of adverse reactions can be reduced by proper
occurs within a minute or two, but patients may take some sterilization of syringes and needles, by proper selection of
more time to recover fully. Table 39 shows the difference the subject and the product, and if due care is exercised in
between fainting attack and anaphylaxis. carrying out the procedure. Measles and BCG vaccines
should be reconstituted only with the diluent supplied by the
An anxiety spell can lead to pale, fearful appearance and manufacturer. Reconstituted vaccine should be discarded at
symptoms of hyperventilation (light-headedness, dizziness, the end of each immunization session and NEVER retained
tingling in the hands and around the mouth). Breath-holding for use in subsequent sessions. In the refrigerator of the
occurs in young children and will lead to facial flushing and immunization centre, no other drug and substances should
cyanosis. It can end in unconsciousness, during which be stored beside vaccines. Training of immunization worker
breathing resumes. Anaphylaxis develops over several and their close supervision to ensure that proper procedures
minutes upto a few hours and usually involves multiple body are being followed are essential to prevent complications
systems. Unconsciousness is rarely the sole manifestation of and deaths following immunization. Careful epidemiological
anaphylaxis - it only occurs as a late event in severe cases. investigation should be carried out when an adverse event
A strong central pulse (e.g. carotid) is maintained during a following immunization occurs to pinpoint the cause of the
faint, but not in anaphylaxis. incident and to correct immunization practices (133, 121).
TABLE 39
Difference between a fainting attack and anaphylaxis
Occurring within • Anaphylactoid reaction {acute No time limit Any death, hospitalization, disability
24-48 hours of hypersensitivity reaction) or other severe and unusual events that
immunization • Anaphylaxis are thought by health workers or the
• Persistent {more than 3 hours) public to be related to immunization
inconsolable screaming
• Hypotonic hyporesponsive episode Once the report has been received, an assessment should be
(HHE) made to determine whether or not an investigation is needed.
• Toxic shock syndrome (TSS) The urgency of the investigation depends on the situation.
\ Cl~~ter of AEF!s I
+
/\
/ \
I \
/ \ /;'
/ All cases \ All cases \ Similar
// Programme
/from only one \ No / got same \ No / Known No illness in error,
'. facility (same )---4>< \.____.( vaccine others who
vaccine coincidental or
\ lot used / I \ reaction ? didn't get
or lot? 'unknown'
\at others)?/ // \\\. vaccine?
\ . ,//
\ // '
\\ / I
\I \ I
TABLE 40
Contraindications to vaccines
' ·•.:, ../@;,
.Vacc;m~ .... Cqritraindications
All An anaphylactic reaction• following a previous dose of a particular vaccine is a true contraindication to further
immunization with the antigen concerned and a subsequent dose should not be given, OR, Current serious illness.
Live va'~cines (MMR, Pregnancy.
BCG, ;Yellow fever) Radiation therapy (i.e. total-body radiation).
Yellow fever Egg allergy.
Immunodeficiency (froll) medication, disease or symptomatic HIV infectionh).
BCG '· Symptomatic HIV infection.
Influenza, yellow fever History of anaphylactic reactions• following egg ingestion. No vacciries prepared in hen's egg tissues (i.e. yellow
fever and influenza vaccines) should be given. (Vaccine viruses propagated in chicken fibroblast cells, e.g.
measles or MMR vaccines, can however usually be given.)
Pertussis-containing Anaphylactic reaction to a previous dose.
Evolving neurological disease (e.g. uncontrolled epilepsy or progressive encephalopathy). Vaccines containing
the whole-cell pertussis component should not be given to children with this problem. Acellular vaccine is less
reactogenic and is used in many industrialized countries instead of whole-cell pertussis vaccine.
• Gen~ralized urticaria, difficulty iri breathing, swelling of the mouth and throat, hypotension or shock.
h In many industrialized countries yellow fever vaccine is administered to individuals with symptomatic HIV infection or who are suffering
from other immunodeficiency diseases, provided that their CD 4 count is at least 400 cells/mm 3 and if they plan to visit areas where
epidemic or endemic yellow fever actually occurs. ·
Source : (132)
Broadly these are measures, pending results of suspected), it should be notified to the local health authority,
epidemiologic investigation. whose responsibility is to put into operation control
1. The reservoir or source of infection measures, including the provision of medical care to
2. The route(s) of transmission patients, perhaps in a hospital.
3. The susceptible host (people at risk). Certain diseases are statutorily notifiable. The diseases to
The activities of disease prevention and control are now be notified vary from country to country; and even within
included in primary health care - it requires community the same country. Usually, diseases which are considered to
participation (involvement), political support and inter- be serious menaces to public health are included in the list
sectoral coordination (135). of notifiable diseases. Notifiable diseases may also include
non-communicable diseases and conditions such as cancer,
1. Controlling the reservoir congenital defects, accidents, etc.
If the first link in the chain of causation (i.e., the disease Notification is an important source of epidemiological
agent) is deemed to be the weakest link, logically, the most information. It enables early detection of disease outbreaks,
desirable control measure would be to eliminate the which permits immediate action to be taken by the health
reservoir or source, if that could be possible. Elimination of authority to control their spread. The other uses of
the reservoir may be pretty easy with the animal reservoir notification are discussed elsewhere.
(e.g., bovine tuberculosis, brucellosis), but is not possible in Notification of infectious diseases is often made by the
humans in whom the general measures of reservoir control attending physician or the head of the family, but any one,
comprise : early diagnosis, notification, isolation, treatment, including the lay people (e.g., religious, political and
quarantine, surveillance and disinfection - all directed to administrative leaders, teachers and others) can report, even
reduce the quantity of the agent available for dissemination. on suspicion. In all cases, the diagnosis is verified by the
local health authority.
(1) EARLY DIAGNOSIS
Under the International Health Regulations (IHR),
The first step in the control of a communicable disease is
certain prescribed diseases are notified by the national
its rapid identification. It is the cornerstone on which the
health authority to WHO. These can be divided into :
edifice of disease control is built. It has been aptly said that
prompt detection of cases (and carriers) and their treatment (a) Those diseases subject to International Health
is like stamping out the "spark" rather than calling the fire Regulations (1969), Third Annotated Edition, 1983 -
brigade to put out the fire caused by the spark. Frequently, cholera, plague and yellow fever.
laboratory procedures may be required to confirm the (b) Diseases under surveillance by WHO - louse-borne
diagnosis. typhus fever, relapsing fever, paralytic polio, malaria,
Early diagnosis is needed for (a) the treatment of patients viral influenza-A, SARS, smallpox etc.
(b) for epidemiological investigations, e.g., to trace the Health administrations are required to notify to WHO
source of infection from the known or index case to the Geneva for any notification of communicable diseases under
unknown or the primary source of infection (c) to study the international surveillance and International Health
time, place and person distribution (descriptive Regulations.
epidemiology) and (d) for the institution of prevention and
control measures. (3) EPIDEMIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS
An epidemiological investigation is called for whenever
(2) NOTIFICATION
there is a disease outbreak, the methodology for which is
Once an infectious disease has been detected (or even given elsewhere (see page 131). Broadly, the investigation
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
. Disease Immunization
Cholera Two types of safe and effective oral cholera vaccines currently available. Given orally in two doses
between seven days and six weeks apart.
3. Typhoid fever Two vaccines are available for prevention of typhoid. Typhoid polysaccharide vaccine is injectable given
subcutaneously or intramuscularly. One dose is required. Confers protection after 7 days. The other
is oral Ty21a vaccine, administered on 1, 3 and 5th day. Protective immunity achieved 7 days after
3rd dose.
4. Influenza Inactivated vaccines are widely used. Two adequately spaced doses (1.0 ml each) of an aqueous
or saline vaccine are recommended for primary immunization, although one dose may be given
when an epidemic is threatened. The immunity lasts for about 3 to 6 months. Oil-adjuvanted
vaccines give immunity of longer duration, but they tend to produce unpleasant local reaction.,
5. Yellow fever The dose of the vaccine (17 D vaccine) is 0.5 ml given subcutaneously. Immunity begins 10-1?'
days after vaccination, and extends up to 10 years. ·
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
• - - - - - - -
number of immunization schedules, each having its merits BCG Birth 2 weeks
-
and demerits. If each vaccine were to be given separately, a OPV -
Birth; 6 weeks, 10 weeks and 14 weeks;
minimum of at least 14 visits would be needed to the 16-18 months, 5 years
immunization clinic. The current trend is to combine
· immunizing agents into small packages and thus reduce the DPT 6 weeks, 10 weeks and 14 weeks;
number of injections an individual must receive. 16-18 months and 5 years
A well thought-out immunization schedule must be Hepatitis B Birth, 6 weeks and 14 weeks or
(a} epidemiologically relevant, that is,_ vaccinations should 6 weeks, 10 weeks and 14 weeks
be included only against diseases which are public health Hib Conjugate - 6 weeks, 10 weeks and 14 weeks
problems and against which an effective vaccine exists Measles 9 months, 16-24 months
(b} immunologically effective : children must be vaccinated
MMR 15 months
at an age when they can benefit from it, i.e., when they are
capable of forming defences and when they have lost the Typhoid - 2 years, 5 years, 8 years, 12 years
antibodies transmitted by the mother. Above all, children TT/Td 10 years, 16 years
must be vaccinat~d at the right time, that is before they are TT - 2 doses one month apart for pregnant
exposed to possible infection. An immunization may not be women, or booster dose if previously
effective if given within too short an interval between immunized.
subsequent doses (c} operationally feasible : this includes
cost and ability to achieve a high percentage of coverage Vaccines that can be given after discussion with
which is a key factor in an effective immunization parents
programme. The schedule must minimize the number of
visits, by simultaneous administration of vaccines, and Varicella - 15 months (or after 1 year}
(d} socially acceptable : the schedule must take into account Hepatitis A - high-risk selected infants,
the local customs, beliefs and practices, seasonal and 18 months, and 6 months later
climatic factors and daily work pattern of the community. Pneumococcal - 6 weeks
One important factor is to reduce long waiting time for conjugate vaccine
patients whose sole purpose in visiting the clinic was to be Influenza vaccine 6 months of age to high risk
immunized. selected infants anually
Universal Immunization Programme 2. WHO EPI Schedule
In May 1974, the WHO officially launched a global Table 44 summarizes the WHO recommendations for
immunization programme, known as Expanded Programme routine vaccination for children. The purpose is to assist
on Immunization (EPI) to protect all children of the world health planners to develop an appropriate country specific
against six vaccine-preventable diseases, namely immunization schedule based on local conditions. The
diphtheria, whooping cough, tetanus, polio, tuberculosis and health care workers should refer to their national
measles by the year 2000. EPI was launched in India in immunization schedules.
January 1978 (144).
The WHO EPI Global Advisory Committee has strongly
The Programme is now called Universal Child recommended BCG and Polio vaccine to be given at birth or ·
Immunization, 1990-that's the name given to a declaration at first contact, in countries where tuberculosis and polio
sponsored by UNICEF as part of the United Nations' 40th have not been controlled. In all countries routine
anniversary in October 1985. It is aimed at adding impetus immunization with DPT and oral polio vaccine can be safely
to the global programme of EPI. and effectively initiated at 6 weeks of age. New vaccines are
The Indian version, the Universal Immunization being added for the vaccination schedule e.g., hepatitis B,
Programme, was launched on November 19, 1985 and was rubella and Japanese encephalitis vaccines are now
dedicated to the memory of Smt. Indira Gandhi. The included in several country's programmes.
National Health Policy was aimed at achieving universal The immunization schedule may be altered to suit the local
immunization coverage of the eligible population by 1990. needs of individuals and groups. Interruption of the schedule
with a delay between doses does not interfere with the final
immunity achieved. There is no basis for the mistaken belief
IMMUNIZATION SCHEDULES that if a second {or third} dose in an immunization is delayed,
1. National Immunization Schedule the immunization schedule must be started all over again
(115). The ages shown in Table 44 for the various
The National Immunization Schedule is given in Table immunizations are considered the best. However, if there is
43. The first visit may be made when the infant is 6 weeks any delay in starting the first dose the site for the injection
old; the second and third visits, at intervals of 1-2 months. should be different, the periods may be adjusted accordingly.
Oral polio vaccine may be given concurrently with DPT.
Immunization is frequently postponed if children are ill or
BCG can be given with any of the three doses but the site for
malnourished. This is not acceptable in the light of present
the injection should be different. The schedule also covers knowledge. In fact, it is particularly important to immunize
immunization of women during pregnancy against tetanus. children with malnutrition. Low grade fever, mild respiratory
The Indian Academy of Paediatrics recommends infections or diarrhoea and other minor illnesses should not
inclusion of more vaccines in the immunization schedule. be considered as contraindications to immunization. These
These vaccines are not included in the UIP because of are the very children who are most in need of immunization.
financial constraints. The immunization schedule approved They are most likely to die should they acquire a vaccine-
by the IAP is as follows : preventable disease (146).
TABLE 43
National Immunization Schedule (NIS) for Infants, Children and Pregnant Women (India)
Japanese 16-24 months with DPT/OPV 0.5ml Sub-cutaneous Left Upper Arm I
IVitamin A***
Encephalitis ** booster
16 months with DPT/OPV booster. Then, one 2ml Oral Oral
Ij DPT
(2nd to 9th dose)
Booster
dose every 6 months up to the age of 5 years.
5-6 years
(2 lakh!U)
Intra-muscular Upper Arm
I
0.5 ml. I
ITT 10 years & 16 years 0.5ml. Intra-muscular Upper Arm
I
* Give TT-2 or Booster doses before 36 weeks of pregnancy. However, give these even if more than 36 weeks have passed. Give TTto a woman in labour,
if she has not previously received TT.
** SA 14-14-2 Vaccine, in select endemic districts of the Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal, Karnataka and Assam.
*** The 2nd to 9th doses of Vitamin A can be administered to children 1-5 years old during biannual rounds, in collaboration with !CDS.
**** In select states, districts and cities.
Note : (a) Interval between 2 doses of DPT, OPV and hepatitis B should not be less than one month.
(b) Minor cough, cold and mild fever are not a contraindication to vaccination.
(c) If the child has diarrhoea, give a dose of OPV, but do not count the dose and ask the mother to return in 4 weeks for the missing dose.
(d) Pentavalent Vaccine (DPT + Hep B + Hib) has been introduced in NIS in the states of Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Goa, Haryana, Gujarat,
Karnataka and Jammu & Kashmir at 6, 10 and 14 weeks of age.
Source : (130)
Since the success of EPI is now being seen to have part of disease elimination or eradication measure.
important long-term effects on the trad~tional Adolescence presents certain challenges for immunization
epidemiological patterns of major infectious diseases, often in relation to lifestyle and other social issues, while also
raising the average age of incidence, the adolescent age offering special opportunities, such as a vaccine delivery in
group of 10-19 years represent an important additional the setting of educational institutions. The vaccines of
target group for immunization. In the pre-immunization era, interest are MR and MMR as part of measles outbreak
large proportion of adults had disease induced immunity to prevention or elimination campaign, Td as booster dose for
common infections, now majority of individuals have neonatal tetanus elimination, hepatitis B, influenza, varicella
vaccine induced immunity, which may or may not have the and HPV vaccines etc.
same long-term stability. Questions therefore arise as to
policy and strategy implications for post-infancy (2) PASSIVE IMMUNIZATION
immunization programmes. Three types of preparations are available for passive
The WHO Scientific Advisory Group of Experts to EPI has immunity - (a) Normal human immunoglobulin, (b) Specific
indicated the need to expand immunization activities beyond (hyperimmune) human immurioglobulin, and (c) antisera or
infancy, either as part of routine immunization services or as anti-toxins.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
TABLE 44
WHO recommendations for routine immunization for children, 2010
Surveillance may comprise : (a) Individual surveillance : immunoglobulin in a dose of 0.02-0.05 mg/kg of body
This is surveillance of infected persons until they are no weight has been recommended every 4 months. Ideally
longer a significant risk to other individuals, (b) Local immunoglobulin should not be given within 3 weeks before,
population surveillance : e.g., surveillance of malaria, or until 2 weeks after administration of a live vaccine.
(c) National population surveillance : e.g., surveillance of A highly safe, inactivated HAV vaccine is available in several
smallpox after the disease has been eradicated, and European countries. (6) Hepatitis E : There is no vaccine
(d) International surveillance: At the international level, the against hepatitis E and immunoglobulin prepared in Europe
WHO maintains surveillance of important diseases (e.g., and USA does not give much of protection. Avoidance of
influenza, malaria, polio, etc.) and gives timely warning to contaminated food and water is the only effective protective
all national governments. Surveillance, if properly pursued, measure. (7) Hepatitis B : Hepatitis B vaccines are available
can provide the health agencies with an overall intelligence and are safe. Three doses of vaccine constitute the complete
and disease-accounting capability. Surveillance is an course. The first two doses are given one month apart and
essential pre-requisite to the rational design and evaluation the third dose about 6 months later. (8) STD and HN :
of any disease control programme. Measures for preventing STD are the . same whether the
individual is travelling abroad or not, Le., avoidance of sex
HEALTH ADVICE TO TRAVELLERS altogether or limit it to a single faithful, uninfected partner.
Use of condom is an important preventive measure. To
Emporiatrics is the term coined to describe the science of reduce ·the risk of acquiring HIV and hepatitis B from
the health of travellers (150). Travellers face special health syringes and needles, travellers should avoid injectable
risks. In the age of jet travel, international travellers are drugs and if an injection is essential they should make sure
subject to various forms of stress that may reduce their that the needle and syringe come from sterile pack.
resistance to disease, e.g., crowding, long hours of waiting, (9) Yellow fever: Vaccination certificate for yellow fever is
disruption of eating habit, change in the climate and time the only certificate required for international travel. Yellow
zone. These factors may in themselves provoke nausea, fever vaccine is recommended for travellers to countries
indigestion, extreme fatigue and insomnia. designated as yellow fever endemic zone. (10) Tetanus: It is
Secondly, in developing countries, they are exposed to a wise precaution for the traveller to have a booster dose of
diseases which are not covered by International Health tetanus toxoid if 10 years or more have elapsed since the
Regulations (IHR), e.g., malaria, giardiasis, dengue, last injection of a complete course or booster.
influenza, filariasis, STD and AIDS, intestinal parasites, Medical kit for travellers should contain a disinfectant and
typhoid and paratyphoid fever, viral hepatitis, etc. Many of dressing that can be applied easily. Sun cream, mosquito
these may not manifest themselves immediately but occur repellent, oral rehydration salts and first-aid articles are
during a varying period after the traveller returns to his basic necessities. Patients with chronic diseases like
normal way of life. Poor hygiene by food handler, poor diabetes, cardiac problems etc. should carry enough
water quality and improper disposal of wastes are other medicines to avoid the risk of break in medication (152). It is
important causes of disease transfer (151). International advisable to carry a card with noting of their blood group,
travellers have a personal responsibility to recognize these drug sensitivity if any and name of any chronic disease he or
risks of travel, which can be minimized by immunization and she is suffering from.
chemoprophylaxis or chemotherapy. Thirdly, travellers
are separated from familiar and accessible sources of For the benefit of travellers, the WHO publishes every
medical care. year a booklet, now entitled "International Travel and
Health, Vaccination requirements and Health advice ". It
Some of the recommendations pertain to the following :
provides guidance on some of the main health risks to which
(1) Avoid bathing with polluted water as this may result in
travellers may be exposed in different parts of the world and
ear, eye and skin infections. Excessive heat and humidity or
advice on precautions that may be taken against them.
over-exertion in these conditions may lead to exhaustion
from loss of water and salt. (2) The measures for prevention
of insect bites. (3) Diarrhoeal Diseases : "Be careful what DISINFECTION
you eat" is common advice to travellers, but very few truely Semmelweis (1818-1865) demonstrated the value of
understand its implications. Diarrhoea affects an estimated handwashing with antiseptic solutions, when he obtained
20-50 per cent of all travellers. Contaminated food drinks considerable reduction in the death rate from puerperal
are the most common source of these infections. Careful fever. Lister (1827-1912) was also successful in reducing the
selection and preparation of food and drink offer the best number of wound infections by prophylactic application of
protection. Unfortunately appearance of food is no guide as an antiseptic (carbolic acid) to wounds. The importance of
to its safety. The main personal protection is to consider antiseptics and disinfectants has not diminished in this
unpasteurized milk, non-bottled drinks, uncooked food "golden age of antibiotics". Their uses range from control of
(apart from the fruits and vegetables that can be peeled or communicable diseases to sterilization of sophisticated
shelled), as likely to be contaminated and therefore unsafe. instruments, and treatment of fungal and bacterial infections
The food should be thoroughly and freshly cooked. Use of the skin and mucous membrane.
boiled water or bottled mineral water (now available
everywhere). Travellers should be aware of the importance Definitions
of oral rehydration fluids containing salt and glucose for
countering dehydration. (4) Malaria : There is a high risk of Disinfectant : Usually a chemical agent (but sometimes
acquiring malaria in endemic areas. Travellers are advised to a physical agent) that destroys disease causing pathogens or
protect themselves by chemoprophylaxis. Drug prophylaxis other harmful microorganisms, but might not kill bacterial
should begin at the latest on the day of arrival in the spores. It refers to substances applied to inanimate objects.
malarious areas and continued for 4-6 weeks after leaving Disinfection : Thermal or chemical destruction of
the malarious areas. (5) Hepatitis A : Normal human pathogen and other types of microorganisms. Disinfection is
DISINFECTION
- - - - - - -•
less lethal than sterilization because it destroys most 8. Odourless: should have a pleasant odour or no odour
recognized pathogenic microorganisms but not necessarily to facilitate its routine use.
all microbial forms (e.g., bacterial spores). 9. Economical: should not be prohibitively high in cost.
Sterilization : Validated process used to render a 10.Solubility: should be soluble in water.
product free of all forms of viable microorganisms including
bacterial spores. Sterilizer is the apparatus used to sterilize 11.Stability: should be stable in concentrate and use-
medical devices, equipment or supplies by direct exposure dilution.
to the sterilizing agent. 12. Cleaner: should have good cleaning properties.
Antiseptic : Substance that prevents or arrests the 13.Environmentally friendly: should not damage the
growth or action of micro-organisms by inhibiting their environment on disposal.
activity or by destroying them. The term is used especially
for preparations applied topically to living tissue. Types of disinfection
Asepsis : Prevention of contact with micro-organism. (a) Concurrent disinfection : It is the application of
Sanitizer : Agent that reduces the number of bacterial disinfective measures as soon as possible after the discharge
contaminants to safe levels as judged by public health of infectious material from the body of an infected person,
requirements. Commonly used with substances applied to or after the soiling of articles with such infectious discharges
inanimate objects. (2). In other words, the disease agent is destroyed as soon as
it is released from the body, and in this way further spread of
Sterile : State of being free from all living micro- the agent is stopped. Concurrent disinfection consists of
organisms. usually disinfection of urine, faeces, vomit, contaminated
Hospital disinfectant : Disinfectant registered for use linen, clothes, hands, dressings, aprons, gloves, etc
in hospitals, clinics, dental offices or any other medical- throughout the course of an illness. (b) Terminal
related facility. Efficacy is demonstrated against Salmonella disinfection : It is the application of disinfective measures
choleraesuis, Staphylococcus aureus, and Pseudomonas after the patient has been removed by death or to a hospital
aeruginosa. or has ceased to be a source of infection or after other
Germicide : Agent that destroys micro-organisms, hospital isolation practices have been discontinued (9, 99).
especially pathogenic organisms. Terminal disinfection is now scarcely practised; terminal
cleaning is considered adequate, along with airing and
Detergent : Surface cleaning agent that makes no sunning of rooms, furniture and bedding (9, 99).
antimicrobial claims on the label. They comprise a (c) Precurrent (prophylactic) disinfection : Disinfection
hydrophilic component and a lipohilic component. It acts by of water by chlorine, pasteurization of milk and
lowering surface tension e.g. soap which removes bacteria handwashing may be cited as examples of precurrent
along with dirt. disinfection.
Cleaning : Removal, usually with detergent and water
or enzyme cleaner and water, of adherent visible soil, blood, Natural agents
protein substances, micro-organisms and other debris from (1) Sunlight: Direct and continuous exposure to sunlight
the surfaces, crevices, serrations, joints, and lumens of is destructive to many disease producing organisms. The
instruments, devices and equipment by a manual or ultraviolet rays of sunlight (these do not penetrate through
mechanical process that prepares the items for safe handling glass) are particularly lethal to bacteria and some viruses.
and/or further decontamination. Articles such as linen, bedding, and furniture may be
Deodorant : Deodarant is a substance which suppresses disinfected by exposure to direct sunlight for several hours
or neutralizes bad odours, e.g., lime and bleaching powder. (2) Air : Exposure to open air (airing) acts by drying or
evaporation of moisture which is lethal to most bacteria. In
Properties of an ideal disinfectant (153) general, natural agents such as sunlight and air, because of
their vagaries, cannot be totally depended upon for
An ideal disinfectant fulfils the following criteria ; disinfection.
1. Broad spectrum: should have a wide antimicrobial Physical agents
spectrum.
2. Fast acting: should produce a rapid kill. (1) Burning : Burning or incineration is an excellent
method of disinfection. Inexpensive articles such as
3. Not affected by environmental factors: should be
contaminated dressings, rags and swabs can be disposed off
active in the presence of organic matter (e.g., blood, by burning. Addition of sawdust, paper, kerosene or other
sputum, faeces) and compatible with soaps, combustible material aid in burning. Faeces can be disposed
detergents, and other chemicals encountered in use. off by burning. Burning should not be done in open air; it is
4. Nontoxic: should not be harmful to the user or best done in an incinerator. (2) Hot air : Hot air is very
patient. useful for sterilizing articles such as glassware, syringes,
5. Surface compatibility: should not corrode instruments swabs, dressings, french chalk, oils, vaseline and sharp
and metallic surfaces, and should not cause the instruments. The drawback of hot air is that it has no
deterioration of cloth, rubber, plastics, and other penetrating power, and is therefore not suitable for
materials. disinfection of bulky articles such as mattresses. Hot air
sterilization is usually done in a hot air oven. The
6. Residual effect on treated surfaces: should leave an temperature of the air in the oven should be maintained at
antimicrobial film on the treated surface. 160-180 deg C for at least one hour to kill spores.
7. Easy to use with clear label directions. Unfortunately, such elevated temperatures destroy plastic,
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
rubber and other delicate substances. (3) Boiling : Boiling is phenol", which is a mixture of phenol and cresol. It is a dark
an effective method of disinfection. It provides an oily liquid. It is effective against gram-positive and gram-
atmosphere of boiling and steam. Boiling for 5-10 minutes negative bacteria, but only slowly effective against spores
(rolling boil) will kill bacteria, but not spores or viruses. and acid-fast bacteria. It is also effective against certain
Boilers provide temperature well above 90 deg C in an viruses. Phenol disinfectants are not readily inactivated by
atmosphere of steam, which is exposed to open air. To organic matter. Its effect is greatly weakened by dilution.
ensure destruction of spores, temperatures above 100 deg C Therefore, it should not be used in less than 10 per cent
would be required which cannot be achieved in boilers. strength for disinfection of faeces. In 5 per cent strength, it
Boiling is suitable for disinfection of small instruments, tools may be used for mopping floors and cleaning drains.
which are not used for subcutaneous insertion, linen and Aqueous solutions of 0.2 to 1 per cent are bacteriostatic.
rubber goods such as gloves. Linen stained with faeces, pus (3) Cresol: Cresol is an excellent coal-tar disinfectant. It is 3
or blood should be first washed in cold water (preferably to 10 times as powerful as phenol, yet no more toxic. Cresol
with a disinfectant such as 2 1/ 2 per cent cresol) and then is best used in 5 to 10 per cent strength for disinfection of
subjected to boiling, with frequent stirring because linen and faeces and urine. A 5 per cent solution may be prepared by
clothes are poor conductors of heat. Addition of 1 per cent adding 8 ounces of cresol to one gallon of water (or 50 ml to
soap and 0.3 per cent of washing soda enhances the effect one litre of water). Cresol is an all-purpose general
of boiling. Boiling for about 30 minutes is adequate to disinfectant. (4) Cresol emulsions : Cresol emulsified with
disinfect linen, utensils and bedpans. The drawbacks of soap is known as "saponified cresol". Lysol, izal and cyllin
boiling are that it is a slow process, unsuitable for thick are cresol emulsions. Lysol contains 50-60 per cent cresol.
beddings and woollen materials as they shrink, and it fixes They are very powerful disinfectants. A 2 per cent solution
albuminous stains. (4) Autoclaving : Sterilizers which of lysol may be used for disinfection of faeces.
operate at high temperatures (in excess of 100 deg C) and (5) Chlorhexidine (hibitane) : This is one of the most useful
pressure are called autoclaves. They generate steam under skin antiseptics. Highly active against vegetative gram-
pressure (saturated steam) which is the most effective positive organisms, and moderately active against gram-
sterilizing agent. Autoclaves fall into two categories - gravity positive microbes. It is soluble in water and alcohol. It is
displacement autoclaves and the high-speed prevaccum inactivated by soaps and detergents. 0.5 per cent alcoholic
sterilizers. Basically, the autoclave works on the same or aqueous solutions can be used as effective handlotions.
principle as the domestic pressure cooker. Autoclaving is Creams and lotions containing 1 per cent chlorhexidine are
widely used in hospital and laboratory practice. It destroys recommended for burns and hand disinfection.
all forms of life, including spores. Steam attains a higher (6) Hexachlorphane : This antiseptic is highly active against
temperature under pressure, and has greater powers of gram-positive organisms, but less active against gram-
penetration than ordinary steam. For example, it attains a negative organisms. It is slow in action, but shows a
temperature of 122 deg C under 15 lbs/sq. inch (1 kg/sq. cumulative effect on the skin and is compatible with soaps.
cm.) pressure. It acts by giving off its latent heat. Absolute Thus it may be incorporated in soap preparations without
sterility can be obtained only by raising the temperature of loss of activity. (7) Dettol : Dettol (chloroxylenol) is a
articles to over 135 deg C. Autoclaving is the most effective relatively non-toxic antiseptic and can be used safely in high
method for sterilization of linen, dressings, gloves, syringes, concentrations. It is more easily inactivated by organic
certain instruments and culture media. It is not suitable for matter than many other phenolic disinfectants. It is active
sterilization of plastics and sharp instruments. (5) Radiation: against streptococci, but worthless against some gram-
Ionizing radiation is being increasingly used for sterilization negative bacteria. Dettol (5%) is suitable for disinfection of
of bandages, dressings, catgut and surgical instruments. The instruments and plastic equipment; a contact of at least 15
objects to be sterilized are placed in plastic bags before minutes will be required for disinfection.
radiation, and they will remain sterile until opened. Ionizing
radiation has great penetrating powers with little or no 2. Quaternary ammonia compounds
heating effect. This method is most effective, but very costly. (1) Cetrimide : It is manufactured under the trade name
Commercial methods of sterilization are normally carried "cetavlon". It is actively bactericidal against vegetative
out by gamma radiation (atomic). This technique requires gram-positive organisms, but much less so against gram-
special packing and equipment. It is now one of the most negative organisms. Cetavlon is soluble in water; it has a
viable, safe and economic methods used today. soapy feel. It may be used in 1-2 per cent strength.
(2) Savlon : Savlon is a combination of cetavlon and
Chemical agents hibitane. Plastic appliances may be disinfected by keeping
Articles which cannot be sterilized by boiling or them in normal strength savlon for 20 minutes. Savlon 1 in 6
autoclaving may be immersed in chemical disinfectants. in spirit is more effective than savlon 1 in 20 aqueous
Chemical agents may also be used for the disinfection of solution. Clinical thermometers may be best disinfected in
faeces, urine and other contaminated material. There are a savlon 1 in 6 in spirit in just under 3 minutes.
wide range of chemical disinfectants, each with its
advantages and disadvantages. These are discussed below : 3. Halogens and their compounds
a. Chlorine and chlorine compounds : They are potent
1. Phenol and related compounds bactericidal, fungicidal, sporicidal, tuberculocidal and
(1) Phenol : Pure phenol or carbolic acid is the best virucidal. Since long time chlorine has been used as
known member of this group. On exposure to air, the disinfectant in water treatment.
colourless crystals of phenol become pinkish, and on longer (1) Bleaching powder: Bleaching powder or chlorinated
exposure, the colour deepens to dark red. Pure phenol is not lime (CaOCl.2) is a white amorphous powder with a pungent
an effective disinfectant. It is used as a standard to compare smell of chlorine. A good sample of bleaching powder
the germicidal activity of disinfectants. (2) Crude phenol : contains about 33 per cent of "available chlorine". It kills
The phenol that is commonly used for disinfection is "crude most of the organisms when used in the strength of 1 to 3
DISINFECTION
per cent. Bleaching powder is widely used in public health extended exposure time difficult to achieve unless the items
practice in India for disinfection of water, faeces and urine; are immersed (153).
and as a deodorant. The chief drawback of bleaching
powder is that it is an unstable compound and loses its 5. Formaldehyde
chlorine content on storage. Its action is rapid but brief. A 5 More commonly known in solution as formalin,
per cent solution (3 to 4 rounded tablespoons to 1 litre of formaldehyde is a highly toxic and irritant gas which
water) is suitable for disinfection of faeces and urine precipitates and destroys protein. It is effective against
allowing a period of one hour for disinfection. vegetative bacteria, fungi and many viruses but only slowly
(2) Hypochlorites : Hypochlorites are the most widely used effective against bacterial spores (e.g., tetanus spores) and
chlorine disinfectant, available as liquid (e.g. sodium acid-fast bacteria. It does not injure fabrics and metals. It
hypochlorite) or solid (e.g. calcium hypochlorite). The most may be used as a 2-3 per cent solution (20-30 ml of 40 per
prevalent chlorine products are aqueous solutions of 5.25- cent formalin in one litre of water) for spraying rooms, walls
6.15 per cent of sodium hypochlorite, usually called and furniture.
household bleach. They have a broad spectrum of
antimicrobial activity, do not leave toxic residues, are Formaldehyde gas is most commonly used for
unaffected by water hardness, are inexpensive and fast disinfection of rooms. The gas is most effective at a high
acting, remove dried or fixed organisms and biofilms from temperature and a relative humidity of 80-90 per cent. The
surfaces (153). (3) Chlorine tablets : Under various trade gas may also be used for disinfection of blankets, beds,
names (viz., halazone tablets) they are available in the books and other valuable articles which cannot be boiled.
market. They are quite good in disinfecting small quantities
6. Oxidizing agents
of water. (4) Alternative compounds that release chlorine
and are used in the health-care setting include demand- a. Potassium permanganate : It is a purplish black
release chlorine dioxide, sodium dichloroisocyanurate, and crystelline powder that colours everything it touches through
chloramine-T. The advantage of these compounds over strong oxidizing action, which limits its use. It is used to
hypochlorites is that they retain chlorine longer and so exert disinfect aquariums and is also widely used in community
a more prolonged bactericidal effect. (5) The microbicidal swimming pools to disinfect ones feet before entering the
activity of a new disinfectant, "superoxidized water" has pool. It is also used to disinfect fruits and vegetables.
been examined. The concept of electrolyzing saline to create b. Hydrogen peroxide Hydrogen peroxide is
a disinfectant or antiseptic is appealing because the basic bactericidal, virucidal, sporicidal and fungicidal. It is used in
materials of saline and electricity are inexpensive and the hospital setting to disinfect surfaces. It is used as solution
end product (Le., water) does not damage the environment. alone or in combination with other chemicals as a high level
The main products of this water are hypochlorous acid (e.g., disinfectant. A 0.5 per cent accelerated hydrogen peroxide
at a concentration of about 144 mg/L) and chlorine. demonstrated bactericidal and virucidal activity in I minute
b. Iodine : (1) Iodine solutions or tinctures have been and mycobactericidal and fungicidal activity in 5 minutes. A
used by health professionals primarily as antiseptic on skin 3 per cent solution is also used as an antiseptic and for
(e.g.to prepare incision site prior to surgery) or tissue since cleaning wounds and discharging ulcers.
long time. Iodine is bactericidal, fungicidal, virucidal and c. Paracetic acid : It is a disinfectant produced by reacting
lethal to spore-bearing organisms. Iodine is cheap, readily hydrogen peroxide with acetic acid. It is broadly effective
available and quick in action. (2) Iodophores : An iodophore against microorganisms and is not deactivated by catalase
is a combination of iodine and a solubilizing agent or carrier; and peroxidase, the enzymes that break down hydrogen
the resulting complex provides a sustained-release reservoir peroxide. It inactivates gram-positive and gram-negative
of iodine and releases small amounts of free iodine in bacteria, fungi and yeast in less than 5 minutes at less than
aqueous solution. The best known and most widely used 100 ppm. In the presence of organic matter, 200-250 ppm is
iodophore is povidone-iodine (Betadine). They are non- required. For viruses, the dose range is wide (12-2250 ppm).
irritant and do not stain the skin. Besides their use as an
It breaks down to environment friendly residue (acetic acid
antiseptic, iodophores have been used for disinfecting blood
and hydrogen peroxide) and therefore can be used in non-
culture bottles and medical equipment.
rinse applications.
4. Alcohols
7. Metals as microbicides
Ethyl and isopropyl alcohols are commonly used as
antiseptics and disinfectants. Ethyl alcohol in the form of Anti-infective activity of some heavy metals has been
industrial methylated spirit is the alcohol most commonly known since antiquity. Heavy metals such as silver have
used for skin disinfection and hand washing. Pure alcohol been used for prophylaxis of conjunctivitis of the new-born,
has no powers of disinfection but when diluted with water to topical therapy for burn wounds, and bonding to indwelling
60-90 per cent vol/vol, it is potent bactericidal, fungicidal, catheters. Inactivation of bacteria on stainless steel surfaces
virucidal and tuberculocidal, but does not destroy bacterial by zeolite ceramic coating containing silver and zinc ions has
spores (153). Its activity decreases rapidly below 50 per cent also been demonstrated. Metals such as silver, iron, and
concentration. 70 per cent alcohol is lethal in a period of copper could be used for environmental control, disinfection
seconds to all types of non-sporing bacteria, but when of water or reusable medical devices, or incorporated into
applied to the skin and other surfaces, its activity disappears medical devices.
as the alcohol dries off. Because of expense and
flammability, its use is limited to small article disinfection. 8. Lime
Available evidence suggests that the most effective skin Lime is the cheapest of all disinfectants. It is used in the
antiseptics are alcoholic solutions of chlorhexidine and form of fresh quick lime or 10-20 per cent aqueous
iodine. Alcohols are inflammable and consequently must be suspension known as "milk of lime". Faeces and urine can
stored in cool areas. They also evaporate rapidly, making be disinfected by mixing 10-20 per cent aqueous
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
suspension of lime and allowing the disinfectant to act for Factors affecting the efficacy of sterilization (153)
2 hours. As lime wash, it is used for treating walls. As a Following factors should be kept in mind while sterilizing
deodorant, lime is sprinkled in cattle sheds and stables and
the medical equipment :
in public places where urinals and latrines are located.
Factors Effect
9. Ethylene oxide 1. Cleaning Failure to adequately clean instruments
Heat-sensitive articles may be sterilized at 55-60 deg.C results in higher bioburden, protein
by ethylene oxide which kills bacteria, spores {e.g., tetanus load, and salt concentration. These will
spores) and also viruses. Ethylene oxide is explosive, decrease sterilization efficacy.
therefore, it is mixed with carbon dioxide {12 per cent). 2. Pathogen type Spore-forming organisms are most
Water vapour is also often added to the mixture {relative resistant to sterilization. However, the
humidity 33 per cent) since it increases the efficiency of the contaminating microflora on surgical
gas. Ethylene oxide has been effectively used to sterilize instruments consists mainly of
fabrics, plastic equipment, cardiac catheters, books, etc; but vegetative bacteria.
the process is difficult to control. Therefore ethylene oxide
disinfection is discouraged when alternatives are available. 3. Bio film Biofilm accumulation reduces efficacy
accumulation of sterilization by impairing exposure of
10. Miscellaneous inactivating agents the sterilant to the microbial cell.
a. Pasteurization : Pasteurization is not a sterilization 4. Luman length Increasing lumen length and decreasing
process; its purpose is to destroy all pathogenic and luman lumen diameter impairs sterilant
microorganisms. However, pasteurization does not destroy diameter penetration. May require forced flow
bacterial spores. The time-temperature relation for hot-water through lumen to achieve sterilization.
pasteurization is generally -70°C (158°F) for 30 minutes. 5. Restricted flow Sterilant must come into contact with
microorganisms. Device designs that
b. Microwave : Microwaves are used in medicine for
prevent or inhibit this contact (e.g.
disinfection of soft contact lenses, dental instruments,
sharp bends, blind lumens) will
dentures, milk, and urinary catheters for intermittent self-
catheterization. However, microwaves must only be used decrease sterilization efficacy.
with products that are compatible (e.g., do not melt). 6. Device design Materials used in construction may
Microwaves are radio-frequency waves, which are usually and affect compatibility with different
used at a frequency of 2450 MHz. The microwaves produce construction sterilization processes.
friction of water molecules in an alternating electrical field.
The intermolecular friction derived from the vibrations Recommended disinfection procedures
generates heat. The microwaves produced by a "home- 1. Faeces and urine
type" microwave oven (2.45 GHz) completely inactivate
bacterial cultures, mycobacteria viruses, and G. Faeces and urine should be collected in impervious
stearothermophilus spores within 60 seconds to 5 minutes vessels and disinfected by adding an equal volume of one of
depending on the challenge organism. the disinfectants listed in Table 46 and allowed to stand for
1-2 hours. Faeces should be broken up with a stick to allow
c. Flushing and Washer Disinfectors : Flushing and proper disinfection. If the disinfectants listed in Table 46 are
washer-disinfectors are automated and closed equipment not available, an equal amount of quicklime or freshly
that clean and disinfect objects from bedpans, urinals and prepared milk of lime (1 of lime to 4 of water) may be
washbowls to surgical instruments and anesthesia tubes. added, mixed and left for 2 hours. If none is available, a
They have a short cycle of a few minutes. They clean by bucket of boiling water may be added to the faeces which is
flushing with warm water, possibly with a detergent, and then covered and allowed to stand until cool. After
then disinfect by flushing the items with hot water or with disinfection, the excreta! matter may be emptied into water
steam. Because this machine empties, cleans, and disinfects, closet or buried in ground. Bedpans and urinals should
manual cleaning is eliminated, fewer disposable items are ideally be steam disinfected. Alternatively, they may be
needed, and fewer chemical gemicides are used.
disinfected with 2 1/ 2 per cent cresol for an hour after
d. Ultraviolet radiation : The wavelength of UV radiation cleaning.
ranges from 328 nm to 210 nm. Its maximum bactericidal
effect occurs at 240-280 nm. Mercury vapour lamps emit TABLE 46
more than 90 per cent of their radiation at 253. 7 nm, which Agents suitable for disinfection of faeces and urine
is near the maximum microbicidal activity (153). UV
radiation has been employed in the disinfection of drinking Disinfectant Amount per litre Percent
water, air, titanium implants and contact lenses. Bacteria
and viruses are more easily killed by UV light than the 1. Bleaching powder 50g 5
bacterial spores. 2. Crude phenol lOOml 10
e. Ozone : Ozone has been used for years as a drinking 3. Cresol 50ml 5
water disinfectant. Ozone is produced when 0 2 is energized 4. Formalin lOOml 10
and split into two monatomic (0 1 ) molecules. The
monatomic oxygen molecules then collide with 0 2 molecules 2. Sputum
to form ozone, which is 0 3 . Ozone is a powerful oxidant that This is best received in gauze or paper handkerchiefs
destroys microorganisms but it is highly unstable (i.e. half- and destroyed by burning. If the amount is considerable (as
life of 22 minutes of room temperature). in TB hospitals), it may be disinfected by boiling or
autoclaving for 20 minutes at 20 lbs pressure. Alternatively, 1. Verification of diagnosis
the patient may be asked to spit in a sputum cup half filled Verification of diagnosis is the first step in an epidemic
with 5 per cent cresoL When the cup is full, it is allowed to investigation, as it may happen sometimes that the report
stand for an hour and the contents may be emptied and may be spurious, and arise from misinterpretation of signs
disposed off. and symptoms by the lay public. It is therefore necessary to
have the verification of diagnosis on the spot, as quickly as
3. Room possible. It is not necessary to examine all the cases to arrive
Usually thorough cleaning, airing and exposure to direct at a diagnosis. A clinical examination of a sample of cases
sunlight, when possible, for several hours will be sufficient. If may well suffice. Laboratory investigations wherever
necessary, floors and hard surfaces in the room should be applicable, are most useful to confirm the diagnosis but the
prohibited for 48 hours (154). For chemical disinfection, epidemiological investigations should not be delayed until
floors and hard surfaces should be sprayed or mopped with the laboratory results are available.
one of the following disinfectants : chlorine preparations
such as chlorinated lime in concentrations that leave 25 ppm 2. Confirmation of the existence of an epidemic
or more of free chlorine; formaldehyde solution at a
concentration of 1 per cent or more; phenolic disinfectants The next step is to confirm if epidemic exists. This is done
by comparing the disease frequencies during the same
such as 2 1/ 2 per cent cresol. The solution should remain in
period of previous years. An epidemic is said to exist when
contact with the surface for at least 4 hours before final
washing (154). the number of cases (observed frequency) is in excess of the
expected frequency for that population, based on past
On rare occasions, when fumigation is required, the gas experience. An arbitrary limit of two standard errors from
most commonly used is formaldehyde. It may be generated the endemic occurrence is used to define the epidemic
by boiling commercial formalin in 2 volumes of water (500 threshold for common diseases such as influenza (3). Often
ml of formalin plus 1 litre of water per 30 cu. metres of the existence of an epidemic is obvious needing no such
space) in a stainless steel vessel, over an electric hot plate or comparison, as in the case of common-source epidemics of
by adding potassium permanganate to commercial formalin cholera, food poisoning and hepatitis A. These epidemics
in large jars (170-200 gram to 500 ml of formalin plus 1 litre are easily recognized. In contrast the existence of modern
of water per 30 cu. metres) (154). There is vigorous boiling epidemics (e.g., cancer, cardiovascular diseases) is not easily
and liberation of formaldehyde gas. The room is kept closed recognized unless comparison is made with previous
for 6-12 hours to allow disinfection. Formaldehyde experience.
disinfection is most effective at a high temperature and a
relative humidity of 80-90 per cent. 3. Defining the population at-risk
(a) Obtaining a map of the area : Before beginning the
INVESTIGATION OF AN EPIDEMIC investigation, it is necessary to have a detailed and current
map of the area. If this is not available, it may be necessary
The occurrence of an epidemic always signals some to prepare such a map. It should contain information
significant shift in the existing balance between the agent, concerning natural landmarks, roads and the location of all
host and environment. It calls for a prompt and thorough dwelling units along each road or in isolated areas. The area
investigation of the cases to uncover the factor(s) may be divided into segments, using natural landmarks as
responsible and to guide in advocating control measures to boundaries. This may again be divided into smaller sections.
prevent further spread. Emergencies caused by epidemics Within each section, the dwelling units (houses) may be
remain one of the most important challenges to national designated by numbers.
health administrations. Epidemiology has an important role
(b) Counting the population : The denominator may be
to play in the investigation of epidemics. The objectives of
related to the entire population or sub-groups of
an epidemic investigation are (3, 21, 155).
a population. It may also be related to total events (see
a. to define the magnitude of the epidemic outbreak or page 55 for more details). For example, if the denominator is
involvement in terms of time, place and person. the entire population a complete census of the population
b. to determine the particular conditions and factors by age and sex should be carried out in the defined area by
responsible for the occurrence of the epidemic. house-to-house visits. For this purpose lay health workers
c. to identify the cause, source(s) of infection, and in sufficient numbers may be employed. Using this
modes of transmission to determine measures technique it is possible to establish the size of the
necessary to control the epidemic; and population. The population census will help in computing
the much-needed attack rates in various groups and
d. to make recommendations to prevent recurrence. subgroups of the population later on. Without an
An epidemic investigation calls for inference as well as appropriate denominator of "population at risk" attack rates
description. Frequently, epidemic investigations are called cannot be calculated.
for after the peak of the epidemic has occurred; in such
cases, the investigation is mainly retrospective. No step by 4. Rapid search for all cases and their
step approach applicable in all situations can be described characteristics
like a "cook-book" (155). However, in investigating an (a) Medical survey : Concurrently, a medical survey
epidemic, it is desired to have an orderly procedure or should be carried out in the defined area to identify all cases
practical guidelines as outlined below which are applicable including those who have not sought medical care, and
for almost any epidemic study. Some of the steps can be those possibly exposed to risk. Ideally, the complete survey
done concurrently. (screening each member of the population for the presence
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
of the disease in question) will pick up all affected outbreaks, food-specific attack rates must be calculated for
individuals with symptoms or signs of the disorder. Lay each food eaten to determine the source of infection.
health workers may be trained to administer the The purpose of data analysis is to identify common event
"epidemiological case sheet" or questionnaire to collect or experience, and to delineate the group involved in the
relevant data. common experience.
(b) Epidemiological case sheet : The epidemiologist
should be armed with an "epidemiological case sheet" for 6. Formulation of hypotheses
collecting data from cases and from persons apparently · On the basis of time, place and person distribution or the
exposed but unaffected. The epidemiological case sheet or Agent-Host-Environment model, formulate hypotheses to
"case interview form" should be carefully designed (based explain the epidemic in terms of (a) possible source
on the findings of a rapid preliminary inquiry) to collect (b) causative agent (c) possible modes of spread, and (d) the
relevant information. This includes : name, age, sex, environmental factors which enabled it to occur. These
occupation, social class, travel, history of previous exposure, hypotheses should be placed in order of relative likelihood.
time of onset of disease, signs and symptoms of illness, Formulation of a tentative hypothesis should guide further
personal contacts at home, work, school and other places; investigation.
special events such as parties attended, foods eaten and
exposure to common vehicles such as water, food and milk; 7. Testing of hypotheses
visits out of the community, history of receiving injections or
blood products, attendance at large gathering, etc. The All reasonable hypotheses need to be considered and
information collected should be relevant to the disease weighed by comparing the attack rates in various groups for
under study. For example, if the disease is food-borne, those exposed and those not exposed to each suspected
detailed food histories are necessary. A case review form will factor. This will enable the epidemiologist to ascertain which
ensure completeness and consistency of data collection. hypothesis is consistent with all the known facts. When
divergent theories are presented, it is not easy to distinguish
If the outbreak is large, it may not be possible to immediately between those which are sound and those
interview all the cases (e.g., influenza). In such cases, a which are merely plausible. Therefore it is instructive to turn
random sample should be examined and data collected. back to arguments which have been tested by the
(c) Searching for more cases: The patient may be asked subsequent course of events (156).
if he knew of other cases in the home, family,
neighbourhood, school, work place having an onset within 8. Evaluation of ecological factors
the incubation of the index case. Cases admitted to the local An investigation of the circumstances involved should be
hospitals should also be taken into consideration. This may carried out to undertake appropriate measures to prevent
reveal not only additional cases but also person-to-person further transmission of the disease. Ecological factors which
spread. The search for new cases (secondary cases) should have made the epidemic possible should be investigated
be carried out everyday, till the area is declared free of such as sanitary status of eating establishments, water and
epidemic. This period is usually taken as twice the milk supply; breakdown in the water supply system;
incubation period of the disease since the occurrence of last movements of the human population, atmospheric changes
case. such as temperature,, humidity and air pollution, population
dynamics of insects and animal reservoirs. The outbreak can
5. Data analysis
be studied in a case control fashion. One of the primary
The data collected should be analyzed on ongoing basis, concerns of the epidemiologist is to relate the disease to
using the classical epidemiological parameters - time, place environmental factors to know the source(s) of infection,
and person. If the disease agent is known, the characteristics· reservoirs and modes of transmission.
of time, place and person may be rearranged into Agent-
Host-Environment model (3). 9. Further investigation of population at risk
a. Time : Prepare a chronological distribution of dates of A study of the population at risk or a sample of it may be
onset and construct an "epidemic curve". Look for time needed to obtain additional information. This may involve
clustering of cases. An epidemic curve may suggest : (a) a medical examination, screening tests, examination of
time relationship with exposure to a suspected source suspected food; faeces or blood samples, biochemical
(Fig. 4), (b) whether it is a common-source or propagated studies, assessment of immunity status, etc. The approach
epidemic, and (c) whether it is a seasonal or cyclic pattern may be retrospective or prospective. For example,
suggestive of a particular infection. serological study may reveal clinically inapparent cases and
b. Place: Prepare a "spot map" (geographic distribution) throw light on the pathogenesis of the condition. Healthy
of cases, and if possible, their relation to possible sources of individuals (those who are not ill) from the same universe
infection, e.g., water supply, air pollution, foods eaten, may be studied in a case control fashion. This will permit
occupation, etc. Clustering of cases may indicate a common classification of all members as to :
source of infection. Analysis of geographic distribution may
provide evidence of the source of disease and its mode of a. exposure to specific potential vehicles.
spread. This was demonstrated by John Snow in the cholera b. whether ill or not.
outbreak in the Golden Square district, London (Figure 6).
c. Person : Analyze the data by age, sex, occupation and 10. Writing the report
other possible risk factors. Determine the attack rates/case The report should be complete and convincing.
fatality rates, for those exposed and those not exposed and Information to be included in the final report on an
according to host factors. For example, in most food-borne epidemic is given in Table 47 (157).
REFERENCES
TABLE 47 References
Information to be included in the final report on an epidemic
1. Acheson, R.M. (1978). Brit. Med. J., 2 : 1737.
Section Contents 2. Last, John M.ed. (1983). A Dictionary of Epidemiology, A Handbook
sponsored by the IEA, Oxford Univ. Press.
1. Background 3. Roht, LH. et al (1982). Principles of Epidemiology, A self-teaching
Geographical location guide, London, Academic Press.
Climatic conditions 4. Lilienfeld, AM. and Lilienfeld, D.E. (1980) Foundations of
Demographic status (population pyramid) Epidemiology, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press.
Socio-economic situation 5. Lowe, C.R. and J. Kostrzewski (1973). Epidemiology, A guide to
Organization of health services teaching methods, Churchill Livingstone.
6. Alderson, M. (1983). An Introduction to Epidemiology, 2nd ed.,
Surveillance and early warning systems London, Macmillan.
Normal disease prevalence. 7. Lilienfeld, AM. (1973). Am. J. Epi., 97: 135.
2. Historical data 8. Langmuir, AD. (1975). Int. J. Epi., 4 (4) 253.
Previous occurrence of epidemics 9. Roberts, C.J. (1977) Epidemiology for Clinicians, London, Pitam
of the same disease, Medical.
- locally or elsewhere 10. Morris, J.N. (1975). Uses of Epidemiology, 3rd ed., London,
Occurrence of related diseases, if any Churchill Livingstone.
- in the same area 11. WHO (1982). The Place of Epidemiology in Local Health Work,
- in other areas Offset Pub. No. 70, Geneva, WHO.
Discovery of the first cases of the present outbreak. 12. Macmahon, B. and T.F. Pugh (1970). Epidemiology: Principles and
Methods, Boston, Little, Brown.
3. Methodology of investigations 13. Fox, J.P. et al (1970). Epidemiology: Man and Disease, New York,
Case definition Macmillan.
Questionnaire used in epidemiological 14. WHO (1981). Health for All, Sr. No. 4.
investigation 15. Hall, David J. (1984). The Islamic World Med.J., April 84p. 22.
Survey teams 16. Rose, G and D.J.P. Barker (1979). Epidemiology for the Uninitiated,
Household survey British Medical Association, London.
Retrospective survey 17. WHO (1959). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.164.
Prospective surveillance 18. WHO (1968). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 389.
Collection of laboratory specimens 19. Hogarth, J. (1978). Glossary of Health Care Terminology, Geneva,
Laboratory techniques. WHO.
20. Lowe, C.R. and S.K. Lwanga (1978). Health Statistics, A manual for
4. Analysis of data teachers of medical students, !EA/WHO handbook, Oxford Medical
Clinical data : Publications.
- frequency of signs and.symptoms 21. Barker, D.J.P. and G. Rose (1976). Epidemiology in Medical
- course of disease Practice, Churchill Livingstone.
- differential diagnosis 22. WHO (1993), Basic Epidemiology by R. Beaglehole R. Bonita,
- death or sequelae rates T. Kjelistrom.
Epidemiological data : 23. Austin, D.F. and Werner, S.B. (1970). Epidemiology for the Health
mode of occurrence Sciences, Illionis, C.C. Thomas.
in time 24. Fraser, D.W. et al (1977). N. Eng. Med. J., 299: 1189.
by place 25. WHO (2008). Health Situation in South East Asia Region, 2001-
- by population groups 2007.
Modes of transmission : 26. Herbst, A.L. et al (1971). N. Eng. J. Med., 284: 878.
- source(s) of infection 27. Marmot, M.G. (1979). Bull WHO, 57 (3) 332.
28. WHO (1967). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 365.
route(s) of excretion and portal(s) of entry
29. Austin-Seymour, Mary Met al (1984). Ann. Int. Med., 100: 17.
factors influencing transmission
30. MacMahon, B. (1981). In : Preventive and Community Medicine,
Laboratory data ; 2nd ed., Duncan Clark (ed) Boston, Little, Brown & Co.
isolation of agent(s) 30A WHO (2006). Basic Epidemiology, 2nd Ed., R. Bonita, R.
serological confirmation Beaglehole and T. Kjellstrom.
- significance of results 31. WHO (1972). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 510, P. 20.
Interpretation of data : 32. Thompson, D.W. et al (1982). Am. J. Epid., 116 (5) 840.
- comprehensive picture of the outbreak 33. Karon, J.M. and Kupper, LL (1982). Am. J. Epi., 116 (5) 852.
- hypotheses as to cause(s) 34. Doll, R. and Hill, A.B. (1950). Brit. Med. J., 2: 739.
- formulation and testing of hypotheses by statistical 35. Schlesselman, J.J. (1982). Case Control Studies, New York, Oxford
analysis. University Press.
5. Control measures 36. Mausner, J.S. and Bahn, AK. (1974). Epidemiology : An
Introductory Text, Philadelphia, Saunders.
Definition of strategies and
37. Wynder, E.L and Graham, E.A. (1950). JAMA, 143: 329.
methodology of implementation
38. Levin, M.I. et al (1950). JAMA 143: 336-338.
- constraints 39. Kelsey, J.K. et al (1978). J. Epi. and Comm. H/th. 32: 102-107.
- results 40. Linos, A. et al (1980). N. Eng. J. Med., 302: 1101.
Evaluation : 41. Rooks, J.B. et al (1979). JAMA, 242: 644-648.
- significance of results 42. Adour, K.K. et al (1975). JAMA. 233: 527-539.
cost/effectiveness 43. Kline, J. et al (1978). Am. J. Epi., 107: 290-298.
Preventive measures. · 44. Hennekens, C.H. et al (1977). Int. J. Epi., 6: 243-246.
45. Hoover, R.N. and P.H. Strasser (1980). Lancet, 1: 837-840.
It may be necessary to implement temporary control 46. Vassey, M.P. and R.Doll (1968). Brit. Med. J., 2: 199.
measures at the commencement of an epidemic on the basis 47. Vassey, M.P. and R.Doll (1969). Brit. Med. J., 2: 651.
of known facts of the disease. These measures may be 48. Speirs, A.L (1962). Lancet, 1: 303.
modified or replaced in the light of new knowledge acquired 49. Dawber, TR. et al (1951). Am. J. Pub. H/th, 41 : 249.
by the epidemic investigation. As Frost (156) observed, an 50. Doll, R. and AB.Hill (1964). Brit. Med. J. 1: 1399-1410;1460-1467.
51. Royal College of General Practitioners (1974). Oral Contraceptives
epidemiological investigaUon is more than the collection of and Health, London, Pitman Medical.
established facts. It includes their orderly arrangement into 52. Neutra, R.R. et al (1978). N. Eng. J. Med., 299: 324-326.
chains of inference, which extend more or less beyond the 53. Lee, A.M. et al (1969). J. Natl. Cancer Inst., 42: 1045.
bounds of direct observation. 54. Wagoner, J.K. et al (1965). N. Eng. J. Med., 273: 181-188.
PRINCIPLES OF EPIDEMIOLOGY AND EPIDEMIOLOGIC METHODS
55. Seiter, R. and P.E. Sartwell (1965). Am. J. Epi., 81 : 2-22. 110. Brachman, P.S. (1984). In: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol IL
56. Makka, L. et al (1974). JAMA, 230: 64. 111. Waterson, A.P. (1979). Brit. Med. J., 2:564.
57. Court-Brown, W.M. and R. Doll (1957). Leukaemia and Aplastic 112. Dudgeon, J.A. (1976). Brit. Med. Bull, 32:77-85.
anaemia in patients irradiated for ankylosing spondylitis, MRC Sp! 113. WHO (1978). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.626.
Res.Ser.No.295, London, HMSO. 114. Fudenberg, H.H. et al (1976). Basic and Clinical Immunology, Los
58. Doll, R. and Peto (1976). Brit. Med. J., 2: 1525. · Altos, Ca, Lange
59. Dorn, H.E (1959). Pub. Health Rep., 74: 581-593, Washington DC, 115. Gell, P.G.H. et al (1975). Clinical Aspects of Immunology, 3rd ed.,
Govt. Printing Press. Blackwell, Oxford.
60. Doll, R. andA.B. Hill (1956). Brit.Med.J., 2: 1071-1081. 116. Mims, C.A. (1977). The Pathogenesis of Infectious Disease, London,
61. Selikoff, I.J. et al (1968). JAMA, 204: 106-112. Academic Press.
62. Mann, J.I. (1977). In: Proceedings of an International Symposium 117. Youmans, G.P. et al (1980). The Biological and Clinical Basis of
on CHD in young women, Edinburgh, 30 June-2 July 1977, Infectious Diseases, 2nd ed., Saunders.
Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone. 118. Turk, J.L. (1975). In: Clinical Aspects of Immunology, P.G.H. Cell et
63. Doll, R. and A.B. Hill (1956). Brit. Med. J., 2: 1071. al (eds), 3rd ed., Blackwell, Oxford. .
64. Doll, R. andA.B. Hill (1954). Brit. Med. J., 1: 1451-1455. 119. McConnel, I. et al (1981). The Immune System, a Course on the
65. Hammond, E.C. and D.Horn (1954). JAMA, 155: 1316-1328. moleculer and cellular basis of immunity, 2nd ed. Oxford, Blackwell.
66. Hammond, E.C. et al (1958). JAMA, 116: 1159-1172; 1294-1308. 120. WHO (1976). Public Health Papers, No.62.
67. Editorial (1977). Lancet, 2 : 74 7. 121. WHO (2013), Immunization Safety Surveillance, Guidelines for
68. WHO (1980). Medical Experimentation and the protection· of managers of immunization programmes on reporting and
Human Rights. investigating adverse events following immunization, 2nd ed.
69. Weser, J.K. et al (1984). N. Eng. J. Med., 310:830. 122. William E. Paul (2013), Fundamental Immunology, Seventh ed.
70. Smithells, R.W. eta! (1983). Lancet, 1: 1027-31. 123. Galazka, A.M. et al (1984). World Health Forum, 5 (3).
71. Paradise, J.L. et al (1984).N. Eng. J. Med., 310:674. 124. Galazka, A.M. et al (1984). Bull WHO, 62:357
72. Coronary Artery Surgery Study Randomized Trial (1984). N. Eng. J. 125. Jawetz, Melnick and Adelberg's Medical Microbiology, 24th edition
Med., 310: 750. . (2007), A Lange medical book.
73. Schoenberg, B.S. (1982). Neuroepidemiology, 1: 85-101. 126. Internet.
74. Medical Research Council (1951), Brit. Med. J., 2: 1463-71. 127. WHO (1983). Bull WHO, 61 (1) Directions to Contributors to
75. WHO cooperative Trial on Primary Prevention of IHD (1980) Bulletin.
Lancet, 2:379. 128. WHO (1982). Bull WHO, '60 (1) 43-47.
76. Rose, G. and P.J.S. Hamilton (1978). J. Epi and Community Health, 129. WHO (1978) Techn. Rep. Ser. No. 630.
32: 275-81. 130. Govt. of India (2011), Immunization Handbook/or Health Workers,
77. Terry, T.L. (1942).Am. J. Ophthalmology, 25:203-204; 1409-1423 Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
78. Kinsey, V.E. and EM. Hemphill (1955). Am. J. Oph, 56:481. 131. Govt. oflndia (2008), Immunization Handbook/or Medical Officers,
79. Kinsey, V.E. (1956). Archives of Oph, 56, 481-543. Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
80. South-EastLondonScreeningStudyGroup (1977).Inj. J. Epi., 6 (4) 132. WHO (2006), International travel and Health 2006.
357-63. 133. WHO (1996), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 32, 9 August
81. Bennet, A.E. (1978). Recent Advances in Community Medicine, 1996. .
Churchill Livingstone. 134. WHO (1984). Health/or All, Sr.No.9.
82. Sackett, D.L eta! (1974). Ann. Int. Med., 80: 137. 135. WHO (1978). Health/or All, Sr.No.I, pp 24-25.
83. Trichopoulos, D. et al (1983). Lancet, 1:441-443. 136. Bagshawe, K.D. et al (1978). Brit.Med.J., 2:879-881.
84. Moses, L.E. et al (1984).Annua/ Rev. P.H., 5:267-92. 137. WHO (1978). WHO Chronicle, 32:439-44 7.
85. Yudkin, J.Roddy, J. (1964). Lancet, 2:6. 138. Clark Duncan, W and B. MacMahon (1981). Preventive and
86. Bennet, A.E. et al (1970). Lancet, 1: 1012. Community Medicine, 2nd ed., Boston, Little Brown & Co.
87. US Public Health Service (1964). Smoking and Health, P.H. Service 139. American Academy of Paediatrics (1977). Report of Committee on
Pub; No.1103 Washington, US Govt. Printing Press. infectious Diseases (Red Book, 18th ed).
88. Hill, A.B. (1965). Proc. Roy. Soc. Med., 58:295-300. 140. Le Riche and J. Milner (1971). Epidemiology as Medical Ecology,
89. Hill, A.B. (1971). Principles of Medical Statistics, 9th ed., Oxford Churchill, Livingstone. ·
University Press. 141. WHO (1983). International Health Regulations, 1969. 3rd
90. Susser, M.W. (1977). Am. J. Epi., 105:1-15 Annotated edition, WHO, Geneva.
91. Noble, John (1976). Primary Care and the Practice of Medicine, 142. Salvato, J.A. (1976). Guide to Sanitation in Tourist Establishments,
Boston, Little Brown. WHO Geneva.
92. White, K.L (1978). In: Basic Health Care in Developing Countries, 143. WHO (1984). The Work of WHO, 1982-83.
An Epidemiological perspective, Basil S. Hetzel (ed). !EA/WHO 144. WHO (1978). Expanded Programme on Immunization, Report and
Handbook, Oxford Med. Publications. Working Papers, 31st Session of the WHO Reg. Committee,
93. Mckeown, T and C.R. Lowe (1974). An Introduction to Social Mongolia, 21-28 Aug, 1978, SEARO.
Medicine, 2nd ed., Blackwell.
145. WHO (2010), WHO recommendations for routine immunizations,
94. WHO (1980). Early Detection of Handicap in Children, EURO Rep Immunization, Vaccines and Biologicals.
and Studies, 30 Reg.Office WHO, Copenhagen.
. 146. Galazka, A.M. et al (1984). Bull WHO, 62 (3) 357 .
95. Melby.J.C (1975).JAMA, 231 :399.
Finnerty, EA. (1975). JAMA, 231: 402. 147. Centre for Disease Control (1982). Health Information for
96.
International Travel, Washington DC. Govt. Printing Office (H.H.S.
97. WHO (1972). WHO Chr., 26 (1) 7-11.
Publication (CDC) 82-8280), p.64.
98. Letters to the Eidtor (1980). Lancet, 2:1200.
148. Krugman, S. et al (1963). Pediatrics, 31:919-928.
99. Benenson, A.S. ed (1981). Control of Communicable Diseases in Chin, James (1980). In : Maxcy-Rosenau Public Health and
Man, 13th ed. American P.H. Association, New York. 149.
Preventive Medicine, 11th ed. J.M. Last (ed). Appletone-Century-
100. Council for International Organizations of Medical Sciences (1973).
Communicable Diseases, Provisional International Nomenclature,
Crofts, New Work.
CIOMS/WHO, Geneva. 150. Editorial (1982). Brit.Med.J., 285:582.
101. WHO (1982). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.682. 151. WHO (1983). WHO Chronicle, 37 (6) 210.
102. Nelson, G. (1960). Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Hyg., 54: 301. 152. WHO (1996), International Travel and Health, Vaccination
103. Last, J.M. (1985). World Health Forum, 6 (2) 135. Requirements and Health Advice.
104. WHO (1981). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.666, p.92. 153. William A. Rutala, David J. Weber and Health Care Infection Control
Raska, K. (1966). WHO Chronicle, 20: 315. Advisory Committee (2008), Guidelines for Disinfection and
105.
Sterilization in Healthcare Facilities, CDC.
106. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.593.
107. Kark, S.L. (1966). In: Medical Care in Developing Countries, King, 154. WHO (1972). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.493, p. 58.
M. (ed), Oxford. 155. Friedman, G.D. (1974). Primer of Epidemiology, McGraw Hill.
108. Last, J.M. (1980). Maxcy-Rosenau Public Health and Preventive 156. Frost, W.H. (1936). In : Snow on Cholera, New York,
Medicine, 11th ed., Appletion-Century-Crofts. Commonwealth Fund, p.ix.
109. Pelcze!r Jr M.J. et al (1977). Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill, New 157. Bres, P. (1986). Public Health action in Emergencies caused by
Delhi, p.669. Epidemics, WHO, Geneva.
"Health should mean a lot more than escape from death or, for that matter, escape from disease."
of the programme must be seen in terms of its outcomes. It is Four main uses have been described:
also necessary for the complexities and costs of any
detection programme to be viewed against the benefits a. Case detection
accruing therefrom (3). This is also known as "prescriptive screening". It is
defined as the presumptive identification of unrecognized
Aims and objectives disease, which does not arise from a patient's request, e.g.,
The basic purpose of screening is to sort out from a large neonatal screening. In other words, people are screened
group of apparently healthy persons those likely to have the primarily for their own benefit. Specific diseases sought by
disease or at increased risk of the disease under study, to this method have included bacteriuria in pregnancy, breast
bring those who are "apparently abnormal" under medical cancer, cervical cancer, deafness in children, diabetes
supervision and treatment (Fig.2). Screening is carried out in mellitus, iron deficiency anaemia, PKU, pulmonary
the hope that earlier diagnosis and subsequent treatment tuberculosis, haemolytic disease of the newborn, etc. (5).
favourably. alters the natural history of the disease in Since disease detection is initiated by medical and public
a significant proportion of those who are identified as health personnel, they are under special obligation to make
"positive" (4). sure that appropriate treatment is started early.
Apparently healthy
(Screening tests) b. Control of disease
J. This is also known as "prospective screening". People are
examined for the benefit of others, e.g., screening of
Apparently normal Apparently abnormal immigrants from infectious diseases such as tuberculosis and
(Periodic re-screening) syphilis to protect the home population; and screening for
(a) Normal - periodic
re-screening
streptococcal infection to prevent rheumatic fever. The
(b) Intermediate
screening programme may, by leading to early diagnosis
surveillance permit more effective treatment and reduce the spread of
(c) Abnormal - infectious disease and/or mortality from the disease.
treatment
c. Research purposes
FIG.2
Possible outcomes of screening
Screening may sometimes be performed for research
purposes. For example, there are many chronic diseases
Explanation of terms whose natural history is not fully known (e.g., cancer,
hypertension). Screening may aid in obtaining more basic
a. Screening knowledge about the natural history of such diseases, as for
Strictly speaking, screening is testing for infection or example, initial screening provides a prevalence estimate
disease in populations or in individuals who are not seeking and subsequent screening, an incidence figure. Where
health care; for example, serological testing for AIDS virus in screening is done for research purposes, the investigator
blood donors, neonatal screening, premarital screening for should inform the study participants that no follow-up
syphilis. therapy will be available.
d. Educational opportunities Multiphasic screening has enjoyed considerable
Apart from possible benefits to the individual and the popularity, and evidence from randomized controlled
acquisition of information of public health relevance, studies in UK and USA suggested that multiphasic screening
screening programmes (as for example, screening for has not shown any benefit accruing to the population in
diabetes) provide opportunities for creating public terms of mortality and morbidity reduction (9). On the other
awareness and for educating health professionals. hand, it has increased the cost of health services without any
observable benefit. Furthermore, in multiphasic screening,
Types of screening as currently practised, most of the tests have not been
validated. These observations have cast doubts on the utility
Three types of screening have been described: of multiphasic screening (10, 11).
a. Mass screening
b. High-risk or selective screening CRITERIA FOR SCREENING
c. Multiphasic screening. Before a screening programme is initiated, a decision
must be made whether it is worthwhile, which requires
a. Mass screening ethical, scientific, and, if possible financial justification (4).
Mass screening simply means the screening of a whole The criteria for screening are based on two considerations:
population (6) or a sub-group, as for example, all adults (7). the DISEASE to be screened, and the TEST to be applied
It is offered to all, irrespective of the particular risk (12,13,14,15).
individual may run of contracting the disease in question
(e.g., tuberculosis). Disease
Mass screening for disease received enthusiastic support The disease to be screened should fulfil the following
in the past. However, when a number of mass screening criteria before it is considered suitable for screening:
procedures were subjected to critical review, there appeared 1. the condition sought should be an important health
to be little justification for their use in many instances (8). problem (in general, prevalence should be high);
Indiscriminate mass screening, therefore; is not a useful 2. there should be a recognizable latent or early
preventive measure unless it is backed up by suitable asymptomatic stage;
treatment that will reduce the duration of illness or alter its 3. the natural history of the condition, including
final outcome. development from latent to declared disease, should
be adequately understood (so that we can know at
b. High-risk or selective screening what stage the process ceases to be reversible);
Screening will be most productive if applied selectively to 4. there is a test that can detect the disease prior to the
high-risk groups, the groups defined on the basis of onset of signs and symptoms;
epidemiological research (7). For example, since cancer 5. facilities should be available for confirmation of the
cervix tends to occur relatively less often in the upper social diagnosis;
groups, screening for cancer cervix in the lower social 6. there is an effective treatment;
groups could increase the yield of new cases. One 7. there should be an agreed-on policy concerning
population sub-group where certain diseases (e.g., diabetes, whom to treat as patients (e.g., lower ranges of blood
hypertension, breast cancer) tend to be aggregated in the pressure; border-line diabetes);
family. By screening the other members of the family (and 8. there is good evidence that early detection and
close relatives), the physician can detect additional cases. treatment reduces morbidity and mortality;
Epidemiologists have extended the concept of screening 9. the expected benefits (e.g., the number of lives saved)
for disease to screening for "risk factors", as these factors of early detection exceed the risks and costs.
apparently antedate the development of actual disease. For
example, elevated serum cholesterol is associated with a When the above criteria are satisfied, then only, it would
high risk of developing coronary heart disease. Risk factors, be appropriate to consider a suitable screening test.
particularly those of a patho-physiological nature such as
serum cholesterol and blood pressure are amenable to Screening test
effective interventions. In this way, preventive measures can The test must satisfy the criteria of acceptability,
be applied before the disease occurs. Besides effectiveness, repeatability and validity, besides others such as yield,
economical use of resources will also occur if the screening simplicity, safety, rapidity, ease of administration and cost.
tests are selectively applied to individuals in high-risk group. Tests most likely to fulfil one condition may however, be
least likely to fulfil another - for example, tests with greater
c. Multiphasic screening accuracy may be more expensive and time consuming. The
It has been defined as the application of two or more choice of the test must therefore often be based on
screening tests in combination to a large number of people compromise.
at one time than to carry out separate screening tests for
single diseases. The procedure may also include a health 1. Acceptability
questionnaire, clinical examination and a range of Since a high rate of cooperation is necessary, it is
measurements and investigations (e.g., chemical and important that the test should be acceptable to the people at
haematological tests on blood and urine specimens, lung whom it is aimed. In general, tests that are painful,
function assessment, audiometry and measurement of visual discomforting or embarrassing (e.g., rectal or vaginal
acuity) - all of which can be performed rapidly with the examinations) are not likely to be acceptable to the
appropriate staffing organization and equipment (7). population in mass campaigns.
138 SCREENING FOR DISEASE
TABLE 7
Predictive value of a positive gram-stained cervical smear test
(with constant sensitivity of 50% and specificity of 90%) at three levels of prevalence
Total 50 950 1000 Total 150 850 1000 Total 250 750 1000
(i.e. all are vesicles or all are pustules) on any given part of
I. RESPIRATORY INFECTIONS the body (e.g. the face or arm)
AND
SMALLPOX No alternative diagnosis explaining the illness
(VARIOLA)
AND
An acute infectious disease caused by variola virus, and Laboratory confirmation.
clinically characterized by a sudden onset of fever,
By eradication of smallpox, 2 million deaths, a few
headache, backache, vomiting and sometimes convulsions,
hundred thousand cases of blindness, and 10-15 million
especially in children. On the third day of fever, a typical
cases of disease per year have been prevented. Over the last
rash appears which is centrifugal in distribution and passes
34 years, it has become increasingly obvious that the
through successive stages of macule, papule, vesicle,
strategy that was used to conquer smallpox cannot be
pustule, and scab with subsequent scarring.
copied for any other disease. Every disease like every
Previously, it was one of the greatest killer disease. In human being is unique.
1967, WHO began an intensified worldwide campaign to
eradicate smallpox, based on the technique of surveillance Smallpox eradication surveillance
and containment. The last known case of smallpox in India Despite the absence of smallpox, surveillance of
occurred on 24th May 1975. India was declared smallpox "rumours" continues in order to sustain public confidence in
free on 5th July 1975. The eradication of smallpox was the eradication of the disease. However, the final chapter of
confirmed in April 1977 by an international commission. the smallpox story remains to be written, as the smallpox
The World Health Assembly confirmed the global virus has not been completely destroyed. Stocks are still held
eradication of smallpox in May 1980. All countries have at government research centres in the Russian Federation
discontinued routine vaccination against smallpox. and at the United States.
However WHO maintains a reserve stock of smallpox
vaccine ~nd vaccination needles - sufficient to protect more References
than 200 million people, should an emergency arise (1). 1. WHO (1980), The Global Eradication of Smallpox, Final Report,
Geneva.
Case definition for notification of smallpox under 2. WHO (2009), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 7, Feb 13, 2009.
the International Health Regulations, 2005 (2)
Member states to the IHR (2005) are required to notify to CHICKENPOX
WHO immediately of any confirmed case of smallpox. The {VARI CELLA)
case definition for a confirmed smallpox case includes the
following:
Chickenpox or varicella is an acute, highly infectious
Confirmed case of smallpox disease caused by varicella-zoster (V-Z) virus. It is
characterized by vesicular rash that may be accompanied by
An individual of any age presenting with acute onset of fever and malaise. It is worldwide in distribution and occurs
fever (::?.38.3°C/101°F), malaise, and severe prostration in both epidemic and endemic forms. Chickenpox and
with headache and backache occurring 2-4 days before herpes zoster are now regarded as different host responses to
onset of rash the same aetiological agent. Inoculation of zoster vesicle
AND fluid into children produces chickenpox, and children who
have recovered from zoster virus related infection are
Subsequent development of a maculopapular rash
resistant to varicella (1).
starting on the face and forearms then spreading to the trunk
and legs, and evolving within 48 hours to deep-seated, firm Problem Statement
or hard and round well-circumscribed vesicles, and later
pustules, which may become umbilicated or confluent Based on conservative estimates, the global annual
chickenpox disease burden includes 4.2 million severe
AND complications leading to hospitalization and 4,200 deaths.
Lesions that appear at the same stage of development In the pre-vaccine era in high-income developed countries,
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
case fatality rate was about 3 per lac cases compared to during pregnancy, have a higher risk of developing herpes
1-3 per 1000 cases for measles. Factors which influence the zoster in the first years of life (2).
severity of disease and outcome in populations include the
proportion of cases among infants, pregnant women and Environmental factors
other adults, the prevalence of immunocompromising Chickenpox shows a seasonal trend in temperate settings
conditions including HIV infections and the extent of access and in most tropical settings, with peak incidence during
to care and appropriate treatment. In otherwise healthy winter and spring, or in coolest, driest months in the tropics.
children, the disease is usually self-limiting (2). Periodic large outbreaks occur with an inter-epidemic cycle
The incidence and severity of herpes-zoster disease of 2-5 years (2).
increases with age, with marked increase after 50 years of VZV is heat labile. Outside host cell, the virus survives in
age, which correlates with ageing related decline in cell- the external environment for only a few hours, occasionally
mediated immunity. Among adults who reach 85 years of for a day or two, and it is readily inactivated by lipid
age, it is estimated that approximately half will have suffered solvents, detergents, and proteases (2).
atleast one episode of herpes zoster (2).
Transmission
In India, during the year 2013, about 28,090 cases of
chickenpox were reported with 61 deaths. The case fatality Chickenpox is transmitted from person to person by
rate was about 0.21 per cent. Kerala reported the highest droplet infection and by droplet nuclei. Most patients are
number of cases (12,168) and West Bengal reported the infected by "face-to-face" (personal) contact. The portal of
maximum number of deaths (68) due to chickenpox (3). entry of the virus is the upper respiratory tract or the
conjunctiva. Since the virus is extremely labile, it is unlikely
Epidemiological determinants that fomites play a significant role in its transmission (9).
Contact infection undoubtedly plays a role when an
Agent factors individual with herpes zoster is an index case. The virus can
(a) AGENT : The causative agent of chickenpox, V-Z cross the placental barrier and infect the foetus, a condition
virus is also called "Human (alpha) herpes virus 3". Primary known as congenital varicella.
infection causes chickenpox. Recovery from primary
infection is commonly followed by the establishment of latent Incubation period
infection in the cranial nerves, sensory, ganglia, and spinal Usually 14 to 16 days, although extremes as wide as 10 to
dorsal root ganglia, often for decades, without clinical 21 days have been reported.
manifestations. When the cell-mediated immunity wanes
with age or following immuno-suppressive therapy, the virus
Clinical features
may reactivate, resulting in herpes zoster in about 10-30 per The clinical spectrum of chickenpox may vary from a
cent of persons (4). It is, a painful, vesicular, pustular mild illness with only a few scattered lesions to a severe
eruption in the distribution of one or more sensory nerve febrile illness with widespread rash. Inapparent infection is
roots. The virus can be grown in tissue culture. (b) SOURCE estimated to occur in no more than 5 per cent of susceptible
OF INFECTION: Usually a case of chickenpox. The virus children (7). In the majority of cases, the disease tends to be
occurs in the oropharypgeal secretions and lesions of skin mild and typical (6). The clinical course of chickenpox may
and mucosa. Rarely the source of infection may be a patient be divided into two stages :
with herpes zoster. The virus can be readily isolated from the (A) PRE-ERUPTIVE STAGE : Onset is sudden with mild
vesicular fluid during the first 3 days of illness. The scabs or moderate fever, pain in the back, shivering and malaise.
however are not infective (5). (c) INFECTIVITY: The period This stage is very brief, lasting about 24 hours. In adults, the
of communicability of patients with varicella is estimated to prodromal illness is usually more severe and may last for
range from 1 to 2 days before the appearance of rash, and 2-3 days before the rash comes out (6).
4 to 5 days thereafter (5). The virus tends to die out before (B) ERUPTIVE STAGE : In children the rash is often the
the pustular stage (6). The patient ceases to be infectious first sign. It comes on the day the fever starts. The distinctive
once the lesions have crusted. (d) SECONDARY ATTACK features of the rash are :
RATE: Chickenpox is highly communicable. The secondary (a) Distribution.: The rash is symmetrical. It first appears
attack rate in household contacts approaches 90 per cent (7). on the trunk where it is abundant, and then comes on the
Host factors face, arms and legs where it is less abundant. Mucosal
surfaces (e.g., buccal, pharyngeal) are generally involved.
(a) AGE : Chickenpox occurs primarily among children Axilla may be affected, but palms and soles are not usually
under 10 years of age. Few persons escape infection until affected. The density of the eruption diminishes
adulthood. The disease can be severe in normal adults. centrifugally.
(b) IMMUNITY: One attack gives durable immunity; second
attacks are rare. The acquisition of maternal antibody (b) Rapid evolution : The rash advances quickly through
protects the infant during the first few months of life. No the stages of macule, papule, vesicle and scab. In fact, the
age, however, is exempt in the absence of immunity. The first to attract attention are often the vesicles filled with clear
IgG antibodies persist for life and their presence is correlated fluid and looking like "dew-drops" on the skin. They are
with protection against varicella. The cell-mediated superficial in site, with easily ruptured walls and surrounded
immunity appears to be important in recovery from V-Z by an area of inflammation. Usually they are not
infections and in protection against the reactivation of latent umbilicated. The vesicles may form crusts without going
V-Z virus (8). (c) PREGNANCY: Infection during pregnancy through the pustular stage. Many of the lesions may abort.
presents a risk for the foetus leading to congenital varicella Scabbing begins 4 to 7 days after the rash appears.
syndrome. It occurs in 0.4-2.0 per cent of children born to (c) P/eomorphism : A characteristic feature of the rash in
mothers who become infected with VZV during the first 20 chickenpox is its pleomorphism, that is, all stages of the rash
weeks of gestation. Infants, whose mothers had chickenpox (papules, vesicles and crusts) may be seen simultaneously at
CHICKENPOX
one time, in the same area. This is due to the rash appearing cerebro-cortical atrophy. If varicella develops in a mother
in successive crops for 4 to 5 days in the same area. within 5 days after delivery, the newborn is at risk of
(d) Fever : The fever does not run high but shows disseminated disease and should receive varicella-zoster
exacerbations with each fresh crop of eruption. immunoglobulin (4). The virus has a potential for
oncogenicity.
The main points of difference between chickenpox and
smallpox are given in Table 1. Varicella-zoster virus is the major virus associated with
acute retinal necrosis and progressive outer retinal necrosis,
TABLE 1 both of which occur with increased frequency among AIDS
Differences between smallpox and chickenpox patients (4).
Smallpox Chickenpox Secondary bacterial infections, particularly with group A
{3-haemolytic streptococci and staphylococcus aureus are
1. Incubation : common. Cellulitis, erysipelas, epiglottitis, osteomyelitis,
About 12 days About 15 days scarlet fever and rarely meningitis are observed. Pitted scars
(range: 7-17 days). (range 7-21 days).
are frequent sequelae.
2. Prodroma/ symptoms:
lmmunocompromised patients are at increased risk of
Severe. Usually mild.
complications of varicella, including those with
3. Distribution of rash : malignancies, organ transplants or HIV infection and those
(a) centrifugal . (a) centripetal receiving high doses of corticosteroids. Disseminated
(b) palms and soles frequently (b) seldom affected intravascular coagulation may occur which is rapidly fatal.
involved
(c) axilla usually free (c) axilla affected
Children with leukaemia are especially prone to develop
(d) rash predominant on (d) rash mostly on flexor
severe disseminated varicella-zoster virus disease (1).
extensor surfaces and surfaces.
bony prominences. Laboratory diagnosis
4. Characteristics of the rash: During the smallpox post-eradication era the diagnosis of
(a) deep-seated (a) superficial chickenpox is of great importance because of its
(b) vesicles multilocular and (b) unilocular; dew-drop like resemblance to mild smallpox. Laboratory diagnosis is rarely
umbilicated appearance required as clinical signs are usually clear-cut.
(c) only one stage of rash may (c) rash pleomorphic, i.e.,
be seen at one time different stages of the rash Laboratory confirmation of varicella or herpes zoster
evident at one given time, (HZ) is by detecting VZV DNA using polymerase chain
because rash appears in reaetion (PCR) or isolating VZV in cell culture from vesicular
successive crops fluid, crusts, saliva, cerebrospinal fluid or other specimens.
(d) No area of inflammation is (d) an area of inflammation is Direct immunofluorescence can also be used for rapid
seen around the vesicles. seen around the vesicles. testing though this method has lower sensitivity than PCR.
5. Evolution of rash : Detection of VZV-specific serum lgM antibody is
(a) evolution of rash is slow, (a) evolution of rash very rapid considerably less sensitive than PCR and is not the method
deliberate and majestic, of choice for confirming varicella. Detection of serum lgM
passing through definite and PCR are of limited value for the confirmation of HZ.
stages of mac11le, papule, Serologic screening of serum for IgG antibodies is used to
vesicle and pustule.
assess immunity or susceptibility to varicella in unvaccinated
(b) scabs begin to form 10-14 (b) scabs begin to form 4-7 persons, e.g. in health-care workers (2).
days after the rash appears days after the rash appears
6. Fever: Control
Fever subsides with the Temperature rises with each
appearance of rash, but fresh crop of rash.
The usual control measures are notifications, isolation of
may iise again in the cases for about 6 days after onset of rash and disinfection of
pustular stage (secondary articles soiled by nose and throat discharges (11).
rise of fever). Several antiviral compounds provide effective therapy for
varicella including acyclovir, valaciclovir, famiciclovir and
Complications foscarnet. Acyclovir can prevent the development of systemic
In most cases, chickenpox is a mild, self-limiting disease. disease in varicella-infected immunosuppressed patients and
The mortality is less than 1 per cent in uncomplicated cases. can halt the progression of zoster in adults. Acyclovir does not
However, varicella may be accompanied by severe appear to prevent post herpic neuralgia (1).
complications particularly in immunosuppressed patients
Prevention
and may also occur in normal children and adults. These
include haemorrhages (varicella haemorrhagical),
1. VARICELLA-ZOSTER IMMUNOGLOBULIN (VZIG)
pneumonia, encephalitis, acute cerebellar ataxia and Reye's
syndrome (acute encephalopathy associated with fatty Varicella-Zoster Immunoglobulin (VZIG) given within
degeneration of the viscera especially liver) (10). Varicella 72 hours of exposure has been recommended for prevention
pneumonia is rare in healthy children but is the most of chickenpox in exposed susceptible individuals particularly
common complication in neonates, adults and immuno- in immunosuppressed persons. These include (a) susceptible
compromised patients. It is related to many varicella-related persons receiving immunosuppressive therapy; (b) persons
deaths. Maternal varicella during pregnancy may cause with congenital cellular immunodeficiency; (c) persons
foetal wastage and birth defects such as cutaneous scars, with acquired immunodeficiency including HIV/AIDS;
atrophied limbs, microcephaly and low birth weight, (d) susceptible and exposed persons, in particular pregnant
cataract, microphthalmia, chorioretinitis, deafness and women; (e) newborns; and (f) premature infants of low birth
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
weight. It has no therapeutic value in established disease. 5. Weller, Thomas H. (1977). in Viral Infections of Humans:
VZIG is given by intramuscular injection in a dose of 12.5 Epidemiology and Control, Evans Alfred, S. et al (eds), 2nd ed.,
Plenum Medical, New York.
units/kg body weight up to a maximum of 625 units, with a 6. Christie, A.B. (1980). Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical
repeat dose in 3 weeks, if a high-risk patient remains Practice, 3rd ed., Churchil Livingstone.
exposed. Because VZIG appears to bind the varicella vacine, 7. Stephen, R Preblud and A.R. Hinman (1980), Maxcy-Rosenau: Public
the two should not be given concomitantly (4). Health and Preventive Medicine, Last, J.M. (ed), llthed, Appleton-
Century - Crofts.
2. VACCINE 8. WHO (1985) Bull WHO 63: 433.
9. Brunell, P.A. (1979) Principles and Practice of Infectious Disease,
A live attenuated varicella virus vaccine is safe and Mandell, G. et al (eds), John Wiley, New York.
currently recommended for children between 12-18 months 10. WHO (1985) Techn. Rep. Ser., No.725.
of age who have not had chickenpox. 11. Bres, P. (1986) Public Health Action in Emergencies caused by
Recommendations on dosage and interval between doses Epidemics. Geneva, WHO.
vary by manufacturer. Monovalent vaccine can be
administered following one or two dose schedule (0.5 ml MEASLES
each by subcutaneous injection. A 2 dose schedule is (RUBEO LA)
recommended for all persons aged 2 13 years. When 2
doses are administered, the minimum interval between An acute highly infectious disease of childhood caused by
doses is either 6 weeks or 3 months for children (12 months a specific virus of the group myxoviruses. It is clinically
to 12 years of age inclusive), and 4 or 6 weeks for characterized by fever and catarrhal symptoms of the upper
adolescents and adults (13 years of age and older). respiratory tract (coryza, cough), followed by a typical rash.
Combination vaccines (MMRV) can be administered to Measles is associated with high morbidity and mortality in
children from 9 months to 12 years. If 2 doses of MMRV are developing countries. Measles occurs only in humans. There
used, the minimum interval between doses should be is no animal reservoir of infection.
4 weeks. It is preferred that the 2nd dose be administered Problem statement
6 weeks to 3 months after the first dose or at 4-6 years of
age (2). Measles is endemic virtually in all parts of the world. It
tends to occur in epidemics when the proportion of
The duration of immunity is not known but is probably 10 susceptible children reaches about 40 per cent (1). When the
years. Although the vaccine is very effective in preventing disease is introduced into a virgin community more than 90
disease, breakthrough infections do occur but are much per cent of that community will be infected (2). While
milder than in unvaccinated individuals (usually less than 50 measles is now rare in industrialized countries, it remains a
lesions, with milder systemic symptoms). Although the common illness in many developing countries. The primary
vaccine is very safe, adverse reactions can occur as late as reason for continuing high childhood measles mortality and
4-6 weeks after vaccination. Tenderness and erythema at the morbidity is the failure to deliver at least one dose of
injection site are seen in 25%, fever in 10-15%, and a measles vaccine to all infants (3).
localized maculopapular or vesicular rash in 5%; a smaller
percentage develops a diffuse rash, usually with five or fewer The challenges for measles elimination include: (1) weak
vesicular lesions. immunization systems; (2) high infectious nature of measles;
(3) populations that are inaccessible due to conflict; (4) the
Spread of virus from vaccinees to susceptible individuals increasing refusal of immunization by some populations;
is possible, but the risk of such transmission even to (5) the changing epidemiology of measles which has led to
immune-compromised patients is small, and disease, when it increased transmission among adolescents and adults; (6) the
develops, is mild and treatable with acyclovir. Nonetheless, need to provide catch-up measles vaccination to > 130
the vaccine, being a live attenuated virus, should not be million children in India; (7) the gaps in human and financial
given to immunocompromised individuals, or pregnant resources at the country, regional and global levels (4).
women. The use of varicella vaccine may be considered in
clinically stable HIV-infected children or adults with CD4+ In the year 2010, the world's two most populous
T-cell levels 2 15 per cent including those receiving highly countries made promising advances in measles control:
active antiretroviral therapy. HIV testing is not .a prerequisite China held the largest-ever SIA, vaccinating > 103 million
for varicella vaccination (2). It is contraindicated in persons children, and India started implementation of a 2-dose
allergic to neomycin. For theoretic reasons, it is vaccination strategy (5).
recommended that following vaccination, salicylates should In 1980, before widespread use of measles vaccine, an
be avoided for 6 weeks (to prevent Reye's syndrome). estimated 2.6 million measles deaths occurred worldwide.
Several unresolved issues remain, including the need for Recognizing this burden, WHO and UNICEF developed an
booster doses, whether universal childhood vaccination will accelerated measles mortality reduction strategy of
shift the incidence of disease to adolescence or adulthood delivering 2 doses of measles containing vaccine (MCV) to
with the possibility of more severe disease, and whether all children through routine services and supplementary
vaccination might prevent development of herpes zoster. immunizing activities (SIAs), and improving disease
surveillance. Since implementation of this strategy began in
References 2001, the estimated number of measles deaths has fallen
from 733,000 in year 2000 to 122,000 in year 2012. At the
1. Jawetz, Melnick and Adelberg's Medical Microbiology, (2007), 24th
Ed., A Lange Publication. 2010 World Health Assembly, member states endorsed the
2. WHO (2014), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 25, June 20, 2014. following targets to be met by 2015 as milestones towards
3. Govt. of India (2014), National Health Profile of India 2013, Ministry eventual global measles eradication : (1) raise routine
of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. coverage with the first dose of MCV (MCV 1) to 2 90 per cent
4. Lawrence, M., Tierney, Jr. (2008), Current Medical Diagnosis and nationally, and 2 80 per cent in every district or equivalent
Treatment, (2008), 47th Ed., A Lange Publication. administrative unit; (2) reduce and maintain annual measles
MEASLES
incidence to < 5 cases per million; and (3) reduce measles developed countries (10). Following the use of measles
mortality by ~ 95 per cent in comparison with the estimated vaccine, the disease is now seen in somewhat older age-
level in the year 2000 (5). groups (11). This highlights the importance of periodic
Building on the previous WHO and UNICEF strategy; and serological checking of the immunity status of the
recognizing the burden of congenital rubella syndrome and susceptible population. (b) SEX : Incidence equal.
availability of combination vaccines, the Measles Initiative (c) IMMUNITY : No age is immune if there was no previous
has developed a 2012-2020 Global Measles and Rubella immunity. One attack of measles generally confers life-long
Strategic Plan. This plan aims to: (1) achieve and maintain immunity. Second attacks are rare. Infants are protected by
high levels of population immunity through high coverage maternal antibodies up to 6 months of age; in some,
with 2 doses of measles and rubella-containing vaccines; maternal immunity may persist beyond 9 months. Immunity
(2) establish effective surveillance to monitor disease and after vaccination is quite solid and long-lasting.
evaluate progress; (3) develop and maintain outbreak (d) NUTRITION : Measles tends to be very severe in the
preparedness for rapid response and appropriate case malnourished child, carrying a mortality upto 400 times
management; (4) communicate and engage to build public higher than in well-nourished children having measles (12).
confidence in, and demand for vaccination; and (5) conduct This may possibly be related to poor cell-mediated immunity
research and development to support operations and response, secondary to malnutrition (13). Additionally,
improve vaccination and diagnostic tools (5). severely malnourished children have been shown to excrete
measles virus for longer periods than better nourished
In India, measles is a major cause of morbidity and a children indicating prolonged risk to themselves, and of
significant contributor to childhood mortality. Prior to the intensity of spread to others (14). Even in a healthy child, an
immunization programme, cyclical increase in the incidence attack of severe measles may be followed by weight loss,
of measles were recorded every third year. With the increase precipitating the child into malnutrition.
in immunization coverage levels, the intervals between
cyclical peaks has increased and the intensity of the peak Environmental factors
minimized. However, several outbreaks are reported in tribal
and remote areas. The retrospective data indicate a Given a chance, the virus can spread in any season (9).
declining trend of measles in the country. During 1987 In tropical zones, most cases of measles occur during the dry
about 2.47 lakh cases were reported, whereas, after season. In temperate climates, measles is a winter disease,
implementation of UIP, the number of cases has come down probably because people crowd together indoors. Epidemics
to 15,768 with 56 deaths during the year 2013 (6). of measles are common in India during winter and early
However, the estimates are much higher as large number of spring (January to April). Population density and movement
cases go unreported. According to WHO estimates, measles do affect epidemicity (15). In general, the less favourable the
is responsible for about 2 per cent of under-5 mortality in prevailing socio-economic conditions, the lower the average
India (7). age at which children are attacked.
Transmission
Epidemiological determinants
Transmission occurs directly from person to person
Agent factors mainly by droplet infection and droplet nuclei, from 4 days
(a) AGENT Measles is caused by an RNA before onset of rash until 4 days thereafter. The portal of
paramyxovirus. So far as is known, there is only one entry is the respiratory tract. Infection through conjunctiva is
serotype. The virus cannot survive outside the human body also considered likely as the virus instilled into the
for any length of time, but retains infectivity when stored at conjunctiva can cause infection. Recipients of measles
sub-zero temperature. The virus has been grown in cell vaccine are not contagious to others (16).
cultures. (b) SOURCE OF INFECTION: The only source of Incubation period
infection is a case of measles. Carriers are not known to
occur. There is some evidence to suggest that subclinical Incubation period is commonly 10 days from exposure to
measles occurs more often than previously thought. onset of fever, and 14 days to appearance of rash. When
(c) INFECTIVE MATERIAL : Secretions of the nose, throat measles infection is artificially induced bypassing the
and respiratory tract of a case of measles during the respiratory tract (as with injection of live measles vaccine),
prodromal period and the early stages of the rash. the incubation period is somewhat shortened, averaging
(d) COMMUNICABILITY : Measles is highly infectious 7 days.
during the prodromal period and at the time of eruption.
Communicability declines rapidly after the appearance of
Clinical features
the rash. The period of communicability is approximately 4 There are three stages in the natural history of measles,
days before and 4 days after the appearance of the rash. viz. the prodromal or pre-eruptive stage, eruptive stage and
Isolation of the patient for a week from the onset of rash post-measles stage.
more than covers the period of communicability (8).
(e) SECONDARY ATTACK RATE : There is only one 1. PRODROMAL STAGE
antigenic type of measles virus. Infection confers life long It begins 10 days after infection, and lasts until day 14. It
immunity. Most so-called secondary attacks represent errors is characterized by fever, coryza with sneezing and nasal
in diagnosis either in initial or second illness (9). discharge, cough, redness of the eyes, lacrimation and often
photophobia. There may be vomiting or diarrhoea. A day or
Host factors two before the appearance of the rash Koplik' s spots like
(a) AGE : Affects virtually everyone in infancy or table salt crystals appear on the buccal mucosa opposite the
childhood between 6 months and 3 years of age in first and second lower molars. They are small, bluish-white
developing countries where environmental conditions are spots on a red base, smaller than the head of a pin (9). Their
generally poor, and older children usually over 5 years in presence is pathognomonic of measles.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
2. ERUPTIVE PHASE measles is about 10-20 per cent. The majority of survivors
This phase is characterized by a typical, dusky-red, have neurologic sequelae (9). Encephalitis is another serious
macular or maculo-papular rash which begins behind the complication. It occurs in about 1 in 1000 cases. The cause
ears and spreads rapidly in a few hours over the face and is unknown. Measles vaccination definitely constitutes a
neck, and extends down the body taking 2 to 3 days to protection against the neurological and other complications
progress to the lower extremities. The rash may remain by preventing natural measles from occurring (9).
discrete, but often it becomes confluent and blotchy. In the Measles during pregnancy is not known to cause
absence of complications, the lesions and fever disappear in congenital abnormalities of the foetus. However, it is
another 3 or 4 days signalling the end of the disease. The associated with spontaneous abortion and premature
rash fades in the same order of appearance leaving a delivery. Measles in the offspring of mothers with measles
brownish discoloration which may persist for 2 months or ranges from mild to severe; therefore, it is recommended
more. that infants born to such mothers be passively immunized
During the prodromal phase (2-4 days) and the first 2-5 with immunoglobulin at birth (17).
days of rash, virus is present in tears, nasal and throat All cases of severe measles, and all cases of measles in
secretions, urine and blood. Just as the maculo-papular rash areas with high case-fatality rates should be treated with
appears, the circulating antibodies become detectable, the vitamin A, as many children develop acute deficiency of
viraemia disappears and the fever falls. The rash develops vitamin A, which may lead to keratomalacia and blindness
as a result of interaction of immune T cells with virus- from corneal scarring. A high dose of vitamin A is given
infected cells in the small blood vessels. In patients with immediately on. diagnosis and repeated the next day. The
defective cell-mediated immunity, no rash develops (9). recommended age-specific daily doses are 50,000 IU for
infants aged <6 months, 100,000 IU for infants aged 6-11
Diagnosis of measles is based on the typical rash and
months, and 200,000 IU for children aged :e: 12 months.
Koplik's spots seen in oral mucosa. The diagnosis would
If the child has clinical signs of vitamin A deficiency (such
normally be incorrect in any febrile exanthem in which red as Bitot's spots) a third dose should be given 4-6 weeks
eyes and cough are absent. In developed countries, where later (18).
measles is uncommon, specific IgM antibodies are being
used for diagnosis. Measles and chickenpox
3. POST -MEASLES STAGE It has . been noted that sometimes measles and
chickenpox may occur together and one most remarkable
The child will have lost weight and will remain weak for a finding in these cases of double infection is that the first
number of days. There may be failure to recover and a infection may diminish the severity of the rash of the second
gradual deterioration into chronic illness due to increased infection (19).
susceptibility to . other bacterial and viral infections,
nutritional and metabolic effects and the tissue destructive Prevention of measles
effects of the virus. There may be growth retardation and
diarrhoea, cancrum oris, pyogenic infections, candidosis, The following guidelines are important in combating
reactivation of pulmonary tuberculosis etc. measles:
a. achieving an immunization rate of over 95 per cent,
Complications and
Measles is too often regarded as an unimportant b. on-going immunization against measles through
infection, but this is not true. The most common successive generations of children.
complications are: measles-associated diarrhoea,
pneumonia and other respiratory complications and otitis 1. Measles vaccination
media. Otitis media occurs in about 5-15 per cent of cases. Measles is best prevented by active immunization.
Penumonia is the most common life-threatening (1) VACCINE : Only live attenuated vaccines are
complication. This occurs in less than 10 per cent of cases in recommended for use; they are both safe and effective, and
developed countries and 20-80 per cent cases in developing may be used interchangeably within immunization
countries. Pulmonary complications account for more than programmes. Person to person transmission of measles
90 per cent of measles-related deaths. Pneumonia develops vaccine strains has never been documented. The vaccine is
in 3-15 per cent of adults with measles, but most cases are presented as a freeze-dried product. Before use, the
due to the virus itself rather than bacteria, and fatalities are lyophilized vaccine is reconstituted with sterile diluent. Each
rare (9). dose of 0.5 ml contains 21000 viral infective units of the
The more serious are the neurological complications vaccine strain; this is also true when it is presented as an
which include febrile convulsions, encephalitis and subacute MCV combination. Measles vaccine may also contain
sclerosing pan-encephalitis (SSPE). Subacute sclerosing sorbitol and hydrolysed gelatin as stabilizers, as well as a
pan-encephalitis is a rare complication which develops small amount of neomycin, but it does not contain
many years after the initial measles infection. It is thiomersal. In general, it is recommended that freeze-dried
characterized by progressive mental deterioration leading to vaccine be stored in a refrigerated condition (18). The
paralysis, involuntary movements, muscle rigidity and coma, diluent must not be frozen but should be cooled before
probably due to persistence of the virus in the brain. The reconstitution. Reconstituted measles vaccine loses about 50
diagnosis of SSPE may be made early by the demonstration per cent of its potency after 1 hour at 20°C; it loses almost
of high levels of measles complement fixing antibodies in all potency after 1 hour at 37°C. The vaccine is also
CSF and serum. The frequency of SSPE is about 1:300,000 sensitive to sunlight, hence it is kept in coloured glass vials.
cases of natural measles. It is usually fatal within 1-3 years After reconstitution, the vaccine must be stored in the dark
after onset. The mortality rate in encephalitis associated with at 2-8°C and used within 4 hours.
MEASLES
(2) AGE : The principal problem of measles immunization People with a history of an anaphylactic reaction to
is timing; immunization before the age of 9 months runs the . neomycin, gelatin or other components of the vaccine
risk of the vaccine being rendered ineffective by the natural should not be vaccinated. Furthermore, measles vaccine is
antibodies acquired through the mother. Immunization later contraindicated in persons who are severely immuno-
than 9 months means that a significant proportion of compromised due to congenital disease, severe HIV
children will contract measles in the interval between infection, advanced leukaemia or lymphoma, serious
wearing off natural protection, and the introduction of the malignant disease, treatment with high-dose steroids,
vaccine. The most effective compromise is immunization as alkylating agents or antimetabolites, or who receive
close to the age of 9 months as possible (20). The WHO immuno-suppressive therapeutic radiation (18).
Expanded Programme on Immunization recommends (9) ADVERSE EFFECTS OF VACCINE : Toxic shock
immunization at 9 months age. This recommendation has syndrome (TSS) occurs . when measles vaccine is
been adopted in India. The age can be lowered to 6 months contaminated or the same vial is used for more than one
if there is measles outbreak in the community. For infants session on the same day or next day. The vaccine should not
immunized between 6 months and 9 months of age, a be used after 4 hours of opening the vial. TSS is totally
second dose should be administered as soon as possible preventable and reflects poor quality of immunization
after the child reaches the age of 9 months provided that at services. The symptoms of TSS are typical. Severe watery
least 4 weeks have elapsed since the last dose (21). diarrhoea, vomiting and high fever are reported within few
In countries where the incidence of measles has declined, hours of measles vaccination. There are usually a cluster of
the age of immunization is being raised to 12 months in cases as all infants vaccinated from contaminated vial will be
order to avoid the blocking effect of persistent affected. This may cause death within 48 hours. Case
transplacentally acquired antibody (20). fatality rates are high (23).
(3) ADMINISTRATION : The reconstituted vaccine is MEASLES AND HIV : Given the severe course of measles
generally injected subcutaneously, but it is also effective in patients with advanced HIV infection, measles
when administered intramuscularly. vaccination should be routinely administered to potentially
(4) IMMUNE RESPONSES: Measles vaccine induces both susceptible, asymptomatic HIV-positive children and adults.
humoral and cellular immune responses comparable to those Vaccination may be considered for those with symptomatic
following natural infection, although antibody titres are HIV infection if they are not severely immunosuppressed
usually lower. Also, lower average concentrations of according to conventional definitions. In areas where there
maternal antibodies are found in infants born to vaccinated is a high incidence of both measles and HIV infection, first
mothers when compared with naturally infected mothers. dose of measles vaccine may be offered as early as age 6
Following vaccination, transient measles-specific months. Two additional doses of measles vaccine should be
imrnunoglobulin (lg) M antibodies appear in the blood and administered to these children according to the national
IgA antibodies appear in mucosa! secretions; IgG antibodies immunization schedule (18).
persist in the blood for years. Vaccination also induces Second dose of measles vaccine may be added to the
measles virus-specific CD4+ and CDS+ T lymphocytes (18). routine immunization schedule in countries that have
(5) REACTIONS : When injected into the body, the achieved ::2:80% coverage of the first dose of the vaccine at
attenuated virus multiplies and induces a mild "measles" the national level for 3 .consecutive years, as determined by
illness (fever and rash) 5 to IO days after immunization, but the most accurate means available (for example, a well
in reduced frequency and severity. This may occur in 15 to conducted population-based survey or WHO/UNICEF
20 per cent of vaccinees. The fever may last for 1-2 days estimates). In general, countries that do not meet this
and the rash for 1-3 days. There is no cause for alarm. The criterion should prioritize improving MCV 1 coverage and
vaccines now given rarely cause severe reaction (9). There is conducting high-quality follow-up SIAs, rather than adding
no spread of the virus from the vaccinees to contacts. the second dose to their routine schedule.
(6) IMMUNITY The vaccine has convincingly COMBINED VACCINE : Measles vaccine can be
demonstrated to provide immunity to even severely combined with other live attenuated vaccines such as
malnourished children. Immunity develops 11 to 12 days mumps, and rubella vaccines (MMR vaccine), measles,
after vaccination (22) and appears to be of long duration, mumps, rubella and varicella (MMRV), and measles and
probably for life. One dose of the vaccine given at 11-12 rubella (MR), and such combinations are also highly
months of age appears to give 99 per cent protection. effective.
Infants vaccinated at the age of 9 months show 2. lmmunoglobulin
seroconversion of about 90 per 'cent (18).
Measles may be prevented by administration of
(7) CONTACTS : Susceptible contacts over the age of immunoglobulin (human) early in the incubation period.
9-12 months may be protected against measles with The dose recommended by WHO is 0.25 ml per kg of body
measles vaccine, provided that this is given within 3 days of weight (see Table 33 on page 108). It should be given within
exposure. This is because, the incubation period of measles 3-4 days of exposure. The person passively immunized
induced by the vaccine is about 7 days, compared with should be given live measles vaccine 8-12 weeks later. The
IO days for the naturally acquired measles. need for immunoglobulin is now much reduced because of
(8) CONTRAINDICATIONS : Mild concurrent infections the availability of an effective live attenuated vaccine.
are not considered a contraindication to vaccination, but it
should be avoided if the patient has a high fever or other Eradication of measles
signs of serious disease. Measles vaccine alone, or in It is believed that measles, like smallpox, is amenable to
combination with other vaccines, should also be avoided by eradication. Measles immunization has in its favour the fact
pregnant women. Being in the early stages of HIV infection that only one dose is needed, and that a measles vaccine
is not a contraindication to measles vaccination (18). has now been developed which is more heat stable. It
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
attempting to reach as many of the risk population as more severe in adults than in children. (b) IMMUNITY: One
possible (16). attack, clinical or subclinical, is assumed to induce lifelong
immunity. There is only one antigenic type of mumps virus,
References and it does not exhibit significant antigenic variation (3).
1. Cooper, A.R. (1988}. Med.Int. 53: 2182. Most infants below the age of 6 months are immune because
2. Fovbes, J.A. (1969). Am.J.Dis.Child., 118 :5. of maternal antibodies.
3. Gershon, A.A. (1979). in Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases.
Mandell. G. et al (eds). John Wiley, New York. Environmental factors
4. Ann. Rev. of P.H. (1988). P 209. Mumps is largely an endemic disease. Cases occur
5. Khare, S. et al (1987), J.Com.Dis. 19 (4) 391-395.
throughout the year, but the peak incidence is in winter and
6. Moghadam, H. (1970). Canad.J.Pub.Health, 61 (5) 379-385.
spring. Epidemics are often associated with overcrowding.
7. Valman, H.B. (1981), Brit.Med.J. 283: 1038.
8. Walter, A.O. et al (1984). JAMA 251: 1988.
9. Jewetz, Melnick and Adelberg's Medical Microbiology, 26th ed., 2013.
Mode of transmission
10. Dudgeon, J.A. (1969). Am.J.Dis.Child, 118: 35. The disease is spread mainly by droplet infection and
11. Falknev, F. (ed) (1980). Prev.in childhood of Health Problems in Adult after direct contact with an infected person.
Life WHO, Geneva.
12. Gershon, AA et al (1980) Am. J.Med.Sci. 279: 95- 97. Incubation period
13. O'shea, S. et al (1982) BMJ 285: 253 255. Varies from 2 to 4 weeks, usually 14-18 days.
14. Serum Institute of India Ltd.
15. WHO (1988} Tech.Rep.Ser.No.771. Clinical features
16. Hinman, A.R. et al (1983) Lancet 1: 39-41.
Mumps is a generalized virus infection. In 30-40 per cent
of cases mumps infection is clinically non-apparent. In
MUMPS clinically apparent cases, it is characterized by pain and
swelling in either one or both the parotid glands but may
An acute infectious disease caused by an RNA virus also involve the sublingual and submandibular glands. Often
classified as genus Rubulavirus of the family the child complains of "ear ache" on the affected side prior
paramyxoviridae which has a predilection for glandular and to the onset of swelling. There may be pain and stiffness on
nervous tissues. Clinically, the disease is recognized by non- opening the mouth before the swelling of the gland is
suppurative enlargement and tenderness of one or both the evident. Mumps may also affect the testes, pancreas, CNS,
parotid glands. Other organs may also be involved. ovaries, prostate, etc. In severe cases, there may be fever,
Constitutional symptoms vary, or may be inapparent. The headache and other constitutional symptoms which may
disease occurs throughout the world. Although morbidity last from 3-5 days. The swelling subsides slowly over
rate tends to be high, mortality rate is negligible. 1-2 weeks.
In most parts of the world, the annual incidence of COMPLICATIONS : Though frequent, are not serious.
mumps in the absence of immunization is in the range of These include orchitis, ovaritis, pancreatitis, meningo-
100-1000 cases/100,000 population with epidemic peak encephalitis, thyroiditis, neuritis, hepatitis and myocarditis.
every 2-5 years. Natural infection with this virus is thought Testicular swelling and tenderness denote orchitis, which is
to confer lifelong protection (1). the most common extrasalivary gland manifestation of
mumps in adults. It is unilateral in about 75 per cent of
Agent factors cases. High fever usually accompanies orchitis, which
develops typically 7-10 days after the onset of parotitis in
(a) AGENT : The causative agent, Myxovirus parotiditis is about 25-40 per cent of post-pubertal men (4). Bilateral
a RNA virus of the myxovirus family. The virus can be grown orchitis is rare and the assumption that mumps orchitis may
readily in chick embryo or tissue culture. There is only one lead to sterility is ill-founded (5). Upper abdominal pain,
serotype. {b) SOURCE OF INFECTION : Both clinical and nausea and vomiting suggest pancreatitis. Mumps is a
subclinical cases. Subclinical cases which account for 30-40 leading cause of pancreatitis in children. It occurs in about
per cent of all cases (2) appear to be responsible for 4 per cent of patients (6). Lower abdominal pain and
maintaining the cycle of infection. The virus can be isolated ovarian enlargement suggest oophoritis which occurs in 5
from the saliva or from swabs taken from the surface of per cent of post pubertal women, usually unilateral (4).
Stenson's duct. Virus has also been found in the blood, While some instances of diabetes have occurred in children
urine, human milk and on occasion in the CSF. (c) PERIOD following mumps infection, a causal relationship has yet to
OF COMMUNICABILITY : Usually 4-6 days before the be demonstrated (5). Rarer complications include nerve
onset of symptoms and a week or more thereafter. The deafness, polyarthritis, hydrocephalus, encephalitis,
period of maximum infectivity is just before and at the onset cerebellar ataxia, facial palsy and transverse myelitis.
of parotitis. Once the swelling of the glands has subsided, Encephalitis is associated with cerebral oedema, serious
the case may be regarded as no longer infectious. neurologic manifestations and sometimes death (4). Upto
{d) SECONDARY ATTACK RATE : Estimated to be about 15% of mumps patients may develop meningitis, and a
86 per cent. much smaller proportion (0.02-0.03%) may develop
encephalitis. Mumps is one of the main infectious causes of
Host factors sensorineural deafness, which affects approximately 5 per
(a) AGE AND SEX : Mumps is the most frequent cause of 100,000 mumps cases (6).
parotitis in children in the age group 5-9 years. The average Mumps infection in the first trimester of pregnancy is
age of incidence of mumps is higher than with measles, associated with a 25% incidence of spontaneous abortion,
chickenpox or whooping cough. However, no age is exempt although congenital malformations following mumps
if there is no previous immunity. The disease tends to be infection in pregnancy have not been reported (6).
MUMPS
of a virus more easily transmitted between humans sexes. In general, the attack rate is lower among adults.
remains (5). More recently, influenza A (H 1N1 ) virus of swine Children constitute an important link in the transmission
origin emerged in Mexico during the spring of 2009 and was chain. The highest mortality rate during an epidemic occurs
given name - pandemic influenza A (H 1N1 ) 2009 virus. It among certain high-risk groups in the population such as old
spreads with travellers worldwide, resulting in the first people (generally over 65 years of age), children under
influenza pandemic since I968. 18 months, and persons with diabetes or chronic heart
disease, kidney and respiratory ailments (7). {b) HUMAN
Epidemiological determinants MOBILITY : This is an important factor in the spread of
infection. (c) IMMUNITY : Immunity to influenza is subtype-
Agent factors specific. Antibodies against HA and NA are important in
(a) AGENT : Influenza viruses are classified within the immunity to influenza. Resistance to initiation of infection is
family Orthomyxoviridae. There are three viral subtypes, related to antibody against HA,. which neutralizes the virus,
namely influenza type A, type B and type C. These three whereas decreased severity of disease and decreased ability
viruses are antigenically distinct. There is no cross immunity to transmit virus to contacts are related to antibody directed
between them. Of importance are the influenza A and B against the NA. Antibodies against ribonucleoprotein are
viruses which are responsible for epidemics of disease type-specific and are useful in typing viral isolates as in
throughout the world (6). Influenza A virus has 2 distinct influenza A and B. Protection correlates with both serum
surface antigens the haemagglutinin (H) and the antibodies and secretory IgA antibodies in nasal secretions.
neuraminidase (N) antigens. The H antigen initiates infection The local secretory antibody is probably important in
following attachment of the virus to susceptible cells. The N preventing infection. Serum antibodies persist for many
antigen is responsible for the release of the virus from the months, whereas secretory antibodies are shorter-lived
infected cell. The currently identified subtypes are I6 HA (usually only few months). Antibody also modifies the course
and 9 NA. Humans are generally infected by viruses of the of illness. A person with low titres of antibody may be infected
subtype HI, H2 or H3, and NI or N2. Type B virus does not but will experience a mild form of illness. Immunity can be
exhibit antigenic shifts and is not divided into subtypes. incomplete as reinfection with the same virus can occur. The
three types of influenza viruses are antigenically unrelated
The influenza A virus is unique among the viruses and therefore induce no cross-protection. When a viral type
because it is frequently subject to antigenic variation, both undergoes antigenic drift, a person with pre-existing antibody
major and minor. When there is a sudden complete or major to the original strain may suffer only mild infection with the
change, it is called a shift, and when the antigenic change is new strain (8). Antibodies appear in about 7· days after the
gradual over a period of time, it is called a drift. Antigenic attack and reach a maximum level in about 2 weeks. After 8
shift appears to result from genetic recombination of human to I2 months, the antibody level drops to pre-infection level.
with animal or avian virus, providing a major antigenic
change. This can cause a major epidemic or pandemic Environmental factors
involving most or all age groups. Antigenic drift involves (a) Season: The seasonal incidence is striking, epidemics
"point mutation" in the gene owing to selection pressure by usually occurring in winter months in the Northern
immunity in the host population. Antigenic changes occur to Hemisphere and in the winter or rainy season in the
a lesser degree in the B group influenza viruses. Influenza C Southern Hemisphere (6). In tropical countries, influenza
appears to be antigenically stable. virus circulates throughout the year with one or two peaks
Since the isolation of the virus A in I 933, major antigenic during rainy season. (b) Overcrowding : Enhances
changes have occurred twice - once in I957 (H 2N2 ) and transmission. The attack rates are high in close population
again in I968 (H 3N2 ). Strains occurring between I946 and groups, e.g., schools, institutions, ships, etc.
I957 have been called (H 1 N1 ) strains. The shift in 1968
involved only the H antigen. Mode of transmission
(b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : It has become Influenza is spread mainly from person to person by
increasingly evident that a major reservoir of influenza virus droplet infection or droplet nuclei created by sneezing,
exists in animals and birds. Many influenza viruses have coughing or talking. The portal of entry of the virus is the
been isolated from a wide variety of animals and birds (e.g., respiratory tract.
swine, horses, dogs, cats, domestic poultry, wild birds, etc). Incubation period
Some of these include the major H and N antigens related to
human strains. It is hypothesized. There is an increasing I8 to 72 hours.
evidence that the animal reservoirs provide new strains of Pathogenesis and clinical features
influenza virus by recombination between the influenza
viruses of man, animals and birds. The virus enters the respiratory tract and causes
inflammation and necrosis of superficial epithelium of the
(c) SOURCE OF INFECTION : Usually a case or tracheal and bronchial mucosa, followed by secondary
subclinical case. During epidemics, a large number of mild bacterial invasion. There is no viraemia. Both the viruses
and asymptomatic infections occur, which play an important cause much the same symptoms - fever, chills, aches and
role in the spread of infection. The secretions of the pains, coughing and generalized weakness. Fever lasts from
respiratory tract are infective. I-5 days, averaging 3 days in adults. Frequent complications
{d) PERIOD OF INFECTIVITY : Virus is present in the are acute sinusitis, otitis media, purulent bronchitis and
nasopharynx from I to 2 days before and I to 2 days after pneumonia. The most dreaded complication is pneumonia,
onset of symptoms. which should be suspected if fever persists beyond 4 or 5
days or recurs abruptly after convalescence (1).
Host factors Reye syndrome (fatty liver with encephalopathy) is a rare
(a) AGE AND SEX : Influenza affects all ages and both and severe complication of influenza, usually B type,
INFLUENZA
particularly in young children. It consists of . rapidly concerns about activating replication of HIV virus by the
progressive hepatic failure and encephalopathy, and there is immunogen appear to be exaggerated and may be less
about 30 per cent mortality rate. The pathogenesis is severe than the increase in HIV viral load associated with a
unknown, but the syndrome is associated with aspirin use in full influenza infection. Vaccination is less effective when
a variety of viral infections (9). CD4 counts are less than 100/mcL. False-positive assays for
HIV, HTLV-1, and HCV antibodies have been reported in
Laboratory diagnosis the wake of influenza vaccination (10).
Since clinical diagnosis is difficult except during Prevention of exposure to avian influenza strains also
epidemics, laboratory methods are needed to confirm the includes hygienic practices during handling of poultry
diagnosis. These are (a) VIRUS ISOLATION products, including handwashing and prevention of cross-
Nasopharyngeal secretions are the best specimens for contamination, as well as thorough cooking, to more than
obtaining large amounts of virus-infected cells. The virus 70°C, of poultry products (10).
can be detected by the indirect fluorescent antibody
technique. However egg inoculation is required for virus Influenza vaccines
isolation and antigenic analysis. (b) SEROLOGY : Routine (a) KILLED VACCINES
serodiagnostic tests in use are based on haemagglutination
inhibition (HI) and ELISA. Paired acute and convalescent Most influenza vaccination programmes make use of
sera are necessary, because normal individuals usually have inactivated vaccines. The recommended vaccine strains for
influenza antibodies. A fourfold or greater increase in titer vaccine production are grown in the allantoic cavity of
must occur to indicate influenza infection. Human sera often developing chick embryos, harvested, purified, killed by
contains non-specific mucoprotein inhibitors that must be formalin or beta-propiolactone, and standardized according
destroyed before testing by HI. The HI test reveals the strain to the haemagglutinin content.
of virus responsible for infection only if the correct antigen is The vaccine is conventionally formulated in aqueous or
available for use. The ELISA test is more sensitive than other saline suspension. One dose of the vaccine contains
assays. approximately 15 micrograms of HA. The vaccine is
administered by the subcutaneous or intramuscular route.
Prevention of influenza A single inoculation (0.5 ml for adults and children over
All attempts to control influenza epidemics have so far 3 years and 0.25 ml for children from 6 months to 36
met with little success and the prospects of achieving control months of age) is usually given. However, in persons below
remain poor. Good ventilation of public buildings, the 9 years of age with no previous immunological experience
avoidance of crowded places during epidemics, encouraging (unprimed individuals), 2 doses of the vaccine, separated by
sufferers to cover their faces with a handkerchief when an interval of 3 to 4 weeks are considered necessary to
coughing and sneezing, and to stay at home at the first sign induce satisfactory antibody levels. After vaccination, there
of influenza are all sensible precautions. The vaccine is not is an increase in serum antibodies in about one week, which
recommended to control spread in the general population. reaches a maximum in about 2 weeks. The protective value
of the vaccine varies between 70-90 per cent (6) and
Immunization, in theory, offers the best prospect of immunity lasts for only 6-12 months. Revaccination on an
controlling influenza at the present times. In view of the annual basis is recommended.
changing antigenic characteristics of the virus (antigenic drift
and antigenic shift) new vaccines are constantly required, The killed vaccine can produce fever, local inflammation
and they should contain the H and N components of the at the site of injection, and very rarely Guillain-Barre
prevalent strain or strains to keep the vaccines upto date. syndrome (an ascending paralysis). Since the vaccine strains
The WHO makes recommendations every year as to what are grown in eggs, persons allergic to eggs may develop
strains should be included in the vaccine. A number of field symptoms and signs of hypersensitivity.
trials have shown that vaccines so constituted are highly (b) LIVE-ATTENUATED VACCINES
effective (70-90%). To be effective the vaccine must be
administered at least two weeks before the onset of an A trivalent, live-attenuated influenza vaccine
epidemic, or preferably 2 to 3 months before influenza is administered as a single dose intranasal spray is as effective
expected. Since epidemics of influenza are unpredictable, as inactivated vaccine in preventing the disease. It is
the hope of preventing influenza epidemics by prophylactic approved for use in otherwise healthy individuals between
mass vaccination is remote. age of 2 years and 49 years. Because the risk of transmission
of the live-attenuated vaccine virus to immunocompromised
Since influenza vaccines will not control epidemics, they
individuals is unknown, it should not be used in household
are recommended only in certain selected population groups
members of immunosuppressed individuals, health care
- e.g., in industry to reduce absenteeisms, and in public
workers, or others with close contact with
servants to prevent disruption of critical public services, such
immunosuppressed persons (9).
as the police, fire protection, transport and medical care.
Also, certain groups e.g. the elderly and individuals in any CONTRAINDICATIONS (11) : As a general rule,
age group who have a known underlying chronic or inactivated vaccines should not be administered to :
debilitating disease (e.g. disease of cardiovascular system, (1) People who have a severe allergy to chicken eggs;
metabolic disease like diabetes, cystic fibrosis, chronic (2) People with a history of anaphylactic reactions or other
respiratory disease and chronic renal insufficiency, life-threatening allergic reactions to any of the
congenital or acquired immunodeficiency) and their close constituents or trace residue of the vaccine;
contacts (persons living with them or their care givers), are (3) People with history of a severe reaction to influenza
selectively immunized because of the high-risk of severe vaccination;
complications, including death (6). (4) People who developed Guillain-Barre syndrome (GBS)
HIV infected persons can be safely vaccinated, and within 6 weeks of getting an influenza vaccine;
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
(5) Children less than 6 months of age (inactivated influenza Based on knowledge about past pandemics, the (H 1N1 )
vaccine is not approved for this age group); and 2009 virus is expected to continue to circulate as a seasonal
(6) People who have a moderate-to-severe illness with a virus for some years to come. While level of concern is now
fever (they should wait till they recover to get greatly diminished, vigilance on the part of national health
vaccinated). authorities remains important, when the behaviour of H 1N 1
virus as a seasonal virus cannot be reliably predicted (16).
Antiviral drugs On 26th September 2011 WHO has adapted a new nomen-
Because of limitations in the efficacy of influenza clature as Influenza A {H 1N 1) pdm09 (17).
vaccines antiviral drugs have been tried for the prophylaxis Incubation period
and therapy of seasonal influenza infections. Two
neuraminidase inhibitors (zanamivir and oseltamivir) are The incubation period appears to be approximately 2-3
available for prophylaxis and therapy of influenza A and B. days, but could range upto 7 days.
The dose of oseltamivir is 75 mg per day for prophylaxis and
75 mg twice daily for 5 days for therapy. Zanamivir is Case definitions (18)
administered by inhaler {10 mg dose) and is given twice Suspected case: A suspected case of influenza A {H 1N 1 )
daily for therapy and once daily for prophylaxis. The 2009 is defined as a person with acute febrile respiratory
duration of prophylaxis depends on the clinical setting. The illness (fever ?:: 38°C) with onset (a) within 7 days of close
current recommendations are that influenza A be treated contact with a person who is a confirmed case of influenza
with zanamivir or a combination of oseltamivir and A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 virus infection, or; (b) within 7 days of travel
rimantadine. Influenza B can be treated with either to areas where there are one or more confirmed cases, or
oseltamivir or zanamivir (9). For chemoprophylaxis against (c) resides in a community where there are one or more
influenza A, zanamivir should be used. If this is confirmed influenza A (H 1N 1) 2009 cases.
contraindicated, patients should be given rimantadine. In an Probable case : A probable case of influenza A {H 1N 1 )
outbreak associated with influenza B, either oseltamivir or 2009 virus infection· is defined as a person with an acute
zanamivir can be used for prophylaxis (9). febrile respiratory illness who : (1) is positive for influenza A,
but unsubtypable for H 1 and H3 by influenza RT -PCR or
AVIAN INFLUENZA (12) reagents used to detect seasonal influenza virus infection, or;
(2) is positive for influenza A by an influenza rapid test or an
Avian influenza refers to a large group of different
influenza immunofluoresence assay (IFA) and meets criteria
influenza viruses that primarily affect birds. On rare
for a suspected case, or; (3) individual with a clinically
occasions, these bird viruses can infect other species, compatible illness who died of an unexplained acute.
including pigs and humans. The vast majority of avian respiratory illness who is considered to be epidemiollogically
influenza viruses do not infect humans. However, avian linked to a probable or confirmed case.
H 5N 1 is a strain with pandemic potential, since it might
ultimately adapt into a strain that is contagious among Confirmed case : A confirmed case of pandemic influenza
humans. Once this adaptation occurs, it will no longer be a A {H 1N 1 ) 2009 virus infection is defined as a person with an
bird virus - it will be a human influenza virus. Influenza acute febrile respiratory illness with laboratory confirmed
pandemics are caused by new influenza viruses that have influenza A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 virus infection at WHO approved
adapted to humans. Health experts have been monitoring a laboratory by one or more of the following tests :
new and extremely severe influenza virus the H5N 1 strain a. Real Time PCR
for almost 15 years. Fortunately, the virus does not jump b. Viral culture
easily from birds to humans or spread readily and c. Four-fold rise in influenza A (H 1N 1 ) virus specific
sustainably among humans. Once a fully contagious virus neutralizing antibodies.
emerges, its global spread is considered inevitable.
Clinical features (19)
PANDEMIC INFLUENZA A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 A wide clinical spectrum of .disease ranging from non-
febrile mild upper respiratory illness, febrile influenza like
The pandemic influenza A {H1N 1 ) 2009 virus differs in its illness (ILI), to severe or even fatal complications including
pathogenicity from seasonal influenza in two key aspects. rapidly progressive pneumonia has been described. The
First, as the majority of human population has little or no case fatality rate is smilar to seasonal influenza i.e. about 0.5
pre-existing immunity to the virus, the impact of the per cent; however this could change (9). The clinical features
infection has been in a wider age range, in particular among are as described below :
children and young adults. Secondly, the virus can infect the (a) Uncomplicated influenza
lower respiratory tract and can cause rapidly progressive
pneumonia, especially in children and young to middle-aged ( 1) !LI symptoms include : fever, cough, sore throat,
adults. rhinorrhoea, headache, muscle pain, and malaise,
but no shortness of breath and no dyspnoea. Patients
Following its emergence in March 2009, pandemic may present with some or all of these symptoms.
A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 virus spread rapidly throughout the world,
(2) Gastrointestinal illness may also be present, such as
leading to the declaration of an inlfuenza pandemic by
diarrhoea and/or vomiting, especially in children,
WHO on 11th June 2009 (14). The world is now in but without evidence of dehydration.
post-pandemic period. Between September 2012 and
January 2013, all seasonal A (H 1N1 ) viruses detected were (b) Complicated or severe influenza
A {H1 N1 ) Pdm 09. In India it causes local outbreaks. During (1) Presenting clinical (e.g. shortness of breath/
2013, India reported 5,253 cases and 699 deaths, a case dyspnoea, tachypnea, hypoxia) and/or radiological
fatality rate of 13.3 per cent (15). signs of lower respiratory tract disease (e.g.
INFLUENZA
pneumonia), central nervous system (CNS) reported in individuals who are obese particularly in those
involvement (e.g. encephalopathy, encephalitis), who are morbidly obese.
severe dehydration, or presenting secondary
complications, such as renal failure, multiorgan Laboratory diagnosis (19)
failure, and septic shock. Other complications can Laboratory diagnosis of pandemic influenza A (H 1N1 )
include rhabdomyolysis and myocarditis. 2009 virus, especially at the beginning of a new community
(2) Exacerbation of underlying chronic disease, outbreak or for unusual cases, has important implications for
including asthma, COPD, chronic hepatic or renal case managment, such as infection control procedures,
failure, diabetes, or other cardiovascular conditions. consideration of antiviral treatment options and avoiding
(3) Any other condition or clinical presentation requiring the inappropriate use of antibiotics. Currently, the diagnostic
hospital admission for clinical management. tests can be done by specialized laboratories in many
countries. Reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction
(4) Any of the signs of progressive disease.
{RT-PCR) will provide the most timely and sensitive
Signs and symptoms of progressive disease detection of the infection.
Patients who present initially with uncomplicated Clinical specimens to be collected for laboratory
diagnosis are respiratory samples. Samples from the upper
influenza may progress to more severe disease. Progression
can be rapid (i.e. within 24 hours). The following are some respiratory tract, including a combination of nasal or
of the indicators of progression, which would necessitate an nasopharyngeal samples, and a throat swab are advised.
Recent evidence supports viral replication and recovery of
urgent review of patient management.
pandemic A {H 1NJ 2009 virus from lower respiratory tract
{a) Symptoms and signs suggesting oxygen impairment or samples (tracheal and bronchial aspirates) in patients
cardiopulmonary insufficiency : presenting lower respiratory tract symptoms and in these
- Shortness of breath {with activity or at rest), difficulty patients, such samples have higher diagnostic yields than
in breathing, turning blue, bloody or coloured sputum, samples from the upper respiratory tract.
chest pain, and low blood pressure; When influenza viruses are known to be circulating in a
In children, fast or laboured breathing; and community, patients presenting with features of
Hypoxia, as indicated by pulse oximetry. uncomplicated influenza can be diagnosed on clinical and
{b) Symptoms and signs suggesting CNS complications: epidemiological grounds. All patients should be instructed to
return for follow-up, should. they develop any signs or
Altered mental status, unconsciousness, drowsiness, or symptoms of progressive disease or fail to improve within
difficult to awaken and recurring or persistent 72 hours of the onset of symptoms.
convulsions {seizures), confusion, severe weakness, or
Diagnostic testing, when available, should be prioritized
paralysis.
for patients in whom confirmation of influenza virus
{c) Evidence of sustained virus replication or invasive infection may affect clinical management, including patients
secondary bacterial infection based on laboratory testing considered at-risk and/or those with complicated, severe, or
or clinical signs {e.g. persistent high fever and other progressive respiratory illness. In addition, results of
symptoms beyond 3 days). diagnostic testing may also be valuable in guiding infection
(d) Severe dehydration, manifested as decreased activity, control practices and management of a patient's close
dizziness, decreased urine output, and lethargy. contacts. Under no circumstances should influenza
diagnostic testing delay initiation of infection control
Risk factors for severe disease (19) practices or antiviral treatment, if pandemic influenza
A (H 1N1 ) 2009 disease is suspected clinically and
Risk factors for severe disease from pandemic influenza epidemiologically (19).
A (H 1N1) 2009 virus infection reported to date are considered
similar to those risk factors identified for complications from Several rapid influenza diagnostic tests including (so-
seasonal influenza. These include the following groups : called point-of-care diagnostic tests) are commercially
available. However, studies indicate that rapid diagnostic
(1) Infants and young children, in particular <2 years tests miss many infections with pandemic (H 1N1 ) 2009 virus
(2) Pregnant women and, therefore, negative results cannot rule out disease, and
(3) Persons of any age with chronic pulmonary disease (e.g. should not be used as grounds to withhold therapy or lift
asthma, COPD) infection control measures.
(4) Persons of any age with chronic cardiac disease (e.g.
congestive cardiac failure) Infection control
(5) Persons with metabolic disorders (e.g. diabetes) Evidence to date suggests that pandemic (H 1N ) 2009
(6) Persons with chronic renal disease, chronic hepatic virus is transmitted similarly as seasonal influenza Aand B
disease, certain neurological conditions (including viruses. Appropriate infection control measures (standard
neuromuscular, neurocognitive, and seizure disorders), plus droplet precautions) should be adhered to at all times,
haemoglobinopathies, or immunosuppression, whether which includes strict adherence to hand hygiene with soap
due to primary immunosuppressive conditions, such as and water or an alcohol based hand sanitizer, and to cover
HIV infection, or secondary conditions, such as mouth and nose with tissue or handkerchief when coughing
immunosuppressive medication or malignancy or sneezing. If ill persons must go into the community e.g. to
seek medical care, they should wear a face mask to reduce
(7) Children receiving chronic aspirin therapy
the risk of spreading the virus in the community.
(8) Persons aged 65 years and older.
Whenever performing high-risk aerosol-generating
A higher risk of severe complications from pandemic procedures (for example, bronchoscopy or any procedure
influenza A (H 1N1) 2009 virus infection has also been involving aspiration of the respiratory tract) use a particulate
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
respirator (N95, FFP2 or equivalent), eye protection, gown, CONTRAINDICATIONS (11) : As a general rule,
and gloves, and carry out the procedure in an adequately inactivated vaccines should not be administered to certain
ventilated room, either naturally or mechanically. category of people. For details please refer to page 155.
The duration of isolation precautions for hospitalized Immunity
patients with influenza symptoms should be continued for
7 days after onset of illness or 24 hours after the resolution Pandemic influenza vaccine does not give 100 per cent
of fever and respiratory symptoms, whichever is longer, protection against the disease but they greatly reduce the
while a patient is in a health-care facility. For prolonged risk of disease. Influenza vaccine only becomes effective
illness with complications (i.e. pneumonia), control about 14 days after vaccination. Those infected shortly
measures should be used during the duration of acute illness before (1-3 days) or shortly after immunization can still get
(i.e. until the patient has improved clinically). Special the disease (11). Vaccinated individuals can also get
attention is needed in caring for immunosuppressed patients influenza caused by a different strain of influenza virus, for
who may shed virus for a longer time period and are also at which the vaccine does not provide protection (11).
increased risk for development of antiviral resistant virus.
(b) LIVE ATTENUATED VACCINE
Pandemic influenza A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 vaccine Live attenuated vaccines are given via a nasal spray, and
In response to the pandemic, over 30 pandemic (H 1N 1 ) can commonly cause runny nose, nasal congestion, cough
2009 vaccines were licensed worldwide. These include live and can less frequently cause sore throat, low grade fever,
attenuated vaccines; inactivated unadjuvanted vaccines irritability and muscle-aches and headache. Wheezing and
(split, subunit virion or whole virion); and inactivated vomiting episodes have been described in children receiving
adjuvanted vaccines (split or subunit virion) (20). Pandemic live influenza vaccines (11).
A (H 1N 1 ) viruses were antigenically and genetically similar to Since the spread of the pandemic virus is unstoppable
A/California/7/2009 like viruses. Vaccines containing and there is limitation of vaccine availability, WHO
NCalifornia/7/2009 antigen stimulated anti-HA antibodies recommends that all the countries should immunize their
of similar titres against the vaccine virus and recent health care workers as a first priority to protect the essential
pandemic A (H 1N1 ) viruses (14). health infrastructure, and to prevent initiation of nosocomial
spread of disease to vulnerable patients. Furthermore, WHO
(a) INACTIVATED VACCINE suggests the following groups for vaccination according to
It is a monovalent vaccine containing antigen equivalent their order of priority : (a) pregnant women; (b) individuals
to NCalifornia/7/2009 (H 1N 1 ) V - like strain, 15 micrograms aged more than 6 months with one of the several chronic
of haemagglutinin per 0.5 ml dose (21). Inactivated vaccines medical conditions; (c) healthy young adults between age
contain thiomersal if they are supplied in multidose vials 15-49 years, (d) healthy children; (e) healthy adults
(10 dose of 0.5 ml). It is a commonly used vaccine between age 49-65 years; and (f) healthy adults aged more
preservative to prevent vaccine contamination by bacteria than 65 years (22).
during use.
Treatment
Though the vaccine can be used within 7 days after
opening the vial, it is preferred that the open vial is used Key principles for clinical management include basic
completely in a given session day. This will minimize the risk symptomatic care, early use of antiviral drugs if available,
of adverse effects of immunization due to programmatic for high risk populations, antimicrobials for co-infections,
errors and also reduce vaccine wastage. To facilitate tracking and proactive observation for progression of illness.
and timely disposal of multidose vials, it is suggested that the Hospital care requires early supplemental oxygen therapy
date of opening be clearly written on the label (21). to correct hypoxaemia, with saturation monitoring at triage
The vaccine should be stored between 2°C-8°C. It and during hospitalization, if possible, careful fluid
should not be frozen. replacement, antimicrobials, and other supportive care. It is
important to provide appropriate antimicrobials for other
The vaccine is administered as single dose intramuscular infections which also present with severe respiratory distress.
injection in the upper arm. In infants aged more than A number of severely ill patients with pandemic (H 1N ) 2009
.6 months and young children thigh is the preferred site for disease develop respiratory distress requiring mechanical
vaccination. Inactivated influenza vaccine can be given at ventilation and intensive care support.
the same time as other injectable, non-influenza vaccines,
but the vaccine should be administered at different injection Antiviral therapy (19)
site. Seasonal influenza and pandemic influenza vaccines Pandemic influenza A (H 1N 1 ) 2009 virus is currently
can be administered together, and there is a public health susceptible to the neuraminidase inhibitors (NAis)
value in doing so. Clinical studies on this area of vaccination oseltamivir and zanamivir, but resistant to the M2 inhibitors
are continuing (11). amantadine or rimantadine.
SIDE-EFFECTS : Inactivated vaccines, administered by The following is a summary of treatment
injection, commonly cause local reactions such as soreness, recommendations.
swelling and redness at the injection site, and less often can
cause fever, muscle or joint-aches or headache. These (1) Patients who have severe or progressive clinical illness
symptoms are generally mild and do not need medical should be treated with oseltamivir. Treatment should be
attention, and last for 1-2 days. Fever, aches and headaches initiated as soon as possible.
can occur more frequently in children compared to elderly (a) This recommendation applies to all patient groups,
people. Rarely, these inlfuenza vaccines can cause allergic including pregnant women, and young children
reactions such as hives, rapid swelling of deeper skin layers <2 years, including neonates.
and tissues, asthma or a severe multisystem allergic reaction (b) In patients with severe or progressive illness not
due to hypersensitivity to certain components. responding to normal treatment regimens, higher
doses of oseltamivir and longer duration of Zanamivir
treatment may be appropriate. In adults, a dose of Zanamivir is indicated for treatment of influenza in adults
150 mg twice daily is being used in some situations. and children ( > 5 years). The recommended dose for
(c) Where oseltamivir is not available or not possible to treatment of adults and children from the age of 5 years is
use, or if the virus is resistant to oseltamivir, patients two inhalations (2 x 5 mg) twice daily for 5 days.
who have severe or progressive clinical illness should
be treated with zanamivir. Chemoprophylaxis (18)
(2) Patients at higher risk of developing severe or Oseltamivir is the drug of choice for chemoprophylaxis to
complicated illness, but presenting with uncomplicated health care personnels and close contacts of suspected,
illness due to influenza virus infection, should be treated probable or confirmed case of pandemic influenza A (H 1N1 )
with oseltamivir or zanamvir. Treatment should be 2009. It should be given till 10 days after last exposure. The
initiated as soon as possible following onset of illness. dose by body weight is a follows :
(3) Patients not considered to be at higher risk of developing Weight less than 15 kg 30 mg OD
severe or complicated illness and who have
uncomplicated illness due to confirmed or strongly 15-23 kg 45 mg OD
suspected influenza virus infection need not be treated 24-40 kg 60 mg OD
with antivirals. > 40 kg 75 mg OD
If used, antiviral treatment should ideally be started early For infants
following the onset of symptoms, but it may also be used at < 3 months not recommended unless
any stage of active disease when ongoing viral replication is situation is critical
anticipated or documented. Recent experience strongly 3-5 months 20mgOD
indicates that earlier treatment is associated with better 6-11 months 25mgOD
outcomes. Therefore, antiviral treatment should be initiated
immediately and without waiting for laboratory confirmation References
of diagnosis. 1. WHO (2012), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 47, 23 Nov. 2012.
In patients who have persistent severe illness despite 2. Maxine A. Papadakis, Stephen J. McPhee, Current Medical Diagnosis
oseltamivir treatment, there are few licensed alternative and Treatment, 53rd Ed. 2014, Lange Publication.
antiviral treatments. In these situations, clinicians have 3. WHO 2014, Fact Sheet, March 14, 2014.
considered intravenous administration of alternative 4. Douglas, R.G. and R.E Betts (1979). in Principles and Practice of
Infectious Diseases, Mandell, G.L. et al (eds), John Wiley, New York.
antiviral drugs such as zanamivir, peramivir, and ribavirin. 5. WHO (1998) World Health Report 1998, life in the 21st century, A
The use of such treatments. should be done only in the vision for all.
context of prospective clinical and virological data collection 6. WHO (1980). Techn.Rep.Ser., No.642.
and with regard to the following cautions: 1. WHO (1985) Bull. WHO 63 (1) 51.
- ribavirin should not be administered as monotherapy; 8. Jawetz, et al (2001) Medical Microbiology, 22nd ed., A Lange Med.
Publication.
- ribavirin should not be administered to pregnant 9. Stephen J. Mcphee et al (2010), Current Medical Diagnosis and
women; and Treatment, 49th Ed., A Lange & Med. Publication.
- zanamivir formulated as a powder for inhalation 10. Lawrence, et al (2006). Current Medical Diagnosis and Treatment,
should not be delivered via nebulization due to the 45th Ed., A Lange Med. Publication.
presence of lactose, which may compromise ventilator 11. WHO (2010), Safety of pandemic (H 1N 1) 2009 uaccines, 30th Oct,
2009.
function.
12. WHO (2005). Weekly Epidemiological Record, No.49/50, Oct 14,
2005.
Standard antiviral treatment regimens (19) 13. WHO (2012), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 13, 30th March,
Oseltamivir 2012.
14. WHO (2009), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 41, 9th Oct, 2009.
Oseltamivir is indicated for treatment of influenza. For 15. Govt. oflndia (2014), National Health Profile 2013, Central Bureau of
adults the recommended oral dose is 75 mg oseltamivir Health Intelligence, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
twice daily for 5 days. 16. WHO (2010), WHO Recommendations for the post-pandemic,
Pandemic (H1N1 ) 2009 briefing note 23.
For infants less than 1 year of age recommended oral
17. WHO (2011), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 43, 21st Oct, 2011.
doses are as follows: 18. Govt. of India (2010), Guidelines for Swineflu (Influenza A H1N 1),
>3 months to 12 months 3 mg/kg, twice daily for 5 days Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
19. WHO (2009), Clinical Management of human infection with
> 1 month to 3 months 2.5 mg/kg, twice daily for 5 days pandemic, (H1N1) 2009: revised guidance, November, 2009.
20. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 30, 23rd July,
0 to 1 month* 2 mg/kg, twice daily for 5 days 2010.
* There are no data available regarding the adminstration 21. Govt. of India (2010), Guidance on pandemic uaccination, DGHS,
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Emergency Medical Relief, New
of oseltamivir to infants less than one month of age. Delhi.
For older children the recommended oral doses according 22. WHO (2009), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 30, 24th July,
2009. .
to body weight are as follows:
15 kg or less 30 mg twice a day for 5 days DIPHTHERIA
15-23 kg 45 mg twice a day for 5 days
24-40 kg 60 mg twice a day for 5 days Diphtheria is an acute infectious disease caused by
toxigenic strains of Corynebacterium diphtheriae. Three
>40kg 75 mg twice a day for 5 days major clinical types have been described : anterior nasal,
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
faucial and laryngeal; however, the skin, conjunctiva, vulva when exposed to a particular bacteriophage - the beta
and other parts of the body may be affected. The bacilli phage carrying the gene for toxin production (7). The
multiply locally, usually in the throat, and elaborate a toxin can affect the heart leading to myocarditis or the
powerful exotoxin which is responsible for : nerves leading to paralysis. Diphtheria bacilli are sensitive to
penicillin and are readily killed by heat and chemical agents.
(a) the formation of a greyish or yellowish membrane They may survive for short periods in dust and fomites.
("false membrane") commonly over the tonsils, (b) SOURCE OF INFECTION: The source of infection may
pharynx or larynx (or at the site of implantation), with be a case or carrier: (i) CASE : Cases range from subclinical
well-defined edges and the membrane cannot be to frank clinical cases. Mild or silent infections may exhibit
wiped away; no more than a mere running nose or sore throat; these
(b) marked congestion, oedema or local tissue cases play a more important role than frank cases in
destruction; spreading the infection. (ii) CARRIER : Carriers are common
(c) enlargement of the regional lymph nodes; and sources of infection, their ratio is estimated to be 95 carriers
(d) signs and symptoms of toxaemia. for 5 clinical cases (1). Carriers may be temporary or
chronic; nasal or throat carriers. The nasal carriers are
Fatality rate on the average is about 10 per cent which particularly dangerous as source of infection because of
has changed little in the past decades in untreated cases, frequent shedding of the organism into the environment,
and in .children under 5 years of age, one out of 5 children than do throat carriers. The temporary carrier state may last
who get diphtheria dies (1). for about a month, but the chronic carrier state may persist
Problem statement for a year or so, unless the patient is treated. The incidence
of carriers in a community may vary from 0.1 to 5 per cent
WORLD : Diphtheria is a rare disease in most developed (8). Immunization does not prevent the carrier state.
countries owing to routine children vaccination. In countries (c) INFECTIVE MATERIAL : Nasopharyngeal secretions,
where satisfactory vaccination schemes have been instituted discharges from skin· lesions, contaminated fomites and
the disease has so declined that it is no longer regarded as a possibly infected dust. (d) PERIOD OF INFECTIVITY :
public health problem. However the disease is seen Unless treated, the period of infectivity may vary from 14 to
occasionally among non-immunized children in developed 28 days from the onset of the disease, but carriers may
countries. remain infective for much longer periods.
Improved socio-economic conditions are changing the A case or carrier may be considered non-communicable,
epidemiology of diphtheria. Changes in lifestyle allow far when at least 2 cultures properly obtained from nose and
less opportunity to maintain natural immunity, such as throat, 24 hours apart, are negative for diphtheria bacilli.
through frequent skin infection with C.diphtheriae (2).
These· epidemics are largely due to decreasing immunization Host factors
coverage among infants and children, waning immunity to (a) AGE : Diphtheria particularly affects children aged
diphtheria in adults, movement of large groups of 1 to 5. In countries where widespread immunization is
population in the last few years, and an irregular supply of practised, a shift in age incidence has been observed from
vaccine (3). These outbreaks highlight the need for booster preschool to school age. (b} SEX : Both sexes are affected.
vaccinations. Recent diphtheria outbreaks in a number of (c) IMMUNITY : Infants born of immune mothers are
countries have demonstrated a shift in the age distribution relatively immune during the first few weeks or months of
of cases to older children and adults (4). In developing life. Before artificial immunization, large proportion of
countries, the disease continues to be endemic due to lack of population in developing countries were acquiring active
adequate widespread immunization. The true numbers of immunity through inapparent infection which resulted in
diphtheria cases and deaths are unknown because of widespread production of antitoxin in the population. Thus
incomplete reporting from most countries where the disease most members of the population except children were
occurs. During the year 2012, about 4,490 diphtheria cases immune. By age 6-8 years, approximately 75 per cent of
were reported globally (5). children in developing countries where skin infection with
lNDIA : Diphtheria is an endemic disease. The available C. diphtheriae are common have protective serum antitoxin
retrospective data indicate a declining trend of diphtheria in levels (12).
the country. It is due to increasing coverage of child Since diphtheria is principally the result of action of the
population by immunization. The reported incidence of the toxin formed by the organism rather than invasion by the
disease in the country during 1987 (before wide coverage of organism, resistance to the disease depends largely on the
immunization) was about 12,952, whereas during the year availability of specific neutralizing antitoxin in the
2013, 4,090 cases and 64 deaths were reported showing a bloodstream and tissues. It is generally true that diphtheria
case fatality rate of about 2.61 (6). occurs only in persons who possess no antitoxin (or less than
0.01 Lf unit/ml.). Assessment of immunity to diphtheria
Epidemiological determinants toxin for individual patients can best be made by review of
Agent factors documented diphtheria toxoid immunizations and primary
or booster immunization if needed (12).
(a) AGENT : The causative agent, C.diphtheriae is a
gram-positive, non-motile organism. It has no invasive Environmental factors
power, but produces a powerful exotoxin. Four types of
diphtheria bacilli are differentiated - gravis, mitis, belfanti Cases of diphtheria occur in all seasons, although winter
and intermedius, all pathogenic to man. In general, gravis months favour its spread.
infections tend to be more severe than mitis infections. Not
all the strains of the organism are toxigenic. There is Mode of transmission
evidence that a non-toxigenic strain may become toxigenic The disease is spread mainly by droplet infection. It can
DIPHTHERIA
also be transmitted directly to susceptible persons from Non-respiratory mucosa! surface i.e., the conjunctiva and
infected cutaneous lesions. Transmission by objects (e.g., genitals may also be sites of infection.
cups, thermometers, toys, pencils), contaminated by the Cutaneous diphtheria is common in tropical areas. It
nasopharyngeal secretions of the patient is possible, but for often appears as a secondary infection of a previous skin
only short periods. abrasion or infection. The presenting lesion, often an ulcer,
Portal of entry may be surrounded by erythema and covered with a
membrane. Patients generally seek treatment because of the
(a) RESPIRATORY ROUTE : Commonly the portal of chronicity of the skin lesion.
entry is the respiratory tract. (b) NON-RESPIRATORY
ROUTES : The portal of entry sometimes may be the skin CONTROL OF DIPHTHERIA
where cuts, wounds and ulcers not properly attended to,
may get infected with diphtheria bacilli, and so is the
umbilicus in the newborn. Occasionally, the site of 1. CASES AND CARRIERS
implantation may be the eye, genitalia or middle ear. The (a) Early detection : An active search for cases and
non-respiratory routes of infection are less common in carriers should start immediately amongst family and school
developed countries where spread by droplet infection is contacts (14). Carriers can be detected only by culture
more common. method. Swabs should be taken from both the nose and
throat and examined by culture methods for diphtheria
Incubation period bacilli. Tests should be made for the virulence of the
2 to 6 days, occasionally longer. organism. (b) Isolation : All cases, suspected cases and
carriers should be promptly isolated, preferably in a
Clinical features hospital, for at least 14 days or until proved free of infection.
Respiratory tract forms of diphtheria consist of At least 2 consecutive nose and throat swabs, taken 24
pharyngotonsillar, laryngotracheal, nasal, and combinations hours apart, should be negative before terminating isolation.
thereof. Patients with pharyngotonsillar diphtheria usually (c) Treatment : (i) CASES : When diphtheria is suspected,
have a sore throat, difficulty in swallowing, and low grade diphtheria antitoxin should be given without delay, IM or IV,
fever at presentation. Examination of the throat may show in doses ranging from 20,000 to 100,000 units or more,
only mild erythema, localized exudate, or a pseudo- depending upon the severity of the case, after a preliminary
membrane. The membrane may be localized or a patch of test dose of 0.2 ml subcutaneously to detect sensitization to
the posterior pharynx or tonsil, may cover the entire tonsil, horse serum. For mild early pharyngeal or laryngeal disease
or, less frequently, may spread to cover the soft and hard the dose is 20,000-40,000 units; for moderate
palates and the posterior portion of the pharynx. In the early nasopharyngeal disease, 40,000-60,000 units; for severe,
stage the pseudo-membrane may be whitish and may wipe extensive or late (3 days or more) disease, 80,000-100,000
off easily. The membrane may extend to become thick, units (15). In addition to antitoxin, every case should be
blue-white to grey-black, and adherent. Attempts to remove treated with penicillin or erythromycin for 5 to 6 days to
the membrane result in bleeding. A minimal area of mucosa! clear the throat of C.diptheriae and thereby decrease toxin
erythema surrounds the membrane. Patients with severe production, (ii) CARRIERS : The carriers should be treated
disease may have marked oedema of the submandibular with 10 days course of oral erythromycin, which is the most
area and the anterior portion of the neck, along with effective drug for the treatment of carriers. The immunity
lymphadenopathy, giving a characteristic "bull-necked" status should be upgraded as discussed below.
appearance.
Laryngotracheal diphtheria most often is preceded by 2. CONTACTS
pharyngotonsillar disease, usually is associated with fever, Contacts merit special attention. They should be throat
hoarseness and croupy cough at presentation, and, if the swabbed and their immunity status determined. Different
infection extends into bronchial tree, it is the most severe situations pose different options : (a) where primary
form of disease. Initially it may be clinically indistinguishable immunization or booster dose was received within the
from viral croup or epiglottitis. Prostration and dyspnoea previous 2 years, no further action would be needed (b)
soon follow because of the obstruction caused by the where primary course or booster dose of diphtheria toxoid
membrane. This obstruction may even cause suffocation if was received more than 2 years before, only a booster dose
not promptly relieved by intubation or tracheostomy. of diphtheria toxoid need be given (c) non-immunized close
contact should receive prophylactic penicillin or
The diphtheria bacilli within the membrane continue to erythromycin. They should be given 1000-2000 units of
produce toxin actively. This is absorbed and results in distant diphtheria antitoxin and actively immunized against
toxic damage, particularly parenchymatous degeneration, diphtheria. Contacts should be placed under medical
fatty infiltration and necrosis in heart muscle, liver, kidneys, surveillance and examined daily for evidence of diphtheria
and adrenals, sometimes accompanied by gross for at least a week after exposure (16). The bacteriological
haemorrhage. Irregularities of cardiac rhythm indicate surveillance of close contacts should be continued for
damage to the heart. Later, there may be difficulties with several weeks by repeated swabbing at approximately
vision, speech, swallowing, or movement of the arms or legs. weekly intervals (14).
The toxin also produces nerve damage, resulting often in
paralysis of the soft palate, eye muscles, or extremities (12). 3. COMMUNITY
Patients who survive complications recover completely. The only effective control is by active immunization with
Nasal diphtheria, the mildest form of respiratory diphtheria toxoid of all infants as early in life as possible, as
diphtheria, usually is localized to the septum or turbinates of scheduled, with subsequent booster doses every 10 years
one side of the nose. Occasionally a membrane may extend thereafter (16). The aim should be to immunize before the
into the pharynx. infant loses his maternally derived immunity so that there
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
will be continuous protection from birth without any gap in immunization. It is associated with higher and more
immunity to natural disease (17). The vaccine being a sustained levels of diphtheria and tetanus antitoxin and
toxoid is not directed against organisms. Therefore acceptable level of pertussis protection i.e., vaccine
immunization does not prevent the carrier state; efficiency 70 per cent (22).
consequently, the non-immune individuals are not (c) Interval between doses : The current recommendation
protected by a high level of population immunity (18). This is to allow an interval of 4 weeks between the 3 doses, with a
implies that immunization rate must be maintained at a high booster injection at one and a half year to two years,
level. followed by another booster (DT only) at the age of 5 to 6
years. Studies have shown that two-month intervals do not
DIPHTHERIA IMMUNIZATION offer any advantage over one-month intervals for protection
against diphtheria and tetanus, and may not enhance
Current prophylactics pertussis protection. On the other hand, shorter intervals
These may be grouped as below : confer protection at an earlier age which may be particularly
important in pertussis control (22). ·
a. Combined or mixed vaccines
(d) Mode of administration : All vaccines containing
- DPT (diphtheria-pertussis-tetanus vaccine) mineral carriers or adjuvants should be injected deep
DTPw (diphtheria, tetanus, whole-cell pertussis) intramuscular. This applies to DPT also which may be given
- DTPa (diphtheria, tetanus, acellular pertussis) in the upper and outer quadrant of the gluteal region. One
of the principal recommendations of the 1984 Global
- DT (diphtheria-tetanus toxoid) · Advisory Group is that "especially for children under one
dT (diphtheria-tetanus, adult type) year of age, DPT should be administered in (lateral aspect)
b. Single vaccines the thigh" (23).
FT (formal-toxoid) (e) Reactions : Fever and mild local reactions following
DPT immunization are common. It is estimated that 2 to 6
- APT (alum-precipitated toxoid) per cent of vaccinees develop fever of 39 deg. C or higher,
PTAP (purified toxoid aluminium phosphate) and that 5 to 10 per cent experience swelling and induration
- PTAH (purified toxoid aluminium hydroxide) or pain lasting more than 48 hours. In studies in USA and
Australia, about 50 per cent of children had local
- TAF (toxoid-antitoxin flocculus) reactions (24).
c. Antisera The most severe complications following DPT
- Diphtheria antitoxin. immunization are neurological (encephalitis/
encephalopathy, prolonged convulsions, infantile spasms
a. COMBINED VACCINES and Reye's syndrome) and are thought to be due primarily
to the pertussis component of the vaccine - the estimated
DPT Vaccine risk is 1: 170, 000 doses administered (24).
For immunizing infants, the preparation of choice is DPT. (f) Contraindications : Minor illnesses such as cough,
Firstly because, the infant can be immunized simultaneously cold, mild fever are not considered contraindications to
against three diseases, viz., diphtheria, pertussis and tetanus vaccination, only such children who are seriously ill or need
which is a great gain administratively. Secondly the pertussis hospitalization are not vaccinated. DPT should not be
component in DPT vaccine enhances the potency of the repeated if a severe reaction occurred after a previous dose.
diphtheria toxoid. Such reactions include collapse or shock-like state,
There are two types of DPT vaccines plain and persistent screaming episodes, temperature above 40 deg.C,
adsorbed. Adsorption is usually carried out on a mineral convulsions, other neurological symptoms and anaphylactic
carrier like aluminium phosphate or hydroxide. Studies have reactions. In the case of DPT, subsequent immunization with
shown that adsorption increases the immunological DT only is recommended, without the pertussis component.
effectiveness of the vaccine. The WHO recommends that Local reactions at the site of injection or mild fever do not by
only adjuvant DPT preparations be utilized in immunization themselves preclude the further use of DPT (24).
programmes (17). Since the severity of pertussis infection decreases with
STORAGE : DPT/DT vaccines should not be frozen. They age, the pertussis component in DPT vaccine is not usually
recommended after the age of 6 years (25). Therefore,
should be stored in a refrigerator between 2 to 8 deg. C. The
children over the age of 5 years who have not received DPT,
vaccine should be used before the date of expiry indicated
need only 2 doses of DT vaccine, 4 weeks apart, with a
on the vial. When issued to a sub-centre, the vaccine should
booster dose 6 months to· 1 year later. Those children who
be used within a week (19). The vaccine will lose potency if received the primary course of DPT earlier, should receive
kept at room temperature over a longer period of time. only DT as booster at 5-6 years or at school entry.
(a) Optimum age : It has been found that young infants For immunizing children over 12 years of age and adults,
respond well to immunization with potent vaccines and the preparation of choice is dT, which is an adult-type of
toxoids even in the presence of low to moderate levels of diphtheria tetanus vaccine (16). This preparation contains
maternal antibodies. Accordingly, the Global Advisory Group no more than 2 Lf of diphtheria toxoid per dose, compared
of the Expanded Programme on Immunization (EPI), has with 25 Lf in the ordinary (paediatric) DPT/OT vaccines.
recommended that DPT vaccine can be safely and effectively Administration of dT vaccine to adults is carried out in
administered as early as 6 weeks after birth (20, 21). 2 doses at an interval of 4 to 6 weeks, followed by a booster
(b) Number of doses: Three doses of DPT each of which 6 to 12 months after the second dose (26). This vaccine (dT)
is usually 0.5 ml, should be considered optimal for primary is not followed by the high incidence of reactions associated
-~~~~~~~~-1111
with the use of DPT or OT. Alternatively, for primary
WHOOPING COUGH
1
,1,
developed countries (1). Infants below 6 months have the mortality. The incidence of pertussis-associated
highest mortality. In older children, adolescents and adults, encephalopathy is 0.9 per cent 100,000. In industrialized
pertussis is often unrecognized because of its atypical countries, lethality of pertussis is very low ( < 1/1000),
course. However, older age groups represent an important . whereas in developing countries the average mortality is
source of infection for susceptible infants (7). (b) SEX : estimated at 3.9 per cent in infants and 1 per cent in children
Incidence and fatality are observed to be more among aged 1-4 years (7).
female than male children (6). (c) IMMUNITY : Recovery
from whooping cough or adequate immunization is followed Control of Whooping Cough
by immunity. Second attacks may occur in persons with
declining immunity, but these are usually mild. It is possible 1. CASES AND CONTACTS
that the first defence against pertussis infection is the (i) Cases : Early diagnosis, isolation and treatment of
antibody that prevents attachment of the bacteria to the cilia cases, and disinfection of discharges from nose and throat are
of the respiratory epithelium (8). Infants are susceptible to the general principles of control of whooping cough. Early
infection from birth because maternal antibody does not diagnosis is possible only by bacteriological examination of
appear to give them protection. There is no cross immunity nose and throat secretions which may be obtained by
with B. parapertussis. naso-pharyngeal swabs. The chances of isolating the
Environmental factors organism are < 60 per cent if the material is obtained within
10-14 days from the onset of illness. The value of fluorescent
Pertussis occurs throughout the year, but the disease antibody technique has been emphasized in facilitating the
shows a seasonal trend with more cases occurring during rapid diagnosis of pertussis. The patient should be isolated
winter and spring months, due to overcrowding. Socio- until considered to be non-infectious. Although several
economic conditions and ways of life also play a role in the antibiotics are effective against B. pertussis, erythromycin is
epidemiology of the disease. Thus, the risk of exposure is probably the drug of choice. A dose of 30-50 mg/kg of body
greater in the lower social classes living in overcrowded weight in 4 divided doses for 10 days has been
conditions than in well-to-do groups. recommended. Possible alternatives are ampicillin, septran or
tetracycline. Antibiotics may prevent or moderate clinical
Mode of transmission pertussis when given during incubation period or in early
Whooping cough is spread mainly by droplet infection catarrhal stage. During paroxysmal phase of disease,
and direct contact. Each time the patient coughs, sneezes or antimicrobial drugs will not change the clinical course but
talks, the bacilli are sprayed into the air. Most children may eliminate the bacterium from the nasopharynx and thus
contract infection from their playmates who are in the early reduce transmission of disease (7). They are useful in
stages of the disease. The role of fomites in the spread of controlling secondary bacterial infections (9).
infection appears to be very small, unless they are freshly (ii) Contacts : Infants and young children should be kept
contaminated. away from cases. Those known to have been in contact with
whooping cough may be given prophylactic antibiotic
Incubation period (erythromycin or ampicillin) treatment for 10 days to prevent
Usually 7 to 14 days, but not more than 3 weeks. the infecting bacteria to become established. The best
protection that can be given to an infant is to administer a
Clinical course booster dose of DPT/DT to his siblings before he is born (6).
B. pertussis produces a local infection; the organism is
not invasive. It multiplies on the surface epithelium of the 2. ACTIVE IMMUNIZATION
respiratory tract and causes inflammation and necrosis of The vaccine is usually administered in the national
the mucosa leading to secondary bacterial invasion. Three childhood immunization programme as combined DPT,
stages are described in the clinical course of the disease: DTWP or DTaP vaccine. In India, the national policy is to
(a) catarrhal stage, lasting for about 10 days. It is immunize against diphtheria, whooping cough and tetanus
characterized by its insidious onset, lacrimation, sneezing simultaneously, by administering 3 doses (each dose about
and coryza, anorexia and malaise, and a hacking night 0.5 ml) of DPT vaccine intramuscularly, at one month
cough that becomes diurnal. (b) paroxysmal stage, lasting interval, starting at the age of 6 weeks. A booster dose is
for 2-4 weeks. It is characterized by bursts of rapid, given at 18-24 months. Children whose vaccination series
consecutive coughs followed by a deep, high-pitched has been interrupted should have their series resumed,
inspiration (whoop). It is usually followed by vomiting. In without repeating previous doses. In some countries, an
young infants it may cause cyanosis and apnoea. In adults additional vaccine dose is now offered to health-care
and adolescents, uncharacteristic, persistent cough may be workers and young parents. Only acellular pertussis vaccines
the only manifestation of the disease, and (c) convalescent are used for vaccination of older children and adults (7).
stage, lasting for 1-2 weeks. The illness generally lasts 6 to 8
weeks. Despite major differences in the content, mode of
preparation and efficacy among both whole-cell pertussis
Complications occur in 5-6 per cent of cases, most vaccines and acellular pertussis vaccines; comprehensive
frequently in infants aged less than 6 months. The chief clinical trials have demonstrated that the most efficacious
complications of pertussis are bronchitis; vaccines of either category will protect 85 per cent of the
bronchopneumonia.and bronchiectasis. The violence of the recipients from clinical disease. The duration of protection
paroxysms may precipitate subconjunctival haemorrhages, following the primary 3-dose course in infants and 1 booster
epistaxis, haemoptysis and punctate cerebral haemorrhages dose atleast 1 year later is believed to be on an average
which may cause convulsions and coma. 6-12 years for both whole-cell and acellular pertussis
Bronchopneumonia occurs in about 5.2 per cent of cases. vaccines. This is similar to, or somewhat shorter than,
It is the most prominent problem, with relatively high immunity following natural infection (7). Some studies
MENINGOCOCCAL MENINGITIS
suggest that pertussis vaccination affects pharyngeal diagnosis and treatment, case fatality rates have declined to
colonization of B. pertussis, resulting in some reduction of less than 10 per cent.
bacterial transmission in the community (7). All infants,
including HIV-positive individuals should be immunized Problem statement
against pertussis. Distribution worldwide, occurring sporadically and in
In principle, the same type of acellular vaccine should be small outbreaks in most parts of the world. In some regions
given throughout the primary course of vaccination. this endemic situation may alternate with devastating,
However, if the previous type of vaccine is unknown, any unpredictable epidemics. This is the case in the African
type of acellular vaccine may be used (7). meningitis belt, which is the region in sub-Saharan Africa
Commercially available vaccines containing acelluar stretching from Senegal in the west to Ethiopia in the east.
pertussis include combination with some or all of the This region is inhabited by around 400 million people. In the
following components : diphtheria toxoid, tetanus toxoid, African meningitis belt, the WHO definition of a
Hib, HepB and IPV. meningococcal epidemic is > 100 cases per 100,000
population per year. In the endemic countries, the incidence
UNTOWARD REACTIONS: With some vaccines available of > 10 cases, 2-10 cases and <2 cases per 100,000
in the early 1960s, persistent screaming and collapse were population per year characterize high, moderate and low
reported, but these reactions are rarely observed with the endemicity respectivety. An outbreak outside the meningitis
vaccines now available. Pertussis vaccines may give rise to belt may be defined as a substantial increase in invasive
local reactions at the site of injection, mild fever and irritability. meningococcal disease in a defined population above that
The rare vaccine reactions are persistent (more than 3 hours) which is expected by place and time (1).
inconsolable screaming, seizures, hypotonic hypo-responsive
episodes, anaphylactic reaction and very rarely During recent years, several serious outbreaks affecting
encephalopathy. For details kindly refer to Table 36 of numerous countries have occurred in tropical and temperate
chapter 3 page 111. zones of other continents, viz, Americas, Asia and Europe. In
Europe, the incidence of disease ranges from 0.2 to 14 cases
CONTRAINDICATIONS The contraindications to per 100,000 population and majority cases are caused by
pertussis vaccination are anaphylactic reaction, serogroup B strains. In Americas, the incidence of disease is
encephalopathy, a personal or strong family history of in the range of 0.3 to 4 cases per 100,000 population. In
epilepsy, convulsions or similar CNS disorders: any febrile United States, the majority cases are caused by serogroups
upset until fully recovered: or a reaction to one of the B, C and Y. In Asia most meningococcal disease is caused by
previously given triple vaccine injections (10). meningococci belonging to serogroup A or C (1).
3. PASSIVE IMMUNIZATION Meingococcal disesase is endemic in India. Cases of
meningococcal meningitis are reported sporadically or in
The merit of hyperimmune globulin in pertussis
small clusters. During 2013, about 3,380 cases of
prophylaxis has yet to be established. So far, there is no
meningococcal meningitis were reported in India with about
evidence of its efficacy in well-controlled trials (9).
176 deaths. Majority of the cases were reported from only
The control of pertussis by immunization is still an few states as shown in Table 1.
unsolved problem. Even if the level of immunization reaches
100 per cent, it is possible that the disease would not be ·TABLE 1
entirely eliminated because whooping cough vaccines have Reported cases and deaths due to
never been claimed to be more than 90 per cent effective. meningococcal meningitis in India - 2013
State Cases Deaths
References
L Morley, David (1973). Paediatric Priorities in the Developing World, Andhra Pradesh 397 27
Butterworths. Madhya Pradesh 302 6
2. WHO (2014), World Health Statistics 2014. Uttar Pradesh 12 0
3. WHO (1996), The World Health Report 1996, Fighting disease West Bengal 64 13
Fostering development. Delhi 876 53
4. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 40, 1st Oct, 2010. Gujarat 112 13
5. Govt. of India (2013), National Health Profile 2013, DGHS, Ministry Tamil Nadu 57 4
of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
6. Christie, AB. (1980). Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical
Bihar 69 1
Practice, 3rd ed., Churchill Livingstone. Jharkhand 125 0
7. WHO (2005), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 4, Jan. 28, 2005. Odis ha 248 17
8. Jawetz, et al, Medical Microbiology, 24th ed. 2007, A Lange Medical Haryana 107 0
Book. Manipur 205 0
9. Manclark, C.R. (1981). Bull WHO, 59: 9-15. Puducherry 181 23
10. Gray, James A (1981). Medicine International, 3, 112.
Source: (2)
MENINGOCOCCAL MENINGITIS
Epidemiological features
Meningococcal meningitis or cerebrospinal fever is an (a) AGENT : The causative agent, N. meningitidis is a
acute communicable disease caused by N.meningitidis. It gram-negative diplococci. 12 serotypes have been identified,
usually begins with intense headache, vomiting and stiff viz. Groups A, B, C, H, I, K, L, W135, X, Y, Z based on
neck and progresses to coma within a few hours. The the structure of the polysaccharide capsule. The majority of
meningitis is part of a septicaemic process. The fatality of invasive meningococcal infections are caused by organisms
typical untreated cases is about 80 per cent. With early of serogroups A, B, C, X, W135 and Y. Meningococci of these
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
serogroups have the potential to cause both endemic disease pressure in meningitis are particular problem in the
and outbreaks. In African meningitis belt, subgroup A has management of meningococcal disease. Treatment of cases
been the most important cause of disease (1). N. meningitidis has practically no effect on the epidemiological pattern of
is a delicate organism; it dies rapidly on exposure to heat and the disease because it only reduces the fatality rate of the
cold. (b) SOURCE OF INFECTION: The organism is found in disease according to the treatment efficiency (3). Isolation of
the nasopharynx of cases and carriers. Clinical cases present cases is of limited usefulness in controlling epidemics
only a negligible source of infection. More often the infection because the carriers outnumber cases.
causes mild or even unnoticeable symptoms of naso- (b) CARRIERS : Treatment with penicillin does not
pharyngitis. 4 to 35 per cent of the normal population may eradicate the carrier state; more powerful antibiotics such as
harbour the organism in the nasopharynx during inter- rifampicin are needed to eradicate the carrier state (5).
epidemic periods. Carriers are the most important source of
infection. The mean duration of temporary carriers is about (c) CONTACTS : Close contacts of persons with
10 months (3). During epidemics, the carrier rate may go up confirmed meningococcal disease are at an increased risk of
to 70-80 per cent. (c) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY : developing meningococcal illness. Antibiotics are effective in
Until meningococci are no longer present in discharges from preventing additional cases through eradicating carriage of
nose and throat. Cases rapidly lose their infectiousness within the invasive strain. Most secondary case occur within the
24 hours of specific treatment. (d) AGE AND SEX : This is first 72 hours after presentation of the index case; risk of
predominantly a disease of children and young adults of both secondary disease decreases to near baseline by 10-14
sexes with highest attack rate in infants aged 3-12 months. days. Close contacts include household, child care, and
(e) IMMUNITY: All ages are susceptible. Younger age groups preschool contacts. In outbreaks involving limited
are more susceptible than older groups as their antibodies are populations, those with direct, prolonged contact with a case
lower. Immunity is acquired by subclinical infection (mostly), of meningococcal disease may also be offered clearance
clinical disease or vaccination. Infants derive ·passive treatment. Ideally, where indicated, treatment should be
immunity from the mother. (f) ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS started within 24 hours of identification of the index case.
: The seasonal variation of the disease is well established; Antibiotics effective for this purpose include rifampicin,
outbreaks occur more frequently in the dry and cold months ciprofloxacin, ceftriaxone or azithromycin.
of the year from December to June. Overcrowding, as occurs (d) MASS CHEMOPROPHYLAXIS : This is in fact mass
in schools, barracks, refugee and other camps, is an medication of the total population some of which are not
important predisposing factor. The incidence is also greater in infected. It is recommended that mass chemoprophylaxis be
the low socio-economic groups living under poor housing restricted to closed and medically supervised communities.
conditions, with exposure to tobacco smoke, asplenia, HIV Mass treatment causes an immediate drop in the incidence
infection and travel to endemic areas. rate of meningitis and in the proportion of carriers. The
efficacy of this preventive measure depends to a large extent
Mode of transmission on the population coverage (3). The drugs of choice are
The disease spreads mainly by droplet infection. The ciprofloxacin, minocycline, spiramycin and ceftriaxone.
portal of entry is the nasopharynx. (e) VACCINE (1, 4) : Currently available meningococcal
vaccines include polysaccharide vaccines and
Incubation period polysaccharide-protein conjugate vaccines. The conjugate
Usually 3 to 4 days, but may vary from 2 to 10 days. vaccines are more immunogenic and also induce
immunogenic memory. Both vaccines are available against
Clinical course meningococci of serogroup A, C, W135 and Y.
Most infections do not cause clinical disease. Many Po/ysaccharide vaccines Internationally marketed
infected people become asymptomatic carriers of the meningococcal polysaccharide vaccines are available in
bacteria and serve as a reservoir and source of infection for bivalent (A, C), trivalent (A,C, W 135), and quadrivalent (A,
others. In general, susceptibility to meningococcal disease C, W135, Y) formulations. The vaccines contain 50 µg of
decreases with age. Meningococcal meningitis has a sudden each of the individual polysaccharides. Meningococcal
onset of intense headache, fever, nausea, vomiting, polysaccharide vaccines are administered as a single dose to
photophobia, stiff neck and various neurological signs. The persons :?:2 years old; most of these vaccines are given
disease is fatal within 24-48 hours in 5-10 per cent of cases subcutaneously.
even with prompt antimicrobial treatment in good health . Adverse reactions to polysaccharide meningococcal
care facility. Among individuals who survive, upto 15-20 per vaccines are usually mild; the most frequent reaction is 1-2
cent have permanent neurological sequelae. Meningococcal days of pain and redness at the site of injection, which occur
septicaemia, in which there is rapid dissemination of bacteria in 4%-56% of vaccine recipients. Transient fever is reported
in the bloodstream, is a less common form of meningococcal in <5% of recipients.
disease, characterized by circulatory collapse, haemorrhagic
skin rash and high fatality rate (4). Conjugate vaccines : Licensed meningococcal conjugate
vaccines are monovalent (A or C) or quadrivalent (A, C,
Prevention and control W135, Y), and also include a combination vaccine based on
Haemophilus influenzae type b and Neisseria meningitidis
(a) CASES : Treatment with antibiotics can save the lives serogroup C vaccines (Hib/MenC).
of 95 per cent of patients provided that it is started during
the first 2 days of illness. Penicillin is the drug of choice. In Conjugate vaccine should be given as intramuscular
penicillin-allergic patients, ceftriaxone and other third- injection, preferably in the deltoid muscle (or in the
generation cephalosporins should be substituted. A single anterolateral aspect of the upper thigh in children
dose of long-acting chloramphenicol or cetriaxone is used <12 months of age).
for treatment of epidemic meningococcal meningitis in sub- Monovalent Men A conjugate vaccine should be given as
Saharan Africa. Septicaemic shock and raised intracranial a single dose to individuals 1-29 years of age. For
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A_C_U_T_E_R_E_S_P_IR_A_T_O_R_Y_I_N_FE_C_T_I_O_N_S~__,~
monovalent Men C conjugate vaccine, one single low as 3-4 per cent, its incidence in developing countries
intramuscular dose is recommended for children aged 2 12 range between 20 to 30 per cent. This difference is due to
months, teenagers and adults. Children 2-11 months of age high prevalence of malnutrition, low birth weight and
require 2 dose administration at an interval of at least 2 indoor air pollution in developing countries (1).
months and a booster about 1 year thereafter. Quadrivalent ARI is an important cause of morbidity in the children.
vaccines are administered as a single dose to individuals On an average, children below 5 years of age suffer about
aged 2 2 years. 5 episodes of ARI per child per year, thus accounting for
Meningococcal vaccines should be stored at 2-8°C. about 238 million attacks. Consequently, although most of
Conjugate vaccines are preferred over polysaccharide the attacks are mild and self limiting episodes, ARI is
vaccines due to their potential for herd protection and their responsible for about 30-50 per cent of visits to health
increased immunogenicity, particularly in children < 2 years facilities and for about 20-40 per cent of admissions to
of age. Both vaccines are safe when used during pregnancy hospitals (1). It is also a leading cause of disabilities
(1). WHO recommends that countries with high or medium including deafness as a sequelae of otitis media (2).
endemic rates of invasive meningococcal disease and Pneumonia kills more children than any other disease
countries with frequent epidemics should introduce (more than AIDS, malaria and measles combined). More
appropriate large-scale meningococcal vaccination than 1.1 million under 5 years of age children die from
programmes (1). pneumonia each year, accounting for almost 17 per cent
References under-five deaths worldwide. Yet, little attention is paid to
this disease (3). Streptococcus pneumoniae is a major cause
1. WHO (2011), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No, 47, 18th Nov. of illness and death in children, as well as in adults.
2011.
2. Govt. of India (2014), National Health Profile 2013, DGHS, Ministry of
According to a WHO estimate, about 1.6 million cases of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. fatal pneumococcal disease occur worldwide, mostly in
3. Cvjetanovic, B. et al (1978). Bull WHO, 56 (SupplementNo.l): 81. infants and elderly. In addition, immunocompromised
4. WHO (2012), International traue/ and Health, 2012. individuals of all ages are at increased risk (4). Disease rates
5. Jawetz, et al, (2007), Medical Microbiology, 24th ed., A Lange Medical and mortality are higher in developing than industrialized
Book. countries, with majority of deaths occurring in Sub-Saharan
Africa and South Asia. Children who are poor,
ACUTE RESPIRATORY INFECTIONS undernourished in remote areas are more likely to suffer
from pneumonia. Moreover, only 34 per cent of children with
Infections of the respiratory tract are perhaps the most suspected pneumonia received antibiotics during 2012 (4).
common human ailment. While they are a source of Likewise, haemophi/us inf/uenzae type B (Hibl bacteria is
discomfort, disability and loss of time for most adults, they estimated to cause 3 million cases of severe pneumonia and
are a substantial cause of morbidity and mortality in young meningitis, and approximately 386,000 deaths per year in
children and the elderly. Many of these infections run their children under 5 years of age (5).
natural course in older children and in adults without The key pneumonia indicators developed for prevention
specific treatment and without complications. However, in and treatment of pneumonia are as shown in Table 1. It also
young infants, small children and in the elderly, or in shows the data pertaining to pneumonia from South-East
persons with impaired respiratory tract reserves, it increases Asia countries for the year 2008-2012.
the morbidity and mortality rates. In India, in the states and districts with high infant and
Acute respiratory infections (ARI) may cause child mortality rates, ARI is one of the major causes of
inflammation of the respiratory tract anywhere from nose to death. ARI is also one of the major reasons for which
alveoli, with a wide range of combination of symptoms and children are brought to the hospitals and health facilities.
signs. ARI is often classified by clinical syndromes Hospital records from states with high infant mortality rates
depending on the site of infection and is referred to as ARI show that upto 13% of inpatient deaths in paediatric wards
of upper (AURI) or lower (ALRI) respiratory tract. The upper are due to ARI. The proportion of death due to ARI in the
respiratory tract infections include common cold, pharyngitis community is much higher as many children die at home.
and otitis media. The lower respiratory tract infections The reason for high case fatality may be that children are
include epiglottitis, laryngitis, laryngotracheitis, bronchitis, either not brought to the hospitals or brought too late.
bronchiolitis and pneumonia. In India, during the year 2013, about 31.7 million cases
The clinical features include running nose, cough, sore of ARI were reported. During 2013 about 3,278 people died
throat, difficult breathing and ear problem. Fever is also of ARI and 2,597 died of pneumonia. Pneumonia was
common in acute respiratory infections. Most children with responsible for about 18 per cent of all 'under 5 year' deaths
these infections have only mild infection, such as cold or in India (8).
cough. However, some children may have pneumonia which
is a major cause of death. In less developed countries, Epidemiological determinants
measles and whooping cough are important causes of severe
respiratory tract infection. Agent factors
The microbial agents that cause acute respiratory
Problem statement infections are numerous and include bacterias and viruses.
Every year ARI in young children is responsible for an Even within species they can show a wide diversity of
estimated 3.9 million deaths worldwide. About 90 per cent antigenic type. The agents are those most frequently
of the ARI deaths are due to pneumonia which is usually encountered in a normal population. The bacteria involved
bacterial in origin. The incidence of ARI is similar in can all be isolated with varying frequency from carriers, and
developed and developing countries. However, while the cause illness in only minority of infected persons. The
incidence of pneumonia in developed countries may be as viruses that have been found in association with acute
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 1
Key pneumonia indicators : mortality, prevention and treatment in South-East Asia countries (2008-2012)
India 14 43 16 46 74 69
Bangladesh 13 36 10 64 96 96 35
Bhutan 17 13 3 49 95 74
Indonesia 17 18 5 42 80 75
Myanmar 17 23 6 24 84 69
Maldives 8 17 3 48 98 22
Nepal· 13 29 8 70 86 90 50
Sri Lanka 6 21 4 76 99 99 58
Thailand 8 7 1 15 98 84
[World 15 15 9 38 84 45 59
Source : (6, 7)
respiratory disease are numerous. They are the, primary case of lower respiratory tract infections. The agents
cause of the great majority of respiratory illnesses. However, considered to be capable of acute respiratory diseases, the
the severity of the illness is often determined by whether or age group most frequently affected, and the characteristic
not secondary bacterial infection occurs, particularly in the clinical features are as shown in Table 2.
TABLE 2
The agents causing ARI, age group affected and clinical features
Agent Age group (s) most frequently affected Characteristic clinical features
Bacteria
Bordetella pertussis Infants and young children Paroxysmal cough
Corynebacterium diphtheriae Children Nasal/tonsillar/pharyngeal membranous exudate ±
severe toxaemia
Haemophi/us influenzae Adults Acute exacerbations of chronic bronchitis pneumonia
Children Acute epiglottitis (H.influenzae type B)
Klebsiel/a pneumoniae Adults Lobar pneumonia ± lung abscess
Legionella pneumophila Adults Pneumonia
Staphylococcus pyogenes All ages Lobar and broncho-pneumonia (esp. secondary to
influenza) ± lung abscess
Streptococcus pneumoniae All ages Pneumonia (lobar or multilobular) Acute exacerbations
of chronic bronchitis
Streptococcus pyogenes All ages Acute pharyngitis and tonsillitis
Virus
Adenoviruses - endemic types (1,2,5) Young children Lower respiratory .
- epidemic types (3,4, 7) Older children and young adults Febrile pharyngitis and influenza-like illness
Enteroviruses (ECHO and Coxsackie) All ages Variable respiratory
Influenza A
B
· All ages
School children
J Fever, aching, malaise, variable respiratory
Occasional primary pneumonia
[
Secondary bacterial pneumonia in elderly
c Rare Mild upper respiratory
Measles Young children Variable respiratory with characteristic rash
Parainfluenza 1
2 J Young children J Croup J re-infection in later life :
mild upper respiratory
3 Infants Bronchiolitis and pneumonia
Respiratory syncytial virus Infants and young children Severe bronchiolitis and pneumonia
Rhinoviruses (multiple serotypes)]
Corona virus All ages Common cold
Other agents
Chlamydia type B (Psittacosis) Adults exposed to infected birds Influenza-like illness and atypical pneumonia
Coxiel/a burnetti (Q fever) Adults exposed to sheep and cattle Atypical pneumonia
Mycoplasma pneumoniae School children and young adults Febrile bronchitis and atypical pneumonia
Source: (9)
ACUTE RESPIRATORY INFECTIONS
TABLE 4
Management of pneumonia in a child aged 2 months upto 5 years
Source : (10)
minute. Any pneumonia in young infant is considered to be Some of the danger signs of very severe disease are :
severe. They should be referred immediately to a hospital.
(a) Convulsions, abnormally sleepy or difficult to wake :
Table 5 is used to classify the illness of a young infant.
A young infant with these signs may have hypoxia from
TABLE 5 pneumonia, sepsis or meningitis. Malaria infection is
Classification and management of illness in young infants unusual in children of this age, so antimalarial treatment is
not advised.
Stopped feeding well,
Convulsions, (b) Stridor when calm : Infections causing stridor (e.g.
SIGNS Abnormally sleepy or difficultto wake, diphtheria, bacterial tracheitis, measles or epiglottitis} are
Stridor in calm child, rare in young infants. A young infant who has stridor when
Wheezing, or calm should be classified as having very severe disease.
Fever or low body temperature
(c} Stopped feeding well : A young infant who stops
feeding well (i.e., takes less than half of the usual amount of
CLASSIFY AS VERY SEVERE DISEASE
milk} may have a serious infection and should be classified
TREATMENT Refer URGENTLY to hospital as having very severe disease.
Keep young infant warm (d) Wheezing : Wheezing is uncommon in young infants
Give first dose of an antibiotic
and is often associated with hypoxia.
Severe chest indrawing, No severe chest indrawing (e) Fever or low body temperature : Fever {38°C or more)
SIGNS or Fast breathing and No fast breathing
(60 per minute or more) (less than 60 per minute) is uncommon in young infants and more often means a
serious bacterial infection. In addition, fever may be the only
CLASSIFY AS SEVERE PNEUMONIA NO PNEUMONIA : sign of a serious bacterial infection. In young infants an
COUGH OR COLD infection may sometimes cause the body temperature to
drop (hypothermia).
Refer URGENTLY to Advise mother to give the
TREATMENT hospital. Keep young following home care : A young infant who is classified as having very severe
infant warm. - Keep young infant warm. disease should be referred urgently to a hospital for
Give first dose of an - Breast-feed frequently. treatment. The management is summarized in Table 5.
antibiotic(lf referral - Clear nose if it interferes
is not feasible,treat with feeding.
with an antibiotic and Return quickly if:- TREATMENT
follow closely). Breathing becomes difficult,
Breathing becomes fast,
Feeding becomes a problem (A) TREATMENT FOR CHILDREN AGED 2 MONTHS
The young infantbecomes UPTO 5 YEARS
sicker.
The standard treatment for childhood acute respiratory
Source: (10) infections in India is as follows (10) :
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
and cause side-effects while providing no clinical benefit, vaccine containing capsular antigens of 23 serotypes against
and are wasteful expenditure. Symptomatic treatment and this infection have been available for adults and children
care at home is generally enough for such cases. The over 2 years of age. Children under 2 years of age and
mothers must be advised on how to take care of the child at immunocompromised individuals do not respond well to the
home. vaccine. It is recommended for selected groups, e.g., those
who have undergone spl~nectomy or have sickle-cell
Prevention of Acute Respiratory Infections disease, chronic diseases of heart, lung, liver or kidney;
Present understanding of risk factors of respiratory tract diabetes mellitus, alcoholism, generalized malignancies,
infection in childhood indicates several approaches for organ transplants etc. In some industrialized countries like
primary prevention. In developing countries, improved living USA it is routinely advised for everyone aged above 65
conditions, better nutrition and reduction of smoke pollution years (13).
indoors will reduce the burden of mortality and morbidity A dose of 0.5 ml of PPV23 contains 25 micrograms of
associated with ARI. Other preventive measures include purified capsular polysaccharide from each 23 serotypes.
better MCH care. Immunization is an important measure to For primary immunization, PPV23 is administered as a
reduce cases of pneumonia which occur as a complication of single intra-muscular dose preferably in the deltoid muscle
vaccine preventable disease, especially measles. It is obvious or as subcutaneous dose. The vaccine should not be mixed
that community support is essential to reduce the disease in the same syringe with other vaccines, for e.g. with
burden. Families with young children must be helped to influenza vaccine, but may be administered at the same time
recognize pneumonia. Health promotional activities are by separate injection in the other arm. Simultaneous
specially important in vulnerable areas (11). administration does not increase adverse events or decrease
the antibody response to either vaccine. Protective capsular
Immunization type-specific antibody levels generally develop by the third
Vaccines hold promise of saving millions of children from week following vaccination (4).
dying of pneumonia. Three vaccines have potential of
MiOor adverse reactions, such as transient redness and
reducing deaths from pneumonia. These vaccines work to
pain at the site of injection occur in 30-50 per cent of those
reduce the incidence of bacterial pneumonia.
who have been vaccinated, more commonly following
1. MEASLES VACCINE subcutaneous administration. Local reactions are more
frequent in recipients of the 2nd dose of the vaccine (4).
Pneumonia is a serious complication of measles and the
most common cause of death associated with measles b. PCV : Two conjugate vaccines are available since
worldwide. Thus, reducing the incidence of measles in young 2009 PCV 10 and PCV 13 • The PCV7 conjugate vaccine is
children through vaccination would also help to reduce deaths gradually being removed from the market (14). Both PCV 10
from pneumonia. A safe and effective vaccine against measles and PCV 13 are preservative free and their recommended
is available for past 40 years. Please refer to page 148 for storage temperature is 2-8°C. The vaccine must not be
details. frozen.
For PCV administration to infants, WHO recommends
2. HIB VACCINE 3 primary doses (the 3p+O schedule) or, as an alternative,
Haemophilus influenzae type B (Hib, is an important cause 2 primary doses plus one booster (the 2p+ 1 schedule). In
of pneumonia and meningitis among children in developing 3p+O schedule, vaccination can be initiated as early as
countries. Hib vaccine has been available for more than a 6 weeks of age with an interval betweeen doses of 4-8
decade. It reduces dramatically the incidence of Hib weeks, with doses given at 6, 10 and 14 weeks or 2, 4, and
meningitis and pneumonia in infants and nasopharyngeal 6 months, depending on programme convenience (14).
colonization by Hib bacteria. It's high cost has posed obstacle
to its introduction in developing countries. If 2p+ 1 schedule is selected, the 2 primary doses are
given during infancy as early as 6 weeks of age at an interval
The vaccine is often given as a combined preparation with preferably of 8 weeks or more for young infant, and 4-8
DPT and poliomyelitis vaccine. Three or four doses are given weeks or more between primary doses for infants ?.7 months
depending on the manufacturers and type of vaccine used, of age. One booster dose should be given between 9-15
and is given intramuscularly. The vaccine schedule is at 6, 10, months of age (14).
and 14 weeks of age or according to national immunization
schedule. In many industrialized countries a booster dose is Mild reactions like erythema and tenderness to PCV-7
given between 12-18 months which provides additional occur in upto 50 per cent of recipients, but systemic
benefit to limit burden of Hib disease among children (12). reactions are unknown. Revaccination is not recommended
For children more than 12 months of age, who have not for those who had a anaphylactic reaction to initial dose.
received their primary immunization series a single dose is HIV positive and preterm babies who have received their
sufficient for protection. The vaccine is not generally offered 3 primary doses of vaccine before reaching 12 months of
to children aged more than 24 months (12). age may benefit from a booster dose in the second year of
No serious side-effects have been recorded, and no life. Interrupted schedules should be resumed withqut
contraindications are known, except for hyper-sensitivity to repeating the previous doses (14).
previous dose of. vaccine. All conjugate vaccine have an When primary immunization is initiated with one of these
excellent safety record, and where tested, do not interfere vaccines, it is recommended · that remaining doses are
substantially with immunogenecity of other vaccines given administered with the same product. Interchangeability
simultaneously (13). between PCV 10 and PCV 13 has yet not been documented.
WHO recommends inclusion of PCVs in childhood
3. PNEUMOCOCCAL PNEUMONIA VACCINE immunization programme worldwide, particularly in
a. PPV23 : For years, the polysaccharide non-conjugate countries with high under-five mortalities (14).
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
The Integrated Global Action Plan for the 9. Epidemiology of Diseases, Edited by Miller, D.L. and Farmer, R.D.,
Blackwel Scientific Publications.
Prevention and Control of Pneumonia and 10. WHO (1995), The management of acute respiratory infections in
Diarrhoea (15) children, Practical guidelines for outpatient care, World Health
The Integrated Global Action Plan for the Prevention and Organization, Geneva.
Control of Pneumonia and Diarrhoea (GAPPD) proposes a 11. Govt of India (1994), National Child Survival and Safe Motherhood
Programme, Programme Interventions, MCH Division, Ministry of
cohesive approach to ending preventable pneumonia and Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
diarrhoea deaths. It brings together critical services and 12. WHO (2006), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 47, 24th Nov.
interventions to create healthy environments, promotes · 2006.
practices known to protect children from disease, and 13. WHO (2006, International Travel and Health.
ensures that every child has access to proven and 14. WHO (2012), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 14, 6th April,
appropriate preventive and treatment measures. 2012.
15. WHO, UNICEF (2013), Ending Preventable Child Deaths from
The specific goals for 2025 are to: Pneumonia and Diarrhoea by 2025. The Integrated Global Action Plan
reduce mortality from pneumonia in children less than for Pneumonia and Diarrhoea.
5 years of age to fewer than 3 per 1000 live births;
reduce mortality from diarrhoea in children less than 5 SEVERE ACUTE RESPlR.ATORV SYNl)RQ.l\fE
years of age to fewer than 1 per 1000 live births; · (SARS)
reduce the incidence of severe pneumonia by 75% in
children less than 5 years of age compared to 2010 Severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) is a
levels; communicable viral disease, caused by a new strain of
coronavirus, which differs considerably in genetic structure
reduce the incidence of severe diarrhoea by 75% in
from previously recognized coronavirus.
children less than 5 years of age compared to 2010
levels; The most common symptoms in patient progressing to
reduce by 40% the global number of children less than 5 SARS include fever, malaise, chills, headache myalgia,
years of age who are stunted compared to 2010 levels. dizziness, cough, sore throat and running nose. In some
cases there is rapid deterioration with low oxygen saturation
Theses goals are ambitious and will require significant and acute respiratory distress requiring ventilatory support.
political will and mobilization of additional resources if they It is capable of causing death. in as many as 10 per cent
are to be reached. cases (1).
Coverage targets to be maintained or reached have also Chest X-ray findings typically begin with a small,
been set to define efforts needed to attain the above goals. unilateral patchy shadowing, and progress over 1-2 days to
These are: become bilateral and generalized, with interstitial/confluent
By the end of 2025: infiltration. Adult respiratory distress syndrome has been
90% full-dose coverage of each relevant vaccine observed in a number of patients in the end stages.
(with 80% coverage in every district); Problem statement
90% access to appropriate pneumonia and
The earliest case was traced to a health care worker in
diarrhoea case management (with 80% coverage China, in late 2002, with rapid spread to Hong Kong,
in every district);
Singapore, Vietnam, Taiwan and Toranto. As of early August
at least 50% coverage of exclusive breast-feeding 2003, about 8,422 cases were reported to the WHO from 30
during the first 6 months of life; countries with 916 fatalities (2).
virtual elimination of paediatric HIV.
Incubation period
By the end of 2030:
The incubation period has been estimated to be 2 to 7
universal access to basic drinking-water in health days, commonly 3 to 5 days (1).
care facilities and homes;
universal access to adequate sanitation in health Mode of transmission
care facilities by 2030 and in homes by 2040; The primary mode of transmission appears to be through
universal access to handwashing facilities (water direct or indirect contact of mucous membranes of eyes,
and soap) in health care facilities and homes;. nose, or mouth with respiratory droplets or fomites. The use
universal access to clean and safe energy of aerosol-generating procedures (endotracheal intubation,
technologies in health care facilities and homes. bronchoscopy, nebulization treatments) in hospitals may
amplify the transmission of the SARS coronavirus. The virus
References is shed in stools but the role of faecal-oral transmission is
1. WHO (1999), Health Situation in the South-East Asia Region 1994- unknown. The natural reservoir appears to be the horseshoe
1997, Regional Office for SEAR, New Delhi. bat (which eats and drops fruits ingested by civets, the
2. WHO (1995), The World Health Report 1995, Bridging the gaps, earlier presumed reservoir and a likely amplifying host).
Report of the Director-General. The SARS virus can survive for hours on common
3. UNICEF, WHO (2006), Pneumonia the forgotton killer of children. surfaces outside the human body, and up to four days in
4. WHO (2008), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 42, 17th Oct,
2008.
human waste. The virus can survive at least for 24 hours on
5. WHO (2008), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 7, 15th Feb, 2008. a plastic surface at :f9om temperature, and can live for
6. WHO (2014), World Health Statistics 2014. extended periods in the cold.
7. UNICEF (2014), The State of Worlds Children, 2014.
Case definition (4),--,.
8. Govt. of India (2014), National Health Profile2013, DGHS, Ministry of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. The case definition Is based on current understanding of
SARS
1. Prompt identification of persons with SARS, their were HIV positives, and 3.5 per cent of the new and 20.5 per
movements and contacts; cent of previously treated cases were of MDR-TB. It is
2. Effective isolation of SARS patients in hospitals; estimated that about 1.5 million people died of TB, of these
3. Appropriate protection of medical staff treating these 360,000 were HIV positive and 210,000 MDR-TB cases.
patients; About 60 per cent of TB cases and deaths occur among
4. Comprehensive identification and isolation of suspected men, but burden of disease (3.3 million) among women is
SARS cases; high. In 2013, an estimated 510,000 women died as a result
5. Simple hygienic measures such as hand-washing after of TB, more than one-third of whom were HIV.positive. An
touching patients, use of appropriate and well-fitted estimated 550,000 (6 per cent of total cases) children under
masks, and introduction of infection control measures; 15 years of age had TB of whom 80,000 died.
6. Exit screening of international travellers; TB detection and treatment outcome : During 2013, of
7. Timely and accurate reporting and sharing of the estimated 9 million cases, only 6.1 million cases were
information with other authorities and/or governments. reported to WHO. Of these 5.7 million were people newly
diagnosed and 0.4 million were already on treatment. The
References notification rate was about 64 per cent. About 3 million
1. WHO (2003), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 12, 21March2003. missed cases were either not diagnosed or diagnosed but not
2. WHO (2003), World Health Report 2003, Shaping the future. reported.
3. WHO (2003), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 43, 24th Oct. 2003.
4. WHO (2009), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 7, 13th Feb. 2009. In 2013, the treatment success rate continued to be high
5. Stephen J. Mcphee et al, (2010), Current Medical Diagnosis and at 86 per cent among all new TB cases.
Treatment, 49th Ed. A Lange Medical Publication. The South East Asia Region accounts for 39 per cent of
the global burden of TB in terms of incidence and India
alone accounts for 24 per cent of the world's TB cases. It is
estimated that about 3.4 million new cases of TB continue to
Tuberculosis is a specific infectious disease caused by occur each year in this Region, most of them in India,
M. tuberculosis. The disease primarily affects lungs and Bangladesh, Indonesia, Myanmar and Thailand. 6.2 per
causes pulmonary tuberculosis. It can also affect intestine, cent of the cases with HIV known status (39 per cent of total
meninges, bones and joints, lymph glands, skin and other SEAR cases) were HIV-positive. 89 per cent of HIV-positive
tissues of the body. The disease is usually chronic with TB cases were on co-trimoxazole preventive therapy and
varying clinical manifestations. The disease also affects 61 per cent of these cases were put on antiretroviral therapy.
animals like cattle; this is known as "bovine tuberculosis", Level of MDR-TB is still low in the Region (less than 2.2 per
which may sometimes be communicated to man. Pulmonary · cent), however, this translates into nearly 90,000 estimated
tuberculosis, the most important form of tuberculosis which MDR-TB cases among all the notified TB cases in 2012 (3).
affects man, will be considered here. Each year, more than 2 million TB cases are registered for
treatment with more than 85 per cent success rate of new
Problem statement sputum smear positive cases. TB mortality rate has
WORLD decreased more than 40 per cent since 1990 (3).
Tuberculosis remains a worldwide public health problem The actual burden of paediatric TB is not known due to
despite the fact that the causative organism was discovered diagnostic difficulties. It is assumed that about 10 per cent of
more than 100 years ago and highly effective drugs and total TB load is found in children. Globally, about 1 million
vaccine are available making tuberculosis a preventable and cases of paediatric TB are estimated to occur every year, with
curable disease. Technologically advanced countries have more than 100,000 deaths (4). Childhood deaths from TB
achieved spectacular results in the control of tuberculosis. are usually caused by meningitis or disseminated disease (1).
This decline started long before the advent of BCG or Though MDR-TB and XDR-TB is documented among
chemotherapy and has been attributed to changes in the paediatric age groups, there are no estimates of overall
"non-specific" determinants of the disease such as burden because of diagnostic difficulties and exclusion of
improvements in the standard of living and the quality of life children in most of the drug resistant surveys (4).
of the people coupled with the application of available In many developing countries, acquired drug resistance
technical knowledge and health resources. remains high, because national tuberculosis control
It is estimated that about one-third of the current global programmes in these countries have not been able to
population is infected asymptomatically with tuberculosis, of achieve a high cure rate over a very long period of time,
whom 5-10 per cent will develop clinical disease during even after the introduction of short-course chemotherapy.
their lifetime. Most new cases and deaths occur in Poverty, economic recession, malnutrition, overcrowding,
developing countries where infection is often acquired in indoor air pollution, tobacco, alcohol abuse and diabetes
childhood. The annual risk of tuberculosis infection in high make populations more vulnerable to tuberculosis. Increase
burden countries is estimated to be 0.5-2 per cent (1). in human migration has rapidly mixed infected with
Patients with infectious pulmonary tuberculosis disease can uninfected communities. To make global situation worse,
infect 10-15 persons in a year. tuberculosis has formed a lethal combination with HIV.
Tuberculosis remains a major global health problem. The DOTS remains central to the public health approach to
current global picture of TB shows continued progress but not tuberculosis control, which is now presented as Stop TB
fast enough. During the year 2013, an estimated Strategy. To be classified as DOTS, a country must have
9 million people developed TB, which is equivalent to officially accepted and adopted the strategy by 2004, and
126 cases per 100,000 population. Most of the cases must have implemented the four technical components of
occurred in Asia (56 per cent) and the African regions DOTS in at least part of the country. DOTS coverage is
(29 per cent). Of these incident cases 1.1 million (13 per cent) defined as the percentage of the national population living
TUBERCULOSIS
in areas where health services have adopted DOTS. "Areas" first survey showed that BCG scar did not influence ARTI
are the lowest administrative or management units in the interpretation (5).
country (township, district, counties, etc.). The target of Table 1 shows the burden of tuberculosis in India (the
DOTS programme is successful treatment or cure rate of estimated and reported rates etc.). The Indian scenario
85 per cent of new smear positive cases, and detection of about DOTS programme has been discussed in detail in
70 per cent of such cases. chapter 7.
The advantages of DOTS are : (a) Accuracy of TB
diagnosis is more than doubled; (b) Treatment success rate is TABLE 1
upto 95 per cent; (c) Prevents the spread of the tuberculosis Burden of tuberculosis in India (2013)
infection, thus reducing the incidence and prevalence of (Population 1,252 million)
tuberculosis; (d) Improves quality of health care and Number Rate (per 100,000
removes stigma associated with TB; (e) Prevents failure of (thousands) population)
treatment and the emergence of MOR-TB by ensuring
patient adherence and uninterrupted drug supply; (f) Helps Estimates of TB burden 2013
alleviate poverty by saving lives, reducing duration of illness Mortality (excludes HIV+ TB) 240 (150-350) 19 (12-28)
and preventing spread of infection; (g) Lends credibility to
Mortality (HIV+ TB only) 38 (31-44) 3 (2.5-3.5)
TB control efforts.
Prevalence (includes HIV+TB) 2,600 (1,800-3,700) 211 (143-294)
The WHO has set International Standards for
Incidence (inch.ides HIV+ TB) 2,100 (2,000-2,300) 171 (162-184)
Tuberculosis Care. These standards are intended to facilitate
the effective engagement of all care-providers in delivering Incidence (HIV+TB only) 120 (100-140) 9.7 (8.3-11)
high-quality care for patients of all ages, including those Case detection, all forms (%) 58 (54-61)
with smear-positive, smear-negative, extrapulmonary [ Estimates of MOR-TB burden 2013
tuberculosis, drug-resistant tuberculosis, and tuberculosis
combined with HIV infection. The basic principles of care for New Retreatment I
people with, or suspected of having tuberculosis are the
same worldwide. The standards are intended to be
3 of TB cases with MDR-TB
MDR-TB cases among
2.2 (1.9-2.6)
20,000
15 (11-19)
41,000
j
complementary to local and national tuberculosis control notified pulmonary TB cases (17,000-24,000) (30,000-52,000
policies that are consistent with WHO recommendations.
They are not intended to replace local guidelines. There are
j TB case notifications 2013
I
6 standards for diagnosis, 9 standards for treatment and 2 IPulmonary, bacteriologically New Relapse I
standards for public health responsibilities. Please refer to 621,762 102,660
WHO publication : Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 5, confirmed
dated 3rd Feb. 2006 for further details. Pulmonary, clinically diagnosed 292,926
The WHO has launched global plan for Stop TB Strategy Extrapulmonary 226,557
(2006-2015), with the objective of reducing incidence of
Total new and relapse 1,243,905
tuberculosis. Please refer to page 200 for further details.
Previously treated, excluding 171,712
INDIA relapses
Total cases notified 1,415,617
India is the highest TB burden country in the world in
terms of absolute number of incident cases that occur each Among 1,243,905 new and relapse cases:
year. It accounts for one-fourth of the estimated global 64,726 (5%) cases aged under 15 years.
incident TB cases in 2013. Reported cases of RR-/MDR-TB 2013 I
As per WHO estimations, tuberculosis prevalence per lac
population has reduced from 465 in year 1990 to 211 in
Total I
2013. In absolute numbers, prevalence has reduced from Cases tested for RR-/MDR-TB 248,341
40 lacs to 26 lacs annually. Incidence per lac population has Laboratory-confirmed RR-/MDR-TB cases 35,385
reduced from 216 in year 1990 to 171in2013. Tuberculosis Patients started on MDR-TB treatment 20,763
mortality has reduced from 38 per lac population in 1990 to
19 in 2013. In absolute numbers, mortality due to TB has
ITB/HN2013 I
reduced from 3.3 lacs to 2.4 lacs annually. Among the new
TB cases, 5 per cent of patients were in paediatric age-group
I Number (%)1
TB patients with known HIV status 887,903 (63)
(0-14 years). HIV among estimated incident cases of TB HIV-positive TB patients 44,027 (5)
was about 5 per cent. MOR-TB among notified new HIV-positive TB patients on co-trimoxazole 41,827 (95)
pulmonory TB patients was about 2.2 per cent, and among preventive therapy (CPT)
retreatment cases was about 15 per cent (4). HIV-positive TB patients on antiretroviral 38,754 (88)
The first nation-wide standardized tuberculin survey was therapy (ART)
carried out during the period 2000-2003. For the purpose HIV-positive people screened for TB 1,063,644
of survey, country was stratified into 4 zones (north, west,
Treatment success rate(%)
south and east). An identical methodology of sampling was
used across all zones to estimate ART! (annual risk of TB New and relapse cases registered in 2012 88
infection), allowing for stratified analysis for children with Previously treated cases, excluding relapse, registered in 2012 74
and without BCG scar. The survey showed the national HIV-positive TB cases, all types, registered in 2012 77
ART! was about 1.5 per cent. The second survey (2009- RR-/MDR-TB cases started on second-line treatment in 2011 50
2010) shows that the national ART! is 1.1 per cent, but the
sample size of survey 2 was substantially smaller (5). The Source : (1)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
AGE DISTRIBUTION : In India tuberculosis is more 1. Incidence is defined as the number of new and
prevalent in adults than in children. It affects adults in the recurrent (relapse) episodes of TB (all forms) occurring in a
most productive age group (15-54 years). More than 80 per given year. Recurrent episodes are defined as a new episode
cent of TB cases are in this age group, as shown in Table 2. of TB in people who have had TB in the past and for whom
there was bacteriological confirmation of cure and/or
TABLE 2 documentation that treatment was completed. Relapse cases
Percentage of new smear positive cases are referred to as recurrent cases because the term is more
in different age groups (2006) useful when explaining the estimation of TB incidence.
Recurrent cases may be true relapses or a new episode of TB
caused by reinfection. In current case definitions, both
2.0 relapse cases and patients who require a change in
20.9 treatment are called 'retreatment cases'. However, people
22.50 with a continuing episode of TB that requires a treatment
change are prevalent cases, not incident cases.
1,20,481 20.32
96,727 16.32 2. Prevalence is defined as the number of TB cases (all
forms) at a given point in time. It is the best available
66,617 11.24 practical index to estimate the case load in a community.
39,341 6.63 The age-specific prevalence of patients is considered the
most relevant index.
THE ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL BURDEN OF DISEASE : 3. Mortality from TB is defined as the number of deaths
Besides the disease burden, TB also causes an enormous caused by TB in HIV-negative people, according to the latest
socio-economic burden to India. TB primarily affects people revision of the International Classification of Diseases
in their most productive years of life. While two-thirds of the (ICD-10). TB deaths among HIV-positive people are
cases are male, TB takes disproportionately larger toll classified as HIV deaths in ICD-10. For this reason, estimates
among young females, with more than 50 per cent of female of deaths from TB in HIV-positive people are presented
cases occurring before the age of 34 years (7). separately from those in HIV-negative people.
4. The case fatality rate is· the risk of death from TB
Tuberculosis kills more women in reproductive age group
than all causes of maternal mortality combined, and it may among people with active TB disease.
create more orphans than any other infectious disease. 5. Th·e case notification rate refers to new and
Nearly one-third of female infertility in India, is caused by recurrent episodes of TB notified to WHO for a given year,
tuberculosis. The indirect impact of tuberculosis on children expressed per 100,000 population. The case notification
is considerable, as nearly 3 lacs children of tuberculosis rate for new and recurrent TB is important in the estimation
patients, either leave the school or take up employment to of TB incidence. In some countries, however, information on
help support their families (6). A patient of tuberculosis treatment history may be missing for some cases. When data
takes an average of three to four months to recuperate, on treatment history are not available, recurrent cases
losing that much income. The loss is disastrous for those cannot be distinguished from cases whose treatment was
struggling against poverty. They are most likely to be changed, since both are registered and reported in the
defaulters of treatment. The vast majority (more than 90 per category "retreatment". Patients reported in the "unknown
cent) of the economic burden of TB in India is caused by the history" category are considered incident TB episodes (new
loss of life rather than morbidity. or relapse). This is a change from previous years in view of
In India, tuberculosis is mainly a disease of the poor. The past difficulties to estimate with NTPs the proportion of true
majority of its victims are migrant labourers, slum dwellers, new, or relapse TB episodes in this category of patients.
residents of backward areas and tribal pockets. Poor living 6. Case detection rate : The case detection rate is
conditions, malnutrition, shanty housing and overcrowding calculated as the number of notification of new and relapse
are the main reasons for the spread of the disease (6). cases in a year divided by the estimated incidence of such
HIV increases a person's susceptibility to tuberculosis cases in the same year.
infection, and tuberculosis is one of the earliest 7. Prevalence of drug-resistant cases : It is the
opportunistic disease to develop amongst persons infected prevalence of patient excreting tubercle bacilli resistant to
with HIV. It increases morbidity and mortality in HIV anti-tuberculosis drugs. This index is directly related to
infected persons. HIV is the most potent risk factor for chemotherapy.
progression of TB infection to disease. (a) Prevalence of infection : It is the percentage of
Since death rate is declining and the disease is showing a individuals who show a positive reaction to the standard
decline in younger age groups, epidemiologists are tuberculin test. When the test is done in defined age-groups,
beginning to think that perhaps we may have crossed the it yields age-specific prevalence which is a far superior
peak of the secular epidemic curve and are somewhere at indicator than the mere percentage of positive reactors in
the beginning of the declining limb. the total population (8). Prevalence represents a cumulative
experience of a population to recent and remote infection
Epidemiological indices (2) with Myco. tuberculosis. It may be mentioned that the
Indices or parameters are needed to measure the interpretation of tuberculin test has become complicated in
tuberculosis problem in a community as well as for planning countries with a high coverage of BCG vaccination at birth,
and evaluation of control measures. Indices are also since most of the vaccinees become positive reactors to
required for international comparison. The following tuberculin test. This presents a problem in identifying true
epidemiological indices are generally used in tuberculosis prevalence of infection. Further, cross-sensitivity to atypical
problem measurement and programme strategy : mycobacteriae, where it occurred, has also caused the
TUBERCULOSIS
prevalence to be over-estimated. Despite these limitations, TB involving the lung parenchyma or the tracheobronchial
tuberculin-testing is widely used for estimating the tree. Miliary TB is classified as PTB because there are lesions
prevalence of tuberculous infection in a population. in the lungs. Tuberculous intra-thoracic lymphadenopathy
(b) Incidence of infection : (Annual Infection Rate) : It is (mediastinal and/or hilar) or tuberculous pleural effusion,
the percentage of population under study who will be newly without radiographic abnormalities in the lungs, constitutes
infected by Mycobacterium tuberculosis among the non- a case of extrapulmonary TB. A patient with both
infected of the preceding survey during the course of one pulmonary and extrapulmonary TB should be classified as a
year. It reflects the annual risk of being infected (or case of PTB.
reinfected) in a given community. In other words, it expresses b. Extrapulmonary tuberculosis (EPTB) refers to any
the attacking force of tuberculosis in a community (9). In bacteriologically confirmed or clinically diagnosed case of
developing countries, every 1 % of annual risk of infection is TB involving organs other than the lungs, e.g. pleura, lymph
said to correspond to 50 new cases of smear-positive nodes, abdomen, genitourinary tract, skin, joints and bones,
pulmonary tuberculosis, per year for 100,000 general meninges.
population (10). Also known as "tuberculin conversion"
index, this parameter is considered one of the best indicators 2. Classification based on history of previous TB
for evaluating the tuberculosis problem and its trend. The treatment (patient registration group)
higher the rate, the greater the problem (9, 11). It may be Classifications based on history of previous TB treatment
mentioned that a good treatment programme, lowers the risk are slightly different from those previously defined. They
of tuberculosis infection in the community. focus only on history of previous treatment and are
independent of bacteriological confirmation or site of
Revised (2013) definitions of tuberculosis cases disease.
and treatment (12)
New patients: Patients who have never been treated for
WHO has issued updated guidance on definitions of TB or have taken anti-TB drugs for less than 1 month.
cases and treatment outcomes and associated reporting
framework in March 2013. These updates were necessary Previously treated patients: Patients who received 1
to accomodate diagnosis using Xpert MTB/RIF and month or more of anti-TB drugs in the past. They are further
other WHO-endorsed molecular tests, as well as offering classified by the outcome of their most recent course of
an opportunity to improve aspects of the existing {2006) treatment as follows:
framework, such as inclusion of more comprehensive a. Relapse patients have previously been treated for TB,
reporting of TB cases among children. The updated were declared cured or treatment completed at the end of
definitions will be used from 2014 in global data their most recent course of treatment, and are now
collection (2). diagnosed with a recurrent episode of TB (either a true
Presumptive case: Presumptive TB refers to a patient who relapse or a new episode of TB caused by reinfection).
presents with symptoms or signs suggestive of TB b. Treatment after failure patients are those who have
(previously known as a TB suspect). previously been treated for TB and whose treatment failed at
the end of their. most recent course of treatment.
A. CASE DEFINITIONS c. Treatment after loss to follow-up patients have
a. A bacteriologically confirmed TB case is one from previously been treated for TB and were declared lost to
whom a biological specimen is positive by smear fo1101.V-UP at the end of their most recent course of treatment.
microscopy, culture or WRD (such as Xpert MTB/RIF). All (These were previously known as treatment after default
such cases should be notified, regardless of whether TB patients.)
treatment has started. d. Other previously treated patients are those who have
b. A clinically diagnosed TB case is one who does not previously been treated for TB but whose outcome after
fulfil the criteria for bacteriological confirmation but has their most recent course of treatment is unknown or
been diagnosed with active TB by a clinician or other undocumented.
medical practitioner who has decided to give the patient a e. Patients with unknown previous· TB treatment history
full course of TB treatment. This definition includes cases do not fit into any of the categories listed above. New and
diagnosed on the basis of X-ray abnormalities or suggestive relapse cases of TB are incident TB cases.
histology and extrapulmonary cases without laboratory
confirmation. Clinically diagnosed cases subsequently found 3. Classification based on drug resistance
to be bacteriologically positive (before or after starting
treatment) should be reclassified as bacteriologically Cases are classified in categories based on drug
confirmed. susceptibility testing (DST) of clinical isolates confirmed to
be M. tuberculosis:
Bacteriologically confirmed or clinically diagnosed cases
of TB are also classified according to: a. Monoresistance: resistance to one first-line anti-TB
drug only.
1. anatomical site of disease;
b. Polydrug resistance: resistance to more than one first-
2. history of previous treatment; line anti-TB drug (other than both isoniazid and rifampicin).
3. drug resistance; c. Multidrug resistance: resistance to at least both
4. HIV status. isoniazid and rifampicin.
d. Extensive drug resistance: resistance to any
1. Classification based on anatomical site of disease fluoroquinolone and at least one of three second-line
a. Pulmonary tuberculosis (PTB) refers to any injectable drugs (capreomycin, kanamycin and amikacin), in
bacteriologically confirmed or clinically diagnosed case of addition to multidrug resistance.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
e. Rifampicin resistance: resistance to rifampicin detected Treatment A TB patient who completed treatment without
using phenotypic or genotypic methods, with or without completed evidence of failure BUT with no record to show
resistance to other anti-TB drugs. It includes any resistance that sputum smear or culture results in the last
to rifampicin, whether monoresistance, multidrug resistance, month of treatment and on at least one previous
polydrug resistance or extensive drug resistance. occasion were negative, either because tests were
not done or because results are unavailable.
These categories are not all mutually exclusive. When Treatment failed A TB patient whose sputum smear or culture is
enumerating rifampicin-resistant TB (RR-TB), for instance, positive at month 5 or later during treatment.
multidrug-resistant TB (MDR-TB) and extensively drug- Died A TB patient who dies for any reason before
resistant TB (XDR-TB) are also included. While it has been starting or during the course of treatment.
the practice until now to limit the definitions of Lost to follow-up A TB patient who did not start treatment or whose
monoresistance and polydrug resistance to first-line drugs treatment was interrupted for 2 consecutive
only, future drug regimens may make it important to classify months or more.
patients by their strain resistance patterns to Not evaluated A TB patient for whom no treatment outcome is
fluoroquinolones, second-line injectable agents and any assigned. This includes cases "transferred out" to
another treatment unit as well as cases for whom
other anti-TB drug for which reliable DST becomes the treatment outcome is unknown to the reporting
available. unit.
Treatment success The sum of cured and treatment completed.
4. Classification based on HIV status Cohort A group of patients in whom TB has been
a. HIV-positive TB patient refers to any bacteriologically diagnosed, and who were registered for treatment
confirmed or clinically diagnosed case of TB who has a during a specified time period (e.g. the cohort of
positive result from HIV testing conducted at the time of TB new smear-positive cases registered in the calendar
year 2011 ). This group forms the denominator for
diagnosis or other documented evidence of enrolment in calculating treatment outcomes. The sum of the
HIV care, such as enrolment in the pre-ART register or in the treatment outcomes, plus any case for which no
ART register once ART has been started. outcome is recorded (eg. still on treatment) should
b. HIV-negative TB patient refers to any bacteriologically equal the number of cases registered (2).
confirmed or clinically diagnosed case of TB who has a Patients found to have an RR-TB or MDR-TB strain at any
negative result from HIV testing conducted at the time of TB point in time should be started on an adequate second-line
diagnosis. Any HIV-negative TB patient subsequently found drug regimen. These cases are excluded from the main TB
to be HIV-positive should be reclassified accordingly.
cohort when calculating treatment outcomes and included
c. HIV status unknown TB patient refers to any only in the second-line TB treatment cohort analysis. If
bacteriologically confirmed or clinically diagnosed case of treatment with a second-line drug regimen is not possible,
TB who has no result of HIV testing and no other the patient is kept in the main TB cohort and assigned an
documented evidence of enrolment in HIV care. If the outcome from above table.
patient's HIV status is subsequently determined, he or she
should be reclassified accordingly. 2. Outcomes for RR-TBIMDR-TB/XDR-TB patients
treated using second-line treatment
B. TREATMENT OUTCOME DEFINITIONS
The new treatment outcome definitions make a clear Outcome Definition
distinction between two types of patients: Cured Treatment completed as recommended by the
patients treated for drug-susceptible TB; national policy without evidence of failure AND
three or more consecutive cultures taken at least 30
patients treated for drug-resistant TB using second- days apart are negative after the intensive phase.•
line treatment (defined as combination chemotherapy Treatment Treatment completed as recommended by the
for drug-resistant tuberculosis which includes drugs completed national policy without evidence of failure BUT no
other than those in Group 1 (see page 187). record that three or more consecutive cultures
The two groups are mutually exclusive. Any patient found taken at least 30 days apart are negative after the
intensive phase.•
to have drug-resistant TB and placed on second-line
Treatment failed Treatment terminated or need for permanent
treatment is removed from the drug-suscepitble TB outcome regimen change of at least two anti-TB drugs
cohort. This means that management of the standard TB because of:
register and of the second-line TB treatment register needs - lack of eonversionb by the end of the intensive
to be coordinated to ensure proper accounting of the phase,• or
outcomes of treatment. bacteriological reversion° in the continuation
phase after conversionb to negative, or
1. Treatment outcomes for TB patients (excluding evidence of additional acquired resistance to
patients treated for RR-TB or MDR-TB) fluoroquinolones or second-line injectable
drugs, or
All bacteriologically confirmed and clinically diagnosed - adverse drug reactions (AD Rs).
TB cases should be assigned an outcome from this list Died A patient who dies for any reason during the
except those with RR-TB or MDR-TB, who are placed on a course of treatment.
second-line drug regimen. Lost to follow-up A patient whose treatment was interrupted for
2 consecutive months or more.
Outcome Definition Not evaluated A patient for whom no treatment outcome is
Cured A pulmonary TB patient with bacteriologically assigned. (This includes cases "transferred out" to
confirmed TB at the beginning of treatment who another treatment unit and whose treatment
was smear or culture-negative in the last month of outcome is unknown)
treatment and on at least one previous occasion. Treatment success The sum of cured and treatment completed
TUBERCULOSIS
Cohort A ·group of patients where RR-TB has been infection from one case of infectious pulmonary TB. Such
diagnosed (including MOR-TB and XOR-TB), and sources can discharge the bacilli in their sputum for years.
who were started on a full course of a second-line The tubercle bacilli in a human case are usually a mixed
MOR-TB drug regimen during a specified time
period (e.g. the cohort of MOR-TB cases registered
group - some multiply very rapidly and some slowly. The
in the calendar year 2010). This group forms the more rapidly a bacillary strain multiplies the more
denominator for calculating treatment outcomes. susceptible it is to the bactericidal action of
With the revised definitions, any patient found to chemotherapeutic drugs. The slow multipliers are the source
have drug-resistant TB and placed on second-line of persister or dormant bacilli; they can remain alive for
treatment is removed from the drug-susceptible TB years without causing harm to the host, but when conditions
outcome cohort. This means that management of are favourable they may start multiplying again and cause
the basic management unit TB register and of the active disease. That is, they are the seeds of a future relapse
second-line TB treatment register needs to be
coordinated to ensure proper accounting of the (15). (ii) Bovine source: The bovine source of infection is
outcomes of treatment (2). usually infected milk. There is no definite evidence that
bovine tuberculosis is a problem in this country because of
a For Treatment failed, lack of conversion by the end of the intensive the practice of boiling milk before consumption.
phase implies that the patient does not convert within the maximum
duration of intensive phase applied by the programme. lf no maximum (c) COMMUNICABILITY : Patients are infective as long
duration is defined, an 8-month cut-off is proposed. For regimens as they remain untreated. Effective anti-microbial treatment
without a clear distinction between intensive and continuation phases, reduces infectivity by 90 per cent within 48 hours (16).
a cut-off 8 months after the start of treatment is suggested to determine
when the criteria for Cured, Treatment completed and Treatment Host factors
failed start to apply.
b The terms "conversion" and "reversion" of culture as used here are
(a) AGE : Tuberculosis affects all ages. Developing
defined as follows: countries show a sharp rise in infection rates from childhood
Conversion (to negative) : culture is considered to have converted to to adolescence. In India, from an average of 2 per cent in
negative when two consecutive cultures, taken at least 30 days apart, the "0-14 years age group", the infection rate climbs to
are found to be negative. In such a case, the specimen collection date about 20 per cent at age 15-24 years age group (Table 2). In
of the first negative culture is used as the date of conversion. the developed countries, the disease is now more common
Reversion (to positive) : culture is considered to have reverted to in the elderly. (b) SEX : More prevalent in males than in
positive when, after an initial conversion, two consecutive cultures, females. (c) HEREDITY : Tuberculosis is not a hereditary
taken at least 30 days apart, are found to be positive. For the purpose
of defining treatment failed, reversion is considered only when it
disease. However, twin studies (17) indicate that inherited
occurs in the continuation phase. susceptibility is an important risk factor. (d) NUTRITION :
Malnutrition is widely believed to predispose to tuberculosis.
The revised definitions should be applied by the NTP at a As malnutrition is widely prevalent in developing world, it
set changeover date (e.g. 1 January): all cases on treatment on will continue to affect the development of active disease,
that date should be assigned outcomes according to the out- come of treatment and spread of the disease.
revised definitions. This means that patients started on (e) IMMUNITY : Man has no inherited immunity against
treatment in the previous year may be assigned outcomes tuberculosis. It is acquired as a result of natural infection or
according to two different definitions of cured or treatment BCG vaccination. Past infection with atypical mycobacteria
failed, depending on whether they completed treatment is also credited with certain amount of naturally acquired
before or after the changeover date. This may be the most immunity. It is now known that both delayed
practical option for the transition period, given that hypersensitivity and acquired resistance to tuberculosis are
retrospective reassignment of outcomes is not always feasible. cell-mediated responses. In most cases, the cellular
immunity proves adequate to limit further multiplication and
NATURAL HISTORY OF TUBERCULOSIS spread of bacilli.
Agent factors Social factors
(a) AGENT : M. tuberculosis is a facultative intracellular Tuberculosis is a social disease with medical aspects. It
parasite, i.e., it is readily ingested by phagocytes and is has also been described as a barometer of social welfare.
resistant to intracellular killing (13). Of importance to man The social factors include many non-medical factors such as
are the human and bovine strains. The human strain is poor quality of life, poor housing, and overcrowding,
responsible for the vast majority of cases. The bovine strain population explosion, undernutrition, smoking, alcohol
affects mainly cattle and other animals. Regarding virulence, abuse, lack of education, large families, early marriages,
the Indian tubercle bacillus is said to be less virulent than the lack of awareness of causes of illness, etc. All these factors
European bacillus. In recent years, a number of "atypical" are interrelated and contribute to the occurrence and spread
mycobacteria have been isolated from man (14). These have of tuberculosis. In fact, tuberculosis began to decline in the
been classified into four groups - (i) photochromogens (e.g., western world long before the advent of chemotherapeutic
M. Kansasii); (ii) scotochromogens (e.g., M. scrofulaceum); drugs. This has been attributed to improvements in the
(iii) non-photochromogens (e.g., M. interce/lulare)) and, (iv) quality of life.
rapid growers (e.g., M. fortuitum). All these are mainly
saprophytic. Diseases attributed to them have resembled Mode of transmission
pulmonary tuberculosis and chronic cervical lymphadenitis. Tuberculosis is transmitted mainly by droplet infection
(b) SOURCE OF INFECTION : There are two sources of and droplet nuclei generated by sputum-positive patients
infection - human and bovine. (i) Human source: The most with pulmonary tuberculosis. To transmit infection, the
common source of infection is the human case whose particles must be fresh enough to carry a viable organism.
sputum is positive for tubercle bacilli and who has either Coughing generates the largest number of droplets of all
received no treatment or has not been treated fully. An sizes. The frequency and vigour of cough and the ventilation
estimated annual average of 10-15 persons contract the of the environment influence transmission of infection.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Tuberculosis is not transmitted by fomites, such as dishes dayl Sqmple 1 . Patient provides an "on~the-spot" sample
and other articles used by the patients. Sterilization of these ·. · under supervision when presenting to the
articles is therefore of little or no value. Patients with h.earth facilify. Give the patient a sputum ·
extrapulmonary tuberculosis or smear-negative tuberculosis (;qntainer to takehorp.e for ah early. morning
constitute a minimal hazard for transmission of infection sample the.following rnorning; · · ·
.day 2 ·. · sampl~ 2 , Patient brings ~n early morning sample.
Incubation period
The time from receipt of infection to the development of If the patient is coming from a long distance or there is
a positive tuberculin test ranges from 3 to 6 weeks, and likelihood that the patient may default to give a second
thereafter, the development of disease depends upon the sample, 2 spot specimens are collected with a gap of one
closeness of contact, extent of the disease and sputum hour (18).
positivity of the source case (dose of infection) and host-
parasite relationship. Thus the incubation period may be Ziehl-Neelsen acid-fast stain
weeks, months or years. This simple stain detects acid fast bacilli. The procedure is
as follows:
THE CONTROL OF TUBERCULOSIS 1. Fix the smear on the slide by passing the slide with the
Tuberculosis control means reduction in the prevalence smear up about three times slowly through a flame. It
and incidence of disease in the community. can also be done by covering the smear with alcohol and
letting this evaporate.
Since tuberculosis is an infectious disease, the basic
principles of prevention and control are the same as for any 2. Cover with carbol fuchsin, steam gently for 5 minutes
other infectious disease. The control measures consist of a over direct flame (or for 20 minutes over a water bath).
curative component namely case finding and treatment; Do not permit slide to boil or dry out.
and a preventive component namely BCG vaccination. 3. Wash with deionized water.
These are the two fundamental components of a 4. Decolourize in 3.0 per cent acid-alcohol (95 per cent
national tuberculosis programme. The most powerful ethanol and 3.0 per cent hydrochloric acid) until only a
weapon, however, is the combination of case-finding and faint pink colour remains.
treatment.
5. Wash with water.
Case-finding 6. Counter stain for 1 minute with Loeffler's methylene
blue.
a. THE CASE
7. Wash with deionized water and let it dry.
The first step in a tuberculosis control programme is early
detection of sputum-positive cases. This should be an Slide reporting (19)
intensive, on-going programme.
The number of bacilli seen in a smear reflects disease
b. TARGET GROUP severity and patient infectivity. Therefore, it is important to
record the number of bacilli seen on each smear. The table
An overwhelming majority of patients of pulmonary below shows the standard method of reporting using 1000 X
tuberculosis have one or more of the symptoms referable to magnification.
chest, such as persistent cough and fever, and many of them
(over 60 per cent) seek medical advice on their own
initiative. The chest symptoms often develop early, that is
before the disease has gone on to an advanced stage. This is No AFB per lOO·oil immersion fields 0
the most fertile group for case-finding. 1-9 AFB per 100 oil immersion fields scanty (or number
AFB seen)
c. CASE-FINDING TOOLS 10-99 AFB per 100 oil immersion fields + (1+)
(i) Sputum examination : Sputum smear examination 1-10 AFB per oil immersion field ++ (2+)
by direct microscopy is now considered the method of >10' AFB per oil immersion field +++ (3+)
choice. The reliability, cheapness and ease of direct
microscopic examination has made it number one case- Laboratory technicians should examine both the sputum
finding method all over the world. It enables us to discover samples from each TB suspect. They must record the result
the epidemiologically most important cases of pulmonary of each sputum sample with the laboratory reference
tuberculosis, i.e., those excreting tubercle bacilli in their number in the laboratory register and on the sputum request
sputum. This is the group which contributes most of the new form. Results as indicated above are made available to the
cases to the "pool of infection" every year. clinician who can then categorize the patient. It is advised
Collection of sputum samples that the smear examined by one microscopist should not
exceed 20 per day as visual fatigue leads to a deterioration
A pulmonary tuberculosis suspect should submit two of reading quality (20).
sputum samples for microscopy. The chances of finding
TB bacilli are greater with two samples than with one One positive specimen out of the two is enough to
sample. Secretions build up in the airways overnight. So an declare a patient as smear positive TB. Smear positive TB is
early morning sputum sample is more likely to contain TB further classified as new or retreatment cases, based on
bacilli than one taken later in the day. It may be difficult for their previous treatment history, and appropriate therapy is
an out-patient to provide two early morning sputum prescribed. Patients in whom both specimens are smear
samples. Therefore in practice an out-patient usually negative should be prescribed symptomatic treatment and
provides sputum samples as follows: broad-spectrum antibiotic for 10-14 days. In such cases
TUBERCULOSIS
antibiotics such as fluoroquinolones (ciprofloxacin, Z-N light microscopy in both high and low-volume
ofloxacin, etc.), rifampicin or streptomycin, which are active laboratories (20).
against TB, should not be used. Most patients are likely to
improve with antibiotics if they are not suffering from TB. If Radiography
the symptoms persist after a course of broad-spectrum Chest X-rays are useful for the diagnosis of smear
antibiotic, repeat sputum smear examination (2 samples) negative pulmonary TB and TB in children. It is not
must be done for such patients. If one or more smears are routinely indicated in smear-postive cases. X-rays are
positive, the patient is diagnosed as having smear-positive valuable tools for the diagnosis of pleural and pericardia!
pulmonary TB. If none of the repeat sputum specimen is effusion, especially in early stages of the disease when
positive, a chest X-ray is taken, and if findings of the X-ray clinical signs are minimal. It is essential in the diagnosis of
are consistent with pulmonary TB, the patient is diagnosed miliary TB. The other indications are frequent or severe
as a case of sputum-negative pulmonary TB (7). haemoptysis to exclude bronchiectasis or aspergilloma and
Sputum smear microscopy for tubercle bacilli is positive in patients needing specific treatment for pneumothorax.
when there are at least 10,000 organisms present per ml of
sputum. The sputum smear positivity rate in TB/HIV patient Sputum culture (21)
depends on the degree of immunocompromise. If the degree Isolation of mycobacteria from clinical samples by culture
of immunocompromise is mild, the likelihood of positive still represents the corner-stone on which definitive
sputum smear is similar to HIV negative patient. If diagnosis of tuberculosis and other mycobacterioses relies.
immunocompromise is severe, the likelihood of positive At present, mycobacterial culture can be performed on
sputum smear is decreased because of decreased conventional egg based solid medium such as Lowenstein-
inflammation in lungs (19). Jensen medium and agar based ones, such as Middle brook
False-positive results of sputum smear 7H10 or 7Hl 1 and liquid media such as Kirchner's or
Middle brook 7H9 broth. The major constraint of culturing
microscopy mycobacteria in conventional media is its slow growth which
A false-positive result means that the sputum smear result necessitates a mean incubation period of at least 4 weeks.
is positive even though the patient does not really have The drug susceptibility tests to anti-tuberculosis drugs
sputum smear-positive PTB. This may arise because of the require additional 4 weeks. Most of the laboratories in the
following: red stain retained by scratches on the slide; developing world rely on solid media for culture of
accidental transfer of AFBs from a positive slide to a mycobacteria. The choice and preparation of specimens by
negative one; contamination of the slide or smear by various pretreatment procedures has tremendous influence
environmental mycobacteria; presence of various particles on the sensitivity of results. The positively of culture largely
that are acid-fast (e.g. food particles, precipitates, other dependens on the technique of decontamination used by
microorganisms). various laboratories, viz the chemicals used for
decontamination and the centrifugation method adopted for
False-negative results of sputum smear
processing specimens for culturing mycobacteria by
microscopy inoculating into solid or liquid media.
A false-negative result means that the sputum smear Although a combination of solid and liquid media is
result is negative even though the patient really does have currently the gold standard for the primary isolation of
sputum smear-positive PTB. This may arise because of mycobacteria, a few modern, rapid methods are also
problems in collecting (patient provides inadequate sample,
available. These include micro colony detection on solid
inappropriate sputum container used or sputum stored too
long before smear microscopy), processing (faulty sampling media (including the rapid slide culture technique), septi-
of sputum for smear or faulty smear preparation and check AFB method, microscopic observation of in-broth
staining), or interpreting sputum smears (inadequate time culture (MODS), the BACTEC 460 radiometric system,
spent examining smear or inadequate attention to smear BACTEC MGIT 960 system {Becton Dickinson), MB/BaCT
examination), or because of administrative errors system (Organon Teknika), and the ESP II culture system.
{misidentification of patient, incorrect labelling of sample or
mistakes in documentation). Micro colony detection on solid media (21)
In this method, plates poured with thin layer of middle
Fluorescence microscopy brook 7Hll agar medium are incubated and examined
Fluorescence microscopy is mainly used in industralized microscopically on alternate days for the first 2 days and less
countries. It is performed with auramine stain. The frequently thereafter. In less than 7 days, micro colonies of
advantage of FA microscopy is from the speed of M. tuberculosis can be detected. Though this method is less
.examination. The field of view is 5-10 times bigger. expensive and requires about half the time needed for
Scanning of one length of smear will require only 1-2 conventional culture, the recovery of mycobacteria is less
minutes. efficient and it is labour intensive. Since M. tuberculosis
grows more rapidly in liquid medium forming strings and
Light-emitting diode fluorescence microscopy (LEDs) tangles, which can be observed under the inverted light
LEDs provide a much less expensive light source for microscope with 40x magnification, this method is a better
fluorescence microscopy. In a recent WHO evaluation, the alternative for culturing tubercle bacilli.
diagnostic accuracy of LED microscopy was found to be
Radiometric BACTEC 460 TB method (21)
comparable to that of conventional fluorescence microscopy
and superior to that of conventional Ziehl-Neelsen This technique is specific for mycobacterial growth,
microscopy. It is therefore recommended that LED wherein C labeled palmitic acid in 7H12 medium is used.
microscopy be phased in as an alternative to conventional This system detects the presence of mycobacteria based on
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
their metabolism rather than visible growth. When th~ Cartridge based nucleic acid amplification test
C labeled substrate present in the medium is metabolized The second generation NAAT-based TB diagnostics offer
Co 2 · is produced and measured by the BACTEC systerr: the prospect of very high sensitivity, approaching that of
instrument and reported in terms of growth index (GI) value. liquid culture - the current gold standard for TB diagnosis.
The BACTEC system is also useful in the identification of In addition, some versions of NAAT also provide
M. tuberculosis using specific inhibitor, para-nitro-a-
information on drug susceptibility to rifampicin, which is a
acetylamino-b-hydroxypro-piophenone. Using the same
surrogate marker in most countries for identification
system, drug susceptibility tests can also be performed for all
of patients who are most likely to have MDR-TB, thus
the anti-tuberculosis drugs when sufficient GI is observed.
Mycobacteria in clinical samples can be detected in half the allowing the early initiation of standardized 2nd line TB
treatment (4).
time compared to conventional culture methods.
If the second test is negative, consider the person THE FIRST-LINE DRUGS
uninfected.
BACTERICIDAL DRUGS
The validity of tuberculin test, like all medical tests, is
subject to variability. It is limited by lack of specificity. Apart Rifampicin (RMP)
from errors associated with the mode of administration,
reading of results and the test material used, there are other RMP is a powerful bactericidal drug. It is a better
factors such as cross-reactions due to sensitization by other sterilizing agent than INH. It permeates all tissue membranes
mycobacteria, which should be taken into account. In including the blood-brain and placental barriers. It is
countries with a high coverage of BCG, which also produces equally effective against intracellular as well as extracellular
tuberculin hypersensitivity, tuberculin test has lost its bacilli. It is the only bactericidal drug active against the
sensitivity as an indicator of the "true" prevalence of "persisters" or dormant bacilli which are found in the solid
infection. The true prevalence rates of infection may be caseous lesions, all other drugs being inactive (25). In this
exaggerated by infection with atypical mycobacteria as well regard, it has a distinct advantage over INH. Rifampicin is of
as the "boosting effect" of a second dose of tuberculin special value when the bacilli resists other drugs. In
producing a larger reaction than the first (24). combination with INH, it can cure even extensive
tuberculosis, in about 9 months.
It is often assumed that delayed hypersensitivity as
. measured by tuberculin testing is a correlate of the RMP is used only as oral drug. It is so well absorbed that
protective immune response. But evidence indicates that there is little need for parenteral administration. The dose
this hypersensitivity is irrelevant to the ability of the host to should be taken at least one hour before or 2 hours after
combat the disease. Despite these limitations, the tuberculin food because absorption is reduced by food. It is never used
test continues to be the only tool for measuring the alone for the treatment of tuberculosis, but always used in
prevalence of tuberculous infection in a community. It has combination with INH or another drug.
been aptly said that tuberculin test "must be approached Many patients develop nausea at the start of treatment,
with respect, administered with care, read with deliberation but this passes off. The toxic effects include hepatotoxicity,
and interpreted with sentient discrimination". gastritis, influenza-like illness, purpura, thrombocytopenia
Case-finding should not be an end in itself. It is of little and nephrotoxicity. The patient should be told that the drug
value as a control measure unless followed by chemotherapy. will turn the urine red; this can be used as test of compliance.
Resources and efforts should be directed towards primary PAS delays its absorption; hence concurrent
health care, rather than irrational case finding. administration with PAS should be avoided. If RMP is
Please refer to chapter 7 for the flow chart for diagnosis stopped for some reason, it should not be restarted within 3
of tuberculosis in adults, as followed by RNTCP. weeks to avoid hypersensitivity.
Chemotherapy INH
The development of effective treatment for tuberculosis INH ranks among the most powerful drugs in the
has been one of the most significant advances during this treatment of tuberculosis. It can easily penetrate the cell
century. With the evolution of controlled trials (see page 81), membrane, and is thus active against intracellular and
the chemotherapy of tuberculosis is now more rationally extracellular bacilli. Its action is most marked on rapidly
based, than in the treatment of other infectious diseases. multiplying bacilli. It is less active against slow multipliers.
INH gets widely distributed in the body including CSF. Its
Chemotherapy is indicated in every case of active ease of administration, freedom from toxicity and low cost
tuberculosis. The objective of treatment is cure - that is, the makes it an ideal component for any drug regimen.
elimination of both the fast and slowly multiplying bacilli
(including the persisters) from the patient's body. The effects INH should be given as a single dose. INH reaches its
of chemotherapy are judged not by the anatomic healing of peak level in blood 1 to 2 hours after the dose. It has been
lesions, but mainly by the elimination of bacilli from the found that its peak level in serum is more important than
patient's sputum. Chemotherapy should be easily available, sustained inhibitory level. It is for this reason, INH should
free of charge to every patient detected. It should be not be given in divided doses (26).
adequate, appropriate and applied to the entire pool of Patient may experience gastrointestinal irritation,
infectors in the community. Patient compliance is critically peripheral neuropathy, blood dyscrasias, hyperglycaemia
important; the patient must take the correct drugs at the and liver damage. Those patients who are slow inactivators
correct dosage for the correct length of time. Incomplete experience a higher incidence of toxicity. The addition of
treatment puts the patient at risk of relapse and the pyridoxine (10-20 mg daily) helps prevent the occurrence of
development of bacterial resistance and, importantly, the peripheral neuropathy.
community at risk of infection with resistant organisms.
Streptomycin
Anti-tuberculosis drugs Streptomycin is bactericidal. It acts entirely on rapidly
There are now twelve or thirteen drugs active against multiplying bacilli. It has been shown that when bacilli are
M. tuberculosis, of which, six are considered to be essential. multiplying rapidly, they come out of the phagocytes and are
An antitubercular drug should satisfy the following criteria : mostly extracellular aod are, therefore, susceptible to
(a) highly effective (b) free from side-effects (c) easy to streptomycin. Streptomycin is less active against slow
administer, and (d) reasonably cheap. The currently used multipliers. It has no action on persisters. It does not
drugs may be classified into two groups : bactericidal and permeate cell walls or normal biological membranes such as
bacteriostatic. The bactericidal drugs kill the bacilli in vivo. meninges or pleura.
The bacteriostatic drugs inhibit the multiplication of the bacilli The daily dose of streptomycin is 0. 75 g in a single
and lead to their destruction by the immune mechanism of the injection. This is a disadvantage because of the organizational
host. A brief review of these drugs is given below. problem involved in the long term treatment. It can cause side-
TUBERCULOSIS
effects which include vestibular damage and nystagmus rather Antituberculosis drugs can also be grouped according to
than deafness. Renal damage may also occur. their efficacy, experience in use and drug class. The different
groups are as follows (27) :
Pyrazinamide
Alternative method of grouping anti-TB agents
This drug is bactericidal and is particularly active against ·.
the slow-multiplying intracellular bacilli which are unaffected Grouping Drugs.
by other drugs. It has been found to increase the sterilizing
ability of rifampicin. Therefore, pyrazinamide has been Groupl: Isoniazid (H); Rifampicin (R);
First-line oral Ethambutol (E); Pyrazinamide (Z)
incorporated in short-course chemotherapy regimens. anti-TB agents
Complications include hepatotoxicity and Group2: Streptomycin (S); Kanamycin (Km);
hyperuricaemia. Pyrazinamide achieves high levels in CSF Injectable Amikacin (Am); Capreomycin (Cm);
and is, therefore, recommended in tuberculous meningitis. anti-TB agents Viomycin (Vm).
Group 3: Ciprofloxacin (Cfx); Ofloxacin (Ofx);
BACTERIOSTATIC DRUGS Fluoroquinolones Levofloxacin (Lvx); Moxifloxacin (Mfx);
Gatifloxacin (Gfx)
Ethambutol Group4: Ethionamide (Eto); Prothionamide (Pto);
Ethambutol is bacteriostatic and is used in combination to Oral second-line Cyclosedne (Cs); Terizadone (Trd);
prevent the emergence of resistance to other drugs. It is given anti-TB agents para-aminosalicylic acid (PAS)
orally. Its major side-effect is retrobulbar neuritis; this however Group5: Clofazimine (Cfz); Linezolid (Lzd);
Agents with unclear Amoxicillin/Clavulanate (Amx/Clv);
does not occur at the usual dosage. Ethambutol has replaced efficacy (not thioacetazone (Thz);
para-aminosalicylic acid (PAS) almost entirely among adults. recommended by imipenem/cilastatin (Ipm/Cln);
WHO for routine use high-dose isoniazid (high-dose H);
THE SECOND-LINE DRUGS in MOR-TB patients) Clarithromycin (Cir)
Fluoroquinolones For dosage of different second-line drugs, kindly refer to
Ciprofloxacin, ofloxacin, levofloxacin, moxifloxacin and page 191.
gatifloxacin are active against M. tuberculosis, even those Most TB patients complete their treatment without any
resistant to other drugs. They are given orally or IV. They are significant drug side-effects. However, a few patients do
useful in treating infections resistant to standard drugs and develop major reactions and it is important to monitor
in cases with relapse. clinically all the patients. A patient who develops one of the
Ethionamide following reactions must never receive that drug again (19) :
:
Ethionamide is structurally related to INH and acts by Readion Drug
inhibiting the mycolic acid synthesis. It is effective against .· responsible
bacilli resistant to other drugs and has proved effective in
infections due to atypical mycobacteria. It is effective against a. Severe rash, agranulocytosis Thioacetazone
b. Hearing loss or disturbed balance Streptomycin
intracellular as well as extracellular organisms.
c. Visual disturbance (poor vision and Ethambutol
Capreomycin colour perception)
d. Renal failure, shock or thrombocytopenia Rifampicin
It is bactericidal. Its mechanism of action, pharmaco- e. Hepatitis Pyrazinamide
kinetics and adverse reactions are similar to those of
streptomycin. It should be administered with caution in Two-phase chemotherapy
presence of renal impairment.
It is well recognized that there are two phases in the
Kanamycin and Amikacin effective treatment of tuberculosis : (i) the first is a short,
They are bactericidal and are active against bacilli aggressive or intense phase, early in the course of treatment,
resistant to streptomycin, INH and cycloserine. lasting 1-3 months. During this intensive phase, three or
more drugs are combined to kill off as many bacilli as
Cycloserine possible. The more rapidly the bacilli are killed initially, the
The drug is mainly bacteriostatic. It is effective against less likely are "persisters" to emerge. The risk of relapse is
bacilli resistant to INH or streptomycin and against atypical also lessened. (ii) the second or "continuation" phase is
mycobacteria, although antitubercular activity is less than aimed at sterilizing the smaller number of dormant or
that of these two drugs. It acts by inhibiting the synthesis of persisting bacilli. In the standard anti-tuberculous therapy,
the bacterial cell wall. the duration of treatment was not less than 18 months to
achieve complete sterilization of the bacilli. With the
Thioacetazone introduction of rifampicin and pyrazinamide, this period is
It is a bacteriostatic drug. It rapidly diffuses into various now successfully reduced to 6-9 months.
body tissues and also crosses the placenta barrier. It is also
secreted in milk. It should never be used in HIV patients as it DOMICILIARY TREATMENT
can cause severe and fatal skin reactions. Side-effects The self-administration of drugs (generally oral drugs) by
include gastrointestinal disturbances, blurring of vision, the patients themselves without recourse to hospitalization is
haemolytic anaemia and urticaria. The incidence of these called domiciliary or ambulatory treatment. The classical
side-effects seem to differ in different ethnic groups. controlled clinical trials (28) carried out at the Tuberculosis
Chemotherapy Centre, Chennai showed that the incidence of
Macrolides tuberculosis was no greater in the contacts of patients treated
Newer macrolides azithromycin and clarithromycin also at home than in the contacts of patients treated in sanatoria.
have action against tubercular bacilli. They are used to treat It is now universally accepted that with good chemotherapy,
atypical mycobacterial infection and cases with relapse. hospital treatment has no advantage over domiciliary
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
treatment, and domiciliary treatment is to be preferred its wider use in developing countries.
because in the long run, it is so much cheaper than hospital There are now a number of short-course regimens of
treatment, and that it can be managed by the primary health 6 months duration that are highly effective, of low toxicity,
care system and the general health services of the country. It and well-tolerated. These potent regimens are based on an
may be mentioned that it was this study, the classical Chennai initial intensive phase with 4 drugs (INH, rifampicin and
Study, that prompted a radical departure from the traditional
pyrazinamide, supplemented by either streptomycin or
sanatorium to ambulatory or domiciliary treatment.
ethambutol} for a period of 2 months, followed by 2 drugs in
the continuation phase, (INH plus rifampicin or
LONG-COURSE REGIMENS thioacetazone} given daily or intermittently. The treatment
The classical (long-course} conventional must be fully supervised and monitored mainly by
chemotherapeutic regimens depended upon the use of INH bacteriological examination.
along with one or two bacteriostatic or "companion" drugs.
The main role of the bacteriostatic drugs was to prevent the DIRECTLY OBSERVED TREATMENT, SHORT
emergence of INH-resistant strains. Sterilization of the lesions COURSE(DOTS)CHEMOTHERAPY
thus depended entirely on INH, and 18 months of treatment
was required to avoid relapses. Two main types of drug DOTS is a strategy to ensure cure by providing the most
regimens were formulated for application in India. These are : effective medicine and confirming that it is taken. It is the
a. daily regimens only strategy which has been documented to be effective
world-wide on a programme basis. In DOTS, during the
b. bi-weekly or intermittent regimens intensive phase of treatment a health worker or other trained
person watches as the patient swallows the drug in his
SHOR~COURSECHEMOTHERAPY
presence. During continuation phase, the patient is issued
For a long time, the standard duration of tuberculosis medicine for one week in a multiblister combipack, of which
chemotherapy was 18 months. In 1972, Wallace Fox and his the first dose is swallowed by the patient in the presence of
colleagues from the British Medical Research Council health worker or trained person. The consumption of
showed that the addition of rifampicin or of pyrazinamide to medicine in the continuation phase is also checked by return
regimens containing INH made it possible to reduce the of empty multiblister combipack, when the patient comes to
duration of treatment. collect medicine for the next week. The drugs are provided
There are a number of advantages of short-course in patient-wise boxes with sufficient shelf-life. In the
chemotherapy, viz. rapid bacteriological conversion, lower programme alternate-day treatment is used.
failure rates and a reduction in the frequency of emergence The cases are divided into two types of categories
of drug-resistant bacilli. Patient compliance is improved, category I and category II. Table 3 shows the type of cases
they become non-infectious earlier. The disadvantage is that included in each kind of category, the treatment regimen
the high cost of short-term chemotherapy militates against and the duration of treatment (29).
TABLE 3
Treatment categories and sputum examination schedule in DOTS chemotherapy in India
TREATMENT REGIMEN SPUTUM EXAMINATIONS FOR PULMONARY TB
Category Pre- Test IF:
of Type of patient Regimen* treatment at result r THEN:
treatment sputum month is
- Start continuation phase, test sputum again at 4 and
New cases New sputum smear-positive 2(HRZE) 3 + 2 6 months#
Category I New sputum smear-negative + + Continue intensive phase for one more month#
Red Box New extra-pulmonary** 4(HR) 3 Complete the treatment in 7 months
New others
Previously Sputum smear-positive Relapse*** 2(HRZES) 3 - Start continuation phase, test sputum again at 5 months
Treated Sputum smear-positive Failure*** + 6 months, completion of treatment#
Category 11 Sputum smear-positive treatment 1 (HRZE) 3 + 3 + Continue intensive phase for one more month, test sputum
Blue Box after default + again at 4 months if sputum is positive send sputum for
others 5 (HRE) 3 culture and drug sensitivity as it might be a case of MDR-TB#
* The number before the letters refers to the number of months of treatment. The subscript after the letters refers to the number of doses per
week. H: lsoniazid (600 mg), R: Rifampicin (450 mg), Z: Pyrazinamide (1500 mg), E: Ethambutol (1200 mg), S: Streptomycin (750 mg).
Patients who weigh more than 60 kg receive additional Rifampicin 150 mg. Patients more than 50 years old receive streptomycin 500 mg.
Patients in categories I and II, who have a positive sputum smear at the end of the initial intensive phase, receive an additional month of
intensive phase treatment.
** Examples of seriously ill extra-pulmonary TB cases are meningitis, disseminated TB, tuberculous pericarditis, peritonitis, bilateral or
extensive pleurisy, spinal TB with neurological complications and intestinal and genito-urinary TB.
*** In rare and exceptional cases, patients who are sputum smear-negative or who have extra-pulmonary disease can have Relapse or
Failure. This diagnosis in all such cases should always be made by an MO and should be supported by culture or histological evidence of
current, active tuberculosis. In these cases, the patient should be categorized as 'Other' and given Category II treatment.
# Any patient treated with Category I who has a positive smear at 5 months of treatment should be considered a Failure and started on
Category II treatment, afresh. If category I sputum smear -ve case fails to improve or if patient develops pulmonary signs and positive smear
at the end of intensive phase, it is considered treatment failure. Start category II treatment and confirm failure by culture and perform DST.
Source : (30, 31)
TUBERCULOSIS
MANAGEMENT OF PATIENTS comply with this regime. The treatment is given as follows :
WHOINTERRUPTTREATMENT (1) Non-DOTS regime 1 (NDl) : For new smear positive
pulmonary seriously ill patients and extrapulmonary
Table 4, 5 and 6 show the management of patients who seriously ill patients 2 (SHE} + 10 (HE)
interrupt the treatment under revised national tuberculosis (2} Non-DOTS regime 2 (ND2} : For smear negative
control programme. pulmonary not seriously ill patients and extra pulmonary
Daily self administered non-DOTS regime is followed in not seriously ill patients - 12 (HE).
exceptional cases when there is adverse reaction to drugs used Please refer to page 180 for the treatment outcome
in short-course chemotherapy or when the patient cannot definitions.
TABLE 4
Management of patients who were smear-negative at diagnosis and who interrupt treatment
TABLE 6
Management or retreatment of smear-positive cases who interrupt treatment (Category II)
Treatment received Length of Doa Result of
before interruption interruption sputum smear sputum smear Outcome Re-registration Treatment
examination examination
Less than 1 month Less than No Continue CAT II*
2 weeks
2-7 weeks No - Start again on CAT II**
8 weeks Yes Positive Default Treatment Start again on
or more After Default CATII**
Negative - - Continue CAT II*
1-2 months Less than No - Continue CAT II*
2 weeks
2-7 weeks Yes Positive 1 extra month of
intensive phase of CAT II
Negative - - Continue CAT II*
8 weeks Yes Positive Default Treatment Start again on
or more After Default CATII**
Negative Continue CAT II*
More than 2 months Less than No Continue CAT II*
2 weeks
2-7 weeks Yes Positive Default** Other Start again on CAT II
Negative - - Continue CAT II*
8 weeks Yes Positive Default Treatment Start again on
or more After Default CAT II
Negative - - Continue CAT II*
* A patient must complete all 36 doses of the initial intensive phase.
** Although this patient does not strictly fit the definition of default, default most closely describes the outcome of this patient, although at
re-registration they should be categorized as 'Other'.
Source · (29)
initiation to their district of residence with a maximum of The reserve/substitute drugs would be used in the
7 day supply of drugs and arrangement for injections in following conditions:
transit. The respective DTO should be informed of the In case the patient was on PAS, PAS will be
patients discharge three days prior to the actual time of replaced with one of the reserve drugs in the regimen
discharge. The DTO will inform the respective MO-PHI and for XOR-TB
the identified DOT provider about the expected discharged If the patient is unable to tolerate one or more of the drugs
of the patient. The monthly drug box and the patient records - If the patient is found to be resistant to Capreomyicn.
will be passed on to the id1mtified DOT provider from the
respective TU. Local arrangements will need to be made for Duration of regimen for XDR-TB (18)
daily injections during the intensive phase. The Regimen for XOR-TB would be of 24-30 months
Regimen for XDR-TB (18) duration, with 6-12 months Intensive Phase (IP) and 18
months Continuation Phase (CP). The change from IP to CP
All XOR-TB patients should also be subject to a repeat full will be done only after achievement of culture conversion i.e.
pre-treatment evaluation, but also including consultation by 2 consecutive negative cultures taken at least one month
a thoracic surgeon for consideration of surgery. MOR-TB apart. In case of delay in culture conversion, the IP can be
patients diagnosed as XOR-TB would be given an outcome extended from 6 months upto a maximum of 12 months. In
of "Switched to regimen for XOR-TB". The decision and case of extension, the DR-TR centre committee, which will be
initiation of regimen for XOR-TB is to be taken by the responsible for initiating and monitoring the regimen for
concerned DR-TB centre committee. XOR-TB, can decide on administering Capreomycin injection
The Intensive Phase (6-12 months) consists of 7 drugs - intermittenly (3 times/week) for the months 7 to 12.
Capreomycin (Cm), PAS, Moxifloxacin (Mfx), High dose Direct observation of treatment remains even more
INH, Clofazimine, Linezolid, and Amoxyclav crucial in XOR-TB as this is the last chance at successful
The Continuation Phase (18 months) consists of 6 drugs - treatment that these patients will have. Because of the use of
PAS, Moxifloxacin (Mfx), High dose INH, Clofazimine, drugs with different toxicity profiles, XOR-TB requires more
intensive monitoring during follow-up.
Linezolid, and Amoxyclav.
Complete blood count with platelets count : weekly in
RNTCP regimen for XDR-TB: first month, then monthly to rule out bone marrow
6-12 Cm, PAS, Mfx, High dose-H, Cfz, Lzd, Amx/Clv/ suppression and anaemia as a side-effect of Llnezolid.
18 PAS, Mfx, High dose-H, Cfz, Lzd, Amx/Clv Kidney function test: monthly creatinine and addition
(Reserve/Substitute drugs : Clarithromycin, Thiacetazone) of monthly serum electrolytes to the monthly
creatinine during the period that Inj. Capreomycin is
The dosage of the drugs would vary as per the weight of being administered.
the patient ( <45 Kg or >45 Kg). All drugs are to be given on - Lever function tests : monthly in IP and 3 monthly
a daily basis. Injections of Capreomycin will be given for 6 during CP.
days/week (not on sundays). All morning doses are to be CXR every 6 months.
supervised by the DOT provider except on sundays. After
taking DOT for morning doses on saturday, next day Management of treatment interruptions and default for
medicines would be given to the patient to be taken at home M/XDR-TB patients
on sunday. Empty blisters of medicines taken unsupervised All efforts should be made to ensure that M/XDR-TB
in the evening, and on sundays are to be collected by DOT patients do not interrupt treatment or default. Action should
provider. be taken to promptly retrieve patients who fail to come for
Regimen for XOR-TB dosage and weight band DOT. The following situations may be seen in case of
recommendations are as follows treatment interruption.
1. Patients in IP!CP who miss doses: All the missed doses
Dosage/day during IP must be completed prior to switching the patient to
Drugs :> Ll.t:; l<rTc
s::45 Kgs CP. Similarly all missed doses during CP must be
1000 mg administered prior to ending treatment.
lnj. Capreomycin (Cm) 750mg
PAS lOgm 12gm 2. Patients who interrupt treatment for less than 2 months
400mg
during IP: When the patient returns to resume treatment the
Moxifloxacin (Mfx) 400mg IP should be continued, however the duration of treatment
High dose INH 600mg 900mg will be extended to complete IP. The follow up cultures
(High dose-H) should be done as per the revised schedule.
Clofazimine (Cfz) 200mg 200 mg
3. Patients who interrupt treatment for less than 2 months
Linezolid (Lzd) 600mg 600mg during CP: When the patient returns to resume treatment,
Amoxyclav {Amx/Clv) 875/125 mg BD 875/125 mg BD the CP should be continued, however the duration of
Pyridoxine lOOmg 100 mg treatment will be extended to complete the CP. The follow
IR"eroe/Sub,;itute dmg'
Clarithromycin {Cir) 500 mgBD 500 mgBD
up cultures should be done as per the revised schedule.
4. Patients who default (interrupt treatment for 2 or more
months) and return back for treatment: Such patients should
I Ihiacetazone (Ibz)# lSQmg 150mg be given an outcome of "default" and then re-registered for
# Depending on availability, not to be given to HIV positive cases.
further treatment which is based on the duration of default
as shown in Fig. 1 and 2. Re-registration of patients will be
Source : (18) done by the DR-TB Centre.
TUBERCULOSIS
FIG. 1 FIG.2
Algorithm for management of M/XDR patients who default and Algorithm for management of M/XDR patients who default and
return for treatment within 6 months of discontinuing return for treatment after 6 months.
regimen for M/XDR-TB
The first quarter in the CP will have two examinations CHILDHOOD TUBERCULOSIS
and the rest 5 will be in the subsequent quarters till the end
of treatment Cases of tuberculosis in children usually represent
between 6-8 per cent of all tuberculosis in the age group of
Two specimens for AFB at the end of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 12,
under 15 years (4). The source of infection to a child is
15, 18, 21, 24 months
usually an adult, often a family member with sputum smear-
- Two specimens for culture at the end of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, positive tuberculosis. The frequency of childhood TB in a
12, 15, 18, 21, 24 months given population depends on : (a) the number of infectious
Monthly weight cases; (b) closeness of contact with an infectious case; (c) the
Chest radiograph during pre-treatment evaluation, end age of child when exposed to TB; and the age structure of
of IP, end of treatment and whenever clinically indicated the population.
Physician evaluation including adverse drug reaction Children rarely have sputum smear-positive TB and it is
monitoring every month for six months, then every three unlikely that they are a powerful source of transmission of TB.
months for two years Tuberculosis in children is mainly due to failure of TB control
S. Creatinine monthly for first 3 months, then every in adults. The risk of infection to a child depends on extent of
3 months during the injectable phase exposure to infectious droplet nuclei. An infant whose mother
- Thyroid Function Test during pre-treatment evaluation has sputum smear-positive PTB has a high chance of
and when indicated becoming infected. The chance of developing disease is
greatest shortly after infection, and steadily decreases as the
Please refer to page 180 for the treatment outcome time goes by. Because of less-developed immune system,
definitions of DOTS-Plus regimen. children under 5 years of age are more prone to develop (up
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
to 20 per cent) the disease mostly within 2 years following to introduce paediatric patient wise boxes (4).
infection (19). The commonest age of childhood TB disease
is 1 to 4 years. Young age is a risk factor for spread of disease Diagnosis of Paediatric TB (0-14 years)
to other parts of the body, i.e. dissemination. A new diagnostic algorithm is developed for pulmonary
In order to simplify the management of paediatric TB, TB, the commonest type of extra pulmonary TB (Lymph node
RNTCP in association with Indian Academy of Paediatrics TB) and for other types of extra-pulmonary TB (Fig. 3 a & b).
(IAP) has described criteria for suspecting TB among a. All efforts should be made to demonstrate bacteriological
children, has separate algorithms for diagnosing pulmonary evidence in the diagnosis of paediatric TB. In cases
TB and peripheral TB lymphadenitis and a strategy for where sputum is not available for examination or sputum
treatment and monitoring patients who are on treatment. In microscopy fails to demonstrate AFB, alternative
brief, TB diagnosis is based on clinical features, smear specimens (gastric lavage, induced sputum, bronco-
examination of sputum where this is available, positive alveolar lavage) should be collected, depending upon
family history, tuberculin skin testing, chest radiography and the feasibility, under the supervision of a paediatrician.
histo-pathological examination as appropriate. The
treatment strategy comprises of components. First, as in b. A positive tuberculin skin test I mantoux positive is
adults, children with TB are classified, categorized, defined as 10 mm or more induration. The optimal
registered and treated with intermittent short-course strength of tuberculin 2 TU (RT 23 or equivalent) is to be
chemotherapy (thrice-weekly therapy from treatment used for diagnosis in children.
initiation to completion), given under direct observation of a - There is no role for inaccurate and inconsistent
treatment provider (DOT provider) and the disease status is diagnostics like serology (IgM, lgG, lgA antibodies
monitored during the course of treatment. Based on their against MTB antigens), various non-validated
pre-treatment weight, children are assigned to one of the commercial PCR tests and BCG test.
pre-treatment weight bands and are treated with good - There is no role of IGRAs in clinical practice for the
quality anti-TB drugs through "ready-to-use" patient-wise diagnosis of TB.
boxes containing the patients' complete course of anti-TB
drugs, made available to every registered TB patient c. Loss of weight was defined as a loss of more than 5% of
according to programme guidelines. India is the first country the highest weight recorded in the past three months.
Sputum examination
Smear negative
·Review for an Repeat X-Ray chest after a course of Review for alternate diagnosis
alternative diagnosis Antibiotic (if not already received) Alternate diagnosis establisheci
FIG. 3b
Diagnostic algorithm for paediatric tuberculosis
Source; (5)
TABLE 9
Treatment categories and regimens for childhood tuberculosis
Categoi-Y C>ftieatment
I
>20we.ek:s
(3) TYPES OF VACCINE : There are two types of BCG
vaccine the liquid (fresh) vaccine and the freeze-dried
vaccine. Freeze-dried vaccine is a more stable preparation
than liquid vaccine with vastly superior keeping qualities.
Present-day vaccines are distributed in the freeze-dried form.
AdviseMTP
BCG vaccine is stable for several weeks at ambient
temperature in a tropical climate, and for up to 1 year if kept
r
MTP
r
Patient unwilling for MTP
away from direct light and stored in a cool environment
preferably refrigerated at a temperature below 10 deg C (33).
The vaccine must be protected from exposure to light
during storage (wrapped up in a double layer of red or black
cloth) and in the field. Normal saline is recommended as a
Start/continue Start modified Cat IV Start modified Cat IV diluent for reconstituting the vaccine, as distilled water may
Cat!V • s 12 weeks - Omit • Omit Kanamycin; cause irritation. The reconstituted vaccine may be used up
Kanamycin and Add PAS till delivery within 3 hours, and the left-over vaccine should be discarded.
Ethionamide; • Replace PAS with
add PAS (4) DOSAGE: For vaccination, the usual strength is 0.1 mg
Kanamyciri after
• > 12 wks ...:Omit delivery arid
in 0.1 ml volume (34). The dose to newborn aged below 4
Kanamycin only; continue till the weeks is 0.05 ml. This is because the skin of newborn is rather
add PAS end of IP thin and an intradermal injection with full dose (0.1 ml) in
• Replace PAS with
some of them might penetrate into deeper tissue and give rise
Kanamycin after to local abscess formation and enlarged regional (axillary)
delivery and lymph nodes.
continue till end (5) ADMINISTRATION The standard procedure
of IP
recommended by WHO is to inject the vaccine intradermally
using a "Tuberculin" syringe {Omega microstat syringe fitted
FIG.4 with a 1 cm steel 26 gauge intradermal needle). The syringe
Management of pregnancy with MDR-TB and needle technique remains the most precise way of
administering the desired dose. All other techniques (e.g.,
In the end it may be stated that the main problem of bifurcated needle, dermo-jet) are reported to be less
chemotherapy today is not the need to introduce new accurate, and do not permit the desired dose to be
regimens or more potent drugs, but to apply the existing injected (35). If the vaccine is injected subcutaneously an
ones successfully. The cornerstone of successful abscess is more likely to develop (36). The site of injection
chemotherapy is adequate and regular drug intake. Patient should be just above the insertion of the left deltoid muscle.
compliance is critically important throughout the prescribed If it is injected too high, too forward or too backward, the
period of treatment. All other considerations are secondary. adjacent lymph nodes may become involved and tender.
TUBERCULOSIS
A satisfactory injection should produce a wheal of 5 mm in planned, controlled trials have been conducted in various
diameter. parts of the world, including the "Tuberculosis Prevention
The vaccine must not be contaminated with an antiseptic Trial" in South India (43, 44).
or detergent. If alcohol is used to swab the skin, it must be Studies have shown that the range of protection offered
allowed to evaporate before the vaccine is given. by BCG varied from 0 to 80 per cent in different parts of the
(6) AGE : The national vaccination policies differ from world. The full explanation for the varying degrees of
country to country (34). In countries where tuberculosis is protection has yet to be found (45, 46). One suggestion for
prevalent and the risk of childhood infection is high (as in which there is an increasing epidemiological support, is that
India), the national policy is to administer BCG very early in prior exposure to some non-tuberculous environmental
infancy either at birth (for institutional deliveries) or at 6 mycobacteria (e.g., M. vaccae, M. non-chromogenicum)
weeks of age simultaneously with other immunizing agents may have conferred partial immunity on the population and
such as DPT and polio. BCG administered early in life thus masked the potential benefit of BCG vaccination (47).
provides a high level of protection, particularly against the There is also evidence that exposure to other species (e.g.,
severe forms of childhood tuberculosis and tuberculous M. kansacii, M. scrofulaceus) have an antagonistic action
meningitis. against BCG (48). This may be one reason why BCG was
not found to be protective in the South Indian trial (38).
In countries with a low prevalence of tuberculosis, However, infants and young children, BCG-vaccinated
perhaps there is a diminishing need for widespread BCG before they had contact with environmental mycobacteria,
vaccination. In this situation, it would seem reasonable to derived protection.
restrict BCG vaccination to high risk groups, for example,
hospital personnel and tuberculin-negative contacts of There is a large body of evidence which supports the
known cases of tuberculosis particularly multi-drug resistant conclusion that BCG gives an appreciable degree of
TB (MDR-TB) (33, 37). protection against childhood tuberculosis (48). The WHO,
on the basis of an extended review of BCG including the
(7) PHENOMENA AFTER VACCINATION : Two to three South Indian trial (50) holds that it would seem
weeks after a correct intradermal injection of a potent
unreasonable to stop current BCG vaccination programmes
vaccine, a papule develops at the site of vaccination. It
(46) and recommends that the use of BCG should be
increases slowly in size and reaches a diameter of about 4 to
continued as an antituberculosis measure (50).
8 mm in about 5 weeks. It then subsides or breaks into a
shallow ulcer, rarely open, but usually seen covered with a (10) REVACCINATION : The duration of protection
crust. Healing occurs spontaneously within 6 to 12 weeks conferred by BCG is a matter of dispute. Even 90 years after
leaving a permanent, tiny, round scar, typically 4-8 mm in the development of the vaccine, it is not known whether
diameter. This is a normal reaction (38). However, with booster doses are indicated or advisable. In fact, BCG
overdosage, the local lesion and the later scar may be revaccination has not been included in the official
considerably larger and of irregular size. Normally the immunization schedule in India under the expanded
individual becomes Mantoux-positive after a period of 8 programme on immunization.
weeks has elapsed, but sometimes about 14 weeks are (11) CONTRAINDICATIONS Unless specifically
needed. indicated, BCG should not be given to patients suffering from
(8) COMPLICATIONS : BCG has been associated with generalized eczema, infective dermatosis,
adverse reactions which include : prolonged severe ulceration hypogammaglobulinaemia, to those with a history of
at the site of vaccination, suppurative lymphadenitis, deficient immunity (symptomatic HIV infection, known or
osteomyelitis, disseminated BCG infection and death. suspected congenital immunodeficiency, leukaemia,
Ulceration and lymphadenitis occur in 1-10 per cent of lymphoma or generalized malignant diseases), patients under
vaccinations, and disseminated infection occurs in less than immunosuppressive treatment (corticosteroids, alkylating
one per million vaccinations. The disseminated infection is agents, antimetabolites, radiation), and in pregnancy. The
usually associated with severe abnormalities of cellular effect of BCG may be exaggerated in these patients.
immunity. The risk of adverse reactions is related to the BCG (12) DIRECT BCG VACCINATION : Direct BCG
strain used by different manufacturers, the dose, the age of the vaccination, i.e., vaccination without a prior tuberculin test,
child, the method of immunization and the skill of the has been adopted as a national policy in many developing
vaccinator (39). countries, including India. It permits a more rapid and
If there is a local abscess formation, it should be treated by complete coverage of the eligible population, while reducing
aspiration, in case it does not clear spontaneously. If this is the cost. No adverse effects have been reported even if BCG
not successful, it should be incised and treated with local is given to tuberculin-positive reactors (38). However, it is
applications daily with PAS or INH powder. There is no need sound practice to administer BCG during infancy before the
for systemic treatment with INH. The patient should be child has had contact with environmental mycobacteria, than
assured of the harmless nature of the lesion (40). In order to to resort to direct BCG at a later date, when the benefits of
avoid these complications, the vaccination should be strictly BCG are doubtful as shown by the South Indian trial (49).
intradermal and no other injection should be given for at least (13) IMPACT : BCG vaccination is less effective in
6 months into the arm which received BCG vaccine (41). controlling tuberculosis as compared to active case-finding
(9) PROTECTIVE VALUE : The duration of protection is and chemotherapy, as BCG offers only partial protection. In
from 15 to 20 years. The local BCG infection generates an 1982, a WHO Expert Committee (51) concluded that
immunity response, which is associated with the although BCG vaccination of uninfected individuals (usually
development of tuberculin hypersensitivity and with it, children) can prevent tuberculosis in them, it can have only
possibly, some immunity. The first prospective control trial a relatively small epidemiological effect in that it will not
of BCG showed it to be 80 per cent effective over an contribute significantly to the reduction in the overall risk of
observation period of 20 years (42). Since then several well- infection in the community as a whole.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
always due to infection of the individual with drug-resistant The magnitude of the problem remains to be determined
bacilli, is well known. It is an accepted fact that when the due to the absence of laboratories capable of conducting
bacilli are rapidly multiplying, resistant mutants appear quality assured second line drug susceptibility test (6).
irrespective of the administration of any particular drug. It has been observed that resistance to isoniazid alone
According to one hypothesis, drug resistance is induced by does not affect the results of treatment so much, if proper
transference through what are called "episomes". Episomes regimens for treatment or retreatment are prescribed, but
are non-chromosomal heritable genes which can pass from simultaneous resistance to isoniazid and rifampicin limits
one bacterial cell to another. If there is a direct contact severely the results of the treatment.
between the cell containing episomes, the episomes leave
the resistant cell and invade susceptible cells (56). The most serious danger of MOR Tuberculosis is that it is
(b) SECONDARY OR ACQUIRED RESISTANCE : Here the much more difficult to treat, even where second line drugs
bacteria were sensitive to the drug at the start of the are available. Treatment of MOR tuberculosis can take at
treatment but became resistant to the particular drug during least two years and the results are poor. Second line drugs
the course of treatment with it. cost 30 times as much as drugs used in sec treatment of
non-resistant tuberculosis patients. Patients with MOR
Drug resistance means that certain strains of tuberculosis tuberculosis may need to be hospitalised and isolated which
bacilli are not killed by the anti-tuberculosis drugs given adds to the cost of treatment, to prevent transmission of
during the treatment. Some strains can be resistant to one or primary resistant strains to others. Careful precautions are
more drugs. necessary to prevent transmission, especially to health
Definitions workers caring for MOR tuberculosis patients (57).
Please refer to page 1 79 for classification of cases based DOTS-Plus for MOR-TB is a comprehensive management
on drug resistance. initiative built upon 5 elements of DOTS strategy. However,
DOTS-Plus also takes into account specific issues, such as use
Causes of drug-resistant tuberculosis (18) of second-line anti-TB drugs. The goal of DOTS-Plus is to
prevent further development and spread of MOR-TB. DOTS-
Drug-resistant TB has microbial, clinical and programmatic Plus is not intended for universal application and is not
causes. From a microbiological perspective, the resistance is
required in all settings. The aim of implementation of DOTS-
caused by a genetic mutation that makes a drug ineffective
Plus in selected areas with significant levels of MOR-TB is to
against the mutant bacilli. An inadequate or poorly
combat an emerging epidemic. The underlying principle is
administered treatment regimen allows drug-resistant mutants
that the first step in controlling MOR-TB is prevention by full
to become the dominant strain in a patient infected with TB.
implementation of DOTS. An effective DOTS-based TB
Table 10 summarizes the common causes of inadequate
control programme is a prerequisite for implementation of
treatment. However it should be stressed that MOR-TB is man-
DOTS-Plus (19).
made phenomenon poor treatment, poor drugs and poor
adherence lead to the development of MOR-TB. The emergence of XOR-TB and high case fatality rate in
In all countries and especially those where the number of patients with HIV infection was the subject of an emergency
cases of tuberculosis is rising rapidly because of the consultations held in Johannesburg on 7-8 September,
association with HIV, the development of resistant strains of 2006. The issues include strengthening treatment adherence
tuberculosis is a serious concern. In 2012, about 0.45 to achieve high levels of completion (;;::: 85 per cent) for all
million people worldwide, are estimated to be infected with TB patients ensuring that second line drugs used to treat
strains of drug resistant tuberculosis. An accurate picture of MOR-TB and XOR-TB are strictly controlled and properly
drug resistance is not available because few countries have a used according to WHO guidelines. The steps required to
reliable drug resistance surveillance system (2). limit the impact of MOR-TB and XOR-TB were identified and
incorporated into a 7-point plan of action (58).
It is estimated that primary MOR-TB in India is around
2.2 per cent. The drug resistance in re-treatment cases is 15 In the short term, countries should:
(11-19) per cent. Although the level of MOR-TB in the 1. develop national emergency response plans for MDR-
country is low in relation to percentage and proportion, it TB and XOR-TB and ensure that basic TB control
translates into large absolute numbers (2). For details please measures meet international standards for TB care
refer to page 430. and are fully implemented;
XOR-TB has been reported in India by isolated studies 2. conduct rapid surveys of MOR-TB and XOR-TB using
with non-representative and highly selected clinical samples. a standardized protocol to assess the geographical and
TABLE 10
Causes of inadequate treatment
Ptovid,~rs/prc)gra~~es : · ·. ··· Drugs: .... ·.·. · . ·· . . ··.··.•' .. · .••..... •· Patients.:
inadequate regimens · · . inad~quate supply/quality
'.';,, - · ,'' '·· · '1'
inadequate dru.g intake
- Absence of guidelines or - Non-availability of certain drugs - Poor adherence
inappropriate guidelines (stock-outs or delivery disruptions) (or poor DOT)
- Non-compliance with guidelines - Poor quality - Lack of information
- Inadequate training of health staff Poort storage conditions - Non-availability of free drugs
- No monitoring of treatment Wrong dosages or combination - Social and economic barriers
- P~orly organized or funded TB - Malabsorption
control programmes - Substance abuse disorders
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
immune system working effectively and tuberculosis bacilli doctor to have active tuberculosis on the basis of X-ray and
are able to multiply rapidly. In developing countries HIV clinical symptoms.
associated tubercular disease is very common.
2. Primary infection : New tubercular infection in people
Initiating ART (Anti-Retroviral Therapy) in
with HIV can progress to active disease very quickly. In the patients with MDR-TB (18)
USA active tubercular disease in two-thirds of people with The use of ART in HIV infected patients with TB
both infections is due to recent infection, rather than improves survival for both drug resistant and susceptible
reactivation of latent infection. People with HIV are at risk of disease cases. However HIV infected MOR patients without
being newly infected, if they are exposed to· tuberculosis the benefit of ART may experience mortality rates exceeding
because their weakened immune system makes them more 90%. The likelihood of adverse effects could compromise
vulnerable. the treatment of HIV or MOR-TB if both treatments are
3. Recurring infection : People with HIV who have been started simultaneously. On the other hand undue delay in
cured of tuberculosis infection may be more at risk of starting ART could result in significant risk of HIV related
developing tuberculosis again. However, it is not clear death amongst MOR patients. Table 11 is based on the WHO
whether this is because of reinfection or relapse. guidelines for initiating ART in relationship to treatment for
MOR-TB.
4. In the community : There are more new cases of active
tuberculosis because more people infected with tuberculosis TABLE 11
develop active disease, and those newly infected become ill
faster. This means that there are more people in the CD 4 cell count ART recomm- Timing of ART in relation to
community who are infectious to others. Larger number of endation treatment for MDR-TB
people with active disease mean more people will die from ~ 350 cells/mm3 Recommend After 2 weeks, as soon as the
tuberculosis unless they are treated. The association of ART treatment for MDR TB is
tuberculosis with HIV means that people suffer additional tolerated.
discrimination. Community education is needed to increase > 350 cells/mm 3 Defer ART Re-evaluate patient monthly
awareness that tuberculosis is curable and, most important, for consideration of ART.
that people are no longer infectious after the first few weeks CD4 testing is recommended
of treatment. every 3 months during
treatment for MDR TB
Diagnosis of tuberculosis in people with HIV Not available Recommend After 2 weeks, as soon as the
In most people in the early stages of HIV infection, ART treatment for MDR TB
is tolerated.
symptoms of tuberculosis are similar as in people without
HIV infection. In areas where many people have HIV For patients who are already on ART at the time of MDR-
infection, tuberculosis programmes should continue to focus TB diagnosis be continued on ART when TB therapy is
on identifying infectious sputum-smear-positive cases initiated. Occasionally, patients with HIV-related TB may
through microscopy. However, diagnosis of tuberculosis in experience a temporary exacerbation of symptoms, signs of
individual patients using the standard diagnostic tools can radiographic manifestations of TB after beginning TB
be more difficult if they have advanced HIV infection treatment. This paradoxical reaction occurs in HIV-infected
because : patients with active TB and is thought to be a result of
(a) HIV positive people with pulmonary tuberculosis may immune restitution due to the simultaneous administration
have a higher frequency of negative sputum smears. of antiretroviral and tuberculosis medication. Symptoms and
Confirming the diagnosis may require sputum culture. signs may include high fever, lymphadenopathy, expanding
(b) The tuberculin skin test often fails to work in people intra-thoracic lesions and worsening of chest radiographic
who are HIV positive because it relies on measuring the findings. The diagnosis of paradoxical reaction should be
response of a person's immune system. If the immune made only after a thorough evaluation has excluded other
system has been damaged by HIV, it may not respond even aetiologies, particularly TB treatment failure. For severe
though the person is infected with tuberculosis. HIV positive paradoxical reactions prednisone- (1-2 mg/kg for 1-2 weeks,
people with tuberculosis, therefore, have a higher frequency then gradually decreasing doses) may be used.
of false negative tuberculin skin test results.
Diagnosis of HIV in TB patients
(c) Chest radiography may be less useful in people with
HIV because they have less cavitation. Cavities usually The diagnosis of HIV relies in serological testing. In areas
develop because the immune response to the tubercular where there is high prevalence of HIV ( > 1 per cent in
bacilli leads to some destruction of lung tissue. In people pregnant women), HIV testing should be systemetically
with HIV, who do not have a fully functioning immune offered to all TB patients, including children. Pre-test
system, there is less tissue destruction and hence less lung counselling must be available to all patients so that they
cavitation. understand what the implications of the results might be and
(d) Cases of extra-pulmonary tuberculosis seem to be make a informed choice. Patients should be counselled on
more common in people who are co-infected. behaviour risk and methods to prevent transmitting or
acquiring the infection.
In short-screen for tuberculosis using sputum smear
microscopy, if the result is positive, start treatment; if the TUBERCULOSIS AND DIABETES
result is negative, but it is suspected that the patient has
tuberculosis, sputum culture should be carried out where Diabetes has been shown to be an independent risk
feq.sible to confirm the diagnosis and give treatment to those factor for tuberculosis in community based study from south
with positive culture results. Alternatively, where culture India and multiple studies globally. It is suggested that
cannot be done, treatment can be given to those judged by a diabetes accounts for 14.8 per cent of all tuberculosis and
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
20.8 per cent of smear positive TB (3). People with weak 25. WHO (1980). WHO Chronicle, 34: 101.
immune system as in diabetes are at higher risk of 26. Toman, K. (1979). Tuberculosis : Case finding and Chemotherapy
progressing from latent to active tuberculosis. The risk is 2-3 Questions and Answers, WHO, Geneva. '
times higher than people without diabetes. A large 27. Govt. of India (2010), DOTS - Plus Guidelines, Jan 2010, Ministry of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
proportion of people with diabetes and TB are diagnosed 28. Kamat, S.R. (1966). Bull WHO, 34: 517.
very late. 29. Govt. of India, RNTCP at a Glance, Revised National TB Control
It is suggested that all people with TB should be screened Programme, Central TB Division, Ministry of Health and Family
for diabetes and screening for TB in diabetes should be Welfare, New Delhi. .
considered, particularly in setting with high TB prevalence. 30. Govt of India (2010), TB India 2010, RNTCP Annual Status Report.
People with diabetes and TB have a high risk of death 31. WHO (2010), Treatment of Tuberculosis Guidelines, 4th Ed.
32. Suri, J.C. et al (1971). Ind.J. Tuberculosis, 18: 48.
during TB treatment and of TB relapse after treatemt. As
33. Snell, N.J.C. (1985). P.G. Doctor Middle East April 1985, 1232.
diabetes is complicated by presence of other infectious
34. WHO (1980). Tech.Rep Ser., No. 651.
diseases also, it is important to take proper care of diabetes 35. WHO (1976). The Work of WHO Annual Rep. of the Director General
in patients suffering from diabetes/TB (61). for 1975, p. 73.
36. Humphrey, J.H. et al (1970). Immunology for Students of Medicine,
The future Blackwell.
Despite effective case-finding and therapeutic tools and 37. WHO (1982). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 652.
declines in mortality and morbidity rates in some countries, 38. Dam, H.G.T. et al (1976) Bull WHO, 54 (3) 255.
tuberculosis appears to continue as an important 39. Galazka, A.M. et al (1984). W.H. Forum 5 (3) 269.
communicable disease problem, worldwide, for several 40. AnyQuestions(1981). Brit. Med.J. 282: 1305, 18April 1981.
41. Banker, D.D. (1969). Modern Practice in Immunization. Indian
decades to come. The chronic nature of the disease, the Journal of Medical Sciences, Mumbai.
ability of the tubercle bacilli to remain alive in the human 42. Aronson, J.D. et al (1958) Archieues of Int. Med. 101: 881.
body for years, the concentration of the disease in the older 43. WHO (1979). Bull WHO, 57 (5) 819-827.
age-groups, the increased expectation of life, the high 44. Tuberculosis Prevention Trial, Madras (1979). Ind. J. Med. Res.
prevalence of infection rates in some countries, the relatively 70: 349-363. . ,
high reactivation rate, the emergence of drug-resistant 45. Baily, G.V.J. (1981). Ind. J. Tuberculosis, 28 (3) 117.
strains, association of tuberculosis and HIV infection, and 46. WHO (1980). WHO Chronicle, 34: 119.
above all, the perpetuation of the "non-specific 47. Gangadharan, P.R. (1981) Tubercle 62 : 223.
determinants" of the disease in the third world countries 48. Wijsmuller, G. (1971). Bull WHO 45: 633.
impede a rapid conquest of the disease. 49. Dam, H.G.T. and Hitze, K.L (1980). Bull WHO, 58: 37.
50. WHO (1980). Techn Rep Ser., No.652.
References 51. WHO (1982), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 671.
52. WHO (2007), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 21, May 25, 2007.
1. WHO (2004), Weekly Epidemiological Record, 23rd Jan 2004, No. 4.
53. WHO (2004), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 4, 23rd Jan. 2004.
2. WHO (2014), Global Tuberculosis Report 2014.
54. Moulding, T.S. (1971) : Ann Intern Med., 74: 761.
3. WHO, Tuberculosis Control in South-East Asia Region, Regional
Report, 2014. 55. Leading Article (1981): Tubercle, 61: 69-72.
4. Govt. of India (2014), TB India 2014, RXITCP Annual Status Report, 56. Pamra, S.P. (1976). Ind.J. Chest Dis and allied Sciences, 23: 152.
DQHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 57. AIDS Action, Asia Pacific edition, The international newsletter on
5. Govt. of India (2013), TB India 2013, Ministry of Health and Family HIV/AIDS prevention and cure, AHRTAG Issue 30, January - March
Welfare, New Delhi. 1996.
6. Govt. of India (2008), TB India 2008, RNTCP Status Report, I am 58. WHO (2006), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 41, 13th Oct. 2006
stopping TB, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 59. WHO (2006), Global Tuberculosis Control, Surveillance, Planning
7. Govt. of India (2010), TB India 2010, RNTCP Status Report, Central Financing, WHO Report 2006.
TB Division, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 60. WHO (1996) TB Groups At Risk, WHO Report on the Tuberculosis
8. WHO (1974). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.552. Epidemic, Geneva.
9. Styblo K. (1976) Int. J. Epi. 5: 63. 61. WHO (2011), Tuberculosis and diabetes, The stop TB Department,
Sept 2011.
10. WHO (1981). Wkly Epi Rec., 56 (50) 393-400.
11. WHO (1967). WHO Chronicle, 21: 156.
12. WHO (2013), Definitions and Reporting Framework/or Tuberculosis- II. INTESTINAL INFECTIONS
2013 revision.
13. Youmans, G.P. et al (1980). The Biological and Clinical Basis of
Infectious Diseases, 2nd ed, Saunders.
14. Gangadharan, P.R.J. (1980). Ind. J. Tuberculosis, 27 (3) 108.
15. Pamra, S.P. (1976), Ind. J. Tuberculosis, 23, No.2 Supplement.
L POLIOMYELITIS
Poliomyelitis is an acute viral infection caused by an RNA
16. American Thoracic Society (1976) Ann Reu, of Resp. Disease virus. It is primarily an infection of the human alimentary
114: 459.
17. Comstock, G.W. (1978). Am. Rev, Res. Dis., 117: 621.
tract but the virus may infect the central nervous system in a
18. Govt. of India (2012), Guidelines on Programmatic Management of very small percentage (about 1 per cent) of cases resulting in
Drug. Resistant TB in India, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New varying degrees of paralysis, and possibly death.
Delhi.
19. WHO (2004), TB I HIV, A Clinical Manual, 2nd Ed. Problem statement
20. WHO (2010), Policy Framework for Implementing New Tuberculosis In the pre-vaccination era, poliomyelitis was found in all
Diagnostics, March 2010.
21. ICMR Bulletin (2002), Vol. 32, No. 8, August 2002.
countries of the world. The extensive use of polio vaccines
22. Reichman, L.B. and Mc Donald R.J. (1977). Med. C/in. N.A. Nov. since 1954 eliminated the disease in developed countries. In
1977, p.1185. 1988, the World Health Assembly resolved to eradicate
23. Maxine, A, Papadakis, Stephen J., Mcphee (2014), Current Medical poliomyelitis globally. Since then, implementation of the
Diagnosis and Treatment, 2014 Ed., Lange Publication. eradication strategies has reduced the number of polio
24. CDC Fact Sheet for Parents. endemic countries from more than 125 in 1988 to 3 in 2014.
POLIOMYELITIS
These countries are Afghanistan, Pakistan and Nigeria. India 4. Legacy planning: As the polio programme approaches
has not reported any polio case since January 2011, and has key eradication milestones, successful legacy planning
been declared polio-free since 27th March 2014. This was will include the mainstreaming of essential polio
once considered the most complex challenge to achieve. Four functions into on-going public health programmes at
of the six Regions of WHO have been certified as polio-free : national and international levels, ensuring the transfer of
the Americas (1994), Western Pacific (2000}, Europe (2002} learning to other relevant programmes and/or initiatives,
and SEAR (2014). 80 per cent of world's population now lives and the transition of assets and infrastructure to benefit
in polio-free areas (1). During 2013, 406 cases of wild-polio other development goals and global health priorities (3).
were reported globally. These include only 160 cases from
endemic countries; international spread from endemic areas Polio Surveillance (3)
into polio-free areas accounted for the remainder. Surveillance is the most important part of the whole polio
Of the 3 strains of wild poliovirus (type 1, type 2 and eradication initiative. Without surveillance, it would be
type 3), wild poliovirus type 2 was eradicated in 1999 impossible to pinpoint where and how wild poliovirus is still
and case numbers of type '3 are down to the lowest-ever circulating, or to verify that the virus has been eradicated.
levels with the last case reported in November 2012 from Surveillance identifies new cases and detects importation of
Nigeria (1). wild poliovirus.
Recognizing the epidemiological opportunity and the
significant risk of potential failure, the new Polio Eradication Acute flaccid paralysis surveillance
and Endgame Strategic Plan 2013-2018 has been There are four steps of acute flaccid paralysis (AFP)
developed. It is the first plan to eradicate all types of polio surveillance:
disease simultaneously both due to wild poliovirus and 1. Finding and reporting children with acute flaccid
due to vaccine-derived poliovirus. paralysis (AFP) : The first links in the surveillance chain are
staff in all health facilities from district health centres to
Polio Eradication and Endgame Strategic Plan, large hospitals. They must promptly report every case of
2013-2018 (2, 3) acute flaccid paralysis {AFP) in any child under 15 years of
This programme is a comprehensive long-term strategy age. In addition, public health staff make regular visits to
that addresses what is needed to deliver a polio free world hospitals and rehabilitation centres to search for AFP cases
by 2018. The plan has 4 objectives: which may have been overlooked or misdiagnosed. The
number of AFP cases reported each year is used as an
1. Detect and interrupt all poliovirus transmission: This indicator of a country's ability to detect polio even in
objective is to stop all wild polio transmission by the end countries where the disease no longer occurs. A country's
of 2014 by enhancing global poliovirus surveillance, surveillance system needs to be sensitive enough to detect at
effectively implementing national emergency plan to least one case of AFP for every 100,000 children under 15
improve OPV campaign quality in the remaining even in the absence of polio.
endemic countries, and ensuring rapid outbreak
response. It also includes stopping any new polio 2. Transporting stool samples for analysis : In the early
outbreak due to vaccine-derived poliovirus (VDPV) stages, polio may be difficult to differentiate from other
within 6 months of the index case. forms of acute flaccid paralysis, such as Guillain-Barre
Syndrome, transverse myelitis, or traumatic neuritis. All
2. Strengthen immunization system and withdraw oral polio children with acute flaccid paralysis (AFP) should be
vaccine: This objective will help hasten the interruption of reported and tested for wild poliovirus within 48 hours of
wild poliovirus transmission, reduce the risk of wild and onset, even if doctors are confident on clinical grounds that
VDPV importation and spread and help build a strong the child does not have polio. To test for polio, faecal
system for the delivery of other life saving vaccines. To specimens are analyzed for the presence of poliovirus.
eliminate all VDPV risks, in the long-term, all OPV must be Because shedding of the virus is variable, two specimens
removed from routine immunization programmes. As wild taken 24-48 hours apart are required. Speed is essential,
poliovirus type 2 was eradicated in 1999, and the main since the highest concentrations of poliovirus in the stools of
cause of VDPV outbreaks is currently type 2 component of infected individuals are found during the first two weeks
OPV, this component must be removed from the vaccine after onset of paralysis.
by mid-2016. Preparation for this removal entails
strengthening routine immunization system, especially in Stool specimens have to be sealed in containers and stored
areas at highest risk, introducing immunization immediately inside a refrigerator or packed between frozen
programme globally and then replacing the trivalent OPV ice packs at 4-8°C in a cold box, ready for shipment to a
with bivalent OPV in all OPV using countries. This laboratory. Undue delays or prolonged exposure to heat on
objective affects all 144 countries world-wide which the way to the laboratory may destroy the virus. Specimens
currently use OPV in their immunization programme. should arrive at the laboratory within 72 hours of collection.
3. Containment and certification: This objective 3. Isolating poliovirus : In a laboratory, virologists begin
encompasses the certification of the eradication and the task of isolating poliovirus from the stool samples. If
containment of all wild poliovirus in all WHO regions by poliovirus is isolated, the next step is to distinguish between
end of 2018, recognizing that a small number of facilities wild (naturally occurring) and vaccine-related poliovirus.
will need to retain poliovirus stocks in the post- This is necessary because the oral vaccine consists of
eradication era for the purposes of vaccine production, attenuated live polioviruses and resembles wild virus in the
diagnosis and research. Criteria for the safe handling and laboratory. If wild poliovirus is isolated, the virologists
biocontainment of such poliovirus, and processes to identify which of the two surviving types of wild virus is
monitor their application are essential to minimize the risk involved. Wild poliovirus type 2 has not been recorded
of poliovirus re-introduction in the post-eradication era. since 1999.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
4. Mapping the virus : Once wild poliovirus has been VACCINE DERNED POLIOVIRUS (VDPV) (4)
identified, further tests are carried out to determine where Although OPV is .a safe vaccine, on rare occasions
the strain may have originated. By determining the exact adverse events may occur. Vaccine-associated paralytic
genetic make-up of the virus, wild viruses can be compared poliomyelitis (VAPP) is the most important of these rare
to others and classified into genetic families which cluster in adverse events. Cases of VAPP are clinically
defined geographical areas. The newly-found poliovirus indistinguishable from poliomyelitis caused by WPV, but can
sequence is checked against a reference bank of known be distinguished by laboratory analysis. The incidence of
polioviruses, allowing inferences about the geographical VAPP has been estimated at 4 cases/1000,000 birth cohort
origin of the newly found virus. When polio has been per year in countries using OPV. VAPP occurs in both OPV
pinpointed to a precise geographical area, it is possible to recipients and their unimmunized contacts; it is most
identify the source of importation of poliovirus - both frequently associated with Sabin 3 (60% of cases), followed
long-range and cross-border. Appropriate immunization by Sabin 2 and Sabin 1.
strategies can then be determined to prevent further spread VDPVs resemble WPVs biologically and differ from the
of the poliovirus. majority of vaccine-related poliovirus (VRPV) isolates in that
they have genetic properties consistent with prolonged
Environmental surveillance replication or transmission, which is substantially longer
Environmental surveillance involves testing sewage or than the normal period of vaccine virus replication of 4-6
other environmental samples for the presence of poliovirus. weeks in the OPV recipient (5). All poliovirus isolates are
Environmental surveillance often confirms wild poliovirus characterized by Global Polio Laboratory Network. The
infections in the absence of cases of paralysis. Systematic diagnosis is made by real-time reverse transcription-
environmental sampling (e.g. in Egypt and Mumbai, India) polymerase chain reaction (rRT-PCR) nucleic acid
provides important supplementary surveillance data. Ad- amplification targetted to nucleotide substitution that occur
hoc environmental surveillance elsewhere (especially in early in VDPV emergence.
polio-free regions) provides insights into the international VDPVs are divided into three categories as (1) cVDPVs,
spread of poliovirus. when evidence of person-to-person transmission in the
community exists; (2) immunodeficiency-associated VDPVs
Surveillance indicators (3) (iVDPVs), which are isolates from persons with primary
immunodeficiencies, who have prolonged VDPV infections;
Indicator Minimum levels for certification and (3) ambiguous VDPVs (aVDPVs), which are either clinical
standard surveillance isolates from person with no known immunodeficiency or
Completeness At least 80% of expected routine sewage isolates whose source is unknown (5).
of reporting (weekly or monthly) AFP surveillance The prolonged large outbreak of cVDPV2 in Nigeria and
reports should be received on time, D.R. of Congo, the increased detection of iVDPV infection in
including zero reports where no AFP developing countries and continued detection of aVDPVs
cases are seen. The distribution of that resemble cVDPV and iVDPV reaffirm the following
reporting sites should be representative points (5):
of the geography and demography of 1. The clinical signs and severity of paralysis associated
the country. with VDPV and WPV infections are indistinguishable.
Sensitivity of At least one case of non-polio AFP 2. cVDPVs pose the same public health threat as WPVs and
surveillance should be detected annually per require the same control measures.
100,000 population aged less than 15 3. Surveillance for WPVs and VDPVs should continue to be
years. In endemic regions, to ensure strengthened.
even higher sensitivity, this rate should 4. Environmental surveillance to detect VDPVs and WPV
be two per 100,000. infection can serve as an important, sensitive
Completeness of All AFP cases should have a full clinical supplement to AFP surveillance in many settings.
case investigation and virological investigation with at 5. Persons with prolonged iVDPV infection may transmit
least 80% of AFP cases having poliovirus to others, raising the risk of VDPV circulation
'adequate' stool specimens collected in settings of low population immunity to the
'Adequate' stool specimens are two corresponding poliovirus serotype.
stool specimens of sufficient quantity 6. Prolonged iVDPV excretion is uncommon among persons
for laboratory analysis, collected at least with primary immunodeficiencies exposed to OPV.
24 hours apart, within 14 days after the 7. The prevalence of long-term iVDPV excretors may be
onset of paralysis, and arriving in the higher than suggested.
laboratory by reverse cold chain and Because of these risks of emergence of vaccine-derived
with proper documentation. polioviruses, OPV use will be discontinued worldwide once
Completeness At least 80% of AFP cases should have all WPV transmission has been interrupted (i.e. inactivated
of follow-up a follow-up examination for residual polio vaccine (IPV) will replace OPV) and strategies to
paralysis at 60 days after the onset of strengthen global polio immunization and surveillance are
paralysis. needed to limit the emergence of VDPVs.
Laboratory All AFP case specimens must be Epidemiological determinants
performance processed in a WHO accredited
laboratory within the Global Polio Agent factors
Laboratory Network (GPLN). (a) AGENT : The causative agent is the poliovirus which
POLIOMYELITIS
has three serotypes 1,2 and 3. Most outbreaks of paralytic may be relatively more important in developed countries
polio are due to type- I virus. Poliovirus can survive for where faecal transmission is remote.
long periods in the external environment. In a cold
environment, it can live in water for 4 months and in faeces Incubation period
for 6 months (6). It is, therefore, well-adapted for the Usually 7 to 14 days (range 3 to 35 days).
faecal-oral route of transmission (7). However, the virus
may be rapidly inactivated by pasteurization, and a variety Clinical spectrum
of physical and chemical agents. (b) RESERVOIR OF
INFECTION : Man is the only known reservoir of infection. When an individual susceptible to polio is exposed to
Most infections are subclinical. It is the mild and subclinical infection, one of the following responses may occur (Fig. I)
infections that play a dominant role in the spread of (a) INAPPARENT (SUBCLINICAL) INFECTION : This
infection; they constitute the submerged portion of the occurs approximately in 91-96 per cent of poliovirus
iceberg. It is estimated that for every clinical case, there may infections (12). There are no presenting symptoms.
be 1000 subclinical cases in children and 75 in adults (8). Recognition only by virus isolation or rising antibody titres.
There are no chronic carriers. No animal source has yet (b) ABORTIVE POLIO OR MINOR ILLNESS : Occurs in
been demonstrated. (c) INFECTIOUS MATERIAL: The virus approximately 4 to 8 per cent of the infections (13). It causes
is found in the faeces and oropharyngeal secretions of an only a mild or self-limiting illness due to viraemia. The
infected person. (d) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY: The patient recovers quickly. The diagnosis cannot be made
cases are most infectious 7 to 10 days before and after onset clin_ically. ~ecognition only by virus isolation or rising
of symptoms. In the faeces, the virus is excreted commonly antibody titre. (c) NON-PARALYTIC POLIO : Occurs in
for 2 to 3 weeks, sometimes as long as 3 to 4 months. approximately 1 per cent of all infections (14). The
presenting features are stiffness and pain in the neck and
Host factors back. The disease lasts 2 to 10 days. Recovery is rapid. The
disease is synonymous with aseptic meningitis .
.(a) AGE : The disease occurs in all age groups, but
(d) PARALYTIC POLIO : Occurs in less than one per cent of
children are usually more susceptible than adults because of
infections. The virus invades CNS and causes varying
the acquired immunity of the adult population. In developed
degrees of paralysis. The predominant sign is asymmetrical
c:>u~trie~, be~ore the advent of vaccination, the age
flaccid paralysis. A history of fever at the time of onset of
d1stnbutton shifted so that most patients were over the age
paralysis is suggestive of polio. The other associated
of 5 years, and 25 per cent were over age 15 years (9). In
symptoms are malaise, anorexia, nausea, vomiting,
India, polio is essentially a disease of infancy and childhood.
headache, sore throat, constipation and abdominal pain.
About 50 per cent of cases are reported in infancy. The most
There might be signs of meningeal irritation, i.e., stiffness of
vulnerable age is between 6 months and 3 years. (b) SEX :
neck and back muscles. Tripod sign may be present, i.e. the
Sex differences have been noted in the ratio of 3 males to
child finds difficulty in sitting and sits by supporting hands at
one female. (c) RISK FACTORS: Several provocative or risk
the back and by partially flexing the hips and knees.
factors have been found to precipitate an attack of paralytic
Progression of the paralysis to reach its maximum in the
polio in individuals already infected with polio viruses. They
majority of cases occurs in less than 4 days (may take 4-7
include fatigue, trauma, intramuscular injections, operative
days). The paralysis is characterized as descending, i.e.
procedures such as tonsillectomy undertaken especially
starting at the hip and then moving down to the distal parts
during epidemics of polio and administration of immunizing
agents particularly alum-containing DPT. (d) IMMUNITY :
The maternal antibodies gradually disappear during the first Minor illness Major illness
6 months of life. Immunity following infection is fairly solid (non-specific) (CNS specific)
although reinfection can occur since infection with one type 0.1%
does not protect completely against the other two types of 'O
2<..> to 111111.,__-J } Paralytic
viruses. Type-2 virus appears to be the most effective 1% poliomyelitis
~
antigen. Neutralizing antibody is widely recognized as an .s
important index of immunity to polio after infection (10). ....
s:::
~ r--47.3=--+--=--------~--l------I
Environmental factors & to Abortive
8% infection
Polio is more likely to occur during the rainy season.
Approximately 60 per cent of cases recorded in India were 91% Subclinical
to infection
during June to September (11). The environmental sources 96%
of infection are contaminated water, food and flies. Polio
virus survives for a long time in a cold environment. Virus in blood nu11111•11111•e11111111-11
Overcrowding and poor sanitation provide opportunities for Virus in throat mmQW1111Mll:llll!llB11111mmlillllllle1m;uam111111
May persist
exposure to infection. Virus in faeces 1111111ewam11111111111111111111il'li1111Zl11-lllllili!!fmlll11111P1111•m*'!lllllllWrn 12to 17
weeks
Mode of transmission Neutralizing
(a) FAECAL-ORAL ROUTE : This is the main route of antibodies in Persist for life
serum
s1?read in developing countries. The infection may spread
drr~ct/¥ through contaminated fingers where hygiene is poor, 0 5 10 15 20
or indirectly through contaminated water, milk, foods, flies Days after exposure
and articles of daily use. (b) DROPLET INFECTION : This
FIG. l
may occur in the acute phase of disease when the virus
occurs in the throat. Close personaI·contact with an infected Time course of events in infection with poliovirus.
person facilitates droplet spread. This mode of transmission Source: (16)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
• - - - - - - -
of the extremity. As it is asymmetrical patchy paralysis, 1-2 months and 4th dose 6-12 months after the third dose.
muscle strength varies in different muscle groups of different First dose is usually given when the infant is 6 weeks old.
limbs. However, proximal muscle groups are more involved Additional doses are recommended prior to school entry and
as compared to distal ones. Deep tendon reflexes (DTRs) are then every 5 years until the age of 18. Alternatively, one or
diminished before the onset of paralysis. There is no sensory two doses of live vaccine (OPV) can be given safely as
loss. Cranial nerve involvement is seen in bulbar and boosters after an initial course of immunization with
bulbospinal forms of paralytic poliomyelitis. There might be inactivated vaccine.
facial asymmetry, difficulty in swallowing, weakness or loss IPV induces, humoral antibodies (IgM, IgG and IgA serum
of voice. Respiratory insufficiency can be life-threatening antibodies) but does not induce intestinal or local immunity
and is usually the cause of death. After the acute phase, (Fig. 2). The circulating antibodies protect the individual
atrophy of the affected muscles lead to a life with residual against paralytic polio, but do not prevent reinfection of the
paralysis which is typical and relatively easy to identify as gut by wild viruses. For the individual, it gives protection
poliomyelitis (15). from paralysis and nothing more; for the community, it
Progressive paralysis, coma or convulsions usually offers nothing because the wild viruses can still multiply in·
indicate a cause other than polio, as does a very high case the gut and be a source of infection to others. This is a major
fatality rate (14). drawback of IPV. Further, in the case of an epidemic, IPV is
There is no specific treatment for polio. Good nursing unsuitable because : (i) immunity is not rapidly achieved, as
care from the beginning of illness can minimize or even more than one dose is required to induce immunity, and
prevent crippling. Physiotherapy is of vital importance. It (ii) injections are to be avoided during epidemic times as
can be initiated in the affected limb immediately. It helps the they are likely to precipitate paralysis (17). Therefore, IPV is
weakened muscles to regain strength. Very probably, the not efficacious in combating epidemics of polio.
child may have to put on metal callipers. Advantages : Inactivated polio vaccine, because it does not
contain living virus, is safe to administer (i) to persons with
PREVENTION immune deficiency diseases (ii) to persons undergoing
corticosteroid and radiation therapy (iii) to those over 50 years
Immunization is the sole effective means of preventing who are receiving vaccine for the first time, and (iv) during
poliomyelitis. Both killed and live attenuated vaccines are pregnancy.
available and both are safe and effective when used
correctly. It is essential to immunize all infants by 6 months Associated risks : No serious adverse reactions to IPV
of age to protect them against polio. Two types of vaccines vaccines currently in use have been reported except minor
are used throughout the world; they are : local erythema (0.5-1 per cent), induration (3-11 per cent)
and tenderness (14-29 per cent).
1. Inactivated (Salk) polio vaccine (IPV).
2. Oral (Sabin) polio vaccine (OPV). 2. Oral (Sabin) polio vaccine (OPV)
Oral polio vaccine (OPV) was described by Sabin in
1. Inactivated (Salk) polio vaccine 1957. It contains live attenuated virus (types 1,2 and 3)
IPV is usually made from selected WPV strains - namely, grown in primary monkey kidney or human diploid cell
Mahoney (Salk type-1), MEF-1 (Salk type-2) and Saukett cultures. Ideally each virus type should be given separately
(Salk type-3) that are grown in Vero cell culture or in as monovalent vaccine, but for administrative convenience,
human diploid cells. Harvested viral components are rather than efficacy, it is given as trivalent (TOPV) vaccine.
inactivated with formaldehyde. The final vaccine mixture is The vaccine contains (i) over 3,00,000 TCID 50 of type 1
formulated to contain at least 40 units of type-1, 8 units of poliovirus (ii} over 1,00,000 TCID 50 of type 2 virus, and
type-2 and 32 units of type-3 D-antigen (D-antigen, which is (iii) over 3,00,000 TCID 50 of type 3 virus per dose.
expressed only on intact poliovirus particles, is used to
adjust the concentration of the individual viruses included in National Immunization Schedule
the trivalent IPV). All versions of IPV have higher The WHO Programme on Immunization (EPI) and the
antigenicity than the first-generation vaccines, and they are National Immunization Programme in India recommend a
sometimes referred to as IPVs of enhanced potency. IPV primary course of 3 doses of OPV at one-month intervals,
may contain trace amounts of formaldehyde, streptomycin, commencing the first dose when infant is 6 weeks old
neomycin or polymyxin B; some versions of IPV contain (see page 123). It is recommended that a dose of OPV (zero-
the preservative phenoxy-ethanol (0.5%), but neither dose) is required to be given to all children delivered in
thiomersal (incompatible with IPV antigenicity) nor health institutions before their discharge from the hospital.
adjuvants are used (4). The vaccine should be given in maternity wards, the
newborn should not be taken to regular immunization
IPV is administered by intramuscular injection (preferred) sessions to avoid infection. OPV is given concurrently with
or subcutaneous injection. The vaccine is stable at ambient DPT; BCG can be given simultaneously with the first dose of
temperature, but should be refrigerated to ensure no loss of OPV. It is very important to complete vaccination of all
potency. Freezing should be avoided as it could diminish infants before 6 months of age. This is because most polio
potency. IPV is available either as a stand-alone product cases occur between the ages of 6 months and 3 years. One
or in combination with ::::1 other vaccine antigens booster dose of OPV is recommended 12 to 18 months later.
including diphtheria, tetanus, whole-cell or acellular
pertussis, hepatitis B, or Haemophilus influenzae type b. In Dose and mode of administration
the combination vaccines, the alum or the pertussis vaccine, The dose is 2 drops or as stated on the label. WHO
or both, have an adjuvant effect. recommends that vaccinators use dropper supplied with the
The primary or initial course of immunization consists vial of oral polio vaccine. This is the most direct and
of 4 inoculations. The first 3 doses are given at intervals of effective way to deliver the correct drop size. Tilt the child's
POLIOMYELITIS
back, and gently squeeze the cheeks or pinch the nose to Advantages
make the mouth open. Let the drops fall from the dropper The advantages of OPV are : (i) since given orally, it is
onto the child's tongue. Repeat the process if the child spits easy to administer and does not require the use of highly
out the vaccine. If the vaccine is spoon-fed there is a chance trained personnel (ii) induces both humeral and intestinal
that it will not all be licked up by the child (18). immunity. (iii) antibody is quickly produced in a large
Development of immunity proportion of vaccinees, even a single dose elicits (except in
tropical countries) substantial immunity (iv) the vaccinee
On administration, the live vaccine strains infect excretes the virus and so infects others who are also
intestinal epithelial cells. After replication, the virus is immunized thereby (v) useful in controlling epidemics, and
transported to the Peyer's patches where a secondary {vi) relatively inexpensive.
multiplication with subsequent viraemia occurs. The virus
spreads to other areas of the body, resulting in the Complications
production of circulating antibodies · which prevent OPV is remarkably free from complications. However,
dissemination of the virus to the nervous system and prevent being living viruses, the vaccine viruses, particularly type 3
paralytic polio. Intestinal infection stimulates the production do mutate in the course of their multiplication in vaccinated
of IgA secretory antibodies which prevent subsequent children, and rare cases of vaccine-associated paralytic
infection of the alimentary tract with wild strains of polio have occurred in (a) recipients of the vaccine, and
poliovirus, and thus is effective in limiting virus transmission {b) their contacts. For details please refer to page 204.
in the community. Thus OPV induces both local and
systemic immunity as shown in Fig. 2. Contraindications
It is recommended that diarrhoea should not be
... 512 Serum lgG considered a contraindication to OPV. However, to ensure
E
::.- full protection, a dose of OPV given to a child with
"Cl - - Killed parenteral diarrhoea should not be counted as part of the series and
0 128
:9 - Live oral
1:
the child should receive another dose at the first available
<ll
32 \
opportunity. Live vaccines are not usually given to
"';::! \ Serum lgM Nasal lgA immunocompromised individuals (16). Patients suffering
·S
.Q
8 --~ from leukaemias and malignancy and those receiving
0
0.
iii
---~
'":"'
,,,,,----~
- -- -
....
corticosteroids may not be given OPV. IPV is an alternative
to OPV for immunization of children with HIV infection (16).
u ~"' ~~
Duodenal lgA
...0 2 I. There is as yet no indication that polio immunization may
·ff
Q)
pose any danger to a pregnant mother or developing foetus.
Cl:: 1 However, OPV should be delayed until after pregnancy
unless immediate protection is required, when IPV is
Vaccination 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 indicated (7).
1st dose 2nd dose 3rd dose
Storage
Days after first dose
(a) Stabilized vaccine : Recent oral polio vaccines are
FIG. 2 heat stabilized by adding magnesium chloride. They can be
Serum and secretory antibody response to
kept without losing potency for a year at 4 deg. C, and for a
3 doses of OPV or 3 doses of IPV month at 25 deg. C temperature (9). (b) Non-stabilized
Source : (16) vaccine : The vaccine should be stored at -20 deg C in a
deep freeze until used. In case a deep freeze is not available,
it might be stored temporarily in the freezing chamber of the
The vaccine progeny is excreted in the faeces and
refrigerator. During transport, the vaccine must be kept
secondary spread occurs to household contacts and
either on dry ice (solid carbon dioxide) or a freezing mixture
susceptible contacts in the community. Non-immunized
(equal quantities of wet ice and ammonium chloride) (21).
persons may therefore, be immunized. Thus widespread
"herd immunity" results, even if only approximately 66 per At the vaccination clinic, the bottle containing the OPV
cent of the community is immunized (7). This property of should not be frozen and thawed repeatedly, since repeated
OPV has been exploited in controlling epidemics of polio by freezing and thawing has a deleterious effect on the potency
administering the vaccine simultaneously in a short period of live polio vaccine. It would be preferable to keep the
to all susceptibles in a community. This procedure virtually vials of the vaccine in ice during its administration to
eliminates the wild polio strains in the community and children (21).
replaces them by attenuated strains (19). The duration of Recent studies indicate that breast-feeding does not
immunity produced by the OPV is not known, it may impede the effectiveness of oral poliovirus vaccine (22).
possibly even be lifelong (20). Breast milk can be given whenever the child is hungry.
Colostrum produced in the first three days after child However, hot water, hot milk or hot fluids should be
birth contains secretory lgA antibody, which might interfere withheld for about half an hour after the administration of
with the immune response to OPV. Nevertheless, several the vaccine. The vaccine should be administered preferably
studies show that among breast-fed infants who are fed OPV in a cool room, rather than in a hot, humid and crowded
in the first three days of life, 20-40 per cent develop serum room.
antibodies and 30-60 per cent excrete vaccine virus. Lower The problems with OPV may be summarized as follows
levels of secretory IgA are present in breast milk produced (a) A primary problem is the instability of the vaccine at high
after the fourth day. There is no significant effect of breast- ambient temperatures. The vaccine has to be kept frozen
feeding on the response of older infants to OPV (16). during storage, and kept cold during transportation, right up
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
to the point of administration. (b) A second problem is the search for other cases. Samples of faeces from all cases or
frequent vaccine failures even with fully potent vaccines. suspected cases of polio should be collected and forwarded
(c) A third problem is the very small residual neurovirulence to the laboratory for virus isolation. In addition, where
in OPV. possible, paired sera should be collected, the first specimen
at the clinical suspicion of paralytic polio and the second at
Sequential administration of IPV and OPV the period of convalescence. A rising titre of poliovirus
Over the past decade, a number of countries in central neutralizing antibody provides useful confirmatory
and eastern Europe, the Middle East, the Far East, and evidence. The Indian Council of Medical Research has set
southern Africa have adopted sequential schedules of 1-2 up National Enterovirus Units at Mumbai, Coonoor,
doses of IPV followed by ;: : 2 doses of OPV. Combined Chennai, Delhi and Kasauli where samples may be sent for
schedules of IPV and OPV appear to reduce or prevent examination.
VAPP while maintaining the high levels of intestinal mucosa! The following check-list indicates the essential data to be
immunity conferred by OPV. In addition, such schedules collected when investigating an outbreak (23, 24).
economize on limited resources by reducing the number of 1. Name of the administrative area and locality
doses of IPV, and may optimize both the humoral and 2. Date first case reported from locality
mucosa! immunogenicity of polio vaccination. The 3. Period of field investigation
effectiveness of this approach in preventing polio caused by From ............... to ............... (dates)
WPV as well as VAPP has been documented by 2 large 4. No.of paralytic polio cases detected
studies (4). 4.1 Clinical diagnosis only
The difference between IPV and OPV are given in Table 1. 4.2 Laboratory confirmed
4.3 Type(s) of virus isolated
TABLE 1 5. No. of deaths from paralytic polio
Differences between IPV and OPV 6. No.of paralytic cases of polio by age
-1 year 10-14 years
IPV OPV 1-4 years 15-19 years
(Salk type) (Sabin type) 5-9 years 20+ years
7. No.of contacts of paralytic polio examined:
1 Killed formolised virus Live attenuated virus Household contacts
Other. (specify)
2 Given subcutaneously or IM Given orally
I 8. Brief description of field investigation
3 Induces circulating antibody, Immunity is both humoral 9. History of previous vaccination practice in the locality
but no local (intestinal) and intestinal. Induces including the dates of the last community vaccination
immunity antibody quickly programme, and the type of vaccine used.
Prevents paralysis, but does Prevents not only 10. Name of the principal investigator and laboratory.
4
not prevent reinfection by paralysis, but also Within an epidemic area, OPV should be provided for all
wild polio viruses intestinal reinfection
persons over 6 weeks of age who have not been completely
5 Not useful in controlling Can be effectively used in immunized or whose immune status is unknown.
epidemics controlling epidemics.
Even a single dose elicits
Under the International Health Regulations, polio is
substantial immunity subject to international surveillance. The WHO should be
(except in tropical countries) notified as soon as possible of the occurrence of paralytic
polio and to supplement reports on such outbreaks with
6 More difficult to manufacture Easy to manufacture additional epidemiological information such as the type of
7 The virus content is 10,000 Cheaper virus, and the number of cases and deaths reported. In
times more than OPV addition a quarterly report (on prescribed form) should be
Hence costlier sent to WHO, Geneva. The WHO has prepared guidelines to
8 Does not require stringent Requires to be stored and poliovirus isolation and serological techniques for polio
conditions during storage transported at sub-zero surveillance.
and transportation. temperatures, unless
Has a longer shelf-life stabilized Strategies for polio eradication in India
(a) Conduct Pulse Polio Immunization days every year
Human Normal lg until poliomyelitis is eradicated.
The current widespread practice of immunization has (b) Sustain high levels of routine immunization coverage.
virtually eliminated the need for passive immunization. (c) Monitor OPV coverage at district level and below.
Normal human lg in a dose of 0.25-0.3 ml per kg of body (d) Improve surveillance capable of detecting all cases of
weight has been found to be protective for a few weeks AFP due to polio and non-polio aetiology.
against paralytic disease but does not prevent sub-clinical (e) Ensure rapid case investigation, including the
infections. Immuneglobulin is effective only if given shortly collection of stool samples for virus isolation.
before infection, it is of no value after clinical symptoms
develop (10). The subject shall be actively immunized (f) Arrange follow-up of all cases of AFP at 60 days to
check for residual paralysis.
against polio after a few weeks.
(g) Conduct outbreak control for cases confirmed or
Epidemiological Investigations suspected to be poliomyelitis to stop transmission.
The occurrence of a single case of polio is now Even a single case is treated as an outbreak and
considered as an epidemic, and should prompt an preventive measures are initiated, usually within 48 hours of
immediate epidemiological investigation, including an active notification of the case. The complete and timely reporting
POLIOMYELITIS
of cases of poliomyelitis is an important element for the are put on vaccine bottles. Each label has a circle of deep
eradication of poliomyelitis. Reporting of all cases of acute blue colour. Inside it is a white square which changes colour
flaccid paralysis in children under 15 years of age is and gradually becomes blue, if vaccine bottle is exposed to
mandatory, and line lists of all reported cases of higher temperature. When the colour of the white square
poliomyelitis are maintained. Since 1992, the active becomes blue like that of surrounding circle, the vaccine
surveillance has been extended to all cases of acute flaccid should be considered ineffective. Thereby, the health worker
paralysis, including causes other than poliomyelitis. can easily ascertain that the vaccine being given is effective
or not. This mechanism has been made mandatory in .all
Line listing of cases vaccine procurements since 1998. This quality assurance
Line listing of reported cases was started in the year 1989 will ensure that the children will have better protection
to check for duplication (same case reported more than once against polio in 1999 and thereafter.
if the child visited more than one health facility}, year of Following recommendations from the India Expert
onset of illness (to screen children with residual paralysis Advisory Group on Polio Eradication (IEAG), several
who developed poliomyelitis prior to the year of reporting}, strategies were utilized during 2005 and early 2006 to
identification of high risk pockets (by analysis of residential improve the impact of SIAs : (i} development and licensure
status) and documentation of high-risk age groups. of monovalent OPVl (mOPVl) and mOPV3 for targeted use
Line listing of cases made it possible to take appropriate during SIAs based on surveillance data; (ii) deployment of
follow-up action in areas from where the cases had been additional peronnel to assist with intensified SIAs in the
reported. The line lists have also provided useful States of Bihar and UP and in Mumbai City; (iii) social
epidemiological data for programme purposes. For example, mobilization targeted at reaching population groups missed
it provided information on the age at onset of illness and to during previous SIAs; (iv) use of mobile teams to vaccinate
understand the urgency for the early completion of the OPV children at transit points (e.g. railway and bus stations) and
immunization schedule. on moving trains; and (v} increased engagement and
accountability of political leaders and of health staff at all
All cases of acute flaccid paralysis must be reported levels. To further improve population immunity in the most
immediately to the chief medical officer/district critical age group, the IEAG added a specific
immunization officer with the following details : recommendation at its May 2006 meeting to identify and
Name, age and sex of the patient target all neonates in high-risk areas of UP with a "birth
- Father's name and complete address dose" of mOPVl (26).
- Vaccination status The last case of polio in the country was reported from
Date of onset of paralysis and date of reporting Howrah of West Bengal with date of onset of disease on
Clinical diagnosis 13th January 2011. Thereafter no polio case has been
- Doctor's name, address and phone number reported in the country. On 27th March 2014, India was
declared as non-endemic country for polio.
Mopping Up The steps taken by the Government to achieve the target
Mopping up activities are usually the last stage in polio of polio eradication and maintain the polio-free state are as
eradication. The strategy of "mopping up" involves door- follows (27) :
to-door immunization in high-risk districts, where wild polio 1. All states and union territories in the country have
virus is known or suspected to be still circulating. This developed a Rapid Response Team (RRT) to respond to·
strategy is being implemented in India. any polio outbreak in the country. An Emergency
Preparedness and Response Plan (EPRP) has also been
Pulse Polio Immunization developed by all states indicating steps to be undertaken
In India NIDs have become the largest public health in case of detection of a polio case.
campaigns ever conducted in a single country. Government 2. In the states of UP and Bihar every new born child is
of India conducted the first round of PPI consisting of two being identified and vaccinated during the polio
immunization days 6 weeks apart on 9th December 1995 immunization campaigns and is being tracked for 8
and 20th January 1996. The first PPI conducted targeted all subsequent rounds.
children under 3 years of age irrespective of their
3. In order to reach every eligible child during the pulse
immunization status. Later on, as recommended by WHO, it polio round, apart from the strategy of vaccinating
was decided to increase the age group from under 3 to under children at fixed booths and house to house visit, efforts
5 years. in vaccinating children in transit at railway stations,
The term "pulse" has been used to describe this sudden, inside long distance trains, major bus stops, marker
simultaneous, mass administration of OPV on a single day to places, religious congregations, major road crossings etc.
all children 0-5 years of age, regardless to previous throughout the country have been intensified. Special
immunization. PPis occur as two rounds about 4 to 6 weeks booths are established in areas bordering neighbouring
apart during low transmission season of polio, i.e. between countries like Wagah border and Attari train station in
November to February. In India, the peak transmission is Punjab and Munabo train station in Barmer district of
from June to September. The dose of OPV during PPis are Rajasthan, to ensure that all children under 5 years of age
extra doses which supplement, and do not replace the doses coming from across the border are given polio drops.
received during routine immunization services. The children 4. An extremely high level of vigilance through surveillance
including 0-1 year old infants should receive all their across the country for any importation or circulation of
scheduled doses and PPI doses. There is no minimum interval poliovirus and Vaccine Derived Polio Virus (VDPV) is
between PPI and scheduled OPV doses (25). being maintained. Environmental surveillance is
An important improvement in PPI during 1998 has been continuing at four sites with establishment of two new
the use of vaccine vial monitor. Colour monitors or labels sites in 2012.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
5. Government of India has identified 107 high risk blocks 22. Sabin, A.B. (1980). Bull WHO 58 (1) 141.
for polio where a multi-pronged strategy is being 23. WHO (1975). Wkly Epi Rec., 50: 205-209.
implemented to ensure sanitation, hygiene and clean 24. WHO (1976). WHO Chronicle, 30: 72-75.
drinking water in addition to vaccinating each and every 25. Govt. of India (1996), Pulse Polio Immunization in India, Operational
child oral polio vaccine (OPV). Guide, MCH Division, Department of Family Welfare, New Delhi.
26. WHO (2006), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 29, 21st July,
6. Migratory population from UP and Bihar are being 2006.
identified in the states of Punjab, Haryana, Gujarat and 27. Govt. of India (2013), Annual Report 2012-2013, Ministry of Health
West Bengal and these migratory children are being and Family Welfare, New Delhi
covered during the Sub National Immunization Day 28. AFP Surveillance Bulletin India, of 24 week, June 2014.
(SNID) in UP and Bihar.
7. Social mobilization activities are being intensified by VIRAL HEPATITIS
involving the local influencers, community and religious
leaders to improve community participation and Viral hepatitis may be defined as infection of the liver
acceptance of polio vaccine. caused by any of half dozen viruses. Twenty years ago,
8. A rolling emergency stock of oral polio vaccine (OPV) is hepatitis A virus (HAV) and hepatitis B virus (HBV) were the
being maintained to respond to any wild polio vaccine only known aetiological agents of viral hepatitis. Today, in
(WPV) or circulating vaccine derived polio virus addition to HAV and HBV hepatitis viruses C, D, E and G
(cVDPV) detection. An expert sub-group will be have also been identified and are recognized as aetiological
established to discuss issues related to trivalent oral polio agents of viral hepatitis. It is known that many other viruses
vaccine (tOPV) to bivalent oral polio vaccine (bOPV) may be implicated in hepatitis such as cytomegalovirus
(CMV), Epstein-Barr virus, yellow fever virus and rubella
switch in routine immunization and possibility of
virus. Viruses of herpes simplex, varicella and adenoviruses
injectable polio vaccine (IPV) introduction in the country
can also cause severe hepatitis in immunocompromised
along with India specific timelines for these activities.
individuals, but are rare.
AFP SURVEILLANCE : PPI is supported by AFP
surveillance system since 1997. It is being conducted through HEPATITIS A
a network of surveillance medical officers (SMOs), who are
Hepatitis A (formerly known as "infectious" hepatitis or
specially trained and are responsible for a defined area. A epidemic jaundice) is an acute infectious disease caused by
national surveillance team is positioned in Delhi. The SMOs hepatitis A virus (HAV). The disease is heralded by non-
are located at the state headquarters and at regional places specific symptoms such as fever, chills, headache, fatigue,
in case of larger states. A regular weekly reporting system has generalized weakness and aches and pains, followed by
been established. As a result of more meticulous search/ anorexia, nausea, vomiting, dark urine and jaundice. The
reporting, the number of reported cases of AFP increased disease spectrum is characterized by the occurrence of
from 1005 in 1996 to 54,674 and the completeness of stool numerous subclinical or asymptomatic cases. The disease is
specimen collection improved markedly from 59 per cent in benign with complete recove.ry in several weeks. The case
1998 to 86 per cent at the end of 2013 (28). fatality rate of icteric cases is less than 0.1 per cent, usually
from acute liver failure and mainly affects older adults.
References Although the disease has, in general, a low mortality (0.1 %),
1. WHO (2014), Fact Sheet, No. 114, May 14, 2014. patients may be incapacitated for many weeks.
2. WHO (2013), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No.1, 1st Jan, 2013.
3. Global Polio Eradication Initiative, Data and Monitoring, Surveillance. Problem statement
4. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 23, 4th June,
2010. Being an enterovin,1s infection like poliomyelitis, hepatitis
5. WHO (2012), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 38, 21st Sept. A is endemic in most developing countries, with frequent
2012. outbursts of minor or major outbreaks. The exact incidence
6. Provoost, P. (1985). Children in the Tropics No. 156-157 P.58. of the disease is difficult to estimate because of the high
7. lchout, B.D. (1988). Med. Int. 53: 2189-2191. proportion of asymptomatic cases. However, based on an
8. Christie, A.B. (1980). Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical ongoing reassessment of the global burden of hepatitis A,
Practice, 3rd ed, Churchill Livingstone. WHO estimates suggest that about 1.4 million cases occur
9. Jewetz, Melnick and Adelberg's. Medical Microbiology, 26th Ed, 2013, every year world-wide (1).
A Lange Medical Book.
10. WHO (1983). Tech.Rep.Ser. No.693. Geographical areas can be characterized as having high,
11. ICMR (1975). ICMR Bulletin, Jan. 1975. intermediate or low levels of hepatitis A infection (2).
12. Krishnan, R.et al (1983). Bull WHO, 61 (4) 689-692.
13. Young, N.A. (1979) in Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases, Areas with high levels of infection
Mandell, G.L. et al (eds), John Wiley, New York.
In developing countries with very poor sanitary
14. WHO (1981). WklyEpi.Rec., 56(17)131-132.
conditions and hygienic practices, most children (90%) have
15. Govt. of India CSSM reuiew, A Newsletter on the Child Survival and
Safe Motherhood Programme, No.32, August 1995. been infected with the hepatitis A virus before the age of 10
16. WHO (1993), The Immunological Basis of Immunization Series, years. Those infected in childhood do not experience any
Module 6 : Poliomyelitis Global Programme for Vaccines and noticeable symptoms. Epidemics are uncommon because
Immunization EPI, WHO. older children and adults are generally immune.
17. Galazka, A.M. et al {1984) Bull WHO, 62: 357. Symptomatic disease rates in these areas are low and
18. AHRTAG (1988) Dialogue on diarrhoea No. 33 June P.7. outbreaks are rare.
19. Nightingale, E. (1977). N.Eng.J.Med., 297: 249.
20. Malnick, J.L. (1978). Bull WHO, 56: 21. Areas with intermediate levels of infection
21. Ministry of Health, Govt. of India (1977). Manual on Immunization,
Dept, ofFamily Welfare. In developing countries, countries with transitional
HEPATITIS A
economies, and regions where sanitary conditions are age. The ratio of anicteric to icteric cases in adults is about
variable, children often escape infection in early childhood. 1 :3; in children, it may be as high as 12: 1. However, faecal
Ironically, these improved economic and sanitary conditions excretion of HAV antigen and RNA persists longer in the
may lead to a higher susceptibility in older age groups and young than in adults (6). In India, by the age of 10 years,
higher disease rates, as infections occur in adolescents and 90 per cent of healthy persons have serological evidence of
adults, and large outbreaks can occur. Thus, paradoxically, HAV infection (7). (b) SEX : Both sexes are equally
with the transition from high to intermediate endemicity, the susceptible. (c) IMMUNITY: Immunity after attack probably
incidence of clinically significant hepatitis A increases. lasts for life; second attacks have been reported in about
5 per cent of patients. Most people in endemic areas acquire
Areas with low levels of infection immunity through subclinical infection. The lgM antibody
In developed countries with good sanitary and hygienic appears early in the illness and persists for over 90 days. IgG
conditions, infection rates are low. Disease may occur appears more slowly, and persists for many years.
among adolescents and adults in high-risk groups, such as
injecting-drug users, homosexual men, people travelling to Environmental factors
areas of high endemicity, and in isolated populations such as Cases may occur throughout the year. In India the
closed religious communities. disease tends to be associated with periods of heavy rainfall
The exact incidence of HAV in India is not known. The (8). Poor sanitation and overcrowding favour the spread of
Indian literature is replete with numerous reports of sporadic infection, giving rise to water-borne and food-borne
and epidemic occurrence of this disease in various cities, epidemics. Paradoxically, when standards of hygiene and
residential colonies and campuses. Epidemics of hepatitis A sanitation are improved, morbidity from infection with
often evolve slowly, involve wide geographic areas and last enteric viruses may increase. This is what happened with
many months, but, common source epidemics (e.g., faecal hepatitis A (9).
contamination of drinking water) may evolve explosively.
Modes of transmission
Epidemiological determinants (a) FAECAL-ORAL ROUTE : This is the major route of
Agent factors transmission. It may occur by direct (person-to-person)
contact or indirectly by way of contaminated water, food or
(a) AGENT : The causative agent, the hepatitis A virus, is milk. Water-borne transmission, is not a major factor in
an enterovirus (type 72) of the Picornaviridae family (3). It developed countries, where food-borne outbreaks are
multiplies only in hepatocytes. Faecal shedding of the virus becoming more frequent. For example, consumption of
is at its highest during the later part of the incubation period salads and vegetables, and of raw or inadequately cooked
and early acute phase of illness. Only one serotype is shellfish and oyesters cultivated in sewage polluted water is
known. (b) RESISTANCE: The virus is fairly resistant to low associated with epidemic outbreaks of hepatitis A (6). Direct
pH, heat and chemicals. It has been shown to survive more transmission comprises an array of routes such as
than 10 weeks in well water (4). It withstands heating to 60 contaminated hands or objects such as eating utensils.
deg C for one hour, and is not affected by chlorine in doses Direct infection occurs readily under conditions of poor
usually employed for chlorination. Formalin is stated to be sanitation and overcrowding.
an effective disinfectant. The virus is inactivated by
ultraviolet rays and by boiling for 5 minutes or autoclaving. (b} PARENTERAL ROUTE: Hepatitis A is rarely, if ever,
In short the virus survives for long periods under variable transmitted by the parenteral route (i.e., by blood and blood
conditions and resists many procedures that eliminate or products or by skin penetration through contaminated
inactivate most bacterial agents. (c) RESERVOIR OF needles). This may occur during the stage of viraemia. This
INFECTION : The human cases are the only reservoir of mode of transmission is of minor importance as viraemic
infection. The cases range from asymptomatic infections to stage of infection occurs during prodromal phase and there
severe ones. Asymptomatic (anicteric) infections are is no carrier state (6).
especially common in children. These cases play an (c} SEXUAL TRANSMISSION: As a sexually transmitted
important role in maintaining the chain of transmission in infection hepatitis A may occur mainly among homosexual
the community. There is no evidence of a chronic carrier men because of oral-anal contact (10).
state. (d) PERIOD OF INFECTIVITY : The risk of
transmitting HAV is greatest from 2 weeks before to 1 week Food handlers are not at increased risk for hepatitis A
after the onset of jaundice. lnfectivity falls rapidly with the because of their occupation, but are noteworthy because of
onset of jaundice (5). (e) INFECTIVE MATERIAL : Mainly their critical role in common-source food-borne HAV
man's faeces. Blood, serum and other fluids are infective transmission. Health care personnel do not have an
during the brief stage of viraemia. (f) VIRUS EXCRETION : increased prevalence of HAV infection and nosocomial HAV
HAV is excreted in the faeces for about 2 weeks before the transmission is rare. Children play an important role in HAV
onset of jaundice and for up to 2 weeks thereafter. There is transmission as they generally have asymptomatic or
little evidence for HAV transmission by exposure to urine or unrecognized illness. (11).
naso-pharyngeal secretions of infected patients.
Haemodialysis plays no role in the spread of hepatitis A
Incubation period
infections to either patients or the staff (6). 10 to 50 days (usually 14-28 days}. The length of the
incubation period is proportional to the dose of the virus
Host factors ingested (4).
(a} AGE : Infection with HAV is more frequent among
children than in adults. However, people from all ages may
Clinical spectrum
be infected if susceptible. In young children, infections tend The onset of jaundice is often preceded by
to be mild or subclinical; the clinical severity increases with gastrointestinal symptoms such as nausea, vomiting,
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
anorexia, and mild fever. Jaundice may appear within a few Prevention and containment
days of the prodromal period, but anicteric hepatitis is more
common. Hepatitis A resolves completely in 98 per cent of a. Control of reservoir
cases but relapse of symptoms are noted in 3-20 per cent Control of reservoir is difficult because of the following
cases (12). The outcome of infection with HAV is as shown factors: (a) faecal shedding of the virus is at its height during
in Table 1. the incubation period and early phase of illness (b) the
occurrence of large number of subclinical cases (c) absence of
TABLE 1
specific treatment, and (d) low socio-economic profile of the
Outcomes of infection with hepatitis A virus population usually involved. Strict isolation of cases is not a
Outcome Children Adults
useful control measure because of (a) and {b). However,
attention should be paid to the usual control measures such
Inapparent (sub-clinical) infection 80-95% 10-25% as complete bed rest and disinfection of faeces and fomites.
Icteric disease 5-20% 75-90% The use of 0.5 per cent sodium hypochlorite has been
Complete recovery >98% >98%
strongly recommended as an effective disinfectant (13).
Chronic disease None None b. Control of transmission
Mortality rate 0.1% 0.3-2.1% The best means of reducing the spread of infection is by
Source: (6) promoting simple measures of personal and community
hygiene, e.g., hand washing before eating and after toilet; the
. Diagnosis sanitary disposal of excreta which will prevent contamination
of water, food and milk; and purification of community water
Tests for abnormal liver function, such as serum alanine supplies by flocculation, filtration and adequate chlorination.
aminotransferase (ALT) and bilirubin, supplement the A question is often asked how much chlorine is needed to
clinical, pathologic, and epidemiologic findings. inactivate the virus. Studies indicated that 1 mg/L of free
A specific laboratory diagnosis of hepatitis A can be residual chlorine can cause destruction of the virus in 30
obtained by : minutes at pH values of 8.5 or less (14). The water treatment
and distribution system should be improved. During
a. Demonstration of HAV particles or specific viral epidemics, boiled water should be advocated for drinking
antigens in the faeces, bile and blood. HAV is purposes. Several countries of the world have achieved
detected in the stool from about 2 weeks prior to control of water-borne HAV infection. Other control
the onset of jaundice, up to 2 weeks after. measures include proper disposal of sewage within
b. Anti-HAV appears in the lgM fraction during the communities. If all these measures are properly implemented,
acute phase, peaking about 2 weeks after elevation a substantial reduction of HAV infection can be expected.
of liver enzymes. Anti-HAV lgM usually declines to
non-detectable levels within 3-6 months. Anti-HAV c. Control of susceptible population
lgG appears soon after the onset of disease and Targeted protection of high-risk groups should be
persists for decades. Thus, detection of lgM-specific considered in low and very low endemicity, settings. Groups
anti-HAV in the blood of an acutely infected at increased risk of hepatitis A include travellers to areas of
patient confirms the diagnosis of hepatitis A. ELISA intermediate or high endemicity, those requiring life-long
is the method of choice for measuring HAV treatment with blood products, men having sex with men,
antibodies (6). workers in contact with non-human primates, and injection
drug users. In addition, patients with chronic liver disease
The clinical, virologic and serological events following
are at increased risk for fulminant hepatitis A and should be
exposure to HAV are as shown in Fig. 1. vaccinated (12). Use of hepatitis A vaccine rather than
passive prophylaxis with immune globuline should be
Virus in blood
considered for pre-exposure prophylaxis (e.g. for travellers)
~
and post-exposure prophylaxis (e.g. for close contacts of
~··i: faece1s acute cases of hepatitis A.
~ transferase 1. Vaccines : Two types of hepatitis A vaccines are
N8I I I
currently used worldwide:
Symptoms/jaundice
rtliF •I (a) Formaldehyde inactivated vaccines - produced in several
IgM .. -
countries and which are most commonly used worldwide.
/' {b) Live attenuated vaccinces - which are manufactured in
I
I
I China and are available in several countries.
I
I
I Inactivated hepatitis A vaccine are licensed for use in
I
persons 2: 12 months of age. The complete vaccination
Level of detection /
schedule consists of 2 dose administration into the deltoid
muscle. The interval between the first (primary) dose and
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 second (booster) dose is commonly 6-12 months; however,
Weeks after exposure the interval between the doses is flexible and can be
extended to 18-36 months. It can be administered
FIG. 1 simulteneously with other vaccines. Following 2 doses of
Immunologic and biologic events associated with human infection vaccine the protective efficacy is about 94 per cent.
with hepatitis A virus. The live attenuated vaccine is administered as a single
Source: (6) subcutaneous dose.
Both inactivated and live attenuated hepatitis A vaccines
HEPATITIS B Ell
per cent of all primary liver cancer. Between 5 per cent and
are highly immunogenic and immunization will generate 10 per cent of adults, and upto 90 per cent of infants
long-lasting, possibly life-long, protection against the disease infected with HBV become carriers. Among these, 25 per
in children and adults. cent, in the long term, develop serious liver disease.
Recommendations for hepatitis A vaccination in outbreak Hepatitis B is endemic in China and other parts of Asia.
situation depend on the epidemiologic features of disease in In these regions most people become infected in childhood
the community and the feasibility of rapidly implementing and 8-10 per cent of the adult population are chronically
a widespread vaccination programme. National immunization infected. In the Middle East and Indian sub-continent, an
programmes may consider inclusion of single-dose estimated 2-5 per cent of the general population is
inactivated hepatitis A vaccine in immunization schedule (12). chronically infected. In Western Europe and North America
Combination of hepatitis A and B, or hepatitis A and less than 1 per cent population is infected.
typhoid vaccines have been developed, mainly intended for Based on the different HBsAg carrier rates, countries can
use in adult travellers. be divided into three categories : high endemicity (:::: 8 per
2. Human immunoglobulin : The protective efficacy of cent), intermediate {:::: 2-8 per cent), and low endemicity
immune globulin {lg) against HAV infection is well ( < 2 per cent). Countries of the Region can be divided into
documented. The duration of protection is, however, limited three epidemiological patterns. The Type 1 occurs in Nepal
to approximately 1-2 months and 3-5 months following and Sri Lanka and is characterized by a low HBsAg carrier
administration of lgG at dose of 0.02 and 0.06 ml/kg body rate of 0.9 to 1.0 per cent. The second pattern (Type 2) can
weight, respectively. Prophylaxis is achieved within hours of be found in Bhutan, India, Indonesia and Maldives where
injection and is 80 to 90 per cent effective when carrier rate is high in the general population (5 to 7 per
administered before or no later than 14 days after exposure. cent). In India alone there are an estimated 43 to 45 million
The use of lg worldwide is now declining because of HBsAg carriers and, among them 10 to 12 million also have
insufficient concentration of anti-HAV lgG in non-specific lg HBeAg. Type 3 is observed in Bangladesh, DPR Korea,
preparations, the high cost of specific HAV IgG preparations, Myanmar and Thailand, where the carrier rate is very high
the limited duration of protection following passive IgG and ranges from 9 per cent to 12 per cent.
prophylaxis against HAV infection, and because hepatitis A Transmission of HBV infection by blood transfusion and
vaccines have been shown. to induce rapid protection in other medical interventions in both modern and
against HAV after first dose (12). traditional health practices is also common in the Region. In
India, the carrier rate of HBsAg in hospital staff has been
HEPATITIS B found to be higher (10.87 per cent) than in voluntary blood
donors (6 per cent) and in the general population (5 per
Hepatitis B (formerly known as "serum" hepatitis) is an
cent). In India there are only 806 licensed blood banks and
acute systemic infection with major pathology in the liver,
the incidence of post transfusion hepatitis in multiple-
caused by hepatitis B virus {HBV) and transmitted usually
transfused patients is as high as 18 to 30 per cent (16).
by the parenteral route. It is clinically characterized by a
tendency to a long incubation period (4 weeks to 6 months) Epidemiological determinants
and a protracted illness with a variety of outcomes. Usually,
it is an acute self-limiting infection, which may be either Agent factors
subclinical or symptomatic. In approximately 5 to 15 per
cent of cases, HBV infection fails to resolve and the affected (a) AGENT: Hepatitis B virus was discovered by Blumberg
individuals then become persistent carriers of the virus: in 1963. Efforts to grow this virus have been so far
Persistent HBV infection may cause progressive liver disease unsuccessful (17). HBV is a complex, 42-nm, double-shelled
including chronic active hepatitis and hepatocellular DNA virus, originally known as the "Dane particle". It
carcinoma. There is also evidence of a close association replicates in the liver cells. HBV occurs in three morphological
between hepatitis Band primary liver cancer (11). Hepatitis forms in the serum of a patient: (a) small spherical particles
B virus can form a dangerous alliance with delta virus and with an average diameter of 22-nm. These particles are
produce a new form of virulent hepatitis which is considered antigenic and stimulate production of surface antibodies;
to be a widespread threat for much of the world. (b) tubules of varying length and diameter, and (c) the Dane
particle which corresponds morphologically to hepatitis B
Problem statement virus. A person who is serologically positive for the surface
antigen is circulating all morphological forms, of which 22-nm
WORLD particles constitute the bulk. Of the three morphological
Hepatitis B is endemic throughout the world, especially in forms, only the Dane particle is considered infectious, the
tropical and developing countries and also in some regions other circulating morphological forms are not infectious.
of Europe (11). Its prevalence varies from country to (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : Man is the only
country and depends upon a complex mix of behavioural, reservoir of infection which can be spread either from
environmental and host factors. In general, it is lowest in carriers or from cases. The continued survival of infection
countries or a<reas with high standards of living. is due to the large number of individuals who are carriers of
The HBV infection is a global problem, with 66 per cent the virus. The persistent carrier state has been defined as the
of all the world's population living in areas where there are presence of HBsAg (with or without concurrent HBeAg) for
high levels of infection. more than 6 months. Cases may range from inapparent to
More than 2 billion people worldwide have evidence of symptomatic cases.
past or current HBV infection and 350 million are chronic (c) INFECTIVE MATERIAL: Contaminated blood is the
carriers of the virus, which is harboured in the liver, and main source of infection, although the virus has been found
causes an estimated 780,000 deaths from cirrhosis of liver in body secretions such as saliva, vaginal secretions and
and hepatocellular carcinoma (15). The virus causes 60-80 semen of infected persons.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
(d) RESISTANCE : The virus is quite stable and capable Serological screening and vaccination of high-risk groups is
of surviving for at least 7 days on environmental' surfaces. It highly recommended.
can be readily destroyed by sodium hypoclorite, as is by (c) HEPATITIS BAND HIV INFECTION: It is estimated
heat sterilization in an autoclave for 30 to 60 minutes. that 10 per cent of the 40 million people infected with HIV
(e) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY : The virus is worldwide are coinfected with HBV. Although HBV infection
present in the blood during the incubation period (for a appears to have a minimal effect on the progression of HIV,
month before jaundice) and acute phase of the disease. the presence of HIV markedly increases the risk of
Period of communicability is usually several months developing HBV-associated liver cirrhosis and
{occasionally years in chronic carriers) or until disappearance hepatocellular carcinoma. The mortality rate increases
of HBsAg and appearance of surface antibody. among HIV-positive people due to HBV coinfection both
before and after commencement of highly active anti-
Host factors retroviral therapy (17).
(a) AGE : The outcomes of HBV infection are (d) HUMORAL AND CELLULAR RESPONSES (18):
age-dependent. Acute hepatits B occurs in approximately Hepatitis B virus has three distinct antigens - a surface
1 per cent of perinatal, 10 per cent of early childhood (1-5 antigen, also known as "Australia antigen" {HBsAg), a core
years of age), and 30 per cent of late (> 5 years age) HBV antigen {HBcAg), and an "e" antigen (HBeAg). They
infections. Mortality from fulminant hepatitis B is stimulate the production of corresponding antibodies e.g.,
approximately 70 per cent. The development of chronic surface antibody (anti-HBs), core antibody (anti-HBc) and
HBV infection is inversely related to age and occurs in "e" antibody (anti-HBe). These antibodies and their
approximately 80-90 per cent of persons infected antigens constitute very useful markers of HBV infection.
perinatally, in 30 per cent infected in early childhood (less Patients with HBV infection are expected to have one or
than 6 years of age) and in 5 per cent infected after 6 years more HBV markers. The course of a typical acute hepatitis is
ofage (17). outlined in Fig. 1.
(b) HIGH-RISK GROUPS : Certain groups carry higher
risks. The annual incidence of HBV infection in surgeons is Modes of transmission
estimated to be 50 times greater than that in the general
population, and is more than twice that of other physicians. a. Parenteral route
Other high risk groups comprise recipients of blood · Hepatitis B is essentially a blood-borne infection. It is
transfusions, health care and laboratory personnel, transmitted by infected blood and blood products through
homosexuals, prostitutes, percutaneous drug abusers, transfusions, dialysis, contaminated syringes and needles,
infants of HBV carrier mothers, recipients of solid organ pricks of skin, handling of infected blood, accidental
transplants and patients who are immunocompromised. inoculation of minute quantities of blood such as may occur
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
concentration I
I
or reactants I
Anti-HBs
Level of Anti-HBe
detection
Months after
exposure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALT
Symptoms
FIG.1
Course of a typical acute hepatitis
ALT - alanine aminotransferase; anti-HBc antibody to hepatitis B core antigen; anti-HBe - antibody to hepatitis Be antigen;
anti-HBs - antibody to hepatitis B surface antigen; HBeAg hepatitis B e antigen; HBsAg - hepatitis B surface antigen;
HBV - hepatitis B virus; IgG immunoglobulin G; lgM immunoglobulin M.
Source: (6)
HEPATITIS B
during surgical and dental procedures, immunization, similar to those of the other types of viral hepatitis. But the
traditional tattooing, ear piercing, nose piercing, ritual picture is complicated by the carrier state and by chronic
circumcision, accupuncture, etc. Accidental percutaneous liver disease, which may follow the infection. Chronic liver
inoculations by shared razors and tooth brushes have been disease may be severe, and may progress to primary liver
implicated as occasional causes of hepatitis B (8). cancer which, in some parts of the world, is one of the
commonest human cancers, particularly in men (21). The
b. Perinatal transmission clinical course of hepatitis B in adults is as shown in Fig. 2.
Spread of infection from HBV carrier mothers to their
babies appears to be an important factor for the high
prevalence of HBV infection in some regions, particularly Fulminant
China and SE Asia. The risk of infection varies from country
to country and unless vaccinated at birth, the majority of
children born to mothers who are HBeAg-positive become 0.5% 66% Acute hepatitis B 33%
chronically infected. The mechanism of perinatal infection is infection
uncertain. Although HBV can infect the foetus in utero, this
rarely happens and most infections appear to occur at birth,
as a result of a leak of maternal blood into the baby's Clinical
circulation, or ingestion or accidental inoculation of infection Sub-clinical
blood (19). Infection of the baby is usually anicteric and is - jaundice infection
- flu-like asymptomatic
recognized by the appearance of surface antigen between
60-120 days after birth (8).
5-10% 85-90%
c. Sexual transmission
There is ample evidence for the spread of infection by
intimate contact or by sexual ro·ute. The sexually
promiscuous, particularly male homosexuals, are at very
high risk of infection with hepatitis B.
Reactivation
d. Other routes Minimal Chronic Recovery
liver hepatitis immunity
Transmission from child-to-child, often called horizontal disease
transmission, is responsible for a majority of HBV infections
and carriers in parts of the world other than Asia. The
researchers believe that the spread occurs through physical
contact between children with skin conditions such as
impetigo and scabies, or with cuts or grazes. Often
transmission occurs when children play together or share the
same bed (20).
In short, transmission occurs in a wide variety of Death
epidemiological settings. It can spread either from carriers or
from people with no apparent infection, or during the
incubation period, illness or early convalescence.
FIG. 2
Incubation period Clinical course of hepatitis B in adults
30 to 180 days. Lower doses of the virus result often in Source : (22)
longer incubation period. The average incubation period is
about 75 days (17). There are three distinct antigen antibody systems that
relate to HBV infection and a variety of circulating makers
Clinical picture that are useful in diagnosis. Interpretation of common
The symptoms and manifestations of hepatitis B are serological patterns is as shown in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Common serologic patterns in hepatitis B virus infection and their interpretation
PREVENTION AND CONTAINMENT 65-75 per cent of the vaccinees. The duration of protection
is at least 15 years and based on current scientific evidence,
Since there is no specific treatment, prevention has been life long (24). Some infants born prematurely with low birth
the major aim in managing viral hepatitis B. The following weight ( < 2000 g) may not respond well to vaccination at
measures are available : . birth. However, by one month of chronological age, all
premature infants, regardless of initial birth weight or
a. Hepatitis B vaccine gestational age, are likely to respond adequately. In such
The recombinant hepatitis B vaccine was introduced in cases the vaccine dose given at birth should not be counted
1986 and has gradually replaced the plasma-derived towards the primary series and 3 additional doses should be
hepatitis B vaccine. The active substance in recombinant given according to the national immunization schedule (17).
hepatitis B vaccine is HBsAg. Immunosuppressive illness such as advanced HIV infection,
Hepatitis B vaccine is available as monovalent chronic liver disease, chronic renal failure, and diabetes are
formulation, or in fixed combination with other vaccines, associated with reduced immunogenicity of the vaccine.
including DPT, Hib, hepatitis A and inactivated polio. The Data on immunogenecity suggest that in any age group,
immune response and safety of these combinations of interruption of the vaccination schedule does not require
vaccines are comparable to those observed when the restarting of the vaccine series. If the primary series is
vaccines are administered separately. When immunizing interrupted after the first dose, the second dose should be
against HBV at birth, only monovalent hepatitis B vaccine administered as soon as possible and the second and the
should be used. Internationally marketed hepatitis B third doses separated by a minimum interval of 4 weeks; if
vaccines are considered immunologically comparable and only the third dose is delayed, it should be administered as
can be used interchangeably (23). soon as possible (17).
The dose for adults is 10-20 micrograms initially Immunization in adults Routine pre-exposure
(depending on the formulation) and again at 1 and 6 vaccination should be considered for groups of adults who
months. Children under 10 years of age should be given half are at increased risk of HBV infection. Adults 20 years of age
of the adult dose at the same time intervals. For greatest and older should receive 1 ml of adult formulation. The
reliability of absorption, the deltoid muscle is preferred for usual schedule for adults is two doses separated by no less
injection as gluteal injection often results in deposition of than 4 weeks, and a third dose 4 to 6 months after the
vaccine in fat rather than muscle, with fewer serologic second dose. If an accelerated schedule is needed, the
conversion. For infants and children under 2 years, minimum interval between first and second dose is 4 weeks
anterolateral aspect of thigh is used as vaccination site. and the minimum interval between the second and third
Intradermal administration is not recommended because the dose is 8 weeks. However, the first and the third doses
immune response is less reliable particularly in children. The should be separated by no less than 16 weeks. Doses given
hepatitis B vaccine does not interfere with immune response at less than these minimum intervals should not be counted
to any other vaccine and vice-versa. The birth dose of as part of the vaccination series. It is not necessary to restart
hepatitis B can be given safely together with BCG vaccine. the series or add doses because of an extended interval
However, the vaccines should be given at different sites. between doses (11).
There are multiple options for incorporating the hepatitis The high-risk persons for whom the vaccination is
B vaccine into national immunization programmes. The recommended are persons with high-risk sexual behaviour,
choice of schedule depends on the local epidemiological partners and household contacts of HBsAg-positive
situation and programme considerations. The recommended persons, injecting drug users, persons who frequently
schedule for vaccination can be divided into those that require blood or blood products, recipients of solid organ
include a birth-dose and those that do not. Schedules with a transplantation, those at occupational risk of HBV infection,
birth-dose call for the first dose at birth, followed by a including health care workers, as well as for international
second dose and third dose at the time of the first and third travellers to HBV endemic countries.
dose of DPT vaccination respectively. Alternatively, a four- Hepatitis B vaccine is contraindicated for individuals with
dose schedule may be used (as in India) where the dose at a history of allergic reactions to any of the vaccine's
birth is followed by three additional doses at 6, 10 and 14 components. Neither pregnancy nor lactation is a
weeks with DPT vaccination. These doses may be given contraindication for use of this vaccine (24).
either as monovalent vaccine or as a combination (eg. with
DPT and/or Hib) following the schedules commonly used for The vaccine.should be stored at 2-8°C. Freezing must be
these vaccines. The minimum recommended interval avoided as it dissociates antizen from the alum adjuvant.
between the doses is four weeks. Longer dose intervals may
increase the final anti-HBs titres but not the sero-conversion Serological testing in vaccine recipients (11)
rates. These schedules will prevent most perinatally acquired Prevaccination serological testing: Prevaccination
infection. In countries where a high proportion of HBV serological testing is not indicated before routine vaccination
infection is acquired perinatally, specifically in countries of infants and children. It is recommended for all persons
where the prevalence in the general population of chronic born in Africa, Asia, the Pacific Islands, and other regions
HBV infection is more than 8 per cent, the first dose of with HBsAg prevalence of 2 per cent or higher; household,
hepatitis B vaccine should be given within 24 hours after sex and needle sharing contacts of HBsAg-positive persons;
birth to prevent perinatal transmission (24). homosexuals; injecting drug users; certain persons receiving
The complete vaccine series induces protective antibody cytotoxic or immunosuppressive therapy.
levels in more than 95 per cent of infants, children and Postvaccination serological testing: Not routinely
young adults. After the age of 40 years, protection following recommended following vaccination of infants, children,
the primary vaccination series drops below 90 per cent; by adolescents, or most adults. It is recommended for - chronic
60 years, protective antibody levels are achieved in only haemodialysis patients; other immunocompromised
HEPATITIS C
are used to confirm the diagnosis. Diagnosis of chronic prevent coinfection from these hepatitis viruses to
infection is made when antibodies to the hepatitis C virus protect their liver,
are present in the blood for more than six months. Similar to early and appropriate medical management including
acute infections, diagnosis is confirmed with an additional antiviral therapy if appropriate; and
test. Specialized tests are often used to evaluate patients for
liver disease, including cirrhosis and liver cancer. - regular monitoring for early diagnosis of chronic liver
disease.
Early diagnosis can prevent health problems that may
result from infection and prevent transmission to family For a number of technical reasons, the development of a
members and other close contacts. Some countries vaccine to prevent HCV infection is unlikely for many years.
recommend screening for people who may be at risk for The epidemiologic and clinical features of hepatitis A,
infection. These include: (a) people who recevied blood, hepatitis Band hepatitis Care summarized in Table 2.
blood products or organs before screening for hepatitis C
virus was implemented, or where screening was not yet HEPATITIS E
widespread. (b) current or former injecting drug users (even
those who injected drugs once many years ago); (c) people The infection caused by the hepatitis E virus (HEV) which
on long-term haemodialysis; (d) health-care workers; was discovered in 1980, is essentially a water-borne disease.
(e) people living with HIV; (f) people with abnormal liver Formerly termed enterically transmitted hepatitis non-A,
tests or liver disease, and (g) infants born to infected non-B (HNANB), HEV is a 29-nm to 32-nm RNA virus with
mothers. 4 genotypes (type 1, 2, 3 and 4).
Hepatitis E is found worldwide and different genotypes of
Treatment (32) the hepatitis E virus determine differences in epidemiology.
Hepatitis C does not always require treatment. There are For example, genotype 1 is usually seen in developing
6 genotypes of hepatitis C and they may respond differently countries and causes community-level outbreaks while
to treatment. Careful screening is necessary before starting genotype 3 is usually seen in the developed countries, and
the treatment to determine the most appropriate approach does not cause outbreaks. Hepatitis E prevalence is highest
for the patient. Combination antiviral therapy with in East and South Asia with genotype 1 most commonly
interferon and ribavirin has been the mainstay of hepatitis C found in India. Countries with limited resources, i.e., limited
treatment. Unfortunately, interferon is not widely available access to essential water, sanitation, hygiene and health
globally, it is not always well tolerated, some virus genotypes services are frequently affected. In recent years, some of
respond better to interferon than others, and many people these outbreaks have occurred in areas of conflict and
who take interferon do not finish their treatment. This humanitarian emergencies, such as war zones, and in camps
means that while hepatitis C is generally considered to be a for refugees or internally displaced populations. An
curable disease, for many people this is not a reality. estimated 20 million infections and 3.3 million acute cases
Scientific advances_ have led to the devel9pment of new occur annually worldwide with an estimated 56,600 deaths.
antiviral drugs for hepatitis C, which may be more effective Over 60 per cent of all hepatitis E infections and 65 per cent
and better tolerated than existing therapies. Two new of hepatitis deaths occur in East and South Asia, where
therapeutic agents telaprevir and boceprevir have recently seroprevalence rate of 25 per cent are common in some age
been licensed in some countries. Much needs to be done to groups (1).
ensure that these advances lead to greater access and
treatment globally. Transmission
The hepatitis E virus is transmitted mainly through the
Prevention faecal-oral route, due to faecal contamination of drinking
Primary prevention
water. Other transmission routes have been identified, which
include : (a) food-borne transmission from ingestion of
There is no vaccine for hepatitis C. The risk of infection products derived from infected animals; (b) transfusion of
can be reduced by avoiding. infected blood products; and (c) vertical transmission from a
unnecessary and unsafe injections; pregnant woman to her foetus.
- unsafe blood products;
- unsafe sharps waste collection and disposal; Incubation period
use of illicit drugs and sharing of injection equipment; The incubation period following exposure to the hepatitis
- unprotected sex with hepatitis C-infected people; E virus ranges from three to eight weeks, with a mean of 40
days. The period of communicability is unknown.
- sharing of sharp personal items that may be
contaminated with infected blood;
Symptoms
tattoos, piercings and acupuncture performed with
contaminated equipment. Symptomatic infection is more common in young adults
aged 15-40 years. Although infection is frequent in children,
Secondary and tertiary prevention the disease is mostly asymptomatic or causes a very mild
For people infected with the hepatitis C virus, WHO illness without jaundice that goes undiagnosed. The typical
recommends: symptoms are jaundice, loss of appetite, abdominal pain
and tenderness, nausea and vomiting, fever and enlarged
education and· counselling on options for care and and tender liver. The symptoms are largely indistinguishable
treatment; from those experienced during any acute phase of hepatic
immunization with the hepatitis A and B vaccines to illness and last for one or two weeks.
HEPATITIS E
TABLE 2
Epidemiologic and clinical features of viral hepatitis types A, B and C
Type A Viral Hepatitis; Type B Viral Hepatitis Type C
Incubation period 10-50 days (avg. 25-30) 50-180 days (avg. 60-90) 2 weeks-6 months
(avg. 40-120 days
IPrincipal age distribution Children, 1 young adults 15-29 years 2 Adu!ts2
ISeasonal incidence Throughout the year but tends
to peak in autumn
Throughout the year Throughout the year
TABLE 3
Nomenclature and definitions of hepatitis viruses, antigens and antibodies
Component
Disease of system Definition
Hepatitis A HAV Hepatitis A virus. Etiologic agent of infectious hepatitis. A picornavirus, the prototype of a
new genus, Hepatovirus.
Anti-HAV Antibody to HAV. Detectable at onset of symptoms; lifetime persistence.
lgM Anti-HAV IgM class antibody to HAV. Indicates recent infection with hepatitis A; positive up to 4-6
months after infection.
Guidelines for assessing dehydration and oral supervision respecting the following rules :
rehydration : The guidelines for assessing dehydration and for children under age 2 years, give a teaspoon every
oral rehydration are given in Tables 3 and 4 (20, 21). 1 to 2 minutes, and offer frequent sips out of a cup for
TABLE 3 older children. Adults may drink as much as they like.
Assessment of dehydration Try to give the estimated required amount within a
4-hour period. As a general guide, after each loose
DEHYDRATION stool, give - children under 2 years of age : 50-100 ml
Mild Severe (a quarter to half a large cup) of fluid; children aged
2 up to 10 years : 100-200 ml (a half to one large
(l) Patient's Thirsty; alert, Drowsy; iimp, cold, cup); and older children and adults : as much fluid as
appearance restless sweaty; may be they want.
comatose
(2) Radial pulse Normal rate and Rapid, feeble, if the child vomits, wait for 10 minutes, then try again,
volume sometimes giving the solution slowly - a spoonful every 2 to 3
impalpable minutes.
(3) Blood pressure Normal Less than 80 mm Hg; if the child wants to drink more ORS solution than the
may be unrecordable estimated amount, and does not vomit, there can be
(4) Skin elasticity Pinch retracts Pinch retracts very no harm in feeding him/her more. If the child refuses
immediately slowly (more than 2
seconds) to drink the required amount and signs of dehydration
(5) Tongue Moist Very dry have disappeared, rehydration is completed. The
(6) Ant. fontanelle Normal Very sunken treatment plan for non-dehydrated diarrhoeic children
(7) Urine flow Normal Little or none is then resumed.
3 body weight loss 4-53 · rn3 or more if the child is breast-fed, nursing should be pursued
I during treatment with ORS solution.
Estimated fluid 40-50 ml/kg 100-UO ml/kg
deficit The introduction of oral rehydration fluid has not only
When obvious signs of dehydration exist, the water deficit reduced the cost of treatment, but also made possible
is somewhere between 50 and 100 ml per kg of body weight. treatment of patients in their own homes by primary health
If the child's weight is known, the amount of ORS solution workers or relatives of patients. The ingredients required for
required for rehydration during the first four hours may be the preparation of oral fluid are inexpensive and readily
calculated by setting the deficit at approximately 75 ml/kg. If available, and the solution can be prepared with ordinary
the child's weight is not known, the approximate deficit may drinking water and needs no sterilization. The development
be determined on the basis of age, although this procedure of oral rehydration therapy is a major breakthrough in the
is less accurate. The guidelines for oral rehydration are given fight against cholera and other diarrhoeal diseases.
in Table 4. Packets of "oral rehydration mixture" are now freely
TABLE 4 available at all primary health centres, sub-centres, hospitals
Guidelines for oral rehydration therapy (for all ages) and chemist shops. The contents of the packet are to be
during the first four hours dissolved in one litre of drinking water. The solution should
be made fresh daily and used within 24 hours. It should not
Age(*) under4 1 1-2 2-4 5-14 15 yrs be boiled or otherwise sterilized.
months months yrs. yrs. yrs. or over
If the WHO mixture of salts is not available, a simple
Weight under5 5-7.9 8-10.9 11-15.9 16-29.9 30 or mixture consisting of table salt (one level teaspoon) and
(kg) over sugar (6 level teaspoon) dissolved in one litre of drinking
ORS 200-400 400-600 600-800 800- 1200- 2200- water may be safely used until the proper mixture is
solution 1200 2200 4000 obtained. The earlier the treatment is instituted the better it
(ml) is for the patient.
(*)The patient's age should only be used if weight is not known. The Many countries have designated recommended house
approximate amount of ORS required in ml. may also be calculated fluids. Wherever possible these should include at least one
by multiplying the patient's weight (expressed in kg) by 75. fluid that contains salt. Fluids that do not contain salt are
Source: (1) water in which a cereal has been cooked e.g. rice water;
unsalted soup, yoghurt drinks, green coconut water, weak
The actual amount given will depend on the patients tea etc. The mothers should be taught to add salt about
desire to drink and by surveillance of signs of dehydration, 3 g/litre to an unsalted drink or soup during diarrhoea. A few
keeping in mind the fact that greater amounts should be fluids are potentially dangerous and should be avoided
given to heavier patients, those with greater signs of during diarrhoea. Especially important are drinks sweetened
dehydration and those who still have watery diarrhoea with sugar, which can cause osmotic diarrhoea and
during rehydration. The general rule is that patients should hypernatraemia. Examples are commercial carbonated
be given as much ORS solution as they want, and that signs beverages, commercial fruit juices and sweetened tea. Other
of dehydration should be checked until they subside. fluids to be avoided are those with stimulant diuretic or
Older children and adults should be given as much water purgative effect, e.g. coffee and some medicinal tea or
as they want, in addition to the ORS solution. infusions (1).
Mothers should be taught how to administer ORS The infant's usual diet of cereals, vegetables and other
solution to their children. It is best for a demonstration to be foods should be continued during diarrhoea, and increased
given by a nurse or by a health worker following which the afterwards. Food should never be witheld and the child's
mother feeds the solution to her child under their usual food should never be diluted. The aim is to give as
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
much nutrient rich food as the child will accept. Most (III) MAINTENANCE THERAPY
children with watery diarrhoea regain their appetite after After the initial fluid and electrolyte deficit has been
dehydration is corrected, whereas those with bloody corrected (i.e., the signs of dehydration {Table 3) have gone)
diarrhoea often eat poorly until the illness resolves. These
oral fluid should be used for maintenance therapy. In adults
children should be encouraged to resume normal feeding as
and older children, thirst is an adequate guide for fluid
soon as possible.
needs; they can be told to drink as much as they want to
Please refer to Chapter 9, Annexure A for plan A, Plan B satisfy their thirst. The guidelines for maintenance therapy
and Plan C for the management of dehydration due to are given in Table 6. The general principle is that the oral
diarrhoea. fluid intake should equal the rate of continuing stool loss,
which should be measured. Diarrhoea usually lasts for 1 or 2
(II) INTRAVENOUS REHYDRATION days.
Intravenous infusion is usually required only for the initial
rehydration of severely dehydrated patients who are in TABLE 6
shock or unable to drink. Such patients are best transferred Maintenance therapy
to the nearest hospital or treatment centre.
The solutions recommended by WHO for intravenous
infusion are: {a) Ringer's lactate solution (also called Mild diarrhoea
Hartmann's solution for injection) : It is the best (not more than one stool every
commercially available solution. .It supplies adequate 2 hours or longer, or less than
concentrations of sodium and potassium and the lactate 5 ml stool per kg per hour)
yields bicarbonate for correction of the acidosis. It can be Severe diarrhoea· Replace stool losses volume
used to correct dehydration due to acute diarrhoeas of all (more than one stool every forvolume; ifnot measurable
causes. {b) Diarrhoea Treatment Solution (DTS): Also 2 hours, or more than 5 ml of give 10-15 ml/kg body
recommended by WHO as an ideal polyelectrolyte solution stool per kg per hour) weight per h.our
for intravenous infusion. It contains in one litre, sodium
chloride 4 g sodium acetate 6.5 g potassium chloride 1 g (IV) APPROPRIATE FEEDING : Medical profession has
and glucose 10 g (21). It must meet purity and sterility reeled for centuries under the mistaken assumption that it is
requirements of fluid for injection. important to "rest the gut" during diarrhoea. The current
If nothing else is available, normal saline can be given view is that during episodes of diarrhoea, normal food
because it is often readily available. Normal saline is the intake should be promoted as soon as the child whatever its
poorest fluid because it will not correct the acidosis and will age, is able to eat. This is especially relevant for the
not replace potassium losses. It should be replaced by the exclusively breast-fed infants. Newborn infants with
above solutions as early as possible. Plain glucose and diarrhoea who show little or no signs of dehydration can be
dextrose solutions should not be used as they provide only treated by breast-feeding alone. Those with moderate or
water and glucose. severe dehydration should receive oral rehydration solution.
The recommended dose of the IV fluid to be given is 100 Breast-feeding is continued along with oral rehydration
ml/kg, divided as follows {Table 5) : solution given after each liquid stool. Not only breast milk
helps the infant to recover from an attack of diarrhoea both
TABLE 5 in terms of the nutrients it supplies, and its rehydrating
Treatment plan for rehydration therapy effect, but it helps to prevent further infection because it has
protective properties.
For diarrhoea due to cholera the drug of choice is Without an adequate supply of clean water close to their
doxicycline, tetracycline, TMP-SMX and erythromycin. For homes, it is extremely difficult to promote personal and
diarrhoea due to shige/la, the drug of choice is ciprofloxacin domestic hygiene. Simple hygienic measures like hand
as shigella is usually resistant to ampicillin and TMP-SMX. washing with soap before preparing food, before eating,
The medicines that should not be uesd in the treatment of before feeding a child, after defecation, after deaning a child
diarrhoea are as follows (16) : who has defecated, and after disposing off a child's stool
should be promoted. All families should have a clean and
neomycin (damages the intestinal mucosa and can functioning latrine. The latrine should be kept dean by
cause malabsorption); regular washing of dirty surface. If there is no latrine, family
- purgatives (worsen diarrhoea and dehydration); members should defecate at a distance from the house,
tincture of opium or atropine (dangerous for children paths or areas where children play and at least 10 metres
and dysentery patients because of decreased intestinal away from the water supply source. It should be recognized
transit time); that in many communities, young children are often
- cardiotonics such as Coramine; shock in diarrhoea permitted to defecate indiscriminately. Because diarrhoea
must be corrected by intravenous fluids and not by attack rates are higher among children, it is the defecation in
drugs; this age group that deserves the most attention.
- steroids (expensive, useless, and may cause adverse Contaminated foods of all sorts have been identified as
effects); major vehicles for the transmission of faecal pathogens
during early infancy, e.g., diluted milk, cereal gruels, etc.
- oxygen (expensive, unnecessary); Delays in consumption add to the problem.
- charcoal, kaolin, pectin, bismuth (no value);
(ii) HEALTH EDUCATION : Environmental sanitation
mexaform (no value and can be dangerous). measures require educational support, to ensure their proper
(VI) ZINC SUPPLEMENTATION When a zinc use and maintenance of such facilities. An important part of
supplement is given during an episode of acute diarrhoea, it health worker's job is to help prevent diarrhoea by
reduces the episode's duration and severity. In addition, zinc convincing and helping community members to adopt and
supplements given for 10 to 14 days lower the incidence of maintain certain preventive practices such as breast-feeding,
diarrhoea in the following 2 to 3 months. WHO and UNICEF improved weaning, clean drinking water, use of plenty of
therefore recommend daily 10 mg of zinc for infants under 6 water for hygiene, use of latrine, proper disposal of stools of
months of age, and 20 mg for children older than 6 months young children etc.
for 10-14 days (19). (iii) IMMUNIZATION : Immunization against measles is a
potential intervention for diarrhoea control. When
b. Better MCH care practices administered at the recommended age, the measles vaccine
(a) MATERNAL NUTRITION : Improving prenatal can prevent upto 25 per cent of diarrhoeal deaths in
nutrition will reduce the low birth weight problem. Prenatal children under 5 years of age.
and postnatal nutrition will improve the quality of breast
milk. Rotavirus vaccine (9)
(b) CHILD NUTRITION: (i) Promotion of breast-feeding: Two live, oral, attenuated rotavirus vaccines were
Any measures to promote breast-feeding are likely to reduce licensed in 2006 : the monovalent human rotavirus vaccine
the diarrhoeal diseases in infants. The breast-fed child is at (Rotarix™) and the pentavalent bovine-human, reassortant
very much less risk of severe diarrhoea and death than the vaccine (Rota Teq™). Both vaccines have demonstrated very
bottlefed child. Promotion of breast-feeding should include good safety and efficacy profiles in large clinical trials. The
strong efforts to limit the use of commercial and artificial rotavirus vaccines are now introduced for routine use in a
formulas. Breast-feeding should be continued as long as number of industrialized and developing countries.
possible. (ii) Appropriate weaning practices : Poor weaning
practices are a major risk factor for diarrhoea. The child The Rotarix™ vaccine is administered orally in a 2-dose
should be weaned neither too soon, nor too late, in any case schedule to infants of approximately 2 and 4 months of age.
not earlier than the sixth month of life using nutritious and The first dose can already be administered at the age of
locally available foods, and the foods should be hygienically 6 weeks and should be given no later than at the age of
prepared and given. (iii) Supplementary feeding : This is 12 weeks. The interval between the 2 doses should be at
necessary to improve the nutritional status of children aged least 4 weeks. The 2-dose schedule should be completed by
6-59 months. As soon as the supplementary food is age 16 weeks, and no later than by 24 weeks of age.
introduced, the child enters the high-risk category. For RotaTeq™, the recommended schedule is 3 oral doses
(iv) Vitamin A supplementation : Vitamin A supplementation at ages 2, 4 and 6 months. The first dose should be
is a critical preventive measure, and studies have shown administered between ages 6-12 weeks and subsequent
mortality reductions ranging from 19 per cent to 54 per cent doses at intervals of 4-10 weeks. Vaccination should not be
in _children receiving supplements. This reduction is initiated for infants aged > 12 weeks. All 3 doses should be
associated in large part with decline in deaths due to administered before the age of 32 weeks.
diarrhoeal diseases and measles. It also reduces the
duration, severity and complications associated with There is a potentially higher risk of intussusception when
diarrhoea (2). the first dose of these vaccines is given to infants aged
> 12 weeks; consequently, current rotavirus vaccines should
c. Preventive strategies not be used in catch-up vaccination campaigns, where the
(i) SANITATION : Measures to reduce transmission
exact age of the vaccinees may be difficult to ascertain.
emphasize the traditional improved water supply, improved (iv) FLY CONTROL : Flies breeding in association with
excreta disposal and improved domestic and food hygiene. human or animal faeces should be controlled.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
picture. For reasons that are not known, there has been no form in the environment (9, 10). The existence of a free-
large scale epidemic of classical cholera since 1964. In short, living cycle may explain why cholera became endemic for
the El Tor biotype of V. Cho/erae 01 has rapidly replaced varying periods in certain areas after introduction of the
the classical biotype in all parts of the country. Most of the El current pandemic strains (9, 10). Atypical non-toxigenic
Tor biotype isolated today belong to the serotype Ogawa. V. cholerae 01 of the El Tor biotype have sometimes been
During 2013, about 1,127 cholera cases were reported in found in surface waters in endemic and non-endemic areas
India with 5 deaths. The majority cases were reported from without any related human infection or disease (11). A
Gujarat (327) followed by Maharashtra (24 7). Karnataka question of considerable epidemiological significance is
reported 105 cases, Tamil Nadu 93, and West Bengal 120 whether "transmission" of somatic antigen can occur in the
cases (4). natural environment, i.e., can non-01 V. cholerae become
V. cholerae 01? (12). Such "transformation" has been
Epidemiological features claimed by many workers (13).
Cholera is both an epidemic and endemic disease. The Epidemiological determinants
epidemicity and endemicity of a disease will depend on the
characteristics of the agent, and those of the system Agent factors
(environment). Characteristics of the agent which influence (a) AGENT : The organism that causes cholera is labelled
its distribution include its ability to survive in a given as V. cholerae 0 Group 1 or Vibrio cholerae 01 and 0139.
environment, its virulence, the average number of The term "epidemic strain" has also been used for these
organisms required to cause infection, etc. Characteristics of vibrios. Vibrios that are biochemically similar to the
the system which affect the distribution of the agent include epidemic strains (\!. cholerae 01 and 0139) but do not
the number of susceptibles, and the opportunities it provides agglutinate in V. cholerae 01 and 0139 antiserum have
for transmission of the infection. Global experience has been referred to in the past as non-agglutinating (NAG)
shown that the introduction of cholera into any country vibrios or as non-cholera vibrios (NCV). These are now
cannot be prevented, but cholera can create a problem only included in the species V. cholerae and are referred to as
in areas where sanitation is defective. non-0 Group 1VI 0139 cholerae (non-epidemic strains). It
Epidemics of cholera are characteristically abrupt and is now recognized that the NCV/NAG vibrios include some
often create an acute public health problem. They have a species that are pathogenic for humans (e.g., Vibrio
high potential to spread fast and cause deaths. The epidemic parahaemolyticus) which have caused outbreaks of cholera-
reaches a peak and subsides gradually as the "force of like diarrhoea. It is, therefore, necessary to identify
infection" declines. Often-times, by the time control V. cholerae 01 and 0139 for specific diagnosis of cholera.
measures are instituted the epidemic has already reached its Within the 0-Group 1, two biotypes - classical and El Tor,
peak and is waning. Thus, cholera epidemic in a community have been differentiated. It may be mentioned that the El
is self-limiting. This is attributed to the acquisition of Tor biotype was first isolated at the El Tor quarantine station
temporary immunity, as well as due to the occurrence of a in Egypt in 1905. Cholera is now caused mostly by the El
large number of subclinical cases. Tor biotype and 0139. Classical and El Tor vibrios are
The "force of infection" is composed of 2 components, further divided each into 3 serological types namely Inaba,
namely the force of infection through water and the force of Ogawa and Hikojima. Most of the El Tor vibrios isolated in
infection through contacts (5). It is well-known that the India belong to the Ogawa serotype. The El Tor biotype
elimination of contaminated water does not immediately which are known for their haemolytic property, lost this
bring an outbreak to an end, but a so-called "tail" of the property as the pandemic progressed. They may be
epidemic is produced. This is due to the continuation of distinguished from classical vibrios by the following tests :
transmission through contacts (5).
(1) El Tor vibrios agglutinate chicken and sheep
In areas where cholera is endemic, it does not show a erythrocytes
stable endemicity like typhoid fever (5). It undergoes
(2) they are resistant to classical phage IV
seasonal fluctuations as well as epidemic outbreaks. The
seasonal variation differs between countries and even (3) they are resistant to polymyxin B-50-unit disc, and
between regions of the same country. The seasonal (4) the VP reaction and haemolytic test do not give
incidence is also subject to change. For example, the disease consistent results.
used to be most common in the summer in Kolkata and in (b) RESISTANCE : V. cho/erae are killed within 30
the early winter in Bangladesh; now in both places, it is most minutes by heating at 56 deg.C or within a few seconds by
frequent in the autumn (6). In some parts of India, the peak boiling. They remain in ice for 4-6 weeks or longer. Drying
incidence is in August. and sunshine will kill them in a few hours. They are easily
The El Tor biotype, wherever it has spread, has become destroyed by coal tar disinfectants such as cresol. Bleaching
endemic with periodic outbreaks. It appears to have greater powder is another good disinfectant which kills vibrios
"endemic tendency" than its classical counterpart in that it instantly at 6 mg/litre. The El Tor biotype tends to be more
causes a higher infection-to-case ratio (i.e., inapparent resistant than do classical vibrios. (c) TOXIN PRODUCTION
infections and mild cases). : The vibrios multiply in the lumen of the small intestine and
Cholera occurs at intervals even in endemic areas. produce an exotoxin (enterotoxin). This toxin produces
A question that is frequently asked is about the fate of diarrhoea through its effect on the adenylate cyclase-cyclic
V. cholerae in the inter-epidemic periods. Three AMP system of mucosa! cells of the small intestine. The
explanations are offered : (a) the existence of long-term exotoxin has no effect on any other tissue except the
carriers (7); (b) the existence of diminished but continuous intestinal epithelial cells. (d) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION:
transmission involving asymptomatic cases (8), and (c) the The human being is the only known reservoir of cholera
persistence of the organism in a free-living, perhaps altered infection. He may be a case or tarrier. (i) Cases : Cases
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
the passage of sodium from the lumen to the plasma. None Laboratory diagnosis of cholera (21)
of these theories stood the test of time (19). The diagnosis of cholera can never be made with certainty
According to current concepts, the cholera vibrio get on clinical grounds. Laboratory methods of diagnosis are
through the mucus which overlies the intestinal epithelium. It required to confirm the diagnosis : (a) COLLECTION OF
probably secretes mucinase, which helps it move rapidly STOOLS : A fresh specimen of stool should be collected for
through the mucus. Then it gets attached or adhered to the laboratory examination. Sample should be collected before
intestinal epithelial cells, and this it probably does by an the person is treated with antibiotics. Collection may be made
adherence factor on its surface. When the vibrio becomes generally in one of the following ways : (i) Rubber catheter :
adherent to the mucosa, it produces its enterotoxin which Collection by the catheter is the best method but is
consists of 2 parts - the light or L toxin and the heavy or complicated under field conditions. Soft rubber catheter
H toxin. The L toxin combines with substances in the epithelial (No.26-28) sterilized by boiling should be used. The catheter
cell membrane called gangliosides and this binds the vibrio to is introduced (after lubrication with liquid paraffin) for at least
the cell wall. Binding is irreversible. The mode of action of 4-5 cm into the rectum. The specimen voided may be
H toxin is not fully clear. What we know is that there is a collected directly into a transport (holding} media, e.g.,
substance called "adenyl cyclase" in the intestinal epithelial Venkatraman-Ramakrishnan (VR} medium, alkaline peptone
cells, and H toxin activates this substance. The activated water. (ii) Rectal swab : Swabs consisting of 15-20 cm long
adenyl cyclase causes a rise in another substance, called 3, wooden sticks, with one end wrapped with absorbent cotton,
5-adenosine monophosphate, better known as cyclic or sterilized by autoclaving have been found to be satisfactory.
cAMP (A physiologist got Noble Prize for describing this Rectal swabs should be dipped into the holding medium
substance}. cAMP provides energy which drives fluid and ions before being introduced into the rectum. (iii) If no transport
into the lumen of the intestine. This fluid is isotonic and is medium is available, a cotton-tipped rectal swab should be
secreted by all segments of small intestine. The increase in soaked in the liquid stool, placed in a sterile plastic bag,
fluid is the cause of diarrhoea, and not increased peristalsis. tightly sealed and sent to the testing laboratory (22).
There is no evidence that V. cholerae invades any tissue, nor (b) VOMITUS : This is practically never used as the chances
the enterotoxin to have any direct effect on any organ other of isolating vibrios are much less and there is no advantage.
than the small intestine (19). (c} WATER: Samples containing 1-3 litres of suspect water
should be collected in sterile bottles (for the filter method}, or
Clinical features 9 volumes of the sample water added to 1 volume of 10 per
The severity of cholera is dependent on the rapidity and cent peptone water, and despatched to the laboratory by the
duration of fluid loss. Epidemiological studies have shown quickest method of transport. (d) FOOD SAMPLES: Samples
that more than 90 per cent of El Tor cholera cases are mild of food suspected to be contaminated with V. cho/erae (or
and clinically indistinguishable from other acute diarrhoeas other enteric bacteria} amounting to 1 to 3 g are collected in
(20). However, a typical case of cholera shows 3 stages : transport media and sent to the laboratory.
(a) STAGE OF EVACUATION : The onset is abrupt with (e) TRANSPORTATION: (i) The stools should be transported
profuse, painless, watery diarrhoea followed by vomiting. in sterilized McCartney bottles, 30 ml capacity containing
The patient may pass as many as 40 stools in a day. The alkaline peptone water or VR medium. VR medium can be
stools may have a "rice water" appearance. (b) STAGE OF used if larger stool specimens can be collected. The specimen
COLLAPSE : The patient soon passes into a stage of collapse should be transported in alkaline peptone water or Cary-
because of dehydration. The classical signs are : sunken eyes, Blair medium if it is collected by a rectal swab. One gram or
hollow cheeks, scaphoid abdomen, sub-normal temperature, one ml of faeces in 10 ml of the holding medium will suffice.
washerman's hands and feet, absent pulse, unrecordable Rectal swabs should have their tops broken off so that caps of
blood pressure, loss of skin elasticity, shallow and quick the containers can be replaced (ii) If suitable plating media
respirations. The output of urine decreases and may are available (e.g., bile salt agar} at the bed-side, the stools
ultimately cease. The patient becomes restless, and should be streaked on to the media and forwarded to the
complains of intense thirst and cramps in legs and abdomen. laboratory with the transport media. (f) DIRECT
Death may occur at this stage, due to dehydration and EXAMINATION : If a microscope with dark field illumination
acidosis resulting from diarrhoea. (c) STAGE OF is available, it may be possible to diagnose about 80 per cent
RECOVERY : If death does not occur, the patient begins to of the cases within a few minutes, and more cases after 5-6
hours of incubation in alkaline peptone water. In the dark
show signs of clinical improvement. The blood pressure
field, the vibrios evoke the image of many shooting stars in a
begins to rise, the temperature returns to normal, and urine
dark sky. If motility ceases on mixing with polyvalent anti-
secretion is re-established. If anuria persists, the patient may cholera diagnostic serum, the organisms are presumed to be
die of renal failure. The classical form of severe cholera cholera vibrios. A presumptive diagnosis of cholera can thus
occurs in only 5-10 per cent of cases. In the rest, the disease be established. (g) CULTURE METHODS : On arrival at the
tends to be mild characterized by diarrhoea with or without laboratory, the specimen in holding fluid is well shaken, and
vomiting or marked dehydration. As a rule, mild cases about 0.5 to 1.0 ml of material is inoculated into Peptone
recover in 1-3 days. Water Tellurite (PWT) medium for enrichment. After 4 to 6
Epidemiologically, cholera due to El Tor biotype differs hours incubation at 37 deg. C, a loopful of the culture from
from classical cholera in the following respects : (a} a higher the surface is subcultured on Bile Salt Agar medium (BSA, pH
incidence of mild and asymptomatic infection. This implies 8.6}. After overnight incubation, the plates are screened
that the characteristic picture of rice-water stools and other under oblique light illumination for vibrio colonies.
signs of classical cholera described above may not be seen (h} CHARACTERIZATION : V. cho/erae usually appears on
often; (b) fewer secondary cases in the affected families; bile salt agar (BSA) as translucent, moist, raised, smooth and
(c) occurrence of chronic carriers, and (d) since El Tor easily emulsifiable colonies about 1 mm in diameter. The
vibrios are more resistant than classical cholera vibrios, they typical colonies are picked up and tested as follows :
survive longer in the extra-intestinal environment. (i) Gram's stain and motility: Gram negative and curved rods
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
stage, there is malaise, headache, cough and sore throat, The dipstick test, developed in the Netherlands, is based on
often with abdominal pain and constipation. The fever the binding of S. typhi - specific lgM antibodies in samples
ascends in a step-ladder fashion. After about 7-10 days, the to S. typhi lipopolysaccharide (LPS) antigen and the staining
fever reaches a plateau and the patient looks toxic, of bound antibodies by an anti-human lgM antibody
appearing exhausted and often prostrated. There may be conjugated to colloidal dye particles.
marked constipation, especially in early stage or "pea soup"
diarrhoea. There is marked abdominal distention. There is CONTROL OF TYPHOID FEVER
leukopenia and blood, urine and stool culture is positive for
· salmonella. If there are no complications the patient's The control or elimination of typhoid fever is well within
condition improves over 7-10 days. However, relapse may the scope of modern public health. This is an accomplished
occur for up to 2 weeks after termination of therapy. fact in many developed countries. There are generally three
lines of defence against typhoid fever :
During the early phase, physical findings are few. Later,
splenomegaly, abdominal distension and tenderness, relative 1. control of reservoir
bradycardia, dicrotic pulse, and occasionally meningismus 2. control of sanitation, and
appear. The rash (rose spots) commonly appears during the 3. immunization.
second week of disease. The individual spot, found The weakest link in the chain of transmission is sanitation
principally on the trunk, is a pink papule 2-3 mm in diameter which is amenable to control.
that fades on pressure. It disappears in 3-4 days.
Serious complications occur in up to 10 per cent of 1. Control of reservoir
typhoid fever patients, especially in those who have been ill The usual methods of control of reservoir are their
longer than 2 weeks, and who have not received proper identification, isolation, treatment and disinfection.
treatment. Intestinal haemorrhage is manifested by a sudden
drop in temperature and signs of shock, followed by dark or a.CASES
fresh blood in the stool. Intestinal perforation is most likely (i) Early diagnosis : This is of vital importance as the early
to occur during the third week. Less frequent complications symptoms are non-specific. Culture of blood and stools are
are urinary retention, pneumonia, thrombophlebitis, important investigations in the diagnosis of cases.
myocarditis, psychosis, cholecystitis, nephritis and (ii) Notification: This should be done where such notification
osteomyelitis. is mandatory. (iii) Isolation . Since typhoid fever is infectious
Estimates of case-fatality rates of typhoid fever range and has a prolonged course, the cases are better transferred
from 1 per cent to 4 per cent; fatality rates in children aged to a hospital for proper treatment, as well as to prevent the
less than 4 years being 10 times higher (4.0%) than in older spread of infection. As a rule, cases should be isolated till
children (0.4%). In untreated cases, the fatality rates may three bacteriologically negative stools and urine reports, are
rise to 10-20 per cent (2). obtained on three separate days. (iv) Treatment : The
fluoroquinolones are widely regarded as the drug of choice
Laboratory diagnosis of typhoid (3) for· the treatment of typhoid fever. They are relatively
(a) MICROBIOLOGICAL PROCEDURES : The definitive inexpensive, well tolerated and more rapidly and reliably
diagnosis of typhoid fever depends on the isolation of S. effective than the former first-line drugs, viz.
typhi from blood, bone marrow and stools. Blood culture is chloramphenicol, ampicillin, amoxicillin and trimethoprim -
the mainstay of diagnosis of this disease. sulfamethoxazole (TMP-SMX). The antibiotics used in
uncomplicated typhoid fever are as shown in Table 1. Patients
(b) SEROLOGICAL PROCEDURE : Felix-Wida! test seriously ill and profoundly toxic may be given an injection of
measures agglutinating antibody levels against 0 and hydrocortisone 100 mg daily for 3 to 4 days. (v) Disinfection:
H antigens. Usually, 0 antibodies appear on day 6-8 and Stools and urine are the sole sources of infection. They
H antibodies on day 10-12 after the onset of disease. The test should be received in closed containers and disinfected with
is usually performed on an acute serum (at first contact with the 5 per cent cresol for at least 2 hours. All soiled clothes and
patient). The test has only moderate sensitivity and specificity. linen should be soaked in a solution of 2 per cent chlorine and
It can be negative in up to 30 per cent of culture -proven cases steam-sterilized. Nurses and doctors should not forget to
of typhoid fever. This may be because of prior antibiotic disinfect their hands. (vi) Follow-up : Follow-up examination
therapy that has blunted the antibody response. On the other of stools and urine should be done for S. typhi 3 to 4 months
hand, S. typhi shares 0 and H antigens with other salmonella after discharge of the patient, and again after 12 months to
serotypes and has cross-reacting epitopes with other prevent the development of the carrier state. With early
Enterobacteriacae, and this can lead to false-positive results. diagnosis and appropriate treatment, mortality has been
Such results may also occur in other clinical conditions, e.g. reduced to about 1 per cent as compared to about 30 per cent
malaria, typhus, bacteraemia caused by other organisms, and in untreated cases.
cirrhosis.
(c) NEW DIAGNOSTIC TESTS: The recent advances for (b) CARRIERS
quick and reliable diagnostic tests for typhoid fever as an Since carriers are the ultimate source of typhoid fever,
alternative to the Wida! test include the IDL Tubex® test their identification and treatment is one of the most radical
marketed by a Swedish company, which reportedly can ways of controlling typhoid fever. The measures
detect lgM09 antibodies from patient within a few minutes. recommended are : (i) Identification : Carriers are identified
Another rapid serological test, Typhidot®, takes three hours by cultural and serological examinations. Duodenal
to perform. It was developed in Malaysia for the detection of drainage establishes the presence of salmonella in the biliary
specific lgM and IgG antibodies against a 50 kD antigen of tract in carriers. The Vi antibodies are present in about 80
S. typhi. A newer version of the test, Typhidot-M®, was per cent of chronic carriers. (ii) Treatment : The carrier
recently developed to detect specific lgM antibodies only. should be given an intensive course of ampicillin or
CONTROL OF TYPHOID FEVER
TABLE 1
Treatment of uncomplicated typhoid fever
Quinolone·
. or cetixime ·
.Azith~o~ycin or ·
7-14
7
Cefixime
Cefixime
15-20
20
7-14
7-14
I
resistance b cefti:iaxone 10-14
• Three-day courses are also effective and are particularly so in epidemic containment
b The optimum treatment for quinolone-resistant typhoid fever has not been determined. Azithromycin, the third-generation
cephalosporins, or a 10-14 days course of high-dose fluoroquinolones, is effective. Combinations of these are now being evaluated.
Source: (10)
amoxycillin (4-6 g a day} together with Probenecid ANTI-TYPHOID VACCINES (2)
(2 g/day) for 6 weeks. These drugs are concentrated in the
The old parenteral killed whole-cell vaccine was effective
bile and may achieve eradication of the carrier state in
but produced strong side-effects, Two safe and effective
about 70 per cent of carriers. Chloromycetin is considered
worthless for clearing the carrier state. (iii) Surgery : vaccines are now licensed and available. One is based on
Cholecystectomy with concomitant ampicillin therapy has defined subunit antigens, the other on whole-cell live
been regarded as the most successful approach to the attenuated bacteria.
treatment of carriers. Cure rate may be as high as 80 per The Vi polysaccharide vaccine
cent. Urinary carriers are easy to treat, but refractory cases
may need nephrectomy when one kidney is damaged and This subunit vaccine was first licensed in the United
the other healthy. (iv) Surveillance : The carriers should be States in 1994. It is composed of purified Vi capsular
kept under surveillance. They should be prevented from polysaccharide from the Ty2 S. Typhi strain and elicits a
handling food, milk or water for others. (v) Health education T-cell independent IgG response that is not boosted by
: Health education regarding washing of hands with soap, additional doses. The vaccine is administered
after defecation or urination, and before preparing food is subcutaneously or intramuscularly. The target value for each
an essential element. In short, the management of carriers single human dose is about 25µg of the antigen. The vaccine
continues to be an unsolved problem. This is the crux of the is stable for 6 months at 37°C, and for 2 years at 22°C. The
problem, in the elimination of typhoid fever. recommended storage temperature is 2-8°C. The Vi vaccine
does not elicit adequate immune responses in children aged
2. Control of sanitation less than 2 years.
Protection and purification of drinking water supplies,
improvement of basic sanitation, and promotion of food Schedule
hygiene are essential measures to interrupt transmission of The vaccine is licensed for individuals aged ;;::: 2 years.
typhoid fever. For instance, typhoid fever is never a major Only 1 dose is required, and the vaccine confers protection
problem where there is a clean domestic water supply. 7 days after injection. To maintain protection, revaccination
Sanitary measures, not followed by health education may is recommended every 3 years. The Vi polysaccharide
produce only temporary results. However, when sanitation is vaccine can be co-administered with other vaccines relevant
combined with health education, the effects tend to be for international travellers, such as yellow fever and
cumulative, resulting in a steady reduction of typhoid hepatitis A, and with vaccines of the routine childhood
morbidity (11). immunization programmes.
3. Immunization Safety
While ultimately, control of typhoid fever must take the No serious adverse events and a minimum of local side-
form of improved sanitation and domestic and personal effects are associated with Vi vaccination. There are no
hygiene, these are long-term objectives in many developing contraindications to the use of this vaccine other than
countries. A complementary approach to prevention is previous severe hypersensitivity reaction to vaccine
immunization, which is the only specific preventive measure, components. Although the Vi polysaccharide vaccine is safe
likely to yield the highest benefit for the money spent. for HIV-infected individuals, the induction of protective
Immunization against typhoid does not give 100 per cent antibodies is directly correlated to the levels of CD4 positive
protection, but it definitely lowers both the incidence and T-cells.
seriousness of the infection. It can be given at any age
upwards of two years. It is recommended to : (i) those living The Ty2 la vaccine
in endemic areas (ii} household contacts (iii) groups at risk This vaccine, which was first licensed in Europe in 1983
of infection such as school children and hospital staff and in the USA in 1989, is an orally administered, live-
(iv) travellers proceeding to endemic areas, and (v} those attenuated Ty2 strain of S. Typhi in which multiple genes,
attending me/as and yatras. including the genes responsible for the production of Vi,
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
have been mutated chemically. The lyophilized vaccine is Types of food poisoning
available as enteric coated capsules. Protection is markedly Food poisoning may be of two types : non-bacterial and
influencEd by the number of doses and their spacing. There
bacterial. (a) Non-bacterial : Caused by chemicals such as
are currently no field trials to document the efficacy of Ty2la
vaccine in children aged <3 years. Ty21a requires storage at arsenic, certain plant and sea foods. In recent years, there
2-8°C; it retains potency for approximately 14 days at has been a growing concern about contamination of food by
25°C. chemicals, e.g., fertilizers, pesticides, cadmium, mercury etc.
(b) Bacterial : Caused by the ingestion of foods
Schedule contaminated by living bacteria or their toxins. The
conventional classification of bacterial food poisoning into
The capsules are licensed for use in individuals aged ;:>: 5 toxic and infective types is becoming increasingly blurred
years. The vaccine is administered every other day; on 1, 3, with the knowledge that in some types, both multiplication
and 5th day; a 3-dose regimen is recommended. With the and toxin production are involved (1). Bacterial food
3-dose regimen, protective immunity is achieved 7 days
poisoning may be of the following types :
after the last dose-. The recommendation is to repeat this
series every 3 years for people living in endemic areas, and
every year for individuals travelling; from non-endemic to 1. Salmonella food poisoning
endemic countries. The Ty2la vaccine may be given An extremely common form of food poisoning. Five
simultaneously with other vaccines, including live vaccines reasons have been given for its increase in recent years :
against polio, cholera, and yellow fever, or the measles, (a) an increase in community feeding (b) increase in
mumps and rubella (MMR) combination. international trade in human food (c) a higher incidence of
salmonellosis in farm animals (d) widespread use of house-
Safety and precautions hold detergents interfering with sewage treatment, and
Proguanil and antibacterial drugs should be stopped from (e) wide distribution of "prepared foods" (2).
3 days before until 3 days after giving Ty2la, as such drugs (a) AGENT(S) : The species most often incriminated in
may harm live bacterial vaccines. The vaccine is unlikely to human outbreaks are S. typhimurium, S. cholera-suis and
be efficacious if administrated at the time of ongoing S. enteritidis, besides many others. (b) SOURCE :
diarrhoea. It is not known whether this live attenuated Salmonellosis is primarily a disease of animals. Man gets the
vaccine may cause foetal harm when administered to infection from farm animals and poultry - through
pregnant women. Ty21a can be administered to contaminated meat, milk and milk products, sausages,
HIV-positive, asymptomatic individuals as long as the T-cell custards, egg and egg products. Rats and mice are another
count (CD4) is >200/mm 3 .
source; they are often heavily infected and contaminate
Ty21a is remarkably well tolerated and has low rates of foodstuffs by their urine and faeces. Temporary human
adverse events. carriers can also · contribute to the problem.
The vaccine is not recommended in congenital or (c) INCUBATION PERIOD : 12 to 24 hours commonly.
acquired immunodeficiency including treatment with (d) MECHANISM OF FOOD POISONING : The causative
immuno-suppressive and antimitotic drugs, acute febrile organisms, on ingestion, multiply in the intestine and give
illness and acute intestinal infection. rise to acute enteritis and colitis. The onset is generally
sudden with chills, fever, nausea, vomiting, and a profuse
References watery diarrhoea which usually lasts 2-3 days. Mortality is
1. Anderson, E.S. and Smith, H.P. (1972). Brit. Med.J., 3: 329-331. about 1 per cent. A convalescent carrier state lasting for
2. WHO (2008) Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 6, 8th Feb, 2008. several weeks may occur (1).
3. WHO (1996), The World Health Report, Report of the Director
General WHO.
Salmonellosis is described in detail separately, (Page
4. Ramesh Kumar, et al (1988). Ann-Nat. Aced.Med. Sc. (INDIA) 24 (4) 298).
255-257.
5. Govt. oflndia (2014),NationalHealth Profile2013, DGHS, Ministry of 2. Staphylococcal food poisoning
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. It is about as common as salmonella food poisoning.
6. Basu, S. et al (1975). Bull WHO, 52 (3) 333. (a) AGENT : Enterotoxins of certain strains of coagulase-
7. Christie, A.B. (1974). Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical
Practice, 2nd ed., Churchill Livingstone.
positive Staphylococcus aureus. At least 5 different
8. Mangat, H.N. et al (1967). Indian J. Med. Res., 55: 219. enterotoxins have been identified, and a sixth may exist (3).
9. WHO (1969), Public Health Papers No.38, p. 78. Toxins can be formed at optimum temperatures of 35 deg. to
10. WHO (2003), Background document: The diagnosis, treatment and 37 deg. C. These toxins are relatively heat stable and resist
prevention of typhoid fever, Communicable Disease Surveillance and boiling for 30 minutes or more. (b) SOURCE: Staphylococci
Response Vaccines and Biologicals. are ubiquitous in nature, and are found on the skin and in
11. Cvjetanovic, B. et al (1978). Bull WHO, Supplement No. 1 56: 45. the nose and throat of men and animals. They are a
common agent of boils and pyogenic infections of man and
.FOOD POISONING. animals. Cows suffering from mastitis have been responsible
for outbreaks of food poisoning involving milk and milk
Food poisoning is an acute gastroenteritis caused by products. The foods involved are salads, custards, milk and
ingestion of food or drink contaminated with either living milk products which get contaminated by staphylococci,
bacteria or their toxins or inorganic chemical substances and (c) INCUBATION PERIOD : 1-8 hours. The incubation
poisons derived from plants and animals. The condition is period is short because of "preformed" toxin.
characterized by: (a) history of ingestion of a common food (d) MECHANISM OF FOOD POISONING: Food poisoning
(b) attack of many persons at the same time, and results from ingestion of toxins preformed in the food in
(c) similarity of signs and symptoms in the majority of cases. which bacteria have grown ("intradietetic" toxins). Since the
FOOD POISONING
toxin is heat-resistant, it can remain in food after the 50 deg. C and produce a variety of toxins, e.g., alpha toxin,
organisms have died. The toxins act directly on the intestine theta toxin, etc. Prevention consists either by cooking food
and CNS. The illness becomes manifest by the sudden onset just prior to its consumption or, if it has to be stored, by
of vomiting, abdominal cramps and diarrhoea. In severe rapid and adequate cooling (10). (e) CLINICAL
cases, blood and mucus may appear. Unlike salmonella food SYMPTOMS : The most common symptoms are diarrhoea,
poisoning, staphylococcal food poisoning rarely causes abdominal cramps and little or no fever, occurring 8 to 24
fever. Death is uncommon. hours after consumption of the food. Nausea and vomiting
are rare. Illness is usually of short duration, usually 1 day or
Botulism less. Recovery is rapid and no deaths have been reported.
Most serious but rare. It kills two-thirds of its victims.
(a) AGENT : Exotoxin of Clostridium botu/inum generally B. cereus food poisoning
Type A, B or E. (b) SOURCE : The organism is widely Bacillus cereus is an aerobic, spore-bearing, motile, gram
distributed in soil, dust and the intestinal tract of animals positive rod. It is ubiquitous in soil, and in raw, dried and
and enters food as spores. The foods most frequently processed foods. The spores can survive cooking and
responsible for botulism are home preserved foods such as germinate and multiply rapidly when the food is held at
home-canned vegetables, smoked or pickled fish, home- favourable temperatures. B, cereus has been recognized as a
made cheese and similar low acid foods. In fact, botulism cause of food poisoning, with increasing frequency in recent
derives its name from the Latin word for sausage (botulus). years.
(c) INCUBATION PERIOD 18 to 36 hours. Recent work has shown that B. cereus produces at least
(d) MECHANISM OF FOOD POISONING : The toxin is 2 distinct enterotoxins, causing 2 distinct forms of food
preformed in food ("intradietetic") under suitable anaerobic poisoning. One, the emetic form with a short incubation
conditions. It acts on the parasympathetic nervous system. period (1-6 hours) characterized by predominantly upper
Botulism differs from other forms of food poisoning in that gastro-intestinal tract symptoms, rather like staphylococcal
the gastrointestinal symptoms are very slight. The prominent food poisoning. The other, the diarrhoeal form, with a
symptoms are dysphagia, diplopia, ptosis, dysarthria, longer incubation period (12-24 hours) characterized by
blurring of vision, muscle weakness and even quadriplegia. predominantly lower intestinal tract symptoms like
Fever is generally absent, and consciousness is retained. The Cl. perfringens food poisoning (diarrhoea, abdominal pain,
condition is frequently fatal, death occurring 4-8 days later nausea with little or no vomiting and no fever. Recovery
due to respiratory or cardiac failure. Patients who recover do within 24 hours is usual). The toxins are preformed and
not develop antitoxin in the blood. Since the toxin is stable.
thermolabile, the heating of food which may be subjected to
100 deg. C for a few minutes before use will make it quite Diagnosis can be confirmed by isolation of 105 or more
safe for consumption (4). B. cereus organisms per gram of epidemiologically
incriminated food. Treatment is symptomatic.
Botulism occurring in infants is called "infant botulism". It
is due to infection of the gut by Cl. botulinum with Differential diagnosis
subsequent in vivo production of toxin (5).
Food poisoning may be mistaken for cholera, acute
Antitoxin is of considerable value in the prophylaxis of bacillary dysentery and chemical (arsenic) poisoning. The
botulism. When a case of botulism has occurred, antitoxin differentiating points between cholera and food poisoning
should be given to all individuals partaking of the food. The are given in Table 1.
dose varies from 50,000 to 100,000 units IV (6). The
antitoxin will be of no avail if the toxin is already fixed to the INVESTIGATION OF FOOD POISONING
nervous tissue. Guanidine hydrochloride given orally in
doses of 15 to 40 mg/kg of body weight has been shown to (a) Secure complete list of people involved and their
reverse the neuromuscular block of botulism. When history : All the people who have shared part of the food
combined with good medical and nursing care, the drug can should be interviewed. They may be supplied questionnaires
be a useful adjunct in the treatment of botulism (7). Active concerning the foods eaten during the previous 2 days, and
immunization with botulinum toxoid to prevent botulism is place of consumption; time of onset of symptoms; symptoms
also available (8). of illness (e.g., nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, abdominal pain,
headache, fever, prostration, etc.) in order of occurrence;
Cl. perfringens food poisoning personal data such as age, sex, residence, occupation, and
(a) AGENT : Clostridium (Cl.) perfringens (welchii). any other helpful information. Questionnaires may be
(b) SOURCE : The organism has been found in faeces of administered to kitchen employees and those working in the
humans and animals, and in soil, water and air. The dining halls. (b) Laboratory investigations: An important part
majority of outbreaks have been associated with the of the investigation. The object is not only to incriminate the
ingestion of meat, meat dishes and poultry. The usual story causative agent from stool, vomit or remnants of food by
is that the food has been prepared and cooked 24 hours or inoculating into appropriate media, but also to determine the
more before consumption, and allowed to cool slowly at total number of bacteria and the relative numbers of each
room temperature and then heated immediately prior to kind involved. This will give a better indication of the
serving. (c) INCUBATION PERIOD : 6 to 24 hours, with a organism involved. Stool samples of the kitchen employees
peak from 10 to 14 hours (d) MECHANISM OF FOOD and food handlers should also be investigated. The samples
POISONING : The spores are able to survive cooking, and if should be examined aerobically and anaerobically. Phage
the cooked meat and poultry are not cooled enough, they typing of the organisms should be done to complete the
will germinate. The organisms multiply between 30 deg. and laboratory investigation. (c) Animal experiments : It may be
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 1
Differential diagnosis of cholera and food poisoning
Faod poisoning •
1. Epidemiology Occurs often in epidemic form· associated Often a single group of persons who shared a common
with other cases in the neighbourhood meal
Secondary cases occur No secondary cases
2. Incubation From a few hours upto 5 days 1to24 hours
3. Onset With purging With vomiting
4. Nausea and retching None Present
5. Vomiting Projectile, effortless, watery and continuous Often single, severe vomit, rnucus and blood streaked
6. Stools Copious rice watery, inoffensive Frequent, may contain mucus and blood, offensive
7. Tenesmus None Yes
8. Abdominal tenderness None Yes
9. Dehydration Very marked Distinct
10. Muscular cramps Constant and severe Less constant
11. Surface temperature Subnormal Often upto 100-102 deg.E
12. Headache None Often
13. Urine Suppressed Seldom suppressed
14. Blood Leucocytosis Normal
necessary to feed rhesus monkeys with the remnants of food. handlers should be educated in matters of clean habits and
Protection tests are useful in the case of botulism; in this, a personal hygiene, such as frequent and thorough hand
saline filtrate of food-stuff is injected subcutaneously into washing.
mice protected with antitoxic sera, keeping suitable controls. (b) REFRIGERATION: In the prevention of bacterial food
(d) Blood for antibodies : This is useful for retrospective
poisoning, emphasis must be placed on proper temperature
diagnosis. (e) Environmental study: This includes inspection control. Food should not be left in warm pantries; a few
of the eating place(s), kitchen(s), and questioning of food germs can multiply to millions by the next morning. Foods
handlers regarding food preparation. (f) Data analysis : The not eaten immediately should be kept in cold storage to
data should be analyzed according to the descriptive methods prevent bacterial multiplication and toxin production. "Cook
of time, place and person distribution. Food-specific attack and eat the same day" is a golden rule. When foods are held
rates should be calculated. A case control study may be between 10 deg. C (50 deg. F) and 49 deg. C (120 deg.Fl
undertaken to establish the epidemiologic association they are in the danger zone for bacterial growth. ·Cold is
between, illness and the intake of a particular food. bacteriostatic at temperature below 4 deg. C (40 deg.F), and
refrigeration temperature should not exceed this level.
PREVENTION AND CONTROL
SURVEILLANCE : Food samples must be obtained from
(a) FOOD SANITATION : (i) Meat inspection : The food the food establishments periodically and subjected to
animals must be free from infection. This can be ensured by laboratory analysis if they were unsatisfactory. Continuing
their examination by veterinary staff, both before and after surveillance is necessary to avoid outbreaks of food-borne
slaughter. (ii) Personal hygiene : A high standard of personal diseases.
hygiene among individuals engaged in the handling,
preparation and cooking of food is needed. (iii) Food
References
handlers : Those suffering from infected wounds, boils,
diarrhoea, dysentery, throat infection, etc should be 1. Mandal, B.K. (1981). Medicine International, 2: 56.
excluded from food handling. The medical inspection of 2. Beveridge, W.LB. (1967). in Health of Mankind, lOOth Symposium,
Ciba Foundation, Churchill, London.
food handlers is required in many countries; this is of limited
3. Werner, S.B. (1980). in Maxcy-Rosenau : Public Health and
value in the detection of carriers, although it will remove Preventive Medicine, 11th ed, John M. Last (ed), Appleton-Century
some sources of infection (12). (iv) Food handling Crofts, New York.
techniques : The handling of ready-to-eat foods with bare 4. Jawetz, Melnick and Adelberg's Medical Microbiology, 26th ed., A
hands should be reduced to a minimum. Time between Lange Publication.
preparation and consumption of food should be kept short. 5. Amon, S.S. et al (1977). JAMA, 237: 1946-1951.
The importance of rapid cooling and cold storage must be 6. Christie, A.B. {1980). lnfectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical
stressed. Milk, milk products and egg products should be Practice, 3rd ed., Churchill Livingstone.
pasteurized. Food must be thoroughly cooked. The heat 7. Ryan, D.W. etal (1971).JAMA, 216: 513.
8. Stuart, P.F. et al (1970). Cand. J. Pub. Health, 61 (6) 509.
must penetrate the centre of the food leaving thereby no
9. Nakamura, M. et al (1970). Annual Review of Microbiology, 24: 359-
cool spots. Most food poisoning organisms are killed at 367.
temperatures over 60 deg. C. (v) Sanitary improvements : 10. Bailey, J. (1977). Guide to Hygiene and Sanitation in Aviation, WHO,
Sanitization of all work surfaces, utensils and equipments Geneva.
must be ensured. Food premises should be kept free from 11. Terranova, W. et al (1978). N. Eng. J. Med., 298: 143.
rats, mice, flies and dust. (vi) Health education : Food 12. WHO (1980). WHO Chroriicle, 34 (2) 83.
AMOEBIASIS
practice of washing hands after defecation and before eating 4. Bull WHO (1980) 58 (6) 819-830.
is a crucial factor in the prevention and control of 5. Vakil, B.J. (1973), Medical Times, Aug. 1973, Sandoz Publications,
amoebiasis. But there are too many hurdles (both social and Mumbai.
economic) in enforcing it in many developing countries. 6. WHO (1987). Techn. Rep. Ser. No. 749.
7. WHO (1981). Techn. Rep. Ser. No. 666.
With the cooperation of the local community, the sanitary
8. Ree, G.H. (1983). PostGraduateDoctor, Middle East Dec. 1983 P. 626.
systems should be selected and constructed (14) taking into
9. Sargeaunt, P.G. et al (1982) Lancet 1 : 1386 - 1388.
consideration the customs and practices of the population 10. Bull WHO (1985) 63 (3) 417-426.
and the available resources. (b) Water supply : The 11. WHO (1980), Scientific Working Group Reports 1978-1980, WHO/
protection of water supplies against faecal contamination is CDD/80. 1.
equally important because amoebic cysts may survive for 12. Nanda, R. et al (1984). Lancet 2: 301.
several days and weeks in water. The cysts are not killed by 13. Palmo, A.M. (1988). Medicine International 54: 22, 16 June 1988.
chlorine in amounts used for water disinfection. Sand filters 14. Rajagopalan, S. andShiffman, M.A. (1974): Guide to Simple Sanitary
are quite effective in removing amoebic cysts. Therefore Measures for the control of Enteric Diseases, Geneva, WHO.
water filtration and boiling are more effective than chemical
treatment of water against amoebiasis. (c) Food hygiene : SOIL-TRANSMITTED HELMINTHIASIS
Environmental measures should also include the protection
of food and drink against faecal contamination. Uncooked Soil-transmitted helminth (STHs) infections refer to a
vegetables and fruits can be disinfected with aqueous group of parasitic diseases in humans caused by intestinal
solution of acetic acid (5-10 per cent) or full strength roundworms (ascariasis), hookworms (Necator americanus
vinegar (1). In most instances, thorough washing with and Ancy/ostoma duodena/el and whipworm (Trichuris
detergents in running water will remove amoebic cysts from trichiura). They are the most common infections worldwide.
fruits and vegetables. Since food handlers are major More than 1.5 billion people, or about 24 per cent of the
transmitters of amoebiasis, they should be periodically world's population are infected. Infections are widely
examined, treated and educated in food hygiene practices distributed in tropical and subtropical areas, with the
such as hand washing. (d) Health education : In the greatest numbers occurring in sub-Saharan Africa, the
long-term, a great deal can be accomplished through health Americas, China and east Asia (1). Over 270 million pre-
education of the public. school children and over 600 million school-age children
live in areas where these parasites are intensively
2. Secondary prevention
transmitted and are in need of treatment and preventive
(a) Early diagnosis : Demonstration of trophozoites interventions.
containing red cells is diagnostic. They are most readily seen
in fresh mucus passed per rectum. Microscopy should be Mode of transmission
performed immediately before its cooling results. The Soil-transmitted helminths are transmitted by eggs that
absence of pus cells in the stool may be helpful in the are passed in the faeces of infected people, as adult worms
differential diagnosis with shigellosis. Serological tests are live in the intestine where they produce thousands of eggs
often negative in intestinal amoebiasis, but if positive, they each day. In areas that lack adequate sanitation, these eggs
provide a clue to extraintestinal amoebiasis. Indirect contaminate the soil. This can happen in several ways :
haemagglutination test (IHA) is regarded as the most (a) eggs that are attached to vegetables and salads are
sensitive serological test. Newer techniques include counter ingested when the vegetables are not carefully cooked,
immuno-electrophoresis (CIE) and ELISA technique (11). washed or peeled; (b) eggs are ingested from contaminated
(b) Treatment : (i) Symptomatic cases : At the health water sources; and (c) eggs are ingested by children who
centre level, symptomatic cases can be treated effectively play in soil and then put their hands in their mouth without
with metronidazole orally and the clinical response in washing them.
48 hours may confirm the suspected diagnosis. The dose is In addition, hookworm eggs hatch in the soil, releasing
30 mg/kg of body weight/day, divided into 3 doses after larvae that mature into a form that can actively penetrate
meals, for 8-10 days. Tinidazole can be used instead of the skin. People become infected with hookworm primarily
metronidazole. Suspected cases of liver abscess should by walking barefoot on contaminated soil.
be referred to the nearest hospital. (ii) Asymptomatic
infections : In an endemic area, the consensus is not to treat There is no direct person-to-person transmission, or
such persons because the probability of reinfection is very infection from fresh faeces, because eggs passed in faeces
high (10). They may, however, be treated, if the carrier is a need about three weeks to mature in the soil before they
food handler. In non-endemic areas they are always likely to become infective. Since these worms do not multiply in the
be treated. They should be treated with oral human host, reinfection occurs only as a result of contact
diiodohyroxyquin, 650 mg TDS (adults) or 30-40 mg/kg of with infective stages in the environment.
body weight/day (children) for 20 days, or oral diloxanide
furoate, 500 mg TDS for 10 days (adults) (3). AS CARIAS IS
At present there is no acceptable chemoprophylaxis for An infection of the intestinal tract caused by the adult,
amoebiasis. Mass examination and treatment cannot be Ascaris lumbricoides and clinically manifested by vague
considered a solution for the control of amoebiasis (10). symptoms of nausea, abdominal pain and cough. Live
worms are passed in the stool or vomited. Occasionally, they
References
may produce intestinal obstruction or may migrate into the
1. WHO (1969). Techn. Rep. Ser., 421. peritoneal cavity.
2. Jawetz (2010), Melnick and Adelberg's. Medical Microbiology, 25th
Ed., A Lange Publication. Geographic distribution and prevalence
3. STEPHEN J. McPHEE and MAXINE A (2010), Current Medical
Diagnosis and Treatment, 49th Ed., A Lange Publication. Ascaris is cosmopolitan in distribution. It is the most
HOOKWORM INFECTION
common helminthic infestation. It is estimated that about The larvae migration may cause fever, cough, sputum
one billion (807-1121 million) people are infected world- formation, asthma, skin rash, oesinophilia. The adult
wide annually with about 12 million acute cases and 20,000 roundworm aggregate masses can cause volvulus, intestinal
or more deaths. Heavy infection is common in children aged obstruction or intessusception; and wandering worm can
3-8 years (2). cause bowel perforation in the ileococcal region, blocking of
common bile duct or may come out with vomit (4).
Epidemiological features
(a) AGENT : Ascaris /umbricoides lives in the lumen of HOOKWORM INFECTION
small intestine, where it moves freely. Sexes are separate.
The female measures 20-35 cm in length, and the male Hookworm infection is defined as "any infection caused
12-30 cm. Egg production is very heavy - an estimated by Ancylostoma duodenale or Necator americanus" (5).
2,40,000 eggs per day by each female, which They may occur as single or mixed infections in the same
counterbalances the heavy losses in the environment. The person.
eggs are excreted in the faeces. They become embryonated
in the external environment and become infective in 2-3 Problem statement
weeks. On ingestion by man, the embryonated eggs hatch in Ancylostoma duodenale and Necator americanus are the
the small intestine. The resulting larvae penetrate the gut main nematodes causing hookworm infection in man.
wall and are carried to the liver and then to the lungs via the Almost eradicated from Europe and the USA (3), hookworm
blood stream. In the lungs, they moult twice. They break infection is still seen in warm, moist climates in tropical and
through the alveolar walls and migrate into the bronchioles. subtropical regions between 45 °N and 30°S of the equator
They are coughed up through the trachea and then (e.g., Asia, Africa, Central and South America and the South
swallowed by the human host. On reaching the intestine, . Pacific). The geographic distribution of these two
they become mature into adults in 60-80 days. The life span hookworms used to be regarded as relatively distinct, the
of an adult is between 6-12 months, maximum reported former being more prevalent in Europe and South-western
being 1.5 years. (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : Man is Asia, and the latter in tropical Africa and in the Americas.
the only reservoir. (c) INFECTIVE MATERIAL : Faeces However, over the past decades both parasites have become
containing the fertilized eggs. (d) HOST : Infection rates are widely distributed throughout the tropics and subtropics,
high in children; they are the most important disseminators and rigid demarcations are no longer tenable (6).
of infection. Adults seem to acquire some resistance. There It is estimated that, during 2010, the global prevalence of
is a high degree of host-parasite tolerance. Roundworms
hookworm was about 576-740 million cases, of these about
rob man of his food and may possibly compete for vitamin A 80 million were severely affected (6). ·
in the intestine (1). They contribute to malnutrition
especially in children who may show growth retardation. Epidemiological determinants
(e) ENVIRONMENT : Ascaris is a "soil-transmitted"
helminth. The eggs remain viable in the soil for months or Agent factors
years under favourable conditions. Of the various ecological
factors regulating the population of Ascaris eggs, the most (a) AGENT : Adult worms live in the small intestine,
important ones are the temperature, moisture, oxygen mainly jejunum where they attach themselves to the villi.
pressure and ultra-violet radiation from the sunlight (3). A Males measure 8 to 11 mm, and females 10 to 13 mm in
low temperature inhibits the development of eggs. Clay soils length with dorsally curved anterior end. Eggs are passed in
are most favourable for the development of ascariasis eggs, the faeces in thousands; one female A duodenale produces
in contrast to moist porous soils for those of hookworms. about 10,000-30,000 eggs and one female N. americanus
(f) HUMAN HABITS : Seeding of the soil by ascariasis eggs about 5,000-10,000 eggs per day (6). High egg production
takes place by the human habit of indiscriminate open air ensures constant exposure to infection.
defecation. It is the most important factor responsible for the When deposited on warm, moist soil, a larva rapidly
widespread distribution of ascariasis in the world (3). Soil develops in the egg and hatches after 1 to 2 days. The newly
pollution is usually concentrated around houses where small hatched larva (rhabditiform larva) moults twice in the soil and
children who have no regular habits pollute the house and becomes a skin-penetrating third stage infective larva within
surrounding areas. Infective eggs can then easily reach other 5 to 10 days. These lie in wait in the soil to pierce the skin of
children who play on the ground and contaminate their the human host. They move very little horizontally, but
hands and food (3). (g) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY: migrate upwards on blades of grass (3). They can survive in
Until all fertile females are destroyed and stools are shaded, moist soil for up to one month. Infection occurs when
negative. the larva enters the body through the skin, most commonly
through the feet. Larvae of A duodenale are also infective by
Incubation period mouth. Once inside the body, they migrate via lymphatics
18 days to several weeks. and blood stream to the lungs. They break into the alveoli,
ascend the bronchi and trachea and are coughed up and
Symptoms swallowed to reach the small intestine, where they become
The symptoms are related to the number of the worms sexually mature. Adult A duodena/e and N. americanus are
harboured. People with light infection usually have no believed to be capable of surviving for an average about
symptoms. Heavier infections can cause a range of 1and4 years, respectively (5). (b) RESERVOIR: Man is the
symptoms including intestinal manifestations like diarrhoea, only important reservoir of human hookworm infection.
abdominal pain; general malaise, weakness, impaired (c) INFECTIVE MATERIAL : Faeces containing the ova of
cognitive and physical development. The WHO definition of hookworms. However, the immediate source of infection is
heavy infection of roundworm is ~ 50,000 eggs per gram of the soil contaminated with infective larvae. (d) PERIOD OF
faeces (4). INFECTIVITY : As long as the person harbours the parasite.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
transmission of guineaworm disease is water infested with (b) dengue haemorrhagic fever without shock, or (c) dengue
cyclops. The risk of transmission exists where such cyclops- haemorrhagic fever with shock. The manifestations of the
infested water-sources are frequented by infected persons. dengue syndrome are as shown in Fig. 1.
Season : The seasonal variations in the incidence of the Dengue fever is a self-limiting disease and represents the
disease are marked. Where the step-wells are the source of majority of cases of dengue infection. A prevalence of Aedes
water supply, peak transmission occurs during the dry aegypti and Aedes albopictus together with the circulation of
season (March-May) when the contact between open cases dengue virus of more than one type in any particular area
of gunieaworm disease and the drinking water is the tends to be associated with outbreaks of DHF/DSS (1).
greatest; and there is little transmission when the wells are
full during and after rains. Where the ponds are used, Problem statement
transmission appears to be confined to June-September, Dengue fever (DF) and its severe forms dengue
when the ponds contain water (4, 5). Temperature : The haemorrhagic fever (DHF) · and dengue shock syndrome
larvae develop best between 25 and 30 deg C, and will not (DSS) have become major international public health
develop below 19 deg C. Therefore, the disease is limited to concerns. Over the past three decades, there has been
tropical and subtropical regions (6). dramatic global increase in the frequency of dengue fever,
Mode of transmission DHF and DSS and their epidemics. It is found in tropical
and subtropical regions around the world, predominantly in
The disease is transmitted entirely through the urban and semi-urban areas, and are now spreading to
consumption of water containing cyclops harbouring the rural areas.
infective stages of the parasite. Guineaworm disease is a
totally water-based disease and does not have an alternate Some 2.5 billion people i.e. two fifth of the world's
pathway of transmission. population in tropical and subtropical countries are at risk of
the disease. An estimated 50 million dengue infections occur
Treatment worldwide annually and about 500,000 people with DHF
No drug cures the infection but metronidazole and require hospitalization each year. Approximately 90 per cent
mebendazole are sometimes used to limit inflammation and of them are children aged less than five years, and about 2.5
facilitate worm removal. Wet compresses may relieve per cent of those affected die. Epidemics of dengue are
discomfort. Occlusive dressings improves hygiene and limit 'increasing in frequency. During epidemics, infection rate
shedding of infectious larvae. Worms are removed by among those who have not been previously exposed to the
sequentially rolling them out over a small stick. When virus are often 40 to 50 per cent, but can also reach 80 to 90
available simple surgical procedure can be used to remove per cent (2). Cocirculation of multiple serotypes/genotypes is
worm. Topical antibiotics may limit bacterial superinfection. evident.
Dengue and DHF is endemic in more than 100 countries
Eradication in the WHO regions of Africa, the Americas, Eastern
Guineaworm disease is amenable to eradication. The Mediterranean, South-East Asia and Western Pacific. The
eradication strategy comprises the following elements : South-East Asia and Western Pacific regions are most
seriously affected. Detection of all four serotypes has now
i) Provision of safe drinking water (e.g., piped water, rendered the countries hyperendemic. The countries of
installation of hand pumps). South-East Asia region are divided into 3 categories (2).
ii) Control of cyclops (see Chap.12).
iii) Health education of the public in matters relating to Category A (Bangladesh, India, Indonesia, Maldives,
boiling or sieving drinking water through a double- Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Thailand and Timor-Leste)
thickness cotton cloth for personal protection, and a. Major public health problem;
prevention of water contamination by infected persons. b. Leading cause of hospitalization and death among
iv) Surveillance : Active search for new cases, and children;
Guineaworm Eradication Programme c. Hyperendemicity with all 4 serotypes circulating in
urban areas; and
Refer to chapter 7 for details. d. Spreading to rural areas.
References Category B (Bhutan, Nepal)
1. WHO (2014), Fact Sheet No. 359, March 2014. a. Endemicity uncertain;
2. WHO (2000), Weekly Epidemiological Record 2nd June 2000 No. 22. b. Bhutan reported first outbreak in 2004; and
3. WHO (1979). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 637. c. Nepal reported first indigenous case in 2004.
4. Muller, R. (1979). Bull WHO, 57 (5) 683.
5. WHO (1980). WHO Chr., 34 (4) 159. Category C (DPR Korea)
6. National Guineaworm Eradication Programme, National Health No evidence of endemicity.
Programme series 2, National Institute of Health and family welfare,
New Mehrauli Road, New Delhi. INDIA
In India, the risk of dengue has shown an increase in
Ill. ARTHROPOD-BORNE INFECTIONS recent years due to rapid urbanization, lifestyle changes and
deficient water management including improper water
storage practices in urban, peri-urban and rural areas,
THE DENGUE SYNDROME leading to proliferation of mosquito breeding sites. The
disease has a seasonal pattern i.e. the cases peak after
Dengue viruses are arboviruses capable of infecting monsoon, and it is not uniformly distributed throughout the
humans, and causing disease. These infections may be year. However, in the southern states and Gujarat the
asymptomatic or may lead to (a) "classical" dengue fever, or transmission is perennial (3).
THE DENGUE SYNDROME
Dengue is endemic in 31 states/UTs. During 2013, about the two most important vectors of dengue. They both carry
74,168 cases were reported with 168 deaths. The case high vectorial competency for dengue virus, i.e., high
fatality rate was 0.22 per cent. As seen from Table 1, the susceptibility to infecting virus, ability to replicate the virus
highest number of cases were reported from Punjab and ability to transmit the virus to another host. Aedes
followed by Tamil Nadu, Gujarat, Kerala and Andhra aegypti is a highly domesticated, strongly anthropophilic,
Pradesh (5). nervous feeder (i.e., it bites more than one host to complete
All the four serotypes i.e. dengue 1, 2, 3 and 4 have been one blood meal) and is a discordant species (i.e., it needs
isolated in India but at present DENV-1 and DENV-2 more than one feed for the completion of the gonotropic
serotypes are widespread (4). cycle). This habit results in the generation of multiple cases
and the clustering of dengue cases in the cities. On the
Epidemiological determinants contrary, Ae. albopictus partly invades peripheral areas of
urban cities. It is an aggressive feeder and concordant
Agent factors species, i.e., the species can complete its blood meal in one
(a) AGENT : The dengue virus form a distinct complex go on one person and also does not require a second blood
within the genus flavivirus based on antigenic and biological meal for the completion of the gonotropic cycle.
characteristics. There are four virus serotypes which are Transmission of disease
designated as DENV-1, DENV-2, DENV-3 and DENV-4.
Infection with any one serotype confers lifelong immunity to The Aedes mosquito becomes infective by feeding on a
that virus serotype (6). Although all four serotypes are patient from the day before onset to the 5th day (viraemia
antigenically similar, they are different enough to elicit cross- stage) of illness. After an extrinsic incubation period of 8 to
. protection for only a few months after infection by any one 10 days, the mosquito becomes infective, and is able to
of them. Secondary infection with dengue serotype 2 or transmit the infection. Once the mosquito becomes infective,
multiple infection with different serotypes lead to severe it remains so for life. The genital tract of the mosquito gets
form dengue DHF/DSS (2). The first infection probably infected and transovarian transmission of dengue virus
sensitizes the patient, while the second infection with occurs whe·n virus enters fully developed eggs at the time of
different serotype appears to produce immunological oviposition.
catastrophy. Environmental factors
The pathogenesis of severe syndrome involves pre- The population of Aedes aegypti fluctuates with rainfall
existing dengue antibody. It is postulated that virus and water storage. Its life span is influenced by temperature
antibodies are formed within a few days of the second and humidity, survives best between 16°C-30°C and a
dengue infection and that the non-neutralizing enhancing relative humidity of 60-80 per cent. It breeds in the
antibodies promote infection of higher numbers of containers in and around the houses. Being a domestic
mononuclear cells, followed by the release of cytokines, breeder, it is a endophagic and endophilic. However, even
vasoactive mediators, and procoagulants, leading to the with a 2°C increase in temperature the extrinsic incubation
disseminated intravascular coagulation seen in the period of. DENV will be shortened and more infected
haemorrhagic fever syndrome (7). mosquitoes are available for a longer duration. Besides that
All four serotypes have been associated with epidemics of the mosquitoes will bite more frequently because of
dengue fever (with or without DHF) with varying degree of dehydration and thus increase man-mosquito contact (2, 4).
severity. The failure of urban authorities to provide civil amenities
(b) VECTOR : Aedes aegypti and Aedes Albopictus are and poor public health infrastructure raises the potential for
TABLE 1
Dengue I DHF situation in India 2010 2013
Source: (5)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
the vector to breed at high level and makes the environment 500 fold risk of DHF compared with primary infection. For
transmission conducive. The rural spread of the vector is the DENV-3/DENV-2 sequence the risk was 150-fold, and a
relatively recent occurrence associated with the DENV-4/DENV-2 sequence had a 50-fold risk of DHF. There
development of rural water supply schemes, improved is no time-limit to sensitization after a primary infection. The
transport systems, scarcity of water and lifestyle changes (4). 1997 Santiago de Cuba epidemic clearly demonstrated that
with the introduction of DENV-2, DHF had occurred 16-20
Dengue in the community (2) years after the primary infection with DENV-1.
A number of factors that contribute to initiation and
maintenance of an epidemic include: (i} the strain of the High risk patients (2)
virus, which may influence the magnitude and duration of The following host factors contribute to more severe
the viraemia in humans; (ii} the density, behaviour and disease and its complications :
vectorial capacity of the vector population; (iii} the 1. infants and elderly ;
susceptibility of the human population (both genetic factors 2. obesity;
and pre-existing immune profile); and (iv) the introduction
of the virus into a receptive community. 3. pregnancy;
4. peptic ulcer disease;
DF/DHF syndrome 5. women who are in menstruation or have abnormal
DF/DHF is characterized by the "iceberg" or pyramid bleeding;
phenomenon. At the base of the pyramid, most of the cases 6. haemolytic disease such as G-6PD, thalassemia and
are symptomless, followed by DF,DHF and DSS. Clusters of other haemoglobinopathies;
cases have been reported in particular households or 7. congenital heart disease;
neighbourhoods due to the feeding behaviour of the vector. 8. chronic diseases such as diabetes mellitus, hypertension,
asthma, ischaemic heart disease, chronic renal failure,
Affected population liver cirrhosis; and
The population affected varies from one outbreak to 9. patients on steroid or NSAID treatment.
another. Actual estimates can be made by obtaining clinical/
subdinical ratios during epidemics. In a well-defined Clinical mainfestations
epidemic study in North Queensland, Australia, with primary Dengue virus infection may be asymptomatic or may
infection, 20% to 50% of the population was found affected. cause undifferientiated febrile illness (viral syndrome},
dengue fever(DF), or dengue haemorrhagic fever (DHF}
Severity of the disease including dengue shock syndrome (DSS} as shown in Fig.l
The serotype that produces the secondary infection and, in
particular, the serotype sequence are important to ascertain 1. Undifferentiated fever
the severity of the disease. All the four serotypes are able to Infants, children and adults who have been infected with
produce DHF cases. However, during sequential infections, denuge virus, especially for the first time (Le. primary
only 2% to 4% of individuals develop severe disease. dengue infection}, may develop a simple fever
Studies in Thailand have revealed that the DENV-1/ indistinguishable from other viral infection. Maculopapular
DENV-2 sequence of infection was associated with a rashes may accompany the fever or may appear during
Asymptomatic Symptomatic
- objective evidence of plasma leakage due to increased which consists of RNA, can be detected by reverse
vascular permeability shown by any of the following : transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) assay
Rising haematocrit/haemoconcentration ~ 20% and real time RT-PCR. In recent years, a number of
from baseline or evidence of plasma leakage such RT -PCR assays have been reported for detecting dengue
as pleural effusion, ascites or hypoproteinaemia/ virus. They offer better specificity and sensitivity compared
albuminaemia. to virus isolation with a much more rapid turnaround time.
Dengue shock syndrome 3. Immunological response and serological tests :
Following tests are available for diagnosis of dengue
Criteria for dengue haemorrhagic fever as above with infection:
signs of shock including :
a. Haemagglutination inhibition assay (HIA);
tachycardia, cool extremities, delayed capillary refill, b. Complement Fixation (CF);
weak pulse, lethargy or restlessness, which may be. a
sign of reduced brain perfusion. · c. Neutralization test (NT);
pulse pressure ~ 20 mmHg with increased diastolic d. IgM capture enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
pressure, e.g. 100/80 mmHg. (MAC-ELISA);
hypotension by age, defined as systolic pressure <80 e. Indirect lgG- ELISA, and
mmHg for those aged <5 years, or SO to 90 mmHg for f. IgM/IgG ratio
older children and adults. 4. Viral antigen detection : ELISA and dot blot assays
Laboratory diagnosis (2, 4) directed against the envelop/membrane (EM) antigens and
nonstructural protein 1 (NSl) can be detected in both
Rapid and accurate dengue diagnosis is of a paramount patients with primary and secondary dengue infection upto
importance for: (1) clinical management; (2) epidemiological 6 days after the onset of the illness. Commercial kits for the
surveillance; (3) research; and (4) vacdne trials. detection of NSl antigens are now available; however, these
Epidemiological surveillance requires early determination of kits do not differentiate between the serotypes. Besides
dengue virus infection during the outbreak for urgent public providing an early diagnostic marker for clinical
health action towards control, as well as at sentinel sites for management, it may also facilitate the improvement of
detection of circulating serotypes/genotypes during the inter-
epidemiological surveys of dengue infection.
epidemic period for use in forecasting possible outbreak. The
following laboratory tests are available to diagnose dengue 5. Rapid diagnostic test (RDT) : A number of commercial
fever and DHF : rapid format serological test-kits for anti-dengue IgM and
1. Virus isolation : Isolation of dengue virus from clinical IgG antibodies have become available in the past few years,
specimens is possible provided the specimen is taken during some of these producing results within 15 minutes.
the first six days of illness and processed without delay. Unfortunately, the accuracy of most of these tests is
Specimen that are suitable for virus isolation are acute uncertain since they have not yet been properly validated.
phase serum, plasma or washed b\lffY coat from the 6. Analysis of haematological parameters : Standard
patient,autopsy tissue from fatal case (especially liver, spleen, haematological parameters such as platelet count and
lymph nodes and thymus), and mosquitoes collected from the haematocrit are important and are part of the diagnosis of
affected areas. dengue infection. They should be closely monitored.
2. Viral nucleic acid detection : Dengue viral genome, The diagnostic tests are summarized in Table 2.
TABLE 2
Dengue diagnostics and sample characteristics
··.
TABLE 3
WHO classification and grading of the severity of dengue infection
DF/DHF Grade Symptoms/signs . Laboratory findin!;jS
DF Fever with two or more of following - Leucopenia (WBC:;;; 5000 cells/cu.mm),
Headache - Thrombocytopenia (platelet count < 150,000 cells/cu.mm),
- Retro-orbital pain - Rising hae.matocrit (5-10 per cent)
- Myalgia
- Arthralgia
- Rash
Haemorrhagic manifestations
No evidence of plasma leakage
DHF Above criteria for DF and haemorrhagic manifestaion Thrombocytopenia : Platelet count < 100,000/cu.mm.
plus positive tourniquet test, evidence of plasma leakage Haematorcit rise 20% or more ·
DHF II Above signs and symptoms plus some evidence of Thrombocytopenia platelet count < 100,000/cu.mm.
spontaneous bleeding in skin or other organs Haematocrit rise 20% or more
(black tarry stools, epistaxis, bleeding from gums, etc)
and abdominal pain
DHF III Above signs and symptoms plus circulating failure Thrombocytopenia: Platelet count < 100,000/cu.mm.
(weak rapid pulse, pulse pressure:;;; 20 mm Hg or high Haematocrit rise more than 20%
diastolic pressure, hypotension with the presence ·of
cold clammy skin and restlessness)
DHF IV Signs as grade III plus profound shock with undetectable Thrombocytopenia : Platelet count < 100,000/cu.mm.
I blood pressure or pulse Haemotocrit rise more than 20%
I DHF 111 and IV are Dengue Shock Syndrome
Source : (2, 4)
Haemorrhagic (bleeding} tendencies, Thrombocytopenia
FIG.3
Volume replacement flow chart for patients with DHF Grades I & II
Source: (4)
3. Management of DHF Grade I and II haematocrit is decreasing, fresh whole blood transfusion
Any person who has dengue fever with 10 ml/kg/hour should be given.
thrombocytopenia and haemoconcentration and presents However, in case of persistent shock when, after initial
with abdominal pain, black tarry stools, epistaxis, bleeding fluid replacement and resuscitation with plasma or plasma
from the gums and infection etc needs to be hospitalized. All expanders, the haematocrit continues to decline, internal
these patients should be observed for signs of shock. The bleeding should be suspected. It may he difficult to recognize
critical period for development of shock is transition from and estimate the degree of internal blood loss in the
febrile to abferile phase of illness, which usually occurs after presence of haemoconcentration. It is thus recommended to
third day of illness. A rise of haemoconcentration indicates give fresh whole blood in small volumes of 10 ml/kg/hour for
need for IV fluid therapy. If despite the treatment, the patient all patients in shock as a routine precaution. Oxygen should
develops fall in BP, decrease in urine output or other he given to all patients in shock. The detailed graphical
features of shock, the management for Grade III/IV DHF/ presentation of the treatment for patients with DHF Grades
DSS should be instituted. III and IV is given in Fig. 4.
Oral rehydration should he given along with antipyretics Indications of red cell transfusion
like paracetamol, sponging, etc. as descrilied above. The
detailed treatment for patients with DHF Grade I and II is 1. Loss of blood (overt blood) - 10 per cent or more of total
given in Fig. 3. blood volume - preferably give whole blood or
components to be used.
4. Management of DHF Grade III and IV 2. Refractory shock despite adequate fluid administration
Common signs of complication are observed during the and declining haematocrit.
afehrile phase of DHE Immediately after hospitalization, the 3. Replacement volume should be 10 ml/kg body weight at
haematocrit, platelet count and vital signs should be a time and coagulogram should be done.
examined to assess the patient's condition and intravenous 4. If fluid overload is present packed cells are to be given.
fluid therapy should be started. The patient requires regular
and sustained monitoring. If the patient has already received Indications of platelet transfusion
about 1000 ml of intravenous fluid, it should he changed to In general there is no need to give prophylactic platelet
colloidal solution preferably Dextran 40/haemaccele or if even at< 20,000/cu.mm.
•
__ EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE
. _ :DISEASES
___::__ _ _ __
UNSTABLE VITAL SIGNS
Urine output falls, signs of shock
Improvement No .improvement
Discontinue IV
after 24 hrs IV colloid (dextran (40) or Blood transfusion
plasma 10 ml/kg/hr (10 ml/kg/Ju)
as intravenous bolus
I~
(repeat if necessary)
I ;j ·Improvement
l
IV therapy by crystalloid successively reducing
the flow from 10 to 6 and 6 to 3 ml/kg/hr.
Discontinue after 24-48 hrs.
Serial platelet and haematocrit determinations : drop iri platelets and rise in haematrocrit are
essential for early dignosis of DHF.
Cases of DHF should be observed every hour for vital signs and urinary output.
FIG. 4
Volume replacement flow chart for patients with DHF Grades III & IV
Source: (4)
(2: 1 case/1000 population) areas and about 67 per cent in localities and mysorensis form is present in rural areas (it is
low transmission (0-1 case/1000 population) areas (2). not a vector); (3) An. fluviatilis is the main vector in hilly
About 92 per cent of malaria cases and 97 per cent of deaths areas, forests and forest fringes in many states, especially in
due to malaria is reported from North-eastern states, the east; (4) An. minimus is the vector in the foot hills of
Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa, Andhra North-Eastern states; (5) An. dirus is an important forest
Pradesh, Maharashtra, Gujarat, Rajasthan, West Bengal and vector in the North-East; and (6) An. epiroticus is now
Karnataka. However, the other states are also vulnerable restricted to the Andaman and Nicobar Islands (5).
with local and focal outbreaks of malaria. Much of these
areas are remote and inaccessible, forest or forest fringed Prevalent major epidemiological types of
with operation difficulties and predominantly inhabited by malaria in India (6)
tribal population (3). In the course of the stratification exercise, various problems
The countrywide malaria surveillance data for the period and constraints responsible for the slow progress of malaria
from 1995 to 2013 is as shown in Table 1. control have been identified. An analysis of these factors has
The API has been steadily declining in India from 3.29 in resulted in the identification of malaria priority areas.
1995 to 0.88 in 2012. When interpreting API, it is important TRIBAL MALARIA : The population of tribal areas are
to evaluate the level of surveillance activity indicated by the contributing about 50 per cent of P. falciparum cases of the
Annual Blood Examination Rate (ABER). At low levels of country (5). Infants, young children and pregnant women
surveillance, the Slide Positivity Rate {SPR) is a better have been identified as malaria high risk groups followed by
indicator. The SPR has also shown a decline in the country mobile tribal population engaged in forest-related activities.
from 3.51 in 1995 to 0.51 in 2013. The Pf cases have Limited health infrastructure and lack of drugs at village
declined from 1.14 million in 1995 to 0.44 million cases in level are the factors responsible for high morbidity and
2013. However Pf% has gradually increased from 38.8% in mortality due to malaria.
1995 to nearly 66.9% in 2013, which may indicate
increasing resistance to chloroquine (4). RURAL MALARIA : These include irrigated areas of arid
and semiarid plains. Malaria is of moderate to low
India is predominantly characterized by unstable malaria endemicity. An. culicifacies is the main vector and P. vivax is
transmission. Transmission is seasonal with increased predominant during lean period and P.falciparum during
intensity related to rains. Due to the low and unstable periodic exacerbation. In these the health infrastructure is
transmission dynamics, most of the population has no or little moderately developed.
immunity toward malaria. As a result, the majority of Indians
living in malarious areas are at risk of infection with all age URBAN MALARIA : 15 major cities including 4
groups affected. However, surveys have shown that in some metropolitans account for nearly 80 per cent of malaria
foci, mainly in forested areas, transmission is intense and the cases covered under urban malaria control scheme. The
disease burden is to a large extent concentrated in children. health infrastructure is well developed. In peri-urban areas
malaria situation is influenced by poor sanitary conditions
There are six primary vectors of malaria in India :
. and low socio-economic groups living in unplanned
{1) An. culicifacies is the main vector of rural and peri-urban
areas and is widespread in peninsular India. It is found in a settlements prone to periodical epidemics.
variety of natural and man-made breeding sites. It is highly MALARIA IN PROJECT AREAS : Project areas are those
zoophilic. Species A is an established vector for P. Vivax and areas where construction and developmental activities are
P. falciparum, whereas species B is completely refractory to taken up and temporary tropical aggregation of labourers
P. Vivax and partially refractory to P. falciparum. It has been takes place bringing in different strains of malaria parasite
demonstrated that species B, however, may play a role as a and non-immune population. This results in disturbance in
vector of P. falciparum in areas where the cattle population is eco-system, prolific increase in vector breeding places and
very low or absent; {2) An. stephensi is responsible for increased man-mosquito contact favouring high malaria
malaria in urban and industrial areas. The type form is found transmission. These pockets contribute a large number of
in urban areas; intermediate form in urban and semi-urban malaria cases which are highly disproportionate to the
TABLE 1
Countrywide malaria surveillance data (1995-April 2014)
relatively small population groups inhabitating the area. worldwide incidence of infection caused by a specific agent;
One or more major vectors are involved in malaria applies to a particular malaria parasite species. Intervention
transmission. Limited health facilities for prompttreatment is measures are no longer needed once eradication has been
invariably associated with chloroquine resistant malaria achieved.
parasite. Hence specific control strategy is required for such
areas. Epidemiological determinants
BORDER MALARIA : These are the high malaria Agent factors
transmission belts along the international borders and state
borders. These areas have their own problems in regard to (a) AGENT
malaria control becaµse of mixing of population and poor Malaria in man is caused· by four distinct species of the
administrative control. malaria parasite - P. vivax, P. falciparum, P. malariae and
P. ovale. Plasmodium vivax has the widest geographic
Some definitions (2) distribution throughout the world. In India, about 50 per
Malaria control : reducing the malaria disease burden to a cent of the infections are reported to be due to P. falciparum
level at which it is no longer a public health problem. and 4-8 per cent due to mixed infection and rest due to
Malaria elimination : the interruption of local mosquito- P. vivax. P. malariae has a restricted distribution and is said
borne malaria transmission; reduction to 'zero' of the to be responsible for less than 1 per cent of the infections in
incidence of infection caused by human malaria parasites in India. The largest focus of P. malariae in India is reported to
a defined geographical area as a result of deliberate efforts; be in Tumkur and Hassan districts in Karnataka. P. ovale is a
continued measures to prevent re-establishment of very rare parasite of man, mostly confined to tropical Africa.
It has also been reported in Vietnam. The severity of malaria
transmission are required.
is related to the species of the parasite.
Certification of malaria elimination : can be granted by
WHO after it has been proven beyond reasonable doubt that Life history
the chain of local human maiaria transmission by Anopheles The malaria parasite undergoes 2 cycles of development
mosquitoes has been fully interrupted in an entire country the human cycle (asexual cycle) and the mosquito cycle
for at least 3 consecutive years. (sexual cycle). Man is the intermediate host and mosquito
Malaria eradication : permanent reduction to 'zero' of the the definitive host (Fig. 1).
/
Oocyst grows (multiple
division stage: cyst bursts
to release sporozoites)
SPOROGONY SCHIZOGONY
/M~O'oiIB• ~
l
Mature schizont (Enter red cells)
(Segmentes)
I
Ookinete (motile zygote)
Immature schizont
~/
Ring trophozoite
'~
GAMETOGENY Mature trophozoite
FIG. l
Lifecycle of the malaria parasite.
Source: (10)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
(i) Asexual cycle: The asexual cycle begins when an 10-20 days depending upon favourable conditions of
infected mosquito bites a person and injects sporozoites. A atmospheric temperature and humidity. This period is also
considerable amount of new knowledge about the parasite's referred to as the "extrinsic incubation period".
life cycle has become available in recent years, concerning
almost all phases of the cycle (7). A brief description is as (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION
follows four phases are described in the human cycle: With the possible exception of chimpanzees in tropical
(a) HEPATIC PHASE: The sporozoites disappear within Africa, which may carry the infection with P. malariae, no
60 minutes from the peripheral circulation (8). Many of other animal reservoir of human plasmodia is known to exist
them are destroyed by phagocytes, but some reach the liver (9). A human reservoir is one who harbours the sexual forms
cells. After 1-2 weeks of development (depending upon the (gametocytes) of the parasite. A patient can be a carrier of
species), they become hepatic schizonts, which eventually several plasmodial species at the same time. Children are
burst releasing a shower of merozoites. The number of more likely to be gametocyte carriers than adults. The child is
merozoites produced from a single sporozoite varies thus epidemiologically a better reservoir than the adult.
considerably with the infecting species. A single Certain conditions must be met before a person can serve as
P. falciparum sporozoite may form as many as 40,000 a reservoir: (i) the person must harbour both the sexes of the
merozoites, whereas sporozoites from other species of gametocyte in his blood. If the person harbours only male or
plasmodia produce only 2,000 to 15,000 merozoites (8). In female gametocytes, further development cannot take place
the case of P. falciparum, the intrahepatic schizonts rupture in the mosquito vector, (ii) the gametocytes must be mature;
almost simultaneously and there is no persistent tissue phase immature forms do not undergo further development. It may
(the so-called exo-erythrocytic phase). On the contrary, the take 2-4 days for the gametocytes to attain maturity after
intrahepatic schizonts of the other plasmodia do not burst all their appearance in the blood, (iii) the gametocytes must be
at the same time. Some hepatic forms persist and remain viable, i.e., if the patient receives an antimalarial drug, the
dormant in the hepatocytes for considerable periods before gametocytes lose their viability or infectivity to mosquitoes
they begin to grow and undergo pre-erythrocytic (iv) the gametocytes must be present in sufficient density to
schizogony, thus liberating merozoites into the blood stream infect mosquitoes. The number of gametocytes necessary to
causing relapses of these infections. P. vivax and P. ovale infect mosquitoes is not definitely known, but it is thought by
may continue to relapse for 2 to 3 years and P. malariae may some that there must be at least 12 per cubic mm of blood.
persist for 10 to 20 years or more. Once the parasites
enter the RBC, they do not reinvade the liver. (c) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY
(b) ERYTHROCYTIC PHASE: Many of the merozoites are Malaria is communicable as long as mature, viable
quickly destroyed, but a significant number attach to specific gametocytes exist in the Circulating blood in sufficient
receptor sites on the RBC. The merozoites then penetrate density to infect vector mosquitoes. In vivax infections,
the RBC and pass through the stages of trophozoite and gametocytes appear in blood 4-5 days after the appearance
schizont. The erythrocytic phase ends with the liberation of of the asexual parasites; in falcipanim infections, they do
merozoites, which infect fresh red blood cells. The cycle is not appear until 10-12 days after the first appearance of
repeated over and over again until it is slowed down by the asexual parasites. Gametocytes are the most numerous
immune response of the host (9). The duration of the during the early stages of the infection when their density
erythrocytic cycle is constant for each species of malaria may exceed 1,000 per cubic mm of blood. They also tend to
parasite- 48 hours for P. fa/ciparum, P. vivax and P. ovale; occur in waves in peripheral blood.
and 72 hours for P. malariae. (c) GAMETOGENY: In all
RELAPSES: It is usual for vivax and ovale malaria to
species of malaria some erythrocytic forms do not divide but
relapse more than 3 years after the patient's first attack.
become male and female gametocytes. These are the sexual
Recurrences of falciparum malaria usually disappear within
forms of the parasite which are infective to mosquito.
1-2 years. P. malariae has a tendency to cause prolonged
(ii) Sexual cycle: The mosquito cycle (sporogony) begins low-level, asymptomatic parasitaemia (11). The infection is
when gametocytes are ingested by the vector mosquito known to persist for 40 years or more. It is probable that
when feeding on an infected person. The gametocytes persons harbouring such infections are at least occasionally
continue further development in the mosquito. The first infective to mosquitoes.
event to take place in the stomach of the mosquito is It is now considered more likely that vivax and ovale
exflagellation of the male gametocyte; 4-8 thread-like relapses are derived from original, sporozoite-induced, liver
filaments called "micro-gametes" are developed. The female schizonts which have lain latent long before bursting. In
gametocyte undergoes a process of maturation and becomes P. falciparum and P. malariae infections latent liver schizonts
a female gamete or "macrogamete". By a process of do not appear to occur. Relapses in these species, most
chemotaxis, microgametes are attracted towards the female authorities maintain, are due to a chronic blood infection,
gamete, and one of which (microgamete) causes fertilization i.e., erythrocytic schizogony persisting at a low level.
of the female gamete. The resulting zygote is at first a
motionless body, but within 18-24 hours, it becomes motile. Host factors
This is known as Ookinete, which penetrates the stomach
wall of the mosquito and develops into an oocyst on the The main variables of the human element that have an
outer surface of the stomach. The oocyst grows rapidly and influence on malaria epidemiology include the following :
develops within it numerous sporozoites. When mature, the (a) AGE : Malaria affects all ages. Newborn infants have
oocyst bursts and liberates sporozoites into the body cavity considerable resistance to infection with P. falciparum. This
of mosquito. Many of the sporozoites migrate to the salivary has been attributed to· the high concentration of foetal
glands of the mosquito, and the mosquito now becomes haemoglobin during the first few months of life, which
infective to man. The period of time required for the suppresses the development of P. falciparum (12). (b) SEX:
development of the parasite from the gametocyte to Males are more frequently exposed to the risk of acquiring
sporozoite stage in the body of the mosquito is about malaria than females because of the outdoor life they lead.
Further, females in India are usually better clothed than
MALARIA
.,
(b) TEMPERATURE: Temperature affects the life cycle of the
males. (c) RACE : Individuals with AS haemoglobin (sickle- malaria parasite. The optimum temperature for the
cell trait) have a milder illness with falciparum infection than development of the malaria parasite in the insect vector is
do those with normal (AA) haemoglobin (8). Persons whose between 20 deg. to 30 deg.C (68 deg. to 86 deg.F). The
red blood cells are "Duffy negative" (a genetic trait) are parasite ceases to undergo development in the mosquito if
resistant to P. vivax infection. (d) PREGNANCY: Pregnancy the mean temperature is below 16 deg.C (60.8 deg.F).
increases the risk of malaria in women. Malaria during Temperatures higher than 30 deg.C are lethal to the
pregnancy may cause intrauterine death of the foetus; it may parasite. (c) HUMIDITY: The atmospheric humidity has a
also cause premature labour or abortion. Primigravid direct effect on the length of life of the mosquito, although it
women are at greatest risk (13). (e) SOCIO-ECONOMIC has no effect on the parasite. A relative humidity of 60 per
DEVELOPMENT Malaria has demonstrated the cent is considered necessary for mosquitoes to live their
relationship between health and socio-economic normal span of life. When the relative humidity is high,
development. It is generally accepted that malaria has mosquitoes are more active and they feed more voraciously.
disappeared from most developed countries as a result of If the humidity is low, mosquitoes do not live long.
socio-economic development (13). (f) HOUSING: Housing (d) RAINFALL : Rain in general provides opportunities for
plays an important role in the epidemiology of malaria. The the breeding of mosquitoes and may give rise to epidemics
ill-ventilated and ill-lighted houses provide ideal indoor of malaria. Rain increases the atmospheric humidity which is
resting places for mosquitoes. Malaria is acquired in most necessary for the survival of mosquitoes. However, heavy
instances by mosquito-bites within the houses. The site, rain may have an adverse affect in flushing out the breeding
type of construction, nature of the walls, etc. influence the places. Paradoxically in some areas, (e.g., Sri Lanka) severe
selection of control measures (14). (g) POPULATION epidemics of malaria followed years of drought. It was
MOBILITY : People migrate for one reason or other from because, the lesser monsoon rains led to the formation of
one country to another or from one part of a country to small pools of water in river beds, which served as active
another. Labourers connected with various engineering, breeding places for malaria vectors. The relationship
irrigation, agricultural and other projects and periodic between rainfall (total and its distribution) and mosquito
migration of nomads and wandering tribes are outstanding breeding is of fundamental importance (15). (e) ALTITUDE:
examples of internal migration. Some of them may import As a rule, Anophelines are not found at altitudes above
malaria parasites in their blood and reintroduce malaria into 2000-2500 metres, due to unfavourable climatic conditions.
areas where malaria has been controlled or eliminated. (f) MAN-MADE MALARIA: Burrow pits, garden pools,
Imported malaria has become quite a public health problem irrigation channels and engineering projects like
in Europe, North America, and other temperate parts of the construction of hydroelectric dams, roads, bridges have led
world, owing to the rising tide of air travel, tourism and to the breeding of mosquitoes and an increase in malaria.
migration (10). (h) OCCUPATION Malaria is Malaria consequent on such human undertakings is called
predominantly a rural disease and is closely related to "man-made malaria".
agriculture practices. (i) HUMAN HABITS : Habits such as
sleeping out of doors, nomadism, refusal to accept spraying Vector of malaria
of houses, replastering of walls after spraying and not using Out of about 45 species of anopheline mosquitoes in
measures of personal protection (e.g. bed nets) influence India, only a few are regarded as the vectors of primary
man-vector contact, and obviously the choice of control importance. These are: An. culicifacies, An. fluviatilis,
measures. (j) IMMUNITY: The epidemic of malaria is An. stephensi, An. mm1mus, An. philippinensis,
influenced by the immune status of the population. An. sundaicus, and An. maculatus. The vectors of major
Immunity to malaria in humans is acquired only after importance are An culicifacies in rural areas and
repeated exposure over several years. Thus in endemic An. stephensi in urban areas.
malarious areas a state of collective immunity becomes In the absence of a vaccine, vector control is the only
established slowly, so that infants, young children, migrants practical approach to malaria control. A knowledge of
and travellers from non-endemic areas suffer most from the anopheline biology is essential for understanding the
disease. Those, however, who survive to the adult age show epidemiology of malaria and its prevention. The main
less evidence of adverse effects to the attenuated infection. factors which determine the vectorial importance of
Infants born of immune mothers are generally protected mosquitoes are: (a) DENSITY : To be an effective vector, a
during the first 3-5 months by maternal IgG antibody; species must be present in adequate density in or near
infants born of semi-immune mothers are only partially human habitations. A sudden increase in density of vectors,
protected. Active immunity is species-specific, that is, may be a cause of epidemic outbreaks ..For each vector,
immunity against one strain does not protect against there is what is known as "critical density" below which
another. People living in endemic areas exposed continually effective transmission cannot be maintained in a community.
to malaria develop considerable degree of resistance to This level varies with different species. In the case of An.
clinical disease, but their partial immunity to malaria culicifacies a high density is required for the propagation of
declines with time after they leave their endemic countries. malaria; in the case of An. fluviatilis which is very efficient
Semi-immune individuals may harbour malaria parasites vector, a much lower density would suffice. (b) LIFE SPAN:
without presenting any symptoms of disease. Both humoral The key factor in the transmission of malaria is the life span
and cellular factors play a role in this protection (1). of the vector. The vector mosquito must live for at least
10-12 days after an infective blood meal to become
Environmental factors infective. The strategy in malaria eradication is to shorten
India's geographic position and climatic conditions had the life span of mosquitoes to less than 10 days by
been, for long, favourable to the transmission of malaria. insecticides. (c) CHOICE OF HOST : Some mosquitoes
(a) SEASON : Malaria is a seasonal disease. In most parts of prefer human blood, some animal blood, and some show
India, the maximum prevalence is from July to November. great variation in their feeding habits. The percentage of
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
malaria in second and third trimesters of pregnancy, while oral quinine with tetracycline/doxicycline. These instances
quinine is recommended in the first .trimester. P. vivax should be reported to concerned District Malaria/State
malaria can be treated with chloroquine. Primaquine is Malaria Officer/ROHFW for initiation of therapeutic efficacy
contraindicated in pregnant woman. studies.
TREATMENT OF MIXED INFECTIONS Diagnosis and treatment of malaria (23)
Mixed infections with P. falciparum should be treated as All fever cases diagnosed as malaria by either ROT or
falciparum malaria. microscopy should be promptly given effective treatment.
. Resistance should be suspected if inspite of full treatment The medicines chosen will depend upon whether the patient
with no history of vomiting, diarrhoea, patient does not has vivax malaria or falciparum malaria. The flow charts in
respond within 72 hours, clinically and parasitologically. different settings for diagnosis and drug selection for the
Such cases not responding to ACT, should be treated with treatment of malaria are shown in Fig. 2, 3 and 4.
A. Where microscopy result is available within 24 hours
Result?
FIG.2
B. Where microscopy .result is not available within 24 hours and monovalent RDT is used
.. . -
Where TfR;?; 1%, and Pf%> $0% in any of last 3 years In other areas, if patient not at high-risk of Pf
Do RDT for detection of Wait for slide result. Give CQ 25 mg/kg over 3 days
malaria & prepare slide only if high suspicion of malaria
Positive for RDT negative: Wait for slide Positive for Positive for
P. f alciparum result. Give CQ 25 mg/kg over P. vivax P. falciparum
1n North-Eastern states: Treat with 3 days, if high suspicion of malaria GiveCQ if In North-Eastern states: Age-
age-specific ACT-AL for 3 days + not already specific ACT-AL for 3 days + PQ
PQ single dose on second day · given+ single dose on second day
In other states: Treat with ACT-SP If confirmed as Pv, give CQ if not PQ 0.25 mg/kg In other states: Treat with:
+
for 3 days PQ single dose on already given PQ 0.25 mg/kg/ single dose
for 14days
ACT-SP for 3 days + PQ single
second day day over 14 days dose on second day
C. Where microscopy result is not available within 24 hours and bivalent RDT is used
Note: (a) If a patient has severe symptoms at any stage, then immediately refer to a nearest PHC or other health facility with indoor patient
management or a registered medical doctor.
(b) PQ is contra-indicated in pregnancy and in children under 1 year (Infant).
FIG.4
Dosage chart for treatment of fa/ciparum malaria Primaquine (PQ) prevents transmission of falciparum
with ACT-SP malaria to others by its ability to kill gametocytes. PQ tablets
should .be taken after a meal; not on an empty stomach.
Age group 1st day 2nd day 3rd day Children less than the age of one year and pregnant women
(Years) AS SP AS PQ AS should not be given primaquine. As pregnant women having
0-1* 1 1 1 Nil 1 falciparum malaria require different medicines, they should
Pink (25 mg) (250+ (25mg) 25 (mg) be directed to go to the nearest PHC or hospital
blister 12.5 mg) immediately, without delay.
1-4 1 1 1 1 1
Yellow (50 mg) (500+25 (50mg) (7.5 mg (50 mg) Treatment of mixed infections
blister mg each) base) (P. vivax + P. falciparum) cases (23)
5-8 1 1 1 2 1
(100 mg) (750+37.5 (100 mg) (7.5 mg (100 mg)
All mixed infections should be treated with full course of
Green
blister mg each) base each) ACT and Primaquine 0.25 mg per kg body weight daily for
14 days.
9-14 1 2 1 4 1
Red (150 mg) (500+25 (150 mg) (7.5 mg (150 mg) In North-Eastern states: Treat with: Age-specific ACT-AL
blister mg each) base each) for 3 days + Primaquine 0.25 mg per kg body weight daily
15 & above 1 2 1 6 1 for 14 days.
White (200 mg) (750+37.5 (200 mg) (7.5 mg (200 mg)
blister mg each) base each) In other states: ACT-SP 3 days + Primaquine 0.25 mg per
kg body weight daily for 14 days.
* SP is not to be prescribed for children <5 months of age and
should be treated with alternate ACT Dosage chart for treatment of mixed
* ACT-AL is not to be prescribed for children weighing less than (vivax and falciparum) malaria with ACT-SP
5 kg.
Age Day 1 Day2 Day3 Day
4-14
Jn North-Eastern states (NE states): AS SP PQ AS PQ AS PQ PQ
1. ACT-AL co-formulated tablet of Artemether (20 mg) - tablet tablet (2.5 tablet (2.5 tablet (2.5 (2.5
(50mg) mg) (50 mg) mg) (50 mg) mg) mg)
Lumefantrine (120 mg)
(Not recommended during the first trimester of Less than l/z V2 0 Vz 0 1/z 0 0
1 year
pregnancy and for children weighing <5 kg)
1-4 years 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Recommended regimen by weight and age group 5-8 years 2 11/z 2 2 2 2 2 2
The packing size for different age groups 9-14 years 3 2 4 3 4 3 4 4
based on Kg body weight. 15 years 4 3 6 4 6 4 6 6
or more
Co-formulated 5-14 kg 15-24 kg 25-34 kg >34 kg
tablet ACT-AL (>5 months (>3 to 8 (>9to14 (>14 years)
to <3 years) years) years) Treatment of P. ovale and P. malariae
Total dose of 20mg/ 40 mg/ 60 mg/ 80mg/
ACT-AL 120mg 240mg 360mg 480mg
In India these species are very rarely found in few places.
twice daily twice daily twice daily twice daily P. ova/e should be treated as P. vivax and P ma/ariae should
for 3 days for 3 days for 3 days for 3 days be treated as P. falciparum.
Pack size General recommendations for the management
No. of tablets 6 12 18 24 of uncomplicated malaria
in the packing
1. Avoid starting treatment on an empty stomach. The first
Give 1 tablet 2 tablets 3 tablets 4 tablets
twice daily twice daily twice daily twice daily dose should be given under observation. Dose should be
for 3 days for3 days for 3 days for 3 days repeated if vomiting occurs within 15 minutes by
Colour of Yellow Green Red White opening a new blister pack (discard what remains of old
the pack pack). If the patient vomits the first dose again, it is
considered a severe case of malaria and refer the patient
immediately to the nearest Block PHC/CHC/Hospital.
2. Primaquine * : 0. 75 mg/kg body weight on day 2 Special precaution should be taken in case of a child
under-5 years of age, and in pregnant woman.
Treatment of uncomplicated P. falciparum cases in
2. Explain to the patient or caretaker that : (a) if the
pregnancy:
treatment is not completed as prescribed, the disease
1st trimester : Quinine salt 10 mg/kg 3 times daily for may manifest again with more serious features and more
7 days. difficult to treat; (b) to come back immediately, if there is
Quinine may induce hypoglycaemia; pregnant women no improvement after 24 hours, if the situation gets
should not start taking quinine on an empty stomach and worse or the fever comes back; and (c) that regular use
should eat regularly, while on quinine treatment. of a mosquito net (preferably insecticide treated net) is
2nd and 3rd trimester : Area-specific ACT as per dosage the best way to prevent malaria.
schedule given above i.e. ACT-AL in North-Eastern states, 3. Patient should also be examined for concomitant
ACT-SP in other states. illness.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Initial parenteral treatment for at least 48 hours: Follow-up treatment, when patient can take oral·
Choose one of following four options medication following parenteral treatment
Quinine : 20 mg quinine salt/kg body weight on admission Quinine 10 mg/kg three times a day with: doxycycline
(IV infusion or divided IM injection) followed by maintenance · 100 mg once a day OR clindamycin in pregnant
dose of 10 mg/kg 8 hourly; infusion rate should not exceed women and children under 8 years of age.
5 mg/kg per hour. Loading dose of 20 mg/kg should not - to complete 7 days of treatment.
be given, if the patient has already received quinine.
Artesunate: 2.4 mg/kg IV or IM given on admission Full oral course of area-specific ACT:
(time=O), then at 12 hand 24 h, then once a day. In North-Eastern states: Age-specific ACT-AL for
3 days + PQ single dose on second day
OR
Artemether: 3.2 mg/kg bw IM given on admission In other states: Treat with: ACT-SP for 3 days +
then 1.6 mg/kg per day. PQ single dose on second day
OR
Arteether: 150 mg daily IM for 3 days in adults only
(not recommended for children).
Note : The parenteral treatment in severe malaria cases should be given for minimum of 24 hours once started (irrespective
of the patient's ability to tolerate oral medication earlier than 24 hours).
After parenteral artemisinin therapy, patients will receive reports of teratogenicity in experimental animals, most
a full course of area-specific oral ACT for 3 days. Those authorities accept that pyrimethamine can safely be taken
patients who received parenteral Quinine therapy should alone during pregnancy (25). The teratogenic effect of
receive oral Quinine 10 mg/kg body weight three times a day pyrimethamine in man is not proved. In regard to
for 7 days (including the days when parenteral Quinine was primaquine, although in recommended doses, no serious
administered) plus Doxycycline 3 mg/kg body weight once a toxic manifestations have been encountered so far in India.
day, or Clindamycin 10 mg/kg body weight 12-hourly for 7 It is useful to bear in mind the likely toxic symptoms, which
days (Doxycycline is contraindicated in pregnant women may be of three types : (a) P/asmocid types : this is a rare
and children under 8 years of age) or area-specific ACT as toxic manifestation involving the CNS, (b) Gastrointestinal :
described. cramps, nausea and vomiting, (c) Cardiovascular : This is
Note: probably the most serious toxic manifestation which is to be
carefully observed during the administration of the drug.
- Pregnant women with severe malaria in any trimester Even the first dose may bring about the warning sign of
can be treated with artemisinin derivatives, which, in cyanosis. The surveillance worker/MPW must carefully check
contrast to qumme, do not risk aggravating for all possible toxic symptoms before he administers the
hypoglycaemia. daily dose of primaquine. In the case of appearance of any
The parenteral treatment should be given for of the toxic symptoms . discussed above, primaquine
minimum of 24 hours. treatment should be stopped immediately (26).
Once the patient can take oral therapy; give:
Quinine 10 mg/kg three times a day with doxycycline Chemoprophylaxis
100 mg once a day or clindamycin in pregnant Chemoprophylaxis against malaria has, with the
women and children under 8 years of age, to development of drug resistance, become unreliable. Experts
complete 7 days of treatment, in patients started on disagree on whether well-conducted prophylaxis gives an
parenteral quinine. additional benefit if effective treatment is readily available.
- Full course of ACT to patients started on artemisinin However, experts feel that it can play a useful role in
derivatives. reducing the risk of fatal disease (27).
Use of mefloquine should be avoided in cerebral Chemoprophylaxis is recommended for travellers from
malaria due to neuropsychiatric complications non-endemic areas and, as a short term measure for
associated with it. soldiers, police and labour forces serving in highly endemic
areas. Chemoprophylaxis should be complemented by
Some don'ts in severe malaria case management personal protection where feasible and by other methods of
Do not use corticosteroids, do not give intravenous vector control (27).
mannitol, do not use heparin as anticoagulant, do not The recommendations for short-term chemoprophylaxis
administer adrenaline or do not overhydrate. (less than 6 weeks) are as follows (27) :
Toxic hazards of drugs (1) Dosing schedules for the children should be based on
body weight.
Chloroquine has few side-effects. Nausea, vomiting,
blurring of vision and headaches may occur, but they are (2) Antimalarials that have to be taken daily (e.g.
mild and transient. Cases of retinal damage have been Doxycycline) should be started the day before arrival in
reported but only in persons exposed to large cumulative the risk area.
doses over many years. It is important to remember that (3) Weekly chloroquine should be started 1 week before
chloroquine should not be given on empty stomach. Despite arrival.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 3
Malaria vector control measures
Reduction of human,mosquito
contact
IIDestru~tion
Des.tru
.. ction ofadult
mosquitoes
of mosqUit~ia:?he ·• Ped~dom~stic.sa11itation
Insecticide-treated nets, indoor residual spraying,
space spraying, ultra low-volume sprays
Larviciding of water surfaces, intermittent irrigation,
I
sluicing, biological control I
ISource i:eductio,I) ....•.· ·'·' $rtialt•sc~le draJnage Environmental sanitation, water management, drainage · I
ISocial ~artlcip~tion .. M~tivation for personal and
family protection
Health education, community participation
Source : (29)
MALARIA
9. Bruce-Chwatt, LJ. (1980). Essential Malariology, William About 95 per cent of cases of lymphatic filariasis are
Heinemenn, London. caused by infection with W. bancrofti; other related parasites
10. Jawetze et.al, Medical Microbiology, 24th Ed, 2007, A Lange Medical that infect humans are Brugia malayi in South-East Asia and
Book.
B. timori in Indonesia.
11. Hall, A P. ( 1976) Brit. Med. J., 1 : 323.
12. Pasrol, G. et al (1976) Lancet, 1, 1269. The formal goal of the global lymphatic filariasis
13. WHO (1986). Techn. Rept. Ser. 735. programme is to eliminate the disease "as a public health
14. WHO (1979). Tech Rep. Ser. No. 640. problem" and 2020 is the informal target date for
15. WHO (1995), Tech. Rep. Ser., No. 857. interrupting transmission. The strategy to interrupt
16. Lariviere, M. (1977). Children in the Tropics No. 106, p. 9. transmission of the disease calls for mass administration of a
17. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep.Ser. No.712. 2-drug regimen (ivermectin or DEC plus .albendazole)
18. WHO (1995), World Health, March-April, 1995. administration as a single dose annually for 4-6 years.
19. Council for International Organization of Medical Sciences (1973).
Communicable Diseases, Provisional Nomenclature, CIOMS/WHO, Between 2000-2011, the global programme provided a
Geneva. cumulative total of nearly 4.4 billion treatments to at least
20. WHO ( 1986). The clinical Management of Acute Malaria, SEARO, SEA 984 million people. It represents about 73.2 per cent of the
· Ser. No. 9. New Delhi. 1.4 billion people at risk (2).
21. Govt. of India (2009), Guidelines for Diagnosis and Treatment of
Malaria in India 2009, NVBDCP Division, Ministry of Health and The current hypothesis is that reducing the prevalence of
Family Welfare, New Delhi. microfilaraemia in humans to < 1 per cent will stop
22. WHO (1961) Techn.Rep.Ser. No.205. transmission. One provisional set of guidelines for stopping
23. Govt. of India (2013), National Drug Policy on Malaria 2013, treatment would require 2 5 annual rounds of MDA with
Directorate of NVBDCP, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New coverage of 2 65 per cent of the total population (3).
Delhi.
24. Govt. of India (2011), Guidelines for Diagnosis and Treatment of Lymphatic filariasis is a public health problem in India.
Malaria in India 2011, NVBDCP, National Institute of Malaria The disease is endemic all over India, except in Jammu and
Research, New Delhi. Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh, Punjab, Haryana, Delhi,
25. Editorial (1976). Lancet, 2 :1005. Chandigarh, Rajasthan, Nagaland, Manipur, Tripura,
26. Department of Family Welfare, Ministry of Health, Govt. of India Meghalaya, Sikkim, Arunachal Pradesh, Mizoram, and
(1977). Role of Medical Officer of PHC in Malaria Control, Mass Dadra and Nagar Haveli. However, surveys carried out
Mailing Unit. during the past two decades indicate that areas previously
27. WHO (2010), International travel and health.
known to be free from filariasis are showing evidence of low
28. WHO (1993), Tech. Rep. Ser., No.839.
degrees of transmission. Heavily infected areas are found in
29. WHO (2006), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 936.
30. WHO Bull (1985) 63 (2) 353.
Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Jharkhand, Andhra Pradesh, Orissa,
31. WHO (1991), World Health, Sept-Oct 1991.
Tamil Nadu, Kerala and Gujarat .
32. WHO (1983). Techn. Rep.Ser. No.688. An estimated 600 million people are at risk of lymphatic
33. WHO (2008), World Malaria Report, 2008. filariasis infection in 250 endemic districts in 20 states/UTs in
34. WHO (2011), World Malaria Report2011. India. Mapping was carried out using epidemiological data
supplemented by data from filaria control units, filaria
clinics, and survey units under the national filaria control
LYMPHATIC:flLARIASIS
programme. Morbidity surveys (upto 2012) of filaria cases in
the states/UTs revealed 8 lacs cases of lymphoedema and
The term "lymphatic filariasis" covers infection with three 4 lacs cases of hydrocele (4). The microfilaria survey reports
closely related nematode worms - W. bancrofti, B. malayi received from 205 districts revealed microfilaria rate of
and B. timori. All three infections are transmitted to man by about 0.45 per cent (4).
the bites of infective mosquitoes. All three parasites have Mass drug administration (MDA) is being implemented in
basically similar life cycles in man-adult worms living in India since year 2004. In 2007 India changed its strategy
lymphatic vessels whilst their offspring, the microfilariae from delivery of DEC alone to delivery of DEC plus
circulate in peripheral blood and are available to infect albendazole; since that time, the number of people treated
mosquito vectors when they come to feed (1). The disease with combination therapy has increased steadily. In 2012,
manifestations range from none to both acute and chronic about 87 per cent people at risk were treated with
manifestations such as lymphangitis, lymphadenitis, combination drug (4). India has reduced the prevalence of
elephantiasis of genitals, legs and arms or as a microfilaria to less than 1 per cent in· 192 out of 250
hypersensitivity state such as tropical pulmonary implementation units. In implementation units in Nalganda
eosinophilia or as an atypical form such as filarial arthritis. in Andhra Pradesh, the prevalence of microfilaria
Though not fatal, the disease is responsible for considerable was reduced from 17 per cent in 2004 to 0.8 per cent in
suffering, deformity and disability. 2009 (5).
mosquitoes, their longevity and also determines the (ii) Asymptomatic microfilaraemia : A considerable
development of the parasite in the insect . vector. The proportion of people are asymptomatic, although their
maximum prevalence of Culex quinquefasciatus (previously blood is positive for Mf. They may remain without any
known as C. fatigans) was observed when the temperature symptoms for months - in some instances for years. They
was between 22 to 38 deg. C and optimum longevity when are an important source of infection in the community.
the relative humidity was 70 per cent. (b) DRAINAGE: These carriers are usually detected by night blood
Lymphatic filariasis is associated with bad drainage. The examination.
vectors breed profusely in polluted water. (c) TOWN (iii) Stage of acute manifestations : In the first months and
PLANNING : Inadequate sewage disposal and lack of town years there are recurrent episodes of acute inflammation in
planning have aggravated the problem of filariasis in India lymph glands and vessels. The clinical manifestations
by increasing the facilities for the breeding of comprise filarial fever, lymphangitis, lymphadenitis,
C. quinquefasciatus (C. fatigans). The common breeding lymphoedema of the various parts of the body and of
places are cesspools, soakage pits, ill-maintained drains, epididymo-orchitis in the male.
septic tanks, open ditches, burrow pits, etc.
(iv) Stage of chronic obstructive lesions : The chronic
Vectors of lymphatic filariasis stage usually develops 10-15 years from the onset of the
All three infections (W bancrofti, B. malayi and B. timori) first acute attack. This phase is due to fibrosis and
are transmitted to man by the bites of infective mosquitoes. obstruction of lymphatic vessels causing permanent
No less than 5 genera are involved in different areas of the structural changes.
world - Cu/ex, Anopheles and Aedes serve as vectors for In chronic Bancroftian filariasis, the main clinical features
W bancrofti; and Mansonia, Anopheles and Coquil/ettidia are hydrocele, elephantiasis and chyluria. Elephantiasis may
serve as the vectors of the Brugia species. affect the legs, scrotum, arms, penis, vulva and breasts,
The main vectors in India are : C. quinquefasciatus usually in that order of decreasing frequency. The
(C. fatigans) for Bancroftian filariasis, and Mansonia prevalence of chyluria is usually very low.
(Mansonoides) mosquitoes (e.g., M. annu/ifers and The Brugian filariasis is generally similar to Bancroftian
M. uniformis) for Brugian filariasis. The breeding of filariasis, but strangely the genitalia are rarely involved,
Mansonia mosquitoes is associated with certain aquatic except in areas where Brugian filariasis occurs together with
plants such as Pistia stratiotes. In the absence of these Bancroftian filariasis.
plants, these mosquitoes cannot breed.
Not all elephantiasis is caused by lymphatic filarial
Mode of transmission infection. Even in endemic areas, a small proportion of cases
Filariasis is transmitted by the bite of infected vector may be due to other causes - i.e., due to obstructions
mosquitoes. The parasite is deposited near the site of following infections (such as tuberculosis), tumours, surgery
puncture. It passes through the punctured skin or may or irradiation (13). In Ethiopia, endemic leg elephantiasis is
penetrate the skin on its own and finally reach the lymphatic caused by silica in the iliac lymph glands (14).
system. The dynamics of transmission depends upon the
man-mosquito contact (e.g., infective biting rate). 2. OCCULT FILARIASIS
The term occult or cryptic filariasis refers to filarial
Incubation period infections in which the classical clinical manifestations are
The time interval between inoculation of infective larvae not present and Mf are not found in the blood. Occult
and the first appearance of detectable Mf is known as "pre- filariasis is believed to result from a hypersensitivity reaction
patent period". Direct information on the duration of the to filarial antigens derived from Mf. The best known example
prepatent period is lacking (13). is tropical pulmonary eosinophilia.
The time interval from invasion of infective larvae to the
development of clinical manifestations is known as the Lymphoedema management (15)
"clinical incubation period". This period, most commonly, is The recommended management of lymphoedema in
8 to 16 months. This period may, however, be longer (13). areas where lymphatic filariasis is endemic involves simple
activities that have demonstrated their effectiveness in
Clinical manifestations significantly improving the quality of life of patients. These
Only a small proportion of infected individuals exhibit activities include providing early detection of lymphoedema,
clinical signs. The disease manifestations can be divided into caring for the skin by washing and drying the affected limb
two distinct clinical types : (a) lymphatic filariasis caused by or area, preventing and treating entry lesions and providing
the parasite in the lymphatic system, and (b) occult filariasis lymph drainage by elevating the limb and exercising. These
caused by ah immune hyper-responsiveness of the human are the minimum activities that need to be undertaken, and
host (e.g., tropical pulmonary eosinophilia). there is a standard care beyond this that can be accessed
where available.
1. LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS
Since the prevention and management of disability
The following stages have been described (13): caused by lymphatic filariasis is now viewed as public health
(i) Asymptomatic amicrofilaraemia : In all endemic areas a issue, the guidelines for the first level care worker developed
proportion of population does not show Mf or clinical by WHO to manage acute dermato-lymphangioadenitis
manifestations of the disease although they have the same (ADLA) are as follows:
degree of exposure to infective larvae as those who become
1. TREATMENT FOR UNCOMPLICATED ADLA
infected. With presently available diagnostic procedures it is
not possible to determine whether persons in this group have a. Give analgesic such as paracetamol (lg given 3-4
detectable infections or whether they are free from infection. times a day);
LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS
1. CLINICAL PARAMETERS circulation. It is effective in killing Mf. The effect of the drug
The clinical parameters measured are the incidence of on the adult worm is uncertain. It has probably no effect on
acute manifestations (adeno-lymphangitis, epididymo- the infective stage larvae.
orchitis, etc), and the prevalence of chronic manifestations Toxic reactions : DEC may produce severe side reactions.
(lymphoedema, elephantiasis, hydrocele, chyluria, etc). The reactions may be of two kinds : (a) those due to the drug
itself, e.g., headache, nausea, vomiting, dizziness, etc, These
2. PARASITOLOGICAL PARAMETERS reactions are observed a few hours after the first dose of
These are: (a) MICROFILARIA RATE: It is the percentage DEC and generally do not last for more than 3 days, and
of persons showing Mf in their peripheral blood (20 cu. mm) {b) those which are allergic reactions due to destruction
in the sample population, one slide being taken from each of microfilariae and adult worms, e,g., fever, local
person. Specify the species of the parasite. (b) FILARIAL inflammations around dead worms, orchitis, lymphadenitis,
ENDEMICITY RATE : It is the percentage of persons transient lymphoedema and hydrocele. The local reactions
examined showing microfilariae in their blood, or disease tend to occur later in the course of treatment and to last
manifestation or both. (c) MICROFILARIAL DENSITY : It is longer. If the drug is given in spaced doses, systemic
the number of Mf per unit volume (20 cu. mm) of blood in reactions are much less frequent and less intense after the
samples from individual persons. It indicates the intensity of second dose and are rare after subsequent doses. These
infection. (d) AVERAGE INFESTATION RATE : It is the reactions disappear spontaneously and interruption of
average number of Mf per positive slide, each slide being treatment is not necessary.
made from 20 cu.mm of blood. It indicates the prevalence of
microfilaraemia in the population. b. Fi/aria control in the community
There are three reasons why filariasis never causes
3. ENTOMOLOGICAL PARAMETERS explosive epidemics : (a) the parasite does not multiply in
These comprise : (a) vector density per 10 man-hour the insect vector, (b) the infective larvae do not multiply in
catch (b) percentage of mosquitoes positive for all stages of the human host, and (c) the life cycle of the parasite is
development (c) percentage of mosquitoes positive for relatively long, 15 years or more. These factors favour the
infective (stage III) larvae (d) the annual biting rate - for success of control programme (13).
assessment of transmission (e) types of larval breeding The administration of DEC can be carried out in various
places, etc. ways:
The above parameters help to measure the conditions
existing before and after control procedures began, and also (i) Mass therapy
to measure the progress of the control campaign against In this approach, DEC is given to almost everyone in the
vectors from time to time. community irrespective of whether they have
· microfilaraemia, disease manifestations or no signs of
CONTROL MEASURES infection except children under 2 years, pregnant women and
seriously ill patients. The dose recommended is 6 mg/kg body
The current strategy of filariasis control is based on : weight. In some countries it is used alone and some countries
1. Chemotherapy with albendazole or ivermectin. Mass therapy is indicated in
2. Vector control highly endemic areas (13). For mass chemotherapy to be
accepted, a good rapport must be established with the
Many years of experience with DEC chemotherapy has community before the treatment begins. This requires
shown that, even after the full regimen of treatment, some intensive health education of the general public.
microfilariae still persist in the body. Due to this and other
reasons (e.g., toxic effects}, it has not been possible to (ii) Selective treatment
prevent the spread of filariasis by the administration of DEC
alone. Chemotherapy must, therefore, be supplemented by DEC is given only to those who are Mf positive. It is
an effective vector control programme, if the disease generally accepted that selective treatment may be more
transmission has to be effectively prevented. suitable in areas of low endemicity than in highly endemic
areas.
1. Chemotherapy In· India the current strategy is based on detection and
treatment of human carriers and filaria cases. The
a. Diethylcarbamazine recommended dose in the Indian programme is 6 mg DEC
Diethylcarbamazine {DEC) is both safe and effective. The per kg of body weight daily for 12 doses, to be completed in
dose of DEC that is most generally accepted for the 2 weeks (i.e., 6 days in a week). In endemic areas, treatment
treatment of Bancroftian filariasis is 6 mg/kg body weight per must be repeated at specified intervals, usually every 2
day orally for 12 days, given preferably in divided doses years. This is partly because, despite remarkable
after meals. This amounts to a total of 72 mg of DEC per kg antimicrofilarial properties, expected microfilaria clearance
of body weight as a full treatment. For Brugian filariasis, with DEC is incomplete at times even after adequate
recommended doses range from 3 to 6 mg of DEC/kg body treatment (18). The other reason is that people living in
weight per day, up to a total dose of 36-72 mg DEC/kg body endemic areas are exposed to reinfection.
weight as a full treatment (13).
DEC is rapidly absorbed after oral administration, (iii) DEC-medicated salt
reaching peak blood levels in 1-2 hours. It is also rapidly The use of DEC-medicated salt is a special form of mass
excreted the blood half-life is only 2-3 hours in alkaline treatment using very low doses of the drug over a long
urine and about 10-20 hours in acid urine. period of time. Common salt medicated with 1-4 g of DEC
DEC causes rapid disappearance of Mf from the per kg has been used for filariasis control in some endemic
LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS
areas of W. bancrofti and B. malayi, particularly after an vector mosquito has developed resistance to many of these
initial reduction in prevalence has been achieved by mass or chemicals. The frequency of application is once weekly on
selective treatment of Mf carriers. Treatment should be all breeding places.
continued for at least 6 to 9 months. In the Lakshadweep (2) REMOVAL OF PISTIA PLANT : In the case of
islands, this regimen has been shown to be safe, cheap and Mansonia mosquitoes, breeding is best controlled by
effective (13). removing the supporting aquatic vegetation such as the
The combination of the long life of the adult parasite for pistia plant from all water collections and converting the
several years and infectiousness of a patient with low ponds to fish or lotus c,:ulture. Alternatively, certain
parasitaemia represents a serious obstacle to control herbicides such as phenoxylene 30 or Shell Weed Killer D
programmes based on chemotherapy alone (19). may be used for destroying the aquatic vegetation.
(3) MINOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES : Larvicidal
c. Ivermectin operations are complemented by minor engineering
Ivermectin is a semisynthetic macrolide antibiotic with a operations such as filling up of ditches and cesspools,
broad spectrum of activity against a variety of nematodes drainage of stagnant water, adequate maintenance of septic
and ectoparasites. The dose is 150-200 µg/kg of body tanks and soakage pits, etc. Environmental management is
weight the most efficient approach to the problem of controlling
Ivermectin is not used in India. It is used in the region of mosquito breeding.
Africa.
II. Anti-adult measures
There is no drug toxicity in normal persons. However, in
The vector mosquitoes of filariasis have become resistant
microfilaraemic patients there may be a variety of reactions
to DDT, HCH and dieldrin. The use of these compounds for
as a result of inflammatory response triggered by the cleared
indoor residual spraying, tried earlier, has been
and dying microfilariae. discontinued. Pyrethrum, as a space spray, still holds
promise. It is useful as a temporary means of personal
2. Vector control
protection, but has no practical value in present-day vector
Where mass treatment with DEC is impracticable, the control programmes.
control of filariasis must depend upon vector control. Vector
control may also be beneficial when used in conjunction Ill. Personal prophylaxis
with mass treatment. The most important element in vector The most effective preventive measure is avoidance of
control is the reduction of the target mosquito population in mosquito bites (reduction of man-mosquito contact) by
order to stop or reduce transmission quickly. The techniques using mosquito nets. Screening of. houses can substantially
for controlling mosquitoes are given in chapter 12. Briefly reduce transmission, but it is expensive.
they are:
Integrated vector control
I. Antilarval measures
None of the above vector control measures applied alone
The ideal method of vector control would be elimination is likely to bring about sustained control of filariasis vectors.
of breeding places by providing adequate sanitation and An integrated or combined approach is needed to control
underground waste-water disposal system. This involves filariasis using all the above strategies and approaches in
considerable expenditure amounting to several crores of optimum combination.
rupees. Because of financial constraints, this may not be
In filariasis four major breakthroughs have occurred. The
feasible in developing countries such as India in the near
first of these is the development of safe, single dose, annual
future. For the time being, therefore, vector control must be
drug treatment. Trials have proved that a single dose of DEC is
based on temporary or recurrent methods.
very effective even two years after treatment. A single dose of
The current approach in India is to restrict the antilarval ivermectin has proved to be equally effective.
measures to urban areas, because it is operationally difficult A combination of single dose of both drugs reduced
and very costly to cover the vast rural areas of the country. microfilaraemia more than 95 per cent, 2 years after
The urban areas include an extra 3-km peripheral belt treatment. Secondly, intensive local hygiene on the affected
because the flight range of Cu/ex quinquefasciatus limb, with or without the use of antibiotic and antifungal
(C. fatigans) is about 3 km. creams, has shown to have dramatic effects by halting the
The anti-larval activities comprise the following (20). progression of, or even reversing elephantiasis and
(1) CHEMICAL CONTROL : (a) Mosquito larvicidal oil: lymphoedema. Thirdly, DEC-medicated tablet or cooking salt
Mosquito larvicidal oil (MLO) is active against all preadult has been introduced in India. The carefully controlled
stages. It has. been the main chemical used to control addition of very low concentration of DEC has long been
C. quinquefasciatus for some time. Since it has proved to be recognized as an effective means of eliminating lymphatic
less efficient under field conditions and more expensive than filariasis infections in communities. However, the addition
other chemical preparations, it is being replaced by increases the price of the salt. During 1994, the first
pyrethrum oil, temephos and fenthion. (b) Pyrosene oil- E : commercially prepared DEC salt went on sale in India, at
This is a pyrethrum-based emulsifiable larvicide. The about twice the price of ordinary salt. Finally, there has been
emulsion concentrate contains 0.1 to 0.2 per cent pyrethrins the development of insecticide sprays and polystyrene beads
by weight and is required to be diluted with water before to seal latrines and roof-top water-storage tanks, to eliminate
use. The emulsion is diluted in the ratio of 1 :4, or reduce populations of urban Culex mosquitoes (21).
(c) Organophosphorus larvicides : During the past 10 years,
organophosphorus larvicides (e.g., temephos, fenthion) National Filaria Control Programme
have been widely used with successful results. However, the See chapter 7, page 421 for details.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Malta, New Zealand, the U.K. and the islands of Western A "fixed" strain of virus may be defined as one that has a
Pacific are all free of the disease. The Liberian peninsula and short, fixed and reproducible incubation period (4-6 days)
Finland, Norway and Sweden are also rabies free (1). In when injected intracerebrally into suitable animals. It does
India, Union Territory of Lakshadweep and Andman and not form Negri bodies. It no longer multiplies in extra-neural
Nicobar islands are free of the disease (2). A "Rabies-free" tissues. The fixed virus is used in the preparation of
area has been defined as one in which no case of antirabies vaccine. There is evidence that fixed virus can be
indigenously acquired rabies has occurred in man or any pathogenic for humans and mammals under certain
animal species for 2 years (3). According to WHO reports, in conditions, as for example parenteral injection of antirabies
many countries rabies is spreading inspite of great advances vaccine inadequately inactivated (7).
in research and field control methods. SOURCE OF INFECTION : The source of infection to
Rabies occurs in more than 150 countries and territories. man is the saliva of rabid animals. In dogs and cats, the virus
Although a number of carnivorous and bat species serve as may be present in the saliva for 3-4 days (occasionally 5-6
natural reservoir, rabies in dogs is the source of 99 per cent days) before the onset of clinical symptoms and during the
of human infection, and posses a potential threat to more course of illness till death (9, 10).
than 3.3 billion people.
Host factors
Iri a number of countries, human deaths from rabies are
likely to be grossly underreported, particularly in the All warm blooded animals including man are susceptible
youngest are groups. Vast majority of the estimated 55,000 to rabies. Rabies in man is a dead-end infection, and has no
deaths caused by rabies each year occur in rural areas of survival value for the virus. The overwhelming number of
Africa and Asia. In India alone, 20,000 deaths (that is, about victims in India belong to the age group 1-24 years (2).
2 per lac population at risk) are estimated to occur annually; Laboratory staff working with rabies virus, veterinarians,
in Africa, the corresponding figure is 24,000 (about 4 per lac dog handlers, hunters and field naturalists face bigger risks
population at risk) (4). of rabies than do general public.
Although all age groups are susceptible, rabies is most Mode of transmission (11)
common in children aged less than 15 years; on an average,
40 per cent of post-exposure immunization are given to People are infected following a deep bite or scratch by an
children aged 5-14 years, and the majority of those infected animal. Dogs are the main host and transmitter of
immunized are male. In the north-western part of the United rabies. They are the source of infection in almost all the
Republic of Tanzania, the incidence of rabies was upto 5 rabies deaths annually in Asia and Africa.
times higher in children aged less than 15 years than in Bats are the source of most human rabies deaths in the
adults (4). At the global level, more than 15 million people United States of America and Canada. Bat rabies has also
receive rabies prophylaxis annually, the majority of whom recently emerged as a public health threat in Australia, Latin
live in China and India. It is estimated that in the absence of America and western Europe. However in these regions the
post-exposure prophylaxis, about 327,000 persons would number of human deaths due to bat rabies remains small
die from rabies in Africa and Asia each year (4). compared to deaths following· dog bites. Human deaths
following exposure to foxes, raccoons, skunks, jackals,
Epidemiological determinants mongooses and other wild carnivore host species are very
Agent factors rare.
Transmission can also occur when infectious material -
AGENT : The causative agent (Lyssavirus type 1) is a
usually saliva - comes into direct contact with human mucosa
bullet shaped neurotropic RNA containing virus. It belongs
or fresh skin wounds. Human-to-human transmission by bite
to the family rhabdoviridae - serotype 1 (Lyssavirus, type 1)
is theoretically possible but has never been confirmed.
and is the causative agent of rabies. Serotype 2, 3 and 4 are
rabies-related but antigenically distinct viruses; they cause Rarely, rabies may be contracted by inhalation of virus-
rabies like disease in man and animals (5). Available anti- containing aerosol or via transplantation of an infected
rabies vaccines may not be effective against the rabies- organ. Ingestion of raw meat or other tissues from animals
related viruses (6). infected with rabies is not a source of human infection.
Rabies virus particles contain two distinct, major
Incubation period
antigens : a glycoprotein (G protein) antigen from the virus
membrane and an internal nucleoprotein antigen. The The incubation period in man is highly variable,
glycoprotein seems to be the only antigen capable of commonly 1-3 months following exposure but may vary
inducing the formation of virus-neutralizing antibodies (7). from 7 days to many years (4). The incubation period
The presence of neutralizing antibodies in the blood of man depends on the site of the bite, severity of the bite, number
and animals is considered an index of protection against of wounds, amount of virus injected, species of the biting
infection with rabies virus (8). Recently, surface glycoprotein animal, protection provided by the clothing and treatment
of rabies virus has been cloned and expressed in E. coli in a undertaken, if any. In general, incubation period tends to be
bid to develop genetically engineered rabies vaccine. shorter in severe exposures and bites on face, head, neck
The virus is excreted in the saliva of the affected animals. and upper extremities and bites by wild animals. In no other
The virus recovered from naturally occurring cases of rabies specific communicable disease is the incubation period so
is called "street virus". It is pathogenic for all mammals and variable and dependant on so many factors as in rabies.
shows a long variable incubation period (20-60 days in
dogs). Serial brain-to-brain passage of the street virus in
Pathogenesis
rabbits modifies the virus such that its incubation period is Rabies virus replicates in muscle or connective tissue cells
progressively reduced until it becomes constant between at or near the site of introduction before it attaches to nerve
4-6 days. Virus isolated at this stage is called a fixed virus. endings and enters peripheral nerves. It spreads from the
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
site of infection centripetally via the peripheral nerves be given repeatedly. The drug is well tolerated and once the
towards the central nervous system; most likely it "ascends" diagnosis is established there appears to be no reason to
passively through the nerve associated tissue space (7). restrict the administration of a drug which does so much to
Following infection of the central nervous system, the virus allay acute suffering. (c) If spastic muscular contractions are
spreads centrifugally in peripheral nerves to many tissues, present use drugs with curare-like action. (d) Ensure
including skeletal and myocardial muscle, adrenal glands hydration and diuresis. (e) Intensive therapy in the form of
and skin. The salivary glands invasion is crucial for the respiratory and cardiac support may be given.
transmission of the virus to another animal or human (5). Patients with rabies are potentially infectious because the
virus may be present in the saliva, vomits, tears, urine or
RABIES IN MAN other body fluids. Nursing personnel attending rabid
Clinical picture patients should be warned against possible risk of
contamination and should wear face masks, gloves, goggles
Rabies in man is called hydrophobia. The disease begins and aprons to protect themselves. Persons having bruises,
with prodromal symptoms such as headache, malaise, sore cuts or open wounds should not be entrusted to look after
throat and slight fever lasting for 3-4 days. About 80% of the patient. Where human cases of rabies are encountered
patients complain of pain or tingling at the site of the bite. frequently pre-exposure prophylaxis is recommended.
·This is the only prodromal symptom which is considered
reasonably specific (12).
PREVENTION OF HUMAN RABIES
The prodromal stage is followed by widespread excitation
and stimulation of all parts of nervous system usually This may be considered under 3 heads.
involving, in order, the sensory system, the motor system,
the sympathetic and mental system. The patient is intolerant a. Post-exposure prophylaxis.
to noise, bright light or a cold draught of air (sensory). b. Pre-exposure prophylaxis.
Aerophobia (fear of air) may be present and is considered c. Post-exposure treatment of persons who have been
by some to be pathognomonic of rabies (13). It can be vaccinated previously.
elicited by fanning a current of air across the face which
causes violent spasms of the pharyngeal and neck muscles.
Examination may show increased reflexes and muscle POST-EXPOSURE PROPHYLAXIS
spasms (motor) along with dilatation of the pupils and
increased perspiration, salivation and lachrimation 1. General consideration
(sympathetic). Mental changes include fear of death, anger,
irritability and depression. The vast majority of persons requ1rmg anti-rabies
treatment are those who were bitten by a suspected rabid
The symptoms are progressively aggravated and all animal. The aim of post-exposure prophylaxis is to
attempts at swallowing liquid become unsuccessful. At later neutralize the inoculated virus before it can enter the
stage the mere sight or sound of water may provoke spasm nervous system. Every instance of human exposure should
of the muscles of deglutition. This characteristic symptom of be treated as a medical emergency. It is now well established
hydrophobia (fear of water) is pathognomonic of rabies and that irrespective of the class of wound, the combined
is absent in animals. The duration of illness is 2 to 3 days, administration of a single dose of rabies immunoglobulin if
but may be prolonged to 5-6 days in exceptional cases. The indicated with a course of vaccine, together with local
patient may die abruptly during one of the convulsions or treatment of the wound is the best specific prophylactic
may pass on to the stage of paralysis and coma. Intensive treatment after exposure of man to rabies.
care may allow an occasional patient to survive (10).
To-date, only three people are on record who have been 2. Local treatment of wound
stricken with rabies and have survived (1).
Prompt and adequate local treatment of all bite wounds
Diagnosis and scratches is the first requisite and is of utmost
importance. The purpose of local treatment is to remove as
A clinical diagnosis of hydrophobia can be made on the much virus as possible from the site of inoculation before it
basis of history of bite by a rabid animal and characteristic can be absorbed on nerve endings. Local treatment of
signs and symptoms. wounds is of maximal value when applied immediately after
Rabies can be confirmed in patients early in the illness by exposure (within minutes if possible) but it should not be
antigen detection using immunofluorescence of skin biopsy, neglected if several hours or days have elapsed (3). Animal
and by virus isolation from saliva and other secretions. experiments have shown that local wound treatment can
Immunofluorescence of corneal impression smears has reduce the chances of developing rabies by upto 80% (6).
proved unreliable. Neutralizing antibodies are not usually The local treatment comprises the following measures :
detectable in serum or CSF before the eighth day (5).
(a) Cleansing : Immediate flushing and washing the
Treatment wound(s), scratches and the adjoining areas with plenty of
soap and water, preferably under a running tap, for at least
There is no specific treatment for rabies. Case 15 minutes is of paramount importance in the prevention of
management includes the following procedure : human rabies. If soap is not available, simple flushing of the
(a) The patient should be isolated in a quiet room wounds with plenty of water should be done as first-aid.
protected as far as possible from external stimuli such as In case of punctured wounds, catheters, should be used
bright light, noise or cold draughts which may precipitate to irrigate the wounds. This procedure is now standard
spasms or convulsions. (b) Relieve anxiety and pain by worldwide. It does minimize the risk of contracting rabies.
liberal use of sedatives. Morphia in doses of 30-45 mg may Unfortunately, very few patients get it in right time.
RABIES
(b) Chemical treatment : Whatever residual virus All category II and III exposures assessed as carrying
remains in the wound(s), after cleansing, should be a risk of developing rabies require PEP This risk is increased
inactivated by irrigation with virucidal agents either alcohol if (11):
(400-700 ml/litre), tincture or 0.01 % aqueous solution of the biting mammal is a known rabies reservoir or vector
iodine or povidone iodine. species;
(c) Suturing : Bite wounds should not be immediately the animal looks sick or has an abnormal behaviour;
sutured to prevent additional trauma which may help spread a wound or mucous membrane was contaminated by the
the virus into deeper tissues. If suturing is necessary, it should animal's saliva;
be done 24-48 hours later, applying minimum possible - the bite was unprovoked;
stitches, under the cover of rabies immunoglobulin locally. the animal has not been vaccinated; and
(d) Antibiotics and anti-tetanus measure: The application if biting animal cannot be traced or identified.
of antibiotics and antitetanus procedures when indicated In developing countries, the vaccination status of the
should follow the local treatment recommended above. suspected animal alone should not be considered when
deciding whether to initiate prophylaxis or not.
3. Immunization
Post-exposure prophylaxis may be discontinued if the
Since their development more than four decades ago, suspected animal is proved by appropriate laboratory
concentrated and purified· cell-culture vaccine (CCV) and examination to be free of rabies or, in the case of domestic
embryonated egg-based vaccine (EEV) have proved to be dogs, cats or ferrets, the animal remains healthy throughout
safe and effective in preventing rabies. These vaccines are a 10 day observation period starting from the date of the
intended for pre-exposure as well as post-exposure bite (4).
prophylaxis.
The internationally available cell-culture and Intramuscular administration of vaccine for
embryonated egg-based vaccines (CCEEVs) consist of rabies post-exposure prophylaxis
virus that has been propagated in cell substrates such as The post-exposure vaccination schedule is based on
human diploid cells (embryonic fibroblast cells), fetal rhesus injecting 1 ml or 0.5 ml (the volume depends on the type of
diploid cells, Vero cells (kidney cells from the African green vaccine) into the deltoid muscle (or anterolateral thigh in
monkey), primary Syrian hamster kidney cells, primary children aged <2 years) of patients with category II and III
chick embryo cells or in embryonated duck eggs. The more exposures. The recommended regimen consists of either a
recently developed vaccines based on chick embryo cells 5-dose or a 4-dose schedule:
and Vero cells have safety and efficacy records comparable
to those of the human diploid cell vaccines and are less (i) Essen regimen: the 5-dose regimen prescribes 1 dose on
expensive (4). each of days 0, 3, 7, 14, and 28; as shown below
Rabies vaccines prequalified by WHO do not contain Dose: one IM dose (1.0 or 0.5 ml) into deltoid (or thigh)
preservatives such as thimerosal. The shelf-life of these Day 0 3 7 14 28
vaccines is ;;:: 3 years, provided they are stored at +2°C to
+8°C and protected from sunlight. Following reconstitution
with the accompanying sterile diluent, the vaccines should
1l l l 5 vials
t!'-----"'-----'"'------""------- 5 visits
l
be used immediately, or within 6-8 hours if kept at the Rabies immunoglobulin
correct temperature.
(ii) Zareb regimen: the 4-dose abbreviated multisite regimen
All CCEEVs should comply with the WHO recommended
prescribes 2 doses on day 0 (1 in each of the 2 deltoid or
potency of;;:: 2.5 IU per single intramuscular dose (0.5 ml or
thigh sites) followed by 1 dose on each of days 7 and 21,
1.0 ml volume after reconstitution, depending on the type of
as shown below.
vaccine).
The guidelines for the post-exposure treatment by the Abbreviated multisite intrmuscular regimen (2-1-1)
WHO are given in Table 1. Dose : one IM dose (LO or 0.5 ml) into deltoid (or thigh)
Day 0 7 21
TABLE 1 Sites X2 Xl Xl
Rabies immunoglobulin
Categories of contact with Post-exposure prophylaxis
su'spectrabidanimal · . measures An alternative for healthy, fully immunocompetent,
Category I - touching or feeding None exposed people who receive wound care plus high quality
animals, licks on intact skin rabies immunoglobulin plus WHO prequalified rabies
Category II - nibbling of uncovered Immediate vaccination and vaccines, is a post-exposure regimen consisting of 4 doses
skin, minor scratches or abrasions local treatment of the wound administered intramuscularly on days 0, 3, 7 and 14.
without bleeding
Category III - single or multiple Immediate vaccination and Intradermal administration for post-exposure
transdermal bites or scratches, administration of rabies prophylaxis
licks on broken skin; contamination immunoglobulin; local
of mucous membrane with saliva treatment of the wound
The 2-site regimen prescribes injection of 0 .1 ml at 2 sites
from licks, contacts with bats. (deltoid or thigh) on days 0, 3, 7 and 28. The day 14 dose is
missed. This regimen may be used for people with category
Source: (11) II and III exposures in countries where the intradermal route
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
has been endorsed by national health authorities. The treating physician should be prepared to manage
regimen is as shown below: anaphylaxis which, although rare, could occur during any
stage of administration (14).
2-site intradermal regimen (2+2+2+0+2)
Dose : one JD dose one fifth of IM dose (0.1 ml) ID per site Guide for pre-exposure prophylaxis (PrEP) (14)
Day 0 3 7 28 PrEP may be performed with any of the modern cell-
Sites
!l
X2 X2 X2 X2 derived vaccines and is recommended for anyone at
l l <Nal•
4 visits
increased risk of exposure to rabies virus. Traditionally, PrEP
is recommended for anyone who is at continual, frequent or
increased risk of exposure to the rabies virus either as a
Rabies immunoglobulin result of their residence or occupation (for example
laboratory workers dealing with rabies virus and other
Post-exposure prophylaxis for previously vaccinated lyssaviruses, veterinarians and animal handlers). Travellers
individuals with extensive outdoor exposure and children living in rural
high-risk areas are at particular risk.
For rabies-exposed patients who can document previous
complete pre-exposure vaccination or complete post- PrEP schedule requires intramuscular doses of lml or
exposure prophylaxis with a CCEEV, 1 dose delivered 0.5 ml, depending on the vaccine type, or intradermal
intramuscularly or a CVV delivered intradermally on days 0 administration of 0.1 ml volume per site (one site each day)
and 3 is sufficient. Rabies immunoglobulin is not indicated given on days 0, 7 and 21 or 28. To lead to significant
in such cases. This 1-site 2-day intradermal or intramuscular savings, intradermal PrEP sessions should involve enough
regimen also applies to people vaccinated against rabies individuals to utilize all opened vials within 6-8 hours.
who have demonstrated rabies-virus neutralizing antibody Booster doses of rabies vaccines are not required for
titres of ;:>:0.5 IU/ml . As an alternative to this regimen, the individuals living in or travelling to high-risk areas who have
patient may be offered a single-visit 4-site intradermal received a complete primary series of pre-exposure or post-
regimen consisting of 4 injections of 0.1 ml equally exposure prophylaxis with a CCV. Periodic booster injections
distributed over left and right deltoids or thighs. Vaccination are recommended as an extra precaution only for people
cards recording previous immunizations are invaluable for whose occupation puts them at continual or frequent risk of
making correct decisions. exposure. If available, antibody monitoring of personnel at
risk is preferred to the administration of routine boosters.
Immunization of immunocompromised individuals For people who are potentially at risk of laboratory exposure
In immunocompromised individuals including patients to high concentrations of live rabies virus, antibody testing
with HIV/AIDS, a complete series of 5 doses of should be done every 6 months. Those professionals who
intramuscular CCEEV in combination with comprehensive are not at continual risk of exposure through their activities,
wound management and local infiltration with human rabies such as certain categories of veterinarians and animal health
immunoglobulin is required for patients with category II and officers, should have serological monitoring every 2 years.
III exposures. When feasible, the rabies-virus neutralizing Because vaccine-induced immunity persists in most cases for
antibody response should be determined 2-4 weeks years, a booster would be recommended only if rabies virus
following vaccination to assess the possible need for an neutralizing antibody titres fall to <0.5 IU/ml.
additional dose of the vaccine.
Adverse events following immunization (4)
Rabies immunoglobulin for passive immunization In general, CCEEVs have been shown to be safe and well
Rabies immunoglobulin for passive immunization is tolerated. However, in 35-45% of vaccinees, minor and
administered only once, preferably at, or as soon as possible transient erythema, pain and/or swelling may occur at the
after, the initiation of post-exposure vaccination. Beyond the site of injection, particularly following intradermal
seventh day after the first dose, rabies immunoglobulin is administration of a booster. Mild systemic adverse events
not indicated because an active antibody response to the following immunization (AEFI), such as transient fever,
CCEEV is presumed to have occurred. The dose of human headache, dizziness and gastrointestinal symptoms, have
rabies immunoglobulin is 20 IU/kg body weight; for equine been observed in 5-15 % of vaccinees.
immunoglobulin and F (ab')2 products, it is 40 IU/kg body
weight. All of the rabies immunoglobulin, or as much as Contraindications and precautions (4)
anatomically possible (but avoiding possible compartment For pre-exposure prophylaxis, previous severe reaction to
syndrome), should be administered into or around the any components of the vaccine is a contraindication to
wound site or sites. The remaining immunoglobulin, if any, further use of the same vaccine. Because rabies is a lethal
should be injected intramuscularly at a site distant from the disease, no contraindications exist to post-exposure
site of vaccine administration. Rabies immunoglobulin may prophylaxis following high-risk exposure. This is also the
be diluted to a volume sufficient for all wounds to be case for post-exposure prophylaxis during infancy or
effectively and safely infiltrated. pregnancy, and for immunocompromised individuals,
Most of the new equine immunoglobulin preparations are including children with HIV/AIDS. People taking chloroquine
potent, highly purified, safe and considerably less expensive for malaria treatment or prophylaxis may have a reduced
than human rabies immunoglobulin. However they are of response to intradermal rabies vaccination. These patients
heterologous origin and carry a small risk of anaphylactic should receive the vaccine intramu·scularly.
reaction (1/45,000 cases). There are no scientific grounds
for performing a skin test prior to administering equine NERVOUS TISSUE VACCINES
immunoglobulin because testing does not predict reactions, Nervous tissue vaccines are crude products capable of
and it should be given whatever the result of the test. The causing severe and even fatal reactions. Although apparently
RABIES
effective, they are generally of low or variable potency and microscopic examination of brain tissue for Negri bodies is
are usually administered to exposed subjects in a large still a useful method for rapid diagnosis of rabies. The
number of doses. The current trend is to limit or abandon microscopic examination for Negri bodies identifies 75-90%
completely the production of nervous tissue vaccines and of cases of rabies in dogs. (c) MOUSE INOCULATION
replace them by safer and more effective inactivated cell- TEST : Intracerebral mouse inoculation is still one of the
culture vaccines in both developed and developing most useful tests in the laboratory diagnosis of rabies.
countries. Government of India has stopped producing Suckling mice are generally more sensitive for virus
nervous tissue vaccine since 2004. isolation. A 103 emulsion of suspected brain tissue is
prepared in normal saline and centrifuged at 2000 r.p.m. for
RABIES IN DOGS 5-10 minutes. 0.03 ml of the supernatant fluid is injected
intracerebrally using a tuberculin syringe into at least 4 mice.
In developing countries over 903 of human deaths from If Infected they show signs of rabies between 6-8 days. The
rabies are caused by dog bites and dog rabies control is the virus can be identified by the FRA test or by the presence of
key that can lock the door against human rabies. Negri bodies. (d) CORNEAL TEST : Rabies virus antigen
can be detected in live animals in corneal impressions or in
INCUBATIONPERIOD
frozen sections of skin biopsies by the FRA test. A positive
The incubation period in dogs ranges from 3-8 weeks, result is indicative of rabies, but a negative result does not
but it may be as short as 10 days or as long as a year or rule out the possibility of infection (3).
more (15).
Immunization of dogs
CLINICAL PICTURE Prophylactic vaccination of dogs against rabies is one of
Rabies in dogs may manifest itself in two forms Furious the most important weapons in rabies control (7). Studies
rabies and Dumb rabies. · have shown that, in general, 80-90% of the dog population
(a) Furious rabies : This is the typical "mad-dog is accessible for vaccination, thus confirming that the
syndrome", characterized by (i) a change in behaviour : In concept of controlling rabies through mass vaccination is a
animals, the cardinal sign is a change in behaviour. The sound one (19). All dogs should receive primary
animal loses its fear of people, becomes very aggressive, immunization at the age of 3-4 months and booster doses
bites without provocation and bites unusual objects like should be given at regular intervals, according to the type of
sticks, straw and mud {ii) running amuck: i.e., tendency to vaccine used.
run away from home and wander aimlessly and biting (1) BPL inactivated nervous tissue vaccine (Single dose) :
humans and animals who may come in its way {iii) change This is based on 20% suspension of infected sheep brain.
in voice : i.e., the dog barks or growls in a hoarse voice or The dose is 5 ml for dogs and 3 ml for cats. Revaccination is
often unable to bark because of paralysis of laryngeal advised after 6 months, and subsequently every year.
muscles (iv) excessive salivation and foaming at the angle of (2) Modified live virus vaccine : This is based on 33%
the mouth, and (v) Paralytic stage : The animal enters into a
chick embryo suspension infected with modified virus. The
paralytic stage, towards the later stages of illness. There is
dose is 3 ml by single injection, and boosters every 3 years.
paralysis of the whole body leading to coma and death. As with the vaccines for human use, the adult-brain vaccines
(b) Dumb rabies : In this type, the excitative or irritative for use in animals should be replaced as soon as possible by
stage is lacking. The disease is predominantly paralytic. The cell-culture vaccines (20).
dog withdraws itself from being seen or disturbed. It lapses
in to a stage of sleepiness and dies in about 3 days. Control of urban rabies
Once the symptoms of rabies develop in an animal, it Since dog is the major source of infection, the most
rarely survives more than a week (16). logical and cost-effective approach is elimination of stray
and ownerless dogs combined with a programme of swift
LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS mass immunization, in the shortest possible time, of at least
The head of the animal is cut off and sent to the nearest 80% of the entire dog population of the area.
testing laboratory, duly packed in ice in an airtight Other methods include (i) registration and licensing of all
container. Alternatively, the brain may be removed with domestic dogs (ii) restraint of dogs in public places
anti-septic precautions and sent in 50% glycerol-saline for (iii) immediate destruction of dogs and cats bitten by rabid
examination (17). This should be done by a qualified or animals (iv) quarantine for about 6 months of imported dogs
trained person soon after the death of the animal. and (v) health education of people regarding the care of
Laboratory examination is made by : (a) FLUORESCENT dogs and prevention of rabies.
ANTIBODY TEST : This is a highly reliable and the best The discovery that foxes could be immunized against
single test currently available for the rapid diagnosis of rabies by placing modified live virus vaccine directly into the
rabies viral antigen in infected specimens. This test can mouths has generated a new control technique. So far no
establish a highly specific diagnosis within a few hours (3). suitable oral bait is developed for use in dogs (1).
The accuracy of the test is considered equal to that of
isolation of the virus by animal inoculation. If the brain is Oral vaccines
negative by FRA test, one can assume that the saliva The successful introduction of oral vaccines for the
contains no virus, and the bitten person need not be treated. immunization of foxes is a great advancement in the rabies
Further, fluorescent antibody titres in clinical rabies have prophylaxis of wild life. An attempted live rabies vaccine
been well in excess of 1:10,000 a feature which helps to harmless but immunizing .to foxes, is placed in baits and
distinguish between rabies and vaccine reaction (18). distributed over the foxes habitat. Successful control of wild
(b) MICROSCOPIC EXAMINATION: Although FRA test has animal's rabies particularly foxes has been achieved in
largely supplanted other methods of diagnosis, the Canada, Germany and Switzerland by the use of "oral
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
vaccine baits." The technique holds much promise for the formerly classified as a group B arbovirus, is a member of
future control of rabies not only in foxes but also in other wild the togavirus family. It shares group-specific antigens with
life species. other members of the genus (e.g., West Nile, dengue). Under
natural conditions, the virus is pantropic but after continued
References culture in tissues, as in chick embryo, it loses all its
1. Debbie, J.G. (1988). W.H. forum, 9 (4) 536. pathogenic properties but retains its antigenicity.
2. Sehgal and R Bhatia (1985) rabies : Current status and proposed (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : In forest areas, the
control programmes in India, NICD, 22 Shamnath Marg, Delhi - 54. reservoir of infection is mainly monkeys and forest
3. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep. Ser. No.709. mosquitoes. In urban areas, the reservoir is man (subclinical
4. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 32, 6th Aug., 2010. and clinical cases) besides Aedes aegypti mosquitoes.
5. Warrell, D.A., and M.J. Warell (1988) Medicine International 53: 2194 (c) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY : (i) MAN : Blood of
May 1988. patients is infective during the first 3 to 4 days of illness.
6. Molyneux M.E. {1985) Medicine Digest 11 (4) 5; York house, 37 Queen (ii) MOSQUITOES: After an "extrinsic incubation period" of
square London, U.K.
7. WHO (1973) Techn. Rep. Ser. No. 523.
8 to 12 days, the mosquito becomes infective. The virus
8. J.B. Campbell, et al (1968). Bull WHO, 38: 373. multiplies in the insect vector. After becoming infective, the
9. Christie, A.B. (1980). Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology and Clinical mosquito remains so for life. Transovarian transmission of
Practice, Churchill Livingstone. the virus in mosquitoes has been shown to occur in adverse
10. Vaughn, J.B. et al (1965). JAMA, 193: 363. conditions (e.g., during extended dry seasons), in the
11. WHO (2012), Rabies Fact Sheet No. 99, Sept2012. absence of susceptible hosts (1).
12. Warrel, D.A. (1976). Tr. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg. 70: 188.
13. Plokin, S.A. (1979) in Nelson's Textbook of Paediatrics, 11th ed, Host factors
Saunders.
(a) AGE AND SEX : All ages and both sexes are
14. WHO (2010), Current strategies for human rabies pre and post-
exposure prophylaxis, 3rd Sept, 2010. susceptible to yellow fever in the absence of immunity
15. Kaplan, M.M. and Koprowski, H. (1980). Sci American, 242 (1) 120. (b) OCCUPATION : Persons whose occupation brings them
16. Central Research Institute, Kasauli (1979) Principles and Practice of in contact with forests (wood cutters, hunters) where yellow
Antirabic Treatment and Control of Rabies, Govt. of India. fever is endemic are exposed to the risk of infection
17. Fischman, H.R. (1980) in Maxcy-Rosenau : Public Health and (c) IMMUNITY : One attack of yellow fever gives lifelong
Preventive Medicine, 11th ed, Appleton Century Crofts, New York. immunity; second attacks are unknown. Infants born of
18. WHO (1975) WklyEpi Rec. No.33. immune mothers have antibodies up to 6 months of life.
19. The work of WHO 1986-87 P 176.
20. Bull WHO (1985) 63 (4) 661. Environmental factors
(a) CLIMATE : A temperature of 24 deg.C or over is
YELLOW FEVER. I r:equired for the multiplication of the virus in the mosquito. It
should be accompanied by a relative humidity of over 60 per
Yellow fever is a zoonotic disease caused by an arbovirus. cent for the mosquitoes to live long enough to convey the
It affects principally monkeys and other vertebrates in disease. (b) SOCIAL FACTORS : In Africa, urbanization is
tropical America and Africa and is transmitted to man by leading to the extension of yellow fever. In addition, the
certain culicine mosquitoes. It shares clinical features with expanding population is encroaching on areas that were
other viral haemorrhagic fevers (e.g., dengue HF, Lassa previously sparsely populated, thereby bringing man closer to·
fever) but is characterized by more severe hepatic and renal the jungle cycles of yellow fever. The increasing number of
involvement. The spectrum of disease varies from clinically people who travel and the greater speed with which they are
indeterminate to severe cases. Severe cases develop transported from endemic areas to receptive areas, also gives
jaundice with haemorrhagic manifestations (black vomit, a cause for concern (3).
epistaxis, melena) and albuminuria or anuria, shock,
agitation, stupor and coma (1). In general death occurs Modes of transmission
between the fifth and tenth day of illness. The case fatality
rate may reach 80 per cent in severe cases. Survivors exhibit There are three known cycles of transmission, the jungle,
long-lasting immunity. intermediate and the urban cycles (2).
- Sylvatic (or jungle) yellow fever. In tropical rainforests,
Problem statement yellow fever occurs in monkeys that are infected by wild
45 countries in Africa and Latin America, with a mosquitoes. The infected monkeys then pass the virus to
combined population of more than 900 million, are at risk of other mosquitoes that feed on them. The infected
yellow fever. In Africa, an estimated 508 million people live mosquitoes bite humans entering the forest, resulting in
in 32 countries at risk. The remaining are in 13 countries of occasional cases of yellow fever. The majority of
Latin America, with Bolivia, Brazil, Colombia, Ecuador and infections·occur in young men working in the forest (e.g.
Peru at greatest risk (2). for logging).
There are an estimated 200,000 cases and 30,000 deaths - Intermediate yellow fever. In humid or semi-humid parts
worldwide each year. Small number of imported cases occur of Africa, small-scale epidemics occur, Semi-domestic
in countries free of yellow fever. Although disease has never mosquitoes (that breed in the wild and around
been reported in Asia, the region is at risk because the households) infect both monkeys and humans. Increased
conditions required for transmission are present there (2). contact between people and infected mosquitoes leads to
transmission. Many separate villages in an area can suffer
Epidemiological determinants cases simultaneously. This is the most common type of
outbreak in Africa. An outbreak can become a more severe
Agent factors epidemic if the infection is carried into an area populated
(a) AGENT : The causative agent, FlaviiJirus fibricus with both domestic mosquitoes and unvaccinated people.
YELLOW FEVER
Urban yellow fever. Large epidemics occur when (2) VECTOR CONTROL : The other principal method of
infected people introduce the virus into densely preventing yellow fever is through intensive vector control.
populated areas with a high number of non-immune The objective of vector control is to reduce rapidly the
people and Aedes mosquitoes. Infected mosquitoes vector population to the lowest possible level and thereby
transmit the virus from person to person. stop or reduce transmission quickly. This approach has
proved successful in the Americas to · prevent urban
Treatment epidemics.
There is no specific treatment for yellow fever, only The vector, Aedes mosquito is peri-domestic in habits. It
supportive care to treat dehydration and fever. Associated can be controlled by vigorous anti-adult and anti-larval
bacterial infections can be treated with antibiotics. measures. The long-term policy should be based on
Supportive care may improve outcomes for seriously ill organized "source reduction" methods (e.g., elimination of
patients, but it is rarely available in poorer areas. breeding places) supported by health education aimed at
securing community participation.
Incubation period
Personal protection against contact with insects is of
3 to 6 days (6 days recognized under International Health
major importance in integrated vector control. Such
Regulations).
protection may include the use of repellents, mosquito nets,
CONTROL OF YELLOW FEVER mosquito coils and fumigation mats (6).
(3) SURVEILLANCE : A programme of surveillance
Jungle yellow fever (clinical, serological, histopathological and entomological)
Jungle yellow fever continues to be an uncontrollable should be instituted in countries where the disease is endemic,
disease. The virus maintains itself in the animal kingdom. for the early detection of the presence of the virus in human
Mosquito control is difficult and can be considered only in populations or in animals that may contribute to its
restricted areas. Vaccination of humans with 170 vaccine is dissemination.
the only control measure. For the surveillance of Aedes mosquitoes, the WHO uses
an index known as Aedes aegypti index. This is a house
Urban yellow fever. index and is defined as "the percentage of houses and their
(1) VACCINATION Rapid immunization of the premises, in a limited well-defined area, showing actual
population at risk is the most effective control strategy for breeding of Aedes aegypti larvae" (7). This index should not
yellow fever. For international use, the approved vaccine is be more than 1 per cent in towns and seaports in endemic
the 17D vaccine. It is a live attenuated vaccine prepared areas to ensure freedom from yellow fever (8).
from a non-virulent strain (170 strain), which is grown in
chick embryo and subsequently freeze-dried. International measures
The sensitivity of the lyophilized 170 vaccine to heat is a India is a yellow fever "receptive" area, that is, "an area in
major drawback to the use of this vaccine, in mass campaigns which yellow fever does not exist, but where conditions
in tropical countries. It has to be stored between +5 and would permit its development if introduced". The population
-30 deg.C, preferably below zero deg. C until reconstituted of India is unvaccinated and susceptible to yellow fever. The
with the sterile, cold physiological saline diluent provided. vector, Aedes aegypti is found in abundance. The climatic
Reconstituted vaccine should be kept on ice, away from conditions are favourable in most parts of India for its
sunlight, and discarded if not used within half an hour. transmission. The common monkey of India (Macacus spp) is
The vaccine is administered subcutaneously at the susceptible to yellow fever. The missing link in the chain of
insertion of deltoid in a single dose of 0.5 ml irrespective of transmission is the virus of yellow fever which does not seem
age. Immunity begins to appear on the 7th day and lasts for to occur in India.
more than 35 years, and possibly for life (2). However, WHO The virus of yellow fever could get imported into India in
recommends revaccination after 10 years for international two ways: (0 through infected travellers (clinical and
travel. subclinical cases), and (ii) through infected mosquitoes.
The risk of death from yellow fever is much higher than Measures designed to restrict the spread of yellow fever are
the risks related to the vaccine. People who should not be specified in the "International Health Regulations" of
vaccinated include (2) : WHO (7). These are implemented by the Government of India
through stringent aerial and maritime traffic regulations.
(a) children aged under 9 months for routine immunization Broadly these comprise :
(or under 6 months during an epidemic);
(i) TRAVELLERS : All travellers (including infants)
(b) pregnant women - except during a yellow fever outbreak exposed to the risk of yellow fever or passing through
when the risk of infection is high; endemic zones of yellow fever must possess a valid
(c) people with severe allergies to egg protein; and international certificate of vaccination against yellow fever
(d) people with severe immunodeficiency caused by before they are allowed to enter yellow fever "receptive"
symptomatic HIV/AIDS or other causes, or in the areas. If no such certificate is available, the traveller is placed
presence of thymus disorder. on quarantine, in a mosquito-proof ward, for 6 days from
Mild post-vaccinial reactions (e.g., myalgia, headache, the date of leaving an infected area. If the traveller arrives
low-grade fever) may occur in 2-5 per cent of vaccinees, 5 before the certificate becomes "valid", he is isolated till the
to 10 days after vaccination. Anaphylaxis is very rare, certificate becomes valid.
occurring mainly in those allergic to eggs (4). (ii) MOSQUITOES : The aircraft and ships arriving from
Cholera and yellow fever vaccines together or within endemic areas are subjected to aerosol spraying with
3 weeks interfere with each other, so whenever possible, prescribed insecticides on arrival for destruction of insect
they should be given 3 weeks or more apart (5). vectors. Further, airports and seaports are kept free from the
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
breeding of insect vectors over an area extending at least problems in both tropical and temperate zones. The number
400 metres around their perimeters. The "aedes aegypti of arboviruses known in India had risen from two (dengue
index" is kept below 1. and sandfly fever) in 1951 to over 40 in 1975 (2).
International certificate of vaccination CLASSIFICATION
India and most other countries require a valid certificate The huge family of heterogeneous arboviruses is divided
of vaccination against yellow fever from travellers coming into no less than 7 major groups, and 18 smaller groups (3) .
. from infected areas. A few countries (including India) require Many remain unclassified. The current trend is to name the
this even if the traveller has been in transit. It rests with each viruses after the places where they were discovered. Some of
country to decide whether a certificate of vaccination the arboviruses known to be prevalent in India are as shown
against yellow fever shall be required for infants under one in Table 1.
year of age, after weighing the risk of importation of yellow
fever by unvaccinated infants against the risk to the infant TABLE 1
arising from vaccination. In this regard, India requires Some Arboviruses known to be prevalent in India
vaccination of infants too (9). The validity of the certificate
Group A OTHERS
begins 10 days after the date of vaccination and extends up
(Alphaviruses) Umbre
to 10 years. Revaccination performed before the end of the
Sindbis Sathuperi
validity of the certificate renders the certificate valid for a Chikungunya Chandipura
further period of 10 years starting on the day of Chittor
revaccination. For the purpose of international travel, the Gan jam
vaccination must be given at an officially designated centre, Group B · Minna!
and the certificate must be validated with the official stamp (Flaviviruses) Venkatapuram
of the Ministry of Health, Government of India. The Dengue Dhori
certificate is valid only if it conforms with the model KFD Kaisodi
prescribed under the International Health Regulations. JE Sandfly fever
On the other hand, for their own protection, travellers who West Nile African Horse sickness
enter endemic areas should receive vaccination against Vellore
yellow fever.
CLINICAL SYNDROMES
Reference centres
Although arboviruses are many, only a small number of
The yellow fever reference centres in India are : (1)
National Institute of Virology, Pune, and (2) Central them are known to be capable of infecting man, and a much
Research Institute, Kasauli. smaller number capable of producing disease. A high
proportion of the infections is inapparent. For convenience,
The international control of yellow fever remains one of three clinical syndromes have been described : (a) FEBRILE
the major medical challenges of the century (10). GROUP : This is the most common group which comprises a
References large number of relatively undifferentiated fevers, generally
benign with or without rashes and joint pains. Viruses
1. WHO (1986). Bull WHO 64 (4) 511-524.
responsible for this group of illness in India are the sindbis,
2. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 5, 29th Jan., 2010.
chikungunya and dengue viruses. (b) HAEMORRHAGIC
3. WHO (1972). WHO. Chr., 26 (2) 60-65.
4. Immunization Practices. Advisory Committee, US countries for
FEVERS : The second group is that of haemorrhagic fevers,
Disease Control (1984) Ann. Int. Med., 100: 540-42. generally associated with moderate or high mortality.
5. Med Digest (1985) Feb. P.29. Viruses responsible for haemorrhagic fevers in India
6. WHO (1985) Tech. Rep. Ser., No. 720 P.31. are the dengue, chikungunya and KFD viruses.
7. WHO (1969). International Health Regulations, Second Annotated (c) ENCEPHALITIDIS : The third group is that of
Edition. encephalitidis or meningoencephalitis which is associated
8. WHO (1971). Tech. Rep. Ser., No.479. with a considerable and sometimes high mortality. The
9. WHO (1982). Vaccination Certificate Requirements for International disease reported now frequently in some parts of India is the
Travel and Health Advice to Travellers, WHO Geneva.
10. Henderson, B.E. et al (1968). Bull WHO 38 · 229-237.
Japanese encephalitis.
1. The dengue syndrome.
OTHER ARBOVIRAL DISEASES This is detailed separately at page 246.
During the past few years, a large number of arthropod- 2. Japanese encephalitis
borne viruses (arboviruses) have been isolated from sick Japanese encephalitis (JE) is a mosquito-borne
persons, animals and arthropods throughout the world. encephalitis caused by a group B arbovirus (Flavivirus) and
Arthropod-borne viruses are defined as viruses "which are transmitted by culicine mosquitoes. It is a zoonotic disease,
maintained in nature principally, or to an important extent i.e., infecting mainly animals and incidentally man. The
through biological transmission between susceptible envelope glycoprotein of the JE virus contains specific as
vertebrate hosts by haematophagous arthropods; they well as cross-reactive, neutralizing epitopes. The major
multiply in the tissues of arthropods, and are passed on to genotypes of this virus have different geographical
new vertebrates by the bites of arthropod after a period of distribution, but all belong to the same serotype and are
extrinsic incubation" (1). similar in terms of virulence and host preference. Following
Yellow fever is historically the most prominent among the an infectious mosquito bite, the initial viral replication
diseases in this group. In· recent years, a number of other occurs in local and regional lymph nodes. Viral invasion of
arboviruses have emerged as important public health the central nervous system occurs probably via blood.
JAPANESE ENCEPHALITIS
similar clinical manifestations. Their case management performed/no aetiological agent is identified/test results are
usually follows a common protocol along with situation indeterminate.
specific treatment. Diagnosis of JE will depend on laboratory While the above classifications are useful for clearer
investigations. The case definitions and case classification in definitions of AES cases, for practical purposes, the two key
the programme are as follows (12) : definitions to be used are "suspected JE cases" for those that
Case definition of suspected case meet the criteria for AES, and "confirmed JE cases" for those
AES cases which have laboratory confirmation for JE. In an
- Acute onset of fever, not more than 5-7 days duration. epidemic situation fever with altered sensorium persisting for
- Change in mental status with/without more than two hours with a focal seizure or paralysis of any
New onset of seizures (excluding febrile seizures) part of body, is encephalitis. Presence of rash on body
Other early clinical findings ~ may include irritability, excludes Japanese Encephalitis. AES with symmetrical signs
somnolence or abnormal behaviour greater than that and fever is likely to be cerebral Malaria.
seen with usual febrile illness. The causes of AES are shown in Fig. 2.
Case classification Management of Acute Encephalitis Syndrome, including
Japanese Encephalitis, is essentially symptomatic. To reduce
Laboratory-confirmed case severe morbidity and mortality, it is important to identify
early warning signs and refer patients to health facility and
A suspected case with any one of the following markers:
to educate the health workers about the first line of
Presence of IgM antibody in serum and/or CSF to a treatment for management of the case at the grassroot level.
specific virus including JE/Enterovirus or others
Fig. 3 summarizes the guidelines for management of a
Four fold difference in IgG antibody titre in paired sera case of AES at PHC and FRU level and management of
- Virus isolation from brain tissue circulation as blood pressure should be maintained at about
Antigen detection by immunofluroscence 95th centile for the age of the patient with the help of
Nucleic acid detection by PCR dopamine drip. Failure of autoregulation of the brain makes
In the sentinel surveillance network, AES/JE is to be the cerebral circulation depend solely on systemic blood
diagnosed by IgM Capture ELISA, and virus isolation to be pressure. Avoid fluid overload. The ultimate decision
done in National Reference Laboratory. regarding the management depends upon the attending
physician.
Probable cases
Suspected case in close geographic and temporal Treatment of specific cause
relationship to a laboratory-confirmed case of AES/JE in an If laboratory investigation shows a non-JE cause, like
outbreak. herpes zoster, varicella, malaria, pyogenic meningitis,
tubercular meningitis, toxoplasmosis, amoebiasis, fungal
Acute Encephalitis Syndrome (AES) due to other agent infection or neurocysticercosis; the patient should be given
A suspected case in which diagnostic testing is performed specific treatment for that particular disease.
and an aetiological agent other than AES/JE is identified.
3. Kyasanur forest disease
Acute Encephalitis Syndrome (AES) due to unknown Kyasanur forest disease . (KFD) is a febrile disease
agent associated with haemorrhages caused by an arbovirus
A suspected .case in which no diagnostic testing is flavivirus and transmitted to man by bite of infective ticks.
AES
I I
J.E
NonJEviral
1
I
Single stranded RNA virus
Arbovirus
FIG. 3
Management of AES including Japanese Encephalitis
Source : (12)
40 years. (ii) Sex : Attack rate was greater in males than in During 2006, there was a large outbreak of chikungunya
females. (iii) Occupation : The attacked people were mostly in India, with 1.39 million officially reported cases spread
cultivators who visited forests accompanying their cattle or over 16 states; attack rates were estimated at 45 per cent in
cutting woods and (iv) Human activity : The epidemic period some areas (21). The outbreak was first noticed in Andhra ·
correlates well with the period of greatest human activity in Pradesh and it subsequently spread to Tamil Nadu.
the forest, i.e., from January until the onset of rains in June. Thereafter, Kerala and Karnataka were affected and then
northwards as far as Delhi. The other states involved were
(e) MODE OF TRANSMISSION Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, Rajasthan,
The transmission cycle involves mainly monkeys and Pondicherry, Goa, Orissa, West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh,
ticks. The disease is transmitted by the bite of infective ticks, Andaman and Nicobar Islands. During 2013, 18,639 cases
especially nymphal stages. There is no evidence of man to were reported by the Government of India (4).
man transmission. The incubation period of chikungunya fever is 4-7 days,
(f) INCUBATION PERIOD following which the disease has a sudden onset with fever,
chills, cephalalgia, anorexia, lumbago and conjunctivitis.
Estimated to be between 3 and 8 days. Adenopathy is also common. 60 to 80 per cent patients have
CLINICAL FEATURES a morbilliform rash, occasionally with purpura, on the trunk
and limbs. The cutaneous eruption may recur every 3 to 7
The disease appears with a sudden onset of fever, days. Other symptoms are coffee-coloured vomiting,
headache and severe myalgia, with prostration in some epistaxis and petechiae. A prominent symptom, seen
patients. The acute phase lasts for about 2 weeks. especially in adult patients is arthropathy, from which the
Gastrointestinal disturbances and haemorrhages from nose, disease gets its name. The arthropathy is manifested by
gums, stomach and intestine may occur in severe cases. pain, swelling and stiffness, especially of the
In a number of cases, there is a second phase metacarpophalangeal, wrist, elbow, shoulder, knee, ankle
characterized by mild meningoencephalitis after an afebrile and metatarsal joints. It appears between 3rd and 5th day
period of 7 to 21 days. It is manifested by a return of fever, after the onset of clinical symptoms, and it can persist for
severe headache followed by neck stiffness, coarse tremors, many months and even years. No deaths have been
abnormal reflexes and mental disturbances. The case fatality attributed to chikungunya fever (11).
·rate has been estimated to be 5 to 10 per cent (13). There is no specific treatment of chikungunya infection
Diagnosis is established only after detecting the presence and it is usually self limiting. Analgesics, antipyretics like
of the virus in the blood and/or serological evidence. paracetamol, diclofenac sodium, chloroquine along with
fluid supplementation are recommended to manage
CONTROL infection and relieve fever, joint pains and swelling. Drugs
(a) CONTROL OF TICKS : Since KFD is a tick-borne like aspirin and steroids should be avoided.
disease, control of ticks should be undertaken. For control of The disease occurs in the rainy season, when the
ticks in forests, application can be made by power mosquito vector population is at its peak. Research suggests
equipment or by aircraft-mounted equipment to dispense that the virus has a wild cycle, similar to that of yellow fever,
carbaryl, fenthion, naled or propoxur at 2.24 kg of active operating between jungle primates and mosquitoes,
ingredient per hectare (17). The spraying must be carried including Aedes africanus and members of the A. furcifer-
out in "hot spots", i.e., in areas where monkey deaths have tay/ori group.
been reported, within 50 metres around the spot of the
monkey deaths, besides the endemic foci. Since the heavy DIAGONSIS
tick population in the forest areas is attributed partly to the
free roaming cattle, restriction of cattle movement is The virus can be isolated from the blood of febrile
thought to bring about a reduction in vector population. patients by the intracerebral inoculation in suckling mice or
(b) VACCINATION : The population at risk should be on VERO cells.
immunized with killed KFD vaccine. (c) PERSONAL In serologic diagnosis, which is the approach most
PROTECTION : Protection of individuals exposed to the risk commonly used, sero-conversion is demonstrated by
of infection by adequate clothing and insect repellents such comparing acute and convalescent - phase sera in the
as dimethylphthalate (DMP, DEET) should be encouraged. haemagglutination inhibition, serum neutralization, or
They should examine their bodies at the end of each day for complement fixation test. The enzyme-linked
ticks and remove them promptly. The habit of sitting or lying immunosorbent assay (ELISA) is used to detect lgM. A
down on the ground should be discouraged through health reverse-transcription polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) I
education. nested PCR technique has also been shown to be useful in
rapidly diagnosing the disease (11).
4. Chikungunya fever
A dengue-like disease caused by a group A virus, the CONTROL
chikungunya virus and transmitted by Aedes mosquitoes. It (a) VECTOR CONTROL : The Aedes aegypti mosquito
is manifested by high fever and severe articular pains in the should be the main target of control activities. It requires
limbs and spinal column. The virus was first isolated from active community involvement to keep water storage
patients and mosquitoes during an epidemic in Tanzania in containers free of mosquitoes and to eliminate the other
1952-53. Chikungunya is a local word meaning "doubling breeding places of mosquitoes in and around houses and
up" owing to excruciating joint pains. The virus occurs dwellings (4). The organophosphorus insecticide, Abate is
widely in sub-Saharan Africa, India and in many areas in increasingly being used as a larvicide. It can prevent
Asia. breeding for upto 3 months when applied on sand granules;
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
does not harm man and does not affect the taste of water.
Antilarval measures can prevent an epidemic, but do not
give immediate results when an epidemic has already
broken out. In such cases, anti-adult measures alone can Brucellosis is one of the major bacterial zoonoses, and in
bring about a rapid interruption of transmission. Another humans is also known as Undulent fever, Malta fever or
technique consisting of aerosol spray of ultra low-volume Mediterranean fever. It is occasionally transmitted to man by
(ULV) quantities of malathion or sumithion (250 ml/hectare) direct or indirect contact with infected animals. It is caused
has been found to be effective in interrupting transmission by different species of the brucella group of organisms and
and stopping epidemics of DHF. The tiny droplets kill the characterized by intermittent or irregular febrile attacks, with
mosquitoes in the air as well as on water. By making 2 ULV profuse sweating, arthritis and an enlarged spleen. The
disease may last for several days, months or occasionally
treatments at about 10 days apart, the Aedes Research Unit
years. Brucellosis is both a severe human disease and a
in Bangkok was able to reduce adult mosquito densities by
disease of animals with serious economic consequences.
more than 98 per cent for several weeks (19, 20).
(b) VACCINE : No vaccine has yet been developed that is Problem statement
considered suitable for use.
Brucellosis is a recognized public health problem with
5. West nile fever worldwide distribution. It is endemic wherever cattle, pigs,
goats and sheep are raised in · large numbers. Important
An acute febrile illness caused by a group B arbovirus. endemic areas for brucellosis exist in Mediterranean zones,
The disease is endemic in Africa, the Middle East, South- Europe, Central Asia, Mexico and South America. Eastern
West Asia and India, and transmitted by certain species of Mediterranean countries have experienced an increase in
Culex mosquitoes. Clinically, it is manifested by a sudden the number of cases. The disease is now rare in most
onset of fever, severe headache and malaise lasting several European countries, North America and Australia (1).
days. In children, a maculopapular rash of short duration Animal brucellosis is reported from practically every State
may appear. In the aged, a fatal meningo-encephalitis may in India. However, no statistical information is available
be produced. about extent of infection in man in various parts of the
country (2).
6. Sandfly fever
The prevalence of human brucellosis is difficult to
Sandfly fever is known to occur in the arid regions of estimate. Many cases remain undiagnosed either because
West Pakistan and Middle East. Its occurrence in India was they are inapparent or because physicians in. many countries
thought to be doubtful. However, in 1967, the sandfly fever are unfamiliar with the disease.
virus was isolated in Aurangabad (Maharashtra) from febrile
cases. The virus was also isolated from sandflies (21). The Epidemiological determinants
control of sandfly fever is based on the control of insect
vector. Agent factors
(a) AGENT : The agents are small, gram-negative rod-
References shaped, non-motile, non-sporing and intracellular
1. WHO (1967). Tech. Rep. Ser., No.369. coccobacilli of the genus Brucella. Four species infect man :
2. WHO (2010), International travel and Health, 2010. B.melitensis, B.abortus, B.suis, and B.canis. B.melitensis is
3. WHO (2014). Fact Sheet, No. 386, March 2014. the most virulent and invasive species; it usually infects
4. Govt. of India (2014), Annual Report 2013-2014, Ministry of Health goats and occasionally sheep. B.abortus is less virulent and
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. is primarily a disease of cattle. B.suis is of intermediate
5. Govt. of India (2012), Annual Report 2011-2012, DGHS, Ministry of virulence and chiefly infects pigs. B.canis is a parasite of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. dogs. (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : Main reservoirs of
6. Govt. of India (2014), National Health Profile2013, DGHS, Ministry of human infection are cattle, sheep, goats, swine, buffaloes,
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
7. WHO (1979). Japanese Encephalitis, Technical Information and
horses and dogs. In animals the disease can cause abortion,
Guidelines for Treatment, SEA/CD/79, WHO, New Delhi. premature expulsion of the foetus or death. Cross infections
8. National Institute of Virology, Pune (1980). Japanese Encephalitis in can often occur between animal species. The infected
India, ICMR, New Delhi. animals excrete Brucella in the urine, milk, placenta, uterine
9. WHO (2006), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 34/35, 25th Aug. and vaginal discharges particularly during a birth or
2006. abortion. The animals may remain infected for life.
10. WHO (2005), International travel and health 2005.
11. Pan American Health Organization (2003), Zoonoses and Host factors
Communicable Diseases Common to Man and Animal 3rd Ed., Vol. II.
12. Govt. of India (2009), Guidelines, Clinical Management of Acute Human brucellosis is predominantly a disease of adult
Encephalitis syndrome including Japanese Encephalitis, DNVBDCP, males. Farmers, shepherds, butchers, and abattoir workers,
DGHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. veterinarians and laboratory workers are particularly at
13. WHO (1985) Tech. Rep. Ser., 721. special risk because of occupational exposure. Immunity
14. NICO (1985). Manual of Zoonosis. follows infection.
15. Govt. of India (2006), Health Information of India 2005, Ministry of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Environmental factors
16. Singh K.R.P. (1971). Indian. J. Med. Res., 59: 312.
17. WHO (1984). Chemical methods for the Control of arthropod vectors Brucellosis is most prevalent under conditions of
and pests of Public Health importance. advanced domestication of animals in the absence of
18. WHO (2006), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 43, 27th Oct. 2006. correspondingly advanced standards of hygiene.
19. WHO (1972). World Health, Aug-Sept., 1972. Overcrowding of herds, high rainfall, lack of exposure to
20. WHO (1972). WHO Chronicle, 26, 463. sunlight, unhygienic practices in milk and meat production,
21. WHO (1975). Wk/yEpid Rec., No. 23, 6June 1975. all favour the spread of brucellosis. The infection can travel
BRUCELLOSIS
long distances in milk and dust. The environment of a animals infected with brucellosis are slaughtered, with
cowshed may be heavily infected. The organism can survive full compensation paid to farmers. This is the only
for weeks, or months in favourable conditions of water, satisfactory solution aimed at eradication of the disease.
urine, faeces, damp soil and manure. (b) Vaccination: Vaccine of B. abortus strain 19 is commonly
used for young animals. A compulsory vaccination
Mode of transmission programme for all heifers in a given community on a yearly
Transmission is usually from infected animals to man. basis can considerably reduce the rate of infection.
There is no evidence of transmission from man to man (3). Systematic vaccination for a period of 7 to 10 years may
The routes of spread are : result in the elimination of the disease. Control of the
(a) Contact infection : Most commonly, infection occurs
infection caused by B. melitensis in goats and sheep has to
by direct contact with infected tissues, blood, urine, vaginal be based mainly on vaccination (5). (c) Hygienic measures:
discharge, aborted foetuses and especially placenta. These comprise provision of a clean sanitary environment
Infection takes place through abraded skin, mucosa or for animals, sanitary disposal of urine and faeces, veterinary
conjunctiva (mucocutaneous route). This type of spread is care of animals and health education of all those who are
largely occupational and occurs in persons involved in occupationally involved.
handling livestock and slaughter house workers. (b) IN THE HUMANS
(b) Food-borne infection : Infection may take place (a) Early diagnosis and treatment: In un_complicated cases
indirectly by the ingestion of raw milk or dairy products the antibiotic of choice is tetracycline. For adults in the acute
(cheese) from infected animals. Fresh raw vegetables can stage, the dose is 500 mg every 6 hours for about 3 weeks. In
also carry infection if grown on soil containing manure from patients with skeletal or other complications, intramuscular
infected farms. Water contaminated with the excreta of streptomycin 1 g daily in addition to tetracycline usually
infected animals may also serve as a source of infection. achieves a cure. (b) Pasteurization of milk : This is a useful
(c) Air-borne infection : The environment of a cowshed preventive measure which will render milk and milk products
may be heavily infected. Few people living in such an safe for consumption. Boiling of milk is effective when
environment can escape inhalation of infected dust or pasteurization is not possible. (c) Protective measures : The
aerosols. Brucellae may be inhaled in aerosol form in aim is to prevent direct contact with infected animals.
slaughter houses and laboratories, so these infections are Persons at risk such as farmers, shepherds, milkmen, abattoir
notified as occupational. workers should observe high standards of personal hygiene.
They should exercise care in handling and disposal of
Incubation period placenta, discharges and foetuses from an aborted animal.
Highly variable. Usually 1-3 weeks, but may be as long They should wear protective clothing when handling
as 6 months or more. carcasses. Exposed .areas of the skin should be washed and
soiled clothing renewed. (d) Vaccination : Human live
Pattern of disease vaccine of B. abortus strain 19-BA is available (5).
Brucella infection in man can vary from an acute febrile Brucellosis would disappear if it were eradicated from
disease to a chronic low-grade ill-defined disease, lasting animals. The national and international centre for
for several days, months or occasionally years. brucellosis is located at FAQ/WHO Brucella Reference
The acute phase is characterized by a sudden or insidious Centre, Indian Veterinary Research Institute, lzatnagar,
onset of illness with (i) swinging pyrexia (upto 40-41 deg C), (Uttar Pradesh).
rigors and sweating. (ii) arthralgia/arthritis (usually References
monoarticular) involving larger joints such as hip, knee,
shoulder and ankle. (iii) low back pain. (iv) headache, 1. WHO (1996). World Health Report 1996, Report of the Director-
General WHO.
insomnia. (v) small firm splenomegaly and hepatomegaly.
2. DGHS, NICO (1985) Manual on Zoonoses.
(vi) leucopenia with relative lymphocytosis (4). The most 3. WHO (1976) Techn. Rep. Ser., No.598.
striking aspect of the clinical picture is the severity of the 4. J.V. Zammit Maempel (1984). Med Int 2: 85 Feb 1984Middle Eastern
illness and the absence of clinical signs. The acute phase edition.
subsides within 2-3 weeks. If the patient is treated with 5. T. Fujlkuva (1985) World Health July, 1985 P. 13.
tetracycline, the symptoms may disappear quickly, but the
infection, being intracellular, may persist giving rise to
subacute or relapsing disease. · LEPTOSPl.ROSIS
In a few patients (upto 20 per cent), symptoms recur for Leptospirosis is essentially animal infection by several
prolonged periods. Diagnosis is established by isolation of serotypes of Leptospira (Spirocheates) and transmitted to
the organism from cultures of blood, bone marrow, exudates man under certain environmental conditions. The disease
and biopsy specimens during the acute phase of the disease; manifestations are many and varied, ranging in severity
and by serological tests. from a mild febrile illness to severe, and sometimes fatal
Control of brucellosis disease with liver and kidney involvement. Weils disease is
one of the many manifestations of human leptospirosis.
(a) IN THE ANIMALS
The most rational approach for preventing human Problem statement
brucellosis is the control and eradication of the infection Leptospirosis is considered to be the most widespread of
from animal reservoirs which is based on the combination of the disease transmissible from animal to man (1). It has high
the following measures : (a) Test and slaughter : Case finding prevalence in warm humid tropical countries. Out breaks
is done by mass surveys. Skin tests are available. The mostly occur as a result of heavy rainfall and consequent
complement fixation test is also recommended. Those floodings (3). Although the global burden of disease is
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DlSEASES
enormous body of knowledge regarding plague, this rodents, i.e., rodents which have become immune to plague.
communicable disease continues to pose a threat in many The susceptible rodents die of the disease.
areas. (c) SOURCE OF INFECTION : Infected rodents and fleas
and case of pneumonic plague.
Problem statement
WORLD Host factors
Plague is often seen as a problem of the past or an ancient (a) AGE AND SEX : All ages and both sexes are
disease that is unlikely to reappear. But continued outbreaks susceptible. (b)HUMAN ACTIVITIES : Man may come into
throughout the world attest to its tenacious presence. Plague contact with natural foci in the course of hunting, grazing,
continues to be a threat because vast areas exist where wild cultivation, harvesting and construction activities or while
rodents are infected, particularly in endemic countries in engaging in outdoor recreation. These activities offer
Africa, Asia and the Americas. Although plague is numerous opportunities to flea-man contact. Social
predominantly a rural disease, there have been outbreaks upheavals like war may also account for outbreaks, as had
among urban populations in Madagascar and the United happened in Vietnam. (c) MOVEMENT OF PEOPLE :
Republic of Tanzania. Plague is a major concern in countries Plague is associated with movement of people and cargo by
where it remains endemic given its inherent communicability, sea or land. Rats and rat fleas are transported in this way.
its rapid clinical course and high mortality if left untreated. Further, in these days of jet travel, it is possible for a person
to acquire the disease and become ill thousands of miles
The development of rapid diagnostic tests have away where plague would be least suspected.
contributed to better case-management and surveillane in (d) IMMUNITY : Man has no natural immunity. Immunity
Africa and other continents. after recovery is relative.
The data shows that from 2004 to 2009, a total of 12,503
cases of human plague, including 843 deaths, were reported Environmental factors
by 16 countries in Africa, Asia and the Americas. The global (a) SEASON : Outbreaks of plague are usually seasonal
case-fatality rate was 6. 7 per cent. Africa reported maximum in nature. In northern India, the "plague season" starts from
number of cases (12,209) including 814 deaths, accounting September until May. The disease tends to die out with the
for 97 .6 per cent of the total number of cases reported onset of hot weather. Researches indicated that the curious
worldwide. Asia reported 149 cases, including 23 deaths phenomenon of "plague season" depended primarily on the
(case fatality rate of 15.4 per cent) (1). field rodent factors; from May onwards all species of rodents
In 2004, India reported a localized outbreak of bubonic in the fields commenced aestivation, closing themselves in
plague (8 cases and 3 deaths) in the Dangud village, District their burrows and living on stored food reserves. Then the
of Uttarkashi. epizootic ceased to advance and at the same time infection
of village rats came to an end. When the field rodents again
Absence of human plague may simply mean that there became active, that is mid-October, when the monsoon
has been reduced human contact with plague bacteria floods had dried up, the epizootic revived in the fields
circulating in nature. Therefore, there is a need to continue followed by human plague (4). On the contrary, in south
to make concerted effort to strengthen surveillance and India, there was no definite plague season. The disease was
improve control measures in order to manage human plague found to be active all the year round. This is attributed
in endemic countries. partly to the topographic and climatic conditions in the
south, favourable for the breeding of the field rodents.
Epidemiological determinants (b) TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY: A mean temperature
Agent factors of 20 to 25 deg. C, and a relative humidity of 60 per cent
and above are considered favourable for the spread of
(a) AGENT : The causative agent, Y. pestis is a gram- plague. (c) RAINFALL : Heavy'rainfall, especially in the flat
negative, non-motile, cocco-bacillus that exhibits bipolar fields tend to flood the rat burrows. This factor may be
staining with special stains (e.g., Wayson's stain). The bacilli responsible for keeping certain states (e.g., Bengal) free
occur in great abundance in the buboes, blood, spleen, liver from plague (5). (d) URBAN AND RURAL AREAS: Plague
and other viscera of infected persons, and in the sputum of had failed to gain a foothold in many towns of India perhaps
cases of pneumonic plague. The virulence of the organism is due to untoward ecological conditions and lack of efficient
related to its ability to produce exotoxin, endotoxin, flea vectors (as in Chennai and Assam) (5). (e) HUMAN
fraction 1 and many other antigens and toxins. It has been DWELLINGS: Rats, frequent dwelling houses and where
shown that plague bacilli can survive, and indeed multiply in housing conditions are poor, there may be an abundance of
the soil of rodent burrows where micro-climate and other rats and rat fleas all the year round, and contact with man
conditions are favourable (2). occurs readily.
(b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : Wild rodents (e.g.,
field mice, gerbils, skunks and other small animals) are the Vectors of plague
natural reservoirs of plague. These are found in mountains, The commonest and the most efficient vector of plague is
deserts, cultivated areas and forests in temperate and the rat flea, X. cheopis, but other fleas may also transmit the
tropical regions. Over 200 species of these small animals infection, e.g., X. astia, X. brasiliensis and Pu/ex irritans
may carry plague (3). In any given focus, rodent reservoirs (human flea). Both sexes of the flea bite and transmit the
may vary. disease.
In India, the wild rodent, Tatera indica has been
incriminated as the main reservoir, not the domestic rat, Blocked flea
Rattus rattus, as once thought. Generally the disease is A flea may ingest upto 0.5 cu.mm of blood which may
maintained and spread by the resistant species of wild contain as many as 5,000 plague bacilli. The bacilli multiply
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
enormously in the gut of the rat flea and may block the existing in nature, independent of human populations and
proventriculus so that no food can pass through. Such a flea their activities" (2). The disease spreads among wild rodents
is called a "blocked flea". A blocked flea eventually faces by wild rodent fleas. The epizootic wipes out the susceptible
starvation and death because it is unable to obtain a blood population. Those that survive (i.e., resistant species)
meal. It makes frantic efforts to bite an.d suck blood over and maintain the enzootic in natural foci.
over again; and in so doing, it inoculates (regurgitates) b. DOMESTIC PLAGUE : Is defined as "plague that is
plague bacilli into the bite wound each time it bites. A intimately associated with man and rodents living with him,
blocked flea, therefore, becomes an efficient transmitter of and has a definite potential for producing epidemics (2).
plague. A partially blocked flea is more dangerous than a
completely blocked flea because it can live longer. Infected 3. Natural foci
fleas may live upto an year, and certain species survive in
the burrow micro-climate for as long as 4 years (2). Worldwide, rodent plague is still firmly entrenched in its
natural foci. A "natural focus" of plague has been defined as
Flea indices "a strictly delimited area where ecological conditions ensure
the persistence of the aetiological agent for considerable
Flea indices are useful measurements of the density of periods of time, and where epizootics and periods of
fleas. They are also useful in evaluating the effectiveness of a quiescence alternate, without introduction of infection from
spraying programme. The following flea indices are widely outside" (2).
used in rat flea surveys : (a) TOTAL FLEA INDEX: It is the
average number of fleas of all species per rat. (b) CHEOPIS The long persistence of plague in some natural foci is not
INDEX : It is the average number of X. cheopis per rat. It is a achieved through the usual simple chain of "Rat-flea-rat"
specific flea index. It is a more significant index than the total transmission. Probably several other mechanisms are
flea index. If this index is more than 'one', it is regarded as involved. They include : (a) latent infection in rodents,
indicative of potential explosiveness of the situation, should especially hibernating rodents, has been demonstrated; such
a plague outbreak occur (6). (c) SPECIFIC PERCENTAGE animals may relapse and become bacteraemic, so initiating
OF FLEAS : It is the percentage of different species of fleas an epizootic. (b) development of resistance to plague
that are found on rats. (d) BURROW INDEX : It is the infection by some rodents with subsequent localization of
average number of free-living fleas per species per rodent plague bacillus in some organ; such an animal may become
burrow (7). a source of infection if eaten by another susceptible rodent.
(c) survival of rat fleas for as long as 4 years in rat burrows
Flea indices do not in themselves indicate an imminent under optimum micro-climatic conditions. This is considered
plague epidemic. They serve as a warning that more the most likely mechanism of maintaining the natural focus.
stringent control measures are needed to protect the human (d) variations in the pathogenecity of Y pestis, and
population. (e) survival and even multiplication of plague bacilli in the
soil of rodent burrows. All these factors may combine to
PLAGUE IN RODENTS keep the infection alive in natural foci.
1. Rodents 4. Epizootic process
Plague is primarily a disease of rodents in which man The epizootic and enzootic process in each natural plague
becomes accidentally involved. Approximately, 1, 700 species focus has its specific cyclic and periodical pattern.
of rodents are known, of which over 200 species are Researches into the epidemicity of plague indicated that the
associated with plague. These are found in mountains, field rodents spread the infection very slowly from burrow to
deserts, cultivated areas and forests throughout the world (8). burrow, and from field to field taking months to cover
Rodents may be classified into two distinct groups : several miles. In this process they infect the village rats
(a) WILD RODENTS : They are the reservoir of plague in (commensal rodents). The commensal rodents especially the
nature. The common wild rodents in India are : Tatera peridomestic species (e.g., R. norvegicus) act as "Liaison
indica, Bandicota bengalensis varius, B. bengalensis kok rodents" between man and field rodents. An outbreak of
(Gunomys kok), B. indica, Millardia meltada, M. gleadowi human plague is always preceded by rodent plague. After
and Mus booduga. In India, tatera indica has been the death of house rats, the fleas leave the dead rats and are
incriminated as the main reservoir of plague, not the forced to seek man for food. An unusual mortality among
domestic rat (R. rattus) as once thought. rodents should arouse suspicion of plague and should be
investigated immediately.
(b) COMMENSAL RODENTS : These are. the rodents
which live close to man. They may be further divided into 5. Silent periods
domestic and peridomestic species. The domestic species
include Rattus rattus, Rattus norvegicus and Mus musculus. Silences of long duration (10 years or more) followed by
The domestic species seldom live in fields. The peridomestic sudden explosive outbreaks of rodent or human plague have
species live in both fields and houses; R. norvegicus which been repeatedly confirmed in some natural foci (9). A
frequents sewers, drains as well as houses is a typical number· of explanations for this phenomenon have been put
example of a peri-domestic species in India. Characteristics forward. It has been suggested that plague disappears
which are easily ascertainable of Rattus rattus and completely for long periods and that it is reintroduced from
R. norvegicus are given elsewhere (see chapter 11). other areas by infected rodents, fleas or migrating birds. On
the other hand, the plague bacillus can survive and indeed
2. Epizootiology multiply in the soil of rodent burrows, where micro-climatic
conditions are suitable. It has been demonstrated that
Plague is epizootic and enzootic in wild rodents. Two healthy rodents re-occupying and excavating such burrows
ecological cycles have been described : may become infected through contact with contaminated
a. WILD PLAGUE : Wild plague is defined as "plague soil (2, 10).
PLAGUE
6. Plague in rodents 2. Wild rodents~ wild rodent fleas or direct contact ~man
Animal disease is similar to that in man. The disease is The disease is transmitted from rodent to rodent
inapparent or mild in resistant species (11). via wild rodent fleas or contaminated soil. Man
contracts the infection from infectious wild rodent
7. Investigations fleas or by direct contact with infected rodents.
(1) COLLECTION AND FORWARDING OF DEAD RATS 3. Wild rodents, peridomestic rodents, commensal rodents
: Rodents (house or field) found dead regardless of its stage ~ wild rodent fleas, peridomestic rodent fleas,
of decomposition should be carefully packed in several commensal rodent fleas ~man
layers of packing paper or preferably in plastic bags. Such Plague foci impinge upon the habitats of
rodents should not be handled with naked hands. The neck· peri-domestic or commensal rodents. Interaction
of the bag should be tied to avoid escape of ectoparasites. of the rodents and their fleas convey the infection
The bag should then be placed in a wooden box or tin. The to man.
empty space left in the box or tin should be filled with
absorbent cotton or sawdust to eliminate chances of leakage 4. Man ~ human flea (Pulex trritans) ~man
of effluents outside the box. The box is labelled giving This variety may be encountered in certain areas.
details of collection and sent to the nearest laboratory. 5. Man~ man
(2) AUTOPSY AND COLLECTION OF SMEARS : The rat is This results when a primary case of bubonic
held with a pair of tongs, and dipped in a solution of 5 per plague develops secondary pneumonic plague
cent cresol. The animal is laid on its dorsum, stretched and and infects contacts via the respiratory toute.
the limbs nailed on a wooden board. The abdomen is
swabbed with lysol or spirit. The skin is lifted and cut up to Incubation period
the chest. The instruments used are then put back into (a) bubonic plague 2 to 7 days
boiling water. Using another set of instruments, small
portions of the viscera (spleen, liver, lungs, bubo) are cut (b) septicaemic plague 2 to 7 days
and the freshly cut surface is first blotted on a blotting paper (c) pneumonic plague 1to3 days
so as to remove excess of blood or plasma. Then the same
surface of the tissue is gently pressed on the glass slides so as Disease in man
to make thin impressions (never rub the tissue on the slides). There are three main clinical forms : (a) Bubonic
If the rat is completely decomposed and no tissue is left, plague : This is the most common type of the disease. The
smears should be obtained from the bone marrow. The infected rat fleas usually bite on the lower extremities and
smears are dried,_ treated with alcohol for three minutes and inoculate the bacilli. The bacilli are intercepted by the
fixed by exposure to open flame. The fixed smears may be regional lymphatic glands where they proliferate. Typically
sent for examination. Persons handling irifected rats are the patient develops sudden fever, chills, headache,
exposed to the risk of pneumonic plague and this danger prostration and painful lymphadenitis. Usually within a few
should be borne in mind. (3) ANIMAL INOCULATION : It days greatly enlarged tender lymph nodes (buboes) develop .
may be difficult to isolate the plague bacilli by cultural in the groin and less often in the axilla or neck, depending
methods owing to gross contamination of the carcass. In upon the site of the bite by the flea. When suppuration takes
such cases, small portions of liver or spleen are taken, place it is considered a favourable sign. Bubonic plague
ground in a mortar with a little saline and inoculated into a cannot spread from person to person as the bacilli are locked
guinea pig or a white mouse. If there is plague infection, the up in the buboes and do not find a way or easy exit.
guinea pig will die in 7 days and the white mouse in 48 (b) Pneumonic plague : Primary pneumonic plague is
hours. (4) PATHOLOGICAL CHANGES : The pathological rare; it generally follows as a complication of bubonic-
changes in an animal infected with plague are as follows: septicaemic plague. The incidence of pneumonic plague is
(a) there is oedema and necrosis at the site of injection, usually below 1 per cent (5). Pneumonic plague is highly
(b) the lymph nodes are enlarged, (c) the spleen is enlarged infectious and spreads from man to man by droplet
and congested, and shows necrotic patches, (d) liver shows infection. The plague bacilli are present in the sputum.
mottling, (e) lungs also show necrotic lesions, and (f) there is ( c) Septicaemic plague : Primary septicaemic plague is
subcutaneous congestion and haemorrhages. rare except for accidental laboratory infections. However,
bubonic plague may develop into septicaemic plague in the
face of an overwhelming infection.
HUMAN PLAGUE
Laboratory investigations
Mode of transmission
The absolute confirmation of plague infection in human
Human plague is most frequently contracted from : (a) beings, rodents or fleas requires the isolation and
the bite of an infected flea, (b) occasionally by direct contact identification of the plague bacillus. The important
with the tissues of the infected animal or (c) by droplet laboratory methods of diagnosis include the following :
infection from cases of pneumonic plague. The (a) Staining : It is important to prepare smears of the
dissemination of plague by plague patients (by the bite of clinical material (e.g., bubo fluid, sputum) which should be
the human flea, Pu/ex irritans) is a rare and exceptional fixed with alcohol and then stained with Giemsa's or
occurrence. Wayson's stain to demonstrate bipolar bacilli in the
There are at least 5 basic types of transmission cycles in specimen. (b) Culture : Blood for culture should be
plague. These cycles are as follows (8) : collected from all patients. Under ideal circumstances,
appropriate culture media should be inoculated on the spot
1. Commensal rats~ rat fleas ~man with blood, bubo fluid or sputum to ensure speedy isolation
This is the basic cycle in epidemic bubonic plague. of the plague bacilli. When this is not possible, the specimen
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
must be transported to the laboratory in Cary-Blair blower. Insecticidal spraying up to a radius of 5 miles around
transport medium. (c) Serology : Acute and convalescent each infected locality is considered adequate (8). Within 48
specimens of blood sera should be collected for antibody hours of application, the "flea index" should drop down to
studies. (d) Other methods: These include inoculation of zero (8). ·
guinea pigs or mice or immunofluorescent microscopic test.
3. Control of rodents
PREVENTION AND CONTROL Continuous mass destruction of rodents is an important
plague-preventive measure. The long-term policy for the
1. Control of cases control of rodents should be based on improvement of
(a) EARLY DIAGNOSIS : During epidemic situations, general sanitation, improvement of housing and quality of
diagnosis of plague can be made readily on clinical grounds, life. The various antirodent measures are given elsewhere.
e.g., acute fever and painful lymph node enlargement
developing into buboes in the inguinal and other regions of 4. Vaccination
the body. In other situations, "rat falls" (dead rats) provide a Immunization with plague vaccine is a valuable
useful warning of a possible outbreak. It is essential that preventive measure. The WHO recommends that under all
plague-suspected humans and rodents be examined circumstances, vaccination should be only for the
bacteriologically to confirm the presence of plague. It is prevention, not the control of human plague (2). To be
often possible to arrive at a prima facie diagnosis by the effective, vaccination should be carried out at least a week
examination of smears that show the characteristic bipolar before an anticipated outbreak, and the vaccine should be
stained plague bacilli (8). (b) NOTIFICATION: If a human given in 2 doses.
or rodent case is diagnosed, health authorities must be In 1897, Haffkine developed a killed plague vaccine
notified promptly. Case notification is required by while working in India and inoculated himself with his
International Health Regulations (13). (c) ISOLATION : experimental vaccine (14). The vaccine used currently is
Although most bubonic plague patients are non-infectious, that of Haffkine, modified by Sokhey. It is a formalin-killed
isolation is recommended whenever possible. All patients vaccine. Virulent strains of Y pestis are grown in casein
with pneumonic plague including suspected cases should be hydrolysate broth for 2 weeks at 27 deg. C and killed by
isolated. (d) TREATMENT : Treatment must be started treatment with 0.1 per cent formalin for 3 days at 37 deg. C.
without waiting for confirmation of the diagnosis (2). Unless The final vaccine is a suspension of 2000 million killed
promptly treated, plague may have a mortality of nearly 50 organisms per ml (15).
per cent, and pneumonic plague 100 per cent. The drug of The vaccine is given subcutaneously in two doses of 0.5
choice is streptomycin (30 mg per kg of body weight daily) and 1.0 ml at an interval of 7 to 14 days. A single dose will
administered intramuscularly in two divided doses for not result in dependable protection. However, in an
7 to 10 days. Tetracycline orally (30-40 mg per kg of body emergency, when it is desired to carry out primary
weight daily) is an alternative drug, and is sometimes given immunization by means of a single injection, the dose
in combination with streptomycin (12). Gentamycin should be double the second dose, that is, 3 ml for adult
administered as a 2 mg/kg body wt. loading dose, then males (15). Immunity starts 5 to 7 days after inoculation,
1. 7 mg/kg body wt. every 8 hours intravenously is effective. and lasts for about 6 months. Booster doses are
Penicillin is rather ineffective. Sulphonamides may be used if recommended six-monthly for persons at continuing risk of
other drugs are not available. (e) DISINFECTION : infection (e.g., geologists, biologists and anthropologists).
Disinfection of sputum, discharges and articles soiled by the The recommended doses of the vaccine are given in Table 3.
patient should be carried out. Dead bodies should be The reactions after inoculation (pain, tenderness, headache,
handled with aseptic precautions. etc) appear in a few hours and subside in 1 to 2 days. The
vaccine is indicated for travellers to hyperendemic areas
2. Control of fleas besides persons at special risk.
The most effective method to break the chain of
transmission (rodent-..:; flea -..:; man) is the destruction of rat TABLE 3
fleas by the proper application of an effective insecticide. Flea Dosage of plague vaccine
.
control must precede or coincide anti-rodent measures. The . Primary inoculati()f1 . Booster dose .
choice of insecticide is dictated by the results of prior Age and Sex
1st dose 2nd dose six-monthly
susceptibility tests. In general DDT and BHC should be used
as dusts containing 10 per cent and 3 per cent of the active Adult males l.Oml 1.5 ml 1.0 ml
ingredient respectively. In areas where resistance to one or Adult females 0.75 ml 1.0 ml 0.75ml
both of these insecticides occurs, dusts of carbaryl (2%) or Children
malathion (5%) should prove effective. About 2 to 3 g of 1-4 years 0.2ml
insecticide formulation will be needed for each sq. metre of 5 -10 years 0.3ml} Double the Same as the
surface requiring treatment (8). Generally the organochlorine 11-16 years 0.4ml first dose first dose
insecticides remain effective for 2 to 4 months. Infants under 6 months
are not immunized.
Before spraying is to be done, the inhabitants of premises
should be asked to remove all foodstuffs and eating and Source : (15)
cooking vessels from their houses. Spraying is done inside
the houses covering the entire floor area, bottoms of all walls 5. Chemoprophylaxis
up to 3 feet above floor level, back of the doors, roofing of Chemoprophylaxis is a valuable preventive measure,
thatched houses, crevices of walls, rat runs, clothing, highly recommended. It should be offered to all plague
bedding, cats, dogs and other pets. Rat burrows should be contacts, medical, nursing and public health personnel
insufflated with the insecticidal dust with the help of a dust exposed to the risk of infection. The drug of choice is
PLAGUE
tetracycline. For adults, the dose is 500 mg 6-hourly for natural plague foci and destined for national or
5 days (16). A cheaper alternative is sulfonamide, 2 to international trade;
3 gram daily for 5 to 7 days. (7) to undertake surveillance in cooperation with
adjacent countries when natural foci are common
6. Surveillance to two or more countries;
Plague has a potential for spread into susceptible areas. (8) to give special attention, in the case of seaports or
Therefore, in areas where natural plague foci exist or where airports, to the proximity of natural foci where
there is a history of past infection, surveillance is essential. there is contact between wild and cornmensal
Surveillance should cover all aspects of rodent and human rodents, the proximity of epidemics, and the
plague, e.g., microbiology, serology, entomology, transport of cargo from enzootic areas.
mammalogy, epidemiology and ecology. On the basis of The surveillance team should also be prepared to assist
information provided by surveillance, effective control the national or community health service in organizing and
measures must be established {14). Surveillance of plague in carrying out the treatment of human cases and measures for
its natural foci should, therefore, replace quarantine the control and prevention of plague. An organizational
measures which have been shown to be ineffective (2). basis should be established for rapid emergency services in
7. Health education the event of an epidemic.
Health education is an essential part of any plague Reporting of cases and outbreaks of plague (17)
control programme. Education should aim at providing the
public with the facts about plague and at enlisting their The WHO should be informed promptly of the
cooperation. Emphasis must be placed on the need for the occurrence of any epidemic or isolated case of plague. The ·
prompt reporting of dead rats and suspected human cases report should include details about the administrative area
so that preventive measures can be taken. Medical and exact locality involved. This preliminary notification
practitioners should keep plague in mind in differential should be followed up as soon as possible by a more
diagnosis of any cases of fever with lymphadeno-pathy, or detailed report containing the following information :
when multiple cases of pneumonia occur (2). (a) The locality and administrative area, shown on a map
if possible
Epidemiological investigations (17)
(b) The date, the first case was noticed
The determination of the source of infection and the
distribution, prevalence, and potential spread of plague in (c) The period during which field investigations were
human population is the main objective of epidemiological made
surveillance. This means that those engaged in surveillance (d) The number and types of cases of plague detected :
must evaluate human plague in its relationship with clinical diagnosis only (presumptive)
epizootic factors and that the investigations must be based laboratory diagnosis (confirmed)
on direct contact with villages and other communities recovered and confirmed serologically
affected by plague. While the collection of demographic
data and information on such subjects as population types of cases - bubonic, pneumonic, etc.
movements and local occupations, customs, and habits is age of patient with a confirmed diagnosis of
important, special attention must be given to the factors plague
bringing man into contact with the vertebrate reservoirs and number of deaths
vectors of y. pestis. (e) The contacts of known cases
Some of the responsibilities of the surveillance team are serological test results
as follows: throat swab results
(1) to make a detailed study of all cases of human (f) Chemotherapy applied
plague, giving special attention to dwellings where
cases have occurred, in order to establish the number of frank cases
rodent/vector source of the infection or the number of contacts
occurrence of man-to-man transmission; (g) Vertebrate host population
(2) to keep complete and uniform records of each identification of domestic rodents
case of plague, using standardized forms, and to identification of wild rodents
issue questionnaires to the population at risk;
results of laboratory test for plague
(3) to isolate strains of Y pestis and subject them to
detailed biochemical analysis, samples being (h) Vector population
lyophilized for later study; identification of X. cheopis
(4) to make a serological survey of the target identification of other species of flea
population; such surveys are of value in results of laboratory tests for infection
investigation of possible cases of subclinical results of insecticide resistance tests
plague, of recovered untreated infections, and of
control measures applied.
asymptomatic pharyngeal infection in "carriers";
(5) to investigate changes in the human population, References
social or economic activities, and other features of
1. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 6, 5th Feb, 2010.
natural foci where there is close contact between
2. WHO (1970). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 447.
human populations and comrnensal rodents; 3. WHO (1982). Vol. 60.
(6) to keep a watch on containerized cargoes of grain 4. WHO (1960). WHO Chr. 14: 422.
and other food crops originating in areas with 5. Seal, S.C. (1960). Bull WHO 23: 286.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
6. WHO (1974). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 553. infect both man and animals e.g., S.
7. WHO (1972). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 501. typhimurium, S.enteritidis. In this group
8. Bahmanyar, M. et al (1976). Plague manual Geneva, WHO. (approximately 2,200 serovars) are the principal
9. WHO (2002), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 9, 1st March, 2002.
10. WHO (1970). WHOChr. 24 (8) 371-373.
agents of salmonellosis that occurs today (2).
11. WHO (1982). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 682. They can be transmitted from animals to man and
12. Akier, A.K. (1982). Bull WHO, 62 (2) 165-169. vice versa. S. typhimurium is responsible for upto
13. WHO (1983). Int Health 3rd annotrated ed Geneva, WHO. 50 per cent or more of all human salmonella
14. WHO (1980). Bull WHO P.753. infections all over the world. S. enteritidis has also
15. Banker, D.D. (1969). Modern Practice in Immunization, The Indian emerged as an important pathogen.
Journal of Medical Sciences Mumbai.
16. lssacson, M. (1981). Medicine International, 3: 127. RESERVOIR AND SOURCES OF INFECTION : The main
17. WHO (1974), WHO Chronicle, Vol.28, No.2, February 1974, p.71. reservoir of Salmonella is the intestinal tract of man and
animals. The source of the infecting agent could be
HUMAN SALMONELLOSIS contaminated food, animals, man or the environment.
(a) Foods
The term "salmonellosis" covers a complex group of
foodborne infections affecting both man and animals (1). Foods of animal ongm, particularly commercially
The disease causes illness and even death in humans, as well prepared foods such as meat, poultry and egg products are
as economic losses in the animal and food industries. The considered to be the primary sources of salmonellosis. Most
term "food poisoning" is also commonly applied to of these foods, e.g., meat and poultry become contaminated
salmonellosis. during slaughter. Every food that is produced or processed
(including chocolates, spices, coconut) in a contaminated
Problem statement environment may become contaminated. Cross-
contamination of cooked foods from raw ingredients,
Salmonellosis is a global problem (2). Human kitchen utensils or surfaces has been described frequently as
salmonellosis represents 60 to 80 per cent of all reported a cause of salmonellosis (5). Eggs may be infected directly
cases of foodborne diseases (3). through shell-cracks. Recent investigations suggest that
While the incidence of typhoid fever has declined, the salmonellae may penetrate the ovaries of egg-laying
incidence of other Salmonella infections has increased in the chickens. What food will ultimately become the vehicle
developed countries. The problem is aggravated by the varies from country to country (6). For example, in the USA,
widespread use of animal feeds containing antimicrobial beef is the main source of salmonella infection, while in
drugs that favour drug-resistant salmonellae and their England and Wales poultry accounts for more than 50 per
potential transmission to humans. The disease can occur cent of Salmonellosis outbreaks (2).
sporadically or in small outbreaks in the general population
and usually from food contaminated at its source. The extent (b) Animals
of the problem is not clear in developing countries where Animals are the hosts and the principal vectors of
diarrhoeal diseases are widespread (2). zoonotic salmonellosis. Many animals including cattle,
swine, rodents and fowl are naturally infected with a variety
Epidemiological determinants of salmonellae and have the bacilli in their tissues (meat),
eggs or excreta. Carriers occur among both man and
Agent factors animals. ·
AGENT : Salmonellae comprise a large and important
group of bacteria. This group is now known to comprise (c) Environment
more than 2,500 serotypes capable of infecting humans (4), Salmonellae are widely distributed in the environment -
but in most countries only a small number of them (usually in dust, water, manure, sewage, sludge, vegetables, insects,
about 10) are endemic at any one time (5). birds, fish, rodents and other mammals. They can survive in
Compared with other gram-negative rods, salmonellae soil for months (6). They may even multiply in the warm
are relatively resistant to various environmental factors. environment provided by the high ambient temperatures of
They have been shown to be resistant to drying, salting, many countries. Man may be infected from these sources.
smoking and freezing even for years. This explains why Multidrug resistant strains of salmonella are now
these organisms survive in many kinds of food. As a result, encountered frequently. Resistance to fluoroquinolones and
salmonellae have been isolated from divergent foods such as third generation cephalosporins is a serious development,
chocolates, biscuits, coconuts and spices. The bacterium is which results in severe limitation of the possibilities for
sensitive to heat and will not survive temperatures above effective treatment of human infections (4).
70 deg C.
Mode of transmission
From an epidemiological point of view, salmonellae can
be classified into three main groups (2). By ingestion of contaminated food or drink. In addition,
man can contract infection following direct contact with
(i) those which infect only man - e.g., S. typhi, domestic animals especially such as dogs, pigeons, rats,
S. paratyphi A and C. mice and insects. Once man is infected, he becomes a
(ii) those that are host-adapted for particular species source (case or carrier) and the infection may spread to
of animals, e.g., S. cholera-suis in swine, S. dub/in others by the faecal-oral route.
in cattle, S. abortus equi in horses, S. gallinarum in Transmission is facilitated by food handling methods,
poultry, etc. Some of these are also pathogenic for · local customs, cooking and food habits, food processing,
man, e.g., S. cholera-suis, S. dub/in. storage and distribution methods, and prevailing sanitary
(iii) those with no particular host preference and can conditions.
HUMAN SALMONELLOSJS
Among the major groups of rickettioses, the commonly Clearing the vegetation where rats and mice live; application
reported diseases in India are scrub typhus, murine flea- of insecticides such as lindane or chlordane to ground and
born typhus, Indian tick typhus and Q fever. These are vegetation. (c) PERSONAL PROPHYLAXIS : Impregnating .
considered in more detail : clothes and blankets with miticial chemicals (benzyl
benzoate) and application of mite repellents
SCRUB TYPHUS (diethyltoluamide) to exposed skin surfaces (5). No vaccine
exists at present.
Distribution
Of the diseases caused by rickettsiae in man, the most MURINE TYPHUS
widespread is scrub typhus. It exists as a zoonoses in nature (Endemic or flea-borne typhus)
between certain species of trombiculid mites and their small
mammals (e.g., field mice, rats, shrews). Scrub typhus is Distribution
endemic in Northern Japan, South East Asia, the Western Murine typhus (MT) is a zoonoses. It is worldwide in
Pacific Islands, Eastern Australia, China, Maritime areas and distribution especially in areas of high rat infestation. It
several parts of South-Central Russia, India and Sri Lanka. appears to be more prevalent in South-East Asian and
More than 1 million cases occur annually. Most travel- Western Pacific countries than previously recognized. In
acquired cases of scrub typhus occur during visits to USA, cases tend to be scattered. Successful isolation of the
rural areas in endemic countries for activities such as causative agent from rats, fleas and bandicoots was made at
camping, hiking or rafting, but urban cases have also been many places in India. Focal infections are often associated
described (4). with docks and shipping places where rats abound.
Epidemiological determinants Agent factors
Agent factors (a) AGENT Rickettsia typhi (R. mooseri).
(b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : Rats are the reservoir
(a) AGENT : The causative agent of scrub typhus is (Rattus rattus and R.norvegicus). Infection in rats is
Rickettsia tsutsugamushi. There are several serologically inapparent, long-lasting and non-fatal.
distinct strains. (b) RESERVOIR : The true reservoir of
infection is the trombiculid mite (Leptotrombidium delinese Mode of transmission
and L.akamushi). The infection is maintained in nature The infection spreads from rat to rat (X. cheopis) and
transovarially from one generation of mite to the next. The possibly by the rat louse (6). The actual mode of transmission
nymphal and adult stages of the mite are free-living in. the is not by the bite of the rat flea, but by (i) inoculation into skin
soil; they do not feed on vertebrate hosts. It is the larva of faeces of infected fleas, and (ii) possibly by inhalation of
(chigger) that feed on vertebrate hosts and picks up the dried infective faeces. There is no direct man to man
rickettsiae. The larval stage serves both as a reservoir, transmission. Once infected the flea remains so for life. The
through ovarian transmission, and as a vector for infecting flea cannot transmit the rickettsiae transovarially. The
humans and rodents. transmission cycle may be shown as below :
Mode of transmission Rat ~ Rat flea ~ Rat ~ Rat flea ~ Rat
By the bite of infected larval mites. The transmission J,
cycle may be depicted as below :
Man
Mite ~ Rats and mice ~ Mite ~ Rats and mice
J, Incubation period
Man 1 to 2 weeks, commonly 12 days.
The disease is not directly transmitted from person to Clinical features
person.
The clinical features resemble that of louse-borne typhus,
Incubation period but milder and rarely fatal. The Weil Felix reaction with
Proteus OX-19 becomes positive in the 2nd week.
Usually 10 to 12 days; varies from 6 to 21 days.
Control measures
Clinical features (a) TREATMENT: Tetracycline is the only drug of choice.
Scrub typhus resembles epidemic typhus clinically. The Since rickettsial growth is enhanced in the presence of
onset is acute with chills and fever (104°-105°F), headache, sulfonamides, these drugs should not be given.
malaise, prostration and a macular rash appearing around (b) CONTROL OF FLEAS : Residual insecticides (e.g.,
the 5th day of illness. Generalized lymphadenopathy and BHC, malathion) are effective against rat fleas. Rodent
lymphocytosis are common. One typical feature is the control measures should be implemented in the affected
punched-out ulcer covered with a blackened scab (eschar) areas. No murine typhus vaccine is currently available.
which indicates the location of the mite bite. The pyrexia
falls by lysis in the 3rd week in untreated cases. The INDIAN TICK TYPHUS
Weil Felix reaction is strongly positive with the Proteus
strain OXK. Epidemiological determinants
Control measures Agent factors
(a) TREATMENT : Tetracycline is the drug of choice. With (a) AGENT : The causative agent is Rickettsia conorii, a
proper therapy the mortality is nil. (b) VECTOR CONTROL: member of the spotted fever group of rickettsiae, the best
RICKETTSIAL ZOONOSES
The control measures comprise anti-louse measures and The adult T. saginata measures 5 to 12 metres in length, and
improvements in personal hygiene and living conditions. may be up to 24 metres; T. solium measures 2 to 6 metres.
Under the International Health Regulations, louse-borne
typhus is Sl!bject to international surveillance. TABLE 1
Hosts of infection
2. Rickettsialpox
Man gets the infection through the bite of certain infected
mites, which are found on mice (Mus musculus). 1. T. saginata Man Cattle (C. bovis)
Transovarial transmission occurs in the mite. The mouse acts 2. T. so/ium Man Pig (C. cel/ulosae)
as true reservoir as well as vector. Rickettsialpox may be
confused with atypical cases of chickenpox. The larval stage of T. saginata (C. bouis) mainly occurs in
cattle. The pig is the main host for the larval stage of
3. Trench fever T. solium (C. cellulosae) but man may also be infected. This
This disease is limited to central Europe. The vector is may lead to muscular, ocular and cerebral cysticercosis.
louse and the disease is transmitted by louse faeces. Man is The adult stages of T. saginata and T. solium may persist
the only known reservoir. for several years in infected humans. Mixed infections of
both the parasites can occur. Although the life span of
References C. cellulosae in man is not known, it is suspected to be some
1. WHO (1983). Bull WHO 61: 443. years.
2. Jawetz E eta] (1986). Reivew of Medical Microbiology 17th ed. Lange
Med. Publ. California. Mode of transmission
3. WHO (1975). The work of WHO, Geneva.
4. Current Medical Diagnosis and Treatment, by Maxine A Padakis etc.,
These infections are acquired : (a) through the ingestion
2014 ed., A Lange Publication. of infective cysticerci in undercooked beef (T. saginata) or
5. WHO (1982). Bull WHO, P.162. pork (T. solium); (b) through ingestion of food, water or
6. Saah, J.J. and Hormick, R.B. (1979). lri Principles and Practice of vegetables contaminated with eggs; and (c) reinfection by
Infectious Diseases, G.L. Mandell et al (eds), John Wiley, New York. the transport of eggs from the bowel to the stomach by
7. Sehgal, Sand R. Bhatia eds (1985). Manual on Zoonosis NICD, 29- retroperistalsis is considered to be rare.
Sham Nath Marg, Delhi-54.
8. Kazar, J. et al (1982). Bull WHO, 60 (3) 389-394. Incubation period
For the adult tapeworm, from 8 to 14 weeks.
I TAENIASIS
Clinical illness
A group of cestode infections which are important zoonotic The impact of tapeworm infection in man is difficult to
diseases. Two parasites of importance in taeniasis are Taenia quantify because in the vast majority of cases, they do not
saginata and T. solium. These are classified as "cyclo- lead to clinical illhealth, except occasional abdominal
zoonoses" because they require more than one vertebrate discomfort, anorexia and chronic indigestion.
host species (but no invertebrate host) to complete their Straying of proglottids may sporadically cause
developmental cycles. appendicitis or cholangitis. The most serious risk of T. solium
infection is cysticercosis.
Problem statement
(a) T. SAG/NATA : This parasite is virtually global in Human cysticercosis
distribution, wherever beef is eaten. Highly endemic regions Human infection is caused by the ingestion of eggs of
(prevalence rates exceeding 10 per cent) exist in some T. solium in contaminated water or food (hetero-infection) or
African countries south of the Sahara, in Eastern regurgitated eggs from the small intestine (auto-infection).
Mediterranean countries and in parts of USSR. There is a The eggs disintegrate and the infective stages leave the
moderate prevalence in Europe, in most of the Indian intestine via the hepatic portal system, and are dispersed
subcontinent, Southern Asia, and in Japan. Australia, throughout the body where they develop to form cysticerci.
Canada and USA are generally regarded as low endemic Cysticerci that develop in the central nervous system (neuro-
areas, with prevalence rate below 0.1 per cent (1). cysticercosis), represent a serious threat to the individual and
The larval stage of T. saginata (Cysticercus bovis) occurs even to the community, if this condition is prevalent. As a
almost all over the world. In some East African countries result of mechanical pressure, obstruction or inflammation, a
rates 30 to 80 per cent have been noted. In European variety of pathological changes are produced, leading to
countries, it is found in 0.3 to 4.0 per cent of slaughtered epilepsy, intracranial hypertensive syndromes,
animals (1). hydrocephalus, psychiatric diseases or death (4).
(b) T. SOLIUM: T. solium infection is endemic in many
countries of Latin America, Africa and Asia as well as in Control measures
some parts of Europe and the USSR (2). It is endemic in The methods usually employed for control are :
India, and has been widely reported (3). Human (a) treatment of infected persons, (b) meat inspection,
cysticercosis caused by T. solium is a far more important (c) health education, and (d) adequate sewage treatment
public health problem than human taeniasis (4). and disposal (1, 4). Early detection and early treatment of
T. so/ium cases is essential to prevent human cysticercosis.
Hosts of infection Effective drugs (e.g., praziquantel and niclosamide) are
T. saginata and T. solium pass their life cycles in two available for the treatment of these infections. Surgical
hosts. In man, the adult parasites live in the small intestine. removal of symptom-producing cysts is indicated although
HYDATID DISEASE
reduction in the quality and yield of meat, milk and wool Prevention and control
and condemnation of offal are also very great (4). Hydatid (a) Preventing dogs from gaining access to raw offal at
disease is an occupational disease of certain groups, e.g., slaughter houses and on farms, and to dead animals : this
shepherds and their families in endemic areas ~nd shoe- involves control of slaughter houses, proper meat inspection
makers. and destruction of infected viscera.
Mode of transmission (b) Control of dogs : This involves elimination of stray
dogs, drastic reduction of dog population, an effective dog-
Human infection occurs by ingestion of the eggs of registration system; surveillance of dogs based on periodic
Echinococcus inadvertently with food, unwashed vegetables stool examinations after administration of a teanifuge such
or water contaminated with faeces from infected dogs. as arecoline hydrobromide, followed by the isolation and
Infection can also take place while handling or playing with treatment of infected animals with praziquantel (6). A single
infected dogs, e.g., hand to mouth transfer of eggs, or by oral dose of 5 mg/kg of body weight will remove all adult
inhalation of dust contaminated with infected eggs. The worms from the dogs.
disease is not directly transmissible from person to person.
(c) Health education of the public particularly butchers,
The disease is maintained in the "dog-sheep" cycle. dog owners, animal breeders and shepherds is the basis of
Other animal combinations may also be involved, e.g., dog- effective prevention (2).
goat, dog-cattle, and dog-camel. Carnivores get infected by
eating viscera containing hydatid cysts. The disease is not References
directly transmissible from one intermediate host to another. 1. Matossian, R.M. et al (1977). Bull WHO, 55 (4) 499-507.
2. WHO (1979). Tech. Rep. Ser., No. 637.
Incubation period 3. Reddy, C.R.R.M. et al (1968). Jnd. J. Med. Res. 56: 1205-1220.
Variable, from months to years depending upon the 4. WHO (1974). WHO Chr. 28 (3) 110.
number and location of cysts and how rapidly they grow. 5. Rana, U.V.S. et al (1986). J. Com. Dis., 18 (2) 116-119.
6. Gammell, M.A. (1986). WHOBul/64 (3) 333-339.
Clinical features 7. Jawetz, Melnick and Adelberg's Medical Microbiology (2014), 26th
Ed., A Lange Publication.
In man, symptoms of hydatid disease are usually
manifested several years after exposure. The cysts grow
slowly from 5 to 20 years before they are diagnosed. The LEISHMANIASIS ·
size of the cyst may vary from a pinhead to that of a small
football. It has been estimated that more than 70 per cent of Leishmaniasis are a group of protozoa! diseases caused
the cysts become located in the right lobe of the liver, and by parasites of the genus Leishmania, and transmitted to
the rest in lungs, brain, peritoneum, long bones and kidney. man by the bite of female phlebotomine sandfly. They are
The cysts are filled with watery fluid and contain a large responsible for various syndromes in humans kala-azar or
number of tapeworm heads. If the cyst ruptures, the brood visceral leishmaniasis (VL), cutaneous leishmaniasis (CL),
capsules can spill out of the cyst, metastasize to other sites muco-cutaneous leishmaniasis (MCL), anthroponotic
and develops into a hydatid, thus ingestion of a single egg cutaneous leishmaniasis (ACL), zoonotic cutaneous
can give rise to several hydatid cysts, each containing leishmaniasis (ZCL), post-kala-azar dermal leishmaniasis
several brood capsules (7). (PKDL), etc (1). The visceral type of disease, kala-azar, is
still an important disease in India. The majority of the
Cysts of small size are generally asymptomatic. Large leishmaniasis are zoonoses involving wild or domestic
cysts, however, cause pressure symptoms (e.g., jaundice in mammals (rodents, canines). Some forms (e.g., Indian kala-
liver cysts). In vital organs they may cause severe symptoms azar) are considered to be nonzoonotic infections (2).
and death.
Problem statement
Diagnosis
(a) Clinical : Based on the history of residence in an WORLD
endemic area, close association with dogs and the presence Leishmaniasis is endemic in many countries in tropical
of a slowly growing cystic tumour. (b) X-ray : A plain X-ray and subtropical regions, including Africa, Central and South
permits the location of the cyst. Modern techniques of Americas, Asia and the Me.diterranean region.
diagnosis include ultrasonography and CAT scan. More than 90 per cent of all cases of cutaneous
(c) Serological : Serological tests with a high degree of leishmaniasis occur in Afghanistan, Algeria, Brazil,
sensitivity and specificity have been introduced such as the Colombia, the Islamic Republic of Iran, Peru, Saudi Arabia
indirect immunofluorescent test. ELISA is regarded as a and the Syrian Arab Republic. More than 90 per cent of all
relatively simple method with a high sensitivity superior to cases of mucosa! leishmaniasis occur in Brazil, Ethiopia,
that of some other serological procedures (2). The Peru and Bolivia (3).
intradermal (Casoni) test is still in wide use, since it is simple
to perform. This test often lacks specificity (2). About 200,000-400,000 cases of kala-azar (visceral
leishmaniasis) are reported annually worldwide. Six
Treatment countries, namely India, Bangladesh, Brazil, Nepal,
Ethiopia, South Sudan and Sudan account for 90 per cent of
There is no specific treatment excepting surgical removal the global incidence. Within countries, kala-azar occurs
of cysts which is not without considerable risk in as much as among poorest communities. In SEAR, an estimated 147
the accidental penetration of one of the cysts can lead to million people in Bangladesh, India and Nepal are at risk of
anaphylactic shock which may prove fatal. kala-azar, largely in rural communities. The disease is
Mebendazole (Vermox) has been tried and found very endemic in 52 districts in India, 12 districts in Nepal and 45
effective in mice. It may well become the drug of choice. districts in Bangladesh (3).
LEISHMANIAS!S
Kala-azar situation is worsening due to the occurrence of lack of waste management, open sewerage) may increase
asymptomatic cases, post-kala-azar dermal leishmaniasis sandfly breeding and resting sites, as well as their access to
(PKDL), undernutrition, and kala-azar/HIV coinfection. humans. Sandflies are attracted to crowded housing as these
Case fatality rate has decreased perhaps due to improved provide a good source of blood-meal. Human behaviour,
case management in endemic countries. such as sleeping outside or on the ground, may increase risk.
As a disease it more often debilitate than kills, and makes
INDIA people become dependants on others; (e) MALNUTRITION:
Kala-azar is endemic in 52 districts in Bihar (31), Diets lacking protein-energy; iron, vitamin A and
Jharkhand (4), West Bengal (11) and Uttar Pradesh (4). zinc increases the risk that an infection will progress to kala-
About 130 million population is at risk of the disease. The azar (3). (f) OCCUPATION: The disease strongly associates
present situation is shown in Table 1. While both cutaneous with occupation. People who work in various farming
(ZCL and ACL) and visceral (VL) disease occur in India, practices, forestry, mining and fishing have a great risk of
kala-azar is by far the most important leishmaniasis in being bitten by sandflies. (g) IMMUNITY : Recovery from
India (4). kala-azar and oriental sore gives a lasting immunity. During
the active phase of kala-azar, there is impairment of cell
mediated immunity, this is reflected in the negative skin
TABLE 1 reaction to leishmanin test.
State-wise Kala-azar cases and deaths in India
Environmental factors
'.2011 : 201z,. : c ' · J~:~ c: J (a) ALTITUDE : Kala-azar is mostly confined to the
·:.cc!iSes· :Deaths Clises Deat}is Cases 'Deaths plains; it does not occur in altitudes over 2000 feet (600
Bihar 25,222 76 16,036 27 10,730 17 metres). (b) SEASON : In the past epidemics, two peaks,
West Bengal 1,962 0 995 0 595 0 one in November and another in March-April were
Utta~ Pradesh 11 1 5 0 11 1
reported. Generally there is high prevalence during and after
rains. (c) CLIMATE CHANGES : Kala-azar is climate
Jharkhand 5,960 3 3,535 1 2,515 0 sensitive, and is strongly affected by changes in rainfall,
Delhi 19 0 11 0 6 0 temperature and humidity. Global warming and land
Assam 5 0 6 0 4 0 degradation together affect the epidemiology of kala-azar in
many ways. It can · have strong effects on vector and
jindia 33,187 80 20,600 29 3,869 20
reservoir hosts by altering their distribution and influence
Source: (4) their survival. Drought famine and flood resulting from
climate changes can lead to massive displacement and
Epidemiological determinants migration of people to areas with transmission of kala-azar,
and poor nutrition could compromise their immunity (3).
Agent factors (d) RURAL AREAS : The disease is generally confined to
(a) AGENTS : The leishmania are intracellular parasites. rural areas, where conditions for the breeding of sandflies
They infect and divide within macrophages. At least nineteen readily exist compared to urban areas. (e) VECTORS : In
different leishmania parasites have been associated with India, P. argentipes is a proven vector of kala-azar.
human infection. Further, the majority of these offer no cross Cutaneous leishmaniasis is transmitted by P. papatasi and
immunity of one against the other (5). Leishmania donovani P. sergenti. Sandflies breed in cracks and crevices in the soil
is the causative agent of kala-azar (VL); L. tropica is the and buildings, tree holes, caves etc. Overcrowding,
causative agent of cutaneous leishmaniasis (oriental sore); ill-ventilation and accumulation of organic matter in
and, L. braziliensis is the causative agent of muco-cutaneous the environment facilitate transmission. Their habits
leishmaniasis. But this distinction is not absolute; visceral are primarily nocturnal. Only the females bite.
forms may produce cutaneous lesions, and cutaneous forms (f) DEVELOPMENT PROJECTS Ironically many
may visceralize (6). The life cycle is completed in two development projects are exposing more people to
different hosts - a vertebrate and an insect; in the former, it leishmaniasis. Forest clearing, and cultivation projects, large
occurs in an amastigote form (called "leishmania bodies") water resource schemes, and colonization and resettlement
and in the latter as a flagellated promastigote. programmes are bringing human beings into areas of high
(b) RESERVOIRS OF INFECTION : There is a variety of vector and reservoir concentration (3).
animal reservoirs, e.g., dogs, jackals, foxes, rodents and
other mammals. Indian kala-azar is considered to be a non- Mode of transmission
zoonotic infection with man as the sole reservoir. This In India, Kala-azar is transmitted from person to person
assumption is based largely on the absence of evidence (7). by the bite of the female phlebotomine sandfly, P. argentipes
which is a highly anthrophilic species. Transmission may
Host factors also take place by contamination of the bite wound or by
(a) AGE: Kala-azar can occur in all age groups including contact when the insect is crushed during the act of feeding.
infants below the age of one year. In India, the peak age is Cutaneous leishmaniasis is transmitted by P. papatasi and
5 to 9 years (1). (b) SEX: Males are affected twice as often as P. sergenti.
females. (c) POPULATION MOVEMENT : Movement of After an infective blood meal, the sandfly becomes
population (migrants, labourers, tourists) between endemic infective in 6 to 9 days (extrinsic incubation period). This is
and non-endemic areas can result in the spread of infection. the time required for the development of the parasite in the
(d) SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS: Kala-azar usually strikes insect vector. Transmission of kala-azar has also been
the poorest of the poor. Poverty increases the risk for kala- recorded ·by blood transfusion (6), and is also possible by
azar. Poor housing and domestic sanitary conditions (e.g. contaminated syringes and needles (8).
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Incubation period indirect fluorescent antibody test (IFAT) are considered most
The incubation period in man is quite variable, generally suitable (9). Being a simple test where blood samples can be
1 to 4 months; range is 10 days to 2 years. collected on a filter paper strip and examined at leisure in
laboratory, the ELISA test has a wide potential both for
Clinical features diagnosis as well as for epidemiological field surveys.
The rk39 - rapid diagnostic test is based on the
1. Kala-azar (VL) recombinant k 39 protein. It is an epitope apparently
The classical features of kala-azar are fever, conserved on amastigotes of Leishmania species that cause
splenomegaly and hepatomegaly accompanied by anaemia visceral infection. The test is simple to perform and yields
and weight-loss. A ·family history of the disease is also result within five minutes. However, the test should not be
common. Darkening of the skin of the face, hands, feet and used in Kala-azar relapse cases, Kala-azar reinfection cases
abdomen is common in India (kala-azar black sickness). and Kala-azar and HIV co-infection cases.
Atypical features of the disease (e.g., lymphadenopathy) Kala-azar dipstick test strip is a membrane, pre-coated
may also occur. Kala-azar, if left untreated, has a high with a recombinant VL antigen on the test line region and
mortality. chicken anti-protein A on the control line region. It is a
PKDL : Post-kala-azar dermal leishmaniasis, caused by immunochromatographic assay for qualitative detection of
L. donovani, is common in India. It appears one to several antibodies to L. donovani in human serum. During testing
years after apparent cure of kala-azar. The lesions consist of the serum sample reacts with the dye conjugate. The mixture
multiple nodular infiltrations of the skin, usually without then migrates upwards on the membrane
ulceration. Parasites are numerous in the lesion. chromatographically by capillary action to react with rk39
antigen on the membrane and generates a red line. Presence
2. Cutaneous leishmaniasis of this red line indicates a positive result while its absence
Several forms of cutaneous leishmaniasis have been indicates a negative result.
described Anthroponotic or urban cutaneous leishmaniasis Regardless of the presence of antibody to VL antigen, as
(ACL), Zoonotic or rural cutaneous leishmaniasis (ZCL), the mixture continues to migrate across the membrane to the
Diffuse cutaneous leishmaniasis (DCL), etc (1). The disease immobilized chicken antiprotien A region, a red line at the
may be mistaken for leprosy. The agent is restricted to skin. control line will always appear. The presence of this red line
The disease is characterized by painful ulcers in the parts of serves as a verification for sufficient sample volume and
the body exposed to sandfly bites (e.g., legs, arms or face) proper flow, and is a control for the reagent. If no lines
reducing the victim's ability to work. · appear at control and test line areas, the test is invalid. The
3. Muco-cutaneous leishmaniasis test is also invalid if no control line appears, even though a
test line is seen (9).
Ulcers similar to the oriental sore (CL) appear around the
margins of mouth and nose. It can mutilate the face so badly 4. Leishmanin (Montenegro) test
that victims may become social outcasts.
This test is based on skin reaction. Leishmanin is a
Laboratory diagnosis preparation of 106 per ml washed promastigotes of
leishmania, suspended in 0.5 per cent phenol saline or
1. Parasitological diagnosis merthiolate. Sterile and standardized preparations are
The demonstration of the parasite LD bodies in the available commercially. An intradermal injection of 0.1 ml
aspirates of the spleen, liver, bone marrow, lymph nodes or on the flexor surface of the forearm is given and examined
in the skin (in the case of CL) is the only way to confirm VL after 48 to 72 hours. Induration is measured and
or CL conclusively. The parasite must be isolated in culture recorded. An induration of 5 mm or more is considered
to confirm the identity of the parasite. positive. The test is usually positive 4 to 6 weeks after ·
onset in the case of CL and MCL. It is usually negative in
2. Aldehyde test the active phase of kala-azar and becomes positive in
75 per cent patients within one year of recovery. The test is
The aldehyde test of Napier is a simple test widely used in not species-specific. The test remains a valuable tool for
India for the diagnosis of kala-azar. 1 to 2 ml of serum from distinguishing immune from non-immune subjects. From
a case of kala-azar is taken and a drop or two of 40 per cent this information, it may be possible to infer the endemicity
formalin is added. A positive test is indicated by jellification or epidemicity of the infection and to identify groups at risk
to milk-white opacity like the white of a hard-boiled egg so
of infection (9).
that in ordinary light newsprint is invisible through it. If it
occurs within 2 to 20 minutes, it is said to be strongly 5. Haematological findings
positive. Reaction after 30 minutes is not significant. The
test usually becomes positive 2 to 3 months after onset of These include progressive leucopenia, anaemia and
the disease, and reverts to negative 6 months after cure. reversed albumin-globulin ratio, with greatly increased IgG.
Therefore, this test is good for surveillance but not for The WBC:RBC ratio is 1:1500 or even 1:2000 (normal
diagnosis. The test is non-specific and demands the use of 1:750). ESR is increased.
venous blood. Further, the test is positive in many other ICMR has developed a new kit to diagnose Kala-azar,
chronic infections in which albumin to globulin ratio is which was launched on 3rd Sept. 2014. The test needs the
reversed. sample of urine or oral fluid of the subject in question. It is
mixed with the given solution in the 'tube' - part of the kit.
3. Serological tests Dip the stipulated strip in the solution thus created. Those
Of the numerous serological tests available, Direct infected would get two or one red bond on the strip once'it
Aggutination test (DAT), rk39 dipstick test, ELISA and the comes out. Absence of the red bond means negative result.
LEISHMAN IASIS
2. SSG and Miltefosine failure 6. Kager, P.A. (1988). Med Int., 54: 2235 (June 88).
· 7. Sanyal, R.K. et al (1979). J. Comm Dis, 11(4)149-169.
- Liposomal Amphotericin B (when final results are
8. WHO (2010),lnternational travel and Health, 2010.
available with proven efficacy and safety) 9. Govt. of India (2010), Guidelines of Ka/a-azar, Division of National
Treatment of PKDL : SSG in usual dosage for kala- Vector Borne Disease Control Programme, Ministry of Health and
azar could be given for 120 days. Family Welfare, New Delhi.
10. WHO, TDR (2010), Indicators for Monitoring and Evaluation of Kala-
- Repeated 3-4 courses of Amphotericin B can be azar Elimination Programme, Aug. 2010, for Bangladesh, India and
given in patients failing SSG treatment. Nepal.
The patient, in either case should be examined 3 and 12 11. Internet (2006) : National Vector Disease Control Programme, DGHS,
Ministry of Health and Family W<;ilfare, New Delhi.
months after the treatment course to detect any relapse.
A new drug namely "Liposomal Amphotericin B" in dose V. SURFACE INFECTIONS
of 10 mg, administered intravenously as a single dose
therapy has been introduced in the Kala-azar therapy. It
will help. reduce human reservior as it cures the patient
with a single shot. WHO has agreed to supply the drug free
of cost.
I TRACHOMA
Trachoma is a chronic infectious disease of the
- conjunctiva and cornea, caused by Chlamydia trachomatis,
Animal reservoirs but other pathogenic microorganisms often contribute to the
If animal reservoirs (e.g., dogs) are involved, appropriate disease. Trachoma inflammation may undergo spontaneous
control measures against them should be undertaken .. In resolution or may progress to conjunctiva! scarring which
many endemic countries, extensive dog and rodent control can cause inward deviation of eyelashes (trichiasis) or of the
programmes have contributed greatly to the reduction in the lid margin (entropion). The abrasion of the cornea by
number of human cases. eyelashes frequently result in corneal ulceration, followed by
scarring and visual loss.
2. Sandfly control
From the public health point of view, trachoma is
The application of residual insecticides has proved classified as blinding and non-blinding (1). A community
effective in the control of sandflies. DDT is the first choice with blinding trachoma can be recognized by the presence of
since the vector of kala-azar, P. argentipes is susceptible to persons with lesions such as enfropion, trichiasis and
DDT. (P. papatasi in north Bihar has been shown to be corneal ulcers. It is the blinding trachoma that requires
resistant to DDT, but fortunately, it is not the vector of kala- urgent control measures. Non-blinding trachoma often
azar in India). Insecticide spraying should be undertaken in becomes blinding trachoma when other ocular pathogens
human dwellings, animal shelters and all other resting places interact synergistically and enhance the risk of damage to
upto a height of 6 feet (2 metres) from floor level. DDT (two
eye sight (2).
rounds per year) at the rate of 1-2 g per sq. metre is
considered sufficient to control transmission. Spraying Diagnosis
should be preceded and followed by an assessment of
susceptibility. Any sign of resistance in vector should lead to In epidemiological studies, more stress is now put on the
an immediate change in insecticide. BHC should be kept as upper tarsal conjunctiva as a convenient index of
a second line of defence. trachomatous inflammation in the eye as a whole (2). For
Spraying should be repeated at regular intervals to keep the purpose of diagnosis in the field, cases must have at least
down the density of sandflies. For long-lasting results, 2 of the following diagnostic criteria (3).
insecticidal spraying should be combined with sanitation a. follicles on the upper tarsal conjunctiva
measures, viz elimination of breeding places (e.g., cracks in b. limbal follicles or their sequelae, Herbert's pits
mud or stone walls, rodent burrows, removal of firewood,
bricks or rubbish around houses), location of cattle sheds c. typical conjunctiva! scarring (trichiasis, entropion)
and poultry at a fair distance from human dwellings, and d. vascular pannus, most marked at the superior
improvement of housing and general sanitation. limb us
{b) Selective treatment 2. WHO (1984). Strategies for the prevention of blindness in National
Programmes. A primary health care approach.
In communities with a low to medium prevalence, 3. WHO (1962). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 234.
treatment should be applied to individuals by case finding 4. WHO (2012), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 17, 27th April,
rather than by community-wide coverage, the principals of 2012.
treatment remaining the same. For the selective treatment to 5. WHO (1996), World Health Report 1996, fighting disease, Fostering
be effective, the whole population at risk must be screened for development, Report of the Director General, WHO.
6. WHO (1999), Health Situation in the South -East Asia Region 1994-
case finding. 1997, Regional office of SEAR, New Delhi.
7. Govt of India (1992), Present Status of National Programme for control
3. Surgical correction of Blindness (NPCB) 1992, Ophthalmology Section, DGHS, New Delhi.
Antibiotic ointment is just one component of a trachoma 8. Tarizzo, M.L. (1973). Field Methods for the control of Trachoma, WHO,
control programme. Individuals with lid deformities Geneva.
9. Tarizzo, M.L. {1976). World Health, Feb-March, 1976.
(trichiasis, entropion) should be actively sought out, so that 10. WHO (1980). Methods of assessment of avoidable blindness, WHO
necessary surgical procedures can be performed and Offset Pub!. No.54.
followed-up. It has an immediate impact on preventing 11. Dawson, C.R. et al (1981). Guide to Trachoma Control, WHO.
blindness. 12. Govt. of India (1986). Health Information of India, 1986. Director
General of Health Services, Nirman Bhawan, New Delhi.
4. Surveillance
Once control of blinding trachoma has been achieved, .TETANUS
provision must be made to maintain surveillance, which may
be necessary for several years after active inflammatory An acute disease induced by the exotoxin of Clostridium
trachoma has been controlled. Since trachoma is a familial tetani and clinically characterized by muscular rigidity which
disease, the whole family group should be under persists throughout illness punctuated by painful paroxysmal
surveillance. spasms of the voluntary muscles, especially the masseters
5. Health education (trismus or "lock-jaw"), the facial muscles (risus
sardonicus), the muscles of the back and neck
In the long run, most of the antibiotic treatment must be (opisthotonos), and those of the lower limbs and abdomen
carried out by the affected population itself. To do this, the (1). The mortality tends to be very high, varying from 40 to
population needs to be educated. The mothers of young 80 per cent.
children should be the target for health education. Measures of
personal and community hygiene should also be incorporated Problem statement
in programmes of health education. Thus real primary
prevention could only come through health education for the WORLD
total elimination of transmission. This would require a Tetanus is now comparatively rare disease in the
permanent change in the behaviour patterns and in developed countries. Neonatal tetanus (NT) is a killer
environmental factors. The final solution would be the disease, second only to measles among the six target
improvement of living conditions and quality of life of the diseases of the EPI. Even with treatment, the case-fatality
people (10). rate can be as high as 80-90 per cent. It tends to occur in
6. Evaluation areas with poor access to health care, hence it often remains
hidden within the community.
Lastly evaluation. Trachoma control programme must be
evaluated at frequent intervals. The effect of intervention Community surveys have consistently shown that only a
can be judged by the changes in the age-specific rates of small proportion of NT cases are routinely reported to
active trachoma and in the prevention of trichiasis and notifiable disease reporting system in most developing
entropion. countries; and under-reporting is often highest in areas at
highest risk for NT. Because of this low notification
The 28th World Health Assembly in 1975, in a resolution efficiency, WHO makes estimates of annual neonatal tetanus
requested the Director General of WHO "to encourage morbidity and mortality. Estimation methods previously
Member countries to develop national programmes for the used the number of live births, the estimated number of
prevention of blindness especially aimed at the control of infants protected at birth by routine vaccination strategies
trachoma, xerophthalmia, onchocerciasis and other causes". and prevaccination mortality rates based on community
With this came the re-orientation of strategies away from surveys. Estimation methods were updated to account also
single cause prevention, to the adoption of the concept of for the number of infants protected through supplementary
integrated delivery of eye care as part of primary health vaccination and as a result of skilled deliveries.
care. In this context, many countries have now integrated
their trachoma control programmes into National During 2012, a total of 10,392 cases of tetanus and
Programmes for the Prevention of Blindness, to give 4,650 cases of neonatal tetanus were reported to WHO
simultaneous introduction of other specific measures for worldwide (3).
dealing with all causes of avoidable blindness.
INDIA
The trachoma control programme in India which was
launched in 1963 has now been integrated with the National Tetanus is an important endemic infection in India.
Programme for Control of Blindness (see chapter 7, page Behaviours such as hand-washing, delivery practices,
439). The "Health for All by 2000" had set a target of traditional birth customs and interest in immunization, are
reducing the prevalence of blindness to 0.3 per cent (11). all important factors affecting the disease incidence.
Medically under-served areas and livestock raising regions
References are two environments particularly associated with behaviour
1. Dawson, C.R. et al (1975). Bull WHO, 52: 279. conducive to neonatal tetanus.
TETANUS
Since 1983 in India, the nationwide EPI has facilities has been made mandatory. A monthly "nil" report
recommended the provision of 2 doses of tetanus toxoid to is required to be submitted by all hospitals, if no NT case is
all pregnant women during each ·pregnancy (or one booster seen. The cases are reported to the chief medical officer of
dose if <3 years have passed since the previous pregnancy) the concerned district. line lists of the cases are submitted to
to prevent neonatal and maternal tetanus. In addition to enable identification of high risk pockets of areas for specific
immunization, hospital and primary health centres where · interventions.
clean deliveries can be performed have been established
and a cadre of trained ANM and other trained birth Epidemiological determinants
attendants have been developed and deployed to ensure
clean delivery and cord care practices. More recently, under Agent factors
the National Rural Health Mission launched in 2005, the (a) AGENT : Cl. tetani is a gram-positive, anaerobic,
Government of India has provided training to health spore-bearing organism. The spores are terminal and give
workers. The mission also actively encourages institutional the organism a drum-stick appearance. The spores are
deliveries through interventions such as the '::Janani highly resistant to a number of injurious agents, including
Suraksha Yojana". boiling, phenol, cresol and autoclaving for 15 minutes at
These measures have contributed to reducing the burden 120 deg. Centigrade (7). They germinate under anaerobic
of neonatal tetanus (NT) in India considerably. In 2013, conditions and produce a potent exotoxin
about 528 cases of neonatal tetanus were reported in India ("tetanospasmin"). The spores are best destroyed by steam
compared to 11,000 in 1989. However, as the disease is under pressure at 120 deg. C for 20 minutes or by gamma
typically and vastly underreported, the true NT burden in irradiation. (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : The natural
India is likely to be substantially higher than reported habitat of the organism is soil and dust. The bacilli are found
numbers indicate (4). in the intestine of many herbivorous animals, e.g., cattle,
horses, goats and sheep and are excreted in their faeces.
By the end of 2008, India had validated NT elimination
in 15 states/UTs. They are Andhra Pradesh, Chandigarh, The spores survive for years in nature. The bacilli may be
Goa, Haryana, Karnataka, Kerala, laskhadweep, found frequently in the intestine of man without causing ill-
Maharashtra, Puducherry, Punjab, Sikkim, Tamil Nadu and effects. The spores are blown about in dust and may occur in
West Bengal. In June 2008, community-based surveys were a wide variety of situations, including operation theatres.
carried out to assess whether NT had also been eliminated (c) EXOTOXIN: Tetanus bacilli produce a soluble exotoxin.
in the states of Gujarat and Himachal Pradesh (4). It has an astounding lethal toxicity, exceeded only by
botulinum toxin. The lethal dose for a 70 kg man is about
The preventive measures in the areas of high risk are 0 .1 mg (8). The toxin acts on 4 areas of the nervous system :
being accelerated to reduce the number of cases. In areas (a) the motor end plates in skeletal system (b) the spinal
considered at low risk, the surveillance system is being cord (c) the brain, and (d) the sympathetic system (7). Its
sensitized to ensure that no case is missed. A district principal action is to block inhibition of spinal reflexes (8).
classification has, therefore, been suggested, so that area- (d) PERIOD OF COMMUNICABILITY : None. Not
specific action oriented measures, could be taken and the transmitted from person to person.
progress monitored.
Districts are being classified into three categories Host factors
depending on NT incidence rates, immunization coverage (a) AGE : Commonly, tetanus is a disease of the active
levels in pregnant women with two doses or a booster dose age (5 to 40 years). This period predisposes to all kinds of
of tetanus toxoid vaccine, and proportion of clean deliveries trauma and therefore, the risk of acquiring the disease is
by trained personnel (6). pretty high. Tetanus occurring in the new-born is known as
Neonatal tetanus elimination {Classification of districts) "neonatal tetanus". Infants typically contact the disease at
birth, when delivered in non-aseptic conditions - especially
NT high risk : Rate > 1/1000 live births
when the umbilical cord is cut with unclean instruments or
or TT 2 coverage < 70%
or Attended deliveries < 50%
when the umbilical stump is dressed with ashes, soil or
cowdung. {b) SEX : Although a higher incidence is found in
NT control: Rate < 1/1000 live births males, females are more exposed to the risk of tetanus,
and TT 2 coverage > 70% especially during delivery or abortion leading to "puerperal
and Attended deliveries > 50% tetanus". Males appear to be more sensitive to tetanus toxin
NT elimination : Rate < 0.1/1000 live births than females (9). (c) OCCUPATION : Agricultural workers
and TT 2 coverage > 90% are at special risk because of their contact with soil.
and attended deliveries > 75% {d) RURAL-URBAN DIFFERENCES : The incidence of
Hospital records show a major male preponderance of tetanus is much lower in urban than in rural areas. Within
cases. Since there is no biological reason why male infants the urban areas, there may be vast differences in the
should be more susceptible, it is in all likelihood, due to the incidence of tetanus. For example, it was observed in one
male children being brought to the health facilities more town that tetanus was more frequent on the outskirts where
frequently. For purpose of classification of districts with NT floors were earthen and animals lived close to human
risk, the male bias is taken into account. The total number of beings, than in the centre of the town where there were
cases of NT for a district is considered to be two times the paved and mosaic floors (10). (e) IMMUNITY : No age is
number of reported male cases (6). immune unless protected by previous immunization. The
immunity resulting from 2 injections of tetanus toxoid is
NT has a marked seasonal incidence in India. More than highly effective and lasts for several years. As a general rule,
50 per cent of the total annual cases of NT occur in the patients who have recovered from tetanus must be actively
month of July, August and September. immunized, because the amounts of toxin responsible for
Reporting of NT cases by hospitals and other treatment the disease in man do not stimulate protective immunity (8).
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Immunity lasting for a few weeks (less than 6 months) can be PREVENTION
transferred to the baby, if the mother is immunized during
pregnancy or if she already has a high level of immunity at 1. Active immunization (13, 14, 15)
the time she becomes pregnant. Tetanus is one disease in Tetanus is best prevented by active immunization with
which herd immunity does not protect the individual. tetanus toxoid. It stimulates the production of the protective
antitoxin. The aim should be to vaccinate the entire
Environmental and social factors community and ensure a protective level of antitoxin
Tetanus is a positive environmental hazard (11). Its approximately 0.01 IU/ml serum throughout life. All persons
occurrence depends upon man's physical and ecological should be immunized regardless of age.
surroundings - the soil, agriculture, animal husbandry - and Two preparations are available for active immunization
not on the presence or absence of infection in the
population. The environmental factors are compounded by a. Combined vaccine - DPT
social factors such as unhygienic customs and habits (e.g:, b. Monovalent vaccines
application of dust or animal dung to wounds); unhygienic i) Plain or fluid (formal) toxoid
delivery practices (e.g., using unsterilized instruments for
cutting the umbilical cord); ignorance of infection and lack ii) Tetanus vaccine, adsorbed (PTAP, APT)
of primary health care services. In the developed countries,
urbanization, industrialization and mechanization of a. COMBINED VACCINE
agriculture have interfered with the normal process of Tetanus vaccine is offered routinely to infants (Expanded
distribution of CI. tetani and have reduced the morbidity Immunization Programme} in combination with diphtheria
rate, as has occurred, for example in UK, l)SA and Germany vaccine and killed B. pertussis organisms as DPT vaccine.
during the last 40 years (9). According to the National Immunization Schedule (see page
123), the primary course of immunization consists of 3 doses
Mode of transmission of DPT, at intervals of 4-8 weeks, starting at 6 weeks of age,
Infection is acquired by contamination of wounds with followed by a booster at 18 months of age, and a second
tetanus spores. The range of injuries and accidents which booster (Only OT} at 5-6 years of age and a third booster
may lead to tetanus comprise a trivial pin prick, skin (Only TT) after 10 years of age.
abrasion, puncture wounds, burns, human bites, animal
bites and stings, unsterile surgery, intra-uterine death, bowel b. MONOVALENT VACCINES
surgery, dental extractions, injections, unsterile division of Purified tetanus toxoid (adsorbed) has largely supplanted
umbilical cord, compound fractures, otitis media, chronic plain toxoid because it stimulates a higher and longer-
skin ulcers, eye infections, and gangrenous limbs (8). lasting immunity response than plain toxoid (16). However,
The sequence of events are : introduction of spores, the latter may be employed for purposes of booster injection
germination and elaboration of the exotoxin and binding to when rapid protection is indicated. ·
the receptor. A primary course of immunization consists of two doses
of tetanus toxoid adsorbed (each dose 0.5 ml, injected into
Incubation period the arm) given at intervals of 1-2 months. The longer the
The incubation period is usually 6 to 10 days. However, it intervals between the two doses, the better is the immune
may be as short as one day or as long as several months (8). response. The first booster dose (the third in order) should
Long incubation is probably explained by the spores lying be given a year after the initial two doses. The opinion was
dormant in the wounds. Incubation is also prolonged by expressed that no more than one additional booster dose
prophylaxis (8). (a total of 4 doses altogether) given 5 years after the third
dose is required in adults (including pregnant women) in
Types of tetanus developing countries (17). Frequent boosters must be
avoided.
(a) TRAUMATIC : Trauma is a major and important cause
of tetanus. Sometimes tetanus may result from most trivial Reactions following the injections of tetanus toxoid are
or even unnoticed wounds. (b) PUERPERAL : Tetanus uncommon. They are less likely to occur with a refined and
follows abortion more frequently than a normal labour. A adsorbed toxoid such as Purified Tetanus Toxoid
post-abortal uterus is a favourable site for the germination (Aluminium Phosphate Adsorbed). However, in persons
of tetanus spores. (c) OTOGENIC: Ear may be a rare portal giving history of allergy usual precautions should be
of entry. Foreign bodies such as infected pencils, matches, observed. Purified tetanus toxoid should be stored between
and beads may introduce the infection. Otogenic tetanus is a 4 and 10 deg. C. It must. not be allowed to freeze at any
paediatric problem, but cases, may occur in adults also. time.
(d) IDIOPATHIC : In these cases there is no definite history
of sustaining an injury. Some consider it to be the result of 2. Passive immunization (13, 14)
microscopic trauma. Others hold the view that it is due to Temporary protection against tetanus can be provided by
the absorption of tetanus toxin from the intestinal tract. A an injection of human tetanus hyperimmunoglobulin (TIG) or
third view is that the tetanus spores may be inhaled and may ATS. (i) HUMAN TETANUS HYPERIMMUNOGLOBULIN : It
start the infection. (e) TETANUS NEONATORUM: In many is the best prophylactic to use. The dose for all ages is 250 JU.
countries, neonatal tetanus kills about 85 per cent of those It does not cause serum reactions. It gives a longer passive
afflicted (12). The common cause is infection of the protection upto 30 days or more compared with 7-10 days
umbilical stump after birth, the first symptom being seen for horse ATS. Human tetanus lg is now available in India it
about the 7th day. Therefore tetanus is known as "8th day is produced by the Serum Institute of India, Pune. (ii) ATS
disease" in Punjab (10). In any country where hygiene is (EQUINE) : If human antitoxin is not available, equine
poor, neonatal tetanus may be common. antitoxin (anti-tetanus serum or ATS) should be used. The
TETANUS
standard dose is 1500 IU, injected subcutaneously after concentrated on training the traditional birth attendants,
sensitivity testing. ATS gives passive protection for about providing home delivery kits and educating pregnant
7-10 days. Being a foreign protein, ATS is rapidly excreted women about the "three cleans" - clean hands, clean
from the body and there may be very little antibody at the end delivery surface and clean cord care i.e., clean blade for
of 2 weeks. Because of this drawback, ATS may not cover the cutting the cord, clean tie for the cord and no application on
tetanus incubation period in all cases. Horse ATS has other the cord stump. Operational research has shown that
disadvantages too - (i) It causes sensitivity reaction in many training of birth attendants alone can reduce death due to
people because it contains foreign proteins. A person neonatal tetanus by 90 per cent (20).
receiving ATS for the first time may tolerate it well, but there Tetanus toxoid will protect both the mother and her child.
is a possibility that subsequent injections of horse serum may In unimmunized pregnant women, two doses of tetanus
lead to allergic reactions varying in severity from rash to toxoid should be given, the first as early as possible during
anaphylactic shock. It is estimated that the incidence of pregnancy and the second at least a month later and at least
serious systemic reactions to ATS is 5 to 10 per cent of the 3 weeks before delivery. According to the National
persons who receive it. It is well to remember that local tests Immunization Schedule {see page 123), these doses may be
for sensitivity are unreliable as to general sensitivity to horse given between 16-36 weeks of pregnancy, allowing an
serum. (ii) Another drawback of ATS is that it stimulates the interval of 1-2 months between the 2 doses. In previously
formation of antibodies to it and hence a person who has immunized pregnant women, a booster dose is considered
once received ATS tends to rapidly eliminate subsequent sufficient. There is no need for a booster at every consecutive
doses. As such the value of second and subsequent doses of pregnancy, because of the risk of hyper-immunization and
ATS becomes questionable. In practice, therefore, ATS side-effects.
becomes Jess and less reliable as a prophylactic. These
drawbacks have been responsible for the growing In areas where the incidence of neonatal tetanus is high,
unpopularity of ATS as an agent for immediate protection the primary 2-dose course can be extended to all women of
against tetanus. child-bearing age, particularly if the present coverage of
antenatal care is low.
3. Active and .passive immunization In developing countries, the majority of pregnant women
Simultaneous active and passive immunization is widely are not seen antenatally. Since a pregnant woman coming
carried out in non-immune persons. The patient is given for an antenatal visit may in fact never return again,
1500 units of ATS or 250 units of Human lg in one arm, and immunization should be given regardless of the month of
0.5 ml of adsorbed tetanus toxoid (PTAP or APT) into the pregnancy as there is no evidence to suggest that tetanus
other arm or gluteal region. This should be followed 6 weeks toxoids are dangerous or harmful to the foetus. The golden
later by another dose of 0.5 ml of tetanus toxoid, and a third rule is that no pregnant mother should be denied even one -.
dose one year later. The purpose of antitoxin is for dose of tetanus toxoid if she is seen late in pregnancy.
immediate temporary protection, and the purpose of toxoid The infants born to the mothers who have not previously
is for long-lasting protection. received 2-doses of tetanus toxoid are exposed to the risk of
neonatal tetanus. They can be protected by injection of
4. Antibiotics antitoxin (heterologous serum, 750 JU), if it is administered
Active immunization with tetanus toxoid is the ideal within 6 hours of birth.
method of tetanus prophylaxis, but it is of no immediate
avail to a person who is non-immune and has sustained Prevention of tetanus after injury (15)
injury. ATS as an agent for immediate protection against All wounds must be thoroughly cleaned soon after injury
tetanus has its drawbacks. For these reasons, antibiotics are - removal of foreign bodies, soil, dust, necrotic tissue. This
indicated in the prophylaxis against tetanus. A single procedure will abolish anaerobic conditions which favour
intramuscular injection of 1.2 mega units of a long-acting germination of tetanus spores.
penicillin {e.g., benzathine penicillin) will provide a
sustained concentration of the drug for 3 to 4 weeks, which A useful scheme for the prevention of tetanus in the
is sufficient to kill any vegetative forms of tetanus bacilli that wounded is given in Fig. 1.
may emerge from the sporulating stage. Penicillin has no When ATS is given, adrenaline solution 1 in 1000 for
effect on tetanus spores. For patients who are sensitive to intramuscular injection in the dosage of 0.5 to 1 ml and
penicillin, a 7-day course of erythromycin estolate 500 mg hydrocortisone 100 mg for intravenous injection must be
6-hourly by mouth will kill vegetative forms of kept available in case of a generalized anaphylactoid
Cl. tetani but not spores. Antibiotics should be given as soon reaction (14). A test dose of ATS (0.1 ml in a tuberculin
as possible after an injury, before a lethal dose of toxin is syringe) should be given subcutaneously {not intradermally)
produced in the wound, which may be as soon as 6 hours and the patient observed carefully {not casually) at least for
after injury. Antibiotic prophylaxis should not be relied upon half an hour for any evidence of general reaction (not only
for patients seen later than 6 hours after injury. Moreover, it local reaction), e.g., alteration in pulse, fall in blood
is not certain whether the antibiotic can reach the bacilli, if pressure, dyspnoea and distress. If there is reaction, the rest
there is dead tissue present in the wound. Therefore, of the antitoxin should be given in gradually increasing
antibiotic alone is ineffective in the prevention of tetanus; it fractions after treatment with adrenaline. In patients with
is not a substitute to immunization. history of allergy, e.g., asthma, eczema, food or drug
idiosyncracy, the above test should be preceded by a dose of
Prevention of neonatal tetanus (18, 19) 0.05 ml of 1 in 10 dilution of the ATS. If there is reaction,
Neonatal tetanus is well controlled in some industrialized ATS should be withheld.
countries through clean delivery practices alone. Over the Lastly, it should be pointed out that tetanus may
last decade, most programmes in developing countries have occasionally occur inspite of active or passive immunization
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
I
Immunity category Treatment Immunity category Treatment·
A Nothing more required A Nothing more required
B Toxoid 1 dose B Toxoid 1 dose
c Toxoid 1 dose c Toxoid 1 dose + Human Tet. lg.
D Toxoid complete course D Toxoid complete course +
Human Tet. lg
A= Has had a complete course of toxoid or a booster dose within the past 5 years.
B= Has had a complete course of toxoid or a booster dose more than 5 years ago and less than 10 years ago.
C= Has had a complete course of toxoid or a booster dose more than 10 years ago.
D= Has not had a complete course of toxoid or immunity status is unknown.
FIG. 1
Recommendations for prevention of tetanus in the wounded
Although significant progress has been made in controlling In view of the changing trends in leprosy, the Director
the disease and reducing the disease burden, much remains General of WHO placed the management of the Global
to be done in order to sustain the gains and further reduce the Leprosy Programme under the Regional Director, SEAR,
impact of the disease, especially the burden due to the considering that this region has the highest burden of
physical, mental and socio-economic consequences of disease globally. The office and staff of the Global Leprosy
leprosy on persons affected and their families. There is a Programme moved from Geneva to New Delhi on July 1st
growing need to develop more effective tools and procedures 2005. The WHO has evolved the Global Strategy for further
for early recognition and management of leprosy reactions reducing the leprosy burden and sustaining leprosy control
and nerve damage. Most programmes need to initiate activities 2010-2015.
activities to improve the quality of life of persons affected by
leprosy through prevention of disability and community- The WHO enhanced global strategy for further
based rehabilitation measures. One of the long-term needs is reducing the disease burden due to leprosy
to develop reliable diagnostic tests for early diagnosis and an (Plan Period : 2011-2015) (4) :
effective vaccine for the prevention of leprosy.
The main principles of leprosy control, based on timely
WHO has been regularly collecting data on several detection of new· cases and their treatment with effective
indicators from various WHO regions and member states. chemotherapy in the form of multidrug therapy, will not
The indicators and reported data is as follows (3) : change over the coming years. The emphasis will remain on
(1) 215,656 new cases of leprosy were detected during sustaining the provisions for quality patient care that are
2013, and the registered prevalence at the beginning of equitably distributed, affordable and easily accessible.
2014 was 180,618 cases; The number of new cases Currently, there is no new technological breakthrough or
detected during 2013 in the 14 countries that reported development that warrant any drastic changes to the
;;>:1000 new cases accounted for 95 per cent of all new strategy for leprosy control that is in place. However, there is
cases; an urgent need to make decisive changes in the organization
(2) Among new cases detected in 2013, the proportion of of leprosy control, in the attitude of health care providers
multibacillary cases of leprosy was about 71.68 per cent; and beneficiaries, and in the working arrangements between
in South East Asia Region (SEAR) it ranged from 43.9 all partners.
per cent in Bangladesh to 83.4 per cent in Indonesia. It is proposed to introduce the global target of reducing
(3) The proportion of females among newly detected cases the rate of new cases with grade-2 disabilities per 100,000
in 2013 was 44.26 per cent. In SEAR it ranged from 40.8 population by at least 35 per cent by the end of 2015,
per cent in Sri Lanka to 16. 7 per cent in Timar Leste; compared to the baseline at the end of 2010 (5).
(4) The proportion of children below 15 years was 10.96 per
cent. In SEAR it ranged from 4.1 per cent in Nepal to INDIA
11.9 per cent in Indonesia; Leprosy is widely prevalent in India. Although the disease
(5) The proportion of new cases with grade-2 disability was is present throughout the country, the distribution is uneven.
7 .36 per cent. In SEAR it ranged from 2. 7 per cent in Nepal After introduction of MDT in the country, the recorded
to 14.3 per cent in Myanmar. Annually, around 13,289 leprosy case load has come down from 57.6 cases per
new cases with grade-2 disability are detected globally. 10,000 population in 1981 to less than one case per 10,000
(6) The number of relapses remained low at about 0.88 per population at national level in December 2005, arid the
cent. country achieved the goal of leprosy elimination at national
The South East Asia Region accounts for about 64.44 per level.
cent of the global prevalence at the beginning of 2014, and Based on the reports received from the states/UTs for the
72.05 per cent of all new detected cases during 2013. The year 2013-2014, the current leprosy situation in the country
scenario in detail is as shown in Table 1. is as follows (6) :
TABLE 1
Leprosy situation in SEAR countries at the beginning of 2014
A total of 1.27 lac new cases were detected during the year many as 2 to 7 billion were estimated in one gram of
2013-14, which gives annual new case detection rate leproma (7). Numerous antigens (more than 20) have been
{ANCDR) of 9.98 per lac population, a decrease of 4.7 per detected in M. /eprae by electrophoretic techniques. Some
cent from 2012-13. A total of 0.86 lac cases were on record of these are shared by those of pathogenic and non-
as on 1st April 2014, giving a prevalence rate (PR) of 0.68 per pathogenic mycobacteria, e.g., BCG, M. smegmatis,
10,000 population. The detailed information on new leprosy M. vaccae, M. tuberculosis, etc. Most interesting of these
cases detected during 2013-14 indicates the proportion of antigens is the phenolic glycolipid (PGL) which may be the
multibacillary cases was 51.48 per cent, proportion of female specific M. leprae antigen. Recent years have witnessed the
cases was 36.91 per cent, child case proportion was 9.49 per successful transmission of M. leprae to some experimental
cent (which gives the child case rate of 0.95 per lac animals. Currently large quantities of M. leprae are being
population), 4.14 per cent patients were with grade-II produced by multiplication in the 9-banded armadillo and
deformity, giving deformity rate of 0.413 per lac population). nude mouse. Despite repeated claims, M. leprae has not yet
33 states/UTs had already achieved the level of leprosy been conclusively shown to grow in artificial medium (8). It
elimination Le. PR of less than 1 case per 10,000 is perhaps mainly for this reason that progress in research
population. Chhattisgarh and Dadra & Nagar Haveli has PR has lagged behind than that of many other diseases.
of 2-4 per 10,000 population. (b) SOURCE OF INFECTION : It is generally agreed that
As on 31st March 2014, 459 districts out of 657 have multibacillary cases (lepromatous and borderline
ANCDR less than 10 per lac population, 83 districts more lepromatous cases) are the most important source of
than 20 per lac population, and only 18 districts are with infection in the community. The inapparent infections are
more than 50 per lac population {of which 2 are in also source of infection. The role of individuals with
Chhattisgarh, 5 in Gujarat, 2 in Maharashtra, 1 in Dadra & tuberculoid forms of the disease as sources of infection is not
Nagar Haveli, 6 in Odisha and 2 in Bihar. clear. The current view is that all patients with "active
leprosy" must be considered infectious (9). Until recently
Out of the total 1.31 lac new cases deleted from record, a man was considered to be the only host and source of
total of 1.25 lac (94.6 per cent) completed their treatment within infection. There is now evidence that natural infections with
specified time period and were released from treatment as cured M. leprae are present in wild animals, e.g., armadillos,
during 2013-14. Poor performing states are Tripura (74.63), mangabey monkeys and chimpanzees. It is not yet known if
Meghalaya (67.73), Rajasthan (81.23) and Delhi {76.83). leprosy in wild animals is a threat to public health.
The trend of leprosy prevalence and annual new case (c) PORTAL OF EXIT : It is widely accepted that the nose
detection rate (ANCDR) in the country is as shown in Fig. 1. is a major portal of exit. Lepromatous cases harbour millions
Epidemiological determinants of M. leprae in their nasal mucosa which are discharged
when they sneeze or blow the nose. The bacilli can also exit
Agent factors through ulcerated or broken skin of bacteriologically positive
cases of leprosy (10).
(a) AGENT : Leprosy is caused by M. leprae. They are
acid-fast and occur in the human host both intracellularly (d) INFECTIVITY : Leprosy is a highly infectious disease
and extracellularly. They occur characteristically in clumps but of low pathogenicity (11). It is claimed that an infectious
or bundles (called globi). They have an affinity for Schwann patient can be rendered non-infectious by treatment with
cells and cells of the reticulo-endothelial system. They dapsone for about 90 days (12) or with rifampicin for 3
remain dormant in various sites and cause relapse. The ·weeks (14). Local application of rifampicin (drops or spray)
bacterial load is the highest in the lepromatous cases. As might destroy all the bacilli within 8 days (13).
5.9
6
4 ANCDR
5
0::: s:: 4.2 4.4 • PR
Cl .9
Uro
z- 4
<( 5.
cl1l 8.
<llo 3
Uo
s::o
<:)) . "
2.3
-o
~,.....
<:)) ....
.... <ll
2
0.. 0.
1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.09
1.0 1.0
0.9
1 0.72 0.74 0.72 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.73
0.68
0
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014
Year (March end)
FIG.1
Trend of leprosy prevalence and annual new case detection rate per 10,000 population in India
Source : (6)
LEPROSY
(e) ATTACK RATES : Among household contacts of A certain degree of immunity is also probable through
lepromatous cases, a varying proportion - 4.4 per cent to infections with other related mycobacteria (17).
12 per cent - is expected to show signs of leprosy within It is now recognized that cell-mediated immunity (CM!) is
5 years (13). This occurs despite treatment of the index case, responsible for resistance to infection with M. leprae. In
most, if not all, cases having been infectious for long lepromatous leprosy, there is a complete breakdown of CM!;
periods, before treatment is sought. in these cases the lepromin test is negative. CM! does not
Host factors however, exclude the participation of humoral response.
Antibodies have been demonstrated throughout the
(a) AGE : Leprosy is not particularly a disease of children spectrum of leprosy; they are more pronounced at the
as was once believed (14). Infection can take place at any lepromatous end. Similarly an increase of immunoglobulins
time depending upon the opportunities for exposure. In of lgG and IgM classes is noted towards the lepromatous end
endemic areas, the disease is acquired commonly during (18). Leprosy workers have found that the anergy of
childhood. The youngest case seen in South India was an lepromatous leprosy is due to suppression of T cell
infant 2 1/ 2 months old (15). Incidence rates generally rise to production of interleukin-2 (T-cell growth factor). This is
a peak between 10 and 20 years of age and then fall (8). In normally secreted by activated T cells to make other T cells
areas where leprosy is rare, the first contact may not take proliferate. If exogenous interleukin-2 is added, the process
place early in life and consequently, the disease may appear may be reversed. However, further studies are needed to
late. However, the presence of leprosy in child population is find out whether administration of IL-2 would benefit the
of considerable epidemiological importance. A high lepromatous patient (18).
prevalence of infection among children means that the
disease is active and spreading. (g) GENETIC FACTORS : There is now evidence that
human lymphocyte antigen (HLA) linked genes influence
(b) SEX : Both the incidence and prevalence of leprosy the type of immune response that develops (8).
appear to be higher in males than in females in most regions
of the world. Sex difference is found least in children below Environmental factors
15 years, and more marked among adults; more marked ·
The risk of transmission is predominantly controlled by
among lepromatous cases than among non-lepromatous
environmental factors (12) : (a) the presence of infectious
cases. The excess of cases in males has sometimes been
cases in that environment. There is evidence that humidity
attributed to their greater mobility and increased
· opportunities for contact in many populations. favours the survival of M. /eprae in the environment.
M. leprae can remain viable in dried nasal secretions for at
(c) MIGRATION : In India leprosy was considered to be least 9 days and in moist soil at room temperature for 46
mostly a rural problem. However, because of the movement days (8), (b) overcrowding and lack of ventilation within
of population from rural to urban areas; leprosy is creating a households.
problem in the urban areas also (15).
(d) THE PREVALENCE POOL (16): The prevalence pool Mode of transmission
of leprosy in a population in general is in a constant flux The mode of transmission of leprosy has not been
resulting from inflow and outflow. The inflow is contributed established with certainty. The following theories are
by the occurrence of new cases, relapse of cured cases, and frequently debated :
immigration of cases. The outflow is mainly through cure or
(A} DROPLET INFECTION : There is more and more
inactivation of cases, death of cases, and emigration of
cases. Of the various factors that influence the prevalence evidence that leprosy may be transmitted via aerosols
pool, the importance of inactivation of disease and mortality containing M. leprae (droplet infection). With the realization
are less well recognized. of the importance of the nose as a portal of exit, there has
been increased emphasis on the respiratory tract as the
(e) INACTIVATION OF DISEASE (16) : Where leprosy portal of entry. The possibility of this route of transmission is
treatment facilities exist, inactivation or cure due to specific based on (a) the inability of the organisms to be found on
treatment is an important mode of elimination of cases from the surface of the skin; (b) the demonstration of a large
the prevalence pool. Even in the absence of specific treatment, number of organisms in the nasal discharge; (c) the high
a majority of· patients, particularly of the tuberculoid and proportion of morphologically intact bacilli in the nasal
indeterminate types, tend to get cured spontaneously. An secretions; and (d) the evidence that M. leprae could survive
earlier study in India had shown that over a period of 20 years, outside the human host for several hours or days (16).
the extent of spontaneous regression among children with
tuberculoid leprosy was about 90%. A study in Culion Island (B) CONTACT TRANSMISSION : Numerous studies
in the Philippines showed that among children self-healing indicate that leprosy is transmitted from person-to-person
occurred in 77.7% of cases (Lara & Nolasco, 1956). A later by close contact between an infectious patient and a healthy
study in South India involving long-term follow-up of a high but susceptible person. This contact may be direct or indirect
endemic population showed that among newly detected (e.g., contact with soil, and fomites such as contaminated
tuberculoid cases of all ages and both sexes, the rate of clothes and linen).
inactivation was 10. 9% per year, the bulk of inactivation in the Now that it is known that leprosy bacilli can survive for
study being spontaneous (Noordeen, 1975). long periods of time in the soil under favourable
(f) IMMUNITY : It is a well-established fact that only a few environmental conditions, the hypothesis that leprosy can be
persons exposed to infection develop the disease. A large transmitted by indirect contact has been strengthened (19).
proportion of early lesions that occur in leprosy heal In epidemiological studies, the first lesions were found in feet
spontaneously. Such abortive and self-healing lesions and legs of patients from hilly areas in India, where injury to
suggest immunity acquired through such lesions. Subclinical the skin is common. In the Philippines 91 per cent of the first
infections are far more common than was thought earlier; lesions were seen in extremities open to injury (15). These
they are also believed to contribute to active immunity. observations lend support to indirect transmission. Although
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
contact transmission has been a long-favoured hypothesis, (c) Borderline type : This type denotes those cases with
leprologists opine that skin-to-skin contact is really not four or more lesions which may be flat or raised, well or ill-
necessary to acquire infection, and that the disease is defined, hypopigmented or erythematous and show sensory
transmissible with far less than intimate contact (9, 11). impairment or loss. The bacteriological positivity of these
(C) OTHER ROUTES: Bacilli may also be transmitted by lesions is variable. Without treatment, it usually progresses
insect vectors, or by tattooing needles. These transmission to lepromatous type.
channels cannot be ruled out (19). However, there is no (d) Lepromatous type : This type denotes those cases
evidence that any of these transmission routes is important with diffuse infiltration or numerous flat or raised, poorly
in nature (8). defined, shiny, smooth, symmetrically distributed lesions.
These lesions are bacteriologically positive, and
Incubation period
(e) Pure neuritic type : This type denotes those cases of
Leprosy has a long incubation period, an average of 3 to leprosy which show nerve involvement but do not have
5 years or more for lepromatous cases. The tuberculoid any lesion in the skin. These cases are bacteriologically
leprosy is thought to have a shorter incubation period (8).
negative.
Symptoms can take as long as 20 years to appear. Failure to
recognize early symptoms or signs may contribute to an Clinical classification for control programme (24)
assumed prolonged incubation period in some patients.
Some leprologists prefer the term "latent period" to In 1981, the WHO Study Group on Chemotherapy of
incubation period because of the long duration of the Leprosy for Control Programmes classified patients as
incubation period. having multibacillary or paucibacillary leprosy according to
Knowledge of incubation pedod of relapses is also the degree of skin-smear positivity (25). It was essentially an
essential, as this will define the duration of surveillance after operational classification to serve as a basis for
treatment has been stopped. chemotherapy. Multibacillary leprosy included polar
lepromatous (LL), border line lepromatous (BL) and mid-
Classification borderline (BB) cases in the Ridley-Jopling classification
Leprosy is a disease bedevilled by classifications, e.g., the with bacteriological index (BI) of? 2 at any site in the initial
Madrid classification (20), Ridley-Jopling classification (21), skin smears. Paucibacillary leprosy included indeterminate
(I), Polar tuberculoid (TT) and borderline tuberculoid (BT)
the Indian classification (22), etc. These classifications are
based on clinical, bacteriological, immunological and in the Ridley-Jopling classification, with a bacteriological
histological status of patients. index of < 2 at all sites in the initial skin smears. At its sixth
meeting in 1987, the Committee endorsed the principles
The Indian and Madrid classification systems are the most upon which this classification is based, with the modification
widely used in field leprosy programmes; they are not that all the patients showing smears positivity should be
essentially different, as the following comparison shows : classified as having multibacillary leprosy for the purpose of
Indian classification Madrid classification MDT treatment (8). In 1993, a WHO Study Group on
Chemotherapy of Leprosy concluded that approaches based
indeterminate type indeterminate
on clinical classification may be required where reliable
tuberculoid type tuberculoid; flat; raised
borderline type borderline
facilities for the bacteriological examination of skin smears
lepromatous type lepromatous are not available, and recommended that when classification
pure neuritic type is in doubt, the patient should be treated as having
multibacillary leprosy (24).
The Indian classification has an additional form, the pure
neuritic in which no skin lesions exist. Because services for processing skin smears are not
always available, and also because their reliability is often
The classification system of Ridley and Jopling (23) doubtful, patients are being classified on clinical grounds.
divides leprosy cases into five groups according to their The criteria differs from programme to programme, but are
position on an immuno-histological scale : tuberculoid (TT), essentially based on the number of lesions, especially skin
borderline tuberculoid (BL), borderline (BB), borderline lesions (26), or on the number of body areas affected (27).
lepromatous (BL) and lepromatous (LL). The neuritic type The assumption is that the protective immunity is inversely
of leprosy does not find a place in the Ridley and Jopling correlated with the number of lesions or the number of body
classification. This classification can be used only when full areas affected and, therefore, the multibacillary patients
research facilities are available. have a significantly greater number of lesions or number of
Indian classification body areas affected than the paucibacillary patients. On the
basis of the information available, patients could be
The Indian classification (1981) is the official classified into two groups :
classification of the Indian Leprosy Association (Hind Kusht
Nivaran Sangh). It is a clinico-bacterial classification. The (1) Paucibacillary leprosy (1-5 skin lesions); and
clinical characteristics of the various types are as below : (2) Multibacillary leprosy (more than six skin lesions).
(a) Indeterminate type : This denotes those early cases Diagnosis
with one or two vague hypopigmented macules and definite
sensory impairment. The lesions are bacteriologically 1. CLINICAL EXAMINATION
negative. Leprosy, in the majority of instances, is diagnosable on
(b) Tubercu/oid type : This type denotes those cases with the basis of a proper clinical examination alone. Therefore, a
one or two well-defined lesions, which may be flat or raised, set pattern must be followed in the examination of a patient
hypopigmented or erythematous and are anaesthetic. The for the presence of leprosy. This procedure is called "case
lesions are bacteriologically negative. taking" in leprosy, which comprises of (28) :
LEPROSY
a. Interrogation and spread over an area of about 8 mm diameter. Six smears
(i) collection of biodata of the patient such as name, can conveniently be made on one microscopic slide. The
age, sex, occup~tion and place of residence sites of the smear should be accurately recorded so that the
same sites can be used for successive sets of smears made for
(ii) family history of leprosy assesing the effect of treatment. The wound is dressed and
(iii) history of contact with leprosy cases closed with a piece of sticking tape applied over the site.
(iv) details of previous history of treatment for leprosy, (ii) Nasal smears or blows : Nasal smears can be best
if any, and prepared from early morning mucus material. The patient
(v) presenting complaint or symptom. blows his nose into a clean dry sheet of cellophane or
plastic. The smear should be made straightaway and fixed.
b. Physical examination
This should be done in the early morning from the first
(i) A thorough inspection of the body surface (skin) blowing of the nose. Nose-blowing smears are used for
to the extent permissible, in good natural light for assessing the patient's infectivity. In patients with untreated
the presence of suggestive, or tell tale evidence of lepromatous leprosy, nose-blow smears may show a higher
leprosy percentage of solid-staining bacilli than skin smears.
(ii) Palpation of the commonly involved peripheral and (iii) Nasal scrapings : An alternative is to use a nasal
cutaneous nerves for the presence of thickening mucosal scrapper. After going in 4.5 cm, the blade is rotated
and/or tenderness. They are the ulnar nerve near towards the septum and scraped a few times and withdrawn.
the median epicondyle, greater auricular as it turns A small ball of cotton is introduced into the nostril to absorb
over the sternomastoid muscle, lateral popliteal any blood that may ooze out. Nasal scrapings are not
and the dorsal branch of the radial, and recommended as a routine, because they are painful, and
(iii) Testing for (a) loss of sensation for heat, cold, pain non-pathogenic atypical mycobacteria may be present in the
and light touch in the skin patches. It cannot be nose of healthy persons. Leprosy bacilli are not found in
emphasized that not all the hypopigmented nasal mucosa if they are absent in skin lesions. During
patches show sensory impairment; (b) paresis or treatment, M. leprae may disappear from the nasal mucosa
paralysis of the muscles of the hands and feet, before they disappear from the skin lesions (29).
leading to the disabilities or deformities. The skin or nasal smear is immediately fixed by lightly
However, the disease should not be diagnosed if only passing the underside of the slide over the spirit lamp flame
nerve thickening is present, without any other and transported to the laboratory for staining with Ziehl-
accompanying symptoms or signs. Neelsen method.
Before the introduction of MDT, most leprosy cases were The glass slides used should be absolutely clean. They
diagnosed by medical officer or specialized leprosy workers, should not be reused for making smears a second tfme as
and it often led to delay in diagnosis and initiation of organisms from a previous examination may give a false
treatment. Since the introduction of MDT, many procedures positive result (22). Before a smear is declared negative, at
have been simplified, so that leprosy patients can be least 200 fields should be examined (9).
detected by health workers in the field.
Bacterial index (29)
2. BACTERIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION Bacterial index (Bl) is the only objective way of
Skin smears are useful for diagnosing multibacillary monitoring the benefit of treatment. The Bacteriological (or
leprosy and were originally used for distinguishing between Bacterial) Index indicates the density of leprosy bacilli in
paucibacillary and multibacillary leprosy. However, the smears and includes both living (solid-staining) and dead
quality of skin smears and of microscopy is probably the (fragmented or granular) bacilli. According to Ridley's
weakest link in most leprosy elimination programmes. In logarithmic scale, it ranges from zero to 6+ and is based
view of this situation, and since it is possible to classify on the number of bacilli seen in an average microscopic field
leprosy without skin smear results, it should not be a pre- of the smear using an oil-immersion objective.
requisite for implementing the MDT (24). 0 No bacilli in any of the 100 oil-immersion fields
A brief account of method of skin smear and nasal smear 1 + 1-10 bacilli, on average, in 100 oil-immers.ion fields
examination is as follows : 2+ 1-10 bacilli on average, in 10 oil-immersion fields
(i) Skin smears : Material from the skin is obtained from 3+ 1-10 bacilli, on average, in each oil-immersion field
an active lesion, and also from one of the ear lobe by the "slit 4+ 10-100 bacilli, on average, in each oil-immersion
and scrape" method. Conventionally, two sites are field
examined. The skin is cleaned with ether or spirit and
allowed to dry. A fold of the skin is nipped between the 5 + 100-1000 bacilli, on average, in each oil-immersion
thumb and forefinger (of left hand in an operator). Enough field
pressure should be applied to stop or minimize bleeding. 6+ More than 1000 bacilli, on average, in each oil-
Holding the point of knife vertical to the apex of the skin immersion field
fold, it is pushed into the skin to a depth of about 2 mm or so, The BI of the patient is calculated by adding up the index
to reach the dermis. A tiny incision is made 5 mm or so in from each site examined and dividing the total by the
length. If blood exudes, it should be wiped off with a small number of sites examined.
dry cotton-wool swab. The knife blade is rotated
transversely to the line of the cut 90° and the knife point is (e.g. Right ear 5+ Left ear 5+
used to scrape first on one side and then on the other side of Back 4+ Chin 4+
the incision 2 or 3 times to obtain a tissue pulp from below 5+5+4+4 18
the epidermis. This material is transferred on to a glass slide Bacteriological Index = - - - - - 4.5+
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
When the bacteriological Index is BI 1 + and BI 2 +, at It allows a more accurate classification of the disease. It also
least 100 oil immersion fields should be examined. When gives information about the bacterial content of the skin.
the index is BI 3+, BI 4+, BI 5+ and BI 6+, at least 25 oil
immersion fields should be examined (29). 6. IMMUNOLOGICAL TESTS
There are now available different kinds of immunological
Morphological index tests. These may be classified as (31) :
During the course of microscopic examination of smears, a. tests for detecting cell mediated immunity (CM!)
it is possible to distinguish and count the number of solid b. tests for humoral antibodies (serological tests).
staining organisms (organisms that stain completely) and
irregularly staining bacilli. The MI is calculated after a. TESTS FOR DETECTING CMI
examining 200 pink-stained free standing (i.e. not in
clumps) bacilli. The percentage of solid staining bacilli in a (i) LEPROMIN TEST
stained smear is referred to as morphological index (Ml). The test is performed by injecting intradermally 0.1 ml of
The total of the Mis for all sites divided by the number of lepromin into the inner aspect of the forearm of the
sites gives the average MI for the body. The criteria for individual. As a routine, the reaction is read at 48 hours and
calling the bacilli solid rods are (22) : 21 days (9). Two types of positive reactions have been
a. uniform staining of the entire organism described:
b. parallel sides (a) EARLY REACTION : The early reaction is also known
c. rounded ends, and as Fernandez reaction. An inflammatory response develops
d. length 5 times that of the width. within 24 to 48 hours and this tends to disappear after
It has been widely believed that only solid-staining 3 to 4 days. It is evidenced by redness and induration at the
organisms are viable. Accurate evaluation of the MI requires site of inoculation. If the diameter of the red area is more than
much skill and experience. It is a valuable indicator of the 10 mm at the end of 48 hours, the test is considered positive.
patient's response to treatment with drugs, during the first The early positive reaction indicates whether or not a
few months and helps to signal drug resistance. person has been previously sensitized by exposure to and
Solid-fragmented-granular (SFG) percentage (29) infection by the leprosy bacilli. In this sense, the early
reaction is much superior to the late reactfon. The early
The procedure for recording the percentages of solid, reaction has been described as delayed hypersensitivity
fragmented and granular bacilli is basically the same as that reaction to "soluble" constituents of the leprosy bacilli. The
used for determining the MI. Since percentages of solid, reaction corresponds to the Mantoux reaction in tuberculosis,
fragmented and granular bacilli are mentioned separately. caused by the soluble antigens (PPD) of the tubercle bacilli.
SFG percentages give a better picture of the bacterial
morphology than the MI, and are a more sensitive indicator (b) LATE REACTION : This is the classical Mitsuda
of the patient's response to treatment. reaction. The reaction develops late, becomes apparent in
7-10 days following the injection and reaching its maximum
3. FOOT-PAD CULTURE in 3 or 4 weeks. The test is read at 21 days. At the end of
The only certain way to identify M. leprae is to inoculate 21 days, if there is a nodule more than 5 mm in diameter at
the material into the foot-pads of mice and demonstrate its the site of inoculation, the reaction is said to be positive. The
multiplication. Mouse foot-pad inoculation is 10 times more nodule may even ulcerate and heal with scarring if the
sensitive at detecting M. leprae than are slit-skin smears (30). antigen is crude.
The drawback of this technique is that it is time consuming It may be noted that the diameter of the red area in the
and requires 6 to 9 months before the results are obtained. early reaction, and the diameter of the nodule in the late
Newer in vitro methods such as macrophage culture have reaction are measured. The early reaction is induced by the
been evolved, which take only 3 to 4 weeks to obtain results. soluble constituents of the leprosy bacilli; and the late
reaction by the bacillary component of the antigen. It
Mouse foot-pad technique has been successfully used for indicates cell-mediated immunity.
(i) detecting drug resistance (ii) evaluating the potency of
anti-leprosy drugs, and (iii) detecting the viability of the In the first 6 months of life, most children are lepromin
bacilli during treatment. negative; some may become positive by the end of first year.
Data obtained from different parts of the world indicate that
4. HISTAMINE TEST in endemic areas, lepromin reaction is already positive in
The histamine test is a very reliable method for detecting 20 per cent of children under 5 years of age, and this
at an early stage peripheral nerve damage due to leprosy. proportion increases to around 60 per cent or more in the
The test is carried out by injecting intradermally 0 .1 ml of a 10-14 years age group, and to 80 per cent or more in
1: 1000 solution of histamine phosphate or chlorohydrate persons over 19 years of age (14). BCG vaccination is
into hypopigmented patches or in areas of anaesthesia. In capable of converting the lepra reaction from negative to
normal persons, it gives rise to a wheal surrounded by an positive in a large proportion of individuals.
erythematous flare within a few minutes (Lewis triple Value of the lepromin test
response). In cases of leprosy where the nerve supply is
destroyed, flare response is lost. Histamine test is Lepromin test is not a diagnostic test. The two drawbacks
recommended when difficulty is experienced in the that stand in the way of this test being used for diagnosis
diagnosis, as for example, indeterminate leprosy (27). are : (i) positive results in non-cases, and (ii) negative results
in lepromatous and near-lepromatous cases (15).
5. BIOPSY The test has been generally accepted as a useful tool in
When the examinations detailed above do not yield evaluating the immune status (CMI) of leprosy patients. It is
diagnosis, histopathological examination may be necessary. of considerable value in confirming the results of
LEPROSY
in the region : (a) CONTACT SURVEY : In areas where the The multidrug treatment has the additional advantage of
prevalence of leprosy is generally low, (less than 1 case per curtailing the duration of treatment of leprosy considerably.
1000 population), the technique of choice is examination of Shorter therapy has the added advantages of patient
all contacts (e.g., household contacts, especially children and compliance, cost-effectiveness and decreased work load.
persons reported to be suspected cases). These examinations
will have to be arranged with discretion so as not to cause DEFINITIONS
alarm. (b) GROUP SURVEYS : When the prevalence is Following the introduction of multidrug therapy, some
about 1 per 1000 or higher, additional case finding methods changes in terminology have taken place. The following
should be employed such as screening of preschool and working definitions have been proposed by WHO (8).
school children, people living in slums, military recruits, (i} Case of leprosy : A "case" of leprosy is a person
industrial labour and other selected groups for all types of showing clinical signs of leprosy with or without
skin diseases; this technique ("skin camps") may bring out bacteriological confirmation of the diagnosis, and who has
additional cases of leprosy. It should be noted that the value not yet completed a full course of treatment with MDT. This
of school surveys as a case finding method will be definition is for estimating the prevalence of leprosy.
considerably diminished if the school enrolment is less than
70 per cent of all children in the 6-14 years age group (13). (ii) Paucibacillary leprosy : A person having 1-5 skin
(c) MASS SURVEYS : Total population surveys for lesions and/or only one nerve involvement (37).
examination of each and every individual, family by family (iii) Multibacillary leprosy : A person having 6 or more
by house-to-house visits are recommended only in skin lesions and/or more than one nerve involvement (37).
hyperendemic areas, i.e., areas where the prevalence of (iv) Adequate treatment : Adequate treatment implies the
leprosy is about 10 or more per 1000 population. In mass completion of a regimen of multidrug therapy within a
surveys, a coverage of not less than 95 per cent of the reasonably short period of time : (a) for paucibacillary cases,
population should be obtained (11). Mass surveys require adequate treatment implies that the patient has received
high quality team work. They should be multipurpose 6 monthly doses of combined therapy within 9 months.
covering not only leprosy but also possibly other diseases. (b) for multibacillary cases, adequate treatment implies that
They should have the full backing of the administration and the patient bas received 12 monthly doses of combined
whole-hearted participation of the local community. therapy within 18 months.
Records : The case information should be collected for all (v) Regular treatment : A patient may be considered to
patients in a standardized manner. The WHO has already a have had regular treatment if he or she has received MDT
standard computer-based proforma for data collection from for at least two-thirds of the months in any interval of time.
individual patients (see Annex 3 of WHO Expert Committee For example, regular treatment for 12 months, implies that
Report No. 716, page 58) which should be followed or the patient has had at least 8 full months of combined
suitably adapted. The Government of India had also therapy during that 12-month period.
approved a set of forms for keeping records and submitting
reports. (vi) Newly diagnosed case : A person who has been
diagnosed as a leprosy case, and who has not taken MDT in
Leprosy is an "iceberg" disease. The problem is one of the past.
discovering the subclinical cases, as considerable proportion
of these cases lie outside the scope of existing case detection (vii) Defaulter case : A defaulter is a leprosy patient on
technology. MDT, who has not collected treatment for 12 consecutive
months.
III. Multidrug therapy Any patient who has been categorized as a defaulter
In the absence of primary prevention by a leprosy vaccine, should be removed from the register (39).
the strategy of leprosy control is based on effective (viii) Relapsed case : A patient whose therapy was
chemotherapy (secondary prevention). Till recently, terminated, having successfully completed an adequate
chemotherapy of leprosy has relied almost entirely on course of multidrug therapy, but who subsequently develops
dapsone (DDS). Due to dependence on dapsone new signs and symptoms of the disease, either during the
monotherapy for many years, drug-resistant leprosy bacilli surveillance period or thereafter, is considered to have
(both primary and secondary resistance) have emerged in all "relapsed" (8).
parts of the world. This has led to relapse of the disease even
in those in whom the disease had been arrested and the spread Drugs
of dapsone-resistant strains to susceptibles jeopardizing the In multidrug regimens, only bactericidal drugs are used.
whole strategy of leprosy control (25). In order to cope with At present, only a small number of such drugs are available :
this problem, a WHO Study Group on Chemotherapy of these are rifampicin, dapsone, clofazimine, ethionamide and
Leprosy, has recommended multiple drug therapy for both protionamide. A brief account of these drugs is given below :
multibacillary and paucibacillary leprosy (25).
(a) Rifarnpicin
OBJECTIVES
Rifampicin (RMP) is the only drug that is highly
The main objectives of multidrug chemotherapy of bactericidal against M. leprae. A single dose of 1500 mg or
leprosy are (25) 3-4 consecutive daily doses of 600 mg appear to kill 99 per
a. to interrupt transmission of the infection in the cent of viable organisms (38). Further the drug is effective
community by sterilizing infectious patients as when given at monthly intervals, which is a big advantage.
rapidly as possible with bactericidal drugs; The drug is expensive butsafe.
b. to ensure early detection and treatment of cases to The toxic effects of RMP are anorexia, nausea, abdominal
prevent deformities, and pain and occasionally vomiting. It is hepatotoxic. The
c. to prevent drug resistance. patient should be kept under supervision for 1 hour, after
LEPROSY
the administration of the drug since shock and collapse are (f) Minocycline
known to occur. This is the most lipid-soluble of the tetracyclines and
RMP is now an essential drug in the chemotherapy of inhibits bacterial protein synthesis. In clinical trials, the
leprosy. Given alone, resistance to the drug develops. Hence clearance of viable M. /eprae from the skin by minocycline
it is given in combination with other anti-leprosy drugs. was faster than that reported from dapsone or clofazimine
and similar to that for ofloxacin. Minocycline may strengthen
(b) Dapsone MDT, for multibacillary patients and thereby shorten the
Dapsone (DDS) has been in use all over the world for the duration of treatment needed to treat leprosy effectively
control of leprosy for more than 30 years. It continues to be (25). The standard dose is 100 mg daily. The side-effects
an important drug in the multidrug chemotherapy of include discoloration of teeth in infants and children,
leprosy. It is cheap and effective in the dosage employed occasional pigmentation of the skin and mucous membrane,
(1-2 mg/kg of body weight). When given orally, it is various gastrointestinal symptoms and central nervous
completely absorbed from the gut and fairly well tolerated. It system complaints. It should not be given to infants, children
has shown to be weak bactericidal against M. /eprae (40). and during pregnancy (24).
The common adverse effects following DDS administration (g) Clarithromycin
are haemolytic anaemia, methaemoglobinaemia,
agranulocytosis, hepatitis, peripheral neuropathy, psychosis Clarithromycin is a member of the macrolid group of
and lepra reaction. A rare syndrome, known as DDS- antibiotics and displays a significant bactericidal activity
syndrome consisting of fever, enlarged lymph glands,
against M. /eprae. In patients with lepromatous leprosy, daily
exfoliative dermatitis, hepatitis and maculopapular rash has administration of 500 mg of clarithromycin killed 99 per cent
also been reported. Since dapsone is a haemolytic drug, care of viable M. /eprae within 28 days, and 99.9 per cent by 56
should be taken that the haemoglobin level is not less than days. Side-effects include nausea, vomiting and diarrhoea.
60 per cent, and the dosage of DDS is strictly weight-based.
Iron tablets are prescribed routinely to correct anaemia.
RECOMMENDED REGIMENS OF CHEMOTHERAPY
(1) WHO RECOMMENDATIONS
(c) Clofazimine
The proper application of multidrug therapy is crucial to
Clofazimine (CLF) was originally synthesized for the the success of leprosy control. The regimens recommended
treatment of tuberculosis, but was subsequently found to by WHO have been widely accepted in many countries.
have far greater value in leprosy. It has both anti-leprosy They are as below (25).
and anti-inflammatory properties. CLF though less effective
than dapsone has the added advantage in suppressing and a. Multibacillary leprosy
preventing reactions. CLF is relatively expensive and is The WHO has recommended the following combination of
reasonably free from toxic effects in the usual dosage. It is drugs for treatment of adult multibacillary cases of leprosy :
used as the third drug, whenever possible in leprosy
chemotherapy. • Rifampicin 600 mg, once monthly, given under
supervision
Clofazimine may be unacceptable to some patients
because it may give rise to darkish red coloration to skin, • Dapsone 100 mg daily, self-administered
mucous membranes, urine and sweat. These symptoms are • Clofazimine ..... 300 mg once monthly supervised;
not serious. They would disappear after the drug is stopped. and 50 mg daily, self-administered.
If totally unacceptable, it may be replaced by ethionamide Where clofazimine is totally unacceptable owing to the
or protionamide. colouration of skin, its replacement by 250 to 375 mg self-
administered daily doses of ethionamide or protionamide
(d) Ethionamide and protionamide has been suggested.
These are bactericidal drugs killing 98 per cent of viable b. Paucibacillary leprosy
bacilli in 4 to 5 days. They are virtually interchangeable and
gives rise to cross-resistance with each other. They are both Paucibacillary cases should also receive combined
more expensive and more toxic than dapsone. The WHO therapy in view of primary dapsone resistance which is
(34) has recommended that ethionamide or protionamide becoming widespread. The recommended standard regimen
should be used as the third drug in the treatment of for adults is :
multibacillary leprosy in those patients, who find clofazimine • Rifampicin 600 mg once a month, supervised
unacceptable. • Dapsone 100 mg (1-2 mg/kg of body weight)
daily, self-administered
(e) Quinolones
The standard treatment regimen for children aged 10-14
These drugs work by inhibiting DNA synthesis during years is as follows :
bacterial replication. Ofloxacin, a fluorinated quinolone is
the most preferred drug in this group. Oral ofloxacin is 98 a. Multibacillary leprosy
per cent bioavailable with elimination half-life of about 5 to • Rifampicin 450 mg once a month, given under
8 hours. 22 doses of ofloxacin kill about 99.9 per cent of supervision
viable M. /eprae (41). This is the basis of very short term • Dapsone 50 mg daily, self administered
clinical trials of a combination of 400 mg ofloxacin and 600 • Clofazimine ..... 150 mg once a month supervised;
mg rifampicin daily for 28 days. and 50 mg every other day.
Side-effects include nausea, diarrhoea and other
gastrointestinal complaints and a variety of central nervous b. Paucibacillary leprosy
system complaints. • Rifampicin . . . . . 450 mg once a month, supervised
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
• Dapsone . . . . . 50 mg daily, self administered appearance of new lesions, patches or nodules with acute
Children under the age of 10 years should receive onset, draw the attention of patient to report. Some cases
appropriately reduced doses of the above drugs. develop signs of nerve damage without changes in skin
lesions.
Duration of treatment There are two types of reaction : Reversal reaction
The treatment duration varies according to the type of (or Type 1) and Erythema Nodosum Leprosum (ENL or
disease. The recommendations are as follows : Type 2). Both types can occur before the start of multi-drug
treatment, during treatment, or after treatment has been
Multibacillary leprosy - MB blisterpacks for 12 months, completed. Both types can be mild or severe. Only severe
within 18 months reactions are treated with corticosteroids.
Paucibacillary leprosy - PB blisterpacks for 6 months, Distinguishing between the two types of reactions is
within 9 months usually not difficult. In a reversal reaction, the leprosy skin
A defaulter who returns to the health centre for treatment lesions themselves become inflamed, red and swollen. In an
should be given a new course of MDT when he or she shows ENL reaction, new inflamed, red nodules (about 1-2 cm
one or more of the following signs (39): across) appear under the skin of the limbs or trunk, while the
- reddish and/or raised skin lesions; original leprosy skin patches remain as they were. In
- appearance of new skin lesions (since the previous addition, ENL reactions cause a general feeling of fever and
examination); malaise, while reversal reactions cause less systemic upset.
Common differentiating features are as shown in Table 2.
- new nerve involvement (e.g. changes in skin
sensation) since the previous examination; Because of the high risk of permanent damage to the
- lepromatous nodules; peripheral nerve trunks, reversal reaction needs to be
diagnosed as soon as possible, and treated adequately. The
signs of reversal reaction or ENL. drug of choice is prednisolone, the cheapest and most
For registration purposes, returning defaulters are not widely available corticosteroid.
considered as newly detected cases. Most reversal reactions and neuritis can be treated
MDT is not contraindicated in patients with HIV infection. successfully under field conditions, with a standard 12-week
Management of leprosy and of lepra reactions is same as course of prednisolone. The potential risk of serious adverse
that of any other leprosy patient. The response of such effects caused by long-term corticosteroid therapy must not
patients to MDT is also similar (39). be ignored, particularly under field conditions. The more
Since leprosy is exacerbated during pregnancy, it is common problems of prolonged steroid therapy include
important that MDT be continued. The evidence so far weight gain, peptic ulcer, diabetes, hypertension, reactivation
indicates that MDT is safe during pregnancy. Small of tuberculosis, osteoporosis and psychiatric disorders.
quantities of anti-leprosy drugs are excreted through breast ENL varies in severity, duration and organ involvement.
milk, but there is no report of adverse reaction as a result of Acute or subacute neuritis, with or without loss of nerve
this, except for mild discolouration of the infant's skin function, is one of the major criteria in distinguishing mild
caused by clofazimine (42). · and severe ENL. Mild ENL can be treated with analgesic or
antipyretic drugs such as aspirin, while severe ENL can be
Lepra reaction (43) treated with prednisolone, as for reversal reaction.
During the course of leprosy, immunologically mediated Clofazimine is also effective for ENL, but is less potent
episodes of acute or subacute inflammation known as than cortico-steroids and often takes 4-6 weeks to develop
reactions may occur. Because peripheral nerve trunks are its full effects, so it should never be started as the sole agent
often involved, unless reactions are promptly and for the treatment of severe ENL.
adequately treated, such episodes can result in permanent
deformities. Signs of a severe reversal reaction
Lepra reactions are usually diagnosed by clinical If any of the following signs are found, the reaction
examination only. Inflammatory changes in skin lesions or should be treated as severe :
TABLE 2
Difference between reversal reaction and ENL
Type 1 (Reversal Reaction) Type II (ENL)
1. Delayed hypersensitivity. 1. Antigen antibody reaction.
2. Occurs in both PB and MB cases in unstable types like BT.BB.BL. 2. Seen in MB cases only (BL and LL type).
3. Skin lesions suddenly become reddish, swollen, warm, painful, 3. Red, painful, tender, sub-cutaneous nodules - ENL may
and tender. New lesions may appear. appear, commonly on face, arms, legs, bilaterally
symmetrical. They appear in crops and subside within few
days even without treatment (Evanescent skin nodules).
Nodules are better felt than seen and these are recurrent
(episodic).
4. Nerves close to skin may be enlarged, tender.and painful 4. Nerves may be affected but not as common or severe and
(neuritis) with loss of its functions (loss of sensation and acute as in Type I.
muscle weakness) which may appear suddenly.
5. Otl:ier organs - not affected. 5. Other organs like eyes, testis, and kidney may be affected.
6. General symptoms - not common. 6. Fever, joints pain, red eyes with watering may be associated.
Source: (43)
LEPROSY
- Loss of nerve function - that is, loss of sensation or treatment; importance of taking daily dose and that the
muscle weakness in the area supplied by nerve. treatment should not be stopped suddenly (the dosage is
Pain or tenderness in one or more nerves. decreased gradually) and importance of completing the full
- Silent neuritis/quiet nerve paralysis i.e. signs of nerve course of treatment; and possible side-effects.
damage without symptoms. Follow-up after treatment with steroids
A red, swollen skin patch on the face, or overlying
another major nerve trunk. People who have been given a course of steroids for
- A skin lesion anywhere that becomes ulcerated. reaction or nerve damage should be followed up closely
because of the risk of recurrence. Each person must
Marked oedema of the hands, feet or face. understand that a reaction or new nerve damage may recur.
Signs of a severe ENL reaction They must know how to recognize the early signs of nerve
damage and be aware of how important it is to return
If any of the following signs is found, the reaction should promptly to the clinic for treatment. These signs include pain
be treated as severe : or tingling sensations, further loss of feeling or loss of muscle
- Pain or tenderness in one or more nerves, with or strength and inability to close the eye.
without loss of nerve function. Patients still on MDT should have their nerve function
- Ulceration of ENL nodules. checked monthly by the health worker when they come to
- Pain of eyes with or without redness and loss of visual collect their treatment. Any deterioration should be noted
acuity. and the person referred. Patients who have already
Painful swelling of the testes (orchitis) or of the fingers completed MDT, by the time they come to the end of a course
(dactylitis). of steroids, should be asked to come back three months and
Marked arthritis or lymphadenitis. six months after the end of the course for review and nerve
function assessment. Patients who still have lagophthalmos
Treatment of Lepra reactions (moderate to severe cases) (weakness of eyelids) after completion of treatment with
It includes bed rest, rest to affected nerves by splint, steroids should be referred to ophthalmic surgeon.
analgesics, prednisolone. Each case of reaction should be Groups requiring special precautions when prescribing
assessed for his/her fitness to put on prednisolone as per
check list given above (43). steroids
The following groups of people require special
Prednisolone regimen Add Clofazimine in ENL precautions when steroids are prescribed. One must not give
40 mg daily for first 2 weeks One capsule (100 mg) steroids to people with tuberculosis, diabetes, deep ulcers,
30 mg daily for weeks 3 and 4 3 times a day x 4 weeks osteomyelitis, corneal ulcers or other serious conditions
20 mg daily for weeks 5 and 6 One capsule (100 mg) without starting treatment for the underlying condition.
15 mg daily for weeks 7 and 8 2 times a day x next 4 weeks
1 Pregnant women
10 mg daily for weeks 9 and 10 One capsule (100 mg) once
5 mg daily for weeks 11 and 12 a day x third month All pregnant women should be treated at referral level, so
1 as to minimize the steroid dose they are given and thus
For neuritis, treatment with Prednisolone should be prolonged to avoid harmful effects, such as growth retardation on the
four weeks from 20 mg onwards foetus. If steroids are given in the third trimester, this may
cause adrenal suppression in the newborn infant. Ideally,
Prednisolone tablets issued must be entered in
such infants should be monitored in a referral centre for a
'Prednisolone card'. Tapering of prednisolone may be done
few days after birth. The dose of prednisolone to be given
according to its response. Patient must be instructed on salt
during pregnancy are as follows :
restriction, no prednisolone intake on empty stomach and
reporting adverse effects/symptoms immediately. - PB cases : start at 30 mg daily instead of 40 mg and limit
the course to ten weeks rather than the usual twelve
Adding Clofazimine for Type II reaction may be extremely
weeks regime.
useful for reducing or withdrawing corticosteroids in patients
who have become dependent on them. Total duration of - MB cases : starting at 30 mg daily but lasting for twenty
Clofazimine therapy should not exceed 12 months. weeks.
If a patient develops lepra reaction during the treatment, Children
do not stop MDT (rather complete the course of MDT).
Lepra reactions, which occur after completion of treatment, All children under the age of twelve should be treated at
should also be managed as mentioned earlier. MDT should referral level, so as to minimize the effects of steroids on their
not be restarted for such cases. Response to treatment growth. Children can be given a course similar to that for
should be monitored and assessed, including check on pregnant women, but the starting dose of prednisolone
adverse effects of prednisolone. should not exceed 1 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
Giving children steroids on alternate days may reduce the
Before starting the steroid treatment, the patient should effect on their growth. A suitable regimen for PB cases would
be asked questions about epigestric pain and diarrhoea, be 30 mg of prednisolone daily for two weeks, then 30 mg on
with or without blood and or mucous; and examined for alternate days for two weeks with a gradually reducing dose
fungal infection, scabies, and worm infestations, as all these over the total course of ten weeks. For MB cases, one should
conditions may be made worse by steroids. Treatment of all double the duration of each stage of the course.
these conditions can be started at the same time as steroids
are started (43). Diabetes
Before starting the steroid treatment the patient should be Patients who show symptoms that suggest diabetes or
explained the reason for treatment; the duration of the whose urine tests positive for glucose should be referred to
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
confirm whether the diagnosis is correct and, if it is As a consequence of all these factors, the diagnosis and
confirmed, for management of the diabetes condition. treatment of leprosy reactions may often be delayed and, by
Steroids may increase the diabetic's requirement for insulin. the time the patients arrive at the referral centres, they may
A person taking steroids may also develop diabetes for have already developed permanent deformities. In order to
the first time. This possibility must be considered when avoid these problems, national leprosy programmes should
patient develops typical symptoms of diabetes during the try to ensure that patients are taught to recognize the early
treatment with steroids. The condition usually resolves itself signs of reactions, and to report promptly for treatment;
when steroids are stopped. health workers are able to diagnose and treat reactions and
to refer patients when necessary; and adequate stocks of
Ulcers or osteomyelitis prednisolone are maintained at the peripheral level (24).
Patients with deep or dirty ulcers or osteomyelitis should
be referred for surgical treatment and antibiotics. Starting IV. Surveillance
steroids before such treatment may lead to a worsening of Clinical surveillance of cases after completion of
the sepsis and more permanent damage, including the need treatment is an important part of the current
for amputation. One should suspect osteomyelitis if the recommendations for multidrug therapy; it is essential for
person's hand or foot is warmer than normal, with or the assurance of long-term success of treatment and for the
without swelling. Any person with a wound discharging pus early detection of any relapses.
should be referred for surgical advice and debridement (a) Paucibacillary leprosy : It is recommended that
{removal of dead and infected tissue) before taking steroids, paucibacillary cases be examined clinically at least once a year
or osteomyelitis may develop. for a minimum of 2 years after completion of treatment (8).
Eye involvement (b) Multibacillary leprosy : It is recommended that
Patients who have corneal damage or iritis should be multibacillary cases be examined clinically at least once a
referred for specialist diagnosis and management at a centre year for a minimum period of 5 years after completion of
properly equipped for eye care. Corneal ulcers and keratitis therapy (8).
are inflammatory conditions of the cornea. They are often A patient who has completed the required period of
caused by exposure, as a result of the person being unable to surveillance following the course of multidrug therapy and
close the eye properly. Steroids, whether taken by mouth or shows no evidence of relapse is considered to have
locally applied, may make these conditions worse. Iritis, completed surveillance. The phrase "release from control"
uveitis, iridocyclitis and scleritis are all types of inflammation should not be applied in the context of multidrug therapy (8).
inside the eye and they can all occur as part of a Type-2
reaction. These conditions cause pain, redness, photophobia V. lmmunoprophylaxis
and loss of vision, although the symptoms are not always The fact that a scientifically valid tool for the detection of
severe. The treatment includes atropine eye ointment to infection is not yet available which could deepen the
prevent adhesion. understanding of how leprosy is transmitted, and could lead
to the development of an effective vaccine and other
Tuberculosis interventions. Trials in different population groups with BCG
If tuberculosis is suspected, the diagnosis must be vaccine either alone or in combination with other vaccine
confirmed and treatment started before giving steroids. {from killed Mycobacterium leprae or atypical
The crucial elements in the management of leprosy Mycobacteria), have shown protective efficacy ranging
reactions and thereby, the prevention of disabilities are early between 28 per cent and 60 per cent. High BCG coverage
diagnosis of reactions together with prompt and adequate remains an important contribution to reducing the disease
treatment. Usually the diagnosis of leprosy reactions is burden due to leprosy (5).
relatively straightforward, but occasionally, in paucibacillary
patients who have completed treatment, differentiation of a VI. Chemoprophylaxis
reversal reaction from relapse may be difficult. Nevertheless, Chemoprophylaxis in chronic infectious diseases has an
it is essential that this distinction must be made correctly. established benefit, particularly when given to persons who are
The differences are as summarized in Table 3. known to be at higher risk of developing the disease. The
TABLE 3
Differences between reversal reaction and relapse
Reversal reaction Relapse
Time interval Generally occurs during chemotherapy or within Usually occurs only when chemotherapy has
3 years of stopping treatment been discontinued, after an interval of usually
more than 3 years
Onset Abrupt and sudden Slow and insidious
Old lesions Existing lesions become oedematous, erythematous Lesion may show erythema and infiltration, but
or tender no tenderness
New lesions Several new lesions appear New lesions are minimal
Ulceration Lesions may ulcerate Ulceration does not occur
Nerve involvement Multiple nerve involvement common, painful Nerve involvement may occur only in a single
and tender n~rve; usually no pain or tenderness
General condition May have fever, joint pains, malaise Not usually affected ·
Response to steroid treatment Rapid Nil
Source : (26, 43)
LEPROSY
Feet 1
present
Sensation
normal
Muscle power
I up the uphill task of rehabilitation (46).
Community-based rehabilitation defined by WHO and
2
absent
Sensation
normal
Muscle power
II major NGOs is as follows (5) :
absent weak or paralyzed "Community-based rehabilitation is a strategy within general
community development for the rehabilitation, equalization of
Vision Lid Gap Blinking I opportunities and social inclusion of all people with disabilities.
0 Normal No lid gap Present I Community-based rehabilitation is implemented through the
Eye 2 Cannot Gap p=enU Ab,.nt I combined efforts of the people with disabilities themselves, their
count red eye/ families, organizations and communities, and the relevant
fingers at corneal ulcer governmental and non-governmental health, education,
6 metres or opacity vocational, social and other services".
The highest grade given in any of the part is used as the Rehabilitation measures may appear to be simple; they
Disability Grade for that patient. Eye, hand and feet score require planned and systematic actions - medical, surgical,
i.e. sum of all the individual disability grades for two eyes, social, educational and vocational - consistently over years
two hands and two feet 0-12, should be recorded at each with sustained counselling and health education for training
examination. or retraining of the individual to the highest possible level of
functional ability. For this purpose, coordinated efforts by
Table 4 shows deformities occurring in patients with the Departments of Health, Education and Social Welfare,
leprosy. as well as voluntary organizations are necessary.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
IX. Health education programme, that is to assess the impact of the action taken with
No anti-leprosy campaign is complete without health regard to the problem reduction. These indices are :
education. Health education aims at helping people develop (a) ·INCIDENCE : Incidence rates are often calculated
attitudes and behaviour by their own actions and efforts and separately for different subgroups of population, e.g., age, sex,
seeking professional help when needed. Health education frequency of household contact. It is the most sensitive index of
should be directed towards the patient and his family and the transmission of the disease. It is the only index for measuring
general public. (a) Patient and his family: The main problem the effectiveness of the measures taken, i.e., reduction of
in leprosy control is poor patient compliance with the drug transmission. Thus they are useful in monitoring the success of
regimen and high drop-out rates. The patient and his family a control programme. (b) PREVALENCE : This provides a
should be educated about the need for regular treatment, measure of the "case load" and is useful in the planning of the
repeated examination of contacts, self care regarding treatment services. The continued reduction in the prevalence
prevention of disabilities and protection of children. Health could also give information about the downward trend of the
education thus minimizes hurdles in implementing the disease. It is often useful to calculate prevalence rates for
leprosy control programme. (b) General public : There is a different subgroups, e.g., age sex, geographic area. The fact
growing realization that technological advances alone cannot that leprosy is not uniformly distributed should be borne in
solve the leprosy problem, unless we succeed in involving mind when these statistics are interpreted (8).
the people in the control programme. Health education aims II. Main or core indicators for monitoring
at ensuring community participation. The public should be progress (5)
made aware that leprosy is not a hereditary disease; it is a
bacterial disease like tuberculosis; it is curable; not all leprosy (1) The number and rate of new cases detected per
patients are infectious; regular and adequate treatment is 100,000 population per year.
essential to obtain cure and prevent disabilities, and that the (2) Rate of new cases with grade-2 disabilities per
patient needs sympathy and social support. A nationwide 100,000 population per year.
mass education is needed to educate people on the true facts (3) Treatment completion/cure rate.
about leprosy and remove superstitions and wrong beliefs
and the social stigma associated with leprosy (36). (1) NUMBER AND RATE OF NEW CASES
DETECTED PER YEAR
2. SOCIAL SUPPORT
The nature (e.g. type, grade of disability, etc.) and
Chemotherapy alone is not likely to solve the whole problem number of new cases detected in a given area are mainly
of leprosy. The economic and social problems of the patient and influenced by four factors :
his family should be identified and met. This may include social
assistance and social support. This may take various forms (a) Effectiveness of !EC activities in promoting awareness
depending upon the local situation, e.g., assistance to the and self-reporting.
patient to travel to and from the clinic; help to the needy families (b) Health workers' competence in making an accurate and
in terms of foodgrains, clothes, care of children and their timely diagnosis.
education, and job placement; programmes such as slum (c) Quality of monitoring and supervision by programme
improvement, etc. Such care should be provided through managers.
voluntary agencies and Departments of Social Welfare. (d) Completeness of programme coverage, ensuring that all
inhabitants are reached.
3. PROGRAMME MANAGEMENT
In order to ensure the quality of new case detection,
Leprosy control is a long-term activity. Therefore planning programmes should ensure that :
and programme management are essential ingredients. It is
generally assumed that with existing tools, we can achieve rapid (a) Case-finding is mainly focused on promoting self-
control of leprosy, provided the "operational performance" is reporting, with appropriate clinical examination and
stepped up to the maximum level required. This is the history-taking to avoid wrong diagnosis and re-
responsibility of programme managers. These issues are registration.
discussed under evaluation (see operational indicators and (b) Case definitions are adhered to, as per national guidelines.
epidemiological indicators below). Among the resources that (c) Previously fully or partly treated cases are not registered as
are needed are adequate infrastructure, trained health new cases. Partly treated cases should be given treatment.
personnel, adequate supply of drugs and vehicles, and financial All national programmes should collect and report this
allocation. The National Leprosy Eradication Programme information, distinguishing paucibacillary and multibacillary
incorporates all these elements (see chapter 7, page 422). leprosy and child/adult patients.
4. EVALUATION (2) RATE OF NEW CASES WITH GRADE-2
An important aspect of leprosy control is to assess the DISABILITIES PER 100,000 POPULATION
impact of the control operations on the endemicity of the It is the percentages of people with grade-2 disability
disease, and to compare results between different times and among the new leprosy cases detected during the reporting
places. Indicators are required for such an evaluation. It is year and for whom a disability assessment was carried out.
important that these indicators can be easily used and satisfy
the criteria of repeatability and validity. Ideally they should Number of new cases with
be conceived and treated as signals for action by Disability grade-2 disability Gr-2 in a year
proportion x 100
programme managers (8). There are two main types of Total number of new cases
indicators in leprosy control. detected in that particular year
For the first time this indicator has been included in the
I. Epidemiological indicators current list of core indicators to monitor the progress made
These are required to evaluate the effectiveness of the against leprosy. When reviewed together with other
LEPROSY
indicators, these can be used to : leprosy transmission, it is important to know how many of
(1) estimate under-detection; the newly detected cases fall into this category. It is also
(2) measure the need for physical and social rehabilitation; necessary for calculating drugs requirement. Proportion of
multibacillary cases is calculated by the following formula :
(3) advocate activities for the prevention of disabilities; and
(4) promote collaboration with other sectors. No. of MB cases among newly
Percentage detected cases in a
of MB ~~~~~~~~~~~~ xlOO
(3) TREATMENT COMPLETION/CURE RATE cases Total number of new cases
The two most important components of the leprosy detected in that year
control programme are : IV. Main indicators for assessing the quality of
(1) timely detection of new cases; and services
(2) ensuring that all new patients who start rnultidrug The programme may collect the following indicators to
therapy complete the full course of treatment within a assess the quality of services on a sample basis as part of an
reasonable period of time. ·integrated supervision process :
A satisfactory treatment completion rate is indicative of (1) Proportion of new cases verified as correctly
efficient case-holding, counselling and the degree of patient diagnosed.
satisfaction with the services. Completion of treatment (2) Proportion of treatment defaulters.
means that a paucibacillary leprosy patient completes six (3) Number of relapses.
monthly doses of PB-MDT within nine months and a (4) Proportion of patients who develop new/additional
rnultibacillary leprosy patient completes 12 monthly doses of disability during multidrug therapy.
MB-MDT within 18 months.
All national programmes should undertake cohort analysis Anti-leprosy activities in India
of treatment completion rates for both paucibacillary and The history of anti-leprosy work in India goes back to
multibacillary leprosy at least on a sample basis. 1874 when the Mission to Lepers {now Leprosy Mission)
Ill. Main indicators for evaluating case detection was founded by Baily at Chamba, in the Himachal Pradesh.
The headquarters of this organization later moved to Purulia
The following indicators should be collected to evaluate in West Bengal. Since then, many voluntary organizations
the case detection activities and to calculate MDT drug (now about 150) have sprung up in the cause of leprosy.
requirements. Important among these are the Hind Kusht Nivaran Sangh
(formerly the British Empire Leprosy Relief Association);
(1) PROPORTION OF NEW CASES PRESENTING Gandhi Memorial Leprosy Foundation, Sevagram, Wardha;
WITH GRADE-2 DISABILITIES/IMPAIRMENTS. the German Leprosy Relief Association; the Damien
This indicator has been included in core indicators also Foundation; the Danish Save the Child Fund; and the more
and has been discussed in detail there. recent JALMA which was taken over by the ICMR in 1975. A
federation body, "National Leprosy Organization" came into
(2) PROPORTION OF CHILD CASES AMONG NEW being in 1965 to provide a common platform to discuss their
CASES problems and share their experiences. The campaign against
It denotes the percentage of children among all new cases leprosy in India is accomplished through an official
detected during the reporting year. A high child proportion programme, the National Leprosy Control Programme
may be a sign of active and recent transmission of the which was initiated in the middle of 1954. In 1983, it was
disease. It is thus an important epidemiological indicator. converted into an eradication programme.
The child proportion (rather the number of new PB and MB An account of the National Leprosy Eradication
children) is also valuable for calculating drug requirements. Programme is given in chapter 7, page 422.
Number of children ( < 15 years age)
Child References
among new cases detected in a year x
proportion 100 1. WHO (2001), Weekly Epidemiolgical Record, No. 20, 18 May, 2001.
rate Total number of new cases detected 2. WHO (2000), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 28 14th July 2000.
in that particular year 3. WHO (2014), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 36, 5th Sep., 2014.
(3) PROPORTION OF FEMALE PATIENTS AMONG 4. WHO (2010), Weekly Epidemiological Record, No. 6, 5th Feb., 2010.
5. WHO (2009), Enhanced Global Strategy for Further Reducing the
NEW CASES Disease Burden due to Leprosy (Plan period 2011-2015).
In most leprosy endemic countries more men than 6. Govt. of India (2014), National Leprosy Eradication Programme,
women are diagnosed with leprosy. It is not clear whether Progress Report for the year 2013-14. Dept. of Deputy Director
the higher leprosy rates in men reflect epidemiological General Leprosy, DGHS, New Delhi, internet report.
differences or the influence of operational factors (5). 7. Dharmendra (1985), Leprosy Vol III Samant and Company, Bombay.
8. WHO (1988). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 768.
(4) PROPORTION OF MULTIBACILLARY CASES 9. Job, C.K. et al (1975). Leprosy: Diagnosis and Management, Hind
AMONG NEW CASES Kush! Nivaran Sangh, New Delhi.
10. Periaswamy, V. (1984). fnd. J. Lepr, 56, No.1 (suppl).
It denotes the percentage of MB cases among the total 11. WHO (1980). A Guide to Leprosy Control.
number of new leprosy cases detected during the reporting 12. Last, J.M. ed (1980). Maxcy-Rosenau: Public Health and Preventive
year. Since 1997, every one who shows more than five Medicine, 11th ed., Appleton Century Crofts.
anaesthetic hypo-pigmented patches in addition to those 13. Prabhakar, M.C. et al (1984). fnd. J. Lepr, 56No.l (Suppl).
who have positive skin smears are considered MB cases. As 14. Noussitou, F.M. et al (1976). Leprosy in Children WHO.
the people with MB leprosy are considered to be more 15. Van Braket, W.H. et al., Leprosy review, 1992, 63:231-245.
infectious, and this is more likely to be responsible for 16. WHO (2009), Transmission of Leprosy, Internet.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
17. Noordeen, S.K. (1980). In :A Manual of Leprosy, R.H. Thangaraj (ed) TABLE 1
The Leprosy Mission, New Delhi. Classification of sexually transmitted disease agents
18. Desikan, K.V. (1985).Ann. Natl.Acad. Med. Sci, India, 21(4)207 The
Times of India, New Delhi 30 Jan. 1991. A. Bacterial agents
19. Job, C.K. (1987). Ind. J. Lepr., 59 (1) 1-8. Neisseria gonorrhoeae
20. International Leprosy Congress, Madrid (1953). Int. J. Lepr., 21: 504. Chlamydia trachomatis
21. Ridley, D.S. and Jopling, W.H. (1966). Int. J. Lepr., 34, 255. Treponema pa//idum
22. Chacko,C.J.G. (1980).In:AManualofLeprosy, R.H. Thangaraj (ed). Haemophilus ducreyi
The Leprosy Mission, New Delhi: Mycoplasma hominis
23. Editorial (1982). Lepr. India, 54 (1) 8-32. Ureaplasma urealyticum
24. WHO (1998), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 874. Calymmatobacterium granu/omatis
25. WHO (1982). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.675. Shigella spp.
26. Govt of India (1989), Leprosy-National Leprosy Eradication Campy/obacter spp.
Programme in India 1989, Guidelines for Multidrug treatment in
Endemic Districts, Leprosy, Division, DGHS, New Delhi. Group B streptococcus
27. Van Brake!, W.H. et al. Leprosy review, 1992, 63:231-245. Bacteria/ vaginosis-associated organisms
28. Ramanujam, K. (1984). lnd. J. Lepr., 56, No.I (suppl). B. Viralagents
29. Yawalkar, S.I., Leprosy for medical practitioners and paramedical Human (alpha) herpesvirus 1 or 2 (herpes simplex virus)
workers, Sixth Edition (1994), CIBA-GEIGY Ltd. Human (beta) herpesvirus 5 (formerly cytomegaiovirus)
30. Bryceson, A. and Roy, E.P. (1979). Leprosy, 2nd ed., Churchill Hepatitis virus B
Livingstone. Human papilloma viruses
31. Bharadwaj, V.P. (1985). Ann. Natl. Acad. Med. Sci, 21(3)128.
Molluscum contagiosum virus
32. Ramu, G. et al (1980). Lepr India, 52 (3) 390. Human immunodeficiency virus
33. Bharadwaj, V.P. et al (1981). Leprlndia, 53: 518.
34. Sinha, S. et al (1985). Ind. J. Lepr., 53: 33-38. C, Protozoa} agents
35. Dharmendra (1982). Lepr India, 54: 193. Entamoeba histolytica
36. Govt. of India (1982). Report of the Working Group on the Eradication Giardia lamblia
of Leprosy, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Trichomonas vagina/is
37. WHO and NLEP India (2000), Guide to Eliminate Leprosy as a Public D. Fungal agents
Health Problem.
Candida a/bicans
38. Katochi, K. et al (1985). Ind. J. Lepr., 57 (3) 499.
39. WHO (2003 ), The Final Push strategy to Eliminate Leprosy as a Public E. Ectoparasites
Health Problem, Questions and Answers, 2nd Ed. 2003. Phthirus pubis
40. Ramu, G. (1985). Ind. J. Lepr., 57 (3) 465. Sarcoptes scabiei
41. Ganpati, R., Leprosy -A Glimpse at the Changing Scenario (1996),
Published by Acworth Leprosy Hospital Society for Research, Extent of the problem
Rehabilitation and Education in Leprosy and Bombay Leprosy
Project. WORLD
42. Indian Journal of Leprosy, Oct-Dec. 2003, Vol 75 (4).
43. Govt. of India (2007), Operational Guidelines (Secondary Level),
The true incidence of STDs will never be known not only
Disability Prevention and Medical Rehabilitation, 2007, National because of inadequate reporting but because of the secrecy
Leprosy Eradication Programme, Central Leprosy Division, Ministry that surrounds them. Most of them are not even notifiable.
of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. All available data, however, indicate a very high prevalence
44. Govt. of India (2007), Operational Guidelines (Primay Level), of STD.
Disability Prevention and Medical Rehabilitation, 2007, National
Leprosy Eradication Programme, Central Leprosy Division, Ministry STDs have a profound impact on sexual and reproductive
of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. health world-wide, and rank among the top 5 disease
45. WHO (1960). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.189. categories for which adults seek health care. ·
46. Bhowmick, A. (1987). Ind. J. Lepr., 59 (1) 92. More than 1 million people acquire a sexually tra_nsmitted
disease every day. Each year, an estimated 500 million people
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES acquire one of the four STDs, i.e., chlamydia, gonorrhoea,
syphilis and trichomoniasis. More than 530 million people are
The sexually transmitted diseases (STD) are a group of living with HSV2 that causes genital herpes. More than 290
communicable diseases that are transmitted predominantly million women have an human papilloma virus infection,
by sexual contact and caused by a wide range of bacterial, which is one of the most common STD (3).
viral, protozoa! and fungal agents and ectoparasites. STDs can have serious consequences beyond the
During the past few decades, STDs have undergone a immediate impact of the infection itself. Some STDs can
dramatic transformation (1). First, the change in name from increase the risk of HIV infection three-fold or more. Mother
venereal diseases (V.D.) to sexually transmitted diseases to child transmission of STDs can result in stillbirth, neonatal
(STD) indicates this transformation. The list of pathogens death, low birth-weight and prematurity, sepsis, pneumonia,
which are sexually transmissible has expanded from ·the neonatal conjunctivitis, and congenital deformities. Syphilis
5 "classical" venereal diseases (syphilis, gonorrhoea, in pregnancy leads to approximately 305,000 foetal and
chancroid, lymphogranuloma venereum and donovanosis) neonatal deaths every year and leaves 215,000 infants at an
to include more than 20 agents, as shown in Table 1 (2). increased risk of.dying from prematurity, lowcbirth-weight or
Secondly, attention is now given not only to specific congenital disease (3).
diseases, but also to clinical syndromes associated with Human papilloma virus causes 530,000 cases of cervical
STDs as shown in Table 3 (1). Most of the recently cancer and 275,000 cervical cancer deaths each year.
recognized STDs are now referred to as second Gonorrhoea and chlamydia are major causes of pelvic
generation STDs. AIDS, the most recently recognized, is a inflammatory disease, adverse pregnancy outcomes and
totally new disease. infertility (3).
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES
encourage prostitution and conversely, prostitution may GENITAL HERPES: Herpes simplex virus type 2 (HSV-2)
boost the sale of alcohol. is the primary cause of genital herpes. Classical genital
herpes can be recognized by the presence of typical papular
Clinical spectrum (7) lesions that progress to multiple blisters and ulcers.
GONOCOCCAL INFECTION: Gonococcal infection causes However, the features can be variable in many people and
inflammation of the genital tract involving the urethra in men the appearance can easily be confused with other genital
and women, the cervix and rectum in women, and the rectum in infections. First episode of disease manifestation are
men who have sex with men. Other sites are the throat frequently associated with a prolonged course of ulceration,
(pharyngitis) and the eyes. The possible complications in lasting up to three to four weeks. Antiviral treatment of these
women include pelvic inflammatory disease (PID). Long-term episodes can be very effective in shortening the duration
sequelae of PIO are increased risk of ectopic pregnancy, and alleviating pain. HSV-2 infection is life-long and
infertility and chronic pelvic pain. In men, complications include recurrent ulcerative episodes occur. The median recurrence
inflammation of the epididymis. Long term consequences are rate after a symptomatic first episode of genital herpes is
sub-fertility and possibly urethral strictures. Serious four to five episodes per year. Asymptomatic or subclinical
consequences in infants include eye infection which can lead to infection does occur, as do subclinical recurrences,
blindness if not treated promptly. The antibiotics of choice are accompanied by viral shedding without a visible ulcer. These
· ciprofloxacin, ceftriaxone, cefixime or spectinomycin. subclinical episodes can be infectious to sexual partners.
There is no cure for HSV-2 infection. However, oral antiviral
SYPHILIS : Syphilis causes ulceration of the uro-genital medications such as acyclovir, valaciclovir and famciclovir
tract, mouth or rectum. Other signs of this infection, are all effective in reducing the severity and duration of first-
occurring in later stages, range from skin eruptions to episode genital ·herpes. Topical creams are less effective.
complications of the cardiovascular and nervous system. Episodic treatment has a limited role in reducing the
Congenital syphilis is an important cause of stillbirth. The duration of lesions as they tend to last less than a week.
antibiotics used to treat syphilis are penicillin, doxycycline
and erythromycin. HUMAN PAPILLOMA VIRUS : Human papilloma virus
(HPV) causes ano-genital warts, which vary from the common
CHLAMYDIAL INFECTION : A high percentage of soft, flesh-coloured protuberances which may become
individuals have no obvious clinical manifestations of. this exuberant (cauliflower like) to papular flat warts on drier areas
infection. If symptoms occur they are similar to those caused (eg. shaft of penis), which resemble those seen on other parts of
by gonorrhoea. Complications, which are similar to those of the body. They can be seen anywhere in the genitalia including
gonorrhoea, can result in steriltiy in women or vertical in the perianal region, even in those denying anal sexual
transmission during childbirth, leading to conjunctivitis or intercourse. The other commonly rec9gnized manifestation of
eye inflammation in the newborn. In men it can cause genital HPV infection is cervical cancer, caused by some sub-
urethritis with possible epididymitis. The antibiotics used are types of HPV. Treatment is generally reserved for large lesions
doxycycline or azithromycin. The alternatives are because sub-clinical infection tend to resolve on their own. For
amoxycillin, ofloxacin, erythromycin or tetracycline. any viral infection the mainstay of control is prevention,
TRICHOMONIASIS : This parasitic infection leads to especially in young sexually active individuals. Regular
vaginitis and vaginal discharge in women. Usually, there are examination of the cervix and cervical cytology using
no symptoms. In most men there are no symptoms but it Papanicolaou staining method is recommended for female
may cause urethritis. There is increasing evidence that patients and female contacts in order to detect progression of
T. Vaginalis may cause adverse outcomes in pregnancy, e.g. lesions to cervical cancer. Detection programmes based on
low birth weight and premature rupture of the membranes. cervical cytology screening and colposcopy services have been
The treatment option is metronidazole or tinidazole. successful in curbing the incidence of, and mortality from
CHANCROID : After infection a small papule develops at cervical cancers in industrialized countries, but are expensive to
the site of inoculation, normally within 2-3 days. The lesion run in developing countries.
then erodes into a deep ulcer that is extremely painful. In about Syndromic approach to STD
25 per cent of patients there is a painful swelling of one or the
other inguinal lymph nodes (bubo). The antibiotics used are Many different agents cause sexually transmitted
ciprofloxacin, erythromycin, ciftriaxone and azithromycin. diseases. However, some of these agents give rise to similar
or overlapping clinical manifestations. Common syndromes
LYMPHOGRANULOMA VENEREUM : It commonly and sequelae are as shown in Table 3.
presents with swelling of lymph nodes in the groin. Although
initially there is a small, painless ulcer of the genitalia 3-30 TABLE 3
days after exposure it may pass unrecognized and resolve
spontaneously. Untreated, the disease may cause extensive Common syndromes and sequelae for which sexual
lymphatic damage resulting in elephantiasis of the genitalia. transmission is of epidemiological importance
The antibiotics used are doxycycline, erythromycin and Male urethritis
tetracycline. Benefit in late cases, e.g. with rectal stricture is Lower genital syndromes in women : vaginitis/cervicitis/urethritis
slight. Surgical operation may be of benefit in cases with Genital ulceration
extensive elephantiasis or deformity. Proctitis/co/itis
DONOVANOSIS : Synonyms are granuloma inguinale, Salpingitis
granuloma venereum. The first manifestation, appearing after Epididymitis/orchitis
a 3-40 days incubation period, is usually a small papule which Infertility/ectopic pregnancy
ruptures to form a granulomatous lesion that is Postnatal and perinatal morbidity
characteristically pain free and bleeds readily on contact, often Hepatitis/hepatic carcinoma
elevated above the level of the surrounding skin. Antibiotics Genital carcinoma
Acquired Im mu no Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS)
used are azithromycin and doxycline, or alterantively
erythromycin, tetracycline, trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole. Source : (1)
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES
The traditional method of diagnosing STD is by syndromic approach is a scientifically derived approach and
laboratory tests. However, these are often not available or offers accessible and immediate treatment, that is effective
are expensive. Since 1990 WHO has recommended and efficient, management of STD using flowcharts (as
syndromic management of STDs in patients presenting with shown in Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6) is more cost-effective than
consistently recognized signs and symptoms of STD. The diagnosis based on laboratory tests (8).
Clinical cure
Discharge persists
(A) Notification and treatment of female partners of men with urethritis are of the highest priority as one of the best ways of
identifying women at high risk of having asymptomatic gonococcal and chlamydia! infections.
(B) Treatment :
As dual infection is common, the treatment for urethral discharge should adequately cover therapy for both, gonorrhea and chlamydia!
infections.
Recommended regimen for uncomplicated gonorrhea + chlamydia
Uncomplicated infections indicate that the disease is limited to the anogenital region (anterior urethritis and proctitis).
Tab. Cefixime 400 mg orally, single dose Plus Tab Azithromycin 1 gram orally single dose, under supervision
- Advise the patient to return after 7 days of start of therapy.
When symptoms persist or recur after adequate treatment for gonorrhea and chlamydia in the index patient and partner(s), they should be
treated for Trichomonas vagina/is.
If discharge or only dysuria persists after 7 days -Tab. Secnidazole 2 gm orally, single dose (to treat for T. vaginalis)
If the symptoms still persists - Refer to higher centre as early as possible.
If individuals are allergic to Azithromycin, give Erythromycin 500 mg four times a day for 7 days.
(C) Syndrome specific guidelines for partner management:
Treat all recent partners; Treat female partners (for gonorrhea and chlamydia) on same lines after ruling out pregnancy and history of
allergies; advise sexual abstinence during the course of treatment; provide condoms, educate about correct and consistent use; refer for
voluntary counselling and testing for HIV, syphilis and Hepatitis B, and schedule return visit after 7 days.
(D) Management of pregnant partner:
Pregnant partners of male clients with urethral discharge should be examined by doing as per speculum as well as per vaginal examination
and should be treated for gonococcal as well as chlamydia! infections.
Cephalosporins to cover gonococcal infection are safe and effective in pregnancy
- Tab. Cefixime 400 mg orally, single dose OR Ceftriaxone 125 mg by intramuscular injection
+
Tab. Erythromycin 500 mg orally four times a day for seven days OR Cap Amoxicillin 500 mg orally, three times a day for seven days
to cover chlamydia! infection
- Quinolones (like ofloxacin, ciprofloxacin), doxycycline are contraindicated in pregnant women.
(E) Follow up after seven days to see reports of tests done for HIV, syphilis and Hepatitis B; if symptoms persist, to assess whether it is due to
treatment failure or re-infection; and for prompt referral if required.
FIG.1
Snydromic management of urethral discharge (in the absence of laboratory support)
Source: (8)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Causative Organisms
Vaginitis Trichomonas vaginalis (Tv);
Candida albicans; and Gardnerella
vaginalis, Mycoplasma causing
bacterial vaginosis (Bv).
Ceruicitis Neisseria Gonorrheae, Chlamydia
trachomatis, Trichomonas vaginalis,
and Herpes simplex virus.
Treatment
Vaginitis (TV+BV+Candida)
- Tab. Secnidazole 2 gm orally, single dose OR Tab. Tinidazole 500 mg orally, twice daily for 5 days.
- Tab. Metoclopropramide taken 30 minutes before Tab. Secnidazole, to prevent gastric intolerance.
- Treat for candidiasis with Tab Fluconazole 150 mg orally single dose OR local Clotrimazole 500 mg vaginal
pessaries once.
Treatment for cervical infection (chlamydia and gonorrhea)
- Tab cefixime 400 mg orally, single dose.
- Plus - Azithromycin 1 gram, 1 hour before lunch. If vomiting within 1 hour, give anti-emetic and repeat
If vaginitis and cervicitis are present treat for both.
- Instruct client to avoid douching.
- Pregnancy, diabetes, HIV may also be influencing factors and should be considered in recurrent infections.
- Follow-up after one week.
,,.
Management in pregnant women
Per speculum examination should be done to rule out pregnancy
complications like abortion, premature rupture of membranes.
Treatment for vaginitis (TV+ BV +Candida)
In first trimester of pregnm:1cy Specific guidelines for partner management
- Local treatment with Clotrimazole vaginal pessary/cream only for - Treat current partner only if no improvement
candidiasis. Oral Flucanozole is contraindicated in pregnancy. after initial treatment.
Metronidazole pessaries or cream intravaginally if trichomoniasis - If partner is symptomatic, treat client and partner
or BV is suspected. using above protocols.
In second and third trimester oral metronidazole can be giuen - Advise sexual abstinence during the course of
- Tab. Secnidazole 2 gm orally, single dose or treatment.
Tab. Tinidazole 500 mg orally, twice daily for 5 days. - Provide condoms, educate about correct
- Tab. Metoclopropramide taken 30 minutes before and consistent use.
Tab. Metronidazole, to prevent gastric intolerance. - Schedule return visit after 7 days.
FIG.2
Syndromic management of vaginal discharge
Source: (8)
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES
Causative organisms
Neisseria gonorrheae; Chlamydia trachomatis; and
Mycoplasma, Gardnerella, Anaerobic bacteria
(Bacteroides specially gram positive cocci) ..
Differential diagnosis : ectopic pregnancy, twisted
ovarian cyst, ovarian tumor, appendicitis, and
abdominal tuberculosis.
FIG.3
Management of lower abdominal pain in females
Source: (8)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Causative organisms :
Treponema pallidum (syphilis),
Haemophi/us ducreyi (chancroid),
Klebsiel/a granulomatis (granuloma inguinale),
Chlamydia trachomatis (lymphogranuloma venerum),
Herpes simplex (genital herpes)
Examination
- Presence of vesicles
History - Presence of genital ulcer-single or multiple.
Associated inguinal lymph node swelling and if present Laboratory
Genital ulcer/vesicles investigations
refer to respective flowchart.
- Burning sensation in the - RPR test for syphilis.
genital region. ___. Ulcer characteristics - For further
- Sexual exposure of either Painful vesicles/ulcers, single or multiple - herpes simplex. investigations refer to
partner to high risk practices - Painless ulcer with shotty lymph node ~ syphilis. higher cen.tre.
including orogenital sex. - Painless ulcer with inguinal lymph nodes - granuloma
inguinale and LGV.
- Painful ulcer usually single, sometimes - chancroid
associated with painful bubo.
Treatment
l
- If vesicles or multiple painful ulcers are present treat for herpes with Tab. Acyclovir 400mg orally, three times a day for 7 days.
- If vesicles are not seen and only ulcer is seen, treat for syphilis and chancroid and counsel on herpes genitalis.
To cover syphilis give
lnj Benzathine penicillin 2.4 million IU IM after test dose in two divided doses (with emergency tray ready).
(In individuals allergic or intolerant to penicillin, Doxycycline 100 mg orally, twice daily for 14 days)
+
Tab. Azithromycin lg orally single dose OR
Tab. Ciprofloxacin 500 mg orally, twice a day for three days to cover chancroid.
Treatment should be extended beyond 7 days if ulcers have not epithelialized i.e. formed a new layer of skin over the sore )
Refer to higher centre
- If not responding to treatment.
- Genital ulcers co-existent with HIV.
Recurrent lesion.
FIG. 4
Management of genital ulcers
Source: (8)
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES
Treatment
- Treat for both gonococcal and chlamydia! .infections
Tab Cefixime 400 mg orally twice daily for 7 days, Plus
Cap. Doxycycline 100 mg orally, twice daily for 14 days and refer to higher
centre as early as possible since complicated gonococcal infection needs
parenteral and longer duration of treatment.
- Supportive therapy to reduce pain
(bed rest, scrotal elevation with T-bandage and analgesics)
Note:
If quick and effective therapy is not girJen, damage and scarring of
testicular tissues may result, causing sub-/ertility.
FlG.5
Syndromic management of scrotal swelling
Source: (8)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Causative organisms
- Chlamydia trachomatis serovars Ll, L2, L3,
causative agent of lympho granuloma
venerum (LGV).
- Haemophilus ducreyi causative agent of
chancroid.
Differential diagnosis
- Mycobacterium tuberculosis, filarisis.
Any acute infection of skin of pubic area, genitals, buttocks,
anus and lower limbs can also cause inguinal swelling.
If malignancy or tuberculosis is suspected refer to higher
centre for biopsy.
Examination
History Look for
- Localized enlargement of lymph nodes in
- Swelling in inguinal region which may be painful. groin which may be tender and fluctuant. Laboratory
- Preceding history of genital ulcer or discharge. Inflammation of skin over the swelling. Investigations.
Sexual exposure of either partner to high risk H Presence of multiple sinuses. Diagnosis is on
practices including oro-genital sex. clinical grounds.
Edema of genitals and lower.limbs
- Systemic symptoms like malaise, fever.
Presence of genital ulcer or urethral
discharge, and if present refer to
respective flowchart.
l
Treatment
- Start Cap. Doxycycline 100 mg orally twice daily for 21 days (to cover LGV)
Plus · ·
- Tab Azithromycin lg orally single dose OR
- Tab. Ciprofloxacin 500 mg orally, twice a day for three days to cover chancroid.
- Refer to higher centre as early as possible.
Note:
- A bubo should never be incised and drained at the primary health centre, even if it is fluctuant,
as there is a high risk of a fistula formation and chronicity. If bubo becomes fluctuant always
refer for aspiration to higher centre.
- In severe cases with vulva! edema in females, surgical intervention may be required for which
they should be referred to higher centre.
FIG. 6
Syndrome management of inguinal bubo
Source: (8)
SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES
Control Of STDs treated (10). This is one of the best methods of controlling
The aim of the control programme for STDs is the the spread of infection. Patients are interviewed for their
prevention of ill-health resulting from the above conditions sexual contacts by specially trained staff. The key to success
through various interventions. These interventions may in contact tracing is the patient himself who must disclose all
have a primary prevention focus (the prevention of sex contacts voluntarily. In some parts of USA, contacts are
infection), a secondary prevention focus (minimizing the sought as quickly as possible using telephone, telegram and
adverse health effects of infection), or usually a combination other rapid means of communication. The contacts are then
of the two. The control of STD may be considered under the persuaded to attend a STD clinic for examination and
following heads (9). treatment. Where prevalence is low, contact tracing is
relatively expensive.
1. Initial planning
( c) CLUSTER TESTING : Here the patients are asked to
2. Intervention strategies name other persons of either sex who move in the same
3. Support components socio-sexual environment. These persons are then screened
4. Monitoring and evaluation (e.g., blood testing). This technique has been shown almost
to double the number of cases found (11).
INITIAL PLANNING 2. Case holding and treatment
Adequate treatment of patients and their contacts is the
Control programmes have to be designed. to meet the
mainstay of STD control. There is a tendency on the part of
unique needs of each country and to be in line with that
patients suffering from STDs to disappear or drop out before
country's health care system, its resources and priorities.
treatment is complete. Therefore every effort should be
This requires initial planning which comprises the following made to ensure complete and adequate treatment. A recent
steps : (1) PROBLEM DEFINITION : The disease problem WHO Expert Committee (2) drew up a list of recommended
must be defined in terms of prevalence, psychosocial regimens for treating STDs. Not less than the recommended
consequences and other health effects - by geographic areas dosages should be used.
and population groups, with the aid of sero-epidemiological
surveys and population surveys. This is an important first 3. Epidemiological treatment
step, since such information is usually inadequate or non- What is known as epidemiological treatment or more
existent in most cases. (2) ESTABLISHING PRIORITIES : appropriately contact treatment has become a keystone
Rational planning requires establishment of priorities. This of the control campaigns (10). It consists of the
will depend upon health problem considerations (e.g., administration of full therapeutic dose of treatment to
magnitude, consequences) and feasibility of control (e.g., persons recently exposed to STD while awaiting the results
availability of adequate resources, social and political of laboratory tests (12). Epidemiological treatment should
commitment). Priority groups may be categorized on the not be an end in itself. Its effects are not lasting unless it is
basis of age, sex, place of residence, occupation, drug combined with a venereological examination and the tracing
addiction, etc. (3) SETTING OBJECTIVES : Priorities must of contacts revealed by that examination.
be converted into discrete, achievable and measurable
objectives. That is, to reduce the magnitude of the problem, 4. Personal prophylaxis
in a given population and a stated time. To be most useful, (i) Contraceptives : Mechanical barriers (e.g., condoms
objectives should be unambiguous and quantifiable. Broad and the diaphragms) can be recommended for personal
coverage of the population is crucial for effective STD prophylaxis against STDs. These barrier methods, especially
control. (4) CONSIDERING STRATEGIES : A variety of when used with spermicides, will minimize the risk of
intervention strategies are available. Planners must define acquiring STD infections. However, their use is limited by
the mixture of strategies that appears to be most appropriate lack of motivation, acceptability and convenience. The
to the setting. (The reader is referred to chapter 20 for a effectiveness of most of the prophylactic techniques
broad discussion of the planning cycle). available is poorly documented since few controlled studies
have been carried out (2). The exposed parts sho.uld be
INTERVENTION STRATEGIES washed with soap and water as soon after contact as
possible. (ii) Vaccines : The development of a vaccine for
1. Case detection hepatitis B has raised hopes that vaccines will be found for
Case detection is an essential part of any control other STDs.
programme. The usual methods of early detection in a STD 5. Health education
control programme are :
Health education is an integral part of STD control
(a) SCREENING : Screening is the testing of apparently programmes. The principal aim of educational intervention
healthy volunteers from the general population for the early is to help individuals alter their behaviour in an effort to
detection of disease. High priority is given to screening of avoid STDs, that is, to minimize disease acquisition and
special groups, viz. pregnant women, blood donors, transmission. The target groups may include the general
industrial workers, army, police, refugees, prostitutes, public, patients, priority groups, community leaders, etc.
convicts, restaurant and hotel staff etc. The availability of an The primary health care of WHO also underlines the
appropriate test is critical for screening purposes. The importance of health education.
sensitivity, specificity, and the predictive value of a test are
important considerations (see Chapter 4). SUPPORT COMPONENTS
{b) CONTACT TRACING : Contact tracing is the term
used for the technique by which the sexual partners of 1. STD clinic
diagnosed patients are identified, located, investigated, and The starting point for the control of STDs is the
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
establishment of STD clinics where all consultation, The information system should be built around a small
investigations and treatment, contact tracing and all other number of questions : How many cases were interviewed ?
relevant services are available. An ideal service is one that is How many villages were visited ? How many cultures were
free, easily accessible to patients and available for long examined? The system should provide information on
hours each day. There should be suitable arrangements for activities, resource utilization and task accomplishment of
treating female patients separately. Since the patients desire programme personnel (9).
anonymity, the STD clinic should try to maintain it.
5. Legislation
Because of the stigma attached to the STD clinics, many
patients seek alternative sources of medical care, including Many countries are still far away in enacting suitable
self-medication. It is now considered that the key to the legislation for the control of STDs (13). Although legislations
success of a STD control programme is the integration of its and regulations cannot wipe out STDs, they are nonetheless
essential elements into the primary health care services. needed, particularly to establish responsibilities and define
standards. The purpose of legislation should be to
However, it is essential to have in each administrative encourage patients to seek early treatment and name their
unit one specialized centre, which should provide the sexual contacts, to screen high risk groups, to improve
necessary clinical, and laboratory expertise and coordinate
notification by general practitioners, health education of the
control activities at all levels of the health care system. The
public, etc. The Immoral Traffic (Prevention) Act, 1986
centre should be housed adjacent to other medical facilities
(which replaced the earlier Suppression of the Immoral
and training centres.
Traffic Act, 1956) covers all persons, whether male or
2. Laboratory services female, who are exploited sexually for commercial purposes.
It makes punishment for the offences under the Act more
Adequate laboratory facilities and trained staff are stringent than the previous Act.
essential for proper patient management. It provides a basis
for correct aetiological diagnosis and treatment decisions; 6. Social welfare measures
for contact tracing; surveillance of morbidity and detection
of antimicrobial resistance. The diagnostic tests that should STDs are social problems with medical aspects. It implies
be available for the important sexually transmitted there should be "social therapy" which would prevent or
pathogens are given in a WHO report (9). control the conditions leading to promiscuity and STDs. The
various social measures include rehabilitation of
3. Primary health care prostitutes; prov1s1on of recreation facilities in the
community; provision of decent living conditions; marriage
The current trend is to integrate STD control activities counselling; prohibiting the sale of sexually stimulating
into primary health care system. This will imply inclusion of literature, pornographic books and photographs, etc.
primary health care workers (e.g., village health guides,
multipurpose workers) in the STD "health team". Then only MONITORING AND EVALUATION
it will be possible to provide effective treatment to the
greatest number of cases in the community. Such A critical aspect of effective management is the
management limits further disease transmission. Primary monitoring of disease trends and evaluating programme
health care which is based on the principles of universal activities. Evaluation will show if the activities have been
coverage, community participation, equity and intersectoral performed in a satisfactory way. Ongoing evaluation of
coordination is ideally suited to control STD in the disease trends provides a more direct measure of
community. programme effectiveness and may be used to determine the
appropriateness of the selected intervention strategies for a
4. Information system particular setting (9).
The basis of an effective control programme of any
communicable disease is the existence of an information National STD Control Programme
system. It is a prerequisite for effective programme planning, See chapter 7, page 437 for details.
coordination, monitoring and evaluation. Three types of
data requirement are relevant in the control of STDs: these References
are clinical notification, laboratory notification, and sentinel 1. Brown, S.T. et al (1985). Int. J. Epidemiology, 14 (4) 505.
and adhoc surveillance. 2. WHO (1986). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 736.
National notification system, at best, includes only the 3. WHO (2014), Fact Sheet, No. 110, Nov., 2013.
"classical" venereal diseases, where existing, reporting 4. Govt. oflndia (2013), National Health Profile 2013, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
systems suffer from undernotification, inaccurate diagnosis
5. WHO (1981). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 660.
and concealment of cases owing to social stigma. Without a 6. Willcox, R.R. (1976). Sexually Transmitted Diseases, R.D. Catterall
notification system, it is not possible to assess the magnitude and C.S. Nicol (eds). Academic Press.
of the problem, to allocate resources and to evaluate the 7. Internet, WHO Fact Sheet, 2006, on STD.
impact of control measures. There is an urgent need to 8. Govt. of India (2007), National Guidelines on Prevention,
develop an effective and detailed reporting system of STDs Management and Control of Reproductive tract infections including
in countries where it does not exist. Sentinel surveillance sexually transmitted infections, NACO, Ministry of Health and Family
Welfare, New Delhi.
systems and/or adhoc surveys can be used to supplement
9. WHO (1985). Control of Sexua/Iy Transmitted Diseases, WHO,
the routine reporting system. Population-based sample Geneva.
surveys may also be used to identify the true distribution of 10. WHO (1982). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 674.
disease in a particular setting. Such surveys are very 11. WHO (1963). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 262.
expensive and are generally of limited use for sexually 12. WHO (1978). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 616.
transmitted disease programmes (9). 13. WHO (1975). VD Control: A Survey of Recent Legislation, Geneva.
ENDEMIC TREPONEMATOSIS
YAWS
ENDEMIC TREPONEMATOSIS
Yaws is a chronic contagious non-venereal disease caused
Endemic treponematoses (pinta, endemic syphilis (Bejel, by T. pertenue, usually beginning in early childhood. It
yaws) continue to be public health problems in some resembles syphilis in its clinical course and is characterized
tropical countries. Of these, yaws and endemic syphilis still by a primary skin lesion (mother yaw) followed by a
constitute a considerable health hazard to the child generalized eruption and a late stage of destructive lesions
population in medically under-served areas, particularly in of the skin and bone. Yaws is also known as pian, bubas or
West and Central Africa and, the Americas (1). These framboesia.
diseases are caused by agents which are microscopically Geographic distribution and prevalence
indistinguishable. Typically these diseases have a patchy
distribution in population groups away from the network of Yaws is exclusively confined to the belt between the
health centres (1). They are usually contracted in childhood Tropic of Capricorn and the Tropic of Cancer. Not long ago,
·non-venereally. Intrauterine transmission is absent. The lat~ it was a significant public health problem in Africa, South
cardiac and cerebral manifestations of venereal syphilis East Asia and Central America. Recent country reports
which are particularly severe in that disease, do not occur in reveal marked variations in prevalence and patchiness in
these infections (excepting scanty or mild lesions in endemic distribution in the former endemic areas (3). In Africa (e.g.,
syphilis). In most countries, the prevalence of these diseases Benin, Ghana, Ivory Coast) there has been a great
was reduced to low levels, and in some areas their resurgence of yaws. In the Americas, reported yaws
transmission was interrupted due to mass-treatment incidence is very low with small foci remaining in Brazil,
campaigns. However, complacency after successful mass Columbia, Ecuador, Guyana and Surinam (3). In Asia, it
campaigns and the premature discontinuation of occurs in Indonesia, Papua New Guinea and the South
surveillance activities have led to resurgence of these Pacific. Persistent low levels of yaws is reported in Sri Lanka
infections in a number of countries (1). and India.
months or years to develop fully unless suppressed by made. The survey should cover not less than 95 per cent of
treatment. There is considerable experimental and the total population. During the survey, persons suffering
epidemiological evidence (3) that yaws provides partial from yaws and their contacts are listed.
immunity to venereal syphilis. The near eradication of yaws
in Haiti has been followed by a high prevalence of venereal 2. Treatment
syphilis. Treatment is based on the following observations :
(a) treatment with a single dose of Azithromycin oral or a
Environmental factors single injection of long-acting penicillin will cure infection.
(a) CLIMATE : Yaws is endemic in warm and humid (b) the simultaneous treatment of all clinical cases and their
regions. High humidity for at least 6 months of the year and likely contacts in the community will interrupt transmission
an average rainfall of at least 40 inches are considered in the community (9).
favourable for the transmission of yaws. (b) SOCIAL Benzathine penicillin G is the penicillin of choice. It has
FACTORS : Social factors are even more important than now replaced PAM (3). The dose of BPG is 1.2 million units
biological factors in the perpetuation of yaws in the endemic for all cases and contacts, and half that dose (0.6 million
areas. Yaws is mostly endemic among the tribal people, units) for children under 10 years of age. Azithromycin is
whose ways of living favour its transmission. Scanty given as a single oral dose at 30 mg/kg body weight
clothing, poor personal cleanliness, overcrowding, bad (maximum 2 gm).
housing, low standard of living and the absence of soap are The WHO (3) has recommended three treatment policies :
important socio-economic factors in the epidemiology of (a) TOTAL MASS TREATMENT : In areas where yaws is
yaws. Yaws is a crippling disease; lesions on palms and soles hyperendemic (i.e., more than 10 per cent prevalence of
may disable a person for long periods making him clinically active yaws), a great part of the population is at
dependant on others. risk. The entire population including the cases should be
given penicillin in the doses mentioned above.
Mode of transmission
(b) JUVENILE MASS TREATMENT : In meso-endemic
Yaws is transmitted non-venereally by : (a) DIRECT communities (5 to 10 per cent prevalence), treatment is
CONTACT : That is, by contact with secretions from given to all cases and to all children under 15 years of age
infectious lesions. (b) FOMITES : Yaws may also be and other obvious contacts of infectious cases.
transmitted by indirect contact. The organism may remain (c) SELECTIVE MASS TREATMENT : In hypo-endemic or
alive on fomites or on the earthen floor in hot and humid areas of low prevalence (less than 5 per cent) treatment is
conditions long enough to cause infection, and (c) VECTOR: confined to cases, their household, and other obvious
There is some evidence that small flies and other insects contacts of infectious cases.
feeding on the lesion may possibly convey the infection
mechanically for brief periods. 3. Resurvey and treatment
Transplacental, congenital transmission does not occur. It is unlikely that a single round of survey and treatment
will cover the entire population. In order to interrupt
Incubation period transmission, it is necessary to find out and treat the missed
9-90 days (average 21 days). cases and new cases. Resurveys should be undertaken every
6 to 12 months. Several such follow-ups may be needed
Clinical features before eradication is achieved.
(a) EARLY YAWS : The primary lesion or "mother yaw" 4. Surveillance
appears at the site of inoculation after an incubation period With the decline of yaws to very low levels, emphasis has
of 3 to 5 weeks. The lesion is extra-genital and is seen on shifted to "Surveillance and containment" - a technique
exposed parts of the body such as legs, arms, buttocks or which has proved highly successful in the eradication of
face. The local lymph glands are enlarged and the blood smallpox. The surveillance and containment measures
becomes positive for STS. Within the next 3 to 6 weeks, a would be concentrated on affected villages, households and
generalized eruption appears consisting of large, yellow, other contacts of known yaws cases. The measures comprise
crusted, granulomatous eruptions often resembling epidemiological investigation of cases to identify probable
condylomata lata in secondary syphilis. During the next 5 source(s) of infection and contacts of each known case so as ·
years skin, mucous membrane, periosteal and bone lesions to discover previously unknown cases and prevent new
may develop, subside and relapse at irregular intervals. The cases; treatment of cases; prophylactic treatment of contacts
early lesions are highly infectious. with BPG; and, monthly follow-up of households with
(b) LATE YAWS : By the end of 5 years, destructive and confirmed cases for at least 3 to 4 months after treatment of
often deforming lesions of the skin, bone and periosteum the last active case to assure interruption of transmission.
appear. The lesions of sole and palms are called "crab 5. Environmental Improvement
yaws". The destructive lesions of soft palate, hard palate,
and nose are called "Gangosa". Swelling by the side of the In a disease like yaws, an attack on social and economic
nose due to osteo-periostitis of the superior maxillary bone conditions of life is as important as an attack on the
is called "Goundu". biological cause. Recrudescence of the disease is apt to
occur unless environmental improvement is promoted, e.g.,
CONTROL OF YAWS improvement of personal and domestic hygiene, adequate
water supply, liberal use of soap, better housing conditions
The control of yaws is based on the following principles : and improvement of the quality of life.
1. Survey 6. Renewed eradication efforts (7)
A clinical survey of all the families in endemic areas is The WHO roadmap for neglected tropical diseases
AIDS
TABLE 1
Key Indicators for the HIV epidemic 2009-2012
2009 2010 2011 2012
Number of people living with HIV (in millions) 32.9 34.0 34.2 35.2
(31.0-34.4) (31.6-35.2) (31.9-35.9) (32.2-38.2)
Number of people newly infected 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.3
with HIV (in millions) (2.5-2.9) (2.4-2.9) (2.2-2.8) (1.9-2. 7)
Number of people dying from AIDS-related 1.9 1.8 1.7 .1.6
causes (in millions) (1.7-2.1) (1.6-1.9) (1.5-1.9) (1.4-1.9)
3 of pregnant women tested for HIVa 26% 353 40%
Number of facilities providing antiretrovial therapy• 18,600 22,400
Number of people receiving antiretrovial therapy • 5,255,000 6,650,000 8,000,000 9,700,000
Number of children receiving antiretrovial therapy a 354,600 456,000 566,000 647,000
Coverage of antiretrovial medicines for preventing 48%b 48%c 57% 67%b
. mother-to-child transmission (3) a
a In low-and middle-income countries.
b The coverage data includes provision of single-dose nevirapine which is no longer recommended by WHO.
c This data does not include single-dose nevirapine regimen which is no longer recommended by WHO. It should not be compared with the
previous years. When including single-dose nevirapine, the coverage in 2010 was 59%.
Source : (2, 3, 4)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
is not well-established in the general population. This responses; (c) Build strong and sustainable health systems;
epidemic state suggests active networks of risk within the and (d) Address inequalities and advance human rights (8).
sub-population. The future course of the epidemic is The interaction of HIV/AIDS with other infectious
determined by the frequency and nature of links between diseases is an increasing public health concern.
highly infected sub-populations and the general population. Tuberculosis, bacterial infection and malaria have been
Numerical proxy : HIV prevalence is consistently over 5% in identified as the leading cause of HIV-related morbidity in
at least one defined sub-population but is below 1 % in Sub-Saharan Africa. HIV infection increases the incidence
pregnant women in urban areas. and severity of clinical malaria in adults (9).
Generalized HIV epidemics The national HIV strategic plans in most SEAR countries
accord priority to prevention, care and treatment
In generalized epidemics, HIV is firmly established in the
interventions to high-risk populations; however coverage of
· general population. Although sub-populations at high risk
a comprehensive package of HIV interventions for sex
may contribute disproportionately to the spread of HIV,
workers, men having sex with men, transgender persons and
sexual networking in the general population is sufficient to
injecting drug users remains low in all countries.
sustain an epidemic independent of sub-populations at
higher risk of infection. Numerical proxy : HIV prevalence INDIA
consistently over 1 % in pregnant women.
Now into its fourth decade, India's epidemic is marked by
On the verge of fourth decade of the AIDS epidemic, the heterogeneity-not a single epidemic but made up of a number
world has turned the corner - it has halted and begun to of distinct epidemics, in some places within the same state.
reverse the spread of HIV The question remains how quickly India's epidemic seems to be following the pattern first
the response can chart a new course towards vision zero described in Thailand. The epidemic shifts from the highest
discrimination, zero new HIV infection and zero AIDs- risk group (commercial sex workers, homosexual men, drug
related deaths through universal access to effective HIV - users) to bridge population (clients of sex workers, STD
prevention, treatment, care and support. patients, migrant population, population in conflict areas
HIV incidence (the number of new HIV infections in a and partners of drug users), and then to general population.
population per year) is the key parameter that prevention The shift usually occurs where the prevalence in the first
efforts aim to reduce, since newly infected persons contribute group reaches 5%. There is a time-lag of 2-3 years between
to the total number of persons living with HIV; they will the shift from one group to the next (10). The trends indicate
progress to disease and death over time; and are a potential that HIV infection is spreading in two ways; from urban to
source of further transmission. Since 1997, the year in which rural areas and from individuals practising high-risk
annual new infections peaked to 3.2 million cases globally, behaviour to the general population. Data from antenatal
the number of new infections has fallen to 2.3 million in clinics indicate rising HIV prevalence among women, which
2012. This reduction in HIV incidence reflects natural trend in turn contribute to increasing HIV infection in children.
of epidemic, as well as the result of prevention programmes Available evidence on HIV prevalence and future statistical
resulting in behavioural changes in different contexts (2). projections shows signs of stabilization of HIV epidemic in
Most new infections are transmitted heterosexually, India at national level. Provisional estimates for the year 2012
although risk factors vary. In some countries, men who have show that there were 20.89 lakh people living with HIV/AIDS
sex with men, injecting drug users and sex workers are at with estimated adult HIV prevalence of 0.27 per cent.
significant risk. Although HIV testing capacity has increased Declining trends are noted in high prevalence states indicating
over time, enabling more people to learn about their HIV possible impact of sustained programme interventions. Even
status, the majority of people with HIV are still unaware the prevalence among pregnant women in the age group of
about their infective status (4). 15-24 years, which is considered proxy for· incidence/new
Women represent about half of all people living with infections in general population, is showing a declining trend.
HIV worldwide, and more than half (about 60 per cent) in Information from persons testing positive for HIV at the
sub-Saharan Africa. HIV is the leading cause of death among integrated counselling and testing centres across the country
women in reproductive age. Gender inequalities, differential during 2011-2012 shows that 88.2 per cent of HIV
access to services and sexual violence increase women's infections are still occurring through heterosexual route of
vulnerability to HIV, and women, especially younger women, transmission. Fig. 1 shows the routes of transmission of HIV
are biologically more susceptible to HIV (4). and their percentage.
In 2013, WHO issued revised treatment guidelines
recommending earlier initiation of antiretroviral therapy, at Heterosexual, Blood & blood
a CD4 count of ~500 cells/mm 3 . These new criteria increased 88.2 products, 1
the total number of people medically eligible for therapy
from 16. 7 million to 25.9 million, an increase of 9.2 million
in low and middle income countries (6).
The "Treatment 2.0" initiative, launched by WHO and
UNAIDS in 2010 is continuing the drive for optimizing and
innovating treatment in the key areas of drug regimens,
point-of-care diagnostics, integrated and decentralized Parent to
delivery of HIV services, and mobilizing communities (7). In child, 5.0
2011, WHO member states adopted a new "Global health
sector strategy on HIV/AIDS for 2011-2015". It outlines four
strategic direction for next 5 years : (a) Optimize HIV FlG.1
prevention, diagnosis, treatment and care outcomes; Routes of transmission of HIV in India 2011-2012 (Jan.)
(b) Leverage broader health outcomes through HIV Source: (11)
_______
Patterns of HIV epidemic at na.tional level (12)
AIDS
At the national level, the overall HIV prevalence among who have sex with men, stable trends are recorded among
different population groups in 2010-11 continues to portray injecting drug users.
the concentrated epidemic with high prevalence of HIV in Impoverished, unemployed, under employed, mobile and
high risk groups. Fig. 2 shows the percentage positivity of migrant youth, and street children are particularly
HIV in different population groups during the year 2010-11. vulnerable to HIV, as they are less likely to have information
about HIV or access to preventive measures, and they may
10 face repeated risks of HIV infection.
8.82
9- EPIDEMIOLOGICAL FEATURES
8 1. Agent factors
7.14
7- (a) AGENT : When the virus was first identified it was
~ called "lymphadenopathy-associated virus {LAV)" by the
<ll
0 6-
s:::
<ll
French scientists. Researchers in USA called it "human
5- T-cell lymphotropic virus III (HTLV-III)". In May 1986, the
'c..°...
>
<ll
4.43
International Committee on the Taxonomy gave it a new
4- name : human immunodeficiency virus {HIV).
>
:c 3- 2.59 2.67 The virus is 1/10,000th of a millimetre in diameter. It is a
protein capsule containing two short strands of genetic
2- material (RNA) and enzymes. The virus replicates in actively
0.99 dividing T4 lymphocytes and like other retroviruses can
1- 0.35 n
o_.._~n.__~~-'--'-~~-'--'-~~_,_~_,_,_~_,_,_~_._.~
remain in lymphoid cells in a latent state that can be
activated. The virus has the unique ability to destroy human
ANC Migrants Truckers FSW MSM !DU Trans- T4 helper cells, a subset of the human T-lymphocytes. The
(2012-13) genders virus is able to spread throughout the body. It can pass
FIG.2 through the blood-brain barrier and can then destroy some
HIV prevalence for ANC attendees and brain cells. This may account for certain of the neurological
among different risk groups, India, 2010-11 and psychomotor abnormalities, observed in AIDS patients.
Source : (12) HIV mutates rapidly, new strains are continually developing.
There are two types of HIV - HIV 1 and HIV 2, which
The primary drivers of HIV epidemic in India are exceeds 50 per cent.
unprotected paid sex/commercial female sex workers, The virus is easily killed by heat. It is readily inactivated
unprotected sex between men, and injecting drug use. It is by ether, acetone, ethanol (20 per cent) and beta-
estimated that there are 8.68 lakh female sex workers, propiolactone (1 :400 dilution), but is relatively resistant to
3.13 lakh men who have sex with men with high-risk and ionizing radiation and ultraviolet light (13).
70,000 transgenders, 1.77 lakh injecting drug users in India
and 110 lakh bridge population which includes 80 lakh (b) RESERVOIR OF INFECTION : These are cases and
migrants and 30 lakh truckers. Though sex workers account carriers. Once a person is infected, the virus remains in the
for 0.5 per cent of adult female population, they account for body life-long. The risk of developing AIDS increases with
seven per cent of HIV infected females. Sex workers time. Since HIV infection can take years to manifest itself,
continues to act as the most important source of HIV the symptomless carrier can infect other people for years.
infection in India due to the large size of clients that get (c) SOURCE OF INFECTION: The virus has been found
infected from them. These men then transmit the infection in greatest concentration in blood, semen and CSE Lower
to their wives affecting several low risk women in the society. concentrations have been detected in tears, saliva, breast
Long-distance truckers and single male migrants constitute a milk, urine, and cervical and vaginal secretions. HIV has
significant proportion of clients of sex workers (12). also been isolated in brain tissue, lymph nodes, bone
The national adult {15-49 years) HIV prevalence is marrow cells and skin (14).
estimated at 0.27 per cent for the year 2011, 0.32 among 2. Host factors
males and 0.22 in females. There is a steady decline from
0.49 per cent in 2001. The prevalence among young {a) AGE : Most cases have occurred among sexually
population {15-24 years) at national level is estimated at active persons aged 20-49 years. This group represents the
0.11 per cent for 2011, and equal among men and women most productive members of the society, and those
at 0.11 per cent. There is stable decline in most states, while responsible for child-bearing and child-rearing.
rising trends are noted in Jharkhand, Odisha, Tripura and (b) SEX : In North America, Europe and Australia, about
Uttarakhand. India is estimated to have around 1.16 lakh 51 per cent of cases are homosexual or bisexual men. In
annual new infections among adults and 14,500 among Africa, the picture is very different; the sex ratio is equal.
children. About 1.48 lakh people died of AIDS related Certain sexual practices increase the risk of infection more
causes in 2011. Deaths among HIV-infected children than others, e.g., multiple sexual partners, anal intercourse,
account for 7 per cent of all AIDS-related deaths. It is and male homosexuality. Higher rate of HIV infection is
estimated that the scale up of free ART since 2004 has saved found in prostitutes.
over 1.5 lakh lives in the country till 2011. {c) HIGH-RISK GROUPS : Male homosexuals and
During 2010-11, none of the states have shown HIV bisexuals, heterosexual partners (including prostitutes),
prevalence of 1 per cent or more among ANC clinic intravenous drug abusers, transfusion recipients of blood
attendees. While declining trends are noted at national level and blood products, haemophiliacs and clients of STD.
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
in developed countries e.g. in the USA, where there was Major signs
sudden increase in tuberculosis cases. The situation in
developing countries is still worst. • weight loss ~ 10% of body weight
• chronic diarrhoea for more than 1 month
The emergence of drug resistance makes it essential that • prolonged fever for more than 1 month (intermittent
antibiotic sensitivity be performed on all positive cultures. or constant).
Drug therapy should be individualized. Patients with multi
drug resistance should receive atleast three drugs to which Minor signs
their organism is sensitive (20). • persistent cough for more than 1 month 3 • b
PERSISTENT GENERALIZED LYMPHADENOPATHY. • generalized pruritic dermatitis
Lymph nodes are larger than one centimetre in diameter, in • history of herpes zosterb
two or more sites other than the groin area for a period of at • oropharyngeal candidiasis
least three months. • chronic progressive or disseminated herpes simplex
KAPOSI SARCOMA. A tumour featuring reddish brown infection
or purplish plaques or nodules on the skin and mucous • generalized lymphadenopathy.
membranes. Endemic in Africa prior to HIV, it used to affect The presence of either generalized Kaposi sarcoma or
mainly older men. With HIV infection it affects a wider age cryptococcal meningitis is sufficient for the diagnosis of
range and both sexes, and is characterized by lesions in the AIDS for surveillance purposes.
mouth or gut; or lesions are generalized (in two or more
places) or rapidly progressive or invasive. a. For patients with tuberculosis, persistent cough for
more than 1 month should not be considered as a
OROPHARYNGEAL CANDIDIASIS. Caused by a minor sign
common yeast fungus, oral thrush presents with soreness b. Indicates changes from the 1985 provisional WHO
and redness, with white plaques on the tongue, and in the clinical case definition for AIDS ("Bangui definition")
mouth and throat; and sometimes a white fibrous layer
covering the tonsils and back of the mouth. Infection of the
The clinical definition is relatively specific (if used
oesophagus presents with pain behind the breastbone.
correctly), meaning that the vast majority of people
CYTOMEGALOVIRUS RETINITIS. Inflammation of the diagnosed as having AIDS will have been correctly assessed.
eye retina which may lead to blindness. However, studies show that the definition is relatively
PNEUMOCYSTOSIS CARINII PNEUMONIA. Symptoms insensitive, meaning that only half the patients who have
can include a dry, non-productive cough; inability to take a severe illness related to HIV infection are included. This is
full breath and occasional pain on breathing; and weight loss because not all HIV-related opportunistic diseases are in the
and fever. AIDS definition. Tuberculosis is widely recognized as the
TOXOPLASMA ENCEPHALITIS. Protozoa! infection in commonest opportunistic disease associated with HIV in
the central nervous system, presenting with focal Africa. But because TB causes wasting, cough and fever in
neurological signs such as mild hemiplegia or stroke, most patients, the AIDS clinical case definition cannot
resulting from damage to part of the brain, seizures or reliably distinguish between HIV-positive and HIV-negative
altered m'ental status. TB patients.
HAIRY LEUKOPLAKIA. White patches on the sides of the The clinical case definition was developed to enable
tongue, in vertical folds resembling corrugations. reporting of the number of people with AIDS for the
purposes of public health surveillance, rather than for
CRYPTOCOCCAL MENINGITIS. A fungal infection in patient care. However, for the purpose of individual case
the central nervous system which usually presents with fever, management, it is useful to be able to diagnose whether
headache, vomiting and neck stiffness.
illnesses may be related to HIV infection (symptomatic HIV
HERPES-ZOSTER OR SHINGLES. Viral inflammation of infection) because :
the central nervous system, presenting with localised pain
and burning sensations, followed by vesicle eruption (skin • clinical manifestations can be a reliable indicator of
blistering) and ulceration. underlying HIV infection;
SEVERE PRURIGO OR PRURITIC DERMATITIS. • over-use of HIV testing is avoided, testing is used to
Chronic skin inflammation in the form of a very itchy rash of confirm suspected HIV infection, rather than as a
small flat spots developing into blisters. diagnostic tool in the first instance;
SEVERE OR RECURRENT SKIN INFECTIONS. Warts; • a patient with suspected HIV infection can be
dermatophytosis or ringworm; and folliculitis (inflammation counselled about having an HIV test, the implications
of hair follicles). for them and their sexual partners, self-care and
nutrition;
DIAGNOSIS OF AIDS • many HIV-related illnesses can be treated, improving
the patient's quality of life;
CLINICAL
• certain drugs (such as thiacetazone) cause severe side
I. WHO case definition for AIDS surveillance effects in people with HIV infection, and should not be
For the purposes of AIDS surveillance an adult or prescribed for them.
adolescent(> 12 years of age) is considered to have AIDS if at
least 2 of the following major signs are present in combination
Children (22)
with at least 1 of the minor signs listed below, and if these signs The case definition for AIDS is fulfilled if at least 2 major
are not known to be due to a condition unrelated to HIV signs and 2 minor signs are present (if there is no other
infection (21). known cause of immunosuppression).
AIDS
The current trend in HIV-antibody tests is towards HIV vfral load tests These tests measure the amount of actively.
·simple, cheap, reliable kits whose results can be read on the replicating HIV virus. Correlates with
spot without much waiting and without the need for disease progression and response to
antiretroviral drugs.
laboratory backup.
Non-specific laboratory findings with HIV infection may B2 - Microglobulin Cell surface protein . indicative ·. of
include anaemia, leukopenia (particularly macrophage monocyte stimulation.
lymphocytopenia) and thrombocytopenia in any Levels >3.5 mg/dL associated with rapid
progression of disease. Not useful with
combination, polyclonal hypergammaglobulinaemia. intravenous drug users.
Cutaneous energy is frequent early in the course, and
becomes universal as the disease progresses (24). p24antigen Indicates active HIV replication. Tends to be
Several laboratory markers are available to provide positive prior .to seroconversion and with
advanced disease.
prognostic information and guide therapy decisions. The
most widely used marker is the absolute CD4 lymphocyte Source: (20)
AIDS
The WHO has pointed out the danger of compulsory j Nucleoside reve.rse trans~dptas~ hihibltors (NRTls)
testing programmes in their tendency to social rejection of Abacavir (ABC)
HIV-carrier and the resulting social and psychological Didanosine (ddl)
consequences. Diagnostic testing may be useful in gauging Emtricitabine (FTC)
the magnitude and course of the epidemic. Lamivudine (3TC)
Stavudine (d4T)
Control of AIDS Zidovudine (AZT)
There are four basic approaches to the control of AIDS : INucleotide reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NtRTh;1)
ITenofovir (TDF) . . . . · • . . . . . >• ·• J
1. Prevention INon-nucleoside revere~e tr,anscriptase inhibitors (Nl\lRTbii)J
.Efavirenz (EFV) . . .. .·
(a) EDUCATION Etraviritie (ETV)
Until a vaccine or cure for AIDS is found, the only Nevirapine: (NVP)
means at present available is health education to enable IProtease. inhibitors (Phi)
people to make life-saving choices (e.g., avoiding Atazanavir + ritonavir (ATV/r)
indiscriminate sex, using condoms). There is, however, no Darunavir + ritonavir (DRV)r)
guarantee that the use of condoms will give full protection. Fos-ampren~vir + ritonavir (FPV/r)
One should also avoid the use of shared razors · and +
lndinavir ritonavir (IDV/r)
toothbrushes. Intravenous drug users should be informed Lopinavit/ritonavir (LPV/r) ·
that the sharing of needles and syringes involves special Saquinavir + ritoriavir (SQV/r)
risk. Women suffering from AIDS or who are at high risk of l'Int~grase strand traqsfer inhibitors (INSTisr ·
infection should avoid becoming pregnant, since infection l.R~ttegravir (HAL) . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .
-I
can be transmitted to the unborn or newborn. Educational
material and guidelines for prevention should be made
widely available. All mass media channels should be
WHO recommended ARV treatment schedule
involved in educating the people on AIDS, its nature,
transmission and prevention; this indudes international (2013) (25)
travellers. WHO has been providing guidance on the use of ARV
drugs since 2002, producing a range of guidelines on various
(b) PREVENTION OF BLOOD-BORNE HIV aspects of HIV diagnosis, treatment and care. The 2013
guidelines aim to combine and harmonize new and existing
TRANSMISSION recommendations, including updated recommendations
People in high-risk groups should be urged to refrain from the 2010 guidelines on ART for adults, adolescents and
from donating blood, body organs, sperm or other tissues. children, and ARV treatment and prophylaxis for pregnant
All blood should be screened for HIV 1 & HIV 2 before and breast-feeding women living with HIV. They also include
transfusion. Transmission of infection to haemophiliacs can existing WHO guidance on HIV testing and counselling. HIV
be reduced by introducing heat treatment of factors VIII prevention, general care for people living with HIV,
and IX. Strict sterilization practices should be ensured in managing common coinfections and other comorbidities and
hospitals and clinics. Pre-sterilized disposable syringes and monitoring and managing drug toxicities.
needles should be used as far as possible. One should avoid The 2013 guidelines are based on a public health
injections unless they are absolutely necessary. approach to further expanding the use of ARV drugs for HIV
treatment and prevention, with a particular focus on
2. Antiretroviral treatment resource-limited settings. The new clinical recommendations
in the guidelines include :
At present there is no vaccine or cure for treatment of 1. treating adults, adolescents and older children earlier,
HIV infection/AIDS. However, the development of drugs starting ART in all individuals with a CD4 cell count of
that suppress the HIV infection itself rather than its 500 cells/mm3 or less and giving priority to individuals
complications has been important development. These with severe or advanced HIV disease and those with a
antiviral chemotherapy have proved to be useful in CD4 cell count of 350 cells/mm 3 or less;
prolonging the life of severely ill patients.
2. starting ART at any CD4 count for certain populations
The availability of agents in combination suppress HIV with HIV, including people with active TB disease,
replication. It has a profound impact on the natural history people with hepatitis B virus (HBV) coinfection with
of HIV infection. Patients who achieve excellent severe chronic liver disease, HIV-positive partners in
suppression of HIV generally have stabilization or serodiscordant couples, pregnant and breast-feeding
improvement of their clinical course which results from women and children younger than five years of age;
partial immunologic reconstitution and a subsequent 3. a new, preferred first-line ART regimen harmonized for
decrease in complications of immunosuppression. Concept adults, pregnant and breast-feeding women and children
about the timing of such therapy have changed aged three years and older;
considerably. 4. support to actively accelerate the phasing out of
stavudine (d4T) in first-line ART regimens for adults and
Classification of drugs used for ART (24) adolescents;
The drugs used for ART are classified as : 5. the use of viral load testing as the preferred approach to
II_ _ _ _ _ __
, EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 4
Preferred first line ART in treatment (2013)
Target population Recommendations
First-line ART regimens • First-line ART should consist of two nucleoside reverse-transcriptase inhibitors (NRTls) plus a
· for adults · non-nucleoside reverse-transcriptase inhibitor (NNRTI}.
• TDF + 3TC (or FTC}+ EFV as a fixed-dose combination is recommended as the preferred
option to initiate ART.
• IF TDF + 3TC (or FTC) + EFV is contraindicated or not available, one of the following
options is recommended :
• AZT + 3TC + EFV
• AZT + 3TC + NVP
• TDF + 3TC (or FTC) + NVP
• Countries should discontinue d4T use in first-line regimens because of its well-recognized metabolic
toxicities.
First-line ART for pregnant • A once-daily fixed-dose combination ofTDF + 3TC (or FTC}+ EFV is recommended as first-line
and breastfeeding women ART in pregnant and breastfeeding women, including pregnant women in the first trimester of
and their infants pregnancy and women of childbearing age. The recommendation applies both to lifelong treatment
and to ART initiated for PMTCT and then stopped.
• Infants of mothers who are receiving ART and are breastfeeding should receive six weeks of infant
prophylaxis with daily NVP. If infants are receiving replacement feeding, they should be given four
to six weeks of infant prophylaxis with daily NVP (or twice-daily AZT}.· Infant prophylaxis should
begin at birth or when HIV exposure is recognized postpartum.
Fisrt-line ART for children • A LPV/r-based regimen should be used as first-line ART for all children infected with HIV younger
younger than 3 years of age than three years (36 months} of age, regardless of NNRTI exposure, if LPV/r is not feasible,
treatment should be initiated with an NVP-based regimen.
• Where viral load monitoring is available, consideration can be given to substituting LPV/r with an
NNRTI after virological suppression is sustained.
• For infants and children younger than three years infected with HIV, ABC + 3TC + AZT is
recommended as an option for children who develop TB while on an ART regimen containing NVP
or LPV/r. Once TB therapy has been completed, this regimen should be stopped and the initial
regimen should be restarted.
• For infants and children younger than three years infected with HIV, the NRTI.backbone for an
ART regimen should be ABC + 3TC or AZT + 3TC.
First-line ART for children • For children infected with HIV three years of age and older (including adolescents), EFV is the
3 years of age and older preferred NNRTI for first-line treatment and NVP is the alternative.
(including adolescents} • For children infected with HIV three years to less than 10 years old (and adolescents weighing
less than 35 kg), the NRTI backbone for an ART regimen should be one of the following,
in preferential order :
•ABC+ 3TC
• AZT or TDF + 3TC (or FTC)
• For adolescents infected with HIV (10 to 19 years old) weighing 35 kg or more, the NRTI backbone for
an ART regimen should align with that of adults and be one of the following, in preferential order:
• TDF + 3TC (or FTC)
•AZT+ 3TC
•ABC+ 3TC
Source : (25)
TABLE 5
Monitoring ART response and diagnosis of treatment failure
Population Recommendations . '
All populations • Viral load is recommended as the preferred monitoring approach to diagnose and confirm
ARV treatment failure.
• If viral load is not routinely available, CD4 count and clinical monitoring should be used to
diagnose treatment failure. ·.
Source: (25)
AIDS
TABLE 6
Second-line ART
·~ojJulaticm' Recommendati9ns ·
What ARV regimen to switch • Second-line ART for adults should consist of two nucleoside reverse-transcriptase inhibitors (NRTis)
to in adults and adolescents + a ritonavir-boosted protease inhibitor (PI).
(includes pregnant and • The following sequence of second-line NRTI options is recommended :
breastfeeding women) • After failure ori a TDF + 3TC (or FTC)-based first-line regimen, use AZT + 3TC as the NRTI ·
backbone in second-line regimens.
• After failure on an AZT or d4T + 3TC-based first-line regimen, use TDF+3TC (or FTC) as the
NRTI backbone in second-line regimens.
•.Use of NRT.I backbones as a fixed-dose combination is recommended as the preferred approach.
• Heat-stable fixed-dose combinations ATV/rand LPV/r are the preferred boosted PI options for
second-line ART.
What ART regimen to switch • After failure of a first-line NNRTl-based regimen, a boosted Pl plus two NRT!s are recommended for
to in children second-line ART; LPV/r is the preferred boosted PL ·
(including adolescents) • After failure of a first-line LPV/r-based regimen, children younger than 3 years should remain on
their first-line regimen, and measures to improve adherence should be undertaken.
• After failure of a first-line LPV/r-based regimen, children 3 years or older should switch to a
secorn;l-line regimen containing an NNRTI plµs tWo NRT!s; EFV is the preferred NNRTI.
• After failure of a first-line regimen of ABC or TDF + 3TC (or FTC), the preferred NRTI backbone
option for second-line ART is AZT + 3TC. ·
• After failure of a first-line regimen containing AZT or d4T + 3TC (or FTC) the preferred. NRTI
backbone option for second-line ART is ABC or TDF + 3TC (or FTC).
Source : (25)
TABLE 7
Third-line ART
. Eec()~roen(;!afions.,,
All populations • National programmes should develop policies for third-line ART
• Third-line regimens should include new drugs with minimal risk of cross-resistance to previously used
regimens, such as integrase inhibitors and second-generation NNRT!s and Pis.
• Patients on a failing second-line regimen with no new ARV options should continue with a
tolerated regimen. ·
Special considerations Strategies that balance the benefits and risks for child~en need to be explored when s·econd~line
for children · treatment fails. For older children and adolescents who have more therapeutic options available to
them, constructing third-line ARV regimens with novel drugs used in treating adults such as ETV,
DRV and RAL may be possible. Children on a second-line regimen that is failing with no riew ARV drug
options should continue with a tolerated regimen. If ART is stopped, opportunistic infections still need
to be prevented, symptoms relieved and pain managed~
Source: (25)
counselling is not readily available but the potential HIV risk TABLE 9
is high or if the exposed person refuses initial testing, post- Use of co-trimoxazole for HIV related infections,
exposure prophylaxis should be initiated and HIV testing WHO (2014)
and counselling undertaken as soon as possible.
Adults
..
(including pregnant women) .
Tablt 8 summarizes the new WHO (2014) '•
recommendations for post-exposure prophylaxis. Co-trimoxazole prophylaxis is recommended for severe or advanced
HIV cllrii.cal disease (WHO stage 3 or 4) and/or for aCD4 count
:s: 350 cells/mm3 . · ·
TABLE 8
- In settings where malar.ia and/or severe bacterial infections are
Post-exposure prophylaxis for HIV {WHO 2014) highly prevalent, co-tI:imoxazole prophylaxis should be initiated
regardless of CD4 cell count or WHO stage.
J Numberofantiretroviral drugs ... ·. ·. ·.. .. ... . . . . .. . I Co-trimoxazole prophylaxis may be discontinued in adults
An HIVpos.t-~posure prophylaxis regimen w.· ith two antiretrovira·l·· I {including pregnant women) with HIV infection who are clinically
I dru!JS is effective; but three drugs are preferred. . stable on antiretroviral therapy, with evidence of immune recovery
and viral suppression.
I Preferred antiretroviral regimen for adults and adolescents. ·1 - In settings where malaria and/or severe bacterial infections are
TDF + 3"fC (or FTC) is recommended as.the preferred backbone highly prevalent, co-trimoxazole prophylaxis should be
regimen for HIV post-exposure prophylaxis among adults and · continued regardless of CD4 cell count or WHO clinical stage.
adolescents. · · · · ..
Infants, chi.ldren a.nd adolescents.
LPV/r or ATV/ris rec.omrriended as the preferred third drug for HIV
post-exposure prophylaxis among adults and adolescents~ . Co•trimoxa:i:ole prophylaxis is recommended for infants, children,
and adolescents with HIV, irrespective of clinical and immune
Where available, RAL, DRV/r or EFV can be considered as cc;mditions. Priority should be given to all children younger than
alternative options. ~ years old regardless of C:D4 cell count or Clinical stage and to
A 28-.d.ay prescription of.ant.iretroviral drugs should be provided for I Co~trimoxazole prophylaxis is recommended for HIV-exposed
infants from 4-6 weeks of age and should be continued until HIV
I
J
HIV post-exposure prophylaxis following initial risk assessment.
Adheren(;e support .· . I
infection has been excluded by an age-appropriate HIV test to
establish final diagnosis after complete cessation of breast-feeding.
LPV/r is recommended as the preferred third drug for HIV post-
Enhanced adherimce counselling is suggested for all individ4als exposure prophylaxis among children younger than 10 years.
initiating HIV post-exposure prophylaxis.
An age-appropriate alternative regimen can be identified among
ATV/r, RAL, DRV, EFVand NVP..
All individuals potentially exposed to HIV should be
encouraged to undergo HIV testing 3 months following J HIV and TB coinfection
exposure. Further testing after this time should be in Routine co-trimoxazole prophylaxis should be administered to all
accordance with WHO guidelines. Individuals diagnosed HIV-infected people with active TB disease regardless of CD4 cell
with HIV following PEP should be linked to treatment and counts.
care services as soon as possible. Risk reduction counselling
should form part of each consultation with the individual. Monitoring the efficacy of ART
Use of condoms and safe injecting practices to prevent
secondary transmission should be discussed. Blood Efficacy is monitored by (21)
donation should be avoided while the individual is taking (a) clinical improvement
PEP following a possible HIV exposure and while still in the gain in body weight,
window period for HIV acquisition and testing (26). decrease in occurrence and severity of HIV-related
diseases (infections and malignancies),
Use of co-trimoxazole prophylaxis for
HIV-related infections (26) (b) increase in total lymphocyte count,
Co-trimoxazole is a fixed dose combination of two {c) improvement in biological markers of HIV {when
antimicrobial drugs {sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim) available)
that covers a variety of bacterial, fungal and protozoan CD4 + T-lymphocyte counts,
infections. The therapy is feasible, well tolerated and - plasma HIV RNA levels.
inexpensive intervention for people living with HIV to
reduce HIV-related morbidity and mortality. The WHO 3. Specific prophylaxis
recommendations {2014) for the use of co-trimoxazole is Until more effective antiviral therapy becomes available,
summarized in Table 9. the main aim of existing therapies will be to treat the
EMERGING AND RE-EMERGING INFECTIOUS DISEASES
refers to newly-appearing infectious diseases, or diseases occur every 20 years or so, triggering large epidemics in
that are spreading to new geographical areas - such as many parts of the world, and causing many thousands of
cholera in South America and yellow fever in Kenya. deaths. The next such shift is expected to take place very
The diseases in question involve all the major modes of soon. Epidemic strains of influenza viruses originate from
transmission they are spread either from person to person, China. The influenza virus is carried by ducks, chickens and
by insects or animals, or through contaminated water or pigs raised in close proximity to one another on farms. The
food. The most dramatic example of a new disease is AIDS, exchange of genetic material between these viruses
caused by the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). The produces new strains, leading to epidemics of human
existence of the virus was unknown until 1983. Presently, influenza, each epidemic being due to a different strain.
estimated 2.3 million cases occur every year worldwide. For Currently avian H5Nl is the strain with pandemic potential,
more det_ails, please refer to page 343. since it might adapt into a strain that is contagious among
A new breed of deadly haemorrhagic fevers, of which humans. Since 1997, 478 cases with 286 deaths have been
Ebola virus disease (previously known as Ebola reported to WHO. The first case was from Hong Kong. Other
haemorrhagic fever) is the most notorious, has struck in countries involved are Cambodia, Indonesia, Thailand and
Africa. Ebola appeared for the first time in Zaire and Sudan Viet Nam (4). In late 2002, a new disease called SARS was
in 1976. Since then it has appeared periodically. Ebola virus reported from China with rapid spread to Hong Kong,
is a member of Filoviridae family and comprises of 5 distinct Singapore, Viet Nam, Taiwan, and Toronto. During 2003,
species - Zaire ebolavirus; Reston ebolavirus; Sudan 8,422 SARS cases were reported from 30 countries with 916
ebolavirus; Tai ebolavirus; and Bundibugyo ebolavirus. The fatalities (5). More recently, pandemic due to influenza A
recent epidemic started in December 2013 in Guinea and (H1Nl) 2009 strain is continuing worldwide involving 214
spread to South Africa. By 28th Sept. 2014, a total of 7,192 countries, already taking 18, 156 lives. New strains such as
cases have been reported with 3,286 deaths. Case fatality those of cholera and influenza do not follow the usual
rate may be as high as 70 per cent. Ebola has incubation pattern of being more common in younger people. They
period of 2-21 days, and is not infective during this period. affect all age groups, since older people have not acquired
Asymptomatic cases are also not infective. The virus is immunity to them from previous infection.
transmitted through direct contact with the blood, organs, Table 1 summarizes the aetiological agents and infectious
body secretions or other body fluids of infected animals like diseases in humans and/or animals recognized since 1973.
chimpanzees, gorillas, monkeys, fruit bats etc. Human to The year may differ from first appearance and first
human transmission is through blood or body fluids of an identification of cases.
infected symptomatic person or through exposure to objects
(such as needles) that have been contaminated with infected Re-emerging diseases
secretions. It is not transmitted through air, water or food.
The illness is characterized by sudden onset of fever, intense The term re-emerging diseases refers to the diseases
weakness, muscle pain, headache, sore throat, vomiting, which were previously easily controlled by chemotherapy
diarrhoea, rash, impaired kidney and liver functions and in and antibiotics, but now they have developed antimicrobial
some cases both internal and external bleeding. Currently resistance and are often appearing in epidemic form.
there is no specific treatment for this disease. However, by The emergence of drug-resistant strains of
intensive supportive care, the mortality can be reduced and microorganisms or parasites is promoted by treatments that
spread of the disease can be prevented by instituting specific do not result in cure. The increasing use of antimicrobials
infection control measures. There is no vaccine against worldwide, often in subtherapeutic doses and sometimes in
ebola (1). counterfeit form, indicates that this problem will increase in
The United States has seen the emergence of hantavirus the foreseeable future. Changes in lifestyle, behaviour
pulmonary syndrome, characterized by respiratory failure (including injecting and non.:..injecting drug use) and cultural
and a case fatality rate of over 50%. Since it was first or social values are behind the emergence of some infectious
recognized in 1993, this type of hantavirus infection has diseases such as syphilis. Increases in the number of sexual
been detected in more than 20 states in that country, and partners have been the main factor in the spread of HIV
has also surfaced in Argentina and Brazil. This hantavirus is infection and other sexually transmitted diseases. Travel,
carried by rodents, particularly deer mice. Other including tourism, also plays a role. The spread of syphilis in
hantaviruses have been recognized for many years in Asia, the 18th and 19th centuries was related to the movement of
where they cause haemorrhagic fever with renal armies. Today, the introduction of HIV in many parts of the
involvement in humans. world is due to greatly increased human mobility. Studies
Epidemics of foodborne and waterborne diseases due to show that whereas only a few generations ago most people
new organisms such as cryptosporidium or new strains of in their lifetime travelled no further than 40 kilometres from
bacteria such as Escherichia coli have hit industrialized and their birthplace, many today go up to 1,000 times further,
developing countries alike. The 0157:H7 strain of E.coli travelling the whole world.
was first reported in 1982 and has since then been The practices of modern medicine also contribute. The
implicated in many serious outbreaks of diarrhoeal illness, spread of viral hepatitis is related in part to techniques such
sometimes leading to kidney failure. The strain has been as kidney dialysis and multiple blood transfusions, as well as
linked to undercooked hamburger beef and unpasteurized to other forms of transmission. Relaxation in immunization
milk. A completely new strain of cholera, 0139, appeared in practices can quickly result in the resurgence of diseases, as,
south-eastern India in 1992 and has since spread north and for example, the recent spread of diphtheria in the Russian
west to other areas of India, into western China, Thailand Federation and other former republics of the USSR.
and other parts of South-East Asia. New animal diseases pose potential foodborne risks to
The threat of a new global influenza pandemic is human health that are sometimes difficult to evaluate or
increasing. Major shifts In the make-up of influenza viruses predict. An example that has caused much public concern in
EMERGING AND RE-EMERGING INFECTIOUS DISEASES
TABLE 1
New infectious diseases recognized since 1973
Year Disea.se/Comments
1973 Rota virus Virus Major cause of infantile diarrhoea worldwide
1975 Parvovirus B19 Virus Aplastic crisis in chronic haemolytic anaemia
1976 Cryptosporidium parvum Parasite Acute and chrdnic diarrhoea ·
1977 .Ebola virus Virus Ebola haemorrhagic fever
1977 Legione//a pneumophi/a Bacterium Legionnaires' disease
1977 Hantaan virus Virus Haemorrhagic fever with renal syndrome (HRFS)
1977 Campylobacter jejuni Bacterium Enteric pathogen distributed globally
1980 Human T-lymphotropic virus 1 (HTLV-1) Virus T-cell lymphoma-leukaemia
1981 Toxin-producing strains of Staphylococcus aureus Bacterium Toxic shock syndrome
1982 Escherichia coli 0157:H7 Bacterium Haemorrhagic colitis; haemolytic uraemic syndrome
1982 Borre/ia burgdorferi Bacterium Lyme disease
1982 · HTLV-2 Virus Hairy cell leukaemia
1983 Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) Virus Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS)
1983 He/icobacter pylori Bacterium Peptic ulcer disease
1985 Enterocytozoon bieneusi Parasite Persistent diarrhoea
1986 Cyc/ospara cayetanensis Parasite Persistent diarrhoea
1986 BSE agent? Non-conventional agent Bovine spongiform encephalopathy in cattle
(Mad cow disease)
1988. Human herpes virus 6 (HHV-6) Virus Exanthem subitum
1988 Hepatitis E virus Virus Enterically transmitted non-A, non-B hepatitis
1989 Ehrlichia chaffeensis Bacterium Human ehrlichiosis
1989 Hepatitis C virus Virus Parenterally transmitted non-A, non-B liver hepatitis
1991 Guanarito virus Virus Venezuelan haemorrhagic fever
1991 Encephalitozoon he//em Parasite Conjunctivitis, disseminated disease
1991 New species of Babesia Parasite . Atypical babesiosis
1992 Vibrio cholerae 0139 Bacterium New strain associated with epidemic cholera
1992 Bartone/la henselae Bacterium Cat-scratch disease; bacillary angiomatosis ·
1993 Sin Nambre virus Virus Hantavirus pulmonary syndrome
1993 Encephalitozoon cuniculi Parasite Disseminated disease
1994 Sabia virus Virus Brazilian haemorrhagic fever
1995 Human herpes virus 8 Virus· Associated With Kaposi's sarcoma in AIDS patients
1996 nvCJD Australian bat lyssavirus Virus
1997 H5Nl Virus Avian flu (Bird flu)
1999 Nipah virus Virus
2003 Corona virus Virus SARS
2009 HlNl Virus Pandemic A (HlNl) 2009 influenza
Source : (2, 3)
Europe is bovine spongiform encephalopathy ("mad cow stop their spread. Without doubt diseases as yet unknown,
disease"). Fears have grown that the infectious agent but with the potential to be the AIDS of tomorrow, lurk in
responsible may be passed through the food chain to cause the shadows.
a variant of the incurable Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease in
humans, in which the brain is attacked. The British beef Antimicrobial resistance
market has been seriously affected and stringent public Resistance by disease-causing organisms to antimicrobial
health safeguards have been introduced. drugs and other agents is a major public health problem
The reasons for outbreaks of new diseases, or sharp worldwide. It is making a growing number of infections
increases in those once believed to be under control, are virtually untreatable, both in hospitals and in the general
complex and still not fully understood. The fact is however, community. It is having a deadly impact on the control of
that national health has become an international challenge. diseases such as tuberculosis, malaria, cholera, dysentery
An outbreak anywhere must now be seen as a threat to and pneumonia.
virtually all countries, especially those that serve as major Antimicrobial resistance is not a new problem, but it has
hubs of international travel. Despite the emergence of new worsened dramatically in the last decade. During that time,
diseases in the last 30 years, there is still a lack of national the pace of development of new antimicrobials has slowed
and international political will and resources to develop and down while the prevalence of resistance has grown at an
support the systems that are necessary to detect them and alarming rate. The increase in the number of drug-resistant
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
bacteria is no longer matched by a parallel expansion in the with vancomycin, an expensive intravenous drug. Even
arsenal of agents used to treat infections. There is strong resistance to vancomycin has developed in the last 10 years
evidence that a major cause of the current crisis in or so. Staphylococci, which can contribute to skin infections,
antimicrobial resistance is the uncontrolled and endocarditis, osteomyelitis, food poisoning and other
inappropriate use of antibiotic drugs, in both industrialized serious disorders, have developed resistance to all
and developing countries. They are used by too many antibiotics except vancomycin. If vancomycin-resistant
people to treat the wrong kind of infection, in the wrong strains were to emerge, some of the most prevalent hospital-
dosage and for the wrong period of time. The implications acquired infections would become virtually untreatable.
are awesome : drugs that cost tens of millions of dollars to Streptococci have become increasingly resistant to some
produce, and take perhaps 10 years to reach the market, antibiotics. They are among the most common disease-
have only a limited life span in which they are effective. As causing bacteria, responsible for infections of the throat,
resistance spreads, the life span shrinks; as fewer new drugs middle ear, skin and wounds, and also necrotizing fasciitis
appear, the gulf widens between infection and control. So and gangrene. Pneumococci and Haemophilus influenzae
far, the pattern of excessive or inappropriate use and the are the most common bacteria causing acute respiratory
development of resistance has been repeated after the infections in children, particularly pneumonia. Both of these
introduction of each new antimicrobial. The over-use of organisms are becoming more and more resistant to drugs.
expensive drugs designed to cover a range of infections is a Strains of pneumococci, once uniformly susceptible to
particularly serious problem in industrialized countries. In penicillin, are currently resistant to it in up to 18% of cases
developing countries, the problem is compounded by the in the United States and, 40% in South Africa. In addition,
ready availability of over-the-counter drugs. This allows they are becoming resistant to many other commonly used
patients to treat themselves, either with the wrong medicine, antibiotics, including cotrimoxazole, the drug recommended
or in quantities that are too small to be effective. Sub- by WHO for treatment of pneumonia. The most virulent
standard and counterfeit drugs which lack adequate type of Haemophi/us influenzae is today frequently resistant
amounts of active ingredients further exacerbate the to ampicillin, and strains have been identified that are
resistance problem. resistant to other drugs, including cotrimoxazole. In brief,
doctors worldwide are losing some of the most useful and
The examples of bacterial resistance are as affordable antibiotics against the two bacteria which are the
follows: major cause of death in children.
Strains of M.tuberculosis resistant to anti-tuberculosis Neisseria gonorrhoeae, cause of one of the most common
drugs are widespread, although attention has recently sexually transmitted diseases, has acquired such resistance
focused on the alarming outbreaks of tuberculosis caused by to penicillin and tetracyclines in most countries that the use
multidrug-resistant strains in the United States. Drug of these antibiotics to treat it has become unacceptable and
resistance is the result of poor prescribing practices, or poor this infection now requires the use of much more expensive
patient compliance with treatment. It is low in the few drugs which are often unavailable.
countries with effective tuberculosis programmes. The most Shigella dysenteriae has been causing outbreaks of
dangerous form of the multidrug-resistant disease occurs severe diarrhoeal disease in central and southern Africa in
when cases become virtually incurable and doctors face recent years, including those in refugee camps, with the
situations similar to those of the pre~antibiotic era. epidemic strain acquiring increasing resistance to standard
Malaria presents a double resistance problem : resistance antibiotics. Epidemic dysentery caused by this strain results
of the Plasmodium parasites, which cause the disease, to in the death of up to 15% of those infected. Salmonella
antimalarial drugs; and resistance of the Anopheles typhi, the bacterium responsible for typhoid fever, has
mosquitoes, the vectors of the disease, to insecticides. The developed resistance to antibiotics commonly used in the
arsenal of antimalarial drugs is limited. Most of them act by past for treatment. Resistant strains have caused outbreaks
killing parasites when they are multiplying in the blood of the disease in India and Pakistan. Without effective
stream of the human host. Unfortunately, due to inadequate antibiotic treatment, typhoid fever kills almost 10% of those
regimens, poor drug supply, and poor quality and misuse of infected. In South-East Asia, 50% or more of the strains of
drugs, rapid development of drug resistance has occurred in the bacteria may already be resistant to several antibiotics.
most areas of the world. Drug resistance is particularly More than half of the· antibiotics produced worldwide are
important in falciparum malaria, the most severe form of the used in animals, largely in subtherapeutic concentrations
disease. Resistance to chloroquine, the most commonly used which favour the onset of drug resistance. As a result, two
drug, has been found in all endemic countries except those important human· pathogens of animal origin, E.coli and
of Central America and the Caribbean. Resistance to salmonellae, are today highly resistant to antibiotics in both
multiple drugs is common in South-East Asia. This serious industrialized and developing countries. For instance, in the
obstacle to malaria control efforts is further complicated by United Kingdom, the increase of multidrug-resistant strains
mosquito resistance to insecticides. Many mosquitoes are of Salmonella typhimurium isolated from cattle is paralleled
reported to be resistant to the three classes of insecticides by increasing resistance among strains of human origin. In
available for public health use, and some are becoming Thailand, salmonellae isolated from food animals are also
resistant to pyrethroids, widely promoted for bed-net and highly resistant to the common antibiotics. These bacteria
curtain impregnation. cause diarrhoeal disease and can lead to ·life-threatening
Enterococci contribute to some of the most common complications. Due to the globalization of food supply and
infections acquired in hospitals, causing intra-abdominal international travel, antimicrobial resistance among animal
abscesses, endocarditis, and infections of the urinary tract bacteria can affect consumers anywhere in the world.
and soft tissues. In some countries, infections resulting from Together, these factors have created perhaps the richest
strains resistant to the main groups of antibiotics, such as the opportunities ever for the spread of infections, many of
beta-lactams and the aminoglycosides, can only be treated which become global problems that make the first line of
HOSPITAL-ACQUIRED INFECTION
defence - early recognition and adequate and timely Nosocomial infections may also be considered either
response essential. endemic or epidemic. Endemic infections are most common.
Epidemic infections occur during outbreaks, defined as an
Responding to epidemics unusual increase above the baseline of a specific infection or
The process of response encompasses a multitude of infecting organism.
activities including : diagnosis of the disease; investigation to Changes in health care delivery have resulted in shorter
understand the source of transmission; implementation of hospital stays and increased outpatient care. It has been
control strategies and programmes; research to develop suggested that the term nosocomial infections should
adequate means to treat the disease and prevent its spread; encompass infections occurring in patients receiving
and the production and distribution of the necessary drugs treatment in any health care setting. Infections acquired by
and vaccines. staff or visitors to the hospital or other health care setting
The strategy for controlling re-emerging diseases is may also be considered nosocomial infections.
through available cost-effective interventions such as early Simplified definitions may be helpful for some facilities
diagnosis and prompt treatment, vector control measures without access to full diagnostic techniques. Table 1
and the prevention of epidemics, for malaria; and DOTS- provides definitions for common infections that could be
directly observed treatment, short-course - for tuberculosis; used for surveys in facilities with limited access to
by launching research initiatives for treatment regimens and sophisticated diagnostic techniques.
improved diagnostics, drugs and vaccines; and above all by
strengthening epidemiological surveillance and drug- TABLE 1
resistance surveillance mechanisms and procedures with
appropriate laboratory support for early · detection, Simplified criteria for surveillance of nosocomial infections
confirmation and communication.
The category of diseases "new diseases - new
problems"- such as Ebola and other viral haemorrhagic Surgical site infection Any purulent discharge, abscess, or
fevers, is probably the most frightening. The need, therefore, spreading cellulitis at. the surgical site
is for expanding research on infectious disease agents, their during the month after the operation.
evolution, the vectors of disease spread and methods of Urinary infection Positive urine culture (1 or 2 species) with
controlling them, and vaccines and drug development. Much at least 105 bacteria/ml, with or without
of this already applies to HIV/AIDS, one of the most serious clinical symptoms.
diseases to emerge in recent decades. Repiratory infection Respiratory symptoms with at least two of
the following signs appearing during
References hospitalization :
- cough
1. WHO (2014), Fact Sheet on Ebola Viral Disease, No. 103, Sept. 2014. - purulent sputum
2. WHO (1996), The World Health Report 1996. - new infiltrate o_n chest .radiograph
3. WHO (1999), Remoulng Obstacles to Healthy Deuelopment, WHO consistent with infection.
Report on Infectious Diseases.
4. WHO (2005), Weekly Epidemiological Record No. 49/50, 14th Oct., Vascular catheter Inflammation, lymphangitis or purulent
2005. infection discharge at the insertion site of the
5. WHO (2003), World Health Report 2003, Shaping the future. catheter.
Septicaemia Fever or rigors and at least one positive
blood culture.
HOSPITAL-ACQUIRED INFECTION Source: (1)
Hospital-acquired infection is cross infection of one
patient by another or by doctors, nurses and other hospital According to a French National Prevalence Survey the
staff, while in hospital. A high frequency of nosocomial distribtution of sites of nosocomial infection are as shown in
infection is evidence of a poor quality of health. service Fig. 1.
delivery. Many factors contribute to the frequency of
Surgical Lower respiratory
nosocomial infections: hospitalized patients are often sites
immunocompromised, they undergo invasive examinations tract RI
and treatments, and patient care practices and the hospital
environment may facilitate the transmission of
Respiratory
microorganisms among patients. The selective pressure of tract (other)
intense antibiotic use promotes antibiotic resistance. While R2
progress in the prevention of nosocomial infections has been Urinary tract
Bacteraemia
made, changes in medical practice continually present new B u
opportunities for development of infection.
Definition of nosocomial infections ENT/Eye
E/E
Nosocomial infections, also called "hospital-acquired
infections", are infections acquired during hospital care
which are not present or incubating at admission. Infections Catheter site C
occurring more than 48 hours after admission are usually
considered nosocomial. Definitions to identify nosocomial FIG. 1
infections have been developed for specific infection sites Sites of the most common nosocomial infections
(e.g. urinary, pulmonary). Source: (1)
EPIDEMIOLOGY OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Hospital-acquired infection may be considered from improve the standards of hand hygiene practices (2).
three angles : (d) Dust control : Hospital dust contains numerous bacteria
1. Source and viruses. The dust is released during sweeping, dusting
and bed making. Suppression of dust by wet dusting and
2. Routes of spread; and vacuum cleaning are important control" measures.
3. Recipients. (e) Disinfection : The articles used by the patient as well as
patient's urine, faeces, sputum should be properly
1. Sources disinfected. Proper sterilization of instruments should be
The sources are patients, hospital staff and the enforced. (f) Control of droplet infection : Use of face masks,
environment. (a) PATIENTS : Patients suffering from proper bed spacing, prevention of overcrowding and
infectious diseases are potential sources of infection. These ensuring adequate lighting and ventilation are important
cases may be certain viral infections (measles, german control measures. (g) Nursing techniques : Barrier nursing
measles, influenza, viral hepatitis); Skin infections and task nursing have also been recommended to minimize
(discharging wounds, infected skin lesions, eczema, cross infection. (h) Administrative measures : There should
psoriasis, boils, bed sores); respiratory infections (sore be a hospital "Control of Infection Committee" to formulate
throat, pulmonary tuberculosis, chest infection); and policies regarding admission of infectious cases, isolation
urinary tract infection (B. coli infection). All these are facilities, disinfection procedures, and in fact all matters
very common sources of hospital acquired infection. relating to control of hospital acquired infection.
(b) STAFF: The hospital staff (viz doctors, nurses, ward The four most common nosocomial infections are urinary
boys) who come in close contact with patients may often be tract infections, surgical wound infections, pneumonia, and
an important source of cross infection. For example, primary bloodstream infection. Each of these is associated
staphylococcus aureus is commonly carried in the nose or with an invasive medical device or invasive procedure.
on the skin. Haemolytic streptococci may be carried in the Specific policies and practices to minimize these infections
throat and salmonella in the gut. (c) ENVIRONMENT : The must be established, reviewed and updated regularly, and
hospital environment (viz. hospital dust, linen, bed clothes, compliance monitored, as shown in Table 2.
furniture, sinks, basins, door handles and even the air) is
laden with microorganisms, and is thus an important source Standard (routine) precautions
of infection.
Standard precautions should be applied to the care of all
2. Routes of spread patients. This includes limiting health care worker contact
with all secretions or biological fluids; skin lesions, mucous
The common routes of spread of cross infection are : membranes, and blood or body fluids. Health care workers
(a) Direct contact, i.e. the organism may be transferred must wear gloves for each contact which may lead to
directly from the hands of a nurse or doctor to a susceptible contamination, and also gown, mask and eye protection
patient; (b) Droplet infection, e.g. droplets released from where contamination of clothes or the face is anticipated.
nose and throat through coughing or sneezing; (c) Air-borne
particles ; (d) Release of hospital dust into the air; Considerations for protective clothing include :
(e) Through various hospital procedures, viz, gown: should be of washable material, buttoned or tied
catheterization, intravenous procedures, infected cat gut, at the back and protected, if necessary, by a plastic
dressings, sputum cups, bed pans, urinals etc. apron
- gloves: inexpensive plastic gloves are available and
3. Recipients usually sufficient
All patients in hospitals are potential recipients of cross - mask : surgical masks made of cloth or paper may be
infection. Some patients are more susceptible than others, used to protect from splashes.
especially those who are severely ill and those under Standard precautions for all patients are as follows :
corticosteroid therapy. Cross infection is greater in intensive Wash hands promptly after contact with infective
care units, urological and geriatric wards and in special baby material.
care units. - Use no touch technique wherever possible.
Preventive measures - Wear gloves when in contact with blood, body fluids,
secretions, excretions, mucous membranes and
The main preventive measures are : (a) Isolation : contaminated items.
Infectious patients must be isolated. Patients who are
Wash hands immediately after removing gloves.
susceptible to infection should not be placed in beds next to
patients who are a source of infection. (b) Hospital staff : - All sharps should be handled with extreme care.
Those who are suffering from skin diseases, sore throat, Clean up spills of infective material promptly.
common cold, ear infection, diarrhoea or dysentery and - Ensure that patient-care equipment, supplies and linen
other infectious ailments should be kept away from work contaminated with infective material is either discarded,
until completely cured. They should b.e careful about or disinfected or sterilized between each patient use.
personal hygiene and in regular changes of aprons and - Ensure appropriate waste handling.
outer clothing. (c) Hand-washing : The most common route - If no washing machine is available for linen soiled with
of infection is via the hands. When dealing with patients, infective material, the linen can be boiled.
hand-washing must be thorough. When hand-washing with
soap and water is not sufficient, a suitable alcohol-based Health care workers are at risk of acquiring infection
disinfectant must be employed for hand-washing. In the year through occupational exposure. Hospital employees can
2009, WHO developed guidelines for hand hygiene known also transmit infections to patients and other employees.
as "Clean Care is Safer Care". It should be followed to Thus, a programme must be in place to prevent and manage
HOSPITAL-ACQUIRED INFECTION
TABLE 2
Measures for prevention of infection
Chronic diseases and conditions have been variously unknown cause and progressive course are often labelled
defined. An EURO symposium in 1957 (1) gave the "degenerative".
following definition ·
"An impairment of bodily structure and/or function The problem
that necessitates a modification of the patient's Chronic non-communicable diseases are assuming
normal life, and has persisted over an extended period increasing importance among the adult population in both
of time". developed and developing countries. Cardiovascular
Another EURO symposium in 1965 (2) observed: diseases and cancer are at present the leading causes of
death in developed countries. The prevalence of chronic
"Upto now no widely acceptable definition (of acute disease is showing an upward trend in most countries, and
or chronic patients) has been found. Some authors for several reasons this trend is likely to increase. For one
maintain that an acute illness usually consists of a reason, life expectancy is increasing in most countries and a
simple episode of fairly short duration from which the greater number of people are living to older ages, and are at
patient returns to normal activity, whereas a chronic greater risk to chronic diseases of various kinds. For another,
illness is one of long duration in which the patient is · the life-styles and behavioural patterns of people are
permanently incapacitated to a more or less marked changing rapidly, these being favourable to the onset of
degree. There is also the view that progress in the chronic diseases. Modern medical care is now enabling many
technology of resuscitation and haemobiology has with chronic diseases to survive. The impact of chronic
blurred the borderline between acute and chronic diseases on the lives of people is serious when measured in
conditions". terms of loss of life, disablement, family hardship and
The Commission on Chronic Illness in USA (3) has poverty, and economic loss to the country. Developing
defined "chronic diseases" as "comprising all impairments countries are now warned to take appropriate steps to avoid
or deviations from normal, which have one or more of the the "epidemics" of non-communicable diseases likely to
following characteristics : come with socio-economic and health developments.
a. are permanent Of the 57 million global deaths in 2008, 36 million or
b. leave residual disability 63 per cent were due to non-comunicable diseases (NCDs).
By cause, cardiovascular diseases were responsible for the
c. are caused by non-reversible pathological alteration largest proportion of NCD deaths (47.9 per cent), followed
d. require special training of the patient for rehabilitation by cancers (21 per cent), chronic respiratory diseases
e. may be expected to require a long period of supervision, (11.72 per cent), digestive diseases (6.1 per cent), diabetes
observation or care" (3.5 per cent) and rest of the NCDs were responsible for
9.78 per cent of deaths (6). As population will age, annual
In short, there is no international definition of what NCD deaths are projected to rise substantially, to 52 million
duration should be considered long-term (4), although many in 2030. Annual cardiovascular disease mortality is
consider that chronic conditions are generally those, that projected to increase by 6 million and cancer mortality by
have had a duration of at least 3 months (5). A practical 4 million. In low-and-middle income countries NCDs will be
definition should be established which will suit the particular responsible for three times as many DALYs and nearly five
conditions of the community (4). times as many deaths as communicable disesases, maternal,
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) include perinatal and nutritional conditions combined (6, 7).
cardiovascular, renal, nervous and mental diseases, India is experiencing a rapid health transition with a
musculo-skeletal conditions such as arthritis and allied rising burden of NCDs causing significant morbidity and
diseases, chronic non-specific respiratory diseases (e.g., mortality, both in urban and rural population, with
chronic bronchitis, emphysema, asthma), permanent results considerable loss in potentially productive years (age 35-64
of accidents, senility, blindness, cancer, diabetes, obesity years) of life. NCDs are estimated to account for about
and various other metabolic and degenerative diseases and 53 per cent of all deaths. Fig. 1 shows the proportional
chronic results of communicable diseases. Disorders of mortality in the country.
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASE
events) with outcomes, e.g., the possible relation between a major cause of liver cancer. Vaccination against human
oral contraceptives and the occurrence of cervical cancer. In papillomavirus (HPV), the main cause of cervical cancer, is
an attempt to overcome this problem, a search has been also recommended. Protection against environmental or
made for precursor lesions in, for example, cancer cervix, occupational risk factors for cancer, such as aflatoxin,
oral cancer and gastric cancer. But this is not possible in all asbestos and contaminants in drinking-water can be
chronic diseases. However, it has now become increasingly included in effective prevention strategies. ·
evident that the factors favouring the development of Present knowledge indicates that the chronically ill
chronic disease are often present early in life, preceding the require a wide spectrum of services case finding through
appearance of chronic disease by many years. Examples screening and health examination techniques; application of
include hypertension, diabetes, stroke, etc. improved methods of diagnosis, treatment and
rehabilitation; control of food, water and air pollution;
4. Indefinite onset reducing accidents; influencing patterns of human
Most chronic diseases are slow in onset and development, behaviour and life-styles through intensive education;
and the distinction between diseased and non-diseased upgrading standards of institutional care and developing
states may be difficult to establish (e.g., diabetes and and applying better methods of comprehensive medical care
hypertension). In many chronic diseases (e.g., cancer) the including primary health care. Political approaches are also
underlying pathological processes are well established long needed as in the case of smoking control, control of alcohol
before the disease manifests itself. By the time the patient and drug abuse. The approach should be holistic in handling
seeks medical advice, the damage already caused may be the complex medical and social needs of the chronically ill
irreversible or difficult to treat. and should always be considered in relation to the family
and community.
Prevention
Integrated approach
The preventive attack on chronic diseases is based on the
knowledge that they are multifactorial in causation, so their It is now felt that the principles of prevention of CHD can
prevention demands a complex mix of interventions. be applied also to other major non-communicable diseases
Previously only tertiary prevention seemed possible to (NCDs) because of common risk factors. A broader concept
prevent or delay the development of further disability or the is emerging, that is, to develop an overall integrated
occurrence of premature death. But, now, with the programme for the Prevention and Control of NCDs as
identification of risk factors, health promotion activities part of primary health care systems, simultaneously
aimed at primary prevention are being increasingly applied attacking several risk factors known to be implicated in the
in the control of chronic diseases. Some of the interventions development of non-communicable diseases. Such
that should be undertaken immediately to produce concerted preventive action should reduce not only
accelerated results in terms of lives saved, disease prevented cardiovascular diseases but also other major NCDs, with an
and heavy cost avoided are as follows (6) : overall improvement in health and length of life (10).
1. Protecting people from tobacco smoke and banning Recently, the WHO has developed a survey methodology
smoking in public places, warning about the dangers known as "the STEPS Non-communicable Disease Risk
of tobacco use, enforcing bans on tobacco advertising, Factors Survey" to help countries establish NCD surveillance
promotion and sponsorships and raising taxes on system. Some surveys are conducted at the country level
tobacco; and others at the subnational level. The methodology
2. Restricting access to retailed alcohol, enforcing bans prescribes three steps questionnaire, physical
measurements, and biochemical measurements. The core
on alcohol advertising and raising taxes on alcohol;
topics covered by most surveys are demographic, health
3. Reduce salt intake and salt content of food; status and health behaviours. These provide data on socio-
4. Replacing trans-fat in food with polyunsaturated fat; economic risk factors and metabolic, nutritional and lifestyle
and risk factors. Details may differ from country to country and
5. Promoting public awareness about diet and physical from year to year (11).
activity, including through mass media. In India the survey was conducted from April 2003 to
In addition, there are many other cost-effective and low- March 2005 in 6 sites and again in 2007 in 7 states.
cost population-wide interventions that can reduce risk WHO Global Action Plan for the Prevention and
factors for NCDs. These include : Control of NCDs (2013-2020)
1. Nicotine dependence treatment; The Global Action Plan provides member states with a
2. Enforcing drink-driving laws; road map and menu of policy options which, when
3. Restrictions on marketing of foods and beverages high implemented collectively between 2013 and 2020, will
in salt, fats and sugar; contribute to progress on 9 global NCD targets including
4. Food taxes and subsidies to promote healthy diets. that of 25 per cent relative reduction in premature mortality
from cardiovascular diseases, cancer, diabetes and chronic
5. Healthy nutrition environments in schools;
respiratory diseases by 2025. These four diseases make the
6. Nutrition information and counselling in health care; largest contribution to mortality and morbidity due to NCDs.
7. National physical activity guidelines (school based It will target four behavioural risk factors - tobacco use,
physical activity programmes for children and unhealthy diet, physical inactivity and harmful use of
workplace programmes for physical activity and alcohol. The voluntary global targets are (12) :
healthy diets). 1. A 25 per cent relative reduction in risk of premature
There also are population-wide interventions that focus mortality from cardiovascular diseases, cancer, diabetes
on cancer prevention, like vaccination against Hepatitis B, and chronic respiratory disease.
CARDIOVASCULAR·DISEASES
(g) Measurement of risk factor levels : These include Coronary heart disease in India
measurement of levels of cigarette smoking, blood Coronary heart disease is assuming serious dimension in
pressure, alcohol consumption and serum cholesterol in the developing countries. It is expected to be the single most
community (8). important cause of death in India by the year 2015. There is
(h) Medical care : Measurement of levels of medical care a considerable increase in prevalence of CHD in urban areas
in the community are also pertinent. in India during the last decade. Although there is increase in
prevalence of CHD in rural areas also, but it is not that steep
Epidemicity because life-style changes have affected people in urban
"Epidemics" of CHD began at different times in different areas more than in rural areas.
countries. In United States, epidemics began in the early The pooled estimates from studies carried out in 1990s
1920s (9); in Britain in the 1930s (10); in several European upto 2002 shows the prevalent rate of CHD in urban areas as
countries, still later. And now the developing countries are 6.4 per cent and 2.5 per cent in rural areas. In urban areas the
catching up. Countries where the epidemic began earlier are pooled estimate was 6.1 per cent for males and 6.7 per cent
now showing a decline. For example, in United States, for females. In rural areas the estimate was 2.1 per cent for
where the epidemic began in early 1920s, a steady decline males and 2. 7 per cent for females (15). According to medical
was evident by 1968, and a 25 per cent fall in mortality (not certification of cause of death data, 25.1 per cent of total
morbidity) by 1980 (9). Substantial declines in mortality · deaths in urban areas are attributable to diseases of the
have also occurred in Australia, Canada and New Zealand. circulatory system. Therefore, it was assumed that mortality
The decline in CHD mortality in US and other countries rates due to CHD (which forms an important disease entity
has been attributed to changes in life-styles and related risk and the diseases of circulatory system) in rural areas are
factors (e.g., diet and diet-dependent serum cholesterol, expected to be half of CHD specific mortality rates in urban
cigarette use and exercise habits) plus better control of areas. The projections of burden of disease due to CHD in
hypertension (11). India for the year 2004 are given in Table 2. The age specific
prevalence rate derived from the studies are as shown in
The reasons for the changing trends in CHD are not Table 3 (15).
precisely known. The WHO has completed a project known
as MONICA "(multinational monitoring of trends and TABLE 2
determinants in cardiovascular diseases)" to elucidate this Indices of burden of disease for CHD
issue. Forty-one centres in 26 countries were participating in
Indkes
this project, which was planned to continue for a 10 year
period ending in 1994 (12). Prevalence rate/1000
When CHD emerged as the modern epidemic, it was the Death rate/1000
disease of the higher social classes in the most affluent DALY per 100,000
societies. Fifty years later the situation is changing; there is a Taking urban population 30% and rural population 70% of total,
strong inverse relation between social class and CHD in Prevalence rate (Urban+Rural)
developed countries (13). = 64.37 (0.3) + 25.27 (0.7) = 37.0per1000
To summarize, in many developed countries, CHD still Source: (15, 16)
poses the largest public health problem. But even in those TABLE 3
showing a decline, CHD is still the most frequent single
cause of death among men under 65 (13). Age-specific prevalence rate per 1000 for CHD
derived from the selected studies 2004
International variations Age group Urban ' - -~-_,-,
Rural .
--,
o::,~ ~ ~
·----,':
.Maje .
(in years)· · Fernal~ ..
~----
With 7.2 million deaths and 12.8 per cent of total deaths, .. Male fema!e
CHD is a worldwide disease. Mortality rates vary widely in 20-24 8.00 6.80 17.54 10.47
different parts of the world (Table 1). 25-29 19.65 26.24 13.67 14.42
30-34 17.05 22.96 12.39 10.75
TABLE 1 35-39 43.18 48.44 18.79 15.99
Mortality due to CHD, global estimates for 2008 40-44 47.25 65.85 17.94 23.23
Region Deaths . Per cent of total 45-49 83.26 105.35 20.72 38.78
(000) CHDdeaths 50-54 93.07 111.88 31.11 49.86
55-59 162.44 152.75 26.68 50.91
Africa 374 5.15
60+ 173.65 175.35 71.07 67.44
SEAR 1,834 25.28
Americas 881 12.14 Source: (15, 16)
East Mediterranean 587 8.08 Risk factors
Europe 2,195 30.25
The aetiology of CHD is multifactorial. Apart from the
Western Pacific 1,383 19.06
obvious ones such as increasing age and male sex, studies
jworld 1,254* 100 have identified several important "risk" factors (i.e., factors
* 12.8 per cent of all deaths that make the occurrence of the disease more probable).
Source: (14) Some of the risk factors are modifiable, others immutable
(Table 4). Presence of any one of the risk factors places an
The highest coronary mortality is seen at present in the individual in a high-risk category for developing CHD. The
European Region followed by South-East Asia Region (15). greater the number of risk factors present, the more likely
On the other hand rates in Americas and Eastern one is to develop CHD. The principal risk factors are
Mediterranean countries are much lower. discussed below:
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
1.5
South
Japan
:a
01
--
E
er?. 1.0 I
t\\ East
::>,
u I \ Finland
cQ)
;::!
I \
O' I \
I ,
Q)
d:: I \
0.5
Each strategy - population strategy, high-risk strategy, 1. The Stanford-Three-Community Study (39).
secondary prevention - has its advantages and disadvantages, To determine whether community health education can
but the population strategy has the greatest potential. reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease, a field experiment
Revascularization procedures for patients was undertaken in 1972 in three northern California towns
with populations varying between 12,000 and 15,000. In
with angina pectoris (48) two of these towns intensive mass education campaigns
The indications for coronary artery revascularization i.e. were conducted against cardiovascular risk factors over a
coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG) and percutaneous period of 2 years. The third community served as a control.
transluminal coronary angioplasty (PTCA.) in patients with People from each community were interviewed and
angina pectoris are often debated. There is general examined before the campaign began and one and two
agreement that otherwise healthy patients in the following years afterwards to assess knowledge and behaviour related
groups should undergo revascularization. (a) patients with to cardiovascular diseases (e.g., diet and smoking) and also
unacceptable symptoms despite medical therapy to its to measure physiological indicators of risk (e.g., blood
tolerable limits; (b) patients with left main coronary artery pressure, serum cholesterol,, relative weight). In the control
stenosis greater than 50 per cent with or without symptoms; community, the risk of cardiovascular disease increased over
(c) patients with three-vessel disease with left ventricular the two years, but in the intervention communities there was
dysfunction (ejection fraction <50 per cent or previous a substantial and sustained decrease in risk. The net
transmural infarction); (d) patients with unstable angina who difference in estimated total risk between control and
after symptom control by medical therapy continue to intervention samples was 23-28 per cent.
exhibit ischaemia on exercise testing or monitoring; and
(e) post-myocardial infarction patients with continuing 2. The North Kerelia Project (37, 40)
angina or severe ischaemia on noninvasive testing.
North Kerelia is a county in the eastern part of Finland,
, CABG can be accomplished with a very low mortality where CHO is particularly common. Its 185,000 inhabitants
rate (1-3 per cent) in otherwise healthy patients with work mostly in farming and forestry and live in the
preserved cardiac function. However, the mortality rate of countryside.
this procedure rises to 4-8 per cent in older individuals and
in patients who have had a prior CABG. Increasingly, A multiple risk factor intervention trial was started in
younger individuals with focal lesions of one or more vessels 1972. The project had two aims : (a) to reduce the high
are undergoing coronary angioplasty as the initial levels of risk factors for cardiovascular disease (e.g.,
revascularization procedure, where coronary artery stenosis smoking, blood pressure and serum cholesterol), and (b) to
can be effectively dilated by inflation of a balloon under promote the early diagnosis, treatment and rehabilitation of
high pressure. PTCA is also possible but less successful in patients with CV disease. A control population was
bypass graft stenosis. established in a neighbouring county which has similar CV
mortality. The main strategy employed was mass community
The incidents of restenosis appears to be reduced with action against risk factors and advice on their avoidance.
intracoronary stent placement and may be as low as 15-20
per cent. The number of PTCA and stent procedure now Follow-up surveys at 5-years demonstrated a significant
exceeds that of CABG operations. Several studies have reduction in all three major risk factors. By 1979, mortality
shown PTCA to be superior to medical therapy for symptom began to decline by 24 per cent in men and 51 per cent in
relief but not in preventing infarction or death. In patients women in North Kerelia, compared with 12 per cent in men
with no or only mild symptoms, aggressive lipid-lowering and 26 per cent in women in rest of Finland. A further
and anti-angina! therapy may be preferable to PTCA. representative sample (8000) was studied in 1982. It
exhibited its effect on CHO deaths more than twice the
reduction achieved in the rest of Finland during the same
RISK FACTOR INTERVENTION TRIALS period. Thus it took 10 years (Rose's 10-year incubation
Since 1951, one of the best known large prospective period) to exhibit its effect on CHO deaths.
studies, the Framingham Study, has played a major role in
establishing the nature of CHO risk factors and their relative 3. MRFIT (38)
importance (49, 50). The major risk factors of CHO are The multiple risk factor intervention trial (MRFIT) carried
elevated serum cholesterol, smoking, hypertension and . out in USA was aimed at high risk adult males aged 35-57
sedentary habits. Accordingly, the four main possibilities of years. A total of 12,866 men who showed no evidence of
intervention in CHO prevention are: reduction of serum CHO either clinically or on ECG were enrolled for the study.
cholesterol, the cessation of smoking, control of Half the group was randomly allocated to an intensive
hypertension and promotion of physical activity. intervention programme, being seen at least every four
Risk factor trials can be "single factor" trials or "multi- months to ensure adequate control of risk factors. The other
factor" trials. Both the approaches are complementary and half (control group) received a medical examination once
both are needed. Early trials of CHO prevention concentrated yearly, and no specific advice was given to them about the
on one factor (e.g., dietary cholesterol). Later emphasis control of risk factors. The intervention procedures included
swung away from unifactorial to multifactorial approach. cessation of smoking, controlling blood pressure and altering
The widely reported intervention trials are : (a) The diet to reduce hypercholesterolemia.
Stanford Heart Disease Prevention Programme in California, Over the 7 year follow-up period, IHD mortality was
(b) The North Kerelia Project in Finland, (c) The Oslo Study, reduced by 22 per cent more in the intervention group but
(d) The Multiple Risk Factor Intervention Trial (MRFIT) in this was not statistically significant. This was because the
USA, and (e) The Lipid Research Clinics Study. A brief control group had also changed their habits and lifestyle to a
account of these trials is given below. For more details the far greater extent than anticipated by the designers of the
reader is referred to the references cited in the text. trial. The trial produced no significant changes at all in
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
mortality or risk factors in as much as the control group was 7. WHO (1985). Techn. Rep. Ser. No 726.
not properly chosen. 8. Hetzel, B.S. (1979). In : Measurement of Leuels of Health, WHO.
Copenhagen.
4. Oslow diet/smoking Intervention Study (42). 9. Rose, G. (1985) In: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol. 4, p. 133.
10. Hart, J.T. (1983) In : Practising Preuention, British Medical
This study began in 1973. 16,202 Norwegian men aged Association.
40-49 years were screened for coronary risk factors; of these 11. Stamler, J. (1985). N. Eng. J. Med., 312 : 1053.
1232 healthy normotensive men at high risk {total serum 12. WHO (1983). Bull WHO, 61: 45.
cholesterol 290-379 mg/di; smoking) of CHO were selected 13. WHO (1985) Primary Preuention of CHD EURO Rep and Studies 98.
for a 5 year randomized trial. The aim of the study was to Copenhagen.
determine whether lowering of serum lipids and cessation of 14. WHO (2011), Disease and injury, Regional estimates, cause specific
smoking would reduce the incidence of first attack of CHO in estimates for 2008.
males aged 40-50. 15. ICMR (2004), Assessment of Burden of Non-Communicable Diseases,
Final Report.
The intervention group underwent techniques designed 16. Govt. oflndia (2011 ), National Health Profile2011, Ministry of Health
to lower serum cholesterol level through dietary means (e.g., and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
a polyunsaturated fat diet), and to decrease or eliminate 17. Slone, D. et al (1978). N. Eng. J. Med. 298: 1273.
smoking. At the end of 5 years, the incidence of myocardial 18. Shaper A.G. et al (1981). Brit. Med. J. 283: 179.
infarction (fatal and nonfatal) was lower by 47 per cent in 19. WHO (1979). Tech. Rep. Ser., No. 636.
the intervention group than in the control group. 20. WHO (1996), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 862, Hypertension control.
21. Bain, C. et al (1978). Lancet, 1 : 1087.
With this study, primary prevention of CHO entered the 22. Wald, N.J. (1976). Lancet, 1: 136.
practical field of preventive medicine in an impressive 23. Kannel, W.B. (1976). Am. J. Cardio/., 37: 269.
manner. 24. Keys, A. ( 1980). Seuen Countries: a multiuariate analysis of death and
CHD, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, M.A.
5. Lipid Research Clinics Study (43) 25. Gordon, T. et al (1977). Am. J. Med., 62: 707.
This double-blind, randomized clinical trial involved 26. Superko, H.R. et al (1985). Am. J. Med., 78: 826.
3806 asymptomatic "high-risk" American men aged 35-59 27. Schaefer, E.J. (1985). N. Eng. J. Med., 312: 1300.
years with typell hyperlipoproteinaemia. The trial was 28. WHO (1985). Techn. Rep. Ser., 727.
designed to test whether reducing serum cholesterol would 29. Miller,N.E.etal(1979)Lancet, 1: 111.
prevent CHO events. 30. Phillips, G.B. (1985). Am. J. Med., 78 (3) 363.
31. Jenkins, C.D. et al (1974). N. Eng. J. Med., 290: 1271.
The men were randomized into two groups, one receiving 32. WHO (1986) Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 732.
cholestyramine and the other receiving a placebo. Both the 33. Mann, J.I. et al (1976). Brit. Med. J., 2: 445.
groups were followed for an average of 7.4 years. 34. WHO (2008), The Global Burden of disease, 2004 update.
The treatment group had an 8.5 per cent and 12.6 per 35. WHO (1986). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 732.
cent greater reduction in total cholesterol and LDL- 36. Rose, G. (1981). Brit. Med. J., 282: 1847.
cholesterol levels respectively than the placebo-treated 37. Puska, P. et al (1979). Brit. Med. J., 2: 1173.
group. This difference resulted in a 24 per cent reduction in 38. Multiple risk factor Intervention Trial Research Group (1982). JAMA,
death from definite CHO and a 19 per cent reduction in 248: 1465.
39. Farquhar, J. et al (1977). Lancet., 1: 1192.
non-fatal myocardial infarction. The findings of this study
40. Salonen, J.T. et al (1983). Brit. Med. J., 286: 1857.
have resulted in enthusiasm for the drug treatment of those
41. Lancet (1985). 1: 320.
men with considerably elevated serum cholesterol levels. 42. Hjermann. Let al (1981). Lancet, 2: 1303.
43. Lipid Research Clinics Programme (1984). JAMA, 251: 351.
Secondary prevention trials 44. Glasunov, I. et al (1973). Jnt. J. Epi., 2 (2) 137.
Secondary prevention trials are aimed at preventing a 45. Brade]y, N. (1984). In: Medical Annual, D.J.P. Gray (ed}. John Wright
subsequent coronary attack or sudden death. A wide range and Sons.
of clinical trials have been performed with four main groups 46. Rose, G. (1975). Brit. J. PSM, 29: 147.
of drugs - anti-coagulants, lipid-lowering agents (e.g., 47. G. Lamm (1979) In: Measurement of Leuels of Health, WHO Reg.
clofibrate), anti-thrombotic agents (e.g., aspirin) and beta- Puhl. EURO Ser. No. 7.
48. Lawrence M. Tierney, Jr. Stephen J. Mcphee Maxine A. Papadakis,
blockers. The most promising results to date have come from Current Medical Diagnosis and Treatment, 41st Ed., 2002, Large
beta blockers. Publication.
In general the above studies and similar others show that 49. Dawber, T.R. (1980). The Framingham Study, Cambridege, M.A.,
it is feasible through well-planned intervention programmes Harvard University Press.
to reduce the risk factors in the populations studied. The 50. Kannel, W.B. et al (1976). Am. J. Cardiol., 38: 46.
primary and secondary prevention studies promise at
present to be the main contribution of epidemiology to the HYPERTENSION
conquest of chronic diseases.
Hypertension is a chronic condition of concern due to its
References role in the causation of coronary heart disease, stroke and
1. WHO (1982). Techn Rep. Ser. No. 678. other vascular complications. It is the commonest
2. Pedoe, H.T. (1982). In Epidemiology of Diseases, D.L. Miller and cardiovascular disorder, posing a major public . health
R.T.D. Farmer (eds), Blackkwell, Oxford. challenge to population in socio-economic and
3. Rose, G.A. (1973). In: Chronic Diseases, Public Health in Europe No. epidemiological transition. It is one of the major risk factors
2, Regional Office of WHO, Copenhagen.
for cardiovascular mortality, which accounts for 20-50 per
4. WH0(1972). WHOStatisRep.,25:430.
· cent of all deaths.
5. Oliver, M.F. (1981). Br. Med. Bull., 37 (1) 49.
6. Rose, G.A. and Blackburn, H. (1968). Cardiouascular Suruey Definition of hypertension is difficult and, by necessity
Methods, Geneva, WHO. arbitrary. Sir George Peckering first fomulated a concept
HYPERTENSION
that blood pressure in a population is distributed A few salient points need be mentioned about measuring
continuously as a bell-shaped curve with no real separation blood pressure. A WHO Study Group (4) recommended the
between normotension and hypertension (1). There is also a sitting position than the supine position for recording blood
direct relation between cardiovascular risk and blood pressure. In any clinic a uniform policy should be adopted,
pressure : the higher the blood pressure, the higher the risk using either the right or left arm consistently. The pressure at
of both stroke and coronary events (1). As a consequence, which the sounds are first heard (phase I) is taken to indicate
the dividing line between normal and high blood pressure the systolic pressure. Near the diastolic pressure the sounds first
can be defined only in an operational way. become muffled (phase IV) and then disappear {phase V).
As intervention trials included only adults aged 18 years Most of the studies have used phase V to measure diastolic
or older, definition and classification of hypertension refer to blood pressure. The systolic and diastolic pressures should be
adults not taking anti-hypertensive drugs and not actually ill, measured at least three times over a period of at least 3 minutes
and based on the average of two or more readings on two or and the lowest reading recorded. For reasons of comparability,
more occasions after initial screening. Table 1 shows the the data should be recorded everywhere in a uniform way.
classification of hypertension by blood pressure level.
Classification
TABLE 1 Hypertension is divided into primary (essential) and
Classification of blood pressure measurements secondary. Hypertension is classified as "essential" when the
causes are generally unknown. Essential hypertension is the
most prevalent form of hypertension accounting for 90 per
Category ·. pre~&q:ie cent of all cases of hypertension. Hypertension is classified
. (n1m of Hg) . · ·
as "secondary" when some other disease process or
Normal < 120 < 80 abnormality is involved in its causation. Prominent among
these are diseases of kidney {chronic glomerulo-nephritis
Pre-hypertension 120-139 or 80-90 and chronic pyelonephritis), tumours of the adrenal glands,
Hypertension congenital narrowing of the aorta and toxemias of
Stage.1 140-159 or 90-99 pregnancy. Altogether, these are estimated to account for
Stage 2 2160 or 2100 about 10 per cent or less of the cases of hypertension.
Source: (2) Magnitude of the problem
When systolic and diastolic blood pressure fall into Although blood pressure is easily measured, it had taken
different categories, the higher category should be selected several decades to realise that arterial hypertension is a
to classify the individual's blood pressure. "Isolated systolic frequent, worldwide health disorder (5).
hypertension" is defined as a systolic blood pressure of
140 mm of Hg or more and a diastolic blood pressure of less
"Rule of halves"
than 90 mm of Hg. Hypertension is an "iceberg" disease. It became evident
in the early 1970s that only about half of the hypertensive
Organ damage subjects in the general population of most developed
Although the extent of organ damage often correlates countries were aware of the condition, only about half of
with the level of blood pressure, it is not always the case. In those aware of the problem were being treated, and only
addition the rate of progression of organ damage varies about half of those treated were considered adequately
from one individual to another depending on many treated (6). Fig. 1 illustrates this situation (7). If this was the
influences, most of which are incompletely understood. situation in countries with highly developed medical
Therefore, blood pressure and organ impairment should be services, in the developing countries, the proportion treated
evalu.ated separately, since markedly high pressures may be would be far too less.
seen without organ damage and, conversely, organ damage
may be present with only moderate elevation_ of blood
pressure. The presence of signs of organ damage confers an
increased cardiovascular risk to any level of blood pressure.
Attempts to find genetic markers that are associated with (g) PHYSICAL ACTIVITY: Physical activity by reducing
hypertension have been largely unsuccessful. The detailed body weight may have an indirect effect on blood pressure.
mechanism of heredity, i.e., how many genes and loci are (h) ENVIRONMENTAL STRESS : The term hypertension
involved and their mode of inheritance have not yet been itself implies a disorder initiated by tension or stress. Since
conclusively elucidated. stress is nowhere defined, the hypothesis is untestable (3).
(d) ETHNICITY : Population studies have consistently However, it is an accepted fact that psychosocial factors
revealed higher blood pressure levels in black communities operate through mental processes, consciously or
than other ethnic groups (1). Average difference in blood unconsciously, to produce hypertension. Virtually all studies
pressure between the two groups vary from slightly less than on blood pressure and catecholamine levels in young people
5 mm Hg during the second decade of life to nearly 20 mm revealed significantly higher noradrenaline levels in
Hg during the sixth. Black Americans of African origin have hypertensives than in normotensives. This supports the
been demonstrated to have higher blood pressure levels contention that over-activity of the sympathetic nervous
than whites. system has an important part to play in the pathogenesis of
hypertension (11).
2. Modifiable risk factors. (i) SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS : In countries that are in
(a) OBESITY : Epidemiological observations have post-transitional stage of economic and epidemiological
identified obesity as a risk factor for hypertension (14). The change, consistently higher levels of blood pressure have
greater the weight gain, the greater the risk of high blood been noted in lower socio-economic groups. This inverse
pressure. Data also indicate that when people with high relation has been noted with levels of education, income
blood pressure lose weight, their blood pressure generally and occupation. However, in societies that are transitional
decreases. "Central obesity" indicated by an increased waist or pre-transitional, a higher prevalence of hypertension
to hip ratio, has been positively correlated with high blood have been noted in upper socio-economic groups.
pressure in several populations. This probably represents the initial stage of the epidemic of
CVD (1).
(b) SALT INTAKE : There is an increasing body of
evidence to the effect that a high salt intake (i.e., 7-8 g per (j) OTHER FACTORS : The commonest present cause of
day} increases blood pressure proportionately. Low sodium secondary hypertension is oral contraception, because of
intake has been found to lower the blood pressure (15). For the oestrogen component in combined preparations. Other
instance, the higher incidence of hypertension is found in factors such as noise, vibration, temperature and humidity
Japan where sodium intake is above 400 mmol/day while require further investigation (5).
primitive societies ingesting less than 60 mmol/day have
virtually no hypertension (16). It has been postulated that PREVENTION OF HYPERTENSION
essential hypertensives have a genetic abnormality of the
kidney which makes salt excretion difficult except at raised The low prevalence of hypertension in some communities
levels of arterial pressure (5). indicates that hypertension is potentially preventable (18).
The WHO has recommended the following approaches in
Besides sodium, there are other mineral elements such as
the prevention of hypertension :
potassium which are determinants of blood pressure.
Potassium antagonizes the biological effects of sodium, and 1. Primary prevention
thereby reduces blood pressure. Potassium supplements (a} Population strategy
have been found to lower blood pressure of mild to (b) High-risk strategy
moderate hypertensives. Other cations such as calcium,
cadmium and magnesium have also been suggested as of 2. Secondary prevention
importance in reducing blood pressure levels.
1. PRIMARY PREVENTION
(c) SATURATED FAT : The evidences suggest that
saturated fat raises blood pressure as well as serum Although control of hypertension can be successfully
cholesterol (17). For further details refer to chapter 10. achieved by medication (secondary prevention} the ultimate
goal in general is primary prevention. Primary prevention
(d) DIETARY FIBRE : Several studies indicate that the has been defined as "all measures to reduce the incidence of
risk of CHD and hypertension is inversely related to the disease in a population by reducing the risk of onset" (19).
consumption of dietary fibre. Most fibres reduce plasma total The earlier the prevention starts the more likely it is to be
and LDL cholesterol (1). effective.
(e) ALCOHOL: High alcohol intake is associated with an In connection with primary prevention, terms such as
increased risk of high blood pressure. It appears that alcohol "population strategy" and "high-risk strategy" have become
consumption raises systolic pressure more than the diastolic. established (5, 20). The WHO has recommended these
But the finding that blood pressure returns to normal with approaches in the prevention of hypertension. Both the
abstinence suggests that alcohol-induced elevations may approaches are complementary.
not be fixed, and do not necessarily lead to sustained blood
pressure elevation (3). a. POPULATION STRATEGY
(f) HEART RATE : When groups of normotensive and The population approach is directed at the whole
untreated hypertensive subjects, matched for age and sex, population, irrespective of individual risk levels. The
are compared, the heart rate of the hypertensive group is concept of population approach is based on the fact that
invariably higher. This may reflect a resetting of sympathetic even a small reduction in the average blood pressure of a
activity at a higher level. The role of heart variability in population would produce a large reduction in the incidence
blood pressure needs further research to elucidate whether of cardiovascular complications such as stroke and
the relation is casual or prognostic (1). CHD (18). The goal of the population approach is to shift
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
the community distribution of blood pressure towards lower Detection of high-risk subjects should be encouraged by
levels or "biological normality" (11). This involves a the optimum use of clinical methods. Since hypertension
multifactorial approach, based on the following tends to cluster in families, the family history of
non-pharmacotherapeutic interventions : hypertension and "tracking" of blood pressure from
{a) NUTRITION : Dietary changes are of paramount childhood may be used to identify individuals at risk.
importance. These comprise : {i) reduction of salt intake to
an average of not more than 5 g per day {ii) moderate fat 2. SECONDARY PREVENTION
intake {iii) the avoidance of a high alcohol intake, and The goal of secondary prevention is to detect and control
{iv) restriction of energy intake appropriate to body needs. high blood pressure in affected individuals. Modern anti-
(b) WEIGHT REDUCTION : The prevention and correction hypertensive drug therapy can effectively reduce high blood
of over weight/obesity {Body Mass Index greater than 25) is pressure and consequently, the excess risk of morbidity and
a prudent way of reducing the risk of hypertension and mortality from coronary, cerebrovascular and kidney
indirectly CHD; it goes with dietary changes. {c) EXERCISE disease. The control measures comprise:
PROMOTION : The evidence that regular physical activity (i) EARLY CASE DETECTION : Early detection is a major
leads to a fall in body weight, blood lipids and blood problem. This is because high blood pressure rarely causes
pressure goes to suggest that regular physical activity should symptoms until organic damage has already occurred, and
be encouraged as part of the strategy for risk-factor control our aim should be to control it before this happens. The only
(25). {d) BEHAVIOURAL CHANGES : Reduction of stress effective method of diagnosi? of hypertension is to screen the
and smoking, modification of personal life-style, yoga and population. But screening, that is not linked to follow-up and
transcendental meditation could be profitable. {e) HEALTH sustained care, is a fruitless exercise. It is emphasized that
EDUCATION : The general public require preventive advice screening should not be initiated if health resources for
on all risk factors and related health behaviour. The whole treatment and follow-up are not adequate.
community must be mobilized and made aware of the In the developed countries, mass screening is not
possibility of primary prevention, and {f) SELF-CARE : An considered essential for the adequate control of blood
important element in community-based health programmes pressure in the population. In Europe, the large majority of
is patient participation. The patient is taught self-care, i.e., people have at least one contact in every 2 years with the
to take his own blood pressure and keep a log-book of his health service. If blood pressure is measured at each such
readings. By doing so, the burden on the official health contact, the bulk of the problem of detecting those in need
services would be considerably reduced. Log-books can of intervention is solved.
also be useful for statistical purposes and for the long-term
follow-up of cases (22). (ii) TREATMENT : In essential hypertension, as in
diabetes, we cannot treat the cause, because we do not
Table 2 shows some of the lifestyle modifications to know what it is. Instead, we try to scale down the high blood
manage hypertension. pressure to acceptable levels. The aim of treatment should
be to obtain a blood pressure below 140/90, and ideally a
b. HIGH-RISK STRATEGY blood pressure of 120/80. Control of hypertension has been
This is also part of primary prevention. The aim of this shown to reduce the incidence of stroke and other
approach is "to prevent the attainment of levels of blood complications. This is a major reason for identifying and
pressure at which the institution of treatment would be treating asymptomatic hypertension. Care of hypertensives
considered" (3). This approach is appropriate if the risk should also involve attention to other risk factors such as
factors occur with very low prevalence in the community (3). smoking and elevated blood cholesterol levels (18).
TABLE 2
Lifestyle modifications to manage hypertension
Weight reduction Maintain normal body weight (BMI, 18.5-24.9) 5-20 mm Hg/10 kg
weight lo.ss
Adopt DASH Consume a diet rich .in fruits, vegetables and low-fat dairy products with a 8-14mmHg
eating plan reduced content of saturated fat and total fat
Dietary sodium REiduce dietary sodium intake to no more than 100 mEq/d 2-Smm Hg
reduction (2.4 g sodium or 6 g sod_ium chloride)
Physical activity Engage in regular aerobic physical activity such as brisk walking . 4-9mmHg
(at least 30 minutes. per day, most. days of the week)
Moderation of alcohol Limit consumption to no more than two drinks per day 2-4mmHg
consumption (1 oz or 30 ml ethanol eg, 24 oz beer, 10 oz wine, or 3 oz 80- proof whisky)
in most men, and no more than one drink per day in women and
lighter~weight no1·~r.t1~
(iii) PATIENT COMPLIANCE : The treatment of high deficit") manifests itself by various neurological signs and
blood pressure must normally be life-long and this presents symptoms that are related to extent and site of the area
problems of patient compliance, which is defined as "the involved and to the underlying causes. These include coma,
extent to which patient behaviour (in terms of taking hemiplegia, paraplegia, monoplegia, multiple paralysis,
medicines, following diets or executing other lifestyle speech disturbances, nerve paresis, sensory impairment, etc.
changes) coincides with clinical prescription". The Of these hemiplegia constitutes the main somatoneurological
compliance rates can be improved through education disorder in about 90 per cent of patients (2).
directed to patients, families and the community. Stroke includes a number of syndromes with differing
Intensive research carried out during the past decade, aetiologies, epidemiology, prognosis and treatment. These
aiming at control of hypertension at the community level, are listed below :
has already provided valuable results. The studies have A. Ischaemic stroke
shown that control of hypertension in a population is a. Lacunar infarct
feasible, that it can be carried out through the existing system
b. Carotid circulation obstruction
of health services in different countries, and that the control
of blood pressure leads to a reduction of complications of c. Vertebra-basilar obstruction
high blood pressure - namely stroke, heart failure and renal B. Haemorrhagic stroke
failure. In some of the projects the incidence of myocardial a. Spontaneous intracerebral haemorrhage
infarction was also reduced. As a result of these findings b. Subarachnoid haemorrhage
some countries have launched nationwide control c. Intracranial aneurysm
programmes in the field of hypertension (23). d. Arteriovenous malformations.
References Problem
1. WHO (1996}. Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 862. Stroke is a worldwide health problem. It makes an
2. STEPHEN J. McPHEE, MAXINE A. PAPADAKIS (2010), Current important contribution to morbidity, mortality and disability
Medical Diagnosis and Treatment, 49th Ed. A Lange Publication.
in developed as well as developing countries. Although there
3. Hart, J.T. (1980). Hypertension, Library of General Practitioner
Series, Churchill Livingstone. are substantial differences in frequency from place to place,
4. WHO (1983). Bull WHO, 61(1)53. cerebral thrombosis is usually the most frequent form of
5. WHO (1983). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 686. stroke encountered in clinical studies, followed by
6. Strasser, T. (1972). WHO Chronicle, 26: 451. haemorrhage. Subarachnoid haemorrhage and cerebral
7. WHO (1974). WHO Chronicle, 28 (3) 11. embolism come next as regards both mortality and
8. Pedoe, H.T. (1982). In: Epidemiology of Diseases, D.L. Miller and morbidity (2). However, stroke from cerebral haemorrhage
R.T.D. Farmer (eds), Blackwell, Oxford. is more common in Japan than elsewhere (1).
9. WHO (2011), Global Status Report on Non-communicable Diseases,
2010. MORBIDITY AND MORTALITY
10. Govt. oflndia (2011),National HealthReport2011, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Cerebrovascular disease remain a leading cause of death
11. WHO (1985). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 715. from NCDs. In 2008 it was estimated that cerebrovascular
12. Marmot, M.G. (1984). Brit. Med. Bulletin, 40 (4) 380. disease accounted for 6.1 million deaths worldwide,
13. Bianchi, G. et al (1979). Lancet, 1: 173-177. equivalent to 10.8 per cent of all deaths. Majority of these
14. Stamler, R. et al (1978). JAMA, 240: 1607. deaths occurred in people living in developing countries and
15. Beard, T.C. et al (1982). Lancet, 2: 455. 33. 72 per cent of the subjects were aged less than 70 years
16. Oliver, M.F. (1981). Br. Med. Bull., 37 (1) 49. (3). Additionally, cerebrovascular disease is the leading
17. Puska, P. et al (1983). Lancet, 1: 1-5. cause of disability in adults and each year millions of stroke
18. WHO (1986). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 732. survivors have to adopt life with restriction in activities of
19. Hogarth, J. (1978). Glossary Health Care Terminology, WHO, daily living as a consequence of stroke. Many surviving
Copenhagen. stroke patients will often depend on other people's
20. Rose, G. (1981). Brit.Med.J., 1: 1847. continuous support to live (4).
21. WHO (1982). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 678.
22. WHO (1978). WHO Chronicle, 32 (11) 448. In demographically developed countries, the average age
23. WHO (1980}. Sixth Report World Health Situation, Part I. at which stroke occurs is around 73 years reflecting the older
age structure of these countries. The probability of a first
stroke or first TIA is around 1.6 per 1000 and 0.42 per 1000
STROKE respectively. In less developed regions, the average age of
The term "stroke" (syn : apoplexy) is applied to acute stroke is less due to the different population age structure,
severe manifestations of cerebrovascular disease. It causes resulting from higher mortality rates.
both physical and mental crippling. WHO defined stroke as Stroke patients are at highest risk of death in the first
"rapidly developed clinical signs of focal disturbance of weeks after the event, and between 20-50 per cent die
cerebral function; lasting more than 24 hours or leading within first month depending on type, severity, age, co-
to death, with no apparent cause other than vascular morbidity and effectiveness of treatment of complications.
origin" (1). The 24 hours threshold in the definition excludes Patients who survive may be left with no disability or with
transcient ischaemic attacks (TIA) which is defined to last mild, moderate or severe disability. Considerable
less than 24 hours, and patients with stroke symptoms spontaneous recovery occurs upto about 6 months.
caused by subdural haemorrhage, tumours, poisoning or However, patients with history of stroke are at high risk of a
trauma are excluded. subsequent event of around 10 per cent in the first year and
The disturbance of cerebral function is caused by three 5 per cent year thereafter (4).
morphological abnormalities, i.e., stenosis, occlusion or The proportion of patients achieving independence in
rupture of the arteries. Dysfunction of the brain ("neurological self-care by one year after a stroke range from around
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
60 to 83 per cent. This depends on whether the studies are Stroke. control programme
community-based or hospital-based, which activity is The aim of a stroke control programme is to apply at
considered in estimating independence, and the methods community level effective measures for the prevention of
used to rate ability (4). stroke. The first priority goes to control of arterial hypertension
There is evidence that mortality from stroke has been which is a major cause of stroke. As transcient ischaemic
declining in many countries for several years. Some of the attacks (TIA) may be one of the earliest manifestations of
decline occurred before modern treatment methods became stroke, their early detection and treatment is important for the
available, indicating that the decline in stroke was associated prevention of stroke (2). Control of diabetes, elimination of
with social and economic changes. smoking, and prevention and management of other risk factors
at the population level are new approaches. Treatment for
INDIA acute stroke is largely the control of complications. Facilities for
Although the prevalence of stroke appears to be the long-term follow-up of patients are essential. The
comparatively less in India than in developed countries, it is education and training of health personnel and of the public
likely to increase proportionally with the increase in life form an integral part of the programme. For any such
expectancy. The proportion of stroke in the young programme, reliable knowledge of the extent of the problem in
population is significantly more in India than in developed the community concerned is essential (2).
countries; some of the more important causes for this are In summary, control of stroke that was once considered an
likely to be rheumatic heart disease, ischaemic strokes in inevitable accompaniment to ageing is now being
peripartum period and arteriopathies as a sequale of CNS . approached through primary prevention. It has generated the
infections like bacterial and tubercular meningitis etc. (5). hope that stroke can be tackled by community health action.
The prevalence rate of stroke in India is about 1.54 per
thousand and death rate about 0.6 per 1000. The DALYs References
lost is about 597.6 per lac (5). The total number of stroke 1. WHO (1980). Bull WHO, 58: 113-130.
cases in India in the year 2004 were about 9.30 million with 2. WHO (1971). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 469.
about 0.63 million deaths, and total DALYs lost in 2004 3. WHO (2011), Disease and Injuries, Regional estimates, cause specific
mortality, estimates for 2008.
were about 6.36 million (6).
4. WHO (2011), Related article to the Global burden of Cerbrovascular
Disease by Truelse T.
1. RISK FACTORS 5. ICMR (2004), Assessment of Burden of Non-Communicable Diseases,
Epidemiological studies have indicated that stroke does Final Report.
not occur at random, and there are factors (risk factors) 6. Govt. of India (2011), National Health Profile 2011, Ministry of Health
which precede stroke by several years. These are : and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
7. Pedoe, H.T. (1982). In : Epidemiology of Diseases, Miller, D.L. and
(a) Hypertension: This is considered the main risk factor for R.D.T. Farmer (eds) Blackwell, Oxford.
cerebral thrombosis as well as cerebral haemorrhage;
(b) Other factors: Additional factors contributing to risk are
cardiac abnormalities (i.e., left ventricular hypertrophy, RHEUMATIC HEART DISEASE
cardiac dilatation), diabetes, elevated blood lipids, obesity, Rheumatic fever (RF) and rheumatic heart disease (RHO)
smoking, glucose intolerance, blood clotting and viscosity, cannot be separated from an epidemiological point of
oral contraceptives, etc. The importance of these factors is view (1). Rheumatic fever is a febrile disease affecting
not clearly defined. Although the risk factors for stroke are connective tissues particularly in the heart and joints
similar to those for CHO, their relative importance differs (7). initiated by infection of the throat by group A beta
haemolytic streptococci. Although RF is not a communicable
2. TRANSCIENT ISCHAEMIC ATTACKS (TIA) disease, it results from a communicable disease
One phenomenon that has received increasing attention (streptococcal pharyngitis). Rheumatic fever often leads to
is the occurrence of TIA in a fair proportion of cases. These RHO which is a crippling disease. The consequences of RHO
are episodes of focal, reversible, neurological deficit of include : continuing damage to the heart; increasing
sudden onset and of less than 24 hours duration. They show disabilities; repeated hospitalization, and premature death
a tendency to recurrence. They are due to microemboli, and usually by the age of 35 years or even earlier. RHO is one of
are a warning .sign of stroke. the most readily preventable chronic disease.
TABLE 1
Direct and indirect results of enviromental and health-system determinants
on rheumatic fever and rheumatic heart disease
Determinants
. .
.·; .: . : . ·.·.
.
surveillance for streptococcal pharyngitis. Ideally a sore 3. Medscape (2012), Thomas K Chin, Paediatric Rheumatic Heart
throat should be swabbed and cultured. If streptococci are Disease Overview Epidemiology, May 30th, 2012.
present, the child should be put on penicillin. Since facilities 4. WHO (1986). Techn Rep. Ser. No. 732.
for throat swab culture are not easily available, it is justified 5. Strasser, T. and Rotta J. (1973) WHO Chronicle, 27 (2) 49-54.
to treat a sore throat with penicillin even without. having the 6. Govt. of India (2006). Health Information of India, 2005, Min. of
Health and Family Welfare New Delhi.
culture. For this purpose, a single intramuscular injection of 7. Govt of India (2004), Annual Report 2003-2004, Ministry of Health
1.2 million units of benzathine benzyl penicillin for adults and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
and 600,000 units for children is adequate, or oral penicillin 8. Kaplan, E.L. (1985) Int. J. Epi, 14 (4) 499.
(Penicillin V or Penicillin G) should be given for 10 days. 9. Strasser, T. (1978) WHO Chronicle, 32 (1) 18-25.
This is the least expensive method of giving penicillin for 10. Wahi, P.L. (1984) Ann Acad. Med. Sci. (India) 20 (4) 199-215.
eradication of streptococci from the throat. For patients with 11. El Kholy, A. et al (1978). Bull WHO 56:887.
allergy to penicillin, erythromycin is the drug of choice. The 12. WHO (2004), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 923.
MCH and school health services should be utilized for this 13. Strasser, T. et al (1981) Bull WHO 59: 285-294.
purpose.
In short, the impossible logistics of primary prevention
coupled with enormous financial constraints force us to
concentrate on secondary prevention (10). Cancer may be regarded as a group of diseases
characterized by an (i) abnormal growth of cells (ii) ability to
b. SECONDARY PREVENTION invade adjacent tissues and even distant organs, and (iii) the
Secondary prevention (i.e., the prevention of recurrences eventual death of the affected patient if the tumour has
of RF) is a more practicable approach, especially in progressed beyond that stage when it can be successfully
developing countries. It consists in identifying those who removed. Cancer can occur at any site or tissue of the body
have had RF and giving them one intramuscular injection of and may involve any type of cells.
benzathine benzyl penicillin (1.2 million units in adults and The major categories of cancer are : (a) Carcinomas,
600,000 units in children) at intervals of 3 weeks (12). This which arise from epithelial cells lining the internal surfaces
must be continued for at least 5 years or until the child of the various organs (e.g. mouth, oesophagus, intestines,
reaches 18 years whichever is later. For patients with carditis uterus) and from the skin epithelium; (b) Sarcomas, which
(mild mitral regurgitation or healed carditis) the treatment arise from mesodermal cells constituting the various
should continue for 10 years after the last attack, or at least connective tissues (e.g. fibrous tissue, fat and bone); and
until 25 years of age, which ever is longer. More severe (c) Lymphomas, myeloma and leukaemias arising from the
valvular disease or post-valve surgery cases need life-long cells of bone marrow and immune systems.
treatment (12). This prevents streptococcal sore throat and
therefore recurrence of RF and RHD. The term "primary tumour" is used to denote cancer in
the organ of origin, while "secondary tumour" denotes
However, the crucial problem is one of patient cancer that has spread to regional lymph nodes and distant
compliance as penicillin prophylaxis is a long-term affair. organs. When cancer cells multiply and reach a critical size,
Studies have shown that secondary prevention is feasible, the cancer is clinically evident as a lump or ulcer localized to
inexpensive and cost-effective, when implemented through the organ of origin in early stages. As the disease advances,
primary health care systems (13). symptoms and signs of invasion and distant metastases
c. NON-MEDICAL MEASURES become clinically evident (1).
Non-medical measures for the prevention/control of RF Problem statement
are related to improving living conditions, and breaking the
poverty-disease-poverty cycle. Improvements in socio- WORLD
economic conditions (particularly better housing) will in the In 2012, the worldwide burden of cancer rose to an
long term reduce the incidence of RF. estimated 14 million new cases per year, a figure expected to
Objective evaluation of available data indicates that rise to 22 million annually within the next two decades. Over
penicillin alone will not lead to effective control. Predictions the same period, cancer deaths are predicted to rise from an
suggest that many of the countries which suffer severe estimated 8.2 million annually to 13 million per year.
economic constraints will not be likely to be able to raise Globally, during 2012, the most common cancers diagnosed
their standards of living in the foreseeable future to were those of the lung (1.8 million), breast (1.7 million) and
significantly alter the incidence of this disease (9). colorectal (1.4 million). The most common causes of cancer
deaths were cancer of lung (1.6 million), liver (0.8 million)
d. EVALUATION
and stomach (0.7 million).
In the evaluation of the programme, the prevalence of
As a consequence of growing and ageing populations,
RHD in school children from periodic surveys of random
developing countries are disproportionately affected by the
samples is probably the best indicator. It is suggested that
surveys should be carried out on samples of schools (not increasing numbers of cancers. More than 60 per cent of the
individuals) in the 6-14 years age group at 5-year intervals. worlds total cases occur in Africa, Asia, and Central and
The recommended sample size is 20,000 to 30,000 children South America, and these regions account for about 70 per
depending upon the expected prevalence (13). cent of the world's cancer deaths. Situation is made worse
by the lack of early detection and access to treatment (2).
References The "Westernization" trends : As low human-development
L WHO (1969). WHO Chronicle, 28:345. index (HD!) countries become more developed through
2. WHO (2011 ), Disease and Injuries, Regional Estimates, Cause Specific rapid societal and economic changes, they are likely to
mortality, Estimates for 2008. become "westernized". As such, the pattern of cancer
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
incidence is likely to follow, that seen in high HDI settings, cancer in different regions of the world for men and women.
with likely decline in cancer incidence rate of cervix uteri Table 1 and 2 show the age standardized incidence and
and stomach, and increasing incidence rates of breast, mortality of most common cancers in men and women
prostate and colorectal cancers. This westernization effect is worldwide.
a result of reduction in infection-related cancers and increase For any disease, the relationship of incidence to mortality
in cancers associated with reproductive, dietary and is an indication of prognosis. Similar incidence and mortality
hormonal risk fact_?rs (3). rates being indicative of an essentially fatal condition. Thus,
Large variations in both cancer frequency and case lung cancer accounts for most deaths from cancer in the
fatality are observed, even in relation to the major forms of world ·(1.6 million) annually, since it is most invariably
TABLE 1
Estimated incidence, mortality and 5-year prevalence of top 10 cancers worldwide, 2012
lnddence
Cancer
% of total ASR(W} % of total · ASR (W} % of total Proportion per .
100,000 population
MEN
Lung 16.7 34.2 23.6 30.0 8.2 48.8
Prostate 15.0 31.1 6.6 7.8 25.5 151.2
Colorectum 10.0 20.6 8.0 10.0 12.7 75.3
Stomach 8.5 17.4 10.1 12.8 6.7 39.7
Liver 7.5 15.3 11.2 14.3 3.0 17.5
Oesophagus 4.3 9.0 6.0 7.7 2.2 13.0
Bladder 4.4 9.0 2.6 3.2 6.6 39.3
Non-Hodgkin 2.9 6.0 2.5 3.2 3.0 17.9
Lymphoma
Kidney 2.9 6.0 2.0 2.5 3.8 22.4
Leukaemia 2.7 5.6 3.3 4.2 1.9 11.0
All cancers excluding 100.0 205.4 100.0 126.3 100.0 592.0
non-melanoma
skin cancer
lwoMEN
Breast 25.2 43.3 14.7 12.9 . 36.4 240.8
Colo rectum 9.2 14.3 9.0 6.9 9.3 61.2
Cervix uteri 7.9 14.0 7.5 6.8 9.0 59.6
Lung 8.8 13.6 13.8 11.1 3.6 24.1
Corpus uteri 4.8 8.3 2.1 1.8 . 7.1 46.8
Stomach 4.8 7.5 7.2 5.7 3.0 19.5
Ovary 3.6 6.1 4.3 3.8 3.4 22.6
Thyroid 3.5 6.1 0.8 0.6 5.4 36.0
Liver 3.4 5.3 6.3 5.1 1.0 6.9
Non-Hodgkin 2.5 4.1 2.4 2.0 2.2 14.2
lymphoma
All cancers excluding 100.0 165.3 100.0 82.9 100.0 661.4
non-melanoma
skin cancer
isoTHSEXES
Breast 11.9 43.3 6.4 12.9 19.2 240.8
Prostate 7.9 31.1 3.7 7.8 12.1 151.2
Lung 13.0 23.1 19.4 19.7 5.8 36.5
Colorectum 9.7 17.2 8.5 8.4 10.9 68.2
Cervix uteri 3.7 14.0 3.2 6.8 4.8 59.6
Stomach 6.8 12.. 1 8.8 8.9 4.7 29.6
Liver 5.6 10.l 9.1 9.5 1.9 12.2
Corpus uteri 2.3 8.3 0.9 1.8 3.7 46.8
Ovary 1.7 6.1 1.9 3.8 1.8 22.6
Oesophagus 3.2 5.9 4.9 5.0 1.4 8.9
All cancers excluding 100.0 182.3 100.0 102.4 100.0 626.7
non-melanoma
skin cancer
* Incidence and mortality data for all ages. 5-year prevalence for adult population only.
* ASR (W) Age-standardized rate and proportions per 100,000.
Source: (4)
CANCER
TABLE 2
Summary Statistics, World - 2012
Population (thousands)
Number of new cancer cases (thousands) 7427.1 14090.1
Age-standardized rate (W)* 205.4 165.3 182.3
Risk of getting cancer before age 75 (%) 21.0 16.4 18.5
Number of cancer deaths (thousands) 4653.1 3547.9 . 8201.0
Age-standardized rate (W)* 126.3 82.9 . 102.4
.Risk of dying from cancer before age 75 (%) 12.7 8.4 10.4
5-year prevalent cases, adult population 15362.3 17182.3 32544.6
(thousands)
Proportion (per 100,000) 592.0 661.4 626.7
* Age-standardized rate (W): A rate is the number of new cases or deaths per 100 000 persons per year. An age-standardized rate is the rate that
a population would have if it had a standard age structure. Standardization is necessary when comparing several populations that differ with
respect to age because age has a powerful influence on the risk of cancer.
Risk of getting or dying from the disease before age 75 (%) : The probability or risk of individuals getting/dying from cancer. It is expressed as
the number of new born children (out of 100) who would be expected to develop/die from cancer before the age of 75, if they had cancer.(in the
absence of other causes of death).
Source: (4)
associated with poor prognosis. On the .other hand, The five most frequent cancers in men were cancer lung,
appropriate intervention is often effective in avoiding fatal lip and oral cavity, stomach, colorectum and other pharynx,
outcome following diagnosis of breast cancer. Hence this and in women, cancer breast, cervix uteri, colorectum,
particular cancer, which rank second in terms of incidence, ovary, lip and oral cavity. Cancer in males were mostly
is not among the top three causes of death from cancer, tobacco related. In women, cervical cancer is closely
which are respectively cancers of the lung, stomach, and associated with poor genital hygiene, early consummation of
liver. · marriage, multiple pregnancies, and contact with multiple
The most conspicuous feature of the distribution of sexual partners. It is also reported that breast cancer is
cancers between the sexes is the male predominance of lung proportionately on the increase in a few metropolitan areas
cancer. Prostate, colorectal, stomach and liver cancer are of India. This appears to be related to late marriage, birth of
also much more common in males (Table 1). Cancer of the first child at a late age, fewer children, and shorter
periods of breast-feeding, which are increasingly common
breast, colorectum, cervix, uteri, lung and stomach are
practice among the educated urban women (7).
common in females (4). For the most part, differences in
distribution between the sexes are attributable to differences Facilities for screening and proper management of cancer
in exposure to causative agents rather than to variation in patients are grossly limited in India. More than two-thirds of
the susceptibility. For other tumour types, including cancers cancer patients are already in an advanced and incurable
of pancreas and colorectum, there is little difference in the stage at the time of diagnosis. Appropriate strategies are
sex distribution. Generally speaking, the relationship of being developed, including creating public awareness about
incidence to mortality is not affected by sex. Thus for cancer, tobacco control and application of self or assisted
example, the prognosis following diagnosis of liver or screening technique for oral, cervical, and breast cancers.
pancreatic cancer is dismal for both males and females.
Many other tumour types are more responsive to therapy, so Time trends
that cancers of breast, prostate and uterine cervix are the Few decades ago, cancer was the sixth leading cause of
cause of death in only a minority of patients diagnosed (5). death in industrialized countries; today, it is the second
The burden of cancer is distributed unequally between leading cause of death. There are a number of reasons for
developed and developing countries, with particular cancer this increase, the three main ones being a longer life
types exhibiting different patterns of distribution. expectancy, more accurate diagnosis and the rise in cigarette
smoking, especially among males. The overall rates do not
INDIA reflect the different trends according to the type of cancer.
For example, there has been a large increase in lung cancer
In India, the National Cancer Registry Programme of the incidence and the stomach cancer has shown a declining
ICMR provides data on incidence, mortality and distribution trend in most developed countries for reasons not
of cancer from 25 population-based registries and 5 hospital understood.
based registries.
It is estimated that during the year 2012, 10.15 lac new Cancer patterns
cancer cases occurred in the country, of these 4. 77 lac were There are wide variations in the distribution of cancer
males and 5.37 lac females. It gives an incidence rate of throughout the world. That cancer of the stomach is very
92.4 per lac population. Same year about 6.83 lac persons common in Japan, and has a low incidence in United States.
died of cancer, (3.57 lac males and 3.26 lac females), a The cervical cancer is high in Columbia and has a low
mortality rate of 69. 7 per lac population. Table 3 and 4 show incidence in Japan. In the South-East Asia Region of WHO,
the age standardized incidence and mortality due to cancer the great majority are cancers of the oral cavity and uterine
in India. cervix. These and other international variations in the
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 3
Estimated incidence, mortality and 5-year prevalence of top 10 cancers in India, 2012
Ineidence Mortality 5-year prevalence
Cancer · Prqportion per .
% of total ASR(W) % of total ASR(W) % of total
· 100,000 population
MEN
Lung 11.3 11.0 13.7 9.9 3.7 5.4
Lip and oral cavity 11.3 10.1 10.2 6.7 12.6 18.5
Stomach 9.1 8.6 11.4 8.0 4.7 6.8
Colorectum 7.7 7.2 7.8 5.4 7.5 11.0
Other pharynx 6.6 6.3 7.6 5.3 7.0 10.3
Oesophagus 5.7 5.4 7.1 5.0 2.1 3.1
Larynx 4.8 4.6 4.4 3.2 6.8 10.0
Prostate 4.0 4.2 3.4 2.7 9.6 14.1
Liver 3.6 3.5 4.7 3.3 1.2 1.8
Leukaemia 4.1 3.3 4.5 2.7 2.1 3.1
jwoMEN
Breast 27.0 25.8 21.5 12.7 35.3 92.6
Cervix uteri 22.9 22.0 20.7 12.4 27.4 72.0
Colorectum 5.1 5.1 6.4 3.8 3.3 8.6
Ovary 5.0 4.9 6.0 3.6 4.9 12.9
Lip, oral cavity 4.3 4.3 4.8 3.0 3.1 8.2
Stomach 3.7 3.7 5.6 3.4 1.3 3.3
Lung 3.1 3.1 4.6 2.8 0.7 1.9
Oesophagus 2.7 2.8 4.1 2.6 0.7 1.9
Corpus uteri 2.3 2.3 1.5 0.9 4.0 10.5
Leukaemia 2.4 2.3 3.3 1.9 0.9 2.3
IBOTHSEXES
Breast 14.3 25.8 10.3 12.7 22.2 92.6
Cervix uteri 12.1 22.0 9.9 12.4 17.3 72.0
Lip, oral cavity 7.6 7.2 7.6 4.9 6.6 13.5
Lung 6.9 6.9 9.3 6.3 1.8 3.7
Colorectum 6.3 6.1 7.1 4.6 4.8 9.8
Stomach 6.2 6.1 8.6 5.7 2.8 5.1
Ovary 2.6 4.9 2.9 3.6 3.1 12.9
Prostate 1.9 4.2 1.8 2.7 3.6 14.l
Oesophagus 4.1 4.1 5.7 3.8 1.2 2.5
Other pharynx 3.8 3.7 4.8 3.1 3.2 6.4
TABLE 4
Summary Statistics, India - 2012
India Male Female Both sexes
Population (thousands) 649474 608876 1258350
Number of new cancer cases (thousands) 477.5 537.5 1014.9
Age-standardized rate (W) 92.4 97.4 94.0
Risk of getting cancer before age 75 (%) 10.2 10.1 10.1
Number of cancer deaths (thousands) 356.7 326.1 682.8
Age-standardized rate (W) 69.7 60.2 64.5
Risk of dying from cancer before age 75 (%) 7.8 6.5 7.1
5--cyear prevalent cases, adult population 664.5 1126.0 1790.5
(thousands)
Proportion (per 100,000) 146.6 262.5 202,9
Source: (5)
CANCER
pattern of cancer are attributed to multiple factors such as origin. The human T-cell leukaemia virus is associated with
environmental factors, food habits, lifestyle, genetic factors adult T-cell leukaemia/lymphoma in the United States and
or even inadequacy in detection and reporting of cases. southern parts of Japan (5, 12). (/) PARASITES : Parasitic
Hospital data clearly indicates that the two organ sites infections may also increase the risk of cancer, as for
most commonly involved are: (i) the uterine cervix in example, schistosomiasis in Middle East producing
women, and {ii) the oropharynx in both sexes. These two carcinoma of the bladder. (g) CUSTOMS, HABITS AND
sites represent approximately 50 per cent of all cancer cases. LIFESTYLES : To the above causes must be added customs,
Both these cancers are predominantly environment related habits and lifestyles of people which may be associated with
and have a strong socio-cultural relationship. It is also an increased risk for certain cancers. The familiar examples
important to note that these two kinds of cancer are easily are the demonstrated association between smoking and lung
accessible for physical examination and amenable to early cancer, tobacco and betel chewing and oral cancer, etc (13).
diagnosis by knowledge already available. i.e., good clinical (h) OTHERS : There are numerous other environmental
examination and exfoliative cytology. The cure rate for these factors such as sunlight, radiation, air and water pollution,
neoplasma is also very high if they are treated surgically at medications (e.g., oestrogen) and pesticides which are
stages I and II. But unfortunately, in most cases, the patients related to cancer.
present themselves to a medical facility when the disease is
far advanced and is not amenable to treatment. This is the
2. GENETIC FACTORS
crux of the problem. Genetic influences have long been suspected. For
example, retinoblastoma occurs in children of the same
Causes of cancer parent. Mongols are more likely to develop ·cancer
As with other chronic diseases, cancer has a multifactorial (leukaemia) than normal children. However, genetic factors
aetiology. are less conspicuous and more difficult to identify. There is
probably a complex interrelationship between hereditary
1. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS susceptibility and environmental carcinogenic stimuli in the
causation of a number of cancers.
Environmental factors are generally held responsible for
80 to 90 per cent of all human cancers. The major Cancer control
environmental factors identified so far include
Cancer control consists of a series of measures based on
(a) TOBACCO: Tobacco in various forms of its usage (e.g.,
present medical knowledge in the fields of prevention,
smoking, chewing) is the major environmental cause of
detection, diagnosis, treatment, after care and rehabilitation,
cancers of the lung, larynx, mouth, pharynx, oesophagus,
aimed at reducing significantly the number of new cases,
bladder, pancreas and probably kidney. It has been estimated
increasing the number of cures and reducing the invalidism
that, in the world as a whole, cigarette smoking is now due to cancer.
responsible for more than one million premature deaths each
year (8). (b) ALCOHOL : Excessive intake of alcoholic The basic approach to the control of cancer is through
beverages is associated with oesophageal and liver cancer. primary and secondary prevention. It is estimated that at
Some recent studies have suggested that beer consumption least one-third of all cancers are preventable (14).
may be associated with rectal cancer (9). It is estimated that
1. PRIMARY PREVENTION
alcohol contributed to about 3 per cent of all cancer
deaths (10). (c) DIETARY FACTORS: Dietary factors are also Cancer prevention· until recently was mainly concerned
related to cancer. Smoked fish is related to stomach cancer, with the early diagnosis of the disease (secondary
dietary fibre to intestinal cancer, beef consumption to bowel prevention), preferably at a precancerous stage. Advancing
cancer and a high fat diet to breast cancer. A variety of other knowledge has increased our understanding of causative
dietary factors such as food additives and contaminants have factors of some cancers and it is now possible to control
fallen under suspicion as causative agents. (Refer to chapter these factors in the general population as well as in
10 for further details.) (d) OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURES : particular occupational groups. They include the following :
These include exposure to benzene, arsenic, cadmium, (a) CONTROL OF TOBACCO AND ALCOHOL
chromium, vinyl chloride, asbestos, polycyclic hydrocarbons, CONSUMPTION : Primary prevention offers the greatest
etc. Many others remain to be identified. The risk of hope for reducing the number of tobacco-induced and
occupational exposure is considerably increased if the alcohol related cancer deaths. It has been estimated that
individuals also smoke cigarettes. Occupational exposures control of tobacco smoking alone would reduce the total
are usually reported to account for 1 to 5 per cent of all burden of cancer by over a million cancers each year (15).
human cancers (11). (e) VIRUSES: An intensive search for a (b) PERSONAL HYGIENE: Improvements in personal
viral origin of human cancers revealed that hepatitis B and C hygiene may lead to declines in the incidence of certain types
virus is causally related to hepatocellular carcinoma. The of cancer, e.g., cancer cervix. (c) RADIATION: Special efforts
relative risk of Kaposi's sarcoma occurring in patients with should be made to reduce the amount of radiation (including
HIV infection is so high that it was the first manifestation of medical radiation) received by each individual to a minimum
the AIDS epidemic to be recognized. Non-Hodgkin's without reducing the benefits. (d) OCCUPATIONAL
lymphoma, a cancer of the lymph nodes and spleen is a late EXPOSURES : The occupational aspects of cancer are
complication of AIDS. The Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) is frequently neglected. Measures to protect workers from
associated with 2 human malignancies, viz. Burkitt's exposure to industrial carcinogens should be enforced in
lymphoma and nasopharyngeal carcinoma. Cytomegalovirus industries. (e) IMMUNIZATION: In the case of primary liver
(CMV) is a suspected oncogenic agent and classical Kaposi's cancer, immunization against hepatitis B virus and for
sarcoma is associated with a higher prevalence of antibodies prevention of cancer cervix immunization against HPV
to CMV. Human papi/loma virus (HPV) is a chief suspect in presents an exciting prospect. (/) FOODS, DRUGS
cancer cervix. Hodgkin's disease is also believed to be of viral AND COSMETICS: These should be tested for carcinogens.
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
{g) AIR POLLUTION : Control of air pollution is another of time trends, and planning and evaluation of operational
preventive measure. (h) TREATMENT OF PRECANCEROUS activities in all main areas of cancer control.
LESIONS : Early detection and prompt treatment of
precancerous lesions such as cervical tears, intestinal ii) EARLY DETECTION OF CASES
polyposis, warts, chronic gastritis, chronic cervicitis, and Cancer screening is the main weapon for early detection
adenomata is one of the cornerstones of cancer prevention. of cancer at a pre-invasive (in situ) or pre.-malignant stage.
(i) LEGISLATION : Legislation has also a role in primary Effective screening programmes have been developed for
prevention. For example, legislation to control known cervical· cancer, breast cancer and oral cancer. Like primary
environmental carcinogens (e.g., tobacco, alcohol, air prevention, early diagnosis has to be conducted on a large
pollution). {j) CANCER EDUCATION : An important area of scale; however, it may be possible to increase the efficiency
primary prevention is cancer education. It should be directed of screening programmes by focussing on high-risk groups.
at "high-risk" groups. The aim of cancer education is to Clearly, there is no point in detecting cancer at an early
motivate people to seek early diagnosis and early treatment. stage unless facilities for treatment and after-care are
Cancer organizations in many countries remind the public o_f available. Early detection programmes will require
the early warning signs ("danger signals") of cancer. These mobilization of all available resources and development of a
are: cancer infrastructure starting at the level of primary health
a. a lump or hard area in the breast care, ending with complex cancer centres or institutions at
b. a change in a wart or mole the state or national levels.
c. a persistent change in digestive and bowel habits iii) TREATMENT
d. a persistent cough or hoarseness
Treatment facilities should be available to all cancer
e. excessive loss of blood at the monthly period or loss of patients. Certain forms of cancer are amenable to surgical
blood outside the usual dates removal, while some others respond favourably to radiation
f blood loss from any natural orifice or chemotherapy or both. Since most of the known methods
g. a swelling or sore that does not get better of treatment have complementary effect on the ultimate
h. unexplained loss of weight. outcome of the patient, multi-modality approach to cancer
control has become a standard practice in cancer centres all
There is no doubt that the possibilities for primary over the world. In the developed countries today, cancer
prevention are many. Since primary prevention is directed at treatment is geared to high technology. For those who are
large population groups (e.g., high risk groups, school beyond the curable stage, the goal must be to provide pain
children, occupational groups, youth clubs), the cost can be relief. A largely neglected problem in cancer care is the
high and programmes difficult to conduct. Primary management of pain. The WHO has developed guidelines
prevention, although a hopeful approach, is still in its early on relief of cancer pain (18). "Freedom from cancer pain" is
stages. Major risk factors have been identified for a small now considered a right of cancer patients.
number of cancers only and far more research is needed in
that direction. CANCER SCREENING
2. SECONDARY PREVENTION In the light of present knowledge, early detection and
Secondary prevention comprises the following measures : prompt treatment of early cancer and precancerous
conditions provide the best possible protection against
i) CANCER REGISTRATION cancer for the individual and the community. Now a good
deal of attention is being paid to screening for early
Cancer registration is a sine qua non for any cancer detection of cancer. This approach, that is, cancer screening
control programme. It provides a base for assessing the may be defined as the "search for unrecognized malignancy
magnitude of the problem and for planning the necessary by means of rapidly applied tests".
services. Cancer registries are basically of two types :
hospital-based and population based. (a) HOSPITAL- Cancer screening is possible because : (a) in many
BASED REGISTRIES: The hospital-based registry includes instances, malignant disease is preceded for a period of
all patients treated by a particular institution, whether in- months or years by a premalignant lesion, removal of which
patients or out-patients. Registries should collect the prevents subsequent development of cancer; (b) most
uniform minimum set of data recommended in the "WHO cancers begin as localized lesions and if found at this stage a
Handbook for Standardized Cancer Registers" (16). If there high rate of cure is obtainable; and (c) as much as 75 per
is a long-term follow-up of patients, hospital-based registries cent of all cancers occur in body sites that are accessible.
can be of considerable value in the evaluation of
diagnostic and treatment programmes. Since hospital METHODS OF CANCER SCREENING
population will always be a selected population, the use of (a) Mass screening by comprehensive cancer detection
these registries for epidemiological purposes is thus limited. examination: A rapid clinical examination, and examination
(b) POPULATION-BASED REGISTRIES : A right step is to of one or more body sites by the physician is one of the
set up a "hospital-based cancer registry" and extend the important approaches for screening for cancer. (b) Mass
same to a "population-based cancer registry". The aim is to screening at single sites : This comprises examination of
cover the complete cancer situation in a given geographic single sites such as uterine cervix, breast or lung.
area. The optimum size of base population for a population (c) Selective screening : This refers to examination of those
based cancer registry is in the range of 2-7 million (17). The people thought to be at special risk, for example, parous
data from such registries alone can provide the incidence women of lower socio-economic strata upwards of 35 years
rate of cancer and serve as a useful tool for initiating of age for detection of cancer cervix, chronic smokers for
epidemiological enquiries into causes of cancer, surveillance lung cancer, etc.
CANCER
1. Screening for cancer cervix has been concern about exposure to radiation from repeated
Screening for cervical cancer has ·become an accepted mammographies and the risk of breast cancer developing as
clinical practice. The prolonged early phase of cancer in situ a result (ii) mammography requires technical equipment of a
can be detected by the Pap smear. Current policy suggests high standard and radiologists with very considerable
that all women should have a Pap test (cervical smear} at the experience - these two factors limit its more widespread use
beginning of sexual activity, and then every 3 years for mass screening purposes, and (iii) biopsy from a
thereafter (19). A periodic pelvic examination is also suspicious lesion may end up in a false-positive in as many
recommended. Organized population based screening as 5-10 cases for each case of cancer detected.
programmes have reduced the incidence and mortality from Although recent evidence points to the superiority of
cervical cancer in many developed countries. mammography over clinical examination in terms of
sensitivity and specificity (21), medical opinion is against
However, screening for cancer cervix using Pap smear
routine mammography on the very young. Women under 35
requires excessive resources in terms of laboratories,
.years of age should not have X-rays unless they are
equipments and trained personnels. This has led to search
symptomatic or a family history of early onset of breast
for an alternative screening method that can be more cost- cancer (22).
effective. Visual inspection based screening tests such as
visual inspection with 5 per cent acetic acid {VIA}, VIA with 3. Screening for lung cancer
magnification {VIAM}, and visual inspection post application
of Lugol's iodine {VIL!) are some of the alternative screening At present there are only two techniques for screening for
tests, which have been studied for their effectiveness in lung cancer, viz. chest radiograph and sputum cytology.
India. Sensitivity of VIA tends to be similar to cytology based Mass radiography has been suggested for early diagnosis at
screening. It is easy to carry out and easy to train six monthly intervals, but the evidence in support of this is
appropriate health workers (20). not convincing. So it is not recommended. It is doubtful
whether the disease satisfies the criteria of suitability for
The present strategy is to screen women using visual screening (see chapter 4).
inspection after application of freshly prepared 5 per cent
acetic acid solution {5 ml of glacial acetic acid mixed with EPIDEMIOLOGY OF SELECTED CANCERS
95 ml distilled water}. Detection of well-defined opaque
acetowhite lesions close to the squamo-columnar junction,
well defined circum-orificial acetowhite lesion or dense 1. Oral cancer
acetowhitening of ulceroproliferative growth on the cervix Oral cancer is one of the ten most common cancers in the
constiute a positive VIA or VIAM. The test is followed by a world. Its high frequency in Central and South East Asian
single visit approach for further investigation and countries (e.g., India, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Thailand,
management at district hospital. The management at district Indonesia, Pakistan} has been well documented. It is
hospital is planned in such a way that the treatment based estimated that during the year 2012, about 1.98 lac new
on colposcopy is offered in the same visit. Pap smear and cases and 98,000 deaths occurred worldwide, with a
biopsy are the investigations that are done to ensure that mortality rate of 2.1 per lac population (4).
there are cytological and histopathological back-up for the
interventions (20). PROBLEM IN INDIA
Intensive information, education and communication For the year 2012, with estimated incidence of 10.1 cases
activities are required to sensitize the community about the per 100,000 population for males and 4.3 per 100,000
significance of the disease and its early detection through population in females, oral cancer is a major problem in
screening. India. The estimated mortality is about 6. 7 per 100,000 in
males and 3.0 per 100,000 in females. During the year,
2. Screening for breast cancer 77,003 new cases occurred in the country with 52,067
There is evidence that screening for breast cancer has a deaths due to oral cancer (4).
favourable effect on mortality from breast cancer. The basic EPIDEMIOLOGICAL FEATURES
techniques for early detection of breast cancer are :
(a} breast self-examination (BSE) by the patient (b) palpation (a) Tobacco : Approximately 90 per cent of oral cancers in
by a physician (c) thermography, and (d) mammography. South East Asia are linked to tobacco chewing and tobacco
smoking. During 1966-1977, a large epidemiological survey
All women should be encouraged to perform breast self-
was carried out in different parts of the country. In this
examination. Breast cancers are more frequently found by
10-year follow-up study of 30,000 individuals in the three
women themselves than by a physician during a routine
districts of Ernakulam (Kerala}, Srikakulam (Andhra), and
examination. Although the effectiveness of BSE has not
Bhavnagar (Gujarat}, the results indicated that (i) oral cancer
been adequately quantified, it is a useful adjuvant to early
case detection. In many countries, BSE will probably be the and precancerous lesions occurred almost solely among
only feasible approach to wide population coverage for a those who smoked or chewed tobacco, and (ii) oral cancer
long time to come. Palpation is unreliable for large fatty was almost always preceded by some type of precancerous
breasts. Thermography has the advantage that the patient is lesion (24, 25). The case about tobacco is further
not exposed to radiation. Unfortunately, it is not a sensitive strengthened by the findings that the cancer almost always
tool. Mammography is most sensitive and specific in occurred on the side of the mouth where the tobacco quid
detecting small tumours that are sometimes missed on was kept (23), and the risk was 36 times higher than for non-
palpation. The use of mammography has three potential chewers if the quid was kept in the mouth during sleep (26).
drawbacks: (i) exposure to radiation. This may amount to a (b) Alcohol : Data indicates that oral cancer can also be
dose of 500 milliroentgen compared to a 30-40 caused by high concentrations of alcohol, and that alcohol
milliroentgen dose received in chest X-ray. Therefore, there appears to have a synergistic effect in tobacco users (23).
'.~8~1·_:__N_O_N_-C_O_M_M_UN_IC_A_B_L_E_D_IS_E_A_S_E_S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(c) Pre-cancerous stage : The natural history of oral 2. Cancer of the cervix
cancer shows that often a precancerous stage precedes the This is the second most common cancer among women
development of cancer. The pre-cancerous lesions worldwide, with an estimated 527 ,624 new cases and
(leukoplakia, erythroplakia) can be detected for upto 265,653 deaths with overall incidence: mortality ratio of
15 years prior to their change to an invasive carcinoma (23). 52 per cent (4). Developing countries, where it is often the
Intervention at this stage may result in regression of the most common cancer among women, account for 88 per
lesion. cent of cases. Wide variations in incidence and mortality
(d) High-risk groups: These include tobacco chewers and from the disease exist between countries. Cases and deaths
smokers, bidi smokers, people using tobacco in other forms have declined markedly in the last 40 years in most
such as betel quid; people who sleep with the tobacco quid industrialized countries, partly owing to a reduction in risk
in the mouth (27). factors, but mainly as a result of extensive screening
(e) Cultural patterns : In studying the tobacco habits in programmes. More limited improvements have been
developing countries, indigenous forms of smoking, as well observed in developing countries, where persistently high
rates tend to be the rule (1).
as chewing, which are characteristic of certain regions have
to be taken into account (8). Tobacco is smoked in the form In India, cancer of the cervix is the second most common
of manufactured cigarettes. The indigenous forms of number one killer cancer among women. It is estimated that
smoking are : bidi, chutta (cigar), chi/um, hookah (hubble- during 2012, 122,644 new cases of cancer cervix occurred
bubble). Tobacco in powdered form is inhaled as snuff. in the country (incidence rate of 22 per lac population) and
about 67,477 women died of the disease (mortality rate of
The most common form of tobacco chewing in India is 12.4 per lac population). It comes to 20. 7 per cent of all
the betel quid which usually consists of the betel leaf, cancer deaths in women and about 9.9 per cent of total
arecanut, lime and tobacco. It is common for the poorer cancer deaths in the country (6).
people to rub with the thumb flakes of sun-dried tobacco
and slaked lime in the palm of their left hand until the NATURAL HISTORY
desired mixture is obtained. The mixture (khaini) is then put
into the mouth in small amounts and at frequent intervals (a) The disease: Cancer cervix seems to follow a
during the day and slowly sucked and swallowed after progressive course from epithelial dysplasia to carcinoma in
dilution with saliva. situ to invasive carcinoma (Fig. 1). There is good evidence
that carcinoma in situ persists for a long time, more than
Cancer of the oral cavity is also very prevalent in 8 years on an average (19). The proportion of cases
Central Asian districts of USSR, where people chew "nass" progressing to invasive carcinoma from preinvasive stage is
or "nasswar" - a mixture of tobacco, ashes, lime and cotton- not known it may average 15 to 20 years or longer (31).
seed oil. The duration of the preinvasive stage is also not known.
Another type of cancer common in the eastern coastal There is evidence that some in situ cases will spontaneously
regions of Andhra Pradesh state in India is the epidermoid regress without treatment. Once the invasive stage is
carcinoma of the hard palate. It is associated with the habit reached, the disease spreads by direct extension into the
of reverse smoking of cigar (chutta), i.e., smoking with the lymph nodes and pelvic organs.
burning end inside the mouth (28).
Normal Dysplasia Cancer ~ Invasive
PREVENTION epithelium in situ cancer
childbirth have been associated with increasing risk. Breast cancer is not only infrequent in Indian women, but
(e) ORAL CONTRACEPTIVE PILLS : There is renewed also it occurs in them a decade earlier than in Western
concern about the possible relationship between pill use and women - the mean age of occurrence is about 42 in India,
the development of invasive cervical cancer (33). A recent as compared to 53 in the white women.
WHO study finds an increased risk with increased duration (b) FAMILY HISTORY : The risk is high in those with a
of pill use and with the use of oral contraceptives high in positive family history of breast cancer, especially if a
oestrogen (34). (f) SOCIO-ECONOMIC CLASS : Cancer mother or sister developed breast cancer when
cervix is more common in the lower socio-economic groups premenopausal.
reflecting probably poor genital hygiene.
(c) PARITY : MacMahon, et al (40) in their international
PREVENTION AND CONTROL case-control study found that the risk of breast cancer is
directly related to. the age at which women bear the first
(a) PRIMARY PREVENTION: Until the causative factors child. An early first, full-term pregnancy seems to have a .
are more clearly understood, there is no prospect of primary protective effect. Those whose first pregnancy is delayed to
prevention of the disease (31). It may be that with improved their late thirties are at a higher risk than multiparous
personal hygiene and birth control, cancer of the cervix uteri women. Unmarried women tend to have more breast
will show the same decline in developing countries tumours than married single women, and nulliparous
as already experienced in most of Europe and North women had the same risk.
America (35).
(d) AGE AT MENARCHE AND MENOPAUSE : Early
(b) SECONDARY PREVENTION : This rests on early menarche and late menopause are established risk factors
detection of cases through screening and treatment by (41). The risk is reduced for those with a surgically induced
radical surgery and radiotherapy. The 5-year survival rate is menopause. Forty or more years of menstruation doubles
virtually 100 per cent for carcinoma in situ, 79 per cent for the risk of breast cancer as compared with 30 years (42).
local invasive disease and 45 per cent for regional invasive (e) HORMONAL FACTORS : The association of breast
disease (19). Cancer cervix is difficult to cure once cancer with early menarche and late menopause suggests
symptoms develop and is fatal if left untreated. Prognosis is that ovary appears to play a crucial role in the development
strongly dependent upon the stage of disease at detection of breast cancer. Evidence suggests that both elevated
and treatment. oestrogen as well as progesterone are important factors in
increasing breast cancer risk (43). In short, hormones
3. Breast cancer appear to hold the key to the understanding of breast
Breast cancer is by far the most frequent cancer among cancer.
women, with an estimated 1.67 million new cases diagnosed (f) PRIOR BREAST BIOPSY : Prior breast biopsy for
in 2012 (about 25 per cent of all cancers). It is now the most benign breast disease is associated with an increased risk of
common cancer both in developed (794,000 cases) and breast cancer.
developing regions (883,000 cases). Incidence rates vary (g) DIET : Current aetiological hypotheses suggest that
from 2 7 per lac women in Eastern Africa to 98 per lac cancer of the breast is linked with a high fat diet and obesity.
women in Western Europe. The range of mortality rate is It is not known how dietary fat influences breast cancer risk
similar, approximately 6-20 per lac, because of the more at a cellular level (43).
favourable survival of breast cancer cases in developed
countries. As a result, breast cancer ranks as the fifth cause (h) SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS : Breast cancer is
of death from cancer, but it is still the most frequent cause of common in higher socio-economic groups. This is explained
cancer death in women in developing regions (36). by the risk factor of higher age at first birth.
(i) OTHERS : (i) Radiation : An increased incidence of
It is estimated that during the year 2012, about 144,937
new cases of breast cancer in women occurred in India, breast cancer has been observed in women exposed to
radiation. (ii) Oral contraceptives : Oral contraceptive
which accounts for 27.0 per cent of all malignant cases (an
appears to have little overall effect on breast cancer,
incidence rate of 25.8 per lac population). About 70,218
although prolonged use of oral pills before the first
women died of this cancer (mortality of 21.5 per cent of all pregnancy or before the age of 25 may increase the risk in
cancer cases), mortality rate being 12. 7 per lac population, younger women (44).
ranking number one killer in women (6).
PREVENTION
RISK FACTORS
The established risk factors of breast cancer include the a. PRIMARY PREVENTION
following: Current knowledge of the aetiology of breast cancer (35)
(a) AGE : Breast cancer is uncommon below the age of offers little prospect of primary prevention. However, the
35, the incidence increasing rapidly between the ages of 35 aim should be towards elimination of risk factors discussed
and 50. A slight bimodal trend in the age distribution has above and promotion of cancer education. The average age
been observed (37) with a dip in incidence at the time of at menarche can be increased through a reduction in
menopause. A secondary rise in frequency often occurs after childhood obesity, and an increase in strenuous physical
the age of 65. Women who developed their first breast activity; and the frequency of ovulation (after menarche)
cancer under the age of 40, had three times the risk of decreased by an increase in strenuous physical activity (45).
developing a second breast cancer than did those who There is also good reason for reducing fat intake in the diet.
developed their first cancer after the age of 40 (38). Indeed
the aetiologies of pre-menopausal and post-menopausal b. SECONDARY PREVENTION
breast cancer appears to be different (39). Breast screening leads to early diagnosis of breast cancer,
~e~o- .·__ N_O_N_-C_O_M_M_U_N_l_C_A_BL_E_D_IS_E_A_SE_s_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
which in turn influences treatment and, hopefully, mortality. lung cancer is at present increasing more in females than in
An important component of secondary prevention is follow- males (49).
up, i.e., to detect recurrence as early as possible; to detect
cancer in the opposite breast at an early stage; and to b. RISK FACTORS
generate research data that might be useful (39). (i) Smoking : Tobacco smoking was first suggested as a
No major improvement in survival rates has yet been cause of lung cancer in the 1920s. Subsequent studies
shown by current treatment modalities. Some cases progress proved the causal relationship between cigarette smoking
rapidly even if diagnosed at an apparently early stage, and lung cancer. Two studies in India showed that the lung
others surviving for 20 years even after metastatic spread. cancer risk for cigarette smokers is 8.6 times the risk for non-
However, in general, the removal of the tumour early is smokers (50, 51). The risk is strongly related to the number
more likely to be curative than removal at a later stage (29). of cigarettes smoked, the age of starting to smoke and
smoking habits, such as inhalation and the number of puffs
4. Lung cancer and the nicotine, the tar content and the length of cigarettes.
Those who are highly exposed to "passive smoking"
MAGNITUDE OF THE PROBLEM (somebody else's smoke} are at an increased risk of
Lung cancer has been known in industrial workers from developing lung cancer. It has been calculated that in
the late 19th century. It came into prominence as a public countries where smoking has been a widespread habit, it is
health problem in the Western world in 1930s at first in responsible for 90 per cent of lung cancer deaths (52). The
men, and later (in 1960s) among women (46), and has strongest evidence that cigarette smoking is responsible for
followed the increasing adoption of cigarette smoking first lung cancer is the incidence reduction that occurs after
by men and later by women. According to WHO reports, cessation of smoking. This has been convincingly
between 1960 and 1980, the death rate due to lung cancer demonstrated in a 20-year prospective study on male
increased by 76 per cent in men and by 135 per cent in British doctors (53).
women (47, 27). In countries where cigarette smoking has The most noxious components of tobacco smoke are tar,
only recently begun to be widely adopted, lung cancer carbon monoxide and nicotine. The carcinogenic role of tar
deaths still remain low, but it may be expected that they will
is well established. Nicotine and carbon monoxide,
rise soon. In others, such as Poland, where the use of
particularly, contribute to increased risk of cardiovascular
cigarettes began earlier, the rise is already occurring. The
diseases through enhancement of blood coagulation in the
total burden of lung cancer in any country is directly related
to the amount and duration of cigarette smoking. vessels, interference with myocardial oxygen delivery, and
reduction of the threshold for ventricular fibrillation (8).
Lung cancer has been the most common cancer in the
world for several decades, and by 2012, there were an A study in India has shown that there is no difference
estimated 1.82 million new cases, representing 13.0% of all between the tar and nicotine delivery of the filter and
new cancers. It was also the most common cause of death non-filter cigarettes smoked in India, so that a filter gives no
from cancer, with 1.58 million deaths (19.4% of the total). protection to Indian smokers. The "king-size" filter cigarettes
deliver more tar and nicotine than ordinary cigarettes.
A majority of the cases now occur in the developing Bidi smoking appears to carry a higher lung cancer risk than
countries (55%). Lung cancer is still the most common cigarette smoking owing to the higher concentration of
cancer in men worldwide (16.5% of the total). In females, carcinogenic hydrocarbons in the smoke (8).
incidence rates are generally lower, but worldwide, lung
cancer is now the fourth most frequent cancer of women (ii) Other factors : Besides cigarette smoking, there are
(8.5% of all cancers) and the second most common cause of other factors which are implicated in the aetiology of lung
death from cancer (12.8% of the total}. The highest cancer. These include air pollution, radioactivity, and
incidence rate is observed in Northern America (where lung occupational exposure to asbestos, arsenic and .its
cancer is now the second most frequent cancer in women), compounds, chromates, particles containing polycyclic
and the lowest in Middle Africa (15th most frequent cancer}. aromatic hydrocarbons and certain nickel-bearing dusts.
Because of its high fatality (the ratio of mortality to A number of studies have shown an interaction between
incidence is 0.86) and the lack of variability in survival in smoking and asbestos exposure.
developed and developing countries, the highest and lowest
mortality rates are estimated in the same regions, both in PREVENTION
men and women (48).
The estimates for the year 2012 for India are about 1. PRIMARY PREVENTION
70,276 new lung cancer cases of which 53,728 were men In lung cancer control, primary prevention is of greatest
and 16,547 women (incidence rate of 6.9 per lac importance. The most promising approach is to control the
population). About 63, 759 persons died of lung cancer "smoking epidemic", because 80 to 90 per cent of all cases
during the same year, of which 48,697 were men and of lung cancer in developed countries are due to smoking of
15,062 women (a mortality rate of 6.3 per lac population). It cigarettes (50). Methods of controlling the smoking epidemic
accounts for 6.9 per cent of all malignancies and 9.3 per have been described by the WHO expert committees in their
cent of all deaths due to cancer in the country (6). reports (49, 53). Broadly these methods include :
EPIDEMIOLOGICAL FEATURES a. Public information and education
b. Legislative and restrictive measures
a. AGE AND SEX
About a third of all lung cancer deaths occur below the c. Smoking cessation activities
age of 65. In many industrialized countries, the incidence of d. National and international coordination
CANCER
a. Public information and education met with only limited success. For untreated patients, the
The need of the hour is to create public awareness about median survival is 2 to 3 months, compared to 10-14
the hazards of smoking through mass media. The target months for patients receiving combined chemotherapy. In
population should be the entire population with greater view of these limitations, primary prevention merits greater
emphasis laid on young people and school children. Nothing attention. An important part of treatment is relief of pain so
less than a national anti-smoking campaign will be needed that each dying patient has the right to spend his last days as
to change human behaviour or life styles associated with pain-free as possible.
smoking. Curtailment of smoking must be an essential part
of national health policy.
5. Stomach cancer
About one million new cases of stomach cancer were
b. Legislative and restrictive measures estimated to have occurred in 2012 (6.8% of the total),
Legislation and restrictive measures have been suggested making it currently the fifth most common malignancy in the
in the following areas : control of sales promotion; health world, behind cancers of the lung, breast, colorectum and
warnings on cigarette packets and advertisements; product prostate. More than 70% (677,000) of cases occur in
description showing yield of harmful substances; imposition developing countries·(456,000 in men, 221,000 in women),
of upper limits for harmful substances in smoking materials; and half the world total occurs in Eastern Asia (mainly in
taxation; sales restrictions; restriction on smoking in public China).
places; restriction on smoking in places of work, etc. (52). Stomach cancer is the third leading cause of cancer death
The Government of India have provided legislative in both sexes worldwide (8.8% of the total). The highest
support to the anti-smoking campaign. "The Cigarettes mortality rates are estimated in Eastern Asia (24 per
(Regulation of production, supply and distribution) Act of 100,000 in men, 9.8 per 100,000 in women), the lowest in
1975" which came into force from 1 April 1976, requires all Northern America (2.8 and 1.5 respectively) (54).
manufacturers or persons trading in cigarettes to display About 63,097 new cases of stomach cancer were
prominently the statutory warning "Cigarette Smoking is estimated to have occurred .in India during 2012 (an
Injurious to Health" on all cartons or packets of cigarettes incidence rate of 6.2 cases per lac population)· of these
that are put on sale. Most of the State Governments in India 43,386 were in men and 19,711 in women. About 59,041
have promulgated laws prohibiting smoking in closed areas, persons died of stomach cancer (mortality rate of 5. 7 per lac
e.g., cinemas, buses, educational institutions, and hospitals. population) of which 40,721 were men and 18,320
Again in the year 2003, a comprehensive tobacco control women (6).
legislation titled "The Cigarettes And Other Tobacco The constant decline of stomach cancer in industrialized
Products (Prohibition of Advertisement and Regulation of countries is linked to improved food preservation practices;
Trade and Commerce, Production, Supply and Distribution) better nutrition more rich in vitamins from fresh vegetables
Act 2003 was passed by the Govt of India. Refer to chapter 7 and fruits; and less consumption of preserved, cured and
"National cancer control programme" for the details. salted foods. Infection with the bacterium Helicobacter
pylori contributes to the risk, probably by interacting with
c. Smoking cessation activities the other factors.
Research continues on different methods of smoking Symptoms are non-specific, which explains why most of
cessation. In all countries well over 90 per cent of those who the cases are diagnosed when the disease is at an advanced
give up smoking do so of their own volition, i.e., without use stage. Patients may complain of weight loss, fatigue or
of any specific therapy. The basic role of most treatments for gastric discomfort. Diagnosis is performed by barium X-rays
smoking cessation would be to relieve the smoker of and with biopsy.
"abstinence symptoms" (e.g., sleeplessness, craving for
smoking, dizziness, constipation, etc). The report of the This cancer is treated by surgical removal of the tumour,
WHO expert committee (52) on smoking control contains with or without adjuvant chemotherapy.
information on specific smoking cessation methods such as Stomach cancer cases have a generally poor survival
smoking cessation clinics, nicotine substitutes, hypnosis, etc. prognosis, averaging no more than 20% survival after five
years. If the tumour is localized to the stomach, 60% of
d. National and International coordination patients survive five years or more. However, only 18% of
Since smoking is a worldwide epidemic, it requires all cases are diagnosed at this early stage. Screening by
coordinated political and non-political approaches at local, photofluoroscopy has been widespread in Japan since the
national and international levels to contain the smoking late 1960s and mortality rates are declining. It is unclear
epidemic. whether this trend can be attributed to mass screening alone.
Information, International Agency for Research on Cancer, Lyon, of aetiologies, environmental and genetic, acting jointly (1).
France. The underlying cause of diabetes is the defective production
7. WHO (1999). Health Situation in the South-East Asia Region 1994- or action of insulin, a hormone that controls glucose, fat and
1997, Regional office for SEAR, New Delhi.
8. WHO (1983). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 695. amino acid metabolism. Characteristically, diabetes is a
9. Kabat, G.C. et al (1986). Int. J. Epi., 15 (4) 494-501. long-term disease with variable clinical manifestations and
10. Rothman, K.J. (1980). Preventive Medicine, 9: 174-179. progression. Chronic hyperglycaemia, from whatever cause,
11. Doll, Rand R. Peto (1981). J. Natl. Cancer Inst., 61 : 1191-1308. leads to a number of complications - cardiovascular, renal,
12. Broder, S. et al (1984). Ann. Int. Med., 100: 543. neurological, ocular and others such as intercurrent
13. Reddy, D.J. (1968). Cancer, Customs, Habits, Usages and infections.
Environment, Current Technical Literature, Mumbai.
14. WHO (1985). World Health Forum, 6 (2) 160-164. Classification
15. WHO (1986). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 731. The classification adopted by WHO (2) is given in Table 1.
16. WHO (1976). WHO handbook for standardized cancer registers
(hospital based). WHO Offset Pub! No. 25. TABLE 1
17. WHO (1979). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 632. Clinical classification of diabetes mellitus
18. WHO (1986). Cancer pain relief, WHO, Geneva.
19. Ken, Stanley (1981). World Health, Sept-Oct, pp 21-23. 1. Diabetes mellitus (DM)
20. Govt. of India, WHO (2006), Guidelines for Cervical Cancer i) Type 1 or Insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
Screening Programme, Department of Cytology and Gynaecological
ii) Type 2 or Non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus
Pathology, Postgraduate Institute of Medical Education and Research,
Chandigarh, India. iii) Malnutrition-related diabetes mellitus (MRDM)
21. Editorial (1985). Lancet, 1: 851. iv) Other types (secondary to pancreatic, hormonal,
22. Tucker,A.K. (1985).Practitioner, 229-217. drug-induced, genetic and other abnormalities)
23. WHO (1984). Bull WHO, 62 (6) 817-830. 2. Impaired glucose tolerance (IGT)
24. Mehta, F.S. et al (1982), Bull WHO, 60 (3) 441-446. 3. Gestational diabetes mellitus (GDM)
25. Gupta, P.C. et al (1980), Community Dentistry and Oral Epidemiology,
8: 287 -333. Source (2)
26. Wahi, P.N. (1968), Bull WHO, 38: 495.
27. WHO (1985). WklyEpi,Rec., 60 (17). 125-129. Type 1 diabetes (Insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus) is
28. Reddy, C.R.R.M. et al (1976). Ind.J.Cancer, 13: 161. the most severe form of the disease. Its onset is typically
29. WHO (1984). Bull WHO, 62 (6) 861-869. abrupt and is usually seen in individuals less than 30 years of
30. Warnakulasuriya, K.A.A.S. et al (1984). Bull WHO, 62 (2) 243-250. age. It is lethal unless promptly diagnosed and treated. This
31. Miller, D.L. and R.T.D. Farmer, eds (1982). Epidemiology of Diseases, form of diabetes is immune-mediated in over 90 per cent of
Blackwell, Oxford. cases and idiopathic in less than 10 per cent cases. The rate
32. Zaninetti, P. eta! (1986). Int.J.Epi. 15 (4) 477. of destruction of pancreatic 13 cell is quite variable. Rapid in
33. Brinton, L.A. et al (1986). Int.J.Cancer, 38: 339. some individuals and slow in others. Type 1 diabetes is
34. The WHO Collaborative Study of Neoplasis and Steroid usually associated with ketosis in its untreated state. It occurs
Contraceptives (1985). Brit.Med.J., 290: 961-965.
35. Parkin, D.M. et al (1984). Bull WHO, 62 (2) 163-182. mostly in children, the incidence is highest among 10-14
36. GLOBOCAN 2012, Fact Sheet (2012), Breast Cancer Incidence and year old group, but occasionally occur in adults. It is
Mortality Worldwide 2012 Summary. catabolic disorder in which circulating insulin is virtually
37. Clemmesen, J. (1979). In: Measurement of Levels of Health, WHO absent, plasma glucagon is elevated, and the pancreatic
Reg.Publ.EUROSer.No.7, p. 199. f3 cells fail to respond to all insulinogenic stimuli. Exogenous
38. Hughes L.E. and Courtney, S.P. (1985). Brit.Med.J. 290 : 1229 insulin is therefore required to reverse the catabolic state,
(editorial). prevent ketosis, reduce the hyperglucagonaemia, and reduce
39. Hislop, T.G. eta! (1986). Int.J.Epi., 15 (4) 469. blood glucose (3).
40. MacMahon, B. et al (1970). Bull WHO, 43: 209-217.
41. Miller, A.B. and Bulbrook, R.D. (1980). N.Eng.J.Med., 303: 1246- Type 2 diabetes is much more common than type 1
1248. diabetes. It is often discovered by chance. It is typically
42. Marks, M. (1985). Practitioner, 229: 225. gradual in onset and occurs mainly in the middle-aged and
43. Pike, M.C. and R.K. Ross (1984). Br.Med.Bu//., 40 (4) 351-354. elderly, frequently mild, slow to ketosis and is compatible
44. Pike, M.C. etal (1983). Lancet, 2: 926-929. with long survival if given adequate treatment. Its clinical
45. Frisch, R.E. eta! (1981).JAMA, 246: 1559-1563. picture is usually complicated by the presence of other
46. Muir, C.S. (1981). World Health, Sept-Oct, pp 8-11. disease processes.
47. WHO (1985). WHO Chronicle, 39 (3) 109-111.
48. GLOBOCAN 2012, Fact Sheet (2012), Lung Cancer Incidence and Impaired glucose tolerance (IGT) describes a state
Mortality Worldwide2012, Summary. intermediate- "at-risk" group - between diabetes mellitus
49. WHO (1982). Bull WHO, 60 (6) 809-819. and normality. It can only be defined by the oral glucose
50. Natani, P.N. et al (1977). Int.J.Cancer, 14: 115. tolerance test (see Table 3).
51. Jussawalla, D.J. and Jain, D.K. (1979). Brit.J.Cancer40: 437.
52. WHO (1979). Techn.Rep.Ser., No. 636. Insulin resistance syndrome (Syndrome X)
53. Doll, R. and Peto, R. (1976). Brit.Med.J., 2: 1525. In obese patients with type 2 diabetes, the association of
54. GLOBOCAN 2012, Fact Sheet (2012), Stomach Cancer, Incidence hyperglycaemia, hyperinsulinaemia, dyslipidaemia and
and Mortality Worldwide 2012, Summary.
hypertension, which leads to coronary artery disease and
stroke, may result from a genetic defect producing insulin
DIABETES MELLITUS resistance, with the latter being exaggerated by obesity. It
has been proposed that insulin resistance predisposes to
Once regarded as a single disease entity, diabetes is now hyperglycaemia, which results in hyperinsulinaemia (which
seen as a heterogeneous group of diseases, characterized by may or may not be of sufficient magnitude to correct the
a state of chronic hyperglycemia, resulting from a diversity hyperglycaemia) and this excessive insulin level then
. DIABETES MELLITUS
contributes to high levels of triglycerides and increased Unfortunately, there is still inadequate awareness about
sodium retention by renal tubules, thus inducing the real dimension of the problem among the general public.
hypertension. High levels of insulin can stimulate There is also a lack of awareness about the existing
endothelial proliferation to initiate atherosclerosis (3). interventions for preventing diabetes and the management of
complications. Inadequacies in primary health care systems,
Problem statement which are not designed to cope with the additional challenges
posed by the chronic non-communicable diseases, result in
WORLD poor detection of cases, suboptimal treatment and
Diabetes is an "iceberg" disease. Although increase in insufficient follow-up leading to unnecessary disabilities and
both the prevalence and incidence of type 2 diabetes have severe complications, often resulting in early death.
occurred gloablly, they have been especially dramatic in The age-adjusted mortality rates among the people with
societies in economic transition, in newly industrialized diabetes are 1.5 to 2.5 times higher than in the general
countries and in developing countries. Currently the number population (6). In Caucassian population, much of the
of cases of diabetes worlwide is estimated to be around excess mortality is attributable to cardiovascular disease,
34 7 million, of these more than 90 per cent are type 2 especially coronary heart disease; amongst Asian and
diabetes. In 2008, an estimated 1.2 million people died from American Indian population, renal disease is a major
consequences of high blood sugar (4). More than 80 per contributor (6); whereas in some developing societies,
cent diabetes deaths occur in low and middle income infections are an important cause of death. It is conceivable
countries. that the decline in mortality due to coronary heart disease
The apparent prevalence of hyperglycaemia depends on which has occurred in many affluent countries may be halted
the diagnostic criteria used in epidemiological surveys. The or even reversed if rates of type 2 diabetes continue to rise.
global prevalence of diab.etes in 2008 was estimated to be This may occur if the coronary risk factors associated with
10% in adults aged 25 + years. The prevalence of diabetes diabetes increase to the extent that the risk they mediate
was highest in the Eastern Mediterranean Region and the outweighs the benefit accrued from improvements in
Region of the Americas (11 % for both sexes) and lowest in conventional cardiovascular risk factors, and the improved
the WHO European and Western Pacific Regions (9% for care of patients with established cardiovascular disease (6).
both sexes). The magnitude of diabetes and other In addition to non-insulin dependent diabetes, which is
abnormalities of glucose tolerance are considerably higher rather silent, chronic, often unidentified killer mostly among
than the above estimates if the categories of 'impaired the adult population, the insulin dependent form of the
fasting' and 'impaired glucose tolerance' are also included. disease (type 1) makes an even more dramatic appearance
The estimated prevalence of diabetes was relatively in affected children. They develop symptoms of ketoacidosis
consistent across the income groupings of countries. Low- and often die, since the majority do not have access to
income countries showed the lowest prevalence {8% for adequate medical care, and since insulin is not available or
both sexes), and the upper-middle-income countries showed too expensive. It is estimated that the prevalence of type 1
the highest (10% for both sexes) (5). diabetes in Asia is relatively low, accounting for about
Unfavourable modification of lifestyle and dietary habits 9.7 per cent of all diabetes mellitus cases in the Region. The
that are associated with urbanization are believed to be the insulin dependent diabetes registry at Chennai (India)
most important factors for the development of diabetes. The reported an incidence of 10.5 per 100,000 children in the
prevalence of diabetes is approximately twice in urban areas age group of 10-12 years (7).
than in rural population.
INDIA
A bulk of evidence from studies on migrants indicates
that the ethnic, presumably genetic, vulnerability of Asians The population in India has an increased susceptibility to
manifests into diabetes when subjected to unfavourable life- diabetes mellitus. This propensity was demonstrated by
styles. Population-based surveys completed recently in multiple surveys of migrant Indians residing in Fiji,
Bangladesh, India and Indonesia have shown considerable Singapore, South Africa, U.K. and USA. The rates of
increase in the prevalence rate of the disease in both urban diabetes in migrants from the Indian subcontinent have
consistently shown to exceed those of the local population.
and rural dwellers when compared to results obtained
earlier. The results of prevalence studies of diabetes mellitus in
India were systematically reviewed with emphasis on those
Diabetic patients, if undiagnosed or inadequately treated,
utilizing the standard WHO criteria for diabetes diagnosis.
develop multiple chronic complications leading to
During the year 2004, there were an estimated 37. 7 million
irreversible disability and death. Coronary heart disease and
cases of diabetes in the country, of these 21.4 million were
stroke are more common in diabetics than in the general
in urban areas and 16.3 million in rural areas. The estimated
population. Microvascular complications like diabetic renal total mortality due to diabetes was 1.09 lac; 62.5 thousand
disease and diabetic retinopathy and neuropathy are serious in urban areas and 46.6 thousand in rural areas. Same year
health problems resulting in deterioration of the quality of 2.2 million DALYs were lost due to the disease (8).
life and premature death. In fact, diabetes is listed among
the five most important determinants of the cardiovascular Natural history
disease epidemic in Asia. Lower limb amputation are at least
10 times more common in diabetic than in non-diabetic Epidemiological determinants
individuals in developed countries, more than half of all
non-traumatic lower limb amputations are due to 1. AGENT
diabetes (5). Metabolic disorders in pregnant diabetic The underlying cause of diabetes is insulin deficiency
women as well as those caused by gestational diabetes which is absolute in type 1 diabetes and partial in type 2
(diabetes diagnosed for the first time during pregnancy) diabetes. This may be due to a wide variety of mechanisms:
pose a high health risk, to both the mother and foetus. (a) pancreatic disorders - inflammatory, neoplastic and
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
other disorders such as cystic fibrosis, (b) defects in the those born before. Maternal diabetes associated with
formation of insulin, e.g., synthesis of an abnormal, intrauterine growth retardation and low birth weight, when
biologically less active insulin molecule; (c) destruction of associated with rapid growth catch-up later on, appears to
beta cells, e.g., viral infections and chemical agents, increase the risk of subsequent diabetes in the child (6).
(d) decreased insulin sensitivity, due to decreased numbers
of adipocyte and monocyte insulin receptors. {e) genetic 3. ENVIRONMENTAL RISK FACTORS
defects, e.g., mutation of insulin gene; and (f) auto- Susceptibility to diabetes appears to be unmasked by a
immunity. Evidence is accumulating that the insulin number of environmental factors acting on genetically
response to glucose is genetically controlled. The overall susceptible individuals. They include : (a) SEDENTARY
effect of these mechanisms is reduced utilization of glucose LIFESTYLE : Sedentary life style appears to be an
which leads to hyperglycaemia accompanied by glycosuria. important risk factor for the development of type 2 diabetes.
Lack of exercise may alter the interaction between insulin
2. HOST FACTORS and its receptors and subsequently lead to type 2 diabetes
(a) AGE : Although diabetes may occur at any age, (2). (b) DIET : A high saturated fat intake has been
surveys indicate that prevalence rises steeply with age. Type associated with a higher risk of impaired glucose tolerance,
2 diabetes usually comes to light in the middle years of life and higher fasting glucose and insulin levels (6). Higher
and thereafter begins to rise in frequency. Malnutrition proportions of saturated fatty acids in serum lipid or muscle
related diabetes affects large number of young people. The phospholipid have been associated with higher fasting
prognosis is worse in younger diabetics who tend to develop insulin, lower insulin sensitivity and a higher risk of type 2
complications earlier than older diabetics. (b} SEX: In some diabetes. Higher unsaturated fatty acids from vegetable
countries {e.g., UK) the overall male-female ratio is about sources and polyunsaturated fatty acids have been
equal (9). In south-east Asia, an excess of male diabetics has associated with reduced risk of type 2 diabetes and lower
been observed (1), but this is open to question. (c) GENETIC fasting and 2-hour glucose concentrations. Higher
FACTORS: The genetic nature of diabetes is undisputed. proportions of long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids in
Twin studies showed that in identical twins who developed skeletal muscle phospholipids have been associated with
type 2 diabetes, concordance was approximately 90 per cent increased insulin sensitivity (6). In human intervention
(2); thus demonstrating a strong genetic component. In studies, replacement of saturated by unsaturated fatty acids
type 1 diabetes, the concordance was only about 50 per cent leads to improved glucose tolerence and enhanced insulin
indicating that type 1 diabetes is not totally a genetic entity. sensitivity. However, long chain polyunsaturated fatty acids
(d) GENETIC MARKERS :Type 1 diabetes is associated with do not appear to confer additional benefit over
HLA-B8 and B15, and more powerfully with HLA-DR3 and monounsaturated fatty acids. When total fat intake is high
DR4. The highest risk of type 1 diabetes is carried by (greater than 37 per cent of total energy), altering the quality
individuals with both DR3 and DR4. On the other hand of dietary fat appears to have little effect (13). (c) DIETARY
type 2 diabetes is not HLA-associated (2). (e) IMMUNE FIBRE : In many controlled experimental studies, high
MECHANISMS : There is some evidence of both cell- intakes of dietary fibre have been shown to result in reduced
mediated and of humoral activity against islet cells. Some blood glucose and insulin levels in people with type 2
people appear to have defective immunological diabetes and impaired glucose tolerance (14). Moreover an
mechanisms, and under the influence of some environmental increased intake of wholegrain cereals, vegetables and fruits
"trigger", attack their own insulin producing cells. (all rich in NSP) was a feature of diets in randomized
(f) OBESITY: Obesity particularly central adiposity has long controlled trials. Thus the evidence for a potential protective
been accepted as a risk factor for type 2 diabetes and the risk effect of dietary fibre appears strong. A minimum daily
is related to both the duration and degree of obesity. The intake of 20 grams of dietary fibre is recommended (6).
association has been repeatedly demonstrated in Table 2 shows a summary of lifestyle and dietary factors
longitudinal studies in different populations, with a striking associated with diabetes.(d) MALNUTRITION: Malnutrition
gradient of risk apparent with increasing level of BMI, adult (PEM) in early infancy and childhood may result in partial
weight gain, waist circumference or waist to hip ratio. Indeed failure of ~-cell function. Damage to beta cells may well
waist circumference or waist to hip ratio (reflecting explain the associated impaired carbohydrate tolerance in
abdominal or visceral adiposity) are more powerful kwashiorkor (2). (e) ALCOHOL: Excessive intake of alcohol
determinants of subsequent risk of type 2 diabetes than BMI can increase the risk of diabetes by damaging the pancreas
(6). Central obesity is also an important determinant of and liver and by promoting obesity (2). (f) VIRAL
insulin resistance, the underlying abnormality in most cases INFECTIONS: Among the viruses that have been implicated
of type 2 diabetes. In some instances obesity reduces the are rubella, mumps, and human coxsackie virus B4. Viral
number of insulin receptors on target cells. Voluntary weight infections may trigger in immunogenetically susceptible
loss improves insulin sensitivity· and in several randomized people a sequence of events resulting in ~-cell destruction.
controlled trials has shown to reduce the risk of progression (g) CHEMICAL AGENTS: A number of chemical agents are
from impaired glucose tolerence to type 2 diabetes (10, 11). known to be toxic to beta cells, e.g., alloxan, streptozotocin,
However, many obese subjects are not diabetic. Thus obesity the rodenticide VALCOR, etc (15). A high intake of cyanide
by itself is inadequate to account for all, or even most, cases producing foods (e.g., cassava and certain beans) may also
of type 2 diabetes; physical inactivity and/or deficiencies of have toxic effects on P-cells. (h) STRESS : Surgery, trauma,
specific nutrients may also be involved (2). Obesity appears and stress of situations, internal or external, may "bring out"
to play no role in type 1 diabetes pathogenesis (12). the disease. (i) OTHER FACTORS : High and low rates of
(g) MATERNAL DIABETES : Offsprings of diabetic diabetes have been linked to a number of social factors such
pregnancies including gestational diabetes are often large as occupation, marital status, religion, economic status,
and heavy at birth, tend to develop obesity in childhood and education, urbanization and changes in life style which are
are at high risk of developing type 2 diabetes at an early age. elements of what is broadly known as social class. One of
Those born to mothers after they have developed diabetes the most important epidemiological features of diabetes is
have a three-fold higher risk of developing diabetes than that it is now common in the lower social classes whereas
DIABETES MELLITUS
1. Urine examination
Target population
Urine test for glucose, 2 hours after a meal, is commonly
used in medical practice for detecting cases of diabetes. All Screening of the whole population for diabetes is not
those with glycosuria are considered diabetic unless considered a rewarding exercise (17, 18). However,
otherwise proved by a standard oral glucose tolerance test. screening of "high-risk" groups is considered more
Most studies now confirm that although glucose is found in appropriate. These groups are: (i) those in the age group 40
urine in the most severe cases of diabetes, it is often absent and over (ii) those with a family history of diabetes (iii) the
in milder forms of the disease, and such cases are likely to be obese (iv) women who have had a baby weighing more than
missed by urine test. This· is known as lack of "sensitivity". 4.5 kg (or 3.5 kg in constitutionally small populations)
To be more precise, the sensitivity of the test (i.e., (v) women who show excess weight gain during pregnancy,
proportion of people with disease who have a positive test) and (vi) patients with premature atherosclerosis.
varies between 10-50 per cent. The lack of sensitivity means
that many diabetics would have been missed if this had been PREVENTION AND CARE
the only test. That is, the test yields too many "false- 1. Primary prevention
negatives". Further, glycosuria may be found in perfectly
normal people; this gives rise to "false-positives". Since the Two strategies for primary prevention have been
specificity of the test is over 90 per cent, the yield of false- suggested: (a) population strategy, and (b) high-risk
positives is not very high. For these reasons, urine testing is strategy (2).
not considered an appropriate tool for case-finding or
epidemiological surveys of the population (2). a. POPULATION STRATEGY
The scope for primary prevention of type 1 diabetes is
2. Blood sugar testing limited on the basis of current knowledge and is probably
Because of the inadequacies of urine examination, not appropriate (2). However, the development of
"standard oral glucose test" remains the cornerstone of prevention programmes for type 2 diabetes based on
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
elimination of environmental risk factors is possible. There is check-ups, recognition of symptoms associated with
pressing need for primordial prevention that is, glycosuria and hypoglycaemia, etc.
prevention of the emergence of risk factors in countries in Table 4 shows some of the individual interventions in
which they have not yet appeared. The preventive measures diabetes with evidence of efficacy.
comprise maintenance of normal body weight .through
adoption of healthy nutritional habits and physical exercise. TABLE 4
The nutritional habits include an adequate protein intake, a Individual interventions in diabetes with evidence of efficacy
high intake of dietary fibre and avoidance of sweet foods.
Elimination of other less well defined factors such as protein
deficiency and food toxins may be considered in some
populations. These measures should be fully integrated into Lifestyle interventions for Reduction of 35-58% in
other community-based programmes for the prevention of preventing type 2 diabetes in incidence
non-communicable diseases (e.g., coronary heart disease). people of high risk
Me.tfo.rm. in for preventing type 2 . Reduction of 25-31 % in
b. HIGH-RISK STRATEGY
There is no special high-risk strategy for type 1 diabetes.
I diabetes for people at high risk
.
burdens are attributable to overweight and obesity (3). evidence that regular physical activity is protective against
Overweight and obesity are linked to more deaths unhealthy weight gain. Where as sedentary lifestyle
worldwide than underweight. particularly sedentary occupation and inactive recreation
In India, the non-communicable risk factor survey phase 2 such as watching television promote it, physical activity and
was carried out in the year 2007-2008, in the states of physical fitness are important modifiers of mortality and
Andhra Pradesh, Kerala, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, morbildity related to overweight and obesity (12). In some
Tamil Nadu, Uttarakhand and Mizoram. The survey shows individuals a major reduction in activity without the
high prevalence of overweight in all age groups except in compensatory decrease in habitual energy intake may be
15-24 years group .. Overweight prevalence was higher the major cause of increased obesity, e.g. in athletes when
among females than males and in urban areas than in rural they retire and in young people who sustain injuries etc.
areas. Low prevalence was recorded among lower level of Physical inactivity may cause obesity, which in turn restricts
education (ill-literate and primary level), and in people activity. This is a vicious circle. It is the reduced energy
whose occupation was connected with agriculture or manual output that is probably more important in the aetiology of
work (4). obesity than used to be thought (11).
In India, 1.3 per cent males and 2.5 per cent females (e) SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS : The relationship of
aged more than 20 years were obese in the year 2008 (5). obesity to social class has been studied in some detail. There
is a clear inverse relationship between socio-economic status
As obesity is a key risk factor in natural history of other and obesity. Within some affluent countries, however,
chronic and non-communicable diseases, the typical time obesity has been found to be more prevalent in the lower
sequence of emergence of chronic diseases following the socio-economic groups.
increased prevalence of obesity is important in public health
planning. The first adverse effects of obesity to emerge in (f) EATING HABITS : Eating habits (e.g., eating in
population in transition are hypertension, hyperlipidaemia between meals, preference to sweets, refined foods and fats)
and glucose intolerence, while coronary heart disease and are established very early in life. The composition of the
the long-term complications of diabetes, such as renal failure diet, the periodicity with which it is eaten and the amount of
begin to emerge several years (or decades) later (7). It is energy derived from it are all relevant to the aetiology of
matter of time before same mortality rates for such diseases obesity. A diet containing more energy than needed may
will be seen in developing countries as those prevailing lead to prolonged post-prandial hyperlipidaemia and to
30 years ago in industrialized countries (8). deposition of triglycerides in the adipose tissue resulting in
obesity (13). Nowadays television and print media is playing
Epidemiological determinants an important role in producing obesity by heavy
advertisement of fast food outlets of energy-dense,
The aetiology of obesity is complex, and is one of micronutrient poor food and beverages (usually classified
multiple causation: under the "eat least" category in diet guidelines) of
(a) AGE : Obesity can occur at any age, and generally multinational corporations, which influence the daily eating
increases with age. Infants with excessive weight gain have habits. The consumer demand by itself may be influenced by
an increased incidence of obesity in later life (9). About advertising, marketing, culture, fashion and convenience
one-third of obese adults have been so since childhood (1). (8). It has been calculated that a child whose energy
It has been well established that most adipose cells are requirement is 2000 kcal/day and who consumes
formed early in life and the obese infant lays down more of 100 kcal/day extra will gain about 5 kg a year (10). The
thes~ cells (hyperplastic obesity) than the normal infant. accumulation of one kilo of fat corresponds to 7, 700 kcal of
Hyperplastic obesity in adults is extremely difficult to treat energy (14).
with conventional methods. (g) PSYCHOSOCIAL FACTORS : Psychosocial factors
(b) SEX : Women generally have higher rate of obesity (e.g., emotional disturbances) are deeply involved in the
than men, although men may have higher rates of aetiology of obesity. Overeating may be a symptom of
overweight. In the Framingham, USA study, men were found depressiori, anxiety, frustration and loneliness in childhood
to gain most weight between the ages of 29 and 35 years, as it is in adult life. Excessively obese individuals are usually
while women gain most between 45 and 49 years of age withdrawn, self-conscious, lonely and secret eaters. An
(10), i.e. at menopausal age. It has been claimed that insight into the circumstances in which the obesity has
woman's BMI increases with successive pregnancies. The . developed is essential for planning the most suitable
recent evidence suggested that this increase is likely to be, management.
on an average, about 1 kg per pregnancy. On the other hand (h) FAMILIAL TENDENCY : Obesity frequently runs in
in many developing countries, consecutive pregnancies at families (obese parents frequently having obese children), but
short intervals are often associated with weight loss rather this is not necessarily explained solely by the influence of
than weight gain (8). genes.
(c) GENETIC FACTORS: There is a genetic component (i) ENDOCRINE FACTORS : These may be involved in
in the aetiology of obesity. Twin studies have shown a close occasional cases, e.g., Cushing's syndrome, growth
correlation between the weights of identical twins even hormone deficiency. ·
when they are reared in dissimilar environments (11). The
profile of fat distribution is also characterized by a significant (j) ALCOHOL : A recent review of studies concluded that
heritability level of the order of about 50 per cent of the total the relationship between alcohol consumption and adiposity
human variation. Recent studies have shown that the was generally positive for men and negative for women (6).
amount of abdominal fat was influenced by a genetic (k) EDUCATION : In most affluent societies, there is an
component accounting for 50-60 per cent of the individual inverse relationship between educational level and
differences (8). prevalence of overweight (6).
(d) PHYSICAL INACTNITY : There is convincing (I) SMOKING : Reports that the use of tobacco lowers
OBESITY
body weight began to appear more than 100 years ago, but Caucasian Australians at an identical BMI. In addition, the
detailed studies have been reported only during the past percentage of body fat mass increases with age up to 60-65
10 years or so. In most populations, smokers weigh years in both sexes, and is higher in women than in men of
somewhat less than ex-smokers; individuals who have never equivalent BM!. In cross-sectional comparisons, therefore,
smoked fall somewhat between the two. BMI values should be interpreted with caution if estimates of
(m) ETHNICITY : Ethnic groups in many industrialized body fat are required.
countries appear to be especially susceptible to the
development of obesity and its complications. Evidence INTRA-ABDOMINAL (CENTRAL) FAT
suggests that this may be due to a genetic predisposition to ACCUMULATION AND INCREASED RISK
obesity that only become apparent when such groups are Compared with subcutaneous adipose tissue, intra-
exposed to a more affluent lifestyle (8). abdominal adipose tissue has more cells per unit mass,
(n) DRUGS : Use of certain drugs, e.g., cortico-steroids, higher blood flow, more glucocorticoid (cortisol) receptors,
contraceptives, insulin, ~-adrenergic blockers, etc. can probably more androgen (testosterone) receptors, and
promote weight gain (8). greater catecholamine-induced lipolysis. These differences
make intra-abdominal adipose tissue more susceptible to
Use of BMI to classify obesity both normal stimulation and changes in lipid accumulation
Body mass index (BMI) is a simple index of weight-for- and metabolism. Furthermore, intra-abdominal adipocytes
height that is commonly used to classify underweight, are located upstream from liver in the portal circulation. This
overweight and obesity in adults. It is defined as the weight in means that there is a marked increase in the flux of
kilograms divided by the square of the height in metres (kg/m 2 ). nonesterified fatty acid to the liver via the portal blood in
patients with abdominal obesity.
For example, an adult who weighs 70 kg and whose
height is 1. 75 m will have a BMI of 22.9: There is good evidence that abdominal obesity is
important in the development of insulin resistance, and in
BMI = 70 (kg)/l. 75 2 (m 2 ) = 22.9 the metabolic syndrome (hyperinsulinaemia, dyslipidaemia,
The classification of overweight and obesity, according glucose intolerance, and hypertension) that link obesity with
to BMI, is shown in Table 2. Obesity is classified as a CHO (8). Premenopausal women have quantitatively more
BMI 2 30.0. The classification shown is in agreement with lipoprotein lipase (LPL) and higher LPL activity in the
that recommended by WHO (12), but includes an additional gluteal and femoral subcutaneous regions, which contain fat
subdivision at BMI 35.0-39.9 in recognition of the fact that cells larger than those in men, but these differences
management options for dealing with obesity differ above a disappear after menopause (8).
BMI of 35. The WHO classification is based primarily on the
association between BMI and mortality. Assessment of obesity
Before we consider assessment of obesity, it will be useful
TABLE 2 to first look at body composition as under;
Classification of adults according to BMI a. the active mass (muscle, liver, heart etc.)
.. . . . . ·.. . · .. ·
b. the fatty mass (fat)
·c11l.ssifiCaticm BM! · ~i*,ofcomorbidities
c. the extracellular fluid (blood, lymph, etc.)
Underweight · < 18.50 Low (but risk of other d. the connective tissue (skin, bones, connective tissue)
clinical problems increased)
Normal range · 18.50-24.99 Average
Structurally speaking, the state of obesity is characterized
by an increase in the fatty mass at the expense of the other
Overweight : ;?:25.00 parts of the body. The water content of the body is never
Pre-obese 25.00-29.99 Increased increased in case of obesity.
Obese Class.I 30.00-34.99 Moderate Although obesity can easily be identified at first sight, a
Obese class II 35.00"39.99 Severe precise assessment requires measurements and reference
Obese class III ~40.00 Very severe standards. The most widely used criteria are :
Source : (12) 1. BODY WEIGHT
Body weight, though not an accurate measure of excess
These BMI values are age-independent and the same for fat, is a widely used index. In epidemiological studies it is
both sexes. The table shows a simplistic relationship
conventional to accept + 2 SD (standard deviations) from
between BMI and the risk of comorbidity, which can be
the median weight for height as a cut-off point for obesity.
affected by a range of factors, including the nature of the
diet, ethnic group and activity level. The risks associated For adults, some people calculate various other indicators
with increasing BMI are continuous and graded and begin at such as (10) :
a BMI above 25.
(1) Body mass index (Quetelet's index)
Although it can generally be assumed that individuals
Weight (kg)
with a BMI of 30 or above have an excess fat mass in their
body, BMI does not distinguish between weight associated
Height2 (m)
with muscle and weight associated with fat. As a result, the
relationship between BMI and body fat content varies
(2) Pondera/ index
according to body build and proportion, and it has been
shown repeatedly that a given BMI may. not correspond to Height (cm)
the same degree of fatness across populations. Polynesians,
for example, tend to have a lower fat percentage than Cube root of body weight (kg)
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
(3) Brocca index which is reflected in the increased morbidity and mortality:
= Height (cm) minus 100 (a) INCREASED MORBIDITY : Obesity is a positive risk
factor in the development of hypertension, diabetes, gall
For example, if a person's height is 160 cm, bladder disease and coronary heart disease and certain
his ideal weight is ( 160-100) = 60 kg types of cancers, especially the hormonally related and large
(4) Lorentz's formula bowel cancers. There are in addition, several associated
Ht (cm) - 150 diseases, which, although not usually fatal, cause a great
Ht (cm) 100 deal of morbidity in the community, e.g., varicose veins,
2 (women) or 4 (men) abdominal hernia, osteoarthritis of the knees, hips and
lumbar spine, flat feet and psychological stresses particularly
(5) Corpulence index during adolescence. Obese persons are exposed to increased
Actual weight risk from surgery. Obesity may lead to lowered fertility. Table
3 shows the relative risk of health problems associated with
Desirable weight obesity. (b) INCREASED MORTALITY : The Framingham
Heart Study in United States showed a dramatic increase in
This should not exceed 1.2 sudden death among men more than 20 per cent overweight
as compared with those with normal weight. The increased
The body mass index (BMI) and the Brocca index are
mortality is brought about mainly by the increased incidence
widely used. A FAO//WHO/UNU Report gives the much
of hypertension and coronary heart disease. There is also an
needed reference tables for body mass index (see Table 1)
excess number of deaths from renal diseases. Obesity lowers
which can be used internationally as reference standards for
life expectancy. More information is needed about the
assessing the prevalence of obesity in a community.
relationship between different degrees of obesity and
2. SKINFOLD THICKNESS morbidity and mortality. Please see in chapter 10 under
heading "Nutritional factors in selected diseases" for dietary
A large proportion of total body fat is located just under factors of obesity.
the skin. Since it is most accessible, the method most used is
the measurement of skinfold thickness. It is a rapid and TABLE 3
"non-invasive" method for assessing body fat. Several Relative risk of health problems associated with obesity•
varieties of callipers (e.g., Harpenden skin callipers) are
available for the purpose. The measurement may be taken
at all the four sites mid-triceps, biceps, subscapular and
suprailiac regions. The sum of the measurements should. be Type 2 diabetes CHO Cancer (breast cancer in
less than 40 mm in boys and 50 mm in girls (15). postmenopausal women,
Unfortunately standards for subcutaneous fat do not exist endometriai cancer,
for comparison. Further, in extreme obesity, measurements . colon cancer)
may be impossible. The main drawback of skinfold Gall bladder HypertensiOn Reproductive hormone
disease abnormalities
measurements is their poor repeatability.
Dyslipidaemia Osteoarthritis Polycystic ovary syndrome
3. WAIST CIRCUMFERENCE AND WAIST: (knees)
HIP RATIO (WHR) Insulin resistance Hyperuricaemia . Impaired fertility
and gout
Waist circumference is measured at the mid point Breathlessness. Low back pain .due to
between the lower border of the rib cage and the iliac crest. obesity ·
It is a convenient and simple measurement that is unrelated Sleep apnea Increased risk of anaesthesia
to height, correlates closely with BMI and WHR and is an .complications ·
approximate index of intra-abdominal fat mass and total Fetal defects assoeiatedwith
body fat. Changes in waist circumference reflect changes in maternal obesity
risk factors for cardiovascular disease and other forms of • All relative risk values are approximate.
chronic diseases. There is an increased risk of metabolic Source: (8)
complications for men with a waist circumference~ 102 cm,
and women with a waist circumference~ 88 cm (12). Prevention and control
Over the past 10 years or so, it has become accepted that Weight control is widely defined as approaches to
a high WHR (> 1.0 in men and> 0.85 in women) indicates maintaining weight within the 'healthy' (i.e. 'normal' or
abdominal fat accumulation. 'acceptable') range of body mass index of 18.5 to 24. 9 kg/m 2
throughout adulthood (WHO Expert Committee, 1995). It
4. OTHERS should also include prevention of weight gain of more than 5
In addition to the above, three well-established and more kg in all people. In those who are already over-weight, a
accurate measurements are used for the estimation of body reduction of 5-10 per cent of body weight is recommended
fat. They are measurement of total body water, of total body as an initial goal (7).
potassium and of body density. The techniques involved are Prevention of obesity should begin in early childhood.
· relatively complex and cannot be used for routine clinical Obesity is harder to treat in adults than it is in children. The
purposes or for epidemiological studies (8). The introduction control of obesity centres around weight reduction. This can
of measuring fat cells has opened up a new field in obesity be achieved by dietary changes, increased physical activity
research. and a combination of both. (a) DIETARY CHANGES: The
following dietary principles apply both to prevention and
Hazards of obesity treatment : the proportion of energy-dense foods such as
Obesity is a health hazard and a detriment to well-being simple carbohydrates and fats should be reduced; the fibre
VISUAL IMPAIRMENT AND BLINDNESS
content in the diet should be increased through the proposed a uniform criterion and defined blindness as
consumption of common un-refined foods; adequate levels "visual acuity of less than 3/60 (Snellen) or its equivalent"
of essential nutrients in the low energy diets (most (2). The current WHO International Classification of
conventional diets for weight reduction are based on 1000 Diseases (ICD-10) describes the levels of visual impairment
kcal daily model for an adult) should be ensured, and as shown in Table 1.
reducing diets should be as close as possible to existing The term "low vision" included in the previous revision
nutritional patterns (16). The most basic consideration is has been replaced by the categories 1 and 2 to avoid
that the food energy intake should not be greater than what confusion with those requiring low vision care.
is necessary for energy expenditure. It requires modification
of the patient's behaviour and strong motivation to lose TABLE 1
weight and maintain ideal weight. Unfortunately, most
attempts to reduce weight in obese persons by dietary Revision of categories of visual impairment
advice remain unsuccessful. (b) INCREASED PHYSICAL
ACTIVITY: This is an important part of weight reducing
programme. Regular physical exercise is the key to an
increased energy expenditure. (c) OTHERS: Appetite
suppressing drugs have been tried in the control of obesity.
They are generally inadequate to produce massive weight
loss in severely obese patients. Surgical treatment (e.g., ·. ·Moder~tevisuiiil
impairment·.
6/18 6/60
gastric bypass, gastroplasty, jaw-wiring, to eliminate the
eating of solid food have all been tried with limited success I . 1
(17). In short, one should not expect quick or even tangible .· • ~:;~fr~~ii' '6/60 3160
results in all cases from obesity prevention programmes.
Health education has an important role to play in teaching
II . Bli~d~ess:
2
•. 1/60*
the people how to reduce overweight and prevent obesity. I . 3
A fruitful approach will be to identify those children who are Light perception
at risk of becoming obese and find way of preventing it.
References
1. Hager, A. (1981). Br. Med. Bull., 37 (3) 287. 9 ·. ·• Undeterriiined or urispecifl~d
2. Aykroyd, W.R. and J.Mayer (1968). Food and Nutrition Terminology. * Or counts fingers at 1 metre.
In: WHO Doc NUT/68.6, Geneva.
3. WHO (2014), Obesity and overweight, Fact sheet No. 311, May 2014. Source: (2)
4. Govt. oflndia (2011), National Health Profile 2011, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. The problem
5. WHO (2014), World Health Statistics2014.
6. WHO (1995). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 854. WORLD
7. WHO (2002), International Agency for Research on Cancer, IARC
Handbooks of Cancer Prevention - Weight Control and Physical In 2010, an estimated 285 million people worldwide were
Acitivity, !ARC Press, Lyon 2002. visually disabled, of whom nearly 39 million were blind and
8. WHO (2000). Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 894. 246 million were with low vision, about 90 per cent of them
9. Charney, E. et al (1976). N. Eng. J. Med., 295: 6. living in developing countries. About 80 per cent of
10. International Children's Centre, Paris (1984). Children in the Tropics, blindness is avoidable (treatable or potentially preventable).
No.151. However, a large proportion of those affected remain blind
11. Falkner, F.ed (1980). Prevention in Childhood of Health Problems in for want of access to affordable eye care. Blindness leads not
Adult Life, WHO, Geneva.
12. WHO (2003), Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 916. only to reduced economic and social status but may also
13. Oliver, M.F. (1981). Br. Med. Bull., 37 (1) 49. result in premature death. The major causes of blindness
14. Beaton, G.H. (1976). In: Nutrition in Preventive Medicine Annex 2, P. and their estimated prevalence are cataract (33 per cent);
482. Beaton, G.H. and J.M. Bengoa (eds). WHO, Geneva, Monograph glaucoma (2 per cent); and uncorrected refractive errors
Ser.No. 62. · (myopia, hyperopia or astigmatism (43 per cent) (3). The
15. James, W.P.T. (1982). Medicine International, 1 (15) 664. number of people visually impaired from infectious disesases
16. Tasher, T. (1986). Food and Nutrition Bull., 8 (3) 12. The United has greatly reduced in the last 20 years.
Nations University.
17. Garrow, J.S. (1981). In : Recent Advances in Medicine, Vol 18, About 82 per cent of all people who are visually impaired
Churchill Livingstone. are aged 50 years and older, while this age group comprises
about 20 per cent of the world's population. With an
increasing elderly population in many countries, more
people will be at risk of age-related visual impairment. An
estimated 19 million children are visually impaired. Of these,
A compilation published by WHO in 1966 (1) lists 12 million children are visually impaired due to refractory
65 definitions of blindness. As might be expected the errors, a condition that could be easily diagnosed and
definitions differed widely. Terms such as total blindness, corrected. 1.4 million are irreversibly blind for the rest of
economic blindness, and social blindness were in vogue.
their lives (3).
The 25th World Health Assembly in 1972 noted the
complexity of the problem and considered the need for a Overall, visual imairment worldwide has decreased since
generally accepted definition of blindness and visual the early 1990s. This decrease is principally the result of a
impairment for national and international comparability. reduction of visual impairment from infectious diseases
Taking into consideration existing definitions, the WHO through public health action.
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
well-to-do (10). (f) SOCIAL FACTORS: Many people lose 1. INITIAL ASSESSMENT
their eyesight because of meddlesome ophthalmology by The first step is to assess the magnitude, geographic
quacks. The basic social factors are ignorance, poverty, low distribution and causes of blindness within the country or
standard of personal and community hygiene, and region by prevalence surveys. This knowledge is essential for
inadequate health care services. setting priorities and development of appropriate intervention
Changing concepts in eye health care programmes.
Recent years have witnessed a change from acute 2. METHODS OF INTERVENTION (15)
intervention (cure) typical of clinical ophthalmology to
comprehensive eye-health care which includes the following (a) Primary eye care
concepts:
A wide range of eye conditions (e.g., acute conjunctivitis,
1. Primary eye care ophthalmia neonatorum, trachoma, superficial foreign
bodies, xerophthalmia) can be treated/prevented at the
One of the most significant developments in the field of
grass-root level by locally trained primary health workers
eye health care over the last few years has been the concept
(e.g., village health guides, multi-purpose workers) who are
of primary eye care, that is, the inclusion of an eye-care
component in primary health care system. The idea of the first to make contact with . the community. For this
primary eye care, as one of the main ingredients of a primary purpose, they are provided with essential drugs such as
health care approach to blindness, has rapidly gained topical tetracycline, vitamin A capsules, eye bandages,
acceptance the world over. It is today recognized as a model shields, etc. They are also trained to refer difficult cases
for eye care at the community level. The promotion and (e.g., corneal ulcer, penetrating foreign bodies, painful eye
protection of eye health, together with on-the-spot treatment conditions and infections which do not respond to treatment)
for the commonest eye diseases, are its cornerstones. The to the nearest PRC or district hospital. Their activities also
final objective of primary eye care is to increase the coverage involve promotion of personal hygiene, sanitation, good
and quality of eye health care through primary health care dietary habits and safety in general. Currently, there is one
approach and thereby improve the utilization of existing village health guide for 1000 population and 2 multipurpose
resources. workers for 5000 population in India.
In short, primary eye care is based firmly in primary
2. Epidemiological approach health care which is " ..... essential health care ...... made
The epidemiological approach which involves studies at universally accessible to individuals and families in the
the population level has been recognized. It focuses, among community through their full participation and at a cost that
other things, on the measurement of the incidence, the community and country can afford .... " (Article VI of the
prevalence of diseases and their risk factors. The local Declaration of Alma Ata, 1978).
epidemiological situation will determine the action needed.
(b) Secondary care
3. Team concept Secondary care involves definitive management of
In many developing countries, there is only one eye common blinding conditions such as cataract, trichiasis,
specialist for more than a million people. Increasingly, entropion, ocular trauma, glaucoma, etc. This care is
therefore, health care leans on the use of auxiliary health provided in PHCs and district hospitals where eye
personnel to fill many gaps. In India this gap is filled by departments or eye clinics are established. The secondary
village health guides, ophthalmic assistants, multi-purpose care may involve the use of mobile eye clinics. For instance,
workers, and voluntary agencies. cataract accounts for over 62 per cent of blindness in India.
The eye camp approach to make cataract surgery available
4. Establishment of national programmes has been highly successful, and has received wide popular
Another important development in connection with the support. Apart from cataract operations, these camps
prevention of blindness has been the establishment of undertake general health surveys for the early detection of
national programmes. Many of these programmes were first visual defects as well as education of the masses. For mobile
started by voluntary agencies concerned with blindness services to be effective, there must be good community
prevention (e.g., eye camps) and some of them focused on a participation in the programme. Adequate follow-up and
single disease, such as trachoma. The increasing recognition evaluation must also be provided. The "mobile units",
of the primary health care approach to blindness resulted in though valuable, lack permanence and are being utilized as
comprehensive national programmes for the prevention of part of a comprehensive strategy for eye care. The greaf
blindness (11) from all causes. advantage of this strategy is, it is problem-specific and makes
the best use of local resources and provides inexpensive eye
Prevention of blindness. care to the population at the peripheral level (13).
The concept of avoidable blindness (i.e., preventable (c) Tertiary care
or curable blindness) has gained increasing recognition These services are usually established in the national or
during recent years. A great many of the causes of blindness regional capitals and are often associated with Medical
lend themselves to prevention and/or control - whether by Colleges and Institutes of Medicine. They provide
improving nutrition, by treating cases of infectious diseases, sophisticated eye care such as retinal detachment surgery,
or by controlling the organisms which cause infection, or by corneal grafting and other complex forms of management
improving safety conditions - particularly on the roads, at not available in secondary centres. The majority of States in
work or in the home (12). India has passed the Corneal Grafting Acts which have
The components for action in national programmes for helped the establishment of Eye Banks. Other measures of
the prevention of blindness comprise the following : rehabilitation comprise education of the blind in special
_ __;N:..::O::..:N:..:...-.::.C.::.O.:.:M::..M:..:U:.:..N:.:.:IC:::.A..::B:..::L=E-=D..:.:IS::E::_A=S=ES.::.__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
;~~ifQltY;1
schools and utilization of their services in gainful National and International agencies
employment. The central government has established The National Association for the Blind (NAB), a
National Institute for the Blind in Dehradun (U.P.) to work voluntary organization which came into existence in 1952
out new approaches and strategies for solving the problems has been active in the field of providing welfare services to
of the blind. the blind throughout India. The Royal Commonwealth
(d) Specific programmes Society for the Blind has been working in the field since
1950. In 1974, by invitation of WHO, the organizations
(i) Trachoma control : Endemic trachoma and associated concerned with blindness and with its prevention came
infections are a major cause of preventable blindness in together to build a new agency, the "International Agency
many developing courytries. Early diagnosis and treatment for Prevention of Blindness". The Agency's primary task is
will cure trachoma. National programmes have been to prevent blindness. There is a growing movement for direct
mounted against trachoma in many countries. Mass technical cooperation among the developing countries.
campaigns with topical tetracycline and the improvement of Neighbouring countries may provide training, exchange
socio-economic conditions have markedly reduced the workers, share plans, and, in a variety of ways enrich and
severity of trachoma and associated bacterial conjunctiva! stimulate their programmes (16).
infections. The Trachoma Control Programme launched in
India in 1963 was merged with the National Programme for National Programme for the Control of
the Control of Blindness in 1976. Blindness
(ii) School eye health services : This is another useful See chapter 7 for details.
approach to the eye health problems in the community.
School children who form a sizable segment of the Vision 2020 : The Right to Sight
community can be screened and treated for defects such as
refraction errors, squint, amblyopia, trachoma, etc. Health Vision 2020 : The Right to Sight, a global initiative to
education is an important component of school health eliminate avoidable blindness was launched by WHO on
service. Students should be taught to practise the principles 18th Feb. 1999. One significant way in which this initiative
of good posture, proper lighting, avoidance of glare, proper differs from previous ones is that the concept centres around
distance and angle between the books and the eyes. Use of Rights issues: Recognition of sight as a fundamental human
suitably readable type style in textbooks should be right by all countries can be an important catalyst of
encouraged. initiatives for the prevention and control of blindness. The
objective of Vision 2020 is to assist member countries in
(iii) Vitamin A prophylaxis : Under the vitamin A developing sustainable systems which will enable them to
distribution scheme in India, 200,000 IU of vitamin A are eliminate avoidable blindness from major causes, i.e.
given orally at 6-monthly intervals between the ages cataract, xerophthalmia and other causes of childhood
1-6 years. To be able to control xerophthalmia, the whole blindness, refractive error and low vision, trachoma and
family should be kept under surveillance for one year and other causes of corneal blindness by the year 2020 (5, 6).
children for 5 years (14).
(iv) Occupational eye health services: This is to prevent/ References .
treat eye hazards in industries. Education on the prevention 1. WHO (1966). Epi and Vital Statis Rep., 19: 437.
of occupational eye hazards and the use of protective 2. WHO (2011), Change the definition of blindness.
devices in some occupations (like welding) is essential. The 3. WHO (2013), Visual impairment and blindness fact sheet, No. 282,
key to the prevention of accidents in factories is to improve June 2013.
the safety features of machines, to have proper illumination 4. Govt. of India (2011), National Health Profile2011, Ministry of Health
of the working area, to select workers with the requisite and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
5. Govt. of India (2012), Annual Report 2011-2012, Ministry of Health
alertness and good vision, and to encourage the use of and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
protective devices (15). 6. WHO (2002), Health Situation in the South-East Asia Region 1998-
2000, New Delhi.
3. LONG-TERM MEASURES 7. WHO (2000), Strategic Plan for Vision 2020 : The Right to sight,
Long-term measures also have a part to play in Elimination of Avoidable Blindness in the South-East Asia Region,
controlling eye infections. Broadly these measures are aimed New Delhi.
at improving the quality of life and modifying or attacking 8. Govt. of India (2003), Annual Report 2002-2003, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
the factors responsible for the persistence of eye health 9. Kapoor, P.M. and A.K. Kundu (1985). J. Com. Dis., 17 (2) 118.
probl~ins, e.g., poor sanitation, lack of adequate safe water 10. Sharma, K.L. and B.G. Prasad (1962). lnd. J. Med. Res., 50: 842.
supplies, little intake of foods rich in vitamin A, lack of 11. Thylefors, B. (1987). World Health, May.
personal hygiene, etc. Health education is an important 12. Bietti, G.B. (1976). World Health, Feb-March.
long-term measure in order to create community awareness 13. WHO (1980). WHO Chronicle, 34 (9) 332.
of the problem; to motivate the community, to accept total 14. Madan Mohan (1984). Swasth Hind, 28 (5) 105.
eye health care programmes, and to secure community 15. WHO (1984). Strategies for the prevention of blindness in national
participation. programmes, WHO, Geneva.
16. WHO (1979). Guidelines for programmes for the prevention of
4. EVALUATION blindness, WHO, Geneva.
Evaluation should be an integral part of intervention
programmes to measure the extent to which ocular diseases. ACCIDENTS.AND INJURIES_
and blindness have been alleviated, assess the manner and
degree to which programme activities have been carried out, An accident has been defined as : "an unexpected,
and determine the nature of other changes that may have unplanned occurrence which may involve injury" (1). A
been produced (16). WHO Advisory Group in 1956 defined accident as an
ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES
"unpremeditated event resulting in recognizable damage" 1.5 million die of intentional injuries. Road traffic accidents
(2). According to another definition, an accident is that claim 1.2 million lives, self inflicted injuries and violence are
"occurrence in a sequence of events which usually produces becoming important causes of loss of lives.
unintended injury, death or property damage".
TABLE 1
Accidents represent a major epidemic of non-
communicable disease in the present century. They are no Global estimates of injuries related deaths
longer considered accidental. They are part of the price we by cause and sex {2008)
pay for technological progress.
Accidents have their own natural history and follow the
same epidemiological pattern as any other disease that is,
the agent, the host and the environment interacting together
to produce injury or damage. They occur more frequently in
1209
certain age-groups, at certain times of day and week and at
certain localities. Some people are more prone to accidents Poisoning 252 0.4 3.35 1.56
than others and susceptibility is increased by the effect of Falls 510 0.9 5.60 4,34
alcohol and other drugs as well as physiological state such as Fires 195 0.3 1.62 2.18
fatigue. Lastly, a majority of accidents are preventable. Drowning 306 0.5 4:20 1.76
Measurement of the problem Other injuries 1146 2.0 13.72 . 8.61
Intentional 1510 2.7 21.76 7.68
a. MORTALITY . Se\f inflicted 782 i.4 9.87 5.37
The following epidemiological indices will be useful in Violence 535 0.9 8.66 1.77
assessing the magnitude of the problem : (i) Proportional War 182 0.3 3.04 0.49.
mortality rate : That is, the number of deaths due to ITotal 5129 . 9.0 68.27 31.73 I
accidents per 100 (or 1000) total deaths. (ii) Number of Source: (7)
deaths per million population : The term "killed" (in a road
traffic accident) is defined as any person who was killed INDIA
outright or who died within 30 days as a result of the Accidents are definitely on an increase in India.
accident (3). (iii) Death rate per 1000 (or 100,000) Increasing mechanization in agriculture and industry,
registered vehicles per year. (iv) Number of accidents or induction of semi-skilled and unskilled workers in various
fatalities as a ratio of the number of vehicles per kilometre or operations and rapid increase in vehicular traffic have
passengers per kilometre. (v) Deaths of vehicle occupants resulted in an increase in morbidity and mortality due to
per 1000 vehicles per year, etc. accidents. Overcrowding, lack of awareness and poor
b. MORBIDITY implementation of essential safety precautions result in an
increasing number of accidents. Consumption of poisonous
Morbidity is measured in terms of "serious injuries" and substances accidentally or intentionally is also on the rise.
"slight injuries" (4). The seriousness of the injury is assessed Deaths, disabilities and hospitalization. due to injuries
by a scale known as "Abbreviated Injury Scale" (3). continue to have impact of socio-economic loss to
Morbidity rates are generally less reliable because of under- . individuals, families, society and infrastructure. The
reporting and mis-reporting. traditional view of injury as an accident, has resulted in the
c. DISABILITY neglect of this aspect of public health. Today injuries are low
in priority for policy makers, and only few plans are drawn
An important outcome of the accident process is for injury prevention.
disability, which may be temporary or permanent, partial or
total. Measurement of disability in terms of its duration is a Table 2 shows the reported number of accidental deaths
limited concept; it does not take into consideration the by main causes in India.
psychological or social aspects of an accident or injury (5).
The International classification of impairments, disabilities TYPES OF ACCIDENTS
and handicaps" is an attempt by WHO (6) to estimate the
disability of individuals at a given moment. 1. Roac;I traffic accidents
In many countries, motor vehicle accidents rank first
The problem among all fatal accidents. Every year almost 1.24 million
WORLD people die from road accidents in the world. In addition, for
every death, there are as many as 20-50 non-fatal injuries
Injuries constitute a variable epidemic. During 2008 road and 10-20 serious injuries requiring long periods of
traffic injuries ranked fourth among the leading causes of expensive care, nursing and treatment. Road traffic fatalities
deaths in the world. Injuries are responsible for rate is higher in younger age groups. Children and young
·approximately 9 per cent {about {5.12 million) of all causes people under the age of 25 years account for over 30 per
of deaths in the world and about 16 per cent of the cent of those killed and injured in road accidents.
disabilities are reported due to injuries. They are. also the
major cause of death among persons aged 10-24 years. In . From a young age, males are more likely to be involved
the developed regions, 57 per cent of male deaths and 43 per in road traffic crashes thanfemales. Among young drivers,
cent of female deaths in this age group are due to injuries, males under the age of 25 years are almost 3 times as likely
mainly traffic accidents. The main causes of injuries to be killed in a car crash as young females (9).
worldwide and their percentages are shown in Table 1. About Nearly half {46 per cent) of those dying on roads are
3.6 million people die of unintentional injuries and about vulnerable road users like pedestrians, cyclists and
NON-COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
TABLE 2
Reported number of accidental deaths in India by main cause (2007-2011)
motorcyclists. Compared to cars the two-wheelers are are recommended in areas where vulnerable road users
unstable and provide little protection for their riders in are common {e.g. residential areas, around schools).
accidents. In developed countries, four wheelers are more - Apart from reducing road traffic injuries, lower average
frequently involved in accidents. traffic speeds can have other positive effects on health
More than 90 per cent deaths that result from road traffic outcomes (e.g. by reducing respiratory problems
accidents occur in low and middle-income countries. Even associated with car emissions).
within high-income countries, people from lower socio-
economic backgrounds are more likely to be involved in Drink-driving
road traffic accidents (9). Drinking and driving increases both the risk of a crash
and the likelihood that death or serious injury will result.
INDIA - The risk of being involved in a crash increases
During the year 2011, a total of 4.43 lac road traffic significantly above a blood alcohol concentration (BAC)
accidents were reported in the country. The rate of death per of 0.04 g/dl.
1000 vehicles has decreased from 1.6 in 2007 to 1.2 in - Laws that establish BACs of 0.05 g/dl or below are
2011. The rate of accidental deaths per 1000 vehicles was effective at reducing the number of alcohol-related
highest in Bihar and Sikkim at 1.6, followed by West Bengal crashes.
at 1.5 (10).
- Enforcing sobriety check-points and random breath
24.9 per cent of victims of road traffic accidents were testing can lead to reductions in alcohol-related crashes
occupants of two wheelers. Maximum number (73,001) by about 20%, and have shown to be very cost-effective.
of accidents occurred between 6 PM and 9 PM time
period (10). Maximum number of road accidents were Motorcycle helmets
reported in the month of May (43,064) followed by
- Wearing a motorcycle helmet correctly can reduce the
January (39,185).
risk of death by almost 40% and the risk of severe injury
Risk factors (9) by over 70%.
- When motorcycle helmet laws are enforced effectively,
Speed helmet wearing rates can increase to over 90%.
An increase in average speed is directly related both to Requiring helmets to meet a recognized safety standard
the likelihood of a crash occurring and to the severity of the is important to ensure that helmets can effectively reduce
consequences of the crash. Some other facts are as below. the impact of a collision to the head in the event of a
- Pedestrians have a 90% chance of surviving a car crash crash.
at 30 km/h or below, but less than a 50% chance of
surviving an impact of 45 km/h or above. Seat-belts and child restraints
- 30 km/h speed zones can reduce the risk of a crash and Wearing car seat-belt reduces the risk of fatality among
ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES
impaired visibn
·.Fatigue
- excessive speed
Psychosocial factors ·.., • old, p~orly rtl.alritained. ·
lack of experience l~rge !lu~ber of
risk,taking 2 .or 3 wheelers
impulsiveness overloaded buses'
· - defectivejudgement low driving standards
delay In decisions Bad weather •·
- . aggressiveness Inadequate enforcementof
poor perception existing laws
family dysfunction
Lack of body protection Mixed traffic (slow and
- helmets . fast moving, pedestrians
an(:! animals)
- safety belts ·
Increased
vulnerability
··· ·and/or
risk situation
ACCIDENT
FIG. 1
Primary factors in accidents
Drugs such as barbiturates, amphetamines, and cannabis hospital in all major cities.
impair one's ability to drive safely. They should be avoided
totally. 6. Elimination of causative factors
The factors which tend to cause accidents must be sought
5. Primary care out and eliminated, e.g., improvement of roads, imposition
Planning, organization and managemen.t of trauma of speed limits and marking of danger points.
treatment, and emergency care services should be a
fundamental element of health service managerial process. 7. Enforcement of laws
Emergency care should begin at the accident site, continued Legislation embodies codified set of rules. These are
during transportation, and conclude in the hospital enforced by the State to prevent accidents. These include
emergency room. At any of these stages a life may be saved driving tests, medical fitness to drive, enforcement of speed
or lost, depending upon the skill of the health care worker limits, compulsory wearing of seat-belts and crash-helmets,
and the availability of needed emergency equipment. To checking of .blood alcohol concentration, road-side breath
achieve these ends, there should be an Accident Services testing for alcohol, regular inspection of vehicles, periodic
Organization and one fully equipped specialized trauma care re-examination of drivers over the age of 55, etc.
ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES
electricity, friction or contact with chemicals. Thermal (heat) - alcohol abuse and smoking;
burns occur when some or all of the cells in the skin or other easy access to chemicals used for assault (such as in acid
tissues are destroyed by : violence attacks);
hot liquids (scalds) - use of kerosene (paraffin) as a fuel source for non-
hot solids (contact burns), or electric domestic appliances;
- flames (flame burns). inadequate safety measures for liquefied petroleum gas
and electricity.
The problem Burns occur mainly in the home and workplace.
Burns are a global public health problem, accounting for Community surveys in Bangladesh and Ethiopia showed
an estimated 265,000 deaths annually. About 11 million that 80-903 of burns occur at home. Children and women
people worldwide require medical attention due to severe usually get burns in domestic kitchens, from upset
burns. The majority of these occur in low and middle- receptacles containing hot liquids, or flames, or from
income countries and almost half occur in the South-East cookstove explosions. Men are more likely to get burns in
Asia Region. the workplace due to fire, scalds, chemicals and electricity.
In many high-income countries, burn death rates have Prevention (13)
been decreasing, and the rate of child deaths from burns is
currently over seven times higher in low and middle-income Burns are preventable. High-income countries have
countries than in high-income countries. made considerable progress in lowering rates of burn
deaths, through a combination of prevention strategies and
Non-fatal burns are a leading cause of morbidity, improvemetns in the care of people affected by burns. Most
including prolonged hospitalization, disfigurement and of these advances in prevention and care have been
disability, often with resulting stigma and rejection. incompletely applied in low and middle-income countries.
It is estimated that over one million people are Increased efforts to do so would likely lead to significant
moderately or severely burnt every year in India. In reduction in rates of burn-related death and disability.
Bangladesh 1. 73 lac children get moderate or severe burns Prevention strategies should address the hazards for
every year with about 17 per cent getting temporary
specific burn injuries, education for vulnerable populations
disability and 18 per cent permanent disability. Burns are
and training of communities in first-aid. An effective burn
the second most common injury in rural Nepal accounting
for 5 per cent disabilities. prevention plan should be multisectoral. There are a number
of specific recommendations for individuals, communities
Risk factors (13) and public health officials to reduce burn risk.
Gender : Females suffer burns more frequently than FIRST-AID (13)
males. Women in the South-East Asia Region have the
highest rate of burns, accounting for 273 of global burn Do's
deaths and nearly 703 of burn deaths in the region. The
high risk for females is associated with open fire cooking, or 1. Stop the burning process by removing clothing and
inherently unsafe cookstoves, which can ignite loose irrigating the burns.
clothing. Open flames used for heating and lighting also 2. Use cool running water to reduce the temperature of the
pose risks, and self-directed or interpersonal violence are burn.
also important factors (although understudied). 3. Extinguish flames by allowing the person to roll on the
Age : Along with adult women, children are particularly ground, or by applying a blanket, or by using water or
vulnerable to burns. Burns are the 11th leading cause of other fire-extinguishing liquids.
death of children aged 1-9 years and are also the fifth most 4. In chemical burns, remove or dilute the chemical agent
common cause of non-fatal childhood injuries. While a major by irrigating with large volumes of water.
risk is improper adult supervision, a considerable number of
5. Wrap the patient in a clean cloth or sheet and transport
burn injuries in children result from child maltreatment.
to the nearest appropriate facility for medical care.
Socio-economic factors
Don'ts
People living in low and middle-income countries are at
higher risk for burns than people living in high-income 1. Do not start first-aid before ensuring your own safety
countries. Within the countries also, burn risk correlates with (switch off electrical current, wear gloves for chemicals
socio-economic status. etc.)
2. Do not apply paste, oil, haldi (turmeric) or raw cotton to
Other risk factors the burn.
There are a number of other risk factors for burns, 3. Do not apply ice because it deepens the injury.
including: 4. Avoid prolonged cooling with water because it may lead
occupations that increase exposure to fire; to hypothermia.
- poverty, overcrowding and lack of proper safety 5. Do not open blisters until topical antimicrobials can be
measures; applied, by a health-care provider.
placement of young girls in household roles such as
cooking and care of small children; 6. Do not apply any material directly to the 'wound as it
- underlying medical conditions, including epilepsy, might become infected.
peripheral neuropathy, and physical and cognitive 7. Avoid application of topical medication until the patient
disabilities; has been placed under appropriate medical care.
ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES
- Early systemic symptoms: collapse (hypotension, shock), deaths in the Region are not available, partly because a
nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, severe headache, majority of the workers are employed in unorganized
"heaviness" of the eyelids, inappropriate (pathological) sectors, few studies indicate that nearly one per cent of
drowsiness or early ptosis/ophthalmoplegia. deaths and 10 per cent of permanent impairment result from
- Early spontaneous systemic bleeding. agricultural injuries. Agriculture workers are exposed to wide
variety of physical, chemical (pesticide and fertilizers),
Passage of dark brown/black urine. biological (animal bites and animal related injuries) and
mechanical injuries. The estimates from agriculture injury
FIRST-AID vary from 22-29 per 1000 workers. The incidence rate of
The Government of India developed a national snake- injury among agriculture workers in India is estimated to be
bite protocol in 2007 which includes following advice : 116 per 100,000 workers. In a study population of 23,000 in
1. Reassure the patient. 70% of all snake bites are from rural Haryana, nearly 31 per cent of the injuries were related
non-venomous species. Only 50% of bites by venomous to agricultural activity (17). Of these, serious injuries were
species actually envenomate the patient. caused by mechanized equipment and tractors (15).
2. Immobilize in the same way as a fractured limb. Use Rapid industrialization has also resulted in mortality and
bandages or cloth to hold the splints, not to block the morbidity of many workers in hazardous industries.
blood supply or apply pressure. Do not apply any The unique features common to the workplace in this
compression in the form of tight ligatures, they don't region are that the manual labour content is high and the
work and can be dangerous. man-machine interaction is unsafe. In addition, there is
3. Do not give alcoholic beverages or stimulants. They are greater emphasis on attempts to change the worker's
known vasodilators and they speed up the absorption of behaviour, but designs that provide automatic protection are
venom. ignored. Children and people who are challenged physically
as well as mentally are at a greater risk of encountering
4. Remove any items or clothings which may constrict the occupational injuries (15).
bitten limb if it swells (rings, bracelets, watches,
footwear, etc.). 4. Railway accidents
5. Do not incise or manipulate the bitten site. Do not apply With the increase in number of trains and passengers, the
ice. increase in the number of accidents and casualties resulting
6. Transport the patient to a medical faculty for definitive therefrom is not unexpected. During 2010, about 30,576
treatment. people died of railway accidents in India (8). The main
factor involved in railway accidents is human failure.
ANTIVENOM (19)
Until the advent of antivenom, bites from some species of 5. Violence
snake were almost universally fatal. Despite huge advances An estimated 1,510,000 persons died in 2008 due to
in emergency therapy, antivenom is often still the only violence or intentional injuries (homicide, suicide and war)
effective treatment for envenomation. The first antivenom worldwide, of which 420,000 were in SEAR countries (7).
was developed in 1895 by French physician Albert Calmette The accurate statistics are not available, as not all those
for the treatment of Indian cobra bites. Antivenom is made injured go to the hospital or state that the injury is because
by injecting a small amount of venom "into an animal of violence. Violence behind closed doors are grossly
(usually a horse or sheep) to initiate an immune system unreported.
response. The resulting antibodies are then harvested from
the animal's blood. Violence is reported to be increasing rapidly. It also follow
the same epidemiological pattern as any other disease (host,
Antivenom is injected into the person intravenously, and agent and environment), i.e. a motivated person who
works by binding to, and neutralizing venom enzymes. It injures; a suitable target; and a suitable environment or the
cannot undo damage already caused by venom, so absence of a guardian, all coinciding in time and space.
antivenom treatment should be sought as soon as possible. Often, it may only be possible to initiate steps for prevention
Modern antivenoms are usually polyvalent, making them after an episode of violence has already taken place.
effective against the venom of numerous snake species.
Some of the risk factors for violent behaviour are (15) :
Pharmaceutical companies which produce antivenom
target their products against the species native to a - Exposure to violence and societal acceptability of
particular area. Although some people may develop serious violence as a means to solve problems. The image of
adverse reactions to antivenom, such as anaphylaxis, in violence as an acceptable and effective tool for solving
emergency situations this is usually treatable and hence the problems, whether across international borders, on
benefit outweighs the potential consequences of not using the street, or around the home, may spill over into real
antivenom. behaviour;
- Availability of lethal weapons like fire-arms
3. Industrial accidents significantly increases the possibility of both fatal and
There are approximately 580 million workers in the non-fatal injuries;
South-East Asia Region. Approximately 60-80 per cent of - Consumption of alcohol and other drugs is linked to
these workers are employed in agriculture, fisheries, home almost 2/3 of cases of violence according to several
industries, and small-scale units. Injuries due to these studies.
occupations result in an estimated 120 million injuries and Violence due to war and political unrest is fairly common
200,000 deaths per year (15). in several countries. Organized and unorganized, ethnic and
Though reliable estimates for work related injuries and communal violence are well known in some places.
REFERENCES
Suicides have been increasing at an alarming rate in 5. WHO {1982). The epidemiology of accident traumas and resulting
SEAR countries. Incidence rates of 11 per lac population in disabilities, EURO Reports and Studies, 57, WHO, Copenhagen.
Bangladesh, 36 per lac population in India, 8 per lac in Sri 6. WHO {1980). International classification of impairments, disabilities,
Lanka, and 22 per lac in Thailand; per year have been and handicaps, WHO, Geneva.
reported. Nearly 70 per cent of suicides in all countries have 7. WHO (2011), Estimates of deaths by causes for the year 2008
summary tables.
been reported in the age group of 15-34 years with male-
8. Govt. oflndia {2014), National Health Profile 2013, Ministry of Health
female ratio of 1:1.2 to 1:3 from different countries. and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Poisoning, hanging, self-immolation and drowning are the 9. WHO (2012), Road Traffic Injuries, Fact sheet No. 358, Sept 2012.
most commonly reported methods of suicide (17).
10. Govt. of India (2013), Accidental deaths and suicides in India, 2013,
In India, an average of 369 suicides take place every day, National Crime Records Bureau, Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi.
out of these 248 are committed by males and 121 by 11. WHO (1981). Seat belts and other devices to reduce injuries from
females (62 are house wives). Family problems (89) and traffic accidents, EURO Reports and Studies 40, WHO, Copenhagen.
illness (72) are the main cause of suicides. Majority cases are 12. WHO (2014), Drowning, Fact Sheet No. 347, April 2014.
below 29 years of age (136) followed by 30-44 years of age 13. WHO (2014), Burns, Fact Sheet No. 365, April 2014.
group (125} (10). 14. WHO (2012), Falls, Fact Sheet No. 344, Oct. 2012.
15. WHO (2002), Injuries in South-East Asia Region, Priorities for Policy
References and Action, SEA I Injuries I Al.
1. Hogarth, J. (1978). Glossary of Health Care Terminology, WHO, 16. Govt,of India (1979). Swasth Hind, 25 (12) 329.
Copenhagen. 17. WHO (2002), Health Situation in the South-East Asia Region 1998-
2. WHO (1957). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.118. 2000, Regional Office for SEAR, New Delhi.
3. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep. Ser., 703. 18. WHO (2010), Snake antiuenoms, Fact sheet No. 337, May 2010.
4. WHO (1976). The epidemiology of road traffic injuries, European Sr. 19. WHO (2010), Guidelines for the Management of Snake-bites,
No.2, WHO Copenhagen. Regional Office of SEAR, New Delhi.
"Those who would benefit most from a service are least likely to obtain it"
Since India became independent, several measures have preparedness and rapid response (ii) Integrated vector
been undertaken by the National Government to improve management (IVM) for transmission risk reduction including
the health of the people. Prominent among these measures indoor residual spraying in selected high-risk areas, use of
are the NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMES, which have insecticide treated bed-nets, use of larvivorous fish, anti-
been launched by the Central Government for the control/ larval measures in urban areas, source reduction and minor
eradication of the communicable diseases, improvement of environmental engineering (iii) Supportive interventions
environmental sanitation, raising the standard of nutrition, including behaviour change communication (BCC), public
control of population and improving rural health. Various private partnership and inter-sectoral convergence, human
international agencies like WHO, UNICEF, UNFPA, World resource development through capacity building,
Bank, as also a number of foreign agencies like SIDA, operational research including studies on drug resistance and
DANIDA, NORAD and USAID have been providing insecticide susceptibility, monitoring and evaluation through
technical and material assistance in the implementation of periodic reviews/field visits, web based management
these programmes. A brief account of these programmes information system, vaccination against JE and annual mass
which are currently in operation is given below : drug administration against lymphatic filariasis (1).
(A) MALARIA
NATIONAL VECTOR BORNE DISEASE
CONTROL PROGRAMME The programme began originally as National Malaria
Control Programme in 1953, during the First Five Year Plan.
The National Vector Borne Disease Control Programme Because of the spectacular success achieved in the control of
(NVBDCP) is implemented in the State/UT's for prevention malaria, the control programme, was converted in 1958 into
and control of vector borne diseases namely Malaria, an eradication programme, with the objective of eradicating
Filariasis, Kala-azar, Japanese Encephalitis (JE), Dengue malaria once and for all from the country. Since then the
and Chikungunya. The Directorate of NVBDCP is the nodal programme has undergone many changes and the milestones
agency for planning, policy making and technical guidance of malaria control activities in India are as shown below (2) :
and monitoring and evaluation of programme Milestones of malaria control activities in India
implementation in respect of prevention and control of these
vector borne diseases under the overall umbrella of NRHM. Year Milestone
The States are responsible for planning, implementation Prior to 1953 Estimated malaria cases in India 75 million;
and supervision of the programme. The vector borne Deaths due to malaria - 0.8 million
diseases are major public health problems in India.
1953 Launching of National Malaria Control
Chikungunya fever which has re-emerged as epidemic
Programme (NMCP)
outbreaks after more than three decades has added to the
problem. The prevention and control of vector borne 1958 NMCP was changed to National Malaria
diseases is complex; as their transmission depends on Eradication Programme
interaction of numerous ecological, biological, social and 1965 Cases reduced to 0.1 million
economic factors including migration (1). Early 1970's Resurgence of malaria
Out of the six vector borne diseases, malaria, filariasis, 1976 Malaria cases 6.46 million
japanese encephalitis, dengue and chikungunya are 1977 Modified Plan of Operations implemented
transmitted by different kind of vector mosquitoes, while 1997 World Bank assisted Enhanced Malaria
kala-azar is transmitted by sand flies. The transmission of Control Project (EMCP) launched
vector borne diseases in any area is dependent on frequency 1999 Renaming of programme to National Anti
of man-vector contact, which is further, influenced by Malaria Programme (NAMP)
various factors including vector density, biting time, etc. 2002 Renaming of NAMP to National Vector
Mosquito density is directly related with water collection, Borne Disease Control Programme
clean or polluted, in which the mosquitoes breed. 2005 Global Fund assisted Intensified Malaria
Under NVBDCP, the three pronged strategy for Control Project (IMCP) launched
prevention and control of VBDs is as follows : (i) Disease 2005 Introduction of RDT in the programme
management including early case detection and complete 2006 ACT introduced in areas showing
treatment, strengthening of referral services, epidemic chloroquine resistance in falciparum malaria
MALARIA
2008 ACT extended to high Pf predominant operations are the direct responsibility of DMO/DVBDC
districts covering about 95% Pf cases officer in the entire district under overall supervision of CMO
2008 World Bank supported National Malaria and collaborative supervision/monitoring by PHC's Medical
Control Project launched Officer. There is one Assistant Malaria Officer (AMO) and
2009 Introduction ofLL!Ns Malaria Inspectors (Mis) to assist him (2).
2010 New drug policy 2010 In many districts, District Vector Borne Disease Control
2012 Introduction of bivalent RDT Societies (now merged with District Health Societies under
2013 New drug policy 2013. NRHM) have been established to assist the management of
funds and planning, and monitoring of programme activities.
The main activities of the programme are : The laboratories have been decentralized and positioned
1. Formulating policies and guidelines. at the PHCs. The medical officer PHC has the overall
2. Technical guidance. responsibility for surveillance and laboratory services, and
3. Planning. also supervises the spray. Case detection management and
4. Logistics. community outreach services are carried out by MPWs as
5. Monitoring and evaluation. well as ASHAs and other community health volunteers.
6. Coordination of activities through the States/Union DRUG DISTRIBUTION CENTRES AND FEVER
Territories and in consultation with national organizations TREATMENT DEPOTS
such as National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC),
National Institute of Malaria Research (NIMR). With the increasing number of malaria cases, the demand
for antimalarial drugs has increased tremendously. It became
7. Collaboration with international organizations like the
clear that drug supply only through the surveillance workers
WHO, World Bank, GFATM and other donor agencies.
and medical institutions was not enough. This led to the
8. Training. establishment of a wide network of Drug Distribution
9. Facilitating research through NCDC, NIMR, Regional Centres and Fever Treatment Depots and malaria clinics at
Medical Research Centres etc. some sub-centres. Drug Distribution Centres are only to
10. Coordinating control activities in the inter-state and dispense the anti-malarial tablets as per NMEP schedules.
inter-country border areas. Fever Treatment Depots collect the blood slides in addition
to the distribution of antimalarial tablets. These centres are
Organization (2) manned by voluntary workers from the community.
There are 19 Regional Offices for Health and Family
Welfare under Directorate General of Health Services, Ministry URBAN MALARIA SCHEME
of Health and Family Welfare, located in 19 states, which play The urban malaria scheme was launched in 1971 to
a crucial role in monitoring the activities under NVBDCP. reduce or interrupt malaria transmission in towns and cities.
These offices are equipped with malaria trained staff. The methodology comprises vector control by intensive
The state governments are required to plan a:nd implement antilarval measures and drug treatment.
the malaria control operations in their respective states. Every About 7.4 per cent of the total cases of malaria and
state has a Vector Borne Disease Control Division under its 10.9 per cent of deaths due to malaria are reported from
Department of Health and Family Welfare. It is headed by the urban areas. Maximum cases are reported from Chennai,
State Programme Officer (SPO) who is responsible for Vadodara, Vishakhapatnam, Ahmedabad, Kolkata, New
supervision, guidance and effective implementation of the Mumbai, Vijaywada etc. (3). The vector of malaria in the
programme and for coordination of the activities with the urban areas breeds largely in man-made containers
neighbouring States/UTs. States are responsible for the including overhead tanks and underground water storage
procurement of certain insecticides for indoor residual spray tanks, water coolers, cisterns, roof gutters, flower vases,
(IRS), spray equipment and certain anti-malarials, the central bottles and ornamental ponds, old tyres etc., which can
government supplies DDT and larvicides. collect water. Large construction activities provide suitable
breeding sites for the mosqitoes. Influx of migrant labour,
Each state has established a State Vector Borne Disease from malarious zones contribute to increase in incidence.
Control Society, which includes civil society and sometimes Control of urban malaria lies primarily in th~
private sector representation. These are now merged with implementation of civil bye-laws to prevent mosquito
similar entities for other centrally sponsored schemes into a breeding in the domestic and peridomestic areas. Use of
single state-level Health and Family Welfare Society. The larvivorous fish in the water bodies such as slow moving
main role of these societies is to channelize funds from GO! streams, ornamental ponds etc. is recommended. Larvicides
to the states and onwards to districts for financing of the are used for water bodies which are unsuitable for fish
programmes. They also play a role in district level planning use (2). The urban malaria scheme under national vector
and in monitoring of programme activities within districts. disease control programme is presently protecting
At the divisional level, zonal officers have technical and 116 million population from malaria and other mosquito
administrative responsibilities of the programme in their borne diseases in 131 towns in 19 states and Union
areas under the overall supervision of Senior Divisional Territories. The civic bye-laws have been enacted and
Officers (SDOs). implemented in Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata, Chandigarh,
At the district level, the Chief Medical Officer (CMO)/ Bangalore, Chennai, Ahmedabad and Goa etc (3).
District Health Officer (DHO) has the overall responsibility of The Expert Committee on Malaria had recommended the
the programme. At the district level, district malaria offices inclusion of all urban areas With more than 50,000
have been established in many places headed by the DVBDC population and reporting slide positivity rate of 5 per cent
officer to assist the CMO/DHO. This office is the key unit for and above, under Urban Malaria Scheme and introduction
the planning and monitoring of the programme. Spray of active surveillance under this scheme.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
The API wise distribution of the states/UTs in 2011 is For surveillance, the states which are reporting an AP!
given in the Table 1 : of < 1 for three consecutive years shall initiate action for
TABLE 1 declaring malaria as a notifiable disease in the state (2).
API wise distribution of States/UTs in 2011
Malaria control strategies
The strategies for prevention and control of malaria and
itS transmission are :
1. Surveillance and case management
Dadra and Nagar Haveli and
Arunacha!Pradesh. Case detection {passive and active)
· Mizoram, Meghalaya, Oi"issaand - Early diagnosis and complete treatment
Chhattisgarh · - Sentinel surveillance.
3 Jharkhand; Tripura and Andaman & . 2. Integrated vector management (IVM)
Nicobar islands • ·. . . ·.. . . .....
6 Assam, Gujarat, Haryana, Madhya Pradesh, - Indoor residual spray (IRS).
Na~land and Daman and Diu Insecticide treated bed nets (ITNs}/Long Lasting
15 And.hr() Prad~sh, Jammu & Kashmir, Insecticidal Nets (LL!Ns).
Karnataka, Maharashtra, Goa,· Manipl.lr, - Antilarval measures induding source reduction.
Rajasthan,.SikkitTI, Tamil Nadu,
Ottarakhand, J]ttar Pr()desh, West Bengal, 3. Epidemic preparedness and early response
·.· Char1digarh; Lakshadweepand Puducherry 4. Supportive interventions
<0.1.· 5 Biht:i,r,Himachal Pradesh, Kerala:, · - Capacity building
Punjab and Delhi
Behaviour change communication {BCC)
Source: (2) Intersectoral collaboration
- Monitoring and evaluation
Major activities according to API (2)
Operational research and applied field research.
For areas having API less than 1
1. Vector control by minor engineering measures like Surveillance and case management
desilting, · deweeding and cleaning of canals and
Surveillance (2)
irrigation channels, biological control by use of
larvicides and environmental management. · The primary purpose of case management is to shorten
2. Involving PR!s by sensitizing them in rural areas and the duration of illness, prevent the development of severe
municipal bodies in urban areas. disease and death, especially in falciparum malaria.
3. Cooperation from VHSCs and nodal officers from Therefore, case management for malaria is based on early
MNREGA. diagnosis followed immediately by effective treatment. Early
effective treatment is also important for limiting transmission
For areas having API between 1-2 of the disease.
1. Vector control by source reduction and biological The malaria surveillance system in India was initially set
control. up in the early 1960s to detect remaining foci at that time,
2. Active surveillance by ASHA/ANM and positioning of when the country was aiming to eliminate the disease and,
MPW in SCs where there is provision for 2nd ANM. not to measure the burden of the disease. The system has
For areas having API between 2-5 since been adapted to the needs of control and now monitors
malaria incidence trends and geographic distribution. The
1. Vector control by distribution of LLIN if acceptability aim is to target control interventions in high transmission
of IRS is low @ 2 LLIN per household of 5 members. areas and assessing their impact. Surveillance also plays a
2. For areas which can be supervised and accessible, key role in the early detection of outbreaks.
quality IRS for selective vector control based on
epidemiological impact of earlier vector control Active case detection (ACD) is carried out in rural areas
measures, if needed; these areas can also be provided with blood smears collected by MPWs during fortnightly
with LL!Ns. house visits. Passive case detection (PCD) is done in fever
cases reporting to peripheral health volunteers/ASHAs and
For areas having API above 5 at sub-centres, malaria clinic, CHC, and other secondary
a. For areas having perennial transmission {more than and tertiary level health institutions that patients visit for
5 months in a year) treatment. ASHA and other volunteer workers provide
1. 2 rounds of IRS with DDT and 3 rounds with diagnostic services by RDTs, and at PHCs by examination of
malathion. blood smears. In villages where no ASHA or other volunteer
2. Priority distribution of LL!Ns as per the guidelines. has been trained and deployed for providing early diagnosis
3. Vector bionomics studies for future change of and effective treatment, ACD and case management is done
strategy. by the MPWs.
b. For areas having seasonal transmission {less than The surveillance data of NVBDCP reflects malaria trends
5 months in a year) reasonably well because the ABER in the country as a whole
has remained relatively constant at about 10%, and the
1. 1 round of IRS with DDT before start of surveillance system has not undergone any major changes.
transmission. The ABER is, however, low in a few states, while in most of
2. Focal spray whenever and wherever needed. the high endemic areas it is much above 10%. Microscopy
3. Priority distribution of LL!Ns as per the guidelines. remains the best method of diagnosis on account of its high
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
sensitivity and specificity. It is also more economical in insecticide resistance. The measures of vector control and
facilities where large number of slides are examined daily. protection include :
There are about 100 million blood slides collected from - Measures to control adult mosquitoes : Indoor Residual
fever cases in India annually from which about 1.5 million Spray (IRS)
malaria cases are detected. The new norms for case Antilarval measures chemical, biological and
management emphasize quality care for patients. The environmental
implementation of use of Rapid Diagnostic Tests (RDTs) and Personal protection use of bed-nets, including
Artesunate combination therapy (ACT) and the insecticide treated nets.
improvements in service delivery is expected to attract
greater number of fever cases to the programme in the The national malaria control program is currently using
coming years. The programme also plans to supply RDT kits IRS as the primary method of vector control in rural settings,
to private providers in return for data. The current level of and anti-larval measures in the urban areas. Insecticide
screening of 100 million fever cases will not be reduced as it treated bed-nets have been introduced in the programme
is aimed to screen 10% of the population, even though the and the programme envisages a scale up in their use as
disease transmission is expected to reduce. vector control option for full population coverage, which will
replace IRS in areas, where operational factors indicate that
During 2003, the NVBDCP introduced the use of RDT in this method alone will give sufficient impact.
8 states under the World Bank assisted EMCP for early
diagnosis of malaria. In the year 2012, bivalent RDT were High-risk areas and populations (2)
introduced in the programme to detect P uiuax and Micro-stratification has been applied in malaria control
P. fa/ciparum. Since then, the programme has procured and for decades, and will now be applied more rigorously, as
distributed RDTs to community level workers/volunteers who
resources are increasing, making it possible to protect
have been trained to use them to enable timely diagnosis in
maximum number of populations living in high risk areas.
these areas. In remote and inaccessible rural and tribal
areas, RDTs are now the established method of choice for Using local surveillance data and vector control experience,
including the knowledge, habits and attitudes of the local
malaria diagnosis.
community, district VBDC staff will be responsible for
Parameters of malaria surveillance identification and mapping of high risk areas and risk
populations as a basis for planning vector control. The
By definition, surveillance also implies the continuing stratification will be flexible, but firm enough to provide the
scrutiny of all aspects of occurrence and spread of a disease, corner-stone for planning, monitoring and evaluation.
that are pertinent to effective control. Included in these are
the systematic collection and evaluation of field IRS was carried out at the beginning of the NMEP in
investigations, etc. The following parameters are widely used 1958 in all rural areas. However, under the MPO in 1977, it
in the epidemiological surveillance of malaria : a. Annual was decided to cover only high risk rural areas, i.e., those
parasite incidence (AP!); b. Annual blood examination rate areas with API 2 2. The Technical Advisory Committee on
(ABER); c. Annual fa/ciparum incidence (AFI); d. Slide Malaria (2002) further prioritized the criteria for undertaking
positivity rate (SPR); e. Slide fa/ciparum rate (SFR). IRS, which was at that time the only vector control method
recognized for broad application. These criteria are as
Case management follows:
According to the revised drug policy, there is no scope of (1) To spray on priority basis with suitable insecticide all
presumptive treatment in malaria control. The new drug areas with 2 5 API where ABER is 10 per cent or more,
policy of 2013 is being followed in the country. For further taking the sub-centre as a unit.
details please refer to page 262, chapter 5. (2) To spray on priority basis with suitable insecticide all
areas reporting 2 5 per cent SPR (based on passive
Sentinel surveillance collection of blood slides), if the ABER is below 10 per
One of the weakness of the existing malaria surveillance cent.
system is the lack of articulation with hospitals, which means (3) Due priOrity be accorded for spray if Pf proportion is
that severe malaria cases are not reported separately and more than 50 per cent. ·
that only a small fraction of malaria deaths are recorded. (4) To accord priority for IRS in areas with less than API 5 or
Therefore, sentinel surveillance is being established in high SPR<5 per cent in case of drug resistant foci, project
endemic districts, by selecting in each district, depending on areas with population migration and aggregation or
its size, 1-3 sentinel sites in large hospitals for recording of other vulnerable factors including peri-cantonment
all out-patient and in-patient cases of malaria, and malaria areas.
related deaths. (5) To make provision for insecticidal spraying in epidemic
Integrated vector management (IVM) situation.
(6) Other parameters including entomological, ecological
The NVBDCP aims to achieve effective vector control by
the appropriate biological, chemical and environmental etc. may also be considered while prioritizing areas for
interventions of proven efficacy, separately or in spraying.
combination as appropriate to the area through the optimal As much as possible, the village is to be the unit of
use of resources. Efforts are made for collaboration with intervention, but in some districts, data available with
various public and private agencies and community knowledge of ecological conditions may make it more
participation for vector control. Integration of IVM is done rational to classify whole sub-centre areas as high-risk areas.
by using identical vector control methods to control malaria High risk areas and populations will be re-defined at least
and leishmaniasis in rural areas, and malaria and dengue in annually. Such villages shall be protected by indoor residual
urban areas, to achieve cost-effectiveness and synergy. The spray and insecticide treated nets and the coverage will be
IVM includes safe use of insecticides and monitoring of more than 80 per cent, whatever may be the intervention.
MALARIA
The population living in areas with API ~ 5 (69 .1 million) burden in high burden areas will translate to a reduction of
is planned to be covered by LLINs and population living in malaria risk in low burden areas in the country inspite of
endemic areas registering API~2 is covered with continued population movements.
conventional net treated with insecticides and IRS.
Conventional nets treated with insecticides will continue to Behaviour change communication (BCC)
be used in areas registering AP! 2 to 5. IRS is still the BCC is a systematic process that motivates individuals,
preferred method of vector control in areas with very hot families and communities to change their inappropriate or
summers and where ITNs are not acceptable to population. unhealthy behaviour, or to continue a healthy behaviour.
A population of about 80 million is at present being BCC is a key supportive strategy for malaria prevention and
covered by IRS in the country. DDT is the insecticide of treatment under NVBDCP.
choice; in areas where the vector has shown resistance to BCC is directed at : (a) early recognition of signs and
DDT, the alternatives are malathion and synthetic symptoms of malaria; (b) early treatment seeking from
pyrethroids. Two rounds of spraying are done for DDT and appropriate provider; (c) adherence to treatment regimens;
synthetic pyrethroids to provide protection during the entire (d) ensuring protection of children and pregnant women;
transmission season, and in the case of malathion, three (e) use of ITNs/LLINs; (f) acceptance of IRS, etc.
rounds of spraying are required. About 60 per cent of the
high risk areas targeted under IRS are under coverage with Anti-malaria month campaign
DDT. The real coverage by IRS is, however, limited by the Anti-malaria month is observed every year in the month
low community acceptance due to the white marks left on of June throughout the country, prior to the onset of
plastered surface, acrid smell associated with malathion, re- monsoon and transmission season, to enhance the level of
plastering of walls after completion of IRS etc. awareness and encourage community participation through
mass media campaign and inter-personal communication
Malaria paradigms/ecotypes (2) and consolidate inter-sectoral collaborative efforts with
The association between malaria and various ecological other government departments, corporate and voluntary
situations have been studied in India since the early part of agencies at national, state and district levels.
the 20th century. There is considerable heterogenicity in
malaria transmission characteristics between and within the Interaction of malaria control with other health
states of the country, and many ecotypes/paradigms of programmes
malaria have been recognized. They are discussed in detail The other main public health programmes related to
on page 256 chapter 5. The vector control recommendations malaria control are :
according to the classification, when ITNs have emerged as a
vector control option are as shown in Table 2. (1) Integrated Disease Surveillance Project (IDSP) : The
project, with weekly fever alerts is increasingly providing
Presently, malaria burden in the country is highly the early warning signals on malaria outbreaks.
concentrated in a few forest-tribal states and areas. In most
of these states, vector control interventions are limited to (2) Other vector borne diseases: Dengue and malaria control
villages with API ~ 5 or other high risk criteria, due to activities overlap in many urban areas, malaria and kala-
resource constraints. The North-East has specific difficulties azar in a few districts of Jharkhand, and malaria and
in implementation and monitoring due to various reasons, filariasis in some areas including a few districts of Odisha.
including difficulty of terrain and exophily of vector (3) Reproductive and child health : Antenatal care services
An. dirus. It is also possible that reductions in malaria are utilized in distribtuion of LLINs to pregnant women
TABLE 2
Malaria ecotypes/paradigms in India and recommended vector control measures
Ecotype/paradigm Main r~commended measures
Tribal areas with malaria associated.with forest environment
(all 7 NE states, Orissa, Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, foci in other states)
in some areas of the country. Janani Suraksha Yojana (ii)The World Bank supported project on malaria
also makes provision of bed-nets distribution to pregnant control and kala-azar elimination : This project was
women. Changes in the malaria case management approved for 5 years effective from March 2009 to
norms have been included in the Integrated December 2013. The total financial outlay for this project
Management of Neonatal and Childhood Illness. is Rs. 1000 crores. This project was initiated in 93
malarious districts of eight states, namely Andhra Pradesh,
The major externally supported projects (1) Chhattisgarh, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh,
Additional support for combating malaria is provided Maharashtra, Orissa & Karnataka and 46 kala-azar
through external assistance in high malaria risk areas. There districts in three states namely Bihar, Jharkhand and West
are two such externally funded projects which are currently Bengal. The project is being implemented in two phases.
being implemented for malaria control : Phase-I covered 50 most malaria endemic districts in five
(i) Global Fund supported Intensified Malaria Control states, namely Andhra Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Madhya
Project (IMCP II). Pradesh, Orissa and Jharkhand, and 46 kala-azar districts
(ii) World Bank supported project on Malaria Control & in Bihar, Jharkhand & West Bengal. From 3rd year,
Kala-azar Elimination. Phase-II is being implemented in remaining (43) malaria
districts. Additional 31 high endemic districts from three
The areas covered under these projects are as under : states namely Jharkhand, Orissa and West Bengal have
(i) The Global Fund supported Intensified Malaria been included in Phase-II for malaria control making a
Control Project II (IMCP II) : Global Fund Round 9 total of 124 districts to be supported for malaria control
supported IMCP II is being implemented since October and kala-azar elimination under the World Bank project.
2010 for a period of five years in 7 North East states.
Additional supports provided in this project are :
The project area covers a population of 46 million in
86 districts. The strategy of the project are early a. Provision of human resource like consultants and
diagnosis and complete treatment, integrated vector support staff at national, state, district and sub-district
control including promotion of !TN (LLINs). level for surveillance and monitoring;
Additional support provided in project area is as follows : b. Promotion and use of long lasting insecticide nets
(LLINs) in high malaria endemic areas;
a. Human resource such as consultants and support staff
for project monitoring units at state and district level c. Strong BCC/IEC activities at sub-district level; and
and malaria technical supervisor and laboratory d. Supply of rapid kits for malaria diagnosis and drug
technicians at sub-district level; Artesunate Combination Therapy for treatment of
b. Capacity building of Medical Officer/Lab. P. f alciparum cases.
Technicians/Fever Treatment Depots/volunteers etc.; - At least 80 per cent of those suffering from malaria get
c. Commodities such as long-lasting insecticidal ~ets correct, affordable and appropriate treatment within
(LLINs), rapid diagnostic tests for quick diagnosis of 24 hours of reporting to the health system, by the year 2012.
malaria, alternate drugs (Artesunsate Combination At least 80 per cent of those at high risk of malaria get
Therapy, inj. Arteether) for treating severe malaria protected by effective preventive measures such as ITNs/
cases; and LLINs or IRS by 2012.
d. Planning and administration including mobility support, An overview of actions with tentative targets for burden
monitoring, evaluation and operational research (studies reduction of malaria in different areas of the country for the
on drug resistance and entomological aspects). period upto 2017 are as shown in Table 3.
TABLE 3
Overview of National Malaria Control Strategy 2012-2017
t~tates.()f odi~ha, c:hnattisg~rh ·.• lJrban malada . Rurnl l"llalaria ......··
North-East Jharkhand, W.Bengal • scheme · (not forest related)
. Madhya Pradesh .···.
12th Five Year Plan period (2012-2017)
IITN coverage Upto 90% Upto 90% Strong Inter- Differentiated
(mainly LL!Ns) (mainly LL!Ns) sectoral vector control
I IRS coverage Down to 20% Down to20% collaboration coverage towards
RDT+ACT Upto80% Upto 90% for greater, more 90%. Down-
Innovative Defined high- effective coverage. classification of
vector control risk areas, Operations gradually 50% of populations
and case Annual/biannual transferred to to low risk, not
management mass vaccination municipality needing vector
delivery with RTS-S responsibility control
R&D Vector bionomics, Vector bionomics, Impact & coverage Continued New treatments
resistance resistance assessments operational research against P. v. liver
operational research with increasing focus stage
to enhance efficiency on larval control
2017 cases <30% <25% <20% <30% <30%
as percentage
of cases
in 2002
Source: (2)
ELIMINATION OF LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS
(B) ELIMINATION OF LYMPHATIC FILARIASIS maintain hygiene for prevention of secondary bacterial and
fungal infection in chronic lymphoedema cases, so that the
The disease is endemic in 250 districts in 20 states and patients get relief from frequent acute attacks.
UTs. According to recent estimates about 600 million people
are exposed to the risk of infection (1). The microfilaria survey in all the implementation units is
being done through night blood survey before MDA. The
The National Filaria Control Programme has been in survey is done in 4 sentinel and 4 random sites collecting
operation since 1955. In June 1978, the operational total 4000 slides (500 from each site). There is definite
component of the NFCP was merged with the urban malaria evidence of microfilaria reduction in the MDA districts.
scheme for maximum utilization of available resources. The However, the coverage of population with MDA should be
training and research components, however, continue to be . above 80 per cent persistently for 5-6 years, which would
with the Director, National Institute of Communicable reduce microfilaria load in the community, and thereby,
Diseases, Delhi. interrupt the transmission (3).
Training in filariology is being given at three Regional
Filaria Training and Research Centres situated at Calicut (C) KALA-AZAR
(Kerala), Rajahamundry (A.P.) and Varanasi (U.P.) under the
National Institute of Communicable Diseases, Delhi. Kala-azar is now endemic in 31 districts of Bihar,
Besides, 12 headquarters bureaux are functioning at the 4 districts of Jharkhand, 11 districts of West Bengal and
state level. 6 districts of Uttar Pradesh, besides sporadic cases in few
other districts of Uttar Pradesh. A centrally sponsored
Filaria control strategy includes vector control through programme was launched in 1990-91. This has brought
anti larval operations, source reduction, detection and down the incidence of the disease from 77,102 cases in
treatment of microfilaria carriers, morbidity management 1992 to 13,869 cases in 2013 (1).
and !EC. National Filaria Control Programme is being
implemented through 206 filaria control units, 199 filaria The strategies for Kala-azar elmination are : (a) Enhanced
clinics and 27 survey units, primarily in endemic urban case detection and complete treatment including
towns. In rural areas anti filaria medicines and morbidity introduction of PK39 rapid diagnostic kits and oral drug
management services are provided through primary health Miltefosine for treatment of Kala-azar cases; (b) Interruption
care system. of transmission through vector control. It has been decided
to replace DDT with synthetic pyrethroid for the purpose of
In India, the National Health Policy (2002), envisages fogging to eliminate sandfly, as the insect is becoming
elimination of lymphatic filariasis (ELF) by 2015. The resistant to DDT; (c) Communication for behavioural impact
elimination is defined as "lymphatic filariasis ceases to be and intersectoral convergence; (d) Capacity building;
public health problem, when the number of microfilaria (e) Monitoring, supervision and evaluation; (f) Research
carriers is less than 1 per cent and the children born after guidelines on prevention and control of Kala-azar have been
initiation of ELF are free from circulating antigenaemia developed and circulated to the states.
(presence of adult filaria worm in human body).
ACTIVE CASE SEARCH : The frequency of case searches
The strategy of lymphatic filariasis elimination is through : has been increased from a single annual case search to
(a) Annual Mass Drug Administration (MDA) of single dose quarterly case searches. The active case searches are c.arried
of antifilarial drug for 5 years or more to the eligible out during a fortnight designated as the "Kala-azar
population (except pregnant women, children below Fortnight", during which the peripheral health workers and
2 years of age and seriously ill persons) to interrupt volunteers are engaged to make door-to-door search and
transmission of the disease. refer the cases conforming to the case definition of kala-azar
(b) Home based management of lymph oedema cases and and PKDL to the treatment centres for definitive diagnosis
up-scaling of hydrocele operations in identified CHCs/ and treatment (3).
district hospitals/medical colleges. An incentive amount of Rs. 300 is provided to ASHA for
To achieve elimination of lymphatic filariasis, during identifying each case of kala-azar and Rs. 100 for ensuring
2004 the Govt. of India launched annual MDA with single community support during insecticide spraying. Even the
dose of DEC tablets in addition to scaling-up home based patient being treated in the hospital will be given Rs. 500 as
foot care and hydrocele operation. The co-administration of compensation of daily wage for the time he spends in the
DEC + Albendazole has been upscaled since 2007. The hospital during the treatment. This revised strategy of total
programme covered 202 districts in 2004 whereas by the eradication of kala-azar was launched on 2nd September
year 2007, all the 250 LF endemic districts were covered. 2014.
The mass drug administration starts in the month of The new strategy also includes introduction of Rapid
November and the coverage has improved from 72.4 per Diagnostic Kit developed by ICMR into the programme and
cent in the year 2004 to 87.5 per cent in 2012. single dose treatment with Liposomal Amphoterecin B,
During the year 2012, two districts of Goa, Puducherry, which is given intravenously in 10 mg dose. It is to reduce
Daman & Diu and 16 districts of Tamil Nadu stopped MDA the human reservoir of infection. WHO will supply the drug
as validation process was initiated through Transmission free of cost (4).
Assessment Survey (1).
(D) JAPANESE ENCEPHALITIS
The line listing of lymphoedema and hydrocele cases
were initiated since 2004 by door-to-door survey in filaria Japanese encephalitis is a disease with high mortality rate
endemic districts. The updated figure till December 2012 and those who survive do so with various degrees of
reveals about 12 lac cases with clinical manifestation of neurological complications. During the last few years it has
lymphoedema (8 lacs) and hydrocele (4 lacs). Initiation has become a major public health problem. States of Andhra
also been taken to demonstrate the simple washing of foot to Pradesh, West Bengal, Assam, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka,
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
Bihar, Maharashtra, Manipur, Haryana, Kerala and Uttar For early diagnosis ELISA based NSI kits have been
Pradesh are reporting maximum number of cases. introduced under the programme which can detect the cases
The strategies for prevention and control of Japanese from .1st day of infection. lgM capture ELISA tests can detect
encephalitis include strengthening of the surveillance the cases after 5th day of infection.
activities through sentinel sites in tertiary health care The GOI has taken the following steps for prevention and
institutions, early diagnosis and proper case management, control of dengue (6) :
integrated vector control, particularly personal protection - Monitoring the situation through reports received from
and use of larvivorous fishes, capacity building and state health authorities.
behaviour change communication. As the JE vectors are
outdoor resters, indoor residual spray is not effective. The A mid-term plan for prevention and control of dengue
government of India provides need-based assistance to the has been developed in 2011 and circulated to the states
states, including support for training programmes and social for implementation. The main components of mid term
mobilization. plan for prevention and control of dengue are as follows :
As there is no specific cure for this disease, early case (a) Surveillance: Disease and entomological surveillance
management is very important to minimize the risk of (b) Case mangement : Laboratory diagnosis and clinical
complications and death. JE vaccination is recommended management
for children between 1 to 15 years of age. In addition, health (c) Vector management : Environmental management
education through different media and interpersonal for source reduction, chemical control, personal
communication for the community is crucial. Emphasis protection and legislation
should be given on keeping pigs away from human (d) Outbreak response : Epidemic preparedness and
dwellings, or in pigsties, particularly during dusk to dawn, media management
which is the biting time of vector mosquitoes. Use of clothes
which cover the body fully to avoid mosquito bites are (e) Capacity building : Training, strengthening human
advocated. Use of bed-nets is also very important resource and operational research
precaution. Since early reporting of case is important to (f) Behavioural change communication Social
avoid complications, the community should be given full mobilization, and information, education and
information about the signs and symptoms of the disease, communication (IEC)
and the health facilities available at health centres/hospitals. (g) Inter-sectoral coordination : with ministries of urban
The states are advised to use malathion for outdoor fogging development, rural development, panchayati raj,
as outbreak control measure in the affected areas (5). surface transport and education sector
Epidemiological monitoring of the disease for effective
implementation of preventive and control measure and (h) Monitoring and supervision : Analysis of reports,
technical support is provided on request by the state health review, field visit and feed-back
authorities.
(F) CHIKUNGUNYA FEVER
(E) DENGUE FEVER/
DENGUE HAEMORRHAGIC FEVER Chikungunya fever is a debilitating non-fatal viral illness,
re-emerging in the country after a gap of three decades.
During 1996, an outbreak of dengue was reported in Govt. of India is continuously monitoring the situation.
Delhi. Since then dengue has been reported from other Guidelines for prevention and control of the disease have
states also. In view of this major outbreak of the disease a been prepared. Since same vector is involved in the
"Guideline of Preparation of Contingency Plan in case of transmission of dengue and chikungunya, strategies for
outbreak/epidemic of Dengue/Dengue haemorrhagic fever" transmission risk reduction by vector control are also the
was prepared and sent to all the states. It includes all the same. Support in the form of logistics and funds are
important aspects of control measures like identification of provided to the states.
outbreak, demarcation of affected area, containment of For carrying out proactive surveillance and enhancing
outbreak, case management, vector control, IEC activities diagnostic facilities for chikungunya, t@e 137 sentinel
about Do's and Don't's for prevention of dengue, monitoring surveillance hospitals involved in dengue in the affected
and reporting etc. states also carry out chikungunya tests. The diagnostic kits
Since early reporting of cases is crucial to avoid any are provided through National Institute of Virology, Pune, by
complication and mortality, the community is given full the central government.
information about the signs and symptoms as well as
availability of health services at health centres/hospitals. NATIONAL LEPROSY "ERADICATION"
Alerting the hospitals for making adequate arrangements for PROGRAMME
management of dengue/dengue haemorrhagic fever cases
has also been advised. The National Leprosy Control Programme (NLCP) has
Government of India in consultation with states has been in operation since 1955, as a centrally aided
identified 311 sentinel surveillance hospitals with laboratory programme to achieve control of leprosy through early
support for augmentation of diagnostic facilities in the detection of cases and DDS (dapsone) monotherapy on an
endemic states. Further, for advanced diagnosis and back-up ambulatory basis. The NLCP moved ahead initially at a slow
support 14 Apex Referral Laboratories have been identified pace, presumably for want of clear-cut policies or
and linked with sentinel surveillance hospitals. To make these operational objectives for nearly two decades (7). The
functional lgM capture ELISA test kits are provided through programme gained momentum during the Fourth Five Year
National Institute of Virology, Pune free of cost. Contingency Plan after it was made a centrally-sponsored programme. In
grant is also provided to meet the operational costs. 1980 the Government of India declared its res(')lve to
NATIONAL LEPROSY "ERADICATION" PROGRAMME
"eradicate" leprosy by the year 2000 and constituted a (b) Micro-cellular rubber footwear is provided for
Working Group to advise accordingly. The Working Group protection of insensitive feet. 41 NGOs in the country
submitted its report in 1982 and recommended a revised and 42 Government Medical Colleges have been
strategy based on multi-drug chemotherapy aimed at leprosy strengthened for providing reconstructive surgery
"eradication" through reduction in the quantum of infection services to leprosy affected persons for correction of
in the population, reduction in the sources of infection, and their disability, thus totalling to 83 centres for
breaking the chain of transmission of disease. In 1983 the conducting reconstructive surgeries in the country.
control programme was redesignated National Leprosy (c) An amount of Rs. 5000/- is provided as incentive to
"Eradication" Programme with the goal of eradicating the each leprosy affected person from BPL family
disease by the turn of the century. The aim was to reduce undergoing reconstructive surgery in these identified
case load to 1 or less than 1 per 10,000 population. institutions to compensate for loss of wages.
To strengthen the process of elimination of leprosy in the (d) Support is also provided to government institutions/
country, the first World Bank supported project was PMR centres in the form of Rs 5000/- per
introduced in 1993. On completion of this project, the 2nd reconstructive surgery conducted.
phase of project with World Bank support was started in (4) ASHAs have been involved in bringing out suspected
2001-02 which ended in December 2004. Since then, the leprosy cases from their villages for diagnosis and
programme is being continued with Government of India treatment at PHC and follow-up of confirmed cases for
funds with technical support from WHO and International their treatment completion. To facilitate the involvement
Federation of Anti-Leprosy Association (ILEP) of ASHA in the programme, they are being paid
organizations. The programme has been integrated with incentive money as below :
general health care system in 2002-03, since then leprosy (a) On confirmed diagnosis of case brought by them -
diagnosis and treatment services are available at all PHCs Rs. 100/-
and government hospitals.
(b) On completion of full course of treatment of the case
The components of the programme are as follows : within specified time - PB leprosy case - Rs 200/-,
(1) Decentralized integrated leprosy services through and MB leprosy case Rs 400/-.
general health care system; (5) There are 612 self settled colonies in the country where
(2) Capacity building of all general health services more than 50,000 leprosy affected persons reside. Free
functionaries; medical facilities like care of ulcers, self care training,
(3) Intensified information, education and communication; counselling and MCR footwear are provided to leprosy
(4) Prevention of disability and medical rehabilitation; and affected persons residing in these colonies through para-
(5) Intensified monitoring and supervision. medical workers/NGOs on weekly/fortnightly basis.
After introduction of MDT, the recorded case load of (6) Intensive !EC campaign with a theme "Towards Leprosy
leprosy came down from 57.6 cases per 10,000 population Free India" has been carried out towards further
in 1981 to less than one at the national level in December reduction of leprosy burden in the community, early
2005, and the country could achieve the goal of leprosy reporting of cases and their treatment completion,
provision of quality leprosy services and reduction of
elimination at national level as set by the National Health
stigma and discrimination against leprosy affected
Policy (2002). 33 states/UTs achieved the status of leprosy
persons. Awareness generation activities are carried out
elimination. Only 2 States/UTs viz. Chattisgarh and Dadra &
through mass media and local media.
Nagar Haveli are yet to achieve elimination (1).
A total of 209 high endemic districts were identified for Urban leprosy control programme
special action during 2012-13. 1792 blocks and 150 urban The urban leprosy control programme was initiated in
areas were identified for special activities, i.e., house to 2005 to address the complex problem of larger population
house survey along with IEC and capacity building of the size, migration, poor health infrastructure and increasing
workers and volunteers (1). leprosy cases in urban areas.
Major initiatives Under this component, assistance is provided to urban
areas having population size of more than 1 lakh. For the
Major initiatives taken are as follows : purpose of providing graded assistance, the urban areas are
(1) More focus has now been given to new case detection grouped in four categories i.e. Township I, Medium Cities I,
than prevalence which only gives the number of cases on Medium Cities II, and Mega Cities (3).
record at a point in time. The new case detection rate is
the main indicator for programme monitoring. Disability prevention and medical rehabilitation
(2) Treatment completion rate has been taken as an (DPMR)
important indicator, to be calculated by states at yearly The main activities carried out under DPMR are as
basis. · follows (8) :
(3) More emphasis is being given on providing disability (1) Implementation of DPMR activities as per guidelines and
prevention and medical rehabilitation (DPMR) services to reporting its outcome eg. treatment of leprosy reaction,
leprosy affected persons. The aid provided is as follows : ulcers, physiotherapy, reconstructive surgery and
(a) Dressing materials, supportive medicines and ulcer providing MCR footwear.
kits are provided to leprosy affected ,persons with (2) Integrating DPMR services - There are provision of
ulcers and wounds. These services are also provided services to persons with disability by various
to leprosy affected persons residing in self settled departments under different ministries. Convergence of
colonies. NLEP services into NRHM facilitates this integration.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
(3) To develop a referral system to provide prevention of (3) All National Institutes under Ministry of Social Justice
disability services to all leprosy disabled persons in an and Empowerment.
integrated set-up. (4) Contractual surgeons skilled in RCS a'nd Rehabilitation
The DPMR activities are planned to be carried out in a Programmes.
three tier system i.e. the primary level care (First level), The referral system in NLEP is as shown in Fig. 1.
secondary level care (Second level) and the tertiary level Decentralization and institutional development
care (Third level). The primary level care institutions are all Integration of leprosy services into the general health care
PHCs, CHCs, Sub-divisional hospitals and urban leprosy system has been completed. Services are available from all
centres/dispensaries. The secondary level care institutions PHCs, and other health centres where a medical officer is
are all District Head Quarter Hospitals and District Nucleus available. District nucleus has been formed to supervise and
Units. The tertiary level care institutions are : monitor the programme. State leprosy societies formed will
1. Central Government Institutes (CLTRI Chingalpettu and merge with the state health society under the National Rural
RLTRI at Aska/Gauripur/Raipur) Health Mission.
2. ICMR Institute JALMA, Agra.
3. ILEP supported Leprosy Hospitals. Programme Implementation Plan for 12th Plan
Period (2012-13 to 2016-17)
4. All PMR Institutes and departments of medical colleges.
As the disease is still prevalent with moderate endemicity
The other support units are : in about 15 per cent of the country, the plan objectives are
(1) Orthopaedics and plastic surgery departments of medical set as follows (9).
colleges. a. Elimination of leprosy i.e. prevalence of less than 1 case
(2) Identified NGO institutions. per 10,000 population in all districts of the country.
Implementation
Self care advice Referral
Sub-Centre : -----.1 - Reaction
Advise to RCS cases
- Monitoring - · Disability
Referral
Implementation
- Lepra react.ions difficult to manage
Manage.reactions (if possible) or refer
- Complicated ulcer
- Identify or refer patient needing RCS
PHC : _ _ ___., - Identify patient needing .foot-wear Eye problems
- Reconstructive surgery.cases .
Advise to reconstructive surgery cases
- Persons needing foot~wear
- Advise to self care
.Follow-up of RCS, leprareaction ·
Implementation Referral
- Managemenfof - Refer difficult
District Hospital : ___________ , complicated ulcers ulcer cases to
- Management of .reconstructive
lepra reactions surgery centre
Implementation Referral
- Management of - Referralfor
District Nucleus : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t - - - - - . i lepra reactions reconstructive
- Supply of surgeries/
foot-wear follow-up of RCS
Implementation
Reconstructive surgery centre - Reconstructive surgery
- Implementation --------------- Follow-up after reconstructive surgery .
Referral - Supply of foot-wear to district. nucleus
FIG. 1
Referral system in NLEP
Source: (8)
NATIONAL LEPROSY "ERADICATION" PROGRAMME
b. Strengthen disability prevention and medical (ii} To involve women including leprosy affected persons in
rehabilitation of persons affected by leprosy. case detection.
c. Reduction in the level of stigma associated with leprosy. (iii} To organize skin camps for detecting leprosy patients
while providing services for other skin conditions.
Targets (9)
(iv} To undertake contact survey to identify the source in the
The plan targets are as shown in Table 4. neighbourhood of each child or multibacillary case.
TABLE 4 (v} To increase awareness through the ANM, AWW, ASHA
Targets for the plan period 2012-13 to 2016-17 and other health workers visiting the villages and people
affected by leprosy, to motivate leprosy affected persons
Indicator Baseline , Ti:\rg_Efts . . •.· for early reporting to the medical officer.
{2011~12) (by March 2017)
Integrated leprosy services through all the primary health
Prevalence Rate (PR) 543 districts 642 districts care facilities will continue to be provided in the rural areas.
< 1/10,000 (84.6%) (100%)
However, for providing technical support to the primary
Annual New Case Detection 445 districts 642 distriets health care system, to stengthen the quality of services being
Rate (ANCDR) <10/100,000 .(69.3%) (100%) provided, a team of dedicated workers including medical
population
officer and para-medical workers are placed at district level.
Cure rate multi bacillary 90.56% >953 This will be known as "District Leprosy Cell".
leprosy cases (MB)
Cure rate pauci bacillary . 95.28% >97% Services in the urban areas (9)
leprosy cases (PB)
3.04% * 35% reduction
The health services in the urban areas differ from the
Gr.II disability rate in
percentage of new cases 1.98% rural areas because of non-availability of infrastructure like
PHC and manpower for providing services upto domicilliary
Stigma reduction Percentage 50% reduction
reported over the level. The services in urban areas are provided mainly
(NSS 2010-11)** percentage through institutional level. Multiple organizations provide
reported by NSS health services in urban localities without much of
coordination amongst them.
* Gr-11 disability rate among new cases per million population to
be reduced by 35% i.e. from 3 (2011-12) to 2 per million More number of cases are detected in urban localities due
population by end of the 12th Plan. to migration of· people, availability of good quality
** Based on the National Sample Survey (NSS) report, 2010-11. institutions with easy accessibility, but treatment completion
rate is less as compared to rural areas.
Programme strategy (9)
For the implementation of special action under the plan,
To achieve the objectives of the plan, the main strategies about 524 urban localities have been identified out of 4,388
to be followed are : urban areas (census 2011). These localities are having
Integrated leprosy services through general health care population more than 100,000. Remaining areas will be
system. covered by PHC services as in rural areas (9). These urban
Early detection and complete treatment of new leprosy areas are divided into 4 categories : (a} Town and city
cases. (population 1 lac to 5 lacs} 432 areas; (b} Medium city
(population >5 lac to 1 million) 53 areas; (c} Mega city
- Carrying out house-hold contact survey for early (population > 1 million to 4.5 million) - 34 areas; and
detection of cases.
(d) Areas with >4.5 million population - 5 areas.
Involvement of Accredited Social Health Activist (ASHA)
Additional activities In urban areas : Component wise
in the detection and completion of treatment of leprosy
cases on time. activities under NLEP will be carried out in the urban areas
as in the case of rural areas. Thus training, IEC, procurement
- Strengthening of disability prevention and medical and supply of MDT and other required medicines, MCR
rehabilitation (DPMR} services. footwear, aids and appliances, payments of incentive for
- Information, Education & Communication (IEC} RCS etc. will be covered under regular provision. However,
activities in the community to improve self-reporting to it is necessary to carry out following additional activities,
Primary Health Centre (PHC} and reduction of stigma. which are specific to the needs of the urban population :
- Intensive monitoring and supervision at block primary 1. Identify human resources available with Government,
health centre/community health centre. civil societies, NGOs and private medical practitioners
Case detection and management (9) for leprosy services like suspect and referral. Population
groups may be allocated to each human resource, and
It is expected that the new cases will continue to occur for follow-up of the cases.
regularly but the people are still hesitant to come forward to
get themselves diagnosed and treated due to the stigma 2. Build capacity of the identified human resources at the
associated with the disease. Detection of the new cases at time of induction and periodically.
the early stage is the only solution to cut down the 3. Examination of all household contacts of all new cases at
transmission potential in the community, and also to provide least once before the completion of treatment of index
relief to the leprosy affected persons by preventing case.
disabilities. It is therefore suggested that the states will draw 4. Identify one referral centre in each urban location for
up innovative plans : diagnosis and to manage leprosy with or without
(i) To improve access to services. complications.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
5. Supervision and monitoring of the programme is the mangagement, self-care practices, prov1s1on of MCR
responsibility of the district leprosy officer, and medical footwear, aids and appliances, referral services at district
officer of the referral centre. hospital· and medical college/central leprosy institutions/
6. Mobile health clinics of general health services include NGO institutions, and reconstructive surgery.
leprosy services on their visit to slums, peri-urban
villages and migrant agglomerations. Incentive to patient (9)
7. Develop a system of record keeping and reporting by An incentive of Rs. 8000/- will be paid to all patients
each participating centre. affected by leprosy undergoing major reconstructive surgery
8. Develop a system of regular MDT supply to each health irrespective of their financial status. The payment will be
centre. made by the district leprosy officer. As on January 2013,
9. Procure additional requirement of drugs, dressing there were 94 recognized RCS centres in the country.
material, aids and appliances for inhabitants of leprosy
colony requiring regular care for their disabilities. Information, education and communication
10. Organize sensitization meetings for IEC and advocacy, (IEC/BCC)
participate in exhibitions, quiz competition for awareness The !EC strategy during the 12th plan period will focus
to reduce stigma. on communication for behavioural changes in general
Out of. these 524 urban areas, 150 areas reported public against the stigma and discrimination against the
ANCDR of > 10 per lac population during the year 2011- leprosy affected persons. Making the public aware about the
12. As in case of rural blocks, these urban areas will also be availability of MDT, correction of deformity through surgery
provided with one para-medical worker on contractual basis and that the leprosy affected person can live a normal life
for monitoring the leprosy services in the area. with the family (9).
Research into the basic problems of leprosy is also part of
ASHA involvement (9) the activities of the NLEP. This is mainly carried out in the
Accredited Social Health Activists (ASHA) will be Government sector, viz. the Central JALMA Institute of
involved to bring out suspected cases from their villages for Leprosy at Agra and the Central Leprosy Teaching and
diagnosis at PHC and after confirmation of diagnosis, will Training Institute at Chingelput, Chennai supported by
follow up the patients for completion of treatment. Her Regional Training and Referral Institutes at Aska (Orissa),
duties will be monitored by the concerned PHC medical Raipur (Chhattisgarh) and Gouripur (West Bengal).
officer. She will be entitled to receive incentive as below : ILEP Agencies
(i) At confirmation of - Rs. 250/-
The International Federation of Anti-Leprosy
diagnosis
Associations is actively involved as partner in NLEP. In
{ii) On completion of full PB-additional Rs.400/- India, ILEP is constituted by 10 agencies viz. The Leprosy
course of treatment in time MB-additional Rs.600/- Mission, Damien Foundation of India Trust, Netherland
Activities to be performed by ASHA are as follows : Leprosy Relief, German Leprosy Relief Association, Lepra
1. Search for suspected cases of leprosy i.e. before any India, ALES, AIFO, Fontilles-India, AERF-India and
sign of disability appears. Such early detection will American Leprosy Mission. ILEP is providing support in the
help in prevention of disability and also cut down form of planning, monitoring and supervision of the
transmission potential. programme, capacity building of general health care staff,
IEC, providing re-constructive surgery services and socio-
2. Follow-up all cases for completion of treatment in economic rehabilitation of persons affected with leprosy.
scheduled time. During follow up visit, also look for 36 NGOs conducting re-constructive surgeries for disability
symptoms of any reaction due to leprosy and refer correction in leprosy affected persons are also supported by
them to the Health Workers/PHC for treatment. This ILEP (1). .
will again reduce chances of disability occurring in
cases under treatment. Non Government Organizations have been involved in
the programme for many decades and have provided
3. Advise and motivate self-care practices by disabled valuable contribution in reducing the burden of leprosy.
cases for proper care of their hands and feet during Presently, 43 NGOs are getting grant-in-aid from
the follow-up period. This will improve quality of life Government of India under SET scheme. NGOs serve in
of the affected persons and prevent deteriOration of remote, inaccessible areas, urban slums, industrial/labour
disabilities. population and other marginalized population groups. IEC,
4. Spreading awareness. prevention of disability, case detection and referral, and
follow-up for treatment completion are some important
SET scheme activities taken up by NGOs (1).
Under the SET scheme, the NGOs are presently involved The leprosy scene in India is passing through an
in disability prevention and ulcer care, IEC, referral of important phase of transition from a high burden country
suspected cases, referral for reconstruction surgery {RCS), of leprosy to a relatively low burden country, from a partially
research and rehabilitation. NGO support is mainly required vertical programme to a more integrated one, from a
for follow-up of under treatment cases in urban locations · programme aimed at increase in coverage for leprosy
and difficult to reach areas. services to one of sustaining quality services, and from
centralization to decentralization (10).
Disability prevention and medical rehabilitation
Recently WHO has announced "enhanced global
(DPMR) strategy" for further reducing the disease burden due to
The services under DPMR will cover reaction leprosy (2011-2015). Please refer to page 315 for details.
REVISED NATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS CONTROL PROGRAMME
diagnosis of tuberculosis and MDT-TB in high risk senior TB laboratory supervisor rechecks all the positive
population like HIV positive and paediatric groups (12). slides and 10 per cent of the negative slides of these five
microscopy centres. Thus the error in diagnosing a patient is
2. Nikshay: TB surveillance using case based web minimized. It is essential to examine 2 sputum specimens of
based IT system (12) each patient before a conclusive diagnosis can be made.
Central TB Division in collaboration with National One sputum sample is not sufficient for diagnosis as the
Informatics Centre has undertaken the initiative to develop a chance of detecting smear positive case is only 80 per cent.
case based web based application named Nikshay. Sputum microscopy not only confirms the diagnosis, but
also indicates the degree of infectivity and response to
This software was launched in May 2012 and has treatment. Fig. 3 shows the criteria of diagnosis and
following functional components. initiation of treatment.
Master management All patients are provided short-course chemotherapy free
User details of charge. During the intensive phase of chemotherapy all
- TB Patient registration and details of diagnosis, DOT the drugs are administered under direct supervision called
provider, HIV status, follow-up, contact tracing, Direct Observed Therapy Short-term (DOTS). DOTS is a
outcomes. community based tuberculosis treatment and care strategy
which combines the benefits of supervised treatment, and
Details of solid and liquid culture and DST, LPA, the benefits of community based care and support. It
CBNMT details. ensures high cure rates through its three components:
DR-TB patient registration with details. appropriate medical treatment, supervision and motivation
Referral and transfer of patients. by a health or non-health worker, and monitoring of disease
status by the health services. DOTS is given by peripheral
- Private health facility registration and TB notification. health staff such as MPWs, or through voluntary workers
Mobile application for TB notification. such as teachers, anganwadi workers, dais, ex-patients,
SMS alerts to patients on registration. social workers etc. They are known as DOT 'Agent' and paid
incentive/honorarium of Rs 150 per patient completing the
SMS alerts to programme officers. treatment.
- Automated periodic reports
a. Case finding
Cough for 2 Weeks or more
b. Sputum conversion
c. Treatment outcome.
2 Sputum smears
3. TB Notification
In order to ensure proper diagnosis and management of
TB cases, and to reduce TB transmission and the emergence
and spread of MDR-TB, it is essential to have complete 1 or 2 Positives
information of all TB cases. According to the Government of
India notification dated 7th May 2012, it is now mandatory
for all healthcare providers to notify every TB case to local
authorities i.e. District Health Officer/Chief Medical Officer
of a district and Municipal health officer, every month in a
given format (14).
At present, 57,000 health facilities have been registered
and 35,000 patients have been notified (1).
1 or 2 Positive
4. Ban on TB Serology
The serological tests are based on antibody response,
which is. highly variable in TB and may reflect remote
infection rather than active disease. Currently available
serological tests are having poor specificity and should not ·
be used for the diagnosis of pulmonary or extra-pulmonary X-ray
TB. Their import, manufacturing, sale, distribution and use
is banned by the Government of India (12). J
J l
Initiation of treatment j Negative for TB I j Positive j
Under the RNTCP active case finding is not pursued.
Case finding is passive. Patients presenting themselves with
symptoms suspicious of tuberculosis are screened through Smear-positive TB I No±TB I Smear-negative ;B
2 sputum smear examinations. Sputum microscopic
examination is done in designated RNTCP microscopy
centres. They are located either in the CHC, PHC, Taluka IAnti-TB Treatmentj IAnti-TB Treatmentj
Hospitals or in the TB dispensary. Each centre has a skilled
technician to ensure quality control, a senior TB laboratory FIG.3
supervisor is appointed for every 5 microscopy centres. The Diagnosis of tuberculosis in RNTCP
HEALTH
The drugs are supplied in patient-wise boxes containing The implementation of collaborative TB/HIV activities are
the full course of treatment, and packaged in blister packs. as follows:
For the intensive phase, each blister pack contains one day's 1. Intensified TB case finding has been implemented
medication. For the continuation phase, each blister pack nationwide at all HIV testing centres (known as
contains one weeks supply of medication. The combipack integrated counselling and testing centres, or ICTCs),
drugs for extension of intensive phase are supplied and has now been extended to all ART centres.
separately. The boxes· are coloured according to the
category of the regimen, red for category I patients, blue for 2. HIV testing of TB patients is now routine through provider
category II patients. initiated testing and counselling (PITC), implemented in
all states with the intensified TB-HIV package.
Paediatric tuberculosis (12) 3. Persons found to be HIV-positive are eligible for free HIV
care at a network of antiretrovial treatment (ART)
Please refer to page 193 for details.
centres. ART centres are located in medical colleges,
Drug resistance surveillance (DRS) under mainly staffed and operated by the state AIDS control
societies, and a few are situated within the facilities of
RNTCP (11) private or NGO partners. As of December 2012, there
The prevalence of drug resistance to TB can be taken as were 410 ART centres operating in the country, 811 link-
an indicator of the effectiveness of the TB control activities ART centres and 158 link-ART plus centres. Ten
over a period of time and, therefore, RNTCP has taken steps Regional Centres of Excellence provide second-line ART
to measure this important indicator. services for PLHIV, and 24 centres provide second line
The aim of DRS is to determine the prevalence of ART (ART-plus centres). HIV-infected TB patients who
antimycobacterial drug resistance among new sputum smear are on protease inhibitor based second line ART are
positive pulmonary tuberculosis (PTB) patients, and also getting rifabutin-based TB treatment in place of
amongst previously treated sputum smear positive PTB Rifampicin.
patients. Drug-resistant TB has frequently been encountered 4. Policy decision has been taken by National Technical
in India, and its presence has been known virtually from the Working Group on TB/HIV collaborative activities
time anti-TB drugs were introduced for the treatment of TB. (NTWG on TB/HIV) to expand coverage of whole blood
finger prick HIV screening test at all DMC without a
To obtain a more precise estimate of Multi-Drug Resistant
.stand-alone or F-ICTC.
TB (MOR-TB) burden in the country, RNTCP carried out
drug resistance surveillance (DRS) surveys in accordance 5. Provider initiated HIV testing and counselling (PITC)
with global guidelines in selected states. The results of these among presumptive TB cases (TB suspects) is now a
surveys indicate prevalence of MOR-TB to be about 2.2 policy
(1.9-2.6) per cent in new cases and 15 (11-19) per cent in a. In high HIV prevalent states/settings The
retreatment cases (16). implementation will be done in a phased manner,
starting with high prevalent states and then in A and
PROGRAMMATIC MANAGEMENT OF B category districts in rest of the country.
DRUG RESISTANT TB (PMDT) b. In low HIV prevalent states/settings - HIV testing
among presumptive TB cases should be routinely
DOTS-Plus implemented in the age-group of 25-54 years in low
HIV prevalent districts (C & D) at places where there
The PMDT services for quality diagnosis and treatment of are co-located TB and HIV testing facilities.
drug resistant TB cases were initiated in 2007 in Gujarat and
Maharashtra. These services since then have been scaled up 6. Intensified case finding activities to be specifically
and currently these services are available across the monitored among HIV infected pregnant women and
country from March 2013. As of 2013, about 20,000 children living with HIV.
(17,000-24,000) among new pulmonary TB cases and 7. The National AIDS Control Programme (NACP) and
41,000 retre.atment cases of MOR-TB have been reported in RNTCP have taken the policy decision to adopt isoniazid
India, and of these 32,622 confirmed cases were put on prophylaxis therapy (IPT) as a strategy for prevention of
standard regimen for MOR-TB under RNTCP (16). TB among PLHIV. The implementation will be in a
phased manner.
For full details about the DOTS-Plus programme and
patient regimens please refer to page 190 and 199. 8. The RNTCP bas prioritized presumptive TB cases among
people living with HIV for diagnosis of TB and
TB-HIV coordination (15) Rifampicin resistance with rapid diagnostic tools having
high sensitivity e.g. Xpert MTB/RIF.
Since the advent of the collaborative efforts in 2001,
TB-HIV activities have evolved to cover most of the The treatment guidelines are discussed in detail on
recommendations as per the latest WHO policy statement page 201.
issued in 2012. In 2007, the first national framework for
joint TB-HIV collaborative activities was developed which Tuberculosis in pregnancy
endorsed a differential strategy reflective of the Please refer to page 196 for details.
heterogeneity of TB-HIV epidemic. Coordinated TB-HIV
interventions were implemented including establishment of National Strategic Plan (2012-2017)
a coordinating body at national and state level, dedicated With progress in achieving objectives in the 11th Five
human resources, integration of surveillance, joint Year Plan and defining newer targets of universal access to
monitoring and evaluation, capacity building and TB .care, newer strategies have been developed as a
operational research. comprehensive National Strategic Plan under the 12th Five
PROGRAMMATIC MANAGEMENT OF DRUG RESISTANT TB (PMDT)
Year Plan. The following thrust areas were identified (15) : practitioners, over 319 medical colleges and more than
Strengthening and improving the quality of basic DOTS 150 corporate health facilities. More than 13,309 peripheral
services. laboratories/Designated Microscopy Centres have been
- Further strengthen and align with health system under established. More than 6 lacs public health care providers
have been trained under the programme. Master trainers on
NRHM.
TB/HIV have been trained on TB/HIV related issues in
- Deploying improved rapid diagnosis at the field level. 12 states. More than 16 million patients have been initiated
Expand efforts to engage all care providers. in treatment, saving almost 2.8 million lives. Four urban
Strengthen urban TB control. DOTS projects have also been launched to solve the
- Expand diagnosis and treatment of drug resistant TB. problems of inaccessibility of TB care faced by urban poor
- Improve communication and outreach. utilizing GFATM (Global Fund to fight AIDS, TB & Malaria)
- Promote research for development and implementation support in Mumbai, Hyderabad, Varanasi and Chennai.
of improved tools and strategies. The laboratory services provided are as follows (16)
Strategic vision to move towards universal access Laboratories 2013
The vision of the Government of India is for a "TB-free Smear (per 100,000 population) 1.0
India" with reduction of the burden of the disease until it is Culture (per 5 million population) 0.2
no longer a major public health problem. To achieve this Drug susceptibility testing (per 5 million population) 0.2
vision, the programme has adopted the new objective of
Universal Access for quality diagnosis and treatment for all Sites performing Xpert MTB/RIF 54
TB patients in the community. This entails sustaining the ls second-line drug susceptibility testing available ? Yes,
achievements of the programme to date, and extending the in country
reach and quality of services to all persons diagnosed with For the incidence rate, prevalence rate and treatment
TB. outcome details, please refer to page 177.
The objectives of the programme proposed in the plan
are (15) : Financial resources
- Early detection and treatment of at least 90% of The programme is being assisted by the World Bank and
estimated all type of TB cases in the community, the Department for International Development (DFID) via
including drug resistant and HIV associated TB. WHO. In addition, the RNTCP is supported by the Global TB
- Successful treatment of at least 90% of new TB patients, Drug Facility (GDF), Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis
and at least 85% of previously-treated TB patients. and Malaria (GFATM), the United States Agency for
International Development (USAID) and DANIDA.
~ Reduction in default rate of new TB cases to less than
Government of India provides 100 per cent grant-in-aid to
5% and re-treatment TB cases to less than 10%. the implementing agencies Le., states/UTs, besides free
Initial screening of all re-treatment smear-positive till drugs. The states are expected to use the existing
2015, and all smear positive TB patients by year 2017 infrastructure and also to provide some manpower resources.
for drug-resistant TB and provision of treatment services
for MDR-TB patients;
- Offer of HIV counselling and testing for all TB patients NATIONAL AIDS CONTROL PROGRAMME
and linking HIV-infected TB patients to HIV care and
support; National AIDS Control Programme was launched in India
in the year 1987. The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare
Extend RNTCP services to patients diagnosed and has set up National AIDS Control Organization (NACO) as a
treated in the private sector. separate wing to implement and closely monitor the various
Targets components of the programme. The aim of the programme
is to prevent further transmission of HIV, to decrease
The targets proposed are : morbidity and mortality associated with HIV infection and to
1. Detection and treatment of about 87 lakh tuberculosis minimize the socio-eonomic impact resulting from HIV
patients during the 12th Five Year Plan. infection.
2: Detection and treatment of at least 2 lakh MDR-TB The milestones of the programme are summarized as
patients during the 12th Five Year Plan. follows (17) :
3. Reduction in delay in diagnosis and treatment of all 1986 First case of HIV detected.
types of TB cases. AIDS Task Force set up by the JCMR.
4. Increase in access to services to marginalized and hard to National AIDS Committee established under the
reach populations, and high risk and vulnerable groups. Ministry of Health.
1990- Medium Term Plan launched for four states and
Achievements of RNTCP the four metros.
The RNTCP covers the whole country since March 2006. 1992 NACP-1 launched to slow down the spread of
Phase II of the RNTCP has been launched in the country HIV infection.
from 1st October 2006. The treatment success rate has more - National AIDS Control Board constituted.
than trebled from 25 per cent in 1998 to 88 per cent in - NACO set-up.
2013. Death rate has been brought down seven folds from
29 per cent to 4 per cent. 662 DTCs, 2,698 TB Units and 1999- NACP-11 begins, focussing on behaviour change,
13,209 DMCs are functional in the country. The programme increased decentralization and NGO involvement.
involves more than 2,708 NGOs, more than 13,311 private State AIDS Control Societies established.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
2002 National AIDS Control Policy adopted. (ART) through ART centres and Link ART Centres
- National Blood Policy adopted. (LACs), Centres of Excellence (CoE) and ART plus
2004- Anti-retroviral treatment initiated. centres
Paediatric ART for children
2006 - National Council on AIDS constituted under
chairmanship of the Prime Minister. Early infant diagnosis for HIV exposed infants and
- National Policy on Paediatric ART formulated. children below 18 months
2007 NACP-III launched for 5 years (2007-2012). - Nutritional and psycho-social support through Care
and Support Centres (CSC)
2014- NACP-IV launched for 5 years (2012-2017).
HIV/TB coordination (cross-referral, detection and
The national strategy has the following components treatment of co-infections)
establishment of surveillance centres to cover the whole Treatment of opportunistic infections
country; identification of high-risk group and their
screening; issuing specific guidelines for management of Drop-in centres for PLHIV networks.
detected cases and their follow-up; formulating guidelines
for blood bank, blood product manufacturers, blood donors Country scenario
and dialysis units; information, education, and Based on sentinel surveillance data, the HIV prevalence
communication activities by involving mass media and in adult population can be broadly classified into three
research for reduction of personal and social impact of the groups of States/UTs in the country.
disease; control of sexually transmitted diseases; and Group I High Prevalence States : includes states of
condom programme. Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh,
The Government of India initiated programmes of Manipur and Nagaland where the HIV infection has crossed
prevention and raising awareness under the Medium 5 per cent mark in high-risk group and 1 % or more in
Term Plan (1990-92), NACP-I (1992-99), NACP-11 antenatal women.
(1999-2006) and NACP-III (2007-2012). Based on the Group II Moderate Prevalence States : includes states of
lessons learnt and achievements made in Phase I, II and III. Gujarat, Goa and Puducherry where HIV infection has
India developed the Fourth National Programme crossed 5% or more among high risk groups but the
Implementation Plan (NACP-IV, 2012-2017). The primary infection is below 1 % in antenatal women.
goal of NACP-IV is to halt and reverse the epidemic in India
over the next 5 years by integrating programmes for Group III Low Prevalence States : includes remaining
prevention, care, support and treatment. states where the HIV infection in any of the high risk groups
is still less than 5% and is less than 1 % among antenatal
The package of services under NACP-IV are as women.
follows (18) :
Categories of Districts
1. Prevention services
In the country, the districts have been classified according
- Targeted interventions for high-risk groups (female sex to the epidemiological and vulnerability-criteria using the
workers, men who have sex with men, transgenders/ sentinel surveillance data for the last 3 years (Table 5).
hijras, injecting drug users) and bridge population Accordingly, 156 districts have been classified as category A
(truckers and migrants) 39 districts as category B, 296 as category C and 118 as
- Needle-syringe exchange programme and opioid category D districts. The planning for HIV related services
substitution therapy for IDUs has also been graded as per categorization of districts. This
- Prevention interventions for migrant population at approach has been implemented since March 2007.
source, transit and destination
- Link worker scheme for HRGs and vulnerable TABLE 5
population in rural areas
Categories of districts
- Prevention and control of sexually transmitted , ' ~ - . . . .-~ .
infections/reproductive tract infections ·Category of districts
- Blood safety More than 1 % ANC/PTCT prevalence in district at A
HIV counselling and testing services any time in any of the sites in the last 3 years
- Prevention of parent to child transmission Less than 1 % ANC/PTCT prevalence in all the sites B
during last 3 years associated with more than 5%
- Condom promotion prevalence in any HRG group (STD/CSW/MSM/lDU)
- Information, education and communication and Less than 1 % in ANC prevalence in all sites during c
behaviour change communication (BCC) last 3 years with less than 5% in all STD clinic attendees
- Social mobilization, youth interventions and or any HRG with known hot spots (Migrants, truckers,
adolescence education programme large aggregation of factory workers, tourist etc.)
Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS response Less than 1 % in ANC prevalence in all sites during last D
3 years with less than 5% in all STD clinic attendees or
- Work place interventions. any HRG OR, poor HIV data with no. known
hot spots.
2. Care, support and treatment services
ANC Antenatal clinic
- Laboratory services for CD4 testing and other
investigations PTCT Parent to child transmission
- Free first-line and second-line Anti-Retroviral Therapy Source: (19)
NATIONAL AIDS CONTROL PROGRAMME
HIV surveillance which should be carried out on the above lines to avoid
Different types of surveillance activities are being carried "selection bias" and "participation bias"
out in the country to detect the spread of the disease and to To start with, the HIV sentinel surveillance for HIV was
make appropriate strategy for prevention and control viz., taken up from 1994 in 55 sentinel sites attached to the
area specific targeted intervention and best practice existing surveillance centres and were increased to 180 in
approach. The types of surveillance are : (a) HIV Sentinel 1998. While the number of the high risk groups of HIV
Surveillance, (b) HIV Sero-Surveillance, (c) AIDS Case sentinel sites were increased every year, with change of sites,
Surveillance, (d) STD Surveillance, (e) Behavioural these 180 sites have remained consistent. Inclusion of data
Surveillance, and (f) Integration with surveillance of other from high-risk population through targeted intervention sites
diseases like tuberculosis etc. and the additional sub-set of rural samples through ante-
HIV SENTINEL SURVEILLANCE After the natal clinics are the key features of HIV sentinel surveillance.
establishment of the fact that HIV infection is present in wide Pregnant women attending antenatal clinics are taken as
geographic areas, the aim of surveillance was redefined to proxy for general population. The number of HIV sentinel
monitor the trends of HIV infection. The objectives of the surveillance sites for different population groups during
surveillance are as follows (20) : 2008-09 and 2010-11 are as shown in Table 6.
1. To determine the level of HIV infection among general TABLE 6
population as well as high~risk groups in different states; Number of HIV sentinel surveillance sites
2. To ·understand the trends of HIV epidemic among (2008-09 and 2010-2011)
general population as well as high-risk groups in different
states; Site type 2008-09 2010-11
3. To understand the geographical spread of HIV infection STD 217 184
and to identify emerging pockets; ANC . 498 506
ANC (rural) 162 182
4. To provide information for prioritization of programme ANC (youth) 8 8
resources and evaluation of programme impact; and IDU 61 79
5. To estimate HIV prevalence and HIV burden in the MSM 67 96
country. FSW 194 262
The objective of the surveillance is best achieved by Migrant 8 20
annual cross-sectional survey of the risk group, in the same TG 1 3
place over few years by unlinked anonymous serological Truckers 7 20
testing procedures by two ERS (i.e., when HIV testing is TB
carried out without indentification of name of samples Fisher-folk/seamen
collected for other purposes e.g., VDRL in STD clinics. The ITotal 1,223 1,359
objective of surveillance may be fulfilled in this example
whereas the positive person is not identified). The number Source : (21)
of samples to be screened must represent the risk group
under study and the sample size is determined accordingly. The strategy adopted for collection and testing of samples
Clinical based approach for such collection has many during HIV Sentinel Surveillance Round 2010-11 was as
advantages including the procedure for collection of samples follows (Table 7).
TABLE 7
HIV sentinel surveillence round 2010-2011
High.risk groups: Bridge population: General population:
. IDU/MSM/FSW/TG STD patients7SMM/LDT Pregnant women attending
ANC clinics
Sentinel site Targeted interventions (TI) projects · STD clinic, Tl projects Antenatal clinic
Counselling and HIV testing services 1. Fixed facility ICTCs are located within an existing
The Basic Service Division of the department of AIDS healthcare facility/hospital/health centre, and are of two
control provides HIV counselling and testing services for types - Standalone ICTC and Facility-integrated
HIV infection. The national programme is offering these counseliing and testing centres.
services since 1997 with the goal to identify as many people a. Standalone ICTC (SA-ICTC): The client load is high in
living with HIV, as early as possible (after acquiring the HIV these centres, with full-time counsellor and laboratory
infection), and linking them appropriately and in a timely technician who provide HIV counselling and testing
manner to prevention, care and treatment services. The services. SA-ICTC are located in medical colleges,
introduction of ART services for people living with HIV/AIDS district hospitals, sub-district hospitals, CHCs etc.
in 2004, gave a major boost to counselling and testing b. Facility-integrated counselling and testing centres
services in India. The HIV counselling and testing services (F-ICTCs): Considering the need for rapid scale-up
include the following components: and sustainability of HIV counselling and testing
1. Integrated Counselling and Testing Centres (ICTC) services, the F-ICTCs have been set up below the
2. Prevention of parent-to-child transmission of HIV block levels at 24 x 7 PHC, etc. Staff of the existing
(PPTCT) health facilities are trained in counselling and testing
services of HIV. The HIV service delivery is ensured
3. HIV/tuberculosis collaborative activities.
with logistic support from DAC. Similar to F-ICTC at
INTEGRATED COUNSELLING AND TESTING 24 x 7 PHC, the Public Private Partnership (PPP)-
ICTCs were established in private facilities (for profit/
CENTRES not-for-profit hospitals, laboratories, non-
Diverse models of HIV counselling and testing services governmental organizations etc.), and have been
are available to increase access to HIV diagnosis, these supported by DAC/SACs in supply of rapid HIV
include testing services in health care facilities, standalone testing kits, training of existing staff, quality
sites and community-based approaches at various levels of assurance, supply of protective kits and prophylactic
public health systems in India from state, district, sub-district drugs for post-exposure prophylaxis for staff, supply
and village/community levels as depicted in Fig. 4. of !EC materials such as flip charts, posters etc.
required for ICTC.
HIV screening using whole 2. Mobile ICTC: Mobile counselling and testing centre is a
blood finger prick test/mobile van with a room to conduct general examination,
ICTCs reaching vulnerable/
HRGs/unreached population counselling and space for collection and processing blood
samples by a team of paramedical healthcare providers
(a health educator/ANM, counsellor and laboratory
technician). Mobile ICTC are set up as temporary clinics
in hard-to-reach areas with flexible working hours and
Village level
Primary Health Centres, provide a wide range of services like counselling and
24 x 7 PHCs etc., Private testing services for HIV, syndromic management of STI/
Hospitals/Labs/NGOs etc. RT! and other minor ailments, along with regular health
check-ups, antenatal, immunization services etc.
Community based HIV screening: In order to offer HIV
Sub-district level
e.g. Civil Hospitals, testing to every pregnant woman in the country, so as to
Community Health Centre etc. detect all HIV positive pregnant women and eliminate
transmission of HIV from parent to child, the community-
based HIV screening is conducted by frontline health
State and District level Standalone ICTCs. workers (Auxiliary Nurse Midwives) at the sub-centre level.
e.g. Medical Colleges/District Hospitals etc.
PREVENTION OF PARENT-TO-CHILD
TRANSMISSION OF HIV
FIG. 4 The prevention of parent-to-child transmission of HIV/
Level of HIV counselling and testing services in India AIDS (PPTCT) programme was started in the country in the
Source : (22) year 2002. Currently there are more than 15,000 ICTCs in
the country which offer PPTCT services to pregnant women.
The aim of the PPTCT programme is to offer HIV testing to
Types of facilities for HIV counselling and testing every pregnant woman (universal coverage) in the country,
services so as to cover all estimated HIV positive pregnant women
Integrated Counselling and Testing Centres (ICTC): A and eliminate transmission of HIV from mother-to-child.
person is counselled and tested for HIV at ICTC, either of his In India, PPTCT interventions under NACP was started in
own free will (client initiated) or as advised by a medical 2002, using SD-NVP prophylaxis for HIV positive pregnant
provider (provider initiated). Functions of ICTC include women during labour and .also for her new born child
early detection of HIV, provision of basic information on immediately after birth. With the department of AIDS
modes of transmission and prevention of HIV/AIDS for control adopting "Option B" of the World Health
promoting behavioural change and reducing vulnerability, Organization recommendations (2010), India has also
and linking PLHIV with other HIV prevention, care and transitioned from the single dose Nevirapine strategy to that
treatment services. The ICTC have been classified into two of multi-drug ARV prophylaxis from September 2012. This
types: Fixed facility ICTC and Mobile ICTC. strategy was executed in the three southern high HIV
NATIONAL AIDS CONTROL PROGRAMME
prevalence states of Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka and Tamil exclusive breast-feeds within an hour of delivery as the
Nadu. The national strategic plan for PPTCT services using preferred option and continued for 6 months.
multi-drug ARVs in India was developed in May-June 2013 8. Provision of ARV prophylaxis to infants from birth upto a
for nationwide implementation in a phased manner. Based minimum of 6 months.
on the new WHO guidelines (June 2013) and on the
suggestions from the technical resource groups during 9. Integrating follow-up of HIV-exposed infants into routine
December 2013, department of AIDS control has decided to healthcare services including immunization.
initiate lifeIOng ART (using the triple drug regimen) for all 10. Ensuring initiation of Co-trimoxazole Prophylactic
pregnant and breast-feeding women living with HIV, Therapy (CPT) and Early Infant Diagnosis (EID) using
regardless of CD4 count or WHO clinical stage, both for HIV-DNA PCR at 6 weeks of age onwards, as per the EID
their own health and to prevent vertical' HIV transmission, guidelines.
and for ad.ditional HIV prevention benefits.
11. Strengthening community follow-up and outreach
The PPTCT services provide access to all pregnant through local community networks to support HIV-
women for HIV diagnostic, prevention, care and treatment positive pregnant women and their families.
services. As such, the key goal is to ensure the integrated
PPTCT service delivery with the existing Reproductive and HIV TESTING OF TB PATIENTS
Child Health (RCH) programme.
Detection of HIV by offering HIV tests to diagnosed TB
The essential package of PPTCT services in India are as patients is being implemented by NACP and RNTCP jointly
follows (22) : · since 2007-08. States with high HIV prevalence cover about
1. Routine offer of HIV counselling and testing to all 90% TB patients for HIV testing, but case fatality rate among
pregnant women enrolled into antenatal care, with an HIV infected TB cases remains 13-14%, as compared to less
'opt out' option. thari 4% in HIV negative TB cases, indicating delayed
2. Ensuring involvement of spouse and other family detection of HIV/TB inspite of good coverage. Therefore,
members, and move from an "ANC-Centric" to a NACP and RNTCP have jointly decided to offer HIV testing
"Family-Centric" approach. upstream during evaluation of patients for TB when they
3. Provision of life-long ART (TDF+3TC+EFV) to all present with TB symptoms. This activity is expected to
pregnant and breast-feeding HIV infected women, expedite detection of HIV within 2-4 weeks of TB positivity,
regardless of CD4 count and clinical stage of HIV leading to early linkage to HIV treatment and hence
progression. reduction in mortality. HIV testing in presumptive TB cases
was rolled-out in India in October 2012 in Kamataka,
4 .. Promotion of institutional deliveries of all HIV infected followed by Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu.
pregnant women. It is planned to extend this strategy to high HIV prevalence
5. Provision of care for associated conditions (STI/RTI, TB districts i.e. A and B category districts. Further the NTWG
and other opportunistic infections). has recommended implementation of this strategy among
6. Provision of nutrition, counselling and psychosocial 25-54 years age group in the rest of the country.
support for HIV infected pregnant women. The four pronged strategy for HIV-TB coordination
7. Provision of counselling and support for initiation of activity to reduce mortality are summarized in Fig. 5.
r
Prevention Early detection of TB/HIV
1. Isoniazid preventive treatment 1. 1003 coverage of PITC in TB patients
2. Air borne infection control 2. PITC in presumptive TB cases
3. Awareness generation 3. Rapid diagnostics for detection of TB and
DR-TB in PLHIV
4. !CF activities at all HIV settings - ICTC, ART,
LAC and TI settings
FIG. 5
. Activities to reduce HIV-TB mortality
PJTC - provider initiated HIV testing and counselling; !CF - intensified case finding;
LAC - link ART centres; TI Targeted interventions
Source: (23)
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
Care, support and treatment ARV drugs, thus necessitating change of ARV drugs to
The care, support and treatment (CST) component of alternative first-line drugs. Presently, the provision of
NACP aims to provide comprehensive services to people alternative first-line ART is done through the Centres of
living with HIV (PLHIV) with respect to free Anti-Retroviral Excellence and ART-Plus centres across the country. ·
Therapy (ART), psychosocial support, prevention and 3. Second-line ART: The second-line ART began in
treatment of opportunistic infections (01) including January 2008 at two sites GHTM, Tambaram, Chennai
tuberculosis, and facilitating home-based care and impact and JJ Hospital, Mumbai on a pilot basis, and was then
mitigation. further expanded to the other CoEs in January 2009.
CST services are provided through ART centres Further decentralization of second-line ART was done
established by DAC in health facilities across the country. through capacitating and upgrading some well-
These are linked to Centres of Excellence (CoE) and ART- functioning ART centres as 'ART-Plus Centres'. Till
Plus centres at selected institutions, while some of the March 2014, 8,897 patients were receiving second-line
services have been decentralized through Link ART Centres drugs at CoEs and ART-Plus centres. All ART centres are
(LAC). ART centres are also linked to ICTCs, ST! clinics, linked to CoE/ART-Plus centres. For the evaluation of
PPTCT services and other clinical departments in the patients for initiation on second-line and alternate first-
institutions of their location, as well as with the Revised line ART, a State AIDS Clinical Expert Panel (SACEP)
National Tuberculosis Programme (RNTCP), in order to has been constituted by DAC at all CoEs. and ART-Plus
ensure proper management of TB-HIV co-infected patients. centres. This panel meets once in a week for taking
Fig. 6 gives a graphic view of this service delivery model. decisions on patients referred to them with treatment
failure/major side effects.
National paediatric HIV/AIDS initiative: The national
paediatric HIV/AIDS initiative was launched on
30 November 2006. Till March 2014, nearly 1,06,824
children living with HIV/AIDS (CLHIV) were registered in
HIV care at ART centres, of whom 42,015 were receiving
free ART. Paediatric formulations of ARV drugs are available
at all ART centres.
Paediatric second-line ART: While the first-line therapy is
Medical college and efficacious, certain proportion of children do show evidence
ART Centres District level hospital of failure. There is not much data available on the failure
rate of Nevirapine-based ART in children. However, WHO
estimates that the average switch rate from first to second-
line ART is 2-3 3 per year for adults. It is likely that similar
Link ART Centres and Sub-district level rates are applicable for children as well. Currently, second-
LAC Plus Centres hospitals & CHC line ART for children has been made available at all CoE
and ART-Plus centres.
Early infant diagnosis: In order to promote confirmatory
FIG.6
diagnosis for HIV exposed children, a programme on Early
Infant Diagnosis (EID) was launched by DAC. All children
Model of HIV treatment services with HIV infection confirmed through EID have been linked
Source : (22) to ART services.
TARGETED INTERVENTIONS FOR HIGH RISK
As of March 2014, about 425 ART centres, 870 link ART GROUPS: The main objective of targeted interventions (Tl)
centres, 10 centres of excellence, 7 paediatric centres of is to improve health-seeking behaviour of high risk groups
excellence, 37 ART Plus centres and 224 care and support (HRG) and reduce their risk of acquiring sexually
centres are functioning in the country (22). transmitted infections (STI) and HIV infections. High risk
groups under TI include female sex workers (FSW), men
Services provided who have sex with men (MSM), transgenders (TG)/hijras
·and injecting drug users (IDU), and bridge populations
1. First-line ART: First-line ART is provided free of cost to include high risk behaviour migrants and long distance
all eligible PLHIV through ART centres. Positive cases truckers. Targeted interventions provide the information,
referred by ICTCs are registered in ART centres for pre- means and skills needed to prevent HIV transmission and
ART and ART services. The assessment for eligibility for improve their access to care, support and treatment services.
ART is done through clinical examination and CD4 These programmes also focus on improving sexual and
count. Patients are also provided counselling on reproductive health and general health of high-risk
treatment adherence, nutrition, positive prevention and population.
positive living. Follow-up of patients on ART is done by
assessing drug adherence, regularity of visits, periodic The services offered through targeted interventions
examination and CD4 count (every six months). include:
Treatment for opportunistic infections is also provided - Detection and treatment for sexually transmitted
through ART centres. Till March 2014, 7.68 lakh PLHIV infections
were on first-line ART. Condom distribution (except in Tis for bridge
2. Alternative first-line ART: It has been observed that a population)
small number of patients initiated on first-line ART - Condom promotion through social marketing (for HRG
experience acute/chronic toxicity/intolerance to first-line and bridge population)
NATIONAL AIDS CONTROL PROGRAMME
Behaviour change communication government blood banks and those run by voluntary/
- Creating an enabling environment with community charitable organizations, that were modernized.
involvement and participation In order to ease the situation of shortage of availability of
- Linkages to integrated counselling and testing centres blood in the rural areas, where it is not feasible to operate a
- Linkages with care and support services for HIV positive blood bank, Govt. has decided to establish blood storage
HR Gs centres at First Referral Units (FRUs), at sub-district levels,
Community organization and ownership building for wider availability of safe blood, particularly for
emergency obstetric care and trauma care services.
Specific interventions for IDUs
- Distribution of clean needles and syringes Condom promotion: Condom promotion strategies will
be strengthened through free distribution and social
Abscess prevention and management
marketing channels, non-traditional outlets, female condoms,
Opioid substitution therapy etc. aided by an effective communication strategy. The
Linkage with detoxification/rehabilitation services programme will continue to link prevention with care,
- Specific interventions for MSM/TGs support and treatment. This will promote positive prevention.
- Provision of lubricants On the basis of HIV prevalence and family planning
- Specific interventions for TG/hijra populations needs, the districts have been mapped and classified into
- Provision of project-based ST! clinics four categories: (a) High prevalence of HIV and high fertility
(HPHF); (b) High prevalence of HIV and low fertility
Link worker scheme: The Link worker scheme is a
community-based outreach strategy to address HIV (HPLF); (c) Low prevalence of HIV and low fertility (LPLF);
and (d) Low prevalence of HIV and high fertility (LPHF).
prevention and care needs of HRG and vulnerable
During 2013-14 the coverage of condom social marketing
population in rural areas. The specific objectives of the
programme implementation was spread across 222 districts,
scheme include reaching out to these groups with
information and knowledge on prevention and risk i.e. 42 HPHF, 45 HPLF and 135 LPHF districts in
11 states (22).
reduction of HIV and STI, condom promotion and
distribution, providing referral and follow-up linkages for STD CONTROL PROGRAMME : STD control is linked to
various services. It includes counselling, testing and HIV/AIDS control as behaviour resulting in the transmission
treatment of ST! and opportunistic infections through link of STD and HIV are same. HIV is transmitted more easily in
workers, creating an enabling environment for PLHIV and the presence of another STD. Hence, early diagnosis and
their families, and reducing stigma and discrimination treatment of STD is now recognized as one of the major
against them. In partnership with various development strategies to control spread of HIV infection. The following
partners, the link worker scheme has been expanded and is approach is adopted for the STD control (24) :
being implemented in 17 states covering 163 highly a. Management of STDs through syndromic approach
vulnerable districts. (management of sexually transmitted diseases based
Blood transfusion services: . The division of blood on specific symptoms and signs and not dependent on
safety has been renamed as the division of blood transfusion laboratory investigations).
services. The. change in nomenclature is to broaden the b. STDs among women, though highly prevalent, are
horizon of blood safety to include transfusion transmitted suppressed because of the social stigma attached to
infections, immuno-hematology, quality management the disease. It has, therefore, been decided to
systems, logistics and other processes involved to improve integrate services for treatment of reproductive tract
confidence in the "safe blood". infections (RT!s) and sexually transmitted diseases
Blood transfusion services have been considered as an (STDs) at all levels of health care. Department of
integral part of the health care system. Blood Transfusion Family Welfare and NACO will coordinate their
Councils have been set-up at national and state levels. activities for an effective implementation of such
Professional blood donation has been prohibited in the integration. STDs Clinics at district I block/ First
country since 1st January 1998. Only licensed blood banks Referral Unit (FRU) level would function as referral
are permitted to operate in the country and voluntary blood centres for treatment of STDs referred from
donation is encouraged. The strategy is to ensure safe peripheries. STDs clinics in all district hospitals,
collection, processing, storage and distribution of blood and medical colleges and other centres would be
blood products. Zonal blood testing centres have been strengthened by providing technical support,
established to provide linkage with other blood banks equipment, reagents and drugs. A massive
affiliated to public, private and voluntary sectors. As per orientation-training programme would be undertaken
national blood safety policy, testing of every unit of blood is to train all the medical and paramedical workers
mandatory for detecting infections like HIV, hepatitis B, engaged in providing STDs/RTis services through a
hepatitis C, malaria and syphilis. syndromic approach. All STDs clinics would also
provide counselling services and good quality
Access to safe blood for the needy is the primary condoms to the STD patients. Services of NGOs
responsibility of NACO. It is supported by a network of would be utilised for providing such counselling
1,137 blood banks, including 258 Blood Component services at the STDs clinics.
Separation Units (BCSU) and 34 Model Blood Banks.
NACO supported the installation of BCSU and has given NACO has branded the STI/RTI services as "Suraksha
funds for modernization of all major blood banks at state Clinic", and has developed a communication strategy for
and district levels. Besides enhancing awareness about the generating demand for these services (3).
need to procure safe blood and blood products, NACO has PRE-PACKED STJ/RTI COLOUR CODED KITS : Pre-
supported the procurement of equipment, test kits and packed colour coded STl/RTI kits have been provided for
reagents, and is helping in the recurring expenditure of free supply to all designated STI/RTI clinics. These kits are
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
being procured centrally and supplied to all State AIDS c. To generate demand for care, support and treatment
Control Societies. services; and
The colour code is as follows (25) : d. To make appropriate changes in societal norms that
·reinforce positive attitude, beliefs and practices to reduce
Kit 1 - grey, for urethral dis.charge, ano-rectal discharge stigma.and discrimination.
and cervicitis.
Kit 2 - green, for vaginitis. Adolescence Education Programme: This programme
runs in secondary and senior secondary schools to built up
Kit 3 - white, for genital ulcers.
life skills of adolescents to cope with the physical and
Kit 4 blue, for geriital ulcers. psychological changes associated with growing up. Under
Kit 5 - red, for genital ulcers. the programme, 16 hour sessions are scheduled during the
Kit 6 - yellow, for lower abdominal pain. academic terms of class IX and XI. State AIDS control
Kit 7 black, for scrotal swelling. society have further adapted the modules after state level
consultations with NGOs, academicians, psychologists and
Information, education and communication parent-teacher bodies. This programme is being
Communication is the key to generating awareness on implemented in 23 states and by March 2014, 49,000
prevention as well as motivating access to testing, treatment, schools have been covered.
care and support. With the launch of NACP-IV, the impetus Red Ribbon Clubs: The purpose of Red Ribbon Club
is on standardizing the lessons learned during the third formation in colleges is to encourage peer-to-peer
phase. Communication in NACP-IV is directed at: messaging on HIV prevention and to provide a safe space
a. To increase knowledge among general population for young people to seek clarifications of their doubts and
(especially youth and women) on safe sexual behaviour; myths surrounding HIV/AIDS. The RRCs also promote
b. To sustain behaviour change in high risk groups and voluntary blood donation among youth.
bridge populations; Year-wise targets of NACP-IV are as shown in Table 8.
TABLE 8
Year-wise targets under NACP-IV
Prevention
IA. Targeted interventions among high risk groups and bridge populations
'
No. of FSW covered 7'74,000 $34,300 882,000. ' 900,000 900,000
No. of MSM covered 276,000 360,800 411,400 418,000 440,000
No. of IOU covered 150,000 155,000 158,000 160,000 162,000
No. of truckers covered · 940,000· 1,120,000 1,120,000 1,600,000 1;600,000
No. of high risk migrants covered 2,880,000 4,480,000 5,152,000 5,600,000 5,600,000
No. of targeted interventions 1,867 2,256 2,459 2,605 2,703
j B. Link worker scheme I
I No. of HRGs covered . 140,000 160,000 180,000 200,000 220;0001
j C. Integrated counselling and testing I
No. of vulnerable population accessing ICTC services/annum (in Iakh) 168 224 236.6 264.6 280
No. of pregnant mothers tested under PPTCT/annum (in lakh) 84 112. 118.3 132.3 140
No. of PPTCT/ICTC centres 11,369 12,019 12,889 14,029 14,769
No. of HIV +ve mother and child pairs receiving 18,060 . 24,080 25,435 28;445 30,100
anti-retroviral prophylaxis
ID. Sex:uallytransmittedinfections
No. of adults with ST! symptoms accessing syndromic 56 67;5 76'.5 85.5 90
management/annum (in lakh)
No. of designated STl/RTI clinics 1,150. 1,200 1,2p0 1,250 1,250
j E. Blood tranfusion services I
I No. of blood banks supported under NACP
No. of units of blood collected in DAC supported
blood banks/annum (in lakh)
1,170
56
1,170
67.5
1,235
76.5
1,235
85.5
1,300
90
I Percentage of voluntary blood donation in DAC supported blood banks 803 803 853 90% 95%
IF. Condom promotion I
I No. of condoms distributed (in crorepieces) 109.2 116.1 123.3 129.7 136.41
j G. Comprehensive care, support and treatment I
No. of ART centres 400 450 500 550 600
No. of PLHIV provided free ART 6,42,400 7,51,400 8,40,200 .9,40,000 ' 10,05,000
(includes first-line; second-line arid children)
Source: (18)
NATIONAL PROGRAMME FOR CONTROL OF BLINDNESS
State
( of Health & FW, New Delhi
was left off. For example: If a child who has received Q. Why 2nd dose of measles vaccine is introduced in the
BCG, HepB-1, DPT-1 and OPV-1 at 5 months of age, National Immunization Programme ?
returns at 11 months of age, vaccinate the child with A. Measles is highly infectious disease causing illness and
DPT-2, HepB-2, OPV-2 and measles and do not start death due to complications such as diarrhoea,
from DPT-1, HepB-1 again. penumonia or brain infection. One dose of measles
Q. Why is it not advisable to clean the injection site with a vaccine at 9 months of age protects 85% of infants. With
spirit swab before vaccination ? 2nd dose the aim is to protect all the children who
A. This is because some of the live components of the remain unprotected after first dose.
vaccine are killed if they come in contact with spirit. Q. If a child comes late for the first dose, then can it get the
second dose ?
DPT vaccine A. All efforts should be made to immunize the children at
Q. If a child could not receive DPTl, 2, 3 and OPV 1, 2, 3 the right age i.e. first dose at completed 9 months to
according to the . schedule, upto what age can the 12 months and second dose at 16-24 months. However
vaccine be given ? if a child comes late then give two doses of measles
A. The DPT vaccine can be given upto 7 years of age and vaccine at one month interval until 5 years of age.
OPV can be given upto 5 years of age. If a child has Q. If a child received one dose of measles vaccine during an
received previous doses but not completed the schedule, SIA campaign, should it receive the routine dose of
do not restart the schedule and instead administer the measles vaccine ?
remaining doses needed to complete the series. A. Yes, the child should receive routine doses of measles
Q. Why should there be a minimum gap of 4 weeks vaccine according to the Immunization Schedule
between two doses of DPT? irrespective of the measles SIA dose.
A. This is because decreasing the interval between two doses
may not obtain optimal antibody production for protection.
BCG vaccine
Q. Why give the DPT vaccine in the antero-lateral mid thigh Q. Why give BCG vaccine only on the left upper arm ?
and not the gluteal region ? A. BCG is given on the left upper arm to maintain
A. DPT is given in the antero-lateral mid-thigh and not the uniformity and for helping surveyors in verifying the
gluteal region to prevent damage to the sciatic nerve. receipt of the vaccine.
Moreover, the vaccine deposited in the fat of gluteal Q. Why do we give 0.05 ml dose of BCG to newborns
region does not invoke the appropriate immune response. (below 1 month of age) ?
Q. What should one do if the child is found allergic to DPT A. This is because the skin of newborns is thin and an intra-
or develops encephalopathy after DPT ? dermal injection of 0.1 ml may break the skin or
A. A child who is allergic to DPT or develops penetrate into the deeper tissue and cause local abscess
encephalopathy after DPT should be given the DTaP/DT and enlarged axillary lymph nodes. Dose of 0.05 ml is
vaccine instead of DPT for the remaining doses, as it is sufficient to elicit adequate protection.
usually the P (whole cell Pertussis) component of the Q. Why is BCG given only upto one year of age ?
vaccine which causes the allergy/encephalopathy. It may A. Most children acquire natural clinical/sub-clinical
be purchased with locally available resources. tuberculosis infection by the age of one year. This too
Q. Why DT is replaced by DPT vaccine for children above protects against severe forms of childhood tuberculosis
2 years of age ? e.g. TB meningitis and miliary disease.
A. As pertussis cases were reported in higher age group Q. If no scar appears after administering BCG, should one
children and the risk of AEFis were not found to be more re-vaccinate the child ?
after DPT vaccine as compared to DT vaccine. A. There is no need to re-vaccinate the child, even if there
is no scar.
Meas/es vaccine
OPV
Q. Why give the measles vaccine only on the right upper arm ?
Q. Till what age can a child be given OPV?
A. The measles vaccine is given on the right upper arm to
A. OPV can be given to children till 5 years of age.
maintain uniformity and to help surveyors in verifying
Q. Can OPV and vitamin A be given together with DPT-
the receipt of the vaccine.
booster dose ?
Q. If a child has received the measles vaccine before
9 months of age, is it necessary to repeat the vaccine later? A. Yes.
Q. Can an infant be breast-fed immediately after OPV?
A. Yes, the measles vaccine needs to be administered,
according to the National Immunization Schedule i.e. after A. Yes.
the completion of 9 months until 12 months of age and at TT vaccine
16-24 months. If not administered in the ideal age for
measles vaccine, it can be administered upto 5 years of age. Q. If a girl has received all doses of DPT and TT as per the
Q. What is measles catch-up campaign ? NIS till 16 years of age and she gets pregnant at 20 years,
should she get one dose of TT during pregnancy ?
A. A measles catch-up campaign is a special campaign to
vaccinate all children in a wide age group in a state or a A. Give 2 doses of TT during the pregnancy as per the schedule.
district with one dose of measles vaccine. The catch-up Q. Is TT at 10 years and 16 years meant only for girls?
campaign dose is given to all children, both immunized A. No, it is to be given to both boys and girls.
and un-immunized, who belong to the target age group Q. Can TT be given in the first trimester of pregnancy ?
of 9 months to 10 years. The goal of a catch~up campaign A. Yes, it should be given as soon as pregnancy is diagnosed.
is to quickly make the population immune from measles
and reduce deaths from measles. A catch-up campaign Hepatitis B vaccine
must immunize nearly 100% of target age group children. Q. Up to what age can hepatitis B vaccine be given ?
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
• - - - - - -
A. According to the National Immunization Schedule, JE vaccine during an SIA, can it receive the JE vaccine
Hepatitis B vaccine should be given with the first, second again, as part of routine immunization ?
and third doses of DPT till one year of age. A. No, currently this is a sirigle dose vaccine and should not
Q. Why give the birth dose of hepatitis B vaccine only be repeated.
within 24 hours of birth ? Q. If a child above 2 years (24 months) of age has not
A. The birth dose of Hepatitis B vaccine is effective in received the JE vaccine through either RI or an SIA,
preventing perinatal transmission of Hepatitis B if given should she/he be given the JE vaccine ?
within the first 24 hours. A. Yes, the child is eligible to receive a dose of the JE
vaccine, through RI, till the age of 15 years.
JE vaccine Following are some Do's and Don'ts during immunization
Q. If a child 16-24 months of age has been immunized with sessions (32) :
- It is safe and effective to give BCG, DPT, OPV and Measles vaccines at the - Withhold the vaccine in case of illness such as cold,
same time to a child who has completed 9 months and never been vaccinated. cough, diarrhoea or fever. ·
- Give BCG to infants less than 1 year of age
(never give BCG to children above 1 year of age).
- If a child is brought late for a dose, pick up where the schedule was left off.
For example, if a child left with DPT-2 and comes after 3 months give DPT-3.
jcold chain
- Check expiry date and VVM label of vaccine vial before - Leave vaccine carrier in sunlight; this spoils
immunizing every child. vaccines that are sensitive to heat and light.
Keep the vaccines and diluents in a plastic bag/zipper bag in the centre of - Leave the lid open, this can allow heat and light into
vaccine carrier with 4 conditioned ice-packs. Make sure that the diluents are the carrier, which can spoil vaccine.
also at +2 to +8 centigrade before reconstitution. - Drop.or siton the vaccine carrier: this can damage
Take one ice pack from vaccine carrier and keep reconstituted BCG & the carder. .. . . .
Measles vaccines only on the top of the ice pack. Carry vaccines in handbag as this can spoil vaccines
that are sensitive to heat.
Keep the DPT, DT, TT and Hep. B vaccines on the
ice pack during the session. ·
j Vaccine handling and administration
- Welcome beneficiaries. ..,.
Use un-sterile syringe or needle for immunization.
Wash hands before conducting the session. - Draw air into AD syringes.
Verify beneficiary's record and age of the child. - Touch any part of the needle.
- Screen for contraindications. - Recap the needle.
- Check label of the vial and expiry date. Leave the needle inside the vial.
- Lightly shake the vial of T-Series Vaccine before drawing the dose. Ever inject in the buttock, never do that.
- Use a new AD syringe for each injection and new disposable syringe - Massage the vaccination site after vaccination.
for each reconstitution. - Use reconstituted measles and BCG vaccine after
Use correct diluent for reconstitution of vaccine. 4hrs and JE after 2 hrs.
- Give appropriate vaccine. Use vaccine with VVM in unusable stage or with
Inject vaccine using the correct site and route for the vaccine e.g. Intradermal in expiry date.
left arm for BCG; subcutaneous in right arm for Measles; intramuscular in
anterolateral aspect of mid thigh for DPT and Hepatitis B.
- Allow dose to self-disperse instead of massaging. ·
Explain potential adverse events following immunization and what to do.
- Discuss with beneficiaries/parents about next visit.
j Recording and reporting
- Fully document each immunization in the immunization card, tally sheet and - Turn away beneficiaries for not bringing the card.
immunization register. Ask parents/guardians to bring the card on next visit. - Leave any cell blank in immunization card.
Retain the counterfoil.
j Adverse events following immunization (AEFI)
In case of serious AEFI refer the patient to appropriate health facility, - Report minofreaction following vaccination (mild
inform youf supervisor immediately - document the type of vaccine(s), fever of less than three days, redness and pain).
batch number, expiry date, and full address of the child.
- Report all serious AEFis to the MOI/C;
j Social mobilization
Use vaccination card to remind parents when to return with their child. - Leave any community meeting without
- Enlist community team like AWW, ASHA, NGOs and other community-based communicating about immunization session days.
workers to remind parents of the importance of full immunization.
Source : (32)
- - - - -NATIONAL URBAN HEALTH MISSION
- - II
'----~N_AT-'-I_O_N_A_L_H_EA_·_LT_H_M_IS_.S_I~O_N_-'---~I N_~_T_Io_.N_A_L_·.._U_R_B_AN_·.H_.·E_·AL_._:r_H_M_._1s_s_1'-'-o_N--'·,:---'-II
L _ l_ _
The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare is NUHM seeks to improve the health status of the urban
implementing various schemes and programmes and population particularly slum dwellers and other vulnerable
national initiatives to provide universal access to quality section by facilitating their access to quality health care.
health care. The approach is to increase access to the NUHM would cover all state capitals, district headquarters
decentralized health system by establishing new and about 779 other cities/towns with a population of
infrastructure in defecient areas and by upgrading the 50,000 and above (as per census 2011) in a phased manner.
infrastructure in existing institutions. As part of the plan Cities and towns below 50,000 population will be covered
process, many different programmes have been brought by NRHM. The NUHM will focus on (27) :
together under the overarching umbrella of National Health 1. Urban poor population living in listed and unlisted slums;
Mission (NHM), with National Rural Health Mission (NRHM) 2. All other vulnerable population such as homeless, rag-
and National Urban Health Mission (NUHM) as its two sub- pickers, street children, rickshaw pullers,· construction
Missions. The National Health Mission was approved in May and brick and lime-kiln workers, sex workers and other
2013. The main programmatic components include health temporary migrants;
system strengthening in rural and urban areas; Reproductive
- Maternal - Newborn - Child and Adolescent Health 3. Public health thrust on sanitation, clean drinking water,
(RMNCH+A); and control of communicable and non- vector control etc.; and
communicable diseases. An important achievement of NHM 4. Strengthening public health capacity of urban local
has been considerable reduction in out of pocket expenses bodies.
from 72 per cent to 60 per cent (1).
•J
The treatment of seven mteropolitan cities, viz., Mumbai,
The Government of India has introduced a series of New Delhi, Chennai, Kolkata, Hyderabad, Bengaluru and
programmes over the past two decades to address Ahmedabad will be different'. These cities are expected to
maternal and newborn health. The major milestones so far manage NUHM through their Municipal Corporation
include (33) directly.
a. 1992 Child Survival and Safe Motherhood The NUHM will provide flexibility to the states to choose
Programme (CSSM) which model suits the needs and capacities of the states to
b. 1997 RCH I best address the healthcare needs of the urban poor. Models
will be decided through community led action. All the
c. 1997 RCHll services delivered under the urban health delivery system
d. 2005 National Rural Health Mission through the urban PHCs and urban CHCs will be universal
e. 2013 RMNCH+A Strategy in nature, whereas the outreach services will be targetted to
f. 2013 National Health Mission the target group (slum dwellers and other vulnerable
g. 2014 India Newborn Actio'h Plan (!NAP) groups). Outreach services will be provided through the
The RMNCH+A strategy is based on a continuum of care Female Health Workers (FHWs), essentially ANMs with an
approach and defines integrated packages of services for induction training of three to six months, who will be. placed
different stages of life. This approach brings focus on at the Urban PHCs. These ANMs will report at the U-PHC
adolescents as a critical life stage and linkages between child and then move to their respective areas for outreach services
survival, maternal health and family planning efforts. It aims on designated days. On other days, they will conduct
to strengthen the referral linkages between community and immunization and ANC clinics etc. at the U-PHC itself.
facility based health services and between the various levels The NUHM would encourage the effective participation
of health system itself. These packages provide a framework of the community in planning and management of health
for delivering services at the state and district level. For care services. It would promote a community health
details please refer to page 461. volunteer -Accredited Social Health Activist (ASHA) or Link
Worker (LW) in urban poor settlement (one ASHA for
Recently, new initiatives have been launched under
1000-2500 urban poor population covering about 200 to
NHM. Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK) was
500 households); ensure the participation by creation of
launched to provide comprehensive healthcare and improve community based institutions like Mahila Arogya
the ·quality of life of children through early detection· of birth Samiti (MAS) (50-100 households) and Rogi Kalyan
defects, diseases, deficiencies, and development delays Samitis. However, the states will have the flexibility to either
including disability. Another initiative, viz. Rashtriya Kishor engage ASHA or entrust her responsibilities to MAS. In that
Swasthya Karyakram (RKSK) was launched to case, the incentives accruing to ASHA would accrue to
comprehensively address the health needs of the 253 million MAS (34). The NUHM would provide annual grant of
adolescents, who account for over 21 % of the country's Rs. 5000/- to MAS every year.
population, by bringing in several new dimensions like
mental health, nutrition, substance misuse, injuries and Essential services to be rendered by the ASHA may be as
violence, and non-communicable diseases. follows (34):
In addition to these initiatives, the Weekly Iron Folic Acid (i) Active promoter of good health practices and enjoying
Supplementation Programme (WIFS) was launched to community support.
address adolescent anaemia. In this programme supervised (ii) Facilitate awareness on essential RCH services,
Iron-Folic Acid (!FA) tablets are given to adolescent sexuality, gender equality, age at marriage/pregnancy;
population between 10-19 years of age in both rural and motivation on contraception adoption, medical
urban areas throughout the country. NHM is a step towards termination of pregnancy, sterilization, spacing
realizing the objective of universal health coverage in the methods. Early registration of pregnancies, pregnancy
country (1). care, clean and safe delivery, nutritional care during
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
ServlcE!S
Al. Maternal health Registration, ANC, identification of ANC, PNC, initial management of Delivery (normal and complicated);
danger signs, referral for institutional complicated delivery cases and· management of complicated
delivery, follow-up counselling and referral, management of regular gynae/maternal health condition,
behavior promotion maternal health conditions, hospitalization and surgical
referral of complicated cases interventions, including blood
transfusion
A2. Family welfare Counselling, distribution of OCP/CC, Distribution of OCP/CC, IUD Sterilization operations, fertility
referral for sterilization, follow-up of insertion, referral for sterilization, treatment · '·
contraceptive related complications management of contraceptive ~·' -.
related complications
A3. Child health Immunization, identification of danger Diagnosis and treatment of Management of complicated
and nutrition signs, referral, follow-up, distribution childhood illnesses, referral of paediatric/neo-natal cases,
of ORS, paediatric cotrimoxazole, acute cases/chronic illness, hospitalization, surgical
post-natal visits/counselling for . identification and referral of interventions, blood transfusion
newborn care neonatal sickness
A4. RTI/STI referral, community level follow-up Symptomatic diagnosis and Management of complicated cases,
(including for ensuring adherence to treatment primary treatment and referral hospitalization (if needed}
HIV/AIDS} regime of cases undergoing treatment of complicated cases
A5. Nutrition Height/weight measurement, Diagnosis and treatment of Management of acute deficiency
deficiency Hb testing, distribution of lFA tablets seriously deficient patients, cases, hospitalization, treatment
disorders promotion of iodized salt, nutrition referral of acute deficiency and rehabilitation of severe
supplements to children and cases under-nutrition
pregnant/lactating women,
promotion of breast feeding.
A6. Vector-borne Slide collection, testing using RDKs, Diagnosis and treatment, Management of terminaly ill cases,
diseases DDT, counselling for practices for referral of terminally ill.cases hospitalization
vector control and protection
IA7. Mental health Initial screening and referral Psychiatric, neurological services
I
A7 .1 Oral health Diagnosis and referral Management of complicated cases
A7 .2 Hearing Management of complicated cases
Impairment/
deafness
AB. Chest infections Symptomatic search and referral, Diagnosis and treatment, referral Management of compli~ated cases
('fB/asthma) ensuring adherence to DOTS, of complicated cases
other treatment
A9. Cardiovascular BP measurement, symptomatic Diagnosis and treatment and Management of emergency cases,
diseases search and referral, follow-up of referral during specialist visits hospitalization and surgical
under-treatment patients interventions (if needed)
AlO. Diabetes Blood/urine sugar test (using Diagnosis and treatment, referral Management of cqmplicated cases,
disposable kit}, symptomatic · of complicated cases · hospitalization (if needed}
search and referral
All. Cancer Symptomatic search and referral, Identification and referral, Diagnosis treatment, hospitalization
follow-up of under-treatment follow-up of under-treatment (if and when needed}
patients patients
A12. Trauma care First aid and referral First-aid/emergency resucitation, Case management and
(bums and documentation for medicolegal hospitalization, physiotherapy and
injuries} case (if applicable} and referral rehabilitation
A13. Other surgical Not applicable Identification and referral Hospitalization and surgical
interventions intervention
I
B. Other support services like /EC, BCC, counselling and personal and social hygiene.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES JN INDIA
Community Processes
1. Number of Mahila Arogya Sa mi ti (MAS) formed * 0
2. Number of MAS members trained * 0
3. Number of Accredited Social Health Activists (ASHAs) 0
selected and trained
IHealth Systems
4. Number of ANMs recruited * 0
5. No. of Special Outreach health camps organized in.the slum/HFAs * 0
6. No .. of UHNDs organized in the slums and vulnerable areas* 0
7. Number of UPHCs made operational * 0
8. Number of UCHCs made operational * 0
9. No. of RKS created at UPHC and UCHC* 0
10. OPD attendance in the UPHCs
11. No. of deliveries conducted in public health facilities
IRCHServices
12. ANC early registration in first trimester
13. Number of women who had ANC check-up in their first
trimester of pregnancy
14. TT (2nd dose) coverage among pregnant women
15. No. of children fully immunized (through public health facilities)
16. No. of Severely Acute Malnourished (SAM) children identified
and referred for treatment
ICommunicable Diseases
17. No. of malaria cases detected through blood examination
18. No. of TB cases identified through chest symptomatic
19. No. of suspected TB cases referred for sputum examination
20. No. of MOR-TB cases put under DOTS-plus
INon-communicable Diseases
21. No. of diabetes cases screened in the city
22. No. of cancer cases screened in the·city
23. No. of hypertension cases screened in the city
*Year 2013-14 being the baseline year, the indicators for these NUHM components would be zero. For other indicators, the figure for
2012-13 will be the base line.
Source : (34)
and prevention of common infections including initiative for bringing the beneficiaries from the village on
reproductive tract infection/sexually transmitted specific days of immunization, health check-ups/health
infection and care of the young child. days etc. to anganwadi centres.
3. ASHA will mobilize the community and facilitate them
in accessing health and health related services Role and integration with ANM (36)
available at the anganwadi/subcentre/primary health Auxiliary Nurse Midwife (ANM) will guide ASHA in
centres, such as immunization, antenatal check-up, performing following activities : (a) She will hold weekly/
postnatal check-up, supplementary nutrition, fortnightly meeting with ASHA and discuss the activities
sanitation and other services being provided by the undertaken during the week/fortnight. She will guide her in
government. case ASHA had encountered any problem during the
4. She will work with the village health and sanitation performance of her activity; (b) AWWs and ANMs will act as
committee of the gram panchayat to develop a resource persons for the training of ASHA; (c) ANMs will
comprehensive village health plan. inform ASHA regarding date and time of the outreach
5. She will arrange escort/accompany pregnant women session and will also guide her for bringing the beneficiary to
and children requiring treatment/admission to the the outreach session; (d) ANM will participate and guide in
nearest pre-identified health facifity i.e. primary health organizing the Health Days at anganwadi centre; (e) She will
centre/community health centre/First Referral Unit. take help of ASHA in updating eligible couple register of the
6. ASHA will provide primary medical care for minor village concerned; (f) She will utilize ASHA in motivating the
ailments such as diarrhoea, fevers, and first-aid for pregnant women for coming to sub-centre for initial check-
minor injuries. She will be a provider of directly ups. She will also help ANMs in bringing married couples to
observed treatment short-course (DOTS) under sub-centres for adopting family planning; (g) ANM will guide
revised national tuberculosis control programme. ASHA in motivating pregnant women for taking full course
7. She will also act as a depot holder for essential of iron and folic acid tablets and tetanus toxoid injections
provisions being made available to every habitation etc.; (h) ANMs will orient ASHA on the dose schedule and
like oral rehydration therapy, iron folic acid tablet, side effects of oral pills; (i) ANMs will educate ASHA on
chloroquine, disposable delivery kits, oral pills and danger signs of pregnancy and labour so that she can timely
condoms etc. A drug kit will be provided to each identify and help beneficiary in getting further treatment;
ASHA. Contents of the kit will be based on the and (j) ANMs will inform ASHA on date, time and place for
recommendations of the expert/technical advisory initial and periodic training schedule, She will also ensure
group set up by the government of India, and include that during the training ASHA gets the compensation for
both AYUSH and allopathic formulations. performance and also TNDA for attending the training.
8. Her role as a provider can be enhanced subsequently. 2. Rogi Kalyan Samiti (Patient Welfare Committee/
States can explore the possibility of graded training to Hospital Management Society: It is a simple yet effective
her for providing newborn care and management of a management structure. This committee is a registered
range of common ailments, particularly childhood society whose members act as trustees to manage the affairs
illnesses. of the hospital and is responsible for upkeep of the facilities
9. She will inform about the births and deaths in her and ensure provision of better facilities to the patients in the
village and any unusual health problems/disease hospital. Financial assistance is provided to these
outbreaks in the community to the sub-centre/primary Committees through untied fund to undertake activities for
health centre. patient welfare. 31,109 Rogi Kalyan Samitis (RKS) have
10. She will promote construction of household toilets been set up involving the community members in almost all
under total sanitation campaign. District Hospitals {DHs), Sub-District Hospitals (SDHs),
Community Health Centres (CHCs) and Primary Health
Role and integration with Anganwadi (36) Centres (PHCs) till March 2014.
Anganwadi worker will guide ASHA in performing 3. The untied grants to sub-centres (SCs): The SCs are far
following activities : (a) Organizing Health Day once/twice a better equipped now with blood pressure measuring
month. On health day, the women, adolescent girls and equipment, haemoglobin (Hb) measuring equipment,
children from the village will be mobilized for orientation on stethoscope, weighing machine etc. This has facilitated
health related issues such as importance of nutritious food, provision of quality antenatal care and other health care
personal hygiene, care during pregnancy, importance of services.
antenatal check-up and institutional delivery, home
remedies for minor ailment and importance of immunization 4. The Village Health Sanitation and Nutrition Committee
etc. AWWs will inform ANM to participate and guide (VHSNC): It · is an important tool of community
organizing the Health Days at anganwadi centre; (b) AWWs empowerment and participation at the grassroots level. The
and ANMs will act as resource persons for the training of VHSNC reflects the aspirations of the local community,
ASHA; (c) IEC activity through display of posters, folk especially the poor households and children. Upto 31st
dances etc. on these days can be undertaken to sensitize the March 2014, 5.12 lakh VHSNCs have been set up across the
beneficiaries on health related issues; (d) Anganwadi worker country.
will be depot holder for drug kits and will be issuing it to 5. Janani Suraksha Yojana (JSY): aims to reduce
ASHA. The replacement of the consumed drugs can also be maternal mortality among pregnant women by encouraging
done through AWW; (e) AWW will update the list of eligible them to deliver in government health facilities. Under the
couples and also the children less than one year of age in the scheme, cash assistance is provided to eligible pregnant
village with the help of ASHA; and (f) ASHA will support the women for giving birth in a government health facility. Since
AWW in mobilizing pregnant and lactating women and the inception of NRHM, 7.04 crore women have benefited
infants for nutrition supplement. She would also take under this scheme. For details please refer to page 455.
NATIONAL RURAL HEALTH MISSION
6. Janani Shishu Suraksha Karyakarm (JSSK): Launched 8. Partial modification of the centrally sponsored scheme
on 1st June, 2011, JSSK entitles all pregnant women for development of AYUSH hospitals and dispensaries
delivering in public health institutions to absolutely free and for mainstreaming of AYUSH under NRHM.
no expense delivery, including caesarean section. This 9. Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK): This
marks a shift to an entitlement based approach. Please refer initiative was launched in February 2013 and provides
to page 456 for details. for Child Health Screening and Early Intervention
7. National Mobile Medical Units (NMMUs): Support has Services through early detection and management of
been provided in 418 out of 640 districts for 2127 MMUs 4 Os i.e., Defects at birth, Diseases, Deficiencies,
under NRHM in the country. To increase visibility, awareness Development delays including disability. For details
and accountability, all Mobile Medical Units have been please refer to page 460.
repositioned as "National Mobile Medical Unit Service" with 10. Rashtriya Kishor Swasthya Karyakram (RKSK): This is a
universal colour and design. new initiative, launched in January 2014 to reach out to
8. National Ambulance Services: NRHM has supported 253 million adolescents in the country in their own
free ambulance services to provide patients transport in spaces and introduces peer-led interventions at the
every nook and corner of the country connected with a toll community level, supported by augmentation of facility
free number. Over 16,000 basic and emergency patient based services. This initiative broadens the focus of the
transport vehicles have been provided under NRHM. adolescent health programme beyond reproductive and
Besides these, over 4, 769 vehicles have been empanelled to sexual health and brings in focus on life skills, nutrition,
transport patients, particularly pregnant women and sick injuries and violence (including gender based violence),
infants from home to public health facilities and back. non-communicable diseases, mental health and
28 states have set up a call centre for effective patient substance misuse (1).
transport system. 11.Mother and Child Health Wings (MCH Wings): 100/50/
9, Web enabled Mother and Child Tracking System 30 bedded Maternal and Child Health (MCH) Wings
(MCTS): The name-based tracking of pregnant women and have been sanctioned in public health facilities with high
children has been initiated under NRHM with an intention to bed occupancy to cater to the increased demand for
track every pregnant woman, infant and child upto the age services. More than 28,000 additional beds have been
of three years by name, for ensuring delivery of services like sanctioned across 470 health facilities across 18 states.
timely antenatal care, institutional delivery and postnatal 12. Free drugs and free diagnostic service.
care for the mother, and immunization and other related 13. National Iron+ Initiative is another new initiative
services for the child. The MCTs is to be fully updated for launched in 2013, to prevent and control iron deficiency
regular and effective monitoring of service delivery, anaemia, a grave public health challenge in India.
including tracking and monitoring of severely anaemic Besides pregnant women and lactating mothers, it aims
women, low birth weight babies and sick neonates. In the to provide !FA supplementation for children, adolescents
long run, it could be used for tracking the health status of the and women in reproductive age group. Weekly Iron and
girl child and school health services. A more recent initiative Felic Acid Supplementation (WIFS) for adolescents is an
is to link MCTS with AADHAR in order to track subsidies to important strategy under this initiative. WIFS (for 10-19
eligible women (37). years age) has already been rolled out in 32 states and
UTs under the National Iron Plus Initiative. WIFS covered
New initiatives (6) around 3 crore beneficiaries in December 2013 (1).
The following are the major decisions of Mission Steering 14. Reproductive, Maternal, Newborn, Child and Adolescent
Group; taken since 2011 : Health Services (RMNCH+A): A continuum of care
1. Home delivery of contraceptives (condoms, oral approach has now been adopted under NRHM with the
contraceptive pills, emergency contraceptive pills) by articulation of strategic approach to Reproductive
ASHA; Maternal, Newborn, Child and Adolescent Health
(RMNCH+A) in India. This approach brings focus on
2. Conducting District Level Household Survey (DLHS) 4 adolescents as a critical life stage and linkages between
in 26 States/UTs where the Annual Health Survey (AHS) child survival, maternal health and family planning
is not being done; efforts. It aims to strengthen the referral linkages
3. Modifications in the scheme for promotion of menstrual between community and facility based health services
hygiene covering 152 districts and nearly 1.5 crores of and between the various levels of health system itself.
adolescent girls in 20 states; Please refer to page 461 for details.
4. Differential financial approach for comprehensive health 15. Delivery Points (DPs): Health facilities that have a high
care by which allocation of Untied Funds and Rogi demand for services and performance above a certain
Kalyan Samiti grants will be made based on the case benchmark have been identified as "Delivery Points"
load and services provided by the health facility; with the objective of providing comprehensive
5. Involving ASHA in Home Based Newborn Care; reproductive, maternal, newborn, child and adolescent
6. Revision in the criterion of allocation of funds to the health services (RMNCH +A) at these facilities. Funds
states under NRHM based on the performance of the have been allocated to strengthen these DPs in terms of
states against the monitorable targets and infrastructure, human resource, drugs, equipments etc.
implementation of specific reform agenda in the health Around 17,000 health facilities have been identified as
sector; "Delivery Points" for focussed support under NRHM.
7. Expansion of Village Health and Sanitation Committees 16. Universal Health Coverage (UHC): Moving towards
to include nutrition in its mandate and renaming it as Universal Health Coverage (UHC) is a key goal of the
Village Health, Sanitation and Nutrition Committee 12th Five Year Plan. The National Health Mission is the
(VHSNC); and primary vehicle to move towards this goal.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDJA
Achievements : The achievements of NRHM as on 30th rehydration therapy, child survival and safe motherhood
June 2013 are as follows (1) : programme and acute respiratory infection control etc. It is
(1) 8.89 lakh ASHAs have been selected in the entire obviously sensible that integrated RCH programme would
country of which 8.06 lakh ASHAs have been trained help in reducing the cost inputs to some extent because
and provided with drug kits. overlapping of expenditure would not be necessary and
(2) 1.47 lakh sub-centres in the country are provided with integrated implementation would optimise outcomes at field
untied funds of Rs 10,000 each. 40,426 sub-centres are level.
functional with second ANM. The RCH phase-I programme incorporated the
(3) 31,109 Rogi Kalyan Samitis have been registered at components relating child survival and safe motherhood and
different level of facilities. included two additional components, one relating to
(4) 8,129 doctors and specialists, 70,608 ANMs, 34,605 sexually transmitted disease (STD) and other relating to
staff nurses, 13, 725 paramedics have been appointed reproductive tract infection (RTI).
on contract to fill-in critical gaps in services. The RCH programme was based on a differential
(5) 1,691 professionals (CNMBNMCA) have been approach. Inputs in all the districts were not kept uniform.
~:
appointed to support NRHM. While the care components was same for all districts, the
(6) 2,127 Mobile Medical Units are operational under weaker districts got more support and sophisticated facilities
NRHM in states. were proposed for relatively advanced districts. On the basis
(7) Emergency transport system operational in 12 states. of crude birth rate and female literacy rate, all the districts
were divided into three categories. Category ·A having
(8) Accelerated immunization programme taken up for 58 districts, category B having 184 districts and category C
North-East states and EAG (Empowered Action Group) having 265 districts. All the districts were covered in a
states. Progress made in pulse polio immunization phased manner over a period of three years. The
(India declared polio free country); neonatal tetanus programme was formally launched on 15th October 1997.
declared eliminated in 7 states in the country; JE
vaccination completed in 11 districts in 4 states. RCH phase-I interventions at district level were as
(9) Janani Suraksha Yojana is operational in all the follows:
states. 106.57 lakh women were benefitted in the year
Interventions in all districts
2012-13.
(10) Integrated Management of Neonatal and Childhood Child Survival interventions i.e. immunization, Vitamin
Illness (IMNCI) started in 310 districts. A (to prevent blindness), oral rehydration therapy and
(11) Monthly Health and Nutrition Days being organized at prevention of deaths due to pneumonia.
the village level in various states. Safe Motherhood interventions e.g. antenatal check up,
(12) The states have constituted 5.12 lakh Village Health immunization for tetanus, safe delivery, anaemia control
Sanitation and Nutrition Committees. programme.
(13) School health programme have been initiated in over Implementation of Target Free Approach.
26 states. High quality training at all levels.
- !EC activities.
Monitoring and evaluation under NRHM - Specially designed RCH package for urban slums and
A baseline survey is to be taken up at the district level tribal areas.
incorporating facility survey (including private facilities) as - District sub-projects under Local Capacity
well as survey of the households. The baseline survey is to Enhancement.
help the mission in fixing decentralized monitorable goals - RTl/STD Clinics at District Hospitals (where not
and indicators. There would be community monitoring at available)
the village level. The panchayat raj institutions, rogi kalyan - Facility for safe abortions at PHCs by providing
samitis, quality assurance committees at the state level and equipment, contractual doctors etc.
district level, state and district health missions, mission - Enhanced community participation through Panchayats,
steering group at the central level. Planning commission is to Women's Groups and NGOs.
be the eventual monitor of the outcomes. External Adolescent health and reproductive hygiene.
evaluation is also to be taken up at frequent intervals.
Interventions in selected States/Distts.
REPRODUCTIVE AND CHILD HEALTH Screening and treatment of RTI/STD at sub-divisional
PROGRAMME level.
Reproductive and child health approach has been defined - Emergency obstetric care at selected FRUs by providing
as "people have the ability to reproduce and regulate their drugs.
fertility, women are able to go through pregnancy and child Essential obstetric care by providing drugs and PHN/
birth safely, the outcome of pregnancies is successful in terms Staff Nurse at PHCs.
of maternal and infant survival and well being, and couples - Additional ANM at sub-centres in the weak districts for
are able to have sexual relations, free of fear of pregnancy ensuring MCH care.
and of contracting disease" (38). - Improved delivery services and emergency care by
The concept is in keeping with the evolution of an providing equipment kits, IUD insertions and ANM kits
integrated approach to the programme aimed at improving at sub-centres.
the health status of young women and young children which - Facility of referral transport for pregnant women during
has been going on in the country namely family welfare emergency to the nearest referral centre through
programme, universal immunization programme, oral Panchayat in weak districts.
REPRODUCTIVE AND CHILD HEALTH PROGRAMME
than 30 per cent. The scheme was extended to all the health workers for providing round the clock services
districts of EAG states. The aim was to train at least one Dai did not function well in most of the states. On the
in every village, with the objective of making deliveries safe. contrary there is the experience from government of
Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu, where round the
Empowered Action Group (EAG) clock delivery and new born care services could be
An Empowered Action Group has been constituted in the ensured by providing 3 to 4 staff nurses/ ANM at the
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, with Union Minister PH Cs.
for Health and Family Welfare as chairman on 20th March b. Skilled attendance at delivery - It is now recognized
2001. As 55 per cent of the increase in the population of globally that the countries which have been successful
India is anticipated in the states of Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, in bringing down maternal mortality are the ones
Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, Odisha, Chhattisgarh, where the provision of skilled attendance at every
Jharkhand and Uttaranchal, these states are perceived to be birth and its linkage with appropriate referral services
most deficient in critical socio-demographic indices. for complicated cases have been ensured. The WHO
Through EAG, these states will get focussed attention for has also emphasized that skilled attendance at every
different health and family welfare programmes. birth is essential to reduce the maternal mortality in
any country. Guidelines for normal delivery and
District Surveys management of obstetric complications at PHC/CHC
There is no regular source of data to indicate the for medical officers and for ANC and skilled
reproductive health status of women. The RCH programme attendance at birth for ANM/LHVs have been
conducts district based rapid household survey to assess formulated and disseminated to the states.
the reproductive health status of women. The key indicators c. The policy decisions : ANMs I LHVs I SNs have now
are: been permitted to use drugs in specific emergency
a. Percentage of pregnant women with full ANC; situations to reduce maternal mortality. They have
b. Percentage of institutional deliveries and home also been permitted to carry out certain emergency
deliveries; interventions when the life of the mother is at stake.
c. Percentage of home deliveries by trained birth Emergency obstetric care
attendant;
Operationalization of FRUs and skilled attendance at
d. Current contraceptive prevalence rate; birth are the two activities which go hand in hand. In view of
e. Percentage of children fully immunized; this, simultaneous steps have been taken to ensure tackling
f. Percentage of unmet need for family planning; and obstetric emergencies. It has been decided that all the First
g. Percentage of household reported visits by health Referral Units be made operational for providing emergency
worker in previous 3 months. and essential obstetric care during the second phase of
RCH.The minimum services to be provided by a fully
RCH - PHASE II functional FRU are (41) :
RCH-phase II began from 1st April, 2005. The focus of 1. 24 hour delivery services including normal and
the programme is to reduce maternal and child morbidity assisted deliveries;
and mortality with emphasis on rural health care. 2. Emergency obstetric care including surgical
interventions like caesarean sections;
The major strategies under the second phase of RCH
are (40) : 3. New-born care;
4. Emergency care of sick children;
• Essential obstetric care
a. Institutional delivery 5. Full range of family planning services including
laproscopic services;
b. Skilled attendance at delivery
6. Safe abortion services;
• Emergency obstetric care
7. Treatment of STl/RTI;
a. Operationalizing First Referral Units
8. Blood storage facility;
b. Operationalizing PHCs and CHCs for round the clock
delivery services 9. Essential laboratory services; and
10. Referral (transport) services.
• Strengthening referral system
There are three critical determinants of a facility being
The Government of India has given some broad
guidelines and strategies for achieving the reduction in 'declared' as a FRU. They are : availability of surgical
maternal mortality rate and infant mortality rate. The interventions, new-born care and blood storage facility on a
initiatives which have been planned are : 24 hours basis.
To be able to perform the full range of FRU function,
Essential obstetric care a health facility must have the following facilities :
a. Institutional delivery To promote institutional (a) A minimum bed strength of 20-30. However, in difficult
delivery in RCH Phase II, it was envisaged that fifty areas, as the North-East states and the underserved areas of
percent of the PHCs and all the CHCs would be made EAG states, this could initially be relaxed to 10-12 beds
operational as 24-hour delivery centres, in a phased (b) A fully functional operation theatre (c) A fully functional
manner, by the year 2010. These centres would be labour room (d) An area earmarked and equipped for new-
responsible for providing basic emergency obstetric born care in the labour room, and in the ward (e) A functional
care and essential newborn care and basic newborn laboratory (f) Blood storage facility (g) 24 hour water supply
resuscitation services round the clock. The experience and electricity supply (h) Arrangements for waste disposal,
of RCH phase-I indicates that giving incentive to and (i) Ambulance facility.
JANANI SURAKSHA YOJANA
Strengthening referral system antenatal as well as postnatal care. She would also be
During RCH phase-I, funds were given to the Panchayat responsible for escorting the pregnant women to the
for providing assitance to poor people in the case of health centre. The scale of assistance under the
obstetric emergencies. Feedback from the states indicate that scheme from 2012-13 would be as follows :
there was no active involvement of Panchayats in running . .. . Ru~al Area . . ·.· •. . Urcbcin Area · ·
the scheme. Based on these experiences different states CatEig6~9:[}.i()thlf;•s ' AsHA1$···Total M~tht!r's . ASHA'si .fTotat
have proposed different modes of referral linkage in RCH · · . pac;kag~ ;:p;,ickage* Rs; · package ~·µatkage**·· Rs'.
Phase IL Some of them have indicated to involve local self
help groups, NGOs and women groups, whereas few others LPS 1400 600 2000 1000 400 1400
have indicated to outsource it. HPS 700 600 1300 600 400 1000
New initiatives LPS : Low performing states, HPS : High performing states
* ASHA incentive of Rs. 600/- in rural areas includes Rs. 300/- for
1. Training of MBBS doctors in life saving anaesthetic skills ANC component and Rs. 300/- for accompanying pregnant
for emergency obstetric care : Provision of adequate and woman for institutional delivery.
timely emergency obstetric care (EmOC) has been ** ASHA incentive of Rs.AOO/- in urban area includes Rs. 200/- for
ANC component and Rs. 200/- for accompanying pregnant
recognized as the most important intervention for saving woman for institutional delivery.
lives of pregnant women who may develop complications Source : (1)
during pregnancy or childbirth. The operationalisation of
First Referral Unit at sub-district/CHC level for providing The eligibility of cash assistance is as follows (1) :
EmOC to pregnant women is a crucial strategy of RCH-11, 1. In low performing states (LPS) : All women, including
which needs focussed attention. The training of MBBS those from SC and ST families, delivering in
doctors will be undertaken for only such numbers who government health centres like sub-centre, primary
are required for the functioning of FRUs and CHCs, and health centre, community health centre, first referral
shall be limited to the requirement of tackling emergency unit, general wards of district and state hospitals or
obstetric situations only. It is not the replacement of the accredited private institutions.
specialist anaesthetist. Government of India is also 2. In high performing states (HPS) : Below poverty line
introducing training of MBBS doctors in obstetric women, aged 19 years and above and the SC and ST
management skills. Federation of Obstetric and pregnant women.
Gynaecology Society of India has prepared a training
plan for 16 weeks in all obstetric management skills, The limitation of cash assistance for institutional delivery
including caesarean section operation. is as follows :
2. Setting up of blood storage centres at FRUs according to 1. In low performing states : All births, delivered in
government of India guidelines. health centre, government or accredited private health
institutions will get the benefit.
JANANI SURAKSHA YOJANA 2. In high performing states the benefit is only upto 2 live
births.
The National Maternity Benefit scheme has been ASHA package is available in all low performing states,
modified into a new scheme called Janani Suraksha Yojana
North-East states and in tribal districts of all states and
(JSY). It was launched on 12th April, 2005. The objectives
UTs.In rural areas it includes the following components :
of the scheme are - reducing maternal mortality and infant (a) Cash assistance for referral transport for pregnant
mortality through encouraging delivery at health
women to go to the nearest health centre for delivery
institutions, and focusing at institutional care among women (should not be less than Rs. 250/-); (b) Cash incentive : This
in below poverty line families.
should not be less than Rs. 200/- per delivery. ASHA should
The salient features of Janani Suraksha Yojana are as get her money after her post-natal visit to the beneficiary,
follows (5) : and when the child has been immunized for BCG; and
a. It is a 100 per cent centrally sponsored scheme; (c) Balance amount to be paid to ASHA in lieu of her
b. Under National Rural Health Mission, it integrates the services rendered by her. The payment should be made at
benefit of cash assistance with institutional care during the hospital/health institution itself.
antenatal, delivery and immediate post-partum care; The Yojana subsidizes the cost of caesarean section and
This benefit will be given to all women, both rural and for management of obstetric complications, upto Rs. 1500
urban, belonging to below poverty line household and per delivery to the government institutions, where
aged 19 years or above, up to first two live births. government specialists are not in position.
However, with a view to give special focus in 10 low In low performing and high performing states, all below
performing states (states having low institutional poverty line pregnant women preferring to deliver at home,
delivery rate), namely Uttar Pradesh, Uttaranchal, are entitled to cash assistance of Rs. 500 per delivery,
Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand, Bihar, Rajasthan, regardless of age and number of children (1).
Chattisgarh, Odisha, Assam and Jammu & Kashmir,
the benefit will be extended upto the third child if the The year 2006-07 was declared as the year for
mother, of her own accord, chooses to undergo institutional deliveries. During the year scope of the scheme
sterilization in the health facility where she delivered, was extended to the urban areas of high performing states
immediately after delivery. The other states are called and restriction of age and birth order were removed in the
high performing states. The Accredited Social Health low performing states. The benefits of the scheme was also
Activist (ASHA) would work as a link health worker extended to all women belonging to SC/ST families for
between the poor pregnant women and public sector institutional deliveries.
health insitution in the low performing states. ASHA During the year 2012-13, about 1.06 crore pregnant
would be responsible for making available institutional women were benefitted from the scheme (1).
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN JNDIA
Vandemataram scheme attendance at birth, care within the first seven days etc. are
This is a voluntary scheme wherein any obstetric and the factors that can reduce the maternal mortality (3).
gynaec specialist, maternity home, nursing home, lady
doctor/MBBS doctor can volunteer themselves for providing JANANl-SHISHU SURAKSHA KARYAKRAM (JSSK)
safe motherhood services. The enrolled doctors will display Government of India launched the Janani-Shishu
'Vandemataram logo' at their clinic. Iron and Folic Acid Suraksha Karyakram (JSSK) on 1st June 2011, a new
tablets, oral pills, TT injections etc. will be provided by the national initiative, to make available better health facitlies
respective District Medical Officers to the 'Vandemataram for women and child. The new initiatives provide the
doctors/ clinics' for free distribution to beneficiaries. The following facilities to the pregnant women (42) :
cases needing special care and treatment can be referred to
the government hospitals, who have been advised to take - All pregnant women delivering in public health
due care of the patients coming with Vandemataram cards. institutions to have absolutely free and no expense
delivery, including caesarean section. The entitlements
Safe abortion services include free drugs and consumables, free diet upto 3 days
In India, abortion is a major cause of maternal mortality during normal delivery and upto 7 days for C-section,
and morbidity and accounts for nearly 8.9 per cent maternal free diagnostics, and free blood wherever required. This
deaths. Majority of abortions take place outside authorized initiative would also provide for free transport from home
health services and/or by unauthorized and unskilled to institution, between facilities in case of a referral and
persons. Whether spontaneous or induced, abortion is a drop back home. Similar entitlements have been put in
matter of concern as it may lead to complications. Under place for all sick newborns accessing public health
RCH phase II following facilities are provided : . institutions for treatment till 30 days· after birth. The
scheme has now been extended to cover the
a. Medical method of abortion : Termination of early complications during ANC, PNC and also sick infants.
pregnancy with two drugs Mifepristone (RU 486)
followed by Misoprostol. They are considered safe The scheme is estimated to benefit more than 12 million
under supervision, with appropriate counselling. pregnant women who access government health facilities
Currently its use in India is recommended upto 7 weeks for their delivery. Moreover, it will motivate those who
(49 days) of amenorrhoea in a facility with provision still choose to deliver at their homes to opt for
for safe abortion services and blood transfusion. institutional deliveries.
Termination of pregnancy with RU 486 and
Misoprostol is offered to women under the preview of
Child health components
the MTP Act, 1971. The strategy for child health care, aims to reduce under-
b. Manual Vacuum Aspiration (MVA) : The department five child mortality through interventions at every level of
of family welfare has introduced Manual Vacuum service delivery and through improved child care practices
Aspiration (MVA) technique in the family welfare and child nutrition.
programme. Manual Vacuum Aspiration is a safe and
Nutritional rehabilitation centres (NRCs)
simple technique for termination of early pregnancy,
makes it feasible to be used in primary health centres Severe acute malnutrition is an important contributing
or comparable facilities, thereby increasing access to factor for most deaths among children suffering from
safe abortion services. The project of introducing the common childhood illness such as diarrhoea and pneumonia.
MVA technique has been piloted in coordination with Deaths among these malnourished children are preventable,
FOGSI, WHO and respective state governments provided timely and appropriate actions are taken. NRCs are
before being accepted for implementation by the facility based units providing medical and nutritional care to
ministry of health and family welfare. severe acute malnutrition (SAM) children under 5 years of
age who have medical complications. In addition special
Village Health and Nutrition Day focus is on improving the skill of mothers on child care and
Organizing Village Health and Nutrition Day once a feeding practices so that the child continues to get adequate
month at anganwadi centre to provide antenatal/post- care at home. The services provided at the NRCs include (1):
partum care for pregnant women, promote institutional a. 24 hours care and monitoring of the child;
delivery, health education, immunization, family planning b. Treatment of medical complication;
and nutrition services etc. c. Therapeutic feeding;
Maternal death review d. Sensory stimulation and emotional care;
e. Counselling on appropriate feed, care and hygiene; and
Maternal death review as a strategy has been spelt out
clearly in the RCH-11. Maternal death audit, both facility and f. Demonstration and practice-by-doing on the preparation
of energy dense food using locally available, culturally
community based, is an important strategy to improve the
acceptable and affordable food items.
quality of obstetric care and reduce maternal mortality and
morbidity. Guidelines and tools for initiating maternal death Presently 872 NRCs are functional across 17 states/UTs
review have been formulated (3). with 9377 dedicated beds (1).
Newborns classified as "Emergency" require urgent intervention and emergency measures. All such newborns will be admitted to SNCU after
initial stabilization.
Newborns classified as "Priority" are sick and need rapid assessment and admission to SNCU.
Newborns classified as non-urgent do not require urgent attention, but require further assessment and counselling.
FIG. 11
Shock (cold periphery with CFT>3 seconds, and Newborn accepting breast-feeds well
weak and fast pulse} Newborn has documented weight gain for 3
Coma, convulsions or encephalopathy consecutive days; and the weight is more than 1.5 kg
Abdominal distension Primary illness has resolved
Diarrhoea/dysentery In addition to the above, mother should be confident of
Bleeding taking care of the newborn at home.
Major malformations
HOME BASED NEWBORN CARE (HBNC) (44) :
II. Criteria for transfer from SNCU to the Step-Down
Newborn whose respiratory distress is improving and Home based newborn care is aimed at improving
does not require oxygen supplementation to newborn survival. The strategy of universal access to home
maintain saturation based newborn care must complement the strategy of
institutional delivery to achieve significant reduction in
Newborn on antibiotics for completion of duration of postpartum and neonatal mortality and morbidity. The
therapy
providers of service include anganwadi workers, ANM,
Low birth weight newborn (less than 1800 g}, who ASHA and the medical officer. However, ASHA is the main
are otherwise stable (for adequate weight gain} person involved in home based newborn care.
Newborn with jaundice requiring phototherapy but
otherwise stable The major objective of HBNC is to decrease neonatal
mortality and morbidity through :
Newborn admitted for any condition, but are now
thermodynamically and hemodynamically stable 1. The provision of essential newborn care to all newborns
and the prevention of complications.
III. Criteria for discharge from SNCU
Newborn is able to maintain temperature without 2. Early detection and special care of preterm and low birth
radiant warmer weight newborns.
Newborn is haemodynamically stable (normal CFT, 3. Early identification of illness in the newborn and
strong peripheral pulse} provision of appropriate care and referral.
4. Support the family for adoption of healthy practices and Mission on December 6th, 2013). The low birth weight
build confidence and skills of the mother to safeguard are followed up for two years and SNCU discharged
her health and that of the newborn. babies for one year.
The responsibilities of ASHA for home based newborn e. In cases where the woman delivers at her maternal
care are as follows (44) : house and returns to her husband's house, two ASHAs
undertake the HBNC visits, i.e., one at maternal house
1. Mobilize all pregnant mothers and ensure that they immediately after delivery, and another one at husband's
receive the full package of antenatal care. house when the new-born returns home or vice versa. In
2. Undertake birth planning and birth preparedness with such cases the HBNC incentive of Rs. 250 can be
the mother and family to ensure access to safe delivery. divided into two parts· in a way that each ASHA who
3. Provide newborn care. through a series of home visits completes 3 visits or more is entitled to Rs. 125. In these
which include the skills for: instances, if an ASHA undertakes less than 3 visits, she
a. Weighing the newborn, would not be entitled to HBNC incentive.
b. Measuring newborn temperature, f. In cases of twin or triples the incentive amount for ASHA
c. Ensuring warmth would be two time of the regular HBNC incentive of
d. Supporting exclusive breast-feeding by teaching the Rs. 250/- (i.e., Rs. 500/-) or three times of Rs. 250/-
mother proper positioning and attachment for (i.e., Rs. 750/-) respectively.
initiating and maintaining breast-feeding, The incentive money is paid to ASHA on 45th day
e. Diagnosing and counselling in case of problems with subject to the following :
breast-feeding, a. Record of birth weight in the mother and child protection
f. Promoting hand-washing, card;
g. Providing skin, cord and eye care, b. Immunization of newborn with BCG, first dose of OPV,
h. Health promotion and counselling mothers and hep B and DPT/pentavalent vaccine and entry into the
families on key messages on newborn care which mother and child protection card;
includes discouraging unhealthy practices such as c. Registration of birth; and
early bathing, and bottle feeding, d. Both mother and newborn are safe until 42nd day of
i. Ensuring prompt identification of sepsis or other delivery.
illnesses.
4. Assessing if the baby is high-risk (preterm or low birth
Navjat Shishu Suraksha Karyakram (NSSK)
weight), through the use of protocols and managing such NSSK is a programme aimed to train health personnel in
LBW or preterm babies through basic newborn care and resuscitation. It has been launched
a. Increasing the number of home visits, to address care at birth issue i.e. prevention of hypothermia,
b. Monitoring weight gain, prevention of infection, early initiation of breast-feeding and
basic newborn resuscitation. The objective of the new
c. Supporting and counselling the mother and family to
initiative is to have a trained health person in basic newborn
keep the baby warm and enabling frequent and care and resuscitation unit at every delivery point (6).
exclusive breast-feeding,
5. Detect signs and symptoms of sepsis, provide first level Integrated management of neonatal and
care and refer the baby to an appropriate centre. If the childhood illness (IMNCI)
family is unable to go, ASHA should ensure that the
ANM visits sick newborn on a priority basis. Integrated management of childhood illness (IMCI)
6. Recognize postpartum complications in the mother and The extent of childhood morbidity and mortality caused
refer appropriately. by diarrhoea, ARI, malaria, measles and malnutrition is
7. Counsel the couple for family planning. substantial. Most sick children present with signs and
8. Provide immediate newborn care, in case of those symptoms of more than one of these conditions. This overlap
deliveries that do not occur in institutions (home deliveries means that a single diagnosis may not be possible or
and deliveries occurring on the way to the institution). appropriate, and treatment may be complicated by the need
to combine for several conditions. An integrated approach to
ASHA will make visits to all .newborns according to
manage sick children is, therefore, necessary. !MCI is a
specified schedule upto 42 days of life. The schedule of visit
strategy for an integrated approach to the management of
is as follows :
childhood illness as it is important for child health
a. Six visits in the case of institutional delivery - Day 3, 7, programmes to look beyond the treatment of a single disease.
14, 21, 28, and 42. This is cost effective and emphasizes prevention of disease
b. Seven visits in the case of home delivery (Day 1, 3, 7, and promotion of child health and development besides
14, 21, 28 and 42). provision of standard case management of childhood illness.
c. In cases of Caesarean section. delivery, where the mother In the Indian context this strategy is quite pertinent
returns home after 5-6 days, ASHAs are entitled to full considering the recent evidence from NFHS-III report
incentive of Rs. 250 if she completes all five visits highlighting that ARI (17 per cent), diarrhoea (13 per cent),
starting from Day 7 to Day 42. fever (27 per cent) and under-nutrition (43 per cent) were
d. In cases when a newborn is discharged from SNCU, the commonest morbidities observed in the children aged
ASHAs are eligible to full incentive amount of Rs. 250 for under 3 years. Coverage of measles vaccination in children
completing the remaining visits. In addition, ASHAs are between 12-23 months is also low. An integrated approach
also eligible for an incentive of Rs. 50 for monthly follow- to address these major childhood illnesses seems to be an
up of low birth weight babies and newborns discharged effective strategy to promote child health in this country.
from SNCU (as approved by MSG of the National Health The line of action is as shown in Fig. 12.
II -~-----
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
• •
(Pink) {Yellow) (Green)
The RMNCH+A strategy is based on provision of adolescent health, and then to focus its efforts, and those of
comprehensive care through the five pillars, or thematic its development partners, on improving the coverage and
areas, of reproductive, maternal, neonatal, child, and quality of those interventions in 184 high-priority districts
adolescent health, and is guided by central tenets of equity, (HPDs) across India. Guidelines and tools were developed
universal care, entitlement, and accountability. The "plus" and policies were adjusted.
within the strategy focusses on : 1. High-Priority Districts: The RMNCH +A strategy
Including adolescence for the first time as a distinct life addresses India's inter-state and inter-district variations. The
stage; districts with relatively weak performance against
Linking maternal and child health to reproductive RMNCH+A indicators were identified. Uniform and clearly
health, family planning, adolescent health, HIV, gender, defined criteria were used to identify 184 high-priority
preconception and prenatal diagnostic techniques; districts across all 29 states. The RMNCH+A approach is a
Linking home and community-based services to facility- conscious articulation of the GOI's commitment to tailoring
based care; and programmes to meet the needs of previously underserved
Ensuring linkages, referrals, and counter-referrals groups, including adolescents, urban poor, and tribal
between and among health facilities at primary (primary populations.
health centre), secondary (community health centre), 2. Management tools and job aids: The RMNCH+A 5x5
and tertiary levels (district hospital). matrix identifies five high-impact interventions across each
In developing the RMNCH+A strategy, the aim is to of the five thematic areas, five cross-cutting and health
reach the maximum number of people in the remotest systems strengthening interventions, and, the minimum
corners of the country through a continuum of services, essential commodities across each of the thematic areas.
constant innovation, and routine monitoring of The 5x5 matrix as shown in Fig. 13, is an important tool for
interventions. In rolling out the new strategy, the emphasis is explaining the strategy in simple terms, organizing technical
on high impact interventions in each of the five thematic support, and monitoring progress with the states and high-
areas of reproductive, maternal, newborn, child, and priority districts.
Reproductive Health Maternal Health Newborn Health Child Health Adolescent Health
Foeus on spacing Use MCTS to ensure early - Early initiation and - Complementary - Address teenage
methods; registration of pregnancy exclusive . feeding, !FA pregnancy and•
particularly and full ANC. breast-feeding: supplementation. increase.
PPIUCD at high - Detect high risk Home based and focus on contraceptive
case load facilities. pregnancies and line list newborn care nutrition. prevalence in
- Focus on interval including severely anaemic through ASHA - Diarrhoea adolescents.
IUCD at all mothers and ensure Essential Newborn management at ..., Introduce
facilities including appropriate management. Care and community level . community b<)se<;l
subcentres on fixed Equip delivery points with resuscitation using ORS and. · 5eivices through ·
days. highly trained HR and services at all Zinc. peer educators;
- Home delivery of ensure equitable access to delivery points. - . Manageme'nt of - Strengthen ARSH ·
Contraceptives EmOC services through - Special Newborn pneumonia.·• clinics.
(HOC) and FRUs, Add MCH wings as Care Units with .:.. Full immunization - Roll out National
Ensuring Spacing per need. highly trained . coverage~ ll"on PlusJnitiative
afBirth (ESB) :.. Review maternal, infant human resource Rashtriya Bal including weekly
· through ASHAs. and child deaths for and other . Swasthya IFA
- Ensuring access to corrective actions. infrastructure. Karyakram . supplementation,
Pregnancy Testing - Identify villages with high - Community level (RBSK); screening - Promote menstrual
. Kits (PTK "Nischay ·numbers of home use of Gentamycin of children for 4Ds' hygiene.
Kits") and deliveries and distribute byANM. (birth defects,
strengthening Misoprostol to selected development
comprehensive women in 8th month of delays, deficiencies
abortion care pregnancy for . and disea.se) and .
services .. consumption during 3rd its management.
- Maintaining quality stage of labour; lnc.entivize
sterilization ANMs for home deliveries.
services.
FIG. 13
5 x 5 matrix for high impact RMNCH+A interventions
To be Implemented with High Coverage and High Quality
RMNCH+A •
- - - - - - - 1
Goals and Targets (37) these will be determined by the coverage achieved among
Taking into account the progress made so far in maternal the affected fraction of population as also the availability,
and child health, it is pertinent to establish the goals and accessability, actual utilization of services and quality of
targets for the implementation phase 2012-2017, after. services delivered.
considering the main reasons for mortality and interventions
Adolescent Health Programme (1, 37)
proven to have an impact on them. The 12th Five Year Plan
has defined the national health outcomes and the three Taking cognisance of the diverse nature of adolescent
goals that are relevant to RMNCH +A strategic approach are health needs, a comprehensive adolescent health strategy
as follows: has been developed. The priority under adolescent health
- Reduction of Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) to 25 per 1,000 include nutrition, sexual and reproductive health, mental
health, addressing gender-based violence, non-
live births by 2017.
communicable diseases and substance use. The strategy
Reduction in Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR) to 100 per proposes a set of interventions (health promotion,
100,000 live births by 2017. prevention, diagnosis, treatment and referral) across levels
Reduction in Total Fertility Rate (TFR) to 2.1 by 2017. of care. These interventions and approaches work towards
For achieving these goals, variable increase in the building protective factors that can help adolescents and
coverage level for key interventions are required. These are young people develop 'resilience' to resist negative
defined in the Table 13. behaviours and operate at four major levels: individual,
family, school and community by providing a
While the country aims to set one collective goal towards comprehensive package of information, commodities and
reducing preventable maternal, newborn and child deaths services.
by 2017, it is increasingly becoming apparent that there is
varied and unequal rate of progress within the states and The priority interventions are as follows :
districts, Therefore, state specific coverage targets should be 1. Adolescent nutrition; iron and folic acid
established against existing baselines. The national and state supplementation.
'scorecard' is being introduced as a · tool to increase 2. Facility-based adolescent reproductive and sexual health
transparency and track progress against reproductive and services (ARSH) (Adolescent health clinics).
maternal health and child survival indicators related with
3. Information and counselling on adolescent sexual
intervention coverage. For more details about the score
reproductive health and other health issues.
cards please refer to page 466.
4. Menstrual hygiene.
The implementation strategies of 5. Preventive health check-ups.
RMNCH+A (37)
The key interventions of RMNCH+A as a "Continuum of A. Adolescent Reproductive and Sexual Health
Care" are as shown in Fig. 14. The set of interventions are programme (ARSH)
those that have high impact on reducing mortality and Adolescent Reproductive and Sexual Health programme
improving survival. Most of these interventions have been (ARSH) focusses on reorganizing the existing public health
part of the previous phase of NRHM. The effectiveness of system in order to meet service needs of adolescents. Steps
TABLE 13
Coverage targets for key RMNCH +A interventions for 2017
.Increase facilities equipped for perinatal care (designated as 'delivery points') by 100%.
Increase proportion of all births in government and accredited private institutions at annual rate of 5.6% Jrom the baseline of 61 %
(SRS 2010).
Increase proportion of pregnant women receiving antenatal care at annual rate of 6% from the baseline of 53% (CES 2009).
Increase proportion of mothers and newboFns receiVing postnatal care at annual rate of 7:5% from.the baseline of 45% (CES 2009).
Increase proportion of deliveries conducted by skilled birth attendants at annual rate of 2% from the baseline of 76% (CES 2009) .
. · Increase exclusive breast-feeding rates at annua.1 rate of 9.6% from the baseline of 35% (CES 2009).
. . .
Reduce prevalence of under-five children who are underweight at annual rate of 5.5% from the.baseline of 45% (NFHS-3) .
..Increase coverage of three doses of combined diphtheria-tetanus-pertussis (DTP3) (12-23 months) at annual rate of 3.5% from the
baselif\e of 7% (CES 2.009).
Increase ORS use in under-five children with diarrhoea at annual rate of 7.2% from the baseline of 43% (CES 2009).
Reduce unmet need for family planning methods among eligible couples, married and unmarried, at annual rate of8,8% from the
baseline of 21%(DLHS3) .
. Increase met need for modern family planning methods among eligible couples at annual rate of 4.5 % from the baseline of 4 7% (DLH 3).
Reduce anaemia in adolescent girls and boys (15-19 years) at annual rate of 6% from the baseline of 56% and 30%, respectively
(NFHS-3). . .
Decrease the porportion of total fertility contributed by adolescents (15-19 years) at annual rate of 3.8% per year from the baseline of
16% (NFHS-3) ..
Raise child sex ratio in the 0-6 years age group at annual rate of 0.6% per year from the baseline of 914 (Census 2011).
HEALTU PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
• - -'---------
Clinical
Reproductive care Pregnancy and child birth care Newborn and childcare
- Comprehensive abortion care Skilled obstetric care, immediate - Essential newborn care
- RTVSTI case management, newborn care and resuscitation Care of sick newborn (SNCU, NBSU)
- Postpartum IOCD and - Emergency obstetric care Facility-based care of childhood illnesses (IMNCl)
sterilization; interval - Preventing Parerit-to~Child Care of children with severe acute
IOCD procedures Transmission (PPTCT) of HIV malnutrition (NRC)
- Adolescent friendly - Postpartum sterilization Immunization
health services
Outreach/Sub-centr.e
·. Reproductive health
. <;are Antenatal care Postnatal care Child health care
..,, . Family planning (including - Full antenatal care package - Early .detection and - First level assessment and
. IUCD insertion, OCP and - · PPTCT management of illnesses care for newborn and
· . condoms} in mother and newborn childhood illnesses
- Prevention and Immunization - Immunization
management of STis - Micro-nutrient
- Peri-cbnc~ption folic acid supplementation
supplementation
Weekly IFA supplementation - Counselling and preparation for - . Home-based newborn care and prompt referral
- Information and counselling newborn care, breast-feeding, (HBNC scheme)
on sexual reproductive birth preparedness - Antibiotic for suspected case of newborn sepsis
health and family planning Demand generation for Infant and Young Child Feeding (IYCF}, including
- Comminity based promotion pregnancy care and exclusive breast-feeding and complementary feeding.
and delivery of institutional delivery - Child health screening and_ early
contraceptives (JSY, JSSK} . . intervention services (0-18 years) ·
- Menstrual hygiene Early childhood development
- Danger sign recognition and care-seeking for illness
Use of ORS and Zinc in case of diarrhoea
FIG. 14
Continuum of care across life cycle and different levels of health system
are being taken to ensure improved service delivery for information and commodities to more than 2.5 million
adolescents during routine sub-centre clinics and also to adolescents for varied health related needs such as
ensure service availability on fixed days and timings at the contraceptives provision, management of menstrual
Primary Health Centre, Community Health Centre and problems, RTI/STI management, antenatal care and
District Hospital levels. Core package of services includes anaemia.
promotive, preventive, curative and counselling services ii. Facility based counselling services: Counselling services
being made available for all adolescents married and for adolescents on important issues such as nutrition,
unmarried, girls and boys through adolescent friendly health puberty, RTI/STI prevention and contraception,
clinics. ARSH programme envisages creating an enabling delaying marriage and childbearing, and concerns
environment· for adolescents to seek health care services related to contraception, abortion services, pre-marital
through a spectrum of programmatic approaches : concerns, substance misuse, sexual abuse and mental
Facility based health services-Adolescent Friendly health problems are being provided through
Health Clinics; recruitment and training of dedicated counsellors. At
Counselling-Dedicated ARSH and ICTC counselling; present 881 dedicated ARSH counsellors are providing
comprehensive counselling services to adolescents
Community based interventions-Outreach activities, and across the country. In 23 States/UTs, 1439 ICTC
Capacity building for. service. providers. counsellors have been enrolled to provide sexual and
i. Adolescent Friendly Health Clinics (AFHC): Through reproductive health counselling to adolescents.
Adolescent Friendly Health Clinics, routine check-up iii.Outreach activities: Outreach activities are being
at primary, secondary and tertiary levels of care is conducted in schools, colleges, teen clubs, vocational
provided on fixed day clinics. At present 6,302 AFHCs training centres, during Village Health Nutrition Day
are functional across the country providing services, (VHND), health melas and in collaboration with self
help groups to provide adequate and appropriate to be the one that have been designated as "delivery points''
information to adolescents in spaces where they and therefore have provision for full complement of RMNCH
normally congregate. services. Following discharge from the health facilities,
mothers and newborns will be provided postnatal care
B. Weekly Iron and Folic Acid Supplementation (WJFS) through home visits. Most of these services are already in
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare has launched the place.
Weekly Iron and Folic Acid Supplementation (WIFS) The priority interventions are as follows (37) ·:
Programme to meet the challenge of high prevalence and 1. Delivery of antenatal care package and tracking of
incidence of anaemia amongst adolescent girls and boys. high-risk pregnancies.
The long term goal is to break the intergenerational cycle of 2. Skilled obstetric care.
anaemia, the short term benefit is of a nutritionally
improved human capital. The programme, implemented 3. Immediate essential newborn care and resuscitation.
across the country, both in rural and urban areas, will cover 4. Emergency obstetric and newborn care.
10.25 crore adolescents. The key interventions under this 5. Postpartum care for mother and newborn.
programme are as follows : 6. Postpartum IUCD and sterilization.
Administration of supervised weekly iron-folic acid 7. Implementation of PC & PNDT Act.
supplements of 100 mg elemental iron and 500 µg folic
acid using a fixed day approach. NEWBORN AND CHILD CARE
- Screening of target groups for moderate/severe anaemia The interventions in this phase of life mainly focus on
and referring these cases to an appropriate health children under 5 years of age. Given below are the priority
facility. child health interventions that are already in place under
- Biannual de-worming (Albendazole 400 mg), six months NRHM.
apart, for control of helminths infestation.
Priority Interventions (37) :
- Information and counselling for improving dietary intake
and for taking actions for prevention of intestinal worm 1. Home-based newborn care and prompt referral.
infestation. 2. Facility-based care of the sick newborn.
3. Integrated management of common childhood
C. Menstrual Hygiene Scheme (1) illnesses (diarrhoea, pneumonia and malaria).
The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare has launched 4. Child nutrition and essential micronutrients
scheme for promotion of menstrual hygiene among supplementation.
adolescent girls in the age group of 10-19 years in rural 5. Immunization
areas. This programme aims at ensuring that girls have 6. Early detection and management of defects at birth,
adequate knowledge and information about menstrual deficiencies, diseases and disability in children
hygiene and have access to high quality sanitary napkins 0-18 years of age (Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram).
along with safe disposal mechanisms. Key activities under
the scheme include : CARE THROUGH THE REPRODUCTIVE YEARS
- Community based health education and outreach in the Reproductive health needs to exist across the
target population to promote menstrual health; reproductive years and therefore access to these services is
- Ensuring regular availability of sanitary napkins to the required in various life stages starting from the adolescence
adolescents; phase. Reproductive health services include the provision
- Sourcing and procurement of sanitary napkins; for contraceptives, access to comprehensive and safe
- Storage and di.stribution of sanitary napkins to the abortion services, diagnosis and management of sexually
adolescent girls; transmitted infections, including HIV.
- Training of ASHA and nodal teachers in menstrual A new strategic direction has been developed for the
health, and family planning programme, wherein it has been
- Safe disposal of sanitary napkins. repositioned to not only achieve population stabilisation but
also to reduce maternal mortality as also infant and child
CARE DURING PREGNANCY AND CHILDBIRTH (37) mortality. A target-free approach based on unmet needs for
contraception; equal emphasis on spacing and limiting
Pregnancy and childbirth are physiological events in the methods; and promoting 'children by choice' in the context
life of a woman. Though most pregnancies result in normal of reproductive health are the key approaches to be adopted
birth, it is estimated that about 15 per cent may develop for the promotion of family planning and improving
complications, which cannot be predicted. Most of these reproductive health.
complications can be averted by preventive care, skilled care
at birth, early detection of risk, appropriate and timely These services will be delivered at home, through
management of obstetric complications and postnatal care. community outreach and at all levels of health facilities and
include adolescents and adults in the reproductive age
The delivery of services during pregnancy and childbirth group.
requires a strong element of continuum of care from
community to facility level and vice versa. While the Priority interventions (37)
antenatal package, counselling and preparation for newborn
care, breast-feeding, birth and emergency preparedness will 1. Community-based promotion and delivery of
mainly be delivered through community outreach; skilled contraceptives.
birth attendance are to be provided at health facilities, 2. Promotion of spacing methods (interval IUCD).
primarily 24x7 PHC and FRU. These facilities are most likely 3. Sterilization services (vasectomies and tubectomies).
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
4. Comprehensive abortion care (includes MTP Act). will be established in high case load facilities with adequate
5. Prevention and management of sexually transmitted prov1s1on of beds. The new MCH wings will be
and reproductive infections (STI/RTI). comprehensive units (30/50/100 bedded) with antenatal
waiting rooms, labour wing, essential newborn care room,
Delivery Points (37) SNCU, operation theatre, blood storage units and a
postnatal ward and an academic wing. This will ensure
The provision of services for delivery care in a health provision of emergency maternal and newborn care services
facility generally serves as an important indicator to assess as well as 48 hours stay, i.e., quality postnatal care to
whether the facility is optimally functional or not. The mothers and newborns (37).
concept of 'delivery point' emerges from this presumption.
Among the health facilities designated as Ll, L2 and L3, SCORE CARD (37)
there are some facilities which are conducting deliveries
above a minimum bench mark (minimum 3 normal A. Health Management Information System - based
deliveries per month at Ll; minimum 10 deliveries per dashboard monitoring system:
month, including management of complications, at L2; The choice of indicators for dashboard monitoring system
minimum 20-50 deliveries per month including C-section at are based on life cycle approach, and are as shown in
L3). These are designated as delivery points. According to Fig. 15.
the government mandate, these facilities should be the first 1. Steps underway to include proportion
to be strengthened for providing comprehensive RMNCH
Services. This should be supported by a referral transport - Pregnant women <19 yrs old to total women
system that reaches the patient within 30 minutes of registered for ANC.
receiving a call and the health facility within the next - Home Based New born Care (HBNC) visit by ASHA
30 minutes. The long-term goal should be to establish and to planned visits.
operationalize Basic Emergency Obstetric Care and - Children 9-11 months fully immunized to children
Comprehensive Emergency Obstetric Care Centres as per 9-11 months due for immunization.
the expected delivery load in the state and district. - Children with diarrhoea who were treated with ORS to
children reported with diarrhoea.
Maternal and Child Health (.MCH) Wing (37) - Children with diarrhoea who were treated with ORS
Most health facilities, especially those at secondary and and Zinc to children reported with diarrhoea.
tertiary level are having high case load of pregnant women Children discharged live from SNCUs to number of
and newborn due to increase in institutional deliveries admissions in SNCUs.
following launch of JSY and JSSK. Therefore, it has been - Children with ARI who received treatment to children
decided that dedicated Maternal and Child Health Wings reported with ARI.
Proportion of:
1st Trimester registration fo total ANC registration
Pregnant women recieved 3 ANC to total ANC registration
Pregnant women given 100 !FA to total ANC registration
Cases of pregnant women with obstetric complications and attended to reported deliveries
Pregnant women receiving TT2 or Booster to total ANC registration
Pregnancy care
Proportion of:
Postpartum sterilization to Proportion of:
total female sterilization SBA attended home
Male sterilization to
total sterilization
IUD insertions in public plus
private accredited institutions
Reproductive
age group Child birth J deliveries to total
reported home deliveries
Institutional deliveries to
total ANC registration
to all family planning methods C-Section to reported
(IUD plus permanent) deliveries
Proportion of:
Newborns breast-fed within 1 hour to total live births
Postnatal matedal
& Newborn care VJ
Women discharged in less than 48 hours of delivery in public institutions to total
number of deliveries in public institutions
Newborns weighing less than 2.5 kg to newborns weighed at birth
Newborns visited within 24 hrs of home delivery to total reported home deliveries
Infants 0 to 11 months old who received measles vaccine to reported live births
FIG. 15
Choice of indicators for dash board
SCORECARD
2. All India average for each indicator will be taken as the Latest available data from national surveys will be taken
reference point. into consideration including Sample Registration System,
3. States scores will be determined on the basis of the Coverage Evaluation Survey, District Level Household and
national average : Facility Survey, National Family Health Survey, Census,
Annual Health Survey.
- Positive scores from 1 to 4 for those above the
national average (for positive indicators) and for those All India average for each indicator will be taken as a
below the national average (for negative indicators). reference point. States will be colour coded based on :
- Negative scores -1 to -4 for those below national - Mortality indicators, nutrition, fertility: Green less than
average (for positive indicators) and for those above 20% of the national average, Yellow - 20% below and
national average (for negative indicators). above national average, Red - more than 20% of the
4. All the indicator scores for each state will be consolidated national average.
as state score (all indicators have the same weightage) - Remaining Indicators: Green - more than 20% of the
5. States have been classified into four categories based on national average, Yellow - 20% below and above the
the state scores. national average, Red less than 20% of the national
B. Survey based score card (37) average
19 survey based outcome and coverage indicators related The scorecard will be updated as and when (every 1-2
to health, nutrition and sanitation will oe used for the score years) new survey data is available.
card. The indicators are as shown in Table 14.
TABLE 14
INDIA NEWBORN ACTION PLAN (INAP)
Indicators for survey based score card
In the past two decades, there has been remarkable
progress in the survival of mother and children beyond the
Mortality - · Under-five i:nortaHty r~te newborn period. Presently, the newborn health has
- Infant mortality rate captured the attention of the policy makers and two
· - Neonatal mortality'rate important milestones in this direction have been the
- Maternal mortality ratio National · Rural Health Mission and the Reproductive,
{per 100,000 live births) Maternal, Newborn, Child and Adolescent Health Strategy
Fertility - Total fertility rate. (RMNCH+A Strategy), NRHM has provided unprecedented
- Births to women during age 15-19 attention and resources for newborn health. By adopting
out of total births RMNCH+A strategy in 2013, the country observed a
paradigm shift in its approach towards health care.
INutrition - Children with birth weight less than 2.5 kg
Newborn health occupies centre stage in the overall
- C_hildren under 3 years.who are underweight strategy as all the inter-linkages between various
jGender - Child sex ratio 0-6 j components have the greatest impact on the mortality and
Cross-cutting . Full Immunization morbidity rates of the newborn.
Children {12-23 months) receiving In India, Newborn Action Plan (INAP) developed in
1 dose BCG, 3 doses of DPT/OPV/hep B response to the global Every Newborn Action Plan (ENAP),
each and 1 measles vaccine was launched in June 2014. The plan outlines a targetted
strategy for accelerating the reduction of preventable
Household having access to toilet facility
newborn deaths and stillbirths in the country. INAP defines
- Couple using spacing method for more the latest evidence on effective interventions which will not
than 6 months
only help in reducing the burden of stillbirths and neonatal
Diarrhoea - ORT or increased fluids for diarrhoea mortality, but also maternal deaths. The goal is to attain
(among children <2 years of age "Single Digit Neonatal Mortality rate by 2030" and Single
who had diarrhoea in preceeding Digit Stillbirth rate by 2030.
2 weeks) The INAP will be implemented within the existing
Pneumonia - Care seeking for ARI in any health facilitj,1 RMNCH+A framework, and guided by the principles of
(Among children <2 years of age who
integration, equity, gender, quality of care, convergence,
accountability and partnerships. Its strength is built on its
had ARI in preceding 2 weeks)
six pillars of intervention packages impacting stillbirths
Service Delivery - Woman who received 4 + ANC and newborn health, which includes : (a) Pre-conception
Skilled Birth Attendance (delivery by and antenatal care; (b) Care during labour and
·doctor, ANM/Nurse/LHV) childbirth; (c) Immediate newborn care; (d) Care of the
.,. Mothers who recieved postnatal care from a healthy newborn; (e) Care of small and sick newborn;
doctor/nurse/LHV/ANM/other health and (f) Care beyond newborn survival. For effective
personnel within 2 days of delivery for implementation, a systematic plan of monitoring and
their last birth(%)
evaluation has been developed with a list of dashboard
Early- initiation o_f breast-feeding ( < lhr) indicators (33).
Exlusive breast-feeding for 6 months
(among 6-9 months children) The interventions under the National Health Mission
focussing on newborns are shown in Table 15.
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
TABLE 15
Interventions under National Health Mission focussing on newborns
Integrated Management of Standard case management of major causes Operationalised in more than 500 districts
Neonatal and Childhood of neonatal and childhood morbidity - 5.9 lakhs health and other functionaries, including
Illnesses (IMNCI) at the and mortality physicians, nurses, AWWs, and ASHAs trained
community level and F-IMNCI under IMNCI ·
at health facilities (2007) - 26,800 medical officers and specialists placed at the
CHCs/FRUs trained under F-IMNCJ
Navjat Shishu Suraksha Basic newborn care and resuscitation - 1.3 lakh health providers trained to-date
Karyakram (NSSK) (2009) training programme
Janani Shishu Suraksha Zero out-of-pocket expenditure for maternal - Implem'ented in all states and· UTs
Karyakram (JSSK) and infant health services through free - Assured service package benefits extended to sick
(2011) healthcare and referral transport entitlements children upto age one
Facility Based Newborn Newborn care facilities at various levels of 14,135 NBCCs established at delivery points to
Care (FBNC) public health services that includes Newborn provide essential newborn care
(2011) Care Corners (NBCCs) at all points of 1,810 NBSUs established at CHCs/FRUs
childbirth to provide immediate care; - 548 SNCUs established at district/sub-district
Newborn Stabilization Units (NBSUs) at hospitals or medical colleges
CHC/FRUs for management of selected - More than 6,300 personnel provided FBNC training
conditions and to stablize sick newborns - Online reporting system adapted and scaled up in
before referral to higher centres; and Special seven states with 245 SNCUs made online and
Newborn Care Unit (SNCUs) at district/ more than 2.5 lakhs newborns registered in
sub-district hospitals to.care for sick newborns the data base.
(all types of care except assisted ventilation
and major surgeries)
I
Home Based Newborn Provision of essential newborn care to all Implemented in all states and UTs
Care (HBNC) newborns, special care of preterm and Most of the ASHAs trained in newborn care
(2011) low-birth-weight newborns; early detection - ASHAs visited more than 12 lakhs newborns in 2013
of illness followed by referral; and support to
family for adoption of healthy practices,
by ASHA worker
Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Screening of children with birth defects, - All children, ages 0 to 18 years targeted
Karyakram (RBSK) diseases, deficiencies, and developmental - ·More than 8 crore children screened and more than
(2013) delays (including disabilities) 10 lakhs children identified for tertiary care in 2013
Source: (33)
Strategic Intervention Packages (33) based on the six packages described below :
The interventions are grouped in six packages, 1. Pre-conception and antenatal care
corresponding to the various life stages of the newborn. It is
estimated that high coverage of available intervention Health interventions must start well before conception
packages can prevent almost three-quarters of the newborn and their impact on the neonatal and stillbirth outcome
deaths, one-third of stillbirths and half of the maternal requires equivalent consideration. The importance of
deaths by 2025. antenatal care for improved neonatal and perinatal outcome
is well established; however, coverage of a few salient
The interventions have been categorized as : interventions needs increased attention (e.g., use of long
a. Essential [E], to be implemented universally; lasting insecticide treated nets and intermittent preventive
treatment of malaria, antenatal syphilis screening combined
b. Situational [SJ, implementation dependent on
with treatment and increased emphasis on early detection,
epidemiological context; and prompt treatment of complications in pregnancy such as
c. Advanced [A], implementation based on healthc pre-eclampsia, type-2 diabetes).
system capacity of the state/district. The strategic interventions for pre-conception and
The states are urged to develop their own action plans antenatal care for newborns are given below.
INDIA NEWBORN ACTION PLAN (!NAP)
Pre-conception and antenatal care interventions package The strategic interventions for care during labour and
child birth are given below :
IFamily and community
Care during labour and childbirth
1. · Reproductive health & family planning [E]
Adolescent reproductive health r Family and community
Delaying age of marriage and first pregnancy
1. Skilled birth attendance [E]
Birth spacing
2. Nutrition related interventions [El
2. Clean birth practices [E] 1
j Outreach/Sub-centre
Balanced energy protein supplementation I
I
Peri-conceptional folic acid 3. Identification of complications and timely referral [E]
Maternal calcium supplementation 4. Pre-referral dose by ANM [E]
Multiple micronutrient supplementation ,... Antenatal corticosteriods in preterm labour
(Iron, folic acid and iodine)
Antibiotics for premature rupture of membranes
Nutrition counselling
3. Counsi:illing and birth preparedness [E] IHealthfacility
4. Prevention against malaria [S]
5. Emergency obstetric care [E]
IOutreach/Sub-centre - Basic and comprehensive
6. Management of preterm labour [E]
5. Antenatal screening for anaemia and hypertensive disorders
of pregnancy (PIH, preeclampsia, eclampsia) [E] Antenatal corticosteroids in preterm labour
6. Antenatal screening for malaria [SJ - Antibiotics for premature rupture of membranes
7. Prevention and management of mild to moderate anaemia [E]
8. Maternal tetanus immunization [E] 3. Immediate newborn care
9. Adolescent friendly health services (nutrition and reproductive Immediate care is the basic right of every newborn baby.
health counselling) [E] This package includes interventions such as immediate drying
and stimulation, provision of warmth, hygienic care, early
10. Interval IUCD insertion [E]
I initiation of breast-feeding, and administration of vitamin K.
j Health facility For babies who do not breathe at birth, neonatal resuscitation
11. Antenatol •creen;ng and management of <eve<e anaem;a, I is a crucial life-saving intervention. Resusdtation training of
hypertensive disorders of pregnancy (PIH, preeclampsia,
eclampsia), gestational diabetes, syphilis [E]
I providers in facilities reduces intrapartum-related neonatal
deaths and early neonatal deaths substantially. Hypothermia
: z::::~::;:~~:::.::~:.n~:::::::::)
14. Postpartum family planning services including
PPIUCD insertion [E]
[E] 1
I
is a risk factor for neonatal mortality, especially in cases of
preterm and low birth weight babies. All steps should be taken
to prevent and manage hypothermia, and rooming-in of
babies with mother must be universally practiced. Delayed
cord clamping in newborns, including pre-term babies is
associated with decreased risk of anaemia and
15. Prevention of Rh disease using anti D im~unoglobulin [S~ intraventricular haemorrhage. Administration of vitamin Kat
birth prevents haemorrhagic disease of newborn.
2. Care during labour and childbirth The strategic interventions for immediate newborn care
Intra-partum complications and preterm births remain a are given below :
challenge to the neonatal survival. Care during labour and
childbirth have the potential to reduce stillbirths by a third. It Immediate newborn care
is important to emphasize that BEmOC can reduce intra-
partum-related neonatal deaths by 40% and CEmOC can
IFamily and cdmmunity
also reduce newborn mortality by 40%, whereas skilled I i. Delayed cord clamping [E]
attendance at birth alone without access to the 1 2. Interventions to prevent hypothermia [E]
emergency component has a smaller effect at 25%. Care at Immediate drying
childbirth also has additional benefits on child survival, Head covering
improved growth, reduced disability and non-communicable Skin-to-skin care
diseases. Delayed bathing
Antenatal corticosteroids use to manage preterm labour 3. Early initiation and exclusive breast-feeding [E]
not only reduces neonatal deaths by 31 %, but this 4. Hygiene to prevent infection [E]
intervention is also associated with reduced need of
j Outreach/Sub-centre
specialized care for newborns, such as ventilators, etc.
Antibiotics administration for pre-mature rupture of 5. Vitamin Kat birth [E]
membranes (PROM) reduces early-onset postnatal sepsis. 6. Neonatal resuscitation [El
Clean birth practices especially hand-washing with soap and
water by birth attendant has been found to reduce mortality
due to sepsis in births at home (15%), facilities (27%), and
Health facility I
during postnatal period (40%). I1. Advanced neonatal resuscitation [E] _J
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
Monitoring and Evaluation (33) with ENAP :-- i.e., 2025, 2030, and 2035.
A comphrehensive assessment of targets would be done Following core indicators (dashboard indicators) have
in 2020, which will help plan course corrections, if any, in been selected for monitoring, based on direct relevance to
on-going interventions. Further, from the year 2020, the the action plan framework, targets, goals, and review of
milestones will be reviewed every five years keeping in sync current data availability.
The major objectives of the programme are as follows (4) : diseases etc. to identify individuals who are at a high-risk of
Prevent and control common NCDs through behaviour developing diabetes, hypertension and CVDs warranting
and lifestyle changes. forfher investigation/action. Detailed investigation will be
Provide early diagnosis and management of common done in respect of persons those who are at high-risk of
NCDs. developing NCDs on screening and those who are referred
from CHCs. They shall provide regular management and
Build capacity at various levels of health care for annual assessment of persons suffering from cancer, diabetes
prevention, diagnosis and treatment of common NCDs. and hypertension. People with established cardiovascular
- Train human resource within the public health set-up diseases shall also be managed at district hospital. They shall
viz doctors, paramedics and nursing staff to cope with provide home based palliative care for chronic, debilitating
the increasing burden of NCDs, and and progressive patients. Apart from clinical services, district
- Establish and develop capacity for palliative & hospital shall be involved in promotion of healthy lifestyle
rehabilitative care. through health education and counselling to the patients and
their attendants.
The programme is to be implemented in 20,000 Urban health check-up scheme for diabetes and high
sub-centres and 700 community health centres (CHCs) in blood pressure
100 districts across 21 States/UTs and the strategies include
promoting healthy lifestyle through massive health The scheme has the following objectives :
education and mass media efforts at country level, 1. To screen urban slum population for diabetes and high
opportunistic screening of persons above the age of blood pressure.
30 years, establishment of Non~Communicable Disease 2. To create database for prevalence of diabetes and high
(NCD) Clinic at Community Health Centre (CHC) and blood pressure in urban slums.
District level, development of trained manpower and 3. To sensitize the urban slum population about healthy
strengthening of tertiary level health facilities. For long-term lifestyle.
sustainability of the programme, service delivery will be
through existing public health infrastructure and systems. The blood sugar and blood pressure will be checked for
The various approaches such as mass media, community all 2 30 years and all pregnant women of all age.
education and interpersonal communication will be used for The NCD cells at the centre, state and district will
behavioural change focusing on the following messages : implement and monitor the National Programme for
Increased intake of healthy foods Prevention and Control of Cancer, Diabetes, CVD and
Stroke (NPCDCS} in various states. The national NCD cell
Increased physical activity has been established at the centre.
- Avoidance of tobacco and alcohol
.B. Cancer component under NPCDCS
- Stress management.
Cancer is an important public health problem in India,
Activities at Sub-Centre with nealy 10 lakh new cases occurring every year in the
country. It is estimated that there are 2.8 million cases of
Health promotion for behaviour and lifestyle change will cancer in the country at any given point of time. With the
be carried out by organizing various camps, interpersonal objectives of prevention, early diagnosis and treatment, the
communications, posters, banners, etc. Opportunistic national cancer control programme was launched in
screening of population above 30 years will be carried out 1975-76. In view of the magnitude of the problem and gaps
using BP measurement and blood glucose by strip method. in the: availability of cancer treatment facilities across the
The suspected cases of diabetes and hypertension will be country, the programme was revised in 1984-85 and
referred to CHCs of higher health facility for further subsequently in December 2004. During 2010, the
diagnosis and management. For screening of diabetes, programme was integrated with National Programme on
glucometer optium xceed, optium test strips and auto Prevention and Control of Diabetes, Cardiovascular Disease
disabled lancets are being procured at central level and and Stroke. The objectives of the programme are :
provided to the concerned states as per their requirements
from time to time. a. Primary prevention of cancers by health education;
b. Secondary prevention i.e. early detection and
Activities at CHC diagnosis of common cancer such as cancer of cervix,
mouth, breast and tobacco related cancer by
NCD clinic at CHC shall do the diagnosis by required screening/self examination method; and
investigations/test like blood sugar measurement, lipid
profile, ultrasound, X-ray and ECG etc., management and c. Tertiary prevention i.e. strengthening of the existing
stabilization of common CVD, diabetes and stroke cases institutions. of comprehensive therapy including
(out- patient as well as in-patients). One of the nurses palliative care.
appointed under the programme shall undertake home visits The schemes under the revised programme are :
for bedridden cases, supervise the work of health workers
and attend monthly clinics being held in the villages on a 1. Regional Cancer Centre Scheme
random basis. Complicated cases of diabetes, high blood The existing regional cancer centres are being further
pressure etc. shall be referred from CHC to the district strengthened to act as referral centres for complicated and
hospital for further investigations and management. difficult cases at the tertiary level. One time assistance of
Rs. 3 crores during the plan period is provided to Regional
Activities at district hospital Cancer Centres except TMH, Mumbai and JRCH (AIIMS) for
NCD clinic at district hospital shall screen persons above strengthening and to the CNCI, Kolkata on the approved
the age of 30 years for diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular pattern of funding.
NPCDCS
2. OTJcology Wing Development Scheme TOBACCO CONTROL LEGISLATION (49)
This scheme had been initiated to fill up the geographic A comprehensive tobacco control legislation titled "The
gaps in the availability of cancer treatment facilities in the Cigarettes and other Tobacco Products (Prohibition of
coun1ry. Central assistance is provided for purchase of Advertisement and Regulation of Trade and Commerce,
equipment, which include a cobalt unit besides other Production, Supply and Distribution) Act, 2003" was passed
equipment. A part of the grant can be used for the civil work by the parliament in April, 2003 and notified in Gazette of
but the manpower is to be provided by the concerned state India on 25th Feb, 2004. The important provisons of the Act
government/institution. The quantum of central assistance is are:
Rs. 3 crores per institution under the scheme.
a. Prohibition of smoking in public places;
3. Decentralized NGO scheme b. Prohibition of direct and indirect advertisement of
Th.is scheme is meant for IEC activities and early cigarette and other products;
detection of cancer. The scheme is operated by the nodal c. Prohibition of sale of cigarette and other tobacco
agencies and the NGOs are given financial assistance for products to a person below the age of 18 years,
undertaking health education and early detection activities d. Prohibition of sale of tobacco products near the
of cancer. educational institutions;
4. !EC activities at central level e. Mandatory depiction of statutory warnings (including
pictorial warnings) on tobacco packs; and
IEC activities at the central level are to be initiated in
order to give wider publicity about the Anti Tobacco f. Mandatory depiction of tar and nicotine contents
Legislation for discouraging consumption of cigarettes and alongwith maximum permissible limits on tobacco
other tobacco related products, and for creating awareness packs.
among masses about the ill effects of consumption of The rules related to prohibition of smoking in public
tobacco and tobacco related products. Under this scheme places came into force from the 2nd October, 2008. As per
wider publicity would also be given about the rules being rules, it is mandatory to display smoke free signages at all
formulated for implementation of various provisions of the public places. Labelling and packaging rules mandating the
anti-tobacco legislation. November 7th is observed as depiction of specified health warnings on all tobacco
National Cancer Awareness Day in the country. product packs came into force from 3!51 May, 2009.
5. Research and training National Tobacco Control Programme (3) : In order
to facilitate the implementation of the Tobacco Control
Training programmes, monitoring and research activities Laws, to bring about greater awareness about the harmful
will be organized at the central level under this scheme. effects of tobacco, and to fulfill the obligations under the
Following training manuals have been developed under the WHO-Framework convention on tobacco control, Govt. of
NCCP for capacity building in cancer control at district India has launched a new National Tobacco Control
level: Programme in the 11th Five Year Plan. Pilot phase was
a. Manual for health professionals launched in 16 districts covering 9 states in 2007-08. It now
b. Manual for cytology covers 42 districts in 21 states in the country. The main
components of the programme are :
c. Manual for palliative care
d. Manual for tobacco cessation 1. Public awareness/mass media campaigns for awareness
building and for behavioural change;
Cancer services under national programme for prevention
and control of cancer, diabetes, CVD and stroke (6) : 2. Establishment of tobacco product testing laboratories, to
build regulatory capacity, as required under COTPA,
1. Common diagnostic services, basic surgery, 2003;
chemotherapy and palliative care for cancer cases is 3. Mainstreaming the programme components as a part of
being made available at 100 district hospitals. the health delivery mechanism under the NRHM
2. Each district is being supported with Rs. 1.66 crores per framework;
annum for the following.
4. Mainstream research and training on alternate crops and
- Chemotherapy drugs are provided for 100 patients at livelihood, with other nodal ministries;
each district hospital.
5. Monitoring and evaluation, including surveillance, e.g.
- Day care chemotherapy facilities is being established adult tobacco survey;
at 100 district hospitals.
6. Dedicated tobacco control cells for effective
Facility for laboratory investigations including
implementation and monitoring of anti-tobacco
mammography is being provided at 100 district
initiatives;
hospitals and if not available, this can be outsourced
at government rates. 7. Training of health and social workers, NGOs school
3. Home based palliative care is being provided for teachers etc;
chronic, debilitating and progressive cancer patients at 8. School programme; and
100 districts. 9. Provision of tobacco cessation facilities.
4. Support is being provided for contractual manpower
through 1 Medical Oncologist, 1 Cytopathologist,
1 Cytopathology technician, 2 Nurses for day care.
I NATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH PROGRAMME
5. 45 centres were to be strengthened as Tertiary Cancer The National Mental Health Programme was launched
Centres (TCCs} to provide comprehensive cancer care during 1982 with a view to ensure availability of Mental
services at a cost of Rs. 6.00 crore each during 2011-12. Health Care Services for all, especially the community at risk
11
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
• - - - - - -
and underprivileged section of the population, to encourage Thrust areas (6)
application of mental health knowledge in general health 1. District mental health programme in an enlarged and
care and social development. A National Advisory Group on more effective form covering the entire country.
mental health was constituted under the Chairmanship of
the Secretary, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare for the 2. Streamlining/modernization of mental hospitals in
effective implementation of the National Health Programme. order to modify their present custodial role.
Eleven institutions have been identified for . imparting 3. Upgrading department of psychiatry in medical
training in basic knowledge and skills in the field of mental colleges and enhancing the psychiatric content of the
health to the primary health care physicians and para- medical curriculum at the undergraduate as well as
medical personnel. At present this programme covers postgraduate level.
94 districts. 4. Strengthening the central and state mental health
The aims of the NMHP are : (a) Prevention and treatment authorities with a permanent secretariat. Appointment
of mental and neurological disorders and their associated of medical officers at state headquarters in order to
disabilities; (b) Use of mental health technology to improve make the monitoring role more effective.
general health services; and (c) Application of mental health 5. Research and training in the field of community
principles in total national development to improve quality mental health, substance abuse and child adolescent
of life (50). psychiatric clinics.
The objectives of the programme are :
1. To ensure availability and accessibility of minimum INTEGRATED DISEASE SURVEILLANCE
mental health care for all in the foreseeable future, . .PROJECT ·.
particularly to the most vulnerable and
underprivileged sections of population. Integrated disease surveillance project is a decentralized
2. To encourage application of mental health knowledge state based surveillanc:;e system in the country. This project is
in general health care and in the social development. intended to detect early wamirig signals of impending
3. To promote community participation in the mental outbreaks and help initiate an effective response in a timely
manner in urban and rural areas. It will also provide
health services development, and to stimulate efforts
essential data to monitor progress of ongoing disease control
towards self-help in the community.
programme and help allocate health resources more
The programme strategies are : efficiently. The project was launched in Nov. 2004. It is a
1. Integration of mental health with primary health care 5 year project.
through the NMHP; The surveillance is needed to recognize cases or cluster of
2. Provision of tertiary care institutions for treatment of cases to initiate interventions to prevent transmission of
mental disorders; disease or reduce morbidity and mortality; access the public
health impact of health events or determine and measure
3. Eradicating stigmatization of mentally ill patients and
protecting their rights through regulatory institutions trends; demonstrate the need for public health intervention
like the Central Mental Health Authority, and State programmes and resources and allocate resources during
Mental Health Authority. public health planning; monitor effectiveness of prevention
and control measures; identify high-risk groups or
District Mental Health Programme components are : geographical areas to target interventions and guide analytic
(a) Training programmes of all workers in the mental health studies; and develop hypothesis that lead to analytic studies
team at the identified nodal institute in the state; (b) Public about risk factors for disease causation, propagation and
education in mental health to increase awareness and to progression (51).
reduce stigma; (c) For early detection and treatment, the
OPD and indoor services are provided; and (d) Providing In this project, different types of integration are proposed.
valuable data and experience at the level of community to These include : (a) Sharing of surveillance information of
the state and centre for future planning, improvement in disease control programmes; (b) Developing effective
service and research. partnership with health and non-health sectors in
surveillance; (c) Including non-communicable and
District Mental Health Programme has now incorporated communicable diseases in the surveillance system;
promotive and preventive activities for positive mental (d) Effective partnership of private sector and NGOs in
health which includes : surveillance activities; (e) Bringing academic institutions and
- School mental health services : Life skills education in medical colleges into the primary public health activity of
schools, counselling services. disease surveillance.
College counselling services : Through trained teachers/ The important information in disease surveillance are -
councellors. who gets the disease, how many get the disease, where did
Work place stress management : Formal & Informal they get the disease, why did they get the disease, and what
sectors, including farmers, women etc. needs to be done as public health response.
- Suicide prevention services : Counselling center at The components of the surveillance activity are :
district level, sensitization workshops, IEC, help lines etc. (a) Collection of data
The National Human Rights Commission also monitors (b) Compilation of data
the conditions in the mental hospitals along with the (c) Analysis and interpretation
government of India, and the states are acting on the
recommendations of the joint studies conducted to ensure (d) Follow-up action
quality in delivery of mental care. (e) Feedback.
INTEGRATED DISEASE SURVEILLANCE PROJECT
The prerequisite of the effective surveillance are - use of Unusual clinical syndromes Meningoencephalitis I
standard case definition, ensure regularity of reports and the (causing death/ Respiratory distress,
action on reports. hospitalization) Haemorrhagic fevers,
The classification of surveillance in IDSP is as follows : other undiagnosed
conditions
a. Syndromic diagnosis - diagnosis is made on the basis
of clinical pattern by paramedical personnel and {ii) Sentinel Surveillance
members of the community; Sexually transmitted HIV I HBV, HCV
b. Presumptive diagnosis - diagnosis made on typical diseases I blood borne
history and clinical examin?\tion by medical officer; Other conditions Water quality
and monitoring
c. Confirmed diagnosis - clinical diagnosis by a medical Outdoor air quality
officer and or positive laboratory identification. (Large urban centres)
Syndromes under surveillance (51) : {iii) Regular periodic surveys
NCD risk factors Anthropometry,
The paramedical health staff will undertake disease Physical activity,
surveillance based on broad categories of presentation. The Blood pressure,
following clinical syndromes will be under surveillance in Tobacco, Nutrition etc.
IDSP:
(iv) Additional state priorities
1. Fever
a. Less than 7 days duration without any localizing signs Each state may identify upto five additional conditions
for surveillance.
b. With rash
The reporting units for disease surveillance are :
c. With altered sensorium or convulsions
d. Bleeding from skin or mucus membrane
.·f>u'Bti~ H~atth
e. Fever more than 7 days with or without localizing Rural CHCs, District · · ·.· . .Sentinel private
signs hospitals practifionei:s~ and
, Sentinel.hospitals.
2. Cough more than 3 weeks duration Urban • Sentinel private
3. Acute flaccid paralysis ES! I Railway l nursing homes,
4. Diarrhoea Medical college hospitals: ·sentinel hospitals,
· •· · · ' Medical colleges,
5. Jaundice, and • Private and ·
6 .. Unusual events causing death or hospitalization. · ·.. NGO laboratories
These syndromes are intended to pick up all priority 1. Sub-centre-health worker/ANM reports all patients
diseases listed under regular surveillance at the level of the fulfilling the clinical syndrome from PHC, private
community under the Integrated Disease Surveillance clinic, hospital etc.
Project. 2. PHC/CHC medical officers report as probable cases of
Fever with or without Malaria, Typhoid, interest, where this cannot be confirmed by laboratory
localizing signs JE, Dengue, Measles tests at the peripheral reporting units, and as
Cough more than 3 weeks Tuberculosis confirmed when the laboratory information is
Acute flaccid paralysis Polio available as in case of blood smear +ve malaria and
Diarrhoea Cholera sputum AFB +ve tuberculosis.
Jaundice Hepatitis, Laptospirosis, 3. Sentinel private practitioners, district hospitals,
Dengue, Malaria, municipal hospitals, medical colleges, sentinel
Yellow fever hospitals, NGOs medical officers report as probable
Unusual syndromes Anthrax, Plague, cases of interest.
Emerging epidemics
. NATIONALG(JINEAWORM
The core conditions under surveillance in IDSP are as ERADICATIONrPROGltA.MME
follows (52) :
India launched its National Guineaworm Eradicatior
(i) Regular Surveillance
Programme in 1984 with technical assistance from WHO
Vector borne disease Malaria From the very beginning the programme was integrated intc
Water borne disease Acute diarrhoeal the national health system at village level. With well definec
disease (cholera} strategies, an efficient information and evaluation system
Typhoid intersectoral coordination at all levels and close collaboratior
Respiratory diseases Tuberculosis with WHO and UNICEF, India was able to significantly reducE
Vaccine preventable diseases : Measles the disease in affected areas. The country has reported zerc
Diseases under eradication Polio cases since August 1996. In February 2000, the Internationa
Other conditions Road traffic accidents Commission for the Certification of Dracunculiasi
(Link-up with police Eradication recommended that India be certified free o
computers} dracunculiasis transmission (52).
Other international Plague The following activities are continuing as pe
commitments recommendations of International Certification Team o
HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN INDIA
2. Govt. of India, Strategic Action Plan for Malaria Control in India 2012- 30. Govt. of India (1987). Centre Calling, Nov. 1987.
2017, Scaling up malaria control interventions with a focus on high 31. Govt. of India (2011), National Health Profile 2011, DGHS, Ministry
burden areas, Directorate of National Vector Borne Disease Control of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Programme, DGHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New 32. Govt. of India (2011), Immunization Hand Book for Health Workers,
Delhi. Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
3. Govt. of India (2010), Annual Report2009-2010, DGHS, Ministry of 33. Govt. oflndia (2014),IndiaNewbornActionP/an (!NAP), Sept.2014,
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
4. Press Information Bureau, 2nd Sept. 2014, Govt. of India, Ministry of 34. Govt. of India (2013), Guidelines for Preparing NUHM Programme
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Implementation Plan (PIP) for 2013-14, July 2013, Urban Health
5. Govt. of India (2006), Annual Report 2005-06, Ministry of Health and Division, Department of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Family Welfare, New Delhi. 35. Govt. of India (2013), National Urban Health Mission, Framework for
6. Govt. of India (2012), Annual Report 2011-2012, Ministry of Health Implementation, May 2013, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare,
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. New Delhi.
7. Rao, C.K. (1987).Ind. J. Lep., 59 (2) 203. 36. Govt. of India (2005), National Rural Health Mission, Accredited
8. Govt. of India (2007), Disability Prevention and Medical Social Health Activist (ASHA) Guidelines, Ministry of Health and
Rehabilitation, Operational Guidelines - Primary level care, NLEP, Family Welfare, New Delhi.
DGHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 37. Govt. of India (2013), For Healthy Mother and Child, A Strategic
9. Govt. oflndia (2014), Programme Implementation Plan (PIP) for 12th Approach to Reproductive, Maternal, Newborn, Child and Adolescent
Plan Period (2012-13 to2016-17), Central Leprosy Division, DGHS, Health (RMNCH+A) in India, January 2013, Ministry of Health and
Ministry of Health and Family Planning, New Delhi. Family Welfare, New Delhi.
10. Indian Journal of Leprosy, vol. 78, No. 1, Jan-March 2006. 38. Govt. of India, Reproductive and Child Health Programme, Schemes
11. Govt. of India (2012), TB India 2012, RNTCP Status Report, Ministry for Implementation October 1997, Department of Family Welfare,
of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
12. Govt. oflndia (2014), T.B. India2014, RNTCPAnnualStatus Report, 39. Govt. of India, Annual Report 1999-2000, Ministry of Health and
Central TB Division, DGHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Family Welfare, New Delhi.
New Delhi. 40. Govt. of India (2004), Annual Report 2003-2004, Ministry of Health
13. TB India 2006, RNTCP Status Report, Dots for All, All for DOTS, and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Central TB Division, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New 41. Govt. of India (2004), Guidelines for Operationalising First Referral
Delhi. Units, Maternal Division, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New
14. Govt. of India (2012), Notification dated 7th May 2012 regarding TB Delhi.
cases, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 42. Govt. of India (2011),Annual Report to the People on Health, Ministry
15. Govt. of India (2013), T.B. India2013, RNTCP Annual Status Report, of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Central TB Division, DGHS, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, 43. Govt. of India (2011), Facility Based Newborn Care Operational
New Delhi. Guide, Guidelines for Planning and Implementation, Ministry of
16. WHO (2014), Global Tuberculosis Report 2014. Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
17. Govt. of India (2007), NACP Ill, To halt and reverse the HIV epidemic 44. Govt. of India (2014), Home Based Newborn Care, Revised
in India, NACO, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Operational Guidelines, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New
18. Govt. of India (2013), National AIDS Control Programme Phase-IV Delhi.
(2012-2017), Strategy Document, Dept of AIDS Control, Ministry of 45. WHO (2006), Working together for health, The World Health Report,
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 2006.
19. Govt. of India (2006), National AIDS Control Programme Phase Ill 46. Govt. of India (2013), Operational Guidelines, Rashtriya Bal
(2007-12), Strategy and Implementation Plan, NACO, Ministry of Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK), Child Health Screening and early
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. intervention service under NRHM, Feb. 2013, Ministry of Health and
20. Govt. of India (2008), HIV Sentinel Surveillance Round 2008, Family Welfare, New Delhi.
National Action Plan Sept 2008 - June 2009, NACO, Ministry of 4 7. Health Programme Series 10, S. Menon et al, Reproductive and Child
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Health Programme : Flagship Programme of National Rural Health
21. NACO (2012),HIVSentine1Surveillance2010-11.ATechnicalBrief, Mission, 2006.
Dec. 2012, NACO, Department of AIDS Control, Ministry of Health 48. USAID, MCHIP (2014), India's Reproductive Maternal, Newborn,
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Child and Adolescent (RMNCH+A) Strategy, July 2014.
22. NACO (2014), Annual Reort 2013-2014, Department of AIDS 49. Govt. of India (2005 ), Annual Report 2004-05, Ministry of Health and
Control, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Family Welfare, New Delhi.
23. Govt. of India (2013), National Framework for Joint HIV/TB 50. National Institute of Health and Family Welfare, website, Legislations,
Collaborative Activities, Nov. 2013, Central TB Division and NACO, National Mental Health Programme.
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 51. Govt. of India (2005), Integrated Disease Surveillance Project,
24. NACO Website, National AIDS Prevention and Control Policy. Training Manual for state and District Surveillance Officers, Ministry
25. Govt. of India (2007), Operational Guidelines for Programme of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Managers and Service Providers for Strengthening STJ/RTI Services, 52. WHO, Weekly Epidemiological Record, No.22, 2nd June 2000.
NACO, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 53. National Institute of Health and Family Welfare, website, Legislations,
26. Govt. of India (2004), National Programme for Control of Blindness National Programme for Control and Treatment of Occupational
in India, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Diseases.
26A.WHO (2013), Universal Eye Health, A Global Action Plan 54. Bookhive's, 8th Fiue Year Plan (1992-97) by E. Chandran, issues of
2014-2019. current interest, Series No. 4.
27. Allan, D. (1987). World Health, Jan-Feb, 1987, p. 9. 55. Swajaldhara, Deptt of drinking water supply, Ministry of Rural
28. Grant, J.P. (1987). World Health, Jan-Feb, 1987, p. 10. Development, GO!, website http://ddws.nic.in I swajaldhara I htm.l I
faq.htm.
29. Govt. of India (2005), Health Information 2005, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 56. Govt. oflndia (2014), Annual Report 2013-14, Ministry of Drinking
Water and Sanitation, New Delhi.
"Delay the first, postpone the second_ and prevent the third 11
Demography, as understood today, is the scientific study birth and high death rates to low birth and low death rates.
of human population. It focuses its attention on three readily
observable human phenomena : (a) changes in population (5) FIFTH STAGE: (Declining)
size (growth or decline) (b) the composition of the The population begins to decline because birth rate is
population and (c) the distribution of population in space. It lower than the death rate. Some East European countries,
deals with five "demographic processes", namely fertility, notably Germany and Hungary are experiencing this stage.
mortality, marriage, migration and social mobility. These
five processes are continuously at work within a population WORLD POPULATION TRENDS
determining size, composition and distribution.
Community medicine is vitally concerned with population, At the beginning of the Christian era, nearly 2, 000 years
because health in the group depends upon the dynamic ago, world population was estimated to be around
relationship between the numbers of people, the space which 250 million. Subsequent estimates of the world population,
they occupy and the skill that they have acquired in providing and rates of increase are given in Table 1.
for their needs. The main sources of demographic statistics in TABLE 1
India are population censuses, National Sample Surveys,
registration of vital events, and adhoc demographic studies. World population
Population Average. annual growth
Demographic cycle Year (million) rate (per cent)
The history of world population since 1650 suggests that 1750 791 -
there is a .demographic cycle of 5 stages through which a 1800 978 0.4
nation passes: 1850 1,262 0.5
1900 1,650 0.6
(1) FIRST STAGE (High stationary) 1950 2,526 1.1
This stage is characterized by a high birth rate and a high 1960 3,037 1.79
death rate which cancel each other and the population 1970 3;696 1.92
remains stationary. India was in this stage till 1920. 1975 . 4,066 1.89
1980 4,432 1.72
(2) SECOND STAGE (Early expanding) 1987 5,000 1.63
The death rate begins to decline, while the birth rate 1991 5,385 1.7
remains unchanged. Many countries in South Asia, and 1998 5,884 1.6
Africa are in this phase. Birth rates have increased in some 2000 6,054 1.4
of these countries possibly as a result of improved health 2003 6,313 1.1
conditions, and shortening periods of breast-feeding (1). 2007 6,655 1.4
2008 6,734 1.2
(3) THIRD STAGE (Late expanding) 2010 6,908 1.23
The death rate declines still further, and the birth rate 2014 7,238 1.2
tends to fall. The population continues to grow because
births exceed deaths. India has entered this phase. In a It required all the human history up to the year 1800 for
number of developing countries (e.g., China, Singapore) the world population to reach one billion. The second billion
birth rates have declined rapidly. came in 130 years (around 1930), the third billion in 30
years (around 1960), the fourth billion in 15 years (in 1974),
(4) FOURTH STAGE (Low stationary) the fifth billion in 12 years (in 1987), and the sixth billion in
This stage is characterized by a low birth and low death 12 years (1999). On October 12th 1999 world population
rate with the result that the population becomes stationary. became 6 billion. The 7th billion came in 2014 (after 15
Zero population growth has already been recorded in years). It is expected to reach 8 billion by 2025 (2).
Austria during 1980-85. Growth rates as little as 0.1 were About three fourths of the world's population lives in the
recorded in UK, Denmark, Sweden and Belgium during developing countries. The population of the ten most
1980-85. In short, most industrialized countries have populous countries of the world and their relative share is
undergone a demographic transition shifting from a high shown in Fig. 1. Although, in terms of population USA ranks
480. DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
With the division of some states the rank of most in the age group 60+, percentage of female population is
populous states have changed. Table 7 shows the ten most 0.8 per cent more than male population. The proportion of
populous states in the country by rank. It is seen that Uttar population in the age group 0-14 years is higher in rural
Pradesh comes first with about 199.581 million people, areas {30.5 per cent) than in urban areas (25.2 per cent), for
Maharashtra comes second with 112.372 million people and both male and female population (10).
Bihar comes third with 103.804 million people. These ten The proportion of population below 14 years of age is
states account for about 71 per cent of the total population showing decline, whereas the proportion of elderly in the
of India (8). country is increasing. This trend is to continue in the time to
TABLE 7 come. The increase in the elderly population will impose a
greater burden on the already outstretched health services in
Ranking of most populous states by population size 2011 the country.
Population Per cent to total TABLE 8
Rank State 31.3.2011 · population of India
(000) 31-3-2011 Per cent distribution by age and sex, India {2012)
1. Uttar Pradesh 199,581 16.49
2. Maharashtra 112,372 9.29
3. Bihar 103,804 8.58
4. West Bengal 91,347 7.55 0-4 9.7 9.9 9.4
Andhra Pradesh 84,665 7.00 5-9 9.1 9.3 8.9
5.
10-14 10.3 10.6 ·10.l
6. Madhya Pradesh 72,597 6.00
15-19 9.9 10.3 9.6
7. Tamil Nadu 72,138 5.96 20-24 10.2 10.5
9.9
8. Rajasthan 68,621 5.67 25-29 8.8 8.8 8.9
9. Karnataka 61,130 5.05 30-34 7.8 7.8 7.8
10. Gujarat 60,383 4.99 35-39 6.8 6.7 6.9
Source: (8) 40-44 6.2 6.2 6.2
45-49 5.2 5.1 5.2
It has been estimated that with current trends, the 50-54 4.1 4.3 3.9
population in India will increase from 1.210 billion to 55-59 3.6 3.2 4.0
1.4 billion during the period 2011 to 2026, an increase of 60-:-64 3.0 3.0 3.0
13.57 per cent in twenty five years at the rate of 1.2 per cent 65-69 2.2 2.1 2.3
annually. There is a substantial difference in total fertility 70-74 1.5 1.4 1.6
rate in between and within states. At one end of spectrum 75-79 0.9 0.8 1.0
are southern states like Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka and 8o.:-84 0.4 0.4 0.5
Andhra Pradesh with total fertility rate at or below 85+ 0.3 0.2 0.3
replacement levels. At the other end are high fertility states
like Uttar Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Uttarakhand, Rajasthan, Total 100.0 100.0 100.0
Jharkhand, Bihar, Madhya Pradesh and Orissa, with an Note : * Total may not add upto 100 due to rounding off.
estimated combined total fertility rate of 4.2 in 2000. The
estimated year by which some high fertility states will reach Source: (10)
replacement level of fertility if current trend continues is as
follows (9) : Age pyramids
The age structure of a population is best represented as
Uttar Pradesh - 2027 shown in Fig.2.
Madhya Pradesh 2025 Such a representation is called an "Age Pyramid". A vivid
Chhattisgarh 2022 contrast may be seen in the age distribution of men and
Uttarakhand - 2022 women in India and in Switzerland. The age pyramid of
Bihar - 2021 India is typical of developing countries, with a broad base
Rajasthan - 2021 and a tapering top. In the developed countries, as in
Jharkhand - 2018 Switzerland,· the pyramid generally shows a bulge in the
middle, and has a narrower base.
India - 2021
It is matter of concern that these states will delay the Sex ratio
attainment of replacement level of fertility in India until Sex ratio is defined as "the number of females per 1000
2021, with Uttar Pradesh projected to reach this level by males". One of the basic demographic characteristics of the .
2027. These high fertility states are anticipated to contribute population is the sex composition. In any study of
about 50 per cent to the nation-wide increase in population. population, analysis of the sex composition plays a vital
Demographic outcomes in these states will determine the role. The sex composition of the population is affected by
timing and size of population at which India achieves the differentials in mortality conditions of males and
population stabilization. females, sex selective migration and sex ratio at birth.
"Female deficit syndrome" is considered adverse because of
Age and sex composition social implications. A low sex ratio indicates strong male-
The age-sex composition of India's population is as child preference and consequent gender' inequities, neglect
shown in Table 8. In the age group 0-14 years male of the girl child resulting in higher mortality at younger age,
population is about 1.4 per cent more than female, whereas female infanticide, female foeticide, higher maternal
483
INDIA (2001) SWITZERLAND (2001)
80+
75-79
60-64
Ll.l 45-49
0
<i::
40-44
30-34
15-19
0-4
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Male Female Male Female
Percentage Percentage
FIG. 2
Percentage distribution by age of the population of India and of the population of Switzerland.
Child sex ratio (0-6 years) : Census 2011 marks a The term "demographic burden" is used to connote the
considerable fall in child sex ratio in the age group of 0-6 increase in the total dependency ratio during any period of
years and has reached an all time low of 914 since 1961. time, mostly caused by increased old age dependency ratio.
The fall has been 13 points from 927 to 914 for the country This is an inevitable consequence of demographic transition,
during 2001 to 2011. In rural areas, the fall has been and the country has to face this problem sooner or later (11).
significant 15 points from 934 to 919 and in urban areas it
has been 4 points from 906 to 902 over the decade (8). Density of population
One of the important indices of population concentration
Dependency ratio is the density of population. It is the ratio between (total)
The proportion of persons above 65 years of age and population and surface (land) area. This ratio can be
children below 15 years of age are considered to be dependant calculated for any territorial unit for any point in time,
on the economically productive age group (15-64 years). The depending on the source of the population data (11). In the
ratio of the combined age groups 0-14 years plus 65 years and Indian census, density is defined as the number of persons,
above to the 15-65 years age group is referred to as the total living per square kilometre. The trends of the density in the
dependency ratio. It is also referred to as the societal country from 1901 onwards are as shown in Table 11. For
dependency ratio and reflects the need for a society to the year 2014 the density of population per sq. km. in
provide for their younger and older population groups. The India was 394.
dependency ratio can be subdivided into young age TABLE 11
dependency ratio (0-14 years); and old age dependency Density of population in India 1901-2011
ratio (65 years and more). These ratios are, however,
relatively crude, since they do not take into consideration Year Per sq.km.
elderly or young persons who are employed or working age 1901 77
persons who are unemployed. It is given by the formula :
1911 82
Children 0-14 years age + 1921 81
Total
dependency = Population more than 65 years of age x lOO
1931 90
ratio Population of 15 to 64 years 1941 103
1951 117
For India, the dependency ratio for the ·year 2005 is
calculated as : 1961 142
Population in 0-14 years age group 374, 143,000 1971 177
1981 216
Population above 65 years of age 56,454,000
1991 267
Population in 15-64 years age group 703,805,000
2001 325
Total 2011 382
dependency = 374143000 + 56454000 x 100
Source: (8)
ratio 703805000
61.1 per cent Urbanization
The young age dependency ratio is 53.1 per cent, and By definition, urban population is the number of persons
old age dependency ratio is 8.02 per cent (11). For the year residing in urban localities. The definition of urban locality
2010, the projected young age dependency ratio is 47.9 per varies from country to country. In Indian context, the urban
cent and old age dependency ratio 7.7 per cent (12). areas are the "Towns (places with municipal corporation,
For international comparison, the child, old and total municipal area committee, town committee, notified
dependency ratios are used to study the dependency burden of area committee or cantonment board); also, all places
the population. The total dependency ratio tends to decrease having 5,000 or more inhabitants, a density of not less than
in the earlier stages of development when rapid decline in 1,000 persons per square mile or 390 per square kilometre,
fertility reduces the child population more than the increase in pronounced urban characteristics and at least three fourths
the older persons, but subsequently the increase in older of the adult male population employed in pursuits other
persons far out-weighs the decline in the child population. than agriculture" (11).
There is a shift from child dependency to old age dependency, The population in India continues to be predominantly
as fertility declines and life expectancy increases. rural with agriculture as the main occupation for the
The rapid decline in dependency ratios, especially the majority of the people.
child dependency ratio, has been identified to be a key factor As per provisional population totals of Census - 2011,
underlying rapid economic development. The term the rural population stands at 833.1 million (68.84 per cent)
"demographic bonus" connotes the period when the and urban population at 377.1 million (31.80 per cent), an
dependency ratio in a population declines because of decline increase of 3.35 per cent in urban population. In absolute
in fertility, until it starts to rise again because of increasing numbers, rural population has increased by 90.47 million
longevity. This period depends on the pace of decline in and urban population by 91.00 million in the last decade.
fertility level of a population. If the switch to small families is Uttar Pradesh has the largest rural population of
fast, the demographic bonus can give a considerable push to 155.11 million i.e. 18.62 per cent of country's rural
development. If investment in health care and education for population, whereas Maharashtra has the highest urban
skill development are made -during this period, maximum population of 50.83 million i.e. 13.48 per cent of the
advantage is taken of the demographic transition with high country's urban population. Fig. 3 indicates the level of
economic growth rates (11). urbanization in the country.
380 The family size depends upon numerous factors, viz.
duration of marriage, education of the couple, the number
360
of live births and living children, preference of male
340 children, desired family size, etc.
320 The question of family size is undoubtedly important
from the demographic point of view. The family planning
300 programme's campaign is currently based on the theme of a
280
"two-child" family norm, with a view to reach the long-term
demographic goal of NRR= 1. Family planning involves both
260 decision regarding the "desired family size" and the effective
limitation of fertility once that size has been reached.
240
Table 12 shows the total fertility rates (completed family
220 size) in India and selected countries. The decrease in family
200 size does not appear to be due to any reduction in fertility;
rather it appears to be due to the result of deliberate family
180 planning.
160 TABLE 12
140 Total fertility rates in selected developed and developing
countries: 1994 and 2012
120
Country ·2012
100
India 3.7 2.5
80 Bangladesh 3.9 2.2
Nepal 4.8 2.4
60 Sri Lanka 2.3 2.3
40 Myanmar 3.6 2.0
China 1.9 1.7
20 Pakistan 5.5 3.3
0 UK 1.8 1.9
1901 1911 1921 1931 1941 1951 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 USA 2.0 2.0
Census year Japan 1.5 1.4
FIG. 3 Switzerland 1.5 1.5
INDIA - Growth of urban population 1901-2011 Source: (7)
The increase in urban population has been attributed Literacy and education
both to natural growth (through births) and migration from
villages because of employment opportunities, attraction of In 1948, the Declaration of Human Rights stated that
better living conditions .and availability of social services everyone has a right to education. Yet, even today, this right
such as education, health, transport, entertainment etc. The is being denied to millions of children. Education is a crucial
continuous migration of people from country side to urban element in economic and social development. Without
areas in India constitute a social crisis, the ramification of education, development can neither be broad based nor
which may eventually impair the quality of life. sustained. The benefits that accrue to a country by having a
literate population are multidimensional. Spread of literacy
According to 2011 census, the urban-rural scenario in is generally associated with modernization, urbanization,
India is as follows (8) : industrialization, communication and commerce. It forms an
important input in the overall development of individuals
' C~nsµi 2001 • Census 2011 ·. • Increase··· enabling them to comprehend their social, political and
No. of States/UTs 35 35 cultural environment better, and respond to it appropriately.
No. of Districts 593 640 47 Higher levels of education and literacy lead to a greater
No. of Sub-Districts 5,463 5,924 461 awareness and also contribute to improvement of economic
No. ofTowns 5,161 7,935 2,774 conditions, and is a pre-requisite for acquiring various skills
No. of Statutory Towns 3,799 4,041. 242 and better use of health care facilities.
No. of Census Towns. 1,362 3,894 2;532 It was decided in 1991 census to use the term literacy rate
No. of Villages 638,588 640,867 2,279 for the population relating to seven years age and above,
A person is deemed as literate if he or she can read and write
Family size with understanding in any language. A person who can
While in common parlance, family size refers to the total merely read but cannot write is not considered literate. The
number of persons in a family, in demography, family size same concept has been continued in census 2001 and 2011
means the total number of children a woman has borne also. The literacy rate taking in account the total population
at a point in time (13). The completed family size indicates in the denominator has now been termed as "crude literacy
the total number of children borne by a woman during her rate", while the literacy rate calculated taking into account
child-bearing age, which is generally assumed to be between the 7 years and above population in the denominator is
15 and 45 years. The total fertility rate gives the called the effective literacy rate. The formula for computing
approximate magnitude of the completed family size. crude literacy rate and effective literacy rate are as follows:
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
TABLE 13
State-wise literacy rate in India - 2011
4. Age-specific Fertility Rate (ASFR) less than 1, then the reproductive performance of the
A more precise measure of fertility is age-specific fertility population is said to be below replacement level.
rate, defined as the "number of live births in a year to 1000
10. Child-woman Ratio
wome:n in any specified age-group". The age-specific
fertility rates throw light on the fertility pattern. They are It is the number of children 0-4 years of age per 1000
also sensitive indicators of family planning achievement. women of child-bearing age, usually defined as 15-44 or
Number of live births in a 49 years of age. This ratio is used where birth registration
particular age group statistics either do not exist or are inadequate. It is estimated
ASFR = - - - - - - - - - - - - x 1000 through data derived from censuses (8).
Mid-year female population
of the same age-group 11. Pregnancy Rate
. 5. Age-specific Marital Fertility Rate (ASMFR) It is the ratio of number of pregnancies in a year to
married women in the ages 15-44 (or 49) years. The
It is the number of live births in a year to 1000 married "number of pregnancies" includes all pregnancies, whether
women in any specified age group. these had terminated as live births, stillbirths or abortions or
Number of live births in a had not yet terminated.
particular age group
AS MFR x 1000 12. Abortion Rate
Mid-year married female population
of the same age group The annual number of all types of abortions, usually
per 1000 women of child-bearing age (usually defined as
6. Total Fertility Rate (TFR) age 15-44) (22).
Total fertility rate represents the average number of
children a woman would have if she were to pass through 13. Abortion Ratio
her reproductive years bearing children at the same rates as This is calculated by dividing the number of abortions
the women now in each age group (20). It is computed by performed during a particular time period by the number of
summing the age-specific fertility rates for all ages; if 5-year live births over the same period (23).
age groups are used, the sum of the rates is multiplied by 5.
This measure gives the approximate magnitude of 14. Marriage Rate
"completed family size". It is the number of marriages in the year per 1000
45-49 population :
5X L ASFR Crude Number of marriages in the year
15-19 Marriage= x 1000
TFR = Rate Mid-year population
1000
Demographers consider this a very unsatisfactory rate,
7. Total Marital Fertility Rate (TMFR) because the denominator is comprised primarily of
Average number of children that would be born to a population that is not eligible to marry. A more sensitive rate
married woman if she experiences the current fertility is the general marriage rate :
pattern throughout her reproductive span. General Number of marriages within one year
45-49 Marriage= x 1000
Rate Number of unmarried persons age
5X L ASMFR 15-49 years
15-19
TMFR = - - - - - - This rate is more accurate when computed for women
1000 than for men because more men than women marry at the
older ages (8).
8. Gross Reproduction Rate (GRR)
Average number of girls that would be born to a woman if Fertility trends
she experiences the current fertility pattern throughout her Researches indicate that the level of fertility in India is
reproductive span (15-44 or 49 years), assuming no beginning to decline. The crude birth rate which was about
mortality. 49 per thousand population during 1901-11 has declined to
45-49 about 25.0 per thousand population in 2002, and was
5X L ASFR for female live births 21.6 per thousand population in 2012. The rural urban
15-19 differential has narrowed. However, the crude birth rate has
GRR = - - - - - - - - - - - - - continued to be higher in rural areas as compared to urban
1000 areas in the last 3 decades.
9. Net Reproduction Rate (NRR) The total fertility rate has declined from 3.6 in 1991 to
2.4 in 2012. The TFR in rural areas has declined from 5.4 in
Net Reproduction Rate (NRR) is defined as the number of 1971 to 2.6 in 2012, whereas the corresponding decline in
daughters a newborn girl will bear during her lifetime urban areas has been from 4.1 to 1.8 during the same
assuming fixed age-specific fertility and mortality rates (21). period. There are considerable inter-state variations in total
NRR is a demographic indicator. NRR of 1 is equivalent fertility rate as shown in Fig. 5. In bigger states it varies from
to attaining approximately the 2-child norm. If the NRR is 1.8 in Kerala to 3.3 in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar (10).
490 __D_E_M_O_G_RA_P_H_Y_A_N_D_F_A_M_IL_Y_P_L_A_N_N_IN_G_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Birth and death rates
India - 2 . 4
I •TFR
.--.l2l.6
OCBR
I The birth and death rates are important components of
population growth. The birth and death rates in India are
Uttar - 3 . 3
shown in Table 18. A look at Table 18 shows that whereas
Pradesh 27.4 the death rate. has considerably declined from 27.4 in 1951
Bihar - 3 . 5 27.7 to an estimated 7.0 per thousand population in 2012, the
Rajasthan
-2.9
25.9
birth rate has declined niggardly from 39.9 in 1951 to an
Madhya - 2 . 9 estimated 21.6 per thousand in 2012.
Pradesh 26.6
-2.3 The Fifth Five Year (1974-79) Plan's objective was to
Haryana 21.6
reduce the birth rate from 35 per thousand at the beginning of
-2.4
Assam 22.5 the Plan to 30 per thousand by 1978-79. During 1979-84,
Gujarat -2.3
21.1
the birth rate was stagnating around 33 per thousand with no
obvious decline. During 1990, however, the birth rate showed
Odisha - 2 . 1 19.9
a slight decline, to an estimated 30.2, further declining to 26.4
Himachal - 1 . 1
Pradesh 16.2 by the year 1998. The current picture indicates that birth and
Maharashtra - 1 . s . 16.6
death rates are both declining in India.
Punjab - 1 . 1 15.9 TABLE 18
West - 1 . 1
16.1
Birth and death rates in India
Bengal
Karnataka - 1 . 9 18.5 Year Birth rate Death rate
Andhra - 1 . s
Pradesh 17.5 1941-1950 39.9 27.4
-1.7 1951-1960 41.7 22.8
Tami!Nadu 15.7
Kerala - 1 . s
1961-1970 41.2 19.0
14.9
1971-1980 37.2 15.0
Jharkhand - 2 . s 24.7 1981 33.9 12.5
Chhattisgarh - 2 . 7 24.5 1991 29.5 9.8
Delhi - 1 . s 1995 28.3 9.0
17.3
-.1.7 1998 26.8 9.0
J&K 16.2 1999 26.l 8.7
I I I I I I 2002 25.0 8.1
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 2004 24.1 7.5
FIG. 5 2006 23.5 7.5
Crude birth rate (2012) and Total fertility rate (2012) 2008 22.8 7.4
for major states 2010 22.1 7.2
Source: (10) 2012 21.6 7.0
Source : (10)
Recent estimates of the fertility indicators and age-
specific fertility rates in India are given in Table 17. HIGH BIRTH RATE : India like other developing
countries is faced with the dilemma of a high birth rate and a
TABLE 17 declining death rate. This is a vicious circle, not easy to
Fertility indicators of India, 2012 break. The causes of high birth rate are :- (1) Universality of
Indicator Age group Total Rural Urban
marriage : Marriages are universal and sacramental.
Everyone, sooner or later (usually sooner) gets married and
Age-specific fertility rate 15-19 31.5 36.3 16.7 participates in reproduction. The individual's economic
20-24 191.9 210.6 140.4 security or emotional maturity are seldom a pre-requisite to
25-29 154.6 164.8 131.4 marriage. (2) Early marriage : Marriages are performed
30-34 64.5 68.3 55.6 early. Data indicate that about 60 per cent of the girls aged
35-39 23.9 27.5 15.4
40-44 8.2 10.1 3.7
15-19 years are already married. (3) Early puberty : Indian
45-49 2.2 2.8 0.8 girls attain puberty early, between 12 and 14 years. (4) Low
standard of living : Where standards of living are low, birth
Age-specific marital 15-19 268.2 273.8 235.3
fertility rate 20-24 322.0 329.0 296.2 rates are high. (5) Low level of literacy : The 2011 census
25-29 180.9 187.2 165.0 showed that only 74.04 per cent of the population was
30-34 69.4 72.9 60.9 literate. The female literacy is still lower, especially in the
35-39 25.8 29.4 16.7 rural areas. (6) Traditional customs and habits : Customs
40-44 9.1 11.2 4.1 dictate that every woman must marry and every man must
45-49 2.5 3.2 0.9 have a son. Children are considered a gift of God and their
Crude birth rate 21.6 23.1 17.4 birth should not be obstructed. (7) Absence of family
General fertility rate 80.3 87.6 61.5 planning habit : Family planning is of recent origin.
Total fertility rate 2.4 2.6 1.8 It has not yet become part of the marital mores of the people.
Gross reproduction rate 1.1 1.2 0.8 DECLINING DEATH RATE : The declining death rate has
General marital fertility rate 114.9 122.9 90.2
been attributed to : (1) absence of natural checks, e.g.,
famines and large scale epidemics, (2) mass control of
Total marital fertility rate 4.4 4.5 diseases, e.g., smallpox, plague, cholera, malaria etc.,
Source : (10) (3) advances in medical science, e.g., extensive use of
FAMILY PLANNING
chemotherapeutics, antibiotics, and insecticides, (4) better 'Plan of Action' that "all couples and individuals have the
health. facilities, e.g., establishment of primary health basic human right to decide freely and responsibly the number
centres and more treatment centres, (5) impact of and spacing of their children and to have the information,
national health programmes, (6) improvements in food education, and means to do so". The World Conference of the
supply, {7) intei:national aid in several directions, and International Women's Year in 1975 also declared "the right
(8) development of social consciousness among the masses. of women to decide freely and responsibly on the number and
De:rnographers opine that further rapid decline in India's spacing of their children and to have access to the information
death rate may not continue in future. The reason is that and means to enable them to exercise that right" (28). Thus
most of the "easy" conquest of mortality has been during the past few decades, family planning has emerged
accomplished through the widespread use of vaccines, from whispers in private quarters to the focus of international
antibiotics, insecticides, and other life-saving measures. The concern as a basic human right, and a component of family
tasks that remain now are the most difficult ones such as health and social welfare.
improvements in environmental sanitation and nutrition;
and control of non-communicable and genetic diseases. Scope of family planning services
Family planning is not synonymous with birth control; it
Growth rate is more than mere birth control. A WHO Expert Committee
The population growth rates in India are presented in {1970) has stated that family planning includes in its
Table 6. Prior to 1921, the population of India grew at a slow purview:- (1) the proper spacing and limitation of births,
rate. This was due to the operation of natural checks {2) advice on sterility, {3) education for parenthood, (4) sex
(e.g., famines and epidemics) which took a heavy toll of education, (5) screening for pathological conditions related
human life. After 1921, the "great divide", the occurrence. of to the reproductive system (e.g., cervical cancer), (6) genetic
famines and epidemics was effectively controlled through counselling, (7) premarital consultation and examination,
better nutrition and improved health care services, with the {8) carrying out pregnancy tests, (9) marriage counselling,
result that the death rate declined more steeply than the birth (10) the preparation of couples for the arrival of their first
rate. Consequently, there was a net gain in births over deaths, child, (11) providing services for unmarried mothers,
leading to rapid growth in population, which rose from (12) teaching home economics and nutrition, and
l.25 per cent in 1951to1.96 in 1961, 2.20 in 1971, 2.22 in (13) providing adoption services (29). These activities vary
1981, 2.14in1991, l.93 in 2001and1.64 in 2011{Table6). from country to country according to national objectives
India is now the second most populous country in the and policies with regard to family planning. This is the
world, adding 17.5 million every year to her 1210 million at modern concept of family planning.
the time of 2011 census. However, the most recent data Health aspects of family planning (29, 30, 31)
indicates a decline in India's population growth rate.
Family planning and health have a two-way relationship.
The national health goal was to attain a birth rate of
The principal health outcomes of family planning were listed
21 and a death rate of 9 per thousand by 2007. This would
and discussed by a WHO Scientific Group on the Health
yield an annual growth rate of 1.2 per cent, which was
Aspects of Family Planning (29). These can be summarized
considered essential for the stabilization of population of
under the following headings.
India over the next 50 years or so.
Women's health
FAMILY PLANNING maternal mortality, morbidity of women of child-
Definition bearing age, nutritional status (weight changes,
haemoglobin level, etc.) preventable complications of
There are several definitions of family planning. An Expert pregnancy and abortion.
Committee (1971) of the WHO defined family planning as "a
way of thinking and living that is adopted voluntarily, upon Foetal health
the basis of knowledge, attitudes and responsible decisions
foetal mortality {early and late foetal death);
by individuals and couples, in order to promote the health
abnormal development.
and welfare of the family group and thus contribute
effectively to the social development of a country" (25). Infant and child health
Another Expert Committee (26) defined and described neonatal, infant and pre-school mortality,
family planning as follows : "Family planning refers to health of the infant at birth {birth weight),
practices that help individuals or couples to attain certain vulnerability to diseases.
objectives : ·
(a) to avoid unwanted births (a) WOMEN'S HEALTH : Pregnancy can mean serious
(b) to bring about wanted births problems for many women. It may damage the mother's
health or even endanger her life. In developing countries,
{c) to regulate the intervals between pregnancies the risk of dying as a result of pregnancy is much greater
{d) to control the time at which births occur in relation to than in developed countries. The risk increases as the
the ages of the parent; and mother grows older and after she has had 3 or 4 children.
{e) to determine the number of children in the family. Family planning by intervening in the reproductive cycle of
women, helps them to control the number, interval and
Basic human rights timing of pregnancies and births, and thereby reduces
The United Nations Conference on Human Rights at maternal mortality and morbidity and improves health. The
Teheran in 1968 recognized family planning as a basic human health impact of family planning occurs primarily through :
right. The Bucharest Conference (27) on the World Population (i) the avoidance of unwanted pregnancies; {ii) limiting the
held in August 1974 endorsed the same view and stated in its number of births and proper spacing, and (iii) timing the
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
births, particularly the first and last, in relation to the age of decade and half after its inception, when it was named
the mother. It is estimated that guaranteeing access to family Family Welfare Programme.
planning alone could reduce the number of maternal deaths The concept of welfare is very comprehensive and is
by 25 per cent, and child mortality by 20 per cent (11). basically related to quality of life. The Family Welfare
(i) Unwanted pregnancies : The essential aim of family Programme aims at achieving a higher end - that is, to
planning is to prevent the unwanted pregnancies. An improve the quality of life of the people.
unwanted pregnancy may lead to an induced abortion.
From the point of view of health, abortion outside the Small-family norm
medical setting (criminal abortion) is one of the most Small differences in the family size will make big
dangerous consequence of unwanted pregnancy. Particular differences in the birth rate. The difference of only one child
mention must be made of the unmarried mother who faces per family over a decade will have a tremendous impact on
significantly higher health risks. There is also evidence of the population growth.
higher incidence of mental disturbances among mothers
who have had unwanted pregnancies. The objective of the Family Welfare Programme in India is
that people should adopt the "small family norm" to stabilize
(ii) Limiting the number of births and proper spacing : the country's population at the level of some 1,533 million by
Repeated pregnancies increase the risk of maternal mortality the year 2050 AD. Symbolized by the inverted red triangle, the
and morbidity. These risks rise with each pregnancy beyond programme initially adopted the model of the 3-child family.
the third, and increase significantly with each pregnancy In the 1970s, the slogan was the famous Do Ya Teen Bas. In
beyond the fifth. The incidence of rupture of the uterus and view of the seriousness of the situation, the 1980s campaign
uterine atony increases with parity as does the incidence of has advocated the 2-child norm. The current emphasis is on
toxaemia, eclampsia and placenta previa. Anaemia is a three themes : "Sons or Daughters two will do"; "Second
common problem in mothers with many children and the rate child after 3 years", and "Universal Immunization".
of stillbirths tends to increase significantly with high parity.
The somatic consequences of repeated pregnancies may also A significant achievement of the Family . Welfare
be exemplified in the clear association between the incidence Programme in India has been the decline in the fertility rate
of cancer of the cervix and high parity. Family plannina is the from 6.4 in the 1950s to 2.4 in 2012. The national target
only way to limit the size and control the interval between was to achieve a Net Reproduction Rate of 'l' by the year
births with a view to improving the health of the mother. 2006, which is equivalent to attaining approximately the
2-child norm. All efforts are being made through mass
(iii) Timing of births : Generally mothers face greater risk communication that the concept of small family norm is
of dying below the age of 20 and above the age of 30-35. In accepted, adopted and woven into lifestyle of the people.
many countries, complications of pregnancy and delivery
show the same pattern of risk, with the highest rate below Eligible couples
20 and over 35 years of age.
An "eligible couple" refers to a currently married couple
(b) FOETAL HEALTH : A number of congenital wherein the wife is in the reproductive age, which is
anomalies (e.g., Down's syndrome) are associated with generally assumed to lie between the ages of 15 and 45.
advancing maternal age. Such congenital anomalies can be There will be at least 150 to 180 such couples per 1000
avoided by timing the births in relation to the mother's age. population in India. These couples are in need of family
Further, the "quality" of population can be improved only planning services. About 20 per cent of eligible couples are
by avoiding completely unwanted births. In the present state found in the age group 15-24 years (32). On an average
of our knowledge, it is very difficult to weigh the overall 2.5 million couples are joining the reproductive group every
genetic effects of family planning. year. The "Eligible Couple Register" is a basic document for
(c) CHILD HEALTH : Issues relating to family planning organizing family planning work. It is regularly updated by
are highly relevant to paediatrics. It would seem that family each functionary of the family planning programme for the
size and birth spacing, if practised by all, will yield area falling within his jurisdiction.
substantial child health benefits. These are : (a) Child The scenario in India as on March, 2010 is as shown in
mortality : It is well known that child mortality increases Fig. 6.
when pregnancies occur in rapid succession. A birth interval
of 2 to 3 years is considered desirable to reduce child
mortality. Family planning is, therefore, an important means Total eligible couples= 197.4 million
of ensuring the survival of all children in a family. (b) Child (estimated) ---~~,,,. Target group
growth, development and nutrition : Birth spacing and As on March 2010 ·'-"-.... for spacing
family size are important factors in child growth and methods
development. The child is likely to receive his full share of
love and care, including nutrition he needs, when the family
size is small and births are properly spaced. Family planning, Unsterilized
in other words, is effective prevention against malnutrition. couples exposed
to higher order of
(c) Infectious diseases : Children living in large-sized families Couples birth (3 & above)
have an increase in infection, especially infectious sterilized =50.3 million
gastroenteritis, respiratory and skin infections. =45.5 million (estimated) Target group
~..,___~for
Target couples Policy". It called for an increase in the legal minimum age of
In order to pin-point the couples who are a priority group marriage from 15 to 18 for females, and from 18 to 21 years
within the broad definition of "eligible couples", the term for males. However, for the most part, the 1976 statement
"target couple" was coined. Hitherto, the term target couple became irrelevant and the policy was modified in 1977. New
was applied to couples who have had 2-3 living children, policy statement reiterated the importance of the small
and family planning was largely directed to such couples. family norm without compulsion and changed the
The definition of a target couple has been gradually programme title to "family welfare programme". The
enlarged to include families with one child or even newly National Health Policy approved by the parliament in 1983
married couples (34) with a view to develop acceptance of had set the long-term demographic goals of achieving a Net
the idea of family planning from the earliest possible stage. Reproductive Rate (NRR) of one by the year 2000 (which
In effect, the term target couple has lost its original meaning. was not achieved).
The term eligible couple is now more widely used and has "National Population Policy 2000" is the latest in this
come to stay. series. It reaffirms the commitment of the government
towards target free approach in administering family
Couple protection rate (CPR) planning services. It gives informed choice to the people to
Couple protection rate (CPR) is an indicator of the voluntarily avail the reproductive health care services.
prevalence of contraceptive practice in the community. It is The new NPP 2000 is more than just a matter of fertility
defined as the per cent of eligible couples effectively and mortality rates. It deals with women education;
protected against childbirth by one or the other approved empowering women for improved health and nutrition; child
methods of family planning, viz. sterilization, IUD, condom survival and health; the unmet needs for family welfare
or oral pills. Sterilization accounts for over 60 per cent of services; health care for the under-served population groups
effectively protected couples (32). Demographers are of the like urban slums, tribal community, hill area population and
view that the demographic goal of NRR= 1 can be achieved displaced and migrant population; adolescent's health and
only if the CPR exceeds 60 per cent. education; increased participation of men in planned
Couple protection rate is based on the observation that parenthood; and collaboration with NGOs.
50 to 60 per cent of births in a year are of birth order 3 or The objective of NPP 2000 is to bring the TFR to
more. Thus attaining a 60 per cent CPR will be equivalent to replacement level by 2010. The long term objective is to
cutting off almost all third or higher order births, leaving 2 or achieve requirements of suitable economic growth, social
less surviving children per couple (33). Therefore, the development and environment protection.
previous National Population Policy was to attain a CPR of The National Socio-Demographic Goals to be achieved
42 per cent by 1990 (end of Seventh Five Year Plan), and by the year 2010 were as follows (35):
60 per cent by the year 2000. In short CPR is a dominant
factor in the reduction of net reproduction rate. (1) Address the unmet needs for basic reproductive and
During 2012-2013, the total number of family planning child health services, supplies and infrastructure.
acceptors by different methods was as follows (34A). (2) Make school education upto the age 14 free and
Sterilization 4.57 million compulsory, and reduce drop-outs at primary and
secondary school levels to below 20 per cent for both
Vasectomy 0.12 million boys and girls.
Tubectomy 4.45 million (3) Reduce infant mortality rate to below 30 per 1000 live
IUD insertion 5.41 million births.
Condom users 13.96 million (4) Reduce maternal mortality ratio to below 100 per
Oral pill users 6.2 million 100,000 live births.
However about 60 per cent eligible couples are still (5) Achieve universal immunization of children against all
unprotected against conception. vaccine preventable diseases.
During the year 2011, 40 per cent of eligible couples in (6) Promote delayed marriage for girls, not earlier than
the reproductive age group 15-44 years were effectively age 18 and preferably after 20 years of age.
protected against conception by one or the other family (7) Achieve 80 per cent institutional deliveries and
planning method. 100 per cent deliveries by trained persons.
A state-wise break-up of the figures reported indicates (8) Achieve universal access to information/counselling,
that . while some states notably Punjab, Gujarat, and services for fertility regulation and contraception
Maharashtra, Karnataka, Haryana and Tamil Nadu etc. are with a wide basket of choices.
forging ahead to cover more than half of their fertility level (9) Achieve 100 per cent registration of births, deaths,
population by contraception, the other states like Bihar, marriage and pregnancy.
Uttar Pradesh, Assam, Rajasthan, West Bengal, Jammu and
Kashmir etc. are lagging behind with low contraceptive (10) Contain the spread of Acquired Immunodeficiency
acceptance levels. Syndrome (AIDS), and promote greater integration
between the management of reproductive tract
infections (RTI) and sexually transmitted infections
NATIONAL POPULATION POLICY 2000 (ST!) and the National AIDS Control Organization.
Population policy in general refers to policies intended to (11) Prevent and control communicable diseases.
decrease the birth rate or growth rate. Statement of goals, (12) Integrate Indian Systems of Medicine (ISM) in the
objectives and targets are inherent in the population policy. provision of reproductive and child health services,
In April 1976 India formed its first "National Population and in reaching out to households.
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
(13) Promote vigorously the small family norm to achieve 2. Intra-uterine devices
replacement levels of TFR. 3. Hormonal methods
(14) Bring about convergence in implementation of related 4. Post-conceptional methods
social sector programmes so that family welfare
becomes a people centred programme. 5. Miscellaneous.
If the NPP 2000 was fully implemented, it was II. Terminal methods
anticipated that in the year 2010 the population may be
1107 million instead of 1162 million projected by the 1 Male sterilization
Technical Group of Population Projections. However, the 2 Female sterilization.
provisional population (1210 million) in 2011 is higher by
about 110 million compared to the target set for the year
2010. Efforts at population stabilization will be effective only BARRIER METHODS
if an integrated package of essential services is directed at
village and household levels. Inadequacies in the existing A variety of barrier or "occlusive" methods, suitable for
health infrastructure have led to a unmet need of 28 per cent both men and women are available. The aim of these
of contraception services and obvious gap in coverage and methods is to prevent live sperm from meeting the ovum.
outreach. The NPP 2000 is to be largely implemented and Barrier methods have increased in popularity quite recently
managed at panchayat and nagar palika levels in because of certain contraceptive and non-contraceptive
coordination with the concerned state/UT administration. advantages. The main contraceptive advantage is the
absence of side-effects associated with the "pill" and IUD.
CONTRACEPTIVE METHODS The non-contraceptive advantages include some protection
(Fertility Regulating Methods) from sexually transmitted diseases, a reduction in the
incidence of pelvic inflammatory disease and possibly some
Contraceptive methods are, by definition, preventive protection from the risk of cervical cancer (36). Barrier
methods to help women avoid unwanted pregnancies. They methods require a high degree of motivation on the part of
include all temporary and permanent measures to prevent the user. In general they are less effective than either the pill
pregnancy resulting from coitus. or the loop. They are only effective if they are used
The last few years have witnessed a contraceptive consistently and carefully.
revolution, that is, man trying to interfere with the ovulation
cycle. a. PHYSICAL METHODS
It is now generally recognized that there can never be an 1. Condom (37, 38)
ideal contraceptive - that is, contraceptive that is safe,
effective, acceptable, inexpensive, reversible, simple to Condom is the most widely known and used barrier
administer, independent of coitus, long-lasting enough to device by the males around the world. In India, it is better
obviate frequent administration and requiring little or no known by its trade name NIRODH, a sanskrit word, meaning
medical supervision. Further, a method which may be quite prevention. Condom is receiving new attention today as an
suitable for one group may be unsuitable for another effective, simple "spacing" method of contraception, without
because of different cultural patterns, religious beliefs and side effects. In addition to preventing pregnancy, condom
socio-economic milieu. As there is no single method likely to protects both men and women from sexually transmitted
meet the social, cultural, aesthetic and service needs of all diseases.
individuals and communities, the search for an "ideal The condom is fitted on the erect penis before
contraceptive" has been given up. The present approach in intercourse. The air must be expelled from the teat end to
family planning programmes is to provide a "cafeteria make room for the ejaculate. The condom must be held
choice" that is to offer all methods from which an individual carefully when withdrawing it from the vagina to avoid
can choose according to his needs and wishes and to spilling seminal fluid into the vagina after intercourse. A new
promote family planning as a way of life. condom should be used for each sexual act.
The term conventional contraceptives is used to denote Condom prevents the semen from being deposited in
those methods that require action at the time of sexual vagina. The effectiveness of a condom may be increased by
intercourse, e.g., condoms, spermicides, etc. Each using it in conjunction with a spermicidal jelly inserted into
contraceptive method has its unique advantages and the vagina before intercourse. The spermicide serves as
disadvantages. The success of any contraceptive method additional protection in the unlikely event that the condom
depends not only on its effectiveness in preventing should slip off or tear.
pregnancy but on the rate of continuation of its proper use.
Condoms can be a highly effective method of
The contraceptive methods may be broadly grouped into contraception, if they are used correctly at every coitus.
two classes spacing methods and terminal methods, as Failure rates for the condom vary enormously. Surveys have
shown below : reported pregnancy rates varying from 2-3 per 100 women-
years to more than 14 in typical users (39). Most failures are
I. Spacing methods
due to incorrect use.
1. Barrier methods The ADVANTAGES of condom are : (a) they are easily
(a) Physical methods available (b) safe and inexpensive (c) easy to use; do not
require medical supervision (d) no side effects (e) light,
(b) Chemical methods
compact and disposable, and (f) provides protection not
(c) Combined methods only against pregnancy but also against STD. The
DISADVANTAGES are : (a) it may slip off or tear during the sponge soaked in vinegar or olive oil, but it is only
coitus due to incorrect use, and (b) interferes with sex recently one has been commercially marketed in USA under
sensation locally about which some complain while others the trade name TODAY for the sole purpose of preventing
get used to it. The main limitation of condoms is that many conception. It is a small polyurethane foam sponge
men do not use them regularly or carefully, even when the measuring 5 cm x 2.5 cm, saturated with the spermicide,
risk of unwanted pregnancy or sexually transmitted disease nonoxynol-9. The sponge is far less effective than the
is high. diaphragm, but it is better than nothing (42). The failure rate
Condoms are manufactured in India by the Hindusthan in parous women is between 20 to 40 per 100 women-years
Latex in Trivandrum, London Rubber Industries in Chennai and in nulliparous women about 9 to 20 per 100 women-
and others. Besides commercial outlets, condoms are years (40).
supplied under social marketing programme.
b. CHEMICAL METHODS
Female condom In the 1960s, before the advent of IUDs and oral
The female condom is a pouch made of polyurethane, contraceptives, spermicides (vaginal chemical
which lines the vagina. An internal ring in the close end of contraceptives) were used widely. They comprise four
the pouch covers the cervix and an external ring remains categories (43):
outside the vagina. It is prelubricated with silicon, and a a) Foams : foam tablets, foam aerosols
spermicide need not be used. It is an effective barrier to STD b) Creams, jellies and pastes squeezed from a tube
infection. However, high cost and acceptability are major
problems. The failure rates during the first year use vary c) Suppositories inserted manually, and
from 5 per 100 women-years pregnancy rate to about 21 in d) Soluble films - C-film inserted manually.
typical users (40).
The spermicides contain a base into which a spermicide
2. Diaphragm is incorporated. The commonly used modern spermicides
are "surface-active agents" which attach themselves to
The diaphragm is a vaginal barrier. It was invented by a spermatozoa and inhibit oxygen uptake and kill sperms (44).
German physician in 1882. Also known as "Dutch cap'\ the
diaphragm is a shallow cup made of synthetic rubber The main drawbacks of spermicides are : (a) they have a
or plastic material. It ranges in diameter from 5-10 cm high failure rate (b) they must be used almost immediately
(2-4 inches). It has a flexible rim made of spring or metal. It before intercourse and repeated before each sex act (c) they
is important that a woman be fitted with a diaphragm of the must be introduced into those regions of the vagina where
proper size. It is held in position partly by the spring tension sperms are likely to be deposited, and (d) they may cause
and partly by the vaginal muscle tone. This means, for mild burning or irritation, besides messiness. The spermicide
successful use, the vaginal tone must be reasonable. should be free from potential systemic toxicity. It should not
Otherwise, in the case of a severe degree of cystocele, the have an inflammatory or carcinogenic effect on the vaginal
rim may slip down. skin or cervix. No spermicide which is safe to use has yet
been found to be really effective in preventing pregnancy
The diaphragm is inserted before sexual intercourse and when used alone (44). Therefore, spermicides are not
must remain in place for not less than 6 hours after sexuai recommended by professional advisers. They are best used
intercourse. A spermicidal jelly is always used along with the in conjunction with barrier methods. Recently there has
diaphragm. The diaphragm holds the spermicide over the been some concern about possible teratogenic effects on
cervix. Side-effects are practically nil. Failure rate for the foetuses, following their use. However, this risk is yet to be
diaphragm with spermicide vary between 6 to 12 per confirmed (41).
100 women-years (39).
ADVANTAGES : The primary advantage of the
diaphragm is the almost total absence of risks and medical INTRA-UTERINE DEVICES
contraindications. DISADVANTAGES : Initially a physician
or other trained person will be needed to demonstrate the Types of IUD
technique of inserting the diaphragm into the vagina and to
There are two basic types of IUD : non-medicated and
ensure a proper fit. After delivery, it can be used only after
medicated. Both are usually made of polyethylene or other
involution of the uterus is completed. Practice at insertion, polymers; in addition, the medicated or bioactive IUDs
privacy for this to be carried out and facilities for washing
release either metal ions (copper) or hormones
and storing the diaphragm precludes its use in most Indian
(progestogens).
families, particularly in the rural areas. Therefore, the extent
of its use has never been great. The non-medicated or inert IUDs are often referred to as
first generation IUDs. The copper IUDs comprise the
If the diaphragm is left in the vagina for an extended
second and the hormone-releasing IUDs the third
period, there is a remote possibility of a toxic shock
generation IUDs. The medicated IUDs were developed to
syndrome, which is a state of peripheral shock requiring
reduce the incidence of side-effects and to increase the
resuscitation (41).
contraceptive effectiveness. However, they are more
Variations of the diaphragm include the cervical cap, expensive and must be changed after a certain time to
vault cap and the vimule cap. These devices are not maintain their effectiveness (45). Fig. 7 shows different types
recommended in the National Family Welfare Programme. of IUDs currently in use. In India, under the National Family
Welfare Programme, Cu-T-200 B is being used. From the
3. Vaginal sponge year 2002, Cu-T-380 A has been introduced in the
Another barrier device employed for hundreds of years is programme (46).
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
during menstruation or within 10 days of the beginning of a If the bleeding is heavy or persistent or if the patient
menstrual period (42). During this period, insertion is develops anaemia despite the iron supplement, the IUD
technically easy because the diameter of the cervical canal is should be removed. Since there is often a direct relationship
greater at this time than during the secretory phase. The between the bleeding and the size and configuration of the
uterus is relaxed and myometrial contractions which might IUD (50), a change of IUD from the Lippes Loop to one of
tend to cause expulsion are at a minimum (44). In addition, copper devices is advised. In most women, removal of the
the risk that a woman is pregnant .is remote at this time. device is rapidly followed by a return to the normal
The IUD insertion can also be taken up during the first menstrual pattern. If an abnormal pattern persists, a full
week after delivery before the woman leaves the hospital gynaecological examination is required to ensure that there
("immediate postpartum insertion"). Special care is required is no pelvic pathology (45).
with insertions during the first week after delivery because of 2. Pain
the greater risk of perforation during this time. Furthermore,
immediate postpartum insertion is associated with a high Pain is the second major side-effect leading to IUD
expulsion rate. A convenient time for loop insertion is removal. WHO estimates that 15-40 per cent of IUD
6-8 weeks after delivery ("post-puerperal insertion"). Post- removals appear to be for pain only (45). Pain may be
puerperal insertion of an IUD has several advantages. It can experienced during IUD insertion and for a few days
be combined with the follow-up examination of the women thereafter, as well as during menstruation (51). ·It may
and her child. IUD insertion can also be taken up manifest itself in low backache, cramps in the lower
immediately after a legally induced first trimester abortion. abdomen and occasionally pain down the thighs. These
But IUD insertion immediately after a second trimester symptoms usually disappear by the third month (49).
abortion is not recommended (45). Since there is a risk of If during insertion, the pain is particularly severe, it is
infection, most physicians still do not approve of an IUD possible that the device may have been incorrectly placed in
insertion after an illegal abortion (45). the uterus or there is a disparity in size between the device
and the uterine cavity. Severe pain can also indicate a
Follow-up uterine perforation (45). Pain could also be due to infection.
An important aspect of IUD insertion is follow-up which is Pain is more commonly observed in nullipara and those who
sadly neglected. The objectives of the follow-up examination have not had a child for a number of years (52, 53).
are : (a) to provide motivation and emotional support for the Slight pain during insertion can be controlled by
woman (b) to confirm the presence of the IUD, and analgesics such as aspirin and codein. If pain is intolerable,
(c) diagnose and treat any side-effect or complication (51). the IUD should be removed. In place of a Lippes Loop, a
The IUD wearer should be examined after her first menstrual copper device can be tried. If the woman decides not to
period, for the chances of loop expulsion are high during this have an IUD, another method of contraception should be
period; and again after the third menstrual period to prescribed.
evaluate the problems of pain and bleeding; and thereafter
at six-month or one-year intervals depending upon the 3. Pelvic infection
facilities and the convenience of the patient. Pelvic inflammatory disease (PID) is a collective term that
The IUD wearer should be given the following includes acute, subacute and chronic conditions of the
instructions : (a) she should regularly check the threads or ovaries, tubes, uterus, connective tissue and pelvic
"tail" to be sure that the IUD is in the uterus; if she fails to peritoneum and is usually the result of infection (50).
locate the threads, she must consult the doctor (b) she Studies suggest that IUD users are about 2 to 8 times more
should visit the clinic whenever she experiences any side- likely to develop PID than non-contraceptors (54). Risk
effects such as fever, pelvic pain and bleeding, and (c) if she associated with IUD use is greater among women who have
misses a period, she must consult the doctor. a number of sexual partners (55) possibly because of greater
potential for exposure to STDs. The greater risk of PID with
SIDE-EFFECTS AND COMPLICATIONS IUD use may be due to introduction of bacteria into the
uterus during IUD insertion. Recent work has focused on
1. Bleeding PID as being caused by organisms ascending the IUD tail
The commonest complaint of women fitted with an IUD from the lower genital tract to uterus and tubes (56). The
(inert or medicated) is increased vaginal bleeding. It organisms include Gardnerella, Anaerobic streptococci,
accounts for 10-20 per cent of all IUD removals (51). The Bacteroides, Coliform bacilli and Actinomyces. The risk of
bleeding may take one or more of the following forms : PID appears to be the highest in the first few months after
greater volume of blood loss during menstruation, longer IUD insertion.
menstrual periods or mid-cycle bleeding (48). From the The clinical manifestations of PID are vaginal discharge,
woman's point of view, irregular bleeding constitutes a pelvic pain and tenderness, abnormal bleeding, chills and
source of personal inconvenience; from a medical point of fever. In many cases, the infection may be asymptomatic or
view, the concern is iron-deficiency anaemia. Usually low grade. Even one or two episodes of PID can cause
bleeding or spotting between periods settles within infertility permanently blocking the fallopian tubes.
1-2 months (49). The patient who is experiencing the Therefore, young women should be fully counselled on the
bleeding episodes should receive iron tablets (ferrous rjsks of PID before choosing an IUD.
sulphate 200 mg, three times daily). When PID is diagnosed, it should be treated promptly
Studies have shown that the greatest blood loss is caused by with broad-spectrum antibiotics. Most clinicians recommend
the larger non-medicated devices. Copper devices seem to removing IUD if infection does not respond to antibiotics
cause less average blood loss. Menstrual blood loss is within 24-48 hours (48). The risk of PID calls for proper
consistently lower when hormone-releasing devices are selection of cases for IUD insertion, better sterilization and
used (45). insertion techniques, and modified devices without tails.
IUDs
Norgestrel. ·
Desogestrel
0.15
0.30
0.15
1. Combined pill Yasmin Drospirenone 3.00
The combined pill is one of the major spacing methods of
contraception. The "original pill" which entered into the
I (C) With EE 0.05 mg and
less progestogenic
market in the early 1960s contained 100-200 mcg of a Eugynon 50, Duoluton, } Norgestrel o.so
synthetic oestrogen and 10 mg of a progestogen. Since then, Ovral G
a number of improvements have been made to reduce the Ovral, Primovlar 50 Levonorgestrel 0.25
undesirable side-effects of the pill by reducing the dose of Minov~ar Ed, Norethisterone acetate . i.oo
both the oestrogen and progestogen. At the present time, Orlest ·
most formulations of the combined pill contain no more Orthonovin 1/50 Norethisteron.e. 1.0b
than 30-35 mcg of a synthetic oestrogen, and 0.5 to 1.0 mg
of a progestogen. The debate continues about the minimum
I(DJ WithEE0.05 mg and
. more progestogenic
effective dose of the progestogen in the pill which will Orgalutin Lynestrenol 2;50
produce the least metabolic disturbances. · Norlestrih 2.5/50 Norethisterone acetate 2.50
The pill is given orally for 21 consecutive days beginning Gynovlar 21 -Do-· 3.00
on the 5th day of the menstrual cycle (for a few preparations · Anovlar21 ~Do- 4.00
HORMONAL CONTRACEPTIVES
2. Progestogen-only pill (POP) levels. But hormones that suppress sperm production tend
This pill is commonly referred to as "minipill" or to lower testosterone and affect potency and libido.
"micropill". It contains only progestogen, which is given in A male pill made of gossypol - a derivative of cotton-seed
small doses throughout the cycle. The commonly used oil, has been very much in the news. It is effective in
progestogens are norethisterone and levonorgestrel. producing azoospermia or severe oligospermia, but as many
The progestogen-only pills never gained widespread use as 10 per cent of men may be permanently azoospermic
because of poor cycle control and an increased pregnancy after taking it for 6 months. Further gossypol could be toxic.
rate (60). However, they have a definite place in modern- Animal studies show a narrow margin between effective and
day contraception. They could be prescribed to older toxic doses. At present it does not seem that gossypol will
women for whom the combined pill is contraindicated ever be widely used as a male contraceptive (65).
because of cardiovascular risks. They may also be
MODE OF ACTION OF ORAL PILLS
considered in young women with risk factors for
neoplasia (61). The evidence that the progestogens may The mechanism of action of the combined oral pill is to
lower the high-density lipoproteins may be of some concern. prevent the release of the ovum from the ovary. This is
achieved by blocking the pituitary secretion of gonadotropin
3. Post-coital contraception that is necessary for ovulation to occur. Progestogen-only
Post-coital (or "morning after") contraception is preparations render the cervical mucus thick and scanty and
recommended within 72 hours of an unprotected thereby inhibit sperm penetration. Progestogens also inhibit
intercourse. Two methods are available: tubal motility and delay the transport of the sperm and of
the ovum to the uterine cavity (63).
(a) IUD : The simplest technique is to insert an IUD, if
acceptable, especially a copper device within 5 days. EFFECTIVENESS
(b) Hormonal : More often a hormonal method may be Taken according to the prescribed regimen, oral
preferable. In India Levonorgestrel 0. 75 mg tablet is contraceptives of the combined type are almost 100 per cent
approved for emergency contraception. It is used as one effective in preventing pregnancy (50). Some women do not
tablet of 0.75 mg within 72 hours of unprotected sex and the take the pill regularly, so the actual rate is lower. In
2nd tablet after 12 hours of 1st dose. developed countries, the annual pregnancy rate is less than
or 1 per cent but in many other countries, the pregnancy rate is
considerably higher (63).
Two oral contraceptive pills containing 50 mcg of ethinyl
estradiol within 72 hours after intercourse, and the same Under clinical trial conditions, the effectiveness of
dose after 12 hours. progestogen-only pills is almost as good as that of the
combination products. However, in large family planning
or programmes, the effectiveness and continuation rates are
Four oral contraceptive pills containing 30 or 35 mcg of usually lower than in clinical trials. The effectiveness may
ethinyl estradiol within 72 hours and 4 tablets after 12 hours. also be affected by certain drugs such as rifampicin,
or phenobarbital and ampicillin (63).
Mifepristone 10 mg once within 72 hours. RISKS AND BENEFITS
Post-coital contraception is advocated as an emergency Historically oral contraceptives were introduced in the
method; for example, after unprotected intercourse, rape or early 1960s. During the first decade of their use,
contraceptive failure. Opinion is divided about the effect on investigations focused on the benefit of pregnancy
foetus, should the method fail. Although the failure rate for prevention and risk of abnormal cycle bleeding. During the
post-coital contraception is less than 1 per cent, some 1970s, following their widespread use it became apparent
experts think a woman should not use the hormonal method that the oral contraceptives had some adverse effects
unless she intends to have an abortion, if the method fails. principally on the cardiovascular system (e.g., myocardial
There is no evidence that foetal abnormalities will occur. But infarction, deep vein thrombosis, etc.) and that these effects
some doubts remain (62). were associated with the oestrogen component of the pill.
This led to a reduction of the oestrogen content of the pill
4. Once-a-month (long-acting) pill until the current 30-35 mcg oral pills were developed. Until
Experiments with once-a-month oral pill in which 1980, there was little mention of the untoward effects of
quinestrol, a long-acting oestrogen is given in combination progestogens.
with a short-acting progestogen, have been disappointing As we entered the third decade of oral pill use in 1980s,
(63). The pregnancy rate is too high to be acceptable. In more information about the hazards and benefits of the pill
addition, bleeding tends to be irregular. were available from two large British prospective studies
the Royal College of General Practitioners' study and the
5. Male pill Oxford University Family Planning Association's study, both
The search for a male contraceptive began in 1950 (64). of which started in 1968 (65, 66, 67). This section
Research is following 4 main lines of approach : summarizes the risks and benefits of the pill as of date.
(a) preventing spermatogenesis (b) interfering with sperm
storage and maturation (c) preventing sperm transport in the a. Adverse effects
vas, and {d) affecting constituents of the seminal fluid. Most
of the research is concentrated on interference with 1. Cardiovascular effects
spermatogenesis. An ideal male contraceptive would Data from the earlier case control studies (68, 69) and the
decrease sperm count while leaving testosterone at normal Oral Contraceptive Study of the RCGP (68) and the Oxford
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
Study in UK (66, 67) provided conclusive evidence that the problem for the users in that they may accelerate
use of the combined pill was associated with an excess atherogenesis and result in clinical problems such as
mortality. Women who had used the pill were reported to myocardial infarction and stroke.
have a 40 per cent higher death rate than women who had
never taken the pill. Virtually, all the excess mortality 4. Other adverse effects
was due to cardiovascular causes, that is myocardial (i) Liver disorders : The use of the pill may lead to
infarction, cerebral thrombosis and venous thrombosis, with hepatocellular adenoma and gall bladder disease.
or without pulmonary embolus (70, 71). The risk increased Cholestatic jaundice can occur in some pill users.
substantially with age and cigarette smoking (Table 21). The (ii) Lactation : Preparations containing a relatively high
evidence was convincing that the cardiovascular amount of oestrogen adversely affect the quantity and
complications were positively associated with the oestrogen constituents of breast milk (74), and less frequently cause
content of the pill. premature cessation of lactation. In a WHO study (74) users
of the combined pill experienced a 42 per cent decline in
TABLE 21 milk volume after 18 weeks, compared with a decline of
Circulatory disease mortality rates per 100,000 women-years 12 per cent for users· of progestogen-only minipills and
by age, smoking status and oral contraceptive use 0.16 per cent for controls using non-hormonal preparations.
Women taking oral contraceptives, no matter what type,
excrete small quantities of hormones in their breast milk, but
little is known about the long-term impact, if any, on the
15-24Years child (71). (iii) Subsequent fertility: In general, oral
Non-'smokers contraceptive use seems to be followed by a slight delay in
Smokers conception (77). The ·proportion of women becoming
25-34 Years pregnant within 2 months of discontinuing the pill may
Non-smokers range from 15-35 per cent (78). It is not known whether the
Smokers·
prolonged use of the pill beyond 5-10 years affects
35-44 Years· subsequent fertility. (iv) Ectopic pregnancies : These are
Non-smokers
Smokers .· more likely to occur in women taking progestogen-only pills,
but not in those taking combined pills. (v) Foetal
45 +Years development : Several reports have suggested that oral pills
Non-smokers .52A
Smokers 206.7 taken inadvertently during (or even just before) pregnancy
might increase the incidence of birth defects of the foetus,
Source : (72) but this is not yet substantiated (79).
The above findings led to the progressive reduction of the 5. Common unwanted effects
oestrogen content to the minimum levels necessary to (i) Breast tenderness : Breast tenderness, fullness and
maintain contraceptive effect. Inspiteof · this reduction, it discomfort have been observed in women taking oral pills.
became clear by 1980 that some of the untoward vascular Breast engorgement and fullness are said to be dependent
effects (e.g., hypertension) persisted, in addition to on progestogen; pain and tenderness are attributed to
metabolic effects which are attributed to the progestogen oestrogen. (ii) Weight gain : About 25 per cent of users
content of the pill. It became clear that progestogen levels complain of weight gain. It is usually less than 2 kg, and
must also be minimal to avoid the complications of pill use. occurs during the first 6 months of use. This is attributed to
water retention, in which case restriction of salt intake is
2. Carcinogenesis usually effective. (iii) Headache and migraine : Migraine
A review prepared by WHO (73) concluded that there may be aggravated or triggered by the pill. Women, whose
was no clear evidence of a relationship, either positive or migraine requires treatment with vasoconstrictors such as
negative between the use of combined pill and the risk of ergotamine, should not take oral pills. (iv) Bleeding
any form of cancer. However, the WHO Multicentre case- disturbances : A small minority of women using oral
control study on the possible association between the use of contraceptives may complain of break-through bleeding or
hormonal contraceptives and neoplasia indicated a trend spotting in the early cycles. A few women may not have a
towards increased risk of cervical cancer with increasing withdrawal bleeding at the end of a cycle. Women should be
duration of use of oral contraceptives; this finding is being forewarned of these possibilities.
further explored (74).
b. Beneficial effects
3. Metabolic effects The single most significant benefit of the pill is its almost
A great deal of attention has been focused recently on the 100 per cent effectiveness in preventing pregnancy and
metabolic effects induced by oral contraceptives. These thereby removing anxiety about the risk of unplanned
have included the elevation of blood pressure, the alteration pregnancy. Apart from this, the pill has a number of non-
in serum lipids with a particular effect on decreasing contraceptive health benefits (80). Both the Royal College of
high-density lipoproteins, blood clotting and the ability to General Practitioners' and the Oxford Family Planning
modify carbohydrate metabolism with the resultant Association's long-term prospective studies of pill use in
elevations of blood glucose and plasma insulin (75). These Britain have shown that using the pill may give protection
effects are positively related to the dose of the progestogen against at least 6 diseases: benign breast disorders including
component (76). Family planning specialists have voiced a fibrocystic disease and fibroadenoma, ovarian cysts, iron-
growing concern that the adverse effects associated with deficiency anaemia, pelvic inflammatory disease, ectopic
oral contraceptives could be a potential long-range pregnancy and ovarian cancer.
HORMONAL CONTRACEPTIVES
TABLE 23
Formulations and injection schedules of injectable contraceptives
1000 pregnancies respectively. It is evident that perhaps two mother. This condition is a unique feature of the
thirds of all abortions take place outside authorized health Indian law and virtually allows abortion on request, in
service by unauthorized and often unskilled persons (91). view of the difficulty of proving that a pregnancy was
The EARLY COMPLICATIONS of abortion include not caused by failure of contraception.
haemorrhage, shock, sepsis; uterine perforation, cervical The written consent of the guardian is necessary before
injury, thromboembolism and anaesthetic and psychiatric performing abortion in women under 18 years of age, and
complications. The LATE SEQUELAE include infertility, in lunatics even if they are older than 18 years.
ectopic gestation, increased risk of spontaneous abortion
and reduced birth weight. 2. The person or persons who can perform abortion
Data indicates that the seventh and eighth week of The Act provides safeguards to the mother by authorizing
gestation is the optimal time for termination of pregnancy only a Registered Medical Practitioner having experience in
(92). Studies indicate that the risk of death is 7 times higher gynaecology and obstetrics to perform abortion where the
for women who wait until the second trimester to terminate length of pregnancy does not exceed 12 weeks. However,
pregnancy. The Indian Law (MTP Act, 1971) allows abortion where the pregnancy exceeds 12 weeks and is not more than
only up to 20 weeks of pregnancy. 20 weeks, the opinion of two Registered Medical
Practitioners is necessary to terminate the pregnancy.
Legalization of abortion
3. Where abortion can be done
During the last 25 years there have been gradual
liberalization of abortion laws throughout the world. Until The Act stipulates that no termination of pregnancy shall
1971, abortions in India were governed exclusively by the be made at any place other than a hospital established or
Indian Penal Code 1860 and the Code of Criminal maintained by Government or a place approved for the
Procedure 1898, and were considered a crime except when purpose of this Act by Government.
performed to save the life of a pregnant woman. The Abortion services are provided in hospitals in strict
Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act was passed by the confidence. The name of the abortion seeker is kept
Indian Parliament in 1971 and came into force from April 1, confidential, since abortion has been treated statutorily as a
1972 (except in Jammu and Kashmir, where it came into personal matter.
effect from November 1, 1976). Implementing rules and
regulations initially written in 1971 were revised again in MTP RULES {1975)
1992 (95). The Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act is a Rules and Regulations framed initially were altered in
health care measure which helps to reduce maternal October 1975 to eliminate time-consuming procedures
morbidity and mortality resulting from illegal abortions. It involved in MTP and to make services more readily
also affords an opportunity for motivating such women to available. These changes have occurred in 3 administrative
adopt some form of contraception. areas (93, 94).
MISCELLANEOUS The shortest cycle minus 18 days gives the first day of the
fertile period. The longest cycle minus 10 days gives the last
1. Abstinence day of the fertile period. For example, if a woman's
menstrual cycle varies from 26 to 31 days, the fertile period
The only method of birth control which is completely
during which she should not have intercourse would be from
effective is complete sexual abstinence. It is sound in theory;
the 8th day to the 21st day of the menstrual cycle, counting
in practice, an oversimplification. It amounts to repression of
day one as the first day of the menstrual period. Fig. 8 shows
a natural force and is liable to manifest itself in other
the fertile period and the safe period in a 28-day cycle.
directions such as temperamental changes and even nervous
breakdown. Therefore, it can hardly be considered as a However, where such calculations are not possible, the
method of contraception to be advocated to the masses. couple can be advised to avoid intercourse from the 8th to
the 22nd day of the menstrual cycle, counting from the first
2. Coitus interruptus day of the menstrual period (95).
This is the oldest method of voluntary fertility control. The drawbacks of the calendar method are : (a) a
It involves no cost or appliances. It continues to be a widely woman's menstrual cycles are not always regular. If the
practised method. The male withdraws before ejaculation, cycles are irregular, it is difficult to predict the safe period
and thereby tries to prevent deposition of semen into the (b) it is only possible for this method to be used by educated
vagina. Some couples are able to practise this method and responsible couples with a high degree of motivation
successfully, while others find it difficult to manage. The and cooperation (c) compulsory abstinence of sexual
chief drawback of this method is that the precoital secretion intercourse for nearly one half of every month what may
of the male may contain sperm, and even a drop of semen is be called "programmed sex" (d) this method is not
sufficient to cause pregnancy. Further, the slightest mistake applicable during the postnatal period, and (e) a high failure
in timing the withdrawal may lead to the deposition of a rate of 9 per 100 woman-years (39). The failures are due to
certain amount of semen. Therefore, the failure rate with this wrong calculations, inability to follow calculations, irregular
method may be as high as 25 per cent. use and "taking chances".
Hitherto, the alleged side-effects (e.g., pelvic congestion, Two medical complications have been reported to result
vaginismus, anxiety neurosis) were highly magnified. Today, from the use of safe period; ectopic pregnancies and
expert opinion is changing in this respect. If the couple embryonic abnormalities. Ectopic pregnancies may follow
prefers it, there should be no objection to its use. It is better conception late in the menstrual cycle and displacement of
than using no family planning method at all. It is conceded the ovum; embryonic abnormalities may result from
that coitus interruptus along with abstinence and abortion conception involving either an over-aged sperm or over-
played a major role in reducing birth rates in the developed aged ovum. If this is correct, the safe period may not be an
world during the 18th and 19th centuries (44). absolutely safe period (96).
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
e. It is sufficient if the acceptor declares having obtained of antibodies against sperm in the blood. Normally 2 per
the consent of his/her spouse to undergo sterilization cent of fertile men have circulating antibodies against their
operation without outside pressure, inducement or own sperm. In men who have had vasectomies, the figure
coercion, and that he/she knows that for all practical can be as high as 54 per cent. There is no reason to believe
purposes, the operation is irreversible, and also that that such antibodies are harmful to physical health. It is
the spouse has not been sterilized earlier. likely that the circulating antibodies can cause a reduction in
subsequent fertility despite successful reanastomosis of the
Male sterilization (107, 108) vas (43).
Male sterilization or vasectomy being a comparatively· (e) Psychological : Some men may complain of
simple operation can be performed even in primary health diminution of sexual vigour, impotence, headache, fatigue,
centres by trained doctors under local anaesthesia. When etc. Such adverse psychological effects are seen in men who
carried out under strict aseptic technique, it should have no have undergone vasectomy under emotional pressure. That
risk of mortality. In vasectomy, it is customary to remove a is why it is important to explain to each acceptor the basis
piece of vas at least 1 cm after clamping. The ends are of the operation and give him sufficient time to .make up
ligated and then folded back on themselves and sutured into his mind voluntarily and seriously to have the. operation
position, so that the cut ends face away from each other. done.
This will reduce the risk of recanalization at a later date. It is
important to stress that the acceptor is not immediately Causes of failure (108)
sterile after the operation, usually until approximately The failure rate of vasectomy is generally low, 0.15 per
30 ejaculations have taken place (44). During this 100 person-years. The most common cause of failure is due
intermediate period, another method of contraception must to the mistaken identification of the vas. That is, instead of
be used. If properly performed, vasectomies are almost the vas, some other structure in the spermatic cord such as
100 per cent effective. thrombosed vein or thickened lymphatic has been taken.
Following vasectomy, sperm production and hormone Histological confirmation has, therefore, been recommended
output are not affected. The sperm produced are destroyed on all vasectomy specimens by some authors in developed
intraluminally by phagocytosis. This is a normal process in countries. In developing countries, histological confirmation
the male genital tract, but the rate of destruction is greatly is ruled out because of lack of facilities for such an
increased after vasectomy. Vasectomy is a simpler, faster and examination. A simpler method has been recommended,
less expensive operation than tubectomy in terms of that is, microscopic examination of a smear prepared by
instruments, hospitalization and doctor's training. Cost-wise, gentle squeezing of the vas on a glass slide and staining with
the ratio is about 5 vasectomies to one tubal ligation. Wright's stain. The vas can be identified by the presence of
columnar epithelial cells that line the lumen of the vas. In
COMPLICATIONS some cases, failure may be due to spontaneous
The very few complications that may arise are : recanalisation of vas. Sometimes there may be more than
(a) Operative : The early complications include pain, one vas on one side. Pregnancy could also result from sexual
scrotal haematoma and local infection. Wound infection is intercourse before the disappearance of sperms from the
reported to occur in about 3 per cent of patients. Good reproductive tract.
haemostasis and administration of antibiotics will reduce the
Post-operative advice
risk of these complications.
(b) Sperm granules : Caused by accumulation of sperm, To ensure normal healing of the wound and to ensure the
these are a common and troublesome local complication of success of the operation, the patient should be given the
vasectomy. They appear in 10-14 days after the operation. following advice :
The most frequent symptoms are pain and swelling. 1. The patient should be told that he is not sterile
·Clinically the mass is hard and the average size immediately after the operation; at least
approximately 7 mm. Sperm granules may provide a 30 ejaculations may be necessary before the seminal
medium through which re-anastomosis of the severed vas examination is negative (44).
can occur. The sperm granules eventually subside. It has 2. To use contraceptives until aspermia has been
been reported that using metal clips to close the vas may established.
reduce or eliminate this problem.
3. To avoid taking bath for at least 24 hours after the
(c} Spontaneous recanalization : Most epithelial tubes will operation.
recanalize after damage, and the vas is no exception. The
4. To wear a T-bandage or scrotal support (langot) for
incidence of recanalization is variously placed between
15 days : and to keep the site clean and dry.
0 to 6 per cent. Its occurrence is serious. Therefore, the
surgeon should explain the possibility of this complication to 5. To avoid cycling or lifting heavy weights for 15 days;
every acceptor prior to the operation, and have written there is, however, no need for complete bed rest.
consent acknowledging this fact. In a study, the wives of 6. To have the stitches removed on the 5th day after the
6 out of 14,047 men who had vasectomies in the UK became operation.
pregnant between 16 months and 3 years later (109).
Therefore, the patient should be urged to report for a regular No scalpel vasectomy
follow-up, may be up to 3 years. No scalpel vasectomy is a new technique that is safe,
(d) Autoimmune response: Vasectomy is said to cause an convenient and acceptable to males. This new method is
autoimmune response to sperm. Blocking of the vas causes now being canvassed for men as a special project, on a
reabsorption of spermatozoa and subsequent development voluntary basis under the family welfare programme. Under
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
the project, medical personnel all over the country are to be The Pearl index is defined as the number of "failures per
trained. Availability of this new technique at the peripheral 100 woman-years of exposure (HWY)." This rate is given by
level will increase the acceptance of male sterilization in the the formula :
country. The project is being funded by the UNFPA (9).
Total accidental pregnancies
Female sterilization Failure rate per HWY x 1200
Total months of exposure
Female sterilization can be done as an interval procedure,
postpartum or at the time of abortion. Two procedures have In applying the above formula, the total accidental
become most common, namely laparoscopy and pregnancies shown in the numerator must include every
minilaparotomy. known conception, whatever its outcome, whether this had
terminated as live births, still-births or abortions or had not
(a) Laparoscopy yet terminated. The factor 1200 is the number of months in
This is a technique of female sterilization through 100 years. The total months of exposure in the denominator
abdominal approach with a specialized instrument called is obtained by deducting from the period under review of
"laparoscope". The abdomen is inflated with gas (carbon 10 months for a full-term pregnancy, and 4 months for an
dioxide, nitrous oxide or air) and the instrument is abortion (96).
introduced into the abdominal cavity to visualize the tubes. A failure rate of 10 per HWY would mean that in the
Once the tubes are accessible, the Falope rings (or clips) are lifetime of the average woman about one-fourth or
applied to occlude the tubes. This operation should be 2.5 accidental pregnancies would result, since the average
undertaken only in those centres where specialist fertile period of a woman is about 25 years (96).
obstetrician-gynaecologists are available. The short
operating time, shorter stay in hospital and a small scar are In designing and interpreting a use-effectiveness trial, a
some of the attractive features of this operation. minimum of 600 months of exposure is usually considered
necessary before any firm co.nclusion can be reached (96).
Patient selection : Laparoswpy is not advisable for
postpartum patients for 6 weeks following delivery; With most methods of contraception, failure rates decline
however, it can be done as a concurrent procedure to MTP. with duration of use. The Pearl index is usually based on a
Haemoglobin per cent should not be less than 8. There specific exposure (usually one year) and, therefore, fails to
should be no associated medical disorders such as heart accurately compare methods at various durations of
disease, respiratory disease, diabetes and hypertension. It is exposure. This limitation is overcome by using the method
recommended that the patient be kept in hospital for a of life-table analysis.
minimum of 48 hours after the operation. Life-table analysis : Life-table analysis calculates a failure
The cases are required to be followed-up by health rate for each month of use. A cumulative failure rate can
workers (F) LHVs in their respective areas once between then compare methods for any specific length of exposure.
7-10 days after the operation, and once again between 12 Women who leave a study for any reason other than
and 18 months after the operation. unintended pregnancy are removed from the analysis,
contributing their exposure until the time of the exit.
Complications : Although complications are uncommon,
when they do occur they may be of a serious nature Element of success in family planning
requiring experienced surgical intervention. Puncture of programme
large blood vessels and other potential complications have
been reported as major hazards of laparoscopy. The main strategy of family planning programme is to
offer to client easy access to a wide range of affordable
Laparoscopic sterilizations have become very popular in
contraceptive method through multiple service delivery
India. Nearly 41.4 per cent of all female sterilizations during channels in a good quality, reliable fashion. The key points
2010-11 were through laparoscopic method (24). are as follows : (1) Make services accessible : Offering
(b) Minilap operation
services through a variety of delivery points makes methods
available to more potential users; (2) Make services
Minilaparotomy is a modification of abdominal affordable : Partnerships between public and private-sector
tubectomy. It is a much simpler procedure requmng a services encourage clients to pay what they can, while public
smaller abdominal incision of only 2.5 to 3 cm conducted programmes serve the poor for free or for low fees; (3) Offer
under local anaesthesia. The minilap/Pomeroy technique is client-centered care : Planning and providing services with
considered a revolutionary procedure for female the clients in mind help to make sure their needs are met
sterilization. It is also found to be a suitable procedure at the and their preferences are honoured; (4) Rely on evidence-
primary health centre level and in mass campaigns. It has based technical guidance : Up-to-date service delivery
the advantage over other methods with regard to safety, guidelines, tools, and job aids can help translate research
efficiency and ease in dealing with complications. Minilap findings into better practice; (5) Communicate effectively :
operation is suitable for postpartum tubal sterilization. Communication grounded in behaviour theory and sensitive
to local norms motivates clients to seek services and helps
Evaluation of contraceptive methods them make good family planning choices; (6) Assure
Contraceptive efficacy is generally assessed by measuring contraceptive security : A strong logistics system and a long-
the number of unplanned pregnancies that occur during a term plan for contraceptive security ensure that a variety of
specified period of exposure and use of a contraceptive methods, and the supplies and equipment to provide them,
method. The two methods that have been used to measure are always available; (7) Work for supportive policies :
contraceptive efficacy are the Pearl index and life-table Showing how family planning contributes to development
analysis. goals makes the case for continued support for family
TERMINAL METHODS
year 2014, WHO puts the global adolescent birth rate at delivery of services rests with the Government through its
49 per 1000 girls of that age, country rates range from one health care system at the Centre and in the States.
to 229 births per 1000 girls. This indicates a marked
decrease since 1990 (111). These are often "at risk" At the Centre
pregnancies. Many are undesired, and occur in unmarried The Family Welfare Programme is a centrally sponsored
adolescents who then resort to legal or illegal abortion, scheme, and the states receive 100 per cent assistance from
performed tinder unsatisfactory medical conditions. This has the central government. Since the entire cost is virtually
serious health and even life-threatening consequences for borne by the central government, the central government
these young women the ensuing mortality and morbidity controls the planning, and financial management of the
(especially secondary sterility) are quite considerable. programme (e.g., establishment of clinics, pattern of staffing,
Prevention of undesired pregnancies and of sexually expenditure); training, research and evaluation, and most
transmitted diseases in young people through educational important, the formulation of an overall policy for the
programmes dealing with responsible sexual behaviour is a programme. The current policy is to promote family
major public health challenge. Adolescents are ambivalent planning on the basis of voluntary and informed acceptance
about family planning : to request contraception is to with full community participation. The emphasis is on a
"reveal" one's sexuality. For this reason, adolescent girls 2-child family. Recently there have been two major changes
sometimes choose the risk of an undesired pregnancy and of in the approach to delivery of family planning services : first,
an abortion. a greater emphasis on spacing methods, side by side with
BARRIER METHODS : Condoms make barrier method
terminal methods, and secondly to take the services to every
door-step and motivate families to adopt the small family
worthwhile, because they protect those adolescents, with
occasional different sexual partners, against STD and AIDS. norm.
However, condoms must be properly used, and it depends The administrative apparatus consists of a separate
on the man's behaviour. Young men seem to be increasingly Department of Family Welfare, which was created in 1966 in
aware of the importance of safeguarding their own health the Central Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. The
and that of their partners. Cervical caps and diaphragms, on Secretary to the Government of India in the Ministry of
the other hand, are inappropriate for adolescents since they Health and Family Welfare is in over all charge of the
require foreseeing of intercourse and complicated Department of Family Welfare. He is assisted by a Special
manipulations, to which young people are loath. Secretary and Joint Secretaries. The special secretary
supervises the programme implementation and coordinates
HORMONAL CONTRACEPTION : Hormonal methods
the various activities. There is now an Advisor (Mass Media
are perfectly suitable for adolescents, who generally do not and Communication) an officer of the rank of an
suffer from such problems as cardiovascular Additional Secretary. The National Institute of Health and
contraindications. In fact, these are probably the most Family Welfare acts as an apex technical institute for
adequate methods, since they are completely reversible, and promoting health and family welfare in the country through
in no way modify the future fertility of these young women. education, training services, research and evaluation. There
In developed countries, pills are usually preferred, but is a Central Family Welfare Council consisting of all the State
trimestrial or monthly injections are also appropriate. Health Ministers to review the implementation of the
Implants, with their five year term, cover too long a period programme. A Population Advisory Council headed by the
for certain adolescents. Union Health Minister, Members of Parliament, and persons
IUD : IUD are theoretically contraindicated, because of from the fields related to population control was set up in
the risk of pelvic infection and of secondary sterility. 1982. This body acts like a "think tank" to analyze the
However, an adolescent is better protected by an IUD than implementation of the programme and advise the
by illegal repeated abortions. This method has the advantage government suitably. A cabinet sub-committee headed by
of being discrete and avoiding demanding routines. the Prime Minister has also been formed for periodic review
OTHER METHODS : Periodic abstinence is not easy of the progress of the family welfare programme. Family
when cycles are irregular and intercourse is unforeseen, and planning is no longer viewed as the sole responsibility of the
with new partners. In certain countries, however, they are Health Ministry, but will devolve on all ministries connected
practically the only method taught, for religious reasons, and with human resources and development. This is an
poor protection is preferable to no protection at all. important breakthrough in current thinking.
Similarly, withdrawal is not very suitable method, since
At the state level
young men are usually not very skillful.
Under the Indian constitution, the state governments are
Spermicides are not contraindicated, but have two
responsible for the administration and implementation of the
disadvantages - they are costly, and are not effective against
Family Welfare Programme. Since most of the crucial policy
STD and AIDS.
decisions are made by the central government, the pattern
As a major chunk of the world population is under of organization and many features of the delivery system are
25 years age group. An extremely large number of young fairly well-standardized in the States.
people will, therefore, be entering their reproductive years at The organizational set-up at the State level consists of a
that time. The demographic future of the world will depend State Family Welfare Bureau, which is part of the State
on them, on how well informed they are, and on their sense Health and Family Welfare Directorate. At present, 25 State
of responsibilities. Family Welfare Bureaus are functioning in the country.
DELIVERY SYSTEM In 1979, the offices of the Family Welfare and National
Malaria Eradication Programme were merged into one office
Since family planning is essentially a component of the and named as Regional Office for Health and Family
he.alth care system, the primary responsibility for the Welfare. These regional offices have been set up to maintain
liaison with state governments and give technical assistance integral part of the primary health centre. A total of 5,435
to them in connection with the implementation of the Family Rural Family Welfare Centres were established in the country
Welfare Programme and other important health at all block level PHCs sanctioned upto 1.4.1980. Most of the
programmes. To co-ordinate the family welfare activities states have integrated these centres into their primary health
between the state governments and the central government, care system and after this date family planning services are
one Family Welfare Cell has been sanctioned for each State. being provided through integrated facilities at PH Cs (115). As
of March 2014, 25,020 primary health centres were
At the district level functioning in the country. Each centre is supported by sub-
At the district level, the set-up consists of a District centres. The total number of sub-centres functioning are
Family Welfare Bureau consisting of 3 divisions an 152,326 (114).
administrative division headed by the District Family Welfare When fully staffed (by 3 medical officers including one
Officer; mass education and media division, in charge of lady doctor and supporting personnel} the PHC is expected
District Mass Education · and Media Officer, and an to provide fairly comprehensive "essential health care"
evaluation division, in charge of a Statistical Officer. These including family planning care. The medical officers are
are supported by 1,083 Urban Family welfare centres and usually trained to provide MTP and sterilization services.
871 Urban Health Posts. Presently there are 4 types of The programme of insertion of copper-T IUDs has been
Urban Health Posts-type A for areas with population less intensified. It is intended that laparoscopic services which
than 5,000, type B for areas with population between have become very popular will be made more widely
5,000-10,000, type C for population between 10 1000- available at the PHC.
25,000, and type D for areas with population between The sub~centres are to provide the main thrust of the
25,000-50,000. If the population is more than 50,000, then programme. Each subcentre is staffed by one male and one
it is to be divided into sectors of 50,000 population and female health worker. They are responsible for providing
Health Posts provided. Type A, B and C Health Posts are rudimentary health and MCH care; family planning
attached to a hospital for providing referral and supervisory motivation, supplies and services in spacing methods.
services. Type D Health Post is attached to a hospital for
sterilization, MTP and referral (34). Only type D health post Various studies conducted have highlighted that the
existing infrastructure is not being optimally utilized because
have a post of medical officer.
of its inadequacy to provide proper services. To improve
The 10 city family welfare bureaus are entrusted with the matters popular committees have been set up at all levels
responsibility of coordination, monitoring and supervision by some states to involve people in the programme and in
etc. ·of the family welfare services provided by various exercising vigilance over the work of various functionaries.
institutions in the city.
Presently there are three types of Urban Family Welfare At the village level
Centres. Type I is for population between 10,000-25,000, Two schemes are being implemented at the village level
type II is for population between 25,000-50,000, and to improve the outreach of services and increase local
type III is for above 50,000 population (34). These are participation: (a) The Village Health Guides : An
manned by 2 para-medical staff in type I and II centres and innovative approach has been the creation of a band of
by 6 persons including medical officer in type III centres. village Health Guides (mostly women}, one for each village
The Urban family welfare centres and health posts or a population of 1000. They are made responsible for
provide comprehensive integrated services of MCH and spreading knowledge and information to the eligible couples
family planning. The staff pattern is different for different and providing them with supplies of Nirodh and oral pills.
types of health posts and urban family welfare centres. About 3.23 lakh health guides are already in position.
(b) Trained dais : The national target is to provide one
At the community health centre trained dai per 1000 population. They conduct safe
deliveries in rural areas. They also act as family planning
Community health centre is established and maintained counsellors and motivators, supplementing the delivery
by the state governments. Presently it is manned by four system. (c) ASHA : 8.89 lakh ASHAs have been selected so
medical specialists i.e. surgeon, physician, gyn.aecologist far and 8.06 lakh have been provided with drug kits (112).
and paediatrician, supported by 21 paramedical and other At present the village health guides, trained dais and ASHAs
staff. It has 30 in-door beds with one OT, X-ray, labour are the lynchpins of the family planning delivery system
room and laboratory facilities and serves as a referral centre in India.
for four PH Cs. According to Indian Public Health Standards,
the community health centre is to be manned by 6 medical New initiatives (112)
specialists including an anaesthetist and an eye surgeon
supported by 24 paramedical and other staff with inclusion 1. Home Delivery of Contraceptives (HDC)
of two nurse midwives. It provides, apart from other a. A new scheme has been launched to utilize the
emergency obstetric care, full range of family planning services of ASHA to .deliver contraceptives at the
services including laproscopic services and safe abortion doorstep of beneficiaries. The scheme was launched
services. At present as of March 2014, 5,363 community in 233 pilot districts of 1 7 States on 11 July 2011
health centres are functional in the country (114). and is now expanded to the entire country from
17th December 2012.
At the primary health centre b. ASHA is charging a . nominal amount from
Since more than 68.2 per cent of India's population lives beneficiaries for her effort to deliver contraceptives at
in the rural areas an adequate network of service centres has doorstep i.e. Rs. 1 for a pack of 3 condoms. Rs.1 for a
been extended to the rural areas. A Rural Family Welfare cycle of OCPs and Rs. 2 for a pack of one tablet of
Centre with a medical officer and supporting staff forms an ECP.
514 DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
2. Ensuring Spacing at Birth (ESB) PTKs are being made available at sub-centres and to the
a. Under a new scheme launched by the Government of ASHAs to facilitate the early detection and decision making
India, services of ASHAs to be utilized for counselling for the outcomes of pregnancy.
newly married couples to ensure spacing of 2 years The public sector provides a wide range of contraceptive
after marriage and couples with 1 child to have services for limiting and spacing of births at various levels of
spacing of 3 years after the ·birth of 1st child. The health system as described in Table 25.
scheme is operational in 18 States (EAG, North- Government of India is promoting "Fixed Day Static
Eastern and Gujarat and Haryana). ASHA would be Services" (FDS) approach in sterilization services within the
paid following incentives under the scheme : public health system with the aim of increasing access to
Rs. 500/- to ASHA for delaying first child birth by sterilization services. States are being provided technical and
2 years after marriage. financial support for the development of human resources
Rs. 500/- to ASHA for ensuring spacing of 3 years and upgradation of health facilities for the functioning of
after the birth of 1st child. FDS. In the states with high unmet need for limiting
methods, sterilization camps will continue till the time FDS is
- Rs.1000/- in case the couple opts for a permanent implemented effectively. The frequency of sterilization
limiting method upto 2 children only. services at different health facilities at FDS is as follows (9) :
b. Ministry of Health & Family Welfare has introduced District hospital - weekly
short term IUCD (5 years effectively), Cu IUCD 375
under the National Family Planning programme. Sub-district hospital - weekly
Training of State level trainers has already been CHC/Block PHC fortnightly
completed and process is underway to train service 24x7 PHC/PHC monthly
providers upto the sub-centre level.
c. A new method of IUCD insertion (post-partum IUCD
Community Needs Assessment Approach (116)
insertion) has been introduced by the Government. Till recently, the achievements of family welfare
d. Promoting Post-partum Family Planning services at programme were assessed on the basis of the targets given
district hospitals by providing for placement of from the centre for individual contraceptives. This led to a
dedicated Family Planning Counsellors and training of situation where the achievement of the contraceptive targets
personnel. had become the ends by themselves. Over the years it
became apparent that there were many drawbacks in the top
3. Pregnancy Testing Kits down target approach in which types and quantity of
Nischay-Home based pregnancy test kits· (PTKs) was contraceptive need to be canvassed was decided by the
launched under NRHM in 2008 across the country. The higher authorities. Firstly, the user preference was not
TABLE 25
Family planning services in public health sector
Spacing Methods
IUCD380A Trained & certified ANMs, LHVs, Sub-centre & higher levels •On demand
SNs and Do.ctors • Camp approach ·
• Revised Compensation Scheme
Oral contraceptive Trained ASHAs, ANMs, LHVs, At door step {in pilot •On demand
pills (OCPs) SNs and Doctors districts), Village level • Village Health Nutrition Days
Subcentre & higher levels
Condoms Trained ASHAs, ANMs, LHVs, At door step {in pilot •On demand
SNs and Doctors districts), Village level • Village Health Nutrition Days
Subcentre & higher levels
Limiting Methods
Minilap Trained & certified MBBS PHC & higher levels • Fixed Day Static Approach
Doctors & Specialist Doctors • Camp approach
• Revised Compensation Scheme
Laparoscopic Trained & certified Specialist Doctors Usually CHC & higher levels· • National Family Planning
sterilization (OBG & General Surgeons) Insurance Scheme
NSV (No Scalpel Trained & certified MBBS PHC & higher levels
Vasectomy) Doctors & Specialist Doctors
Emergency
Contraception
Emergency Trained ASHAs, ANMs, LHVs, At door step (in pilot •On demand
contraceptive pills SNs and Doctors districts) Village level, • Village Health Nutrition Days
(ECPs) Subcentre & higher levels
ANM : Auxiliary Nurse Midwife; LHV : Lady Health Visitor; SN : Staff Nurse; ASHA : Accredited Social Health Activist.
Source: (112)
reflected in the targets. If the contraceptive required in vasectomy). State government employees, who undergo
accordance with the user was not available, the targets were sterilization after two or three children are eligible for a
not likely to be achieved. There was no authentic system of special increment (two increments after 2 children and one
feedback regarding which type of contraceptive was to be after 3 children). Central government employees get one
promoted in a particular area or among a particular age increment after sterilization. It is under the scheme
group. Secondly, the quality of the services became introduced in Dec. 1979 to promote small family norm,
secondary. For example, if in an attempt to fulfil targets for provided the employee is below 50 years of age and his
the number of IUD insertions, the quality ·of care is spouse below 45 years. They get special leave
compromised (especially while screening women for pre- (14 days for women and 7 days for men). No maternity
existing reproductive tract infections and sexually leave is allowed after 3 children.
transmitted diseases before IUD insertion) the acceptability In the event of death following sterilization,
of IUD programme would receive a serious setback and recanalization, or IUD insertion, ex-gratia payment of
discontinuation rate will be high. Thirdly, people may be Rs. 50,000 has been authorised to be paid to the surviving
tempted to resort to false reporting to claim fulfilment of the spouse, natural heir, etc. Rs. 30,000 per case of
target. In other words, contraceptive targets and cash incapacitation and Rs. 20,000 per case of cost of treatment
incentives resulted in the inflation of performance statistics of serious post-operative complications (9).
and deterioration in the quality of services.
The State Governments have been requested to : issue
Government of India deliberated objectively on the utility Green Cards to individual acceptors of terminal methods
of retaining the practice of targets at national and state after two children as a mark of recognition and for priority
levels. In the year 1995-96, one district in each of 18 states attention in schemes where preferential treatment was
(including a pilot project in Kerala and Tamil Nadu) were feasible. Cash awards have been instituted for the best
made target free. Later on the practice of fixing up of targets performing states, the amount of which will be spent on
for individual contraceptive method was given up from April promoting family welfare activities (117).
1996. This does not mean a licence to do no work. The
population goals remain the same as before. Health workers Family welfare linked health insurance
are expected to consult families and local community in the scheme (9)
beginning of the year in order to assess their needs and
preference and then work-out for themselves the programme Government of India has introduced a family planning
and workload for the coming year. The requirement for insurance scheme for acceptors of sterilization and
each village needs to be worked out to arrive at indemnity cover for doctors performing sterilization
the workload for the ANM, this becomes the target for the procedures in both government and accredited private/
ANM for the year. The workload of different ANMs under NGO/corporate health facilities. The insurance scheme will
one PHC when added up would determine the workload be operated by the ICICI.
for the PHC. Similarly requirements at the district level Compensation in the event of death :
would be worked out by adding up the requirements at all In the event of death following sterilization (inclusive of
the PHCs. death during process of sterilization operation) in hospital or
Later on it was found that due to complex calculations within 7 days from the date of discharge from the hospital, the
required the health workers were unable to fix the compensation available is Rs. 2 lakh. Death following
performance norms for themselves. Therefore, it was sterilization within 8-30 days from the date of discharge from
decided to modify and rename the target free manual as the hospital, the compensation is Rs. 50,000 and the
Community Needs Assessment Approach Manual. compensation for failure of sterilization operation is
Rs. 30,000 and Rs 25,000 for medical complication occuring
Involvement of private sector within 60 days of sterilization operation (to be reimbursed on
The family planning programme, to be successful, will the basis of actual expenditure incurred, not exceeding
have to be extended beyond the government delivery Rs 25,000) (91).
system to include the private sector. Grants~in-aid are All the doctors and health facilities rendering family
provided to voluntary organizations and industrial planning services, conducting such operations shall stand
organizations for running family welfare centres and indemnified against claims arising out of failure of
postpartum centres. The scheme for involvement of private sterilization, death or medical complications resulting there-
medical practitioners in the family welfare programme has from up to a maximum amount of Rs 2 lacs per doctor/
been extended to practitioners of integrated medicine. health facility per case. The cover would also include the
Government has also created nation-wide retail outlets for legal costs and actual modality of defending the prosecuted
selling subsidized condoms. doctor/ health facility in court, which would be borne by the
insurance company within certain limits (118).
Incentives and dis-incentives
The use of incentives and dis-incentives to encourage
Postpartum Programme (119)
couples to practise family planning has become a common An All India Hospital Postpartum Programme (AIHPP)
strategy in many developing countries. Financial was introduced in 1969. It is a hospital-based, maternity
compensation of individuals undergoing sterilization was centred approach to family planning. The primary objective
first introduced in 1966; over the years, it has been of the postpartum programme is to improve the health of the
gradually increased. The acceptors now receive a one-time mother and children through MCH and Family Welfare
payment of Rs.600 for conventional tubectomy, Rs. 1100 for programme which includes antenatal, neonatal, and
vasectomy and Rs. 145 for laparoscopic tubectomy, and Rs. postnatal services; immunization services to children and
75 are given to IUD receptors. Motivators also receive a mothers; and prophylaxis against anaemia and blindness.
small amount (Rs.150 for tubectomy and Rs. 200 for The programme is based on the following rationale :
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
a. That women who have recently delivered are of proven The problem of family planning is, therefore, essentially
fertility, and are at risk to become pregnant again rapidly the problem of social change. Contraceptive technology is
b. At the time of delivery and during the lying-in period, they no short cut to the problem. What is more important is to
are generally more receptive to adopt one or the other stimulate social changes affecting fertility such as raising the
family planning method. age of marriage, increasing the status of women, education
The postpartum programme offers necessary facilities to and employment opportunities, old age security, compulsory
such women. It has proved to be an efficient way of education of children, accelerating economic changes
delivering family planning services. The programme now designed to increase the per capita income, etc. It is now
covers 550 medical institutions at national, state and district axiomatic that economic development is the best
levels inclusive of 100 medical colleges and 2 post-graduate contraceptive. The experience of all countries which have
institutions. A scheme of PAP smear test facilities has been had a successful population control show that the .best
sanctioned for all medical colleges. motivation is economic, a desire to improve standard of
living. The solution to the problem is one of mass education
With a view to provide MCH and family welfare services in and communication, so that people may understand the
rural and semi-urban areas, as well as to improve the health benefits of a small family.
of mothers and children, the postpartum programme has
been extended to sub-divisional and sub-district hospitals. VOLUNTARY ORGANIZATIONS
1,012 such centres are functioning in the country (115).
Voluntary organizations have played a major role in
Population education population control programmes since the beginning. They
Population education has been defined as "an are involved in every possible way so as to complement
educational programme which provides for a study of the governmental efforts to promote Family Welfare
population situation in the community, nation and world Programme. Apart from educational and motivational
with the purpose of developing in the students rational and efforts, their activities include running of Family Welfare
responsible attitudes and behaviour towards that situation" Centres, post-partum centres, ANM training schools,
(119). The content of population education programme is population research centres and other innovative projects.
influenced by the specific national situation. as well as by Some of the well-known voluntary agencies in India are
political and educational goals (120). the Family Planning Association of India, the Family
In the Indian context, the concept of population Planning Foundation and the Population Council of India.
education is designed to bring home to the students, both at Others include the Indian Red Cross, the Indian Medical
school and university level the consequences of Association, Rotary Clubs, Lions Clubs, Citizens Forum,
uncontrolled population growth; the benefits of a small Christian Missionaries and Private Hospitals.
family norm; the economics, sociology and statistics of At the international level, the International Planned
population growth, its distribution and its relation to the Parenthood Federation is the world's largest private
levels of living. voluntary organization supporting family planning services
in developing countries. It is an international federation of
SOCIOLOGY OF FAMILY PLANNING independent Family Planning Associations with
The institution of family is as old as man himself. It is the headquarters in London. Others with long experience in this
basic social cell. The need for its discipline has only recently field include the United Nations Fund for Population
dawned because of changing economic, social and cultural Activities (UNFPA), the US Agency for International
patterns in the world - and above all, because of concern of Development (USAID), the Population Council, Ford
what might be called "quality of life" criteria. Sociologists Foundation, the Pathfinder Fund and World Bank besides
and economists have shown that it will be difficult to raise WHO and UNICEE The international agencies are assisting
the living standards of the people while population growth in funding family planning research, services, training and
continues unchecked. The gains of the five year information programmes designed to reduce the family size.
developmental plans are being absorbed by the rapidly
growing population for basic consumption, e.g., food, NATIONAL FAMILY WELFARE PROGRAMME
shelter, clothing, education and medical care. India launched a nation-wide family planning
Attitude surveys have shown that awareness of family programme in 1952, making it the first country in the world
planning is very widespread and over 60 per cent people to do so, though records show that birth control clinics have
have attitudes favourable to restricting or spacing births been functioning in the country since 1930. The early
(27). People are generally in favour of family planning, and beginnings of the programme were modest with the
there is no organized opposition to it. Inspite of this, the rate establishment of a few clinics and distribution of educational
of contraceptive use by couples in the developing countries material, training and research. During the Third Five Year
is very low. This is the crux of the family planning problem. Plan (1961-66), family planning was declared as "the very
Studies have shown that the population problem is centre of planned development". The emphasis was shifted
complicated by deep-rooted religious and other beliefs, from the purely "clinic approach" to the more vigorous
attitudes and practices favouring larger families (e.g., strong "extension education approach" for motivating the people
preference for male children). The common beliefs are - that for acceptance of the "small family norm". The introduction
children are the gift of God; the number of children is of the Lippes Loop in 1965 necessitated a major structural
determined by God; children are a poor man's wealth; reorganization of the programme, leading to the creation of
children are an asset to which parents can look forward in a separate Department of Family Planning in 1966 in the
periods of dependency caused by old age or misfortune, etc. Ministry of Health. During the years 1966-1969, the
Most of these beliefs stem from ignorance and lack of programme took firmer roots. The family planning
communication. infrastructure (e.g., primary health centres, sub-centres,
NATIONAL FAMILY WELFARE PROGRAMME
urban family planning centres, district and State bureaus) and outcome will be better. Accordingly, during Ninth Five
was strengthened. During the Fourth Five Year Plan {1969- Year Plan the RCH Programme integrates all the related
74), the Government of India gave "top priority" to the programmes of the Eighth Five Year Plan. The concept of
programme. The Programme was made an integral part of RCH is to provide need based, client oriented, demand
MCH activities of PHCs and their sub-centres. In 1970, an driven, high quality integrated services.
All India Hospital Postpartum Programme and in 1972, the The Government ·of India evolved a more detailed
Medical Termination of Pregnancy (MTP) Act were and comprehensive National Population Policy 2000 (see
introduced. During the Fifth Five Year Plan (1975-80) there page 493) to promote family welfare.
have been major changes. In April 1976, the country framed
its first "National Population Policy". The disastrous forcible The investment on family welfare programme during
sterilization campaign of 1976 led to the Congress defeat in successive plan-periods is tabulated below (121). It can be
the 1977 election. In June 1977, the· new (Janata) seen that from a modest sum of 0.65 crores during the first
Government that came into power formulated a new plan, the investment has reached a colossal amount of
population policy, ruling out compulsion and coercion for all Rs. 136,147 crores during the Eleventh Plan period.
times to ·come. The Ministry of Family Planning was Expenditure under the programme from
renamed "Family Welfare". the first to Eleventh five year plans
Although the performance of the programme was low
during 1977-78, it was a good year in as much as the
programme moved into new healthier directions. The 42nd
Amendment of the Constitution has made "Population First plan (1951.-56) 0.65
control and Family Planning" a concurrent subject, and this Second plan (l956-61) . q.00
provision has been made effective from January 1977. The ·Third plan (1961-66) 27.00
acceptance of the programme is now purely on voluntary Annual plan (Inter plan 1966-69) 82.90.
basis. The launching of the Rural Health Scheme in 1977 .. 285.80
Fourth plan (1969-74)
and the involvement of the local people (e.g., Health
Fifth plan (1974-79) 285.60 .
Guides, trained Dais, Opinion leaders) in the family welfare
programme at the grass-root level were aimed at Annual plan (1978-79) 101.80
accelerating the pace of progress of the programme. India Annual plan (1979-80) 116.20
was a signatory to the Alma Ata Declaration in 1978. The Sixth plan (1980-85) 1,309.00
acceptance of the primary health care approach to the Seventh plan (1985-90) 2,868.00
achievement of HFN2000 AD led to the formulation of a Annual plan (1990-91) 675.00
National Health Policy in 1982. The National Health Policy Annual plan (1991-92) . 749.00
was approved by the Parliament in 1983. It laid down the Eighth plan (1992-97) 6,195.00
long-term demographic goal of NRR= 1 by the year 2000 Ninth plan (1997-2002.) 14,170.00
which implies a 2-child family norm - through the Tenth plan (2002.:.,2007) 58,920.30
attainment of a birth rate of 21 and a death rate of 9 per · Eleventh plan (2007-2012) 136,147.00
thousand population, and a couple protection rate of 60 per
cent by the year 2000. The Sixth and Seventh Five Year
Plans were accordingly set to achieve these goals. The EVALUATION OF FAMILY PLANNING
National Health Policy also called for restructuring the
Evaluation is defined as a "process .of making judgements
health care delivery system to achieve HFN2000 AD, and about selected objectives and events by comparing them
family planning has been accorded a central place in health
with specified value standards for the purpose of deciding
development. alternative course of action". The purpose of evaluation is to
The Universal Immunization Programme aimed at improve the design and delivery of family planning services.
reduction in mortality and morbidity among infants and Five types of evaluation have been defined by a WHO
younger children due to vaccine preventable diseases was Expert Committee in 1975 (30) on evaluation of family
started in the year 1985-86. The oral rehydration therapy planning in health services :
was also started in view of the fact that diarrhoea was a
leading cause of death among children. Various other 1. Evaluation of need
programmes under MCH were also implemented during the
Seventh Five Year Plan. The objective of all these That is, health, demographic and socio-economic needs
programmes were convergent and aimed at improving the for family planning. For example, the. current status of
health of the mothers and young children, and to provide maternal mortality in a given area is an indicator of the need
them facilities for prevention and treatment of major for family planning.
diseases. During 1992 these programmes were integrated
2. Evaluation of plans
under Child Survival and Safe Motherhood (CSSM)
Programme. That is, an assessment of the feasibility and adequacy of
programme plans.
The process of integration of related programmes
initiated was taken a step further during 1994 when the 3. Evaluation of performance
International Conference on Population and Development in
Cairo recommended implementation of Unified (a) Services : Clinic services, mobile services, post-
Reproductive and Child Health Programme (RCH). It is partum services, contraceptive distribution, follow
obviously sensible that integrated RCH programme would up services, education and motivation activities.
help in reducing cost of inputs to some extent because (b) Response : Number of new acceptors, characteristics
overlapping of expenditure would no longer be necessary of acceptors.
DEMOGRAPHY AND FAMILY PLANNING
(c) Cost analysis. 20. The John Hopkins University (1985). Population Reports, M.8,
Sept-Oct. 85, Baltimore, Maryland. ·
(d) Other activities : Administration, manpower, data
21. World Bank (1987). World Development Report, 1987, Oxford
system, etc. University Press, New Delhi.
4. Evaluation of effects 22. John M. Last (2001), A Dictionary of Epidemiology, 4th ed.
23. International Family Planning Perspectives (1983). 9 (3) 84, New
Changes in knowledge, attitudes, motivation and York, USA.
behaviour. 24. Govt. of India (2011), Family Welfare Statistics in India, 2011,
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
5. Evaluation of impact 25. WHO (1971). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 483.
A WHO Study Group in 1976 (122) proposed the 26. WHO (1971), Tech. Rep. Ser., No. 476.
27. Department of Medical and Public Affairs. The George Washington
following indices for evaluating the impact : (a) Family size University Medical Centre, Washington DC (1974). Population
(number of living children (b) desired number of additional Reports, No.1974.
children (c) birth interval (d) age of the mother at birth of 28. United Nations (1975). World Conference of the International
first child and last child (e) birth order, and (f) number of Women's Year: World Plan of Action, document E/Cof.66/5, 1975,
abortions. To this may be added, changes in birth rate and UN Secretariat.
growth rate. 29. WHO (1970). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.442.
30. WHO (1975). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.569.
Evaluation is a technical activity that requires trained 31. Siegel, E. et al (1974).Am.J. Obs&Gyn, 118: 995.
personnel, statistical facilities and adequate flow of data and 32. Mohan, M. (1985). J. Family Welfare, 31(3)3-12.
information. 33. Mukerji, S. (1987). J. Family Welfare, 33 (3) 14.
The Family Welfare Programme in India has come a long 34. Govt. of India (2008), Annual Report 2007-08, Ministry of Heatlh
way and holds forth the promise that in the not very distant and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
future it may be accepted as a way of life by most people. 34A. Govt. of India (2013), Health and Family We/fare Statistics in India
2013, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Although birth control continues to occupy the same
35. Govt. of India (2000), National Population Policy 2000, Ministry of
important position in the programme as it used to be in the Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi
earlier days the programme now aims at achieving a higher 36. Skrine, R (1984). The Practitioner, 229: 441-446.
end and that is, to improve, in conjunction with 37. Dalsimer, I. et al, eds (1973). Barrier Methods, Population Report
other development programmes, the quality of life of the Series H: I.
people (121). 38. Sherris, J.D. ed (1982). Barrier Methods, Population Report Series
H:6.
References 39. WHO, USAID (1997), The Essentials of Contraceptive Technology,
1. International Planned Parenthood Federation (1981). People Population Information programme. Ed. by Robert A Hatcher et al.
8(2) 26. 40. Leon Speroff and Philip D. Darney, A Clinical Guide for
2. WHO (1999). Health Situation in the South - East Asia Region Contraception, 3rci Ed.
1994 -1997, Regional office for SEAR, New Delhi. 41. Hofmann, AD. (1984). Bu/I WHO, 2 (2) 331-344.
3. Population Reference Bureau (2014), Population Data Sheet. 42. Clive Wood (1975). Contraception Explained, Geneva, WHO.
4. World Bank (2006), World Development Report 2006, Equity and 43. Belsky Raymond, ed (1975). Barrier Methods, George Washington
Development, A co-publication of the World Bank and Oxford University Medical Centre (Population Report Series B : 3),
University Press. Washington, DC.
5. UNICEF (2014), The State of World's Children 2014. 44. Hawkins, D.F. and Elder M.G. (1979). Human Fertility Control :
6. WHO (2012), World Health Statistics 2012. Theory and Practice, Butterworth, London.
7. Bogue, D.N. (1969). Principles of Demography John Wiley. 45. WHO (1983). Offset Publication, No.75.
8. Govt. of India (2012), Census 2011, Provisional Population Report, 46. Govt. of India (2003), Annual Report2002-2003, Ministry of Health
Office of the Registrar General and Census Commissioner India, and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Ministry of Home Affairs, March 31st, 2011. 47. Zipper, J.A. et al (1969). Am. J. OBG, 105: 1275.
9. Govt. oflndia (2010), Annual Report2009-2010, Ministry of Health 48. Gray, R.H. et al (1980). Manual for the provision of IUDs, WHO,
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Geneva.
10. Govt. of India (2012), Sample Registration System Statistical 49. Liskin, L ed (1982). Intra-Uterine Devices, The John Hopkins
Report 2010, Report No. 1of2012, Office of the Registrar General University (Population Report Series B: 4).
and Census Commissioner India, Ministry of Home Affairs, New 50. WHO (1971). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.473.
Delhi. 51. Hutchings, J.E. et al (1985). International Family Planning
11. WHO (2008), Health Situation in the South-East Asia Region 2001- Perspectives, 11 (3) 77-85.
2007. 52. WHO (1966). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.322.
12. UNDP (2009), Human Development Report 2009, Overcoming 53. WHO (1968). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.397.
barriers : Human mobility and development. 54. Vassey, M. et al (1982). Lancet, 1: 841.
13. Bhende, Asha A and Kanitkar, T. (1985), Principles of Population 55. Eschenbach, DA et al (1977). Am. J. OBG, 128 (8) 838.
Studies, Himalaya Publ. House, Mumbai. 56. Sparks, RA et al (1981). Brit. Med. J., 282: 1189-91.
14. UNICEF (2009), State of the World's Children 2009, Special 57. Padma Rao, K. (1972). J. OBG of India, 22 : 268.
Edition.
58. Snowden R. et al (1977). The IUD, A Practice Guide Croom Helm,
15. Govt. oflndia (2001). Census of India 2001, Provisional Population London.
Totals, Paper - 1of2001.
59. V. Wynn, et al (1979). Lancet, 1 : 1045.
15A. Govt. of India (2004), Health Information of India 2003, DGHS,
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 60. Spellacy, W.N. (1982). Am. J. OBG, 142: 717.
16. TATA Services Ltd. (2006), Statistical Ouline of India 2005-06. 61. McEwan, J. (1985). The Practitioner, 229: 415-423.
17. National Family Health Survey NFHS 3 India 2005-06, 62. People (1983). 10 (3) 30.
International Institute for Population Sciences, Mumbai, India 63. WHO (1982). Offset Publication No.64.
MEASURE DHS + ORC & MACRO. 64. Ericsson, R. (1974). Control of Male Fertility, Harper and Row,
18. Agarwala, S.N. (1977). India's Population Problems, 2nd Ed., Tata Hagerstown.
Mc Graw Hill. 65. Royal College of General practitioners (1974). Oral Contraceptives
19. Last, J.M. (1983). A Dictionary of Epidemiology, Oxford Medical and Health, London, Pitman Medical.
Publications. 66. Vassey, M. et al (1976). Jr. Biosocial Science, 8: 373.
·519
67. Vassey, M. and Mann J.l. (1978). Br. Med. Bull, 34: 157. 97. People (1981). 8 (4) 20.
68. Inman, W.H.W. and Vessey, M.P. (1968). Brit. Med. J. 2: 193. 98. People (1982). 9 (2) 47.
69. Mann, J.l. and Inman, WHW (1975) 2: 245. 99. Population Reports (J) (1981). 24: 525.
70. Stradel, B.V. (1981). New Eng. J. Med., 305: 612-618. 100. Jain, A.K. eta! (1981). Stud. Family Plan, 12: 79.
71. Kols, A. et al (1982). Oral Contraceptives, The Johns Hopkins 101. ICMR Bulletin, Dec. 1983.
University (Population-Report Series A : 6). 102. People (1982). 9 (2) 41.
72. RCGP Study (1981). Lancet, 1 : 541-546. 103. Govt. of India (1984). Year Book-Family Welfare Programme in
73. WHO (1978). Techn. Rep. Ser., No.619. India, 1983-84, Ministry of Health, New Delhi.
74. WHO (1974). The Work of WHO, 1982-83. 104. Bhiwandiwala, P. (1981). People 8 (4) 14.
75. Knopp, R.H. et al (1982). Am. J. OBG, 142 : 725. 105. Govt. of India (1978). Central Calling, March 1978. Dept. of Family
76. Kay, C.R. (1982).Am. J. OBG, 142: 762-765. Welfare.
77. Hull, M.G.R. eta! (1981). Lancet, 1: 1329. 106. Govt. of India (1978). Central Calling, Aug. 78, Dept. of Family
78. WHO (1981). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 657. Welfare.
79. Ambani, L.M. et al (1977). Fertility and Sterility, 28: 791. 107. Elstein, M. (1970). The Practitioner, 205: 30.
80. Mishall, D.R. (1982) Am.J.OBG, 142: 809. 108. Kanti Giri (1976). Bibliography on Human Reproduction, Family
81. Any Questions (1970). Brit. Med. J., 1 : 354. Planning and Population Dynamics, WHO, SEARO New Delhi.
82. Info Reports (2007), Injectable Contraceptives: Tool for Providers, 109. Philip, T. et al (1984), Brit. Med. J. 289: 77A9.
Jan-Feb, 2007, Johns Hopkins Bloomberg, Info Project centre for 110. France Donnay, Children in the Tropics, Controlling Fertility, 1991
communication programme. No.193-194.
83. WHO (1982). Offset Publication No.65. 111. WHO (2014), Adolescent: health risks and solutions, Fact Sheet
84. IPPF Medical Bulletin (1996), Vol. 30, Number 2, April 1996.
No. 345, May 2014.
85. Fathalla, M. (1981). People, 8 (4) 12. 112. Govt. of India (2014), Annual Report 2013-14, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
86. WHO (1978). The Work of WHO 1976-77, Biennial Report.
113. P&P (1997), Population Report, Meeting Unmet Needs; New
87. Robinson, P. (1975). An Aid to the Teaching of Human Strategies, No. 43, Series J, June 1997.
Reproduction, Family Planning and Population Dynamics, WHO,
SEARO, New Delhi. 114. Govt. of India (2014), Rural Health Statistics 2013-14, Ministry of
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
88. International Planned Parenthood Federation (1974). IPPF Medical
Bulletin, Feb 1974.
115. Govt. of India (2002), Bulletin on Rural Health Statistics in India,
March 2002, issued by Rural Health Division, DGHS, New Delhi.
89. Vlugt, T. et al (1973). Pregnancy Termination, The George
Washington University (Population Report Series F : 3). 116. Govt. of India (1985).Annual Report, 1984-85, Ministry of Health
and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
90. WHO (2011). Unsafe abortion, incidence and mortality, Global and
regional levels in 2008 and trends during 1990-2008, Information
117. Veena Soni (1983). International Family Planning Perspectives,
9 (2)35.
Sheet.
91. Gov.t of India (2012),Annual Report 2011-2012, Ministry of Health 118. Govt. of India (2006), Annual Report 2005-06, DGHS, Ministry of
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
92. WHO (1980). The Work of WHO 1978-79. 119. UNESCO. Regional Office for Education in Asia (1979). Regional
Workshop on Population and Family Education, Final Report, Sept/
93. Grewal, S. (1976). J. Indian M.A., 66: 269. Oct 1970, Bangkok, Thailand.
94. Cook, R.J. (1976). IFPP Bulletin, April 1966. 120. Sherris, J.D. (1982). Population Education in the Schools, The
95. Govt. of India (1978). Manual for Health Worker, Female, Vol I, Johns Hopkins University, Maryland (Population Rep.Ser. M: 6).
Ministry of Health & Family welfare, New Delhi. 121. Govt. of India (2004). Annual Report 2003-2004, Ministry of
96. Peel, John and Potts Malcom (1970). Textbook of Contraceptive Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
Practice, Cambridge University Press. 122. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 587.
In any community, mothers and ·children constitute a of the mother. The period of development of foetus in
priority group. In sheer numbers, they comprise mother ·is about 280 days. During this period, the foetus
approximately 71.14 per cent of the population of the obtains all the building materials and oxygen from the
developing countries. In India, women of the child-bearing mother's blood; (2) child health is closely related to maternal
age (15 to 44 years) constitute 22.2 per cent, and children health. A healthy mother brings forth a healthy baby; there
under 15 years of age about 35.3 per cent of the total is less chance for a premature birth, stillbirth or abortion;
population. Together they constitute nearly 57.5 per cent of {3) certain diseases and conditions of the mother during
the total population. By virtue of their numbers, mothers pregnancy (e.g., syphilis, german measles, drug intake) are
and children are the major consumers of health services, of likely to have their effects upon the foetus; (4) after birth,
whatever form. the child is dependant upon· the mother. At least up to the
Mothers and children not only constitute a large group, age of 6 to 9 months, the child is completely dependant on
but they are also a "vulnerable" or special-risk group. The the mother for feeding. The mental and social development
risk is connected with child-bearing in the case of women; of the child is also dependant upon the mother. If the mother
and growth, development and survival in the case of infants dies, the child's growth and development are affected
and children. Whereas 50 per cent of all deaths in the (maternal deprivation syndrome); (5) in the care cycle of
developed world are occurring among people over 70, the women, there are few occasions when service to the child is
same proportion of deaths are occurring among children not simultaneously called for. For instance, postpartum care
during the first five years of life in the developing world. is inseparable from neonatal care and family planning
Global observations show that in developed regions advice; (6) the mother is also the first teacher of the child. It
maternal mortality ratio averages at 16 per 100,000 live is for these reasons, the mother and child are treated as one
births; in developing regions the figure is 440 for the same unit.
number of live births (1). From commonly accepted indices,
it is evident that infant, child and maternal mortality rates Obstetrics, Paediatrics and Preventive and
are high in many developing countries. Further, much of the Social Medicine
sickness and deaths among mothers and children is largely In the past, maternal and child health services were
preventable. By improving the health of mothers and rather fragmented, and provided piecemeal "personal health
children, we contribute to the health of the general services" by ·different agencies, in different ways and in
population. These considerations have led to the separate clinics. The current trend in many countries is to
formulation of special health services for mothers and provide integrated MCH and family planning services as
children all over the world. compact family welfare service. This implies a close
The problems affecting the health of mother and child are relationship of maternity health to child health, of maternal
multifactorial. Despite current efforts, the health of mother and child health to the health of the family; and of family
and child still constitutes one of the most serious health health to the general health of the community. In providing
problems affecting the community, particularly in the these services, specialists in obstetrics and child health
developing countries. The present strategy is to provide (paediatrics) have joined hands, and are now looking
mother and child health services as an integrated package of beyond the four walls of hospitals into the community to
"essential health care", also known as primary health care meet the health needs of mothers and children aimed at
which is based on the principles of equity, intersectoral positive health. In the process, they have linked themselves
coordination and community participation. The primary to preventive and social medicine, and as a result, terms
health care approach combines all elements in the local such as "social obstetrics", "preventive paediatrics" and
community necessary to make a positive impact on the "social paediatrics" have come into vogue.
health status of the population, including the health of
mothers and children. OBSTETRICS
Obstetrics is largely preventive medicine. The aim of
Mother and child - one unit obstetrics and preventive medicine is the same, viz. to
Mother and child must be considered as one unit. It is ensure that throughout pregnancy and puerperium, the
because: (1) during the antenatal period, the foetus is part mother will have good health and that every pregnancy may
SOCIAL OBSTETRICS
culminate in a healthy mother and a healthy baby. The age- Social paediatrics
old concept that obstetrics is only antenatal, intranatal and The challenge of the time is to study child health in
postnatal care, and is thus concerned mainly with technical relation to community, to social values and to social policy.
skills, is now considered as a very narrow concept, and is This has given rise to the concept of social paediatrics.
being replaced by the concept of community obstetrics Social paediatrics has been defined as "the application of
which combines obstetrical concerns with concepts of the principles of social medicine to paediatrics to obtain a
. primary health care. more complete understanding of the problems of children in
order to prevent and treat disease and promote their
SOCIAL OBSTETRICS
adequate growth and development, through an organized
The concept of social obstetrics has gained currency health structure (3)." Social paediatrics, like social
in recent years. It may be defined as the study of the obstetrics, covers a wide responsibility. It is concerned not
interplay of social and environmental factors and human only with the social factors which influence child health but
reproduction going back to the preconceptional or even also with the influence of these factors on the organization,
premarital period. The social and environmental factors delivery and utilization of child health care services. In other
which influence human reproduction are a legion, viz. age at words, social paediatrics is concerned with the delivery of
marriage, child bearing, child spacing, family size fertility comprehensive and continuous child health care services
patterns, level of education, economic status, customs and and to bring these services within the reach of the total
beliefs, role of women in society, etc. A study of these factors community. Social paediatrics also covers the various social
is an important aspect of social obstetrics. The social welfare measures - local, national and international - aimed
obstetric problems in India, differ from the social obstetric to meet the total health needs of a child.
problems in the developed countries, because of various Preventive and social medicine, with its involvement in
differing social, economic, cultural and other factors. While total community care, and expertise in epidemiology and in
accepting the influence of environmental and social factors the methodology of collection and utilization of data relating
on human reproduction, social obstetrics has yet another to the community and the environment, makes an
dimension, that is. the influence of these factors on the indispensable contribution to social obstetrics and social
organization, delivery and utilization of obstetric services by paediatrics in the :
the community. In other words, social obstetrics is
concerned with the delivery of comprehensive maternity 1. collection and interpretation of community statistics,
and child health care services including family planning so delineating groups "at risk" for special care;
that they can be brought within the reach of the total 2. correlation of vital statistics (e.g., maternal and infant
community (2). morbidity and mortality rates, perinatal and child
mortality rates) with social and biological
Preventive paediatrics characteristics such as birth weight, parity, age,
stature, employment etc. in the elucidation of
Paediatrics which is synonymous with child health is that aetiological relationships;
branch of medical science that deals with the care of
children from conception to adolescence, in health and 3. study of cultural patterns, beliefs and practices relating
disease. Paediatrics is one of the first clinical subjects to link to childbearing and childrearing, knowledge of which
itself to preventive medicine. Like obstetrics, paediatrics has might be useful in promoting acceptance and
a large component of preventive and social medicine. utilization of obstetric and paediatric services by the
There is no other discipline so comprehensive as paediatrics community;
that teaches the value of preventive medicine. Recent 4. to determine priorities and contribute to the planning
years have witnessed further specialization within the broad of MCH services and programmes, and
field of paediatrics viz. preventive paediatrics, 5. for evaluating whether MCH services and programmes
social paediatrics, neonatology, perinatology, developmental are accomplishing their objectives in terms of their
paediatrics, paediatric surgery; paediatric neurology, and effectiveness and efficiency.
so on. Hitherto, obstetrics, paediatrics and preventive and social
Preventive paediatrics comprises efforts to avert rather medicine were operating in watertight compartments. The
than cure disease and disabilities. It has been broadly emergence of social paediatrics, social obstetrics and their
divided into antenatal paediatrics and postnatal paediatrics. association with preventive and social medicine are certainly
The aims of preventive paediatrics and preventive medicine new developments in contemporary medicine. In some
are the same: prevention of disease and promotion of Universities, a chair of social paediatrics has also been
physical, mental and social well-being of children so that established. The increasing coming together of these
each child may achieve the genetic potential with which he/ disciplines augurs well for the provision of comprehensive
she is born. To achieve these aims, hospitals for children mother and child health care and family planning services as
have adopted the strategy of "primary health care" to a compact family welfare service.
improve child health care through such activities as growth
monitoring, oral rehydration, nutritional surveillance, Maternity cycle
promotion of breast-feeding, immunization, community The stages in maternity cycle are :
feeding, regular health check-ups, etc. Primary health care (i) Fertilization
with its potential for vastly increased coverage through an (ii) Antenatal or prenatal period
integrated system of service delivery is increasingly looked
upon as the best solution to reach millions of children, (iii) lntranatal period
especially those who are most in need of preventive and (iv) Postnatal period
curative services. (v) Inter-conceptional period.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Fertilization takes place in the outer part of the fallopian nutrition interventions have still wider ramifications because
tube. Segmentation of the fertilized ovum begins at once they are not specifically related to nutrition. These include
and proceeds at a rapid rate. The fertilized ovum reaches measures such as control of communicable diseases through
the uterus in 8 to 10 days. Cell division proceeds at a rapid immunization, improvement of environmental sanitation,
rate. By a process of cell division and differentiation, all the provision of clean drinking water, family planning, food
organs and tissues of the body are formed. The periods of hygiene, education and primary health care. Nutritional
growth have been divided as follows : surveillance is becoming increasingly important for
identifying subclinical malnutrition, as it tends to be
1. Prenatal period : overlooked in both the mother and the child. The primary
(a) Ovum 0 to 14 days health worker (community worker) can play a vital role in
(b) Embryo 14 days to 9 weeks improving the nutritional status of mothers and children.
(c) Foetus 9th week to birth
2. INFECTION
2. Premature infant from 28 to 37 weeks
Maternal infections may cause a variety of adverse effects
3. Birth, full term average 280 days. such as foetal growth retardation, low birth weight,
embryopathy, abortion and puerperal sepsis. In industrial
MCH problems societies, the risk of the mother acquiring infections during
MCH problems cover a broad spectrum. At one extreme, pregnancy is relatively low, but in underdeveloped areas, the
the most advanced countries are concerned with problems mother is exposed to significantly higher risks. Many women
such as perinatal problems, congenital malformations, are infected with HIV, hepatitis B, cytomegalo viruses,
genetic and certain behavioural problems. At the other herpes simplex virus or toxoplasma during pregnancy.
extreme, in developing countries, the primary concern is Furthermore, as many as 25 per cent of the women in rural
reduction of maternal and child mortality and morbidity, areas suffer at least one bout of urinary infection (5).
spacing of pregnancies, limitation of family size, prevention As far as the baby is concerned, infection may begin with
of communicable diseases, improvement of nutrition and labour and delivery and increase as the child grows older.
promoting acceptance of health practices. Currently, the Children may be ill with debilitating diarrhoeal, respiratory
main health problems affecting the health of the mother and and skin infections for as much as a third of their first year of
the child in India, as in other developing countries, revolve life. In some regions, the situation is further aggravated by
round the triad of ma/nutrition, infection and the such chronic infections as malaria and tuberculosis. The
consequences of unregulated fertility (4). Associated with occurrence of multiple and frequent infections may
these problems is the scarcity of health and other social precipitate in the children a severe protein-energy
services in vast areas of the country together with poor malnutrition and anaemia. When the child becomes ill,
socio-economic conditions. traditions, beliefs and taboos enter into play; the indirect
effect of infections may be more important than the direct
1. MALNUTRITION one in traditional societies (5, 6).
Malnutrition is like an iceberg; most people in the Prevention and treatment of infections in mother and
developing countries live under the burden of malnutrition. children is a major and important part of normal MCH care
Pregnant women, nursing mothers and children are activity. It is now widely recognized that children in
particularly vulnerable to the effects of malnutrition. The developing areas need to be immunized against six
adverse effects of maternal malnutrition have been well infections tuberculosis, diphtheria, whooping cough,
documented-maternal depletion, low birth weight, tetanus, measles and polio. Many countries, including India,
anaemia, toxemias of pregnancy, postpartum haemorrhage, have adopted the WHO Expanded Programme on
all leading to high mortality and morbidity. The effects of Immunization as part of everyday MCH care. Tetanus toxoid
malnutrition are also frequently more serious during the application during pregnancy has also been taken up.
formative years of life. Previously it was thought that
Education of mothers in medical measures such as oral
malnutrition was largely concentrated in school age
rehydration in diarrhoea and febrile diseases is being tried.
children, and in toddlers. Now it is realized that the
In addition, a good knowledge and practice of personal
intrauterine period of life is a very important period from the
hygiene and appropriate sanitation measures, particularly in
nutritional standpoint. Infants born with adequate birth
weight have relatively low mortality even under poor and around the home, are essential pre-requisites for the
environmental conditions. The next critical period of control of the most common infections and parasitic
childhood is the period of weaning. Severe malnutrition diseases.
coincides with the age at which babies are usually weaned.
Susceptibility to infection and severity of illness are 3. UNCONTROLLED REPRODUCTION
significantly less in well nourished, than in malnourished The health hazards for the mother and the child resulting
children. Nutrition protection and promotion is, therefore, from unregulated fertility have been well recognized -
an essential activity of MCH care. increased prevalence of low birth weight babies, severe
Measures to improve the nutritional status of mothers and anaemia, abortion, antepartum haemorrhage and a high
children may be broadly divided into direct and indirect maternal and perinatal mortality, which have shown a sharp
nutrition interventions (4). Direct interventions cover a wide rise after the 4th pregnancy. Statistics have shown that in
range of activities, viz. supplementary feeding programmes, almost every country in the world, a high birth rate is
distribution of iron and folic acid tablets, fortification and associated with a high infant mortality rate and under-five
enrichment of foods, nutrition education, etc. Indirect death rate (Table 1).
ANTENATAL CARE
2. Record the date of last menstrual period and calculate In any month, the ANM should have about 69
the expected date of delivery. pregnancies registered with her.
3. The health status of the mother can be assessed and any If the number of women registered is less than expected,
medical illness that she might be suffering from can be the ANM should approach community leaders and key
detected. Also to obtain and record the baseline people to ensure that the pregnant women are registered
information on blood pressure, weight, haemoglobin etc. and come for ANC. ASHA and link worker should visit every
4. It helps in timely detection of complications at an early house in the. area and ensure that all pregnant women are
stage and helps to manage them appropriately by registered. Some women may be receiving ANC from the
referral as and where required. private sector. Ensure that their names together with the
5. It also helps to confirm if the pregnancy is wanted and if names of the facilities where they are registered are
not, then refer the women at the earliest to a 24 hours mentioned in the antenatal register.
PHC or FRU that provides safe abortion services. The The ANM must keep track of all pregnant women in her
health personnel should be alert to the possibility of sex area. In case a registered women does not turn-up for her
selective abortion as such abortions are illegal. ANC check-up, ANM must follow her and counsel her for the
6. Early detection of pregnancy and provision of care from the regular ANC check-up. An antenatal check-up after a missed
initial stage facilitates a good interpersonal relationship appointment should include all the components of the
betWeen the care giver and the pregnant woman. missed visit(s) as well as those that correspond to the present
visit. For example, the woman should be given her TT
Estimation of number of pregnancies in a specified injection and supply of IFA tablets, her weight and blood
area and pregnancy tracking (8) pressure should be checked besides being screened for
To ensure complete registration, it is essential that the complications.
ANM should know the estimated number of pregnancies to A policy decision has been taken for a name-based
be registered annually in her area. Calculating the expected tracking system whereby pregnant women and children can
number of annual pregnancies in the area will help her judge be tracked for their ANCs and immunization along with a
how good her pregnancy registration is. In case the number feedback system for the ANM, ASHA etc. This has been
of pregnancies registered is less than that of the estimated done to ensure that all pregnant women receive their ANCs
pregnancies, she needs to track down the pregnancies she and PNCs, and children receive full immunization. This will
has missed, with the help of ASHAs and AWWs. Estimating also help in tracking and ensuring ANC/PNC for missed/left
the number of pregnancies will also help her judge whether out cases.
she has an adequate stock of the supplies required to
provide routine ANC (such as TT injections, IFA tablets and PREVENTIVE SERVICES FOR MOTHERS
ANC record forms} and tackle any complications that arise (ANTENATAL CHECK-UP)
during this period.
A. The first visit, irrespective of when it occurs, should
The number of expected pregnancies per year : include the following components :
The ANM must know the population size and birth rate of I. History-taking
the area under her jurisdiction. The expected number of live During the first visit, a detailed history of the woman
births may be calculated as shown below : needs to be taken to : (1) Confirm the pregnancy (first visit
only); (2) Identify whether there were complications during
Birth rate (per population
Expected no. of 1000 population} x of the area any previous pregnancy/confinement that may have a
live births bearing on the present one; (3) Identify any current medical/
(Y)/year 1000 surgical or obstetric condition(s) that may complicate the
As some pregnancies may not result in a live birth (i.e. present pregnancy; (4) Record the date of 1st day of last
abortions and stillbirths may occur), the expected number of menstrual period and calculate the expected date of delivery
live births would be an under-estimation of the total number by addding 9 months and 7 days to the 1st day of last
of pregnancies. Hence, a correction factor of 10% is menstrual period. (5) Record symptoms indicating
required, i.e. add 10% to the figure obtained above. complications, e.g. fever, persisting vomiting, abnormal
vaginal discharge or bleeding, palpitation, easy fatigability,
So, the total number of expected pregnancies breathlessness at rest or on mild exertion, generalized
(Z) = Y + 10% of Y swelling in the body, severe headache and blurring of vision,
As a thumb rule, in any given month, approximately half burning in passing urine, decreased or absent foetal
the number of pregnancies estimated above should be in movements etc; (6} History of any current systemic illness,
records. e.g., hypertension, diabetes, heart disease, tuberculosis,
renal disease, epilepsy, asthma, jaundice, malaria,
Example of estimation of the number of pregnancies annually reproductive tract infection,· STD, HIV/AIDS etc. Record
Birth rate 25/1000 family history of hypertension, diabetes, tuberculosis, and
population thalassaemia. Family history of twins or congenital
Population under the sub-centre 5000 malformation; and (7) History of drug allergies and habit
forming drugs.
Therefore, expected number of live births= {25x5000)/1000
II. Physical examination
= 125 births
Correction factor (pregnancy wastage) = 10% of 125 1. Pallor : Presence of pallor indicates anaemia. The
woman should be examined for pallor at each visit.
say 13 Examine woman's conjunctiva, nails, tongue, oral
Therefore, total no. of expected 125 + 13 138 mucosa and palms. Pallor should be co-related with
pregnancies in a year haemoglobin estimation.
ANTENATAL CARE
2. Pulse : The normal pulse rate is 60 to 90 beats per III. Abdonimal examination
minute. If the pulse rate is persistently low or high, with Examine the abdomen to monitor the progress of the
or without other symptoms, the woman needs medical pregnancy and foetal growth. The abdominal examination
attention. includes the following :
3. Respiratory rate : It is important to check the respiratory 1. Measurement of fundal height : Enlargement of the
rate, especially if the woman complaints of uterus and the height of the uterine fundus is as shown
breathlessness. Normal respiratory rate is 18-20 breaths in Fig. 1.
per minute.
a. 12 weeks - Uterine fundus just palpable per
4. Oedema : Oedema (swelling), which appears in the abdomen.
evening and disappears in the morning after a full night's
sleep, could be a normal manifestation of pregnancy. b. 20 weeks - Fundus flat at the lower border of
Any oedema of the face, hands, abdominal wall and umbelicus.
vulva is abnormal. Oedema can be suspected if a woman c. 36 weeks Fundus felt at the level of xiphisternum.
complains of abnormal tightening of any rings on her The duration of pregnancy should always be expressed
fingers. She must be referred immediately for further in terms of completed weeks. In the first half of
investigations. If there is oedema in association wi_th high pregnancy the size of the uterus is of the greatest value in
blood pressure, heart disease, anaemia or proteinuria, confirming the calculated duration of pregnancy.
the woman should be referred to the medical officer. .
2. Foetal heart sounds : The foetal heart sounds can be
5. Blood pressure: Measure the woman's blood pressure at heard after 6th month. The rate varies between 120 to
every visit. This is important to rule out hypertensive 140 per minute. They are usually best heard in the
disorders of pregnancy. Hypertension is diagnosed when midline; after the 28th week, their location may change
two consecutive readings taken four hours or more apart because of the position and lie of the foetus.
show the systolic blood pressure to be 140 mmHg or
more and/or the diastolic blood pressure to be 90 mmHg 3. Foetal movements : Foetal movements can be felt by the
or more. High blood pressure during pregnancy may examiner after 18-22nd week by gently palpating the
signify Pregnancy-Induced Hypertension (PIH) and/or abdomen.
chronic hypertension. If the woman has high blood 4. Foetal parts : These can be felt about the 22nd week.
pressure, check her urine for the presence of albumin. After the 28th week, it is possible to distinguish the head,
The presence of albumin ( + 2) together with high blood back and limbs.
pressure is sufficient to categorize her as having 5. Multiple pregnancy : This must be suspected if the uterus
pre-eclampsia. Refer her to the MO immediately. If is larger than the estimated gestational age or palpation
the diastolic blood pressure of the woman is above of multiple foetal parts.
110 mmHg, it is a danger sign that points towards
6. Foetal lie and presentation : Relevant only after 32 weeks
imminent eclampsia. The urine albumin should be
of pregnancy.
estimated at the earliest. If it is strongly positive, the
woman should be referred to the FRU IMMEDIATELY. If 7. Inspection of abdominal scar or any other relevant
the woman has high blood pressure but no urine abdominal findings.
albumin, she should be referred to the MO at 24x7 PHC.
A woman with PIH, pre-eclampsia or imminent
eclampsia requires hospitalization and supervised
treatment at a 24-hour PHC/FRU.
6. Weight : A pregnant woman's weight should be taken at
each visit. The ·weight taken during the first visit/
registration should be treated as the baseline weight.
Normally, a woman should gain 9-11 kg during her
pregnancy. Ideally after the first trimester, a pregnant
woman gains around 2 kg every month. If the diet is not
adequate, i.e. if the woman is taking less than the
required amount of calories, she might gain only 5-6 kg
during her pregnancy. An inadequate dietary intake can
be suspected if the woman gains less than 2 kg per
month. She needs to be put on food supplementation.
The help of the AWW should be taken in this matter, FIG.1
especially for those categories of women who need it the Uterine fundal height at various stages of pregnancy
most. Low weight gain usually leads to Intrauterine (numbers indicate weeks of pregnancy}
Growth Retardation and results in the birth of a baby
with a low birth weight. Excessive weight gain (more IV. Assessment of gestation age (9)
than 3 kg in a month) should raise suspicion of pre- Measurement of gestational age has changed over the
eclampsia, twins (multiple pregnancy) or diabetes. Take time. As the dominant effect of gestational age on survival
the woman's blood pressure and test her urine for and long-term impairment has become apparent over the
proteinuria and sugar. If the blood pressure is high and last 30 years, perinatal epidemiology has shifted from
the urine is positive for protein or sugar, refer her to measuring birth weight alone to focusing on gestational age.
medical officer. The most accurate "gold standard" for assessment is routine
7. Breast examination : Observe the size and shape of the early ultrasound assessment together with foetal
nipples for the presence ofinverted or flat nipples. measurements ideally in the first trimester. Gestational age
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
assessment based on the date of last menstrual period (LMP) 3. Malpresentations, viz breech, transverse lie, etc.
was previously the most widespread method used and 4. Antepartum haemorrhage, threatened abortion
remains the only available method in many settings. Many 5. Pre-eclampsia and eclampsia
countries now use "best obstetric estimate", combining 6. Anaemia
ultrasound and LMP as an approach to estimate gestational
age. It can have a large impact on the number of preterm 7. Twins, hydramnios
births reported. 8. Previous still-birth, intrauterine death, manual
removal of placenta
Any method using ultrasound requires skilled technicians,
equipment and for maximum accuracy, first trimester 9. Elderly grandmultiparas
antenatal clinic attendance. These are not common in low- 10. Prolonged pregnancy (14 days-after expected date
income settings, where majority of preterm births occur. of delivery)
Alternative approaches to LMP in these settings include 11. History of previous caesarean or instrumental
fundal height, clinical assessment of the newborn after birth delivery
or birth weight as a surrogate. 12. Pregnancy associated with general diseases, viz.
cardiovascular disease, kidney disease, diabetes,
V. Laboratory investigations tuberculosis, liver disease, malaria, convulsions,
The following laboratory investigations are carried out at asthma, HIV, RT!, ST!, etc.
the facilities indicated below : 13. Treatment for infertility.
a. At the sub-centre : 14. Three or more spontaneous consecutive abortions.
Pregnancy detection test The "risk approach" is a managerial tool for improved
- Haemoglobin examination MCH care. Its purpose is to provide better services for all, but
- Urine test for presence of albumin and sugar with special attention to those who need them most. Inherent
- Rapid malaria test. in this approach is maximum utilization of all resources,
including some human resources that are not conventionally
b. At the PHC/CHC/FRU: involved in such care .:.. traditional birth attendants,
- Blood group, including Rh factor community health workers, women's groups, for example.
- VDRL/RPR The risk strategy is expeded to have far-reaching effects on
- HIV testing the whole organization of MCH/FP services and lead to
- Rapid malaria test (if unavailable at SC) improvements in both the coverage and quality of health
care, at all levels, particularly at primary health care level.
- Blood sugar testing
- HBsAg for hepatitis B infection. MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS
Essential components of every antenatal check-up : A Mother and Child Protection Card should be duly
1. Take the patient's history. completed for every woman registered. It contains a
2. Conduct a physical examination-measure the weight, registration number, identifying data, previous health history
blood pressure and respiratory rate and check for pallor and main health events etc. The case record should be
and oedema. handed over to the woman. She should be instructed to bring
the record with her during all subsequent check-ups/visits and
3. Conduct abdominal palpation for foetal growth, foetal lie
also to carry it along with her at time of delivery. This card has
and auscultation of foetal heart sound according to the
been developed jointly by the Ministry of Health and Family
stage of pregnancy.
Welfare (MOHFW) and Ministry of Women and Child
4. Carry out laboratory investigations, such as Development (MOWCD) to ensure uniformity in record
haemoglobin estimation and urine tests for sugar and keeping. This will also help the service provider .to know the
proteins. details of previous ANCs/PNCs both for routine and
Interventions and counselling· emergency care. The information contained in the card
1. Iron and folic acid supplementation and medication as should also be recorded in the antenatal register as per the
needed Health Management Information System (HMIS) format.
2. Immunization against tetanus HOME VISITS
3. Group or individual instruction on nutrition, family
planning, self care, delivery and parenthood Home visiting is the backbone of all MCH services. Even
4. Home visiting by a female health worker/trained dai if the expectant mother is attending the antenatal clinic
regularly, it is suggested that she must be paid at least one
5. Referral services, where necessary. home visit by the Health Worker Female or Public Health
6. Inform the woman about Janani Suraksha Yojana and Nurse. More visits are required if the delivery is planned at
other incentives offered by the government. home. The mother is generally relaxed at home. The home
visit will win her confidence. The home visit will provide an
RISK APPROACH (10)
opportunity to observe the environmental and social
The central purpose of antenatal care is to identify "high conditions at home and also an opportunity to give prenatal
risk" cases (as early as possible) from a large group of advice.
antenatal mothers and arrange for them skilled care, while
continuing to provide appropriate care for all mothers. (2) Prenatal advice
These cases comprise the following : A major component of antenatal care is antenatal or
1. Elderly primi (30 years and over) prenatal advice. The mother is more receptive to advice
2. Short statured primi (140 cm and below) concerning herself and her baby at this time than at other
ANTENATAL CARE
times. The "talking points" should cover not only the cause foetal malformations. The classical example is
specific problems of pregnancy and child-birth but overflow thalidomide, a hypnotic drug, which caused deformed hands
into family and child health care. and feet of the babies born. The drug proved most serious
(i) DIET: Reproduction costs energy. A pregnancy in total when taken between 4 to 8 weeks of pregnancy. Other
duration consumes about 60,000 kcal, over and above examples are LSD which is known to cause chromosomal
normal metabolic requirements. Lactation demands about damage, streptomycin which may cause 8th nerve damage
550 kcal a day. Further, child survival is correlated with birth and deafness in the foetus, iodide-containing preparations
weight. And birth weight is correlated to the weight gain of which may cause congenital goitre in the foetus (16).
the mother during pregnancy. On an average, a normal Corticosteroids may impair foetal growth, sex hormones may
healthy woman gains about 9-11 kg of weight during produce virilism, tetracyclines may affect the growth of bones
pregnancy. Several studies have indicated that weight and enamel formation of teeth. Anaesthetic agents including
gain of poor Indian women averaged 6.5 kg during pethidine administered during labour can have depressant
pregnancy (11). Thus pregnancy imposes the need for effect on the baby and delay the onset of effective respiration.
considerable extra calorie and nutrient requirements. If Later still in the puerperium, if the mother is breast-feeding,
maternal stores of iron are poor (as may happen after there are certain drugs which are excreted in breast milk.
repeated pregnancies) and if enough iron is not available to A great deal of caution is required in the drug-intake by
the mother during pregnancy, it is possible that foetus may
lay down insufficient iron stores. Such a baby may show a
pregnant women (17).
.
(iv) RADIATION : Exposure to radiation is a positive
normal haemoglobin at birth, but will lack the stores of iron danger to the developing foetus. The most common source
necessary for rapid growth and increase in blood volume of radiation is abdominal X-ray during pregnancy. Case
and muscle mass in the first year of life. Stresses in the form cohort studies have shown that mortality rates from
of malaria and other childhood infections will make the leukaemia and other neoplasms were significantly greater
deficiency more acute, and many infants become severely among children exposed to intrauterine X-ray. This is in
anaemic during early months of life. A balanced and addition to congenital malformations such as microcephaly.
adequate diet is therefore, of utmost importance during The X~ray examination in pregnancy should be carried out
pregnancy and lactation to meet the increased needs of the only for definite indications, X-ray dosage kept to minimum.
mother, and to prevent "nutritional stress". Furthermore, in all women of child-bearing age among
(ii) PERSONAL HYGIENE : Of equal importance is whom there is a possibility of pregnancy, elective X-ray
advice regarding personal hygiene. (a) Personal cleanliness: should be avoided in the two weeks preceeding the
The need to bathe every day and to wear clean clothes menstrual period.
should be explained. The hair should also be kept clean and (v) WARNING SIGNS : The mother should be given
tidy. (b) Rest and sleep : 8 hours sleep, and at least 2 hours clear-cut instructions that she should report immediately in
rest after mid-day meals should be advised. (c) Bowels: case of the following warning signals : (a) swelling of the feet
Constipation should be avoided by regular intake of green (b) fits (c) headache (d) blurring of the vision (e) bleeding or
leafy vegetables, fruits and extra fluids. Purgatives like castor discharge per vagina, and (f) any other unusual symptoms.
oil should be avoided to relieve constipation. (d) Exercise: (vi) CHILD CARE : The art of child care has to be learnt.
Light household work is advised, but manual physical labour Special classes are held for mothers attending antenatal
during late pregnancy may adversely affect the foetus. clinics. Mother-craft education consists of nutrition
(e) Smoking: Smoking should be cut down to a minimum. education, advice on hygiene and childrearing, cooking
Expectant mothers who smoke heavily produce babies much demonstrations, family planning education, family
smaller than the average - it is because nicotine has a budgeting, etc.
vasoconstrictor influence in the uterus and induces a degree
of placental insufficiency. The adverse effects of smoking (3) Specific health protection
range from low birth-weight to an increased risk of perinatal
death of the infant (12). Women who smoke during (i) ANAEMIA : Surveys in different parts of India indicate
pregnancy give birth to babies which on an average weigh that about 50 to 60 per cent of women belonging to low
1 70g less at term than the babies of non-smokers. The socio-economic groups are anaemic in the last trimester of
perinatal mortality amongst babies whose mothers smoked pregnancy (11). The major aetiological factors being iron and
during pregnancy is between 10-40 per cent higher than in folic acid deficiencies. It is well known that anaemia per se is
non-smokers. (f) Alcohol: Evidence is mounting that alcohol associated with high incidence of premature births,
can cause a range of fertility problems in women. Moderate postpartum haemorrhage, puerperal sepsis and
to heavy drinkers who became pregnant have greater risk of thromboembolic phenomena in the mother. The Government
pregnancy loss (13), and if they do not abort, their children of India has initiated a programme in which 100 mg of
may have various physical and mental problems (14). elemental iron and 500 mcg of folic acid are being distributed
Heavy drinking has been associated with a fetal syndrome daily for 100 days to pregnant women through antenatal
(FAS) which includes intrauterine growth retardation and clinics, primary health centres and their subcentres.
developmental delay. More recently, it has been shown that (ii) OTHER NUTRITIONAL DEFICIENCIES : The mother
the consumption of even moderate amount of alcohol should be protected against other nutritional deficiencies
during pregnancy is associated with an increased risk of that may occur, particularly protein, vitamin and mineral
spontaneous abortion (15). {g) Dental care: Advice should especially vit A and iodine deficiency. In some MCH Centres
also be given about oral hygiene. (h) Sexual intercourse: fresh milk is supplied free of cost to all expectant mothers;
This should be restricted especially during the last trimester. where this is not possible, skimmed milk should be given.
(iii) DRUGS : The use of drugs that are not absolutely Capsules of vitamin A and D are also supplied free of cost.
essential should be discouraged. Certain drugs taken by the {iii) TOXEMIAS OF PREGNANCY : The presence of
mother during pregnancy may affect the foetus adversely and albumine in urine and an increase in blood pressure
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
indicates toxemias of pregnancy. Their early detection and immune response in her so that she forms antibodies to Rh
management are indicated. Efficient antenatal care which can cross the placenta and produce foetal haemolysis.
minimizes the risk of toxemias of pregnancy. The same response may be produced to a greater degree by
(iv) TETANUS : If the mother was not immunized earlier, a transfusion of Rh-positive blood. In a pregnant woman,
2 doses of adsorbed tetanus toxoid should be given the first isoimmunization mainly occurs during labour, so that the
dose at 16-20 weeks and the second dose at 20-24 weeks of first child although Rh-positive, is unaffected except where
pregnancy. The minimum interval between the 2 doses the mother has been already sensitized. In the second or
should be one month. No pregnant woman should be denied subsequent pregnancies, if the child is Rh-positive, the
even one dose of tetanus toxoid, if she is seen late in mother will react to the smallest intrusion of foetal cells by
pregnancy. For a woman who has been immunized earlier, producing antibodies to destroy foetal blood cells causing
one booster dose will be sufficient. When such a booster has haemolytic disease in the foetus. Clinically haemolytic
been given, it will provide necessary cover for subsequent disease takes the form of hydrops foetalis, icterus gravis
neonatorum (of which kernicterus is often a sequel) and
pregnancies, during the next 5 years. It is advised not to
inject tetanus toxoid at every successive pregnancy because congenital haemolytic anaemia.
of the risk of hyperimmunization and side-effects. It is a routine procedure in antenatal clinics to test blood
(v) SYPHILIS : Syphilis is an important preventable cause for Rhesus type in early pregnancy. If the woman is
of pregnancy wastage in some countries. Pregnancies in Rh-negative and the husband is Rh-positive, she is kept
women with primary and secondary syphilis often end in under surveillance for determination of Rh-antibody levels
spontaneous abortion, stillbirth, perinatal death, or the birth during antenatal care. The blood should be further
of a child with congenital syphilis. Syphilitic infection in the examined at 28 weeks and 34-36 weeks of gestation for
pregnant woman is transmissible to the foetus. Neurological antibodies. Rh anti-D immunoglobulin should be given at 28
damage with mental retardation is one of the most serious weeks of gestation so that sensitization during the first
consequences of congenital syphilis. When the mother is pregnancy can be prevented. If the baby is Rh-positive, the
suffering from syphilis, infection of the foetus does not occur Rh anti D immunoglobulin is given again within 72 hours of
before the 4th month of pregnancy; it is most likely to occur delivery. It should also be given after abortion. Post maturity
after the 6th month by which time the Langhan's cell layer should be avoided. Whenever there is evidence of
has completely atrophied (18). Infection of the foetus is most haemolytic process in foetus-in-utero, the mother should be
likely to occur when the mother is suffering from primary or shifted to an equipped centre specialized to deal with Rh
secondary stages of syphilis than late syphilis. problems. The incidence of haemolytic disease due to Rh
factor in India is estimated to be approximately one for
It is routine procedure in antenatal clinics to test blood for every 400 to 500 live births.
syphilis at the first visit. Since the mother can subsequently
get infected with syphilis, the ideal procedure would be to (viii) HIV INFECTION·: HIV may pass from an infected
test blood for syphilis both early and late in pregnancy (18). mother to her foetus, through the placenta or to her infant
Congenital syphilis is easily preventable. Ten daily injections during delivery or by breast-feeding. About one-third of the
of procaine penicillin (600,000 units) are almost always children of HIV-positive mothers get infected through this
route. The risk of transmission is higher if the mother is
adequate (18).
newly infected or if she has already developed AIDS.
(vi) GERMAN MEASLES : The best estimate of the total Voluntary prenatal testing for HIV infection should be done
risk comes from the long-term prospective study carried out as early in pregnancy as possible for pregnant women who
in Great Britain. When rubella was contracted in the first are at great risk (if they or their partner has a number of
16 weeks of pregnancy, foetal death or death during the sexual partners; has a sexually transmitted disease; uses
first year of life occurred in the offspring of 17 per cent of illicit injectable drugs etc.). Universal confidential voluntary
the pregnancies. Among survivors who were followed upto screening of pregnant women in high-prevalence areas may
age 8 years, 15 per cent had major defects, of which allow infected women to choose therapeutic abortion, make
cataract, deafness and congenital heart diseases were the an informed decision on breast-feeding, or receive
most common. Minor defects were found in an additional appropriate care. Screening should not be used as a
16 per cent. It appears that the risk of all degrees of substitute for primary prevention through community-wide
malformation may remain in the region of 20 per cent upto education on safe sexual practice, making condoms readily
the 20th week (19). available and preventing parenteral transmission (20).
Ideally we should prevent infection during pregnancy by (ix) HEPATITIS B INFECTION : Spread of infection from
preventing and controlling the disease in the general HBV carrier mothers to their babies appears to be a factor
population. In many countries, this is being attempted by for the high prevalence of HBV infection in some regions.
vaccination of all school-aged children with rubella vaccine. The mechanism of perinatal infection is uncertain. Most
Supplementing the community control of infection is the infections appear to occur at birth. Transmission of the virus
vaccination of all women of childbearing age who are to the baby after delivery is likely if both surface antigen and
Sero-negative. Before vaccinating, it is advisable that e antigen are positive. Vertical transmission can be blocked
pregnancy be ruled out and effective contraception be by immediate post-delivery administration of B
maintained for 8 weeks after vaccination because of the immunoglobulin and hepatitis B vaccine. Please refer to
possible risk to the foetus from the virus. page 534 for details.
(vii) Rh STATUS : The foetal red cells may enter the (x) PRENATAL GENETIC SCREENING : Prenatal genetic
maternal circulation in a number of different circumstances, screening includes screening for chromosomal abnormalities
during labour, caesarean section, therapeutic abortion, associated with serious birth defects, screening for direct
external cephalic version, and apparently spontaneously in evidence of congenital structural anomalies, and screening
the late pregnancy. The intrusion of these cells, if the mother for haemoglobinopathies and other inherited conditions
is Rh-negative and the child is Rh-positive, provokes an detectable by biochemical assay. Universal genetic screening
INTRANATAL CARE
the mother's mind that the baby is not misplaced in the made by the FHWs to give at least 3 to 6 postnatal visits.
central nursery. It also builds up her self-confidence. The common conditions found on examination during the
late postnatal period are subinvolution of uterus, retroverted
POSTNATAL CARE uterus, prolapse of uterus and cervicitis. Postnatal
examination offers an opportunity to detect and correct
Care of the mother (and the newborn) after delivery is these defects.
known as postnatal or postpartal care. Broadly this care falls
into two areas: care of the mother which is primarily the (2) Anaemia : Routine haemoglobin examination should
responsibility of the obstetrician; and care of the newborn, be done during postnatal visits, and when anaemia is
which is the combined responsibility of the obstetrician and discovered, it should be treated. In some cases, it may be
paediatrician. This combined area of responsibility is also necessary to continue treatment for a year or more.
known as perinatology. (3) Nutrition : Though a malnourished mother is able to
secrete as much breast milk as a well nourished one, she
Care of the mother does it at the cost of her own health. The nutritional needs
The objectives of postpartal care are : of the mother must be adequately met. Often the family
{1) To prevent complications of the postpartal period. budget is limited; the mother should be shown the means
how she can eat better with less money.
(2) To provide care for the rapid restoration of the
mother to optimum health. (4) Postnatal exercises : Postnatal exercises are necessary
(3) To check adequacy of breast-feeding. to bring the stretched abdominal and pelvic muscles back to
(4) To provide family planning services. normal as quickly as possible. Gradual resumption of normal
house-hold duties may be enough to restore one's figure.
(5) To provide basic health education to mother/
family. PSYCHOLOGICAL : The next big area of postnatal care
involves a consideration of the psychological factors peculiar
Complications of the postpartal period to the recently delivered woman. One of the psychological
Certain complications may arise during the postpartal problems is fear which is generally borne of ignorance.
period which should be recognized early and dealt with Other problems are timidity and insecurity regarding the
promptly. These are (1) Puerperal sepsis: This is infection of baby. If a woman is to endure cheerfully the emotional
the genital tract within 3 weeks after delivery. This is stresses of childbirth, she requires the support and
accompanied by rise in temperature and pulse rate, foul- companionship of her husband. Fear and insecurity may be
smelling lochia, pain and tenderness in lower abdomen, etc. eliminated by proper prenatal instruction. The so called
Puerperal sepsis can be prevented by attention to asepsis, postpartum psychosis is perhaps precipitated by birth; and it
before and after delivery. This is particularly important in is rather uncommon.
domiciliary midwifery service. (2) Thrombophlebitis : This is
an infection of the veins of the legs, frequently associated SOCIAL : It has been said that the most important thing a
with varicose veins. The leg may become tender, pale and woman can do is to have a baby. This is only part of the
swollen. (3) Secondary haemorrhage: Bleeding from vagina truth. The really important thing is to nurture and raise the
anytime from 6 hours after delivery to the end of the child in a wholesome family atmosphere. She, with her
puerperium (6 weeks) is called secondary haemorrhage, and husband, must develop her own methods.
may be due to retained placenta or membranes. (4) Others:
Urinary tract infection and mastitis, etc. It is extremely Breast-feeding
important to look for these complications in the postpartal Postnatal care offers an excellent opportunity to find out
period and prevent or treat them promptly. how the mother is getting along with her baby, particularly
with regard to feeding. For many children, breast milk
Restoration of mother to optimum health provides the main source of nourishment in the first year of
The second objective of postpartal care is to provide care life. In some societies, lactation continues to make an
whereby, the woman can recuperate physically and important contribution to the child's nutrition for 18 months
emotionally from her experience of delivery. The broad or longer. In the world's more affluent societies, breast-
areas of this care fall into three divisions : feeding appears to have become a lost art and the feeding
PHYSICAL bottle has usurped the breast. When the standard of
environmental sanitation is poor and education low, the
(1) Postnatal examinations : Soon after delivery, the content of the feeding bottle is likely to be as nutritionally
health check-ups must be frequent, i.e., twice a day during poor as it is bacteriologically dangerous. It is therefore very
the first 3 days, and subsequently once a day till the important to advise the mothers to avoid the feeding bottle.
umbilical cord drops off. At each of these examinations, the
FHW checks temperature, pulse and respiration, examines A great asset in India is that an average Indian mother,
the breasts, checks progress of normal involution of uterus, although poor in nutritional status, has a remarkable ability
examines lochia for any abnormality, checks urine and to breast-feed her infant for prolonged periods, sometimes
bowels and advises on perinea! toilet including care of the extending to nearly 2 years and beyond. Longitudinal and
stitches, if any. The immediate postnatal complications, viz cross-sectional studies indicate that poor Indian women
puerperal sepsis, thrombophlebitis, secondary haemorrhage secrete as much as 400 to 600 ml of milk per day during the
should be kept in mind. At the end of 6 weeks, an first year (Table 2). No other food is required to be given until
examination is necessary to check-up involution of uterus 6 months after birth. At the age of 6 months, breast milk
which should be complete by then. Further visits should be should be supplemented by additional foods rich in protein
done once a month during the first 6 months, and thereafter and other nutrients (e.g., animal milk, soft-cooked mashed
once in 2 or 3 months till the end of one year. In rural areas vegetables, etc.). These are called supplementary foods
only limited postnatal care is possible. Efforts should be which should be introduced very gradually in small amounts.
POSTNATAL CARE
58 per thousand, as compared to 5 per thousand in the (v) early detection and treatment of congenital and
developed countries, places India in the unenviable position acquired disorders, especially infections.
of being among the less developed in the world. Many low- Congenital infections caused by toxoplasmosis, rubella,
cost measures are available for saving life human (alpha) herpes-virus 1 or 2, human (beta) herpes
of millions of children, like immunization, breast feeding, virus, and syphilis (TORCHES synonyms) is associated with
birth spacing, growth monitoring, improved weaning, oral high mortality rate in the neonates (25).
rehydration. Attention is focused on these elements of child
health care in developing countries. Immediate care
NEONATAL CARE 1. CLEARING THE AIRWAY
A flow chart of the optimum care of the newborn is as Establishment and maintenance of cardio-respiratory
shown in Fig. 2. This aspect of family health services has functions (e.g., breathing) is the most important thing the
been termed neonatology. This branch of medicine is, moment the baby is born, and everything else is secondary.
perhaps, more than any other, dependant on teamwork in To help establish breathing, the airways should be cleared of
which disciplines of obstetrics and gynaecology, paediatrics, mucus and other secretions. Positioning the baby with his
preventive and social medicine, community health services head low may help in the drainage of secretions. This
and nursing have an important part to play, if any impact is process can be assisted by gentle suction to remove mucus
to be made on the vast problems of perinatal and neonatal and amniotic fluid. Resuscitation becomes necessary if
mortality and morbidity. The paediatrician has a key role as natural breathing fails to establish within a minute, as in the
a coordinator and guide for the whole team. case of babies who have already been subject to hypoxia
during labour. In these cases, resuscitation may require more
Early neonatal care active measures such as suction, application of oxygen
The first week of life is the most crucial period in the life mask, intubation and assisted respiration. All labour wards
of an infant. In India, 61.3 per cent of all infant deaths occur should be equipped with resuscitation equipment including
within the first month of life. Of these, more than half may oxygen. If the heart has stopped beating for 5 minutes, the
die during the first week of birth. This is because the new baby is probably dead.
born has to adapt itself rapidly and successfully to an alien
external environment. The risk of death is the greatest 2. APGAR SCORE
during the first 24-48 hours after birth. The problem is more The Apgar score is taken at 1 minute and again at
acute in rural areas where expert obstetric care is scarce, and 5 minutes after birth. Today it is considered as negligence to
the home environmental conditions in which the baby is omit Apgar scoring of a newborn infant, especially low birth
born, are usually unsatisfactory. weight babies (26). It requires immediate and careful
The objective of early neonatal care is to assist the observation of the heart rate, respiration, muscle tone, reflex
newborn in the process of adoption to an alien environment, response and colour of the infant. Each sign is given a score
which involves : of 0, 1 or 2 (Table 3). It provides an immediate estimate of
the physical condition of the baby. A perfect score should be
{i) establishment and maintenance of cardio-
9 or 1 O; 0-3 indicates that the baby is severely depressed
respiratory functions
and 4-6 moderately depressed. A score below 5 needs
(ii) maintenance of body temperature prompt action. Infants with low Apgar scores at 5 minutes of
(iii) avoidance of infection age are subject to a high-risk of complications and death
(iv) establishment of satisfactory feeding regimen, and during the neonatal period (26) .
. Delivery
FIG. 2
Flow chart of optimum newborn care
NEONATAL CARE
including 2499 g), the measurement being taken preferably diagnosis and management of NCDs and other conditions
within the first hour of life, before significant postnatal known to increase the risk of preterm birth. Premature
weight loss has occurred (33). Apart from birth weight, babies, in turn, are at greater risk of developing NCDs, like
babies can also be classified into 3 groups according to hypertension and diabetes, and other significant health
gestational age, using the word "preterm", "term" and condition later in life, creating an intergenerational cycle of
"postterm", as follows (32) : risk. The link between prematurity and an increased risk of
a. Preterm : Babies born before the end of 37 weeks NCDs takes on an added public health importance when
gestation (less than 259 days). considering the reported increase in the rates of both
b. Term : Babies born from 37 completed weeks to worldwide. Table 4 summarizes the types of preterm births
less than 42 completed weeks (259 to 293 days) and the risk factors involved.
of gestation. TABLE 4
c. Postterm : Babies born at 42 completed weeks or
any time thereafter (294 days and over) of Types of preterm birth and risk factors involved
gestation.
A LBW infant then, is any infant with a birth weight of Adolescent pregnancy.,' .
less than 2.5 kg regardless of gestational age. It includes two advanced maternal age,
kinds of infants : spacing or.short inter-pregnancy
interval ·
PRETERM BABIES (9, 33A) Multiple .Increased rates of twin and
Preterm is defined as babies born alive before 37 weeks pregnancy higher order pregnancies
of pregnancy are completed. There are sub-categories of with assisted reproduction
preterm birth, based on gestational age : Infection Urinary tract infections,
malaria, HIV, syphilis,
- extremely preterm ( <28 weeks) bactedal vaginosis.
- very preterm (28 to <32 weeks) Underlying Diabetes, hypertension,
moderate to late preterm (32 to 37 weeks). maternal chronic . anaemia; asthma, thyroid
medical conditions .· disease .
These are babies born too early. Their intrauterine
growth may be normal. That is, their weight, length and Nutritional Underhutrition, obesity,
micronuttient deficiencies
development may be within normal limits for the duration of
gestation. Given good neonatal care, these babies may catch Lifestyle/ . Smoking; excess alcohol
up growth and by 2 to 3 years of age will be of normal size work related corisumption,,recreational
druguse,·excessphysical
and performance. ~erk/activity
INCIDENCE Depression, violence · .
against womep
More than 1in10 of the world's babies born in 2010 were
born prematurely, making an estimated 15 million preterm and other .Genetic risk, e.g., family
births (defined as before 37 weeks of gestation) of which . history, Cervical
more than 1 million died as a result of their prematurity. . incompetence
Prematurity is now the second-leading cause of death in Pro:vider- . Medical inductfon. · There-is an overlap for
children under 5 years, and the single most important cause initiated . or caesarean b.irth indicated providerci9itiated
of death in the critical first month of life. For the babies who preterm birth:, f()r:9bs~etric . preterm birth with the risk
survive, many face a lifetime of significant disability. indication,· Foetal factors for spontaneous ·
indication preterm birth. ·
Causes of preterm births (9) Other-Not medically.·
Preterm birth is a syndrome with a variety of causes which · ·indicated
can be classified into two broad subtypes: (1) spontaneous Source: (9)
preterm birth (spontaneous onset of labor or following
prelabor premature rupture of membranes (pPROM) and SMALL-FOR-DATE (SFD) BABIES:
(2) provider-initiated preterm birth (defined as induction of
labor or elective caesarean birth before 37 completed weeks These may be born at term or preterm. They weigh less
of gestation for maternal or fetal indications (both "urgent" than the 10th percentile for the gestational age. These
or "discretionary"), or other non-medical reasons. babies are clearly the result of retarded intrauterine foetal
growth.
Spontaneous preterm birth is a multi-factorial process,
resulting from the interplay of factors causing the uterus to Computation : The percentage of LBW babies is
change from quiescence to active contractions and to birth computed as :
before 37 completed weeks of gestation. The precursors to Live-born bab.ies with birth weight less than 2.5 Kg
spontaneous preterm birth vary by gestational age, social x 100
and environmental factors, but the cause of spontaneous Total number of live births
preterm labor remains unidentified in upto half of all cases. The factors associated with intrauterine growth
Maternal history of preterm birth is a strong risk factor and retardation are multiple and interrelated to mother, the
most likely driven by the interaction of genetic, epigenetic placenta or to the foetus. The maternal factors include
and environmental risk factors. malnutrition, severe anaemia, heavy physical work during
Elevated risk of preterm birth also demands increased pregnancy, hypertension, malaria, toxaemia, smoking, low
attention to maternal health, including the antenatal economic status, short maternal stature, very young age,
LOW BIRTH
high parity and close birth spacing, low education status etc. to correction or can be prevented. Some of the direct
(34). The placental causes include placental insufficiency interventions are as follows :
and placental abnormalities. The foetal causes include foetal (i) Increasing food intake : Studies have shown that even
abnormalities, intrauterine infections, chromosomal a relatively small dietary improvement in the malnourished
abnormality and multiple gestation. pregnant mother, even during the last trimester, can result in
SFD babies have a high risk of dying not only during the a significant improvement in the birth weight of an infant. In
neonatal period but during their infancy, thus significantly Southern India, treatment of anaemic mothers. led to an
raising the rate of infant and perinatal mortality and increase in birth weight of offspring. Direct intervention
contribute greatly to immediate and long term health covers a wide range of act\vities, viz supplementary feeding,
problems. Most of them become victims of protein-energy distribution of iron and folic acid tablets, fortification and
malnutrition and infections. enrichment of foods, etc. (ii) Controlling infections : Many
In the developing countries, adverse prenatal and post- maternal infections go unrecognized. They should be
natal development of the child is associated with diagnosed and treated (e.g., malaria, urinary tract infection,
3 interrelated conditions : malnutrition, infection and infections due to cytomegalovirus, toxoplasmosis, rubella
unregulated fertility which are often due to poor socio- and syphilitic infection) or otherwise prevented. These
economic and environmental conditions. infections can affect foetal growth in several ways. (iii) Early
detection and treatment of medical disorders : These include
IMPORTANCE hypertension, toxemias, and diabetes.
LBW is one of the most serious challenges in maternal INDIRECT INTERVENTION
and child health ·in both developed and developing
countries. Its public health significance may be ascribed to Family planning, avoidance of excessive smoking,
numerous factors - its high incidence; its association with improved sanitation measures, and measures aimed at
mental retardation and a high risk of perinatal and infant improving the health and nutrition of young girls, each have a
mortality and morbidity (half of all perinatal and one-third role to play. These measures can be expected to be more
of all infant deaths are due to LBW); human wastage and effective and to have lasting effects only if, at the same time
suffering; the very high cost of special care and intensive there are improvements in the socio-economic and
care units and its associat.ion with socio-economic environmental conditions and in the distribution of health and
underdevelopment (35). social services especially in the under-served areas.
Government support could be provided through such
LBW is the single most important factor determining the measures as maternity leave with full wages and child benefits.
survival chances of the child. Many of them die during their
first year. The infant mortality rate is about 20 times greater Fig. 3 summarizes the integrated services delivery
for all LBW babies than for other babies. The lower the birth package for maternal and newborn care.
weight, the lower is the survival chance. Many of them
TREATMENT
become victims of protein-energy malnutrition and
infection. LBW is thus an important guide to the level of care From the point of view of treatment, LBW babies can be
needed by individual babies. LBW also reflects inadequate divided in to 2 groups : (a) those under 2 kg and (b) those
nutrition and iJl-health of the mother. There is a strong and between 2-2.5 kg. The first group requires first class modern
significant positive correlation between ·maternal nutritional neonatal care (which is hardly available globally) in an
status and the length of pregnancy and birth weight. A high intensive care unit until the weight reaches that of the
percentage of LBW therefore points to deficient health status second group. The second group may need an intensive
of pregnant women, inadequate prenatal care and the need care unit for a day or two.
for improved care of the newborn.
KANGAROO MOTHER CARE
PREVENTION Kangaroo mother care for low birth-weight babies was
Experts opine that the rates of LBW babies could be introduced in Colombia in 1979 by Ors. Hector Martinez
reduced to not more than 10 per cent in all parts of the and Edzar Rey as a response to, inter alia, high infection and
world (36). It is clear from the multiplicity of causes that mortality rates due to overcrowding in hospitals. It has since
there is no universal solution. Interventions have to be been adopted across the developing world and has become
cause-specific. Main attention has been given in recent essential element in the continuum of neonatal care. The
years to ways and means of preventing LBW through good four components of kangaroo mother care are all essential
prenatal care and intervention programmes, rather than for ensuring the best care option, especially for low birth-
"treatment" of LBW babies born later. weight babies. They include skin-to-skin positioning of a
baby on the mother's chest; adequate nutrition through
DIRECT INTERVENTION MEASURES breast-feeding; ambulatory care as a result of earlier
The incidence of LBW can be reduced if pregnant women discharge from hospital; and support for the mother and her
"at risk" are identified and steps are taken to reduce the risk. family in caring for the baby (37).
For this approach the women need to be identified early in The intensive care comprises of:- (a) lncubatory care, that
pregnancy. To achieve this goal, the mothers health card - is, adjustment of temperature, humidity and oxygen supply.
which is simple and can be used by primary health care There is increasing evidence that low levels of oxygen in a
worker - has been found very useful. The risk factors are : baby's blood stream (hypoxia) can produce cerebral palsy.
mother's malnutrition, heavy work load, diseases and Therefore, continuous monitoring of the level of oxygen in
infections and high blood pressure. Added to malnutrition, baby's blood stream is now carried out in the best
too many and too frequent pregnancies contribute to the incubatory care units. If the oxygen is excessive, it may lead
continued depletion of her body. Both malnutrition and to retrolental fibroplasia. (b) Feeding : Breast-feeding is
morbidity due to infections during pregnancy are amenable rarely possible the baby cannot suck. However, breast milk
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
-....
=
QI
....Ill
·Q.
HEALTHCARE
Family planning,
including birth
- 4-visit focused ANC package
- IPTp and bednets for malaria
Promotion of healthy
behaviours, e.g. hygiene,
breastfeeding, warmth
- Immuniz.ations, nutrition, e.g. Vit A
. supplementation and growth.
monitoring
g spacing Prevention and management of
Early detection of and IPTi and bednetsfor malaria
.;;=
. !,) Prevention and
ST!sand HIV
referral for illness - Care of children with HIV, including
cotrimoxazole
..
Ill
QI
....
management of
STis and HIV
Calcium supplementation
Diagnosis and treatment of
- Extra care of at-risk
mothers and babies
First level assessment and care of ·
0= - Nutritional maternal chronic conditions
Prevention of mother-to
childhood illness (IMC!)
Diagnosis and treatment of
counselling child transmission of HI prematurity associated disability
- Adolescent and Counselling and Where skilled care Healthy home care including:
.....
::» pre-pregnancy preparation for is notavailable, - Promoting preventive care, including newborn care (hygiene,
'E nutrition newborn care, consider clean
=
e - Gender violence. breast-feeding, birth and
warmth), nutrition (exclusive breast-feeding, complementary
feeding) and family planning for women
e
0 - Education
birth and
emergency
immediate
newborn care Seeking curative services for women, babies and chUdren,
-!,)
:..
'El
rf
Prevention of STis
and HIV
- Optimize prepreg-
preparedness (hygiene, warmth
and immediate
breast-feeding)
including oral rehydration salts for prevention of diarrhoea, and
where referral is not available, consider case management for
pneumonia, malaria and neonatal sepsis.
nancy maternal
conditions
INTERSECTORAL Improved living and working conditions including housing, water. and sanitation, and nutrition; education and
empowerment, especially of girls; folk acid fortification; safe and healthy work environments for women· and
pregnant women.
··.:-'.;;.,;__ ·".'
. Pr~-P~~l{P.a~~~ . .
FIG. 3
Integrated service delivery packages for maternal, newborn and child health
Source: (9)
Advantages of breast-feeding feeding. It is free from bacteria; there is little danger from
Among the advantages of breast milk are the following : flies; it does not become sour and is simple to reconstitute. It
(1) it is safe, clean, hygienic, cheap and available to the infant is usually fortified with vitamins. But it is expensive and,
at correct temperature (2) it fully meets the nutritional therefore, beyond the reach of many Indian families.
requirements of the infant in the first few months of life (3) it (b) COW'S MILK: A cheaper alternative which is well
contains · antimicrobial factors such as macrophages, within the reach of many Indian families is cow's milk, which
lymphocytes, secretory IgA, anti-streptococcal factor, in fact is widely used for infant feeding. Most health workers
lysozyme and lactoferrin which provide considerable give very conflicting advice on the use of cow's milk for
protection not only against diarrhoeal diseases and necrotizing infant feeding. A small minority of over-enthusiastic
enterocolitis, but also against respiratory infections in the first paediatricians recommend undiluted cow's milk right from
months of life (4) it is easily digested and utilized by both the the birth, forgetting the fact that human milk is made for the
normal and premature babies (5) it promotes "bonding" human baby and cow's milk for the calf. Both cannot be
between the mother and infant (6) sucking is good for the baby equated. Most authorities in India and abroad including the
- it helps in the development of jaws and teeth (7) it protects World Health Organization have persistently recommended
babies from the tendency to obesity (8) it prevents malnutrition dilution of cow's milk during the first 2 months in order to
and reduces infant mortality (9) it provides several biochemical reduce the solute load on neonatal kidneys. The
advantages such as prevention of neonatal hypocalcaemia and Government of India in the Ministry of Health and Family
hypomagnesemia (38) (10) it helps parents to space their Welfare in the "Manual for Health Worker (Female) Vol. I
children by prolonging the period of infertility and (11) special (1978) have also recommended dilution of cow's milk
fatty acids in breast milk lead to increased intelligence during the first two months. A suggested schedule for infant
quotients and better visual acuity. A breast-fed baby is likely to feeding with cow's milk is given in Table 5.
have an IQ of around 8 points higher than a non-breast fed
baby (39). TABLE 5
Quantities per feeding - assuming five feedings per day
Early initiation of breast-feeding lowers the mother's risk
of postpartum haemorrhage and anaemia, boosts mother's
immune system, delays next pregnancy and reduces the
insulin of diabetic mothers. It protects mothers from ovarian
and breast cancers and osteoporosis (39). Cow's milk (ml) 70 100 150 180
It is neither necessary nor desirable to train a baby to Water(ml) 20 20 0 0
"feed by the clock". It should be explained to the mother, Sugar (g) 5 10 10 10
however, that intervals between feeds are necessary for kcal 64 103 135 153
herself and for the baby, though they may vary between 1 to Protein (g) · 2.1 3.0 4.5 5.4
4 hours, according to the baby's needs, size, strength of Place milk, water, and sugar in pan
sucking and the mother's milk supply. bring to boil, then cool
pour into feeding utensil
(2) Artificial feeding
Source : (40)
The main indications for artificial feeding are failure of
breast milk, prolonged illness or death of the mother. It is Artificial feeding is a hazardous procedure in poor homes
crucial for the baby to be fed "breast-milk substitutes" - e.g., because of the dangers of contamination and over-dilution
dried whole milk powder, fresh milk from a cow or other of the feed.
animal, or commercial formulae. The composition of cow's milk and human milk is given
in Table 6.
PRINCIPLES OF ARTIFICIAL FEEDING
Table 6 shows that cow's milk and human milk are
In planning an artificial feed, the nutritional needs of dissimilar in many respects. The differences may be seen as
infants should be kept in view. These include : great as the difference between "brain" and "brawn",
1. Infants require an average of 100 kcal of energy (a) PROTEIN: One of the striking difference is the low protein
per kg of body weight per day, i.e., about 150 ml content of human milk; this is about 3 times less than in cow's
of milk per kg of body weight each day. milk and lower than in most mammals. The proteins in
2. The estimated protein requirement is about 2 g/kg human breast milk and in cow's milk are completely different.
of body weight during the first 6 months; it Human milk contains more cystine, essential for the
declines to about 1.5 g/kg by the end of one year. prematures, and less methionine than cow's milk. It is rich in
This works out to 13-14 g protein daily during the taurine, indispensable for infants, but which they, unlike
first year of life. In terms of calories, 8 to 10 per adults, are unable to synthesize. Breast milk is almost
cent of calories are given as protein completely digested and utilized for growth, wherea;; much of
3. The carbohydrate requirement is about 10 g/kg of cow's milk protein is excreted by the infant undigested
body weight daily producing whitish curdy stool. Breast milk contains other
4. After 4 months of age, undiluted boiled and proteins whose functions are not nutritive, but anti-infective,
cooled milk should be given e.g., IgG, lysogyme, living cells, etc. Human milk is virtually a
5. Infants need feeding at frequent intervals about "living" fluid. (b) FATS : Mother's milk is especially rich in
6-8 times a day; older babies 5 times a day fats, which represents between 35-50 per cent of total energy
6. During illness (e.g., fevers) the calorie need is value. There are two main ways in which the fats of human
increased, and it should be met. milk differ from those of other milks - first, levels of essential
polyunsaturated fatty acids, especially linoleic acid and
(a) DRIED MILK : The safest milk is undoubtedly dried alpha-linolenic acid are higher in human milk than in cow's
whole milk, which is scientifically prepared for infant milk; secondly, the fats of human milk are easier for the baby
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Infant Milk Substitutes, Feeding Bottles and Infant Food other periods, growth is slower. (4) SEX: At about the age of
(Regulation of Production, Supply and Distribution) Act 10 to 11 years, female children show a sudden increase in
1992. It came into force on 1st Aug. 1993. It prohibits the height and weight. This growth spurt corresponds to
promotion of infant food, infant milk substitutes and feeding puberty. In male children, the growth spurt occurs a little
bottles as Government of India is committed to promote later, i.e., between 12 and 13 years. (5) PHYSICAL
breast-feeding. SURROUNDINGS : Sunshine, good housing, lighting and
The new norms of infant and young child feeding i.e., ventilation have their effects on growth and development
exclusive breast-feeding for the first 6 months (replacing the (6) PSYCHOLOGICAL FACTORS: Love, tender care and
4-6 months age range of earlier guidelines), introduction of proper child-parent relationship do affect the social,
complementary foods at 6 months while continuing breast- · emotional and intellectual development of children.
feeding upto the age of 2 years or beyond; replaces the (7) INFECTIONS AND PARASITOSIS: Certain infections of
previous policy. The infant milk substitutes, feeding bottles the mother during pregnancy (e.g., rubella, syphilis) affect
and infant foods (Regulation of Production, Supply and the intrauterine growth of the foetus. Infections after birth
Distribution) Amendment Act 2003, was passed and came (e.g., diarrhoea, measles) slow down growth and
into action since 1st January 2004 (39). Goals set to be development, especially in the malnourished child. The
achieved by year 2007 were : intestinal parasites (e.g., roundworms) by consuming
considerable quantities of nutrients hamper growth and
1. Intensify nutrition and health education to improve development. (8) ECONOMIC FACTORS : The standard of
infant and child feeding and caring practices so as to living of the family is an important factor. Children from
(a) bring down the prevalence of under-weight well-to-do families have better height and weight. The
children under three years from the current level of economic factor is connected with the nutrition and living of
4 7 per cent to 40 per cent; (b) reduce prevalence of the people. (9) OTHER FACTORS: These comprise the birth
severe undernutrition in children in the 0-6 years age order of the child, birth spacing, birth weight in single and
group by 50 per cent; multiple pregnancies, education of the parents, etc. In short,
2. Enhance early institution of breast feeding (colostrum a normal childhood implies proper physical, mental and
feeding) from the current level of 15.8 per cent to emotional development, and is a prerequisite for a full adult
50 per cent; life. The study of normal development and its determinants
3. Enhance the exclusive breast-feeding rate for the is the basis for paediatric education.
first six months from the current rate of 55.2 per cent The process of growth from birth to age 20 may be
(for 0-3 months) to 80 per cent; and represented diagrammatically in 3 curves (Fig. 4) which
4. Enhance the complementary feeding rate at six months shows the level accomplished (as a percentage of
from the current level of 33.5 per cent to 75 per cent. development between birth and maturity). These curves are
so drawn that height at age 20 corresponds to 100 on the
GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT vertical scale. It will be seen from Fig. 4 that the growth of
the brain is spectacular during the pre-school age.
1. Definition
A phenomenon peculiar to the paediatric age group is 2. Normal growth
growth and development. The term growth refers to increase CONCEPT OF NORMALITY
in the physical size of the body, and development to increase
in skills and functions. Growth and development are When speaking of human growth and development,
considered together because the child grows and develops as mention must be made of the difficulty of defining normality.
a whole. Growth and development include not only physical A normal child may be defined as one whose characteristics
aspect, but also intellectual, emotional and social aspects. fall within the range of measurements accepted as normal
Normal growth and development take place only if there is for the majority of children in the same (or reference) age
optimal nutrition, if there is freedom from recurrent episodes group. Conventionally, these limits the limits of normal
of infections, and if there is freedom from adverse genetic variation are assumed to include two standard deviations
and environmental influences. MCH care is concerned with above and below the mean (i.e., between the 3rd and the
the process of growth and development, which is the 97th centiles). This presupposes the availability of accurate
foundation of human life. It is the nature of this process of measurement techniques of growth, and a satisfactory set of
physical and psychological growth and development of the reference values or standards for comparison.
child which is crucial for health or ill-health, for life or death. As far as physical development is concerned, we have
measurement techniques. For example, we measure growth in
Determinants of growth and development terms of kilograms and centimetres. But very great difficulties
It is beyond the scope of this book to delve into the are encountered in connection with psychomotor, emotional
subject of growth and development which indeed is a vast and social development; most measurement techniques are
one, except to make a passing reference to some of the more based on observations such as "milestones of development."
important factors influencing it. Briefly these . are :
Methods of assessment (44, 45)
(1) GENETIC INHERITANCE : Genetic factors influence
growth and deveiopment, especially height and weight, In children, the parameters of growth generally used are :
mental and social development and personality. weight, height (or length in infants), and head and chest
(2) NUTRITION : Nutrition influences growth and circumferences. These characteristics are measured and
development before as well as after birth. In fact, retardation compared with the reference standards. Three methods are
of growth rate is an indication of malnutrition. When the generally used for making comparisons : (i) The first method
diet is improved the child begins to grow in height and is based on mean (or median) values. The median, rather
weight. (3) AGE: Growth rate is maximum during foetal life, than mean is used where possible because of the skewed
during the first year of life and then again at puberty. At distribution of most anthropometric measurements.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
I
J
I '
/
I
I
60
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I '
40 I I. General I
I
I I
20 I
I
, I'
I ,/
I
-r
' III. Reproduction organs
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age in years
FIG. 4
Growth after birth
A variation of 2 standard deviations from either side of the observations made on children in Boston from 1930 to
mean (or median) is considered as within normal limits. 1956. They have been carefully compiled longitudinally on a
(ii) The second method is by means of percentile or large series of children, mostly from North European origin.
(centiles). Percentiles are easier to understand than standard They became widely used throughout the world. (ii) WHO
deviations. Percentiles refer to the percentage of individuals reference values (47, 48) : The Harvard values were
falling below a particular level. By definition 3 per cent of replaced by WHO reference values for weight and height.
children are below the 3rd percentile, and a further 3 per These values were based on extensive cross-sectional data
cent are above the 97th percentile. The remaining 94 per assembled by the United States National Centre for Health
cent of individuals who fall between these two lines Statistics (NCHS) which were considered the best available
(i.e. between 3rd and 97th percentiles) should therefore be for international use. The WHO reference values are used
regarded as being within the range of "normal." However, for children upto 5 years of age since the influence of ethnic
the 6 per cent of the children outside this range may not or genetic factors on young children at this age period is
necessarily be "abnormal", particularly if their growth is considered insignificant, given the similar socio-economic
parallel with their centile lines. A measurement outside environment. (iii) Indian standards (49) : The Indian Council
3 standard deviation (above 99th and below 1st centile) is of Medical Research {ICMR) undertook a nationwide cross-
more likely to indicate a significant degree of abnormality. sectional study during the year 1956 and 1965 to establish
(iii) Thirdly, it is also possible to assess the growth of a child the much needed reference standards of growth and
by such indices as weight for length, and weight for height. development of Indian children, for the country as a whole,
These are age-independent indices. as well as for each of the states in the country. As the Indian
data are based on measurements of children belonging to
The assessment of growth may be longitudinal or cross-
the lower socio-economic groups which form the majority of
sectional. Longitudinal assessment of growth entails
Indian communities, the values cannot be conside.red · as
measuring the same child at regular intervals. This provides
representing standard values (50).
valuable data about a child's progress. Cross-sectional
studies are also essential to compare a child's growth with The use of local standards of reference is not recommended
that of his peers. Cross-sectional comparisons involve large unless these are based on well-nourished and healthy samples
number of children of the same age. These children are of local population. Further, local standards do not permit
measured and the range of their measurements (e.g., international comparisons (51). It was the opinion of WHO
weight, height) is plotted, usually on percentile charts. that countries or regions might eventually develop their own
reference standards; in the interim, the WHO reference value
Reference values should provide an effective substitute (47).
For national and international comparisons and for
monitoring, reference or "standard" values of growth are Reference versus standard values
essential. The well known reference standards are : A distinction must be made between reference values and
(i) Harvard (or Boston) standards (46) : These are based on standard values. If the values are derived from a population
racially different from the population under study, such A baby should gain at least 500 gram wt. per month in
values should be considered as reference values only and the first three months of life. That is the minimum. The
not as standard values (52). That is, reference values cannot children who gain less weight are malnourished. It is usual
be used as standard values applicable to a population for babies to gain about 1 kg a month, especially in the first
racially different. For example, it would be absurd to apply 3 months. Healthy babies, on an average double their birth
the Harvard standards of growth to Pigmies and Eskimos weight by 5 months, and treble it by the end of first year and
who are racially different (51). quadruple by the age of two. During the first year, weight
increases by about 7 kg. After that the increase in weight is
Surveillance of growth and development not so fast - only about 2.5 kg during the second year and
Surveillance of growth and development is a specific from then until puberty by about 2 kg per year. The weight
function of the mother and child health services. It is an and height gain patterns in India are as shown in Table 8.
important component of the routine anticipatory care of In different parts of India, the average birth weight is
children. The main purpose of growth surveillance is to between 2.7 and 2.9 kg (54). The Indian infant manages to
identify those children who are not growing normally. grow well upto the age of 3-4 months, even at the expense
Surveillance also reflects the effectiveness of other of its malnourished mother. Thereafter, the growth falters
components of child care such as nutrition, sanitation and due to lack of supplementary feeding (55). However, Indian
control of infection. Surveillance of growth and children from well-to-do families display growth patterns as
development covers the following aspects : good as their counterparts in the Western world (49).
PHYSICAL GROWTH TABLE 8
1. Weight-for-age Average weight and height increase during the first 5 years
Measurement of weight and rate of gain in weight are the Age Increments
best single parameters for assessing physical growth. A
single weight record only indicates the child's size at the Weight increments per week
moment; it does not give any information about whether a 0 3 months 200g
child's weight is increasing, stationary or declining. This is 4-6 months 150 g
because, normal variation in weight at a given age is wide. 7-9 months lOOg
What is important is careful repeated measurement at 10 - 12 months . 50- 75 g
intervals, ideally monthly, from birth to 1 year, every two
Weight increments per year
months during the second year and every 3 months
thereafter upto 5 years of age, since this age group is at 1-2 years 2.Skg
greatest risk from growth faltering. By comparing the 3-5 years 2.0kg
measurements with reference standards of weight of children Length increments per year
of the same age {Table 7), the trend of growth becomes 1st year 25cm
obvious. This is best done on growth chart. Serial weighing 2nd year 12cm
is also useful to interpret the progress of growth when the 3rd year 9cm
age of the child is not known. Thus, without the aid of a 4th year 7cm
growth chart, it is virtually impossible to detect changes in 5th year 6cm
the rate of growth, such as sudden loss of weight or halt in
gain. Each baby should have its own growth chart. Source : (52)
TABLE 7
2006 WHO standards of weight for age of boys and girls upto the age of 5 years (kg)
Boys Girls
Age (months).
Median. +2SD -2SD Median +2SD
0 2.5 3.3 4.4 2.4 3.2 4.2
4 5.6 7.0 8.7 5.0 6.4 8.2
8 6.9 8.6 10.7 6.3 7.9 10.2
12 7.7 9.6 12.0 7.0 8.9 11.5
16 8.4 10.5 13.1 7.7 9.8 12.6
2Q 9.1 11.3 14.2 8.2 10.4 13.5
24 9.7 12.2 15.3 9.0 11.5 14.8
28 10.2 . 12.9 16.3 9.7 12.3 16.0
32 10.8 13.7 17.4 10.3 13.1 17.1
36 11.3 14.3 18.3 10.8 13.9 18.1
40 11.8 15.0 19.3 11.3 14.6 19.2
44 12.2 15.7 20.2 11.8 15.3 20.4
.48 12.7 16.3 21.2 12.3 16.1 21.5
52 13.2 17.0 22.2 12.8 16.8 22.6
56 13.6 17.7 23.2 13.3 17.5 23.8
60 14.1 18.3 24.2 13.7 18.2 24.9
Source: (53)
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Weight-for-age is often used to classify malnutrition and height is now considered more important than weight alone. It
determine its prevalence. Jelliffe suggested that 80 per cent of helps to determine whether a child is within range of "normal"
the median weight-for-age of the reference be the cut-off point weight for his height. For example, a child on the 75th centile
below which children could be considered malnourished. of both his height and weight is neither overweight nor under-
weight, but a child on the 75th centile of his weight chart and
2. Height (length)-for-age the 25th centile of his height chart is clearly overweight.
Height should be taken in a standing position without Low weight for height : This is also known as nutritional
foot wear. If the height machine is· not available, the wasting or emaciation {acute malnutrition). It is associated
measuring scale fixed to the wall can be employed. This with an increased risk of mortality and morbidity (56).
arrangement is suitable for children 2 years and above. The A child who is less than 70 per cent of the expected weight-
measuring. scale should be capable of measuring to an for-height is classed as severely wasted.
accuracy of 0.1 cm (48). A very great effort should be made
to measure children accurately. Errors in the measurement The WHO has compiled reference value for children giving
of a young child may lead to significant errors in the weight according to height. For details see reference 53.
classification of the nutritional status. The WHO standards Weight records
(2006) for height-for-age are as shown in Table 9.
Weight records are generally kept by all infant clinics; the
The length of a baby at birth is about 50 cm. It increases aim is the prevention of underfeeding, and in the developing
by about 25 cm during first year, and by another 12 cm world, the weight chart is an important tool in the
during the second year. During growth spurt, boys add prevention of malnutrition.
something like 20 cm in their height, and girls gain about
16 cm. The spurt is followed by a rapid slowing of growth. 4. Head and chest circumference
Indian girls reach 98 per cent of their final height on an
average by the age of 16.5 years, and boys reach the same At birth the head circumference is about 34 cm. It is
stage by the age of 17. 75 years. With the exception of a few about 2 cm more than the chest circumference. By 6 to
ethnic groups, there is evidence showing that all children 9 months, the two measurements become equal, after which
have a similar growth potential. the chest circumference overtakes the head circumference.
Height is a stable measurement of growth as opposed to In severely malnourished children, this overtaking may be
body weight. Whereas weight reflects only the present health delayed by 3 to 4 years due to poor development of the
status of the child, height indicates the events in the past thoracic cage. In a ICMR study (49), the crossing over of
also. The use of growth {height) centile chart is particularly chest and head circumference did not take place until the
valuable in studying the trend of height curve. age of two years and six months. This has been attributed to
growth retardation in poor Indian children.
Low height for age : This is also known as nutritional
stunting or dwarfing. It reflects past or chronic malnutrition. Besides increase in height and weight, the term "growth"
The cut-off point commonly taken for the diagnosis of also includes various physiological events which occur at
stunting is 90 per cent of the United States NCHS height-for- predictable periods such as, dentition, ossification of bones
age values (56). Waterlow recorded the use of 2SD below and secondary sexual characteristics.
the median reference as the cut-off point.
BEHAVIOURAL DEVELOPMENT
3. Weight-for-height A closely related development is behavioural
Height and weight are interrelated. Weight in relation to development. It is assessed in four fields :
TABLE 9
2006 - WHO standards for length/height-for-age of boys and girls upto the age of 5 years (cm)
Boys
ge (months)
-2SD Median +2SD
0 46.1 49.9 53.7 45.4 . 49.1 52.9
.4 59.7 63.9 68.0 57.8 62.1 66.4
8 66.2 70.6 75.0 64.0 68.7 73.5
12 71.0 75.7 80.5 68.9 74.0 79.2
16 75.0 80.2 85.4 73.0 78.6 84.2
20 77.7 83.2 88.8 76.7 82.7 88.7
24 81.7 87.8 93.9 80.0 86.4 92.9
28 83.8 90.4 97.0 82.2 89.1 96.0
32 86.4 93.4 100.4 84.9 92.2 99.4
36 88.7 96.1 103.5 87.4 95.1 102.7
40 90.9 98.6 106.4 89.8 97.7 105.7
44 93.0 101.0 109.1 92.0 100.3 108.6
48 94.9 103.3 111.7 94.1 102.7 111.3
52 96.9 105.6 114.2 96.1 105.0 114.0
56 98.8 107.8 116.7 98.1 107.3 116.5
60 100.7 110.0. 119.2 99.9 109.4 118.9
Source: (53)
THE GROWTH CHART
TABLE 10
Mile3tones of development
The 'milestones' given here are approximations and to assess any individual child, all types of growth development
and behaviour must be taken into account.
Motor Language Adaptive Socio-personal
Age development development development development
6-8 weeks Looks at mother and smiles
.3 months Holds head erect
4-5 months listening begins to reach recognizes mother
out for objects
.6-8months sits without support experimenting transfers objects enjoys hide
with noises hand to hand and seek
.9-10 months crawling increasing releases objects suspicious of strangers
range of sounds
10-11 months stands with support first words
12-14 months walks wide base · builds
18-21 months walks narrow base joining words beginning to explore
beginning to run
24 months runs short sentences dry by day
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
2
25
1
20 0
-1
Oi
c -2
.:c
Ol 15
'(ii
:s -3
10
WHO
5 NCHS
0 2 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
Age (months)
FIG.5
Comparison of WHO with NCHS weight-for-age Z-scores for boys
Source : (53)
3
30
2
25
1
20 0
Oi -1
c
.:c
Ol 15 -2
·c;;
:s -3
10
WHO
5 NCHS
0 2 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
Age (months)
FIG.6
Comparison of WHO with NCHS weight-for-age Z-scores for girls
Source : (53)
THE GROWTH CHART
2. Growth chart used in India supplementary food, milestones of the baby, birth spacing
India has adopted the new WHO Child Growth Standards and reasons for special care. The chart is easily understood
(2006) in February 2009, for monitoring the young child by the health workers and the mother, with a visual record of
growth and development within the National Rural Health the health and nutritional status of the child. It is kept by the
Mission and the ICDS. The same standards will be used for mother and brought to the health centre at each visit.
research too in future. The growth chart shows normal zone of weight for age,
These standards are available for both boys and girls undernutrition (below - 2 SD) and severely underweight
below 5 years of age. With these new standards the child zone (below - 3 SD). In some states like Maharashtra, the
care workers will know when the nutrition and care needs of growth chart contains normal weight for age zone and
the child is being compromised and it will enable them to undernutrition zone of grade one, second, third and fourth.
take timely corrective action at different levels. It is the direction of growth that is more important than the
A joint "Mother and Child Protection Card" has been position of dots on the line. The importance of the direction
developed, as shown in Fig. 7 and 8, which provides space of growth is illustrated at the left hand, upper corner of
for recording the family identification and registration, birth the chart. Flattening or falling of the child's weight curve
record, pregnancy record, institutional identification, care signals growth failure, which is the earliest sign of the
during pregnancy, preparation for delivery, registration protein-energy malnutrition and may precede clinical signs
under Janani Suraksha Yojana, details about immunization by weeks and months. Such a child needs special care. The
procedures, breast-feeding and introduction of objective in child care is to keep the child in normal zone .
1 2 3 4 6 6 7 6 9 10 11 3 yia.
1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 2it>.
Integrated Child Development Services Programme (ICOS)
• ICOS Programme of MWCO, GOI, Is roachmg out to young children under 6 years
pregnant & breast feeding motllern and women 15·45 years with an Integrated package
of services.
•Contact your AWW for child cara services at tile nearest AWC
ICDSServl"""
€ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 'Y'· tSupplomanlaly nu1I1Uonal
support With growth monttorlng
t lrnmunlzatlon
t Hes Ith ehack~up
tEatly childhO<ld care and presch<X>
education
iii Age (completed months and years) and promotion t Referral eervices
•Nutrition and health education
17
16 0
15
14
13
12
11
Ci
~ 10 10
.E
~"' 9
1 2 3 • s s 7 a g 10 11 3,.,.
Fever
t If high fever lake the child
to the health centre.
'
J
ARI
~ t If the child has rapid
~;~~~·
-c:.; ~
1 end/or difficult
•Give ORS & dispersible ~' :7 breathing, lake the
Zinc tablets as prescribed
• Continue reeding
:~~r~o the health
· •Take thEi child to hospltal if
L-..=~L...J loose motions do not stop
€ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 yr.
iii Age (completed months and years) +Care During Illness +
FIG. 8
!CDS growth chart for girls
age, weight-for-height, and arm circumference. The last two influences operating on children during this period (e.g.,
are independent of age and are particularly useful when age malnutrition and infection) may result in severe limitations
is not known. in their development, some of which at least are irreversible.
The concept of vulnerability calls for preventive care and
CARE OF THE PRE-SCHOOL CHILD special actions to meet the biological and psychological
needs inherent in the process of human growth and
Children between 1-4 years of age are generally called development (36).
pre-school age children or toddlers. In the history of health
services of many developing countries, their social and 5. Accessibility
health needs were realized rather late. Today, more than While the infant may be easily reached, the toddler is hard
ever before, the pre-school age child has become a focus for to reach, and it is therefore difficult to look after his health.
organized medical-social welfare activities, and their death Special inputs are needed (e.g., day care centres, play group
rate is considered a significant indicator of the social centres, children's clubs) to reach the toddler and to bring him
situation in a country. into the orbit of health care. Operation research all over the
The pre-school age is distinguished by the following world has demonstrated that parents are unlikely to travel
characteristics : more than 5-8 kms to obtain medical care. For the toddler
who needs to be carried, the distance may be reduced even
1. Large numbers further.
Pre-school age children (1-4 years) represent about
9. 7 per cent of the general population in India. A large 6. Prevention in childhood of health problems in
majority of these children live in rural and tribal areas and in adult life
urban slums. By virtue of their numbers, they are entitled to Results of research indicate how events in early life (e.g.
a large share of health and social services. Further, children child's diet, infections) affect its health when it becomes an
are the human resources of the future. Their development is adult, and how many conditions can be prevented through
in the interest of the total national development; therefore, early action, for example, dental diseases in adulthood.
they need special attention. Unfortunately, pre-school age Early treatment of streptococcal infection can prevent
children are comparatively less attended to. rheumatic heart disease. Longitudinal studies suggest that
the foundations of obesity, hypertension, cardiovascular
2. Mortality diseases, and certain mental disorders may be laid in early
The pre-school age (1-4 years) mortality in India is life. Some of the chronic orthopaedic ailments of the adult
2.3 per cent of all deaths. This high mortality which is largely are probably connected with anomalies in the development
due to infection and malnutrition is characteristic of this age or minor uncorrected infirmities of the infant (e.g. talipes,
group in underprivileged areas. Malnutrition was shown to be congenital dislocation of the hip). Many of the measures
an underlying cause in 3.4 per cent of all deaths in young subsequently undertaken to treat these disorders often do
children and associated cause in no less than 46 per cent (42). not fully succeed.
3. Morbidity Since young children are "vulnerable" to social and
health hazards which can retard or arrest their physical and
The data on the extent of morbidity of pre-school children mental development during these critical years, they deserve
are scarce. Some hospital records and a few surveys suggest special attention by the administration, general population
that children in this age group are usually victims of PEM and the family.
accompanied by retarded growth and development. Surveys
indicate that the main morbidity problems are malnutrition CHILD HEALTH PROBLEMS
and infections. The prevalence of severe protein-energy
malnutrition ranged between 5-6 per cent, and mild protein The problems facing the health worker in the developing
energy malnutrition about 40 per cent. PEM is often world are vast and are nowhere more evident than in the
associated with other nutritional deficiency such as anaemia, field of childcare. The main health problems encountered in
xerophthalmia, etc. Diarrhoea, diphtheria, tetanus, the child population comprise the following.
whooping cough, measles and other eruptive fevers, skin 1. low birth weight
and eye infections, and intestinal parasitic infestations are 2. malnutrition
usually common under the existing environmental
conditions. Atleast 5 per cent of the pre-school age children 3. infections and parasitosis
belonging to poor socio-economic groups show signs of 4. accidents and poisoning
vitamin A deficiency. Accidents are also becoming frequent, 5. behavioural problems.
especially burns and trauma from home accidents, and to an
increasing degree, traffic accidents. Some childhood diseases 1. Low birth weight
and conditions do not kill their victims, but cause serious This has been discussed in detail earlier.
disability (e.g., blindness, paralysis); and some diseases
become manifest later in life (e.g., heart disease and mental 2. Malnutrition
retardation). In many developing countries, periods of illness Malnutrition is the most widespread condition affecting
take up 25-30 per cent of the child's life and each represents the health of children. Scarcity of suitable foods, lack of
either loss of weight or failure to gain weight. These episodes purchasing power of the family as well as traditional beliefs
are well documented by several authors (56). and taboos about what the baby should eat, often lead to an
insufficient balanced diet, resulting in malnutrition. A
4. Growth and development childhood mortality study in the Americas showed that no
The importance of the first 5 or 6 years of life of a child less than 50 per cent of the children who died before the age
for its growth and development is well known. Any adverse of 5 years were found to have malnutrition as underlying or
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
associated cause of death, the peak of this mortality being in partly because their vitamin A requirements are
the post-neonatal period. During 2006-12, more than proportionately greater than those of any other group and
15 per cent of the world's children under the age of 5 years partly because they suffer most from infections. The result is
were underweight for their age. The proportion ranged from that severe, blinding corneal destruction is most frequently
1.4 per cent of children in developed countries to 24 per seen in children between the age of six months and six
cent in developing countries (58). In India, the National years. Vitamin A deficiency is in fact, the single most
Family Health Survey {NFHS) 2005-06 included survey of frequent cause of blindness among pre-school children in
the nutritional status of young children. Both chronic and developing countries. Some 20 per cent children with this
acute undernutrition were found to be high in all the 7 states deficiency are at increased risk of death from common
for which reports have been received, namely, Haryana, infections, and around 2 per cent are blinded or suffer
Karnataka, Maharashtra, Orissa, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh serious sight impairment.
and Goa. Iodine deficiency : Iodine deficiency disorders pose a
At present in India 43.5 per cent children under 5 years public health problem as about 1.5 billion people are living
age are underweight. This includes 43 per cent moderate to in environments lacking this mineral. As a result at least
severe cases, 16 per cent severe malnutrition, of these, 30,000 babies are stillborn each year and over 120,000 are
20 per cent have moderate to severe wasting and 48 per born mentally retarded, physically stunted, deaf-mute or
cent moderate to severe stunting (58). paralysed. Even when children are born otherwise healthy,
Malnutrition makes the child more susceptible to lack of iodine may still cause mental dullness and apathy.
infection, recovery is slower and mortality is higher. Nutritional deficiencies not only lead to severe illnesses,
Undernourished children do not grow to their full potential entailing long and costly treatment, but also influence
of physical and mental abilities. Malnutrition in infancy and physical development, psychic behaviour and susceptibility
childhood leads to stunted growth. It also manifests by to.infection.
clinical signs of micronutrient and vitamin deficiencies.
Prevention and appropriate treatment of diarrhoea, measles 3. Infectious and parasitic diseases
and other infections in infancy and early childhood are
Young children fall an easy prey to infectious diseases.
important to reduce malnutrition rates as infection and
malnutrition often make vicious cycle. Exclusive breast- The leading childhood diseases are : diarrhoea, respiratory
feeding in first 6 months of life is very important. infections, measles, pertussis, polio, neonatal tetanus,
tuberculosis, and diphtheria. It is known that a child may get
Specific nutritional deficiencies affected several times in a year; the incidence increases with
the aggravation of a state of malnutrition. Of about 4 million
(a) Protein-energy malnutrition deaths a year from acute respiratory infections in the
Protein-energy malnutrition {PEM) has been identified as developing world, a quarter are linked to malnutrition, and a
a major health and nutrition problem in India. It occurs further quarter associated with complications of measles,
particularly in weaklings and children in the first years of pertussis, malaria and HIV/AIDS. During 2012, about 9 per
life. It is characterized by low birth weight if the mother is cent of under-five mortality worldwide was due to diarrhoeal
malnourished, poor growth in children and high level of diseases, about 17 per cent due to ARI, about 1 per cent
mortality in children between 12 and 24 months, and is deaths were due to measles and about 7 per cent due to
estimated to be an underlying cause in 30 per cent of deaths malaria. In India, during the year 2013, 4,090 cases of
among children under age 5. diphtheria, 15, 768 cases of measles, 36,661 cases of
pertussis, and 528 cases of neonatal tetanus were
As many as 37 per cent of the children in the developing
world have low height for their age i.e. stunting, and 10 per reported (59). The actual figures may be several times
cent children have low weight for height. The rate of low higher since there is considerable under-reporting. This is so,
height for age reflects the cumulative effects of for example, in the case of eruptive fevers, malaria,
undernutrition and infections since birth or even before intestinal parasites such as ascariasis, hookworm, giardiasis
birth; high rates are often suggestive of bad environmental and amoebiasis etc. which are common because of poor
conditions and/or early malnutrition. On the other hand, a environmental sanitation and paucity of potable drinking
greater frequency of low weight for height, often reflects water. The prevention and treatment of children's illnesses
current severe undernutrition or disease. may interrupt the transmission of infection in the
community.
(b) Micronutrient malnutrition These few facts, which are merely examples and could be
Micronutrient malnutrition refers to a group of conditions multiplied, show that the prevention and treatment of
caused by deficiency of essential vitamins and minerals such infections and parasitosis of children are bound to have
as vitamin A, calcium, iodine, iron and zinc. It is estimated important long-term consequences.
that about 2 billion people are affected by this type of
malnutrition. Vitamin A deficiency is still the most common 4. Accidents and poisoning
cause of preventable childhood blindness world-wide; iodine In the developed world, accidents and poisoning have
deficiency causes goitre, cretinism and brain damage; and become a relatively more important child health problem.
anaemia results from insufficient iron intake. There is every reason to believe that accidents among
Nutritional anaemia : It affects all age groups, including children are frequent in the developing countries also,
pre-school children, school children and elders. Even mild especially burns and trauma as a result of home
anaemia reduces resistance to fatigue. It has a profound accidents and, to an increasing degree, traffic accidents.
effect on psychological and physical behaviour. Children and young adolescents are particularly vulnerable
Vitamin A deficiency and nutritional blindness : Young to domestic accidents - including falls, burns, poisoning and
children are at greater risk of developing xerophthalmia, drowning.
CHILD HEALTH PROBLEMS
5. Behavioural problems newborn may take a heavy toll of the newborn in the first
Behavioural disturbances are notable child health few weeks of life. Diarrhoea, pneumonia and other
problem, the importance of which is increasingly recognized infections bacterial, viral and parasitic - are extremely
in most countries. Children abandoned by their families common in children exposed to insanitary and hostile
present severe social and health problems. Over 60,000 environment. The stages at which these infections occur
children are abandoned each year in India (60). vary according to the ecological conditions, home and
family hygiene, local epidemiological conditions and the
6. Other factors affecting the health of children extent to which they come into contact with earth, water and
above all with adults and other children. An insufficient
a. Maternal health supply of safe water, inadequate disposal of human excreta
A major determinant of child health is the health of his/ and other waste, an abundance of insects and other disease
her mother. Child health is adversely affected (the risk begin carriers are among the environmental factors continuously
to appear even before birth) if the mother is malnourished, if menacing family health.
she is under 18 years (too young) or over 35 (too old), if her Another important factor which influences child
last child was born less than 2 years ago (too close), if she development is environmental stimulations. Children also
has already more than 4 births (too many) and if she is develop skills if they are given the opportunity. Stimulation,
deprived of basic pregnancy care. A healthy mother brings particularly the interaction with people who take interest
forth a healthy baby, with better chances of survival. and talk to them helps children to develop. Other sources of
environmental stimulation are the radio, TV and illustrated
b. Family magazines.
In pre-school years, the child is very much an organic
part of the immediate family. Whatever happens to him or
e. Social support and health care
her affects the other members of the family, and vice versa. Other factors affecting the health status of children
Therefore, "child health" has to be "family health". It include community and social support measures, ranging
depends upon the family's physical and social environment, from creches and day care facilities to organized health care
which includes its lifestyle, customs, culture, traditional systems.
habits, and the childbearing and childrearing practices are
greatly influenced by this. The family and social RIGHTS OF THE WOMEN AND CHILDREN
environment has a considerable influence on the
development of speech, personality and the intellectual Women and children are the most vlunerable section of
potentials of the small child. Other factors are the family the society. It is, therefore, vital to improve their health and
size, the family relationships, and family stability. Infancy well-being in order to achieve complete development of
and early childhood is the time when the child contracts overall human resources. ·
common contagious illness from contact with others (older One of the core function assigned to the WHO in its
brothers and sisters, playmates, school-mates). Data shows Constitution of 1948 was to "promote maternal and child
that the number of episodes of infectious diarrhoea health and welfare". By the 1950s, national health plans and
increases with the size of the family. Studies also show an policy documents from development agencies invariably
increase in the prevalence of malnutrition in families with stressed that mothers and children were vulnerable groups
more than 4 children. In short, fewer children would mean and, therefore, priority "targets" for public health action.
better nutrition, better health care, less morbidity and lower The notion of mother and children as vulnerable group was
infant mortality. also central to the primary health care movement launched
at Alma-Ata in 1978. The plight of mothers and children
c. Socio-economic circumstances
soon came to be seen as much more than a problem of
The socio-economic situation in which the family is bioligical vulnerability. The 1987 Call to Action for Safe
placed is a very important factor in child health. In every Motherhood explicitly framed it as "deeply rooted in the
region of the world, the physical and intellectual adverse social, cultural and economic environment of the
development of children ·varies with the family's socio- society, and specially the environment that societies create
economic level. Under-privileged children of the same age for women". Women's relative lack of decision-making
are smaller, lighter and less advanced in psychomotor and power and their unequal access to employment, finances,
intellectual performance, compared to children of privileged education, basic health care and other resources are
group. A detailed analysis of socio-economic factors shows considered to be the root causes of their ill-health, and that
the part played by the parents' education, profession and of their children. The unfairness of this situation has made it
income, their housing, the urban or rural, industrialized or obvious that the health of mothers and children is an issue
non-industrialized nature of the population. of rights, entitlements and day to day struggle to secure
Poverty, illiteracy (especially mothers' illiteracy) and these entitlements. The milestones in this establishment of
sickness create a viscious circle spanning from one the rights of women and children are as shown in Fig. 9 (61).
generation to the next, and from which it is difficult for the
individual to escape. The differences in health between rich RIGHTS OF THE CHILD
and poor, which can be observed in all age-groups are
particularly striking among children. One of the most encouraging signs of our times is the
awakening of the public to the needs and rights of children.
d. Environment The needs of children and our duties towards them are
After the first week of a child's life, the environmental enshrined in our Constitution; the relevant articles are :
factors play a very great role as determinants of infant and a. Article 24 prohibits employment of children below
childhood morbidity and mortality. Tetanus infection of the the age of 14 in factories;
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
FIG. 9
Milestones in the establishment of the rights of women and children
b. Article 39 prevents abuse of children of tender 2. Right to enjoy the benefits of social security,
age, and including nutrition, housing and medical care.
c. Article 45 provides for free and compulsory 3. Right to free education.
education for all children until they complete the 4. Right to full opportunity for play and recreation.
age of 14 years. 5. Right to a name and nationality.
In the country's Five Year Plans, special attention has 6. Right to special care, if handicapped.
been given to the welfare of children particularly the weaker
sections. Various schemes have been introduced and 7. Right to be among the first to receive protection
implemented to achieve this goal. However, despite and relief in times of disaster.
constitutional provisions, organized efforts for stepping up 8. Right to learn to be a useful member of society
child welfare services did not take place until 1959. and to develop in a healthy and normal manner
and in conditions of freedom and dignity.
UN DECLARATION OF THE RIGHTS OF THE CHILD 9. Right to be brought up in a spirit of
understanding, tolerance, friendship among
The year 1959 ushered in a new era in child welfare. To people, peace and universal brotherhood; and
meet the special needs of the child, the General Assembly of
the United Nations adopted on 20th November 1959, the 10. Right to enjoy these rights, regardless of race,
Declaration of the Rights of the Child. India was a signatory colour, sex, religion, national or social origin.
to this Declaration. The Rights of the Child are :
UNIVERSAL CHILDREN'S DAY
1. Right to develop in an atmosphere of affection
and security and, wherever possible, in the care November 14 is observed as Universal Children's Day. It
and under the responsibility of his/her parents. was started by the International Union for Child Welfare and
RIGHTS OF THE CHILD
the UNICEF. In 1954, the UN General Assembly passed a through the period of growth, to ensure their full physical,
formal resolution establishing Universal Children's Day and mental and social development. The State shall
assigned to UNICEF the responsibility for promoting this progressively increase the scope of such services so that,
annual day. within a reasonable time, all children in the country enjoy
optimum conditions for their balanced growth".
A non-governmental organization (Defence for Children
International, Geneva) was set up in 1979 (during the According to the Declaration, the development of children
International Year of the Child) to ensure ongoing, has been considered an integral part of national development.
systematic international action specially directed towards The Policy recognizes children as the "nation's supremely
promoting and protecting the Rights of the Child. important asset" and declares that the nation is responsible for
their "nurture and solicitude". It further spells out various
The 1990 World Summit for children agreed on a series measures to be adopted and priorities to be assigned to
of specific social goals for improving the lives of the children children's programmes with a focus on areas like child health,
including measurable progress against malnutrition, child nutrition and welfare of the handicapped and destitute
preventable diseases and illiteracy. The vital vulnerable children.
years of childhood should be given a first call on society's
concerns and capacities. A child has only one chance to A high level National Children's Board with the Prime
develop normally, and the protection of that one chance, Minister as Chairman was established. It provides a forum
therefore, demands the kind of commitment that will not be where problems relating to child welfare and their purposeful
superseded by other priorities. The following are the goals development into useful members of society are evolved,
that have been accepted by almost all nations. reviewed and coordinated into an effective programme (68).
Following the enunciation of the National Policy for
Social goals for the year 2000 (62) Children, a number of programmes were introduced by the
The end-of-century goals agreed to by the nations Government of India, viz. The ICDS Scheme, programmes
following the 1990 World Summit for children were : of supplementary feeding, nutrition education and
production of nutritious· food, constitution of the "National
1. A one-third reduction in 1990 under-five death Children's Fund" under the Charitable Endowments Act,
rates (or to 70 per 1000 live births, whichever is 1980, institution of National Awards for Child Welfare,
less) Welfare of the Handicapped (63).
2. A halving of 1990 maternal mortality rates
3. A halving of 1990 rates of malnutrition amorig the Review of existing policies and legislations (64)
world's under-five (to include the elimination of The Constitution of India follows the principle of
micronutrient deficiencies, support for breast- protective discrimination and thereby commits itself to
feeding by all maternity units, and a reduction in the safeguard the rights of children through policies, laws and
incidence of low birth weight to less than 10 per cent action. These commitments are reflected through the
4. Achievement of 90 per cent immunization among national polices which are as follows :
under-ones, eradication of polio, elimination of 1. National Policy for Children, 1974 provides the
neonatal tetanus, a 90. per cent reduction in conceptual basis for an integrated approach to
measles cases and a 95 per cent reduction in
address the whole child and commits the State to
measles deaths (compared to pre-immunization provide adequate services to children, both before
level) and after birth and through the period of growth, to
5. A halving of child deaths caused by diarrhoeal ensure their full physical, mental and social
disease development.
6. A one-third reduction of child deaths from acute
2. National Policy on Education, 1986 and its National
respiratory infections
Plan of Action, which has a full section on early
7. Basic education for all children and completion of childhood care and education. It clearly recognizes the
primary education by at least 80 per cent girls as holistic nature of child development, and that ECCE is
well as boys the crucial foundation for human resource
8. Clean water and safe sanitation for all development and cumulative lifelong learning. It is
communities viewed as a feeder and ·support programme for
9. Acceptance in all countries of the Convention on universal elementary education - especially for first
the Rights of Child, including improved protection generation learners, and an important support service
for children in especially difficult circumstances; for working mothers and girls.
and 3. The National Children's Fund was created during the
10. Universal access to high quality family planning international year of the child in 1979 under the
information and services in order to prevent Charitable Endowment Fund Act, 1890. The fund
pregnancies that are too early, too closely spaced, provides financial assistance to voluntary agencies for
too late or too many. implementing programmes for the welfare of children
including rehabilitation of destitute children.
NATIONAL POLICY FOR CHILDREN 4. National Health Policy, 2002 accords primacy to
preventive and first line curative care at primary
Keeping in view the constitutional provisions and the health level, and emphasizes convergence, and
United Nations Declaration of the Rights of the Child, the strategies to change care behaviours in families and
Government of India adopted a National Policy for Children communities.
in August 1974. The Policy declares: 5. National Charter for Children, 2003 intends to secure
"It shall be the policy of the State to provide adequate for every child its inherent right to be a child and
services to children, both before and after birth and enjoy a healthy and happy childhood, to address the
5
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
root causes that negate the healthy growth and progressively eliminating all forms of economic
development of children, and to awaken the exploitation of children.
conscience of the community in the wider societal Monitoring, review, and reform of policies,
context to protect children from all forms of abuse, programmes and laws to ensure protection of
while strengthening the family, society and the nation. children's interest and rights.
The national charter for children affirms India's - Ensuring child participation and choice in matters and
commitment to the child. However, it does not declare decisions affecting their lives.
India's acceptance of children's entitlements as their A new alienation of children from their rights has arisen
rights. The national policy for children, 1974 still
with the plight of children affected by HIV/AIDS. Since the
stands as the official policy commitment to children of
finalization of the NPAC the issues of these children have
India. With India's accession to the UNCRC and its two
also been accepted as key priorities by MWCD and therefore
optional protocols rights based framework has been
found a place in the Eleventh Plan among critical concerns
accepted as the guiding frame for policy measures and
programming for children. This is clearly reflected in that need to be addressed.
the national plan of action for children, 2005. 8. Integrated Child Protection Scheme (ICPS) (65, 66)
6. Commission for the Protection of Child Rights Act, During the year 2009-10, the Ministry of Women and
2005 provides for the constitution of a national Child Development launched a new centrally
commission and state commissions for protection of sponsored scheme called "Integrated Child Protection
child rights and children's courts for providing speedy Scheme" (ICPS) with a view to create a safe and secure
trial of offences against children or of violation of child environment in the country for the comprehensive
rights and for matters connected therewith or development of children who are in need of care and
incidental thereto. protection, children in conflict and in contact with law
7. National Plan of Action for Children, 2005 articulates {either as a victim or as a witness or due to any other
clearly the rights, perspective, and agenda for the circumstances), children of migrant families, children of
development of children. It provides a robust prisoners, prostitutes, working children, street children,
framework within which to promote the development trafficked or sexually exploited children, child drug
and protection of children. The guiding principles of abusers, child beggars etc.
the NPA are: The objectives of the scheme are : (1) Improve access
a. To regard the child as an asset and a person with to and quality of child protection services; (2) Raise
human rights; public awareness about child rights; (3) Clearly
b. To address issues of discriminiation emanating articulated responsibilities and accountability for child
from biases of gender, class, caste, race, religion protection; (4) Establish structures at all government
and legal status in order to ensure equality; levels for delivery of statutory and support services to
c. To accord utmost priority to the most children in difficult circumstances; and (5) Setting-up
disadvantaged, poorest of the poor and the least of an evidence based monitoring and evaluation
served child in all policy and programme system.
interventions; and
d. To recognize the diverse stages and settings of The services provided under ICPS are as follows :
childhood, and address the needs of each, (1) Emergency outreach service through 'Child line',
providing all children the entitlements that fulfill dedicated number is 1098. It is a 24-hour toll free
their rights and meet their needs in each situation. telephone service available to all children in
Time targets in the NPAC 2005 extend to 2012, the end- distress.
year of the Eleventh Plan. The NPAC 2005 has identified (2) Open shelters for children in need, in urban and
12 key priority areas for the highest and most sustained semi-urban areas.
attention in terms of outreach, programme interventions and
(3) Family based non-institutional care through
resource allocations. These are :
sponsorship, foster-care, adoption, cradle baby
- Reducing infant mortality rate centres and after-care.
Reducing maternal mortality rate (4) Institutional services through shelter homes,
- Reducing malnutrition among children children homes, observation homes, special
- Achieving 100% civil registration of births. homes, and specialized services for children with
- Universalization of early childhood care and special needs.
development and quality education for all children (5) Web-enabled child protection management system
achieving 100% access and retention in schools, including website for missing children.
including pre-schools.
- Complete abolition of female foeticide, female (6) General grant-in-aid for need based interventions.
infanticide and child marriage and ensuring the The growing vulnerability of children in urban
survival, development and protection of the girl child. settlements, including those caught in the shifting frame of
- Improving water and sanitation coverage in both rural migratory and transient labour are also now in the MWCD
and urban areas. portfolio. Their distress and the difficult circumstances of
Addressing and upholding the rights of children in their childhoods merit special measures of development and
difficult circumstances. protection.
- Securing for all children all legal and social protection, Goals and targets set by Government of India for child
from all kinds of abuse, exploitation and neglect. health under various national and international
Complete abolition of child labour with the aim of commitments are as follows (64) :
________
CHILD HEALTH GOALS/TARGETS
NATIONAL POLICY FOR CHILDREN
to another for care for her children, and yet another for control of infections, education about health problems and
family planning services. how to prevent them, and measures to ensure nutritious
An integrated approach implies that all those involved in food all closely related. Primary health care emphasizes
maternity care from the obstetrician down to the local dai, family oriented care and support, and community self-
must work as a team. Obstetric and paediatric units should reliance in health matters. MCH care is an indispensable
be closely linked so that there can be regular contact between priority element of primary health care in every country.
obstetricians, paediatricians, community physicians, health Targets for MCH Services
and social workers so that services for the care of the mother
and the child in the hospital and community be planned and From time to time Government of India has suggested
reviewed including teaching and research. This approach MCH goals with quantifiable time bound targets for
helps to promote continuity of care as well as improves achievement. Table 11 shows the MCH indicators with their
efficiency and effectiveness of MCH care. goal period and the current level of achievement.
provided the necessary directives for reorienting and INDICATORS OF MCH CARE
restructuring th.e health services, based on primary health
care approach with short and long-term goals. Maternal and child health status is assessed through
measurements of mortality, morbidity and, growth and
The infrastructure in rural areas is based on the complex development. In many countries, mortality rates are still the
of community health centres, primary health centres and only source of information. Morbidity data are scarce and
their subcentres. They provide preventive and promotive poorly standardized. In recent years, attention has been paid
health care services. Since deliveries by trained health to systematizing the collection, interpretation and
personnels are crucial in reducing maternal and infant dissemination of data on growth and development. The
mortality in rural areas, the government of India undertook commonly used mortality indicators of MCH care are :
a scheme to train local dais to conduct safe deliveries. These
dais are now available in most villages. Mention must be 1. Maternal mortality ratio
made of !CDS (Integrated Child Development Services) 2. Mortality in infancy and childhood
projects which are functioning all over the country providing a. Perinatal mortality rate
a package of basic health services (eg. supplementary b. Neonatal mortality rate
nutrition, immunization, health check-up, referral, nutrition c. Post-neonatal mortality rate
and health education, and non-formal education services) to d. Infant mortality rate
mother and children. e. 1-4 year mortality rate
Maternal health care was a part of family welfare f. Under-5 mortality rate
programme from its inception. Interventions were g. Child survival rate.
introduced on vertical schemes, but family planning
remained a separate intervention. In 1992, the Child MATERNAL MORTALITY RATIO
Survival and Safe Motherhood Programme integrated all the
schemes for better compliance. More recently, Reproductive According to WHO, a maternal death is defined as "the
and Child Health Programme was launched in 1997, which death of a woman while pregnant or within 42 days of
integrated family planning, Child Survival and Safe termination of pregnancy, irrespective of the duration and site
Motherhood Programme, Preventive management of STD/ of pregnancy, from any cause related to or aggravated by the
RT!, AIDS, and a client approach to health care. This pregnancy or its management but not from accidental or
programme has entered into phase II, with reorientation to incidental causes" (68).
make it consistant with the requirement of the National Maternal mortality ratio measures women dying from
Rural Health Mission. "puerperal causes" and is defined as :
In urban areas, the general trend is towards institutional Total no. of female deaths due to
delivery. In larger cities, almost 90 per cent of deliveries complications of pregnancy, childbirth or
take place in maternity hospitals and maternity homes. within 42 days of delivery from "puerperal
Some of the institutions are under the auspices of the causes" in an area during a given year
Municipal Corporations and voluntary organizations. The - - - - - - - - - - - - - x 1000 (or 100,000)
Total no. of live births in the same
services of obstetricians are available at district hospitals, area and year
which are the apical hospitals for MCH care at the district
Late maternal death : Complications of pregnancy or
level. For specialized care of children, paediatric units have
childbirth can also lead to death beyond the six-weeks
been established in several district hospitals.
postpartum period. In addition, increasingly available
Table 12 shows the evolution of maternal and child modern life-sustaining procedures and technologies enable
health programmes in India. more women to survive adverse outcomes of pregnancy and
TABLE 12 delivery, and to delay death beyond 42 days postpartum.
Despite being caused by pregnancy-related events, these
Evolution of maternal and child health programmes in India deaths do not count as maternal deaths in routine civil
... Year Milestones registration system. An alternative concept of late maternal
death was included in ICD-10, in order to capture these
1952 Family Planning programme adopted by Government of delayed deaths that occur between six weeks and one year
India (GO!) postpartum. It is defined as "the death of a women from
1961 Department of Family Planning created in Ministry of direct or indirect causes, more than 42 days but less than
Health one year after termination of pregnancy" (69).
1971 Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act (MTP Act), 1971
1977 Renaming of Family Planning to Family Welfare
Pregnancy-related death : A pregnancy-related death is
Expanded Programme on Immunization (EPI)
the death of a woman while pregnant or within 42 days
1978
of termination of pregnancy, irrespective of the cause of
1985 Universal lmmunization Programme (UIP) +
National Oral Rehydration Therapy (ORT) Programme death (33).
1992 Child Survival and Safe Motherhood Programme
(CSSM) Statistical measures of maternal
1996 Target-free approach mortality (69, 70)
1997 Reproductive and Child Health Programme-I (RCH-1) (a) Maternal mortality ratio : Number of maternal deaths
2005 Reproductive and Child Health Programme-2 (RCH-2) during a given time period per 100,000 live births during the
2005 National Rural Health Mission same time-period.
2013 RMNCH+A Strategy (b) Maternal mortality rate : Number of maternal deaths
2013 National Health Mission in a given period per 100,000 women of reproductive age
2014 India Newborn Action Plan (!NAP) during the same time-period.
Source: (70) (c) Adult lifetime risk of maternal death : The probability
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
TABLE 13
Maternal mortality ratio, deliveries conducted by skilled personnel, antenatal care coverage
and lifetime risk of maternal deaths in some developing and developed countries.
:·n~n··{pi!~i\/eriesco.iJdit~te·~·.b·; .'· Lifetime. risk Maternal mqrtaljty
,;,. •;.) "skillecipersonnel (%) maternal death ratioAp~rJ.00,QOO
.r> · .:(2oos~2012i (one in) (2013) live births) (2013)
India 74 37 52 190 178
Bangladesh 55 26 32 250 170
Bhutan. 97 79 65 340 120
Indonesia· 96 .88 83 220 190
Myamriar 83 73 71 250 200
Nepcil .. 58 50 36 200 190
Thailand 99 80. 100 1,400 48
Sri Lanka 99 93 99 1,400 29
Pakist~n 61 28 43 )10 170
China 94 100 1,800 32
Japan 100. 100 100 13,100 5
Sirigapore 100 100 100 13,900
lJK . . 99 6,900
6
8
USA 99 1,800 28
World 83 53 68 210 190
Source: (1, 7)
Causes
Maternal deaths mostly occur from the third trimester to
the first week after birth (with the exception of deaths due to b Other direct,.,..-
complications of abortion}. Studies show that mortality risks causes "'- Eclampsia
for mothers are particularly elevated within the first two days
after birth. Most maternal deaths are related to obstetric /
Unsafe abortion \
Obstructed labour
complications including postpartum haemorrhage,
infections, eclampsia and prolonged or obstructed labour - a Indirect causes including for example: anaemia,
and complications of abortion. Most of these direct causes of malaria, heart diseases
maternal mortality can be readily addressed if skilled health b Other direct causes including, for example : ectopic
personnel are on hand and key drugs, equipment and pregnancy, embolism, anaesthesia-related
referral facilities are available.
FIG. 10
About 80 per cent of maternal deaths are due to direct Causes of maternal deaths worldwide
causes i.e. obstetric complications of pregnancy, labour and
puerperium to interventions or incorrect treatment. As shown skills or in an environment lacking the minimal medical
in Fig. 10 the single most common cause-accounting for a standards, or both.
quarter of all maternal deaths· - is obstetric haemorrhage,
generally occurring postpartum which can lead to death very Around 8% of maternal deaths occur as a result of
rapidly in the absence of prompt life-saving care. prolonged or obstructed labour. Other direct causes include
ectopic pregnancies, embolism and deaths related to
Puerperal infections, often the consequence of poor interventions. Around 20 per cent of maternal deaths are
hygiene during delivery, or untreated reproductive tract due to indirect causes, that is, the result of pre-existing
infections account for about 15% of maternal mortality. diseases or disease that developed during pregnancy, which
Such infections can be. easily prevented. Hypertensive are not due to direct obstetric cause but are aggravated by
disorders of pregnancy, particularly eclampsia (convulsions}, the physiological effect of pregnancy. One of the most
result in about 13% of all maternal deaths. They can be significant is anaemia, which can cause death. Maternal
prevented through careful monitoring during pregnancy and anaemia affects about half of all pregnant women. Pregnant
treatment with relatively simple anticonvulsant drugs in adolescents are more prone to anaemia than older women,
cases of eclampsia. and they often receive less care. Infectious diseases such as
Of the estimated 210 million pregnancies that occur malaria, and intestinal parasites can exacerbate anaemia, as
every year, about 42 million end in induced abortion, of can poor quality diet all of which heighten vulnerability to
which only approximately 60 per cent are carried out under maternal death. Severe anaemia contributes to the risk of
safe conditions. More than 20 million induced abortions death in cases of haemorrhage. Other important causes of
each year are performed by people lacking the necessary indirect death are hepatitis, cardiovascular diseases,
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
diseases of the endocrine and metabolic system and following. Assam, Madhya Pradesh and Rajasthan have
infections such as tuberculosis, malaria and increasingly shown an acceleration in reduction in last three years (73).
HIV/AIDS (71). Each year, approximately 50 million women During the year 2012, about 47,000 women died of
living in malaria-endemic countries throughout the world pregnancy related causes (74). It is mainly due to large
become pregnant. Around 10,000 of these women die as a number of deliveries conducted at home by untrained
result of malaria (72). persons. In addition, lack of adequate referral facilities to
Social correlates provide emergency obstetric care for complicated cases also
contribute to high maternal morbidity and mortality.
A number of social factors influence maternal mortality.
The important ones are : (a) Women's age : The optimal From year 2000 onwards, SRS (Central regisfration
child-bearing years are between the ages of 20 and 30 years. system) included a new method called the "RHIME" or
The further away from this age range, the greater the risks of Representative, Re-sampled, Routine Household Interview
a woman dying from pregnancy and childbirth. (b) Birth of Mortality with Medical Evaluation. This is .an enhanced
interval : Short birth intervals are associated with an form of "verbal autopsy" which is the key feature of a
increased risk of maternal mortality. (c) Parity: High parity prospective study of 1 million deaths within the SRS. RHIME
contributes to high maternal mortality. include random re-sampling of field-work by an
independent team for maintaining quality of data. For
Not only are these three variables interrelated, but there comparability with WHO estimates for India and for other
are also other factors which are involved, e.g., economic countries, the WHO's "Global Burden of Disease"
circumstances, cultural practices and beliefs, nutritional categorizaton of maternal deaths have been used, which
status, environmental conditions and violence against includes various categories with their ICD-10 codes such as :
women. The social factors often precede the medical causes haemorrhage, sepsis, hypertensive disorder, obstructed
and make pregnancy and child-birth a risky venture. labour, abortion, and other conditions.
INDIA The SRS report has been grouped into three categories;
India is among those countries which have a very high (a) EAG states of Bihar and Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh
maternal mortality ratio. According to the estimates the and Chhattisgarh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh and
MMR has reduced from 212 per lac live births in 2007-09 to Uttaranchal and Assam. These states have high mortality
178 per lac live births in 2010-12, a reduction of 34 points indicators; (b) This category includes southern states of
over a period of three years period. States of Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Kerala and Tamil Nadu. These
Maharashtra and Tamil Nadu have already achieved the states have comparatively better health indicators; (c) The
goal of a MMR of 100 per lac live births. In EAG and Assam remaining states have been classified as others (73).
category of states, MMR is about 257 per lac live births, with Table 14 shows live births, maternal deaths, maternal
Assam on top (328) and Uttar Pradesh (292), Rajasthan mortality ratio in India by states from 2010-2012, special
(255), Madhya Pradesh (250), Odisha (235) closely survey of deaths using RHIME. During this period the life time
TABLE 14
Maternal mortality ratio (MMR), maternal mortality rate and lifetime risk; India,
EAG and Assam, South and other states, 2010-12
430,170 178
Assam 195,275 12,811 42 328 (229-427) 2L5
Bihar/Jharkhand 371,114 38,549 84 219 (172-266) 22.8
Madhya Pradesh/Chhattisgarh 353,851 32,533 75 230 (178-282) 2Ll
Orissa 293,129 19,981 47 235 .(1(18-302} .16.0
Rajasthan 269,335 . 26,702 68 255 . (194-315) ·25.2
Uttar Pradesh/Uttarakhand 542,640 53,194 156 292 . (247-338) 2$.7
IEAG and Assam Subt~tal 2,025,344 183,770 472 . 257 (234-280) 23.3. 0.8%
Andhra Pradesh 357,699 22,427 25 110 (67-153) 6.9 0.2%.
Kamataka 390,941 21,909 32 144 . (94-194} 8.1 ·o.3%
Kerala 305,268 15,351 10 66 (25-106) 3.3 0.1%
TamilNadu 410,769 22,622 . 20 90 (51~130) . 5.0 0:2%
risk of maternal death of women in the age group 15-49 has TABLE 16
been reported to be 0.6 per cent. This is substantially higher Determinants of maternal mortality in India
for women in the category EAG states and Assam (1.0 per
cent) compared to women in the category southern (0.3 per
cent) or in the "other" states (0.4 per cent). Obstetric causes:
The age distribution of maternal and non-maternal Toxaemias of pregnancy · Age at child birth
deaths from the 2010-2012 Special Survey of Deaths are Haemorrhage Parity
given in Table 15. It shows that more than two-thirds of the Infection Too close pregnancies
maternal deaths are of women in age group 20-34 years. In Obstructed labour Family size
contrast, non-maternal deaths are more evenly distributed Unsafe abortion Malnutrition
over the reproductive age span of 15-49 years. Poverty
Illiteracy
TABLE 15 Ignorance and prejudices
Age distribution of maternal and non-maternal deaths, Lack of maternity services
India, 2010-12 Non-obstetric causes: Shortage of he.alth manpower
·Anaemia Delivery by untrained dais
Associated diseases, e.g., Poor environmental sanitation
cardiac, renal, hepatic Poor communications and
15-19 (5-8) (11-13) metabolic and infectious transport facilities
20-24 (35:....42) 16% (15'-16) Malignancy Social customs, etc.
25-29. 28% (25-32) 13% (12'-14) Accidents
30-34. 17%. (14:-19) 12% (12-'13)
35-39 7% (5-9) 12% (12'-13) Newer approaches such as "risk approach" and primary
40-44 2% (1-3) 15% (15-16) health care are steps in the right direction to reduce maternal
45-49 03 (0-1) 19% (19-20) mortality and morbidity. Despite best antenatal care, some
women may develop complications without warning signs
[15-49 100% 100% I and require emergency care. Essential obstetric care and
Source : (73) establishment of first referral units (FRUs) for emergency
obstetric care is, therefore, a high priority under the safe
Causes motherhood component of Reproductive and Child Health
The major causes of maternal mortality according to the Programme. Equally important is an attack on social and
2001-2003 SRS survey are haemorrhage (38 per cent), cultural factors (e.g., ignorance, low levels of female literacy,
sepsis (11 per cent), hypertension (5 per cent), obstructed prejudices inherent in the socio-cultural milieu, low levels of
labour (5 per cent), abortion (8 per cent) and other nutrition and poor environmental sanitation). It calls for
conditions (34 per cent). Anaemia (19 per cent) is not only socio-economic development of the community through
the leading cause of death but also an aggravating factor in active community involvement.
haemorrhage, sepsis and toxaemia. Illegal abortions are also
one of the leading causes of maternal death. That this should National maternal health care indicators
continue despite MTP facilities points to the need for wider The estimates of maternal mortality can only be used as a
dissemination of information about these facilities. Induced rough indicator of maternal health situation in any given
abortions also point to a large unmet need for contraceptives, country. Hence indicators such as antenatal check-up,
as with each pregnancy the woman faces increased risk of institutional delivery and delivery by trained personnel etc.
death. The percentage distribution of causes of maternal are used to assess the maternal health status. These
deaths during the year 2001-2003 are as shown in Fig. 11. indicators also reflect the status of the ongoing programme
interventions and the situation of maternal health (76).
Other conditions Table 17 shows the national average of key indicators as per
343 --- different surveys conducted in India (76).
TABLE 17
National average of key indicators (per cent) in India
Abortion Indicators · NFHS,.-III DLHS-III
8%- (2005:-06) (2007~08)
•·
1. Ante-natal care :
Obstructed / Any visit 77.0 75.2
labour/
Three or more ANC 50.7 51.1
53 / Haemorrhage 2. Deliveries
Hypertensive 38% Institutional 41.0 47:0
disorders Safe delivery• 48.2 52.7
5% Sepsis
11% 3. !FA tablet consumption 22.3 46.6
for lOOdays
FIG. 11 4. Postnatal check-up within 2 days 36.4 47.9
Major causes of maternal deaths in India (2003)
NFHS : National Family Health Survey
Source : (75) DLHS : District level household survey
a Safe delivery is defined as institutional deliveries plus deliveries
The determinants of maternal mortality in India are as conducted at home by skilled staff and do not include deliveries
listed in Table 16. by trained birth attendants (dais).
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
states, the highest level of stillbirths has been estimated for DEFINITIONS (79)
Karnataka (14) and the lowest for Bihar (1) and The WHO's definition, more appropriate in nations with
Jharkhand (1). Table 18 shows the statewise break-up of well established vital records of stillbirths is as follows :
stillbirth rate.
Late foetal deaths (28 weeks gestation and more)
TABLE 18 + early neonatal deaths (first week) in one year
Perinatal mortality rates and stillbirth rates by residence, PMR = x 1000
India and bigger states, 2012 Live births + late foetal deaths
(28 weeks gestation and more)
in the same year
The WHO's definition, more appropriate in nations with
less well established vital records, is :
Andhra Pradesh 35 12 7 Late foetal deaths (28 weeks + of gestation)
Perinatal + postnatal deaths (first week) in a year
Assam 33 14 8 8 mortality x 1000
Bihar 26 12 1 4 rate Live births in a year
Chhattisgarh 36 33 11 11 .10 There is a difference in denominator of the perinatal
Delhi 16 20 16 6 6 5 mortality rate defined by the WHO and industrially
Gujar(:lt 28 30 23 7. 6 8 developed nations. This makes international comparisons
Haryana 30 34 19 9 10 6 difficult.
Himachal Pradesh 31 32 22 12 12 9
Jammu & Kashmir 32 35 15 8 9 5 International comparisons
Jharkhand 23 25 9 1 1 0 For international comparisons, the WHO Expert
Karnataka 33 40 20 14 16 9 Committee on the Prevention of Perinatal Mortality and
Kerala 10 11 7· 6. 6 5 Morbidity (1970) recommended a more precise formulation:
Madhya Pradesh 35 37 27 6 6 9 "Late foetal and early neonatal deaths weighing over 1000 g
Maharashtra 19 22 15 6 5 6 at birth, expressed as a ratio per 1000 live births weighing
Odis ha 37 38 26 8 8 5 over 1000 g at birth". It is calculated as :
Punjab 20 18 23 7 6 9 Late foetal and early neonatal
Rajasthan 33 36 20 6 5 7 deaths weighing over 1000 g
Tamil Nadu 19 24 13 8 11 5 Perinatal at birth
Uttar Pradesh 31 34 17 3 3 2 mortality x 1000
West Bengal rate Total live births weighing over
22 23 17 5 6 5 1000 g at birth
Source : (78)
Why perinatal mortality rate ?
The estimates provided by Lancet Stillbirth Series for With the decline of infant mortality rate to low levels in
India is 22 per 1000 live births for the year 2009. This many developed countries, perinatal mortality rate has
estimate is being used as a target-setting excercise by India assumed greater significance as a yardstick of obstetric and
Newborn Action Plan (launched in June 2014). With the paediatric care before and around the time of birth.
current level of average annual rate of reduction, which is
less than 1 per cent, India is expected to reach SBR of 19 per First, two types of death rate i.e., stillbirths and deaths
1000 live births by 2030 (81). under the first week of life are combined in perinatal
mortality rate because the factors responsible for these two
PERINATAL MORTALITY RATE types of deaths are often similar, being those operating
before and around the time of birth. Secondly, a proportion
As currently defined, the term "perinatal mortality" of deaths which occur after birth are incorrectly registered as
includes both late foetal deaths (stillbirths) and early stillbirths, thereby inflating the stillbirth rate and lowering
neonatal deaths. The Eighth Revision of the International the neonatal death rate. The perinatal mortality rate, being a
Classification of Diseases (ICD) defined the "perinatal combination of stillbirths and early neonatal deaths, is not
period" as lasting from the 28th week of gestation to the influenced by this error, by removing from consideration the
seventh day after birth. The Ninth Revision (1975) of !CD dividing line between a stillbirth and a live birth with death
added that: shortly after birth.
i) Babies chosen for inclusion in perinatal statistics Although perinatal period occupies less than 0.5 per cent
(this means late foetal deaths, live births and early (less than 168 hours) of the average life span, there are more
neonatal deaths) should be those above a deaths within this period than during the .next 30-40 years
minimum birth weight, i.e., 1000 g at birth of life in many developing countries (80). The value of
(A birth weight of 1000 g is considered equivalent perinatal mortality rate is that it gives a good indication of
to gestational age of 28 weeks) the extent of pregnancy wastage as well as the quality and
ii) if the birth weight is not available, a gestation quantity of health care available to the mother and the
period of at least 28 weeks should be used, and newborn. It reflects the results of maternity care more clearly
iii) where (i) and (ii) are not available, body length than the neonatal death rate.
(crown to heel) of at least 35 cm should be used.
But the preferred criterion is birth weight. Incidence
The Conference for the Tenth Revision (ICD-10) made Perinatal mortality is a problem of serious dimensions in
no changes to these definitions. all countries. It now accounts for about 90 per cent of all
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
foetal and infant mortality in the developed countries. In (c) Postnatal causes
India, stillbirths are seldom registered. Consequently, most (1) Prematurity
studies on perinatal mortality in this country are hospital- {2) Respiratory distress syndrome
based. The SRS estimates for perinatal mortality rate in {3) Respiratory and alimentary infections
India for the year 2010 was about 32 per 1000 live births
(4) Congenital anomalies
and stillbirths, with about 35 for rural areas and 22 for the
urban areas. The statewise perinatal mortality rate is shown (d) Unknown causes
in Table 18. In some cases; the causes are not clinically ascertainable.
In developed countries, perinatal mortality rates have
gradually declined during the past decades due to improved Interventions for the reduction of perinatal mortality
obstetric and perinatal technologies. Measures to reduce perinatal mortality rates are essential
to accelerate the declining trend in neonatal and infant
Social and biological variables mortality rates. For further details, refer to Table 21.
A number of social and biological factors are known to be
associated with perinatal mortality. The degree to which International certificate of perinatal death
these factors influence perinatal mortality varies from For international comparability, the 9th {1975) Revision
country to country. Many of these factors also endanger the of International Classification of Diseases {ICD-9)
life of the mother, causing high maternal mortality. An recommended a special certificate of cause of perinatal
appreciation of these factors (at-risk factors) will certainly death. The ICD has also a. list of 100 causes (the "P" list) for
make the greatest impact on reducing perinatal mortality. tabulation of perinatal morbidity and mortality (32).
The overall risk is increased in the following categories :
(1) Low socio-economic status; (2) High maternal age Prevention of perinatal mortality
{35 years or more); (3) Low maternal age {under 16 years); See page 571 under Preventive & Social Measures.
{4) High parity {fifth and subsequent pregnancies, especially
with short intervals between pregnancies); {5) Heavy NEONATAL MORTALITY RATE
smoking (10 or more cigarettes daily); (6) Maternal height
short stature {as compared with average for locality); Neonatal deaths are deaths occurring during the neonatal
(7) Poor past obstetric history {one or more previous period, commencing at birth and ending 28 completed days
stillbirths and neonatal deaths, one or more premature live- after birth. Neonatal mortality rate is the number of neonatal
born infants); (8) Malnutrition and severe anaemia; and deaths in a given year per 1000 live births in that year.
{9) Multiple pregnancy. The neonatal mortality rate is tabulated as :
For further details see page 569 under factors affecting Number of deaths of children under
infant mortality. 28 days of age in a year
x 1000
Causes of perinatal mortality Total live births in the same year
About two-thirds of all perinatal deaths occur among Causes of neonatal mortality
infants with less than 2500 g birth weight. The causes involve
one or more complications in the mother during pregnancy The main causes of neonatal death globally are as shown
in Fig 13.
or labour, in the placenta or in the foetus or neonate.
No woman should die giving life. Nor should any mother
Main causes : The main causes of death are intrauterine
and birth asphyxia, low birth weight, birth trauma, and endure pregnancy and childbirth, only to go through the
agony of having her child born dead or watching the baby
intrauterine or neonatal infections. The various causes of
die minutes after birth. Yet for countless women around the
perinatal mortality may be grouped as below :
(a) Antenatal causes Preterm birth
lntrapartum-related complications
(1) Maternal diseases : hypertension, cardiovascular complications / 35%
diseases, diabetes, tuberculosis, anaemia 24%
(2) Pelvic diseases : uterine myomas, endometriosis,
ovarian tumours
{3) Anatomical defects uterine anomalies,
incompetent cervix
{4) Endocrine imbalance and inadequate uterine
preparation Tetanus
(5) Blood incompatibilities 2%
(6) Malnutrition
(7) Toxaemias of pregnancy Other
8%
(8) Antepartum haemorrhages
(9) Congenital defects Sepsis
(10) Advanced maternal age 15%
/ Congenital
(b) Intranatal causes Pneumonia abnormalities
5% 10%
{1) Birth injuries
(2) Asphyxia FIG. 13
(3) Prolonged effort time Global distribution of neonatal deaths by cause, 2013
(4) Obstetric complications Source : (82)
NEONATAL MORTALITY RATE
world this scenario remains a tragic reality. The first 28 days Newborn deaths now contribute to about 44 per cent of all
of life - the neonatal period, is the most vulnerable time for deaths in children under five years of age globally, and more
a child's survival. In order to continue to accelerate progress than half of infant mortality. About 1 million babies die
in under-five mortality, focussing on newborns is critical. every year on the day of their birth and close to 2 million die
Neonatal mortality is a measure of intensity with which in the first week of their life. Rates are highest in
"endogenous factors" (e.g., low birth weight, birth injuries) sub-Saharan Africa and Asia. Two-thirds of newborn deaths
affect infant life. The neonatal mortality is directly related to occur in WHO Region of Africa (31 per cent) and South
the birth weight and gestational age. Intrapartum related East Asia (30 per cent). The gap between rich and poor
complications, low birth weight and preterm birth is a causal countries is widening neonatal mortality is now 6.5 times
factor in 60 per cent of neonate deaths. lower in high income countries than in other countries. The
lifetime risk for a woman to lose a newborn baby is now 1 in
Prematurity and congenital anomalies account for about 5 in Africa, compared to 1 in 125 in more developed
60 per cent of newborn deaths, and these often occur in the countries (82).
first week of life. A further quarter of neonatal deaths are
attributable to asphyxia also mainly in the first week of life. India
In the late neonatal period, that is, after the first week,
In India the SRS estimates for the year 2012 is about
deaths attributable to infection (including diarrhoea and
23 per 1000 live births in early-neonatal period (0-7 days),
tetanus) predominate. The importance of tetanus as a cause
with about 25 for rural areas and 12 for urban areas. Table
of neonatal death, however, has diminished sharply due to
19 shows the early neonatal mortality rate and percentage
intensified immunization efforts.
share of early neonatal mortality to infant deaths in the
Neonatal mortality rates of babies born to mothers with country and the major states. Among the bigger states,
no education are nearly twice as high as those of babies · Kerala (4) and Madhya Pradesh and Odisha (29) are the two
born to mothers with secondary education or higher. The extremes. The percentage of early neonatal deaths to the
family's wealth and ruraVurban residence also remain total infant deaths during the year 2012, at the national
powerful determinant of inequities in neonatal mortality. level, has been 33.3, and it varied from 55 in rural areas to
Ending child marriage, reducing adolescent pregnancy and 42.9 in urban areas. In most of the states rural proportion is
extending birth intervals are crucial to reducing the risk of relatively higher than the urban proportion. Among the
newborn mortality. bigger states, the percentage for total-varied from 38.0 in
Direct causes of newborn death vary from region to . Kerala to 62.5 in Karnataka.
region. In general, the proportions of deaths attributed to
prematurity and congenital disorders increase as the TABLE 19
neonatal mortality rate decreases, while the proportions
Early neonatal mortality rates and percentage share of
caused by infections, asphyxia, diarrhoea and tetanus
early neonatal deaths to infant deaths by residence,
decline as care improves. Patterns of low birth weight vary
India and major states, 2012
considerably between countries. Babies with a low birth
weight are especially vulnerable to the hazards of the first
hours and days of life, particularly if they are premature.
Majority of low-birth-weight babies are not actually
premature but have suffered from in utero growth restriction,
usually because of the mother's poor health. These babies
India 23 25 12 53.3 55.0 42.9
too are at increased risk of death.
Andhra Pradesh 22 28 9 54.4 60.6 . 30.0
The main causes of neonatal mortality are intrinsically
Assam 23 25 6 42.3 43.8 18.7
linked to the health of the mother and the care she receives
before, during and immediately after giving birth. Asphyxia Bihar 23 25 8 54.3 56.4 23.3
and birth injuries usually result from poorly managed labour Chhattisgarh 25 25. 23 53.7. 53.1 5.8.7
and delivery, and lack of access to obstetric services. Many Delhi 11 14 10 44.4 39.2 46.0
neonatal infections, such as tetanus and congenital syphilis, Gujarat 21 24 15 55.3 53.2 62.6
can be prevented by care during pregnancy and childbirth.
Haryana 21 24 13 50.3 53.3" 39.3
Inadequate calorie or micronutrient intake also results in
poorer pregnancy outcomes. It has been argued that nearly Himachal Pradesh 20 20 14 55.2 55.2 56.4
three quarters of all neonatal deaths could be prevented if Jammu & Kashmir 24 27 10 62.2 65.4 35.6
women were adequately nourished and received Jharkhand . 23 25 9 59.7 62.6 33.7
appropriate care during pregnancy, childbirth and in the Karnataka 20 24 11 62.5 68.8 44.1
postnatal period.
Kerala 4 5 2 38.0 42.1 19.8
However, neonatal mortality is the most difficult part of Madhya Pradesh 29 31 18 51.7 51.9 49.4
infant mortality to alter, because of the endogenous factors
which are not sensitive to improvements in environmental Maharashtra 14 . 17 9 54.1 55.6 50.0
conditions. Neonatal mortality is greater in boys throughout Odisha 29 30 21 54.8 54.9 54.0
the world, because newborn boys are biologically more Punjab 13 12 14 45.9 40.2 58.9
fragile than girls. Rajasthan 27 31 13 55.6 57.6 42.0
Tamil Nadu 11 13 8 50.7 54.0 44.7
Incidence
Uttar Pradesh 28 31 15 53.1 55.1 38.5
Each year, about 2.8 million newborns die before they
West Bengal 17 18 12 . 51.8 52.5 48.1
are 4 weeks old and half of them die in their first 24 hours.
98 per cent of these deaths occur in developing countries. Source : (78)
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Table 20 shows the neonatal mortality rate in the country Pre term
and the percentage of neonatal deaths to infant deaths for 35%
the year 2012, both at the national and state levels. At the
national level, the neonatal mortality rate was 29 and Birth '-....
asphyxia '-..,.
ranged from 16 in urban areas to 33 in rural areas. Among 20%
the bigger states neonatal mortality ranges from 39 each in
Madhya Pradesh and Odisha to 7 in Kerala. The percentage
of neonatal deaths to total infant deaths was 68.5 per cent at
the national level and varied from 56.8 per cent in urban Other
areas to 70.4 per cent in rural areas. Among the bigger states 3%
Jammu & Kashmir (77.2) registered the highest percentage
of neonatal deaths to infant deaths, and the lowest was in
Assam (52.1).
Sepsis
15%
TABLE 20
Neonatal mortality rates and percentage share of neonatal
deaths to infant deaths by residence,
India and major states, 2012 Diarrhoea Pneumonia
23 16%
FIG. 14
Causes of neonatal deaths in India, 2012
Source : (81)
TABLE 21
Priority areas to improve newborn health
Before and during pregnancy • Delayed child~bearing. .
• Well-timed, well-spaced and wanted pregnancies
• · Well-nourished and healthy mother
• Pregnancy free of drug abuse, tobacco and alcohol
• Tetanus and rubella immunization
• Prevention of mother-to-child transmission of HIV
• Female education
During preganancy • Early contact with health systems including ;
- Birth and emergency preparedness
- Early detection and treatment of maternal complications
Monitoring of foetal well-being and timely interventions for foetal complications·
- Tetanus immunization ·
- Prevention and treatment of anaemia
Prevention and treatment of infections (malaria, hookworm, syphilis and other STis)
Voluntary HIV cotmselling and testing, and prevention of mother-to-childtransmission of HIV .
• G~~ .. .
• Prevention of violence against women
During and soon after delivery • Safe and clean delivery by skilled attendant
• Early detection and prompt management of delivery and foetal complications
• Emergency obstetric care for maternal and foetalconditions
·• Newborn resuscitation
• Newborn care ensuring warmth and cleanliness
• Newborn cord, eye and skin care
• Early initiation of exclusive breast-feeding
• Early detection and treatment of complications ofthe newborn
• Special care for infants born too early or too small and/or. complications
• Prevention and control of infections ·
• Prevention of mother-to-child transmission of HIV
• Information and counselling on home care, danger signs and care seeking
During the first month of life • Early post-natal contact
• Protection, promotion and support of exclusive breast feeding
• · Prompt detection and management of diseases in newborn infant
• Immunization
• Protection of girl child
Source: (83)
The SRS estimates for post-neonatal mortality rate in INFANT MORTALITY RATE
India for the year 2012 is about 13 per 1000 live births for
the whole country, and 14 for rural areas and 12 for the Infant mortality rate (!MR) is defined as "the ratio of
urban areas. The state-wise break-up is shown in Table 22. infant deaths registered in a given year to the total number
of live births registered in the same year; usually expressed
TABLE 22 as a rate per 1000 live births" (86). It is given by the
SRS estimates of post neonatal mortality in India, 2012 formula:
TABLE 23. In the industrial world, the dominant factor in the decline
Infant mortality rate in selected countries (1990-2013) of infant mortality was economic and social progress (i.e.,
quality of life), with medical services playing secondary role.
On the other hand, in most of the developing countries, this
India 88 41 pattern has been almost turned upside down. That is,
Sri Lanka 18 8 medical services (e.g., mass control of disease,
Bangladesh 100 33 immunization, antibiotics and insecticides) have made the
Pakistan 106 69 major impact, with social and economic progress taking the
Thailand 30 11 supporting role. Therefore, infant mortality rates are
Myanmar 78 40 reluctant to fall below 100 per 1000 live births in many
China 42 11 developing countries. It is now conceded that only socio-
Nepal 99 32 economic development can re-accelerate the progress and
New Zealand 9 5 lead to further significant fall in infant deaths.
USA 9 6
UK 8 4 Infant mortality in India
Japan 5 2
World 63 34 India is still among high infant mortality rate countries
(41 in the year 2012). !MR has declined slowly from 204
1990 is the baseline for MDGs during 1911-15, to 129 per 1000 live births in 1970 and
Source : (82) remained static at around 127 for many years, and then
declined a bit once again to 114 in 1980 and coming down to
There are wide variations between countries or regions in 41 in the year 2012. Despite this significant decline, the rates
the levels of infant mortality. The world average of !MR for are very high as compared to developed countries (Table 23)
2013 has been estimated at about 34 per 1000 live births. which are now mostly in the range of 3-7 per 1000 live births.
However, IMR varies from 5 per 1000 live births in the India is a vast country with widely differing populations.
developed countries to 61 per 1000 live births in the sub- The all-India rate masks variations that exist among sub-
saharan countries. The average in the south asian countries groups of the population. An examination of state-wise !MR
was 43 per 1000 live births. Although infant mortality shows a vast regional variation, with Madhya Pradesh having
declined significantly, the drop was greatest for the !MR of 56 and Kerala as low as 12 per thousand live births
developed countries and lowest for least developed during the year 2012. Among the larger States Kerala,
countries. The developed world had a much greater Maharashtra, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, West Bengal, Andhra
reduction in infant mortality compared to child mortality, Pradesh, Haryana, Karnataka, Gujarat, Himachal pradesh,
while in the developing world the situation was reverse (82). and Jharkhand have achieved !MR below the national
The IMRs in industrialized countries were around 200 or average of 42. Within each state there is rural urban variation.
even more some 150 years ago. Even at the beginning of the A critical infant mortality belt runs through Odisha, Madhya
20th century. USA, UK, Japan, France, etc, had rates above Pradesh, Assam, Uttar Pradesh, and Rajasthan; all these states
140 per 1000 live births. Within 50 years (1950) a have infant mortality rates above the national average.
spectacular fall in the rate was observed in all developed Table 24 shows infant mortality rate in major states of
countries. By 1980s, most developed countries achieved India.
IMR rates below 10 per 1000 live births. Demographers
opine that in most developed countries, further decline in TABLE 24
IMRs would be difficult to achieve without some Infant mortality in major states of India (2012)
revolutionary advances in perinatology. Any further
reduction in infant mortality in developed countries will State.
depend upon preventing one of its principal causes, namely, Andhra Pradesh 46. 30 41
congenital abnormalities. Assam 58. 33 55
In general, the infant mortality rates reflect the socio- Bihar 44. 34 43
economic development of a country. Deaths during the first Chhattisgarh 48 39 4'7
four weeks are largely preventable by good health care. Delhi 36 23 25
Much of the variations between developed and developing Gujarat 45 24 38
world in death among newborn can be explained by Haryana 46 33 42'
differences in antenatal care - about half of all pregnant Himachal Pradesh 37 25 36
women in the least developed countries have no antenatal Jammu & Kashmir 41 28 28
care, and 7 out of 10 babies are born without the help of a Jharkhand 39 27 38
trained birth attendant. The other major factors being Karnataka 36 25 32
malnutrition and high parity of the mother, low birth weight Ker ala 13 9 12
of the baby, and congenital anomalies. Madhya Pradesh 60 37 56
The decline in infant mortality has been attributed to : Maharashtra 30 17 25
(a) improved obstetric and perinatal care, e.g., availability of Odisha 55 39 53
oxygen, foetal monitoring during labour, improved Punjab 30 24 29
techniques for the induction of labour (b) improvement in the Rajasthan 54 31 49
quality of life, that is, economic and social progress (c) better TamilNadu 24 18 21
control of communicable diseases, e.g., immunization and Uttar Pradesh 56 39 53.
oral rehydration (d) advances in chemotherapy, antibiotics West Bengal 33 26 $2..•
and insecticides (e) better nutrition, e.g., emphasis on breast All India 46 2.8 42··.
feeding, and (f) family planning, e.g., birth spacing. Source : (78)
INFANT MORTALITY RATE
0% 25%
AIDS, 2% Measles, 2%
Globally, nearly half of all deaths among children under-5 are attributable to undernutrition
FIG. 15
Global distribution of deaths among children under-5 by cause, 2013
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
substantial differences in the distribution of causes of death. preventable diseases decreased, pneumonia came to the
Approximately 90% of all malaria and HIV/AIDS deaths in forefront as a cause of death, and in the 1980s programmes
children, more than. 50% of measles deaths and about 40% were developed around simplified diagnostic and treatment
of pneumonia and diarrhoeal deaths are in the African techniques. In the meantime, promotion of breast-feeding
Region. On the other hand, deaths from injuries and non- continued, backed by international initiative and countries
communicable diseases other than congenital anomalies, widely implemented the Baby-Friendly Hospitals initiative.
account for 20-30% of under~five deaths in the region of The Integrated Management of Childhood Illness (IMC!)
the Americas and in the European and Western Pacific strategy addresses the principal causes of child mortality i.e.
Regions (96). diarrhoeal disease, acute respiratory infection, measles,
The steady improvement in under-five survival is malaria and underlying malnutrition. Several countries like
explained by a combination of advances. They include India have added neonatal care in the national adaptations.
developments in science and techonology (for example, oral It combines effective interventions for preventing death and
rehydration salts that treat diarrhoeal dehydration and for improving healthy growth and development, e.g., oral
insecticide-treated mosquito nets for malaria prevention), rehydration therapy for diarrhoea; antibiotics for sepsis,
improved health-seeking behaviours (such as women's pneumonia and ear infection, antimalarials and insecticide-
increasing use of antenatal care and skilled providers for treated bed-nets; vitamin A, treatment of anaemia, promotion
care around the time of birth), improved sanitation and of breast-feeding and complementary feeding for healthy
improved coverage of effective interventions to prevent or nutrition and for recovery from illness; and immunization.
treat the most important causes of child mortality. Each one Some countries have included guidelines to treat children
of these advances is due to the political will of committed with HIV/AIDS, others for dengue fever, wheezing or sore
governments and the expansion of innovative partnerships throat, or for the follow-up of healthy children.
involving civil society and the public and private sectors. More recently, Every Newborn Action Plan proposes five
Taken together, these efforts are reducing the number of strategic objectives for achieving two clear and measurable
young lives claimed by the leading causes of under-five
targets : (1) Ending preventable newborn deaths - By 2035,
mortality: pneumonia, diarrhoea, malaria, measles and
all countries reach a national target of 10 or fewer newborn
AIDS. As a result 2.2 million fewer children died from these
deaths per 1000 live births and continue to reduce death
five diseases in 2013.
and disability; and (2) Ending preventable stillbirths By
The Expanded Programme on Immunization started in 2035, all countries reach the target of 10 or fewer stillbirths
1974 and widened range of vaccines routinely provided, per 1000 total births and continue to narrow gaps in equity.
from smallpox, BCG and DPT to include polio and measles Developed under WHO and UNICEF, the ENAP
and more recently hepatitis B. It set-out to increase coverage recommends the integrated delivery of high-impact
in line with the international commitment to achieve the interventions across the full continuum of maternal and
universal child immunization goal of 80 per cent coverage in newborn care, including care during labour, newborn care
every country. during the first week of life and care of small and sick
As mortality from diarrhoeal diseases and vaccine newborns. Fig. 16 shows the package of interventions.
Referral and Reproductive health, Management of Esse~tial newborn care H~spital care
tertiary level ·including family pregnancy Skilled care at birth Emergency care of small . ··of childhood
facility planning complications and. sick newborns illness
First and ·. Skilled care at birth Essential newborn care Prevention and
Reproductive health,
secondary including family Pregnancy care Basic emergency Postnatal visits management
level facility .. planning obstetric and Care of small and sick of childhood
newborn care newborns illness
FIG. 16
Packages of interventions in the continuum of care
UNDER-5 MORTALITY RATE
Pneumonia Pneumonia
Intrapartum-related
11% \ I 2% complications, including
birth asphyxia 11 %
Other group 1
conditions
14% Neonatal sepsis 8%
Congenital anomalies 5%
Neonatal tetanus 1%
Meningitis 2% ---..
Malaria 1 %
· Measles3%
/ Other 5%
Diarrhoea
10%
Prematurity
24%
FIG. 17
Causes of death among children under 5 years, India, 2013
Source : (82)
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
management of childhood diarrhoea during the The difference in the survival · rates of· children in
NRHM period has been slow and of variable quality across developed and developing countries is a grim pointer to the
states (98). Third World's need for preventive services. Through breast-
To pursue the goals of NPP, the Government of India feeding, adequate nutrition, clean water, immunization
constituted a National Technical Committee on Child programmes, oral rehydration therapy and birth spacing, a
Health in June 2000. New initiatives taken on the basis of virtual revolution in child survival could be achieved. The
this are (68) : impact would be dramatic in humanitarian and fertility
terms.
Launch of Immunization Strengthening Project;
Organization of RCH camps, health "melas" and
RCH outreach scheme to reach disadvantageous INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT OF
segments of the population; CHILDHOOD ILLNESS (IMCI)
Launch of Hepatitis B vaccine in the The notion of integration has a long history. Integration is
immunization programme; supposed to tackle the need for complementarity of different
Operationalization of newborn care facilities in independent services and administrative structures, so as to
identified weak districts; better achieve common goals. In 1950s, the goals were
Operations research by ICMR for provision of defined in terms of outcome, in 1960s of process and in the
home-based neonatal care through community- 1990s of economic impact. Integration has different
level providers; meanings at different levels. At the patient level it means
Policy for exclusive breast-feeding upto 6 months case management. At the point of delivery it means that
of age; multiple interventions are provided through one delivery
Preparation and approval of concept note on channel, e.g., where vaccination is used as an opportunity to
development of community based mid-wives; provide vitamin A to the child, boosting efficiency and
Implementation of Dai training to provide key coverage. At the system level integration means bringing
messages for newborn health in 166 districts; and together management and support function of different sub-
Adaptation of !MCI to incorporte newborn issues programmes and ensuring complimentarity between
and development of IMNCI. different levels of care. !MCI is now the only child health
strategy that aims for improved integration at these three
The Government of India established an !MCI Adaptation levels simultaneously. More than just adding more
Committee that has led the development of Integrated programmes to a single delivery channel, it has sought to
Management of Newborn and Childhood Illnesses (IMNCI). transform the way the health system looks at the child care.
Separate tools and guidelines have been produced that
focus on newborn issues; these are used to train field staff Most sick children present with signs and symptoms
and for supervision and monitoring purposes. related to more than one conditions. This overlap means
that a single diagnosis may not be possible or appropriate,
CHILD SURVIVAL INDEX and that treatment may be complicated by the need to
combine therapy for several conditions. Surveys of the
The basic measure of infant and child survival is the management of sick children at these facilities reveal that
Under-5 mortality (number of deaths under the age of many children are not properly assessed and treated and
5 years, per 1000 live births). A child survival rate per 1000 that their parents are poorly advised. Providing quality care
births can be simply calculated by subtracting the Under-5 to sick children in these conditions is a serious challenge. In
mortality rate from 1000. Dividing this figure by ten response to these challenge, WHO and UNICEF developed a
shows the percentage of those who survive to the age of strategy known as !MCI. The strategy combines improved
5 years (99). management of childhood illness with aspects of nutrition,
1000 - under-5 mortality rate immunization, and other important disease prevention and
Child survival rate = health promotion elements. The objectives are to reduce
10 deaths and the frequency and severity of illness and
The following table (Table 30) shows the child survival disability and to contribute to improved growth and
rates of some countries. development.
TABLE 30
The strategy includes three main components :
Child survival rates of some countries • Improvements in the case-management skills of
during 1990 and 2013 health staff through the provision of locally
adapted guidelines on !MCI and through activities
Country to promote their use.
• Improvements in the health system required for
India 87.4 94.7
effective management of childhood illness.
Sri Lanka 97.9 99.0
• Improvements in family and community practices.
Bangladesh 85.6 95.9
Nepal 85.8 96.0 The core of the IMC! strategy is integrated case
Pakistan 86:1 91~4
management of the most common childhood problems, with
a focus on the most important causes of death i.e.
China 94.6 98.7
diarrhoea, ARI, malaria, measles and malnutrition. A guided
UK 99.1 99.5 process of adaptation ensures that the guidelines, and the
USA 98.4 99.3 learning materials that go with them, reflect the
Japan 99.4 99.7 epidemiology within a country and are tailored to fit the
Singapore 99.2 99.7 needs, resources and capacity of a country's health system.
The clinical guidelines, which are based on expert clinical Although AIDS is not addressed specifically, the case
opinion and research results, are designed for the management guidelines address the most common reasons
management of sick children aged 1 week up to 5 years. children with HIV seek care : diarrhoea and respiratory
They promote evidence-based assessment and infections. When a child, who is believed to have HIV,
management, using a syndromic approach that supports the presents with any of these common illnesses, he or she can
rational, effective and affordable use of drugs. They include be treated the same way as any child presenting with an
methods for assessing signs that indicate severe disease; illness. If a child's illness does not respond to the standard
assessing a child's nutrition, immunization, and feeding; treatments described or if a child becomes severely
teaching parents how to care for a child at home; counselling malnourished, or returns to the clinic repeatedly, the child is
parents to solve feeding problems; and advising parents referred to a hospital for special care.
about when to return to a health facility.The guidelines also Case management can only be effective to the extent that
include recommendations for checking the parent's families bring their sick children to a trained health worker
understanding of the advice given and for showing them for care in a timely way. If a family waits to bring a child to a
how to administer the first dose of treatment. clinic until the child is extremely sick, or takes the child to an
When assessing a sick child, a combination of individual untrained provider, the child is more likely to die from the
signs leads to one or more classifications, rather than to a illness. Therefore, teaching families when to seek care for a
diagnosis. !MCI classifications are action oriented and allow sick child is an important part of the case management
a health care provider to determine if a child should be process.
urgently referred to another health facility, if the child can be The case management process is presented on two
treated at the first-level facility (e.g. with oral antibiotic, different sets of charts : one for children age 2 months up to
antimalarial, ORS, etc.) or if the child can be safely managed five years, and one for children age 1 week up to 2 months.
at home. Annexure W at the end of this chapter shows the flowchart
The complete IMCI case management process involves about the IMNCI guidelines for the management of various
the following elements (100) : conditions of childhood.
a. Assess a child by checking first for danger signs (or The Indian version of !MCI is known as IMNCI
possible bacterial infection in a young infant), asking (Integrated Management of Neonatal and Childhood Illness}
questions about common conditions, examining the as it includes the first 7 days of age in the programme.
child, and checking nutrition and immunization status. Please refer to page 459 chapter 7 for further details.
Assessment includes checking the child for other health
problems. CONGENITAL MALFORMATIONS
b. Classify a child's illnesses using a colour-coded triage
system. Because many children have more than one Definitions
condition, each illness is classified according to whether Congenital disorders are defined as "those diseases that
it requires : are substantially determined before or during birth and
urgent pre-referral treatment and referral (pink}, or which are in principle recognizable in early life" (85). Some
- specific medical treatment and advice (yellow}, or are obvious at birth like, cleft palate; some are obvious in
early life like congenital dislocation of hip which may escape
- simple advice on home management (green). detection until walking should commence; and some may
c. After classifying all conditions, identify specific not become apparent until much later in life, like patent
treatments for the child. If a child requires urgent ductus arteriosus which may escape diagnosis until school
referral, give essential treatment before the patient is age or even later. Internal defects, when they are not lethal,
transferred. If a child needs treatment at home, develop may go unrecognized. In addition to the list of late diagnoses
an integrated treatment plan for the child and give the are a host of inborn errors of metabolism like PKU,
first dose of drugs in the clinic. If a child should be Tay-Sachs disease, galactosaemia, and mental retardation.
immunized, give immunization. Some defects are classified as major which may require
d. Provide practical treatment instructions, including surgical intervention, and some are classified as minor that
teaching the caretaker how to give oral drugs, how to have no functional implications like skin tags in front of the
feed and give fluids during illness, and how to treat local ear. Thus a broad definition of congenital malformation
infections at home. Ask the caretaker to return for follow- includes not only anatomical defects but also molecular and
up on a specific date, and teach her how to recognize cellular abnormalities present at birth (101). A WHO
signs that indicate the child should return immediately to document in 1972, however, held that the term congenital
the health facility. malformation should be confined to structural defects at
birth, and the term congenital anomaly being used to
e. Assess feeding, including assessment of breast-feeding include all biochemical, structural and functional disorders
practices, and counsel to solve any feeding problems present at birth (84). Thus the basic difficulty in the study of
found. Then counsel the mother about her own health. congenital defects is the actual definition of the term without
f. When a child is brought back to the clinic as requested, which comparisons between studies are difficult to make.
give follow-up care and, if necessary, reassess the
child for new problems. Incidence
The IMC! guidelines address most, but not all, of the Congenital anomalies (also referred as birth defects)
major reasons a sick child is brought to a clinic. A child affect approximately 1 in 33 infants and result in
returning with chronic problems or less common illnesses approximately 3.2 million birth defect-related disabilities
may require special care. The guidelines do not describe the every year. An estimated 270,000 newborns die during the
management of trauma or other acute emergenceis due to first 28 days of life every year from congenital anomalies.
accidents or injuries. Congenital anomalies may result in long-term disability,
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
which may have significant impacts on individuals, families, congenital abnormalities: (103). (1) By discouraging further
health-care systems and societies. The most common serious reproduction after the birth of a malformed child; after such
congenital disorders are heart defect, neural tube defects a birth, the frequency of malformations in subsequent
and Down syndrome. Congenital anomalies may have a pregnancies is increased by about 10 times; (2) The
genetic, infectious or environmental origin; although in most avoidance of pregnancy in circumstances where
of the cases it is difficult identify their cause (102). malformations are likely to occur, e.g., advanced maternal
age and Down's syndrome; (3) the identification and
Causes removal of teratogens such as certain drugs (e.g.,
The aetiology of most congenital anomalies is poorly thalidomide, steroid hormones, folate antagonists,
understood; both genetic and environmental factors have anti-convulsants); infective agents (e.g., rubella,
been implicated. They include : cytomegalovirus, herpes simplex virus, varicella zoster virus,
Toxoplasma gondii); and physical agents such as X-rays and
1. GENETIC FACTORS : The congenital disorders with irradiation. Immunization against rubella is now routine in
genetic aetiology are : (a) Chromosomal abnormalities : The some countries which is bound to lead to some reduction in
chromosome is either missing or in excess. The examples congenital abnormalities. A largely untapped preventive
include Down's syndrome, Klinefelter's syndrome and measure is the avoidance of drugs in pregnancy except
Turner's syndrome. (b) Inborn errors of metabolism : These where they are absolutely necessary (104).
include PKU, Tay-Sachs disease and galactosaemia
(c) Others Other genetically inherited disorders, Congenital' malformations may be regarded as one form
presumably due to single gene defects, are much more of reproductive failure. The most unfavourable
common than conditions with demonstrable chromosomal environmental and genetic factors result in sterility, and the
abnormalities. Single gene disorders may be dominant (e.g., favourable factors lead to normal reproduction. Between
Huntington's chorea), recessive (e.g., thalassaemia, sickle these extremes there may be abortions, stillbirths, premature
cell disease) or sex-linked disorders (e.g., haemophilia) births or neonatal deaths. Malformation represent a relative
(d) Those with probable or possible genetic aetiology : This reproductive "success" when compared with sterility or early
applies to congenital dislocation of hip, club foot and neural abortion (105). Penrose (1961) stressed that major advances
tube defects. in the prevention of malformations must be achieved by
attention to environmental factors rather than by attempting
2. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS : These include intra- to improve heredity. It is more within reach than genetic
uterine Infections (e.g., rubella, cytomegalovirus, control (106).
toxoplasmosis, syphilis), Drugs (e.g., thalidomide,
stilboestrol, anti-convulsants, tobacco, high dose of vitamin A SCHOOL HEALTH SERVICE
during early pregnancy, alcohol, anaesthetics, etc.), Maternal
diseases complicated by pregnancy (e.g., diabetes, cardiac School health is an important branch of community
failure), Irradiation, and Dietary factors (e.g., folic acid health. According to modern concepts, school health service
deficiency). is an economical and powerful means of raising community
health, and more important, in future generations. The
Risk factors school health service is a personal health service. It has
The factors significantly associated with the occurrence of developed during the past 70 years from the narrower
congenital malformations are : (a) Maternal age: Advanced concept of medical examination of children to the present-
maternal age at conception is a recognized risk factor. The day broader concept of comprehensive care of the health
overall risk of giving birth to an infant with Down's syndrome and well-being of children throughout the school years.
is 1 : 800. The risk rises sharply with age; it is 1 : 67 for those
aged 40-45. (b) Consanguinity: In consanguinous marriages Historical development
(e.g., first-cousin and uncle-niece marriages), there is a The beginning of School Health Service in India dates
relatively high incidence of mental retardation and back to 1909, when for the first time medical examination of
congenital malformations. school children was carried out in Baroda city. The Bhore
Committee (1946) (107) reported that School Health
Prenatal diagnosis Services were practically non-existent in India, and where
It is now possible to detect certain congenital anomalies they existed, they were in an under-developed state. In
in utero using the following techniques : (a) Alpha 1953, the Secondary Education Committee emphasized the
fetoprotein : Neural tube defects can be detected by need for medical examination of pupils and school feeding
measurement of a specific protein of foetal origin, called programmes. In 1960, the Government of India constituted
alpha fetoprotein in maternal blood and in amniotic fluid a School Health Committee to assess the standards of health
during pregnancy. (b) Ultrasound : This can be used to and nutrition of school children and suggest ways and
visualize the foetus and detect many abnormalities of the means to improve them. The Committee submitted its
foetus. (c) Amniocentesis : This test is possible only in the report in 1961, which contains many useful
second trimester (i.e., after the completion of 12 weeks). It recommendations (108). During the Five Year Plans, many
can detect many abnormalities (e.g., Down's syndrome, State Governments have provided for school health, and
Neural tube defects). (d) Chorionic villi sampling : This school feeding programmes. Inspite of these efforts to
new technique allows prenatal diagnosis at 9 to 11 weeks of improve school health, it must be stated that in India, as in
pregnancy. By this test, the chromosome status can be easily other developing countries, the school health services
determined. Prenatal diagnosis of congenital abnormalities provided are hardly more than a token service because of
offers the parents the option of therapeutic abortion. shortage of resources and insufficient facilities.
PREVENTION OF CONGENITAL DEFORMITIES HEALTH PROBLEMS OF THE SCHOOL CHILD
There are 3 main approaches to the reduction of Any discussion of a school health service must be based
SCHOOL HEALTH SERVICE
on the local health problems of the school child, the culture appraisal. (b) School Personnel : Medical examination
of the community and the available resources in terms of should be given to teachers and other school personnel as
money, material and manpower. While the health problems they form part of the environment to which the child is
of school children vary from one place to another, surveys exposed. (c) Daily Morning Inspection : The teacher is in a
carried out in India indicate that the main emphasis will fall unique position to carry out the "daily inspection", as he is
in the following categories : (1) malnutrition (2) infectious familiar with the children and can detect changes in the
diseases (3) intestinal parasites (4) diseases of skin, eye and child's appearance or behaviour that suggest illness or
ear; and (5) dental caries. improper growth and development. The following clues will
help the school teacher in suspecting children who need
OBJECTIVES OF SCHOOL HEALTH SERVICE medical attention: (1) unusually flushed face (2) any rash or
The objectives of the programme of a school health spots (3) symptoms of acute cold (4) coughing and sneezing
service are as follows (109, 110) : (5) sore throat (6) rigid neck (7) nausea and vomiting (8) red
or watery eyes (9) headache (10) chills or fever
1. the promotion of positive health (11) listlessness or sleepiness (12) disinclination to play
2. the prevention of diseases (13) diarrhoea (14) pains in the body (15) skin conditions
3. early diagnosis, treatment and follow-up of"defects like scabies and ringworm (16) pediculosis (111). Children
showing any such signs or symptoms should be referred to
4. awakening health consciousness in children the school medical officer. Teacher observation of school
5. the provision of healthful environment. children is of particular importance in India because of the
limited number of trained personnel for school health work.
Aspects of School Health Service For this work, the teachers should be adequately trained
The tasks of a school health service are manifold, and during Teacher Training Courses and subsequently by short
vary according to local priorities. Where resources are In-service Training Courses.
plentiful, special school health services may be developed.
Some aspects of a school health service are as follows : 2. Remedial measures and follow-up
1. Health appraisal of school children and school Medical examinations are not an end in themselves; they
personnel should be followed by appropriate treatment and follow-up.
Special clinics should be conducted exclusively for school
2. Remedial measures and follow-up children at the primary health centres in the rural areas, and
3. Prevention of communicable diseases in one of the selected schools or dispensaries for a group of
4. Healthful school environment about 5,000 children in the urban areas (110). The clinic
days and time should be intimated to all the concerned
5. Nutritional services schools. Considering the high prevalence of dental, eye, ear,
6. First-aid and emergency care nose and throat defects in the school children in India,
7. Mental health special clinics should be secured or provided for the
exclusive use of school children for examination and
8. Dental health treatment of such defects. In the big cities, the required
9. Eye health number of specialists should be employed in the School
10. Health education Health Service. There should be provision for beds in the
existing referral hospitals for the children to be admitted for
11. Education of handicapped children
investigation and treatment as and when required.
12. Proper maintenance and use of school health records.
3. Prevention of communicable diseases
1. Health appraisal Communicable diseases control through immunization is
The health appraisal should cover not only the students the most emphasized school health service function. A well
but also the teachers and other school personnel. Health planned immunization programme should be drawn up
appraisal consists of periodic medical examinations and against the common communicable diseases.
observation of children by the class teacher. (a) Periodic A record of all immunizations should be maintained as
Medical Examination : The school health committee (1961) part of the school health records. When the child leaves
in India recommended medical examination of children at school, the health record should accompany him.
the time of entry and thereafter every 4 years (108). In big
cities, where facilities for medical examination are available, 4. Healthful school environment
this could be more frequent. The initial examination should
be thorough and unhastened and should include a careful The school building, site and equipment are part of the
history and physical examination of the child, with tests for environment in which the child grows and develops.
vision, hearing and speech. A routine examination of blood A healthful school environment therefore is necessary for the
and urine should be carried out. Clinical examination for best emotional, social and personal health of the pupils.
nutritional deficiency, and examination of faeces for Schools should also serve as demonstration centres of good
intestinal parasitosis are particularly important in India. sanitation to the community. The following minimum
Tuberculin testing or mass screening should not be withheld. standards for sanitation of the school and its environs have
The parents should be persuaded to be present at these been suggested in India (109, 110, 112).
examinations. The teacher should help in the medical (1) Location : The school should normally be centrally
inspection by recording the medical history, regular situated with proper approach roads and at a fair distance
(quarterly) recording of height and weight, annual testing of from busy places and roads, cinema houses, factories,
vision, and preparing children for the medical examination railway tracks and market places. The school premises
by helping them understand the "how" and "why" of health should be properly fenced and kept free from all hazards.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
(2) Site : The site should be on suitable high land, and not provided by the UNICEF should be utilized in developing
subject to inundation or dampness and can be properly school gardens. The produce may be utilized in the school
drained. The School Health Committee {1961) had feeding programmes as well as for nutrition education.
recommended that 10 acres of land be provided for higher · Specific Nutrients : Advances in the knowledge of
elementary schools and 5 acres for primary schools with an nutrition have revealed that specific nutrients may be
additional one acre of land per 100 students. In congested necessary for the prevention of some nutrient disorders.
areas, the nearest public park or playground should be made Dental caries, endemic goitre, nightblindness, protein
available to the students. {3) Structure : Nursery and malnutrition, anaemias and a host of other nutrient
secondary schools, as far as possible, be single storied. disorders are eminently preventable. Use of specific
Exterior walls should have a minimum thickness of nutrients is indicated where such nutrient disorders are
10 inches and should be heat resistant. (4) Classroom : problems in a community.
Verandhas should be attached to classrooms. No classroom
should accommodate more than 40 students. Per capita 6. First-aid and emergency care
space for students in a classroom should not be less than
10 sq. ft. (5) Furniture : Furniture should suit the age group The responsibility of giving first-aid and emergency care
of students. It is desirable to provide single desks and chairs. to pupils who become sick or injured on school premises
Desks should be of "minus" type. Chairs should be provided rests with the teacher and therefore all teachers should
with proper back-rests, with facilities for desk-work. receive adequate training during "Teacher Training
(6) Doors and windows: The windows should be broad with Programmes" or "In-service Training programmes" to
the bottom sill, at a height of 2'-6" from the floor level; prepare them to carry out this obligation. The emergencies
combined door and window area should be at least 25 per commonly met within schools are (a) accidents leading to
cent of the floor space; windows should be placed on minor or serious injuries, and {b) medical emergencies such
different walls for cross-ventilation; the ventilators should as gastroenteritis, colic, epileptic fits, fainting, etc. In every
not be less than 2 per cent of the floor area. (7) Colour : school a fully equipped First-Aid-Post should be provided as
Inside colour of the classroom should be white and should per regulations of St. John Ambulance Association of India.
be periodically white-washed. (8) Lighting : Classrooms
should have sufficient natural light, preferably from the left, 7. Mental health
and should not be from the front. (9) Water supply : There The mental health of the child affects his physical health
should be an independent source of safe and potable water and the learning process. Juvenile delinquency,
supply, which should be continuous, and distributed from maladjustment and drug addiction are becoming problems
the taps. (10) Eating facilities : Vendors other than those among school children. The school is the most strategic
approved by the school authorities should not be allowed place for shaping the child's behaviour and promoting
inside school premises; there should be a separate room mental health. The school teacher has both a positive and
provided for mid-day meals. (11) Lavatory : Privies and preventive role he should be concerned with helping all
urinals should be provided one urinal for 60 students and children attain mental health, so that they may develop into
one latrine for 100 students. Arrangements should be mature, responsible and well adjusted adults. The school
separately made for boys and girls. routine should be so planned that there is enough relaxation
between periods of intense work, and every effort should be
5. Nutritional services made to relieve the tedium of the class room. No distinction
A child who is physically weak will be mentally weak, and should be made between race, religion, caste or community;
cannot be expected to take full advantage of schooling. The between the rich and poor; and between the clever and the
diet of the school child should, therefore receive first dull. It is now increasingly realized that there is a great need
attention. The diet should contain all the nutrients in proper for vocational counsellors and psychologists in schools for
proportion, adequate for the maintenance of optimum guiding the children into careers for which they are suited.
health. Studies in India have shown that nutritional
disorders are widely prevalent among school children, 8. Dental health
particularly deficiencies relating to proteins; vitamins A, C, Children frequently suffer from dental diseases and
thiamine and riboflavin, calcium and iron. defects. Dental caries and periodontal disease are the two
Mid-day School Meal : In order to combat malnutrition common dental diseases in India. A school health
and improve the health of school children, it is now an programme should have provision for dental examination,
accepted procedure in all advanced countries to provide a at least once a year. In the developed countries, dental
good nourishing meal to school children. The School Health hygienists are employed in schools to assist the school
Committee (1961) recommended that school children dentist with the examination of the teeth. They make
should be assured of at least one nourishing meal (113). preliminary inspection of the teeth and do prophylactic
Those who can afford it may bring their lunch packets from cleansing which is of great value in preventing gum troubles
home, and during lunch hours take their meals in school. and in improving personal appearance. They take part in
Otherwise, schools should have some arrangement for the teaching of dental hygiene as they work with the
providing mid-day meals through their own cafeteria on a children.
'no profit no loss' basis. In view of the limited finances in
India, it is recommended that the school meal should 9. Eye health services
provide at least one-third of the daily calorie requirement Schools should be responsible for the early detection of
and about half of daily protein requirement of the child. refractive errors, treatment of squint and amblyopia, and
Applied Nutrition Programme : UNICEF is assisting in the detection and treatment of eye infections such as trachoma.
implementation of the Applied Nutrition Programme in the Administration of vitamin A to children at risk, has shown
form of implements, seeds, manure and water supply gratifying results. In other words, basic eye health services
equipment. Wherever land is available, the facilities should be provided in schools.
SCHOOL HEALTH SERVICE
A handicap is defined as a disadvantage for a given syndrome, PKU, Tay-Sach disease, galactosaemia,
individual, resulting from an impairment or a disability, that microcephaly, congenital hypothyroidism involving both
limits or prevents the fulfilment of a role that is normal single and multiple gene action and chromosomal
(depending on age, sex, and social and cultural practice) for abnormalities. (b) Antenatal factors : These comprise neural
that individual. The term handicap thus reflects interaction tube defects, Rh incompatibility, certain infections (e.g.,
with and adaptation to the individual's surroundings. rubella, cytomegalovirus, toxoplasmosis, syphilis), drugs
Handicap may be intrinsic or extrinsic. For example, and irradiation. (c) Perinatal factors : These include birth
blindness is an intrinsic handicap, and loss of parents is an injuries, hypoxia and cerebral palsy. (d) Postnatal factors :
extrinsic handicap. One handicap can give rise to further Head injuries, accidents, encephalitis, physical and chemical
handicaps and the· terms "primary" and "secondary" are agents such as lead and mercury poisoning may result in
used to denote this relationship. Blindness is a primary mental retardation. (e) Miscellaneous Maternal
handicap; it can lead to poverty, which will be secondary malnutrition, protein-energy malnutrition, iodine deficiency
handicap. (endemic goitre), consanguineous marriages, pregnancy
after the age of 40 (late marriages) are all known to be
Extent of the problem associated with mental retardation.
Nearly 83 million of the world's population are estimated Categories of mental retardation
to be mentally retarded, with 41 million having long-term or
permanent disability. It ranks fourth in the list of leading Psychologists have used the concept of IQ to classify the
causes of disability. Hearing loss (41 decibels and above) degree of mental retardation. The IQ scores rest on the
over the age of 3 is estimated to affect 42 million people, assumption that intelligence distribution in the general
ranking 3rd in the list. Disability resulting from poliomyelitis public follow the normal or Gaussian curve, with a mean of
has affected about 10 million people (42). It is difficult to 100. The half of the general population achieve scores
state how many people are mentally retarded in India as the above 100, and one half below. The lower 3 per cent or so
census estimates do not cover mental handicap. About of the population achieve scores of 70 or less. They are
16.15 million persons (1.9 per cent of the population) suffer usually considered to be mentally retarded. The WHO gave
from some or the other physical disability in the country. the following classification of mental retardation :
About 3 percent child population in 1-14 years age group is Mild mental retardation IQ 50-70
affected by developmental delays (115).
Moderate mental retardation IQ 35-49
Classification Severe mental retardation IQ 20-34
It is usual to classify handicapped children into the Profound mental retardation IQ under 20
following groups : Children scoring above 70 are no longer described as
1. Physically handicapped mentally handicapped. The number of mild cases far exceed
2. Mentally handicapped the severe and profound cases. English statistics which have
been widely quoted suggest that, among 100 mentally
3. Socially handicapped. handicapped persons, the following proportion will be
found : 70 mild, 20 moderate and 5 severe cases. In other
1. Physically handicapped children
words, a very great majority of cases of mental handicap are
This category includes children who are blind, deaf and of the mild type and potentially capable of being taught to
mute; those with hare-lip, cleft palate, talipes; and the make a fairly adequate social adaptation in appropriate
"crippled" - e.g., resulting from polio, cerebral palsy, circumstances (117).
congenital heart disease, road accidents, burns, injuries, etc.
Severe mental retardation is uncommon. The great
These conditions fall into three broad causative groups :
majority of severely handicapped children remain more or
(a) birth defects (b) infections, and (c) accidents. These are
less dependant throughout life. Mental retardation often
all preventable to a large extent through adequate prenatal,
involves psychiatric disturbances. It has been stressed that
natal, postnatal services, and genetic counselling.
the IQ range suggested must not be applied too rigidly.
2. Mentally handicapped children IQ level is not necessarily constant during the individual's
life span.
Mental handicap is the present term used for mental
retardation. It is a condition of sub-average intellectual 3. Socially handicapped children
function combined with deficits in adaptive behaviour.
A "socially handicapped child" may be defined as a child
Terms which were previously used such as idiot, moron and
whose opportunities for a healthy personality development
imbecile are now discarded. At least 2 per cent of India's
and a full unfolding of potentialities are hampered by certain
population is said to be suffering from some kind of mental
elements in his social environment such as parental
disability (116).
inadequacy, environmental deprivation (i.e. lack of
Causes stimulation of learning process), and emotional
disturbances. Such children would include children who are
Mental handicap has many causes. These may be orphaned either due to death or loss of parents; neglected
genetic, or environmental and include prenatal as well as and destitute children; those who are exploited or
postnatal causes. The possible and earliest time to recognize victimized; and, delinquent children. It may be pointed out
the problem of mental retardation is to look for any delayed that a child who is physically or mentally handicapped also
milestones and development. meets with social handicaps to the extent to which he is
The known causative factors include the following : subject to social rejection or misunderstanding and cannot
(a) Genetic conditions : Down's syndrome, Klinefelter make use of the normal value of social fulfilment.
HANDICAPPED CHILDREN
for developing organizational infrastructure such as class juvenile courts. Comparable statistics are not available in
room/library/hostel in the field of cerebral palsy and mental India to denote the size of the problem, but it is agreed that
retardation. (e) Assistance to voluntary organization for juvenile delinquency is on the increase in India during the
establishment of special schools : For setting up special schools past few decades, due to changes in the cultural pattern of
NGOs receive grants upto 90 per cent. Preference is given for the people, urbanization and industrialization. The
opening schools in new districts and upgradation of existing highest incidence is found in children aged 15 and above.
schools. The incidence among boys is 4 to 5 times more than
On 26th August 1995, Ministry of Social Welfare, Govt. among girls.
of India has introduced a comprehensive Bill in the CAUSES: (1) Biological causes: Certain biological causes
Parliament known as "Persons with disabilities (equal such as hereditary defects, feeble-mindedness, physical
opportunities, protection of right and full participation) Bill defects and glandular imbalance may be at the bottom of
1995. It deals with preventive and promotional aspects of juvenile delinquency. Recent studies indicate that
rehabilitation. chromosome anomaly might be associated with a tendency
In considering the management of the socially for delinquency and crime. A survey of criminal patients in
handicapped child, we must remember that such children Scotland and elsewhere demonstrated such a link - some of
are normal in their needs and development. Their needs the patients showing an extra Y chromosome. The XYY men
should. be identified and met. The children Act, 1960 suffer from severe disturbance of the whole personality (119).
provides for the "care, protection, maintenance, welfare, (2) Social causes : Among the social causes may be
training, education and rehabilitation" of the socially mentioned broken homes, e.g., death of parents, separation
handicapped children. · of parents, step mothers and disturbed home conditions, e.g.,
poverty, alcoholism, parental neglect, ignorance about child
Lastly, we need to strengthen the family. The family is the care, too many children, etc. (3) Other causes : Absence of
most effective bulwark to prevent children from becoming recreation facilities, cheap recreation, sex-thrillers,
socially handicapped. There were times when the urbanization and industrialization, cinemas and television,
handicapped child was considered a liability to the parents slum-dwelling, etc.
and to the society. All over the world, there is an awakening
that handicapped children can and must be helped to make PREVENTIVE MEASURES : (1) Improvement of family
their lives as happy and useful as possible. life : A well adjusted family can stem the tide of delinquency.
Parents should be prepared for parenthood. The needs of
BEHAVIOUR PROBLEMS children should be appreciated and met. (2) Schooling : The
school comes next to home in the community in ordering the
The behaviour problems in children may be classified as behaviour of children. There should be a healthy teacher-
below: pupil relationship. The school teacher can play an important
part by detecting early signs of maladjustment. (3) Social
· (a) Problems antisocial in nature : Stealing, lying, welfare services : These comprise recreation facilities,
gambling, cruelty, sexual offences, destructiveness. parent-counselling, child guidance, educational facilities
(b) Habit disorders : Thumb sucking, nail-biting, bed- and adequate general health services.
wetting, masturbation.
(c) Personality disorders : Jealousy, temper-tantrums,
Children in difficult circumstances (64)
timidity, shyness, day-dreaming,· fears and anxieties, In a globalized economy, the increased vulnerability of
unsociability, hysterical manifestations. some children due to their identity, and/or their socio-
(d) Psychosomatic complaints : Tremors, headache, economic and geo-political circumstances calls for more
asthma, depression, delusion, hallucinations. focused attention as well as coordination of social and
economic policies and monitoring of child impact. Besides
(e) Educational difficulties : Backwardness in studies, being victims of globalization, these children may be barred
school phobia, school failures, etc. from benefits meant for all children simply because they
Some of the behaviour disorders are due to mental belong to a group or community with difficulties of access.
deficiency; some are due to organic disease and some due to These barriers must be overcome.
failure in adjustment to external environment. The answer to Over the years, some children have been categorized as
these problems lies in improvement of living conditions, children in difficult circumstances and these categorizations
better social environment and education. include:
- Homeless children (pavement dwellers, displaced/
JUVENILE DELINQUENCY evicted, etc.)
The Children Act, 1960 in India defines delinquent as - Orphaned or abandoned children
"a child who has committed an offence". Juvenile means a Children whose parents cannot or are not able to take
boy who has not attained the age of 16 years and a girl who care of them
has not attained the age of 18 years. In a broad sense,
- Children separated from parents
delinquency is not merely "juvenile crime". It embraces all
deviations from normal youthful behaviour and includes the Migrant and refugee children
incorrigible, ungovernable, habitually disobedient and those - Street children
who desert their homes and mix with immoral people, those Working children
with behaviour problems and indulge in antisocial practices.
Trafficked children
INCIDENCE : In the United States it is reported that
2 per cent of children between 7 and 1 7 years attend - Children in bondage
JUVENILE DELINQUENCY
Children with disabilities and related special needs Poorer health attention and poorer
access to health care; high risk of
- Children belonging to the ethnic and religious nutritional anaemia
minorities, and other minority communities, and those Discrimination in overall treatment,
belonging to the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled parental care; expression of value and
Tribes worth
Children in institutional care, be it in state-run Vitamin and micro-nutrient deficiencies
institutions or religious and other charitable Early definition and imposition of
institutions 'suitable' roles; limits on permitted
Children in conflict with law {those who commit learning and play activities
crimes) - Child marriages in some areas of
country
Children who are victims of crime Household/near-home sexual abuse
For the first time in the history of planning for children, - If enrolled in school, less time for
India has adopted a clear understanding and definition of learning.
the child in the NPAC 2005. The NPAC definition of the Assignment of domestic duties, minor
small domestic chores
child as a person upto the age of 18 years and its clear
declaration that 'all rights apply to all age-groups, including 6 to 11 years - Malnutrition and anaemia
before birth' reiterates the 1974 National Policy mandate - Health problems like diarrhoea
that the State takes responsibility for children 'both before - Iodine and Vitamin A deficiency
and after birth,' and the child's interests are to receive - Low school enrolment, school drop outs
paramount attention. This national reaffirmation must set Vulnerable to trafficking, child labour,
the frame for future planning and intervention to secure the child marriage
well-being of all children of the country and provide them a - Abuse, exploitation and violence
caring and protective environment. - Increasing domestic duties/workload
- Looking after siblings
Battered baby syndrome - Restrictions on mobility, play
It has been defined as "a clinical condition in young 12 to 18 years Poor health, poor health attention
children, usually under 3 years of age who have received High risk/high levels of anaemia
non-accidental wholly inexcusable violence or injury, on one Frequent illness due to malnutrition and
or more occasions, including minimal as well as severe fatal micro-nutrient deficiency
trauma, for what is often the most trivial provocation, by the - Child marriage
hand of an adult in a position of trust, generally a parent, - High-risk/incidence of early child-
guardian or foster parent. In addition to physical injury, bearing related morbidity/mortality
there may be deprivation of nutrition, care and affection in Becoming a 'child-mother', health risks
circumstances which indicate that such deprivation is not and burden of childcare
accidental". - Denied information, mobility, access to
services
Battered baby syndrome has been found in all strata of - Low literacy/learning level
society. Its incidence is not known. So far as sequelae are - Early and frequent pregnancy coupled
concerned, the most worrying is the risk of mental and with abortions
neurological complications. Thus it has been tentatively Marital and domestic violence
suggested that 10-15 per cent of cases of cerebral palsy and Dowry harassment, desertion,
almost double that proportion of the new mentally retarded polygamy, divorce
children each year may be the result of the battered baby - Child labour, trafficking
syndrome. - STDs and HIV/AIDS
- Unpaid and unrecognized work, and
Girl child and gender bias (64) drudgery
Gender biases pose a specific threat to girl children across No voice either in home or society.
the social and economic strata. For a girl child, life is a
constant fight for survival, growth and development from It is evident from the text above that age-specific and
the time she is conceived till she attains 18 years. The life setting-specific interventions have to be put in place for
chart of a girl child and the many life threatening problems appropriate and effective response to the above problems,
she faces are as follows : highlighting the inter-sectoral nature of actions required.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Protecting girl children in India will not be easy. The abuse. Some contributory factors of child abuse are poverty,
nation cannot any longer afford the cost of hoping that alcohol and other drug abuse, loneliness, immaturity and a
s·ociety will change its mindset on its own, in a situation host of other factors. Many causes are embedded in the
where pervasive negative attitudes towards women are family and in its function of child rearing.
being reflected on girl children, to the extent of denying During the year 1991, there were one million cases of
them life itself. child abuse and neglect in the USA, i.e., an incidence of
The well-being of daughters in the community must about 2 per cent children being subjected to physical and/or
become the subject of government monitoring (with NGO sexual abuse. Countries around the world report
assistance if appropriate), covering every age and stage of comparable figures (120).
childhood. Such vigilance must apply to all stages of a girl Studies carried out throughout the past two decades have
child's childhood. Panchayats, gram sabhas and local self- shown that the provision of supportive home visitors, either
government bodies should be brought into this benevolent public health nurse or trained lay people, to families who are
surveillance. at risk of using violence against children can prevent the
abuse from happening. However, we have not yet reached a
The specific goals for girls in the National Plan of similar level of confidence about our ability to prevent the
Action for Children 2005 sexual abuse of children, which is also a worldwide
- Assurance of equality of status for girl child as an phenomenon.
individual and a citizen in her own right through Suggested remedial measures include increased legal
promotion of special opportunities for her growth and help, more case workers, educating young people to
development. postpone having children until they are sufficiently mature to
To ensure survival, development and protection of the be adequate parents. Attempt to strengthen the individual
girl child and to create an environment wherein she and his family may prove helpful. The problem is complex
lives a life of dignity with full opportunity for choice and reflects merely one facet of the larger issue of violence
and development. in the home and in society at large (121).
- To stop sex selection, female foeticide and infanticide.
Street children
To eliminate child marriages.
A large number of children live and work on the streets, a
- To ensure the girl child's security and protect her from high proportion without any family support, particularly in
abuse, exploitation, victimization and all other forms the megacities of the developing world. They are at high-risk
of violence. of malnutrition, tuberculosis, STDs including HIV, parasite
- To protect the girl child from deprivation and neglect and worm infestation and skin diseases. Both sexes are
and to ensure to the girl child an equal share of care highly vulnerable to drug abuse, prostitution and criminal
and resources in the home and community, and equal exploitation.
access to services. Most street children describe major losses in their lives.
- To take measures to protect girl children from any Many have lost family members through diseases, natural or
treatment which undermines their self esteem, and manmade disasters, or may be by-product of war and riots.
causes their exclusion from social mainstream and Although poverty and rapid urbanization are major
also to break down persistent gender stereotype. contributing factors to the problem, many claim that
To eliminate all obstacles that prevent girls from full physical and sexual abuse were the reason for their leaving
enjoyment of human rights and fundamental freedom home.
including equal rights in succesion and inheritance. Recent global estimates place their number at as many as
- To ensure equal opportunity for free and compulsory 100 million. There may be 40 million in Latin America,
elementary education to all girls. 25 million in Asia and 10 million in Africa, with about 25
Health and nutrition. million in other areas including the developed world. In
1993 WHO launched an innovative project to study links
Child abuse between street children and substance abuse. The study
In ancient times, general opinion accepted that children noted regular use of alcohol and other drugs by a major
could be beaten and abused. The industrial exploitation of proportion of street children. Often the lives of street
children after the Middle Ages was commonplace, with no children are intimately entwined with the illicit drug industry.
widespread protest. The prevention of cruelty to children, as Street children are used in the production and marketing of
to animal, was beginning to be a matter of public concern in cocain and the trafficking of cannabis and heroin (42).
the 18th century, but birch and cane lingered on and were There are particular problems in the provision of health
brandished righteously at home and at school, well into the and welfare services to street children with regard not only
present century. to health care but also to housing, educational opportunities
The broader concept of child abuse (which includes and employment. The rehabilitation of these children should
battering) is of recent origin. Its recognition by the caring be taken up by the government and non-government
professions have brought a spate of conferences, symposia voluntary agencies.
and publications. The concept itself has been broadened to The "Integrated Programme for Street Children" without
include not only physical violence, but sexual abuse, mental homes and families was launched to prevent destitution of
and emotional maltreatment, neglect, deprivation and lack children and provide facilities for their withdrawal from life
of opportunity. The consequences of physical battering - on the streets. During 2008-09 the scheme was merged to
death, blindness, mental and emotional retardation, stunting Integrated Child Protection Scheme. Under the scheme
of growth - is only one part of the whole picture of child NGOs are given financial support to run 24 hour shelters and
CHILD LABOUR AND CHILD
provide food, clothing, non-formal education, recreation, should be protected against exploitation. In 1973, the
counselling, guidance and referral services for children. The ILO passed a convention establishing 15 as the minimum
other components of the scheme include enrolment in work age for most sectors while permitting light work
schools, vocational training, occupational placement, from age 13, provided that such work was unlikely to harm
mobilizing preventive health services and reducing incidence child's health, morals and safety or prejudice his school
of drug substance abuse, HIV/AIDS etc. (65). attendance (123).
Surveys by International Labour Organization (ILO) in
Refugee and displaced children (122) 1990 found that over 79 million children under the age of
At the end of 2004, roughly 48 per cent of all refugees 15 years were obliged to work. In some cases children as
worldwide were children. young as 5 years have been reported to be in paid
During the same year, the total number of people employment. Africa and Asia dominate the data on child
displaced within their own countries by conflict or human labour. The scenario has not changed much to the present
rights violations amounted to roughly 25 million. time.
Refugee and internally displaced children face many According to ILO, forced child labour is present in all
risks, given the violence and uncertainty surrounding both regions and kinds of economy. For the most part, there is
their flight and their lives in the country and/or place of neither official data on the incidence of forced labour nor a
asylum. They may become separated from their families, widespread awareness among society at large that forced
lose their homes and find themselves living in poor labour is a problem. Children in domestic service are the
conditions that jeopardize their health and education. most invisible child labourers. Their work is performed
Displacement complicates birth registration and the within individual homes, removed from public scrutiny and
issuance of travel documents, thereby compromising their conditions of life and labour are entirely dependant on
displaced persons' right to an identity. Both refugees and the whims of their employers. The number of children
internally displaced people may have been forced to leave involved in domestic service around the world is
their homes without proper documentation, making it unquantifiable because of the hidden nature of the work, but
difficult to establish their identities. They may, therefore, be it certainly runs into millions. Many of these children are
unable to prove their right to receive basic social services, girls, and in many countries domestic service is seen as the
such as education or health care, or to work in a different only avenue of employment for a young girl, though in some
part of the country. places, such as Nepal and South Africa, boys are more likely
The loss of family protection, and inadequate resources to be domestic workers than girls. Children exploited in
to address the needs and challenges that refugee and domestic service are generally paid little or nothing over and
internally displaced children face, can leave them at above food and lodging. In addition, children in domestic
significant risk of recruitment by armed groups and forces, service are especially susceptible to physical and
abuse and sexual exploitation. Girls are especially at risk of psychological harm. Many are forced to undertake tasks that
abduction, trafficking and sexual violence, including rape are completely inappropriate for their age and physical
used as a weapon of war. strength. Another form of forced labour is debt bondage,
whatever the origin of the debt, it leaves children under
Orphaned children are much more vulnerable to
complete control of a money lender in a state little
protection violations. The death of a parent, in situations
where no adequate alternative care systems are in place, distinguishable from slavery.
opens up a protection gap. Children living on their own are India fosters the largest number of child labour in the
at much greater risk of abuse and exploitation. Assessments world. Child labour contributes about 20 per cent of India's
by the International Labour Organization (ILO) have found GNP. Child workers work for 12 hours at an average every
that orphaned children are much more likely than non- day (124). Jammu and Kashmir has the highest percentage
orphans to be working in commercial agriculture, as street of child labour, where children are mainly engaged in carpet
vendors, in domestic service and in the sex trade. weaving industry (125). The other fields where child labour
Primary responsibility for both refugee and displaced is used is in agriculture, plantations, mining, building
children lies with national governments. However, the Office construction, beedi-making, garbage picking, cashew
of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees descalding and processing, cloth printing, dyeing and
(UNHCR) has a mandate to assist and protect refugees, weaving etc.
while the International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC) In India, various items of health and social legislation
has a mandate to assist internally displaced people if have been enacted to protect the health, safety and welfare
displacement is a result of armed conflict and internal of working children below the age of 15 years.
violence.
The Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act,
Child labour and child exploitation 1986
A sizeable number of growing children of poor socio- Except in the process of family-based work or recognized
economic class especially in rural areas are known to be school-based activities, children are not permitted to work in
inducted as child labour. Studies have shown that labour at occupations concerned with :
very young ages can have dire consequences on the child's
development, both physical and mental. Child labourers - Passenger, goods mail transport by railways
always had lower growth and health status compared to - Carpet weaving
their non-working counterparts, besides exposure to Cinder picking, cleaning of ash-pits
occupational hazards at a very young stage in their lives.
The Declaration of the Rights of the Child and our own - Cement manufacturing
Constitution has laid down that childhood and youth Building construction operations
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
trafficked for commercial sexual exploitation. Some of the Services : The paediatrician takes care of the physical
provisions under the scheme are (65) : health of the child. The core of therapy is psychotherapy in
order to restore positive feelings of security in the child. To
(1) Formation of community vigilance groups, adolescents achieve this, many methods are employed, e.g., play
groups, awareness creation and preparation of !EC therapy, counselling, suggestions, change in the physical
material, organizing workshops; environment, easing of parental tensions, reconstruction of
(2) Safe withdrawal of victims from the place of parental attitudes, etc. The child guidance clinics operate on
exploitation; the premise that if sound foundations of mental health are
(3) Rehabilitation of victims by providing them safe shelter, laid in childhood and adolescence, the same will continue
basic amenities, medical care, legal aid, vocational into adulthood.
training and employment.
(4) Re-integration of victims into society; and Child placement
(5) Provide support to cross-border victims for their safe (1) ORPHANAGES : Children who have no home or who
repatriation to the country of origin. for some reason could not be cared for by their parents are
placed in orphanages. Scientific studies of human behaviour
Child marriage have revealed that mass care of infants and children in large
Early marriage is a long-established custom in India. As institutions is undesirable. In such institutions, there is little
early as 1929, the Sharda Act was enacted forbidding the opportunity for the child to experience the warmth and
practice of child marriages. Inspite of the spread of literacy intimacy of family life, to develop emotional security and to
and Jegislations prohibiting early marriages, child marriages participate in activities that would help him to become an
are still in vogue in the countryside particularly in Rajasthan, adequate citizen. (2) FOSTER HOMES : Fostering is an
Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh, where substantial arrangement whereby a child lives, usually on a temporary
proportion of marriages take place when the girl is arountl basis, with an extended or unrelated family member. Such
15 years of age (126). The census data reveal that prior an arrangement ensures that the birth parents do not lose
to 1951, the average age at marriage for girls in India any of their parental rights or responsibilities. This
was 13 years. There is however a gradual rise in the age arrangement cater to children who are not legally free for
at marriage in the country. The Child Marriage Restraint Act adoption, and whose parents are unable to care for them
of 1978 raises the legal age of marriage from 15 to 18 years due to illness, death or desertion by one parent, or any other
for girls; and from 18 to 21 years for boys. Studies indicate crisis. The aim is to eventually re-unite the child with his/her
that in many states, the mean age at marriage for girls has own family, when the family circumstances improve (65).
already moved into 19 years and 24 years for the boys. (3) ADOPTION : In addition to the more or less temporary
The Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, 2006 (PCMA) placement of children in foster or boarding homes, children
was enacted repealing the Child Marriage Restraint Act of are legally adopted. Legal adoption confers upon the child
1929 in order to prohibit child marriage rather than and adoptive parents, rights and responsibilities similar to
only restraining them. PCMA has been enforced with effect that of natural parents. The laws of adoption vary from
from 1st November, 2007. It makes child marriage country to country; the relevant law in India is the "Hindu
an offence and makes provision for punishment for Adoptions and Maintenance Act, 1956". (4) BORSTALS :
those conducting I abetting /promoting I permitting the Boys over 16 years who are too difficult to be handled in a
marriage (65). certified school or have misbehaved there, are sent to a
The age at which the girl marries and enters the Borstal. This institution falls in a category between a
reproduction period of life has a great impact on her fertility. certified school and an adult prison. A Borstal sentence
Girls who marry before the age of. 18 give birth to larger which is usually for three years,. is regarded as a method of
number of children than those who married late. It is training and reformation. There are about six Borstals for
estimated that if the marriages were postponed from the age boys in India but none for girls. Borstals do not come under
of 16 to 20-21, the number of births would decrease by the Children Act but are governed by the State Inspector
20-30 per cent. General of Prisons (125). (5) REMAND HOMES : In the
remand home, the child is placed under the care of doctors,
Child guidance clinic psychiatrists and other trained personnel. Every effort is
The first child guidance clinic was started in Chicago in made to improve the mental and physical well-being of the
1909 and ever since, they have grown in number and child. Elementary schooling is given, various arts and crafts
complexity throughout the world. Originally intended to deal are taught, games are played and other recreational
with problems of juvenile delinquency, child guidance clinics activities are arranged.
deal with all children or adolescents who for one reason or
other, are not fully adjusted to their environment. The object THE CHILDREN ACT, 1960
of child guidance is to prevent children from the possibility The Children Act, 1960 in India (amended in 1977)
of becoming neurotics and psychotics in later life. provides for the care, maintenance, welfare, training,
Team work : Child guidance is a team work job the education and rehabilitation of the delinquent child. It
team comprising of a psychiatrist, clinical psychologist, covers the neglected and destitute, socially handicapped,
educational, psychologist, psychiatric social workers, public uncontrollable, victimized and delinquent children. In Article
health nurses, paediatrician, speech therapist, occupational 39 (f) the Constitution of India provides that "the state shall
therapist and a neurologist. The psychiatrist is the central in particular direct its policy towards securing that childhood
figure and is helped by the others in arriving at a correct and youth are protected against moral and material
diagnosis and formulating the line of treatment. abandonment."
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
Supplementary nutrition (therapeutic food) is given to infrastructure of ICDS. The scheme targets adolescent girls
children suffering from 2nd and 3rd degree malnutrition. in the age group of 11 to 18 years and addresses their needs
Children suffering from 4th degree malnutrition are of self development, nutrition and health status, literacy and
recommended hospitalization. numerical skills, vocational skills etc.
Nutrition Programme for Adolescent Girls was approved
2. Nutrition and health education in the year 2009-10, on a pilot project basis. The project is
Nutrition education and health education is given to all being implemented in 51 identified districts from the major
women in the age group 15-45 years, giving priority to states. Undernourished adolescent girls in the age group of
nursing and expectant mothers. It is imparted by specially 11 to 19 years (with body weight less than 30 kg in the age
organized courses in village during home visits by group of 11 to 15 years and 35 kg in the age group of 15 to
anganwadi workers. 19 years) are covered under the scheme. 6 kg of free food
grain is provided to each beneficiary per month. The
3. Immunization programme is being implemented through the administrative
Immunization of children against 6 vaccine preventable set-up of ICDS scheme at the state, district, block and
diseases is being done, while for expectant mothers, Anganwadi Centre level.
immunization against tetanus is recommended. Two more schemes are being implemented at the ICDS
level. They are (a) Rajiv Gandhi Scheme for Empowerment
4. Health check-up of Adolescent Girls - "SABLA" for the age group 11 to 18
This includes (a) antenatal care of expectant mothers; years to improve their nutritional and health status; and (b)
(b) postnatal care of nursing mother and care of newborn Indira Gandhi Matrutva Sahyog Yojana (IGMSY), under
infants; (c) care of children under 6 years of age. Besides which conditional cash transfer will be made to pregnant
immunization, expectant mothers are given iron and folic and lactating mothers in order to improve their nutritional
~cid tablets along with protein supplements. A minimum of and health status (65).
3 physical examinations are done. High risk mothers are At the end of 2012, about 6,908 ICDS projects and
referred to appropriate institutions for special care. 13.04 lakh Anganwadi Centres/Mini-Anganwadi Centres are
The health care of children under 6 years of age consists functional in the country. About 751.03 lakh children
of: and 167.62 lakh pregnant and lactating mothers (total
918.65 lakh) are getting the benefit of the scheme.
1. Record of weight and height of children at The administrative unit of an ICDS project is the
periodical intervals "community development block" in rural areas, the "tribal
2. Watch over milestones development block" in tribal areas and a group of slums in
3. Immunization urban areas. In selection of project areas preference was
given to areas predominantly inhabited by backward tribes,
4. General check-up every 3-6 months to detect
backward areas, draught prone areas and areas in which
disease, malnutrition etc.
nutritional deficiencies are rampant. The rural/urban project
5. Treatment for disease like diarrhoea, dysentery, has a population of 100,000 and a tribal project about
respiratory tract infections etc. which are widely 35,000 population. The number of villages in the rural
prevalent. project may be 100 while in tribal areas, it may be only
6. Deworming about 50, taking into account the difficult terrain in which
the tribal projects are located. The focal point for the
7. Prophylaxis against vitamin A deficiency and
delivery of integrated early childhood services under the
anaemia.
ICDS scheme is the trained local woman known as
8. Referral of serious cases to hospital has also been Anganwadi worker (AWW). Other functionaries in the ICDS
provided for. are the Child Development Project Officer (CDPO), who is
in charge of 4 Supervisors (Mukhya Sevika} and 100 AWWs.
Health rernrds : Health records of the children, antenatal
Each Supervisor is responsible for 20-25 anganwadis and
care and delivery card etc. are maintained. A card
acts as mentor to AWWs; assists in record keeping, visits of
containing the health record of the child is given to the
health personnel and organizing community visits; and
mother.
provides on-the-job training to AWWs. Anganwadi worker
5. Non-formal pre-school education is the multipurpose agent, selected from the community.
AWW provides direct link to children and mother; assists
Children between the ages 3-6 years are imparted non- CDPO in survey of community and beneficiaries; organizes
formal pre-school education in an anganwadi in each non-formal education sessions; provides health and
village with about 1000 population. The objective is to nutrition education to mothers; assists PHC staff in
provide opportunities to develop desirable attitude, values providing health services; maintains records of
and behaviour pattern among children. Locally produced immunization, feeding and pre-school attendance; liaises
inexpensive toys and material are used in organizing play with block administrator, local school, health staff and
and creative activity. community, and works for other community based activities,
e.g., family planning.
Schemes for adolescent girls (65)
The Government of India is committed to child
At present, there are two schemes for adolescent girls viz. development as a policy priority and is steadily expanding
"Kishori Shakti Yojana" and "Nutrition Programme for ICDS programme with the ultimate aim of reaching every
adolescent girls". child. The impact of the programme on the lives of children
Kishori Shakti Yojana is being implemented using the is evident in several crucial indicators : increased birth
SOCIAL WELFARE PROGRAMMES
weight, reduced incidence of malnutrition, increased women with no education have, on average, twice as many
immunization coverage, and a reduced infant and child children as those with seven or more years of schooling.
mortality rate in areas covered by the ICDS (113). Corollaries of this finding are the increased earning power of
educated women, their improved status within the family,
Health of adolescents and the greater control they are able to exercise over their
The term "adolescence" has been defined as including own lives.
those aged between 10 and 19, and "youth" as those A more universal consequence of early and more
between 15 and 24; "young people" is a term that covers frequent childbearing is the increase in population size and
both age groups, i.e. those between the ages of 10 and 24. growth rate. Where girls marry at 15, the age gap between
True adolescence, however, being the period of physical, successive generations may be less than 20 years; this gap
psychological and social maturing from childhood to may widen to as much as 30 years where the age at
adulthood, may fall within either age range. The marriage is 25. The sexual behaviour and reproductive
development that takes place in adolescence is generally patterns of young people are highly susceptible to social
uneven, in that physical maturity may well be achieved in influences and related to their own sense of psychological
advance of psychological or social maturity; in most well-being.
societies, in fact, reproductive capability is now established Although an adolescent girl is likely to give birth and rear
at an earlier age than in the past. her children within the context of an extended family, the
The importance of the health of adolescents has started risks she and her children run of illness, injury and death are
to receive increasing recognition, particularly in developing far greater than those for a mature woman in her twenties.
countries where four out of five of the world's young people The chances of anaemia, developing during pregnancy, and
live, and where more than half the population is under the of retarded fetal growth; premature birth and complications
age of 25. These young men and women are, or will during labour are all significantly higher for the adolescent
become, the parents of the next generation. They must be mother, as are the risks of her own death during pregnancy
given every opportunity to develop to their full potential as or child-birth.
healthy individuals.
Formal education of girls generally ends with marriage,
Because adolescents are less vulnerable to disease than and from then on their social status may well depend on
the very young and the very old, health problems specific to fecundity. An adolescent girl who proves to be infertile (or
their age group have been given little prominence until now. whose husband is infertile} runs the risk of being rejected by
Moreover, in societies where girls in particular have both husband and family and thus of losing what little status
traditionally married at an early age, adolescence has been she has. The second major set of problems of reproductive
regarded merely as a brief interlude between puberty and health in adolescence results from the profound socio-
marriage. As the average age of menarche has fallen, and economic changes taking place in most developing
with an increasing trend towards late marriage, however, this countries. The average age of menarche has fallen, there is a
period has been extended and traditional attitude has begun trend towards later marriage, and young people are often
to change. At the same time, the influence of the family has less directly supervised than was the case in the past all of
declined, urbanization and migration have become more which have the effect of increasing the opportunities for
common, and young people have been increasingly exposed sexual e.ncounter. Since the subject of adolescent sexuality
to the mass media .:... all factors that contribute to major remains taboo in most societies, there is widespread
changes in social and sexual behaviour. ignorance among young people of the risks associated with
High rate of mortality and morbidity has always been unprotected sexual activity. Sources of information and
assoCiated with pregnancy and childbirth in pubertal and contraceptive advice are rarely available or accessible to
adolescent girls. This problem is now compounded by the them. In addition, impulsive sexual behaviour and non-use
dramatic rise in the number of pregnancies, both wanted of contraceptives are sometimes exacerbated by alcohol and
and unwanted, among adolescents, who are also having drug abuse.
more abortions and contracting sexually transmitted A number of major approaches to reducing problems by
diseases more often. There appears also to be an increase in
modification of the contributing factors will serve to promote
the number of abandoned and abused children born to
good health among the young and thus to improve health
adolescent mothers. As long as these problems are allowed
and social development of their communities. These
to persist, much of the energy, creativity and idealism of
approaches include the following :
youth will be lost to society. However, the problems are
preventable, and efforts to eliminate them must involve the 1. Informing, educating and sensitizing key groups in
young people themselves, contributing in ways appropriate society to individual health and social development
to their particular cultures. needs.
Society today demands more of young people than ever 2. Advocating appropriate policy, legislation and
before. With the decline of the extended family greater programmes for promoting adolescent reproductive
autonomy is expected of them, especially in the raising of health.
children; increasing urbanization and industrialization 3. Using appropriate and innovative research to improve
means that economic independence is achieved only knowledge of, and disseminate information about, the
through more education and training. Early parenthood, factors that influence and determine young people's
particularly for girls, may limit or preclude social and sexual, contraceptive and reproductive decisions and
educational development and the ability to achieve full
behaviour.
status in society and is associated with greater morbidity and
mortality. The World Fertility Survey observed an inverse 4. Modifying, extending and evaluating services specially
relationship between fertility and the education of women: designed to meet young people's needs.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
5. Mobilizing the energy, creativity and idealism of young of a person is not identical with his "chronological age". It is
people in promoting health and developing said that nobody grows old merely by living a certain number
appropriate activities in their communities. of years. Years wrinkle the skin, but worry, doubt, fear,
6. Facilitating action to extend education opportunities anxiety and self-distrust wrinkle the soul. While ageing merely
for girls. stands for growing old, senescence is an expression used for
the deterioration in the vitality or the lowering of the
PREVENTIVE·MEDICINE AND GERIATRICS biological efficiency that accompanies ageing. With the
passage of time, certain changes take place in an organism.
Ageing is a natural process. In the words of Seneca; "Old These changes are, for the most part deleterious and
age is an incurable disease", but more recently, Sir James eventually lead to the death of the organism. Our knowledge
Sterling Ross commented : "You do not heal old age. You about the ageing process is incomplete. We do not know
protect it; you promote it; you extend it" (129). These are in much about the disabilities incident to the ageing process.
fact the basic principles of preventive medicine. Old age However the following are some of the disabilities considered
should be regarded as a normal, inevitable biological as incident to it; (a) senile cataract, (b) glaucoma, (c) nerve
phenomenon. The study of the physical and psychological deafness, (d) osteoporosis affecting mobility, (e) emphysema,
changes which are incident to old age is called gerontology. (f) failure of special senses, (g) changes in mental outlook.
The care of the aged is called clinical gerontology or This list is not exhaustive; we need to know a lot more about
geriatrics. Another aspect of gerontology is social the disabilities incident to the ageing process.
gerontology which was born on the one hand out of the
instincts of humanitarian and social attitudes and on the (2) PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH LONG-TERM
other out of the problems set by the increasing number of ILLNESS
old people (130). Experimental gerontology is concerned Certain chronic diseases are more frequent among the
with research into the basic biological problems of ageing, older people than in the younger people. These are :
into its physiology, biochemistry, pathology and psychology. (a) DEGENERATIVE DISEASES OF HEART AND BLOOD
The fields of studies range from studies of populations VESSELS : Of particular importance after the age of 40, are
through individuals, organs, systems, tissues and cells, down the degenerative diseases of the heart and blood vessels.
to the molecular level. GERIATRIC GYNAECOLOGY: With The inner walls of arteries break down, and a lipoid material
the lengthening span of life a new chapter in gynaecology is deposited. This in time is replaced by calcium which leads
geriatric gynaecology - is fast opening up. More patients are to narrowing of blood vessels or atherosclerosis. This leads
coming for repair of prolapse of varying degrees, non- to diminished blood supply, thrombus formation, rupture of
specific vaginitis, ovarian tumours, psychic aberrations and blood vessels and high blood pressure. No single factor has
sexual problems. There is ample scope for research into been identified as the cause of atherosclerosis. Diet,
the degenerative and other diseases of old age; their heredity, overweight, nervous and emotional strain have all
treatment in hospital and general practice; and finally into been implicated. Cardiovascular diseases are the major
preventive geriatrics and the epidemiology of conditions causes of death in the developed countries. A reduction of
affecting the aged. body weight and modification of the habits of life are
Size of the problem needed to decrease the strain on heart and blood vessels. By
these, it is possible to lead a longer and more useful life.
Discoveries in medical science and improved social (b) CANCER : The danger of cancer looms large past middle
conditions during past few decades have increased the life life. In the developed countries, cancer is a leading cause of
span of man. The expectation of life at birth in developed death. The incidence of cancer rises rapidly after the age of
countries is over 70 years. The age structure of the population 40. Cancer of the prostate is common after the age of 65.
in the developed countries has so evolved that the numbers of (c) ACCIDENTS : Accidents are a health problem in the
old people is continually on the increase. These trends are elderly. The bones become fragile due to a certain amount
appearing in all countries where medical and social services of decalcification as a result of which they break easily.
are well developed and the standard of living is high.
Accidents are more common in the home than outside.
In the year 2002, there were an estimated 605 million old Fracture neck of femur is a very common geriatric problem.
persons in the world, of which 400 million were living in (d) DIABETES : Diabetes is a long-term illness due to faulty
low-income countries (131). Italy and Japan have the carbohydrate metabolism. It is a leading cause of death as
highest proportion of older persons (about 16. 7 per cent and the population grows older. About 75 per cent of the
16 per cent respectively in the year 2003). By 2025, the diabetics are over 50 years of age. (e) DISEASES OF
number of elderly people is expected to rise more than LOCOMOTOR SYSTEM: A wide range of articular and non-
1.2 billion with about 840 million of these in low-income articular disorders affect the aged fibrositis, myositis,
countries (131). In India, although the percentage of aged neuritis, gout, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis,
persons to the total population is low in comparison to the spondylitis of spine, etc. These conditions cause more
developed countries, nevertheless, the absolute size of aged discomfort and disability than any other chronic disease in
population is considerable. For the year 2010 the estimates the elderly. (f) RESPIRATORY ILLNESSES : In the upper
are 8 per cent of total population were above the age of decades of life, respiratory diseases such as chronic
60 years, and is likely to rise to 19% by 2050. This profound bronchitis, asthma, emphysema are of major importance.
shift in the share of older Indians, brings with it a variety of (g) GENITOURINARY SYSTEM : Enlargement of the
social, economic and healthcare policy challenges (132). prostate, dysuria, nocturia, frequent and urgency of
Health problems of the aged micturition are the common complaints.
outlook and dislike of change are some of the mental tolerance (131). Drinking is linked to liver diseases,
changes in the aged. Reduced income leads to a fall in the stomach ulcers, gout, depression, osteoporosis, heart
living standards of the elderly; it does have mental and disease, breast cancer, diabetes and hypertension (132). (f)
social consequences. (2) SEXUAL ADJUSTMENT SOCIAL ACTIVITIES : People who become socially isolated
Between 40 and 50, there is cessation of reproduction by who rarely go out, do not join in the community
women and diminution of sexual activity on the part of activities, have few friends . or do not see much of their
men. During this phase, physical and emotional family - are less healthy. Getting out and keeping involved
disturbances may occur. Irritability, jealousy and with others creates a sense of belonging. Mixing with other
despondency are very frequent. (3) EMOTIONAL people of similar age, at similar stage of life or perhaps with
DISORDERS : Emotional disorders result from social similar health concerns, can help people realize that they
maladjustment. The degree of adaptation to the fact of are not alone. The support gained from others can be
ageing is crucial to a man's happiness in this phase of life. important in recovering from illness. Simply knowing that
Failure to adapt can result in bitterness, inner withdrawal, others care, helps (132).
depression, weariness of life, and even suicide.
Health status of the aged in India
Lifestyle and healthy ageing A few hospital based studies have been made in India on
People can do a great deal to influence their individual the health status of the aged persons, but such studies
risk of developing many of the diseases of later life by provide only a partial view of the spectrum of illness in the
paying careful attention to lifestyle factors. By adopting a aged. The overall data on aged are scarce. The main causes
healthier lifestyle, the risk of a whole range of diseases can of illness are arthritis, cataract, bronchitis, avitaminosis, ear
be reduced. These factors are : (a) DIET AND NUTRITION diseases, hypertension, diabetes, rheumatism, helminthic
: A good diet reduces the chances of developing the infestations, accidents, etc. The findings of an ICMR survey
diseases of old age. As countries rapidly develop conducted in 1984-85 of elderly persons over 60 years of
economically, diets and lifestyles change considerably and age attending geriatric clinics in rural areas is as shown in
overnutrition replaces undernutrition. One of the problem is Table 31.
excessive fat intake. Saturated fats and trans-fatty acids,
have been linked to raised cholesterol levels in the blood, TABLE 31
leading to increased risk of cardiovascular diseaes. People Percentage of elderly reporting various ailments
should eat healthy diet since very early age to avoid or
delay diseases. The diet should be balanced with less Ailment Reported percentage ·
saturated fats and oils; should contain lots of fruits and
vegetables; salt and sugar should be less; include plenty of Visual impairment/complaint 88.0
calcium rich food; eat high fibre diet; (b) EXERCISE : . Locomotive disorder, joints, muscles 40.0
Exercise helps maintain good health, as it helps to control Neurological complaints 18.7
weight, improves emotional well-being and relieves stress, Cardiovascular disease 17.4
improves blood circulation, increases flexibility, lowers
Respiratory disorder 16.1
blood pressure, increases energy levels, improves balance
and thus reduces the dangers of falls, lowers blood sugar Skin conditions 13.3
levels thus helps in diabetes, improves bone density and Gastro-intestinal/abdominal disorder 9.0
thus helps prevent osteoporosis. (c) WEIGHT : Overweight Psychiatric problem 8.5
and obesity have become major problem worldwide and it
Hearing loss 8.2
contributes to many diseases of later life. Obesity is an
important factor in heart disease, stroke, hypertension, Genitourinary disorder 3.5
diabetes, arthritis (especially in the knees), and breast
cancer. (d) SMOKING : It is estimated that 22 per cent of Source : (133)
men and 18 per cent of women aged 65 to 74 years in The government of India announced a National Policy
developed countries are smokers (131). Though this figure on older persons in January 1999. This policy identifies
is lower than among younger adults, older people have principal areas of intervention as financial security, health
usually smoked for longer, have been and continue to be care, nutrition, shelter, education, welfare, protection of life
heavy smokers, and are likely to have chronic diseases, and property of older citizens. The policy provides for a
with smoking causing further deterioration. Former smokers broad framework for collaboration and cooperation, both
live longer than continuing smokers; smoking cessation at within as well as between governmental and non-
the age of 50 years reduces the risk of dying within the next
governmental agencies. An important thrust in the policy is
15 years by 50 per cent. For some, but not for all former
on active and productive involvement of older persons, and
smokers, the risk of developing smoking-related diseases
not just their care. A national council for older persons
reverts to that of lifelong non-smokers (131). (e) ALCOHOL
: Drinking beyond a specified amount contributes to a (NCOP) was constituted to operationalize the policy. An
number of later life diseases. Research suggests that integrated programme for older persons has been
sensitivity to the effect of alcohol increases with age. Older formulated by revising the earlier scheme of assistance to
people achieve a higher blood alcohol concentration, than voluntary organizations for programmes relating to the
younger people after consuming an equal amount of welfare of the aged. The objective is to promote a society
alcohol. This is largely as a result of the age-related for all ages, to empower and improve the quality of life of
decrease in the amount of body water which dilutes older persons.
alcohol. While younger people are likely to develop The programme for the first time recognizes formation of
tolerance to increasing amount of alcohol, self-help groups, association of older persons for
older people have a decreased ability to develop this advancement of their rights and utilization of their
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
experience and services. 234 Old age homes, 398 day care Potential for disease prevention in the elderly
centres and 40 mobile medical units are operational. For older individuals, a great proportion of the disease
Scheme of assistance to Panchayat Raj Institutions I burden derives from existing conditions, whether this
Voluntary Organizations I Self Help Groups, for burden is measured by prevalence rates, indicators of
construction of old age homes has also been revised to morbidity, disability, mortality, or by health and long term
encourage Multi Service Centres for older persons. care utilization. In addition, older people with disability,
As a part of National Social Assistance Programme, old resulting from chronic 9.iseases, appear at high risk of acute
age pension is being provided to more than 4 million illness and injuries. The evidence arrayed of the role of
destitute elderly all over the country. The amount of existing and often immutable disease argues for the
pension varies from state to state - from Rs 75 per month importance of secondary and tertiary prevention, in
in Assam to Rs 300 per month in West Bengal and combination with primary screening or prevention for this
Rajasthan (131). An Old Age Social and Income Security population (134).
(OASIS) project was launched to comprehensively examine
Among older individuals, categories of conditions,
policy questions, connected with Old Age Income Security.
occurrences, and illnesses exist in a variety of
Travel related concessions I facilities are provided to the
combinations, and risk factors as well as disease sequelae
older people by Indian Railways, Indian Airlines and State
often overlap. Examples of conditions potentially amenable
Transport Corporations. Health care is being provided to
to prevention in older persons are outlined in Table 32.
the older persons through Bhavishya Arogya Mediclaim,
and Rural Group Life Insurance Schemes. Income Tax Many factors that contribute to decrements of ageing
Concessions are also available to the elderly citizens. and the burden of illness are potentially responsive to
preventive interventions. In view of this evidence, the
On 19th Nov. 2007, the Indira Gandhi National Old Age
design of preventive strategies appropriate to this
Pension Scheme was launched to provide monthly pension
population becomes crucial for the utility of preventive
to people over 65 years and living below poverty line. The
care, both in reducing risk and maintaining functional
scheme is to cover about 1.57 crore people, the central
government is to provide a monthly pension of Rs. 200 to independence.
each beneficiary and the state governments are expected to Much care is bestowed upon the old people in Western
contribute an equal amount. societies by providing Social Welfare measures such as
In India, HelpAge India is the largest voluntary national assistance, supplementary pensions, home
organization working for the cause and care of the services, home care services, meals on wheels services, old
disadvantaged older people. In the 26 years since its folk's homes, sitters-up service and provision of services of
inception, it has made an impact on the lives of nearly health visitors. By providing these services, the State
6 million senior citizens, through 3,084 projects. HelpAge ensures that the years of retirement of those who have
India supports the following programmes to make life easier worked hard in its service shall be free from anxiety, want
for older people : (a) Free cataract operations; (b) Mobile and boredom.
medicare units; (c) Income generation and micro-credit;
(d) Old-age homes and day-care centres; (e) Adopt-a-Gran TABLE 32
(grand parent); and (f) Disaster mitigation. Areas potentially amenable to preventive health
care in the elderly
Implication of the ageing population in terms Primary Secondary Tertiary
of preventive and social medicine
Health habits Screening for Rehabilitation
The ageing population is both a medical and sociological
-smoking - hypertension physical deficits
problem. It makes a greater demand on the health services
of a community. In rapidly greying world, healthy ageing is -alcohol abuse -diabetes - cognitive deficits.
vital for countries. It is a prerequisite for economic growth. -obesity periodontal disease - functional deficits
The predicted explosion of non-communicable diseases like -nutrition - dental caries ·
cardiovascular diseases, cancer, and depression in the ever -physical activity - sensory impairment
increasing number of older persons globally, will result in -sleep - medication side-effects Caretaker support
enormous human and social costs unless preventive action
Coronary heart - colo-rectal cancer Introduction of
is taken. disease risk breast cancer, support necessary
The alteration of the age pyramid, however, poses factors cervical cancer to prevent loss of
significant new challenges for governments, societies, and prostatic cancer autonomy
families in the 21st century. Ageing developing countries Immunization - nutritionally-induced
are slated to face a heavy double burden of infectious and -influenza anaemias
non-communicable diseases, yet they often lack significant -pneumovax - depression, stress
resources, including comprehensive ageing policies, to -tetanus urinary incontinence
cope. Industrialized countries, on the otherhand, were podiatric problems
fortunate enough to become affluent before they became
old (131). Injury prevention - fall risk·
latrogenesis - tuberculosis
The modern philosophy is that the old must continue to prevention (high-risk)
take their share in the responsibilities and in the enjoyment
of the privileges, which are an essential feature of remaining Osteoporosis - syphilis (high-risk)
prevention - stroke prevention
an active member of the community. The community must - myocardial infarction
assist the aged to fight the triple evils of poverty, loneliness
and ill-health. Source: (134)
ANNEXUREA
ANNEXURE A (135)
ASSESS AND CLASSIFY THE SICK YOUNG INFANT
AGE UPTO 2 MONTHS
The steps to assess and classify a sick young infant during an initial visit are :
• Check for signs of possible bacterial infection. Then classify the young infant based on the clinical signs found.
• Ask about diarrhoea. If the infant has diarrhoea, assess for related signs. Classify the young infant for
dehydration. Also classify for persistent diarrhoea and dysentery if present.
• Check for feeding problem or low weight. This may include assessing breast-feeding. Then classify feeding.
• Check the young infant's immunization status.
• Assess any other problems.
If you find a reason that a young infant needs urgent referral, you should continue the assessment.
ASSESS CLASSIFY IDENTIFY TREATMENT
ASK THE MOTHER WHAT THE YOUNG INFANT'S
PROBLEMS ARE USE ALL BOXES A child with a pink classification needs
• Determine if this is an initial or follow-up visit for this problem. THAT MATCH urgent attention, complete the assessment
If follow-up visit, use the follow-up instructions on the INFANT'S and pre-referral treatment immediately so
bottom of this chart. SYMPTOMS referral is not delayed.
c I 35.5-36.4 C TEMPE-
RATURE
skin to skin contact for one
hour and RE-ASSESS.
» Treat to prevent low blood
sugar.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
• present.
Dehydration SEVERE Treat dehydration before
1G
)>
PERSISTENT referral unless the child has
diarrhoea DEHYDRATION another severe classification.
14days~ )> Refer to hospital.
Ifb/~• stool.
Blood in the DYSENTERY )> Treat for 5 days with
cotrlmoxazole.
in stool /
)> Follow-up in 2 days.
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
.
If the child has LOW MALARIA RISK
measles now or ulcers. Are they deep
within the last and extensive ? - Any general > Give first dose of IM quinine
3 months: • Look for pus draining
from the eye. Low ~ danger sign
or VERY SEVERE
after making a blood smear.
Ji> Give first dose of IV or IM
• Look for clouding of Malaria Risk / •
Stiff neck or FEBRILE chloramphenicol (if not
DISEASE possible, give oral amoxyclllln).
the cornea.
• Bulging
fontanelle.
Ji> Treat the child to prevent low
blood sugar.
> Give one dose of paracetamol
In clinic for high fever
(temp. as.s 0 c or above).
> Refer URGENTLY to hospital.
• Norunny > Give oral antimalarials for
nose.and No LOW malaria risk area, after
measles and making a blood smear.
No other MALARIA )> Give one dose of paracetamol
cause of in clinic for high fever
fever.
(temp. as.S°C or above).
)> Advise mother when to return
immediately.
> Follow-up in 2 days if fever persists.
> If fever is present every day for
more than 7 days, refer for
assessment.
• Runny nose > Give one dose of paracetamol
Present or In clinic for high fever
• Other cause FEVER (temp. 38.5°C or above).
MALARIA Ji> Advise mother when to return
of fever immediately.
Present** UNLIKELY
> Follow-up in 2 days if fever
persists.
Ji> If fever is present every day for
more than 7 days, refer for
assessment.
THEN CHECK FOR MALNUTRITION • Visible severe > Give single dose of Vitamin A.
wasting or SEVERE > Prevent low blood sugar.
• Oedemaof MALNUTRITION > Refer URGENTLY to hospital.
LOOK AND FEEL : Classify both feet. > While.referral is being
NUTRITIONA/ organized, warm the child.
• Look for visible severe wasting. STATUS > Keep the child warm on the
• Look for oedema of both feet.
way to hospital.
, •Very low VERY LOW > Assess and counsel for feeding.
• Determine weight for age.
weight for WEIGHT > Advise mother when to return
age. immediately.
>Follow-up in 30 days.
• Not very low NOT VERY > If child is less than 2 years old,
weight for age LOW WEIGHT assess the child's feeding and
and no other counsel the mother on· feeding.
signs of - If feeding problem, follow-up in
malnutrition. 5days.
> Advise mother when to return
immediately.
THEN CHECK FOR ANAEMIA • Severe SEVERE > Refer URGENTLY to hospital.
palmar pallor ANAEMIA
LOOK:
• Look for palmar pallor. Is it :
Classify ~
• Some palmar
pallor
ANAEMIA· > Give iron folic acid therapy
for 14 days.
ANAEMIA/
- Severe palmar pallor ? > Assess the child's feeding and
- Some palmar pallor? counsel the mother on feeding.
I - If feeding problem, follow-up
in5days.
> Advise mother when to return
immediately.
> Follow-up in 14 days.
* A child who needs to be immunized should be advised to go for immunization the day vaccines are available at AW/SC/PHC
**Hepatitis B to be given wherever included in the immunization schedule.
Treatment in the out-patient health facility of Saline at the clinic, give the solution intravenously to the
the sick child from age 2 months upto 5 years severely dehydrated child.
The sections of Plan C below describe the steps to
NO DEHYDRATION rehydrate a child intravenously. It includes the amounts of
IV fluid that should be given according to the age and weight
WHO Treatment Plan A of the child.
Plan A focuses on the three rules of home treatment: give - Start IV fluid immediately. If the child can drink, give
extra fluids, continue feeding, and advise the caretaker ORS by mouth while the drip is set up. Give 100 ml/kg
when to return to the doctor (if the child develops blood in Ringer's Lactate Solution (or, if not available, normal
the stool, drinks poorly, becomes sicker, or is not better in saline), divided as follows:
three days).
Fluids should be given as soon as diarrhoea starts; the Age First give Then give
child should take as much as s/he wants. Correct home 30 ml/kg in : 70 ml/kg in:
therapy can prevent dehydration in many cases. ORS may Infants 1 hour* 5 hours
be used at home to prevent dehydration. However, other (under 12 months)
fluids that are commonly available in the home may be less Children 30 minutes* 2112 hours
costly, more convenient and almost as effective. Most fluids (12 months upto 5 years)
that a child normally takes can also be used for home
therapy especially when given with food. * Repeat once if radial pulse is still very weak or not
Recommended home fluid should be : detectable.
Safe when given in large volumes. Very sweet tea, soft - Re-assess the child every 1-2 hours. If hydration
drinks, and sweetened fruit drinks should be avoided. status is not improving, give the IV drip more rapidly.
These are often hyperosmolar owing to their high Also give ORS (about 5 ml/kg/hour) as soon as
sugar content (less than 300 mOsm/L). They can the child can drink : usually after 3-4 hours (infants)
cause osmotic diarrhoea, worsening dehydration and or 1-2 hours (children).
hypernatraemia. Also to be avoided are fluids with - Re-assess an infant after 6 hours and a child after
purgative action and stimulants (e.g., coffee, some 3 hours. Classify dehydration. Then choose the
medicinal teas or infusions). appropriate plan (A, B or C) to continue treatment.
Easy to prepare. The recipe should be familiar and its Note:
preparation should not require much effort or time.
The required ingredients and measuring utensils If possible, observe the child at least 6 hours after
should be readily available and inexpensive. rehydration to be sure the mother can maintain
hydration giving the child ORS solution by mouth.
- Acceptable. The fluid should be one that the mother is
willing to give freely to a child with diarrhoea and that References
the child will readily accept.
1. WHO etc. (2014), Trends in Maternal Mortality : 1990 to 2013,
- Effective. Fluids that are safe are also effective. Most Estimates by WHO etc.
effective are fluids that contain carbohydrates and 2. Menon, M.K.K. (1975). J.Obs & Gynae. of India, XXXV, 113.
protein and some salt. However, nearly the same 3. WHO (1969). Report of Training Courses on Organization of MCH
result is obtained when fluids are given freely along Field Practice Programmes in Medical Colleges, SEA/MCH/56 Dec.
1969, New Delhi.
with weaning foods that contain salt.
4. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 600.
5. WHO (1977). World Health, May 1977, p. 25.
SOME DEHYDRATION 6. WHO (1977). WHO Chronicle, 31, 87.
7. UNICEF (2014), State of World's Children 2014.
WHO Treatment Plan B 8. Govt. of India (2010), Guidelines for Antenatal Care and Skilled
Give initial treatment with ORS over a period of four Attendance at Birth by ANM!LHV!SNS, Ministry of Health and Family
hours. The approximate amount of ORS required (in ml) can Welfare, New Delhi.
be calculated by multiplying the child's weight (in kg) 9. WHO, Save the Children etc. (2012), Born Too Soon, The Global
Action Report on Preterm Birth, 2012.
times 75; during these four hours, the mother slowly gives
10. WHO (1978). RiskApproachforMCHCare, WHO Offset Publication
the recommended amount of ORS by spoonfuls or sips. No.39.
Note: If the child is breastfed, breast-feeding should continue. 11. ICMR (1977). ICMR Bulletin, Dec. 1977.
12. Editorial (1973). Brit.Med.J. 1, 370.
After four hours, the child is re-assessed and re-classified
13. Klina, J. et al (1980) Lancet, 2: 176-180.
for dehydration, and feeding should begin; resuming feeding
14. Davis, R.P. et al (1981) Pregnancy and alcohol Current Problems in
early is important to provide required amounts of potassium Obst and Gynaecology 4 (6) 2-48, Feb 1981.
and glucose. When there are no signs of dehydration, the 15. Harlops, Shiono, PH (1980) Lancet2: 173-6.
child is put on Plan A. If there is still some dehydration, Plan 16. Carswell, F. et al (1970). Lancet, 1, 1241.
B should be repeated. If the child now has severe 17. Noble, J.M. (1974). The Practitioner, 212, 657.
dehydration, the child should be put on Plan C. 18. King, A and Nicol, C. (1969). Venereal Diseases, 2nd Ed., Bailliere
Tindal and Cassel.
SEVERE DEHYDRATION 19. Sheridan, MD (1964), BMJ 2: 536.
20. Paula A. Braveman and E. Tarimo, WHO (1994), Screening in
Plan C - Treat Severe Dehydration Quickly Primary Health Care, Setting priorities with limited resources.
21. Department of Family Planning, Ministry of Health, Govt. of India
If you can give intravenous (IV) treatment and you have (1971). Plan of Operation for the A// India Hospital (Postpartum)
acceptable solutions such as Ringer's Lactate or Normal Family Planning Programme.
II
22.
1~------
PREVENTIVE MEDICINE IN OBSTETRICS, PAEDIATRICS AND GERIATRICS
,hfµ~~~i!J~~;;'ij'i4Ui~rl!l~i!li
"What people eat is not calories· but food, and consideration of fads, flavours and
variations of appetite can make nonsense of the dietician's theories"
Nutrition may be defined as the science of food and its attract international attention (3) as a cause of social
relationship to health. It is concerned primarily with the part problems. International activities in the field of nutrition
played by nutrients in body growth, development and initiated by the League of Nations, later continued by FAO,
maintenance (1). The word Nutrient or "food factor" is used WHO and UNICEF form a striking part of the story.
for specific dietary constituents such as proteins, vitamins Significant advances have been made during the past two
and minerals. Dietetics is the practical application of the decades. The association of nutrition with infection,
principles of nutrition; it includes the planning of meals for immunity, fertility, maternal and child health and family
the well and the sick. Good nutrition means "maintaining a health have engaged scientific attention. More recently, a
nutritional status that enables us to grow well and enjoy great deal of interest has been focussed on the role of dietary
good health" (2). The subject of nutrition is very extensive. factors in the pathogenesis of non-communicable diseases
Since our concern is with community aspects of nutrition, such as coronary heart disease, diabetes and cancer.
the subject will be dealt with in five sections : dietary
constituents, nutritional requirements, assessment of It has been said that most nutrition scientists are far more
nutritional status, nutritional problems in public health and familiar with rats than with humans. Of greater significance
nutritional programmes in India. during recent years is that the science of nutrition has moved
out of the laboratory and linked itself to epidemiology. This
Changing concepts . association has given birth to newer concepts in nutrition
such as epidemiological assessment of nutritional status of
Through centuries, food has been recognized as important communities, nutritional and dietary surveys, nutritional
for human beings, in health and disease. The history of man surveillance, nutritional and growth monitoring, nutritional
to a large extent has been a struggle to obtain food. Until the rehabilitation, nutritional indicators and nutritional
turn of the nineteenth century the science of nutrition had a interventions - all parts of what is broadly known as
limited range. Protein, carbohydrate and fat had been nutritional epidemiology. Epidemiological methods are
recognized early in the 19th century as energy-yielding foods now increasingly used not only in the elucidation of disease
and much attention was paid to their metabolism and aetiology and identification of risk factors of disease, but
contribution to energy requirements (3). The discovery of also in the planning and evaluation of nutritional
vitamins "rediscovered" the science of nutrition. Between the programmes. With these newer concepts and newer
two World Wars, research on protein gained momentum. By approaches, nutritional science has become more dynamic.
about 1950, all the presently known vitamins and essential Another concept that has emerged in recent years is that
amino acids had been discovered. Nutrition gained nutrition is the cornerstone of socio-economic development,
recognition as a scientific discipline, with roots in physiology and that nutritional problems are not just medical problems
and biochemistry. In fact nutrition was regarded as a branch but are "multifactorial" with roots in many other sectors of
of physiology and taught as such to medical students. development such as education, demography, agriculture and
Great advances have been made during the past 50 years rural development. It has become apparent that lasting
in knowledge of nutrition and in the practical application of improvement in the health and nutritional status of people can
that knowledge. Specific nutritional diseases were identified be brought about only through a successful attack on the basic
and technologies developed to control them, as for example, problems of poverty and injustice. The old concept that the
protein energy malnutrition, endemic goitre, nutritional health sector alone is responsible for all nutritional ills of the
anaemia, nutritional blindness and diarrhoeal diseases. community has faded away. It is now realized that a broad
While attention was concentrated on nutritional deficiency intersectoral and integrated approach of sectors of
diseases during the first decades of the century, the science of development is needed to tackle today's nutritional problems.
nutrition was extending its influence into other fields - In the global campaign of Health for All, promotion of
agriculture, animal husbandry, economics and sociology. proper nutrition is one of the eight elements of primary
This led to "green revolution" and "white revolution" in India health care (4). Nutritional indicators (5) have been
and increased food production. However, studies of the diets developed to monitor "Health for All". Greater emphasis is
and state of nutrition of people in India showed that poorer now placed on integrating nutrition into primary health care
sections of the population continued to suffer from systems whenever possible, and formulation of national
malnutrition despite increased food production. One result dietary goals to promote health and nutritional status of
was that for the first time the problem of nutrition began to families and communities.
PROTEINS
TABLE 2 Animal fats with few exceptions like cod liver oil and sardine
Approximate fatty acid composition of dietary fats and oils oil are mostly saturated fats.
consumed in India(% of total fatty acids) (b) VEGETABLE FATS : Some plants store fat in their
seeds, e.g., groundnut, mustard, sesame, coconut, etc. They
Fatsioils · SFAs MtJFAs LA· ALA are sources of vegetable oils.
IHigh (medium chain) SFAs (c) OTHER SOURCES : Small quantities of fat (invisible
fat) are found in most other foods such as cereals, pulses,
Coconut 92 6 2 nuts and vegetables. For example, rice carries 3 per cent of
Palm kernel 83 15 2 fat, wheat 3 per cent, jowar 4 per cent and bajra 6.5 per
Butter/Ghee 68 29 2 1 cent. Large cereal consumption, as in India, provides
J High SFAs & MUFAs considerable amounts of "invisible fat". Moreover, the body
IPalmolein 39 46 11 <0.5 can convert carbohydrate into fat.
I High MUFAs & Moderate LA
Visible and invisible fats
Groundnut 19 41 32 <0.5
Rice bran 17 43 38 1 "Visible" fats are those that are separated from their
Sesame 16 41 42 <0.5 natural source, e.g., ghee (butter} from milk, cooking oils
I High LA from oil-bearing seeds and nuts. It is easy to estimate their
intake in the daily diet. "Invisible" fats are those which are
Cottonseed 24 29 48 1
not visible to the naked eye. They are present in almost
Corn 12 35 50 1
every article of food, e.g., cereals, pulses, nuts, milk, eggs,
Safflower 9 13 75
etc. It is difficult to estimate their intake. In fact, the major
Sunflower 12 22 62
contribution to total fat intake is from invisible sources
ILA&ALA rather than visible sources as cereals and pulses constitute
Soya bean 14 24 53 7 the bulk of Indian diet.
Cano la 6 60 22 10
Edible plant foods have a low content of fat and
Mustard/rapeseed 4 65 15 14
saturated fatty acids but they are good source of mono-
Flax-seed 10 21 16 53 unsaturated fatty acids and poly-unsaturated fatty acids. In
I High TFAs most cereals, millets, pulses and legumes, fat content ranges
Vanaspati 46 49 4 between 1.5 to 3 per cent. In cereals, millets and most oil
seeds, linoleic acid is the major fatty acid whereas pulses,
SFA Saturated fatty acids; MUFA - Mono-unsaturated fatty acids;
LA Linoleic acid; ALA - alpha-linolenic acid; legumes, green leafy vegetables and some oil seeds (e.g.
TFA trans-fatty acids. soyabean, rapeseed/mustard and flaxseed) and fenugreek
Source: (9)
are good sources of both linoleic acid and alpha-linolenic
acid. Animal foods like butter, ghee, whole milk cream, fatty
Linoleic acid is abundantly found in vegetable oils. The cheese and fatty meats provide cholesterol and high amount
dietary sources of EFA are as shown in Table 3. of saturated fatty acids, and are natural source of trans-fatty
acids. Lean meats have a fairly high content of long chain
TABLE 3 poly-unsaturated fatty acids (PUFA). Poultry meat contains
Dietary sources of EFA less fat and cholesterol and have high amount of PUFA
including long chain PUFA. Egg has high cholesterol but are
Essential Per cent good source of linoleic acid, alpha-linolenic acid and
fatty acids Dietary source' content docosahexaenoic acid (DHA}. Fish has less fat, saturated
Linoleic acid Safflower oil 73 fatty acids and cholesterol but are good source of PUFAs.
Corn oil 57 The total quantity of invisible fat and its fatty acid
Sunflower oil 56 composition depends on the kind of diet consumed (9).
Soyabean oil 51 Vegetable oil used in cooking is the major type of visible
Sesame oil 40 fat consumed; vanaspati and ghee are the other sources.
Groundnut oil 39 India has a wide range of edible vegetable oils (groundnut,
Mustard oil 15 rapeseed/mustard, soyabean, sunflower, sesame, safflower,
Palm oil 9 ricebran, cottonseed and linseed). In India, the type of
Coconut oil 2 vegetable oil consumed varies from one part of the country
to the other. Vanaspati (PHVO) promoted as vegetable ghee
Arachidonic acid Meat, eggs 0.5-0.3
is used as a substitute for ghee and is used in preparing
Milk (fat) 0.4-0.6 commercially fried, processed, ready to eat, packaged,
Linolenic acid Soyabean oil 7 frozen, pre-mixed foods and street foods. In recent years,
Leafy greens Varied there is change in choice of cooking oils in the urban
Eichosapentaenoic acid Fish oil 10 population. The daily intake of visible fat in rural India is
about the same as reported about 25 years back (9).
Source: (11)
Functions
Sources
Fats have always been equated with calories. They are
The dietary sources of fats may be classified as : high energy foods, providing as much as 9 kcal for every
(a) ANIMAL FATS : The major sources of animal fats are gram. By supplying energy, fats spare proteins from being
ghee, butter, milk, cheese, eggs, and fat of meat and fish. used for energy. Besides providing energy, fats serve as
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
vehicles for fat-soluble vitamins. Fats in the body support Fats and disease
viscera such as heart, kidney and intestine; and fat beneath (a) OBESITY : A diet, rich in fat, can pose a threat to
the skin provides insulation against cold. Without fat, food is human health by encouraging obesity. In fat people, adipose
limited in palatability. tissue may increase upto 30 per cent. (b) PHRENODERMA :
It is only recently that the "non-calorie" roles of fats have Deficiency of essential fatty acids in the diet is associated with
been discovered. For example vegetable fats are rich sources rough and dry skin, a condition known as phrenoderma or
of essential fatty acids which are needed by the body for "toad skin". This condition is reported in Kerala, Karnataka
growth, for structural integrity of the cell membrane and and Gujarat (14). It is characterized by horny papular
decreased platelet adhesiveness. Diets rich in EFA have eruptions on the posterior and lateral aspects of limbs and on
been reported to reduce serum cholesterol and low-density the back and buttocks. Phrenoderma can be cured rapidly by
lipoproteins (12). Poly-unsaturated fatty acids are precursors the administration of linseed or safflower oil which are rich in
of prostaglandin - a group of compounds, now recognized EFA, along with vitamins of the B-complex group.
as "local hormones"; they play a major role in controlling (c) CORONARY HEART DISEASE : High fat intake (i.e.,
many of the physiological functions of the body such as dietary fat representing. 40 per cent or over of the energy
vascular haemostasis, kidney function, acid secretion in supply and containing a high proportion of saturated fats) has
stomach, gastro-intestinal motility, lung physiology and been identified as a major risk factor for CHD (15).
reproduction. Cholesterol is essential as a component of Epidemiological studies indicate that LDL and VLDL
membranes and nervous tissue and is a precursor for the fractions are atherogenic and HDL exerts a protective effect
synthesis of steroid hormones and bile acids. Thus fats and against the development of artherosclerosis. There is
oils are useful to the body in several ways. evidence indicating an inverse relationship between EFA
intake and CHO mortality. (d) CANCER : In recent years,
Hydrogenation there has been some evidence that diets high in fat increase
When vegetable oils are hydrogenated under conditions the risk of colon cancer and breast cancer (16). (e) OTHERS:
of optimum temperature and pressure in the presence of a The skin lesions of kwashiorkor and those induced by EFA
catalyst, the liquid oils are converted into semi-solid and deficiency are similar. The possible association between the
solid fat. The resulting hydrogenated fat is known as skin lesions of kwashiorkor and EFA deficiency has attracted
"vanaspati" or vegetable ghee, which is a popular cooking attention (18).
medium in India. The WHO/FAO Expert Group on diet, nutrition and
During the process of hydrogenation, unsaturated fatty prevention of chronic diseases endorse that qualitative
acids are converted into saturated acids and the EFA content composition of fats in the diet has a significant role to play in
is drastically reduced. The main advantage of vanaspati is its modifying risk factors of CVD and set the following ranges
ghee-like consistency and its keeping quality even in hot for population nutrient goals (%of Energy) : total fat, 15-30
humid climates. Since vanaspati is lacking in fat-soluble (at least 20%E (energy) is consistent with good health);
vitamins, it is fortified with vitamins A and D by government Saturated fatty acids less than 10 per cent; PUFAs 6-10 per
regulation to the extent of 2500 IU of vitamin A and 1 75 IU cent; n-6 about 5-8 per cent; n-3 about 1-2 per cent; Trans-
of vitamin D per 100 grams. fatty acids less than 1 per cent; MUFAs by difference, and
cholesterol less than 300 mg a day (9).
Trans-fatty acids The FAO/WHO expert consultation on fats and fatty acids
Trans-fatty acids are geometrical isomers of Cis- in human nutrition held in November 2008 in Geneva,
unsaturated fatty acids that adapt a saturated fatty acid like Switzerland, reviewed the scientific evidence on nutrient
configuration. Partial hydrogenation, the process used to intake values for total fat and fatty acids for different life
increase shelf-life of poly-unsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs) stages. It also assessed the risks to adequate growth,
create trans fatty acids and also removes the critical double development and maintenance of health and provided
bonds in essential fatty acids. Metabolic studies have recommendations for infants, children, adults and for
demonstrated that trans-fatty acids render the plasma lipid women during pregnancy and lactation. Some of their
profile even more atherogenic than saturated fatty acids, by conclusions and recommendations are as follows :
not only elevating LDL cholesterol but also by decreasing (a) There is convincing evidence on the following :
HDL cholesterol. Several large cohort studies have found
Energy balance is critical to maintain healthy body
that intake of trans-fatty acids increases the risk of coronary
weight and ensure optimal nutrient intakes,
heart disease (13). It takes years for trans fatty acids to be
regardless of macronutrient distribution of energy as
flushed from the body. Deep fried fast foods, cake mixes,
% total fat and % total carbohydrates.
cereals and energy bars, chips and crackers and whipped
toppings, packaged cookies and candy, packaged Saturated fatty acids (SFAs)
doughnuts, pies and cakes are major sources of trans-fatty (1) Replacing SFAs with PUFAs decreases LDL
acids. It is better to look for "partially hydrogenated oil" on cholesterol concentration and the total/HDL
the label of any packaged food. cholesterol ratio. A similar but lesser effect is
achieved by replacing these SFAs with MUFAs.
Refined oils
(2) Replacing SFAs with carbohydrates decreases both
Refining is usually done by treatment with steam, alkali, LDL and HDL cholesterol concentration but does not
etc. Refining and deodourization of raw oils is done mainly change the total/HDL cholesterol ratio.
to remove the free fatty acids and rancid materials which
may be present in them. Refining does not bring about any (3) Replacing SFAs with trans-fatty acids (TFAs)
change in the unsaturated fatty acid content of the oil. It decreases HDL cholesterol and increases the total/
only improves the quality and taste of oils. Refined oils are HDL cholesterol ratio.
costly. (4) Considering the data from epidemiological studies on
FATS
morbidity and mortality due to coronary heart (b) Oil containing high LA + oil containing moderate or
disease (CHO) and controlled clinical trials (using low LA
CHO events and death), it was also agreed that Sunflower/Safflower + Palmolein/Palm oil/Olive
replacing SFAs with PUFAs decrease the risk of CHO.
Safflower/Sunflower + Groundnut/Sesame/Ricebran/
MUFAs (Monounsaturated fatty acids) Cottonseed
(1) Replacing carbohydrates with MUFAs increases HOL 2. Limit use of butter/ghee
cholesterol concentrations. 3. Avoid use of PHVO as medium for cooking/frying.
(2) Replacing SFA with MUFA reduces LOL cholesterol 4. Replacements for PHVO
concentration and total/HOL cholesterol ratio.
Frying : oils which have higher thermal stability - palm
PUFAs (Polyunsaturated fatty acids) oil/palmolein, sesame, ricebran, cottonseed - single/blends
Linoleic acid (LA) and alpha-linolenic acid (ALA) are (home/commercial)
indispensable since they cannot be synthesized by
humans. Minimum intake levels for essential fatty
Fat requirements
acids to prevent deficiency symptoms are estimated Recommendations for dietary fats for Indians have been
to be 2.5% ELA plus 0.5% E ALA. revised taking into account the recent FAO and WHO
recommendations for : (1) total fat, individual fatty acids
Trans-fatty acids (TFAs) and health promoting non-glyceride components; (2) source
TFAs from commercial partially hydrogenated· of dietary fats in Indians; and (3) availability of fat. The
vegetable oils (PHVO) increase CHO risk factors and recommendations are directed towards meeting the
CHO events to a greater extent than what was requirements of optimal foetal and infant growth and
thought earlier. development, maternal health and for combating chronic
energy deficiency in children and adults, and diet related
(b) Based on epidemiologic studies and randomized
non-communicable diseases in adults.
controlled trials of CHO events, 6% has been fixed as the
minimum recommended consumption level of total Taking into account the unfavourable effect of low fat-
PUFAs for lowering LOL and total cholesterol high carbohydrate diets and the energy requirement set on
concentrations, increasing HOL cholesterol the basis of age, physiological status and physical activity,
concentrations and decreasing the risk of CHO events. the minimum intakes of visible fat for Indian adults range
between 20-40 g/day. The minimum level of total fat should
(c) Whilst ALA may have individual properties in their own be 20 per cent of energy. To furnish 20 per cent of total
right, there is evidence that the n-3 long chain PUFAs energy, diet of pregnant and lactating mothers should
may contribute to the prevention of CHO and possibly contain at least 30 grams of visible fat (9). For further details
other degenerative diseases of ageing. see Table 28.
(d) Based on both the scientific evidence and conceptual
limitations, there is no compelling scientific rationale for CARBOHYDRATES
recommending a specific ratio of n-6 to n-3 fatty acids or
LA to ALA, especially if intakes of n-6 and n-3 fats lie The third major component of food is carbohydrate,
within the recommendations established .. which is the main source of energy, providing 4 kcals per
(e) In promoting the removal of TFA, which are gram. Carbohydrate is also essential for the oxidation of fats
predominantly a by-product of industrial processing and for the synthesis of certain non-essential amino acids.
(partial hydrogenation) usually in the form of PHVO, There are three main sources of carbohydrates, viz.,
particular attention must be given to what would be their starches, sugar and cellulose. Starch is basic to the human
replacement; this is a challenge for the food industry. diet. It is found in abundance in cereals, roots and tubers.
Sugars comprise monosaccharides (glucose, fructose and
Choice of cooking oils (9) galactose) and disaccharides (sucrose, lactose and maltose).
These free sugars are highly water soluble and easily
Taking into account the contribution of various fatty acids assimilated. Free sugars along with starches constitute a key
from all foods (visible fats and invisible fats), the complete source of energy. Cellulose which is the indigestible
dependence on just one vegetable oil does not ensure the component of carbohydrate with scarcely any nutritive
recommended intake of fatty acids for optimal health. To value, contributes to dietary fibre.
achieve intake of individual fatty acids, the type of visible
fats and correct combination of vegetable oils to be used are The carbohydrate reserve (glycogen) of a human adult is
as follows: about 500 g. This reserve is rapidly exhausted when a man
is fasting. If the dietary carbohydrates do not meet the
1. Use correct combination/blend of 2 or more vegetable energy needs of the body, protein and glycerol from dietary
oils (1:1) and endogenous sources are used by the body to maintain
(a) Oil containing LA + oil containing both LA and ALA glucose haemostasis.
Groundnut/Sesame/Rice bran/Cottonseed + Mustard/
Rapeseed Glycaemic index (9)
Groundnut/Sesame/Rice bran/Cottonseed + Canola Glycaemic index of a food is defined by the area under
the two-hour blood glucose response curve (AUC) following
Groundnut/Sesame/Rice bran/Cottonseed + Soyabean the ingestion of a fixed portion of test carbohydrate (usually
Palmolein + Soyabean 50 g) as a proportion (%) of the AUC of the standard (either
Safflower/Sunflower + Palm oil/Palmolein + Mustard/ glucose or white bread).
Rapeseed Some foods containing different fractions of soluble and
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
insoluble fibres favour slow release of sugar into small nutraceuticals. Mostly complex carbohydrates, such as
intestine and its absorption into blood (reduced peak and polysaccharides i.e. cellulose, haemicellulose, pectin and a
prolonged rate). They are therefore termed low glycaemic variety of gums, mucilages form the fibre.
index foods as compared to high glycaemic foods with readily Dietary fibre is known to be associated with reduced
digestible and absorbable sugar. The concept has practical incidence of coronary heart disease. The mechanism of its
utility in management of diabetes and control of obesity.The action is attributed to its binding to bile salts and preventing
classification of foods according to GI is as follows : its reabsorption and thus reducing cholesterol level in
circulation. The fibre, particularly the gum and pectin, when
Classification GI range Examples ingested with a diet, are reported to reduce post-prandial
LowGl 55 or less most fruit and vegetables (except
glucose level in blood. Recent studies have shown that gum
potatoes, watermelon and sweet present in fenugreek seeds, which contains 40 per cent gum,
·corn), whole grains, pasta foods, is most effective in reducing blood glucose and cholesterol
beans, lentils levels as compared to other gums.
I Medium GI 56-69 sucrose, basmati rice, brown rice Fibre have no metabolic effects. However, too much of
70 or corn flakes, baked potato, some white
fibre can decrease the absorption of valuable micronutrients.
High GI
more rice varieties (e.g. jasmine), white There is conflicting evidence as to whether fibre tends to
bread, candy bar and syrupy foods. bind some vitamins and minerals like calcium, magnesium,
iron and zinc, and reduce their bio-availability. People who
GI - Glycaemic index eat well-balanced diet obtain enough roughage. Considering
the qualitative and quantitative decrease in fibre content of
DIETARY FIBRE diet over the past many decades, an increase in dietary
fibre, particularly from cereals emerge as a
By definition "Dietary fibre is the remnants of the edible recommendation. Intake in excess of 60 g of fibre over a day
part of plants and analogous carbohydrates that are resistant can reduce the nutrient absorption and cause bowel
to digestion and absorption in the human small intestine irritation (9). A daily intake of about 40 grams of dietary
with complete or partial fermentation in the human large fibre per 2000 kcal is desirable. The actual quantity of fibre
intestine". It includes polysaccharides, oligosaccharides, intake depends upon the nature of cereals, pulses, whole
lignin and associated plant substances. Dietary fibre exhibits grain, vegetables and millets used. The total fibre content of
one or more of either laxation (faecal bulking and softening; common foods are as shown in Table 4.
increased frequency; and or regularity), blood cholesterol
attenuation, and or blood glucose attenuation. Organic TABLE 4
acids (butyric acid) and polyols (sorbitol) are also considered Different dietary fibre fractions in selected Indian foods
as part of fibre. Animal foods do not contain any fibre.
Food Group Food Item Fibre content Soluble
g/100 g edible portion . (%
Type and sources
Crude TDF* Soluble TDF*)
Dietary fibres have been characterized by its source, e.g., fibre
cereal, vegetable and fruits or its solubility in water - soluble
(partly or fully) or insoluble. Both characters of solubility are Cereals Rice 0.2 4.11 0.92 22.4
essential for health promotion. Digestibility of fibre is Wheat 0.3 12.48 2.84 22.7
determined by physiochemical and structural properties of Bajra 1.2 11.33 2.19 19.3
the dietary component and the process used. When exposed Maize 2.7 11.54 1.65 14.2
to longer duration of degradative conditions in large Jowar 1.6 9.67 1.64 17.0
intestine, more fibre is digested. It forms the substance for Ragi 3.6 11.85 0.89 7.50
fermentation by intestinal microbes. It is through this Pulses, dhals Lentil 0.7 10.31 2.04 19.8
mechanism that part of energy from resistant starch is Chick pea 1.2 15.30 2.56 . 16.7
rendered available. Apart from the energy yielding reactions Pigeon pea 0.9 9.14 2.33 25.4
during digestion, at different pH, the action of enzymes on Green gram 0.8 8.23 1.69 20.5
dietary fibres promotes interaction between nutrients. It also Vegetables Cluster beans 3.2 5.7 1.6 28.0
changes the pattern of microbes colonizing the colon and Brinjal 1.3 6.3 1.7 27.0
thus the metabolic products of such fermentation over the Cabbage - 2.8 0.8 28.6
time. Vegetarians may have different digestion pattern than Cauliflower 1.2 3.7 1.1 30.3
that of the non-vegetarians and thus derive different health Bhendi 1.2 3.6 1.0 26.9
benefits. This knowledge of probiotics characterized by
Roots and Potato 0.4 1.7 0.6 33.5
helpful microbes and prebiotics (substrates promoting the
Tubers Carrot 1.2 4.4 1.4 30.6
colonization of probiotic strains) has opened up new areas
Onion 0.6 2.5 0.8 32.0
for research (9).
Original estimates of fibre covered all that was insoluble I Green leafy Spinach 0.6 2.5 0.7 28.0
Vegetables Amaranth 1.0 4.0 0.9 22.5
in boiling water or in dilute acid and alkali conditions. It was
reported as 'crude fibre', which may include all structural Fruits Orange 0.3 1.1 0.5 45.5
fibre, cellulose, lignin and haemicellulose. It is related to Banana 0.4 1.8 0.7 38.9
digestibility and has the property of holding water and Apple 1.0 3.2 0.9 28.1
swelling properties of the diet. It adds to the bulk of the Tomato 0.8 1.7 0.5 28.5
food, favours satiety, increases transit time of the food in the
gut and is an active substrate in the large intestine for release * Total dietary fibre
of important functional components like organic acids and Source: (9)
VITAMINS
VITAMINS the richest natural sources of retinal (Table 5), but they are
generally used as nutritional supplements rather than as
Vitamins are a class of organic compounds categorized as food sources.
essential nutrients. They are required by the body in very
(b) PLANT FOODS: The cheapest source of vitamin A is
small amounts. They fall in the category of micronutrients.
green leafy vegetables such as spinach and amaranth which
Vitamins do not yield energy but enable the body to use
are found in great abundance in nature throughout the year.
other nutrients. Since the body is generally unable to The darker the green leaves, the higher its carotene content.
synthesize them (at least in sufficient amounts) they must be Vitamin A also occurs in most green and yellow fruits and
provided by food. A well balanced diet supplies in most vegetables (e.g., papaya, mango, pumpkin) and in some
instances the vitamin needs of a healthy person. roots (e.g., carrots). The most important carotenoid is beta-
Vitamins are divided into two groups : (a) fat soluble carotene which has the highest vitamin A activity. Carotenes
vitamins, viz., vitamins A, D, E and K; and (b) water soluble are converted to vitamin A in the small intestine. This action
vitamins, viz., vitamins of the B-group and vitamin C. Each is poorly accomplished in malnourished children and those
vitamin has a specific function to perform and deficiency of suffering from diarrhoea.
any particular vitamin may lead to specific deficiency (c) FORTIFIED FOODS : Foods fortified with vitamin A
diseases. For some vitamins (e.g., vitamin E), no deficiency (e.g., vanaspati, margarine, milk) can be an important
disease is yet known. The minimum intake for the source. Vitamin A content of selected foods is as given in
maintenance of health in respect of many of the vitamins has Table 5.
been determined, but the optimum intake remains somewhat
speculative. TABLE 5
Retinal content of selected foods
VITAMIN A .
Retiriol equivalents (RE)
(mcg/100 g)
"Vitamin N covers both a pre-formed vitamin, retinal,
and a pro-vitamin, beta carotene, some of which is Halibut liver oil 900,000 Carrot 1,167
converted to retinal in the intestinal mucosa (17). The Cod liver oil 18,000 Spinach 607
international units (IU) originally established for vitamin A Liver, Ox 16,500 Amaranth 515
and provitamin were discarded in 1954 and 1956 Butter 825 Green leaves 300
respectively (18). In 1960, the term "retinal" was introduced Margarine 900 Mango, ripe 313
for vitamin A 1 alcohol (which is available in crystalline Cheese 350 Papaya 118
form), but most workers prefer the older term vitamin A and Egg 140 Orange 25
the international unit. The international unit (IU) of Milk, Cow 38 Tomato 84
vitamin A is equivalent to 0.3 microgram of retinal Fish 40
(or 0.55 microgram of retinal palmitate).
Source : (20)
Some food composition tables give separate values for
retinal and beta-carotene. To convert these into a single The liver has an enormous capacity for storing vitamin A,
value, the term "retinal equivalent" (RE) has been mostly in the form of retinal palmitate. Under normal
conventionally adopted. The conversion can be done in the conditions, a well-fed person has sufficient vitamin A
following way. reserves to meet his needs for 6 to 9 months or more. Free
1 mcg of retinal 1 RE retinal is highly active but toxic and is therefore transported
1 mcg of rJ-carotene 0.167 mcg of RE in the blood stream in combination with retinal-binding
1 mcg of other carotenoids = 0.084 mcg of RE protein, which is produced by the liver. In severe protein
1 RE 3.333 IU of Vitamin A deficiency, decreased production of retinal-binding protein
prevents mobilization of liver retinal reserves.
Functions
Deficiency
Vitamin A participates in many bodily functions : (a) it is
indispensable for normal vision. It contributes to the The signs of vitamin A deficiency are predominantly
production of retinal pigments which are needed for vision ocular. They include nightblindness, conjunctiva) xerosis,
in dim light. (b) it is necessary for maintaining the integrity Bitot's spots, corneal xerosis and keratomalacia. The term
and the normal functioning of glandular and epithelial tissue "xerophthalmia" (dry eye) comprises all the ocular
which lines intestinal, respiratory and urinary tracts as well manifestations of vitamin A deficiency ranging from
as the skin and eyes. (c) it supports growth especially nightblindness to keratomalacia, Given below is a short
skeletal growth. (d) it is anti-infective; there is increased description of the ocular manifestations.
susceptibility to infection and lowered immune response in
vitamin A deficiency, and (e) it may protect against some (a) Nightblindness
epithelial cancers such as bronchial cancers, but the data are Lack of vitamin A, first causes nightblindness or inability
not fully consistent (19). However, the role of vitamin A at to see in dim light. The mother herself can detect this
the molecular level is not yet known. condition when her child cannot see in late evenings or find
Sources her in a darkened room. Nightblindness is due to
impairment in dark adaptation. Unless vitamin A intake is
Vitamin A is widely distributed in animal and plant foods increased, the condition may get worse, especially when
in animal foods as preformed vitamin A (retinal), and in children also suffer from diarrhoea and other infections.
plant foods as provitamins (carotenes).
(a) ANIMAL FOODS: Foods rich in retinal are liver, eggs, (b) Conjunctiva! xerosis
butter, cheese, whole milk, fish and meat. Fish liver oils are This is the first clinical sign of vitamin A deficiency. The
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
conjuctiva becomes dry and non-wettable. Instead of six-monthly dosing seems very adequate as measured by
looking smooth and shiny, it appears muddy and wrinkled. It clinical signs of deficiency (26).
has been well described as "emerging like sand banks at
receding tide" when the child ceases to cry (21). Assessment of vitamin A deficiency
(c) Bitot's spots The formulation of an effective intervention programme
for prevention of vitamin A deficiency (VAD) begins with the
Bitot's spots are triangular, pearly-white or yellowish, characterization of the problem. This is done by population
foamy spots on the bulbar conjunctiva on either side of the surveys employing both clinical and biochemical criteria.
cornea. They are frequently bilateral. Bitot's spots in young These surveys (prevalence surveys} are done on preschool
children usually indicate vitamin A deficiency. In older children (6 months to 6 years) who are at special risk.
individuals, these spots are often inactive sequelae of earlier The criteria recommended by WHO (18) are as given in
disease. Table 6. The presence of any one of the criteria should
be considered as evidence of a xerophthalmia problem in
(d) Corneal xerosis the community. -
This stage is particularly serious. The cornea appears
dull, dry and non-wettable and eventually opaque. It does TABLE 6
not have a moist appearance. In more severe deficiency Prevalence criteria for determining the
there may be corneal ulceration. The ulcer may heal leaving xerophthalmia problem
a corneal scar which can affect vision.
· Criteria Prevalence ln popul9tfon .
(e) Keratomalacia at risk (6 monthstO 6 yeaci)
Keratomalacia or liquefaction of the cornea is a grave Nightblindness more than 1 per cent
medical emergency. The cornea (a part or the whole) may Bitot's spots more than 0.5 per cent
become soft and may burst open. The process is a rapid Corneal xerosis/corneal more tha.n 0.01 per cent
one. If the eye collapses, vision is lost. ulceration/keratomalacia
Corneal ulcer more than 0.05 per cent
EXTRA-OCULAR MANIFESTATIONS
Serum retinol (less more than 5 per cent
These comprise follicular hyperkeratosis, anorexia and than 10 mcg/dl)
growth retardation which have long been recognized. They
are non-specific and difficult to quantify. Recent studies Source: (18)
seem to indicate that even mild vitamin A deficiency causes
an increase in morbidity and mortality due to respiratory Recommended allowances
and intestinal infection (22). Deficiency of vitamin A has The recommended daily intake of vitamin A is
recently been linked to child mortality (23). 600 micrograms for adults. The present expert committee
has modified the extent of conversion efficiency of 1:4 to 1:8
Treatment and has retained the previous recommendation on retinol
Vitamin A deficiency should be treated urgently. Nearly requirements for all age groups except pregnancy. The
all of the early stages of xerophthalmia can be reversed by committee recommends that a minimum of 50 per cent
administration of a massive dose (200,000 IU or 110 mg of retinol be drawn from animal sources (9). The detailed
retinol palmitate) orally on two successive days (24). All recommendations are as given in Table 7.
children with corneal ulcers should receive vitamin A
whether or not a deficiency is suspected. TABLE 7
Daily intake of vitamin A recommended by ICMR (2010)
Prevention
Retinol OR ~-carotene
Prevention and/or control takes two forms Group (mcg) .(mcg)*
(a) improvement of people's diet so as to ensure a regular Adults
and adequate intake of foods rich in vitamin A, and (b) Man 600 4,800
reducing the frequency and severity of contributory factors, Woman 600 4,800
e.g., PEM, respiratory tract infections, diarrhoea and Pregnancy 800 6,400
measles. Both are long term measures involving intensive Lactation 950 7,600
nutrition education of the public and community I
Infants Oto 6 months 350
participation. 6 to 12 months 350 2800 I
Since vitamin A can be stored in the body for 6 to 9 Children
1to6years 400 3,200
months and liberated slowly, a short term, simple technology 7 to 9 years 600 4,800
had been evolved by the National Institute of Nutrition at
Hyderabad (India) for community based intervention I
Adolescents
10 to 17 years 600 4,800
against nutritional blindness, which has subsequently been
adopted by other countries (25). The strategy is to * A conversion ratio of 1 : 8 is used
administer a single massive dose of 200,000 IU of vitamin A Source: (9)
in oil (retinof palmitate) orally every 6 months to preschool
children (1 year to 6 years), and half that dose (100,000 IU) Toxicity
to children between 6 months and one year of age (24). In An excess intake of retinol causes nausea, vomiting,
this way, the child would be, as it were "immunized" anorexia and sleep disorders followed by skin desquamation
against xerophthalmia. The protection afforded by and then an enlarged liver and papillar oedema. High
VITAMINS
intakes of carotene may colour plasma and skin, but do not TABLE 9
appear to be dangerous (19, 27). The teratogenic effects of Dietary sources of vitamin D
massive doses of vitamin A is the most recent focus of . ..
interest (28). µg/per.)OQg
Recommended allowances Niacin or nicotinic acid (83 ) is essential for the metabolism
of carbohydrate, fat and protein. It is also essential for the
The body content of thiamine is placed at 30 mg, and if normal functioning of the skin, intestinal and nervous
more than this is given it is merely lost in the urine (19). systems. This vitamin differs from the other vitamins of the
Patients on regular haemodialysis should routinely be given B-complex group in that an essential amino acid,
supplements of thiamine. Thiamine should also be given tryptophan serves as its precursor. Another characteristic of
prophylactically to people with persistent vomiting or niacin is that it is not excreted in urine as such, but is
prolonged gastric aspiration and those who go on long fasts. metabolized to at least 2 major methylated derivatives
For further details see Table 30. N-methyl-nicotinamide and N-methyl pyridones.
RIBOFLAVIN (8 2 ) Sources
Foods rich in niacin and/or tryptophan are liver, kidney
Riboflavin (Vitamin 8 2 ) is a member of the B-group meat, poultry, fish, legumes and groundnut. Milk is a poor
vitamins. It has a fundamental role in cellular oxidation. It source of niacin but its proteins are rich in tryptophan which
plays an important role in maintaining the integrity of is converted in the body into niacin (about 60 mg of
mucocutaneous structure. It is a co-factor in a number of tryptophan is required to result in 1 mg of niacin). In many
enzymes involved with energy metabolism. It is also cereals, especially maize, niacin occurs in "bound" form
involved in antioxidant activity, being a co-factor for the unavailable to the consumer.
enzymes like glutathione reductace and is required for the
metabolism of other vitamins like vitamin 86, niacin and Deficiency
vitamin K (9).
Niacin deficiency results in pellagra. The disease is
Sources characterized by three D's - diarrhoea, dermatitis and
dementia. In addition glossitis and stomatitis usually occur.
Its richest natural sources are milk, eggs, liver, kidney and The dermatitis is bilaterally symmetrical and is found only
green leafy vegetables. Meat and fish contain small amounts. on those surfaces of the body exposed to sunlight, such as
Cereals (whether whole or milled) and pulses are relatively back of the hands, lower legs, face and neck. Mental changes
poor sources but because of the bulk in which they are may also occur which include depression, irritability and
consumed, they contribute much of the riboflavin to Indian delirium.
diets. Germination increases the riboflavin content of pulses
and cereals. The riboflavin content of some common foods Once a formidable and widespread deficiency disease
is given in Table 11. among malnourished population subsisting mainly on maize
diets, pellagra has declined in all parts of the world. It is still
TABLE 11 prevalent in some parts of Western Asia and Southern Africa
Dietary sources of riboflavin where people subsist on maize and little else (38). While
pellagra is historically a disease of the maize-eating
Fotids of ve~etabl~
1
Foods of·· •
animal origin origin . population, it was reported in India in the Telangana area of
Andhra Pradesh in some segments of the population eating
Liver, sheep 1.70 Whole cereals 0.10-0.16 another cereal - that is jowar (Sorghum vulgare), these
Milk, cow's 0.19 Milled cereals 0.03-0.08 people consuming very little of milk or other foods of animal
Egg, hen 0.40 Pulses 0.21-0.32 origin. Studies by Gopalan and others (39) have shown that
amino- acid imbalance caused by an excess of leucine is the
Meat 0.14 Leafy vegetables 0.15-0.30 cause of pellagra in both jowar and maize eaters. Excess of
Source : (34) leucine appears to interfere in the conversion of tryptophan
to niacin.
Deficiency
Prevention
The most common lesion associated with riboflavin
deficiency is angular stomatitis, which occurs frequently in Pellagra is a preventable disease. A good mixed diet
malnourished children and its prevalence is used as an index containing milk and/or meat is universally regarded as an
of the state of nutrition of groups of children (3). Other essential part of prevention and treatment. Avoidance of
clinical signs suggestive (but not specific) include cheilosis, total dependence on maize or sorghum is an important
glossitis, nasolabial dyssebacia, etc. Hypo-riboflavinosis, preventive measure. Pellagra is a disease of poverty. Given
even when severe, seldom incapacitates the individual, but it modern knowledge and opportunities for economic,
may have subtle functional effects such as impaired agricultural and social development, there is every reason to
neuromotor function, wound healing and perhaps increased hope that this disease could be eliminated (3).
susceptibility to cataract (37). Riboflavin deficiency almost
always occurs in association with deficiencies of other Requirement
B-complex vitamins such as pyridoxine; it is usually a part of The recommended daily allowance is 6.0 mg/1000 kcal of
a multiple deficiency syndrome. energy intake (9). For further details see Table 30.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
VITAMIN C MINERALS
Vitamin C (ascorbic acid) is a water-soluble vitamin. It is More than 50 chemical elements are found in the human
the most sensitive of all vitamins to heat. Man, monkey and body, which are required for growth, repair and regulation of
guinea pig are perhaps the only species known to require vital body functions. These can be divided into three major
vitamin C in their diet. groups : (a) MAJOR MINERALS : These include calcium,
phosphorus, sodium, potassium and magnesium.
Functions (b) TRACE ELEMENTS: These are elements required by the
body in quantities of less than a few milligrams per day, e.g.
Vitamin C is a potent antioxidant and has an important iron, iodine, fluorine, zinc, copper cobalt, chromium,
role to play in tissue oxidation. It is needed for the formation manganese, molybdenum, selenium, nickel, tin, silicon and
of collagen, which accounts for 25 per cent of total body vanadium (41). Many more have been added to the list in
protein (7). Collagen provides a supporting matrix for the the last few years. (c) TRACE CONTAMINANTS WITH NO
blood vessels and connective tissue, and for bones and KNOWN FUNCTION : These include lead, mercury, barium,
cartilage. That explains why in vitamin C deficiency this boron, and aluminium.
support fails, with the result that local haemorrhages occur
and the bones fracture easily. Vitamin C, by reducing ferric Only a few mineral elements (e.g., calcium, phosphorus,
sodium, iron, fluorine, iodine) are associated with clearly
iron to ferrous iron, facilitates the absorption of iron from
recognizable clinical situations in man. For none of the other
vegetable foods. It inhibits nitrosamine formation by the
elements do we know with any certainty for their metabolic
intestinal mucosa. Other claims such as prevention of
roles, and much less the clinical effects of dietary
common cold and protection against infections ·are not insufficiency (42). The bio-availability of minerals such as
substantiated. iron and zinc may be low in a total vegetarian diet because
of the presence of substances such as phytic acid. Besides,
Sources large amounts of dietary fibre may interfere with proper
The main dietary sources of vitamin C are fresh fruits and absorption. Man is not likely to suffer from trace element
green leafy vegetables. Traces of vitamin C occur in fresh deficiencies as long as he is omnivorous. Surveys have
meat and fish but scarcely in cereals. Germinating pulses shown that mineral deficiencies are no greater among
contain good amounts. Roots and tubers contain small vegetarians than among non-vegetarians. In fact, man's
amounts. Amla or the Indian gooseberry is one of the richest need for trace elements has not yet been precisely
sources of vitamin C both in the fresh as well as in the dry determined. Trace elements should not be used as
condition. Guavas are another cheap but rich source of this dietary supplements, since excessive amounts can have
vitamin. The dietary sources of vitamin C are as given in injurious effects.
Table 12.
CALCIUM
TABLE 12
Dietary sources of vitamin C Calcium is a major mineral element of the body. It
constitutes 1.5-2 per cent of the body weight of an adult
msneios human. An average adult body contains about 1200 g of
calcium of which over 98 per cent is found in the bones. The
amount of calcium in the blood is usually about 10 mg/di.
Fruits Vegetables
The developing foetus requires about 30 g of calcium. There
Am la 600 Cabbage 124 is a dynamic equilibrium between the calcium in the blood
Guava 212 Amaranth 9.9 and that in the skeleton; this equilibrium is maintained by
..
Lime 63 Cauliflower 56 the interaction of vitamin D, parathyroid hormone, and
Orange 30 . Spinach 28 probably calcitonin.
Tomato 27 Brinjal 12 Functions
Germinated pulses Potatoes 17
Ionized calcium in the plasma has many vital functions
Bengal gram 16 Raddish 15 including formation of bones and teeth, coagulation of
Source: (34) blood, contraction of muscles, cardiac action, milk
production, relay of electrical and chemical messages that
Deficiency arrive at a cell's surface membrane to the biochemical
machinery within the cell, keeping the membranes of cells
Deficiency of vitamin C results in scurvy, the signs of intact and in the metabolism of enzymes and hormones. It
which are swollen and bleeding gums, subcutaneous also plays a crucial role in the transformation of light to
bruising or bleeding into the skin or joints, delayed wound electrical impulses in the retina. In short, the calcium ion
healing, anaemia and weakness. Scurvy which was once an controls many life processes ranging from muscle
important deficiency disease is no longer a disease of world contraction to cell division.
importance (3).
Sources
Requirement
Calcium is readily available from many sources. By far
The estimated requirement for vitamin C is 40 mg per the best natural sources are milk and milk products, (e.g.,
day for adults. The normal body when fully saturated cheese, curd, skimmed milk and butter milk), eggs and fish.
contains about 5 g of vitamin C. Daily intakes recommended A litre of cow's milk provides about 1200 mg of calcium, and
by the ICMR (9) are as given in Table 30. human milk about 300 mg. Calcium occurs in milk as
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
calcium caseinogenate which is readily assimilated by the muscular cramps. The requirement of sodium chloride
body. The cheapest dietary sources are green leafy depends upon climate, occupation and physical activity.
vegetables, cereals and millets. The limiting factor in the Adult requirement is about 5 g per day. A strong relationship
complete absorption of calcium from green leafy vegetables between hypertension and dietary salt intake has been
(e.g., spinach, amaranth) is the presence of oxalic acid with observed and intake of more than 10 g of salt per day is
which calcium forms an insoluble compound, calcium considered to have definitive tendency to raise blood
oxalate which interferes with the absorption of calcium. Most pressure (9).
cereals are generous providers of calcium, and the millet
"ragi" is particularly rich in calcium. Rice is very deficient in
POTASSIUM
calcium (43). The bioavailability of calcium from cereals is
poor because of the presence of phytic acid which forms an
insoluble compound with calcium, calcium phytate. An The adult human body contains about 250 g of
additional source of calcium is drinking water which may potassium. Potassium occurs widely in foodstuffs, so there is
provide up to 200 mg/day. Some fruits (e.g. Sitaphal) little likelihood of its deficiency. Potassium is vasoactive,
contain good amounts of calcium. increases blood flow and sustains metabolic needs of the
tissue. Potassium is released by endothelial cells. Potassium
Absorption supplements lower blood pressure, although the response is
Overall, about 20-30 per cent of dietary calcium is slow. Much of the information regarding potassium and
normally absorbed. Absorption of calcium is enhanced by blood pressure is in relation to dietary sodium. High dietary
vitamin D and decreased by the presence of phytates, sodium, low dietary potassium have been implicated in the
oxalates and fatty acids in the diet. Calcium absorption is aetiology of hypertension as evidenced by epidemiological
regulated to some extent by the body's needs. clinical studies (9).
The ideal desirable sodium : potassium ratio in the diet is
Deficiency 1:1 (in mmol).
No clear-cut disease due to calcium deficiency has ever
been observed, even under conditions of low intake (44). It MAGNESIUM
has been established that if the intake of vitamin D is
adequate, the problems of rickets and osteomalacia do not Magnesium is a constituent of bones, and is present in all
arise even with low calcium intake. On the other hand, no body cells. Human adult body contains about 25 g of
deleterious effects have been observed in man as a result of magnesium of which about half is found in the skeleton. It
prolonged intakes of large amounts of dietary calcium, appears that magnesium is essential for the normal
neither have any benefits been demonstrated. metabolism of calcium and potassium (45). Magnesium
deficiency may occur in chronic alcoholics, cirrhosis of liver,
Requirement toxemias of pregnancy, protein-energy malnutrition and
A daily intake of 600 mg of calcium has been suggested malabsorption syndrome (46). The principal clinical features
for adults (9). The physiological requirements are higher in attributed to magnesium deficiency are irritability, tetany,
children, expectant and nursing mothers. Intake values hyper-reflexia and occasionally hypo-reflexia. Requirements
recommended by ICMR (9) are as given in Table 29. are estimated to be about 340 mg/day for adults (9). For
details see Table 29.
PHOSPHORUS
IRON
Phosphorus is essential for the formation of bones and
teeth. It plays an important part in all metabolisms. An adult Iron is of great importance in human nutrition. The adult
human body contains about 400-700 g of phosphorus as human body contains between 3-4 g of iron, of which about
phosphates, most of this occurs in bones and teeth. 60-70 per cent is present in the blood {Hb iron) as
Phosphorus is widely distributed in foodstuffs; its deficiency circulating iron, and the rest {l to 1.5 g) as storage iron.
rarely occurs. A large part of phosphorus present in Each gram of haemoglobin contains about 3.34 mg of iron.
vegetable foods occurs in combination with phytin and is
available to the body only to the extent of 40-60 per cent. Functions
Phosphorus requirements have not been specifically Iron is necessary for many functions in the body including
considered by FAO/WHO Committees, but other groups of formation of haemoglobin, brain development and function,
experts have suggested that phosphorus intake should be at regulation of body temperature, muscle activity, and
least equal to calcium intakes in most age groups, except in catecholamine metabolism. Lack of iron directly affects the
infancy where the ratio suggested is 1:1.5 (9). immune system; it diminishes the number of T-cells and the
production of antibodies. Besides haemoglobin, iron is a
SODIUM component of myoglobin, the cytochromes, catalase and
certain enzyme systems. Iron is essential for binding oxygen
Sodium is found in all body fluids. The adult human body to the blood cells. The central function of iron is "oxygen
contains about 100 g of sodium ion. Sodium occurs in many transport", ahd cell respiration.
foods, and is also added to food during cooking in the form
of sodium chloride. Sodium is lost from the body through Sources
urine and sweat; that which is passed out in urine is There are two forms of iron, haem-iron and non-haem
regulated by the kidney but that which is lost by sweating is iron. Haem-iron is better absorbed than non-haem iron.
not controlled. Depletion of sodium chloride causes Foods rich in haem-iron are liver, meat, poultry and fish.
MINERALS
They are not only important sources of readily available iron decrease in the concentration of circulating haemoglobin
but they also promote the absorption of non-haem iron in due to impaired haemoglobin synthesis (49).
plant foods eaten at the same time (47). The iron content of The end result of iron deficiency is nutritional anaemia
milk is low in all mammalian species. Iron content of breast which is not a disease entity. It is rather a syndrome caused
milk averages less than 0.2 mg/di, and it is well utilized. by malnutrition in its widest sense (51). Besides anaemia,
Foods containing non-haem iron are those of vegetable there may be other functional disturbances such as impaired
origin, e.g., cereals, green leafy vegetables, legumes, nuts, cell-mediated immunity, reduced resistance to infection,
oilseeds, jaggery and dried fruits. They are important increased morbidity and mortality and diminished work
sources of iron in the diets of a large majority of Indian performance.
people. The bioavailability of non-haem iron is poor owing
to the presence of phytates, oxalates, carbonates, Diagnosis of anaemia
phosphates and dietary fibre which interfere with iron
A WHO Expert Group (52) proposed that "anaemia or
absorption. Other foods which inhibit iron absorption are
milk, eggs and tea (48). The Indian diet which is deficiency should be considered to exist" when haemoglobin
is below the following levels (see Table 13).
predominantly vegetarian contains large amounts of these
inhibitors, e.g., phytates in bran, phosphates in egg yolk,
TABLE 13
tannin in tea and oxalates in vegetables. In some areas,
significant amounts of iron may be derived from cooking in Cut-off points for the diagnosis of anaemia
iron vessels. .
Absorption
Iron is mostly absorbed from duodenum and upper small Adult males 13 34
intestine in the ferrous state, according to body needs. The Adult females, non-pregnant 12 34
rate of iron absorption is influenced by a great many factors Adult females, pregnant 11 34
like iron reserves of the subjects, the presence of inhibitors
Children, 6 months to 6 years 11 34
{e.g., phosphates), and promoters {e.g., ascorbic acid and
ascorbic acid-rich foods) of iron absorption, and disorders of Children, 6 to 14 years 12 34
duodenum and jejunum (e.g., coeliac disease, tropical
sprue). Iron absorption is greater when there is an increased At all ages the normal MCHC should be 34; values below
demand for iron, as for example during pregnancy. Iron that indicate that red cells are hypochromic, which occurs in
absorption from habitual Indian diets is less than 5 per cent iron deficiency anaemia. A haemoglobin level of 10 to
(17), the bioavailability being poor. 11 g/dl has been defined as early anaemia; a level below
10 g/dl as marked anaemia (53).
The absorbed iron is transported as plasma ferritin and
stored in liver, spleen, bone marrow and kidney. The EVALUATION OF IRON STATUS
characteristic feature of iron metabolism is conservation.
When red cells are broken down, the liberated iron is Evaluation of iron status is based on the following
reutilized in the formation of new red cells. parameters :
(a) Haemoglobin concentration : Values below those givei-i
Iron losses in Table 14 indicate anaemia. Haemoglobin concentration is
The total daily iron loss of an adult is probably 1 mg, and a relatively insensitive index of nutrient depletion. Its value is
about 12.5 mg per 28 days cycle in menstruating women. less in population groups in which anaemia is not severe. This
Major routes of iron loss are : (a) through haemorrhage, is because anaemia is a late manifestation of iron deficiency
that is, wherever blood is lost, iron is lost, the causes of which can frequently occur without the manifestation of
which may be physiological (e.g., menstruation, childbirth) anaemia (52).
or pathological (e.g., hookworms, malaria, haemorrhoids, (b) Serum iron concentration: This is a more useful index
peptic ulcer); (b) basal losses, such as excretion through than haemoglobin concentration. The normal range is 0.80
urine, sweat and bile, and desquamated surface cells. The to 1.80 mg/L; values below 0.50 mg/L indicate probable iron
widespread use of IUDs in the family planning programme is deficiency (54).
an additional cause of iron loss. IUDs have been shown to
(c) Serum ferritin : The single most sensitive tool for
increase the average monthly blood loss by between 35 and
evaluating the iron status is by measurement of serum
146 per cent depending upon the type of the device (49,
ferritin. It reflects the size of iron stores in the body. It is the
50). Hormonal contraceptives, on the other hand, decrease
menstrual blood loss by about 50 per cent (51). most useful indicator of iron status in a population where the
prevalence of iron deficiency is not high. Values below
Iron deficiency 10 mcg/L probably indicate an absence of stored iron (19).
Three stages of iron deficiency have been described : (d) Serum transferrin saturation : This should be above
(a) First stage characterized by decreased storage of iron 16 per cent. Normal value is 30 per cent.
without any other detectable abnormalities. (b) An
Iron requirements
intermediate stage of "latent iron deficiency", that is, iron
stores are exhausted, but anaemia has not occurred as yet. Because of the recycling of iron, only a small amount of
Its recognition depends upon measurement of serum ferritin iron is needed by the body. In general, iron requirements are
levels. The percentage saturation of transferrin falls from a greater when there is rapid expansion of tissue and red cell
normal value of 30 per cent to less than 15 per cent. This mass, as for example during pregnancy, childhood &
stage is the most widely prevalent stage in India. (c) The adolescence. Table 14 shows the recommended daily
third stage is that of overt iron deficiency when there is a intakes.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
programmes. The following indicators are useful in this as liver disease, pernicious anaemia, thalassaemia and
regard (58) : myocardial infarction. Zinc deficiency is common in children
- prevalence of goitre from developing countries due to lack of intake of animal
food, high dietary phytate content, inadequate food intake
- prevalence of cretinism and increased faecal losses during diarrhoea. Zinc
urinary iodine excretion supplementation in combination with oral rehydration
- measurement of thyroid function by determination of therapy has been shown to significantly reduce the duration
serum levels of thyroxine (T 4 ) and pituitary thyrotropic and severity of acute and persistent diarrhoea and to
hormone {TSH), and increase survival in a number of randomized control trials.
- prevalence of neonatal hypothyroidism. Adequate zinc intake is essential fo.r maintaining the integrity
of immune system. Zinc affects multiple aspects of the
Since the objective of goitre control programme is to immune system, from the barrier of the skin to gene
increase iodine intake, indices of urinary excretion are regulation within lymphocytes. Severe maternal zinc
particularly recommended for use in surveillance. Neonatal deficiency has been associated with spontaneous abortion
hypothyroidism has been found to be a sensitive indicator of and congenital malformations like anencephaly. Milder
environmental iodine deficiency. Serum T4 level is a more forms of zinc deficiency has been associated with low birth
sensitive indicator of thyroid insufficiency than T3 • weight, intrauterine growth retardation and preterm
delivery. Several studies have indicated that zinc
FLUORINE supplementation may reduce the incidence of clinical attacks
of malaria in children. Zinc plays an important role as
Fluorine is the most abundant element in nature. Being so
antioxidant agent (65). These reports suggest that zinc
highly reactive, it is never found in its elemental gaseous
deficiency may not be uncommon in man (63). Zinc is
form, but only in combined form. About 96 per cent of the widely distributed in foodstuffs, both animal and vegetable -
fluoride in the body is found in bones and teeth. Fluorine is but the bioavailability of zinc in vegetable foods is low.
essential for the normal mineralization of bones and Animal foods such as meat, milk and fish are dependable
formation of dental enamel. sources. Suggested daily intake for adults is 12 mg per day
Sources for men, 10 mg per day for women, 10 mg per day for
children and 5 mg for infants. Refer to Table 29 for details.
The principal sources of fluorine available to man are : Growing children and pregnant and lactating women need
{a) Drinking water : The major source of fluorine to man is more. Most human diets provide these amounts.
drinking water. In most parts of India, the fluoride content of
drinking water is about 0.5 mg/L, but in fluorosis-endemic Copper
areas, it may be as high as 3 to 12 mg/L (59). {b) Foods : The amount of copper in an adult body is estimated to be
Fluorides occur in traces in many foods, but some foods between 100-150 mg. Copper is widely distributed in
such as sea fish,, cheese and tea are reported to be rich in nature. Even poor diets provide enough copper for human
fluorides (38). needs. Deficiency or excess of this element is very rare.
Hypocupremia occurs in patients with nephrosis, Wilson's
Deficiency/excess
disease and protein-energy malnutrition and in infants fed
Fluorine is often called a two-edged sword. Prolonged for long periods exclusively on cow's milk. Neutropenia is
ingestion of fluorides through drinking water in excess of the the best documented abnormality of copper deficiency.
daily requirement is associated with dental and skeletal Hypercupremia may reflect excessive intake which may
fluorosis; and inadequate intake with dental caries. The use result from eating food prepared in copper cooking vessels,
of fluoride is recognized as the most effective means or it may be associated with several acute and chronic
available for the prevention of dental caries. infections {leukaemia, Hodgkin's disease, severe anaemia,
haemochromatosis, myocardial infarction and
Requirements hyperthyroidism (66). Estimated copper requirement for
The recommended level of fluorides in drinking water in adults is about 2.0 mg per day.
India is accepted as 0.5 to 0.8 mg per litre (60, 61). In
temperate countries where the water intake is low, the Cobalt
optimum level of fluorides in drinking water is accepted as The only established function of cobalt in the human is as
1 to 2 mg per litre (62). a part of the vitamin B12 molecule, which must be ingested
preformed. There is no evidence as yet of cobalt deficiency
OTHER TRACE ELEMENTS in man (10). Recently cobalt deficiency and cobalt iodine
ratio in the soil have shown to produce goitre in humans.
Zinc It is suggested that cobalt may be necessary for the first
Zinc is a component of more than 300 enzymes. It is stage of hormone production. i.e., capture of iodine by the
active in the metabolism of glucides and proteins, and is gland (67). Cobalt may interact with iodine and affect its
required for the synthesis of insulin by the pancreas and for utilization (10).
the immunity function. Zinc is present in small amounts in all
tissues. Zinc-plasma level is about 96µg per 100 ml Chromium
for healthy adults, and 89 µg per 100 ml for healthy Total body content of chromium is small, less then 6 mg.
children (63). The average adult body contains 1.4 to 2.3 g Current interest in chromium is based on the occurrence of
of zinc (64). Zinc deficiency has been reported to result in unusual glucose tolerance curves that are responsive to
growth failure and sexual infantilism in adolescents, and in chromium (41). Thus there is suggestive evidence that
loss of taste and delayed wound healing (10). There are also chromium plays a role in relation to carbohydrate and
reports of low circulating zinc levels in clinical disorders such insulin function (10).
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
and large bulk, they have an important place in the dietaries Nutritive value
of obese people who wish to cut down their calorie intake. (1) Vitamins : Fruits are prized for their vitamins. Most
The recommended daily intake of green leafy vegetables is fruits contain significant amounts of ascorbic acid. The
about 40 g for an adult. orange, guava and the Indian gooseberry (amla) are
b. Roots and tubers particularly rich in ascorbic acid. One medium sized orange
can provide enough juice to meet the daily requirement of
Included in this group are potato, sweet potato, tapioca, ascorbic acid of an adult. Apart from ascorbic acid, several
yam, carrots, onion, radish and colocasia. They vary widely fruits contain good amounts of carotene. The papaya and
in composition, some are good sources of carbohydrates mango are excellent sources of carotene. (2) Minerals :
such as potatoes and tapioca. In general roots and tubers Fruits are good sources of minerals especially sodium and
are poor in protein, minerals and vitamins. Carrots are .potassium. Some fruits like sitaphal (custard apple) are rich
exceptionally high in betacarotene. In times of cereal in calcium. Dried fruits like raisins, dates and apricots are
shortage, potatoes, sweet potatoes, and tapioca can serve as good sources of calcium and iron. Fruits also contain a great
subsidiary foods for limited periods. But bulk and low variety of organic acids which are responsible for the sources
protein make them unsuitable as staple foods for longer of unripe fruits. The intake of fruits leads to an alkaline
periods, unless supplemented by foods richer in protein. The urine. (3) Carbohydrates : Fruits in general have a low
recommended daily intake of roots and tubers is 50 to 60 g energy value but some fruits like banana and mango contain
for an adult. good amounts of carbohydrate and can act as good source
of energy. Pectin, a kind of sugar, present in fruits like
c. Other vegetables guavas is helpful in the preparation of fruit jellies. The fruit
There is a wide range of "other" vegetables such as sugars are easily digestible and completely absorbed. The
brinjal, tomatoes, cauliflower, etc. They bring variety to the more ripe a fruit is, the higher its sugar content.
diet. Many of them are fairly good sources of minerals and (4) Cellulose : Fruits contain cellulose which assists in
vitamins. Some vegetables like cluster beans, drumsticks and normal bowel movements.
green mango contain fair amounts of iron. The daily
Nutrition experts recommend a daily intake of 85 grams
recommended intake is 60 to 70 grams.
or more of fresh fruit for maintenance of good health. Fruits
are costly and it may not be within the reach of all to afford
4. Nuts and oilseeds them daily. If green leafy vegetables are included in the daily
Included in this group are groundnut (Peanut), diet, the need for fruit as an essential item in the diet is much
cashewnut, coconut, walnut, almonds, pistachio, mustard reduced. The aim in nutrition education should be to
seeds, sesame seeds, cotton seeds, sunflower seeds, maize promote the intake of seasonal fruits which are cheaper and
germ and many others from which cooking oils are easily available. The costly fruits are not necessarily the best
extracted. in respect of nutrients. The food values of some common
Nuts and oilseeds contain good amount of fat and good fruits are as given in Table 20.
quality protein in a relatively small bulk. Regarding the fat
TABLE 20
content, walnuts contain 64.5 per cent, almonds 58. 7 per
Nutritive value of some common fruits
cent, cashewnuts 46.9 per cent and groundnut 40 per cent.
(per 100 g of edible portion)
Peanut (groundnut) butter is a very valued article of the diet.
Regarding protein content, groundnut tops the list with 26. 7 Calcium Iron Carotene Vit. C
per cent. Being of vegetable origin, their protein is not equal Name (ing) (mg) (µg) (mg)
to that of meat or eggs in quality. Nuts are good sources of
vitamins of the B-group. They contribute minerals such as Fresh fruits :
calcium, phosphorus, and iron. Among the commonly used Banana 104 10 0.5 124 7
nuts, cashewnuts and almonds are good sources of iron, but Grapes 71 20 1.5 0 1
pistachio is the richest containing 14 mg of iron per 100 g. Guava 51 10 0.27 0 212
Mango 74 14 1.3 2,210 16
Most of the vegetable oils are rich in essential fatty acids. Orange 48 26 0.32 2,240 68
After oil extraction in the case of some, the residue (oilseed Papaya 32 17 0.5 2,740 57
cake) can be formulated into acceptable foods rich in Sitaphal 104 17 4.31 0 37
protein. For example, groundnut flour is used in the Am la 58 50 1.2 9 600
manufacture of Indian Multipurpose Food, balahar and
Dry fruits:
balanced malt food. Due partly to their high fat content and
Dates 317 120 7.3 44 3
partly to their high cellulose content, nuts are not easily
Raisins 308 87 7.7 2.4 1
digestible. However nuts eaten in a mixed diet are an
Almonds 655 230 5.09 0 0
extremely valuable source of protein. Peanuts for human
Cashew nut 596 50 5.81 0 0
consumption should be thoroughly dried and properly
Ground nut 567 90 2.5 37 0
stored to avoid the growth of Aspergillus flavus which
produces "aflatoxin". Source : (34)
5. Fruits 6. Animal foods
Fruits are protective foods. They are invaluable in human Foods of animal origin include meat, poultry, fish, eggs,
nutrition because they are good sources of vitamins and milk and dairy products. They provide high quality protein
minerals. One special feature which distinguishes fruits from (containing all the essential amino acids) and good amounts
other foods is that they can be eaten raw and fresh. This of fat, besides some vitamins and minerals. Vitamin B12 is
makes the vitamins and minerals present in fruit easily one of the rare nutrients found only in animal foods. Since
available. they are expensive, animal foods are consumed in small
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
amounts in most developing countries. Even small amounts natural milk and "made-up" milk. It contains 1 part of water,
of animal foods add considerably to the nutritive value of 1 part of natural milk and 1/8 part of skim milk powder. The
the diet. Among animal foods, cow's milk and hen's egg are mixture is stirred, pasteurized and supplied in bottles. Toned
perhaps nature's two most "nearly perfect" foods. milk has a composition nearly equivalent to cow's milk. It is
cheaper and yet a wholesome product.
Milk
Vegetable milk
Milk is the best and most complete of all foods. It is
secreted by the animals to serve as the sole and wholesome Milk prepared from certain vegetable foods (viz.
food for their suckling young ones. It is a fine blend of all the groundnut, soyabean) is termed "vegetable milk". It may be
nutrients necessary for growth and development of the used as a substitute for animal milk. The Central Food
young ones. Thus milk is a good source of proteins, fats, Technological Research Institute, Mysore has perfected
sugars, vitamins and minerals. techniques for the preparation of vegetable milk (72).
(i) Proteins : The chief protein of milk is casein; it occurs Egg
in combination with calcium as calcium caseinogenate. The
other proteins are lactalbumin and lactoglobulin. Animal Egg contains all the nutrients except carbohydrate and
milks contain nearly three times as much protein as human vitamin C. About 12 per cent of egg is made of shell, 58 per
milk. Milk proteins contain all the essential amino acids. cent of egg white, and 30 per cent of egg yolk. An egg
Human milk proteins contain greater amounts of tryptophan weighing 60 grams contains 6 g of protein, 6 g of fat, 30 mg
and sulphur-containing amino-acids (especially cystein) of calcium and 1.5 mg of iron, and supplies about 70 kcal of
than the animal milk proteins. (ii) Fat : The fat content of energy. Egg proteins have all the nine essential amino acids
milk varies from 3.4 per cent in human milk to 8.8 per cent needed by the body in right proportions. Nutritionists
in buffalo milk. Human milk contains a higher percentage of consider egg protein as the best among food proteins. In
linoleic. acid and oleic acid than animal milks. Milk fat is a fact, egg protein is the standard against which the quality of
good source of retinal and vitamin D. (iii) Sugar : The other proteins is compared. Except for vitamin C, egg
carbohydrate in all milks is lactose or milk sugar. It is found contains all the fat-soluble and water-soluble vitamins in
nowhere else in nature. It is less sweet than cane sugar and appreciable amounts. Important minerals such as calcium,
is readily fermented by lactic acid bacilli. Human milk phosphorus, iron, zinc and other trace elements are present
contains more sugar than animal milks. (iv) Minerals : Milk in the egg. Barring milk, no other food can supply such a
contains almost all known minerals needed by the body such diverse range of nutrients. Net protein utilization (NPU)
as calcium, phosphorus, sodium, potassium, magnesium, which combines in a single value the biological value and
cobalt, copper, iodine, etc. Milk is particularly rich in digestibility, is 100 for egg compared to 80 for meat and 75
calcium; it is however a poor source of iron. (v) Vitamins : for milk. Raw egg white is not assimilated by the intestinal
Milk is a good source of all vitamins except vitamin C. mucosa, therefore it must be cooked before consumption.
Boiling destroys 'avidin', a substance which prevents the
Human and animal milks are as compared in Table 21, body from obtaining biotin, one of the B-complex vitamins.
which illustrates that milk is to a great extent species-
Boiled egg is therefore nutritionally superior to raw egg. In
specific.
recent years the cholesterol content of egg (250 mg/egg) has
TABLE 21 generated a sense of fear because of the risk of CHO. A
Nutritive value of milks compared reduction in intake of eggs is advised for those at risk of
(value per 100 grams) CHO. This should not distract others from eating eggs. Eggs
or no eggs, cholesterol is formed in the body endogenously
Buffalo Cow Goat Human and is controlled by what is known as feedback mechanism.
Fat (g) 6.5 4.1 4.5 3.4
Protein (g) 4.3 3.2 3.3 1.1 Fish
Lactose (g) 5.1 4.4 4.6 7:4 Fish is nutritious food rich in proteins (15 to 25 per cent)
Calcium . (mg) 210 120 170 28 with a good biological value and a satisfactory amino acid
Iron (mg) 0.2 0.2 0.3 balance. The fat of fish is rich in unsaturated fatty acids and
Vitamin C (mg) 1 2 1 3 A and 0 vitamins. Fish liver oils are the richest source of
Minerals (g) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.1 vitamins A and 0. Fish bones when eaten are an excellent
source of calcium, phosphorus and fluorides. Fish are less
Water (g) 81.0 87 86.8 88 rich in iron (0. 7 to 3 mg per 100 g) than meat. Fresh water
Energy (kcal) 117 67 72 65 fish do not contain iodine, but sea fish do. Of all the sea
Source: (34) foods, oysters and lobsters are the richest in iodine. There is
practically no carbohydrate in fish. The fish proteins are
Milk products easily digested. The nutritive value of diet is greatly
Milk is consumed in a variety of forms - as whole milk, enhanced by inclusion of fish.
butter, ghee, cheese, dried and condensed milk, khoa, ice
cream, etc. Milk from which fat has been removed, is known Meat
as "skimmed milk". It is devoid of fat and fat soluble The term "meat" is applied to the flesh of cattle, sheep
vitamins, but a good source of milk protein (35 per cent) and and goats. Meats contain 15 to 20 per cent of protein, which
calcium. is less than that found in pulses, but meat proteins are a
good source of essential amino acids. Iron contained in meat
Toned milk (2 to 4 mg per 100 g) is more easily absorbed than iron in
The term "toned" is an Indian coinage. It is a blend of plants and this is another major quality of meat. In addition,
NUTRITIONAL PROFILES OF PRINCIPAL FOODS
meat contains varying amounts of fat, which is composed of Coffee, tea and cocoa
non-essential saturated fat. The energy provided by meat {a) Coffee: Coffee contains caffeine (0.6 to 2.0 per cent),
depends upon its fat content. Besides iron, meat provides volatile oils {caffeol) and tannic acid. Caffeine is a stimulant
minerals such as zinc and B-vitamins. It is poor in calcium of the nervous system. When coffee seeds are roasted,
{10 to 25 mg per 100 g) but rich in phosphorus. Liver is tannin is destroyed, proteins are coagulated and the
extremely rich in many nutrients. pleasant aroma is liberated.
Table 22 shows the nutritive value of meat, fish and eggs. {b) Tea : There are two main varieties of tea the green
and the black varieties. Green tea which is more astringent
TABLE 22 than the black variety is popular in China, Japan and
Nutritive value of Meat, Fish and Eggs (g/100 g) Assam. The chemical composition of tea is as follows :
..
Proteins Fat ·Minerals {i) caffeine : 2 to 6 per cent (ii) tannic acid : 6 to 12 per cent
{iii) theophylline : traces {iv) essential volatile oils: 5 per
Meat, Goat 21.4 3.6 1.1 cent. Tea is prepared by adding leaves to boiling water.
Fish 19.5 2.4 L5 When milk is added; the casein of milk combines with tannin
Egg.hen* 13.3· 13.3 1.0 and forms a harmless complex.
Liver goat 20.0 3.0 1.3 {c) Cocoa: Cocoa is obtained from cocoa beans. It is rich
in fat, and contains theobromine which has stimulating
*Two large eggs without shell weigh about 100 g. properties. The composition of a cup of tea, coffee and
cocoa containing the usual amount of sugar is given in Table
1. Fats and oils 23. The nutritive value of a cup of tea or coffee is really due
Good cooking demands liberal use of oils and fats. Fats to its milk and sugar content.
which are liquid at room temperature are called oils. Fats TABLE 23
and oils are good sources of energy and fat-soluble vitamins. The chemical composition of coffee, tea and cocoa
Fats of animal origin are poor sources of essential fatty {values per cup of 150 ml)
acids. Those of vegetable origin are rich in poly-unsaturated
fatty acids, excepting coconut and palm oils. The vegetable Coffee Tea· Cocoa
oils contain no vitamin A and D, except for red palm oil Protein (g) 1.8 0.9 7.2
which is extremely rich in carotene. During the past (g)
Fat 2.2 1.1 8.8
25 years, there has been a great increase in manufacture of
vanaspati {hydrogenated fat) under various trade names. Carbohydrate (g) 17.8 16.4 26.2
Margarine is made from vegetable oils and is fortified with kcal 98.0 79.0 213.0
vitamin A and D.
Soft drinks
8. Sugar and jaggery Some are carbonated (e.g., soda water incorporating
These are carbohydrate foods. Sugar is produced from carbon dioxide under high pressure) and others non-
sugarcane in India, and from sugar beet elsewhere. Refined carbonated such as fruit juices. The principal ingredients of
sugar is pure sucrose and contains no other nutrients. soft drinks are carbon dioxide, sugars, acids such as citric
Jaggery is prepared from sugarcane in India and is acid or tartaric acid, colouring and flavouring agents. Fruit
consumed in place of sugar. It contains useful amounts of beverages comprise fruit juices, squashes and cordials. Fruit
carotene and iron derived from cooking pans. Honey squashes and cordials are diluted with water before
consists of about 75 per cent sugars, mostly fructose and consumption.
glucose. Alcoholic beverages
9. Condiments and spices These are beer, whisky, rum, gin, arrack, etc. The
alcoholic content of these beverages varies widely from 5 to
These include asafoetida, cardamom, chillies, garlic, 6 per cent in beers to 40 to 45 per cent in whisky, rum, gin
cloves, ginger, mustard, pepper, tamarind, turmeric, etc. and brandy. Alcohol supplies about 7 kcal per gram.
They are mainly used to enhance the palatability of foods
and stimulate appetite. The essential oils present in them b. Vinegar
have carminative properties and may aid in digestion.
Excessive consumption of condiments is associated with Natural vinegar is made from fermentation of fruits, malt
peptic ulcer. and molasses. It contains a minimum of 3.7 per cent acetic
acid. Synthetic vinegar should not be harmful if it is free
10. Miscellaneous from lead, copper, arsenic or mineral acids. Synthetic
vinegar should be distinctly labelled "SYNTHETIC"
Beverages : Diet includes beverages, and especially water according to Prevention of Food Adulteration Act rules.
which is essential to life. Beverages include drinks which are
appreciated for their flavour or their stimulating properties. NUTRITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
They may be classified as follows :
(i) Coffee, tea, cocoa. Basic concepts
{ii) Soft drinks : aerated water, lemonade, pepsi cola, The science of human nutrition is mainly concerned with
fruit juices, etc. defining the nutritional requirements for the promotion,
{iii) Alcoholic beverages : wine, beer, whisky and protection and maintenance of health in all groups of the
traditional preparations. Alcoholic beverages are population. Such knowledge is necessary in order to assess
rich in calories. the nutritional adequacy of diets for growth of infants,
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
children and adolescents, and for maintenance of health in REFERENCE BODY WEIGHTS (9)
adults of both sexes and during pregnancy and lactation in
women (83). In this context, a variety of terms have been Age, gender and body weight largely determine the
used to define the amount of nutrients needed by the body nutritional requirement of an individual. Body weights and
such as : optimum requirements, minimum requirements, heights of children reflect their state of health, nutrition and
recommended intakes or allowances, and safe level of growth rate, while weight and heights of adults represent
intake. Of these, the term "recommended dietary intake or what can be attained by an individual with normal growth.
allowance" (RDA) has been widely accepted (1). Anthropometric measurements of infants and children of
Recommended dietary allowance (RDA) : The average well-to-do families having access to good health care and no
daily dietary nutrient intake level sufficient to meet the nutritional constraints are usually treated as reference
nutrient requirement of nearly all (97-98 per cent) healthy values. The purpose of recommending nutrient requirements
individuals in a particular life stage and gender group (9). is to help attaining these anthropometric reference
standards.
Adequate intake : A recommended average daily intake
level based on observed or experimentally determined WHO standard weights and heights of infants
approximations or estimates of nutrient intake by a group and pre-school children
(or groups) of apparently healthy people, that are assumed
to be adequate used when an RDA cannot be determined. World Health Organization has recently published multi-
In the Indian context, this is referred to as "acceptable centre growth reference standards for 0-60 month boys and
intake" (9). girls, based on studies carried out among predominantly
Tolerable upper intake level (UL) : The highest average exclusively breast-fed children in six countries viz., USA,
daily nutrient intake level that is likely to pose no risk of Brazil, Ghana, Norway, Oman and India. The median
adverse health effects for almost all individuals in the weights of infants and pre-school children (1-3 years) can
general population. As intake increases above the UL, the be taken as reference values for Indian children.
potential risk of adverse effect increases (9).
Reference Indian adult man and woman
Estimated average requirement (EAR) : The average daily
nutrient intake level estimated to meet the requirement of "Reference man" is aged between 18-29 years and
half of the healthy individuals in a particular life stage and weighs 60 kg with a height of 1. 73 metre and a BMI of 20.3;
gender group (9). is free from disease and physically fit for active work. On
each working day, he is engaged in 8 hours of occupation
The RDA is derived from (a} the individual variability; which usually involves moderate activity; while when not at
and (b) the nutrient bioavailability from the habitual diet. work he spends 8 hours in bed, 4-6 hours in sitting and
Individual variability : Definition of RDA takes into moving about, 2 hours in walking and in active recreation or
account the variability that exist in the requirement of a household duties.
given nutrient between individuals in a given population
group. The distribution of nutrient requirement in a "Reference woman" is aged between 18-29 years, non-
population group is considered normal when the RDA pregnant non-lactating (NPNL) and weighs 55 kg with a height
corresponds to a requirement, which covers most of the of 1.61 metre and a BMI of 21.2, is free from disease and
individuals (97 .5 per cent) in a given population. This physically fit for active work. On each working day she is
corresponds to mean + 2 SD. This is termed as a safe level engaged in 8 hours of occupation, which usually involves
of nutrient; the chances of individual having requirements moderate activity, while when not at work she spends 8 hours
above the RDA is only 2.5 per cent. This principle is used in in bed, 4-6 hours in sitting and moving about, 2 hours in
case of all nutrients except energy. In case of energy, intakes walking and in active recreation or household duties.
either in excess or below the actual requirement of energy
are not safe. In respect to other nutrients, the RDA is 25 per Infants
cent ( + 2 SD) higher than the mean requirement, 12.5 per The average of birth weight and body weight at 6 months
cent being considered as the extent of individual variability is used for computing the reference body weight for infants
in the requirement of all those nutrients (9). 0-6 months of age. For 6-12 months, an average of body
Bioavailabi/ity : Bioavailability of a given nutrient from a weight at 6 months and at 12 months is taken for
diet, i.e., the release of the nutrient from the food, its computation.
absorption in the intestine and bioresponse have to be taken
into account. It is the level of the nutrient that should be Children
present in the diet to meet the requirement. The bio- For children 1-3 years of age, an average of body weight
availability factor is quite important in caleium, protein and at 18 months, 30 months, 42 months of WHO median
trace elements like iron and zinc. In case of iron, the amount weight is taken (as mentioned above).
present in the diet is to be 20-30 times higher than the
actual iron requirement to account for the low bioavailability The reference body weight for children of 4-6 years are
of iron from a given diet, particularly a cereal-based diet. obtained by averaging the body weight of 4+, 5 + and
6+ years. Similarly for other age groups also the reference
RDA persents the level of the nutrient to be consumed
body weights were obtained from the 95th centile value of
daily to meet all the requirements of most of the individuals
in a given population. However, it must be recognized that body weights of rural India.
the RDA is not meant to be used as a standard to determine
whether or not a given individual requirement has been met,
Adults
since it is a level above the requirement of most individuals The average of values for age category of 18-19, 20-24,
in a given population. RDA value of a nutrient is valid only and 25-29 years was used for computing the reference
when all other dietary nutrient intakes are satisfactory. weights for adult man and woman.
ENERGY
expressed as the ratio of protein calories to the energy Young children (0 to 6 years) require proportionately
requirement is as given in Table 25. more protein for each kilogram of body weight than adults.
They are more vulnerable to malnutrition.
TABLE 25
Protein-energy ratio for different age groups (2010) The ICMR Expert Group (9) has not made any
recommendations for the elderly. It seems reasonable to
assume that the requirement of the aged are not less than
that for young adults, because it is an accepted fact that
protein utilization is less efficient in the elderly (6).
•P'r<3~scttooi 2fiildrerl' All estimates of protein requirement are valid only when
1-5years ·. 4.6 the energy requirements are fully met. If the total energy
S~ho.~l chil.,cirei:t ... intake is inadequate some dietary protein will be diverted to
6-10 years · 71 5.1 provide energy. It is now accepted that there are no body
I. ·- -- ""
TABLE 26 TABLE 27
Relative protein value of some foods : Essential amino acid (EAA) requirements : Adult
per cent of total energy supplied by protein
Histidine 10 15
IIsoleucine '. 20 30 I
ILeucine 39 59 I
ILysine 30 45
"
I
Rice IMethionine · 10 16 I
Potato ICysteine 4 6 I
Banana 4 IMethionine + Cysteine 15 22 I
Tapioca 2 IThreonine 15 23 I
If the PE is less than 4 per cent, the subject will be unable IPhenylalanine·+ Tyrosine 25 38 I
to eat enough to satisfy protein requirements. It is
recommended that protein should account for approximately
ITryptophan 4 6 I
10-12 per cent of the total daily energy intake. !Valine 26 39 I
Dietary intakes
!Total EAA 184 277 I
It is customary to express requirement in terms of grams
jTotal protein •', 0.66 g/kg/d:
I
Safe level of protein o.83 g/kg/d
per kg of body weight. This principle applies to all age {Mean+ l.96xSD)
groups, although absolute additions in units of grams of
protein per day are made for pregnancy and lactation. Source: (9)
The ICMR Expert Group (9) suggested an intake of one New tissues cannot be formed unless all the essential
gram of protein per kg of body weight for adult males and amino acids are present in the diet. The requirement of EM
females, assuming a NPU of 65 for the dietary protein. Table decreases sharply as one advances in age. The quality of the
29 gives the protein intakes for individuals of different ages diet is far more critical for the infant than for the adult.
and physiological states.
Vulnerable groups FAT
The protein requirements of women are increased during The daily requirement of fat is not known with certainty.
pregnancy. For 10 kg gestational weight gain the During infancy, fats contribute to a little over 50 per cent of the
requirement increases by 1, 7 and 23 g/day in 1st, 2nd and total energy intake. This scales down to about 20 per cent in
3rd trimesters respectively; and during lactation by about adulthood. The ICMR Expert Group (2010) has recommended
13 g per day (during 0 to 6 months), over and above their an intake of 20 per cent of the total energy intake as fat, of
normal requirements. which at least 50 per cent of fat intake should consist of
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
~H§~~fd:i~fi1~~J~if;'"" ·.' _· _·~._·_.1_.;:·~o·(_i~fa·_:oi_e ._'.f~_·•.)t'·_•a-'·_!.·_-·~.'-~._'t·f-~:.·-fR_·a(,'-~_an,ls•_,·- .·vf"~- 3'.P_slh1 _:,.· -~.·,•_'-: -_ '.E·,i-~:s·,'_i _-·,•.'-~ :•{_', t_:·-1_~,P:·;A.-_"-··:•~-._r
The recommended dietary allowances for energy,
protein, fat and minerals is summarized in Table 29.
_ .. ;· ·L·E·- e_l(e_ ·._ -r•. .• ._• '·_.P
i?r~~Rt'.~:::;;}j'U; . :·u -· 1
'_.1i'
.. _ _-_-,·_1E
m __
.._._ _ ._"'_.-_·_·:Y._o:
___•• ___ -•_··;····.·.',·,-•_·_e
•. .•.__ ___ ·_::·
Girls
16-17 years
10-12 years
50
jJ (c) Minerals
"-~-----1-3_-_1_5_y_ea_r~s-------------
_ 16-17 years 0
The recommended intakes of important minerals are as
given in Table 29.
TABLE 29
Summary of Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDA) for energy, protein, fat and minerals for Indians - 2010
Group' Category/Age Net.energy Rrptein
(kcal/d) ... · -\' .-';"''
(gld)
Man Sedentary work 2,320
Moderate work 60 2,730 60.0
Heavy work 3,490
Woman Sedentary work 1,900 20
Moderate work 2,230 55.0 25 600 . 21 10
Heavy work 2,850 30
55
Pregnant woman . +350 78 30 1200 35
Lactation 0-6 m +600 74 30 12
1200 21
6-12 months· +520 68 30
I
Infants 0-6 months 5.4 92 kcal/kg/d 1.16 g/kg/d 46µg/kg/d 30
Source: (9)
BALANCED DIET
TABLE 30
Summary of Recommended Dietary Allowance {RDA) for water soluble and fat soluble vitamins for Indians - 2010
Vitamin
·~
. (µ d)
All nutritional requirements are interrelated. For example, conditions of the region, economic capacity, religion,
there is a close interrelationship between the energy and customs, taboos, tastes and habits of the people. Balanced
protein requirements, between requirements for diets formulated by the Indian Council of Medical Research
phosphorus, calcium and vitamin D, between fats and are given in Annexure II at the end of this chapter.
vitamins, and between carbohydrates and vitamins. A nutritional education guide "The Food Guide Pyramid"
It has been said that food is not only a collection of emphasizes foods from the five major food groups shown in
nutrients open to statistical or dietary study, but also the three lower sections of the Pyramid (Fig. 1). Each of
simultaneously a system of communication, a protocol for these food groups provides some, but not all, of the nutrients
customs, situations and behaviour. required. Foods in one group can't replace those in another.
No one of these major food groups is more important than
BALANCED DIET another for good health, one needs them all.
A diet may be defined as the kinds of food on which a DIETARY GOALS
person or group lives. A balanced diet is defined as one
which contains a variety of foods in such quantities and All countries should develop a national nutrition and food
proportions that the need for energy, amino acids, vitamins, policy setting out "dietary goals" for achievement (72). The
minerals, fats, carbohydrate and other nutrients is dietary goals ("prudent diet") recommended by the
adequately met for maintaining health, vitality and general various Expert Committees of WHO (15,79) are as below:
well-being and also makes a small provision for extra
(a} dietary fat should be limited to approximately 15-30
nutrients to withstand short duration of leanness (69). A
per cent of total daily intake;
balanced diet has become an accepted means to safeguard a
population from nutritional deficiencies (79). (b} saturated fats should contribute no more than 10 per
In constructing balanced diet, the following principles cent of the total energy intake; unsaturated vegetable
should be borne in mind : (a) First and foremost, the daily oils should be substituted for the remaining fat
requirement of protein should be met. This amounts to 10-15 requirement;
per cent of the daily energy intake. (b) Next comes the fat (c) excessive consumption of refined carbohydrate should
requirement, which should be limited to 15-30 per cent of the be avoided; some amount of carbohydrate rich in
daily energy intake (c) Carbohydrates rich in natural fibre natural fibre should be taken;
should constitute the remaining food energy. The requirements (d} sources rich in energy such as fats and alcohol should
of micronutrients (Table 29 and 30} should be met. be restricted;
The dietary pattern varies widely in different parts of the (e) salt intake should be reduced to an average of not
world. It is generally developed around the kinds of food more than 5 g. per day; (salt intake is more in tropical
produced (or imported) depending upon the climatic countries. In India it averages 15 g. per day);
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
Key
• Fat (naturally occurring and added}
T Sugars (added)
Fats, oils, and sweets These symbols show fat and added sugar in foods. They
Use sparingly come mostly from the fats, oils and sweets group. But
foods in other groups - such as cheese or ice-cream from
the milk group or french fries from the vegetable group -
can also provide fat and added sugars.
Milk, yoghurt and
cheese group
2-3 servings Meat, poultry, fish,
dry beans, eggs, and
nuts group
2-3 servings
Vegetable group
3-5 servings
Fruit group
2-4 servings
Bread, cereal,
rice, and pasta
group
6-11 servings
FIG. I
The food guide pyramid
Source : (80)
(f) protein should account for approximately 10-15 per has already been discussed in Chapter 9.
cent of the daily intake; The proportion of infants born with LBW was selected as
(g) junk foods such as colas, ketchups and other foods one of the nutritional indicators for monitoring progress
that supply empty calories should be reduced. towards Health for All by the year 2000.
There may be conditions under which the above
recommendations for daily food intake do not apply. For 2. Protefo energy malnutrition
example, diet should be adapted to the special needs of Protein energy malnutrition (PEM) is identified as a major
growth, pregnancy, lactation, physical activity, and medical health and nutrition problem in India. It occurs particularly
disorders (e.g., diabetes). in weaklings and children in the first years of life. It is not
only an important cause of childhood morbidity and
NUTRITIONAL PROBLEMS IN PUBLIC HEALTH · mortality, but leads also to permanent impairment of
There are many nutritional problems which affect vast physical and possibly, of mental growth of those who survive
segments of our population. The major ones which deserve (9). The current concept of PEM is that its clinical forms -
special mention are highlighted : kwashiorkor and marasmus - are two different clinical
pictures at opposite poles of a single continuum.
1. Low birth weight The incidence of PEM in India in pre-school age children
Low birth weight (i.e., birth weight less than 2500 g) is a is 1-2 per cent (83). The great majority of cases of PEM,
major public health problem in many developing countries. nearly 80 per cent, are the "intermediate" ones, that is the
About 28 per cent of babies born in India are LBW (81) as mild and moderate cases which frequently go unrecognized.
compared to 4 per cent in some developed countries. In The problem exists in all the States and that nutritional
countries where the proportion of LBW is high, the majority marasmus is more frequent than kwashiorkor.
are suffering from foetal growth retardation. In countries In the 1970s, it was widely held that PEM was due to
where the proportion of LBW infants is low, most of them protein deficiency. Over the years, the concept of "protein
are preterm (82). Although we do not know all the causes of gap" has given place to the concept of "food gap". That is,
LBW, maternal malnutrition and anaemia appear to be PEM is primarily due to (a) an inadequate intake of food
significant risk factors in its occurrence. Among the other (food gap) both in quantity and quality, and (b) infections,
causes of LBW are hard physical labour during pregnancy, notably diarrhoea, respiratory infections, . measles and
· and illnesses especially infections. Short maternal stature, intestinal worms which increase requirements for calories,
very young age, high parity, smoking, close birth intervals protein and other nutrients, while decreasing their
are all associated factors. All these factors are interrelated. absorption and utilization. It is a vicious circle - infection
Since the problem is multifactorial, there is no universal contributing to malnutrition and malnutrition contributing to
solution. Interventions have to be cause-specific. This matter infection, both acting synergistically (Fig. 2).
NUTRITIONAL PROBLEMS IN PUBLIC HEALTH
Nutritional status of
woman of child-bearing t------~
age ·
TABLE 31
Principal features of severe PEM
Source : (85)
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
(b) Specific protection viz. sugar, salt, tea, margarine and dried skimmed milk.
1. The child's diet must contain protein and energyrich Fortifying an appropriate food with vitamin A is a complex
foods. Milk, eggs, fresh fruits should be given if process. The greatest challenge to successful fortification
possible. programmes is choosing a food that is likely to be consumed
in sufficient quantities by groups at risk (90).
2. Immunization.
(c) Long-term action : These are measures aimed at
3. Food fortification. reduction or elimination of factors contributing to ocular
disease, e.g., persuading people in general, and mothers in
(c) Early diagnosis and treatment
particular, to consume generously dark green leafy
1. Periodic surveillance. vegetables or other vitamin A rich foods; promotion of
2. Early diagnosis of any lag in growth. breast-feeding for as long as possible; improvements in
environmental health such as ensuring safe and adequate
3. Early diagnosis and treatment of infections and
water supply and construction and maintenance of sanitary
diarrhoea.
latrines to safeguard against diarrhoea; immunization
4. -Development of programmes for early rehydration of against infectious diseases such as measles, prompt
children with diarrhoea. treatment of diarrhoea and other associated infections;
5. Development of supplementary feeding programmes better feeding of infants and young children; improved
during epidemics. health services for mothers and children; social and health
education. All these are components of primary health care.
6. Deworming of heavily infested children.
(d) Rehabilitation
Vitamin A deficiency in India (VAD) (91)
VAD has been recognized as a major controllable public
1. Nutritional rehabilitation services.
health and nutritional problem in India. An estimated
2. Hospital treatment. 5.7 per cent children in India suffer from eye signs of VAD.
3. Follow-up care. Recent evidence suggests that even mild VAD probably
increases morbidity and mortality in children, emphasizing
3. Xerophthalmia the public health importance of this disorder. VAD is one of
Xerophthalmia (dry eye) refers to all the ocular the major deficiencies among lower income strata
manifestations of vitamin A deficiency in man. It is the most population in India.
widespread and serious nutritional disorder leading to Though the prevalence of severe forms of VAD such as
blindness (87) particularly in South-East Asia. corneal ulcers/softening of cornea i.e. keratomalacia has in
Xerophthalmia is most common in children aged general become rare, Bitot spots were present in varying
1-3 years, and is often related to weaning. The younger the magnitudes in different parts of the country as reported by
child, the more severe the disease. It is often associated with National Nutritional Monitoring Bureau in 2003. The
PEM. Mortality is often high in this age group (21). The prevalence was higher than WHO cut-off level of 0.5 per
victims belong to the poorest families. Associated risk factors cent, indicating the public health significance of the problem
include ignorance, faulty feeding practices and infections of VAD. There is huge inter-state variation in the prevalence
particularly diarrhoea and measles which often precipitate of VAD among children. It is also a matter of concern that
xerophthalmia. In some countries, "epidemics" of only 21 per cent of children of age 12 to 35 months receive
xerophthalmia have occurred in association with food a vitamin A dose. Less than 10 per cent coverage was
donation programmes involving skimmed milk, which is reported in Nagaland, Uttar Pradesh reported 7 .3 per cent
totally devoid of vitamin A (88). coverage. Only states such as Tamil Nadu (37.2 per cent),
Goa (37.3 per cent), Kerala (38.2 per cent) and West Bengal
The States badly affected are the southern and eastern (41.2 per cent) have better coverage, though it is still low.
States of India notably Andhra; Tamil Nadu, Karnataka,
Bihar and West Bengal. These are predominantly rice-eating In India, in 1970 a national programme for prevention of
States and rice is devoid of carotene. The North Indian nutritional blindness was initiated to fight this deficiency.
States have relatively few cases of xerophthalmia (89). The beneficiaries of this programme were pre-school
children (1-5 years). The programme was modified in 1992
Prevention and control to cover children in age group of nine months to three years
only. Since Tenth Five Year Plan vitamin A supplementation
Prevention and control of xerophthalmia must be an exists as an integral component of RCH programme
integral part of primary health care. An overall strategy can which is now a part of NRHM. The guidelines issued in
be defined, according to WHO, in terms of short-term, November 2006 cover children upto 5 years of age.
medium-term and long-term action (24).
The programme focusses on (92): (a) Promoting
(a) Short-term action : A short-term preventive approach consumption of vitamin A rich foods by pregnant and lactating
that has already demonstrated its efficacy is the women and by children under-five years of age and
administration of large doses of vitamin A orally, in appropriate breast-feeding; (b) Administration of massive
recommended doses to vulnerable groups, on a periodic dose of vitamin A up to five years. First dose of 100,000 IU
basis. This can be organized quickly and with a minimum of with measles vaccination at nine months and subsequent
infrastructure. doses of 200,000 IU each, every six months up to the age
(b) Medium-term action : An approach widely used to 5 years; (c) For sick children all children with xerophthalmia
promote regular and adequate intake of vitamin A is to be treated at health facilities; all children suffering from
fortification of certain foods with vitamin A. Addition of measles to be given one dose of vitamin A if they have not
vitamin A to dalda in India is a typical example. Many other received it in the previous one month; all cases of severe
foods have also been considered for vitamin A fortification, malnutrition to be given one additional dose of vitamin A (92).
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
stores are replenished. It is· necessary that estimation of Indonesia, Nepal, Sri Lanka and Thailand. More people are
haemoglobin is repeated at 3-4 month intervals. The exact affected and levels of severity are higher in South-East Asia
period of supplementation will depend upon the progress of than anywhere else in the world (99).
the beneficiary. (b) CHILDREN : If anaemia is suspected, a It has always been thought in India that goitre and
screening test for anaemia may be done on infants at cretinism were only found to a significant extent in the
6 months, and 1 and 2 years of age. One tablet of iron and "Himalaya goitre belt" which is the world's biggest goitre
folic acid containing 20 mg of elemental iron (60 mg of belt. It stretches from Kashmir to the Naga Hills in the east,
ferrous sulphate) and 0.1 mg of folic acid should be given extending about 2,400 km and affecting the northern States
daily for 100 days. For children 6-60 months, ferrous of Jammu and Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh, Punjab,
sulphate and folic acid is to be provided in a liquid Haryana, Delhi, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, West Bengal, Sikkim,
formulation. For safety sake, the liquid formulation should Assam, Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, Mizoram, Meghalaya,
be dispensesd in bottles so designed that only 1 ml can be Tripura and Manipur. In recent years renewed surveys
dispensed each time. School children, 6 to 10 year old. and outside the conventional goitre belt have identified endemic
adolescents are also to be included in the national foci of iodine deficiency and the associated IDD in parts of
programme. Children 6-10 years of age are to be provided Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh,
30 mg. elemental iron and 250 mcg. folic acid per day for Kerala, Karnataka and Tamil Nadu. More and more new
100 days. Adolescents are given the same dosage and areas are being identified. Even areas near the sea coast like
duration as adults (92). Bharuch district in Gujarat and Ernakulam district in Kerala
are found goitre-affected. In short, no State in India can be
(2) Iron fortification said to be entirely free from goitre (Fig. 4).
The WHO experts (49) did not recommend iron
fortification strategy for control of anaemia in regions where
its prevalence is high. However, studies in India at the
National Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad showed that
simple addition of ferric ortho-phosphate or ferrous sulphate
with sodium bisulphate was enough to fortify salt with iron
(98). When consumed over a period of 12-18 months, iron
fortified salt was found to reduce prevalence of anaemia
significantly. Fortification of salt with iron has been accepted
by the Government of India as a public health approach to
reduce prevalence of anaemia. Commercial production of
iron fortified salt was started in 1985 (98).
Iron fortification has many advantages over iron
supplementation. As salt is a universally consumed dietary
item, all segments of the population· stand to benefit. No
special delivery systems are required (53).
endemic areas. Under the national !DD control activities, the Prakasam districts), Punjab, Haryana, Karnataka, Kerala
Government of India proposed to completely replace and Tamil Nadu (60). The toxic. manifestation of fluorosis
common salt with iodized salt in a phased manner (98). comprise the following:
The National Institute of Nutrition at Hyderabad has (a) Dental fluorosis : Fluorosis of dental enamel occurs
come out with a new product, common salt fortified with when excess fluoride is ingested during the years of tooth
iron and iodine. Community trials have been launched to calcification - essentially during the first 7 years of life
examine the efficacy of the "two-in-one" salt (98). (101). It is characterized by "mottling" of dental enamel,
Iodized oil : Another method which has demonstrated its which has been reported at levels above 1.5 mg/L intake
efficacy for controlling goitre is intramuscular injection of (102). The teeth lose their shiny appearance and chalk-
iodized oil (mostly poppy-seed oil). Scientists at the National white patches develop on them. This is the early sign of
Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad have now successfully dental fluorosis. Later the white patches become yellow and
developed a process to produce iodized oil in safflower or sometimes brown or black. In severe cases, loss of enamel
safola oil (101). gives the teeth a corroded appearance. Mottling is best seen
on the incisors of the upper jaw. It is almost entirely confined
The advantage of the injection procedure is that an to the permanent teeth and develops only during the period
average dose of 1 ml will provide protection for about of formation (61).
4 years. Although more expensive than iodated salt, this
method has the advantage that it can be applied rapidly and (b) Skeletal fluorosis : This is associated with lifetime
in places where iodization of salt is not feasible or iodated salt daily intake of 3.0 to 6.0 mg/Lor more (102). There is heavy
is in short supply. However, the difficulty with. this procedure fluoride deposition in the skeleton. When a concentration of
is one of logistics, i.e., in reaching every victim or potential 10 mg/Lis exceeded, crippling fluorosis can ensue (103). It
victim of !DD for the injection, which means that this leads to permanent disability.
approach is less practicable. . (c) Genu valgum : A new form of fluorosis characterized
Iodized oil, oral : The oral administration of iodine as by genu valgum and osteoporosis of the lower limbs has
iodized oil or as sodium iodate tablets, is technically simpler been reported in some districts of Andhra Pradesh and Tamil
than the injection method. Limited research has found that Nadu (104). The syndrome was observed among people
these procedures are effective against goitre but more costly whose staple was sorghum (jowar). Further studies showed
than intramuscular injections. that diets based on sorghum promoted a higher retention of
ingested fluoride than do diets based on rice (14).
2. Iodine monitoring Intervention
Countries implementing control programmes require a
(a) Changing the water source : One solution to the
network of laboratories for iodine monitoring and problem is to find a new source of drinking water with a
surveillance. These laboratories are essential for a) iodine
lower fluoride content (0.5 to 0.8 mg/L) if that is possible.
excretion determination b) determination of iodine in water,
Running surface water contains lower quantities of fluorides
soil and food as part of epidemiological studies, and than ground water sources such as wells. (b) Chemical
c) determination of iodine in salt for quality control. treatment : If the above is not possible, the water can be
Neonatal hypothyroidism is a sensitive pointer to chemically defluoridated in a water treatment plant, even
environmental iodine deficiency and can thus be an effective though such treatment is moderately exp~nsive (101). The
indicator for monitoring the impact of a programme (99). National Environmental Engineering Research Institute,
Nagpur developed a technique for removing fluoride by
3. Manpower training chemical treatment. It is called Nalgonda technique for
It is vital for the success of control that health workers defluoridation of water (105). It involves the addition of two
and others engaged in the programme be fully trained in all chemicals (viz. lime and alum) in sequence followed by
aspects of goitre control including legal enforcement and flocculation, sedimentation and filtration. (c) Other
public education. measures : Fluoride supplements should not be prescribed
for children who drink fluoridated water. The use of fluoride
4. Mass communication toothpaste in areas of endemic fluorosis is not recommended
Mass communication is a powerful tool for nutrition for children upto 6 years of age (101).
education. It should be fully used in goitre control work.
Creation of public awareness is central issue of a successful 7. Lathyrism
public health programme. Lathyrism is a paralyzing disease of humans and animals.
In the humans it is referred to as neurolathyrism because it
5. Hazards of iodization affects the nervous system, and in animals as
A mild increase in incidence of thyrotoxicosis has now osteolathyrism (odoratism) because the pathological
been described following iodized salt programmes. An changes occur in the bones resulting in skeletal deformities
increase in lymphocytic thyroiditis (Hashimoto's disease) has (8). Neurolathyrism is a crippling disease of the nervous
also been claimed. The risk of iodism or iodide goitre system characterized by gradually developing spastic
however seems to be very small (58). paralysis of lower limbs, occurring mostly in adults
consuming the pulse, Lathyrus sativus in large quantities.
6. Endemic fluorosis
In many parts of the world where drinking water contains The problem
excessive amounts of fluorine (3-5 mg/L), endemic fluorosis Neurolathyrism is prevalent in parts of Madhya Pradesh,
has been observed. Endemic fluorosis has been reported to Uttar Pradesh, Bihar and Orissa. It has also been reported in
be an important health problem in certain parts of the Maharashtra, West Bengal, Rajasthan, Assam and Gujarat
country, e.g., Andhra Pradesh (Nellore, Nalgonda and where the pulse is grown. The magnitude of the problem can
NUTRITIONAL FACTORS IN SELECTED DISEASES
be assessed from the fact that at one time in Rewa and Satna (b) Banning the crop: This is an extreme step not feasible
districts of Madhya Pradesh alone, there were 25,000 and for immediate implementation. The Prevention of Food
32,000 cases respectively. According to reports, there are no Adulteration Act in India has banned lathyrus in all forms -
fresh outbreaks of the disease in endemic areas. This is whole, split or flour. But the ban is not operative where it is
attributed to the shifting trends in agronomical practices in needed, viz. Madhya Pradesh, Bihar, Orissa and Gujarat
the region (106). Lathyrism has also been reported to occur where the pulse is widely grown.
in Spain and Algeria where Lathyrus is eaten (8). If however, it is not possible to avoid consuming khesari
The pulse dhal, it is desirable that the proportion of the dhal should
never form more than a quarter of the total amount of
Lathyrus sativus is commonly known as "Khesari dhal". It cereals and pulses eaten per day.
is known by local names such as Teora dhal, Lak dhal,
Batra, Gharas, Matra etc. (106). The seeds of lathyrus have (c) Removal of toxin
a characteristic triangular shape and grey colour. When (1) Steeping method: Since the toxins are water soluble,
dehusked the pulse looks similar to red gram dhal or bengal they can be removed by soaking the pulse in hot water. This
gram dhal. Like other pulses, lathyrus is a good source of method can be practised at home. A large quantity of water
protein, but for its toxin which affects the nerves. It is eaten is boiled and the pulse is soaked in hot water for 2 hours;
mostly by the poor agricultural labourer because it is after which the soaked water is drained off completely. The
relatively cheap. Studies have shown that diets containing pulse is washed again with clean water, then drained off and
over 303 of this dhal if taken over a period of 2-6 months dried in the sun. The pulse is then used for. consumption.
will result in neurolathyrism. The drawback with this method is that it entails loss of
The toxin vitamins and minerals.
The toxin present in lathyrus seeds has been identified as (2) Parboiling : An improved method of detoxicating the
Beta oxalyl amino alanine (BOM). It has been isolated in pulse is "parboiling" as is done in the case of parboiled rice.
crystalline form and is water soluble; this property has been This technique is suitable for large scale operation. Simple
made use of in removing the toxin from the pulse by soaking soaking in lime water overnight followed by boiling is credited
it in hot water and rejecting the soak water. Studies indicate to destroy the toxin. This treatment also destroys trypsin
that there is a blood-brain barrier to this toxin. In order to inhibitiors. Lime is easily available as it is used with betel
overcome this barrier, the pulse must be eaten in large leaves.
amounts over a period of time for 2 months or more. Besides (c) Education : The public must be educated on the
BOM several other toxins have also been reported (107). dangers of consuming this pulse and the need for removing
its toxin before consumption.
The disease (d) Genetic approach : Certain strains of lathyrus contain
The disease affects mainly young men between the age of very low levels of toxin (0 .1 % ) . The selective propagation
15 to 45 years and manifests itself in stages : (a) Latent and cultivation of such strains may be the most effective way
stage : The individual is apparently healthy, but when to eradicate lathyrism without any drastic change in the food
subjected to physical stress exhibits ungainly gait. habits of the people. Low toxin varieties can be obtained
Neurological examination shows characteristic physical from the Indian Agricultural Research Institute, New Delhi.
signs. This stage is considered important from the preventive
(e) Socio-economic changes : In the final analysis, it is
aspect, since at this stage, if the pulse is withdrawn from the
only socio-economic changes or overall development that
diet, it will result in complete remission of the disease. can root out lathyrism.
(b) No-stick stage : the patient walks with short jerky steps
without the aid of a stick. A large number of patients are
found in this stage. (c) One-stick stage : The patient walks
NUTRITIONAL FACTORS IN
with a crossed gait with a tendency to walk on toes. Muscular SELECTED DISEASES
stiffness makes it necessary to use a stick to maintain
balance. (d) Two-stick stage: the symptoms are more severe. 1. Cardiovascular disease
Due to excessive bending of knees and crossed legs, the It is now generally agreed that diet governs many
patient needs two crutches for support. The gait is slow and situations favouring the onset of "heart-disease", particularly
clumsy and the patient gets tired easily after walking a short coronary heart disease. Of all the factors associated with
distance. (e) Crawler stage : Finally the erect posture CHD (e.g., plasma cholesterol, high blood pressure,
becomes· impossible as the knee joints cannot support the cigarette smoking, lack . of physical activity) plasma
weight of the body. There is atrophy of the thigh and leg cholesterol has a very high statistical significance with the
muscles. The patient is reduced to crawling by throwing his incidence of CHD. The risk of CHD appears to increase as
weight on his hands (106). the plasma cholesterol concentration rises (108). Various
Interventions studies have supported the role of elevated blood levels of
cholesterol and low density lipoproteins (LDL) in the
The possible interventions for the prevention and/or development of atherosclerosis. Geographical studies have
control of lathyrism are : shown that there is no population in whom CHD is common
(a) Vitamin C prophylaxis : Although this condition is that does not have a relatively high mean level of plasma
believed to be irreversible, in certain instances the damages total cholesterol (TC) in adults (15). These observations
could be repaired by the daily administration of 500-1000 mg have been reinforced by metabolic studies. In addition trials
of ascorbic acid for a week or so. The damage could also be of the effect of dietary changes on CHD have suggested that
prevented by generous provision of ascorbic acid in the altering the fatty acid composition of the diet in favour of
lathyrogenic diet, as demonstrated in guinea pigs and greater intake of polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) and less
monkeys. intake of saturated fats, while restricting the intake of fat
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
calories to less than 30 per cent of the. total calories, may Polyunsaturated fatty acids (e.g., linoleic and arachidonic
lower the risk that CHO will subsequently develop (109). acids) have an additional role, that is, to inhibit platelet
The evidence of association is now so strong for cholesterol aggregation and thus prevent thrombus formation. Recent
and CHO that the WHO Expert committee (1982) research indicates that arachidonic acid metabolizes in the
considered its effect to be "causal" in populations although vascular endothelium to form two important metabolites,
this cannot be claimed yet for individuals (15). The WHO namely prostacyclin and thromboxane (Fig. 5). These two
Expert Committee (15) concludes that there is a well compounds have opposing effects on the cardiovascular
established triangular relationship between habitual diet, system. Whereas thromboxane induces platelet aggregation,
blood cholesterol levels and CHO. The current report of the prostacyclin inhibits the same and prevents intravascular
expert group of the ICMR (2010) on Nutrient Requirement thrombus formation. Prostacyclin was found also to .relax
and Recommended Dietary Allowances for Indians endorses coronary blood vessels, thus opposing the action of
the views. thromboxane. It has been suggested that generation of
j>rostacyclin is the biochemical mechanism underlying the
Cholesterol well-known ability of blood vessels to resist platelet
Cholesterol occurs in all foods of animal origin. Part of it aggregation. Linoleic acid which is the main precursor of
is synthesized in the body. The plasma cholesterol is arachidonic acid is therefore regarded as the body's best
determined by (a) the amount absorbed from food (b) the buiwark against CHO. In short, essential fatty acids have in
amount synthesized in the body (c) the rate of catabolism the last decade come to be regarded as of major importance
and excretion in the bile (d) intestinal reabsorption of bile in clinical nutrition.
acids, and (e) the equilibrium between plasma and tissues.
The extent to which cholesterol intake influences total
cholesterol levels is highly variable.
Lipoproteins
Cholesterol is carried in plasma lipoproteins. , .... c~t~ty~'e~ ~Y As~irikcinci bthet ·
Lipoproteins are divided into four major classes 'tyclox!fgE!ril:l's~'enzyme
. ·.. · .. ·''•'·.
tiniss iii'fiib'lthere. ·
chylomicrons, very low-density lipoproteins (VLDLs), low-
density lipoproteins (LDLs) and high-density Jipoproteins
(HDLs). The total serum cholesterol is the sum of the '.dc:uc ENDOPEROXfDE INT~RMEDIATE!
' - -. '. -
.
- - '; ~
The most important determinant of TG level is the Malnutrition-related diabetes mellitus has recently
activity of the enzyme, lipoprotein lipase in the endothelial attracted attention. Protein deficiency may be involved in
lining of the capillaries and in a variety of tissues. This the pathogenesis of some forms of diabetes. Exr:essive
enzyme removes TG particularly from the very low density consumption of alcohol can increase the risk of diabetes
lipoproteins (VLDL) and converts these to the lipoproteins by damaging the pancreas and liver and by promoting
· of higher density. In certain genetically determined diseases, obesity.
this enzyme may be absent. A reduction in its activity or a
reduced capacity to deal with increased levels of TG may be 3. Obesity
important in more common diseases such as diabetes where
high concentrations of TG are often observed. In richer countries and in some developing countries,
obesity is a health problem. The connection between severe
Carbohydrate obesity and premature death from diabetes, hypertension
and CHO is well established (113). The basic cause of
Coronary heart disease rates are lowest in populations obesity is overnutrition. A diet containing more energy than
eating high carbohydrate diets. Support for the hypothesis
needed may lead to prolonged postprandial hyperlipidaemia
that consumption of complex carbohydrates may decrease
and to deposition of triglycerides in adipose tissue resulting
the risk of CHO comes from historical trends of food
consumption patterns and mortality rates in US. It is in obesity (110).
generally recognized that such mortality rates were quite low It is known that a relative insulin resistance takes place in
until about 1920. After 1920 there was a steady increase in obesity in peripheral tissues, mainly adipose tissues, while
the mortality rate until 1968 when a decline began (109). the insulin secretion is normal or increased. The
The principal nutritional change that has occurred since the demonstrated reduction in the sensitivity to insulin of the
early 1920 has been a decrease in the consumption of large adipocyte can be attributed to the decreased affinity of
dietary carbohydrate. Further support comes from feeding the insulin receptors or to a reduction in their number in the
studies. A decrease in serum cholesterol was observed during cell membrane. Through a feedback mechanism the insulin
the vegetable feeding period. Neither high carbohydrates nor secretion is stepped up', thus leading to a state of
high sucrose feeding has induced atherosclerosis in animals, h yperinsuli nism.
An inverse association of fibre intake with the risk of CHD
has also been observed (111). From a practical point of view all hypotheses concerning
the genesis of obesity could be put down to over-nutrition,
Salt to a hyper-energy food intake. This is a sound basis for
There are good and consistent correlations between preventive and therapeutic recommendations (114).
dietary sodium intake and the incidence of hypertension.
Thus the highest incidence of hypertension is found in north 4. Cancer
Japan. where the sodium intake is above 400 mmol/day, It is postulated that 80 per cent of cancers may be due to
while primitive societies ingesting less than 60 mmol/day environmental factors, and it is possible that some dietetic
have virtually no hypertension. Susceptible individuals in factors may be involved. Existing knowledge is reviewed
primitive populations who change from low to high intake of briefly as below:
sodium have been found to develop hypertension.
Hypertension can be successfully treated with a drastically (a) Dietary fat
low sodium diet (less than 10 mmol/day (110). Population surveys have shown a strong positive
2. Diabetes correlation between cancer colon and dietary intake of fat
(115). It has been suggested that the high fat intake accounts
In a diabetic, there is impaired metabolism of glucose in for the high incidence of colon cancer in Western
the body, which leads to excess of glucose in blood and communities. In Japan, recent increases in fat consumption
urine. Insulin helps in checking and maintaining the level of
have been associated with striking increase in rates of colon
glucose in blood. Insulin deficiency leads to accelerated
cancer (116). Dietary fat is believed to increase the secretion
utilization of energy reserves from fat stores. The fatty acids
are oxidized by liver to ketone bodies. Excess of ketone of bile acids in the bowl which are then metabolized by
bodies leads to their accumulation in urine. This condition is bacterial flora into carcinogen or co-carcinogens (117).
known as ketoacidosis and can result in diabetic coma. Due However, no known carcinogen has yet been identified from
to insulin deficiency excess of fatty acids are converted to faeces and the evidence is thus incomplete.
triglycerides. In diabetes these accumulate in the blood. A positive correlation between per capita consumption of
Insulin is also important for synthesis of proteins and dietary fat and breast cancer rates. has also been noted.
deficiency of insulin leads to muscle wasting. A reduction in dietary fat may alter the risk of breast cancer
Studies in England showed that diabetics ate an average (118), perhaps by increasing oestrogen production or
1000 kcal per day more than non-diabetics. It was also prolactin release (119).
found that most diabetics were in non-manual occupations
than non-diabetics. And the diet of diabetics did not appear (b) Dietary fibre
to differ in any marked way from that of non-diabetics, Several studies indicate that the risk of colon cancer is
except in quantity. There is no sound evidence that any inversely related to the consumption of dietary fibre, which
specific dietary factor is diabetogenic. may protect against intestinal carcinogens or precursors by
It has been suggested that deficiencies of trace elements dilutional or other effects (120). Although the available
such as chromium, copper and zinc may play a role in the epidemiological data are not entirely consistent, the weight
pathogenesis of diabetes mellitus, but clinical evidence is of evidence generally supports the hypothesis that fibre
lacking (112). protects against colon cancer (116).
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
FIG. 6
Methods of nutritional assessment and their relationship to the natural history of disease
ASSESSMENT OF NUTRITIONAL STATUS
3. Biochemical evaluation are also valuable. (ii) Stools and urine : Stools should be
4. Functional assessment examined for intestinal parasites. History· of parasitic
infestation, chronic dysentery and diarrhoea provides useful
5. Assessment of dietary intake. background information about the nutritional status of
6. Vital and health statistics persons. Urine should also be examined for albumin and
7. Ecological studies. sugar.
(b) BIOCHEMICAL TESTS : With increasing knowledge
The different methods used for the appraisal of nutritional
status are not mutually exclusive; on the contrary, they are of the metabolic functions of vitamins and minerals,
assessment of nutritional status ·by clinical signs has given
complimentary.
way to more precise biochemical tests which may be applied
1. Clinical examination to measure individual nutrient concentration in body fluids
(e.g., serum retinal, serum iron) or detection of abnormal
Clinical examination is an essential feature of all amounts of metabolites in urine (e.g., urinary iodine)
nutritional surveys since their ultimate objective is to assess frequently after a loading dose, or measurement of
levels of health of individuals or of population groups in enzymes in which the vitamin is a known co-factor (for
relation to the food they consume. It is also the simplest and example in riboflavin deficiency) to help establish
the most practical method of ascertaining the nutritional malnutrition in its preclinical stages.
status of a group of individuals. There are a number of
physical signs, some specific and many non-specific, known Biochemical tests are time-consuming and expensive.
to be associated with states of malnutrition. When two or They cannot be applied on a large scale, as for example in
more clinical signs characteristic of a deficiency disease are the nutritional assessment of a whole community. They are
present simultaneously, their diagnostic significance is often carried out on a subsample of the population. Most
greatly enhanced. A WHO Expert Committee (127) biochemical tests reveal only current nutritional status; they
classified signs used in nutritional surveys into three are useful to quantify mild deficiencies. If the clinical
categories as those : examination has raised a question, then the biochemical
tests may be invoked to prove or disprove the question
(a) not related to nutrition, e.g., alopecia, pyorrhoea, raised. A short list of currently advocated biochemical tests
pterygium applicable in nutritional surveys is given in Table 34.
(b) that need further investigation, e.g., malar
pigmentation, corneal vascularization, geographic TABLE 34
tongue Some biochemical tests used in nutrition surveys
(c) known to be of value, e.g., angular stomatitis,
Bitot's spots, calf tenderness, absence of knee or
ankle jerks (beri-beri), enlargement of the thyroid
gland (endemic goitre), etc.
However, clinical signs have the following drawbacks :
(a) malnutrition cannot be quantified on the basis of clinical
signs (b) many deficiencies are unaccompanied by physical
signs and (c) lack of specificity and subjective nature of most
of the physical signs. To minimize subjective and objective
errors in clinical examination, standard survey forms or
schedules have been devised covering all areas of the body.
A specimen nutrition assessment schedule is given at the end
of this chapter (Annexure I).
2. Anthropometry
Anthropometric measurements such as height, weight,
skinfold thickness and arm circumference are valuable
indicators of nutritional status. In young children, additional
measurements such as head and chest circumference are
made. If anthropometric measurements are recorded over a
period of time, they reflect the patterns of growth and
development, and how individuals deviate from the average
at various ages in body size, build and nutritional status.
Anthropometric data can be collected by non-medical
personnel, given sufficient training. This subject is discussed Source : (128)
in detail in Chapter 9.
4. Functional indicators
3. Laboratory and biochemical assessment Static indices of nutritional status (biochemical
(a) LABORATORY TESTS : (i) Haemoglobin estimation : indicators) will continue to play an important role as they
It is the most important laboratory test that is carried out in are well-established and familiar to practitioners and public
nutrition surveys. Haemoglobin level is a useful index of the health workers. Functional indices of nutritional status are
overall state of nutrition irrespective of its significance in emerging as an important class of diagnostic tools. Some of
anaemia. An RBC count and a haematocrit determination these are given in Table 35.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
Response
~: .. ; '•;·>'.
nufrition
Eailyhome
malnutrition
Nutritional
international concern.
Problem of malnutrition
intervention b;:ised rehabilitation Malnutrition has been defined as "a pathological state
·on local knowfedge often with
supplements resulting from a relative or absolute deficiency or excess of
one or more essential nutrients". It comprises four forms
Response time Brief, resumption of Long, regain of undernutrition, overnutrition, imbalance and the specific
no~mal growth good nutrition in
community
deficiency (136). (1) Undernutrition : This is the condition
. . which results when insufficient food is eaten over an
Interventions · Primary health care; Food extended period of time. In extreme cases, it is called
oral rehydration supplements ·
· therapy; vaccines;
starvation. (2) Overnutrition : This is the pathological state
of cornmunity-
vitamin A;' dewoi'ming; wide response, · resulting from the consumption of excessive quantity of food
contraceptives; suchas .· over an extended period of time. The high incidence of
chloroquine; other food suQsidy obesity, atheroma and diabetes in western societies is
treatment attributed to overnutrition. (3) Imbalance· : It is the
Health system for check- · Malnutrition pathological state resulting from a disproportion among
up and possible brief rehabilitation, essential nutrients with or without the absolute deficiency of
food supplements .·often in special any nutrient. (4) Specific deficiency : It is the pathological
centre state resulting from a relative or absolute lack of an
Source : (135) individual nutrient.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
We do not know enough about the dimensions of the (2) CULTURAL INFLUENCES : Lack of food is not the
problem. According to FAO reports, there are about only cause of malnutrition. Too often there is starvation in
460 million people 15 per cent of the world's population, the midst of plenty. People choose poor diets when good
excluding China who are malnourished, of which about ones are available because of cultural influences which vary
300 million live in South Asia where they constitute one- widely from country to country, and from region to region.
third of the population (137). What makes the situation most These may be stated as follows : (a) Food habits, customs,
serious is that malnutrition's main victims are children under beliefs, traditions and attitudes : Food habits are among the
the age of 15. But children under the age of 5 years are hit oldest and most deeply entrenched aspects of any culture.
the hardest. On a global scale the five principal nutritional They have deep psychological roots and are associated with
deficiency diseases that are being accorded the highest love, affection, warmth, self image and social prestige. The
priority action are kwashiorkor, marasmus, xerophthalmia, family plays an important role in shaping the food habits,
nutritional anaemias and endemic goitre (137). These and these habits are passed from one generation to another.
diseases represent the tip of the "iceberg" of malnutrition; a Rice is the staple cereal in the eastern and southern States of
much larger population are affected by "hidden" India and wheat is the staple cereal in the northern States.
malnutrition which is not easy to diagnose. During the second World War, when wheat was made
The effects of malnutrition on the community are both available in place of rice in South India people refused to buy
direct and indirect. The direct effects are the occurrence of · wheat because it was not their staple cereal. The story is told
frank and subclinical nutrition deficiency diseases such as of a Philippine student who died of beriberi after writing an
kwashiorkor, marasmus, vitamin and mineral deficiency essay explaining how the disease could be prevented. The
diseases. The indirect effects ·are a high morbidity and crux of the problem is that many customs and beliefs apply
mortality among young children (nearly 50 per cent of total most often to vulnerable groups, i.e. infants, toddlers,
deaths in the developing countries occur among children expectant and lactating women. Papaya is avoided during
under-5 years of age as compared to less than 5 per cent in pregnancy because it is believed to cause abortion. In
developed countries), retarded physical and mental growth Gujarat, valuable foods such as dhals, leaf greens, rice and
and development (whieh may be permanent), lowered fruits are avoided by the nursing mother. There is a
vitality of the people leading to lowered productivity and widespread belief that if a pregnant woman eats more, her
reduced life expectancy. Malnutrition predisposes to baby will be big and delivery difficult. Certain foods are
infection and infection to malnutrition; and the morbidity "forbidden" as being harmful for the child. Then there are
arising therefrom as a result of complications from such certain beliefs about hot and cold foods, light and heavy
infectious diseases as tuberculosis and gastro-enteritis is not foods. (b) Religion: Religion has a powerful influence on the
inconsiderable. The high rate of maternal mortality, stillbirth food habits of the people. Hindus do not eat beef, and
and low birth~weight are all associated with malnutrition. Muslims pork. Some orthodox Hindus do not eat meat, fish,
eggs and certain vegetables like onion. These are known as
In the more developed countries of the world nutritional food taboos which prevent people from consuming nutritious
problems are somewhat different. Overnutrition is foods even when these are easily available. (c) Food fads: In
encountered much more frequently than undernutrition. The the selection of foods, personal likes and dislikes play an
health hazards from overnutrition are a high incidence of important part. These are called "food-fads". The food fads
obesity, diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular and renal may stand in the way of correcting nutritional deficiencies.
diseases, disorders of liver and gall bladder. From this brief (d) Cooking practices: Draining away the rice water at the
review, it is obvious that the consequences of malnutrition end of cooking, prolonged boiling in open pans, peeling of
are ominous. vegetables, all influence the nutritive value of foods.
(e) Child rearing practices: These vary widely from region to
Ecology of malnutrition region and influence the nutritional status of infants and
Malnutrition is a man-made disease. It is a disease of children. , Examples of this situation are premature
human societies. It begins quite commonly in the womb and curtailment of breast feeding, the adoption of bottle feeding
ends in the grave. The great advantage of looking at and adoption of commercially produced refined foods.
malnutrition as a problem in human ecology is that it allows (f) Miscellaneous : In some communities, men eat first and
for variety of approaches towards prevention. Jelliffe (1966) women eat last and poorly. Consequently, the health of
(136) listed the ecological factors related to malnutrition as women in these societies may be adversely affected. Chronic
follows : conditioning influences, cultural influences, socio- alcoholism is another factor which may lead to serious
economic factors, food production and health and other malnutrition.
services. (3) SOCIO-ECONOMIC FACTORS : Malnutrition is
(1) CONDITIONING INFLUENCES : Infectious diseases largely the by-product of poverty, ignorance, insufficient
are an important conditioning factor responsible for education, lack of knowledge regarding the nutritive value of
malnu.trition, particularly in small children. Diarrhoea, foods, inadequate sanitary environment, large family size,
intestinal parasites, measles, whooping cough, malaria, etc. These factors bear most directly on the quality of life
tuberculosis all contribute to malnutrition. In fact it is a and are the true determinants of malnutrition in society. The
vicious circle - infection contributing to malnutrition, and speed with which populations are growing in many
malnutrition causing an otherwise minor childhood ailments developing countries is another important factor to reckon
to become killers. It has been shown that where with. It has made the solution of the malnutrition
environmental conditions are poor, small children may suffer problem more difficult. In short, the causes of malnutrition
from some infection or the other for almost half of their first are built into the very nature of society, in the socio-
three years of life. The interrelationship between economic and political structures, both nationally and
malnutrition and infection has been well documented. internationally (137).
SOCIAL ASPECTS OF NUTRITION
(4) FOOD PRODUCTION : Increased food production housewife is the "manager" to the consumption of foods in
should lead to increased food consumption. The average the family. In some families, the husband determines what
Indian has 0.6 hectare of land surface compared to foods will reach the table. Both the husband and the wife
5.8 hectare per head in the developed countries. The need to be educated on the selection of right kinds of local
per capita arable land for an average Indian is only foods and in the planning of nutritionally adequate diets
0.3 hectare (138). Yields per hectare are only about one- within the limits of their purchasing power. Harmful food
fourth of those achieved in the industrialized countries. taboos and dietary prejudices can be identified and
Given the best technology known at ·present, most corrected. Since food expenditure often amounts to 50- 70
developing countries could increase their food production per cent of family budgets, nutrition education programmes
several fold. But increased food production will not solve the should be a good investment (141). The promotion of
basic problem of hunger. and malnutrition in rnuch of the breast-feeding and improvement in infant and child feeding
developing world. Scarcity of food,. as a factor responsible practices are the two areas where nutrition education can
for malnutrition, may be true at thefamily level; but it is not have a considerable effect. Action is also needed to counter
true on a global basis, nor. is it true for most of the countries misleading commercial advertising with regard to baby
where malnutrition is still a serious problem.. It is a problem foods. Attention should also be focused on the nutritional
of uneven distribution between the countries and within the needs of expectant and nursing mothers and children in the
co.untries. It is said that there will be very little malnutrition family. The shortage of protective foods <:an be met to some
in India today if all the food available can be equitably extent by planning a kitchen garden or keeping poultry.
distributed in accordance with physiological needs (139). Adequate nutrition can be obtained in most countries with a
combination of locally available and acceptable foods. Other
(5) HEALTH AND OTHER SERVICES: The health sector related activities at the family level are ·the "package" of
can, if properly organized and given adequate resources can mother and child health, family planning and immunization
combat malnutrition. Some of the remedial actions that can services. The community health workers and the
be taken up by the health sector are : (1) Nutritional multipurpose workers are the kind of people in key positions
surveillance : Nutritional surveillance implies the continuous to impart nutrition education to the families in their
monitoring in a community or area of factors or conditions respective areas.
which indicate, relate to, or impinge on the nutritional status
of individuals or groups of people (WHO, 1976) (140). The ACTION AT THE COMMUNITY LEVEL
first task is to identify the groups and individuals affected
through clinical examination and simple body measurements Action at the community level should commence with the
of persons attending health centres and hospitals. A further analysis of the nutrition problem in terms of (a) the extent,
step is to carry out surveys in the villages. The data will give distribution and types of nutritional deficiencies; (b) the
a more realistic picture of the nutritional status of the population groups at risk, and (c) the dietary and non-
community. (2) Nutritional rehabilitation : Immediate dietary factors contributing to malnutrition. To obtain this
measures are required as soon as the malnourished subjects information, diet and nutrition surveys in carefully chosen
are located. Children suffering from severe PEM with representative population samples will have to be carried
complications need urgent care, may be in a hospital. Less out using standardized methodologies which will permit
severely affected children can be treated on a domiciliary comparisons in time and space. Having obtained
basis or in special nutrition rehabilitation centres. These information about the magnitude of the nutrition problem in
centres should be linked with health centres. (3) Nutrition the community, the next important step will be to plan
supplementation : The target groups are mothers and realistic and feasible approaches to the control of the
children. Supplementary feeding .is normally regarded as a problem based on local resources.· In many developing
stop-gap measure for the rehabilitation of malnourished countries such as India, it is usual to start with direct
children. (4) Health education : It is opined that by intervention measures such as supplementary feeding
appropriate educational action, about 50 per cent of programmes, midday school meals, vitamin A prophylaxis
nutritional .problems can be solved. Health education programme, but these will only provide palliative, partial or
programmes in nutrition is often a wea.k component. Its temporary solutions. The real permanent solution can only
reinforcement is a key element in all health services come from fundamental measures that will correct the basic
development. causes of malnutrition. This implies, first of all, increasing
the availability of foods both in quantity and quality, but -
Preventive and social measures much more important making sure that the people
suffering or at risk of malnutrition can obtain these foods.
Since malnutrition is the outcome of several factors, the The Applied Nutrition Programme is an attempt at_
problem can be solved only by taking action simultaneously production of various types of protective foods by the
at various levels - family, community, national and community for the community. The Integrated Child
international levels. It requires a coordinated approach of Development Services (ICDS) Programme makes a
many disciplines - nutrition, food technology, health concerted and coordinated effort to deliver a basic minimum
administration, health education, marketing, etc. In short, it package consisting of supplementary nutrition,
calls for a comprehensive programme of social development immunization, health check-ups, health and nutrition
of the entire country. education for the mothers and non-formal education for the
preschool age children. The target groups are children up to
ACTION AT THE FAMILY LEVEL six years, pregnant and lactating women, and other women
The principal target of nutritional improvement in the in the age group 15 to 44 years. Significant improvements in
community is the family, and the instrument for combating the overall living conditions of the people is also called for at
malnutrition at the family level is nutrition education. The the community level. This includes such measures as health
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
education, improvement of water supply, control of stressed that food and nutrition planning must be an integral
infectious diseases. In brief, a broad socio-economic part of the overall socio-economic development.
development of the entire community is called for.
ACTION AT THE INTERNATIONAL LEVEL
ACTION AT THE NATIONAL LEVEL Food and nutrition are global problems, just as health
The burden of improving the nutritional status of the and sickness; and both are interrelated. There is
people, by and large, is the responsibility of the State. The considerable scope for international cooperation in solving
ninth Report of the Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee on the problems of malnutrition. International cooperation can
Nutrition (1976) (140) suggested several new approaches play an important role in mitigating the effects of acute
and strategies for action at the national level. Some of the emergencies caused by floods and droughts. The
strategies and approaches undertaken at the national level establishment of the multilateral World Food Programme in
in India are : (1) Rural development : The nutritional uplift 1963 to stimulate and promote economic and social
of people, especially in a country like India, can come about development as a means of providing enough safe food to
only as part and parcel of an overall socio-economic those in need and to come to the aid of victims of
development of rural areas where 80 per cent of people live. emergency is an example of international cooperation.
Even an impressive increase in total food production will not Several international agencies such as the FAO, UNICEF,
solve the problem of undernutrition if the income levels of WHO, World Bank, UNDP, and CARE are working in close
vast sections of the people continue to be so low that they collaboration helping the national governments in different
cannot afford to buy the foods they need. It is therefore parts of the world in their battle against malnutrition.
necessary to raise the living standards and purchasing power
of the people. This implies a broad-based programme of FOOD SURVEILLANCE
rural development. (2) Increasing agricultural production :
The food production potential is still greatly under-utilized. It Food surveillance is essential for the protection and
must keep pace with population growth. This implies maintenance of community health. Broadly it implies the
application of modern farming practices, the expansion of monitoring of food safety/food hygiene. The WHO (142) has
cultivated areas, the use of fertilisers, better seeds, and so defined food safety/food hygiene as "all conditions and
on. Increased food production is meaningless if not measures that are necessary during the production,
accompanied by an effective food distribution system. This processing, storage, distribution and preparation of food
implies marketing, land tenure and food price policies. to ensure that it is safe, sound, wholesome and fit for
Irrigation projects undertaken to increase food production human consumption." The Declaration of Alma-Ata
could be counter-productive if parallel measures aimed at considered food safety as an essential component of
prevention of mosquito-breeding and other vector control primary health care.
measures are· not built into the programmes.
(3) Stabilization of population : The population policy in The importance of surveillance of foodborne diseases has
India is related to food and nutrition policy. The accent now been underlined in the WHO Sixth General Programme of
is on birth spacing and a small family norm. (4) Nutrition Work for the period 1978-1983. The most important
intervention programmes ; Several nutritional problems of international programme carrying out activities in the field
developing countries today can be mitigated, if not entirely of food hygiene is the Joint FAO/WHO Food Standard
solved by short-term programmes. The prevention and Programme (143).
control of endemic goitre through iodized common salt; the
control of anaemia through distribution of iron and folic acid FOOD HYGIENE
tablets to pregnant and nursing mothers, or possibly through
fortification of common foods with iron; the control of Food is a potential source of infection and is liable to
nutritional blindness through periodic administration of contamination by microorganisms, at any point during its
massive oral doses of vitamin A to children at risk; journey from the producer to the consumer. Food hygiene,
supplementary feeding programmes for preschool children in its widest sense, implies hygiene in the production,
are examples of such measures. These programmes have a handling, distribution and serving of all types of food (144).
direct impact on the health and nutritional status of The primary aim of food hygiene is to prevent food
particular segments of the population. These programmes poisoning and other food-borne illnesses. Food hygiene can
alleviate the situation as a temporary measure : (5) Nutrition be grouped under the following headings.
related health activities : Several programmes within the
field of health, seemingly unrelated to nutrition, may have a MILK HYGIENE
profound impact on the nutritional status. The National
Malaria Eradication Programme, by opening up vast tracts Source of Infection
of land for cultivation, has made an outstanding
contribution to health and nutrition. Since malnutrition is Milk is an efficient vehicle for a great variety of disease
closely related to infection, all programmes of immunization agents. The sources of infection or contamination of milk
and improvement of environmental sanitation will inevitably may be (1) the dairy animal (2) human handler or (3) the
have a beneficial effect on nutrition. Programmes of family environment, e.g., contaminated vessels, polluted water,
planning could make a major contribution to the flies, dust, etc. (145).
improvement of nutritional status of mothers and children.
All these programmes may be considered as alternative Milkborne diseases
approaches to improving the nutritional status of the people. A Joint FAO/WHO Expert Committee (1970) on Milk
The FAO/WHO Expert Committee on Nutrition (1976) Hygiene classified milkborne diseases as under (146).
FOOD HYGIENE
fatal and include nausea, repeated vomiting, giddiness and Studies conducted by the National Institute of Nutrition,
drowsiness extending sometimes for periods upto 24 to Hyderabad showed that the local population subsist on the
48 hours after the ingestion of ergoty grain. In chronic cases, millet Panicum miliare (known locally as Gondhli) which gets
painful cramps in limbs and peripheral gangrene due to contaminated with weed seeds of Crotalaria (locally known as
vasoconstriction of capillaries have been reported. However, Jhunjhunia). On chemical analysis. Jhunjhunia seeds
the long-term effects of consuming small amounts of the were found to contain pyrrolizidine alkaloids which are
toxin are not known. A disquieting feature is that the hepatotoxins.
recently introduced high-yielding varieties of bajra are more The preventive measures comprise educating the people
susceptible to infestation. Ergot-infested grains can be easily in the affected areas about the disease, deweeding of the
removed by floating them in 20 per cent salt water. They can Jhunjhunia plants which grow along with the staple, and
also be removed by hand-picking or air floatation. The simple sieving of the millet at the household level to remove
upper safe limit for the ergot alkaloids has been estimated to the seeds of Jhunjhunia which are considerably smaller than
be 0.05 mg per 100 grams of the food material. those of the millet.
4. Epidemic dropsy (159, 144) 6. Fusarium toxins (163)
From time to time, outbreaks of "epidemic dropsy" are Fusarium species of field fungi are known to contaminate
reported in India. The cause of epidemic dropsy was not food crops and pose health hazards to livestock and man.
known until 1926, when Sarkar ascribed it to the The problem of fusarium contamination of sorghum is
contamination of mustard oil with argemone oil. Lal and believed to be on the increase. Rice is also known to be a
Roy (1937) and Chopra et.al:, (1939) gave experimental good substrate for fusarium. Work is now in progress at the
proof of the cause of epidemic dropsy. Mukherji et.al., National Institute of Nutrition to isolate, and identify the
(1941) isolated a toxic alkaloid, sanguinarine from toxic metabolites produced by fusarium incamatum.
argemone oil and found out its chemical formula. This toxic
substance interferes with the oxidation of pyruvic acid which Food additives
accumulates in the blood.
The concept of adding "non-food" substances to food
The symptoms of epidemic dropsy consist of sudden, products is not new. Pickling is an ancient culinary practice
non-inflammatory, bilateral swelling of legs, often associated aimed at preserving food articles such as mango, lime, etc
with diarrhoea. Dyspnea, cardiac failure and death may for fairly long periods by the addition of salt and spices.
follow. Some patients may develop glaucoma. The disease Modern science of food technology has revolutionized food
may occur at all ages except breast-fed infants. The processing with the introduction of chemical additives to
mortality varies from 5-50 per cent. increase the shelf-life of food, improve its taste, and to
The contamination of mustard or other oils with change its texture or colour. Majority of the processed foods
argemone oil may be accidental or deliberate. Seeds of such as bread, biscuits, cakes, sweets, confectionary, jams,
Argemone mexicana (prickly poppy) closely resemble jellies, soft drinks, ice creams, ketchup and refined oils
mustard seeds. The plant grows wild in India. It has prickly contain food additives.
leaves and bright yellow flowers. Crops of mustard are Food additives are defined as non-nutritious substances
gathered during March, and during this period, the seeds of which are added intentionally to food, generally in small
ar:gemone also mature and are likely to be harvested along quantity, to improve its appearance, flavour, texture or
with mustard seeds. Sometimes unscrupulous dealers mix storage properties (164). This definition also includes animal
argemone oil with mustard or other oils. food adjuncts which may result in residues in human food
Argemone oil is orange in colour with an acrid odour. and components of packing materials which may find their
The following tests may be applied for the detection of way into food (165).
argemone oil : (1) Nitric acid test : A simple test is to add Food additives may be classified into two categories :
nitric acid to the sample of oil in a test tube. The tube is Additives of the first category include colouring agents
shaken and the development of a brown to orange-red (e.g., saffron, turmeric), flavouring agents (e.g., vanilla
colour shows the presence of argemone oil. The nitric acid essence), sweeteners (e.g., saccharin), preservatives (e.g.,
test is positive only when the level of argemone oil is about sorbic acid, sodium benzoate), acidity imparting agents
0.25 per cent (160). (2) Paper chromatography test: This is (e.g., citric acid, acetic acid), etc (166). These agents are
the most sensitive test yet devised. It can detect argemone generally considered safe for human consumption. Additives
oil up to 0.0001 per cent in all edible oils and fats. of the second category are, strictly speaking, contaminants
The accidental contamination of mustard seeds can be incidental through packing, processing steps, farming
prevented at the source by removing the argemone weeds practices (insecticides) or other environmental conditions
growing among oil-seed crops. Unscrupulous dealers may be (167). Uncontrolled or indiscriminate use of food additives
dealt with by the strict enforcement of the Prevention of may pose health hazards among consumers. For example,
Food Adulteration Act. certain preservatives such as nitrites and nitrates can lead to
the production of toxic substances, e.g., nitrosamines that
5. Endemic ascites (161, 162) have been implicated in cancer aetiology.
In Kusmi Block of Sarguja district in Madhya Pradesh, The use of food additives is subjected to government
during 1973 and again during 1976, an outbreak of rapidly regulations throughout the world. In India two regulations
developing ascites and jaundice was reported among the (viz. the Prevention of Food Adulteration Act and the Fruit
Nagesia tribals. Both the sexes and all the age groups, except Products Order) govern the rules and regulations of food
infants, were affected. The overall mortality was 40 per cent. additives (167). Any food that contains food additives that
FOOD TOXICANTS
are not permitted is considered to be adulterated; if the Food adulteration practices vary from one part of the
permissible limit exceeds then also the food is considered country to another, and from tirne to time. Our knowledge
adulterated. The nature and quantity of the additive shall be about the current practices of food adulteration is by no
clearly printed on the label to be affixed to the container. means complete. Table 38 shows the types of adulteration
Whenever, any extraneous colouring matter has been added seen in India (168).
to any article of food, the words "Artificially Coloured" shall TABLE 38
be written on the label. Atthe international level, in 1963, a
joint FAO/WHO programme on food standards was Adulteration of foods
established, with the FAO/WHO Codex Alimentarius
Commission as its principal organ. Protection of the health
of consumers is the primary aim of .the Commission. The
ultimate effects of food additives on man is an important
problem of public health and is therefore of great concern to <::oat~t~r,dyes, khksari dal''
the public and the health administrators. ;I-l~ldf (Tl)rmerfo) pdwdet ·Gia.cl 2hro'rnatipolNdet . .. .
. . _·,·.i:i.·!_a_p_ o_ <l_ e,.__t_....·. ,
•..o_.h_.•.__. •'_.a .. . . Starch, 26w dung 6r li6rse abng
Food fortification '' .. .. powder' .....;.; " r . : .•
'•_._w._._
....
. ...
Fortification of food is a public health measure aimed Black pepper Dried seeds of papaya'·
at reinforcing the usual dietary intake of nutrients with Chilli powder Saw dust, brick pow<;ler
additional supplies to prevent/control some nutritional Tea dust/leaves Blp.c)<g~am husk, tamarlrid seeds
disorders. WHO (1) has defined "food fortification" as "the powder, saw dust, used tea dust
process whereby nutrients are added to foods (in relatively Cbffee/pt>~di:fr: · . Oatefo.isk, tamarirld' husk, Chie6ry,
small quantities) to maintain or improve the quality of the J\safoe~idii. (fling) 'S~ri<l, grit,<reslris; gums·· •. · ·
diet of a group, a community, or a population." MJst~rd se·e<ls . Seeds, ofpri~kl~ ~()p~y-A!~el1;i~me ..
Programmes of demonstrated effectiveness of fortification ~i6I~ ~ll~" . Mlner~i oils,.argelllori~ oil. . .
of food or water are : fluoridation of water as a preventive of i;i;~tl,~r . . . Sf(lrch, animaHat. ,
dental caries; iodization of salt for combating the problem of Ice-cream Cellulose,starch, nol)-permitted .
endemic goitre, and food fortification (e.g., vanaspati, milk) ·colours · · · · ·
with vitamins A and D. Technology has also been $weetweats . , .. Noncpermitted colours. ·
developed forthe twin fortification of salt with iodine and iron. Fresh green peas in packing Green dye
In order to qualify as suitable for fortification, the vehicle Milk Extraction of tat, addition of starch
an<:! water .
and the nutrient must fulfil certain criteria (25) :
Ghee, Vanaspati.
(a) the vehicle fortified must be consumed consistently as Source : (168)
part of the regular daily diet by the relevant sections of
the population or total population; Prevention of Food Adulteration Act, 1954
(b) the amount of nutrient added must provide an Enacted by the Indian Parliament in 1954, with the
effective supplement for low consumers of the vehicle, objective of ensuring pure and wholesome food to the
without contributing a hazardous excess to. high consumers and to protect them from fraudulent and
consumers; deceptive trade practices, the Prevention of Food
Adulteration (PFA) Act was amended in 1964, 1976 and
(c} the addition of the nutrient should not cause it to lately in 1986 to make the Act more stringent. A minimum
undergo any noticeable change in taste, smell, imprisonment of 6 months with a minimum fine of Rs.1,000
appearance, or consistency; and is envisaged under the Act for cases of proven adulteration,
(d) the cost of fortification must not raise the price of the whereas for the cases of adulteration which may render the
food beyond the reach of the population in greatest food injurious to cause death or such harm which may
need. amount to grievous hurt (within the meaning of section
320 of I.P.C.} the punishment may go upto life imprisonment
Finally, an adequate system of surveillance and control is and a fine which shall not be less than Rs.5,000. With the
indispensable for the effectiveness of food fortification. Food amendment in 1986, the consumer and the voluntary
fortification is a long-term measure for mitigating specific organizations have been empowered under the Act to take
problems of malnutrition in the community. samples of food.
Adulteration of foods Rules are framed which are revised from time to time by
an expert body called the "Central Committee for Food
Adulteration of foods is an age-old problem. It consists of standards" which is constituted by the Central Government
a large number of practices, e.g., mixing, substitution, under the provisions of the Act. Any food that does not
concealing the quality, putting up decomposed foods for conform to the minimum standards is said to be adulterated.
sale, misbranding or giving false labels and addition of Although it is a Central Act, its implementation is largely
toxicants. Adulteration results in two disadvantages for the carried out by the State Governments and local bodies in
consumer : first, he is paying more money for a foodstuff of their respective areas. However, the Centre plays a vital role
lower quality; secondly, some forms of adulteration are in proper coordination, monitoring and surveillance of the
injurious to health, even resulting in death, as for example, programme throughout the country. A chain of food
adulteration of mustard oil with argemone oil causing laboratories and four regional appellate Central Food
epidemic dropsy or adulteration of edible oils with trycresyn Laboratories (Kolkata, Mysore, Ghaziabad and Pune) whose
phosphate (TCP) resulting in paralysis and death. report is considered to be final have been established.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
Training being an important component of the d. Ensuring better coverage of expectant women in
programme for prevention of food adulteration, the order to reduce the incidence of low birth weight
Directorate General of Health Services organizes in-service babies.
training programme for different functionaries responsible 2. Fortification of essential foods.
for implementation of the PFA Act. Food inspectors, analysts
and the senior officers concerned with the implementation 3. Popularization of low cost nutritious food.
of the Act in States are provided training. 4. Control of micro-nutrient deficiencies among
Food adulteration is a social evil. The general public, vulnerable groups.
traders, and Food Inspectors are all responsible for
perpetuating this evil the public, because of lack of B. Indirect Policy Instruments: Long-term institutional
awareness of the dangers of adulteration and their general and structural changes
disinterest; the traders, for their greed for money, and Food 1. Food security In order to ensure aggregate food
Inspectors who find food adulteration a fertile ground to make security, a per capita availability of 215/kg/person/
easy money. Unless the public rises up against the traders and year of food grain needs to be attained.
unscrupulous food inspectors, this evil cannot be curbed. It is 2. Improvement of dietary pattern through production
here the voluntary agencies and consumer guidance societies and demonstration.
can play a vital role.
3. Improving the purchasing power of the urban and
Food stan<lards rural poor and improving the public food distribution
system.
(a) CODEX ALIMENTARIUS : The Codex Alimentarius
Commission, which is the principal organ of the joint FAQ/ 4. Land reforms.
WHO Food Standards Programme formulates food 5. Health and family welfare.
standards for international market. The food standards in 6. Basic health and nutrition knowledge.
India are based on the standards of the codex alimentarius.
7. Prevention of food adulteration.
(b) PFA STANDARDS : Under the Prevention of Food
Adulteration Act (1954) standards have been established 8. Nutrition surveillance.
which are revised from time to time by the "Central 9. Monitoring of nutrition programmes.
Committee for Food Standards". The purpose of the PFA 10. Research into various aspects of nutrition, both on the
standards is to obtain a · minimum level of quality of consumption side and the supply side.
foodstuffs attainable under Indian conditions. (c) THE
AGMARK STANDARDS : These standards are set by the 11. Equal remuneration for women.
Directorate of Marketing and Inspection of the Government 12. Communication through. established media for the
of India. The Agmark gives the consumer an assurance of implementation of nutrition policy.
quality in accordance with the standards laid down. 13. Minimum wage administration.
(d) BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS : The ISi mark on 14. Community participation.
any article of food is a guarantee of good quality in
accordance with the standards prescribed by the Bureau of 15. Education and literacy particularly that of women.
Indian Standards for that commodity. The Agmark and ISi 16. Improvement of the status of women.
standards are not mandatory; they are purely voluntary.
They express degrees of excellence above PFA standards. COMMUNITY NUTRITION PROGRAMMES
National Nutrition Policy 1993 (169) The Government of India have initiated several large-
scale supplementary feeding programmes, and programmes
Inspite of the significant improvement in food production aimed at overcoming specific deficiency diseases through
and advancement in science since independence, under- various Ministries to combat malnutrition. They are as
n.utrition continues to be a widespread problem in India. In shown in Table 39.
the year 1993, Govt. of India announced National Nutrition
· Policy 1993. As nutrition is a multi-sectoral issue, it needs to TABLE 39
be tackled at various levels through direct nutrition Nutrition programmes in India
interventions for specifically vulnerable groups as well as
through various development policy instruments which will
create conditions for improved nutrition. The strategy
consists of the following :
1. Vitamin A prophylaxis programme children in the age group 3-6 years in rural areas. It is under
the overall charge of the Department of Social Welfare. Four
One of the components of the National Programme for national level organizations including the Indian Council of
Control of Blindness is to administer a single massive dose Child Welfare are given grants to implement the programme.
ofan oily preparation of vitamin A containing 200,000 IU
Voluntary organizations which receive the funds are actively
(110 mg of retinol palmitate) orally to all pre-school children involved in the day-to-day management. The programme is
in the community every 6 months through peripheral health
implemented through Balwadis which also provide pre-
workers. This programme was launched by the Ministry of primary education to these children. The food supplement
Health and Family Welfare in 1970 on the basis of provides 300 kcal and 10 grams of protein per child per day.
technology developed at the National Institute of Nutrition
Balwadis are being phased out because of universalization
at Hyderabad. An evaluation of the programme has of !CDS.
revealed a significant reduction in vitamin A deficiency in
children (see page 615, 616 for details).
6. ICDS programme
2. Prophylaxis against nutritional anaemia Integrated Child Development Services (!CDS)
In view · of its · public health importance, a national programme was started in 1975 in pursuance of the
programme for the prevention of nutritional anaemia was National Policy for Children. There is a strong nutrition
launched by the Govt. of India during the fourth Five Year component in this programme in the form of supplementary
Plan. The programme consists of distribution of iron and nutrition, vitamin A prophylaxis and iron and folic acid
folic acid (folifar) tablets to pregnant women and young distribution. The beneficiaries are preschool children below
children (1-12 years). Mother and Child Health (MCH) 6 years, and adolescent girls 11 to 18 years, pregnant and
Centres in urban areas, primary health centres in rural areas lactating mothers. The States and Union Territories are
and !CDS projects are engaged in the implementation of this encouraged to undertake additional !CDS projects on the
programme. ·The technology for the control of anaemia Central pattern to cover more beneficiaries (170).
through iron fortification of common salt has also been The workers at the village level who deliver the services
developed at the National Institute of Nutrition at are called Anganwadi workers. Each Anganwadi unit
Hyderabad (see page 642 for more details). covers a population of about 1000. A network of Mahila
Mandals has been built up in ICDS Project areas to help
3. Control of iodine deficiency disorders Anganwadi workers in providing health and nutrition
·The National Goitre Control Programme was launched services. The work of Anganwadis is supervised by
by the Government of India in 1962 in the conventional Mukhyasevikas. Field supervision is done by the Child
goitre belt in the Himalayan region with the objective of Development Project Officer (CDPO).
identification of the goitre endemic areas to supply iodized
salt in place of common salt and to assess the impact of 7. Mid-day meal programme
goitre control measures over a period of time. The mid-day meal programme (MDMP) is also known as
Surveys, however, indicated that the problem of goitre School Lunch Programme. This programme has been in
and iodine deficiency disorders was more widespread than it operation since 1961 throughout the country. The major
was thought earlier, with nearly 145 million people objective of the programme is to attract more children for
estimated to be living in known goitre endemic areas of the admission to schools and retain them so that literacy
country. As a result, a major national programme - the IDD improvement of children could be brought about (169).
Control Programme - was mounted in 1986 with the In formulating mid-day meals for school children, the
objective to replace the entire edible salt by iodide salt, in a following broad principles should be kept in mind (171).
phased manner by 1992 (see page 643 for more details).
(a) the meal should be a supplement and not a
4. Special nutrition programme substitute to the home diet
This programme was started in 1970 for the nutritional (b) the meal should supply at least one-third of the
benefit of children below 6 years of age, pregnant and total energy requirement, and half of the protein
nursing mothers and is in operation in urban slums, tribal need
areas and backward rural areas. The supplementary food
supplies about 300 kcal and 10-12 grams· of protein per (c) the cost of the meal sbould be reasonably low
child per day. The beneficiary mothers receive daily 500 kcal (d) the meal should be such that it can be prepared
and 25 grams of protein. This supplement is provided to easily in schools; no complicated cooking process
them for about 300 days in a year. This programme was should be involved
originally launched as a Central programme and was
(e) as far as possible, locally available foods should be
transferred to the State sector in the fifth Five Year Plan as
used; this will reduce the cost of the meal, and
part of the Minimum Needs Programme (170). The main
aim of the Special Nutrition Programme is to improve the (f) the menu should be frequently changed to avoid
nutritional status of the target groups. This programme is monotony.
gradually being merged into the ICDS programme.
MODEL MENU
5. Balwadi nutrition programme
A model menu for a mid-day school meal is given in
This programme was started in 1970 for the benefit of Table 40.
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
ANNEXURE-1
Nutrition Assessment Schedule
CLINICAL:
(1) General appearance Normal built/Thin built/Sickly
(2) Hair Normal/lack of lustre/dyspigmented/thin and sparse/easily pluckable/flag sign
(3) Face Diffuse depigmentation/naso-labial dyssebacea/moon face
(4) Eyes Conjunctiva normal/dry on exposure for 1/2 min/dry and wrinkled/bitot's spots/
brown pigmentation/angular conjunctivitis/pale conjunctiva
Cornea - normal/dryness/hazy or opaque
(5) Lips Normal/angular stomatitis/cheilosis
(6) Tongue Normal/pale and flabby/red and raw/fissured/geographic
(7) Teeth Mottled enamel/caries/attrition
(8) Gums Normal/spongy/ bleeding
(9) Glands Thyroid enlargement/parotid enlargement
(10) Skin Normal/dry and scaly/follicular hyperkeratosis/petechiae/peliagrous dermatosis/flanky
paint dermatosis/scrotal and vulval dermatosis
(11) Nalls Koilonychia
(12) Oedema Independent parts
(13) Rachitic changes Knock-knees or bow legs/epiphyseal enlargement/beading of the ribs/pigeon chest
(14) Internal systems Hepatomegaly/psychomotor change/mental confusion/sensory loss/muscle wasting/
motor weakness/loss of position sense/loss of vibration sense/loss of ankle and knee
jerks/calf tenderness/cardiac enlargement/tachycardia.
ANTHROPOMETRIC :
Weight (kg) : Head circumference (cm) :
Height (cm) : Chest circumference (cm) :
Mid-upper-arm circumference (cm) : Skinfold:
LABORATORY
(1) Haemoglobin: (specify method)
(2) Stool : negative/ascariasis/ancylostomiasis/giardiasis/amoebiasis/strongyloides/others (state) :
(3) Blood smear: negative/M.T./B.T./Filaria
Investigator
ANNEXURE-2
BALANCED DIETS
(The quantities are given in grams)
Cereals 460 520 670 410 440 575 175 270 420 380
Pulses 40 50 60 40 45 50 35 35 45 45
Leafy vegetables 40 40 40 100 100 50 40 50 50 50
Other vegetables 60 70 80 40 40 100 20 30 50 50
Roots and tubers 50 60 80 50 50 60 10 20 30 30
Milk 150 200 250 100 150 200 300 250 250 250
Oil and Fat 40 45 65 20 25 40 15 25 40 35
Sugar or Jaggery 30 35 55 20 20 40 30 40 45 45
Source: (140)
NUTRITION AND HEALTH
ANNEXURE-3 ANNEXURE-5
Suggested substitution for non-vegetarians Exercise and physical activity
Food item which can Substitution that can be Individuals over the age of 20 years should undertake a
be deleted from suggested for deleted minimum of 30 minutes of physical activity of moderate
non-vegetarian diets item or items intensity (such as walking 5-6 km/hr) on most, if not all
days of the week. Greater health benefits can be obtained
50% of pulses 1. One egg or 30 g of meat or fish by engaging in physical activity of longer duration or more
(20-30 g) 2. Additional 5 g of fat or oil vigorous intensity (such as jogging, running, cycling and
swimming).
100% of pulses 1. Two eggs or 50 g of meat or
fish Sedentary people embarking on a physical activity
(40-60 g) 2. One egg plus 30 g meat programme should undertake a moderate intensity activity
10 g of fat or oil of short duration to start with and gradually increase the
duration or intensity. Other day-to-day activities like
Source : (140) walking, housework, gardening, will be beneficial not only in
weight reduction but also for lowering of blood pressure and
ANNEXURE-4 serum triglycerides. This also elevates HDL (good)
Additional allowances during pregnancy and lactation cholesterol in blood. Simple modification in lifestyle like
deliberately climbing up the stairs instead of using the lift
Food During Calories During Calories and walking for short distance instead of using a vehicle
items pregnancy (kcal) lactation (kcal) could also immensely help in increasing our physical activity.
Cereals 35g. 118 60g. 203 Exercise programme should include 'warm up' and 'cool
down' periods each lasting for 5 minutes. During exercise,
Pulses 15 g. 52 30g. 105
the intensity of exercise should ensure 60-70% increase in
Milk lOOg. 83 lOOg. 83 heart rate.
Fat lOg. 90
Previously inactive men over the age of 40 years,
Sugar 10 g. 40 lOg. 40
women over the age of 50 years and people at high risk for
Total .293 521 chronic diseases like heart disease and diabetes should first
consult a physician before engaging in a programme of
Source : (140) vigorous physical activity such as running and swimming.
*Approx. energy expenditure for 60 Kg reference man. Individuals with higher body weight will be spending more calories than those with
lower body weight. Reference woman (50 kg) will be spending 5% less calories.
ANNEXURE-6
Approximate calorific value of some cooked preparations
Preparation
Quantity for
one serving
•Calories
(kcal)
80. Lawrence M. Tierney et al, Current Medical Diagnosis and Treatment, 130. Bourne, G.H. ed (1971).World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics, Vol
43rd Ed., A Lange Medical Books Publication. 13, pp 106-164, Karger Basel.
81. UNICEF (2009), State of World's Children, 2009. 131. Taskar, A.O. et al (1967). Ind. J. Med. Res., 55: 90.
82. WHO (1984). Wkly Epi Rec., 59 (77) 205. 132. Bengoa, J.M. (1974). WHO Chronicle, 28: 3-7.
83. Gopalan, C. and Kamala Jaya Rao (1980). In : Preuention in 133. Mason, J.B. et al (1984). Nutritional Surveillance, Geneva, WHO.
childhood of health problem in adult life, F. Falkner (ed), Geneva, 134. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 593.
WHO.
135. WHO (1984). World Health, Oct. 1984, p. 8.
84. Shah, P. M. (1974). Early Detection and Prevention of Protein-Calorie
Ma/nutrition, Popular Prakashan, Bombay. 136. Jelliffe, D.B. (1966). The Assessment of the Nutritional Status of the
Community, WHO Monograph Sr. No. 53.
85. WHO, The Health Aspects of Food and Nutrition, A manual for
developing countries in the Western Pacific Region, 1979, P. 49. 137. WHO (1963). World Health, May 1977.
86. Gopalan, C. (1973). ProceedingsNutr.Soc.India, N.l.N. Hyderabad. 138. Sukhatma, P.V. et al (1972). In : Proceedings of the First Asian
Congress of Nutrition. National Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad.
87. Editorial (1982). Lancet2: 28-29.
88. John Bland (1979). World Health, Aug-Sept. 1979. 139. Gopalan, C. (1977). Swasth Hind, 21, 335.
89. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., 590. 140. ICMR (1990). Recommended Dietary Intakes for Indians, New Delhi.
90. Central Health Education Bureau (1986). Swasth Hind, 30 (3-4) 85. 141. WHO (1976). Proc. Nutrition Society, 20, 1-5 National Institute of
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Govt. of India, New Delhi. Nutrition, Hyderabad.
91. Govt. of India (2008), Eleuenth Fiue Year Plan (2007-2012), Vol II, 142. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 705.
Planning Commission, New Delhi. 143. WHO (1978). Wkly. Epi. Rec.,53, 37-44.
92. Govt. oflndia (2008), Annual Report 2007-08, Ministry of Health and 144. Stewart, S. (1975). Sanitary Officers Practice; Food Inspection,
Family Welfare, New Delhi. Butterworth, London.
93. WHO (1982). The Work of WHO, 1980-81, Biennial Report. 145. WHO (1962). MilkHygiene,Monograph Ser. No. 48.
94. WHO (1980). Sixth Report World Health Situation, Vol I. 146. WHO (1970). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 453.
95. Srikantia, S.G. (1983). Proceed.Nut.Society of India No.28, P. 7. 147.Parulekar, V. P.P. (1968). National Seminar on Zoonoses in India,
96. Narsinga Rao, B.S. (1978). Ind. J. Med. Res. No. 58. National Institute of Communicable Diseases, Delhi.
97. Govt.oflndia (1978). Manual for Health Worker (F), Vol I. Ministry of 148. Govt. of India (1955). Model Public Health Act, Ministry of Health.
Health and Family Welfare, New Delhi.
149. WHO (1972). Hazards of the Human Enuironment, Geneva, WHO.
98. N.J.N., Hyderabad (1989). Nutrition, Jan. 1989.
99. Clugston, G.A and K. Bagchi (1986). World Health Forum, 7 (1) 33 150. Morton, L.D. (1977). Proce. Nutr. Soc. 36: 101.
100. Govt. of India (2010), Annual Report 2009-2010, Ministry of Health 151. WHO (1976). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 598.
and Family Welfare, New Delhi. 152. Rodricks, J.V. (1976). Food Nutrition (FAOJ 2 :9.
101. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep. Ser., 713. 153. WHO (1977). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 612.
102. WHO (1984). Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality Vol 1 P 55 154. Elton, G.AH. (1977). Proc. Nutr. Soc. 36: 113.
Geneva WHO. 155. Nagarajan, V. (1970). A Decade of Progress, 1961-1970, National
103. WHO (1970). Fluorides and Human Health Geneva, WHO Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad. ·
Monograph S No. 59. 156. Krishnamachari, K.A.V.R. et al (1975). IndianJ.Med.Res., 63, 1036.
104. Krishnamachary, K.A.V.R. (1976). Ind. J. Med. Res., 64: 284. 157. Bhatt, R.V. et al (1976). lndian J. Medical Res. 64, 1629.
105. Nawlakha, W.G. et al (1975). Ind. J. Enu. Hlth. 17: 26.
158. Krishnamachary, K.AV.R. et al (1976). Ibid, 64, 1624.
106. Mohan Ram Mand I Gopalan (1981). Nutritional Disabilities, !CMR,
National Institution of Nutrition, Hyderabad. 159. Lal R.B. and Roy, S.C. (1937). Ibid, 25, 163.
107. Ramachandran, L.K. (1978). Science Reporter, Feb.1978, Council of 160. Garrow, J.S. (1968). ThePraditioner, 201, 283.
Scientific and Industrial Research, New Delhi. 161. National Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad (1977). Ann.Rep.1976.
108. The pooling project Research Group (1978). J.Chr.Dis., 31: 201. 162. National Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad (1977). Nutrition, April,
109. Kushi, L.H. et al (1985). N.Eng. J. Med., 312: 811. 1977.
110. Oliver, M.E (1981). Br. Med. Bull. 37 (1) 49-58. 163. National Institute of Nutrition, Hyderabad (1976). Annual Report,
111. Morris, J.N. eta! (1977). Brit. Med. J., 2: 1307-1314. 1975.
112. WHO (1985). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 727. 164. WHO/FAO (1955). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 97.
113. WHO (1984). Techn. Rep. Ser., 706, P. 44. 165. WHO (1989). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 776.
114. Tasher, T. (1986). Food and Nutrition Bulletin, 8 (13) 12. 166. Bhat, R. (1977). Nutrition, July 1977, Hyderabad.
115.Jain, M. et al (1980).Jnt. J. Cancer, 26: 757-68. 167. Thankamma Jacob (1976). Food Adulteration, MacMillan, Delhi.
116. Willet, W.C. and B. MacMahon (1984). N. Eng. J. Med., 168. Ramadasmurthy, V. and M. Mohanram (1984). Your Nutrition and
310 (11) 697. Health, N.l.N., Hyderabad.
117. Fraumenti, J.F. (1982). Ann. Reu. Pub Health 3: 85-100. 169.Govt. of India (1993), National Nutrition Policy 1993, Ministry of
118. Miller, AB. et al (1978). Am. J. Epid, 107: 499-509. Human Resource Development, New Delhi.
119. Wynder, E.L. and Hill, P. (1977). Lancet, 2: 840-841. 170. Planning Commission, Govt. oflndia (1985). Seventh Fiue Year Plan,
120. Burkitt, D.P. (1971). Cancer, 28: 3-13. 1985-90. Vol II, Delhi.
121. Weisburger, J.H. et al (1980). Preu. Med., 9: 352-61.
171. Swaminathan, M.C. (1970). Nutrition Oct. 1970 NIN.
122. Hoover, R.N. and Strasser, P.H. (1980). Lancet, 1 : 837-40.
172. Govt.oflndia, Planning Commission (1972). Report of the Committee
123. MacMohan, B. et al (1981). N. Eng. J. Med., 304: 630-33.
on Preschool Children Feeding Programmes.
124. Rothma, K.J. (1980). Preu. Med., 9: 174-79.
125. WHO (1978). Bull WHO 56 (4) 519. 173. Internet, Guidelines of Revised National Programme of Nutritional
Support to Education, 2004, http://education.nic.in/mdm/
126. Behar, M. (1976). In : Nutrition in Preuentiue Medicine, WHO mdm2004.asp
Monograph Ser.No. 62.
127. WHO (1963). Techn. Rep. Ser., No. 258. 174. Gopalan, C. (1980). Nutrition and Health Care, Nutrition Foundation
of India, Spl, Pub!. No. 1.
128. James W.P.T. (1982). Medicine International, 1 (15) 663.
129. Solomons, N.W. and Allen, L.H. (1983). Nutrition Reuiew, 175. Dietary Guidelines for Indians, National Institute of Nutrition, ICMR
41 (2) 33-50. Hyd.1998.
The term "social sciences" refers to a composite of several may in turn influence the predisposing variables, and
disciplines. These disciplines are anthropology, economics, therefore health (2).
political science, psychology, sociology etc. In general, these Medicine and the social sciences are concerned, in their
disciplines contribute to our understanding of society and own special way, with human behaviour. Specialists in
human behaviour. The social sciences relevant to medicine community health, clinical medicine, epidemiology are all
are psychology and sociology. They should be considered seeking the cooperation and help of ·social scientists in.
like anatomy and physiology, the basic sciences of medicine. understanding problems such as the social component of
health and disease, "illness behaviour" of people, efficient
Social context of medicine use of medical care and the study of medical institutions. A
Health cannot be isolated from its social context. The last brief sketch of the current interest of these disciplines in
few decades have shown that social and economic factors social science is given below :
have as much influence on health as medical interventions.
All these factors have a direct bearing on the incidence, 1. COMMUNITY HEALTH
course and outcome of a wide variety of communicable and Community health workers are often faced with the
non-communicable diseases as well as on many other health problem of why people who need a particular service are
problems besetting the world today. They also have an least likely to use it or fail to secure the total benefit which is
important effect on the provision of health care to all strata expected. A case in point is immunization against
of society (1). Poverty, malnutrition, poor sanitation, lack of communicable diseases. Although, there is a wide range of
education, inadequate housing, unemployment, poor prophylactic vaccines, immunization has not gained
working conditions, cultural and behc;i.vioural factors all universal acceptance. The family planning programme in
. predispose to ill-health. Today more than ever before, there India is a recent example of a health service of which people
has been an increasirlg recognition that successful are not making use to the extent desired. Similarly, health
application of medicine to individuals and groups involves programmes relating to mother and child health care
more than mere scientific or biological knowledge; it services, improvement of water supplies, installation of
involves an understanding of the behaviour of individuals sanitary latrines, improvement of dietary patterns and infant
and groups who live together and also share certain values rearing practices have all proved abortive or only partially
of life. Man is a social animal. The patient is no longer successful. The resistance of the people is felt not only in the
considered as one who is under strict laboratory control, but field of community health, but in fact even in fields designed
an individual with personal idiosyncrasies, erratic habits, to improve their general standard of living. The central
customs and beliefs reacting on his body and mind. It has question in community health is : Why do people behave as
been aptly said that even a person with a broken leg may they do ? This is the basic problem which the social scientists
present complex social and personal factors which may are studying in India, and are often asked to explain this
influence his recovery. Thus there has been a shift from the failure of health measures. In the western countries, social
earlier concept of visualizing disease in terms of a specific scientists are working on problems of mental health, hospital
germ to the involvement of "multiple factors" in the organization, social class difference in disease,
causation of disease. Good doctors are being identified as rehabilitation, and professional roles and relationships. In
those who treat people, and bad ones as those who treat industries, the social scientists are invited to look into the
cases. As a result of this new outlook, concepts of sociology relationships between members of a team who are
are increasingly being used in the study of disease in human concerned with doing a job in order to improve the overall
societies. performance of the work team. In short, the social scientists
How much effect social changes might have on health of are stepping in increasing numbers into the field of
the people is shown in Fig. 1. community health. The theme common to community
It suggests that health is influenced by four sets of health and social sciences is human behaviour. Many
variables- individual predispositions, ecological community health problems in essence are social problems,
predispositions, current circumstances, and opportunities. and vice versa.
These variables are in turn influenced by the major sources
of social changes : economic, political, educational and 2. CLINICAL MEDICINE
other systems. The health status of the people can feed back During the past half century, the scientific content of
into and influence factors relating to social structure which medicine has increased enormously. The acute
SOCIAL AND BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES
CURRENT CIRCUMSTANCES
Hi:u:;9ine, fa,.mily life; h,04sing, . .•
DEMOGRAPHIC employment, stresse;; anclcrises,
socralsupport; etc.} ..· .. .
ECONOMIC
POLITICAL
L..--- 1 LEGAL
RELIGIOUS INDIVIDUALPRED!SPOSITIONS ...
EDUCATIONAL (inherifance, perinatal events; .·
TECHNOLOGICAL previous accidents oi illness,
upbringing, childhood nutrition,
et~.} • · · ·
·ECOLOGICAL PREDISPOSITIONS
. (corrimunity values, socially
prescribed roles, lifestYle, ·. ·
COMMUNICATIONS sub::-cultural behaviour patterns, .
MIGRATION etc,)
URBANIZATION
LIFE EXPECTANCY
MARRIAGE
FERTILITY OPPORTUNITIES/SITUATIONS ·
ROLE OF WOMEN (access to.health services, exposur-?
to pathogens, availability of ·
ediicatiori, food, sanitation, alcohol,
drugs, marrifige partners, etc.)
FIG.1
Social factors influencing the health of people
Source: (2)
communicable diseases have been brought under control, knowledge and social knowledge, so that he could more
and good medical care is available to more people than ever effectively serve the patient and the community. Hence is
before. This has brought to a sharp focus, the so-called the current interest of medical men in social sciences.
"modern· diseases" such as cardiovascular disease, cancer,
diabetes and mental illness, These diseases have defied 3. EPIDEMIOLOGY
"cure" and prevention, and are currently the major causes of Epidemiologists have also forged a close alliance with
morbidity and mortality in developed societies. The clinicians social scientists in studying the distribution of health and
also tend to believe that "psychophysiological stress disease in human population, and of factors that cause the
reactions" are involved in cases of rheumatoid arthritis, distribution. Disease is studied in relationship to factors such
obesity, ulceration of intestine, skin diseases, constipation, as social status, income, occupation, housing, overcrowding,
diarrhoea and epilepsy. It has become apparent that control social customs, habits and behaviour. Examples can be
of these diseases involves not merely medical care but bask found in researches into the ecology of coronary heart
changes in the behaviour and habits of the patients, which is disease, duodenal ulcer, schizophrenia, mental
a field of specialization of social scientists. The social subnormality, suicide, accidents, and several other
scientists are asked to investigate the life situations of the conditions.
patients with a view to discover linkages between specific life
situations and specific types and cases of illness. To sum up, social scientists are studying a. great many
things of considerable interest to medicine and public
The clinicians have also shown interest in what is known health. They have "given fruitful attention to the growing
as "illness behaviour" of patients, i.e., why different people place of medicine arid medical practice in the social system,
react i.n different ways to th.e same disease process or and to different attitudes and values which various segments
regimen of treatment. It is not known why some people of the population have towards health, illness and medical
(whether by reason of education, religion, social class care: They have made noteworthy advances in mapping out.
difference or occupational status) make light of symptoms the social organization of .health personnel; the social
and some respond in an exaggerated manner, to the slightest structure and functioning of hospitals have been studied to
pain or discomfort. This is an important area of medical advantage, as have the social roles played by patients and
sociology. The doctor-patient relationship, patient care health. personnel as they interact in different settings. They
management, hospital organization, collusion of medical have paid particular attention to the situation of health
treatment and cultural practices are all current interests of personnel who are professionals, and to the social processes
medical sociology. through which these persons acquire the outlook, standards
Criticism is often voiced that the present medical sciences and competence considered necessary for providing
(e.g., anatomy, physiology, microbiology, pathology). are satisfactory professional. services. They have also
insufficient to train the physician to cope with the undertaken investigations which relate various social and
sociocultural aspects of medicine. It is recognized that the psychological factors to different kinds of diseases in patients
physician needs two kinds of knowledge - medical as well as to the course of certain diseases" (3).
MEDICINE AND SOCIAL SCIENCES
SOCIAL AND BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES society is derived from the root words socius, meaning
individual and societa, meaning group. Society is a group of
Medicine and social sciences are concerned in their own individuals who have organized themselves and follow a
special way with human behaviour. The term 'social given way of life, and sociology is the study of individuals as
sciences' is applied to those disciplines which are committed well as groups in a society. Sociology can be viewed from
to the scientific examination of human behaviour. These are two angles : (a) First, it can be seen as the study of
economics, political science, sociology, social psychology relationships between human beings, and how these
and social anthropology. The term 'behavioural sciences' is relationships change or vary in different parts of the world
applied to the last three, i.e., sociology, social psychology and at different times. The unit of study can be a small group
and social anthropology, because they deal directly with (e.g., family) consisting of parents and children, or the study
human behaviour. Each of these disciplines, while sharing can extend beyond the family or small groups into the
the major goals of social sciences, i.e., the scientific complex society where a greater number of people interact
examination of human behaviour deals with specific aspects and interdepend in terms of economics, political power,
, of public health in the study of man. general organization and ways of living. (b) The other part
of sociology is concerned with the study of human
(a) ECONOMICS behaviour. Human behaviour is determined not merely by
The field of economics has a very close relationship with biological and physical environmental factors but also by
sociology. It is the parent discipline from which sociology social factors. Every form of human behaviour has a social
has emerged. Economics deals with human relationships in component. Sociologists are interested in the study of the
the specific context of production, distribution, consumption social determinants of human behaviour. In the final ·
and ownership of scarce resources, goods and services. analysis it may be stated that the aim of sociology is to
Sociology and economics overlap in many senses; both are search for the pattern of relationships between people in
concerned with interdependence in human relations. order to pave the way for the betterment of individuals in
relation to society (5).
(b) POLITICAL SCIENCE
SPECIALIZATION WITHIN SOCIOLOGY
Historically economics and political science tended to be
a single discipline. As a separate discipline, political science Sociology has grown rapidly since World War II resulting
is concerned with the study of the system of laws and in an increase in specialization within the general field of
institutions which constitute government of whole societies. sociology. Some of the major fields of specialization are :
medical sociology, urban sociology, rural sociology,
( c) SOCIOLOGY industrial sociology, sociology of religion, sociology of
Sociology deals with the study of human relationships education, criminology, hospital sociology, and
and of human behaviour for a better understanding of the demography.
pattern of human life. It is also concerned with the effects on MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY
the individual of the ways in which other individuals think
and act. Medical sociology is a specialization within the field of
sociology. Its main interest is in the study of health, health
(d) SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY behaviour and medical institutions. As a specialized field, it
was first proposed by Charles Mcintire in 1894 (6). It is
This discipline sprang from psychology. It is concerned defined as "professional endeavour devoted to social
with the psychology of individuals living in human society or epidemiology, the study of cultural factors and .social
groups. The emphasis is on understanding the basis of relations in connection with illness, and the social principles
perception, thought, opinion, attitudes, general motivation in medical organization and treatment" (6).
and learning in individuals and how these vary in human
societies and groups. In other words, it deals with the effect Broadly speaking medical sociology includes studies of
of social environment on persons, their attitudes and the medical profession, of the relationship of medicine to
motivations. public, and of the social factors in the aetiology, prevalence,
incidence and interpretation of disease.
(e) ANTHROPOLOGY
The word anthropology is derived from the root words, CONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY
anthropos meaning man and logos meaning science. It is the Such terms as society, social structure, social institutions,
study of the physical, social and cultural history of man. The role, socialization, social control mechanisms, customs,
study of human evolution, racial differences, inheritance of culture, acculturatio.n, social problems, social pathology and
bodily traits, growth and decay of the human organism is social survey are frequently used by all sociologists and form
called physical anthropology. The study of the development part of the necessary equipment by means of which they
and. various types of social !ife is called social anthropology. organize their thinking, do research and communicate the
The study of the total way of life of contemporary primitive results of research (7). Some of these concepts have also
man, his ways of thinking, feeling and action is called cultural crept into medical terminology and are being increasingly
anthropology (4). Of all the sciences, which study various used in epidemiological studies. A brief account of these
aspects of man, anthropology is one which comes nearest to concepts is given below.
being a total study of man. Medical anthropology, deals with
the cultural component in the ecology of health and disease. SOCIETY
SOCIOLOGY Human beings everywhere are members of a group or
groups. A man who can live without society, said Aristotle, is
Sociology is derived from the Latin socio, meaning either a beast or God. A group of people may or may not form
society and the Greek logos, meaning science. The word a society. For example, a group of people coming together
- - - - - -SOCIOLOGY
-•
temporarily for a while to witness a hockey match do not duties, seek medical aid, and carry out the orders given by
constitute society; they are merely a crowd. But if the same the physician.
gr.oup of people settle down and organize themselves, then
they form a society. Thus, society may be defined in simple SOCIALISM
terms as an organization of member agents. The outstanding Socialism, to put it briefly, is the general term for any
feature of society is a system a system of social relationships economic doctrine that favours the use of property and
between individuals. The importance of society lies in the fact resources of the country for the public welfare. It is a system
that it controls and regulates the behaviour of the individual of production and distribution based on social ownership for
both by law and customs. It can exert pressure on the raising the living standard of the working class, as opposed
individual to conform to its norms. In short, soc;iety is a vast to capitalism which is based on private ownership of the
network of relationships and compulsions that propel, direct means of production and aims at maximum private profit at
and constrain man's individual efforts. The character of the expense of the working masses. While the motto of
society is dynamic; it changes over time c;md place. Public capitalism is 'all for each' and 'each for each', that of
health is an integral part of the social system. It is influenced socialism is 'all for all' and 'each for all'. These are two
by society, and society by public health. In many places it is extremes. Ever since Louis Blanc set forth the socialist
the social organization that has made it possible to translate principle "from each according to his abilities, to each
into practice the scientific concepts and achievements. As a according to his needs", socialism has undergone many
result, the mortality rates have b.een brought to low levels and changes and taken varied shades.
the life expectancy at \)irth has soared to very high levels.
SOCIALIZATION
COMMUNITY
Every society has its beliefs, customs, traditions and
Various definitions of community are given in dictionarie~ prejudices. A man acquires these in his everyday social
and other publications. Some imply homogenity, e.g., "The interaction with the people of the society. This is called
people living. in a particular place or region and usually "socialization" or the process by which an individual
linked by common interests" (8); or "A group of individuals gradually acquires culture and becomes a member of a
and families living together in a defined geographic area, social group. Children going to school is an instance of
usually comprising a village, .town or city" (8). socialization. The internship training programme of doctors
The definition accepted by WHO Expert Committee is is another instance; it gives them an opportunity to learn
"A community is a social group determined by geographical how to become acceptable to the public at large as doctors.
boundaries and/or common values and interests. Its
members know and interact with each other. It functions SOCIAL CONTROL MECHANISMS
within a particular social structure and exhibits and creates In every society there are rules, formal and informal, for
certain norms, values, and social institutions. The individual the maintenance of relationships of authority and
belongs to the. broader society through his family and subordination. The laws and enactments of Parliament are
community (8). social control mechanisms. In the field of health, there are
various Acts, some central and others state or local which
SOCIAL STRUCTURE help to maintain the standards of health. Even in small
Social structure refers to the pattern of inter-relations organizations, there are sets of formal rules and regulations
between persons. Every society has a social structure a which· control the behaviour of individuals to perform
complex of major institutions, groups, power structure and different roles. Besides formal rules, sometimes, informal
status hierarchy. The study of social structure is comparable social pressures are brought to bear upon individuals to help
to the study of anatomy and that of social organization to construct "norms" of behaviour. The informal social pressure
that of physiology. may be exerted by powerful groups, individuals or friends.
These mechanisms work largely through reward and
SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS punishment. For example, in India, the government is
A social institution is an organized complex pattern of offering a small financial reward to those who undergo
behaviour in which a number of persons participate in order sterilization operation. It is a sort of informal social pressure
to further group interest. The family, the school, the church, to further the programme of family planning in India. The
the club,· the hospital, political parties, professional social control mechanisms vary from group to group. A
associations and the panchayats are all social institutions. study of these mechanisms may be helpful to the community
Within each institution, the rights and duties of the members health worker in carrying out the health programmes.
are defined.
CUSTOMS
ROLE The mere existence of a society, the mere plurality of
In a society, individuals are allocated roles as people in a individuals gives rise to customs from which no single
drama. Sociologists have classified roles into ascribed and member of the community can escape. The 'highly
achieved, according to whether a particular role is "given" developed' societies of the modern world are just as replete
by virtue of sex, age, and birth status or "acquired" by virtue with social customs as the 'primitive societies' of the past.
of education or otherwise. In a single day, a man may play a These customs are quite numerous and quite as powerful.
role of husband, father, employee, friend, son, brother, Customs are technically divided into "folkways" and
committee chairman, guest, neighbour. The playing of these 'mores'. The folkways are the right ways of doing things in
roles enables him to cooperate with others in many what is regarded as the less vital areas of human conduct.
situations according to well-defined roles (9). When a The tnore stringent customs are called "mores". The public
person falls ill, he assumes what is known as a "Sick role". In takes an active part in their enforcement. Laws are generally
this role he is expected to decrease or relinquish his normal customs-inspired. The starting point of all customs is
convention. Convention is the practice promoted by DYNAMICS OF SOCIAL CHANGE
convenience of the society or the individual. The interaction between social factors and health issues is
CULTURE complex and sometimes unpredictable. For example, in
Western Europe during the nineteenth century, increase in
The word "culture" is widely used in sociology. It is the income and wealth, resulting from the Industrial Revolution,
central concept around which cultural anthropology has was accompanied by decrease in both birth and death rates.
grown. Culture is defined as "learned behaviour which has Many authors have in fact argued that increased income was
been socially acquired". Culture is the product of human the main cause of these changes (2). The situation in the
societies, and man is largely a product of his cultural developing world has varied and differs from the so~called
environment. Culture is transmitted from one generation to "demographic transition" In Europe. In many parts of Asia,
another through learning processes, formal and informal. and to a certain extent in Latin America, death rates,
Culture plays an important part in human societies. It lays particularly among infants, have declined steadily in the past
down norms of behaviour and provides mechanisms which decade and birth rates have declined rather dramatically.
secure for an individual his personal and social survival (4). Yet the increase in income has been very modest. In Africa,
In general, it is widely held, that culture stands for the on the whole, death rates, particularly of infants, remain
customs, beliefs, laws, religion and moral precepts,. arts and high, birth rates a:re not declining, the benefits of increased
other capabilities and skills acquire9. by man as a member of income are not yet apparent, and concern over population
the society. growth is just emerging. The relationship between wealth,
Cultural factors in health and disease have engaged the birth, and death rates observed in the development of West
attention of medical scientists and sociologists. Every culture European countries, is thus obviously not univer~al (2).
has its own customs, some of which· have a profound A typical feature of traditional societies is a sense of
influence on the incidence of disease. In developed continuity and immutability in patterns of social life.
countries, for example, cancer of the lung from smoking and Transitional societies may be . better able to cope with
cirrhosis· of.liver from drinking are the result of the abuse of change, and modern societies are perhaps best adapted to
widely proclaimed social habits. In India, chewing pan is assimilate rapid changes. A major difference between
associated with oral cancer. It is now fairly established that traditional and modern societies is that, in the former, young
cultural factors are deeply involved in matters of personal people can be fairly sure that their lives will be substantially
hygiene, nutrition, immunization, seeking early medical 'Similar to their parent's, while, in the latter, young people
care, family planning, child rearing, disposal of refuse and can be fairly sure that their lives will be substantially different
excreta, outlook on health and disease - in short, the whole from their parent's, and that their children's lives will be
way of life. different from their own. In transitional societies, young
people may simultaneously be involved in two cultures : the
ACCULTURATION traditional one in which their parents grew up and which they
Acculturation means "culture contact." When there is still value, and the modern one which may be portrayed in
contact. between two people with different types of culture, the mass media. A similar clash of cultures may occur in the
there is diffusion of culture both ways. There are various lives of young people whose families have migrated to
ways by which culture contact takes place (10). (1) trade and another country or from a rural to an urban area (2).
commerce, (2) industrialization, (3) propagation of religion,
(4) education, and (5) conquest. The British brought their SOCIAL STRESS
culture into India through conquest. An Indian is said to be A major source of stress, particularly in transitional
the next best Englishman. It is because of culture contact, societies, is the conflict generated by new opportunities and
which has both good and bad aspects. The introduction of frustrations arising from societal changes. These stress-
scientific medicine is through culture contact. The changes inducing conditions include : the wave of migration from
in food habits of people is brought about through culture rural to urban areas and the consequent diminution in the
contact; many orthodox .brahmins in India today eat meat. traditional family support system; a ·greater exposure
The widespread use of tobacco all over the world is because through mass media to ideas that had been previously
of culture contact. The radio, the television, the cinema have culturally.alien; tourism; changes in the technological needs
been important factors in shaping the cultural-behaviour of society requiring skill~ that are different .from those of the
patterns of people. · previous generation and for which the training or education
STANDARD OF LIVING available may be inadequate and the encouragement by
commercial interests of economic aspirations that are often
The term "standard of living" refers to the usual scale of unrealistic (2). The pressure is mostly felt where young
our expenditure, the goods we consume and the services we people have little control over their own destinies, where
enjoy. It includes food, dress, house, amusements and in rapid population expansion means greater competition in
short the mode of living. the younger age groups, and where resources are
The standard of living in a country depends upon : inadequate to meet their needs. · · ·
(1) the level of national income (2) the total amount of It is well understood that the causation of physical and
goods and services a country is able to produce (3) the size psychological disorders is multifactorial.. The experience. of
of the population (4) the level of education (5) general price stress, particularly in the absence of a social support system
level and (6) the distribution of national income. or when there is a discrepancy between the actual and
There are vast inequalities in the standards of living of the perceived demands of a stressful situation, may contribute to
people in different countries of the world. The extent of further disorders (2). Psychological stress and inadequate
differences in the level of living can be known through the coping ability has beenimplicated as a contributory factor in
comparison of per capita income on which the standard of virtually all diseases (2). In particular, there are direct links
living of people primarily depends. between stress and hypertension and coronary heart disease.
PSYCHOLOGY
control. Another example is that some people forget Psychosocial illness : There are a group of diseases
important things because they are unpleasant and remain known as "psychosocial diseases" (mind acting on body),
happily unconscious about them. e.g., essential hypertension, peptic ulcer, asthma, ulcerative
colitis which are attributed to disturbed emotional states.
EMOTIONS
An emotion is a strong feeling of the whole organism. Control of emotions
Emotions motivate human behaviour. An emotional A well-adjusted and mentally healthy person is one who
experience is characterized by .both external and internal is able to keep his emotions under control. One should not
changes in the human being. The "external" changes are be carried away by one's emotions. Children should be
those which are apparent and easily seen by others such as shown love and appre.ciation so that they may grow into
changes in facial expression, changes in posture. By emotional maturity. For adults, a happy family life is basic
studying the facial expression we can find out if a person is for emotional adjustment. Patients who are anxious need
angry, happy, depressed or elevated. The· "internal" changes reassurance and their fears must be allayed. The following
brought about by emotions are psychological such as rapid tips may be useful in controlling one's emotions :
pulse, respiration, increased blood pressure, tension and (i) cultivate hobbies, good habits of reading and recreation
pain. Usually these changes are temporary, and subside (ii) adopt a philosophy of life to enable you to avoid mental
when the individual returns to the "normal". conflicts (iii) try to understand your own limitations, and
Some of the major emotions are : (iv) develop a sense of humour. A study 6f psychology helps
us to understand the basis of emotions and the need to keep
Fear Jealousy Sympathy emotions under control.
Anger Moodiness · Pity
Love Joy Lust MOTIVATION
Hate Sorrow Grief Motivation is a key word in psychology. It is an inner
Scientists have proved that emotions can be a major force which drives an individual to a certain action. It also
barrier to communication. Man is indeed a slave to his determines human behaviour. Motivation may be positive
emotions. The doctor should be able to understand the (the carrot) or negative (the stick). Without motivation,
emotions of the patient. Once the emotional barriers are behavioural changes cannot be expected to take place.
broken down, a mutual trust between the patient and the Positive motivation is often more successful than negative
doctor develops, and the patient will begin to talk more freely motivation. Motivation is not manipulation. A motivated
about himself. This is the basis of doctor-patient relationship. person acts willingly and knowingly. The terms motives,
The desirable qualities in a doctor are cheerfulness and an needs, wants, desires and urges are all used synonymously;
even temperament. Moodiness, emotional instability and these terms are interrelated and interdependent.
getting easily upset are undesirable qualities.
Kinds of needs and urges
Some specific emotions It is difficult to define human needs. There are many
(1) FEAR : Fear is the most common emotion of man. It kinds of needs and urges : (a) Biologic needs : These are
may produce excitement or depression; flight or fight. Some survival needs. A hungry man needs food, a thirsty man
of the common fears of man are - fear of the dark, fear of water, a sick man medicine. There are other needs such as
dogs, fear of snakes, fear of ghosts, fear of sickness, fear of sleep, rest, recreation and fresh air. The doctor should be
death, etc. When the fear becomes exaggerated or aware of these needs in the day-to-day care of the patients.
unnecessary, it is called phobia. Such fears are common in (b) Social needs : The need for company, the need for love
patients with mental disorders. (2) ANGER : Anger or rage is and affection, the need for recognition, the need for
another basic emotion of man. It is a reaction of the education are all social needs. Some of these needs are met
offensive type. Anger is a destructive force. If it is not by the family, and some by the community. (c) Economic
controlled, it may impel a person even to commit murder. needs : Economic security, that is security from want, is one
(3) ANXIETY : Anxiety may manifest in such symptoms as which everyone desires. (d) Ego-integrative needs : The
rapid pulse and breathing, flushing, tremors, sweating, dry desire for prestige, power and self-respect come in this
mouth, nausea, diarrhoea, raised blood pressure, etc. category.
Patients admitted to hospitals are anxious. Anxiety leads to Motivation is contagious; it spreads from one motivated
tension, and tension to pain. The doctor must understand person to another. We make use of motives and incentives in
the patient's anxiety and give him reassurance. A kind word community health work. Motivation of eligible couples for a
from the doctor or nurse works like a magic and gives the small family norm is an important activity in the National
patient considerable relief from mental anxiety. (4) LOVE : Family Welfare Programme. Motivation is required to enlist
Love is a feeling of attachment to some person. It is a basic people's participation in community health work.
emotion of man.
INCENTIVES
Role of emotions in health and disease Incentives are among the factors that stimulate motivation
Emotional states determine human behaviour. Anger can and encourage specific behaviours. Incentives can be either
cause a person to be rude and sarcastic. Disorders of intrinsic or extrinsic, material or psychological, self
emotion interfere with human efficiency - lack of determined or selected by others. An intrinsic incentive is the
concentration, lack of appetite, increased risk of accidents, benefit that comes from solving one's own problems.
lack of sleep, palpitation, etc. Emotional disorders in Extrinsic incentives are rewards that do not relate directly to
children may appear in the form of temper tantrums, the goal towards which the desired behaviour.is aimed, for
abdominal pain, spasms, tics, and anti-social behaviour example, financial compensation of individuals undergoing
such as aggressiveness. sterilization operation for family planning. Material
11111.'~~-M_E_D_l_C_IN_E_A_N_o_s_o_c_IA_L_S_C_l_EN_C_E_S~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1
incentives are tangible goods or services; psychological relatively enduring organization of beliefs around an object,
incentives include the satisfaction, self-esteem, or enhanced subject or concept which pre-disposes one to respond in
capabilities gained through a proposed course of action (13). some preferential manner.
Attitudes are not learnt from textbooks, they are acquired
LEGISLATION by social interaction, e.g., attitude towards persons, things,
Legislation can serve as an important tool to support, situations and issues (e.g., government policies,
promote and sustain activities at the community level. Laws programmes and administrative measures). It has been truly
should satisfy requirements and, at the same time be said that attitudes are caught, and not taught. Once formed,
compatible with the political, cultural, social, and economic attitudes are difficult to change. The responsibility to
situation of the country. This is essential because laws may develop healthy attitudes devolves upon parents, teachers,
antagonize the population and make ·the community religious leaders and elders. Our success or failure in· life
uncooperative. depends upon our attitudes. Social psychology is largely. a
study of ·attitudes. In recent years, attitude surveys and
OBSERVATION attitude measurements have been widely used by
Treatment involves lot of correct observation of the psychologists and health professionals.
patient's condition. Observation involves two mental
activities - perception and attention. Hippocrates, the OPINIONS AND BELIEFS
Father of Medicine, laid the foundation of modern medicine Opinions are views held by people on a point of dispute.
by accurate observation of signs and symptoms. By They are based on evidenc.e available at the time. Opinions
observing an apple fall, Newton formulated the theory of by definition are temporary, provisional. They can be looked
gravitation. By observation penicillin was discovered. on as beliefs for the time being. Beliefs, on the other hand
Observation is a psychological skill. It consists of the noting are permanent, stable, almost unchanging. These are usually
of the phenomena of life as they occur. It requires correct derived from our parents, grand-parents, and other people
use of the senses of seeing, hearing, touch, smell, we respect. We accept beliefs, without trying to prove that
movements etc. A doctor should cultivate the habit of they are true. Every community has its own beliefs. As
correct observation. Correct observation leads to correct beliefs are held strongly, they are often difficult to change.
thinking, reasoning and learning. They can be harmful, helpful or neutral. It is thus easier to
Observation promotes attention. To observe more give up one's opinions when faced with the facts; attitudes
carefully is called attention. A moving object attracts more and beliefs do not succumb so easily.
attention than a static object, a large object attracts more
attention than a small object, an uncommon object attracts INTERESTS
more attention than, a common one, a bright colour attracts Numerous interests come into play in a communication
more attention than a dull colour. In attention, certain situation. Most significant are our own interests - of security,
adjustments of sense organs are involved such as turning the pleasure, and self-esteem. Then come the interests of the
head, converging the eyes, In other words, attention means various groups we are associated with : primary and
closer observation. Attention is not a fixed state or power of secondary, as well as the reference groups whose values and
the mind. We constantly change our attention from one norms we aspire to promote. Our communities, castes,
object to another according to the demands of the situation. language groups, peer groups, and other religious, social,
Concentration, i.e., the focusing of consciousness on a political and professional groups so dear to us are vital to
particular object to the exclusion of all other objects has our interests. One must not overlook the social, regional and
been defined as sustained attention. national interests that shape our selection of
communications, and also the way. we perceive them (14).
Errors in perception
LEARNING
The word perception implies observation, recognition
and discrimination. Perception takes place with the help of Learning is any relative permanent change in behaviour
sensory organs. Thus we have visual perception, auditory that occurs as a result of practice or experience. It means
perception, olfactory perception, and muscular perception. acquiring something new - new knowledge, new techniques,
The disorders of perception are : (1) lmperception: That is, new skills, new fears and new experiences.
inability to recognize. This may be due to damage to the Learning is necessary for man's survival and for human
sense organs, e.g., anaesthesia. (2) Illusion : An illusion is a progress. It includes not only acquiring knowledge but also
false perception. Mistaking a rope for a snake, a tree for skills and formation of habits, and development of
an animal are called illusions. Illusions occur in perception. Learning depends largely upon intelligence.
mental diseases. Illusions may be auditory or visual. Learning also depends upon motivation, and motivation
(3) Hallucination : Hallucination is an imaginary perception. depends on the need students feel to learn. Learning is a
It is a gross error of perception. Seeing objects that do not continuous process. It is both conscious and unconscious.
exist, hearing sounds that are false, seeing objects moving in
a room are called hallucinations. Hallucinations occur in Conditions affecting learning
mental disorders. (1) Intelligence : Learning depends upon the intelligence
or mental faculty of an individual. It involves the activity of
ATTITUDES sensory adjustment and motor mechanisms of the body. The
Attitudes are acquired characteristics of an individual. mental faculty is related to heredity, nutrition and IQ.
They are more or less permanent ways of behaving. An Children with low IQ are poor learners; they may not learn at
attitude includes three components : (a) a cognitive or all. (2) Age : The curve of learning reaches its peak between
knowledge element (b) an affective or feeling element, and 22 and 25 years of age. After the age of 30, there is a sharp
(c) a tendency to action. An attitude has been defined as a decline. It has been appropriately said : You cannot teach
PSYCHOLOGY
"an old dog a new trick". (3) Learning situation : Physical Learning is measured by student's performance. There
facilities for learning, viz, institutions, teachers, textbooks, are many ways of measuring student's learning viz., multiple
audio-visual aids promote learning. (4) Motivation : In order choice questions, essay writing, project work, practical
to learn effectively, there must be adequate motivation. The examination, oral examination, etc. Usually a combination
powerful motives are encquragement, praise, reward and of different methods is used.
success. These stimulate learning. (5) Physical health : A
Physically handicapped person, e.g. deaf, dumb, chronically HABITS
sick cannot learn. (6) Mental health : Worries, anxieties, and Habit is an accustomed way of doing things, example in
fears interfere with learning. the field of health is washing one's hands before handling
food. It is usual way of action or an act performed without
Types of learning thinking. Habits are said to have 3 characteristics : (a) they
There are 3 types of learning : are acquired through repetition (b) they are automatic, and
(1) Cognitive learning (knowledge) (c) they can be performed only under similar circumstances.
Habits accumulated through generations emerge as
(2) Affective learning (attitudes) customs; and customs in turn create habits. Habits once
(3) Psychomotor learning (skills) formed persist and influence human behaviour.
Psychologists have experimented a good deal with animals Habit formation
and man to find out how learning takes place. They have
proposed a number of theories: (1) Learning by conditioned Habits are formed. They are of many kinds, e.g., habits
reflex: It is well known that when dogs see food, they begin to relating to food, sleep, work, smoking, intake of drugs and
salivate; this is an inborn reflex. Pavlov, the Russian alcohol, etc. There are both good and bad habits. Good
physiologist discovered that if a bell was rung when the dogs habits promote health; bad habits (e.g., drug dependance)
were fed, eventually, salivation could be induced by the may ruin health. Therefore, cultivation of good habits is
ringing of the bell alone. This is called conditioned reflex. The desirable. The principles involved in habit formation are :
psychologists proposed that learning takes place partly by the (1) Habit formation should begin early in childhood,
mechanism. (2) Trial and error : The lower animals such as when the child has not yet formed any habits, and
apes and cats learn by trial and error method. We also learn a is receptive to all influences;
good deal by this method. A child tries and tries again using a (2) Habits are formed by frequent repetition;
number of approaches until accidentally the ideal
(3) It takes time to form habits; they cannot be
approaches, becomes obvious. This method of learning is
formed overnight;
very slow, laborious and primitive. (3) Learning by
observation and imitation : We learn · a good deal by (4) There shou.ld be a strong emotional stimulus to
observation and imitation. A child copies or imitates gestures, form habits (e.g., taking a vow, reward,
facial expressions and movements such as walking. He learns recognition, etc.);
language by observation and imitation. Observation is an (5) Good habits kill bad habits. The best way to break
important element in medical examination. Observation bad habits is to cultivate good habits.
promotes attention, discrimination and recognition. It was by
observation, Hippocrates, Father of Medicine, separated Habits build up human personality. Man should not
medicine from magic. Part of the doctor's and nurse's become a slave to his habits, he should remain a master. It is
education has always been to observe the patient's condition, the job of the psychologist to find out how good habits can
be developed, and bad ones eliminated.
and to make decisions based on these observations.
(4). Learning by doing : In this type of learning there is FRUSTRATIONS AND CONFLICTS
coordination of muscular responses with sensory impulses.
Nursing skills (e.g., bed making, applying bandages, giving Frustrations
bath) are learnt by doing. Learning to type-write or learning a All people have needs - biological, social, economic,
new game or a musical instrument are all examples of learning w